Electronic Circuits Manual (Markus, 1971) PDF

1971
ELECTRONIC
CIRCUITS
MANUAL
Over 3, 100 modern electronic circuits, complete with values
of all parts, organized in 99 logical chapters for
quick reference and convenient browsing
JOHN MARKUS
Consultant, McGraw-Hill Book Company
Senior Member, Institute of Electrical and Electronics En9ineers
Editorial Soard, American Society for Information Science
McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY

Now Yorlc Sf. Louis San Francisco Diissoldorl Joltannosbur9
Kua/a Lumpur London Mexico Monfroa/ Now Delhi
Panama Rio do Janeiro Sin9aporo Sydney Toronto
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
Copyright © 1971 by McGraw-Hill, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Printed in the United States of America. No part of this publication
may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the
publisher. Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 70-152007
07-040444-5
67890 HDAH 75
This book was set in Spartan heavy by Brown Brothers

Linotypers, Inc., printed by Halliday Lithograph
Corporation, and bound by A. Horowitz & Son Bookbinders.
The editors were Tyler G. Hicks and Lila M. Gardner. George E. Occhsner supervised production.
Preface
More than 3,100 electronic circuits, published largely within the past 5 years
in the United States and abroad, are presented here in 99 chapters, logically
organized for convenient reference and browsing by practical electronics en-
gineers, technicians, and experimenters. Each circuit has the values of all
significant components, an identifying title, a concise description, performance
data, and suggestions for applications. At the end of each description is a cita-
tion giving the title of the original article or book, its author, and the exact
location in the source. After a circuit is selected, the construction details, per-
formance graphs, and calibration procedures can usually be found in the
original publication if needed.
The circuits in this book are completely different from those in the highly
successful predecessor volume, "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published
by McGraw-Hill in 1968. New chapters provide easy access for the first time
to circuits for Audio Control, Automotive Control, Flashers, Lamp Control,
Lasers, Metal Detectors, Opamps, Optoelectronics, Tachometers, Voltage-
Level Detectors, and 14 other new categories. Internal connections for the
most-used IC chips are given in the Integrated Circuits chapter as an extra aid
for analyzing the modern solid-state circuits that dominate this book.
This electronic circuit compendium serves as a highly effective desk-top
information retrieval system for tested practical electronic circuits developed
throughout the world. Engineering libraries, particularly in foreign countries,
will find it a welcome substitute for the original sources when facing limita-
tions on budgets, shelving, or searching manpower. The circuits for this new
book were located by cover-to-cover searching of five years of back issues of
39 U.S. and foreign electronics periodicals, the published literature of several
hundred manufacturers, and hundreds of recent books, together filling well
over 100 feet of shelving. This same search would take weeks or even months
at a large engineering library, plus the time required to write for manufacturer
literature and locate elusive sources.
To find a desired circuit quickly, start with the alphabetically arranged table
of contents at the front of the book. Note the chapters most likely to contain
the desired type of circuit, and look in these first. Remember that most appli-
cations use combinations of basic circuits, and could therefore be placed in
any of several different chapters.
If a quick scan of these chapters does not give the exact circuit desired, use
the index at the back of the book. Here the circuits are indexed in depth under
the different names by which they are known. In addition, the index contains
hundreds of cross references that speed up your search.
In most cases, you can locate a desired circuit in a few minutes. It should
be free of drafting errors, because corrections pointed out in subsequently
published errata notices have been made; this alone can save many frustrating
hours of troubleshooting.
Values of important components are given for every circuit, because these
help in reading the circuit and redesigning it for other requirements. The de-
velopment of a circuit for a new application is speeded when design work can
be started with a working circuit, instead of starting from scratch. Research
and experimentation are thereby cut to a minimum, so even a single use of
this circuit-retrieval book could pay for its initial cost many times over.
v
This book is organized to provide a maximum of circuit information per
page, with minimum repetition. The chapter title, heading, and original title
in the citation should therefore be considered along with the description when
studying a circuit.
Abbreviations are used extensively to conserve space. Their meanings are
given after the table of contents. Abbreviations on diagrams and in original
article titles were unchanged, but their meanings can be deduced by context.
Few publications are able to maintain a supply of back issues, but many
are willing to make copies of individual articles. A charge is usually made for
this service, per page or per article. Similarly, libraries are usually willing to
make copies of articles in publications brought to their copying machines.
Mailing addresses of some U.S. electronics publications are given after the
list of abbreviations for convenience in writing for back issues or copies of
articles. Addresses for foreign sources are generally included with the cita-
tions for the 420 foreign circuits given.
To artist and orchid-hybridizer Jack Quint, more active than ever in Florida
retirement, goes full credit for arranging the circuits so well on these pages,
each unmistakably associated with its text. Secretaries Joyce Macintyre and
Diane Jacobs deserve recognition for perseverance in learning the language of
electronics and typing it exactly as dictated, hyphens, kHzs, and all. Other
co-workers for this book include Claire del Aguila, Joan Clough, Barbara
Jankowski, and Pat Qualls (typing), Ann Fioto (retyping), Debbie Zlendick
(editing), and Mike Wechsberg ( 140 abstracts).
To the original publications cited and to their authors and editors should go
the real credit, however, for making possible this contribution to electronic
circuit design.
John Markus
vi
Contents
Preface .••...•....•..................•.•...• v 50. Medical circuits .............................. . 407
Abbreviations usod .....•.•.••................ ix 51. Metal detector circuits .•.•..•.••..•...•.••..•.. 415
Addresses of Electronics Publications .•.......... ix 52. Modulator circuits ......•..................•.. 423
I. Alarm circuits ..•.....•....•.•.........•..•.. 53. Motor control circuits 431
2. Amplifier circuits .•..•......•..............••. 6 54. Multivibrator circuits 461
3. Audio amplifier circuits ................•....•.. 23 55. Noise circuits ..............................•. 488
4. Audio control circuits •..•...•...............•.. 49 56. Operational amplifier circuits ..............•..• 495
5. Automatic gain control circuits •..............•.. 57 57. Optoolectronic circuits 524
6. Automotivo control circuits ...........•...•..••. 63 58. Oscillator circuits-a·f 531
7. Automotive ignition circuits .........•...•..•..• 70 59. Oscillator circuits-r·f 538
8. Battery-charging circuits •••.....•...••.....•... 78 60. Phase control circuits 547
9. Bridge circuits ......................•...•.... 84 61. Phonograph circuits ...•.••••..••.••..••....... 555
10. Copocitance control circuits .••..••..•.••••••..• 90 62. Photoolectric circuits 564
11. Cathode-ray circuits ..•..•.•.......•..••..••••• 95 63. Photography circuits 585
12. Chopper circuits ...•.......•.••.•••••......... 105 64. Power supply protection circuits •..••............ 591
13. Clock circuits .............•• , •..•..•..• , ...•. 111 65. Protection circuits ............................ . 601
14. Code circuits .................•.......••••..•• 117 66. Pulse generator circuits ....................... . 612
15. Comparator circuits ........ , , . , • , , , , •••.•••••• 121 67. Pulse shaping circuits ...................•..... 618
16. Control circuits •.....••.............•.... , . , •. 128 68. Radiation circuits ...............•............. 625
17. Converter circuits-d-c lo d-c ........•..•••••••• 138 69. Receiver circuits .....•..•••.•.••••..••.•.•.... 629
18. Converter circuits-general ............•••••.••. 145 70. Regulated power supply circuits .......•..•••••. 638
19. Converter circuits-radio .................•.•••. 151 71. Regulator circuits ••..•....••.•••••••••••..••.• 654
20. Countor circuits ........................•.. , , . 158 72. Relay circuits ........................•••••••• 674
21. Curront control circuits •.••......••......•..... 180 73. Remoto control circuits ...........•..••••••••••• 681
22. D-c amplifier circuits •• , , • , .••.••............... 185 74. Sampling circuits .•••......•................ , • 689
23. Dolay circuits .... , , , , , . , •• , .• , , • , • , ......... . 194 75. Sawtooth genorator circuits .....••••.•••........ 696
24. Detector circuits ......• , ..• , .•..• , .•.......... 199 76. Servo circuits ..•..............•..• , • , .•• , .•.. 708
25. Digital-analog converter circuits ..•.••••.••..•.. 204 77. Shift register circuits ...........•••••••.•..••.• 716
26. Display circuits .......... , .. , , , , , , , .. , , • , , , , .. 209 78. Singlo-sideband circuits 722
27. Electronic music circuits ....•........•..•••••• , • 221 79. Square-wave generator circuits ..............• , , 727
28. Filter circuits-active .......... , . , • , , • , , , , , , • , , . 230 80. Switching circuits ...•...•..............•••••.. 741
29. Filter circuits-passive ..................••••••• 239 81. Staircase genorator circuits .......•..••..•.....• 751
30. Flash circuits .•....••..........•.....•... , • , , , 244 82. Tachometer circuits .•..••••••••.•............. 756
31. Flasher circuits •.....•..•...•..•. , •...•. , • , .. , 250 83. Telemetry circuits •..• , • , •••••••••••..•.......• 763
32. Flip-Rop circuits ...............•.........•...• 260 84. Telephone circuits ••...•••.••............. , •. , 769
33. Frequency divider circuits ....•..•..........•... 266 85. Television circuits-black-and-white .....•. , ••.•.. 775
34. Frequency measuring circuits ..•.....••..••••••• 274 86. Television circuits-color .••.••.............•... 801
35. Frequency modulation circuits •........••..•••.. 279 87. Temperature control circuits ......•.••••..•...•. 818
36. Gate circuits ..................•.............• 288 88. Test circuits . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • • . • • . . • ... 838
37. High-voltage circuits •.••...•..••........•.•... 294 89. Timer circuits .......•.•..••.••.......••.••..• 852
38. Hobby circuits .•..•..•....•.........•... , ••.•. 300 90. Transceiver circuits ••••••..••.•..............• 872
39. 1-f amplifier circuits .•...................•...•. 308 91. Transmitter circuits .........•...••••••..•...... 877
40. Infrared circuits ......•...••.••.•••••...••.... 314 92. Triangular-wave generator circuits ••.•........•. 892
41. Integrated circuits .•..•......•...... , ..••..••. 321 93. Trig9er drcuits •.........•.•...•..•.....•.••• , 899
42. lnvertor circuits , ••..•......•........••....... 332 94. Ultrasonic circuits ..••..••..•................. 908
43. lamp control circuits ...• , .••••••.•••••..••.••. 344 95. Video circuits .................•.•••...••.•... 913
44. lamp dimmer circuits ......................•• , 350 96. Volta9o-controlled oscillator circuits .•...•..•.... 919
45. laser circuits ............•..•..•............. 361 97. Voltage-level detector circuits ................•. 928
46. latching circuits ••...•.•••...•..•.......•...•. 366 98. Volta9e reference circuits ..••.••..•............ 941
47. logic circuits •......•..•...•..•..••.•.•.••... 370 99. Zero-voltage detector circuits ..•••.•.......••... 947
48. Magnetic tape circuits ..•.•..•......•....•..... 381 Author index ...•.....................•.•••.•• 953
49. Measuring circuits •..•..••...•.....•...•.••... 392 Subject index .............................•.• 957
vii
ABBREVIATIONS USED
a atto (l0-18) fsk frequency shift keying mW milliwatt rms root-mean-square
A ampere ft feet n nano- (10-D) rpm revolutions per minute
a-c alternating current G giga (100) nA nanoampere RTL resistor-transistor logic
a-c/d-c alternating current GHz gigahertz nF nanofarad sbs slllcon bilateral switch
and direct current G-M Geiger-Muller npn negative-positive· scope oscilloscope
a·f audio frequency hp horsepower negative scr silicon controlled rectifler
afc automatic frequency hr hour ns nanosecond scs silicon controlled switch
control Hz hertz nW nanowatt s second
aft automatic fine tuning IC integrated circuit opamp operational s/n signal-to-noise
age automatic gain control i-f intennediate frequency ampllfier spdt single-pole double-
a·m amplitude modulation IR infrared p pico- (10-12) throw
bed binary coded decimal k kilo- (103) pA picoampere sq cm square centimeter
bfo beat-frequency oscillator K kilohm (,000 ohms) pam pulse-amplitude ssb single-sideband
b-w black-and-white kHz kilohertz modulation ssl solid-state lamp
c centi- (10-2) kV kilovolt pcm pulse-code modulation SUS slllcon unilateral switch
c Centigrade; capacitance; kW kilowatt pep peak envelope power s-w short-wave
capacitor L inductance; inductor pf picofarad sync synchronizing
CATV Community Antenna las light-activated switch piv peak Inverse voltage T tera· (1012)
Television laser light-activated scr p-m phase modulation; td tunnel diode
CB Citizens Band lases light-activated scs pennanent magnet t-r transmit-receive
CCTV Closed-Circuit m milli- ( 10-3) pnp positive-negative- triac triode a-c switch
Television M mega- (106) positive TTL transistor-transistor
cm centimeter mag megohm p·p peak-to-peak logic
er cathode-ray mH millihenry ppi plan position indicator tv television
cro cathode-ray oscilloscope MHz megahertz ppm pulse per minute twt traveling-wave tube
crt cathode-ray tube mil 0.001 inch (10-3 inch) pps pulse per second uhf ultrahigh frequency
c-w continuous-wave min minute preamp preamplifier ujt unljunctlon transistor
d-a digital-analog ms millisecond prf pulse repetition v volt; voltage
d-c direct current mm millimeter frequency VA voltampere
d deci-(10-1) modem modulator· prr pulse repetition rate vco voltage-controlled
dB decibel demodulator psc permanent split oscillator
dBm decibels above 1 mono monostable capacitor vdr voltage-dependent
milliwatt multlvibrator pW picowatt resistor
deg degree mosfet metal-oxide pwm pulse-width vfo variable-frequency
dlac diode a-c switch semiconductor fleld- modulation oscillator
DTL diode-transistor logic effect transistor R resistance; resistor vhf very high frequency
dvm digital voltmeter µ micro- (l0-6) RCTL resistor-capacitor- vlf very low frequency
ecg electrocardiograph µA microampere transistor logic v-o-m volt-ohm-milliammeter
eeg electroencephalograph µf microfarad RDTL resistor-diode- vswr voltage standing wave
emf electromotive force µH microhenry transistor logic ratio
f femto- ( 10-15) µ.s microsecond r-f radio frequency vu volume unit
fet fleld-effect transistor mV millivolt rfi radio frequency w watt; wattage
f.m frequency modulation mvbr mu ltivibrator interference z Impedance
ADDRESSES OF ELECTRONICS PUBLICATIONS

CO, 14 Vanderventer Avenue, Port Washingtcn, L.I., New York 11050
EON (now EDNIEEE), Cahnors Publishing Companv, 270 St. Paul Street, Denver, Colorado 80206
EEE (now EDNIEEE), Cahners Publishing Companv, 270 St. Paul Street, Denver, Colorado 80206
Eloclronic Design, Hovden Publishing Company, 8SO Third Avenue, Now Yark, New York 10222
Eleclronlc News, 7 E. 12th Street, Now Yark, New York 10003
Eloclronic Products, 645 Stewart Avenue, Garden Citv, Now York 11530
Eloclronics, 330 W. 42d Stroot, Now York, Now York 10036
E/edronics World, P.O. Sox 1093, Flushing, Now York 11352
Eledronic Toclrnician, 1 East First Stroot, Duluth, Minnesota 55802
Elemonlary Eledronics, 229 Park Avenue South, Now York, New York 10003
IEEE Publications, 345 East 47th Stroot, Now York, New York 10017
Popular Electronics, Ziff-Davis Publishing, 1 Park Ave., New York, New York 10016
QST, 225 Main St., Newington, Connedlcut 06111
Rarllo-Elodronics, Boulder, Colorado 80302
ix
CHAPTER 1
Alarm Circuits
R R
] 11
ov--- I
I
ov
I.... -
_._J
lino. Ono modulo (enclosed In dashed rec• assigned tono, to activate alarm through pair
tan9lo) is used for each tone frequency. Re- of NOR60 gates conneded as Schmitt trl99er.
MULTITONE ALARM RECEIVER-Input consists port gives values of R and C for tho 12 fre- -1. J. Lemmons, Single-Lino Multitone Trans-
of I 2 dilforent audio tones in ran go from 330 quoncles usod. Twin·T network converts mission for Alarm and Warning Systems,
to 2,850 Hz, coming from remote monitoring Phillps DOA40 opamp Into selective amplifier Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven,
points ovor 600-0hm double-core transmission that delivers 6.5-V rms output only for its The Netherlands, No. 75.
PULSED·LIGHT INTRUSION ALARM RECEIVER

....Can be used up to 10 ft away from
pulsed-light transmitter. Sounds alarm only
If no light pulses reach LS400 phototransistor
for predeterminod time. Ono-shot pulse
generator stretches received pulses. Alarm
consists of 20CMb audio oscillator Q3..Q4
driving small p-m speaker. Optical filter is
not roquirod as long as ambient light Is not
strong enough to saturate phototranslstor.
If latching switch ls closed, alarm will· con-
LS400 tinue sounding after intruder passes through
light boam.-L M. Hertz, Solid Stato Lamps-
Part II, General El8dric, Cleveland, Ohio, No.
SENSOR ONE·SHOT AL.ARM 3.0121, 1970, p 30.
1
2 ELEC.TRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
SEllSINC
AN1£M'IA
IOOK
47K
LIGHT
~~~~M- HUMIDITY
ISTOR
CRI
IOK DK NORMALLY
a.osm
SOUND
CRl,2,3,4,5·G·E TYPE INl692

MULTIPLE-SENSOR ALARM-When connected
E::HEAT£R
as shown between electrodts of scr In oscil- also be usod to wake up bird wotchors at
lator circuit driving alarm spoaker, alarm will ' sunrise without causing loss of sleep on
Tl • STAllCOR PA-M21
respond to Ramo, smoke, heat, or sound of cloudy doys.-"Hobby Manual," Goneral Elec-
TOUCH SWITCH-Touching of sensing antenna Rro. Rosponse to humidity is optional. Can tric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 127.
wire with tip of finger is enough to fire 2D21
thyratron and pull in relay that can actuate
burglar alarm or close any other circuit.-J.
P. Shields, "Novel Electronic Circuits," H. W.
Sams & Co., lndianapolls, Ind., 1968, p 78.
CONTACT CLOSURE IOK

FROM ALARM OR
OVERLOAD CONDITION
. - - ---., TO
-100 voe ~._.,1 _.,.-ff><H:~.....:....J\/I~~~-~- ~~:i~STOR
MINUS 100 V DC OR
GREATER a FILT-EREo--:---tti,ctf--i MALFUNCTION IDENTIF1CATION-Usos neon·
SQUARE WAVES memory switch in OR gota. Lamps flash and
FROM OVERLOADED energize transistor-driven relay to actuato
AMPLIFIER CHOPPER audible alarm and control circultry.-E. Bau•
STABILIZER SECTION - - r l-..-tti,ctf--i
man, "Applications of Noon Lamps and Gas
I .5 Discharge Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p
I1,, _____ .J 73.
IOOK
(fOR RAJ[
E'FECT l 2.4K
. .
V~ 2W ~
ALTERNATE
INPUT
+150 o-----..Y.,,.,..------------0
Rz
+112
z
....,.
IOOK y 3N84
POSITIVE 56V
PULSE INl885
TRIGGERS
scs
BASIC SCS ALARM-Transducer can be any

56V
resistor sensitive to temperature, light, or radl· INl885
otion, up to 1 mag. Alarm is triggered when•
NE·51
over resistance of transducer drops below
setting of preset potentiometer. Altarna•
tively, alarm can bo triggered by 0.75 V
applied to scs through 1OOK. Interchanging
RS and pot gives triggering for Increase In OVERLOAD-lnoxponsivo overload indicator properly adjusted, lamp will glow for only 1
transducer resistance.-Planar Silicon Con- uses noon lamp, throe zoners, and transistor. V drop.-M. R. Johnson, Overload Indicator
trolled Switch 3N84/3N85, General Electric, Noon glows to Indicate overload whonover Utilizes Inexpensive Noon Bulb, Electronic Do·
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 65.18, 1964. output voltaga drops below 112 V. If R4 is 1lgn, Juno B, 1964, p 74-75.
ALARM CIRCUITS 3
BURGLAR NOISE ALARM-When sound level,

as produced by burglar breaking into homo
or any other cause, exceeds prodotormined
level sot by Rl, circuit turns on alarm horn
for other load up to 1 kW and koops it on
until sound level drops in monitored area.
Input terminals roqulre l·V audio signal,
which requires uso of proamplifler or ampll·
fior along with microphone. Circuit becomes
self.latching if mike picks up sound of alarm.
-"Siiicon Controlled Rectifier Experimenter's
10 TO Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967, p 127.
IOOpF
R5
470 INPUT
TERMINALS
N34A
POWER
SUPPLY
I
200PIV
POWER
SUPPLY
2
BLOWN-FUSE ALARM-Audible alarm, wired 200PIV

across all fuses of system as shown, is turned
on whenever one of fuses blows. Useful for
unattended equipment such as component POWER
SUPPLY
life-test racks, process control systems, and 3
equipment undergoing prototypo debugging.
-T. E. Skopal, Use an Audible Alarm to lndi·
200 PIV
cate a Blown Fuse, Electronic Dosign, Fob. 15,
1970, p B4 and 86.
POWER
SUPPLY
ALARM 4
+
•cHOSEN ACCOR1>1NG 10 ALARM CURRENT

RATING
AUTO. REKT UH CLOSID POS.l
MISSING-PULSE DETECTOR-Circuit actuates shut off food before jam occurs. Will also charging cycle of Cl. Rl can be set for In·
Indicator, alarm buzzer, or control solenoid detect momentary dropout longer than proset tervals of 100 ms to 1.5 s.-J. V. McMlllin,
when interval between consecutive pu!ses at period, if monitoring d-c line. Reset can bo Versatile Transistorized Alarm Detects Pulse
Input exceeds preset time determined by set• either manual or automatic. Uses diode In Dropouts, "400 Ideas for Dosign Selected from
ting of Rl. Has been used to detect misfeed ujt timing circuit to provide alternate di~ Electronic Design," Hayden Book Co., N.Y.,
of answer sheet in test-scoring machine and charge path without lnterforlng with normal 1964, p 113-114.
\
\
\
4 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
t28v
2.2k
AIRCRAFT D-C OVERVOLTAGE-Red lamp
comes on whon 28-V supply voltage rises to
R2
IOk 32 V because of voltage regulator malfunc-
tion, so repairs con be made before aircraft
storage battery is damaged. Yellow undor-
voltage warning lamp comes on when voltage
drops below 24 V. With appropriate changes
2.2k of lamps and semiconductor devices, circuit
can monitor voltages up to 600 V.-R. L.
Nuckolls Ill, Warning Lights Monitor D-C
Supply Voltage, Electronics, Doc. 12, 1966, p
106.
BOTH LAMPS NO. 327 IN AIRCRAFT TYPE

PRESS-TO-TEST LAMP FIXTURES
TEMPERATURE ALARM-Wiii ring bell, turn on

lamp, or turn on attic vontilating fan when
temperature exceeds predetermined adjustable - 12 VOLT Tl
value In room. Once relay pulls In, alarm -=-BATTERY
cannot be turned off until temperature Is ro-
ducod or battery switch Is opened. If boll or PRI
buzzer Is operated from battery Instead of
12·24 V secondary of bell transformer, alarm
bocomes Independent of power failure. LI is SPACING
7,000 turns No. 38 wound on reed swltch.- Bl
"Hobby Manual," Gonoral Electric, Owens- BELL BUZZER
boro, Ky., 1965, p 152.
TEFLON COVERED WIRE

LAFAYETTE INDUSTRIAL DEVICES TUNGSTEN PROBE
99H6266 MODULE lOlOAZ
OR EQUIVALENT
~~
l :l
PILOT FLAME MONITOR-Utilizes flame as guishos.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Under-
high-impedance conductor to koop neon lamp standing Miniature Noon Lamps," H. W. Sams
lit. When pilot flame goes out, lamp oxtln- & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 24. +
500µf
01 02
1N4001 1N4001
+9V R•
68
RI R3 1W
8.2k 1.2k
l-
+ av
..:.. NI -CAD
03
2N5060 Q2 BATTERY
MPS8630 PULSED-LIGHT INTRUSION ALARM TRANS-
R2 MITrER-Oporatos from pair of D flashlight
1 k coils, drawing only 0.7 mA. Relaxation oscil-
lator applies 1-A currant pulses to SSL-4
RETURN momentary power failur111 lasting longer than gallium orsenlde lamp at roto of 10 pps.,
POWER-FAILURE INDICATOR-Lamp comes on 5-µs recovery time of scr. Whon circuit is Used with receiver up to 10 foot away, which
whonovor 9-V power source falls either be- roset, power source will trickle-charge lamp sounds alarm If no light pulsos ore received
cause of open or short, and stays on after battery to keep It at full chargo.-"Semlcon- for predetermined tlme.-L. M. Hertz, Solid
power is restored, until circuit Is reset with ductor Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola, State Lamps-Part II, Goneral Electnc, Clovo-
SI. Lamp will also como on and stay on for Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-40. land, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970, p 29.
ALARM CIRCUITS 5
ALARM BOX-Single scr In relaxation oKllla•

tor circuit drlvH speaker to produce series of
loud cllclcs far un as fire, smolco, or Intru-
sion alarm controUod by switch. SoHing af
R2 dotormlnos frequency of cliclcs.-"Hobby
Manual/' Gonoral Electric, Owonsboro, Ky.,
1965, p 124.
Bl
22•1/2V
r RI
IOOK
Cl
lpf
SCR
GE·X5
4 TO 8 J\.
SPEAKER OR
EARPHONES
+48WC:
Sll.E~E TEST
AUDIBLE-VISUAL FAULT ALARM-Whon fault

closes contact K by any moans, fault-lndlcat·
{ng lamp and buzzer bitth come on. When
silence switch Is closod, or when fault is ro·
03 moved, lamp and bu11er go off. ACKNOWL·
'----+w-i--tC.J2N2102 EDGE lamp then comes on only If fault is
still present.-R. Breazzano, Fault Alarm Cir·
~:j
56 cult, EEE, May 1967, p tBO.
CR3
.
1'*456
HlP&SO nCJK 2IO Kor
DUAL
2· INPUT 100 K
IOOI(
GATE
Ill
II• 114
ZAii
112 CZ
IOO• cu,.,
IOOY
'"'
IOOY
,.
113
IC SIREN-Can bo used for bur9lar, intrusion,
and auto tamper alarms, or as toy siren for
290 Kor
100 K
bicycles. Potontiomoter seHln91 determine
typo of siren sound obtained. Omit ampll•
lier section (bolow dashed line) If using slron
A°C POWER FAILURE-Neon lamp NE·23 to feed external audio or p-a ampllflor. Op·
begins blinking whon a-c lino voltago drops orates from 9·V transistor radio baHery.-
below 100 V or power falls, and continues ''Tlps on Using IC'1," HMA-32, Motorola,
blinking until rosot switch Is closod. Intended Phoenix, Ariz., 1968.
for use with electronic oqulpment that is loft
operating unaHanded for long periods of timo.
-c. D. Getlker, A, C. Line Voltage Monitor, •evo-----....------.
Eloctranics World, Jan. 1969, p 85. RI
R3
33
10 k
3W
RESET
SI r QI
Pl
#47
2NllO&O
R2
1k
RETURNO------<.__ _ _.,______,
POWER·INTERRUPTION INDICATOR - lamp
glows to Indicate momentary interruption of
\ Your power from sourco. Closing Sl momentarily
turns on scr Qt, which shunts lamp and lceeps
It off. If power 11 Interrupted longer than 50.
p.s recovery time of scr, scr will turn off and
stay off. When power service is resumed,
SIGNAL DROPOUT DETECTOR-:_Provldos lndl· si9nal for driving Indicator or alarm. Output lamp will como on to indicate there has been
cation of momentary dropout of d-c, a•c, or signal remains until scs is turned off by mo• an Interruption. Switch must then bo closed
pul111 input voltage. Rl permits adjusting montarily opening resat switch.-"Unliunctlon to turn on scr again and turn off lamp.-
Interval botwoan 1l9nal disappearance and Circuit Hints," General Electric, Syracu111, N.Y., "Somiconductor Power Circuits Handbook,"
·,,
\ tri99erlng of 3N5B sea to give d-c output Fi9. 4. Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-39.
'"\
"'.-
CHAPTER 2
Amplifier Circuits
+9V
(At 1·3mAI
DIRECT-COUPLED RING-OF-THREE-Provides
voltage gain of 90 dB, which risos 4.5 dB at
40 Ha and drops 3 dB at 25 kHz. C3 do- C1
terminos high-frequency gain, whllo low-fro- ---111-----t-.f'"
quoncy gain is dotorminod by Cl, C2, and 2SpF
source resistance. Complomontary transistors R1
give slmplo circuit.-E-Lino Transistor Applica• 15kA
tlons, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England,
1969, p 49.
OV
47k..n... 47k.11..
L&
1st 2nd 3rd
STAGE Rg STAGE STAGE
C2
0.001 360
R5
-
R11
-
33 K 33 k
- - -
R19 R20
33 33
-15 Vdc
L1. 4. & L7 " 3.5 turns #20 soh·dllWll, ID " % inch, Length " 1 Inch Bandwidth: 3.1 • 405 MHz at 3 dB point
L2. Ls. & LB" 6 111rns #20 soft·drawn, ID = % inch, lenglh = %inch Gain: 31 dB :t. 1 dB
l.3. L&. & Lg" 6 111rns #24 tiMed wire on CF103, 03 toroid with teflon sleeve. Seniitivity: 100 uV (S+N = 10 dB)
C= 500 pf Erie button capatitnr with 0.02 1o1F ceramic disk.· all other N I
capaciton are ceramic disk. le " 5 mA, VcE " IO Vdc for all deviars /
400-MHZ BROADBAND-Consists of throo hove 50-ohm terminations. Gain is 30 dB, based on uso of Smilh charts.-S. P. Kwok,
identical transistor stages usln9 2N4957 pnp with 3-dB-down polnh at 3.1 MHz and 405 UHF Broadband Amplifier Design, Motorola,
silicon transistors. Both input and oulput MHz. Reparl eivos detailed design procedure Phoenix, Ariz., No. AN-406, 1967.
6
t
(
AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 7
+IOV
+Ee
120K.n. 510K 22K
o--f 1--....+--'-1
0.75flf
e;
(CONSTANT AT IOmv)
0 VOLTS
IOOKA IOKA VARIABLE GAIN-Voltage-controlled common-

emitter amplifier can be used for remote ad·
justmont of gain, amplitude modulation of
wideband signals, and ave. Control voltage
680.A range of 6 V for Ee provides 40-dB change in
voltage gain, independently of frequency from
100 Hz to beyond 100 kHz. Action is basod
FET WITH NEGATIVE FEEDBACK-First stage is Input impedance of complete amplifier much on use of diode in place of emitter resistor.-
high-input-impedance bootstrapped source higher than that af fet first stage, while giv- M. l. Patterson, Amplifler Provides Voltage-
follower with drain lead, giving gain well ing ovor-all unity gain. Input impedance is Controlled Gain, Electronic Design, Nov. 23,
below unity. Output is capacltor•coupled to 65 meg whon RG is I mog, and 500 meg 1964, p 60.
high-gain amplifler stage using conventional whon RG is 10 meg.-Field Effect Transistors
bipolar transistor, with almost entire output and Applications, Ferranti ltd., Oldham,
signal fed back to source of fot. This makes Lanes., England, No. 22, 1965.
COMMON IK IK
MODE
REJECTOR
. .I
0.01
I~ ···~2
22K
-'Wlo..-6----11--'"-•A
TO LOGIC
10 ' 'w -
1•
100 39 I.BK
-= v -= v v -= ':' v ..,.
22
~
O.QI
IK
~..,..,.........1--11-.....- -.... e
TO LOGIC
04
18K
THIN-FILM MEMORY READ AMPLIFIER-Emit·
NOTE:
RESISTANCE IS IN OHMS, tor-gated sense amplifier for reading thin-film
CAPACITANCE IS IN MICROFARAOS
·-
UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN.
ALL DIODES TYPE 10·5050
memory in cycle time of 50 ns has 5-ns rise
timo and gain of 2,000. Output is 2 V for o.Olr
TRANSISTORS 01,2,3,4 TYPE 2N769, input of I mV.-C. F. Chong, G. H. Guttrogg,
05,6 TYPE 2NB28 C. S. lh and A. A. Wicks, High-Speed Road
Amplifiers For Thin Films, Electronic Design,
Aug. 3, 1964, p 38-40•
.,•
560A
100J'F 15kA 680.A
IOkA
ZTX300 10DpF
Used as OUTPUT
Zener Diode
ZTX300
INPUT
120kA
68kA 3·9kA
ov
20 HZ-150 KHZ-Provides power gain of 86 input. Developed for use in balanced chop· sistor Applications, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham,
dB, with p·p noise below 10 µV referred to per amplifier of mlcroammeter.-E-Line Tran· Lanes., England, 1969, p 47.
510 10
Rr 2W R2 IOW
Ov~
COMPLEMENTARY PUSH-PULL-Simple push.
-0.4V
pull emitter·followor with single input gives
high drive power, symmetrical around 0 V, eouT
with very low qulescont powor.-R. Zane, R3 ~~R4 10
IOW
Single-Ended Input Provides Push.Pull Output,
Electronic De1i9n, July 20, 1964, p 77.
0.05...,....
,., -L
100,.h
··~
200
0.002,.1 IOOk LOAD
ALL TRANSISTORS• RCA 40264
c,
~BO pf
SPIKES INTO CAPACITIVE LOAD-Delivers load. Common-emitter amplifier Ql drives

train of high-voltage high-duty-cycle pulses Darlington Q2.Q3. Output impedance is con·
to capacitive load, with low output lmpodanco trolled by Rl ·Cl connected across input and plifler Delivers Falt, High-Voltage Pulses, E/ec•
for transferring chorg11 rapidly to and from by Q4 shunting load.-D. Perlman, NPN Am• Ironies, Juno 26, 1967, p 109-110.
. - - - -......-----..-0+28V +8VOC
ROUTPUT
0.\1<
-evoc
UNITY·GAIN BALANCED AMPLIFIER-Use1
fleld·effed constant•current•IOUrce diodos Cl1 DUAL·FOLLOWER-Use of oddltlonal comple·
and Cl2 for full temperature compensation, mentary pair of transistors In place of bal•
minimum crossover distortion, and unity gain. oncod diodes in dual emittor·follower gives
Can handle signal peaks nearly equal to increased input impedance and higher cvr•
supply voltages, or 40 V p-p into 5-ohm rent gain while eliminating cro1Sover distor•
load. Input impedance at low frequencies Is tion problem. No trimming adjustment is
above I meg. Can be used to increase needed, 100-ohm resistors provide overload
power of opamp, either Inside or outside protection by limiting short-circuit current.-
feedback loop.-C. F. Andren, Symmetry Am· J. P. Chidester, Complementary Dual-Follower
plifler Compensatod by FET Curront-Sourco lncroasos Input lmpedanco, Elecrronic Design,
Diodes, Electronic Design, Oct. 25, 1965, p 70. Nov. 8, 1965, p 58-59.
6v 6v
c,
0.47p.f
i--t---- Vour
R1z
Bk
--
62 DB GAIN WITH IC PAIR-Uses two RCA network for frequency-shaping. Low.fro• changing feedback to reduce gain.-J. P. Kol·
IC video ompliflers, the first connected as a · quency rolloff starts at 22 Hz and high· ler, Unear IC's: Part 3-Difforentiol Amplifiers
doubl-nded differential amplifier and the frequency rolloff at 1 MHz. Can be adapted At Work, Eledronie1, Sept. 18, 1967, p 96-
other singl-nded, with R..C intercennocting for age. Bandwidth can be increased by 104.
+260V
LINEAR DARLINGTON-Uses low-cost Darling·

ton-conneded sorles transistors in linear high·
voltage amplifier. Arrangement gives high
R1•130K, current gain and 9aod power, along with
IW satisfadary voltage division for transistors
durln9 quioscanco.-V. Glover, Using Low·
Volta9e Transistors In High-Voltage Circuits,
Electronic Design, July 20, 1964, p 62-67.
Ay55 AT I Kc
Rz •2K,
1/2W
+av
~07
+av +av
ISOLATING
TRANSFORMER
+av
H25C07 +av +av

+av
SENSE AMPLIFIER-Used in high·speed road· includes output latch.-Y. Hsia, Solenoid·
only memory of computer, in which informa· Winding potlern determines points at which Coupled READ-ONLY Momory, IEEE Transac·
tion is stored by means of mutual inductive read and sense wires moot os solenoid pair lions on Electronic Computers, Juno 1970, p
coupling between two concentric solenoids. far storing information pattern. Circuit abo 344-350.
•3VAT2&µa
220K
·1.5V GI
3N89
OD2J.&f
GI
IOMeg IOMoQ IOMoQ
+8.5VAT IJ'o
MICROPOWER FOR SPACE-Faur tetrode fet's Hz, while drawing only 90 p.W of power from
provide volta9e gain of aver 1,000 and 0.5 V spacecraft supply.-J. S. Sherwin, Noed High HF Design, Electronic Design, June 7, 1965,
rms output over bandwidth of 1 ta 30,000 Z and Low C? Turn ta the Tetrode FET for p 20-25.
2-40
L5 z-u
LZ L4
2·25
IO
2-40 ICIA 4S
""
...
10
+
12.5VDC
••
U •liT,li0.16, 4 1.0. 0ETA1L•A•
25-W THREE-TRANSISTOR POWER AMP-Pro· MHz mobllo band. Drive power required 11
1.2,Ll -3 T,li0.1&. f1.o. A246
2 vidH excollont stablllty and minimum of har• 100 mW. RoqulrH SO.Ohm load.-Two 175
~
E
L4,L5 ·4-fT,M0.111,fl.D. manic and unwanted 1lgnal componontl, with MHz 12.5 Volt Mobllo Communication Power
c
..
8 bandwidth of 20 MH1. Powor output in• Amplifiers for 25W and 40W Power Output,
L6 • ltT,M0.16,;"1.o.
56 croase1 abaut 8% at low end of 150-175 Aft!porex, Slatorsvlllo, R.I., No. S-140, 8/68.
L7 • 2T, lt().14,4 1.0. E
10,.H • 1111.LER lj(). 9330-24
TO
INPUT COMBINER
2N4i30
+32~
l I I I I I I l!J 1
All CAPACITORS ARE IN MICROFARADS
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
KW FROM 60 TRANSISTORS-Circuit dovoJ. for bandwidth of 2 to 32 MHz. Basic fou,.. modules to give desired power output. Re-
oped by Wostln9hou10 under Air Force con• transistor modulo consists of four 2N4130 sulting powor output ampllRer can be tuned
trod, for use In communication systems, keeps IT&T transistors each connodod as In upper as single unit.-C. H. Wood Jr., A. W. Morse,
transistors oloctrlcally Isolated so outputs can circuit, with their outputs combined by tran.. and G. R. Brainerd, Transistors Share tho Load
be paralleled. With Input drive as low as formors as In lower circuit to form modulo In a KllowaH Ampllflor, Elocfronlc1, Doc. 11,
0.25 W, peak envelope power output Is 1 kW that can in turn be paralleled with similar 1967, p 100-105.
o,
2N IK
3704
2Nl78
INPU~-------
2.2k 0.IJlf
50 680k 470k
Dl5TORT10NLESS CLASS A-Solf-goneratod

bias voltage, developed by capacitor charg•
ing through diodo, is proportional to input
22k signal. Permits uso of single-transistor out-
put stage, with low d-c drain on battery
through transformer primory.-C. G. Dorn,
Cappcltor Charge Sets Transistor Bias Point,
50 Electronic Design, March 16, 1964, p 105.
GAIN CONTROL
0.5 HZ TO 300 KHZ-Fet and only two other once is 10 meg at 1 kHz and output imped-
tran1l1tor1 give wide bandwidth and gain ance 2K. Currant drain Is about 1.5 mA.
of 1,000, with" low distortion. Npn stage All capacitor valu81 aro µf,-T. C. Ponn, High·
QI controls fet. Stabilization is achieved Precision Preamp Built from 3 Transistors,
with 20 dB negative feedback. Input lmpod- Electronics, Dec. 23, 1968, p 58•
0--0
.
18 VOLTS TO GATE BIAS ..,.
SELF-BIASING FOR FEl'-Voltago drop pro-

duced by drain current through RS servos os
gato bias. Valuo of CS is chosen to prevent
foedback at signal frequencies. Article dis·
cussos stabilization achieved with solf-bias,
and other design procedures for Improving
1 MEG IK
fot performance in linear voltage omplillors.
-W. A. Rheinfelder, FETs Outperform Bl·
polars, Pentodes In Linear Voltage Amplifiers,
Electronic Design, Doc. 20, 1965, p 24-26 and
BROADBAND R·f m-Covers range of l-40 1 MHz ta about 20 at 40 MHz.-''Tips on 28-29.
MHz with high sin ratio, u1ing two 9-V Using m•s," HMA-33, Motorola, Phoenix,
batteries in serie1. Gain drap1 from 100 at Ariz., 1969.
IOK
+12V
+ INPUT
C·l
25/5 R·l
1:-9
10,,F • ll'F
+
OUTPUT
m~-::-
I
. . .·
3.3K I
"'.rOPTIONAL
GND HIGH-GAIN IC-Takes input of 0.4 mV P-P

and gives output of 2.5-6 V p·p for uso 01
audio or low.frequency r·f amplltler or 01 pre-
R-C COUPLED FEEDBACK-Uses Mallory MIC· amp to increaso cro sensitivity. Goin 11
0101 preamp with feedback tormlnal open overall gain Is 100 or 40 dB. Can be used 5,000 to 10,000. Adjust 1-meg pots for
with respect to a-c ground but returned to as low-level video amplifler whero sourco is maximum undistorted output. Moy also be
IC Input terminal to maintain correct d·c bias. either video tape hoad or another ampliflor. used with HEP580 2-input gate IC, using 1·
Feedback extends 3·dB bandwidth .Jo almost -M. L. Deschlor, Integrated Circuit Preampli· mos resistors In ploce of 1-meg pots In series
3 MHz and down to 10 Hz, but at sacrifice of fiers, Mallary, Indianapolis, Ind., APPN-2, with I OK.-''Tips on Using IC's," Motorola,
voltage gain. With 3.3K feedback resistor, 1968. Phoenix, Ariz., HMA-32, 1968.
+12v
1000.,F'
NONINVERTING WIDEBAND-Gives high Input

impodanco, but is direct coupled and signal
source must supply necessary base curront for
Ferranti ZLD2 IC differential-input d-c ampll·
fler. Gain is 3 dB down at 220 H1 and 600
kHz.-Microlin Amplifiers ZLD25 and ZLD2T,
Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, No. 11,
1967.
BOOTSTRAPPING-Combining positive and positive foodback. Article gives design equa-

nogative ~eedback in boohtrap amplifler gives tions.-G. P. Klein, Combined Foodback Build1
+Vdc both high input impedance and high voltage Gain and Input Impedance, Electronics, Oct.
gain. Bootstrapping rHlstor R2 provides 16, 1967, p 99.
Input Rl .---ti-----+ OUTPUT

109 so,.1
Q2
2N2905
TEMPERATURE-STABLE EMlmR-FOLLOWER-
Wlth 2N780 for 01 and 2N869 for Q2,
averago variation in output voltage will bo
only about 25 mV for temperQture range of
-·20 to 200 F when RI and R2 are 20K.- MOSFET UNITY-GAIN-Circuit shown has In· - - - - - -.... ·tVu ==-t ISV
"Solectod Electronic Circuitry," NASA SP-5046, put impedance above 1,000 meg. Mosfet -C. R. Parkins, "Application of MOSFET De-
1966, Government Printing Office, Washing• functions as source followor with constant• vices to Electronic Circuits," Hughes, Newport
ton, D.C., p 65. current generator lnstoad of source resistance. Beach, Cal., 1968, p 10.
2Zll5V
Output ----·""4~0NT
r-----
2N7061
lJle, eo
+20V
!I I
I
I '=' I
L _____ J
BROADBAND FET PREAMP-Glvos bandwidth change at levels abovo break-point; typical
of 0.5 to 40 MHz for maximum Input 1lgnal NONLINEAR GAIN-Dlodos In foedback not- valuos rango from 470 to 10,000 ohms.
of 3 V p•p. Voltage gain Is 10 dB, and work aro biasod Into conduction when signal Used to omphasizo specific input levels.-J.
dynamic rango 140 dB,..;,.FET Broadband R. F. excursions exceed 0.6 V p•p, and rosulting K. Hickman, Complemontory Diode Feedback
Proampliflers, Crystalonlcs, Cambridge, Mass., negativo feedback reduce1 9aln of stage. Producos Nonlinear Gain, Electronic Deaign,
TMF1. Valuo of feedback resl1tor RF detorminos 9ain Juno 7, 1965, p 42.
+12v ~clOI(
IC INVERTING A-C AMPLIFIER-Uses Ferranti

ZLD2 IC differential-Input d-c ampllfler con-
VIN~ "\J nected to give gain of 10 with negative food-
back. Intended for appllcatlons where d-c
v,,.±3mvlo±3v component is net required, so capacitance
coupling is used at Input. This unbalances
values of RS1 and RS2, for which corrodlon
Is mado by making RSI equal to RF. Alter-
natively, RS1 can be 910 ohms and on addi-
tional lK resistor conneded betwoon terminal
NEGATIVE FEEDBACK-Conventlonal transis- 2 and ground.-Microlin Amplifiers ZLD25 and
tor amplifler circuit shown uses negative ZLD2T, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., Eng·
foeifback by R5 to Increase Input impedance, land, No. 11, 1967.
but doos not glvo high voltage gain, Artlclo
gives design equations and tolls how to add
positive feedback for higher gain.-G. P.
Klein, Combined Feedback Builds Gain and
Input Impedance, Electronlcs, Od. 16, 1967,
p 99.
+6V
IS-MHZ TUNED R-F IC-Designed for use in
military rocoiver covering frequency range of v,,,
2 to 30 MHr. Deliberate mismatching givos
ltablllty. Total gain is 20 dB, bandwidth is
315 kHz, noise flguro at full gain 7.4 dB, and
powor dissipation is only 1.8 mW. Uses
CA3018 four-transistor IC.-"Llnoar Integrated 5.lkQ
Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 312. INVERTING A-C OR D-C AMPUFIER-Uses
3 T1 Ferranti ZLD2 IC differential-Input d-c am-
pllfler conneded to give gain of IO with nega•
tlvo foodback. Values shown glvo band·
5
width of 1.5 MHr.-Microlin Ampllflers ZLD25
and ZLD2T, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes.,
England, No. 11, 1967.
•ISV
LDW•FR[Q. f'\f\1\J
'"""
INPUT
lllPCOANCC
IMA
Yu, ~-.....-G_..4"1
.01
•'
VOLTAGE GAIN' 0.1
L=0.8µH
Qo = 200
L=0.8 µH
Qo= 200 SOURCE-FOLLOWER FET-Clrcult Is analogous
T,.,.= 6T Ta-o= 6T to tube cathode-follower or transistor emlt-
=
T1-2 lT T1-2 = 4T tor-followor. Gives high Input Impedance,
Tc-a=2T T..,.=lT relatively low output Impedance, and voltage
gain close to unity. Frequency response is
#22 wire on Q-2 material, CFI07 Toroid from Indiana flat to 1 MHz.-J, H. Wujek, Jr. and M. E.
General. McGee, Fiold-Effed Transistor Circuits, Elec-
Cs. Ct = Arco 425 or equiv. tronics World, May 1967, p 32-33 and 75.
II-MHZ 3-W AMPLIFIER-Uses pair of BFY50 +12V

transistors connected in parallel common•
L2
emitter configuration. Powar gain is 8.9 dB, RFC
oftlcioncy is 61 %, and both input and output
impedances are 50 ohms.-Applications of tho
C?
BFY50, BFY51, and BFYS2, Philips, Pub. Dept., TA2
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, 200pF ll
No. 428, 1965.
C2
60pF
ce 1·6µH -<fI
60pF
Cll
900
pF
Cl C4 c:. C9 CIO
1eo 2·28 2·18 60 70 100 60
p .. l'H l'H pF pF PF pF
RI C6
100 001
n
""
KoO·:>
IOK
IOK
-12v
47Kl'o 00 47Kl,o
-tl2V~-12V
.~
INVERTING AMPLIFIER WITH ADJUSTABLE INVERTING AMPLIFIER WITH ADJUSTABLE
INPUT BIAS-Provides 9aln of 10 and band· OUTPUT BIAS-Provides gain of 10 and band•
width of 1.5 MHz for either a•c or d~ Inputs, width of 1.5 MHz for either a-c or d-c inputs,
with adjustable bias voltage applied to Input with adjustable bias voltage applied to out-
for correcting offset voltago of amplifier, put for correcting offset voltage of amplifier,
which may typically be about 20 mV.-Mlcro- which may typically be about 20 mV.-Micro-
lin Amplifiers ZLD25 and ZLD2T, Ferranti lin Amplifiers ZLD2S and ZLD2T, Ferranti ltd.,
ltd., Oldham, lanes., England, No. 11, 1967. Oldhom, lanes., England, No. 11, 1967.
+6V
LONG LONG-TAIL PAIR-Drift is less than 75

p.V per deg C referred to input, and differential
mode voltage gain is 30. Addition of third DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUT-Conventional dlffor-
tran1l1tar to differential pair Improves com• ontlal-palr shown is often used as output Hner diode or largo bypa11 capacitor.-$. G.
mon-mode reJection while requiring only stage of ampliflor oven though only one out- Freshour, Differential Ampllller Offen Eftlclont,
extra -6 V source.-Dlfforontlal Ampllflor, put phase is used. Q4 maintains gain at Dual Outputs, Electronic Design, July 19, 1965,
Electronic Do1J9n, Fob. 3, 1964, p 44. frequonclo1 down to d-c without resorting to p 37-38.
NK IK.n.
. , . _ - - - - - 0 OUTPUT
Till
ZTXJOO
R4
TRI
180A
INPUT
ZTXlOO
o--------_.,________..._____-uo
WIDEBAND CURRENT AMPLIFIER-Bandwidth givos dosign procedure. R4 determines cur- of 20 and bandwidth of 6.5 MHz.-E·Une Tran•
Is over 6 MHz, input impodanco about 15 rent gain; I.BK gives gain of 10 and band- slstor Applications, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham,
ohms, and output impodanco I K. Report width of 9 MHz, whilo 3.6K gives curront gain Lones., England, 1969, p 29.
-10v
40k
14V
r-------,
MEM 551
~ O-r--"llllK--1
I I
I
I GENERAL 51 CL :
INSTRUMENT! 000 I
pl I
I
I I
I I
L._:. ____ J
- - - - DlllYER:------LOAD-
Dt CABLE-DRIVING PULSE AMPLIFIER-Upper

transistor is turned on by pulse to drive 50-
ohm line, and lower transistor turns on at end
IOv of pulse to discharge line capacitance, to
BUFFER-Dual mosfet coupled to complamen• improve waveshape and permit driving of
tary transistor pair has excellent thormal sta• longer lines. Area enclosed In dashed lines
blllty and almost infinite Impedance, for simulates worst-case llne load situation.
0
Isolating hlgh·lmpodanco circuits. Maximum With 2N2927 pnp, 14-V pulse decays in 75
input current drawn is lass than 0.1 pA.-T. ns; if 2N1132 is usod Instead, decay is II 0
H. Lynch, MOS FET Amplifier Provldos Almost ns.-Cable Driver Ampliflar, Eledronlc Design,
Infinite Impedance, Elodronics, July 24, 1967, Fob. 3, 1964, p 44.
p 88.
POWER·FET FRONT END-Covers 0.5 to 40

MHz. Broadband noise figure Is below 3
dB, with sufllclont dynamic range to handle
signals above 2 V with little distortion. Re-
ceiver sensitivity and selectivity are slgnlfl·
cantly bottor lhan that achieved with bipolar .022
dovlcas.-J. Tamosaitis, Tho Power FET, Eloc:•
troni~ World, Juno 1969, p 34-35 and 82.
+20V
+vee THREE-STAGE CASCADED IC-Symmetrical Vee l+l

cascading of throe IC video amplifiers gives
stable gain of 65 dB with minimum supply
docoupling. Operates equally well from I 0.01,.F
eithor 4.5-V or 6-V supplies, oxcept for larger

output swing capability with higher voltage.
O.OOl11F 1-i
WIDEBAND CONTROL AMPLIFIER-Voltogo

gain is 44 dB at 1 kHz. Highly ofllciont as
power ampliflor in control systems requiring
a-c ampliflcation.-"llnoar lntogratod Cir•
cuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 274. With 0.02-µF coupiing capacitors, response is
flat within 1 dB from 0.02 to about 5 MHz.
With lOO·pF coupling, gain drops to 60 dB
maximum at 3 MHz, and l·dB-down band·
width Is only about 2 MHz.-"linear Inte-
1000,F' grated Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41,
°V;;-1----- p 145.
ISvOe
AT ISmA
101( 470K
IW
82
voe
HIGH-IMPEDANCE NONINVERTING A·C AM·

PLIFIER-Arrangoment of rosistors used with I0011F
Ferranti ZLD2 IC differential-input d-c ampll· 10 v - 2vp-p
flor glvos high Input impodanco (400,000 (MAX
UNOISTORTEOI
ahms), because foodback Is applied to both
inputs. Voltage gain is 30. Gives reason·
14VOC
ably good low·frequoncy response without D-C TO 100 KHZ-Delivers 2 V p-p for input
requiring largo-value capacitors; gain is 3 dB of 0.1 V p-p at 1 kHz, and covers entire fre- "Linear Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
down at 240 Hz and 440 kHz.-Microlin Am· quency range from 100 kHz down to d-c.- N.J., IC-41, p 276.
pliflors ZLD2S and ZLD2T, Ferranti Ltd., Old·
ham, lanes., England, Na. 11, 1967,
C2
IOOpl'
TR2
Tl TRI
30·MHZ 3·W AMPLIFIER-Provides power gain

C8 CIO cu of 7 dB and 48% efficiency with BFY50 tran•
60 50
Cl C4 C5 ~~o sisters. Input and output lmpodancos aro 50
f~-------'
250 tOO 700 pF
pl' pl' pF' ohms.-Appllcatlons of tho BFY50, BFY51, and
BFY52, Phillps, Pub. Dopf., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
haven, Tho Nothorlands, No. 428, 1965.
""
K•0·5
LI
RFC
•24Y
R2
r--'\/\,\,---
Z.ZMA 1 33k'1 :
T2
I
.OOIJ'F I
IN~i"""'~--~G--~
---11--..-------OOUT
---•z-
.... Al
l•
\'01.T&OC: O&ltf I "'.•• "'
- -
"""'
I
FET WITH TRANSISTOR-Gives very high In· I I
put impodance and low output Impedance. I R3 I
- - -"\,/\,11o,r--
Voltage gain can be made groater than unity 33 kQ
by Inserting resistor R2 In feedbaclc path.
Bandwidth docreases as Impedance of driving LOW-LEVEL CLASS B-Usos RCA CA3018 tran- feedback. Tl is ADC Products 5SX1322, and
source lncroasos.-J. H. WuJolc, Jr., and M. E. sistor array to give maximum output power T2 is Chicago Standard TA·10. R1 Is re-
McGoe, Field·Effoct Transistor Circuits, Efec• of 40 mW ancl total idling current that varies moved when R2 and R3 aro aclcled.-"Llnoar
Ironies Worlrl, May 1967, p 32-33 and 75. only from 0.5 to 0.6 mA over entire military Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC·
temperoture range. Uses both a-c and d-c 41, p 315.
O Z.,•SOll
LINE DRIVER-Uses Motorola IC amplifler
providing 70 dB current gain, with unity volt•
RI" - !Z., • 10111 age gain, as either digital or analog drivor for
SO.ohm line.-Power Booster MC1438R, Mo·
torola, Phoenix, Ariz., ADl-14R1, -1969.
•Sv
3.1611 l.78k 3.16k 1.78k
Rr
147
INPUT OUTPUT
147
31.6k 31.6k
C2 0.2pf
-Sv
2o.MHZ BANDWIDTH-Two IC r-f ampllflen shown. Bandwidth is 20 MHz, and delay clip symmetrically and lnsuro fast racovery.-
are combined to form stable, rollablo wlclo• tlmo is 20 ns. Clamp diodes D1 and D2 aro C. J. Ulrick, Differential Amplifier Uses Two
band differential ampllflor. Gain, dotermlnod required if amplifier is overloaded by large IC's, Efoctronlcs, Nov. 11, 1968, p 120-121.
by ratio of RF to RIN, Is 100 for values dlfforentlal Inputs. Diodes cause output to
+ 28v +6Vdc
8000
OHMS 18-
1!50
pF
V1N
Rs•
500HMS
- =
NOTES: o, Adjust lor • 18 v ot Point ''A".

b. All ro1iuon t $% toloranec, 1/2 watt. -&Vdc
HIGH·Z INPUT-Use of p-channel diffused 10-MHZ NARROW-BAND-With tuned inpul

planar silicon fet gives input impedance of and tuned output, IC d-c amplifier provides
70 meg up to 100 Hz, 50 mes at I kHz, and narrow-band response, with gain dropping
10 me9 at 10 kHz. Intended for small-signal from about 30 dB down to O dB at about 1.2
applications. Voltaga gain is adjustable MHz off from center frequency in either di·
from 1 ta 20.-"Proferred Semicandudars and rection. Con be used in tuned amplitlers up
Campanenh," Texas Instruments, Dallas. to 30 MHz.-"Linear lntegraled Circuils," RCA,
Texas, CCIOl, 1968, p 6302. Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 128.
+12V
C·l +Vee
r·Rl
VIN
2515
lK
--FE-EcDB,_A_C_K-1
OUTPUT
R·C COUPLING-Uses Mallory MICOIOI pre-
amp to provide voltage gains from 57 ta 53
dB. 3-dB bandwidlh exlends up to 700
kHz. Distortion is under 5 % for outputs up
to 1 V rms.-M. l. Doschler, Integrated Circuit
I C-1!"'
...,.
" GND Preamplitlors, Mallory, Indianapolis, Ind.,
APPN-2, 1968 .
IMPROVING SIGNAL TRANSFER-Complemen· INPUT

tary arrangement af amplitler transistors,
with each oparoting class A as bath amplitler
and collector load, improves efficiency and
reducas distortion. Each transistor serves as
colloctor impedance for the other. Delivers
0.5 W at 22 V to load.-M. J. Wright, Tron•
slstor Replaces Resistor and Improves Ampli·
2.Sk
tier, Efectroniu, Jan. 8, 1968, p 92. LOAD
..AlT r.
+f2v
cftL
47 OPTIONAL OFFSET
o.~ NULL
Os
03
OUTPUT
Oz 04 RL
ICL
o,
-=- -=-
MINIMUM MAXIMUM
50 250pf
Dz
1N752A
47
o.!µ1 l. 01t02
03-0,
U252 ISILICONIX)
NC260
HYBRID OUAD
-12v
FAST-SmUNG BUFFER-Simple transistor cir- Circuit is stoblo with moderate copocitivo from d-c to 40 MHs:.-D. Atlas, FET Buffer
cuit outperforms hl9h-speed fot opamps used loadin9 and will slow at up to 300 V por p.s. Boasts Hieh Spood and Performance, Efoctton·
In somplin9 circuits and onolo9 memories by Potentiometer can bo conneded to A and B ics, July 21, 1969, p B2-B3.
settlln9 to 0.1% of flnol value in 50 ns. to null the offset volta90. Bodo plot is flat
+sov +30V +SOY

+24V
1201<.n
68k
0
G ZFTl4
s
RG IMA O.OIJLI
INPUT I
8'21<.n 2·'2KA
ov - -
CONSTANT-CURRENT SOURCE-Q2 offers hi9h whoroos 2.5K r11lstor In ploco of Q2 would

FET SOURCE FOLLOWER-Uses voltogo divider impedance to ampllflor, and requiros only roqulro 4·mA p•p Input for same output.
to provido bias for 9ote. Input impedance bias curront to develop output volto9e. Proc• Maximum output power Is over 0.2 W at 22
ls 1 me9.-Fiold Effoct Transistors and Appli· tically all of colloctor-curront modulation of V.-M. J. Wri9ht, Transistor Replaces Resistor
cations, Ferranti ltd., Oldham, lanes., Eng- Ql is dolivorod to load; thus, collector cur- and Improves Ampliflor, Electronics, Jon. 8,
land, No, 22, 1965. rent of 2 mA p-p produces l·mA p•p in load, 1968, p 92.
14V
R4
••••
OUTPUT
.05.,,.
i:..u, )
:SO•V
TANK P·I'
CIRCUIT TWIN·T-Adjusting R3 in basic twin·T oscilla• ._._ _ _1111100_•._.
r---
tor for operation woll in quiescent active re-
gion 9ivos resonant amplifler peaking at 520
Hz, with Q of 15. Chief advantage Is re-
sponse only to fundamental, not harmonics.
-F. B. Maynard, Twin T's: Designs & Applica•
liens, Efoctronics World, Aug. 1968, p 35-37
and 64.
L __ _
INFINITE IMPEDANCE-Simple two-stage am·

plifler with both positive and negative feed·
+12V
back con servo either as Q multiplier or
infinite-Impedance ampliflor, by appropriate
adjustment of interstage feedback. Basi•
cally, this circuit is a negative-impedance con•
R1• R3
2.2M 680K
verter. Article gives design equations.-G.
INPUT a1 OUTPUT
Morosl, Negative Impedance Converter Doe1 2N2712
Double Duty, Electronics, July 24, 1967, p 87- ZERO de ZERO de
88.
01
IN211
r-------------.--------o+24V R2
IM
1201<A -12v
* SELECTED TO GIVE ZERO \IOL.TS AT THE BASE

D EMITIER·FOlLOWER WITHOUT OFFSET-D-c d-c and a-c applicatlons.-A. C. Caggiano,
c ZF"T 14 levels at input and output ore equal, with Modified Emitter Follower Has No Offset, EEE,
s offset eliminated by diode. Suitable for both Morch 1967, p 164.
RG IMA
1,..F
Cb ..------------------t-----------,.-------------Vcc+9Y
S'2KA '2·'2KA
l\t Rs
39K IOK
---'----------------.1--------~ov
BOOTSTRAPPED FET SOURCE FOLLOWER-
Beotstrappin9 Increases input Impedance to
5.5 mog as compared to 1 meg for convon-
tionol source follower using same resistor INPUT
values, for Improved performance stability.-
Field Effect Transistors and Applications, Fer· Rr
rantl Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, No. 22, IOK
1965.
Tl\1
ZTX30Z
e,.r
UNITY GAIN AT HIGH IMPEDANCE-Input

impedance is at least 1 me9 and bandwidth Rz
is above 1 MHz at 1 V rms output.-E-Llne 47K
Transistor Applications, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham,
Lanes., England, 1969, p 31.
.. +38V
1NlM93
10.W Hl·R-Quasi-complementary circuit uses + INllU

1N3754 diodes in Input of driver to compen• 2000
sate fer effect of high-temperature variations
of output transistors. Diodes shunting 1•
ohm resistors in output stage reduce losses
1 pF
!OV
I05av A.C. C.T.,AT aoo .. A D.C.

when operating at rated power, while resis•
tors provide degonoration for circuit stability.
Response Is flat within 1 dB from 15 to A.F.
IJIPUT
20,000 Hz.-R. D. Gold and J. C. Sondermeyer, A.r. OUTPUT (en.)
Designing Silicon-Transistor Hi-Fl Amplifiers,
Electronics World, Nov. 1966, p 47-SO and
~
80-81.
!O,,
ev
HOii.
...
r-------------------~
I lk0
125~.--+--{~9,..--....--------...-..,.,.YM"""1,___;<,:>--~-~~~.;:~
10~ : TAA-293 3.5~n 3500 I
-.... I 6
820k I I 4
.n I
4 '--~--+-+~f---oouT
INo---)1"'+__._ ___.CM,_..I.
•OV
IOV i'° IC PREAMP-Uses Amperex TAA-293 into-
.47 10%
I , gratod circuit containing throe transistors and
3301l.
L--~- four resistors, priced under $3. Sl gives
0PT10NAL J 27k.I\ choice of threo types of equalization. To
<K'~! ~· Sl8 obtain higher gain for tape playback, add

125-µF capacitor across 560.ohm resistor used
'
~ 2 320 + '1 •1
in place of 680 ohms, and insert 180-ohm un-
6801 1500 bypassod series resistor as per dotted lino1.
-r- .I\ 2 5
V I SWITCH POSITIONS
l. SIA
-----___
l __ ....__ ___._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
---- _ J l·MICROPHONEIKIZ)
2-TAPE KEAO
3-MAG. PHONO
Output is 0.5 V.-D. R. Pryce, lntogratod Cir-
cuit Equalized Preamplifier, Electronics World,
July 1968, p 29 and 73 •
..---..----o+l2V
R7
22
.047 200/'F
l'-F
INPUT
•
MOVIE SOUND PICKUP-Silicon photocoll and
singlo-transistor amplifier give e1sentially flat
1·W IC AMPLIFIER-Uses GE PA-237 mono- is 1% at 1 lcHz.-Dwlght V. Jones, Mono- frequency response from d-c to woll above
llthlc integrated circuit with external compo- lithic 2 Watt Integrated Amplifier-Charac- 20,000 Hz for sound-on-film track of movie
nents shown. Can drive 8-ohm spealcor di- teristics and Applications, Gonerol Electric, projector.-Sillcon Photocoll Applications, Fer-
rectly. With 22-V supply, will deliver 1.5 Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.73, 1968, p JO, ranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, No. 9,
W into 22-ohm lood. Total harmonic distortion 5167, p 16.
AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 25
IC HEARING AID-Uses TAA370 IC developed

_
(MONOLITHIC I. C.
~T.!!!,N~A~EJ~.,L!!iE,!! __ _
Rpr
l<L., _ _ - -
Rl3
-
1 101
8
especially for body and behind-the-ear hear-
ing aids. Heavy negative feedback keeps Cl Z•300.n
T2.5UFI R•IOO.n
spread in gain very small for battery aging
and other factors. Output power is 1 mW. ":' I
Frequency response is determined largely by I
values of C2, CS, and C6; for those shown,
response is flat within 3 dB from 200 Hz to I
above 9,000 Hz. R10 is 1.SK.-The Amperex 91
I
TAA 370 as a Hearing Aid Amplifler, Am· I _____.JI
perex, Slatersville, R.I., 5-139, 1968.
L--- 5
C2 Rll
0.47UF 120K
C6
22K
RIO PF
IK5
INTEllNAL +ISYAT=zo.. A
~"------, +IV
I -~-,'AT .. eu t•A
125111'
IOY
CT.r-------, TAA•ZIJ
--------'
I +
t0011F
IOY
.4.-~-71 tkA
J±.125111'
[_..J!~!!!_J + lOOpl'
IOY
......
IOY
C4
t
!°1~F
IOOSTEll AMP. I
BOOSTER AMP. Z
R7 DECOUPLER-Used to prevent feedback and
22
crosstalk problems whon two preamps, with
or without booster amplifiers, aro used in
.0 47 1d2 stereo system having Amperex TAA-293 IC
p.F LOAD
0 in each channel. Only power supply con•
nections for IC's are shown here.-D. R. Pryce,
INPUT Integrated Circuit Equalized Preamplifier,
Electronics World, July 1968, p 29 and 73.
2-W IC AMPLIFIER-Uses GE PA-237 inte-

grated circuit for driving 16-ohm load that
is returned to ground. Total harmonic dis-
tortion is 1 % at 1 kHz.-Dwight V. Jones,
Monolithic 2 Wan Integrated Amplifler-
Characteristics and Applications, General
Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.73, 1968, p 11.
8.2
MEG
2·W IC WITH 2-MEG INPUT-Usos GE PA·237 750K

integrated circuit with additional transistor
at input to givo input impedance between 2 INPUT
and 3 meg.-Dwight V. Jones, Monolithic 2
Watt Integrated Amplifier-Characteristics and
Applications, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 90.73, 1968, p 13.
+Vee
0.1,.F -1
) I
l I
I
I I
L-...l)
HIGH-IMPEDANCE SPEAKER
-
Rulstor
SupplJ ldll~I between Power Total
Voltace Carr eat T111111laals Oatplrt HlnDHlc
Vee 1•• I 111d 11 Poat Distortion
(V) (mA) (ohms) (mW) (%}
3 10 220 50 2.0
6 21 lGOO 200 2.0
9 24 ~ 400 2.5 2-W AUDIO IC-G-E monolithic ompliRer hos
LOW-DISTORTION IC AMPUFIER-Tablo givos quasi-complementary OutPUt circuit, shown
optimum value of resistor R, connectod b.,.. Inside dashed square, to give pu1h-pull output.
Input is difforential ampliRer.-D. V. Jones,
tween wideband IC ampllRer terminals 8 ond
Audio-Frequency lntogratod Circuits, Electron•
11, for minimizing totol harmonic distortion.
lcs World, July 1968, p 54-56.
-"linear Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., lc-41, p 270.
125UF
r 1-W IC AUDIO AMP-Gives high gain ond

low current consumption for portable radios,
r
2.SUF phonographs, TV sots, tape cassette systems,
and wolki.,..talkies. Usos Amperex TAA300
IC. Froquency response is down 3 dB ot
120 and 23,000 Hz with feedback. Seloct
EIN R-odl for 8-mA no-signal total current drain.
-The Amperex TAA 300 Monolithic Integrated
Circuits Usod as a Complete Audio AmpllRer,
0.56 UF Amporox, Slatorsvillo, R.I., S-138, 1968.
4U\
Ru
0.5-W AMPLIRER-Serves os contor of lnex• c,

penslvo mono hi-R system. Uses oxternol 9·
V supply for power, ond a m/f m tuner or
0 0
ceramic cartridge phonograph os program 9-VOLT

sourco feodlng Into 32-ohm speaker. Article +
gives construction details. Ports values ore:
RI 2.5 mog; R2 270; R3 lOK boss pot; R4
200K; RS, R9 10K; R6·R7·R8 100K; R10 22K; R.
Rll 1.2K; Cl 75 µµf; C2 0.1 pf; C3 0.02 µF;
C4 15 µF; CS 0.01 PF; C6 0.05 pf; QI HEP·
253; Q2 HEP254; Q3 HEP230.-"Solld Stato
Projects Manual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1968, p 37.
AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 2'7
•tv
RI
47K
Cl +
2uF
+C7
IOllF
IC AUDIO OUTPUT-Dollvon up to 1 W, either

"' to center-tapped 1poakor or to output trans-
former and ordinary speaker as shown.
Some Integrated circuit can also drive higher•
power audio amplifiers. Power gain 11 58
d8.-D. E. Lancaster, Audio Integrated Cir•
cults-What's Available?, Efedronlc1 World,
Oct. 1967, p 34-36.
47K
iiEffi
OPAMP PREAMP-Input transformer for micro-
phone provides voltage stop-up for Madel 425
d-c opamp. Serves to reduce overall noise,
because total noise becomes equal to noise of
3 CONDUCTOR CABLE transformer plus noise of IC, dlvldod by trans-
TEXRM INAL SH-• :S SEPARATE SHIELDED CONDUCTORS former gain. low froquoncy cutoff Is 10 Hz.
0
80 1 ·~.... (BELDEN #B7:s3 OR EQUIV)

-----1 .nH·-----H----_, Output level of IC 11 +22 dBm and overall
gain is 1,000 (60 dB). May also be used as
OUT I tape proamp.-B. J. losmandy, Operational
IN IN Ampliflor Applications for Audio Systoms, Op-
omp labs, Los Angelos, Cal., 1968.
GNO GNO
SIG SIG
TO~:.:.~
1j
10 _ _ _ _.._
_____ .. I
I
I
[
TBI
BELDEN •&448 L--------.J
HANDSET ASSEMBLY 2
TBI
L.-----
BELDEN #8448
!OR EQUIV) INPUT
IOltEQUIVI SHOWN IN "OFF HOOK"
CONDITION CONOITION &CONDUCTOR
BCOHDUCTOR
PLASTIC .IACKETEO PLASTIC JACKETED o-1
INTERCOM CABLE @-DYNAMIC MICROPHONE INSTALLED IN HANDSET INTERCOM CABLE
(SEE TEXT)
@-STANDARD HAHDSET RECEIVER
'!'WO-STATION INTERCOM WITH PRIVACY- Cost of parts for two stations is about $50.
Has no on-off or talk ll1ten switches yot
0 Any equivalent transistor can bo used, such as A360
neither party can listen In on room conver· 2N697, 2N3705, SK3020, GE21, or HEP54.
1atlon1 at other station when handsot at ono Article tells whore to buy handset, cradlo, and
station 11 huna up. Whon onct party picks dynamic microphone to bo used in place of 12-V OUTPUT STAGE-Provides medium power
up handSctt, bctep tone at othor station calls handset transmittor cartridge in each of the for audio applications. Converter and In-
other party. Whon that handset 11 plckod ldontical stations or torminals.-E. A. Moni1, verter applications 'far 40250 are given in
up, tone stops and normal two-way convctraa- Phonecom-The Hot Line Intercom, Elementary RCA Application Noto SMA-35.-Ampliflers
tlon can take place, with both parties talking Efocfronia, Mar.-Apr. 1970, p 35-40 and 99- and Converters, Elocfronlc DosJgn, March 15,
and listening just as with standard tolophone. 100. 1965, p 217.
30V
4500pld
4.7K
1sov
AUDIO
INPUT
10,.td
lK
S·W Hl·FI AMPLIFIER-Uses single mosfet in· circuit may be substituted if desirod.-C. R. Electronic Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach,
put stago, for which two-mosfet tone control Perkins, "Application of MOSm Devicos to Cal., 1968, p 8.
10-W COMPLEMENTARY AMPLIFIER-Uses

330k IOk
matched pair of pnp and npn Motorola Iran•
slstors to give hlgh..fldelity performance for
stereo and other C!Pplications.-D. E. Lancaster,
Plastic Power Transistors-Advantages and
Applications, Electronics World, Feb. 1968, p
50-52.
tell
LOAD
'3.9K
-+42V
IOOl'F J
50V
+20V OUTPUT
Cl
1
O.IJIF RCA
INPUTo--)1-~~~~r---:==-., 40406
Q2 20
ZN3392
18K 5W
Rz R17
RI
I.OM
RZ
ISEE TEXT) O.lj'F
2501'F
FET INPUT-Used when high audio voltage IOOK O.Oll'FI 4.7K 6V +
C&
gain is more Important than hi·fl quality. R6 C5 Re
Signal voltage gain Is 120, and frequency = -42V
responso Is down 2 dB at 30 Hz and 10,000
Hz. R2 Is botwoen 560 and 1,200 ohms, 10-
loctod to produce d-c stage current of 1 mA 70-W 20-HZ QUASI-COMPLEMENTARY-Devel- load. Zenor CRS is 1M1519.-"5illcon Power
at 20 V.-F. H. Tookor, High-Gain Audio Input oped for amplifying 20-Hz sine-wave input Circuih Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-S,
Stage, Electronics World, July 1969, p 77. and feeding 225-W poak power Into 8-obm p 100.
A5 + 30V
1~·~·
IOkA
R10
8:?.n
40V
Ru
82.0.
TR4
80131 C7
1601JF"
25V
All
R7 0·5.1\
Cg
470ll
1250;.iF
25)JF" :?Sv 25V
TR1
BCISB
TR2
BCl4B
C3 crBCIOB
400µF"
R3 25V
ICOk.!l. TR5
80132
i'"
R15
10.n IOtl.
sn
R4 R5 Cs Cs ca
22.n 470/l. 220nF lnF 47nF
tO.W Hl°FI AMPLIFIER-Response is flat within Complomontary pair of output transistors to ensure high quality without hum.-"Tran-
3 dB from 20 to 35,000 Hz for 2-W output. drives 8-ohm spealcer directly. Boole gives sistor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mullard Ltd.,
Distortion at rated output is less than O. t %. rocommondations for layout of components London, t969, p t02.
. -----------------------------~
Rs
I
I
r----- . .
I
I
I I
9-VOLT I
Cs + I I
+ I
+
I I
SPKR 1 I I SPKR2
I
[)J I
I .! Q]
le I
I
I I
s. I DI S2
I I
,c
I -' IL _____ J
L--------------------------~
TWo-sTATION INTERCOM-Can provide com- thereby incr11asln9 battery life. Article 9lve1 56; Rtt 0.47; Ct, C2 5 p.f; C3 25 P.F; C4, C5
munication over distance of too foot, using construction details. Both speakers are 45 tO µF; Qt HEP253; Q2 HEP254; Q3 HEP230.
9 to t2 V voltage source. Circuit drow1 ohms. Parts voluos are: Rt 100K; R2, R5, R6 -"Solid Stoto Projects Manual," Motorola,
power only when mn1a9e is beln9 sent, tOK; R3, R7 2K; R4 51; RS 1.SK; R9 100; RtO Phoenix, Ariz., t968, p 45-50.
+ 140VOLTS
AUDIO FOR PORTABLE COLOR TV-Uses low• T106
TRIADS-6X
cost high-voltage glassivated D40N power 3.9K !1000/3.2.A
transistor in class A common-emitter output ,.-----<p-----"'""Nt-----....----, ..
.47
stage having direct coupUng to common· 200V
omittor driver. Maximum power output at
400 Hz is 2 W. At I W, distortion is about
T'='
12K
2W
.OO!I
IKV
10%.-E. l. Haas and D. V. Jonos, Portable
TV Sound System, General Eledric, Syracuse, 2N3859 D40N 133V
N.Y., No. 90.7~, 1969. 2N3393
.22
o----j.-- A14C or IN!1060
TO
VOLUME
CONTROL
+to 250 VOLTS
21.&mA 300
t----r-Nt.----.......-----0 +8.5 VOLTS
27K for l.F. SUPPLY
+ VOLTAGE
IOK 180 390 100
TYPE
2N2148
4-W IC.TRANSISTOR-Wideband IC Is hore

used with driver transformer, power transistor,
and output transformor to deliver full rated
ARGONNE
TYPE 163 power to speaker for 18·mV audio input.-
OR EQUIV ''linear Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., IC-41, p 274.
+llOVDC
80-W POWER AMPLIFIER-Uses high-voltage
high-powor audio transistors in half-bridge
push-pull output to drive 8-ohm load directly
from balanced 50.Y d-c supply. Response is
flat within 1 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz at 1 W
and 20 W output. For 50 W por channel, d-c
supply can be reduced to 35 V and bias re-
sistor changed from 750 to 550 ohms.-160
Watt Storeo Audio Power Amplifier Design,
Delco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., No. 35, 1968.
IOOOi<f
.___________...,_...____..._-+------e-----1lVDC ..._______...____-+------0+50
VDC
I OflLY ONE CHANNEL 5"0WN I

*SELECT FOR 2.:S 1'02.!IVAT Tpl 471< IS TYPICAL
+14.4\1
14V I.SK 4 W WITH COMPLEMENTARY OUTPUT TRAN·
SISTORS-Total harmonic distortion Is 1,6%
for 3.2-ohm load, and slightly higher for 4·
ohm load. Drivor transistor requires mount•
Ing on metal surface.-Dwight V. Jones,
Siiicon Power Transistor Amplifior Circuits with
High Performance at Low Cost, General Eloc·
tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.79, 1969.
+
1001£F
IOOK
- 15V
NOTE:
R1.. o;Av=420X USING
R1"180;Ay"9X 042C3
AND
R1 D43C3
180 3.2n
Po"4W
4n
.1 p. F
LOAD
o-~~~ ...~~~~~~~~-...i~~~~...~~-oPom3W
+ 12 voe 1100ma
R3 0.47fl
6°W IC WITHOUT A·C FEEDBACK-Provides

high gain, with distortion still loss than 10%
at full power. Foeds 10-ohm ;peaker. Used Av • Av cpm l00p
in auto radios, tape players, and mobilo i!IN • R1
power ampliflers. IC is Mallory MIC0201.-M.
L. Deschler, Integrated Circuit Audio Driver
Amplifier, Mallory, Indianapolis, Ind., APPN-1, L1
1968. T 35mlly
R1 R6
15k!l. 1·2kll
c,
r.2S!F
25V R2
68J<A
TRt
BCl48
or BCl08
C2
SI.IF'
<>--I
16V
10-W AUDIO AMP WITH ZOBEL NETWORK-

Output transistors ore protected from energy R3
IOOkll C5
stored in inductanco of speakor by Zobel net· 2000.iF
work RZ·CZ whoso values are chosen to mako 16V
speaker presont purely resistive load to Iran•
sistors. RI should be equal to equivalent re•
sistance of speakors, and CZ should be equal
to speakor inductance dividod by square of its
resistance. For 4-ohm spoaker with induct•
once of 200 µH, RI should bo 4 ohms and CZ
12.5 µF. Distortion is less than 3% and re·
sponse is flat within 3 dB from 40 to 20,000
Hz.-"Transistor Audio and Radio Circuits,"
0
Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, p 39.

+sov_
c, RiJ C7
5µ1' 3•9 32pl'
64V 1:!111._
kJl ____
40V _,
~21 C10
o.sn !250µ1' •
3\'I 40V
4-15.n
25·W HI-Fl AMPLIFIER-Developed for use as response is flat within 3 dB from 10 to

ono channel of stereo system. Matched out• tortion in crossover region (at low autput 30.000 Hz, and distortion at full output Is only
put transistors are driven by matched comple- power) Is very low. Rl Is preset for sym- 0.2%.-"Transistor Audio and Radio Circuits/'
mentary pair. Three diodes ensuro that dis· metrical clipping in output stage. Frequency Mullord Ltd., London, 1969, p 106.
Vccl9V)
Vee
+
vee
...
D
T1
RL
16
OHMS
ISTANCOR TA-IOI
~ 30-MW IC DRIVER-Audio input of 6.5 mV SINGLE-ENDED PUSH.PULL CLASS B-With

rms givos 30-mW audio output whon IC 2N2147 power transistors, EIA music power
a-f amplifier Is used as single-supply audio output rating is 45 W and powor gain 33
driver in capocitor-couplod amplifier. Noithor dB. Chlof drawback Is noed for driver trans-
a-c nor d-c foodback loops are used.-"linoar former. Values: Rl, R3 330; R2, R4 3.9; RS,
Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC- R6 0.27; Vee 22 V.-''Translstor Manual,"
41, p 135. RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC-13, p 192.
r-~-.-..1V'V"~~~~~~~-..~~~~~~..-~~~~~~~--0+3ov
+
4.7p.F
30V T 821( l250mAl
5·W AMPLIFIER WITH DARLINGTON OUTPUT

-Pre-drivor stoge increasos both sensitivity
ond Input lmpodance. Power Darlington In
output eliminates need for bootstrapping
2701< class A drive load resistor. At ratod output,
500,11F
totol harmonic distortion at 1 lcHz is 1.5%
20V
with 280-mV input signal.-Dwight V. Janos,
Silicon Powor Transistor AmpliRor Circuits with
High Performance at low Cost, General Eloc•
16.n..
-
Z1nlt1501< .l,11F'
LOAD
0-:.0
9VOLTS
01mfd
IOPTIONALI
VERSATILE FEY-Amplifies low-lovel audio sig· I I
"
nals ovor frequoncy range af 10 Hz to 30 lcHz.
Current drain Is only 200 to 400 µ.A. Typical
0-:\
goln is 200 to 400. Has high Input imped·
IMEG
ance and low output impodance.-''Tips on TO
Using FET's," HMA-33, Motorola Semicon- 22MEG
ductor Products Inc., Phoenix, Ariz., 1969.
270k0. Vee<& VI
!HV
BCl48
or BCIOB T1
q
220nF ISTANeOR TA-IOI
o-1--- 2000
OHMS RL
16
2·5V OHMS
=-
AMPLIFIER WITH HIGH VOLTAGE OUTPUT-

Voltage gain Is 20 dB and maximum output
voltage 10 V, with 45-V supply. Input Im· VEE (·6Vl
podanco Is 140K and output Impedance Is
200 ohms. Response is flat within 3 dB 300-MW IC DRIVER-IC a·f ampliRor is used stage, and about 100 mW for 6-V supply. If
from 20 to 20,000 Hz.-"Transistor Audio and as dual-supply audio driver in direct-coupled audio squelch is not desired, terminal 2 must
Radio Circuits," Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, audio ampliRer dolivoring 300 mW for audio be grounded.-"linoar Integrated Circuits,''
p 127. Input of 0.3 V rms with 30-V supply for output RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 133.
50-W POWER AMPLIFIER-Provides high per·

formanco at low cost for commercial homo +20V
entertainment systems. Can bo usod after
tone control or preamp stage providing 0.1
V signal. Bandwidth is flat within 1 dB from
20 ta 20,000 Hz at 5 W. Total harmonic
distortion is 2% at 1 kHz up to full output,
and Intermodulation distortion below 3% up
to 40 w.-50 Watt Audio Power AmpliOer Ot
Design, Delco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., No. 36, 2N
3391
1967.
2N3405 2A
02
10
2.2K
680pf
AUDIO BOOSTER-Single-transistor audio am·

pliflor operating from I .S·V alkaline cell can
be mounted In base of desk-stand microphone
for use as preamp, to give more modulation
for any transmitter and less hum pickup oven AUDIO
when using long microphone cable. Tl Is OUT
miniature audio transformer having I 00,000- AUDIO IN
ohm primary (for uso with high-impedance
mike) and I ,OOO-Ohm secondary. For low· ls1 (SEE TEXT)
impedance mike, omit Tl and connect directly INPUT
to Cl. Book gives construction dotails.-E. C2 .1e1
A. Morris, Modulation Booster, "Bench-Tested +LSV SHIELD
+ 10MF (GROUND)
Communications Projects," Hayden Book Co.,
N.Y., p 51-54.
• 12Vdc 1100mm
R2 R4
47K o.68n
Rz
3Sm~~ II
i!IN • Rl • 1.;:~ (Open Loopl
6-W IC WITH SHUNT A.C FEEDBACK-Uses
Mallory MIC0201 audio driver IC with mini-
mum n11mber of external components. Dis-
tortion is less than I% for outputs up to 3.5
7·W SINGLE-ENDED CLASS B-Two powor tran· W. Distortion lncreasos to 10% for outputs
sisters in single-ended output stage drive 2.5• above 6 W. Used In auto radios, tape play·
ohm speaker directly with full rated power ers, ond mobile power ompliflers.-M. L
for input of 14.2 mV to IC wideband ampli· Deschler, Integrated Circuit Audio Driver Am-
flor.-"Linoar Integrated Circuits," RCA, Har• plifler, Mallory, Indianapolis, Ind., APPN-1,
risen, N.J., IC-41, p 274. 1968.
/
•:i4V
C2
100 F'
C3
1000
µF
Al
IOkO
Ct
<,-+f-----·
"
1001JF OPTICAL SOUND HEAD-Wiii give oulput of
:•1k0 50 mW with optical modulation of only 50
'
.•.
:':v':
....·
lux from sound track on movie film. Maxi-
mum output is 3 W, and frequency rosponso
T extends from 15 to 6,000 Hz at 100 lux.
''
I Required Intensity through 0.08 X 0.01-inch
I
t
'--+------....L------___...______-<11_ _ _ _ _..__ _ _ _...., slot, for bandwidth of 6 Hz and full output,
can be obtained by focusing 1·W miniature
3-W UTILITY AMPLIFIER-Power gain is 38 other transistors are BFY51. Diode is OA200. lamp on slot.-Appllcations of Silicon Planar
dB, voltage gain 20 dB, and response is flat -Applications of the BFYSO, BFY51 and Phototranslstor BPX25, Phillps, Pub. Dept.,
within 3 dB from 15 Hz to 50,000 Hz. Wiii BFY52, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd· Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No.
drive loudspeaker directly. TR3 is BCY32 and hoven, The Netherlands, No. 428, 1965. 316, 1967.
:no
03
250128
Ilk
02
2SC401
A 2.2k
lul/12v +
+
THERMISTOR
-
50pf/12v
- 100,.uft12v
T
I
I
3.6k 0.02,,1
c I
I
I
IOk 4.3k I
-L.
B 4.7v 9v -=..
!>0,1.1f/12v J12
DIRECT-COUPLED OUTPUT-Diroct coupling In

Sony model 2R-27 a-m portable radio ellml· use complomentary-symmotry cascade con• from output stage through 3.6K resistor to
nates two coupling transformers and reduces nectlen, whllo output stago Is class B push· Q1 .-Ceramic Filters Edge Out Costly l·F
no-signal battery drain to 5.5 mA, thus In· pull complementary symmetry. High stability Transformers, Electronics, Nev. 14, 1966, p
creasing battery life 30%. First two stages is obtained by 100% d-c negative feedback 160-163.
R7 +18V
22 k, t.5% +
v 120<n
RS 12~
C3 82 k
220 pF
C2 + IOOpF
SUFI
2S v
6·2V
SO nF
33 k
91on
C1
-=
SO nF/50 V +
o-1 R9
1oon
INPUT R1 1·2kn
±.S%
l
220 k
RJ
-=
100 k
MICROPHONE AMPUFIER-Voltago gain Is ad·
justable botwoon 13 and 40 dB by varying
PREAMPLIFIER
':"
-= DRIVER OUTPUT
feedback with 10K pot. Distortion at maxi·
mum gain is 0.75% far 2-V output, Input
•use HEAT SINK CLIP ON 03.
dB at 40 Hz and well above 20 kHz. Book impedance is 120K, and output impedance is
5 W FOR 16 OHMS-Simplo and oconomical gives changes neodod for 10-W output.- 120 ohms.-"Transistor Audio and Radio Cir·
audio power ampliflor delivers ratod output "Somlconductor Power Circuits Handbook," cuits,'' Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, p 124.
for input of 0.1 V rms. Rosponse Is down 3 Motorola, Phoonlx, Ariz., 1968, p 5-34.
IOK
+ 150
Tl5V
-= .22
o----1
DHDSOO
.27Sl
IOOO
+
15V
3.2Sl LOAD
P0 a4W
(SW Max.)
Av 11 690 X (56 dB) WITH Rt= 15 '='

4-W HIGH-GAIN AMPLIF1ER-Additlon of com·
plomontary push-pull drivo stage to basic gives higher voltage gain and permits uso of Dwight V. Jones, Siiicon Power Transistor
complementary output transistor arrangement lower-cost transistors. Added sensitivity re- Ampliflor Circuits with High Performance at
permits class A drive stage to be operated at duces distortion. Total harmonic distortion at low Cost, Goneral Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
lowor current and power dissipation. This 1 kHz is 1.8% for 5.4-mV input signal.- No. 90.79, 1969.
t3V
micr
4-W CLA55-A AMPLIFIER WITH IC-Integrated

circuit provides 58 dB power gain in driving
transistor output stage through coupling trans-
1-MW HEARING AID-Three-transistor circuit sistor currents; avorago value is 350K.-A. M. former.-D. E. Lancaster, Audio Integrated
provides adequate power for conventional Aalbers and A. M. Paton, Tho Microminiature Circuits-What's Available?, Eloctrania World,
behind-the-ear hearing aid. Requires only Transistor BCl 12 Employed in a Direct Couplod Oct. 1967, p 34-36.
25K volume control, low enough to be roliablo Hearing Aid Amplifier with 1 mW Output,
as miniature pot. Input can range from 100 Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven,
µ.V ta 5 mV. Value of RF depends an tran- The Netherlands, No. 135, 1966.
SEISMIC AMPLIFIER-Can amplify faint

echoes of distant explosive charge without
being saturated by direct sound of under-
ground explosion used In geophysical pros- 5.6k
pecting. Gain Is about 25 for microvolt in- 220pf 1.5,if
~--
puts, and decreases automatically as Input 02 1-(-O-UT-P-UT-
inaoasos to millivolt levels. Only first
stage is shown; five stages give maximum 2N328 ~~COND
overall gain of 1,000,000 and Input dynamic .... AMPLIFIER
range of 60 dB from 1-µ.V minimum signal. Upv-1 mv) lpf
Third stage has manual level control that 820
adjusts gain without affecting frequency re-
sponso or dynamic rango.-G. S. lohston,
Audio Amplifier Adjusts Gain to Input levels,
Electronics, May 29, 1967, p 86-87.
A.F.
INPUT
.~":....
IOOpF +
50\1 -
6Y ~
+ 12Vdc 1100ma
A.F.
OUTPUT
(8fi)
RS 0.4711
01 2N442 °" Equi'v.
R4
O.&Bn RL o 101l
35J.~ II ~:..t---:.---,......,.=~o~o +42V(NO LOAD)

""F (NOTE 3)
. II COMMON
\."117------l~~--o-42\l(NO LOAD)
(NOTE 3)
6-W IC WITH SERIES-SHUNT A-C FEEDBACK-
NOTE I: ~2:co}"aer~~TC¥J.A~~M~~ACHEO TO HEAT "ii"
hput impedance is 1K but circuit retains high 2: AT l.5A O.C.; 62\1 C.T. FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
sensitivity (20 mV input for 2 W output) 3: 39\1 AT FULL LOAD
even with feadback from output transistor to
Mallory MIC0201 IC input. Distortion Is about 70-W Hl-Fl-Rosponse Is Rat within 1 dB from 100 C. Other circuit features contribute to
10% for 6 W but loss than 5% up to 4.5 W. 5 to 25,000 Hz. Diodes In driver stage are stability and reliability.-R. D. Gold and J. C.
-M. L Deschler, Integrated Circuit Audio thermally connected to output transistor hoat Sondermeyer, Designing Silicon-Transistor Hi-
Driver Amplifier, Mallory, Indianapolis, Ind., sinks, to maintain preset 20 mA of quiescent Fl Ampliflors, Electronics World, Nov. 1966, p
APPN-1, 1968. output current at case temperatures up to 47-50 and 80-Sl.
A.F.
OUTPUT
181\.I
5U\.
*PAI. IMP. I soon., c.T.

SEC.IMP.•BA
25-W PUBLIC ADDRESS-Transformor-couplod Is Rat within 3 dB from about 30 to 10,000

a-c/d-c dass-AB audio ampliflor provides out· Hz.-R. D. Gold and J. S. Sondermoyer, Do-
put impodanco ftoxibility. Drivers vso Dar· signing Silicon-Transistor Hi-Fi Ampliflors,
llngton arrangomont to output transistors. Electronics World, Nov. 1966, p 47-50 and
Input lmpodanco is 2,500 ohms. Response BD-81.
V9• 1.55V
r-~r-~~~~...-~-v+
Z•IKn
R•333n
0.11-MW IC HEARING AID-Usos TAA370 IC

driving 1,000-0hm oarpieco. Total curront
drain is 1.65 mA from 1.55·V silver oxide cell.
RlO Is 3.3K. Report gives performance
Rll 13•1.I MA
curves.-Tho Amporex TAA 370 as a Hearing 1201( Ve• l.55V
Aid Ampliflor, Amporox, Slatonvlllo, R.1., {
ITOT • l.65MA
5-139, 1968. C2
0.47 p.F RPRESET: TYP. 4Kfi
c&
22K
+24V
llOlt 5.llC
o,
2Nlll:S
Iii loul
10-HZ BANDWIDTH AT 400 HZ-Darlington

"" connection of Ql and Q2 is combined wilh
brldgod-T network to give bandpass ampli-
fier In audio range. Gain is over 30 dB.-
P. Fung, Audio Froquoncy Ampllflor Responds
ovor 10.Cps Bandwidth, "400 Ideas for
Design Selected from Elodronic Design," Hay·
don Book Co., N.Y .. 1964, p 21-22.
AtTDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 39
I.SK
IS6HSO
Hl11 hy OUTPUT
75
SW 100 W PER CHANNEL-Intermodulation dis-
.IS tortion Is bolow 0.3% at any power level,
::r:. and total harmonic distortion bolow 0.5%
from 20 to 20,000 Hz. Latching diode circuit
is used ahead of power stage to disconnect
it from driver when Instantaneous voltage
across output terminals Is greater than 15-V
supply voltage of driver. Power stage efll.
cloncy is 78%.-"Slllcon Power Translator
Handbook," Westinghouse, Youngwood, Pa~
p 6-17.
15·W QUASI-COMPLEMENTARY-Provides hi·

fl performance for mono or in pairs for
stereo, whllo requiring only npn transistors
in output stage. Fet serves os high-lnput-
impedance preamplifier.-D. E. Lancaster,
Plastic Power Transistors-Advantages and
Applications, Eledronics World, Feb. 1968, p
So-52. -r
Ill 8ZOft
+9V
r----,
I
I
I
I VSUPPLY
I
I
L.--..J
RCA-111113
130fiSP£AKER
OREOUIV
310·MW IC TRANSFORMERLESS-Can be usod

with most a•m and f·m dotedors, because full
power is developed for 45-mV input voltage.
Total harmonic distortion Is only 1%.-"Linear
Integrated Circuits,'' RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC·
41, p 272.
IOpF 15K
CLAS5-B COMPLEMENTARY·SYMMETRY POWER verse bias provided for OFF transistor by ON

AMPLIFIER-Book gives detallod dosign pro- transistor In complementary 1ymmotry.-"Sili·
cedure for overcoming bias dissipation. con Pawer Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison,
Storage affects aro reduced as result of re• N.J., SP-51, p 402.
SHIELD
R4 +12 v
2N3763
C1 4-W WIDEBAND AMPLIFIER-Bandwidth is 100
1 µF kHz and minimum pawar autput 2 W. Bota
10 v product of Q4-Q6 and Q5-Q7 complomontary
OUTPUT pairs should be matched to give low d-c offsot
INP~ r
at amplifler output and minimize distortion.
At 4-W output, response is flat within - 1 dB
I from 45 Hz to 100 kHz. Distortion limits are
I more than adoqucato for hl·fl applications,
I Ccan be used as d-c ampliflor with excellont
I stcabllity if C1 and C2 are shorted out.-"Soml-
I conductor Powor Circuits Handbook," Mota.
I
I 2N3735 rola, Phoonix, Ariz., 1968, p 5-30.
I
I
I -12 v
• 12v 300ma
RJ
0.68/lw
2N301 I 2N2869
l·W IC WITH OUTPUT TRANSFORMER-Trans•

former wcas solectod to provide correct Im• 11
pedance ratio and d·c resistanco required for
R2
biasing. Harmonic distortion Is 5% at 1 W IOOk 8!!
and much less at lower output. Input Im•
podanco is 1.1K.-M. L. Deschlor, Integrated
Circuit Audio Driver Amplifler, Mallory, lndi·
anapolis, Ind., APPN-1, 1968. TI Stanco• TA 11
+50V
.7A
R5
1500 47
ALL RESISTORS 112 WI

R6 DI, 02, 03, 04,
6800 02 33026JI
05, D6-IN4154'S
OR DHOBOO'S
C3 •
20,.f - 04
20.W PUSH.PULL CLASS AB-Uses capacitive 50V 01 (27CI)
coupling to load in plcace of output trans• 02 42C5
03
former. lntermodulcatlon distortion Is below 100 Rl3 C5
04 .27 1500,.f
1.5% at 20 W.-Dwight V. Jones, Silicon
Power Transistor Amplifier Circuits with High
Performance cat Low Cost, General Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.79, 1969.
25V
.-
50V a.n
LOAD
C2
R2
llOK 22pf
Cl RI
2.7K
o--?.j~---'VVlr-~...~~-4...,_+-~ 05
127Cll
20,.f 42C5
15V
R4
INPUT 15K Rl5
.27tl
Rl2
33K
15·W SILICON POWER-Quasi-complementary

1.5 kll circuit has flat rosponse within 0.5 dB from
10 to 50,000 Hz. Provldos rated output
power for 850omV input.-"Proforred Semi-
conductors and Components," Texas Instru-
2 k!l
ments, Dallas, Texas, CC101, 1968, p 1702A .
• IOOj,!f. 200
.
750j,!f,
2 kl! Ukll SOY
SOY kll
811
2711
1 Mil 47011 18kll 24011 750pf H>k!I 1N4003 1211
LS222 +25V
-
0-100
fl·c
SOUND-ON-FILM HEAD-Uses silicon photo•

voltaic sensor producing 26.7 p.A output at
0 Hz and 21.3 p.A at 20 kHz, boosted by
proamp to 1.8 V p-p at 20 Hz and 1.2 V p-p
al 10 kHz. Output is linear within 3 dB from
- 40 to 75 C.-Light Sensor and Preamplifler,
Electronic Design, Fob. 3, 1964, p 44.
Ve= l.3V
....~-11--~~~~~~...~~o+
MINIMUM-COMPONENT IC HEARING AID-
Usos TAA370 IC delivering 0.9 mW to 600-ohm
earpiece. Velumo control Is simplo rheostat.
Froquancy response is down 3 dB at 100 and Z=600.Q
20,000 Hz.-Tha Amparax TAA 370 as a R=200.Q
Hearing Aid Ampllfler, Amparox, Slatersvilla,
R.I., S-139, 1968.
I 3 =1.5MA
V9 :! l.3V
{
!TOT = 1.85MA
R PRESET = TYP 7K.Q
cs
22K
42 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS M:ANU AL
14V
CJ
R9
Q7
1W 2N3740
5111
C6
1 nF/50 V
RB
RJ 15U
811
, k 2W
LOAO
i5%
RIO
10 W FOR 8 OHMS-Dlroct-c:oupled class.a 1W
complementary-output amplill11r has loss than 5111
1 % distortion from 20 to 20,000 Hz, with
response no moro than 0.3 dB down over this R7
1.8 k
frequoncy range at l·W output lovol. Input L5%
impodance is about lOK.-"Somiconductor
Powor Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, 14 v
Ariz., T968, p 5-37.
"RBB - AS REQUIRED TD GIVE 15·30 MILLIAMPS QUIESCENT CURRENT IN Q7 AND QB.
rt r--------.....,..._-o• V9• 1.3V
- 2.2ur
z• soo.n
R•2oon
Rll I3• l.5MA 0.9-MW IC HEARING AID-Uses TAA370 IC

1201( V9• 1.3V
{ driving 600-0hm earploco. Frequency re•
Iror• 1.&5MA spon10 is flat within 3 dB from 150 to 30,000
C2
0.47UF R PRESET : TYP TK.(1 Hz. RIO is 3.3K.-The Amperex TAA 370 as
C3
IUF a Hearing Aid Amplifier, Amporex, Slaters·
C6 villo, R.I., S-139, 1968.
RIO Rl2
3K3 22K 25K
~. r--.-----.... --0. V9• l.3V
- 2.2p.F
z•:soon
R•1oon
1.5-MW IC HEARING AID-Uses TAA370 IC

driving 300.ohm earpiece. Total battery RU l3•2.5MA
drain at 1.3 V Is 2.85 mA. Volume control 120K v8 •1.3 V
is conv11ntional continuous typo. Roport In· { Iror• 2.85 MA
cludes graphs showing how performance C2
0.47p.F RPRESET : TYP 4K.!l
varies with voltage and temperaturo.-Tho
Amporox TAA 370 as a Hoaring Aid Amplifier,
Amperex, Slatenville, R.I., 5·139, 1968. RIO C6
IK5 22K
lkll
o.---~-------------0 +1sv .---------a +22Y
AT ::.:10111A R2
15011
ISk.11. RI
INO--"NWN\-o 150k
RECOMMENDED
LOADll\_1~4n.ll.
ONE CHANNEL OF .J..
STEREO CARTRIDGE -r R5
ASTATIC..;.IT I.Ill
C2
.I
BOOSTER FOR PREAMP-Provides additional 7

18 dB of gain, or about 4 V output for input DARLINGTON IC AUDIO PREAMP-Rosponso
of 0.5 Y from preamp. Amperex AI04 tran· is flat within 2 dB from 40 to 12,000 Hz.
slstor may bo replaced by any silicon npn High Input Impedance malcas circuit Ideal for
typo with bota over 150.-D. R. Pryce, Inte- coramlc cartridges or microphones. Output
grated Circuit Equali1ed Preamplifier, E/ec· reference level Is 1.9 V.-D. V. Jones, Audlo-
rronlca World, July 1968, p 29 and 73. Froquency Integrated Circuits, Efocfron/cs
World, July 1968, p 54-56.
+12Vdc 650ma
R3 O.&an
+Vee
4.5·W IC WITHOUT A.C FEEDBACK-Uses OUTPUT
Mallory MIC0201 IC audio driver with output ...--<:>-I
+-}~- 2N1S30 or Equiv.
transistor. Input Impedance goos up to 18K
without a-c foodbaclc, In tradeoff for roducod R1 22K 10K
bandwidth of 30 to 10,000 Hz. Usod in low•
cost auto radios ond tape players.-M. L.
Doschler, Integrated Circuit Audio Driver Am-
r
RI 100
plifier, Mallory, Indianapolis, Ind., APPN·l,
1968.
R1
470
• c, 68kll.·150kJl
I-:- 6uF
I
........,-------...
__J
.05pF
=
470pF
(INPUT) :S
22kJl SPKR.
22A
CRI
tN673 V1N 470pF +
IOpF
IA.C. FEEOBACKI
SUPPLY 22V
+
MODULATED SERIES REGULATOR-With C2, R3,
R4, and 600oohm sourco added, basic series l·W IC OUTPUT-Delivers 1 W inta 22-ohm
regulator for d-c output of power supply be- load at 10% distortion, fom 55 to 15,000 Hz.
comes audio amplifier providing gain of 20, Can deliver up to 2 W but with lower fidelity,
with cutoff at 20 lcHz. Frequency response provided external hoatsinlclng Is added to
falls off below 1 lcHz bocauso of C2, but can heatslnlc tab on IC. External components
be oxtondod to d-c if C2 Is shorted, R3 is shown serve chiefly to prevent parasitic oscil·
mado larger, and larger modulating voltage lotion. ldoal for Intercoms and othor aver-
is used for base drlvo to 03.-R. L. Starliper age-fidelity appllcatlons.-D. E. Loncastor,
and R. D. Clement, Modulated DC Voltage Audio Integrated Circuits-What's Available?,
Regulator, EEE, Fob. 1970, p 114. Elee1ronlcs World, Od. 1967, p 34-36.
Rl3
... 2K2
~,....----•--o
Ve• l,511V
+
0.5-MW IC HEARING AID-Uses TAA370 IC

driving 1,000.0hm earploco, and circuit com·
All 13• 750UA
pononts giving froquoncy response that Is 120K V9•1.55V
down 3 dB at 200 and 8,000 Hz. R13 Is 2.2K { lyOT• IMA
and R10 is 1.5K.-The Amporex TAA 370 as C2
0.47UF RPRESET: TYP 5KQ
a Hearing Aid Amplifier, Amporox, Slatorsvillo, C3
R.I., S-139, 1968. IUF
RIO C6
22K Rl2
IK5 25K
+28V
AC INPUT
8 in 68K
O·IO MV
300 ·3000 CPS
o±i10,.t
INTERCOM REMOTE GAIN-Control signal of
0 to 25. V cl-c changes voltage gain of two•
4.7K 2.2K 470K IOK stage audio amplifler from 440 to 0. Control
is linear within 2% and distortion is negli·
gible.-P. Cooper, External Signal Controls
Audio Voltage Gain, Electronic Design, Aug.
31, 1964, p 48.
CONTROL 40K
INPUT,Oc
o·zs voe
•OV
80
R7
~ion
TR3
ACl28
J 6 4 C1 -CG
""32011F'
o--il R9 6·4V
10 200tl
)'F
16Y
I
'7nF TA4
AC127
TR,
ACl27
TA2
.:..c12a
VM
l·W IC AMPLIFIER-IC drives spoalcor directly,

l~kO
with minimum number of adclitlenal compo-
nents. Input may be from ceramic phona v,
piclcup or from clotedor In portablo radio.
Total battery drain Is 150 mA tust boforo
clipping, and 180 mA at full output with 10%
distortion.-A. M. Potors, TAA300 Integrated
1 W Class B A. F. Ampllflor, Phillps, Pub. l·W TRANSFORMERLESS AUDIO AMP-Fre- using minimum numbor of compononts.-
Dept., Elcomo Div., Elndhoven, Tho Nother• quency rosponso Is flat within 3 dB from 100 ''Translstor Audio and Radio Circuits.'' Mullard
lands, No. 136, 1969. to 20,000 Hz. Has good d-c stability whilo ltd., London, 1969, p 35.
A lJ'DIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 45
+14 Vee
l·W IC AMPLIFIER-Will amplify signals up ta

300 kHz. Total harmonic distortion from 20
C6 to 20,000 Hz for 1 W Into 16-ohm load, with
250 l'f voltage gain of 10, 11 typically 0.4%, and for
'!!.~1...
.1~ k 1~F
·--[>-- g
cs
+10~V
8°ohm speaker Is 1% at 1,000 Hz.-"Somlcon-
dudor Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola,
Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 5-28•
-=- 20 v 0.01 µF '1";.3 an SPI(
J2on-=-
NC
+ 12 voe GSOma
R3 0.68!1
4.5·W IC WfTH SHUNT FEEDBACK-U101 Mal-

01 2N 1530 or Equiv.
lory MIC0201 IC audio drlvor with powor
output transistor to doliver roted output at
10% distortion, for use In low-cost auto
radios, tapo players, and othor mobile equip-
R2 47K
mont. Response is 3 dB down from 30 to R4 un
20,000 Hz at 3 W output.-M. L. Deschler, lnte-
RL 10!1
gratod Circuit Audie Driver Amplifier, Mallory,
Indianapolis, Ind., APPN·I, 1968. L1 35mhy
•21 v
s2on
±. 5 % R2
C1
10.lµF
A14
01 02 1on12 w
02 MZ2361 MZ2360
M08001
L1 OUTPUT
2 µH. R ~ 0.05U
03 R15
r
1on12 w
l
MZ2360
:t5%
C3 C9
5o:~I
C4 T0.1µF
100µF
25 v
R3 A4
A7
6.8 k 470
2.7 k
±5% .t.5% R8
C2
A9
2.1 k ·27 v
6.Sk
±5%
35 W FOR 8 OHMS-Has Ion than 0.1 % put, with 3-dB bandwidth of 10 Hz to 100 load.fault prcitoctlon.-"Stmiconductor Power
total harmonic distortion and less than 0.2% kHz. Book giv" chang11 required In values Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
Intermodulation distortion at full power out• to boost output to 60 W. Diodes provide 1968, p 5-45.
-23V
R1
l.2K
50/'F
25V • Tl
AF
J
INPUT
II
AF R2
OUTPUT 2.2
8 OHMS 0.05
OUTPUT
Rs
IOK
VOl..UME l.2K .!
STABILIZING OUTPUT STAGE WITH BARRE-

25·W AMPLIFIER WITH CURRENT LIMITING-
TERS-Arranaomont shown is used in each R4
Dlodo biasing network establishes fixed cur•
channel of transistor stereo amplifler, with bar- 2.2
rent limit on driver and output transistors reters serving to stabilize operation and pro-
of quasl·complomontary amplifler.-"Sllicon
tect transistors. Barretor lamps 11 and 12
Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., are Tung-Sol CEIOI, whoso resistance in-
SP-51, p 409. .
creases oxponontlally with current from 0.2
ohm until burnout at about 1.5 A. Barreters
+23V
thus servo as fuses.-Uslng Barrotors for Sta·
bilizing an Output Stage, Elodronic Design,
Juno 8, 1964, p 68.
R6
1N4728
7!iOU
w 2 1son
r----l*----..------""""'W-.-------..-=-::c:-:::-----------------------0
2W
+2SV
5% +35 v
C3
510 Cl
~
7·W CLASS.I AMPLIFIER WITH IC-Low-cost
·Integrated circuit drives two-transistor slnglo- Q7
onded output stage through coupling trans- 5% 2N3790
fomor.-D. E. Lancaster, Audio Integrated R2
Circuits-What's Available?, Eledronics World, 10 k
i.5%
Oct. 1967, p 34-36.
•9V
c2 •Ree
R3
7!;00
so"FI
v
10
non
2W polor '='
5%
R13
200
IW
R10
1000
---11---- 5%
-35 v
._______________,,._________________________--o-25V
545-MW IC OUTPUT-With chango in output
transformer, wideband IC amplifler may bo
usod to drive II-ohm or 16-ohm spoakor. "RBS - AS REQUIRED TO GIVE 20·40 mA QUIESCENT CURRENT IN Q7 ANO as.
Input of 45 mV gives full power autput. De- 50 W FOR 8 OHMS-Low-cost 1 N4728 zoner at meet requirements for hi-fl applications.-
veloped for use with portable f-m radio.- collector of QI limits oppliod volta9e, allow- "Semiconductor Power Circuits Handbook,"
"Llnoar lnto9ratod c;ircuits," RCA, Harrison, Ina uso of low-coll plastlc-oncapsulatod Iran- Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 5-49.
N.J., lc-41, p 273. slstor. Frequency responso and distortion
50·W QUASI-COMPLEMENTARY-Ideal for

either monaural or stereo opplications. Fre-
r
quency response is flat within 1 dB from 15
Hz to 100 lcHz at rated output. Total har-
monic distortion Is less than 0.1 % at 1 lcHz up
to rated output, and intermodulation distor·
tion less than 0.2% at 60 Hz and 6 lcHz up to
rated output. Differential amplifier at input
keeps output at d·c ground by compensating
bias of output silicon powor transistors. Q4
is RCA 40409 and Q5 is RCA 40410.-Direct- QI 02
Coupled 50.Watt Audio Amplifler, Dolco
Radio, Kolcomo, Ind., No. 43, 1968. ci
INPUT o-1--t-1• OUTPUT
51ev I &IJ:v~TTS
Il
TOll!
l Alt
Z2
IW
..,.
':"
C2
500
25V l +
TRUE-COMPLEMENTARY·SYMMETRY AMPLIFIER
-Basic circuit can be used for nine different
audio ampliflen In power output range of 3
to 20 W. Frequency response Is flat well
beyond 20 kHz for each, with totol harmonic
distortion of 1 'l6. Operation approximates
that of true closs B amplifier. Book gives
TYPE
2N3391A parts values and supply voltages for each
rr·
INPUT R1 C1 combination of power output and transistor
complemont.-"Sllicon Power Circuits Manual,"
RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 411.
.,. I =s1K
•'
R17 ~ R2
100
.
22K:;
I
K
10 •
Re
I C3
..,i;.. 3V ;n.C..
=
4-W IC POWER AMPLIFIER-Uses Philips IC

driver to feed complementary output stage.
Both d-c and a-c feedbaclc are applied to
input differential amplifier in IC. Circuit in·
eludes stabilization against supply voltage
ftuctuations. Will operate with supply be-
tween 10 and 18 V.-Complomentary Output
Stages Driven By tho TAA435, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether• O.l11f'
lands, No. 18, 1968.
--~
V,
l
'"\,,
39~
_l L...---1--~--r--"'-
.
+46 V 1385 mA at 121/ZW)

Io•3.5mA
NOTE:
ALL RESISTORS 1/2 W
DI, D2;DHDSOO'a 12.S·W QUASI-COMPLEMENTARY PUSH-PULL
1
03, D41DHD805 s -Delivers full power to 16-ohm load for 1.1•
V input signal. Total harmonic distortion at
+c3 10 Wis less than 0.5% from 25 to 20,000 Hz.
_25µf
50V -Dwight V. Jones, Silicon Power Transistor
Amplifier Circuits with High Performance at
l&nLOAD Low Cost, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
90.79, 1969 .
.lµ.f
C6 560
C4,200µf
3V
Rt2.47k
z.z
200)1F' ...
+
OUTPUT STAGE BIAS COMPENSATION-Use 8pF
of compensating diode in typical push-pull
class-B transistor audio stage minimizes
crossover distortion caused by transistor mis--
match or by discontinuities at changeover
1200
point between half-cycles of amplifled wave-
form. Transistor types depend on power out-
put desired.-P. Halliday, Bias Compensation
for Transistor Output Stages, Electronics +
World, Aug. 1967, p 76-78. 25pf'
10,000
1000
2200
R4 +9V
100JI.
C2
25pF 15V ;;J;
C7
2SfF 1SV
0.15-W INTERCOM-May be used as intercom,
with second 35-ohm speaker used as micro-
CS phone at input. With suitable switching,
25 JJF 1SV speakers can bo Interchanged as required for
I talking or listonlng at each location. Report
gives design procedure.-E-Line Transistor Ap·
Tr1 plications, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., Eng•
ct 35A land, 1969, p 50.
ra-_1_... ZTX300
Loudspeaker
2SpF 15V
R2
33kA
ov
CHAPTER 4
Audio Control Circuits
.... 22v
3-W WITH BASS AND TREBLE CONTROLS-

Rl O cuts and boosts treble, while R13 con•
trols bass. Input transistor Is chosen to give
improvement in bass response and reduce
dlstortlon.-"Tronsistor Audio and Radio Cir-
cuits," Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, p 47.
C7
640liF'
Ci; 2,V
2!!0
pF
16V
8aH
COt'ltl'C.1
-
• "l'Pl)'
J1 OUTPUT TO
MODULATOR,
-f-~
RECORDER OR
'=' AMPLIFIER
(OPTIONAL! Cl, 4, 5, 8 -.002 mfd
~ TO CONTROLLED
Cl ·5 mfd
C3 • .15 mfd
C6 -.25 mfd
CIRCUIT lytic
1/2 Cl ·.02 mfd
VIB
6ANBA
1/2
6AN8A Rl ·SOOK
R2 ·1.3K
rr .
R3·110K
DI R4 -620K
RS ·750K pot
R6 -3.4 meg
R7 ·lSK
n5
D2
VI I_ cs
VOICE-CONTROLLED RELAY-Can be used to 6•3 V AC

turn on eledrical device at command of voice
150¥ DC
or start tape recorder whon sound is picked also serve as burglar alarm. Kl Is 1OK Pot·
up by microphono. If alarm is connected to tor & BrumRold PWSLS relay. Both dioclos Tu be Prolocts," Tab Books, Blue Rldgo Sum-
rolay, and RS adjustod for faint noise, can are 1N2071.-R. M. Brown, "104 Simple Ono- mit, Pa., 1969, p 71.
49
10k 8.25k 8.25k 8.2511 8.25k 8.25k 8.25k 8.25k 8.25k TRANSISTORS: NPN -2N2484
PNP-.2N4249
DIODES: 1N659
33k
CAL 20 40 60 80
6 OUTPUT
!Ok
-
c-w
c-w
- 30pf
-v 100k
+V
100k
OFFSET
--------v IOOk
SYNC
POLARITY
100k
-v Os
1N757
FAST-ACTING ATIENUATOR-Will shift level ing either channol to drive astable mvbr fol·
of audio signal In less than I 0 p.s, to give lowed by invertors Q4 and QS. Rote of Use of battery supply isolates circuit from
up to 80 dB of attenuation in audio ampli- astoble con be either 1.2 or 5 s per sample. line noise. Can be used to measure rosponso
fler. Incoming signal Is spilt between ladder Signal from fat goes lo opomp providing of age networlcs.-T. E. O'Brien, Automatic
attenuator and straight-through 6-dB loss net- voltage gain of 6 dB lo SO-Ohm load, Sync Attenuator Rapidly Changes Signal Level,
work. Dual fet acts as spst switch for seloct- output gives 16-V pulses with 10-µs rise limo. Electronics, Sept. 15, 1969, p 120.
3911
+ISV
.005
+14V
!19k
IOk
lpF
•1o---)
·rr·o
100
pF
_to~
llAX. "'ii"'
250k
IC TONE CONTROL-Uses Fairchild P.A709

or National LM709 IC opamp as unity-gain
Inverter when both pots are at mid-positions, TWO-INPUT MIXER-Input transistors use com·
At maximum positions, provides about 20 dB mon 12K collector load resistor. Input im·
of attenuation or boost at low and high fre- podance is 2.5 meg, output Is 70 ohms, volt-
quencies.-$. L Silver, IC Op Amps Boost age gain is unity, ond distortion is 0.5% for
Audio Circuit Performance, Electronics World, 2 V output.-''Transistor Audio and Radio Cir·
Sept. 1968, p 31>-32. cults,'' Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, p 126.
AUDIO OONTROL OIROUITS 51
PHONO TONE CONTROL-Provides separate

bass and treble controls for phonograph usin9
Treble
crystal or ceramic cartrld9e. Input mosfet R28
Q1 is connoded as sourco-followor amplifier 2M
providing extremely hl9h Input Impedance to
avoid loadin9 transducer.-C. R. Parkins, "Ap-
plication of MOSFET Devices to Electranlc Cir-
33K
cuits," Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968,
p 5.
&."W~1 lOM
1---+---I f---+OUTPUT
C20
2,.1
~
R30
R26 330K
47K
G
QZ
HEP50
:·1 C6
FOUR·INPUT AUDIO FET-High-quallty yet in.

RU expensive fet conneds four hl9h-lmpodanco
lK audio sources to single amplifier input.
Article gives construdion dotail1.-"Field Ef·
fact Transistor ProJects," Motorola, Phoenix,
Arb:., 1966, p 26-34.
r=- 12k
t~~BV
>
10·1!.V ,
Ry
8.2k
RX
8.2k
ti R1
6·2V 3,0k
BCl48 E coswt
or BCIOB
220nf"
l<5v 11111
~1._
MCl595L 2
3·4V
8
OFFSET ~
ADJUST
x 12 14
2!>0.i..f 3 7 13
4·7kn •·2kn
6.Bk
~l.OJ'f
To other ChCMet
-15Y -=
BALANCE CONTROL-When used in each DOUBLING 10 KHZ-Motorola monolithic rnul· distortion even without flltorln9. Will oper•
stereo channel, permits varying voltage gain tlplier 9ives second harmonic directly when ate well above 200 kH:r.-E. Renschler and
In both channels by 6 dB in opposite dircc• two equal cosine waves are applied to in· D. Weiss, Try tho Monolithic Multiplier as a
tions. Control potentiometer Is In feedback puts X and Y. A-c coupling removes d-c Venatilo A.C Design Tool, Eledranics, June
circuit.-"Translstor Audio and Radio Cir· term. Dynamic range of Input is 5 V p-p. 8, 1970, p 100-105.
cults," Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, p 129. Doubled output frequency has loss than 1 %
R3 Cz -4v
5,600 68JLf
-4v---"""~"""""""'---t L _
- l+ -L
Rz
5,600
OUTPUT
C1
68µ1
J_.---+--i) ------
-4v
-4v
78-DB RANGE-Whleband audio limiter, built agos. Limiting begins at 0.4 mV input. Distortion limiter Uses IC Operational Am.
around RCA IC opamp, delivers clean sino Can handle up ta 6 V p-p. Second harmonic plifior, Eledronics, October 14, 1968, p 120-
wavas below limiting threshold and sym• distortion is 0.3% ovor dynamic range of S4 121.
metrical square waves for higher input volt· dB, and 2% for 78 dB.-R. Gla19al, low·
Croutalk = -IODll (600.1'\. SourcHI +18V
68k0
lf'C)Ut
o-t1--1--<11--~~---- BCl48
or
IOOnF 8CI08
Output
20-C:HANNEL MIXER-Adivo mixer using
Modal 425 IC opamp connedad for unity gain
has no insertion loss, because negative input
summing point Is drivon to virtual zero. Up
to 20 Input channols may bo usod. Output
voltage across 600-0hm lead is 22 dBm.-B.
J. Losmandy, Oporatienal Amplifler Applica•
tion for Audio Systems, Opamp Labs, Los 10k0 -220nF IOk Cl
Angelos, Cal., 1968.
3,6.o. ISOkCl IOkCl 220nF IOkCl

9VO~TS~
~
- 6K
10µ1'"
ISOkCl
'J
OUTPUT
IOOkCl Output
C>-i
BCl48
or
acroe
68k0
FOUR-INPUT AUDIO IC-Output Is about 3 +rav

V p-p on input of 0.3 V p·p from low-level
mluophono or phono. Optional lOK pot SOUND SOURCE WIDTH CONTROL-Ganged unnecessary because sound impression falls
and capacitor can be added to oach input, as controls give effect of moving stereo sound apart and offed becomos that of two inde-
shown by dashed lines for input 3. Adjust 5K pickup microphones continuously between In· pendent sources rather than stereo. Chan·
pot for maximum undistorted output.-"Tlps phase crosstalk of 100% (corrosponding to nels are balanced with SK prosot pot.-"Tran•
on Using IC's," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., monophonic recording), and anti·phase cross- slstor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mullard Ltd.,
HMA-32, 1968. talk of 24%. Greator anti-phase crosstalk is London, 1969, p 134.
AUDIO CONTROL CIRCUITS 53
28V
UTC
Al9
J c;
0.01
TRIPLER FOR 400-HZ SOURCE-Simple pulser n

feeding tank network delivers equal-energy ACTIVE TONE CONTROL-Operates with fre-
pulses at triple-frequency rate to provide quency-dependent feedback network between
good t,200.Hz sine-wave output wilh no collector and base of tone-control transislor.
fundamental-frequency modulation. Values At 30 Hz, conlrol range is -22 dB to 19.5 dB,
of Rt, R2, Cl, C2, and C3 may bo chosen and at 20 Hz is -19 dB to 19.5 dB. Fre·
for any olhor slandard audio frequency. quency response 11 flat when bolh pots aro
Arlicle gives dolallod duscription of circuit cenlered.-''Translstor Audio and Radio Cir·
operation, along with design equations.-J. cults,'' Mullard ltd., London, 1969, p 131.
B. Messmer, Precise Froquency·Tripler Uses
400 CPS Standard Source, Electronic Design,
Nov. 22, 1965, p 61-62.
~-1----~··
IOdb"'I
v
20.DB AUDIO COMPRESSOR-Uses Model 4009
IC opamp in circuit having adjustable attack·
CR6 INPUT
time and release-time pots. For most appli- TERMINALS
cations, RA is sot for attack time between 10
p.s and perhaps 20 ms, while RR is set for
release times somewhere between 20 and 200
ms. FET is Inside electronic feedback path
and automatically adjusts gain of amplifier C 1C 2 I0 micro farads, 15 volts,
= R1 = potentiometer, 5000 ohms, 2
as function of output voltage. At low 1lg· electrolytic watts, linear taper
not levels, gain Is about 10.-B. J. Losmandy,
Operational Amplifier Applicalion for Audio
C3 = 0.1 microfarad, 25 volts or R2 Rt = 4700 ohms, 2 watts, 10%
Systems, Opamp Labs, Los Angeles, Cal., 1968. greater Ra 270ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
C. = 10 to 100 microfarads, 12 volts, Rt 470 ohms, I/2 watt, 10%
electrolytic, to increase release S, switch, 125 volts, 15 amperes,
time single-pole, single-throw toggle
CR, CR 2 CR3 CR. = silicon rectifier, SC R, SC R 2 silicon controlled
RCASK3030 rectifier, RCA
CR5 CRe "' silicon rectifier, type KD2100
IN34A
F1 fuse, 125 volts, ampere rating
I Ok
J 10011: +20DI
depends on load
01
IOkC I Cut= -20DI Q, transistor, RCA SK3005
TREBLE CONTROL-Uses Model 4009 IC opamp SOUND-OPERATED SWITCH-Will turn on load emitter and collector of Qt so switch does
to provide wide range of treble boost ond up to 1 kW for as long as sound or noise not open for momentary Interruptions in
cut, with turn-over frequency of about 800 signal fed to input by microphone and pre- sound such as between syllables of speech.
Hz for values shown.-B. J. losmandy, Opera· amp remains above prodetorminod level sot -"Hobby Circuits Manual/' RCA, Harrison,
tlonal Amplifier Applicalion for Audio Sys- by Rt. Release time can be increased by N.J., HM-90, p 164.
tems, Opamp Labs, Los Angelos, Cal., 1968. adding capacitor (up to 100 µF) between
Ccintr'Q-zoro
AAl19 m1Ztcir AA119
Loud!>Pllokor
c,
IOO)IF
RIAA EQUALIZATION-Uses Modol 425 IC
opamp in network giving standard equallza•
tion for LP records. Simpler network at right
will sorvo for 1011 critical applications. large
SPEAKER BALANCE METER-Value of R3 is two outputs In a stereo system. Capacitors
capacitor may be electrolytic because voltage
selected to suit current roting of iero-centor servo to damp motor movement.-"Transis-
across it is few millivolts as summing point
meter and output of amplifler; typical value Is tor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mullard ltd.,
of opomp is driven to virtual zoro.-B. J. los-
IOK for l·mA meter, Usod ta balance tho London, 1969, p 183.
mandy, Operational Amplifler Application for
Audio Systems, Opomp labs, Los Angeles,
Cal., 1968.
D<I"'
Z•
~
.jl'ftl
1Nl8A
...,
J"" --------v= -6Vto-24V
·"~""
18K
8.2K
4.7K :.
.1mf
500 IOK INPUT

• Z.$K AC or DC RI
SQ~LC"
8·14.Z..
t 1$•1'
8mf •
Cl
DETECTOR WITH SQUELCH-Circuit is designed
to replace conventional dotoctor of a•m re-
ceiver. Diode types ore not critical, but all
three should be the some. Noise limiting Is
achieved primarily with diode connected Attack time constant, A = R1CI
through capacitor to center of 2K pot. Decay time constant, O = R. 1c 2
Squelch threshold is set by 2.5K pot.-"Elec- AUDIO-ACTIVATED RELAY-Used to detect
tronlc Circuits Handbook," Vol. II, Cawon audio signals and energiz:o relay to feed spikes and othor high-frequency signals.
Pub. Corp., Port Washington, N.Y., 1966, p signals to telephone lino or tape recorder. Time for relay to drop out after audio signals
Input mosfot provides very high input impod· cease is doterminod by C2 and inductance of
38.
once, permitting use of high values for time relay. With I 00 p.f for C2, delay is 2 s.-
constant circuit Rt-Cl; typical values are 1 C. R. Perkins, "Application of MOSFET De-
mag and 0.01 µf, giving I-ms delay In ener• vices to Electronic Circuits," Hughes, Newport
gizing relay, to avoid triggering on nolso Beach, Col., 1968, p 36.
IOk
SIGNAi..
OUTPUT
SIGNAi.. RN8318D
INPUT 22K
R3
IOOk
To~ITO
10.47,11.F
._ __,,.,E]A079
7 '=' ANNUNCIATOR INDICATOR-Neon indicates
which of several remoto speakers in com•
VOLUME COMPRESSOR-Mosfet acts as vor- and with -10 V it is 300 ohms. Signal
munications system is active. Transformer is
lable resistance, changing from several hun• source providos required bias. Transformer
a-f output transformer wired backwards.-E.
drod ohms to several million ohms depondlng turns ratio should bo at least 20:1.-C. R.
Bauman, "Applications of Neon lamps and
on value of negativo voltage at Its goto ter• Porkins, Volume Compressor Needs No Powor
Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalite, Noptuno,
mlnol. With -3 V, resistance is above IOK, Supply, Eleclronic Do1lgn, Doc. 20, 1967, p 110.
N. J., p. 152.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use the index at tho back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
McGraw-Hill In 1968.
CHAPTER 5
Automatic Gain Control Circuits
INPUT r;-o:;------1
~ I
l R1 IOOk I OUTPUT
1,000:1 GAIN RANGE-Insulated.gate fol in· :150pF

creases controlled gain range to about 60
dB. Opamp Al is connected nonlnverting to
prevent loading of variable aHonuetor RI·
I .....__..... I
R2.Ql. Output is full•wave rectified by A2 L!~~~o~ ____ _J
and fed to A3 along wilh reforonco from 2K
output-level pot. A3 integrates sum and
applies It to Ql to complete feedback loop. r----------.,
ciamp circuit around A3 prevents saturation I IOk I
by zero or overload Input signals.-E. Guen· I IN918 I
thor, MOS·FET Provides 60-dB Dynamic Range
low-Frequency AGC Circuit, EEE, Nov. 1969, I 10• I
p 107. I &
IN918 I
I
I
I
LP!.~~N_R~!!_Fl!,R _____ J
A1• Az• A3 • BBRC MODEL 3057101
r------------...,
V ~
High Gain I
15
Integrator I
r---- -----------------, 10 K
I Precision Rectifier and Filter 10 !Jf Vz 'lflOV
/'
I ~-------------------''\h"-+----111----.
I
I 10 K 10 K
I
I
10 K
I
I Eo
I -15 Vdc
I
I 10 K
L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _J >"".,_.__ _r#\1..,..,.__,.,___-.it--_,
MULTIPLIER MODULE FOR AGC-Burr-Brown while phase angle is varied by filtering. De- gain. Rate af rostabilization of loop after
4029/25 quarter-square multiplier-divider Is signed for froquency range of 10-500 Hz. sudden change In Input lovol depends on
combined with amplifler modulo to give stable, Amplitude of output signal is converted to time constant of Integrator and rectitler-flltor.
reliable, and accurate age loop for such mili• d-c ond compared with reference voltage to -Quarter-Square Multiplier/Dividers, Burr-
tary applications as stabilizing oscillator sis· gonerate error signal for Integrator whose llrown Research, Tucson, Ariz., PDS-201 C,
nal amplitude or holding amplitude constant output is multiplied by Input signal to vary 1969.
57
58 ELEOTRONIO OIROUITS MANUAL
+12v
+
620 _Eat
Rt
1.2k
MOS TRANSISTOR AS VARIABLE RESISTOR-

Provides resistance range of 0.8 to 50,000
ohms depending on strength of applied sig• 2.7k
-
OUTPUT I f
1 Your
nal. Whan used In feedback path of age am· I i
pllfler (Q3), gives age range of 3:1. Input
signal applied to base of Ql appears at
emitter of 02 and is foci back through mos
transistor Q3 to base of Ql .-H. Ikeda, MOST
Variable Resistor and Its Application to an 50-DB AGC-Usod in Sony portable IY sots servos aro variable Impedance in emitter cir·
AGC Amplitler, IEEE Journal of Solid.Stale to handle large input signals without dlstor• cult of Q2 and controls bias of 02.-Two·
Circuits, Fob. 1970, p 43-45. tlon or overload. Two transistors give far Stasa Gain Control for Portable TV Sat, Efoc·
greater control range than conventional troniu, Nov. t4, 1966, p t71-t72.
single-sta90 age. Q2 ampliflos, while Qt
INPUT
LIMITED AGC FOR OSCILLATOR-Ujt compen-

sates oscillator whose output varies Inversely
with frequency, to koop output essentially con•
stant at 7-V p·p over frequency ranee of 2.8
to 3.1 kHz. Operation Is based on no9atlve
rasistanco characteristic of ujt.-R. S. Hughes,
Automatic Gain Control Circuit Uses Unijunc-
tion Transistor, "400 ldoas for Design Selected
from Electronic Design," Hayden look Co.,
3K N.Y., t964, p 111.
100
o,
2N3642
220k
220k
tk Cz
1N270 10k
D5
INPUT' 2
2 2 f 4.7k 7
. I' D3
IN270
04
1N270 1k
o, 10k
60-DB RANGE WITH IC'S-Ovor frequency

range of 20 Hz to ovor I 0 kHz, output change
is less than 6 clB for input change greater
than 60 dB. Signal from voltage divider Rt-
Dt·D2·D3-D4 is amplifled by first IC opamp buffer Qt. For manual control, switch in- age rango.-W. H. Ellis, Jr., AGC Circuit Pos-
having gain of too, rectified by DS-06, then serts potentiometer in foodback loop. Input sesses 60-Decibel Gain, Electronics, Dec. 12,
fad back to input through second opamp and signal should be several volts, for maximum 1966, p 107-108.
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL CIRCUITS 59
,,
INPUT
CHOPPER-CONTROLLED GAIN-Gain of ony
opamp may bo varied over 32-dB range by
vorying ratio of OFF and ON times of 20-
kHz pulse-width-modulated source applied to
MEMStt ADDITIONAL STAGES single fet. Resulting chopping of input to
r--""""'l'-<li,--_..;;;.:.;;;;.=..;.;:......--.~~~~IF USED
opomp, at slgnitlcontly higher rate than upper
cutoff frequency of amplitlar, attenuates input
GAIN-CONTROL INPUT
signol during pulse ON time while giving
m HIGH GAIN
lfl..11[,o
20khz
MEDIUM GAIN
JLJLJJL
LOW GAIN
normal gain during OFF tima.-D. E. Lancaster,
Operational Amplifier Gain Varied by FET
Chopper, Electronics, Oct. 2, 1967, p 98.
+ 15 v
IOOK
INPUT 10K 8
6
100
HIGH-ACCURACY AGC-Arrangomont is that

of multiplier, with input signal multiplied by IOOK
corredive d-c voltage requirad to keep output
level constant. Uses two-quadrant 5500
multiplier with 9302 opamp for this function, • 15 v
giving 10 V output level of both polarities.
Output a-c signal is full-wave radified, ampli·
fied, Integrated, and its d-c laval shifted to
control multiplier. IN753A diode provides
d-c lavol compatibility.-An Accurate AGC
Amplifier Using OEI Monolithic Circuits, Optl·
cal Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10161.
1N270
IOK IN270
33pF
FEN WAL 510 + 15 v

GB2BJI
TR2
.,. 0.001
75
IN
DARLINGTON ATIENUATOR-Provides elec·

tronically variable age control of wideband
amplifier without deeroding performance.
Both transformers have 4:1 impedance ratio.
Both Darlington transistors aro 2N1613.
Used in CATV.-P. J. Fung, Variable Attenua·
tor Provides AGC Control, Elocfronic Design,
Sept. 28, 1964, p 54.
2.2µ.h
270
27
1000i 4.7k
+12v
2.2µ.h 0.8µ.h 150 2.2µ.h
4'1!2Mr'\.--2-.a-iµ~Eo" _ _
270
27
-2-N-17..... _,.T.1000
560 -:-
.:t.47
*ALL CAPACITORS
IN PICOFARADS
1000.I
+12v +12v
"':"'
-12Y
SO-Ohm or lOO-Ohm cablo. Upper cutoff fre-
CONSTANT-OUTPUT LIMITER-Provides con• level of 9 mV, and circuit holds output love! quency of 100 MHz Is limited only by transis-
stant output essentially indopondont of constant within 0.06 dB oven though input tors used.-R. J. Turner, Transistors Improve
changes In Input amplitude, without Introduc- level Increases 50 dB. Output stage Q6 has High·frequoncy Limiter, Electronic•, Oct. 13,
ing phase shift. Limiting begins at Input resonant circuit tuned to 80 MHz and drives 1969, p 94.
Vculoblo Goin 519. lwp.
+12.
•.Ilk
IOOk
22k
7 -12.
OPTIMIZING AGC WITH FET-Maintalns high

signal-noise ratio with low distortion in low•
Q audio applications requiring broadband
control at relatively hl9h si9nol lovols. Uses
difforontial gain-control technique with 2,900.
Hz pilot tone as amplitude roforanco. Tone
is fed through comparator to fat chopper, and
output Is flltored for lnto9ratin9 difforontlal IN276
d-c amplifier. Ad(ustable age threshold ref· timized Gain-Control Configuration Using tho
oronco at other Input permits ad(u1tln9 d-c Field-Effect Transistor, IEEE Journal of Solicl-
output of ampliRor.-H. N. Leighton, An Op- Srcrro Circuits, Doc. 1968, p 441-447.
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL CIRCUITS 61
2k lk
+12v
Y+ 0
4
51 MCl59SL
AGC WITH IC MULTIPLIER-Circuit requires
0·1 V d-c control voltage to provide linear KN..!.
~
~
gain control of 1-V p-p signal at 200 kHz. Ve
Pook-to•poak value of output Is thus oxodly
tho some as value of control voltage. Gain 50,flf
is recovered with IC video ampliflor having 14
9ain of 40.-E. Renschler and D. Weiss, Try 13
the Monolithic Multiplier as a Versatile A.C
Design Tool, Electronics, June 8, 1970, p 100-
':'
l Uk
..
105. 2rna
TSO.fl'
OFFSET
":'
...
-tlOV
AOJUST Sk
-12y
I'''...
221<
BOXCAR FOR PULSE AOC-Provides control

over gain of video omplillor when both
TO EMITTER pulse width and frequency are variable.
FOLLOWER Used to keep amplitude of r·f burst constant
desplto variations in signal amplitude, fre-
quency, or pulse width. Boxcar circuit is
sample-and-hold integrator. Output of
standard emitter-follower Is desired age volt·
ago to be applied to controlled amplifter.
With values shown, circuit will handle inputs
0.05pf of 2 to 8 V at 1 to 50 kHz and pulse widths
of 5 to 500 p.s.-G. P. Klein, Boxcar Circuit
Provides Pulse AmpUftor AGC, Electronic De-
sign, Sept. 13, 1965, p 83-84.
+30•
3.3k tk lk 3.3k
fir
IOk
,.... ___....,....,.,.,.........;+
2.2k
Rs
tOk
04
IZ63Tl0
+
C2 1,000plI c, Re
Olpl
101'1 10k
,____________--i~...----------~-t-o-,~----------------------""""'"""------------------------~
ERASING 19-DB SIGNAL SWINGS-A-c gain of AAZIS of amplifier is 10,000, and noiso level Is 20
10-50,000 Hz ampliflor is automatically con• ':" µ.V.-C. A. J. van der Geer, Amplifier Erases
trolled by error signal that changes dynamic Used in system for determining density of Swing of 19-DB In Input Signals, Electronia,
resistance of diode DI in feedback loop. plasma in microwavo cavity. Maximum gain May 29, 1967, p 85-86.
-30V A.G.C. AMP. RECOVERY

OIOOE
SK
2N414
50
IK
CKl 102
AGC FOR SSB-Provides fast attack and slow Requires receiver having good skirt seloctiv·
decay, for improved reception with ssb re- ity, with no d-c return from age line to
ceiver. Rl is normal volume control in ground.-G. W. Luick, Improved A. G. C. For
receiver and T1 is 1:3 step-up audio trans- 5. S. B. Rocoption, "Single Sideband for tho
10-DB OPTOELECTRONIC-Usos photocell of former such as Stancor A-53. Usos audio Radio Amateur," ARRL, Newington, Conn.,
Raysistor to shunt Input of transistor, with drive from output of detector in receiver. 1965, p 180.
one end of Raysistor tied to emitter to protect
low-frequency response. Requires d·c con•
trol voltage of 0 to 1 V.-Raysistor Optoelec•
Ironic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy, Mass., 1967,
p 12.
-JOV
CK l 102
Volts
IOOK
IOK
IN }--<>
OUT
____,
2
AGC
33
" 3
• 15 Vol ts
IOK
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED GAIN-Analog multi·

plier makes age voltage act on Input signal 15-DB OPTOELECTRONIC-Usos Raysistor in
up to 100 kHz, to give over 40 dB of age collector circuit, so collector load decreases
rango with low distortion. If signal level is and reduces gain whon input increases.
under 10 mV at input, resistive divider is not Changing load resistanco RL to lSK incroasos
needed and 5500 will then provide useful control range to over 30 dB for d-c control
voltage goin.-Applying tho Model 5500 voltago of 0 to 1 V.-Raysistor Optoelec•
Monolithic Analog Multiplier, Optical Elec· Ironic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy, Mass., 1967,
tronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10138. p 12.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use the inde1t at the bock
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
McGraw-Hill in 1968.
CHAPTER 6
Automotive Control Circuits
r-----------------------~ NORMAi.
I WIPER
SWITCH
I VARIABLE WIPER-Flip-flop drives ujt timer
I GROUND and wiper motor relay. Setting of duty pot
I I CHASSIS I
determines interval, In range of I to 80 s,
I
I at which ujt timer 03 will be activated and
I power applied to wiper motor through flip-
I flop. Setting of WIPES pot determines inter•
l val before flip-flop is switched back, In range
of I to 8 s. Typical sotting is 1 s for single
wiping action, Chief advantage is ability to
Rz set wiper for operation at long time Inter·
IOk t12VDC
vals, such as once every 30 s, for very light
WIPES
rain.-J. L. Shagena and T. H. Miller, Variable
Control for Automobile Windshield Wiper,
~- EEE, June 1969, p 140-141.
UNl.ESS NOTED
RESISTOR 114 WATT
ADJUST TIME DELAY IGNITION SWITCH

+12vo-~~~~--....~~~~-4>
~HEADLIGHT
HEADLIGHT sookn
HEADLIGHT SWITCH RELAY
II~ <400mA -
r- -------- ------------ -,I

'II 0.1 µF TIC44
6.8kP.
1 kO 2N3707
ioknl
I
1 33okn , rn I
I I
I iokn I
L---------- ----- ----
1N2971
_.J
. .,,I+
OVERRIDE
l
TURN ·ON SWITCH
.... '::' '::'
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT SWITCH-Head· turned off, with amount of delay being ad- nonts," Texas Instruments, Dallas, Toxas,
lights in car are turned off automatically in justable with SOOK pot. Ult Is used as timor. CC101, 1968, p 24114A.
from 1 s to 15 minutes after ignition 11 -"Preferred Semiconductors and Compo•
63
r--------------- TO IGNITION IUS SCR HEADLIGHT-OFF ALARM-Sounds buzzer

IUZZElt until headlights are turnod on after dark.
llZY D.C.) Mount photocell on insldo of windshield fac·
"" ing out. If buzzer sounds too early, boforo
it Is dark enough for headlights, increase re-
CIDSU sistor value. Circuit is for nogative ground;
for positive ground, interchange connections
to headlight and ignition bus.-J. G. Rabine•
CL5MS\. wlt1, Photocells-Types, Characteristics, and
Applications, Electronics World, Sept. 1968, p
..__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __._ _ _ _.O TO HEADLIGHT IUS 23-26•
DOOR
HORN RELAY SWITCH
+
-=-12'VOLTS
PHOTOCELL
2N307 ~
LAFAYETTE
MS-922
HORN J
PUSH-:t DOME
BUTTON HORN LAMP
HEADLIGHT BURNOUT INDICATOR-Turns on

pilot lamp on dashboard If photocell mounted AUTO THEFT ALARM-Simple scr control, onor-
near edge of headlight does not pick up light gized by closing 51, latches In when door of
when headlight switch Is turned on. Circuit car Is opened by thief and keeps horn blow•
ing continuously until Sl Is opened. Used In
ls Schmitt trigger. Designed for 12·Y battery
many London taxis; police have master key
with negative ground. Con also bo used to
for key switch 51 mounted on left front
monitor toil-light or stoplight.-M. Dickey, In·
fender, to turn afF horn after catching thief.
expensive Circuit Makos Remote Light lndica•
-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy
tor, Electronic Design, Sept. 14, 1964, p 75-76.
Power Semiconductor Applications, General
Vs
820 R1 1.2k R2 ~
ELECTRIC CAR FUEL GAGE-Monitors dis-
charge rato of 24-V battery In olemlcally
powered vehicle. Turns on lamp to warn
that battery has discharged onough to re- MM s J+-
quire lmmodlato attention, and disconnects
motor beforo battery ls damaged, Includes
override button that can bo hold down to get
vehicle out of hazardous traffic situation.
Action of vohage sensor can be adjustod to
allow for ago, history, and nominal output
voltage of Individual batteries. Report de-
scribes auxlllory measuring circuit that dis• R
R13
ploys battery output voltage against ex•
panded scale covering important range from
nominal maximum charge to critical discharge
(corresponding to fuel gage Indication).-
+ C1 15k
Battery Discharge Sensor for Eloctricolly 03
Poworod Vehicles, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma 500µ 470n l.Sk R1s
Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No. 434, time (2SV) BA100
1966.
AUTOMOTIVE CONTROL CIRCUITS 65
THERMAL FLASHER UNIT

TO (SIGNAL STAT N0.1'181 ALL RESISTORS 112 WATT
IGNITION~----~a!H---..
SWITCH
RIGHT FRONT TURN
LEFTFRONT~ GENQl073
TURN ----------.
GE Nll073 -=
EXISTING TURN
SEQUENTIAL TURN SIGNAL-For use In cars SIGNAL SWITCH
having three rear lights por side. Turn1 on
roar lights in sequence from center to outside
when turn-signal switch is conventionally op- TO STOP (EXISTING! RIGHT SIDE
LEFT SIDE SWITCH
erated, to simulate flashing arrow pointing DUPLICATE OF RtGHTl
In direction of intendod turn. Can also be +12V
used with any other three 12-V automotive
lamp• for beacon1, barricade lights, advor•
tlslng signs, etc. Additional stages may be
added, provided thermal flasher modulo Is
changed to have required capacity. Lamps
are onorgized 0.25 s aport. Article gives In-
stallation instructions.-D. R. Grafham, Se-
quential Turn Signal System for Automobiles,
Genoral Eloctric, Syracuso, N. Y., No. 201.17,
1966.
r-
1
------------, OOOR
SCR I
+
______ --
'-',.....HORN RELAY
I
I
I
GE·X3 I
I
I
I
SWITCH BURGLAR ALARM-Circuit Is activated by
closing Sl after loaving car. When any
door is then openod that has switch for turn-
12V .;_
I I ing on dome light, 1cr Is triggered and applies
I I power to horns. Once activated, horn• can
I I
I
I,_ __ ~--------J DOME
LIGHT
be turned off only by opening concealed or
key-operated 1wltch Sl, To prevent horns
from going off whon roturnlng to car, open
------ HIOOEN OR KEY· SI before opening door, Arrangement
OPERATE SWITCH ON shown applio1 only to negative-grounded
HORN _J OUTSIDE OF CAR.
PUSH· BUTTONI cars.-"Hobby Manuel," General Eledric,
Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 50.
I
r------------------,
r------------------, I~ I
...... ........~~.....
..
I ~~~---~~~---~~~~~~~ ~~
I
I
I ,.•• IOOA
.,
JOA
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
'/
.,,•..,. II
I
I
I
I
- tt
~o,r
.......
c.. I
I
I
I
nv"
I I
I
fllLD
I
I
I
RtGULATott I At..Tl••ATOll I
--------------------~ L-------------------~
ALTERNATOR REGULATOR-Ser control circuit charged. To adjust, canned voltmeter acro•s 14.5 V for normal room temperature (use 15
applles rectified output of alternator to 12-V battery, with engine running at moderate V if adjusting outdoors at 0 F).-Automotlve
auto battery whenever it is in need of charge, 1poed, and turn R2 In direction of higher Alternator Rogulator, Gonoral Electric, Au-
and automatically open1 when battery Is fully voltage until battery voltage level• aff at . bum, N.Y.. No. 630.15,
r-------.....,
I s1
SCR WINDSHIELD WIPER CONTROL-R2 con•
trots ropotition rate at which windshield I
wiper motor is ener9izod to drive blade across I
windshield and baclc at full wiping speed. __ JI
Connections shown are for negative 9round.
Used to operate wiper less frequently when MCR
rain is light, without slowing blade so much 1304-1
that it Interferes with vision or perhaps stalls
part way across.-"Circuits Manual," Motor•
0
ola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 6-3-2.

2N3480
PARKING-LIGHT TURN.ON-Simple two-tran·

sister d-c amplifler requires only two resistors
and photocell to energize lamp or relay load.
Can be used to turn on 12-V 2.2•W automo•
bile parking light automatically when dark·
Pl ness falls. Power limitation is duo to fact
that current in TR2 increases 9radually as
light is reduced, making dissipation in tran•
sister high during transitional period. With
maximum setting of sensitivity control, lamp
TRI TR2
is energized at 1 lux and doonorgizod at 3.3
lux. At minimum sensitivity, lamp comes on
at 0.1 lux and goos off at 0.5 lux. Transis-
tors are BFY52 and Pl is ORP60 or ORP61.-
Applications of tho BFY50, BFY51 and BFY52,
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven,
Tho Netherlands, No. 428, 1965.
PANEL
SWITCH
r--------------1 ~------__,.....__________..____.SWITCH
DOOR
IHEAOLIGHTSI R2
220
OHMS
count
relay
+
- 12V
RI
180
OOME
OHMS
LAMP
PANEL
LAMPS
ODOMmR-Magnot on transmission shaft or

drivoshaft trips rood relay once per 100 revo-
lutions to aduate oloctromechonical count re-
L ___ -
CHIME
SOLENOID
LI
__ CRI
IN1692
__,
lay that, In European version, advances count

once per 100 meters of distance moved by
car. Uses 100:1 rodudlan 9eor between
shaft and rotating magnet. Diode is BAX13, POSITIVE-GROUND LIGHTS·ON CHIME-Ser songors. Lamp In series with chime provides
S2 is rood contact, Rl 0 is 1K, and Cl 0 Is 470 circuit actuates chime onco when car door is supplemental continuous visual Indication
p.F.-A. G. Kortolln9, Electronic Speedometer/ open with lights on, as romindor to turn lights without overheating chime solenoid, because
Odomotor Usln9 Read Contad Type Signal off. Slnglo-stroko feature 9ives gentle ro· la111p has much higher resistance when hot
Transmittor, Phillps, Pub, Dept., Elcoma Div., minder without becoming nuisance when door than when cold.-"Hobby Manual," General
Elndhoven, Tho Nothorlands, No. 89, 1970. Is kept open for loading or unloading pas- Electric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 46.
12 v
PANEL
[] SWITCH
(HEADLIGHTS)
r------. DOOR
SWITCH
OHMMETER I CHIME
SOLENOID I
:Al3F "SNAPIT" I
+ 600R I
~12VOLTS
I
Cs
O.IJ'f -
CHASSIS I
DISTRIBUTOR GROUND I I
DWELL ANGLE-Simplo diode-capacitor ar•
rangement permits uso of ohmmeter to m11as•
I I
PANEL
uro breaker-point dwoll angle (portion of LAMPS I
L __
C22F
_ _J
I DOME
LAMP
rotation during which points aro closed).
With engino running, ohmmeter roads avorago
of infinite resistance when paints aro open
and zero resistance when closed. Articlo tolls
how to calculate dwell anglo far engines with BATIERY·SAVER-Slmple scr circuit makes
four, six, and eight cyllndors.-E. W. Horri· chime ring if car door is opened while head·
gan, Ohmmeter and Diodo Measure Dwell lights aro on, as romlndor to turn them off.
Angle, Electronics, Aug. 5, 1968, p 105-106. -F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy
Power Semlconduct11r Applications, Gonoral
vb
110 to15Vl
SPEEDOMETER-Monostable mvbr is driven by
+ magnetically actuated rood contact in signal
transmittor coupled either to transmission or
drivoshaft of auto, eliminating noed for
speodometer-odometor cable. Motor indica•
tion is proportional to rate at which pulses
arrive from transmitter when car is In motion.
TR2 In European version, spood of transmitter in·
put spindle was such that rood contacts SI
produced one pulse por motor of distance
covorod.-A. G. Kortollng, Eloctronic Spood-
omotor/Odometor Using Rood Contact Typo
Signal Transmittor, Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, The Nethorlands, No. 89,
1970.
Cl= 270 nF
RI= 680 n
R2 = 10 kn C2 = 330 "F
ff~·
R3= 10 kn Dl = BZY88·CSV6 +BAT
R4= 1.s kn 02 = BAX13
R6= 68 n TRl. TR2 =BCl47
R7 =100 n. potentiometer
SI = Reed contact RI-I 2
RS= kn
R9 = 130 n, NTC thermistor M = Moving coil meter 5 mA, 0.6 V
1N3031
30V
100.a
12~~ SI ~K
VDC(.~-....._____z_w________.,.____-L_J FUEL PUMP OSCIUATOR WITH ZENER-30-V
zoner across transistor speeds decay of sole-
Kl
SLOWING UP ELECTRIC WIPER-Four-layer noid curront oftor plungor hos boon pulled
diodo DI in simple relaxation oscillator drives Whon Cl discharges below 1 mA, DI turns In, thoroby increasing frequency of operation
rolay Kl which in turn controls switch of off and relay drops out for start of new and pumping rate. Designed to give 16
oloctrlc windshield wiper motor. R2 deter• cycle. Will work with either ground polarity. strokos of plunger por second with battery
mines rate at which Cl Is charged to point -C. A. Huber, Slow-Kick Windshield Wiper, voltage of 13.S V.-"Clrcults Manual," Mo·
whore it breaks down Dl and operates wiper. Popular Electronics, April 1970, p 86. torola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 7-3-3.
68 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS :MANUAL
+ 12v
START
I Ok RS
+12• SM Oil-CHANGE COMPUTER-Simple ele<trochem•

icol-cell circuit turns on lomp 11 when oll In
RUN R4 Q1 outo engine should be changed. Factors In·
volved are running time of engine, time oil
is in engino, and number of cold starts mado
+ 12v lOM lOM
by engine. All three factors are weighted by
TIME R1 R2 resistors and used to control rate of tronsfor
of platable matorial in cell El .-J. Rose, E-Cell
Computer Solves Oily Problem, EON, Sept. 6,
1967, p 42-43.
1.5 M R3 El
COMMON
01 • Philco PET 6002 or Equivalent
11 • No. 161
12 • No. 17050
O~(rMP +BAT
Dl
rn
SPEAKER 1N2610
IN
Ql
2Nl539
Rl
to remind user to reset switch. Cl is 0.22

POSITIVE-GROUND HEADLIGHT ALARM- µ.F, C2 30 µ.F, Rl 15K, and R2 680. Second·
Spoaker howls if ignition is turned off but ary of oudlo output transformer Tl should ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP-Boslc blocking oscilla·
llghts left on. Can be defeated with Sl, but match speoker.-"Transistor Monuol," RCA, tor drives solenoid of Bendix plunger-type
alarm then sounds when Ignition is turned on, Harrison, N.J., SC-13, p 517. electric fuel pump, with feedbock winding
added to complete oscillator circuit. Tron-
sistor conducts for 25 ms to make plunger
move full distonce back into solenoid.-"Cir·
cuits Manuol," Motorolo, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1965, p 7-3-1.
(rMP +BAT
1N2610
R2
10.Q
!IOA 80A
2Nl540
100.Q
300Jl. 2;l'OA
HIGH-SPEED ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP-Use of
10-ohm resistor R2 in series with diode acro11
feedback winding of oscillotor decreases off PL-G·E #!13 LAMP
time of solenoid, thereby Increasing frequency
of operation ond pumping rato.-"Circults ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Uses D. E. Loncoster, Plostic Power Transistors-
Manual/' Motorola, Phoonix, Ariz., 1965, p two inoxponsivo Bendix plostic-oncosod power Advontagos and Applications, Electroni"
7-3-2. transistors rated at 25 W eoch and 35 V.- World, Feb. 1968, p 50-52.
PANEL
SWITCH
r-------------, DOOR
(HEADLIGHTS) SWITCH
CRI
IN1692
CHIME
SOLENOID
+
_;_ 12V DOME
fl LAMP
LAMP
GE·1003
PANEL RI
LAMPS 1!!0
OHMS
NEGATIVE-GROUND LIGHTS-ON CHIME-Ser panongers. Lamp in series with chime pro-

circuit actuates chime onco when car door is vides supplemental continuous visual indica•
open with lights on, os reminder to turn lights tlon without overheating chime solonoid, be-
off. Single-stroke feature gives gentle re- cause lamp has much higher resistance when
minder without becoming nuisance when hot than when cold.-''Hobby Manual," Gon-
door is kept open for looding or unloading oral Electric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 46.
"Ace" 4n
T~~~~'lt.L<>--+.....+-_,.....;,¥N.N,..-tf---I
SWITCH
OUTBOARD
LAMP
SEQUENTIAL TAIL-UGHTS-Usos scr's to create HEADLIGHT.Off TIME DELAY-Gives 60 to

sequential tail-light flashing, in combination 90 s after ignition switch is turned off, before
with D13P1 four-layer breakdown dlodos to tuming off headlights automatically If driver
open tho circuit and reset tho scr's. Brook· forgets them or wanh driveway lighted while
over occurs at 6 to 10 V.-R. M. Brown, Auto- ho unlocks door to house.-R. M. Brown, Au·
motlvo Electronics, Electronics World, May tomotivo Electronics, Electronlc1 World, May
1967, p 23-29. 1967, p 23-29.
NEGATIVE-GROUND HEADLIGHT ALARM-

Spoaker howls if auto lights are on when
ignition Is turned off. Can be defeated with
51 If lights ore loft on intentionally, but alarm
then sounds when ignition Is turned back on
to remind user that switch should be returned
to normal position. Cl Is 0.22 µF, C2 30
µF, Rl 15K, and R2 680. Secondary of oudio
output transformer Tl should match speaker.
-"Transistor Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
SC.13, p 517.
NOTE: To locale additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use the Index al the back
of this book. Check also the author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 7
Automotive Ignition Circuits
BLOCKING
l2 \' + A:'.\lPLIFII::H osc. BALLAST SPARK
Dt:LCO-
REJ\IY
1N4001 087
TRIGGERED ON£..SHOT IGNITION-Usos silicon
gate control switch that turns on llko scr but
Is turned off by small reverse voltage pulse
applied to goto. Trigger can be obtolned
from magnetic pickup as shown, or from
photoelectric pickup actuated by distributor
shaft.-"Circults Manual," Motorola, Phoenix,
15.a
Ariz., 1965, p 11-18.
.25 uf
1N4004
"E" CORE
114 R7 RO
HO I.SK 100
ltt& llC
Otl
40406
ISK
+
'"'
.._
XFMA.
IGNITION FOR DRAG RACING-Gives out- PRI,
standing performance at high onglne speeds
in souped-up stock cars, yet ollmlnated
knock on hills when put in 1966 Jeop. Fea-
tures include special storage choke coil and complete ignition. Article describes system
high-voltage pulse transformer that together operation and adjustment proceduros.-H. I. tion System, Eledtoniu World, July 1969, p
provide hot spark long enough to assure Keroes, High-"Q" Inductive Electronic lgni· 32-34 and 61-62.
70
AUTOMOTIVE IGNITION CIRCUITS 71
+ BALLAST
20 CAPACITOR-TURN.OFF IGNITION-Usos silicon

goto control swikh that turns on much like
scr, but can be turned off by relatively small
GCS reverse voltogo pulse applied to goto. Can
> 1N4005
...
C'I turn off 7-A coil current at voltage levels ap•
proaching 500 V. Capacitor charges to volt-
age love! of 25-30 V, dependent on energy
.25 µ f stored In inductance while transistor Is on.-
47 D
"Clrcuih Manual,'' Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1965, p 11-17.
IGN. SW.
-....o--c,___...___ .___.,...__~~--~~------~~----~~
+12 v
50
CONTACTLESS IGNITION-Magnetic pickup
triggered by rotating teeth on distributor
shaft servos in placo of distributor contacts.
Fenwal thermistor In bias circuit of 2N1193
ensures proper operation of circuit at low 2?\1193
temperatures and low Ignition speed1 where
pickup trigger signals are vory low.-"Circuits PICK-UP II. V.
Manual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p
11-4. 1:250
100 l\tA Ll.OHY
2\V 28100
:: T0+12v
)WATTS IVIA IG«ITION
START t----+----a,.:_SWITCHI
I
FUDl!ACM CZ I
IN1692 1.0jtf
400Y
flNISH
100
START
STAllT
SEDJl«lAllY GE
+ Al3B +
14PUCUI
100,.1 START Cl
Z5V
10,.t
200V
02 FINISH
FINISH
IN169Z S.6M PDT

CHANGE
CHASSIS OYER
- GROUND
SWITCH
lll'-El£CTllONIC
01, 02· GEZllZl9U• llOUNT EACH TRANSISTOR ON THERMALLOY "'2210A HEATSINIC DOWlf.REGl.UR
Tl • FERROXOCU8E 2051'440 -3CS "E• CORES 12 REOUIAEDI ; FEllAOXCllBE S9SF42' 80881N IGNITIOl\I
WIND 140 TURNS SEC FIRST 14 LAYER l#lO- fOllMVAll WIRE; INSULATE WITl4 I LAYER MYLAR TAPE
WIND 9 TURNS FEED8ACK NEXT I I I.AYER I - 30 AWG FOAMVAR WIRE
81FILAR WIND 12X91\IRNSI PRIMARY LAST 12 LAYERSl•ZOAWG FOAMVM WIRE.
gerod by pulse output of magnetic pickup
SCR CAPACITOR-DISCHARGE IGNITION-De- engine of most modern automobiles. Elimi- attached to distributor in place of contads.-
livers relatively constant Ignition voltage over nates distributor contad wear from arcing be- D. R. Grafham, Using Low Current SCR's, Gen-
entire speed rango of Idling to maximum cause contacts handle only low-current scr eral Eloctrlc, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.19, 1967,
rpm llmlt (about 5,500 rpm for 4-stroko VS trigger signal. Alternativoly, scr can be trig- p 32.
BALLAST
TO OISTRIBUlOR DROPPING RESISTOR
ROlOR
INSTALLED IN MOST
CAR.
TO DISTRIBUTOR
27000
IN2611
ISOLATION
OIOOE
.331\
TO
POINTS
ELECTRONIC IGNITION WITH STANDARD COIL

-Uses existing wiring and standard Ignition
DUAt..TRANSISTOR IGNITION-Use of two coll, tmproves gas mlleago at high speeds,
low-voltage transistors in place of much more is not affoctod by high temperature, and ex-
costly high-voltage unit givos comparable tends lifo of points to that of car itsolf.-A.
reliability. Possible drawback Is lack of M. Hildobront, Transistor Auto Ignition Uses
zonor diode protedion. Circuit is Slep Elec- Standard Coll, Eledronic Design, Moy 11,
tronics Co. TS-14.-B. Ward, ''Transistor lgnl· 1964, p 83.
tion Systems Handbook," H. W. Sams & Co.,
Indianapolis, Ind., 1966, p 93.
• Ql,02,SCRI, ON HEAT SINIC

01 ,02 1 • 2Nll2311
NEG. OR DIST. TERMINAL OF COIL IS TO IE GROUNDED
+575Y
TO COIL PLUS (OR "BATT."! 1.0 Cl
+12V FROM IGNITION SWITCH caoo DIS

+ SCRI
lk
"1""- C3 R2
-¥-100
TO DIST. POINTS E D7
o-~~~~~~....-~--..-~~~~~ .........;.m........
0.0011
.s
R!I
IN40011 llllk
TO AUTO SYSTEM ONO (NEG,)
TO COIL NH.IOR"DIST."I ALL INOI MADE COMMON TO EACH OTHl!R

o-:i_
-=- of Tl on toroid core. T2 Is Pulse Engineering
TWO-SCR IGNITION-Improves engino per- 12 V to 375 V for charging energy storage PE2225 or Sprague 11Zl3 1:1:1 pulse trans-
formance, increases miles par gallon, and capacitor Cl. Opening of distributor points former. Works only on cars with negative
provonts multiple firing or misfiring caused by triggers SCRI Into conduction, thoroby dis- ground.-C. C. Morris and R. D. Morton,
point bounce. Powor supply usos lnvortor charging Cl through ignition coil. Article Unique Capacitor·Dischargo l9nltlon System,
and bridge to stop up battery voltogo from glvos construdion details, including winding Electronics World, Jan. 1969, p 45-48 and 56.
AUTOMOTIVE IGNITION CIRCUITS '13
•• ..
IOOA
..
oQ A
..'°" ••
OQ A
r-
•• BREAKERLESS IGNITION-Motorola system,
•.,,..
t•INt
. using magnotlc pickup in place of distributor
..
IJOA
...,...
.,_ points, was used in somewhat similar form
on Pontiac Grand Prix. Requires 8-tooth
Iron or stool star wheel for 8-cylinder englno
,...,, (6 for 6-cyllndor) mounted on rotor of di...
= ...
tlVM•
...,.. ··~
trlbutor, with each spoke as wide at tip as
dwoll angle specified for car in which it will
be used. Magnetic pickup is mounted on
..... ,., ...

, ,. ...
IQ A
breaker plate, using bracket, with sumciently
wide relief hole in distributor case to pormit
movement by centrifugal and vacuum ad·
vance mechanisms. Pickup coil contains small
permanent magnet in tip.-B. Ward, "Tran-
lU:CT•O "110r1Ct1 I.Al
'::' '::' sistor Ignition Systems Handbook," H. W.
-
lllOOU. I0410
•&HlflC 'C•- Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1966, p 63.
r-~~~~~~~~~~~~~_,.~~~ ... +12v

.I 6-E Al3C 1,uf 400V
33
r---t-~..-~r~~+-t--t{----~g~~TIVE
t~
SCR CAPACITOR-DISCHARGE IGNITION-
Driven by silicon-transistor lnvertor, drawing
loss than 2 A from battery ever ontlre speed
rango. Will provide full spark voltage for
speeds up to 6,000 rpm on I-cylinder engine.
Distributor points carry very littlo current so
there Is no arcing and very little wear. Exist·
ing points, capacitor, ballast, and coil of car
are usod. Lockout circuit In scr goto prevonts
false triggering by contact bounce, eliminat•
ing misflrlng.-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K.
Howell, Economy Power Semiconductor Appli· GROUND
~~~ =~~~~\~e';i~ CORES} FERROXCUBE, SAUGERTIES,N.Y.

]
cations, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
671.1, 1965, p 25.
Tl ©a@ EACH 5 TURNS~ HEAVY FORMVAR BIFILAR WOUND
@a@ EACH9 TURNS+20HEAVY FORMVAR BIFILAR WOUND
@ 126 TURNS •32 HEAVY FORMVAR
HIGH
DISCONNECT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
01 r----------- --1 C1 TO
SPARK
8 1004 75 +2pfd PLUG
zo 9
SCR1
MCR
2305R·4
IGNITIOM
10 COIL
5
C2
OD33pfd
t,uf
6 -- - - - - ___ ...JR3
04 C4 27
7 A while Idling. Article describes operation.

-K. W. Scheel, Two Added Transistors Reduce
LOW-DRAIN ELECTRONIC IGNITION-Addition charge ignition system improves performance Ignition-System Current Drain, E/ectronlc1, May
of transistors Q3 and Q4 to capacitor-dis· at high speeds and cuts current drain to I 29, 1967, p 87.
+ o-u--
-1 I-
+12 v
l msec lOOQ
2.Zk toon 21\ 176
2W
6Q
0.1,.1
30v
100 mid
1.511 l:!~
0.5W
IN400i
SPEEDING IGNITION TURN-OFF-Arrangement

shown reduces switching losses of electronic
ignition system and Increases lgnltlan coll conducting, supplies reverso bias far Q2 when
BREAKERLESS TRIGGER FOR IGNITION-Elimi· output, by reverse-biasing transistor to d .. QI is triggered on. Reduces erosion at gap
nates need for engine retiming and resetting crease turn-off time of transistor. Charge on of spark-plug eloctrodes.-"Circuits Manual,"
of breaker point gap. Uses simple oscillator 100-µF capacitor, obtained when Qt Is nan- Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 11-10.
circuit in which high average current is ob-
tained with transformar feedback. Fits Into
distributor housing In place of breaker points. TRIAD
Rotation of cam In air gap of trigger trans• 8 TY 99
former makes circuit go in and out of non•
50 9
linear oscillation, producing square wavo
through 100-ohm rosistor. Circuit can also 10
bo used as proximity switch.-R. L. Ronci,
Good Timing, Electronics, Sept. 18, 1967, p
so.
500 1 uf
7
!Oil
1/2W
12 ,.
+~...-------------------------------..
IN3005A
ll\4005
DELCO
RE'.\IY
OS7
If,\'.
1K
200V
PAPER H.V. TO
DIST. .5 .5
600 \' 600 v
.OS
POINTS
100.V ZENER PROTECTS IGNITION TRAN·
SISTOR-Zener Is connected between omlttor
and collector of transistor in electronic lgni·
tion system, with voltage rating chosen for
' IU:QUJRES \'BO= 500
protection against surges without affecting INVERTER FOR IGNITION-Two-transistor In·
reliability of circuit operation.-''Zoner Diode verter drives bridge rectifier to give d-c/d-c PRV =25 V
Handbook," Motorola, Phoanix, Ariz., 1967, converter providing 200 to 400 V d-c for charge ignition system.-"Circuits Manual,"
p 7-'I. more efficient operation of scr capacitor-dis- Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 11-13.
AUTOMOTIVE IGNITION CIRCUITS 75
• 12V
111
!On
RI
100
OHM
CRI
IN3041B
Sn
CR2
H. V. TO COILltJ
DIST.
' - - - - - - - - - - - - " CHASSIS S1(3PDTI (OR"c B"I
GROUND CHANGEOVER
SWITCH POSITIONS
POSITIVE-GROUND IGNITION-Modification of ELECTRONIC

negative-ground capacitor-discharge scr Igni- \_
REGULAR
tion system will operate on cars having posl·
tive ground. Diodes CR3-CR6 are 1N1693, eluding winding data for Tl .-"Hobby Man•
75.y ZENER PROTECTS IGNITION TRAN· CRS and CR10 are 1N1695, and all others ual," General Eloctric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965,
SISTOR-Zonor Is connected between base and 1N1692. Book gives construdion details, In· p 63.
collector of transistor in electronic ignition
system, with voltage rating chosen for pro·
tedion agolnst surges without affecting re-
liability of circuit oporation.-"Zoner Diode
Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1967,
p 7-9.
TO STARTER RELAY IGNITIOH

TO DIST. CAP. OR SOLEllO<D SWITCH
.~""
II-GROUND TO AUTO STSTEM GROUND
u
.. >
!:!
+
a:E~~ER !~ i
l!
~
POINTS ,.:
~~-i--~. ~ . .J ---".-
L-------------------------------
COMMON AUTOMOBILE WIRING AND
IGNITION COMPOllENTS TlRMINATt
Hlllt
TO TRANSISTJ:.iro CIRCUIT r · t · -
(TYPICAL!
-l'..--l'.c--'t.c··y--~--1oc·Lt-~
-·1·····-~L----~-------••
'"- • • • • • • · · · · · · · · · +IZV IN•
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - T O OUICK START
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 - T O COIL OUTPUT
·r
o TO TRIGGER CIRCUIT
TO CAPAClTAN~~ 4
CIRCUIT ITYPICALI
:-·r·-¥..c
0ISCHARCiE •- ··········1·--··--········fL··-·-'-------•o
·-1-- -l'ic- -'(.;c·-l'.1c--~-1 +•ZVIN
_ o -TOCO!\.
' +To con.
TO TRIGGER CIRCUIT
ELECTRONIC IGNITION ADAPTER-Permits rewiring. All wires needed for installation moved from distributor houslng.-C. C.
testing all typos of transistor and capacitor- are torminated In control location, using Morris, Universal Wiring for Automotive lgnl·
discharge ignition systems on automobile scroW•type terminal strip. R1 is original bal- tion Systems, Eledroniu World, Aug. 1967,
and retuming to conventional system without lost resistor, and Cl Is original capacitor re- p48.
76 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MAN11 AL
CAPACITOR-DISCHARGE SCR IGNITION-Cir-

R3
47CIHM cuit Includes inverter and bridge rectiflor for
3W charging capacitor to 175 V d-c and scr trl9•
9erlng clrcvlt for dl1chargln9 capacitor
RI
100 through primary of Ignition coll. lnvorter
OHM
Ql-Q2 converts negatlvo ground auto battery
0
voltage to high-voltage a-c at about 8,000 Hz.

Delivers about 23,000 Hz peak output from
standard 12.6-V ignition coll, yet will operate
on 6.S-V d-c input for good cold-weather
starting. Boak gives constructions details,
including winding data for Tl, Diodos CR3·
CR6 are IN1693, CR8 and CRtO are 1N1695,
and all others 1N1692.-"Hobby Manual,"
u
INOTE3l
COIL(-) Gonoral Eloctric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 60.
ELECTRONIC
''
~---------------
TRANSISTOR
CONVl!NTIONAV
I'
,'
I
,I
-~
I
I
I
,---------------,
I I 5,6
I I
I
I
I
I
Z1 :
IN1788:
I
I
I
•
I
I
I I
I
~---------------~ COIL
1•400
28100
1i"'""
IGNITION'-----Hvr:::::
w Ill~" I
TWO·TRANSISTOR IGNITION-Modlum-voltage
QUICK-CHANGEOVER TRANSISTOR IGNITION voltage cable back to standard ignition coil. transistors in sorlos moot 120-V switching re-
-Slnglo-tran1istor ignition lmprovos perform- -J. Nawracaj, Transistor Ignition System Im· quirement for ignition coil having low turns
ance and lncroases life of broaker points. proves Engine Performance, "400 Ideas for ratio (below 325:1) and requiring between 7
Conventional Ignition can be restored by Design Seleded from Eledronic Design," Hay. and 12 A of colledor curront.-"Clrcuits Man•
operating both switches and moving high· den Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 232. ual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 11-3.
1 To ~511-F
1
IGNITION SWITCH +300 TO 4SOV de •V;p
~ r°
I\
TRANSISTOAIZED INVERTER , ...
fscR
Cp
.. ~
~
=COIL
-::"" 12 -14V INCLUDING BRIDGE RECTIFIER
/ •
1....l
;;,.
BUILT-IN
V;p-21V v
cHASSIS • AUTO COIL RESISTOR
IOW R.lr • O.OIA
~1.5 +12v
l IOmA
I Ok I Ok
I) I
-2 13 II
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
25TO !50 5k
-3
IOW 11-A742 TRIGAC
RI
y
1.Sk
~
8
.,.10
0
R
' OISTRl8UTOR
y POINTS
,IOk _j_ BYPASS
1'0.04711-F
_j_ C11
1' 0.47,._r
- 25V 25V
IC-SCR IGNITION-IC provides peak current prevents multlplo firing cousod by distributor IC Firos SCRs Used In Auto Ignition, Electronic
of 2 A for firing almost any scr of capacitor• points bounce at vary low cranlclng speeds Do1ign, July 5, 1970, p 68 and 70.
dischorge olectronic ignition system. Circuit and at high 1poed1.-W. L. Brown, Improved
AUTOMOTIVE IGNITION CIRCUITS ,,,,
FUSl
+ IAT.
+12 v 10 .a
1/2 w +COIL
C4
:01 MFD.
560 pf ~
10 .a l .a
10\V 100 \V
-COii.
R5 15
OIST•
Cl
MALLORY .47 MFO 06 .01 ufB.
2 U(
COIL
28100
SINGLE·TRANSISTOR IGNITION-Uses graded·

base high-voltago transistor for switching
load line up to 120 V for ignition coil having SCR IGNITION-Consists of d-c/d-c: convorter current through D7 switches on scr to dis-
low turns ratio (below 325:1) and requiring for stepping up auto battory voltage to about charge C3 through Ignition coil. Brochuro
between 7 and 12 A of collector current.- 400 V for charging C3. When first cylinder describos operation In detail-MARK TEN-A
"Circuits Manua~" Motorola, Phoonlx, Ariz., comes up on compression to position whore Now Ignition' System for All Motor Vehicles,
1965, p 11-3. spark plug should bo fired, points open and Delta Products, Grand Junction, Colo., 1969.
+12VCllTS
CONTACTLESS IGNITION TRIGGER-Four-polo

permanent magnet mounted on distributor
0.1..f rotor generates scr trigger pulses In pickup
120VI
coil, for driving scr of capacitor-discharge
automotive ignition. Distributor contacts are
LI CRI then unnecessary. Circuit shown amplifies
and differentiates pulse before It Is applied
to gate of scr. Magnet-coil combination is
commercially available.-D. R. Grafham, Usin9
low Current SCR's, General Eledrlc, Syracuse,
N.Y., Ne. 200.19, 1967, p 33.
BATTERY
+13.Sv
Cz
O.tµfd
=
TO SCR GATE
UJT MAKES IGNITION HEATPROOF-Devel- (2N4319J that previously required several plug chan9es
oped for sports cars used in racing. Ujt in 6-hour race can run entire season on one
trigger in capacitor-discharge ignition main- supply voltage variations of more than 30% set of plugs.-F. Honey, Unljundlon Trl99er
tains quality of Ignition pulse avor tempera· abovo and bolow battory voltage. Entiro Boosts Ignition Reliability, Efecfronict, Sept. 18,
ture range of -30 to 160 F with simultaneous ignition system costs less than $50. Race cars 1967, p 107-108.
CHAPTER 8
Battery-Charging Circuits
AUTOMATIC TRICKLE-Controllod battery

charger dolivers up to 10 A initially, aftor
which charging rate is reduced to trickle at
preset level dotorminod by setting of chargo-
::J 117V TO Z4V C.T.
lUTC•FTIO OR £0UIY,)
O•IOAD.C.
AMM£T£R
lOPTIONA~)
SUD
ZTJ\
4W
ZTA
4W
cutoff potentlometor.-D. Cooper, SCR'• and IW

Triacs-tho Revolution Continues, Efectronla l/ZW
8.ZV
Zll08
World, Aug. 1968, p 25-28.
S~~A:E-0~-1>--+-!111-11--t---'
1, +
No.1488
F
IA
K02103
Rz
5
20W
12·V CHARGER WITH 150-MA TRICKLE-Gives
ossentially full wavo charging at 2 A, with
0
R2 limiting current to safe value when battery

is completely dead. When battory 11 fully
K02103 charged, two-transistor regenerative switch
saturates and provents scr from triggering,
while turning on full-charge indicator lamp.
LOAO VOLTS-DC
Trickle charge then flows through lamp and
CURRENT 1.5
NO CURRENT 0.8 transistor switch to battery.-"Silicon Con•
trolled Roctiflor Experimenter's Manual," RCA,
Harrison, N.J., 1967, p 73.
9v d-c 0.5
80 --
PROTECTING NICKEL-CADMIUM CELLS-Spe• Ing ond rupturing. Two thermistors in bridge full charging current. Devoloped for use
cial diodes, called Amp.Oates by Mallory, circuit sense when battery 11 fully charged and with cordless appliances.-J, V, Boll, Thore's
shunt individual nickel-cadmium cells during tormlnato charging, to protect diodos from No Ovo.rcharge For Fast.Charged Battories,
fast recharge to prevent cells from overheat• ovorheating that would result If they carried Electronics, Jan. 22, 1968, p 97-100,
'18
BATTERY-CHARGING CIRCUITS 79
12·V ON-OFF BATTERY CHARGER-Automat•

ically switches off when battery is fully
~
charged, and switches Itself back on just
before battery Is fully discharged. To adjust,
connoct fully charged battery and adjust RI
until charging just stops.-"Hobby Manual," GE-X141
General Electric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 52. OPTIONAL.'! R2
27J\.
0-10 AMP DC
AMMETER
(OPTIONAL.)
RS
47.n.
+
SCR REGULATOR-Charges 12·V battery at BATTERY
UNDER +Cl R4
rate of up to 6 A. When battery Is fully CHARGE - 100.uf IK
charged, SCRI shuts off, and trickle charge 25VDC
(determined by R4) continues -. flow.-"SCR
Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967,
p 152-153.
.,....,.
BATTERY VOLTAGE SENSOR-U1od on elodric
golf carts and ather electric vohlcles to cut
out traction motor whon battery voltage Is
T t4V low and/or trip a warning device. Timing
J:11i11wr
circuit prevents sensor from responding to
short-duration voltage drops. Delay can be
set by R4 betwffn 15 and 40 s. Override
""" SI permits driving to nearest charging sta•
tion on low battery.-"Roctlfler Diodes,"
Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
The Netherlands, 1969, p 221.
I_ - - - . . - - - - _J
l"""'tC,..tWot.
0.6 QI
120W MCR·2918·1
MDA·972·1
--1
DI THRU D4
Q2
T1
21114871
117~11
60·6~
J
STANCOR
P·6379
12-V CHARGER CONTROL-Proteds battery -=- 12 v

from overcharging or reverse charging and 1111753
protects itself ond/or separate charging 6.2V
D5
supply from damage by short-circuits. Rated
at 16 A.-"Semlcenductor Power Circuits
p 6-41.
...._____ _____ _
4A
cwt put
4 A WITH CURRENT-LIMITING LAMPS-Circuit short is 7 A. 10.A fuse protocts against

'--+Mi-~tlloUtl is readily adapted for charging either 6·Y reverse connection of battory.-"Rectiflor
core :·E· oncrr icmrr'IQt.cns
siizt 90•109 sq mm or 12-V batteries from 115-V a•c lino. On Diodes," Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind·
stocking h•ight: llmm 220 V, maximum output current for direct haven, The Netherlands, 1969, p 217.
6°V CHARGER WITH I SO.MA TRICKLE-Siiicon

rectifiers in full-ave center-tapped connec•
tion provide 3.2 A for charging, with R2
limiting current to safe value if battery Is
dead. Two-transistor regenerative switch at
right opens sc:r when battery Is fully charged,
and passes 150-rnA trickle charge through
battery and indicator lamp. Rl is adjusted
K02103 so lamp just begins to brighten for fully
LOAD VOLTS-OC
charged battery (roadlng 7.15 V across its
CURRENT IS terminals).-"Slllcon Controlled Rectifier Ex·
NO CURRENT 0.8 perimenter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
2103 1961', p 76.
FROM OTHER INDICATOR SOURCES
TO BAT. TEST INDICATOR
- 1-
1
I
I
I
I
I
l·IN2069 AC
ISmAl
BAT
(65mAJ I
I
r
470 ..... \ I ,..BAT I ISV
OFF0!~5!1 + 34V
(CHARGE) 250f!-F
POWER
TOAC LINE
TO PS REGULATOR a
UNREGULATED CIRCUITS
PROTECTION FOR NICKEL-CADMIUM CELLS- BATIERY·FAILURE PROTECTION- Battery•

Usas constant-currant source to provide rec- charging circuit for 12-V nickel-cadmium
ommended maximum charge rate of 120 mA battery doubles as 12·V d-c power supply If
for small three-cell rechargeable nickel-cad· battery fails. With switch at AC, charger
mium battery, and simple series voltage regu• furnishes 5-mA trickle current to battery and
later for helding voltage limit down to 4.5 low-ripple IS.V d-c to regulator. With switch
V so maximum charge voltage of 1.5 V per at BAT, 820-ohm trickle-charge resistor Is
cell is never exceeded. Rl Is adjusted for shorted out and regulator operates directly
120 mA while output is shorted with ammeter from 12-V battery. Fast battery charging Is
having appropriate current range, and open• obtained by plugging In a-c line cord with
circuit voltago is similarly adjusted with R2 switch at BAT position. At BAT TEST posl·
and voltmeter across output.-R. M. Mann, tlon, battery Is checked while under load but
Battery Charger Protects Small Nickel.Cad· with a-c power romoved.-J. Collins and
mium Cells, "400 Ideas for Doslgn Selected W. Whitaker, Fall.safe Unit Operates from
from Eloctronlc Design," Haydon Book Co., NiCad Batteries or A.C Une, Efedronic Dedgn,
N.Y., 1964, p 210. Oct. 11, 1967, p 98 and 100.
Ul<P"
•t
ZT.I\
SELF-SWITCHING CHARGER-Automotically
turns itsolf on whon 12·V load-acid battory is
in nood of chargo, ond outomoticolly switches
itsolf off when battory is fully chorgod. CRZ
_,
INllH
Maximum chorgo currant is 5 A. To adjust,
connect ta fully charged battery ond sot Rl
to position at which charging lust stops TAIP
(ommoler drops to zaro).-Automaticolly Rog•
RI ,KLICTOl'I
ulatod Battery Charger, Gonerol Electric, Au-
burn, N.Y., No. 630.15. '°°"2•
UO«M
12 VOLT
IATTERT +
UNDER Cl
CNAltG[ .100,,1
ISVOC
RECTIFIED A. C.
VOLTAGE FROM
CHARGER
1
~_,.zl -----.--:ij~
12-V CLAMPED·EMITIER UJt SENSING-Will
not operate unless battery Is properly con-
nectod to charger. Charging stops when
- - - - + - - R 3 - - + -11- • zoner In ujt circuit senses theit battery Is prop•
orly charged. Triggering pulses for scr are
genoroted by 11jt oscillator when battor~ volt·
R 1•3,9K, l/2W SCR-MCR808·3 ago Is low,-"Zenor Diode Handbook,"
UJT•2N2646
R2-1K, POT. Motorola, Pheonix, Ariz., May 1967, p S-7.
T 1-PRl' 30T' #22
R3-5.1K, l/2W SEC, 4ST, #22
c 1-.2511f CORE: FERROX CIJBE
z1-IN'153, 6.2V 203F181-303
Tl
12o~va.:
AC
80 CPS
t CRI GE IN556
RZ •39tl UW I
SCRZ
SCR CHARGER FOR 12 V-Maximum charging 2"0t-...++19-il---+~~_,GEC5UOR
currant dopends on scr used for SCRl; article GE CI08Y
gives doslgn equations and dosign procedures R8
llC
for sovoral types of chargers for batteries
from 12 to 400 V.-D. R. Grafham, Regulated
Battery Chargors Using tho Siiicon Controlled T1 : - EAC •12.75 VRMS
Rectifier, General Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. (OPEN CICT ·)
200.33, 1967. 81L9.•l.2MH
G-E A44F
15-A CHARGER WITH REGULATOR-Charges

12-V battery from a-c line. Changes auto-
matlcally to trickle charge when battery
voltage reachos preset level, and starts
heavy charging again when voltage falls
below preset level, Ideal for use on trailors
SCR2 and boats, for emergency power systems, and
G-E
C6U for recharging automotive batteries.-f. W.
Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy Power
Semiconductor Applications, General Electric,
+50MF1>
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 7.
IK
25V.
Rg
IOK
12 VAT 5 A-Regenoratlve switch Q1-Q2 con-

ducts and tums on full-charge indicator lamp
whon battery Is charged to prodetermined
desired level of 14 Vas set by Rl. Regonera-
tive switch resets automatically whon charger
power switch Sl ls opon.-"Silicon Controlled
Rectifier Experimenter's Manual," RCA, Harri-
son, N.J., 1967, p 80.
t 3.9K
- !:YOLTAGE: + :
SOURCE:- ·-- _.,
l.. --·
OVER VOLTAGE RESET

, r- ------------------------,
UNDER
I
I
30VDC
UN REG.
VOLTAGE RESET I
~------------------~--=-,----. P.8. KHP17Dll
24VDC
I
I
IK _J
T , ,J
I
I
Kl t
CONTROL
I RELAY
I 2N696
--b- R1
3.0IK
2N358A tN752
4.7K
TD-I
IN2930
AUTOMATIC CHARGER SWITCH-Voltage de- tory Is disconnected from load when pro- values depend on voltages to bo detoctod.-
toctor circuit using tunnel diode operates relay selocted undervolta90 condition exists. Re- -H. Layte, Ideas For Desl9n, Electronic Design,
to disconnect charger at preselected battery peatability is within 0.1 V over temperature Au9. 30, 1965, p 44.
overvoltage value. In dlschar91 mode, bat- range of 32 to 90 F. Volta9o-clivlder network
C, - 500 microfarads, 25 •oils, clcc· R, - 4700ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%

trolytic R, g10,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, IO'lli
C: • 100 microfarads. 12 vollS, elcc· Ro • 150ohms, 1/2 watt. 10%
trolytic R, • 470ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
C.C, - 0.01 microfarad, ceramic R, - miniature trimmer control,
disc SOOO ohms, Mallory No. MTC·
CR1 through CR, ~ silicon rectifier, I or equivalent
RCA SKJOJO SCR, silicon controlled rectifier,
g
F, - fuse, I ampere, 125 volts RCASK2100

I 1 - lamp. No. 47 S, • switch, 125 volts. I ampere,
Q1 - 1ransis1or. RCA SK3005 single·pole, single-throw
Q, - transistor. RCA SK3020 T, transformer. primary 117 volts,
g
R, - 330ohms, l/2watt, 10% secondary 25 .2 volts at I

R: - adjustable resistor, 5 ohms. 10 ampere, Stancor No. TP-4 or
walls, 111% equivalent.
6-V CHARGER-For motorcycle ond photo· sensing circuil at right sa scr Is turned off for
flash storage batterios. Chorging roto of fully chargod battery, which Is 7 V for load•
I A is automatically termlnoted when battery acid bottories.-"Hobby Circuits Monual,"
is fully charged. Adjust R7 in vollag.. RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 114.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category af this chapter, use the index at tho back
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Soureebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 9
Bridge Circuits
CR4 Cll5 Cfl6

FOR
INDUCTIVE
117 VOLT
3PHASE LOAD
AC SUPPLY CR I CR3
60CPS.=__..__.......1--__,1--~_.,1--~~
ADJUST FOR LOAD
03 FIRING
SCRI SCR2 SCR3

THREE-PHASE SCR CONTROL-Simple throe·
transistor scr Rring circuit provides stepless
control of d-c output voltage of throe-phase
bridge betweon 25% and 100% of maximum
output voltage, or fram 40 to 150 V. With
93-V output for line voltage of 130 V a-c,
drop to 100 V a-c reduces d-c output only
1 V.-"SCR Manual/' 4th Edition, General
Electric, 1967, p 202-204. CAI - 131 G E IN1695 R4 - 1000
CR2 - 20 YOU, I WAl'T ZENER Dl00E, IN1~7 A5,R6 - 3900
CR!, CR4, CR!I, CR6 - AS REOUllED FOi LOAOl t 9 11121561 R7 - 3.31C,2W
SCAI, SCR2, SCR3 - AS AEOUIRm FOR LOAOl t g CS!IB I RS - 5000 POT, 2W
01, 03 - G E 2112646 02 - G E 2N2923 A9 -1000
RI - IOK POT RIO, Rll, Rl2 - 25 Q
R2 - 20K FOT Cl -O!IMFD
RS - 4700 C2 - 1.0 MFD
+15v
Ys1GNAL
-tSv
Oz, 04 ARE P1087 OR EQUIVALENT

0 1 , 03 ARE Ul899 OR EQUIVALENT Dt THRU 04 ARE IN3064 OR EQUIVALENT
COMPARATOR-CONTROLLED FET BRIDGE- output closely follows or inverts half of sino- Switchod FET's Rectify tho Full Wove, Elec•
Diodes have secondary role of simply switch· wavo input signal, to give full-wave roctiflca· Ironies, Aug. 3, 1970, p 76.
ing fet's. With zoro offset voltage for fet's, tion with no distortion.-l. Accardi, Diode-
84
BRIDGE CIRCUITS 85
R c
,-----,
I ----+--41--+---+--------+---<~ OUTPUT
0.1
IIR c 22MI lOK
IL ______
A
JI 2.2K WIEN-BRIDGE OSCILLATOR-Mosfet is used as
DC BIAS LOOP
r 0.1
-----, linear resistance whose value depends on
level of oscillator output signal. Increase in
I 1N697
I output level gives bias voltage for mosfet by
detoctian of poak negative value, for control-
I I ling gain in oscillator automatically.-C. R.
I I Perlcins, "Application of MOSFET Devices to
I 220
Eloctronlc Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach,
I
I HRN8318D
II Cal., 1968, p 29.
: I
'----------------_J
AGC LOOP
3BULBS ~4eOR 1149

2v, 0.06a, RATING
LAMPS REGULATE 1-V A·C-lnexpensive velt·

age-regulating bridge depends on ballast 6 3v
action of 2-V lamps operated at about 0.6 V CENTER
TAPPED
to give 1-V a-c output that varies only 0.25% UNREGULATED
for line voltage chango of 105 to 125 V. SUPPLY I
Regulation is Independent of frequency over VOLTAGE SOO·ohm

VOLTAGE
range of 25 to 800 Hz. Thermal inertia ADJUSTMENT
malces correction slow, so large input change
may require almost 1 s for full correction, but 300
this is usually not seriaus drawback. Bulbs
should bo soldered into circuit.-D. Kelly,
Small Lamp Bridge Regulatas Una Voltage, 200·ohm
SLOPE
Eloctronin, March 20, 1967, p 89-90. ADJUSTMENT
2.21( 120 2.21(
PHASE
CONTROL
lier stage. Circuit gives null of about -55

dB, permitting phase measurement accuracy
MEASURING PHASE AT 100 MHZ-Broad null B+ to within 0.1 deg in frequency range of 15
of conventianal balanced bridge is sharpened phase. Pentode types for V2 and V3 are not to 100 MHz.-R. 0. Goodwin, Unbalanced
in Teltronlcs PD-200 phase detector by using critical, and component values far tube cir• Bridge Slmpllflos Phase Measurements, Elec•
two similar channels exactly 180 dog out of cults are those of conventional pentodo ampll· tronic Design, Morch 15, 1965, p 52-53.
BALANCE ADJUST
OPAMP BIAS-Rasistor brldga interconnecting

two opamps eliminates serious bias problems
without regard for maximum common-mode
input voltago rating. Bridge is in balanco
at X and Y, so bias voltage can be pulsed or
continuously varied wilhout intorforing wilh
signal. Soparato floating and Isolated powar
supply is roquirod for oach opamp.-H. E. R2
Wobar, IC Oporational Ampliflors Salvo Bias IOk
Leval Problems, Electronic Design, Oct. 2S,
1969, p 109 and 111.
-1.:s5V
BATTERY
R6
r,-rECHNITROL No. 9~1166 OR EOUlV
470
SI OHM
SHUNT GATE-Uses CA3019 diode IC array
with diode bridge shunting load rosistance
and balancing out gating signal to provide
podestal-froo output. When gating voltage
Vg is of sulllciont amplitude, bridge conducts
for half of each gating cyclo and prevonts
THERMISTOR THERMOMETER-Will lndlcato on S0,000, and RS is 4,8SO ohms, with battery input signal Vs from reaching output. Gating
motor the temperature inside deop freeze, changed to 1.5-V marcury coll. Bath ranges voltage should be 0.8 to 1.2 V rms at 1 to
solution temperature In darkroom, or any use SO.µA d-c meter (GE type DW-91 having 100 lcHz, and input signal 0 to 1 V rms from
other temperature moasurablo with thermistor 1,500 ohms rosistance). Resistor values in d-c to 500 lcHz.-"Linear lntograted Circuits,"
that can be connected Into bridge-meter cir• bridge are critical. Calibrate with crushed RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 303.
cuit shown. For range of 32 to 122 F, RI Ice In watar and with calibrating resistors
and R2 are 1,000, R4 Is S,000, and RS Is supplied with thormlstor.-"Hobby Manual,"
9,500 ohms. For low•tomperature range of Gonoral Electric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 150.
-40 to +32 F, RI and R2 are 7,300, R4 Is
+lCV
••
tH
lRz
znsoo
,_, ~-.
U IOK
..--r---...-...,,.IV'----v(l'---<1-----i----1-t:: 1 ;; hoo
••
- -· - -.--· .. - -
/
/
~
IOK
5o~r
•• RS) Rio
..,
600A
220... SIC 4 fl '"u OUIPUl
LOW-DISTORTION WIEN-BRIDGE OSCILLA·

TOR-Used primarily for meosurlng distortion
in audio ampliflars wilhout using tuned flt.
tors. Delivers pure sino wavo with very low glvas maximum to m1n1mum frequency ratio quoncy range of 10 Hz to I 00 kHz.-"E·Line
distortion. Values of R3 and R4 determine of 11 :1, for small overlap on decade ranges. Transistor Applications," Ferranti Ltd., Old·
froquancy ratio covered on oach rango; I K Output Is 1 V rms into 600 ohms over fre- ham, Lanes., England, 1969, p 36.
BRIDGE CIRCUITS 89
.,,
...., .,, - .. ,
"'''r
.---T----t ml"•.·.__._'_''------.------~
BRIDGE BALANCE DmCTOR-De1i9n goal is
simplest circuit giving sufficient sensitivity and on .. •
"
linearity, since gain stability is unimportant
for application. Report gives design proce•
dure.-"E-Line Transistor Applications," Fer·
, ..
rantl Ltd., Oldham, Lanes,, England, 1969, p
3B. .
i?Ol
n:noo r.ooo
.
•••
'J
INPUT
SIGNAL
WEAK D·C SIGNALS-IC opamp with bridge

roctlfler and milliammeter provides high input
l1-TECHNllROL No 851166 OR EOUIV. impodance and high sensitivity for measuring
millivolt signals that can vary either way from
SERIES GATE-Uses CA3019 four-diode IC zoro. Motor reads upward regardless of
array in diode-quad bridge that balances input polarity. Full.scale sensitivity Is 1 V.
out undesired gating signal at output and Rl insures that meter overload will not exceed
reduces pedestal to extent that bridgo Is 5%. For measuring a-c: voltages, motor indi·
balanced. Gating voltage should be 1 to 3 catos average value of rectified waveform:
V rms at 1 to 500 kHz.-"Linoar lntegratod for rms readings, reduce R2 by 11 %.-J. P.
Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., lc.41, p 301. Budlong, Bridge and Ampliflor Monitor D-c
Level, Electronics, Sept. 2, 1968, p 71-72.
25v
56k 68k
+IOv
DIAMOND GATE-Used In Paramatrix system 8
for preprocessing analog Information, chiefly
photos and graphs, while converting to digital IN9648
signals under computer control. System can IN9648
enlarge or shrink picture, move it around, VIN
rotate it, correct blurs, and flll in gaps. Cuts
computer requirements by factor of 10. Can GATE I A
also be applied to automatic drafting. Artl• ;;;.:.:..:.~+--------.
cle presents theory and many block diagrams GATE 2
along with examples of results achieved.
A'
Circuit shown is used in lnterpolater, and re-
quires input signals at both gales beforo
diode bridge transmits analog voltogo.-W.
J. Poppelbaum, M. Faiman, and E. Carr,
Paramatrix Puts Digital Computer In Analog \Ok IOk 68k
Picture, And Vice Vorsa, Electronics, Sept. 4,
1967, p 99-108.
RESISTORS ± 5°1o EXCEPT AS NOTED
BRIDGE DIODES ARE SG5428 -25v
CHAPTER 10
Capacitance Control Circuits
TO RELAY
No.I
NO-PUSH El&VATOR BUTION-Flnger near

button, oven If glovad, actuates appropriate
relay in modarn elevator control 1y1tem and
turns on lamp behind button. Screen behind
button plclcs up hum signal from building
ground, capacitively couplocl through body of
person. This signal is pa11od to MEM511
mosfat which in turn makes GE C106 scr
turn on No. 1829 lamp and rolay.-F. G. Goll,
TO RELAY
MOS FET Talces tho Push Out of Elevator Push No.2
Button, Efecrronit1, Oct. 30, 1967, p 70-71.
DOWN
-TRANSLUCENT PLASTIC COMMON

d• 114" RETURN
OUTER PANEL
BRIOGE OUTPUT +350
0.02
I TO
µI B'
A
1"SORS
LIQUID LEVEL IN TANK-Movement of liquid

in glass gago tube outside tonic changes
50k
ono arm of bridge, which is first balanced by

adjusting C and R with liquid at top of tho
E A'
6AG7 tube. Article gives detection sensi·
tlvity for ton different liquids.-P. K. Mital,
capacitance betwoon liquid and metal-band two sonsor electrode rings. Bridge receives Capacitance Sensor Monitors Storod Uquid
sensor around glass. Sensor is connected in 1O.V excitation from 3.2·MHz oscillator using Lovola, Efoclronics, Ocl. 30, 1967, p 71-72.
90
CAPACITANCE CONTROL CIRCUITS 91
PROXIMITY SWITCH-Can be used for elevator

I _ GROUND call buttons, supermarket and other door con·
ANTENNA trolt, burglar alarm•, and other applications
I OR
I TOUCH
whero load is to be energized by momentary
~C2 BUTTON touch of finger on button. C2 represents
capacitance between touch button and ground
120VRMS I
60CPS I that is provided by body of person. Size of
I touch button or sensing plate depends on dis·
tanco to object being sonsed; If distance is
Cl small, as wilh touch control, sensing plate
IOpf need be no larger than a ponny. For latching
action, drive scr anode circuit only with d·c.-
D. R. Grafham, Using Low Currant SCR's, Gen-
eral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.19, 1967,
p 30.
Tl :- 117112.6 VOLT AUTO TRANSFORMER (OR FILAMENT TRANSFORMER}
+16111 o---------+-----
BODY-CAPACITANCE CONTROL-Blstable
neon mvbr is triggorod by momentary finger
contact with ON touch point, to pull In relay. VI, V3 • T2-Z7·WR500
Relay releases when other point is touched. V2, V4·5AB-B
V3
------1
Chief requirement Is sufficient capacitance be-
OFF
tween circuit and ground. With a-c/d-c ON
supply, ground side of power lino should ge TOUCH
POINT
1----• TOUCH
to circuit ground. With battery supply, larger POINT
touch points are needed and circuit ground
should be metal chassis.-W. G. Miller, "Using V4
and Undorstanding Miniature. Noon Lamps," 5.6meg
H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969,
p 74.
6.8K
GLASS I 0
Lt
TUBE l"---0
I
45OR12 Mhz I
200 ohms
23mo
Ct
3-12pf
tk
O.Olp.f
14T
-9v
LIQUID-SENSING CAPACITOR-Convontionol tube, increased dielectric constant of liquid pF between sensing point and ground.-J. K.
Hartley oscillator resonotos at 45 MHz when column changes capacitance enough to reduce Marsh, Two-Frequency Osclllator Detects Level
glass tube is empty. When liquid roaches frequency to 12 MHz. Circuit will trigger of Liquid, Electronics, March 20, 1967, p 90.
critical level inside metal bands surrounding reliably with differential capacitance of 0.1
PROXIMITY SWITCH-load is energized as

long as button of sensor plate capacitor C2
is touched. When button is released, lood Is
do-energized. latching adion can bo ob- r-
..._
tained by replacing CR1 with connection "i'C2
.__
shown as dashed line. Reset will then re- RI
quire auxiliary contact In series with SCRl. IOOK
Used for door sofoty controls and floor se• 120 VAC GE
60 HERTZ 2N2925
loctor buttons in elevators, supermarket door (Oii
GEC1068
control, safe monitor In banks, flow switches, Cl SCRI
and conveyor counting systems.-"SCR Man• I0-
20pt
val," 4th Edition, General Eledric, 1967, p IK
169.
LINE
R1
47K
100-W A.C PROXIMITY SWITCH-High sonsi·
LOAD t~vity of D13T2 programmable ujt mokos trig•
goring of circuit possible with only about 10
pf capacitance between sensing electrode and
115V ground. This means that finger doos not
60'\I TO hove to touch sensing button, Circuit is non•
...+------'VV.,__ SENSING
ELECTRODE latching, and will thereforo open when body
or othor capacitance is romovod. R4 adjusts
sensitivity. Applications include counting
freshly painted objeds moving past on con•
NEUTRAL veyor lino.-E. K. Howell, Small Scale Inte-
gration in low Cost Control Circuits, General
Eledric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.9, 1968, p 19 •
9V
• SI
:•
r-----~-- -- -r~-=~~-~~=~ ~~ R:S
IK
-------- - --
R2
4.7K
RI
HOA
+
c.g;;
-·
-1 '------- - - - - -------------------------------- ____________________ J
INTRUSION DETECTOR-Responds to change
in capacitance between sensor antenna (JI)
tion coll to intruder. Antenna may be dee•
orotivo metal art object. For fail-safe opera·
against burglars in stores, antenna can bo
sofa or cash rogistor.-L E. Garner, Jr., The
and ground when person Is within sovoral tion, Q3 may be biased to energize relay Amazing "People Detodor," Popular Efoc•
foet of antenna, to energize relay that trips under normal conditions. Prosenco ef in· froni", June 1968, p 27-32 and 93.
local or remote alarm, turns on lights, sum- truder or failure of power will then roleaso
mons guard, or applies output of auto lgni• rolay and sot off alarm. For protedion
CAPACITANCE CONTROL CIRCUITS 93
12VOLTS
TOUCH SWITCH-Can be used to turn on or

off variety of circuits, depending on typo af
relay used. Touching motal plate, which
should be kept close to gate of fet, operates
rolay.-"Tips on Using FET's," Motorola,
Phoenix, Ariz., HMA-33, 1969.
+Vee• 35v I • FOOT SENSOR WIRE
llE?"
Tl
INPUT Ct
O.tµ.f
Cl
y
M
-Vee
1,000:1 VARIABLE CAPACITOR-Potontiomoter PROXIMITY DETECTOR-Turns on light when

RI, buffered on both sidos by complementary person approaches sensor wire. R2 should
emitter-followers, reducos effective value of be well Insulated because it Is connected to
fixed capacitor Cl over much greater ronge one side of power line when at lower end of
than with conventional varlablo capacitors. range. Values are: 11 10-W lamp1 Tl Stan-
Useful for capacitive tuning of tank circuits cor P-61341 DI 125-V 65-mA selenium recti-
over wido frequency ranges.-J. Gaon, Feed· fier1 Cl 10 µF; RI 39K; R2 ISK pot; R3 3.9
back Turns Fixed Capacitor Into Variable meg.-R. M. Brown, "104 Slmplo One-Tube
Capacitance, Electronics, Nov. 28, 1966, p Projects," Tab Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa.,
8~1. 1969, p 144.
+5v to 20v
COPPER
10Verr l\J
PLATED 02
BOARD BFY64
2khz
o, OUTPUT
2N3819
R1 R9
4.7k I Ok
SOFT-TOUCH CONTROL-Two·eloctrodo cop·

per•platod button acts os copacltor In R·C controls triggering sensitivity of circuit and
reactive bleoder circuit connocted to 2-kHz trl99erlng level. Moy bo used for elevators,
10-V source. With button not touched, fet Q1 touched, Its capacitance Increases about five typewriters, and computers.-F. Minder,
ond transistor Q2 are off and output Is at times, triggering both transistors on and glv· Touch-Activated Switch Built With Copper•
ground or logic zero. When button is ing positive output voltage or loglc one. Pot Plated Board, flectronlcs, Sept. 1, 1969, p 79.
GllOUllD SIDE DF llTV LINE
I
• .&.. +20Vdc
c.,L.-c:?!TACT
~- TO TOUCH
INPUT
moved, capacitor is charged by IC and rolay

TOUCH ALARM-When intruder touches metal TOUCH SWITCH-Fingar in depression of stays energized for about I 0 s until charging
plate or other metal object connected to free switch plate discharges capacitor and oner• current drops below threshold cun"ent of am•
end of Rl, scr is triggered on and alarm is gizos double Darlington amplifier driving rood plifler.-J. H. Still, Time Delay Touch Switch
energized. May bo connectod to doorknob, switch. Relay remains energized as long as Uses Body Stray Voltage, Electronic De1i9n,
metal screon door, foil strip on window sill, flnger makes contact. When flngor is re· July 19, 1967, p 106.
or other metal object that is not too Iorgo.
Object must not be grounded through build·
ing structure, because alarm doponds on
change In capacitonco between RI and
ground. Alarm stops whon touch contact Is
brokon.-R. F. Graf, Build Low-Cost Touch
Alarm, Popular Electronics, Fob. 1969, p 92- R3 CONTACT
93. 01 PLATES
TOUCH CONTROL-Lamp, appliance, tv, or power to lamp or other appliance plugged ing: if R3 is shorted or much smaller resistor
stereo set can bo turnod on simply by touch· Into socket. Once fired, VI stays on ond used, circuit can be dangerous for one pasi•
ing two small pieces of tin foil or motal with relays remain anorgizod until power from o-c tion of plug because one contact plate goes
finger to bridge gap betwoon them. Uses line is interrupted. Values are: DI 125-V to a-c line.-R. M. Brown, "104 Simple Ona-
grid-glow tube. Relays are 2.SK. Whan VI 65-mA selenium rectifier; Cl 0.47 µF; C2 2µF; Tube Projects," Tab Books, Blue Ridge Summit,
pulls in Kl, its contocts pull In K2 to opply RI 27; R2 110K; R3 1.1 meg; R4 110K. Warn· Pa., 1969, p 140.
TOUCH SWITCH-Body capacitance is sulll· will handle up to 150 W. Alternate touches improve oporation.-J, Bachtold, TC Switch
cient to trlggor scr through neon and oner• of metal plate will turn load on and off. For Remote Control, Popular Eledronic1, April
gize load through IC and triac 01, which Ravening lino cord plug at wall outlet may 1970, p 52-55.
CHAPTER 11
Cathode-Ray Circuits
1000 1N964B +25 v

SWEEP GENERATOR-Uses OEI Model 5245
J
Log~ OSCIU.OSCOPE voltage-frequency transducer having output
A11pt tfter frequency range of 10 Hz to 100 kHz for in-
0
\
put of 0 to 5 V. Output is pseudo-sinusoidal,
adequate for driving L-C and R-C filter-type
networks under tost (NUT}. OEI 547 fre-
quency-voltage transducer has log response,
with d-c: output equal to log of input over
100 frequency range of 1 Hz to 100 kHz. Ujt
generates low-frequency sawtooth that slews
-25 v output frequency of 5245 over entire audio
I.
spectrum. Arrangemont givos log-log dis-
1N play on cro, but with modifications will give
964 lin-lin display.-A Wide Range Sweep Gen-
B erator, Optical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No.
10100.
+~v
+l!>Y -~v +t!>V
Roe
TA9
8'W4!'>
_L.f.12811
x, +4'1
150-MHZ CRO HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION

-60'1
AMPLIFIER-Provides linear 13-cm deflection,'
with provision for expanding selected portion
of trace tenfold. Writing speod of 5 ns/cm "2• C3
is available at maximum rate of output. Cir•

cult Is broadly symmetrical, with long-tailed
t-:J..
pairs used In all stages.-K. Hart and F. G.
--
Oude Moleman, Horizontal Deflection Ampli- ~.f.f28V
flor for 150 MHz Oscilloscopes, Mulford Tech· •2 .t-4V
nlcal Communications, Sept. 1968, p 167-174.
0
••5 . ·
'"i t
• ':>V ••'JV
01
9AY38
02
8AY)8
R1 1·5kn, tW R11 3·9k!1, tW , Ra1 3·3k11, 5·5W

Ra 5 k!l, pot. w.w. R12 75 0, tW,:: 1% Ra2 3·3kn, 5·5W
Ra 7·5kn, tW R13 1 kn, tW 680 n,
Raa tW
R4 2·4kn, tW R14 7·5k0, tW R2468 0, tW
Rs 910 n, tW R1s 7·5k0, tW R2s18 kn, 5·5W
Re 910 n, tW R1s 1 kn, tW 250 n,
Ria pot. w.w.
R1 1·8kn, tW R1; 2·2kn, 1W C1 50 µF, 25V
Re 1·8kn, tW R1e 15 kn, tW C2 50 µF, 25V
Ro 750 n, tW, ±1 % Rm 20 kn, 1W, =1% C3 470 pf, 700V
Rio 3·9k!l, tW R2o 20. kn, 1W,=1%
95
+1av
IOK
c2
56pF
Oz
2N706
C3 O.lµF
.OlµF
R4 Rz OUTPUT
R5
IK 56 IK
AUTOMATIC TRACE INTENSITY CONTROL- output voltage decreases in direct proportion

Difforontlating circuit, with output feodlng to frequency. Gain control R1 is used to
cathode of crt, gives incroased gain at high balance Intensity initially for vertical and
frequoncies to compensate for loss of bright• horizontal deflections.-W. J. Godsey, Differ•
noss. With input of 50 mV rms, output Is 17 ontiatlng Ampllflor lntonsifles Scope Trace,
V peak above 100 MHz. Below 100 MHz, EEE, Jan. 1967, p 115-116.
-
20011A D-C RESTORER WITH POSITIVE CRT GRID
DRIVE-Used with inexpensive D7·190 crt In
oscilloscope having bandwidth up to 10 MHz.
Brightness control adjusts grid drive ovor
range of 2 to 36 V during unblanking periods.
Values are: R1 1 mag; R2 470K; R3 120K; R4
+fOOV
4.7K; R6 22K; R7 1K; R8 100; R9 470; Rll
1SK; RE, RC ISK; Cl, C2 180 pf; C3 3.3 nF; C4
16 µF; CS 6.4 µ.F; D1, D2 BAX16; D3 OA79;
D4 BZY95/C7S; TR1 8SX21; TR2 BC187.-G.
W. Broekema, A New CRT-Grid Drive Circuit
Using D. C. Restoration of the Unblanklng
Signal, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
haven, The Netherlands, No. 326, 1968.
c.r.t. circuit
L__:_~l~los~ope _ _ _ - · - __ ·-·-
E1N - - - - - - - .
25·35V R1
330
+12V
01
C2 FOCUS
68
--+90V 11F COIL
C3 1N914
4711F
-+60V R , 1.8_v .
R4 S IFO(US
<D R3
2.2k 2 2k PRECISION
SAMPLE
RESISTOR
-+4.2V
FOCUS CURRENT REGULATOR-Regulates con•
trol current through focus coil of cathod~·ray
~
J +36V
_+6V
-+4.2V
@ tube. Use of separate supply for National
Semiconductor IC current regulator makes It
unnecessary to restrict unregu1ated Input
voltage to maximum 30.V rating of IC. Line
C2 regulation is better than 0.02% and lead
regulotion better than 0.05%. Intended for
brightness
JLI[_
pulse output"""'····•••• ·IOV
focus coils within 10% of 400 ohms and
maximum focus current of 50 mA.-W. G.
Jung, An Efficient Focus-Currant Regulator
control stage
-·40V Using the LM300, EEE, Feb. 1969, p 113-114.
CATHODE-RAY CIRCUITS 9'1
+25v
DISPLAY-CHANGING FET SWITCH-Permits

displaying three or more signals in rapid se-
quence on cro. Monostable multivibrators,
one for each input signal, are connected so
each one drives the next in closed loop.
Mvbr output is timing signal for Q2, which
In turn controls fet switch.-P. Thompson, A
Single-Channel 'Multltrace' Scope, Electronics,
Sept. 29, 1969, p 113-114.
TIMING +5v
INPUT~
+5v
+60V
I ·h.t..----.-..---+-llH+--...........--~
,,.-;_,
I
I
cs
I
I
I cr.t.circu1t ...__...,.._
Lin~cilloscope _
HIGH-VOLTAGE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL FOR

POSITIVE GRID-D-c restorer circuit for 1O-
01 MH1 cro having positive crt grid drivo is
C1 simple in design, easy to adjust, relatively
hum·froo, and uses only inexpensive capaci·
..... tors. C6 bypasses chopped signal around

brightness control Values are: Rl 1 meg;
R2 470K; R3 lOOK; R4 4.7K; R6 12K; R7 lK;
-····u--+SOV RI 100; R9 470; Rll, RE, RC 15K; Rl2 470K,
-•20V Cl, C2 180 pf ceramic 2,000 V; C3 3.3 nf;
....,.......11Wow.u.w.u.w.u.11WJ·~ +4V C4 16 µf; CS 6.4 µf; C6 22 nF; DI, 02 BAX·
16; 03 OA79; D4 BZY95/C75; TRI BSX21;
TR2 BCl87.-G. W. Broekema, A Now CRf.
Grid Drive Circuit Using D. C. Restoration of
CJ
R11~
n tho Unblanldng Signal, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Elndhovon, The Netherlands, No.
326, 1968.
C2
r---'
pulse output"'·· .•••• ILJ1___- -10V
pos.or neg.
biossource stage
--40V
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE ROTATOR-lnexpen·

sivo two-port nogative-impodance converter
varios characteristic curve of component by
revolving it about an origin. Oscilloscope at
input port display• rotatod characteristic PORT I PORT 2
curve, as aid to designer in building now cir· SHORT- OPEN-
CIRCUIT 20 CIRCUIT
cuits having functions not attainable with STABLE STABLE
conventional component1. Article gives de- 2N 1132 2Nll32
sign criteria and equations for R, L, and C
12
rotators and oxamplas of curves that can bo
obtalned.-L. O. Chua, A Good Turn for Old
Components, E/edronic1, May 29, 1967, p
109-122. 300 47k 300
IOOk
-=- ":'
+20v
-
200iiA
·60V Lh.t.------·--y---..
I
I
C6
I
I
I c.r.t.circuit L...--r--e
L_in~c~scope _
01
Cl
HIGH-VOLTAGE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL-D-c
restorer circuit for crt having negative grid
··--1 drive controls brightness at high-voltage level.
Chopper supply voltage is only 60 V, because
~------- chopping pulses are not varied in magnitude
by shifting chopped signal. Instead, chopped
signal varies symmatrically about center of
available celledor voltage swing for TR1.
Values aro: R1 1 mag; R2 470K; R3 100K; R4
4.7K; R6 12K; R7 1K; RS 100; R9 470; R11,
RE, RC 1SK; R12 470K; C1, C2 180 pf ceramic
2,000 V; C3 3.3 nF; C4 16 µ.F; CS 1 µ.F; C6 22
nF; D1, D2 8AX16; D3 OA79; 04 BlY95/C30;
TRI AF118; TR2 BF194.-G. W, Brookema, A
New CRT-Grid Drive Circuit Using D. C.
CZ Restoration of the Unblanking Signal, Philips,
......____ _ Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhaven, Tho
Netherlands, No. 326, 1968 .
.---~---. JLJ1-+40V
pos. or ne!I. pulse output
bias source stage - +10V
CATHODE-RAY CIRCUITS 99
27K
-780 v CRT
IOOK
T2-32•1 0.1
200V
PILOT LIGHT AND BIAS RIGULATOR-Slngle
neon lamp acts both as pilot light and 01 bias
350K regulator for grid 1 of the crt.-E, Baum111n,
FOCUS
"Applicatlons of Neon Lamps and Gas Dis·
470K char90 Tubes," Sl9nalite, Neptune, N.J., p 151.
':"
Vertical Yoke
Vertical
Ramp Rll
DYNAMIC FOCUS CORRECTION-Uses four Rim
OEI 5122 low·lovol four-quadrant analog
vz Vertical Yoke
Current Sampling
multipliers feedln9 9125 apamp to produce v RHlstor
output equal to sum of squares of vertical 5122
and horizontal position volta9H, for apply·
ing olthor to appropriate 9rid of crt or to
dynamic focus coll located on neck of crt.
Circuit also provides dynamic doftoction cor•
roction by placing suitable nonllnoar transfer lOK lOK lOK
function in feodback loop of doflectian am•
pllflor. Will operato at up to 15 kHz hori•
zontal dofloction rates. Values of input
summinu resistors should bo compatible with
deflection ampllflers used (VDA and HDA).- ya + Ha
5122 5122 H
Dynamic Focus Correction With Analo9 Fune•
tion Modules, Optical Electronics, Tucson, Dynamic Focus
Correction
Ariz., No. 10127.
Rim Signal
Horlzontalo----""11J\l'"-.,_------i
Ra111p Horizontal
Yoke 0
Horl:r.ontal Yoko
Current Sampling
Realstor
7.Sk.n +ISV
A
Z1 of the driver stage
+ISV HORIZONTAL PREAMP-Used In wldo-band

cro having maximum sweep rate of 5 ns per
cm. lncludH switch for expandln9 chosen
shift. port of horizontal scan ten times. Symmetri·
Sk'1 col omiHer·fallowor stages provide required
-1sv--c=J-+30Y -ISV impedance transformation without distortion
of sawtooth input or horllontal shift lnput.-
F. G. Oudo-Malemon and K. Hart, A Transis-
torized Horizontal Deflection Amplifier for
Z; of the driver stage
Wido-Band Osci1101cope1, Phillps, Pub. Dept.,
1.Skn
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Notherlonds, No.
317, 1967.
+15VOC
9 60p.o +300 v
R1
330k
eOI eo2
62K
2.2p.t
,
1,.i
INPUT
1M
o-t----1
150pf
R2
tOk
-=
1001(
R3
430
MILLION-MEG SCOPE PROBE-Insulated-gate

-= ":"" -:"
fet as input stage of oscilloscope probe gives PARAPHA5E AMPLIFIER-Adding transistor

unusually high input impedance of 1,000,000 alimlnates need for negative supply voltage
mog in parallal with 2 pF, although at ox• and improves balanco of output signal ampli·
ponsa of higher output noise than when using tudes for electrostatic cathode-ray tubas.-P.
junction fet in probe. Gain Is unity.-E. J. Salomon, Transistor Replaces Supply in CRT
Kennedy, FET Used For Unity-Gain, High· Amplifier, Electronics, Nov. 13, 1967, p 102-
Impedance Scope Probe, Electronic: Design, 103.
Aug. 30, 1965, p 46-47.
RI A4 HG R9 Rl2 Rll
271( 2.2 K IOK 4.7 K 1001( IOK
100 Pf' 330PF
C7
R5
IOOK
I MHZ OSC +s
01, 02, 0.\-IN277
QI. Q2, Q3, Q4, Q~. Q6,
QU, Ql3-2N3394
Q7, Q8, Q9-2N2646
QtO, QI 1-2N3638 RO
100
I JI SEC·A
5}1 SEC·B•
10 p SEC-Ce R24
013 Qll
47K
100 pSEC·D•
1000 p SEC·E e SI
J0,000 p SEC·F e
SWITCH -=-1av
"=- BATTEllY
TIMING OUTPUT 4.TK R29

SWITCH· SELECTED,
LOW·DUTPUT Z
OUTPUT BATTERY +10 +10
BUFFER REGULATOR
TIME-MARK GENERATOR-Uses 13 transistors
to provlda accurate calibration points of 1, accuracy is provided by 1-MHz crystal oscil· regulated power supply is used.-R. G. Tee•
5, 10, 100, 1,000, and 10,000 µs for colibrat• lotor Ql. Regulator transistors QlO and ter. Scope Sweep Generator, Electronics World,
ing horizontal sweep of oscilloscope. Primary 011 can be omittad if mercury battery or Feb. 1967, p 8~1.
osc
50
':'"
eow
SWEEP ':"
INPUT
4,7pf
100
tOOK
SUPERIMPOSED TIMING SIGNAL-Circuit ap-
plies known fixed frequency (in range of 5 IK
to 200 MHz) from crystal oscillator to hori-
zontal sweep of crt being used for displaying
burst data, for accurate measurement of dura-
• TO
CRT
tion, amplitude, and steepness of pulse traco.
tK
Transformer usod hos several different cores,
to permit changing oscillator without having
to change tunod r·f transformer. Value of 2:3 IOpf
Rs Is chosen to protod transformer from max- 100
lmum 20-W power of oscillator.-P. Allen,
Mufti-Core Transformers Boost Bandwidth,
':" ~
Electronic Design, Feb. 3, 1964, p 31>-32. SWEEP
INPUT
SYNC. INPUT
TO - -......~......r---~
CHANNELB t--..----1........A
CLOCK
lf'PUT
MODULO 10 COUNTER
1001 0000
t1 t, •t0 +906
OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAY
CODED REFERENCE WAVEFORM-Pulse gener- be measured directly by projeding loading Following four bit positions determine most
ator connoctod to sync Input of cro con be edge of pulse down to reference waveform significant digit In hexadecimal code. Two
driven either by master clock of digital sys- and reading delay in increments of clock (in more four-bit decimal codes follow.-J. L.
tem or by any external signal source. If µs if clock Is I MHz). Reference waveform, Nichols, Reference Waveform Adds to Scope's
period in seconds of reference waveform Is as generated by IC units shown, has long Measuring Capability, Elodronics, Doc. 22,
known, thon delay in pulse on cro trace con pulse marking beginning of each period. 1969, p "-78.
1·~·.n +l!>V
A to,
':" BS><lO ~--'\J'>/1.1\,...-
62K m.1
O.OOIJ-Lf
I~ 2N2601
R3 OUTPUT TO
Rz 5K OSCILLOSCOPE
Y---"""Ylo-----""""--r-i
2K
f~IMag
500M R1
39K .J_
20pf , -
L-1
*
68K
60JoLAt
+15VDC
1,201>-MEG SCOPE PROBE-Bootstrap action of CRO HORIZONTAL PREAMP-In·

transistor pair gives effective input lmpodanco clud~s phase Inverter, provisions for X-expan·
of 1,200 mog In parallel with 3.5 pf for slon and shift, and sumclont output for driver
unity-gain probe to be used in oxtromoly high stage of horizontal ampliflor in oscilloscope
Impedance circuits. Can handle up to 2-V having sufficient bandwidth for detailed study
input signals of either polarity without ap- of fast transients. Requires sawtooth with
preciable distortion. Low power drain of 3.26 V p•p and pealc current of 3.58 mA at
input fol permits battery operatlon.-E. J. input going to base of TRl.-K. Hart and F.
Kennedy, FET Used For Unity-Gain, High-Im· G. Oudo Moleman, Horizontal Doftoction Am·
pedanco Scope Probe, Elodranic Design, Aug. plifler for 150 MHz Oscilloscopes, Mul/ard
30, 1965, p 46-47. Technical Communications, Sept. 1968, p 167-
174.
si.es
sin Iii
r----i
IOOK
cos ljl
sties
S229
33K
R
R Is • :1:10 volt
DC to 100 kHz
16 slgnol.
2 sties
100K
360°
,, o-----t
s ln·co 100K
cos p
sties 16 S229
X • R sin (ljl + p) • R (slntcasp + cos•slnp)

Y • R cos (t + p) • R (cosljlcosp - slnljlslnp) 33K
PPI TO X·Y SCAN CONVERTER-Polar Input orator and other modulos shown, In accord•
from radar ppl display consists of azimuth put voltages X and Y, each up to 10 V full· anco with trig rolationshlp given below circuit.
heading angle psi, direction angle rho of scale In either polarity, are derived from -Polar Coordinates to Rectangular Coordl·
radar antenna with respect to direction of polar coordinates with OEI sine function natH Scan Converter, Optical Eloctronlcs,
target travel, aad range ar distance R. Out• modulos in 36D-dog sine-cosine function gen- Tucson, Ariz., No. 10155.
-22V
RANGE GATE
- 4 - - - 1 1--~- INPUT
47K
+22V
20K
7K
INPUT
20I<
INPUT OUTPUT
SINWI x
COSWI y
PPI SWEEP GENERATOR-Two Fairchild IC that is diode-clamped to zero until rango-gate

opamps connected identically far X and Y pulse arrives and allows sweep waveform to
axos (only ono shown) gonorato waveforms start. Values shown give sovoral thousand
roqulrod for radial plan position indicator dis· radial sweeps for 4D-rpm antenna.-D. E. Lan-
play. Advantages aro high linearity, uniform caster, The Integrated Operational Amplifier:
bilateral integration, rapid resat time, and A Versatile and Economical Circuit, "Micro-
sufficient output for dofloction driver. IC electronic Design," Haydon Boole Co., N.Y.,
opamp is connoctod as independent integrator 1966, p 189-194.
r,
lllGH
+\s VOLTAGE
12'
0.3 omps 03
l IN964B
1-...;....---'N.;..T..;;,ERLOCK
Vt
_L
CilT
Flt..A'11S'.JT
---. 6,3V
Dz
o,
IN750A r--
1
---1
o,
2Nt7tf
I
I
IN754A - - -, R3 I
:I 4,7K I
I I l I
RI
,9 I I L:. - - - _.:. __ _JINVERTER 1
I I
- L::. - _ _ .:.. _ _ _J INVERTER 2
PROTECTIVE INTERLOCK-Protective circuit is system faults: (1) Low filament supply volt· food lines.-K. E. Sprln9er, Interlock Protects
activated, to prevent application of hl9h volt· a9e; (2) Hi9h filament supply volta9e; (3) Display Tube, Eloctronics, Sept. 19, 1966, p
age to cathode-ray tubo, for four possible Open filament feed lines; (4) Shorted filament 125-126.
TRANSIENT-WIDENING NETWORK-Simple, in- most completely in 400 ns and holds its charge
expensive differentiator and voltage doubler for over 200 p.s to give at laast 500-to·1
together serve to detect and widen narrow widening and brightening of scape trace.-P.
and fast nonrepetitivo transients that may lefforts, Differentiatar-Dlvider Network Ana•
accur an either side of a-c power line. Stor- lyzes Power-line Transients, Electronic Design,
age capacitor at right of diodes charges al- Dec. 6, 1965, p 52 and 54.
33k 33k
12k
~
D
INPUT A
E0 , S s --
1M
R2
10k 10k
': RANGE ATTENUATOR

101110.
Rl
10k 10k
INPUT B
s Bk
Ee,. S D
1M
.....,_________"" ae
12k OUTPUT B
33k 33k 30k
--
LOW.COST CRO VERTICAL PREAMP-Boot•
strapping af differential fet·input preamp 1200 series low-frequency oscilloscopes. terminal of input fet, virtually nullifying am-
gives common•mode·rejectian ratio of over Transistor types are not given In articlo. plification of this signal.-J. E. Kluge, Boot·
100,000 to 1 (I 00 dB), fram d-c to 10 kHz. With unity-gain bootstrapped preamp, com• strapped Preamp Exhibits High CMRR, EDN,
Doslgnod for uso in Howlett-Packard Model mon•mode signal appears equally on oach Mar. I, 1970, p 61-62.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use tho index at the back
of this book. Check also tho author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 12
Chopper Circuits
DC INPUT>-------
4.3K
-Vno4-------11--J--
s1op•
lOK IOK
1.,..
OUTPUT
.002 SERIEs-SHUNT CHOPPER-Series switch QI
r~·
and shunt switch Q2 are driven by astable
mvbr Q3.Q4 for detection af signal levels at
low as 30 p.V and ampliflcation by opamp.
... Demodulator 05 Is simple series switch. Ar-
rangement gives stable and accurate detec•
tion of very small d-c si9nals.-C. R. Perkins,
"Application of MOSm Devices to Electronic
Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968,
p 22.
All switch resistor values to be

witllln a tolerance of ~1·1.
9MA
A.C.
AMPLIFIER
~~~25/F~O~f_F_..-t'-----~
-2k~
soo,,v·---
1oopv. ____:~--»F---:=:-~
IOOnA
200nA----<1
VR2
10kA
S/'A
so,A---
sool'A
INPUT ov
BALANCED CHOPPER-Used hero as comblna•
tion mlcrovoltmeter and microammeter. A-c noise less than 10 p.V refarrod to input. 12 V at about 35 mA. Accuracy depends on
amplifier can be dlscroto components or IC Chopping frequency is 1.5 kHz. Input imped• Initial adiustment procedure, as given in ro-
ance on voltage ranges Is 10 mos per V. port.-E0Une Transistor Applications, Ferranti
having power gain of 86 dB, bandwidth of
20 Hz to 150 kHz at 3 dB down, and p•p Requires regulated power supply providing Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969, p 46.
105
r----------------------------1
a, 2or I 111
INPUT l.5k 2N3706 Ill 1N294A I CHOPPER·DRIVER-Swltche1 at rotas from d·c
-3, -II Vdc '~? Ill I to 10 kHz, with output completely Isolated
Ill I from Input control 1i9nal just 01 In conven•
....._____. . . m
Ill
41
Ill
'~? I
I tional relay. QI Is IO·MHz common°ba1e
oscillator receiving bias from Input logic slg·
nals. Rectified and flltored transformer sec•
62V Ill 8T
_ _ _ _ ___,Ill .---02- -~.3 ondary voltage controls bipolar switch 02·
Q3 having ON resistance of about 20 ohms
I 2111.3706 2N3 706 and OFF leakage below 1 p.A. Transformer
2.2k
100
pf'
I Is wound on Arnold A4-134P toroidal coro.-
I J. E. frockar, Solld State Relay, EEE, June
0
-------- ---- __ j 1967, p 136.

-12 Vdc
DC INPUT~---.....,
47K IOOK
D-C MODULATOR-Useful for modulating or
chopping low-level d-c signals for further am•
plification or for detection of d-c level. left·
hand pair of mosfets forms astable mvbr 22M
whose period of oscillation is determined by
values of R and C used. Mvbr output drivos
simple shunt mosfet chopper switch, while
mosfet at right provides signal gain and 14-~---i•AC
transforms high impedance of chopper to low OUTPUT
impedance for a-c output.-C. R. Perkins, "Ap-
plication of MOSFET Devices to Electronic Cir· HRN83180
cuits," Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968,
p 21.
MULTIVIBRATOR L--c~~-.....1 AC AMPLIFIER
o,
2N2432
IN914
Q~
D
12v
m
2N2432
02
2N2946
1N914
BALANCED CHOPPER MODULATOR-Connect· synchronous modulators and demodulators.
Ing transi~tors in inverted mode givos much Q4
Chopper transistors produce saturation volt•
lower offset voltago, oliminates need for 2N2946 ages of 2 to 4 mV, as compared to 0_2 to
matched transistor pairs, and operates with 0.4 V for other modulator designs.-R. C.
only one secondary winding on transformer. Scheerer and J. logls, Inverted-Mode Transis-
Useful in chopper-stabilizing amplifiers, f-m tors Give Chopper low Offset, E/ectronlcs,
oscillators, regulated a-c power supplies, and March 30, 1970, p 96.
CHOPPER OIROUITS 107
22K O.I~ DC
o~...~-U"'T"""---1~R-1n-t•L~L.JAA1 N•::, o.ipt
OUTPUT
TOTAL
GAIN•
-100
7ftl.O •4mr
.!l+Q.2 0
Al
lllK
FET CHOPPERS GIVE GAIN OF 100-lnput fet

chopper Is driven by sine wave, and output LAMP DRIVER FOR CHOPPER-Used with full-
by 4-V p-p squaro wave. Input current is wavo laboratory-typo photoolodric chopper
loss than 20 pA, input impedance Is 33K, ampliftor. lamps are noons.-The Dual Pho-
and offset Is less than 4.5 p.V at room tem- tocell, Howlett Packard, No. 924.
perature. Any IC ampliflor having gain of
1,000 can be usad.-DC Ampliflor With FET
Chopper, Electronic Design, April 13, 1964, p
66.
CHOPPER STABILIZATION-Four mosfet's in

double-twin lCl·kHz chopper are used to
stabilize opamp integrator to give required
accuracy of 0.1%, increase gain of opamp,
and reduce drift. Integrator operates in 2
minutes for standard slow computing time,
and in repetitive periods of 100, 50, 25, 12.5,
10, 5, and 2.5 ms for fast operation. Overall
gain of chopper-stabilized opamp is 125 dB
and Input Impedance Is 20K. Used in IC ana-
log computer.-K. Kurokawa, All-IC Hybrid
Computer Eliminates tho Patchwork from Pro-
graming, E/odronics, March 17, 1969, p 100-
107•
..rlJ"U"L
10·khz SQUARE WAVE
IO·khz SQUARE WAVE
tOk tk
FULL-WAVE PHOTOELECTRIC-Uses pair of

dual photocells In push-pull for both modula-
tor and demodulator, to minimize noise for
laboratory applications.-Tho Dual Photocell,
Howlett Packard, No. 924.
'·'
fW()HP~1"6tO-S
WJ 10<
2'1248' 2N2484
12M 4709' Wo!
•••
FAST SWITCH-Chops analog signals by using o,

output of pulso•savlng notwork (C1 ·D1) to 2N2608
switch fot on and off, without introducing
common•modo noiso. Pulse transformer can
maintain 6-V on or off sign a ls for over 100
ms. Transformer is Pulse Englnoerlng Co.
model 2228.-C. A. Walton, Pulse-Saving Net·
t
ei •ANALOG
work Permits Signal Switching, Electronics, VOLTAGE
Sept. 18, 1967, p 108-109.
I
+ l.3!>V
f iMTl
- ~C!~D-!,~_S.§_RVO MOTOR
\REF CELI. IK ,,.··""
" i"° g, IK
:><1-="""----C, Bl
~
~· T ~
9l!:!!!!Q!:
0
.•
83
84 C4
_____
C3
,'''\.
C2
_,
.
I SERVO-DRIVEN PEN-Uses potentiometrlc
:.4 llN SOCKET) metering system, in which input voltage is
:;: continuously compared with reference voltage
I
I from mercury cell by moans of 3-turn slide-
I
I wire pet ganged to servo motor. Voltago
difference Is chopped, and resulting a-c volt-
age is ampliflod. Second pot, at left, is used
to set marking pen at any desired point on
RED strip chart paper for Hro input voltage.
four stages of ampllflcation round off corners
of squaro-wave chopper output so drivo for
470K servo is practically sine wave.-E. Leslie, low·
K Cast Strip-Chart Recorders, Radio-Electronics,
June 1965, p 58-59.
ik
+32W 0 - - -.......- - - - ,
l.i\MPS: LT2-27 -1
PHOTOCELLS:
Cl.i\IREX CL603A
CHOPPER
DRIVE
--- ---c[
'--'------------4.5v
TRANSFORMERLESS WIDEBAND CHOPPER-
Pravides high isolation and reliablo operation
---
V2 V4
...
---c[
over wide ironge of mark-space ratios and 20-HZ PHOTOCHOPPER-four neons in astablo
repetition frequencies. During positive haH- mvbr act an four photocells to pravido syn•
cyclos of square-wavo chopper drive, signals chronous chopping at 20 Hz. Developed far
are transferred from A to B, but blocked dur- use in voltmeters and chopper-stabilized
1119 negative half-cyclos.-H. Riddle, Trans- power supplies.-W. G. Miller, "Using and
former is Eliminated in Transistor Chopper, Understanding Miniature Neon Lamps," H. W.
Electronics, Dec. 22, 1969, p 77. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 68.
CHOPPER CIRCUITS 109
REF
NONINVERTING CHOPPER OPAMP-Nonin·

verting modo of operation gives greatly im•
proved accuracy when handling signals from
high-Impedance sources. Applications In·
elude microvolt moa1uremonts in biological
and research applications. Maximum cur•
rent drift of opamp is 10 pA per degroo C
and common-modo rejection ratio 11 300,000.
Report also covers differentlol and off-ground
appllcation1, and use with bridge 1ignol1.-
INPUT NOISE~ 0.4 pV
P. Zlcko, Designing With Chopper Stabilized
INPUT DRIFT-0.35,u V/°C
-
Operational Ampllflors, Analog Devices, Cam•
bridge, Ma11., 1970.
REF
25M/\. 25M.I\.
OUTPIJI TO GAIN
OIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIER 100"
99K.n.
INPUT NOISE~250pV
IK.J\.
NOISE CANCELLER-Arrangement provides al· INPUT DRIFT~l2.711V/°C
most complete cancelling of switching spikes
and voltage offsets. Dual emitters of chop-
per transistor convort thoso noise 1ource1 Into
INVERTING-ONLY CHOPPER OPAMP-Used
-
common-mode noise, which is rejected by
for high-accuracy low-level moasuroments
differential ampliflor.-S. W. Holcomb, F. Opp,
whore low nolso and low drift are major re•
and J. A. Walston, low-Noise Chopper, Elec·
qulromants, at when measuring signals from
tronic Design, Jan. 6, 1964, p 78.
lOOK precision pot. Common-mode rejec-
tion ratio 11 300,000.-P. Zicko, Designing
With Chopper Stabilized Operational Ampli-
fiers, Analog Devices, Cambridge, Moss., 1970.
+12V
RI. 75k
rl
Rs QI
Vele 2N3854
47k
03
Vac o-----:) 1 - - - . . . i
1
+---
2N3854 __15k
,.,...__-0-6V
3.2V
TRANSFORMERLESS CHOPPER-Uses differen-
18k 2.7k tial amplifier Q1..Q2 and constont-currant
source 03. Differential Input 1to90 has good
tamperotura and drift stabilizotlon. For opti-
mum conversion of vary small d-c slgnals,
difforantial amplifier should be operated at
currents of about 10 µA.-A. C. Coggiono,
Tronsformorloss Chopper Circuit Built With a
Difforontiol Amplifier, Electronic Design, Oct.
+12V 11, 1967, p 106.
a,,. QIB -REF(IOVl -BIAS lZXREFl120Vl

2NZ43Z 2N243Z
EouT
OOT-36
47K ll~Eref
400cps INPUT
,/Q10N
'::'
f z '::'
r~!:.' =q;:;v
TO SYMMETRICAL 0 2 0N
-..__ _ _ CIRCUIT FOR FULL
DIGITAL-ANALOG CONVERTER-IC choppor
WAVE OEMODULATOR
Q2 acts as spdt switch operating from
single-polarity drivo botwoen logic levels of 0
AMPLIFYING LOW·lEVEL O.C-Chopper-am· and +3 V, to give dlgital-to-csnolog conver•
plifler converts d-c signal to a-c at 400 Hz, slon without complex drive circuit or multi-
passoa signol through a·c narrow·band am• pllcity of supply voltages. Input terminal Is
plifler, and synchronously domodulatoa to connedod to leg in ladder network, for switch-
give ampliflod d-c signal. Zoner in chopper ing between ground and minus reference
switching lag suppresses transients and mini· voltago.-lntogratod Chopper Forms Simple
mizos drift and offset orrors.-T. B. Hooker, Digital-to-Analog Converter, "Microoloctronlc
Zoner Diode Aids Chopper in Demodulator Design," Haydon Book Co., N.Y., 1966, p
Application, Electronic Design, April 12, 1965, 135.
p 56-57.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of lhls chapter, uso tho index at tho back
of this book. Check also tha author's "Sourcabook of Electronic Circuits,'' published by
McGraw·Hill In 1968.
CHAPTER 13
Clock Circuits
TYPICAL 04
PROGRAMMING ZNl30!!
CIRCUITRY OR
2N976
Os
2N3904
COMM
~----------11---+--0DISABLE
----r-__
3.0 ,.....
•·&-~ --...i
3.~~-----'
j... t.4IC1I I
I1N ..,
2-10,000 HZ PROGRAMMABLE-Repetition version Is about 1% from 0.1 to 100 p.A.-

rate can bo programmed over four decades R. W. Fergus, Wide-Range Programmable
by Input current changes. Works with 3.6 V Clock fer Low-Voltage Logic, EEE, Sept. 1969,
RTL logic. linearity of current-frequency con• p 132-133.
+l>v r-----------
.:r:.·022 220
1.6k
3.91
.:I:. .022
GATING - - - - -
SIGNAL
c
IOOpf
l=:I
lk
181
AAZ15 R2
100k
COUPUNG TO TTL-Single fet replaces two

or more driver stages and allows clock gen-
--
nL. Crystal oscillator provides 4-V p-p sine
L _ _ _ _ _!N~O~---
Graham, FD Unb Oscillator to TIL Circuit,
erator to operate from same 5-V supply as wave at 12 MHz.-C. S. L Keay and I. C. Electronics, Feb. 17, 1969, p 97.
111
CR 4
-8 ..d.c.
22K 2.21( 2.21(

33K 33K 24-HOUR CLOCK-Frequency divider cuts 60.
Sw1tpat l!l~s.
3
Hz line frequency to 30 Hz for driving stand·
:rr:.
o, @
ord oloctric clock ot half speed, 10 hour honcl
tokes 24 hours for one revolution. With ap-
120K
propriate change In clock face, Greenwich
.02
100 Moan Time con be reocl cllrectly. CR4 is any
top-hot diode rotod ot 400 plv and 750 mA.
Other cllocles ore IN34, Ql..Q3 2N404, and
Q4 is lntornotionol Rectlftor 50-V 2·A scr. T2
® Is somo 01 Tl .-D. L. Jones, A 24-Hour Clock
0u1.,..1 lo for the Shock, CQ, Moy 1970, p 20-21.
cl cell
IK
117.~c.
30c.p.1.
r,
+5V +12v
Re RJO
4.7k 470 +5V
RESYNCHRONIZER-Ult Q4, triggered by one.
shot mvbr GI ·G2-G3.Q2, roconstructs clock
signal from Incoming doto, such as NRZ sig·
nol, that hos no accompanying clock. NAND
gotos keep cost for below that of packaged DATA R1
one-shot. Designed for doto rote of 30 kHz, tl\IPUT !Ok
though molClmum oporoting frequency Is 50
kHz.-F. Boclol, UJT Oscillator Reconstructs
Cllock Signals, EEE, Aug. 1968, p 140.
+5V
R93 100
RS +3.&V
R91 56k
56k C3
RI 10.lpF
2.Tli
- _Vee
+ IOV
- 112 914
R94 OR 900
12.lk
RE
47,n
O.Olf'F
Cl
0
I 00kHz-2Mffz
-vio1__m_,ov
"4- 100µ.s •I ·~ 20p.s
f4-- 120 p.S ----..!
NONSYMMETRICAL ASTABLE-As waveform *AD.IUST R2 5'.IGHTLY TO OBTAIN SVMMETRICAI. WAVEFORM
indicates, transistor conducting times ore
mode unequal by making cross-coupling co- DIGITAL CLOCK-Provides squore-wove output
pocltors Cl and C2 unequal. For voluos of 0.2 to 3.6 V at any frequency from 100
shown, one transistor conducts for only 20 p.s kHz to 2 MHz whlle requiring only 3.6-V cl·c
out of total period time of 120 p.s. Freo supply. lntondocl for digital logic applica-
quontly usocl as clock for frequency control. tions. Stobllity approaches that of crystal
Collector waveform Is shown.-A. C. Gillie, usod.-L. Roque, Accurate Digital Clock Uses
"Pulse and logic Circuits," McGraw-Hiii, N.Y., Inexpensive IC Ootes, Electronic Delign, Aug.
1968, p 213. 16, 1969, p 242 and 244.
CLOCK CIRCUITS 113
IOkA 4700pf
SO pt
100.XHZ CRYSTAL FOR CLOCK-Used with ton

froquoncy divider stages to give pulse ovory
half-minute for driving ratchet mechanism of
battery-powered clock. Accuracy is about 1
=
100 kc 1
lllOOof
CWISTll
s per week. Report gives circuits for divider IOOOpt zusoo
stages and ratchet coil drivo.-A Crystal Clock
Using Plastic Transistors, Ferranti Ltd., Old·
ham, Lanes., England, No. 34, 1968.
+12v
CONTROL'-...~-----
VOLTAGE
470
1-10 MHZ CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE-Pro•
100-KHZ COLPtnS CRYSTAL-Operates from vldos good timing for digital system, and can
single 5·Y supply. Consists of oscillator Q1, 02 also be used as voltage-frequency converter.
emitter-follower Q2, and DTL buffer gate. With SN7400 TIL quad gate, frequency rango
Output Is square wavo with rise and fall of squaro-wava output is 1 ta 15 MHz de•
times under SO ns. Will drive 25 DTL loads c ponding on constant-current source Q1.Q2 and
or 12 nL loads. Stability Is that of crystal. value of C.-P. Westphal, Digital Clock Oper·
-D. Jonos, Stable Clock Osdllators are DTL/ ates in Low Megahertz Range, E/edronics,
470 pf
TIL Compatible, EEE, May 1968, p 123-124. Jan. 20, 1969, p 87.
+Sv
5k
.-----'2::.a ONE SHOT

NOT-OR
Q 6
1 INPUTS
Q OS
pL9601
RG3222
CLOCK CP
DOUBLE-TRIGGERED ONE-SHOT-With IC
gates connected as flip-flops, taking feed-
back from one•shot back Into triggering cir·
cuit, circuit produces trigger whenever Input
clock signal changes state, or on both edges
of clock signal. Output Is square wave at
twice clock frequency.-P. 8. Well, Feedback
n-.+::.....r-""\:,_,__c_'_. Triggers One-Shot From Both Polarity Edges,
IJ--r_,__ _, Efeclronic1, July 20, 1970, p 87.
RG3222
114 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL.
Vee
+12V
MANUAL CLOCK PULSES-Usoful for totting
countors, adders, and other types of digital
circuits. Eliminates effects of switch bounce
that could cause false triggering. Provides
complementary set-roset voltages at collectors
of Ql and Q2, and manual clock pulse each
time mono is triggered by change in state of
Q2 collector voltage from low to high. With
2N706 transistors, total latching time Is le11
than 200 ns.-T. Carmody, Low.Cost Manual 5CO n SEC
MOr'°5TABLE
n MANUAL
CLOCK
Pulser, EEE, Oct. 1967, p 143-144.
SQ-.r.a.QI.
WAVl
O/P RI
2211
Cl
l~F 47
SQUARE-TRIANGULAR CLOCK-Uses Plessoy
high-gain d-c ampli8ors as clock providing
choice of two waveforms at frequency that
is hold constant within 2% ovor 50 dog C 500.KHZ CRYSTAL-Operates from single
temperature range and 0.5-V change in sup• 1.35-V mercury cell and delivers 1 V P·P
ply voltages. Second ampliflor uses positive squaro-wave output for clock generators, lob
feedbaclc to achieve precision trl99or circuit. standards, or cro calibrators.-R. L. Biiiion,
-R. C. Foss and B. J. Green, The SL700 Serles Crystal-Controlled Oscillator Oporates From
and Applications, Plo11ey, Swindon, England, One Mercury Coll, Electronic Design, Nov. 8,
No. 7. 1969, p 109.
PRE-AMPLIFIER GATE BUFFER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT AMPLIFIER

I
-rsv
2.2K "IOOQ:OUTPUT
OUTPUTS
,.
l.$K
qn TOI
lD·IA
lDZ
lD·...
z•
+9V +9V
1.5111:
+9v
I.SK 100
220•'r
+•v
01 01,..
0.005
u OUTPuTn
CLOCK
ously with oqual amplitude ond opposite

polarity. Road cycle time is 500 ns, rise time
is 3 ns, and gain is 2,000.-C. F. Chong, G.
DOUBLE.CLOCK MEMORY READ AMPLIFIER- sient no se completely rejected in output H. Gultrogg, C. S. lh and A. A. Wicks, High·
Propor timing of clocks gives maximum signal stage. Clock signals are applied to tunnel. Speed Read Amplifiers For Thin Films, Elec-
gain for reading thln-fllm memory, with tran· diode gate connected as Goto pair, simultane· tronic Design, Aug. 3, 1964, p 311-40.
CLOCK CIRCUITS 115
(CO#<l-IECT TO +5Vd<: I
·,· A B c D
0 0
-----+----+-CLK
.._---+---IK Co
MODULO 10 OR 4-Logic 0 Input at point X

makes digital counter function as modulo 4
in electronic digital clock, as required when
most significant hours digit becomes 2.
Whon point X is logic 1 (5 V d-c), all four
Rip-flops count in binary sequence to give
1-2-4-8 weighted binary-coded outputs at
A, B, C, and D for modulo 1O. Article gives
truth tablos.-1. P. Braikss, Control Signal De- x ALL 8'1-1AR1(S MC84~P
termines Modulo of EC Counter, EEE, Feb.
0
1° - MODULO <0 L:lC..CAL -,· -~V All GATES A"'D

·o·- MODULO 4 LOG<CAL "0" ·Ov <WCRTERS 114 MC846P
1968, p 126 and 128.
+sv
L Mllr3_2-
m
_J OUTPUT
1°MHZ COLPITIS CRYSTAL-Operates from
single 5.y supply and provides output levels
completely compatible with digital IC's. Fre-
quency stability approaches that of crystal
alono, from 0 to 70 C.-D. Jones, Stable Clock
Oscillators aro DTLmL Compatible, EEE, May
1968, p 123-124.
+24V
PROCESS CONTROL PULSER-Simple clock,

using four-layer diode as timing control, pro-
vides repetitive closures of relay at rates from MOT MAG
M4L2054 WI02PCX-Z
1 to 600 ppm. Closure time Is about 10 ms IZV REED
at all rates. Applications include cycling of
components on lifo tost.-D. T. Krausman, DI
~o----oo
02
Four-layer Diode Clock Has Relay Closure MOT
Output, Electronic Design, May 10, 1967, p IN4001
92 and 94. Kl
390pf
+t5v GATE ALWAY~
BEGINS AT
THIS POINT
GATE ALWAYS
ENDS AT
THIS POINT___..
I
CONTINUOUS TRAIN 7.511:
OF PULSES
nnnnn!i
..IL.ILILILIU •• 33k
GATE PASSES ONLY COMPLETE PULSES-Use

of scr for ballast action insures that gate QI
will opon only on leading sdgo of first clock
SCR pulse in train and close on falling edge of
?Nl595 last pulse desired. Prevents false synchroni•
zation or no synchronization. If gate switch
is opened during pulse, circuit action con•
tinues until pulse is completed.-R. A. Wilson,
SCR Synchronizes Gate, Electronics, March 18,
1968, p 95-96.
Vee
+6V
15k
470 DELAY LINE
pF
o.111s 1k.n
INPUT
T
CLOCK·LINE DRIVER-Inductor L and transis-

75
tor switch are connected In series with clock 5-MHZ DELAY-LINE WITH TURN-ON SYNC-
line to form series resonant tank circuit ca• Clock pulses always start in phase with lead·
pablo of handling 34 256-bit mos registers ing ed90 of input gate pulse, and always stop pulso. Eliminates possible range error of one
operating at clock frequency of 620 kHz. with trailin9 edge. Gives square-ave out- count occurring with crystal-controlled clock
L is 6.8 µH.-R. 0. Brink, Resonant Clock-Lino put. Delay lino is PCA Electronics type DL- osclllators.-P. E. Dingwoll, Gated Delay•Line
Driver for MOS ICs, EEE, April 1969, p 118 and 1000-0.1·2289 having 1K impedance and 100. OsCillator Eliminates Range Error, EEE, Sept.
120. ns dolay. Circuit is designed for 5-V gate 1968, p 108 and 110.
+ VBB : 20 v
lk
50 k SIMPLE CLOCK-Use of quartz crystal in place
of conventional capacitor In ujt relaxation
oscillator gives low-cost clock for digital sys•
tems. With 100-kHz crystal, clock has excel-
lent stability at either 100 or SO kHz. Shunt•
E ing crystal with several hundred pf gives
XTLCJ 33,33 kHz.-R. G. Damaye, Qu0 rtz Crystal
50 Synchronizes Relaxation Oscillator, Electronics,
Jan. 9, 1967, p 104.
CRYSTAL·UJT-With quartz crystal connected

+v 08 = 20v,
between emitter and base of relaxation os-
cillator, lock-in occurs at fundamental or
submultiplos of crystal frequency. External
pulses are not required for synchronization.
Serves as inexpensive 100, 50, or 33.33 Hz
clock for digital systems, with high stability
for both voltage and temperature variations.
-R. G. Damaye, Quartz Crystal Synchronizes
Relaxation Oscillator, Electronics, Jan. 9,
1967, p 104.
I
•.sv '•s"
T, R, 221<n
Ro 2.21<n
D1
R1 5·6kl1
CLOCK
IMPULSE CLOCK DRIVE-Circuit receives nor•

Ro
11,
.
Rt
R
ion
22011
COIL
3A
row pulse every 30 s from frequency divider

of battery-powered 100.kHz quartz crystal
oscillator and delivers 300-mA current to coll FROM STlG[ 11
of ratchet that advances clock hands half a
minute. Output stage operates from soparato
R,
1..5-V coll so negative pulses on Its supply 1\5 Ts
T, Z'1'X500
lino do not affect earlier stages. Impulse T, ZTX300
clock used is made by English Clock Systems, Ta 3 X ZT).300 in Parallel
a branch of Smiths Clocks.-A Crystal Clock R1
D. ZSl.40
Usin9 Plastic Transistors, Ferranti Ltd., Old-
ham, Lanes., England, No. 34, 1968. ov
CHAPTER 14
Code Circuits
R3 R2
4'1011 2.2K
J3
J2 Jl
IC CODE PRACTICE-Uses six transistors In

HEP556 three-input gato to achiovo reliability
alone wilh simpllcily of conslruction. R4 con-
trols lono hoard In phones Ml. Artklo gives
conslruction detalls.-"lntegratod Circuit Proi·
octs," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1966, p 63-
69.
+ struction delalls. Cost of components Is

CODE-GENERATING C-W KEYBOARD-Gonor- Q2 runs continuously to prOYldo shift and about $130. Cl Is 0.1 pf; CRl-CRll IN645;
atos corresponding Morse codo aulomalically switching pulses. Arliclo givos inlerconnoc· CRl2 INl91; Ql·Q2, Q5.Q7, Ql3·Ql4
whon koy for letter or numeral is prossod. lion diagram for shift rogistor sot windings 2Nl252; Q3.Q4 2Nl131; QB.Q11 2N404; Ql2
Mlcroswitchos under koys conlrol magnetlc- thal gonorato required combination of dots 2N657.-H. Granberg, A Push-Button Keyer,
coro shifl rogisler in which astable mvbr QI- and dashes for each character, and 9ivos con- CO, Sept. 1964, p 28-31 and 92.
117
-12v Cl
KE~o-----.
0.01,.t
o, (
2NI024
01 02
2N104 2N408
~
c, l.5k
CONTINUOUS 8pf
A-C SIGNAL
11[3 RI
500Sl
JI
Oz
2N1643
Bl /SI
____________+-111..=---f
SWITCHING AUDIO TONES NOISELESSLY-
Two-tronslstor circuit with I :I transformer 6V
makos koy clicks nogligiblo at switching CODE PRACTICE SET-R2 controls tone. Ear·
speeds up to 50 bauds. Signal suppression phone can bo plugged Into phono jack JI.
during off periods is 70 dB. Operates well Tl is output transformer having SCJO.ohm pri·
with up to 0.2 µ.F across switch contacts, per• mary and 3.2-ohm secondary, for driving 3.2•
mitting remote control of keying with long ohm 6-inch p·m spoaker.-"A Modern Tran•
cablo.-J. M. Little, Transistor Switch For Click· sistor Workbook," Radio Shack, Boston, Mass.,
less Keying, E/oclronics, Oct. 31, 1966, p 68. 1965, p 10.
SPEAKER
c_
KMTR
KEY
INPUT
IM
(DASH \
I KEY•
BROWN UTL
I WITHOUT
I BASE OR BTL
I WITH BASE
I
I
I
C9
.oo:s
I
I
I RIO - I
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -----~K_:_ _ _J
!BOTTOM VIEW OF IC'SI
transmitter keying circuit. Operating speed
ELECTRONIC KEYER-Gonoratos perfect Morso- is released. Circuit uses Fairchild or In type is sot by R20. Article gives construction de·
code dots and doshos, with dashos always 923 JK IC flip-flops In comblnotlon with typo tails. Rl2 is about 21 ohms.-W. O. Hamlin,
throe times longer than dots and with each 914 dual RTL IC gates and throe transistors. Build Perfoct Electronic Koyer, Radio-E/oc-
dot or dash self-completing even though key Keying-relay output may be connected to any rronics, Nov. 1969, p 69-72.
CODE CIRCUITS 119
a,
..
.c,"o MOTIONLESS KEY-RHemblH and Is operated
like conventional paddle key but responds to
I slightest touch of either stationary paddle for

triggering capacitance-sensing dot or dash
gonorator of electronic keyer. Both paddles
are grounded for d-c. Action is fast and re-
..
c.
100 ..
220
liable with normally moist skin. For dry
skin, glycarlne rubbed between thumb and
fingers will increase conductivity enough for
reliable triggering. Article gives construe·
tion details. A-c power supply and long·
a,
---+---Dosh dash circuit (described In CQ, Fob, 1965, p
..
c,
100
c,
2N1303 ., 59 and 104-105) are desirable options.-A.
H. Jackson, Tho Touch-Key, CQ, Nov. 1964,
p 28-31 and 137.
4/0
1
SM
II~
II~
·- THREE-TUBE PRACTICE SET-Provides sufficient
i)~. .i ·~
filament voltage, Tl Is any SOU.typo out•
loudspeaker volume for classroom use. put transformer.-"Electronlc Circuits Hand·
PRACTICE SET WITH SPEAKER-Any expensive Almost any other dual-triode and pentode book," Vol. II, Cowan Pub. Corp., Port Wash-
pnp transistor may bo used. Tl is Lafayette may be used by changing pin connections and ington, N.Y., 1966, ·p 85.
TR· I 09 transistor output transformer or equiv·
alent.-"Electronic Circuits Handbook," Vol. II,
Cowan Pub. Corp., Port Washington, N.Y.,
1966, p 84.
+9V
o~m.s RESET
KEY
ro1~0L,_./
MULTI
9 6
IUP•CLOSED '-~1--"--4
ON •OPENI
TIME llASE MULTI

J._/
o---
RESET
OISPLAT
DECODE
LAMP· DRIVER
OUTPUTS
IUP •LAMP ON)
4m1-. ....
•Vee •Yee A • ..D.DJ~N
12 8 0"12:......,,....-:./PURPLE
l.~~F
TYP
•• 1400H1I
Vee' 36VDC 10_,.__AMBER

,.._
I t300H'1I
CODED AUDIO BEACON FILTER-Conventional
largo and heavy tuned circuits for marker
beacon froquencles of 400, 1,300, or 3,000
H1 are hero replaced entirely by digital IC
COMMON frequency counter. Counting and display
IC CODE PRACTICE OSCILLATOR-Current periods are about 4 ms each. When gate
drain with key down is only 5.5 mA from control line Is positive, gato is closed, and amber light, and 2,000 to 4,000 gives 8-15
9.y transistor radio battery. Values are: Cl previous count activates lamp corresponding and white light, Lamps are disabled during
0.47 p.f; RI, R3, R4 IK; R2 2K; phones 2K to frequancy. In typical 4-ms count, input of counting period to prevent tlicker.-R. J.
magnetlc.-"Hobby Circuits Manual," RCA, 250 to 1,000 Hz gives count of I to 3 and Battos, Dl9ltal ICs Servo as Audio Filters, EEE,
Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 59. purplo light, 1,000 to 2,000 H1 gives 4-7 and Sept. 1969, p 131.
120 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MAN'U AL
c,
o, .()3
4.i'K
2N1265
ll:f"?f•
II c,
.04
.
r .01
f--o ro T.u.
-r
AUDIO FSK-Doveloped for rodiotelotype work balancing mark and space output levels, and
on vhf bands, in which transmiHor must bo hos good froquency stability. Space signal
modulated at 2,975 Hz for spaco signal and is transmitted when keyboard contacts oro
at 2,125 Hz for mark signal. Frequency open. Article gives construction procedure.
shift keyer circuit shown usos inexpensivo KEYING RELAY-With key and koying relay
-R. P. Brickey, A Transistorized A, F. Shift
components, is free from copacitivo loading opon, receiver contacts ore closed and re·
Koyer, CO, Nov. 1964, p 9o-91, 124, and
effects of keying circuit, hos provisions for coiver Is operating, while grid of keyor tuba
126.
is blocked by negative voltage. With koy
closed, monitor and transmitter are opera•
tionol. Use 500-ohm pol for cothodo re•
sister of tetrode and adjust until oscillator
.....
-
10•
3.9K
DCT•C&5"
functions. Diodes should be roted 300 piv.-
!ml
2.2K 4.7K "Electronic Circuits Handbook.'' Vol. II, Cowan
...
22
Er"'' I•
25v
12K
IOOK
S ... (0
Pub. Corp., Port Washington, N.Y., 1966, p
84.
8.U
,' '
/
,'/
Ona...._ _/ l5w
p~1i1·· +200v
ELECTRONIC KEVER-Generates self·complet·

ing dash whon paddle is pushed to loft and and following space before producing dot
released. Speed control determinos length and its spoce.-H. J. Sartori, An Electronic
of dash. If dot is sont before dosh Is com• Koyer for Every C. W. Operator, CO, April O.lpl OUTPUT
pleted, keyer automatically completes dash 1964, p 37-39 and 102. (
O.l,111
INPUT Ir-..--
-· 9·VOLT IM
c.
01
IN4372
02
J, IN4372
BOOSTING S/N RATIO-Input signals above

predetermined throshold level make ampliRor
gain increase suddenly, to give effect of
stretching signal amplitude. Used to Improve
MORSE CODE PRACTICE-Simply plug tele- signal·lo•noiso ratio of koyod c•W signal.
graph key into oscillator and loom Morse + 9-VOLT Maximum gain is 25 and minimum less than
codo, either privately using hoadphonos or in B+ 1. Riso in gain results from sudden decroase
groups using speaker. Article givos construc- in reverse resistance of zenor diode whon
tion details. Ports values ore: RI ·R2 62K; p.F; 01 HEP254; 02 HEP253; speaker 100 voltage across it paHes critical levol.-J.
R3 SK; R4 5.6K; R5 6.8K; R6 lOOK; R7 SOK; ohms.-"Solid State Projects Manual," Moto- Holland, Zenor Diodes Control Amplitude
RB lSK; Cl-C2 0.005 µF; C3 0.01 p.F; C4 0.1 rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 21-26. Stretching, Electronics, July 10, 1967, p 83.
CHAPTER 15
Comparator Circuits
+sv
TERNARY DECISION UNIT-Compares voltage

levels on tho two Input lines and gives 0 or
1 output depending on which Input has moro
positive voltage, Input difference as small
os 0.05 V will gonorate solid 0 or 1 output.
Used in pattern recogni:rer dovoloped by IBM
for spoken words or graphic inputs. Tron•
sistor and diodo types are not critical.-G. L.
SUMMATION 0 SUMMATION t Clapper, Machine Looks, Listens, Learns, Elec-
INPUT INPUT
tronics, Oct. 30, 1967, p 91-102.
1.5/'f
+
-12v
+2av
Cz
INPUT I o-j._+....._+-1
JUl 4
IBOpps
R20
T•3fCSOC
INPUT 2 o-lr.-~~~~~~~--
JUl C:s
4
-2ev
ALGEBRAIC COMPARATOR-Input stago Qt. can bo adjusted to accommodate various input 04 are Goto pair. Last sta90 has two out-
Q2 adds pulses at inputs 1 and 2 algobrai· pulse frequenclos and widths. Voltago at puts, one for positive algebraic sum and
cally, and feeds invorso of algebraic sum to emitter of Q5 In Darlington pair is adjusted ta other for negatlve.-A. J. Burdi, Pulse Com·
omplifler Q3. Time constants of posltivo- :roro (without Input) by R14 to compensate parator Combines Versotlllty, Low Cost, Elec•
nogative rectiflor circuit D1-D2-R11·Rl2·Rl3 for drift, leakage, or transistor changes. D3· Ironic Design, Morch 2, 1964, p 60 and 62.
121
"1"
....------+5v
"O..
-----1J
r--+--ICLK
K
U2-9300 OUTPUT
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY PHASE COMPARATOR but no outputs if other frequency ratios are nate, output becomes constant logic 1.-1.
-Produces output pulso pattern with duty present. Logic state of output 01 is 0 as Breikss, Shift Register Simplifles Design of
cycle proportional to relative phase of two long as pulses arrive at fl input or majority Phase Comparator, Eledronlcs, Jan. 19, 1970,
trains of input pulses having same froquency, of pulsos are fl. Whon f2 pulses predoml· p 93.
Parts
Hopper ~
Allgiment
funnel
Teat,,...-
Flxt~e GO-NO-GO IC TESTER WITH HOPPER SORT-
OEI Model 5233 IC comparator provides three
2N'JOSS outputs, depending on whether electrical
A),/ 100
characteristics of product under tost are above,
below, or within preset limits. Parts drop
one by one into test fixture designed for
automatic contact and measurement, with IC
actuating solenoid of flopper that guides part
Into correct hopper after test. If part Is
within toleranco limits, it drops straight
through Into GO hopper. Ink pad at each
hopper provides automatic color coding. If
part falls all throe tosts, it is guided into
fault or junk hopper. Test fixture may pro·
vide reset command signal for dropping next
part after receiving signal indicating that
part has fallen into appropriate hopper.-
Using a Comparator for Production Selecting,
Optical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10102.
Ink Pad
+av
COMPARATOR IMPROVES RATE METER-Addi-

tion af comparatar Q1.Q2 to rate motor Im-
proves measuremont response time. Output
270k omittor.followor Q3 dolivers voltage propor-
o, tional to repetition rate of input pulso train
2N5088 from preceding mono mvbr, with comparator
serving to prevent Input ripple from affecting
output.-D. Wassorman and G. Parker, Com-
10k parator Increases Rate Meter's Response, lloc-
tronics, May 11, 1970, p 100.
02
2N5086
c, C2
330Jl.f 1,500µf
1N629's
COMPARATOR CIRCUITS 123
+12v
R4
2.2 K
MAGNETIC
PICKUP
IC FOR MAGNETIC PICKUP-Universal IC volt.

age comparator will drive logic circuits,
01
3N60
N
C1
1
0.02
i
r·
lamps, or relays up to 50 V at 50 mA, under
control of pulses from magnetic pickup or
other puho source.-Detoctor for Magnetic
Transducer (National Semiconductor ad), Elec- o,
IN3605
tronic News, Juno 8, 1970, p 11.
-12v
SCS STORES HIGHER OF TWO VOLTAGES- mode voltages can be up to I V in either

Silicon controlled switches (scs) QI and Q2, polarity. Article describes operation in detail
connected as differential amplifier and rogon• and suggests modifications for other appllca•
orativo switch, sense chc:innol having higher tlons.-T. P. Sylvan, SCS Linear Amplifier Gives
Instantaneous voltage and store result. Threshold Switching, Electronic Design, Jan.
Threshold sensitivity is about 5 mV. Common• 20, 1964, p 78-79.
ZERO DETECTOR-Uses Philips TAA241 differ·

v,
ence ampliller as comparator or zero detector.
If input voltage VI is greater than reforonce
voltage, output Is about -5 Vi If Input Is
100Q I below reference, output Is +to V. If :zero
roforenco is required, ground input terminal
BZV8B-C4V7$ temporarily and adjust pot to compensate
for ofhot voltage. If optional zeners are
connectod as shown, output voltages will be
BZV88-C3V9$ symmotrical at +5 V and -5 V.-J. Cohen
I and J. Oosterling, Applications of a Practical
D. C. Difference Amplifler, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
~ Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The Netherlands, No.
321, 1968.
33k
COMPARATOR
1k
1
330k
1,,f
INPUT
30..,v. tov PEAK
,
3.JV
--
-•
SIGNAL-IDENTIFYING LAMPS-A-c/d-c: polarity
IN746A
indicator in parallel with input of signal

processing circuit turns on rod lamp when '-----....tr.-----+-------------~~--------..("\
input signal Is positive, green lamp when
negative, and amber lamp when input is a-c:.
Circuit functions by comparing Input voltage
to zero In IC comparator. Below 10 Hz, red !Ok 10,,F
and green lamps will flash alternately. Op·
orates up to 1 MHz.-R. C. Gerdes, Compara-
tor Steers AC/DC Polarity Indicator, EDN, Doc. + f
1, 1969, p 64.
Bol
56 k
RESISTOR GRADER-Usos Burr-Brown 4021 /25 sistor. Pulse outputs of comparator provide to within 1% accuracy. Article discusses
window comparator fed by 3061/25 differen· convenient way of obtaining low, in-toler- operating procedures for matching to within
tial·input instrumentation amplifier and ance, or high indications fer resistor under 0.01 % .-"lnstrumont Amplifiers.'' Burr-Brown
Wheatstone bridge containing unknown re· test. Used for matching pairs of resistors Research, Tucson, Ariz., PDS-207C, 1969, p 24.
+12v
TRIGGER CHOOSES HIGHER OF TWO VOLT·

AGES-When used as comparator, circuit can IOK 6.8K
IOK 47K
decide which of two voltages in range from OUTPUT
0 to 12 V has the greater numerical vc:due
when one is posltlvo and tho other negative. INPUT- 04
2N1305
When positive vollage is greater, Q3 is cut
off and Q4 is saturated. When negative ls
greater, trigger Q3.Q4 flips over so Q4 is cut
off and Q3 is saturated, Differing output
voltages will then indicato which Input Is
91K
greater. By adding potentiometer to positive
input terminal, as shown by dashed lines, cir· r1
point is equal to voltage-level setting of pot.
-S. Stuhr, Wide-Range Trigger Compares Ab-
,.
cuif' will act as Schmitt trigger in which trip -.:_.- ~
·--I
solute Values, Electronic De1i9n, Jan. 6, 1964, I
L
I _________ ..,._______________......,..
p 85-86.
+12v
+25v +IOv
c 03
SMl290
INPUT I
04
INPUT 2 SM1290
OUT
Os
SM5306
10k 1.Sk
410 560
-Sv -sv
ADJUSTABLE-SENSITIVITY ANALOG COMPA- tivity margin. Used In Paramatrix system pelbaum, M. Faiman, and E. Carr, Paramatrix
RATOR-Adjusting voltage S gives sensitivity for preprocessing analog information, chiefly Puts Digital Computer in Analog Picture, and
ran go of 0.2 te 2 V. I Binary I output occurs photos and graphs, while convorting ta digital Vice Versa, Electronics, Sept. 4, 1967, p 99-
when the two inputs are equal within sensi- signals under computer control.-W. J. Pop- 108.
COMPARATOR CIRCUITS 125
-IV +IV +15 v
II< II<
~-_r
+IZY 15011
;" rn o-----<>-1 Vz
270ll 27011 6
~JL. >--<>-+---<O Out
RI
-0.1 v 'Vz r
- 15 V U--'V'VY---<0--1 -0.7V L.
II< INZIJO
+o:"JVL. 1N4QOI
-·· 10 k
1
IN29:SO
-15V
;"
SINGLE-OPAMP VOLTAGE COMPARATOR-By
interchanging inputs, can be made inverting
VOLTAGE COMPARATOR FOR 2 MHZ-Highly
or noninverting. Opon•loop operation as•
sensitive tunnel-diode comparator dotocts
suros fast response. Tying zoner botween
5-mV change from on to off state. Tunnol
output and ground limits output lovel to that
diodes aro biased as flip·flop, with bias
acceptable to salurated logic familios.-K.
choson so 0.8 mA is roquired to make them
Huehne, Tho Continuing Dominance of the
switch. If output is required when input
Operational Amplifier, "State-of-the-Art-lino-
is above I V, RI is adiusted to make diodes
ars in Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969,
switth at this point.-N. Marchese, Voltage
p 5-13.
Comparator Uses Tunnel Diode Flip-Flop, "400
Ideas for Design Selected from Electronic
Design," Haydon Book Co., N.Y1 1964, p 163.
LAMP CALIBRATOR-Two photocells, 90CV

red-sensitive and 92AV blue-sensitive, farm
part of bridge circuit in which olectronlc
meter voltmeter sorves as null detactor. Used to
dork cummt compare color tomporaturo of service lamp
balance against lhat of standard calibration lamp
.........
mounted side by side in ima9e-converter•tube
tester. Report gives calibration and meas-
urement procedures.-G. P. Brouwer and A.
G. Geurts, An Instrument for Measuring the
Sensitivity of Photocathedes, Phillps, Pub,
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nother•
lands, No. 323, 1966.
PUSH TO
READ
os,
o,
Vz •16V
y1
•YR
CAEFERENCE
.r
os. 2BV DCl
VtO-O
PHOTO·
CELL
Dt
NO. I
Vz•16V
ALL BULBS •GE~.t2V DC
GO-N0°GO WITH READOUT-Compares moni·

tared voltages with reference voltage and
onorgizes lamps DS1-DS2 lo indicate continu· LIGHT COMPARATOR-Pormits matching of
ity. For open circuit, DS3·DS4 are on. Lamps two unknown light sources or one unknown
are paired for redundancy, so circuit gives with standard. Circuit Is initially nulled with
unambiguous indication even if one lamp R3. Photocells are 5Q2508; Rt-R2 1SK1 R3
fails.-W, A. Magee, Voltage Comparator with 25K; meter 50-0-50 µA 2K; battery 1.4 V.-
Visual Readout, EEE, May 1969, p 118 and "Solid State Photosensitive Devices," RCA,
120. Harrison, N.J., p 24.
126 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS M:ANU AL
+ISv 3v
CLOCK
INPUT
HEAT SINK
2N3390 2N3906
04
INPUTo, ) HEAT SINK (
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER-Can detect and '-------~
react to input changes in as little as 100 ns.
Output can be switched from logic 0 to I in -OUTPUT
less than 63 nA. Temperature stablllty is 2 IOOk
nA per deg C. Can be driven by clock pulse
for synchronous comparison. Differential am- IOk
ISOk
pllfler QJ.Q2 provides comparator function LOW NOISE
and Q3 is buffer for driver Q4.-R. Becker,
Inexpensive Comparator Reads in 100 Nano-
seconds, Electronics, Sept. 2, 1968, p 70. -15v
SIGNAL AMPLITUDE REGULATOR-Holds signal being regulated and Q6 is its input, Q3.Q4
amplitude constant within 0.1 dB when input form voltage comparator. QS drives lamp
B- sl9nal of telecommunications system Is fluctu· thot varios resistance of photocell and e-
atlng plus or minus 10 dB. This re9ulatlen theroby controls 9aln of amplltlor beln9 regu•
is maintained over temperature range of -10 lated.-A. E. Lofting, Stable Amplitude Regu-
to 60 deg C despite use of unsolected com· lator for Wldo Tamporatura Ran90, Eloclronics,
ponents. QI is output stago of ampliflor Feb, 6, 1967, p 71-72.
SYSTEM
INPUT ---------------------------------
SYSTEM
OUTPUT
ALL DIODES
Tl53
02,03, 04
ARE 2N2925
2N3638 5.6k
05
750
LOGIC SUPPLY
D-C TRANSFORMER FOR CONTROL LOGIC- Rr R:s ltk

Operates without common ground. Whon
240-V supply voltage drops below 230 V,
o,
(12vl
loss than 2.3 V is applied to inverting input 2.4v
of IC comparator, and it switchos and onor•
gizos output logic through Ql .-T, J, Carmody, o,
Comparator and A.C: Coupling Provide D°C 2N708
Transformer Action, Electronics, Juno 8, 1970, 2.3v
p 98.
2.4k
240vRTN--.....
-28vRTN----J
----.----..------t-----tt-----e----.. . ......,.G...RO.UND
D2
LOGIC
(5v)
R7
-2Bv-----""""'.fl/\r-------4~-----'-5v
COMPARATOR CIRCUITS 12T
+12v
D-C VOLTAGE COMPARATOR-Si9nal voltage live or maximum positive, dependin9 on

applied to terminal 2 ef Ferranti ZlD2 IC whether sl9nal voltage is 9reater or less than
differontial-input d-c amplifier is compared reference voltage.-Microlin Amplifiers ZlD25
with voltage of referonce diode at other input. and ZLD2T, Ferranti ltd., Oldham, lanes., Eng-
FULL COMPARATOR-Combination of two Output volta9e will be either maximum nega- land, No. 11, 1967, p 12.
9302 OEI opamps indicates whother unknown
Input is moro positive than referenco by
giving HI output, less positivo by giving LO
output, or oqual by giving LO output from
both opamps. HI is +10 V and LO is -10
V. Window input accopts positive voltagos
E,,.------2 7
and generates toloranco equal to window •"'---::--TO INDICATOR
3 Eo CIRCUITS
input. If unknown is within window volta90
of reference, both outputs are -10 V corre-
tponding to equal condition.-Applying the ~__.
Model 9302 Monolithic Operational Amplifler, -6
Optical Eloctronics, Tucson, Aris., No. 10135. or more. If input signal Is below reference
voltage by same margin, output to Indicator
is -5 V. Article contains thirteen other IC
2-MV SENSITIVITY-Fairchild µ.A702A IC opamp application circuits.-J. F. Gifford and
Outputs apamp amplifies difference betweon unknown M. Markkula, Linear IC's: Part 5, Ins and
lnp~
Q.
signal and reference volta9e, and delivers 5 Outs of Op Amps, Electronics, Nov. 27, 1967,
V output if sl9nal excoods reference by 2 mV p 84-93.
~-----------------.----o+l2V
+Vdc TR3
BCIOB
03
VOLTAGE COMPARATOR-Can be directly BZV88-
coupled to binary encoder for detection of C6V2
highest input voltage. Has advantages over
1""'21'ting
diode comparator gates. Oporates from 20 input
V d-c supply, for inputs of zero to 10 V d-c
and outputs of 20 or 10 V d-c. All transistors
are 2N780, RI is 100 ohms, and all other
Non-
resistors IOOK.-"Selected Electronic Circuitry," inva:M.ln;
NASA SP-5046, 1966, Government Printing i"l'Ut
Office, Washington, D.C., p 80.
01
BZY88-
__________,,____________.,_c_s_v_2_ _..__T----o\N
0ov
SIMPLE COMPARATOR-With only three ex-

tornal resistors, OEI 9300 opamp serves as
voltage comparator with full performance to '-------------------------0-1211
2 MHz and reduced comparison accuracy at STABLE VOLTAGE COMPARATOR-Uses tran- ing wide variety of lo9lc circuits.-"Circuits
higher froquencies. Output level is compat- sistor pairs in differential stages, with con- Usin9 low-Drift Transistor Pairs," Philips, Pub.
ible with DTL and RTL logic.-Applyin9 the stant-current transistor source for holding Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether-
Model 9300 Monolithic Operational Amplifier, input stage emitter currents constant. Output lands, 1968, p 26.
Optical Eloctronics, Tuscon, Ariz., No. 10134. voltage is limited to 0.7 V and 3 V, for driv-
CHAPTER 16
Control Circuits
INDUCTIVE
LOAO
IN1692
o,
UJT PHASE-CONTROL FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS 160V
-Phase reference for ujt is derived from 60""
supply voltage instead of from biloterol scr.
Gate drive for scr continues from point of IN1692
triggering to end of half-cycle. Circuit pro• 03
vides symmetrical waveforms and positive INl771
IOV
triggering even when load current rises
slowly.-E. K. Howell, Bilateral SCR Lots De- R5
signers Economi:i:e on Circuitry, Electronic 47
Design, Jan, 20, 1964, p 74-77.
A1302. Al3F2 6.8K,5W

UPTO 7.Sk
8k"w O.lµf
LOAD Sw
A44F
O.IHY
20A Z4XL16
1M 1M
240voc
J
SCR3 Z4XL20
C330
+SOOp,t
I
SCR -25v
C33
10k sooo.n
THERMISTOR
AT SET
10k POINT
IG-E 10103)
POWER CONTROL WITH DISCRETE COMPO- nents as compared to half a dozen if ono is Power Grob by Linoar IC's, Electronics, Aug.
NENTS-Will control l'P to 8 kW through re- General Electric's PA424 IC described in same 21, 1967, p 81-86.
sistive load, though requiring over 40 compo- article.-F. W. Gutzwiller and J, H. Galloway,
128
CONTROL CIRCUITS 129
+ +12vd·c Voco-~~~...-~-t~~~~~~~--,
IOOV Ct
R1 R2
200 0.511f 200
50W 200V 50W
c, +
4000
pf
SCR1
2N4441
~ Ra
SIGNAL PULSE 511
RAISING SATELLITE ANTENNA-Signer! pulso
from ecnth triggers SCRl, so Cl dischorges SEQUENTIAL CONTROL-Momentary closing of
through solenoid to provide powerful strolco Sl initiates switching sequence, with each scr
for pushing out antenna or providing other stage having independently adjustable opar•
required mechanical motion. Ql then pulls atlng time. Conduction of SCRl is deter•
capacitor-recharging current to low level to minad by R4, C3, drop across R3, and
allow scr to turn off and thoroby reduce operating voltage of trigger diode TRl.
recycling timo of solonoid. When Cl Is Values shown are for 0.5-A load current.
charged to 12 V, Q2 turns off and stops Ql. Additional controlled stages may be added.-
-J, J. Klinikowski, Transistor Speeds Up E. Kiburis, Sequential Control with Silicon
Charging Circuit, Electronics, Aug. 5, 1968, Controlled Rectifiers, EEE, March 1970, p 100-
p 105. 103.
0.1 pF
TMOA2
120 v I
•
AC I
I
Clomping I
FULL-WAVE CONTROL-Uses Tl42A break· diodoi may be
I
down diodos for triggering scr's. For hon· used if ,~J.':, TUOA2
dling loods up to power rating of scr's.- ..,,oother \..........
•1• '
Preferrod Semiconductors and Components, conlrot is IOkO
I 0.1 pf
requirCo'd
Texos Instruments, Dallas, Texas, CC101, 1968, I
p 24107. •
0.25 MO
mo
9
10k
8
100k 7
6
Qz
Q, 2G321
2G270
@
o,
OA214 50 25
25 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOLTS
CURRENT-CONTROLLED NEGATIVE RESIST· 7 .5 mA, both transistors conduct and voltage Toniolo, A Nogative-Resistance Circuit Doubles
ANCE-For currents up to 3 mA between docreases (negative slope, corresponding to for V or I Control, Electronics, April 28, 1969,
circuit terminals, voltage drop across circuit negative resistance). Above 7.5 mA, only p 78-79.
increases almost linearly because only QI is Q2 conducts and voltoge again increases with
conducting. For higher currents, up to about current, Can be used as flip flop.-F. Broch· 0
WASHING-MACHINE WATER-LEVEL CONTROL

-Simple electrodes D and E soalod In wall of
open vertical tubo sense change in rosistanco
when wator level roaches both electrodes,
then energize inlet valve through transistors
to shut off water. Operates from same 30.V
d-c supply used for other sensors in washing
R1= 12 lc!2 machino.-Transistorlzed level Sensor, Philips,
R2= 3 kO Pub, Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho
R3 = 2.2 kO Netherlands, 1968.
R = 560 {l
4
R 5 = 520 n TR = BC147
1
R6 = 1.5 Jc!2 TR =- BFYSS
2
inlet valve: 28 V; 280 mA D = BA148
39nF
3--i~rH+r........~~~~~+-+~~~--'
ELEVATOR POSITION REGISTER-Philips IC
gates provide performance comparable to
that of relay system, with same cost but
much greater reliability. Can handle maxi-
mum of six floors in apartment building.
Reversible column-type counter has memory
element fer all but top and bottom floors.
,)inf When elevator passes lowest point of slow•
~11-..... .+-f._......~~~~~~~~-l--.._~~~~--' motion zone at each floor, signal is fed from
floor detector through pulse stretcher in
driver circuit (bottom of diagram) to A or
B input lino, depending on whether elevator
Is going up or down. Pulse register at top
of diagram stores and delivers positional in-
formation, except for top or bottom floor
whon it foods reset signal.-J. P. Exalto, Low•
l9nF
lf--lt--....+-t+-r+-~~~~~~-+-t--~~~--'
Cost Solid·Stato Elevator Control, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div,, Elndhoven, The Nether•
lands, No. 69.
lllnF All diodes type BAXI 3

3-1~-4-1 ..........._~~~~~+-~~~---'
-
feoot
dettctor 2.2•A
EPOcr
.....
,_
~·
rn•t
,_
top
SENSING WATER LEVEL-Applles powor to

load through appropriately rated triac untll
Tt "FILAMENT water Jovel touches probe and bypasses gate
TRANSFORMER" current fram law-current C6U scr. This gives
120V isolated low-voltage probe for meoting safety
6.3V
60"' TO requiremonts.-J. H. Galloway, Using the
12.6V Triac far Control of AC Power, General Elec-
tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.35, 1966, p 14.
100
+40Y
+20v
2.7k
4.7k
2.7k
MVBR DRIVE FOR ROD-Combination af multi· solenoids LI and L2 to 9ivo sharp reciprocat•
vibrator and solenoids provides periodic IO ing motion to coro that is common to both.-
linear motion for mochanlcal control rods. R. S. Snyder and A. C. Eberle, Power Muhl·
Rote is adjustable from 1 to 6 Hz by rheostat vibrator Gives Linear Motion to Control
in ujt relaxation oscillator. 01 and Q2 in Rods, Eledroni", July 22, 1968, p 69-70.
mvbr alternately energize and do.energize
_.,,_ ELEVATOR FLOOR CONTROL-Arrangement

RO-----------------~------------~ shown provides signal to floor Indicator lamp
of elevator control system and enabling slg•
nal for up and down command gates. Gen•
oral reset signal R, produced at top and bot•
tom floors, is applied to upper left·hand
memory.-J. P. Exalto, Low-Cost Solid-State
CGllinllilMI Elevator Contra~ Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
~·o------H+-ll------'
Div., Eindhovon, Tho Netherlands, No. 69.
YGn •1,v
0.25 MQ
HALF-WAVE CONTROL-Uses Tl42A broak· 120 v

down diode for triggering scr at point in half· AC
cycle determined by setting of rheostat. Load Tl42A
capacity depends on rating of scr.-Preferred

Semiconductors and Components, Texas lnstru·
I
ments, Dallas, Texas, CC101, 1968, p 24107. I
I
,...... ,,,
I
0.1..,F
''.....··•···
't'
I
:....'
I
IMI\
8AX1l 8AX13 8AXl3
comma:nd ""°p
24V-
doo<s ~.,._...---<>--""'....,."--o•.,.
contat't'I dCWt\ COii
cxtnoe otl
, _ ...<!
EPO MPD
"'"""'ora;;;;..'c~-T---t:.r--
......
pos..tScn
J"''-------l-+lM-µ44<114-_,~··
.....
!I'_,_
ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM-Complete solid· ory is destroyed as soon as elevator enters

state system controls six-ftoor elevator. Use slow-motion zone for that floor.-J. J. Exalto,
of Philips IC building blocks makes, costs move until doors are properly closed. If child Low.Cost Solid-State Elevator Control, Philips,
comparable to that of relay system while giv· opens doors while in transit, brakes aro ap- Pub. Dopf., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The
ing much greater reliability. Elevator cannot plied. Call Information stored in floor mom• Notherlands, No. 69.
120VAC
CR1
G-E oN538
RELAY
Rt
~ OUTPUT
R4 100 K
SC469
M; 3SOK
MOVING IZOVAC
OBJECT 60CPS
~1~~
R;s SCR 1
10 G-E C5B
OKMS
TRIAC POWER CONTROL-Three-position switch

gives full or reduced power for load. At
=Q) l.ASCR1
1.9U
+
t1
40pF
R5
IK
LIGHT
20VOC
reduced power, rectifier changes triggering SOURCE R6
point of triac. Switch can be low-current
type. Good for applications requiring cyclic CONVEYOR-JAM MONITOR-Laser and light ruption of beam turns off laser and starts
switching without noise of circuit breakers, source on opposite sides of conveyor or charging of Cl. Interruptions of only a few
and for remote control.-F. W. Gutzwiller and chuto act with delay and scr to ovorlook or ms do not chargo Cl enough to flro zener
E. K. Howoll, Economy Power Semiconductor pass small self-clearing pile-ups but shut and scr. Rl adjusts delay before scr fires,
Applications, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., down line quickly for impending catastrophic up to several soconds.-E. K. Howell, Tho
No. 671.1, 196S, p 7. jam. With light on, laser conducts and pre- light Activated SCR, General Electric, Syra•
vents voltage buildup across Cl. Each inter- cuse, N.Y., No. 200.34, 196S.
ANOOE
r---------------,
I (100.lll CRI I
I I
RI
1 (IOKI
"GRID" I
GE I
G C350 1
I
I I
I I
1...----------- CATHODE
CRl - - GE IN649
__ .J
THYRATRON SUBSTITUTE-Combination of
small scr as trigger and large scr for power•
handling gives performance characteristics of
thyratron gas tube, including very high signal
input impedance. Maximum forward block·
TYPEWRITER SOLENOID DRIVERS-Used to ac· moment, only one output transistor TRI must
ing voltage with single CS trigger is 400 V.
tuate printing keys of electric typowriter under conduct at given moment, with all other out•
Maximum load curront of circuit is 25 A rms.
control of eloctrical signals from computer or put transistors (for other koys) cut off .-Out•
-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric,
calculator. Each key has armature that Is put Unit for an Electric Typewriter, Philips,
1967, p 169-170.
pulled down magnetically by solenoid. Since Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The
only one character can be printed at glvon Netherlands, No. 832, 1966.
Rt
R:s 33K
3·125K
Rt R1
47K 250K
IZOV
60- 12DV
60-
I -
OUAL OIOOE
6R55GDIBAOI -
UJT PHASE CONTROL WITHOUT HYSTERESIS-

Operation Is independent of variations In
supply voltage. Easily adapted for auto·
C2
0.1}'-f
C1
0.1}'-f
DUAL·RC BILATERAL SCR-Additional phase.

shift network provides control over range of
matic feedback control systems by introducing 5% to 95% load and reduces hysteresis.
transducer in on11 leg of bridge.-E. K. Howell, Suitable for lamps, heaters, and fan speed
Bilateral SCR Lets Designers Economlio on Cir· controls.-E. K. Howoll, Biiaterai SCR Lets
cultry, Electronic Design, Jan. 20, 1964, p Designers Economize on Circuitry, Electronic
74-77. Design, Jon. 20, 1964, p 74-77.
FULL-WAVE WITH THYRISTOR-Breakdown

0.1 ~F Tl43A diode provides triggering of bidiroctlonal
120 v Bidirectional thyristor on both half-cycles, at point in cycle
AC Thyti1tor determined by setting of pot. Load capacity
2N5273
depends on rating of thyrlstor.-Proforrod
Semiconductors and Compononts, Texas In•
struments, Dallas, Texas, CC101, 1968, p
24108.
200k0
0, I ~F
AC .05'11
SIGNAL o--{
INPUT
DC 499K
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED GAIN CHANGER- CONTROL
+4 TO +40v 521( .05pf AC
Provldos 4: 1 gain change of 400..Hz square•
wave carrier signal that Is up to 25 V p•p at
o-----""N------11---~ I 0 SIGNAL
OUTPUT
ALL Dl00£S IN457 (TO IMO LOAD)
input. Diodes are used to switch additional
parallel paths sequentially In simple valtage•
divider circuit. Increasing d·c control voltage
mokos diodos conduct in sequence because of
increasing back·bias applied to successive
paths. Gain is maximum at lowest control
voltage, when no diodes are conducting.-R.
B. Mossmon, Diode Divider Circuit Provides
A·C Gain Control, Electronic Design, April 26,
1965, p 46-48.
750 348 348 196 237 196 110
+131h
i-9v
05
2N3638
INPUT OUTPUT
Rz
6.2k
DIGITAL IC AS CONTROL SWITCH-QS servos = A and 330-ohm load resistor at B, circuit be·
as output stage for Fairchild dual-gate IC comes light-sensing preamp with digital road·
to give versatile circuit at toted cost under $2. turo control switch is obtained with RS in, out.-R. Ricks, Low-Cost Digital IC Performs
i'
With rosiston at A and and RS open, linoar 1,000-ohm thermistor at A, and 6·Y 100-mA Linear Functions, E/oc1tonlc1, July 24, 1967, p
amplifier is obtained. Snap-action tempera· relay at B. With FPM100 phototransistor at 86-87.
Ml
CAPACITY
8A
LOW 0 HIGH
MOTOROLA
2N4154
Rl
MOTOROLA MR990
Xl
Vl X2
Cl R2
lK
330-DEG SCR CONTROL-Turn-on pulse for scr rango for load control in each cyclo.-W. G.
X3 is generated when noon fires. Point ell Miller, "Using and Understanding Miniature
which it fires in posilive half of a-c line Neon lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis,
cycle is detorminod by R1, to give 33o-deg Ind., 1969, p 62.
HIGH
R;s SI
IOOk SPOT IOOK
TOGGLE SCR
SCRI TRI SCR2
2N4108 2N4987 2N4108
POWER A0578
DIODE 0.1
360-DEG PHASE SHIFTER-Noon-tri9gerod scr

regulates powar delivered to load on both
half-cycles. Full powor is delivored when SI
TWO.STATE SEQUENTIAL-Sequential control is in HIGH position. Ser Is Tl-40A2.-E. Bau·
fer only two loads gives high overall em. man, "Applications of Noon lamps and Gas
clency and Is self-starting. Operating time Discharge Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J.,
of each 100.mA load is indepondently adiust• p 121.
able.-E. Klburis, Sequential Control with Siii·
con Controlled Rediflers, EEE, March 1970, p
100-103.
~ ......,..._~--4,__~~~--.
I
I 115V SI
60"' NO Tl-40A2
'
TRIAC
120V SC418
60""
0.1
200V 110°DEG PHASE SHIFTER-During each pod·
tivo half-cyclo of sine-wave voltage, 24% to
95% of available power (depending on set•
600-W TRIAC-Provides full-wave proportional ting of R2) is supplied to load via scr trig•
control, using triac triggered by neon lamp gerod by noon lamp. Full clockwise rotation
whose breakdown voltage is same in both of R2 applies full power to load through 51
diredions.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Noon gonged to R2.-E. Bauman, "Applications of
lamps and Gos Discharge Tubes," Signallte, Noon lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Sig·
Naptuno, N.J., p 125. nalite, Neptune, N.J., p 120.
136 ELECTRONIC: CIRCUITS MANUAL
120VAC
G·E
A448
85VOL1S ZOVOLTS
OOFI'
120 VAC
60Hz
12VAC I ~JG
100
GROUND
N.O.·-
SCRI
GE
Cl06YI
E N.Q OR NC
DEPENDING
ON LOGIC
REQUIRED
(SENSITIVITY
ADJ)
Tl
3-POSITION POWER CONTROL-Rectifior re- ALLIED 64Zl36
(OR EQUIVALENT) HIGH
duces load power by culling line voltage to LEVEL
85 V rms.-F. W. Gutzwillor and E. K. Howell, PROBE
Economy Powor Semiconductor Applicotions,
Gonorol Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1,
1965, p 7. ttMRI:- POTTER a LOW
GROUND
BROMFIELD LEVEL
NOKAllAY-12 VAC PROBE
COIL IOR
EQUIVALENT)
LIQUID·LEVEL CONTROL-Maintoins liquid bo pump, solenoid volvo, or other device for

level between two previously established changing liquid level, Operation from 12-V
limits, determined by positioning two metal secondary of filament transformer contributes
probes, in any reasonably well grounded con- to sofety.-D. R. Grafham, Automatic Liquid
toiner. Energization of probes with a·c Level Control, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
eliminates electrolytic corrosion, Output can No. 201.14, 1966.
ADJUSTABLE POSITIVE ----1/JdC---- -15v REGULATED

~OLT4GE
USTABLE
.-------------------+-----.
'= Ct
R4 IOk
ATIVE VOLTAGE fµf 10k
2k
CONTROL SWITCH +30v
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER IN649
1N2979
D3
1 4007
[0]
01 02
G36B C36B
220v
SOhz
SUPPRESS! NG JACKRABBIT ST ARTS-Provides

continuously variable adjustment of amount
of power transferred from motor through
mognetic clutch to load, to prevent swinging
of jot engines and fuselages carried from one
work station to next by overhead trolloy.
Samo circuit acts on mognotic brakes to pre- brake and clutch control circuits. Control R4 Koskinen, Differential Ampliflor Governs Mag·
vent jerky stops. Uses differential amplifier serves bpth for startup ond broking, since notic Brakes And Clutches, Electronics, May 13,
added to conventional ujt's Q3 and 04 in those con never occur simultaneously.-P. J. 1968, p 75-76.
ANODE
100 r---------- -------1
II 6RS20SP5B5 1
THYRECTOR 1
120 VOLTS I I
AC
INPUT
Cl28 C228 I I
I I
"GRID"
I I
TRIGGER I I
XFMR I I
LOAD
I I
I I
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSION WITH THYRECTOR- I I
With thyrector connected in gato circuits of L---------- -------~
CATHODE
scr's, portion of transient energy triggers for·
ward-biased scr into conduction, thereby pro·
tocting reverse-biased scr from damage. Ar· SCR REPLACEMENT FOR THYRATRON-Circuit
rangement permits use of smaller and shown is suitable for direct replacement of
lower-cost thyrector for given degree of pro• C3J thyratron in many 120-V a-c applications.
toclive effectiveness in an scr control circuit.- Thyrector provides transient voltage protec-
F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy tion for C30B scr.-D. R. Grafham, Using Low
Power Semiconductor Applications, General Current SCR's, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 18, No. 200.19, 1967, p 35.
MAGNETIC
REED SWITCH
MECHANICALLY ACTUATED SCR-Only threo

components are needed with bilateral scr for
full-wave control of a-c load, as compared to
nine components and two conventional scr's in
conventional circuit. Any other typo of
PHASE-CONTROLLED BILATERAL SCR-Roquires switch may be usod.-E. K. Howell, Bilateral
only four components, though has limited con• SCR Lets Designers Economize an Circuitry,
trol range and large hysteresis ot low output. Electronic Design, Jan. 20, 1964, p 74-77.
When voltage across triggering diode roaches
3S V, Cl discharges through diode into gate
of bilateral scr.-E. K. Howell, Bllatoral SCR
Lots Designers Economize on Circuitry, Elec-
tronic Design, Jan. 20, 1964, p 74-77.
PTI UPPER
PR 30 LIMIT c,
.Olµf
R1
27K
BIN LEVEL CONTROL-Uses two SSPI PR30
light-sensitive scr's with light sources, mounted
at upper and lower control limits of material
in bin. With level above upper limit, both 02
photoscr's are dark and off. When level falls INl763
TO EXCITER
below upper limit, PTl switches on and C3 LAMPS
o, LOAD
12V
AC
115 A.C
IN1763 INPUT
charges to peak positive a-c supply voltage.
Whon level falls below lower limit, PT2 is R3
triggered on, making half-wave rectified a-c 15K
energize load and refill bin. When level rises
above lower control limit, C3 voltage holds
PT2 on. Whan levol roaches upper limit,
PTl turns off and load is deenorgized, stop- PT2
ping charging of C3 so PT2 also turns off.- PR 30 LOWER C3
IOµf
Automatic Bin Feed Control, Solid State Prod· LIMIT Cz 25V
ucts, Salem, Moss., No. 12. .Olµf
R2
27K
CHAPTER 17
Converter Circuits-D-C to D-C
+v,
•
-c,
"}"
II
:: Nz
"
II
L
20-KHZ 30-W D·C CONVERTER-Uses BDY10 z C3 are 680 nF, C4 and C6 are I µF, and C5
transistors In autotransformer connection that applications. Roport gives all windin9 data. is 8 µF.-A. H. Hilbors, D. C. Converters Op-
permits addin9 13.8-V d-c Input volta9e to Dl is BYZ13, D2 and D3 aro BYX10, and D4 erating at 20 KHZ, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
26-V rectified autput of converter to 9ivo re• and 05 are BYll8. RI is 68, and R2 and Div., Elndhovon, Tho Netherlands, Na. 436,
quired 40-V d-c output fer mobile transmitter R3 aro 10. C and Cl are 100 µF, C2 and 1966.
+20v 1N1220A 1N1220A
300 5~ 3.9k
I
43k
a,
2N2718A
47 47k
D-C STEPUP AUTOTRANSFORMER-Stops up lator QI controls switching action through

supply voltage for solid-state circuit by using flip-flop Q2.Q3.-C. D. Brock and L. E. John-
transistors QB and Q9 to charge Cl and then Input, output af circuit is 35.5 V at 80 mA, ston, Push-pull Capacitors Multiply Input Volt•
discharge it Into C21 repeatedly. With 20-V with elllciency of 60%. Ujt rolaxatlon oscll- ago, Electronics, Nov. 13, 1967, p 101-102.
138
CONVERTER CJRCUITS-D-C TO D-C 139
COMPLEMENTARY MULTIVIBRATOR
R3
2.2k
03 04
4037 4037 10v
INPUT
© ©
Ct C2
o, 02
BSY86 BSYB6
VOLTAijt. MULTIPLIER
©
®
ALL DIODES BAY 38 ALL CAPACITORS IOµf, 25 VOLTS capocitors changes output polarity. Mvbr
D-C VOLTAGE CONVERTER-Uses 10-kHz com· mvbr is fed into diode-capacitor network be- does not restart itself, so starting switch is
plementary mvbr to change 10-V input to low, for rectification and multiplying of am- ploced in d-c input line.-K. Van der Goar,
100-V output with 280 mW power. Effl· plitude according to number of multiplier Tronsfermerless D-c Voltage Converter is 70%
ciency Is 70%. Squaro•wavo output of stages. Roversing connections of diodes and Efficient, Electronics, April 14, 1969, p 95.
C"2
+ zzv
11
r-
' QI + Cl
22UF
UV
+
C3 R~
82UF 20•.1%
30V
02
tR4,_.C_R~--'Wll--t----f-A--~--~
6
04
V<C I
20K 0 1%
C4 + I "8
~
560UF
r.v R9
zzn
1110
.,on
I 270
~-~._.__...,..~--"W¥-'..,_t,...I-_.
GAO 1
I GAD
TPG $ All
2 rn
CR6 CR7
I I
:(1:
:
:
I
.L CR8
; I 8ZUF
30V
I ,,~'-1--~
I Rl4 + C7
08
I _]-ct--t---t----+--=-..~<2001\ 22Uf
nv
I CR9 CAIO RI$
I
I
I 115",1%
L-~- J
22 V BIPOLAR FROM 5 V D-C-Provldos -zzv
supply voltagos required by onolog cards, tor assembly, and regulator. QI & Q3 aro commorclally as D-4085 plug-In module,
with load ond line rogulotion better than 2N3906; Q4 & Q6 aro 2N1485; 02 & Q7 are Circled numbers are etched board connector
0.15% at 360 mA output current. Input is 2N5190; QS & Q8 aro 2N3904. CR3 & CRlt pins.-lntegratod Circuit lo9lc Cards, Elec·
from standard 5-V d-c digital power source. are IN52328 5.6-V zenor; all other diodes aro tronlc En9ln11oring Co., Santa Ana, Cal., 1969,
Consists of d-c to a-c converter, rectiflor, flt- MR310. Tl is Topa PNABl44. Available P DS77.
+12v
33 V FROM 12 V-Transistors act as switchos

1
for charging capacitors in parallel and dis-
charging in series to obtain inexpensive trans-
formerless voltage multiplication of squaro-
lE33V
-,-
wave pulses when required pulse amplitude
is greater than available supply voltage. To OUT
obtain positive output pulses, use negative
supply, reverse diodes, and change ta pnp
transistors. Values shown handle repetition
rates up to 6 kHz into 2K load.-P. Yanczer,
Eliminate Pulse Transformer with a Voltage
Multiplier, Electranic Design, Aug, 15, 1968, p
234.
REGVERTER-Uses solid-state d-c converter as

270.1\ series regulator to obtain high efficiency as
AS
mobile supply operating from 12-V battery
and delivoring 25 W at 115 V and 400 Hz.
Operated ovor 3 years in space orbit appli-
cation. Output transformer (secondary not
shown) uses Magnetics Inc. core 50425-4A
with 556-turn secondary. Article gives trans-
former design data.-5. Levy and W. L. Blair,
High-Efficiency D.C.-D.C. Converter, Eloctronics
World, Fob. 1969, p 35--37 and 59.
100 W IN 12 OUNCE~-Gives 85% efficiency

at 50 kHz operating frequency, in converting
28 V d-c to 250 V d-clat 400 mA. Maximum
ripple In output is 0.5%.-T. B. Mills, De- .OIJ,lf
1
QI C5
signing Smaller, Llgh! r De-to-De Converters,
EEE, March 1969, p 6-80. RI IOT llOT
Zk
C1 S~ISOV
n--=='-----4'-------6------~~-- .....-----+-------
~ I
28V INPUT R4·
IOQ Rl
3T
R3 150/ 'lW
Q1, Oz : 2N5002
I
C4: IJ,lf/400V
All Diodes: FD300
Core ferroxcube K300502-3E O.IJ,lf I 3V
CONVERTER CIRCUITS-D-C TO D-C 141
DCVOUT
+ c,,~
-
Tl
IU
271(~
J CAI .
I
• A3
100
l!f2071 Tl
IW
cd
t2
.02.,T
:tlO'I.
bOOV
Buf
2SOV ff A4
200
2
T4
+ 0--·
n
28-170 V D-C/D-C CONVERTER-Burroughs vollage level is achieved with oscillator Ql,
VC28·170-1 module was davolopod for opor• transformer, and rectifier. Maximum output
ating Nixie tubes, drlvor modules, and othor current Is 30 mA, with 4·V p•p ripple at full
applications whore required hlgh-lovel d·c load.-DC·DC Converter, Burroughs, Plainflold,
voltage is not available. Conversion of d-c N.J., No. 1087A, 1967.
DI DZ
c•
-JI-----,
01,01 D27CJ HEATSINK CCIA[: F£RAOXCU8E

Al ·'"'
112
01,02 Al4r • Z'16P• 3E POT CORE

R5 4.7KG ' " , Tpz 7r •Z5 WIRE
R'9 1oon,1ow TFa IOT • HWIRE
c,e .ooee sov 160T • SZ WIRE
"*-1-E·~+
Ts
C1N 100,.1
1,.1 •oov N2071
CFIL
03,~S,6 ltt5056
MC[fl
C2 C3 114
280 V D·C AT 20 W FROM 12 V D·C-Arrango•

ment is compact low-cost means of obtaining
::r·~- 200~
high·voltago d-c supply from bottories. Can T4
bo usod as d·c/a-c Inverter by romoving 02
2N404A
bridge rectifier, in which case output is 280
V a-c at 16 kHz. Article gives design cri·
Iorio and dolailed instruclions for dosignlng
and winding pot-coro transformer.-R. A.
Yodlowski, Designing A 12 Voh DC to High 12-170 V D-C/D.C CONVERTER-Burroughs lator 01-02, transformer, and rectifier. Max•
Voltage DC Converter, Goneral EIHlric, Syra• VC12-170-1 module can be used where high· imum output currant is 30 mA, with 4·V p·p
cuse, N.Y., No. 90.75, 1969. levol d-c voltage is not available, as for op· ripplo at full load.-DC.DC Converter, Bur•
erating Nixies and driver modules. Step-up roughs, Plainfield, N.J., No. 1087A, 1967.
of d-c voltage is achieved by transistor oscil-
o,
2N278
Rt
560
6.5v d·c
+
» -.....- -..... - -.>o,......,.. - -+-~.....--c
INPUT
OUTPUT
29Dv d·c
02
2N278
CUTIING START·UP POWER-Base roturn reduce large currents neaded to develop start• Offers Good Regulation, Elettronics, Feb. 6,
sistor In conveqtional d-c/d·c converter ing voltage for switching transistors 01 ·02 1967, p 72-73.
(shown dotted and normally 30 ohms) is re• and thereby reduce power consumption.-R.
placed by back•to-back diodes D1·D2, to re- M. Glocioso, Converter Cuts Start-Up Power,
RI
5k
' 27
'-+-~--
IOk
+Vo
.....-----41----0
V1N
N
27
-Vo
+13.6
IOOWATllOV
fo•3.5 KHi
13.6 V D-C TO 3.5 KHZ TO 110 V D-C-Do-

livers d-c power output of 100 W. Book
gives detailed procedure for selecting opti-
BOTH POLARITIES FROM ONE-When con· Ideal for supplementing costly bonch power mum transistors and componont values for
nected to single ungrounded pewer supply supplies in circuit developmont laboratories. achieving efficiency above 75% at roted load.
up to 40 V d-c, circuit provides both positive -C. Sewell, Jr., One Power Supply Doos tho -"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Har•
and negativo voltages that aro Independently Work of Twe, Electronic Design, April 26, rison~ N.J., SP-51, p 183.
adjustable and can furnish up to 50 mA. 1967, p 241-242.
Ot 6.5-290 V D·C WITH GOOD REGULATION-

2N27B Use of feedback circuit to control baso cur-
Rt rent of switching transistors Ql.Q2 substan-
560 tially improves regulation in automotive ap-
plications where Input voltage is poorly
regulated. Switching frequency is 1.2 kHz.
With 6 V input at 5.5 A, output is 290 V at
98 mA, for 86% efficiency. At 7 V and 5.8
A, output is 292 V at 98.5 mA, for 70.7%
ofllciency. Article describes circuit operation
in detail.-R. M. Glorioso, Converter Cuts
Start-Up Power, Offers Good Regulation, Elec•
tronics, Feb. 6, 1967, p 72-73.
Ds
1/4 M24Z
O.Sp.f
05 + OUTPUT
t/4 M24Z Bp.f 29D v d·c
!SERIES STRING
OF 121
O.Olp.1
Oz
2N278
UNMARKED DIODES 1NS40

CONVERTER CIRCUITS-D·C TO D·C 143
I +
I
I
47k .J.... (43v
0.22 1k 1k
i NO LOAD)
-----1
I
I
- 1211
-=..IOMA
120 NO
3tvLOAO
Dz
+
0 1 -0 4
1N34
TRANSISTOR-SWITCHED SERIES-PARALLEL CA· for noxt half-cyclo, Q3 and Q4 are forward· 01 - 04 2N3704
PACITORS-Whon Q2 Is off, all three 0.1-µF biased into conduction through capacitors to CAPACITORS IN MICROFARADS
copacitors charge to supply voltage loss drops place all threo 0.1-µF capacitors In serlos-ald- tion can bo obtained by connecting output
in diodes and 1K resistors. Q2 Is part of ing for transferring their charge through D4 capacitor to positive supply.-H. R. Mallory,
fro-unning mvbr (about 1.35 kHz) that Ini- to 120-µF output capacitor. Dashed lino Capacitors Add Up In Voltage Multiplier,
tiates switching adlon. When Q2 comes on shows how oxtra stage of voltage multiplica- Electronics, March 2, 1970, p 104.
Cz
20
O.Ol~F
01 l~/2.W
ZT
)00
voe
HOT
T-
R1
l!IJ\/ZW
2.T
01,0z: 2N4998
C..: 0.47 pF/400V
ALL DIODES: FD 300
i
CORE FERROXCUBE K300!!02•3E
R~
IJ., Ir
rr1""""' .....
t CLIPPED AT THIS LEVEL
O.lpf/311 SPIKE-CLIPPING ZENER-Singlo zonor D3 pro·
40 W USING HIGH-FREQUENCY TRANSISTORS tects transistors in d-c converter from spikes
-Article gives nomograms for output powor that may be several times supply voltage,
and transformer design calculations, with 40- occurring when transistor current switches off
W circuit as example of design procoduro. through leakage lndudance of power trans-
Inverter frequency Is 46.5 kHz.-C. W. Young, former.-P. Vorgo1, Transient Clipper For DC
Nomograms Simplify Design of DC-To-DC Converters, "400 Ideas for Design 5olocted
Convertors, EEE, June 1970, p 46-47. from Electronic Design," Haydon Book Co.,
N.Y., 1964, p 208.
+12v
-20v
I.Bk 180k I.Bk 200

C1
O.OOlpf
COMMON
SQUARE WAVES FOR D-C CONVERTER-

Astablo mvbr Q2.Q3 generates square waves
with 15% hl9hor operating efficiency than
saturablo reactor sometimes used in d-c con•
vertors, and reduces cost and size. Frequoncy
is 4 kHz, and riso and fall times are both loss
than 0.3 µs.-G. Marosi and F. ludding, Mul-
tivibrator Replaces Rooctor in D-C Converter,
Eledronict, July 10, 1967, p 81-82.
ALL TRANSISTORS 2N3417 ALL DIODES 1N3879 -:-
Rt= 33 0
R2 = 100
'---1------L-------.{1+ R
3
= 10 1til
R4 = 4.7 k!l
Rs= 2.7 k!l
R
6
= 6800
input . output.
R 7 = 1 k!l
10-1s.2v 28V
Capacitors
Ct== 0.1 µ.F
c 2 = 12.S µ.F
c3 = 500 p.F
DI Is BY126, D2 is BYX30/200R, and 03 is
12 V D-C TO 28 V D-C STABILIZED-Delivers noiseless operation and economically small BZY94-C22.-J. M. Siemonsma, A 23 W Volt-
up to 800 mA with 80% efficiency, and will design. Report gives winding data for age•Stabillzed D. C. Converter, Philips, Pub.
operate with supply voltages from II to 15 transformer and choke. TRI is BCY38, TR3 Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether·
V. Oscillator frequency of 20 kHz gives Is BCIOB, and other transistors are BDl21. lands, No. 439, 1967.
400
TYPE
21113265
6T·
No.14 HFV
BIFILAR
37T
No.28 rJ:.~ ~---l~--->il
lo<FV
HFV
250-W 50-KHZ D-C/O.C-Samplo circuit
shown is used to explain procedure for de-
2.5T 2SO,..F T signing practical high-speed two-transformer
No.22 HFV 6
Bl"ILAR No.14 HFV push·pull converter. Operates from 28-V
BIFILAR d c supply and delivers 80 to 90 V d-c de-
0
HEAT StNK
5 °C/W TYPE TRANSFORMER CORE MATERIALS: pending on load.-"Sllicon Power Circuits
21113265 T1-ALLEN-BRADLEY TYPE Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 194.
T062CHl01A, OR EQUIV.
HFV•lo<EAVY FORMVAR INSULATION T2-ALLEN-BRAO?..EY TYPE
U2625Ct33A, OR EQUIV.
R 1 == 2700
R2 = 180
R 3 = 180
Capacitors
C = SµF
=
C 1 IOOµF
c 2 = 820 nF
C 3 = 820 nF
C 4 =1.8µF
C6 = 8µF
C 6 = I µF
C 7 = 1 nF
/
20-KHZ 6o-W D-C CONVERTER-Use of tran· gives reduction In size of transformer and about 75% ofllciency. Nominal input is 13.8
sistors having high cutoff frequencies and filter components. Transistors are AU103 on V d-c and output is 40 V d-c.-A. H. Hilbors,
power dlodos with • shortor switching times heat sinks. Dt is BYZ13, D2 and D3 are D. C. Converters Operating at 20 KHZ, Phillps,
perlnits operation cit 20 kHz where trans• BYX10, and D4 and DS are BY118. Report Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho
former noise Is outside audible range, and gives winding data. Output is 60 W, at Netherlands, No. 436, 1966.
CHAPTER 18
Converter Circuits-General
A-+
TRANSFER INPUT
FROM DISPLAY
CONTROL ASSY. 5
Al5(4) THRU ~f.----..+---.:.:..:;~....;:..:.=.._ _;----~
STORAGE SW. S 7
NEON BINARY-DECIMAL-Circuit shows one
-35V .~15~~-.......11-+-~---~~~~-+-...-~~~-
stage of binary counter developed by Hew• FROM A24 (15)
lett-Packard, in which neon glow lamps ond
solid-state photocondudor elements perform
decoding logic ond necessory goln for driving
decimal indicators. Light from noons falls on
group of photocells to provide current path for
operation of vlsuol decimol dlsploy. (Book
shows and describes photocell display matrix).
Diodes ·CRI and CR2 enable lnformotion to
be stored while another counting operation
proceeds. Circuit cycles in 10 counts instead
of normol 16, and drives decimol display.-E.
Bauman, "Appllcatlons of Neon Lomps and
..rt. 7
SIGNAL INPUT
Gos Dischorge Tubes," Signollto, Neptune,
N.J., p 130-135.
GATE INPUT FROM .Ii!.+-___.
GATE CONTROL ASSY.
A14(6) IAl7 ONLY)
12
RESET INPUT ~:+--~-~....+----------~~~
FROM RESET LINE
6
"lJ" BCD OUTPUT
2 r------,
t
SINE WAVE
INPUT
7 B
I s
I I
Lt-i-'~1~~
t5v _
- parotor is added to negative offset of the
SINE-5QUARE CONVERTER-Two IC compara· temperature ond omplitude variations. Out- other to maintain symmotry.-G. S. Oshiro,
tors convert sine waves to symmetrical square puts of comparators trigger R-S flip·flop on Two IC Comparators Improve Threshold Con-
waves while operating in noise with wide thelr edges. Positive offset from one com• verier, Electronics, Dae. 23, 1968, p 59.
145
IOI< MALLORY
TRl77 OFf'
.---...-----------------.._;;.9.~8~V~ON
1.51( +
l,2K
LOAD INPuTf\...,
300 OUTPur'l.J
OHMS
241(
ALL RESISTORS 1/4W 5%

1•25 •Hz SINE-SQUARE CONVERTER-Schmitt trigger
100-W 25-l<HZ CONVERTER-Uses pulse convorts output of 600-ohm sine-wave signal
switching techniques and two transformers to generator to squaro waves roquired for test•
provide high d-c output voltage and high. ing digital oquipmont.-J. Shagena and A.
speed oporatian. Book discusses load lines Mall, Plug-In Squaring-Unit for Signal Genora•
for optimum performance.-"Silicon Power tor, EEE, Oct. 1966, p 138.
Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-
51, p 98.
.i(""Acos Wt
St
........--..... I
0 ~ TIME Sz
100k
,,,,,..---....__A sin wt
Sz
:;7~ 0.047/d
Az
PIN9 ::3 -v L St
Az
PINl =i F
At
PIN9 -:- 24.9k
At
PIN3
PINI
Oz PIN4
:EJ ON ON
LE 24.9k
PIN 1 _,...;;o-11_...;;o.;.;11_t_o_N_ ___

Ot PIN4 • ON
2.55k
DERIVED RATE CIRCUIT WAVEFORMS
;~~~.g~LSL
O
TWOAXIS@PROBE
MAGNE-
s,
TOMETER •
•
----
DIRECTION OF
MAGNETIC FIELD
-s,
CELL
~---1 SIGNAL
~ s, LIGHT ~
RAYS
MAGNETOMETER ORIENTATION SOLAR CELL ORIENTATION ANO CIRCUIT
ROLL RATE TO D-C VOLTAGE-Sensors on vehicle. Inputs oro differentiatod to produce with positivo half-cyclos to produco d-c output
periphery of roclcot or spaco vohicle genorato now signals whoso amplitudes aro proper• proportional to roll rote.-W. A. Coolce, IC's
sinusoidal inputs at 51 and 52 in quadrature, tional to angular frequency. Nogative half· Goto FET's for Roll Rote Dato, Electronics,
with frequency proportional to roll rate of cycles am inverted by amp,lifler and summed Fob. 16, 1970, p 105-106.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS-GENERAL 147
-6V 5 .lk 5. lk
'=' IOflF /IOV
.----o-sv
+ E--i
OUTPUT
+12V
510
-6V
l.2k 5. lk
-6V -6V
LIGHT-TO-FREQUENCY CONVERTER-Input im- lithographic equipment, In which output pulses
pedance of mosfet Q1 is 10 toraohms, as re- are fad into counter that turns off light
quired for obtaining linoor rolotionship be- source at predetermined count. Can be cali-
tween light input on photodiode DI ond brated so each pulse corresponds to exposure
square-wave output frequency. Opamp func· of 0.1 mW-s.-H. Murphy, Count Your Foot-
tions as ono·shot for generating 0.1 ·µs reset Candlo1 with Photodiodes, Electronic Dosi9n,
pulses. Used in exposure control for photo· Aug. 15, 1968, p 206-207.
r-------------------,
'I I
1....1.-.0---~
115V
60"'
IN
IE
Ill
10
m II
2
:> 12
I 0
1 z 13
.J
<(
~ 15
u 16
14
l&.I
0
0 17
180---1
z 190---..
0 200---+--
E 210---+--
~ 220---+--
o.. 230---+--6
~ 240-....----+-__,.._______......,
...j
Ill CRI . __ _.......
--:-- -
14 DIODES llN414BI
12 TRANSISTORS (2N3415)
LAMPS 1815 200 MA. @ I 4V
xzl
BINARY-TO.DECIMAL DECODER DRIVERS-
Transistor matrix provides both logic and NEON DECIMAL-BINARY-Demonstrates bi·
amplification for lighting appropriate one of nary arithmetic, using A072 neon lamps In
ten indicator lamps for decimal display when simple circuit. Rotary switch pormits 24 bits
input signal 11 in 8-4·2·1 codo.-R. M. Muth, of information to be transmitted to remote
Digital Circuits with Visual Readouts, Gen· visual display.-E. Bauman, "Applications of
oral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.3, 1966, Neon lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Slg-
p 11. nalite, Neptune, N.J., p 136.
UNIPOLAR TO BIPOLAR-Converts positive Ecc output when It stops conducting. Input of

pulses to positive and nogative (bipolar) -2511 +a V gives output of 12 V peak-to-poalc.-W.
pulses, as required in many business machines D. Waddle, Switching Amplifier Converts Uni·
and data transmission sets. Article explains Re Oz polar to Bipolar Pulses, Elodronics, Oct. 3,
circuit oper~iion wherein Q1 causes negative 5.6 k Ot IN198 1966, p 103-104.
INl98
+Eo +6v
01 Rt
\Eour o-
·ru-t~....
2Nl07 3.9 k
E IN / -6• -Eo
O 0 I 2 3 i +Et
+av
- 0 2 3
+125•
PENTODE MIXER-Developed for usll in binary
4•1 combination of oscillators and mixers for
output generating large number of discrete fre-
quencies for phased (eloctronic scanning)
47
radar. With 1OS MHz at 0.7 rms applied
~ hn
1
to control grid and 40 MHz at same levol ap•
1 '"
plied to suppressor grid, second harmonic
OOOpl
of 40-MHz signal is down 34 dB and all othor
harmonics aro more th.an SO dB below desired
IIOOOpl
tOOOpl output signal.-G. F. Ross, Binary Generation
4: ':'
I.,.. of Frequencies Saves on Hardware, Eloclronic
De1ign, Nov. 23, 1964, p 38-42 and 44-47.
IOOOpf
680
1 1000pf~
UNIJUNCT ION I
TRANSISTOR LOG LINEAR SWEEP PEAK DETECTOR I
CONVERSION CIRCUIT PULSE AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AND FILTER I BUFFER STAGE
+42V +z5vl
I
+30V
IK
I
201'1 I Eo
+ I
I
22V
LINEAR TO LOGARITHMIC-Provides logarith·
mlc d·c output for linear d·c input, using ujt In ing sawtooth pulses go through peak detector ural logarithm of input voltage.-J. Sheehy,
R·C relaxation oscillator network. Output and fllter to buffer amplifier that dolivers de- Dovico Providos DC linear To logarithmic Con•
pulses of ujt are amplifled and used to synchro· sired d-c voltage, proportional to period of version, Electronic Design, July 6, 1964, p 50-
nlze linear sweep genorator-amplifler. Result. sync pulsos and therefore proportional to nat• Sl.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS-GENERAL 149
OUTPUT SIGNAL-POWERED SINE-SQUARE-Delivers

.i._ squaro-wave output in range of 2 to 16 V
OSC. INPUT -::- p•p at frequency of 600-ohm oscillator feed-
.i._ ing input, in range of 5 Hz to 600 kHz. Cir·
cuit dorives its own positive and negative
supply voltages by rectiRcation of input signal
in Dl and D2. Output waveform is osson-
tiolly independont of frequency, with 20.ns
riso time and 30-ns fall time.-D. R. Morgan,
Signal-Powarod Sine-To-Square Wavo Con•
Cz vorter, EEE, Nov. 1969, p 107-108.
ALL DIODES IN914 C7
ALL TRANSISTORS 2N3663
T+ 500µF
J-0.0lµF
_j_IOV
IOCIK
+ INPUT
'-----tf--0
IOjlF
OUTPUT
o--l •
IOµF 5K HEP&lll
4-INPUTGATE
SINE TO SQUARE-WAVE IC-Converts any

audio signal generator with at least 2 V p-p DIGITAL CONTROL OF VOLTAGE-Two parallel
output to high-quality square-wave generator. trains of information pulses aro applied to
-"Tips on Using IC's," HMA·32, Motorola, balanced input terminals of Phillps DOA40 IC
Phoenix, Ariz., 1968. opamp through two 0511 IC monostable
mvbn. With DOA40 externally connected as
difference amplifier and integrator, output
voltage Uo is proportional to difference be-
twoon number of input pulses arriving per
+28V
unit of time. This voltage is held even whon
no furthor pulses are deliverod.-Electronic
Potontiometer With 40- and 1O.Serias Circuit
Blocks, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Eind-
hoven, The Notherlonds .
.;;;.~412
...-+.......>+--+--1-"....--+----+-DI~
-------------------0+12\'
4701l IOK
2.5K
OUTPUT
IOOll 2.7K JUl

40 DIODES IN4148
10 TRANSISTORS 12N3417)
LAMPS N0.1829 40 MA @ 28V SINE-SQUARE CONVERTER-For 5-MHz sine-
wave input at 2 V p-p, output is 2-V p-p
BINARY-TO-DECIMAL CONVERTER-Binary sig- square wave having rise time of about 20 ns.
nal in 8·4·2-1 codo is converted by diode Circuit uses emitter-coupled limitor in which
matrix to decimal code which lights ono of rise time is limited only by switching times
ten lamps, each having a transistor driver.- of transistors.-H. Hahn, Emitter-Coupled
A. M. Muth, Digital Circuits with Visual Read- limiter Produces HF Square Waves, "400
outs, General Electric, Syracuse, N. Y., No. Ideas for Design Selected from Electronic
671.3, 1966, p 11. Design," Hayden Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 66.
RMS TO D·C-Providos d-c output voltago

diroctly proportional to rms value of input
voltago. Input passos through o-c/d-c con·
vortor, polar squaring, integrating, and
sql)ore-root operations. Input levels are
16.S limltod to about 5 V poak or 3.5 V rms. Ro-
quiros both 15·V bipolar d-c and 25 V d-c
supplies for OEI IC units. Uppor frequoncy
limit i.s about 10 kHz and accuracy Is 3%.-
10 K A Truo RMS To DC Converter, Optical Elec•
, Uf961B
tronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. I 0058.
to 916.S
121k R1
4.22k
47pf
~A-C GROUND)
DIODE BIAS SUPPLY-Data-compressing con- ...._--------OUTPUT
vorter delivers output voltage proportional to
logarithm of a-c input over 36·dB range. 26.lk R2
Bias voltage Is provided by single diodo, In· 3.48k
stood of with separato batteries usually
required.-R. K. Nisbett, Diodo Bias Replaces
Batteries in Logarithmic Convortor, Elodronics, All DIODES GEIN306B
Nov. 14, 1966, p 123-124.
~
INPUT
ALL RESISTORS 1''o
61.9k
220,pf
+5v.
COMPARATOR SCHMITT TRIGGER
IOk
IN PHASE
SQUARE
1/zLU380A WAVE
R1 OUTPUTS
~1---1--<IOk
SINE PHASE 1eo•our
WAVE 4.7k ADJUST OF PHASE
INPUT
TRIGGER BIAS
ADJUST
4.?k
o, SINE-SQUARE CONVERTER-Produces square·

wavo output pulses shiftod in phaso as much
as 360 dog from analog sino-wavo input.
LM371 Output remains at IC logic levels of 0 to 5 V
for wide range of analog input voltages.
R·f IC amplifier al input operates as compara•
tor and level shifter, driving Schmitt trigger
using half of quad NOR gato.-W. G. Jung,
Wavo Squarer Shifts Phaso as Much as 360
-6v Deg, Electronics, Aug. 3, 1970, p 75.
CHAPTER 19
Converter Circuits-Radio
0 )
1. lpF
2. OµH 470pF
;""::"'.:i..-~~~~.-~rT'~Ti.........-+~----1~(~~--..o
5-lBpF
2-BpF
lOmH
1.0K
2-BpF
-V +V
25 DB CONVERSION GAIN-With 300-MHz
locol oscillator signal (fed through 1.1 pf) MM1941 transistor, output is 50 MHz. Re- sistor Mhcar Design Using Admittance Parame-
and 250-MHz r·f signal injected inta base of port gives dosign procedure.-E. Klein, Tran- ters, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., AN-238, 1967.
c
o1Spf
Rs •
680.'1
FET A·M CONVERTER-Inexpensive self·oscil·
lating converter handles strong signals wilh·
c out overloading, while providing required
0~02 gain for low-level sl9nals. Age circuit 9ivos
I I required square-law chcnacteristic, so only
535-1620 Khz I I sum and difforonco sl9nals are produced.
D 0.02 Transistor of first l·f ampliRer is a9c volta9e
I 4N294 I source. Circuit provides better overload ca•
pabmty and lower nolso figure than most
IL ______ _ - I transistor a-m rocaivar front ends using sep·
_ _ _- _ _ _J
aratoly oxcited mlxers.-D. R. von Reckling·
hausen, FET Converter is Self-Oscillating, flee·
TO AGC VOLTAGE SOURCE Bt tronics, Dec. 23, 1968, p 62-63.
151
=- _ ,....,.......,. _ .-=..t4-19mc
Ou•f'\lt
220-225 MHZ to 14-19 MHZ-Uses overtone

crystal oscillator hovin9 tuned emitter circuit.
rl'""1-"""1""~-.-....~. . -~. . . . Forward gain control ads on both r·f sta9os.
L1-L7 ore 4 turns No. 20 on *i inch brass
slu9°tun11d forms. All couplin9 loops are I
turn. LB is 13 turns , No. 24 on same form.
-F. C. Jones, Transistorized Converters for
V. H. F., CQ, Nov. 1966, p 36-40 and 102-
103.
Cz
~EYER CONVERTER-If connected between

antonna and ontenna terminals of receiver
that can be tuned to 7 MHz, permits reception
of SO-S4 MHz amateur band. Gives overall
gain of 30 dB, with sensitivity of 1 p.V for
10 dB s/n ratio at receiver audio output with
30% modulated si9nol. Article 9ives con·
structlon and oli9nment details. Crystal Is
43-MHz third-overtone. Coil wlndin9 data 0
is given. Ports values are: R1 S.1 K; R2

8.2K; R3 1.2K; R4 11K; RS IOK; R6 2K; R7
12K; RB 2.2K; R9 470; R10 IK; C1 0.003 p.F;
C2, C6 S·80 pF trimmer; C3, C7 0.1 p.F; C4
0.01 p.F; CS 18 pF; CS 0.001 p.F; C9 S pF; C10
O.OS p.F; C11 2S-380 pF trimmer; Cl2, C13,
C16, C17, C18 0.02 p.F; Cl4 12 pF; C15 82 pF;
QI, Q3 HEP3; Q2 HEP2; RFC1 18 p.H; XTAL Rio
~MHz thlrd-overtone.-"Solid Stato Projects
57-62.
1. lpF
3.4µH 470pF
~--~~~.......___.rvvV'\..---j!t--~~'(J--~-o
3-30pF 2-8pF
lOmH
2-BpF 1. OK
0.02µH
CONVERTING 250 MHZ TO SO MHZ-Uses +V -V

2N3308 transistor, Jwith base Injection for gives complete desi9n procedure. Conversion Transistor Mixer Design .Usin9 Admittance
both 2SO-MHz r-f signal and 300-MHz local goln Is about 2S dB for 1 V Input from locol Parameters, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., AN-238,
oscillator 1i9nol fed' through 1.1 !'If· Report oscillator and 1.8 mV r-f input.-E. Klein, 1967.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS-RADIO 153
+IS Vdc
J o.~01 LI
4:1
O.ISµH
5.5-18 pf son
IF
&OMHz
son 0.5-8 pf
2N3823
O.S·8pf
RF
200 MHz 470pf
sou
O.S· LO· 260MHz
18 pf l.OµH 0.5·8 pf
LI = 36 TURNS R24 ENAMELED WIRE L2 " 1-1/2 TURNS #18 SOFT DRAWN
CLOSE WOUND ON 1/4" IO FORM WIRE ON 3/10 INCH ID, 0.3 INCH
WITH SLUG. TAP AT APPROXI· LENGTH.
MATEL Y 1/4 OF TOTAL LENGTH
FROM ONE ENO. ALL OTHER COILS ARE STANDARD
MOLDED CHOKES.
PARALLEL-TRAP MIXER-Trap removes 260- Autotransformor provides high-impedance MHz.-5. P. Kwok, A UniRed Approach to
MHz local oscillator signal in 200-MHz matching at output. Conversion gain Is 10 Optimum FET Mixer Design, Motorola, Phoe•
common-sourco sourco-injoction fet mixer. dB, nolso figure 6.8 dB, and bandwidth 2.2 nix, Ariz., AN-410, 1967.
son Cl LI = 36 TURNS ;;24 ENAMELED WIRE, CLOSE L2 " 2 TURNSF18TINNED WIRE

LO WOUND ON 1/4 INCH 1.0. FORM. 3110 INCH 1.0., 0.3 INCH LONG.
250 MHz ALL OTHER COILS ARE STANDARD MOLDED CHOKES.
.,,. RFC
3.9µH
son C2
RF
200 MH,z 0.5·8 pf
L2
CJ C4
0.5-8 pf 0.5·8 pf
GATE-INJECTED MIXER-Common-source fat

with gate injection gives slightly higher con•
version gain than source injection, for mix•
ing 250-MHz local oscillator with 200-MHz
r·f signal to got 50-MHz i-f output. Parallel
trap in output removes local oscillator signal.
-5. P. Kwok, A Uniflad Approach to Optimum
FET Mixer Design, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
AN-410, 1967.
0.05
SOURCE-INJECTION MIXER-Common·sourco
fat mixer combines 200-MHz r-f input signal
with 260-MHz local oscillator signal to givo 60-
Choice and two capacitors servo for both Input
and output matching notworlcs.-5. P. Kwok, A
Unified Approach to Optimum FET Mixor De-
RFC ~
10µH
MHz output with 11 dB conversion gain. sign, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., AN-410, 1967. 0.001
son
60MHz
LI
0.001 44nH
260 MHz
---11---1son C3 C4
0.001 3 pf 53pf
Cl C2 L3
SS pf 1S pf lµH
0.001 LI = STURNS TINNED #20 WIRE,

ID " 0.15 INCHES, LENGTH a
v65 =.a.a vp 0.6 INCHES. ALL OTHER INDUCTORS
ARE STANDARD MOLDED CHOKES.
154 ELECTRONIC CIROUITS MANUAL
HALF-WAVE CARRIER SWITCH-Addition of

two diodes (from CA3019 diode IC array) to
conventional balanced mixer effectively dou•
bles desired output voltage and halves unde·
sired oscillator signal at output. Improvement
in conversion gain cannot bo realized above 20
MH1, because of capacitances associated with
IC diodes.-"Linear Integrated Circuits," RCA,
Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 305.
2N2398
~·
432 MHZ TO 16 MHZ-Overtone crystal shown

is used for 16-MHz i-f; for 14-MHz i-f, use
·~
69~ MHz crystal. Oscillator output is dou-
bled in frequency by 1 N82A diode. Article
gives winding data for all coils.-F. C. Jones,
Transistorized Converters for V, H. f., CQ,
"'" '!{;MO
.- Nov. 1966, p 36-40 and 102-103 .
"''"""
T/R S.it(h
ALL-BAND-High..Q toroidal antenna coil tunes

from 7 to 28 MH1 without bandswltching.
11 is 12-µH tu~typo antenna coil in reverse.
Use 1O.S MHz for YI and 1.5 µH for L2 to
cover 7~MH1 band, 17.S MHz and 0.9 µH for
14 MHJ. 24.S MHz and 0.6 µH for 21 MHz,
and 31/5 MHz and 0.5 µH for 28 MHz.-R. lM
Jayararfian, A Deluxe 40673 Converter, CQ, fltortof 1'•
Feb. 1970, p 46-48. ~t~~--, R,T" 2.7'(
L)-~J r L--------1
o.oot +15 Vdc
r 3.9µH
RFC 0.15,ui
LI 5·30 pF son
IF
son L0·250 MHz
SO MHz
Rf 0.5·8 pF
2GOMHz son
0.5·8 470pF 0.5-8 pf 0.5·8 pf
pf
0.001 SOURCE-INJECTED FET MIXER-Parallel trap optimum common-source fot mixers.-S. P.
r
'="
In output removes 250-MHz local oscillator
signal which is lnlected into source through
470-pF capacitor. Report covers design of
Kwok, A Unified Approach to Optimum FET
Mixer Design, Motorola, Phoonix, Ariz., AN·
410, 1967.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS-RADIO 155
47 WM 1106 1.0pf
.-----1 I- 2 5 ..:y 1 - - - - 0
~76 ----1--. SIGNAL
'*' 1': '

I 4 OUTPUT
SIGNAt""\
INPUT } 47 _L+ 1 MHZ FROM 60 MHZ-Provides 20-dB sup•
2.0}'f I.BK
pression of 60.MHz i·f input signal and local
'::' oscillator signal in output, yet employs only
simple fixed-tuned circuits using IC video
amplifiers. Conversion gain is 5 dB. Usos
doublo-balancod down converter.-$, G. Shop•
L.O.:-1
INPUT} 47 WM 1106 1.0
herd and A. E. Soman, Design With Integrated
Circuits at 60 Mc, Elodronic Design, Aug, 2,
1965, p 30-33.
'::' ~2 5~
'-----1 ~ 7 4 _ _ ___.
47 .l:t
2.0µ.f ~
6
lI
'::' ~470
(A) o---t)t----...
l.2pF
2N2221A 43. 5µH
500
72. 5pF - 16pF
RFC 500
1. Ok
15pF 0.47µH
-V +V
CONVERTING 30 MHZ TO 5 MHZ-Report A, for base injoction into transistor along with 1 V input from local oscillator.-E. Klein, Tran•
gives comploto dosign procodure, 35·MHz 30·MHz r·f signa~ to give S·MHz l·f signal at sistor Mixor Design Using Admittance Parame·
local oscillator signal is injocted at terminal output. Convorsion gain is above 30 dB for ters, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., AN·238, 1967.
....
ZNl747
50-S2 MHZ CONVERSION TO 14-16 MHZ-

Four tunod circuits givo good Image suppres- eithor tube or transistor receiver that tunes to Converters for V. H. F., CQ, Nov. 1966, p
sion and l·f signal rejoction. Can be used with output frequoncy.-F. C. Jones, Transistorized 36-40 and 102-103.
-IOv
3:7
·1 OUTPUT
I CIRCUIT
1.4 to
1:9
l'H
SO·TO 500-khZ
BANDPASS 7 l'H AL
FILTER 0.1µ1 O.lpl 1-Mhz 15
_ __. ~ CRYSTAL K
ESIG~
7-45
pF
OSCILLATOR
~ 330 330 0&
I
LOW.COST MIXER FOR l MHZ CARRIER-Two·
0
BALANCED MIXER-Uses two diodes in
CA3019 diode IC array. Conversion gain
transistor Imixer ollminatos costly transformor for 45-MHz Input signal and 55°MHz oscil·
required by diode quad, and also provides lator signal varlos from -6 to -15 dB de·
convorsio~ gain. Circuit cancels fundamental pending on oscillator voltage amplitude, and
frequency and produces two sidebands across is -6 dB for 0.7 V.-"Linoar Integrated
output load-for even-order harmonics of input Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., lc.41, p 305.
and carrier. Crystal Input amplitude is ten
times 6~mV input signal amplltude.-L. E.
Geisler, Cross-Coupled Transistors Form Bal·
ancod Miker, Elecltonlcs, Oct. 17, 1966, p 91.
I
Ol·HEP 802
AUTO POLICE·BAND CONVERTER-Uses single

I fet QI as mixor for receiving any l·MHz
I band betwoon 25 and 55 MHz on any auto
I.-------- or portable radio. Article gives Instructions
NOTE: for calculating crystal frequency for oscillator
SWITCH Sl(o,b,el Q2 to rocoivo desired band. f.m signals in
SHOWN IN THE Qff, OR
CONVERTER OUT emergency and business bands are received
POSITION, - by tuning auto radio off to one side, to talce
advantage of slope detection. Value of Cl
C=:JXI
is 33 pf for 25 to 35 MHz, 15 pf for 35 to
45 MHz, and 10 pf for 45 to 55 MHz. Con•
R2 structian details are given.-Edward A. Marris,
33k
Build SimCon, Elementary Efedronics, Mar.-
Apr. 1970, p 57-62.
CONVERTER CIRCUITS-RADIO 15'7
+6 v
T3
.---'9---.13 I
A·M TO F-M CONVERTER-Convorts ampli-

tude-modulated Information to frequency•
modulated information, with output frequency
proportional to amplitude of Input signal.
RI controls percontago of modulation or
,~ Q
2 -6 v
maximum number of cycles that signal will
deviate from carrier position. Usos form of 50 Q
""""'q ~
relaxation oscillator for conversion, with saw- GEN IC BALANCED MIXER-Uses IC r·f ampliRor
tooth output formed by charge and discharge with external connections shown to convort
of Cl .-"Selected Eloctronic Circuitry," NASA 20 MHz to 1.75 MHz.-"Linear Integrated Cir·
SP-5046, Governmont Printing Office, Washing• cuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 227.
ton, D.C., p 16.
NOTE: Ta locate additional circuits in the catogory of this chapter, uso the Index at the back
of this book. Check also tho author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits,'' published by
CHAPTER 20
Counter Circuits
+080V
CATHODE-COUPLED SCR RING-Will drive

hl9h-volta90 loads requiring currents up to
50 mA. Chief advantage is that square RI
33K
waves across each load are undistorted and
free from commutation transients. Chiof
drawback is limitation placod on circuit speod
by large values of commutating capacitors
C4, CS, and C6.-D. R. Grafham, Using Low
Current SCR's, Gonoral Electric, Syracuso, N.Y.,
No. 200.19, 1967, p 26.
GND
ALL SCR 'S : Cl068; OR C68
...A..A_ ALL DIODES: Al38 OR A148
SHOF"T LINE
525Vn"'
270Vu•1.
tJOV1~•t1.
RI R3 R4 RIO R12 R13 Rog

l·OMn l•OMn &e0kn ~OMtl IOMn 6BOkn l•OMtl
Ce
68001>F
3300
pl"
R7 Rg Roe
100 120kn Z504S e2•n Z504S
Z700U ktl Z700U
Noxt
C5
8201>1"
C10
tOOOpF" "•
R2 20
70 2l0
kfi >.n
+JOV +33V
+40V +40V
ov~-4--+------'------- ....~-+---~~~~~"-----i~-+---~..._--~~.J........+.-'-------.l-~~~--l~~
-12v:;:::o-~~-4~~~~~~~~~--i>--~~~~~~~~~-r--'--------------------!~----------------!>---4-----~
-110v!:r.:o-~~--------------------~----------~~~~---t-----------~~~~~--1--~~~~~----~J.-~----~
Ros~to-.-1>---------------------------~--~~~~----.._----------~----~----------~-------------~~~--
1..0 L
4-KHZ COUNTER CHAIN-Uses throe gas• cold-cathode trigger tubo circuits, and last Tube Coupling Circuits for the Z504S Stepping
filled docado counter ~ubes, for counting units, two tubes are coupled by 40-Hz circuit. Tubo, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind-
tens, and hundreds ~t maximum speod of 4 Chain can be continued with 40-Hz coupling hoven, The Netherlands, No. 15, 1965, p 16-
kHz. Fint two tubes are coupled by 400-Hz circuits.-G. F. Jaynes and S. Zilkha, Trigger 25.
158
COUNTER CIRCUITS 159
--------FF4 OUT ALL FLIP·FLOPS WM215T

OTHER IC'S WM221T
- - - - - - - F F 3 OUT
- - - - - - FF2 OUT
- - - - - F F I OUT
JlENABLE GATING SIGNAL

COUNT
UP
INPUT
ir
.n
COUNT
DOWN
INPUT
n
ENABLE
GATING
SIGNAL
REVERSIBLE COUNTER WITH IC'S-Four stagos

aro shown, to givo goneral solution involving set of flip·flops but resat In opposita dirDOo 150 ns.-L J. Brocato, Digital IC's Shrink Ra-
uso of HAND gatos ancl othar digital IC's. tions. Article gives stap•by-stap description versible Counter, Efedronia, Oct. 16, 1967,
Two ldontlcal serial counters sharo slnglo of counter operation. Switching speed Is . p 96-98.
C4
4,µF
l
2JOv §
600V
o.c. workmg
~....---~---..----.--+---.-0--~--o----+--+-----.~~~-.......
0
0&200
Du
0A200
-.--<.....--oov
C7 2•!>V
~de "'°"'"'9
'\, ~ •2V
0
~§
C6 40V
::. d< \';Orkin9
c: •JO +-------_....___ __., -28V
C2 C1
6W IOOo• 100&.1-F
200V 200V
de. de,
work,flg WO,.k•l'g
-Co
80•
2!>0V
de Whore lower than she Z50'4S ire used
WCr'kong -14~V
a value of R• should be Inserted u
R2 follows:
ooon 6W A!> STubes 1MO
'-----4....:.~::.v
''°"'
2w •n
_ _ _ _ _ ___, t•o•z.
4•7 4 Tubn
l Tubes
2 Tubes
690k0+120k0-8001cO
ll:l:C0+270k0m600i<(l
390k0+10k0 a400k0
1 Tube 120k0+8lk0 -lOOkO
SIX-DECADE SCALER POWER SUPPLY-Pro- with either photooloctrlc or triggerod block- Z504S Stopping Tubo, Philips, Pub, Dept.,
vides all voltages roqulrod for six-docade ing-oscillator input.-G. C. Choppoll and G. Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, The Nothorlands, No.
scalar using Z504S docado stopping tube, F. Jaynes, Transistor Coupling Circuits for tho 15, 1965, p 26-38.
+12
l.5K 4.7K 4.7K

I
20KHz
P.W_ 12-25).ISEC
-1lJL 3N84
2000pfd
2.2K
3.3 4.71<
I<
REVERSIBLE SCS RING-Will operate at count 4.7K

rates of 20 kHz and higher. When Ql can•
ducts, count shifts from right to loft, and in
reverse direction whon Q2 conducts. Thero
is no possibility of, false trig9erin9 when
chan9in9 direction a~ count. Output Is takon
at anode 9ate of scs, where volta9e Is +1
V when sta9e is in its "1" state (scs on) and
+12 V when scs Is off ("O"I state.-R. M.
Muth and W. R. Spofford, Reversible Ring
Counters Utilizing tho Silicon Controlled A IOK B IOK
Switch, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
9058, 1966.
A B
COUNT LEFT +12 0
COUNT RIGHT 0 +12
COUNTER CIRCUITS
;.5'1•
n ·033-F'
~I II
---~~r.~
-tv
4-KHZ TRIGGERED BLOCKING OSCILLATOR
FOR COUNTER-Used whon counting input
signals at spoods abovo 1 kHz_ lmprovos
roliobility by providing closo control of pulso
shapo and amplitude, indopondently of tom·
ov---l.-l.11111--~ 11 J -"-->----·--OOV
poraluro affects. Report gives winding data

for transformor, design considerations, and
wavoforms.-G. C. Chappell and G. F. Joynes,
Transistor Coupling Circuits for tho Z504S
Stopping Tube, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nethorlands, No. 15,
1965, p 2~8.
r·-·-·-·-·-·---·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-------·-·-·---·~
. -uoovl
I j
!!!!!11
'--~~~~~...1--.-~----_J
r·---·-·-·-·---·-·-·-·--~
. I
s, I
I R •
j_ ·---··-·-·---·_J
._ __ __,,,
pgrallol illjlvt
DYNAMIC DRIVE FOR INDICATORS-Handles tubas can be ZM1000.-Ph. do Weger, Nu-
ten numerical Indicator tubos, of which three decade counter producing NBCD-ceded out• merical Indicator Tube Drive Using the FC
are shown. RI, R2, and R3 aro rosot tor• puts. FCJ221 is Philips quadruple-latch flip• Family of Integrated Circuits, Philips, Pub.
minals. Counter function is provided by flop, FCJ2 I I Is 4-bit shift reg liter, and FCL- Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether•
Philips FCJl41 IC four-stage asynchronous 111 is decodor-drivor. Numorlcal indicator lands, No. 58, 1969.
V• '' VOLTS
R1 • 2.2K SUS RING WITH RATE-EFFECT RESISTOR-Uses

Rz • 8.2K resistor from supply to each gate lead to sup-
AL• I.OK press rate effect. Will oporate up to 10 kHz
c •.001 with type DI 3P1 sus and reslstivo loads such
as lamps. Uses common-cathodo connection.
When supply voltage ls applied, sus with
lowost switching voltage comos on first, and
c succoedlng pulses stop count along.-W. R.
Spofford, Jr., Applications of the New Silicon
Bilateral Switch and the Silicon Unilateral
Switch, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No,
671.3, 1966, p 7.
RING COUNTER WITH LAMPS-Saquentially

transfars power to series of loads in rosponse
to pulse-train Input signal. Any number of
stages may be used. Output signals may be
picked up as negative pulses at A or B, by
current sensing at C, or by light sensing if 6V·
lamps are used as loads. Input signal must 9 Vdc
be 6-mA negative current pulse lasting about
500 µs. Reset switch must be preued and
released after power is applied, to start op·
eration.-J. Bliss and D. Zindor, 4-Layor and
Current-Limiter Diodes Reduce Circuit Cost and
Complexity, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., AN-221, cmcuJT VALUES
1966.
c 1 = 0.5µF Dl, a, S, M = 1N4001
c2 ° 0,02 µF D:!, 4,G,N "M4L3050SERlES
RESET c3 - CN = O. 05 µF Rl "820!1
L "10 mH ~ .. 5lfl
Q.= 2N2195
Vee +24v
I
.r
Rz
11
~
.;
0 8 9
Dz
rcset~'/Nt.,v---t---t....,.r.•-------+-------1---------11--------------1-------t---.
pulse R ~
4 8AX13
---------11------+--1------------------------.
l[ Ri\'\."-'_____.
onput--\\' Ic, Tc2 Sa 59
putse ' •
dcrk
.--:;i..:"J):..,----+-------r-------r-----
Sw
- ___________,
ov------....--------+-------+------....--------------------'
RING COUNTER WITHOUT DISPLAY-May be . . . , 8, and 9. Values are: Rl 820; R2, R3, trolled Switches, Electronic Appficatlons,
used to drive contr~I circuit for numerical 4.3K; R4, R10-R19 2.2K; R20-R29 3.9K; R30- Phlllps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
printout device, with I negative-going output R39 1K; Cl, C2 5.6 nF; C10·C19 1 nF.-D. J, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 1, 1966-1967,
pulses taken from terminal points 0, 1, 2, G. Janssen, Circuit Logic with Siiicon Con- p 1-11.
V•l!I VOLTS SUS LAMP-DRIVING RING COUNTER-Wiii op.

orate up to 10 kH&. When supply voltage Is
21on applied, sus with lowest switching voltage
comes an first. Succeeding count pulses op.
plied to base of drive transistor step count
along from stage to stage. Circuit Is
common-cathode typo. Uses D13Pl sus.-W.
R. Spofford, Jr., Applications of tho Now Silicon
ALL SIG DIODES
IN4009 Biloterol Switch and tho Silicon Unilateral
.47 Switch, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
671.3, 1966, p 7.
+12V
CI .0047 J'.f
Rl•IOdl
SEGMENT DECODING-Decoding circuit is OR R2•10KQ
goto formed by resistor group driving into R3• 3.31<fl
R4• IOK.Q
transistor. This transistor provides threshold c SCS •3N81
for goto and goin for driving lamp. Input to
decoder Is docimol·type signal from ring
counter, portion of which Is shown. Counter
signal is referenced to ground, for compoti·
bility with OR gates in decoding motrix.-R.
M. Muth, Digital Circuits with Visual Road·
outs, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
671.3, 1966, p 14.
t 12
R4 R4
R20
r----ill.IJ:r-::---'--+-----6-+--~--t-----------+-----'
Sw
ov·--~~~~-- ......~~~~------...~------~.....~----------....----------~----......._--~------.....------....1
SCS RING COUNTER-Drives ZMIOOO 0-9 nu-
morical Indicator tube. Circuit design is negative-going. Values are: Rl 15K; R2, R10- trolled Switches, E/edronic Applications,
simpler and less expensive than those using R19 lK; R3·R4 5.IK; RS lOK; R6 2.2K; R20 10 Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven,
flip-flops. Input pulse amplitudes and dura• mag; Cl·C2 4.7 nF; C10-C19 390 pF.-D. J. Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No, 1, 1966-1967,
tions are not critical, and can be about 12 V G. Janssen, Circuit Logic with Siiicon Con• p 1-11.
+180V
SCR RING COUNTER-Throe-stage cathode.

coupled ring counter can drive high-voltage
loads up to 50 mA. Additional stagos may
RI R2
bo added. Useful in digital applications.
55K 53K
Transfer along string always proceeds in
same direction, with each transfer Initiated
by pulsing common input lino. Gives undis-
torted squaro waves, froo from commutation
transients, across each load.-"SCR Manual,"
41h Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 161-162.
C4
OJ
GNO
..A.A_
SHIFT LINE
Voco--+-----t~----.----1-----------------------
IOOV C2 C3
Ru 0.511F Ru C4
Bpf >200 >35 3pf
200V 50W 200V 315W200V
C1
O.Olpf Rs R1 R4
SCR HIGH-LEVEL SWITCHING-Scr's are both
pradical and economical for high-level
O.Olpfi
T~ IOOV 20
C1
20k
C1
20k
swikhing within counting soquonco In basic O.OlpF O.Ol11F SCR3

three-stage ring counter, despite popularity IOOV IOOV IOOV
2N3228
of IC modules for low-lovol switching.
Articlo covers design procoduro.-E. Kiburis,
Sequential Control with Sillcon Controlled Rg R10
Rectitlers, EEE, Marchi 1970, p 100-103. 500 500
POSITIVE 03 D1 D2
INPUT FDI FDI FDt
PULSEo-._~~~~~~~-+-~~~~~~
RESET
CP
RING OUTPUT
CP----1o1
A D
STROBE
INPUT
A B c D A B 0
lJ
u
LJ
only one pulse can go around ring even if
MSI RING COUNTER-Can be assembled with pulses and in turn drives two docodors, one false triggering occurs.-W. Nadler, Build
minimum number of IC konnoctlons. Straight- for outputs 0 to 7 and tho other for 8 to 15. Ring Counters with Standard MSI, Electronics,
binary ripple-carry counter is driven by clock Decoding networks allow only one output, so Juno 8, 1970, p 96.
SCS BINARY-Stages are triggered by po1itlve-

I
I
going edge of input pulse, after sharpening
IN4009 I by 3N81 scs input stage. Anode-cathode
JU
INPUT
SOllARE
WAYE
--J -1r1r .02
22K
-" IN4009
T MAY BE
I OMITTED
I ON LAST
diode 1N4009 suppresses positive transients
while scs Is recovering. Each scs is turned
an at cathode gate and turned off at anode
._---lf--+----.J STAGE
gote.-Planar Silicon Controlled Switch 3N81 /
22K 22K
3N82, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
65.16, 1964.
IN4009 .001 IN4009 .001
2.2K "'-
IK 2.2K
INPUT .;.2
STAGE
Cz
CAllllYO--------------------.
lllPUTO----t'
f..tC? r-==-....::=-~-
c, ,.-t..,.--·U . . . ---"""--"l'---'I'---'
~
}.._ -+--I .,_lnf...,.....__ ..>q../ BRV39
TllAlllllTOltl
11'52111011
OVu----_,.~-~
11111.All
PULSE-SHAPING DRIVE-Supplies square-wave

input signals to scs ring counter when posi-
tive-going pulses aro fed to base of BRY39
scs.-D. J, G. Jansson, Circuit Logic with Sili· CURRENT SUMMING-Combines four into• 1-2-4-8 counter. NAND gates at loft are re-
con Controlled Switches, Electronic Applica· grated-circuit JK flip-flops in counter for use quired for precloarlng.-D. E. Lancaster, IC
lions, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcema Div., Eind- with motor or other analog readout. Sum Decimal Counting Techniques, Electronics
hoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 1, 1966- of all currents will equal count storod with World, Sopt. 1968, p 4G-43 and 70.
1967, p 1-11.
310t2 39K 39K 39K

IOWATT
I
I 4.7K
DI 471( 47K I
IN4148
I
GND
-t RESET
SCSN0.1
4.7K
(J I l4.7K
scs
NO.n
3N81
47K
10Kt2 i------_.T.01
I Kil IN4148 LIGHT BULBS-28V, 70MA
02
INPUT SCS LAMP·DRIVING RING COUNTER-Designed released, first scs stays on and tho rest stay
PUL~......._-lt+--i 2N3416 to handle large initial current drawn by In· off. Each input pulse then moves turned-on
01 candoscent lamp when cold. When power stage one position to ri9ht.-R. M. Muth, A
.lp.f 2.2K is first applied, any number of stages may Rine Counter for Driving Incandescent Bulbs,
turn on; those are turned off by turning on General Eledric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.24,
-2ev~~~--~--~~~~ Ql with reset button. Whan re11t button Is 1965.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - +12V r------------------------------------------------, I
I
I
I
I
I
J I
2~1
I
I
I
UOk 22(11( 2201C no no• UCIK I
I
L--
• UOll
__ J
I
•
C2
------------4...._--ov
SYNCHRONOUS AND GATE-Scs gato is usod
with scs ring countor to carry out switching
and logic functions that are to be coordinatod
by a train of clock pulses. Gato responds
only when negative-going clock pulse is ap•
pliod to terminal I in synchronism with
negative-going input pulse of about 12 V at
terminal 2, and then produces negative-going
II I
square-wave output pulse at terminal 3 last- . .0 I
IRG
ing for duration of clock pulse. This output
is used for driving counter. Valuos: RI IOK;
R2, R3 tK; Cl, C2 180 pf.-D. J. G. Janssen,
.ILL '-Sdl- 112W IH.lU llOCATlD
AL.Sa CAMDTGM . . . . . 0 t.H.!SS ICICATlD l l
Circuit Logic with Silicon Controlled Switches, BINARY COUNTER-Noons provido high man, "Applications of Neon Lamps and Gas
Electronic Applications, Philips, Pub. Dopt., brightness and quick roadion timo nocessary Discharge Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J.,
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. for display. Good up ta 1.2 MHz.-E. Bau- p 141.
27, No. 1, 1966-1967, p 1-11.
6-VOLT
r·:··. . . lc'S
50mA 1.511
BULBS {IOI
+6VD.C.,
50mA
330
'------YN'Hll.......---'f~CARRV
RESET
1/2 MC791P 1/2 MC791P
•I s Q s Q s Q Q
COUNT
T T 2 T 2' 4 4.711
c Co
Q 11 c Co
0 c Co
ij c Co 0
IC BIQUINARY-Law-cost design (about $11 Can also drive special biqulnary Nixie indi-
per decade for parts) elves complete decimal cator.-D. E. Lancaster, IC Decimal Counting ALL n-p-n 2N5129 (6)
counter, decoder, drivor, and staggered 0-9 Tochnlquos, Efedronics World, Sept. 1968, p ALL p-n-p 2N5139 (7)
lamp readout operating from d·c to 8 MH1. 4o-4~ and 70.
CLOCK
osc
£1!1~'"
+150V
47K
r~50K
82K
IW
IOOOpf 0.033
No.I-::- r 112
5814A
112
5814A
~ TO SPADE BUSS
lmeQ
lmeQ
BEAM X
TUBES
•• +18V
•
-IOV
No.Nrr:
RECYCLE
.,.. .,.. AND GATE
Gr-1------- LOCATION
IN ALL BEAMS FORMED
ONE OR MORE
BEAMS CLEARED
SCHEMATIC
12Vj JUlJl_
0 OV
.1::~ JU1J1J
BEAM·SWITCH1'1G COUNTER RESTARTER-If
beam of Beam-x counter tube clean for any
0 ov4
reason during operation, circuit shown will
start tube again automatically. Circuit will
operate on as little as 3 V from clock osdl-
ov~
·12V nnru
lator.-W. C. Whitworth, Simple Circuit Starts Ess-1
Beam Tubes Automatically, Electronic Design,
Jan. 18, 1965, p 44 and 46.
© ESSj
ov TYT
+12v
3.9k
Slk
Sk
2k
IOk
0.1 µf
(
IOOpf
--1
INPUT
PULSES
IOk
ot
IN7SS
lk
PULSE DIVIDER-Gives sln9le output pulse for number of pulses required ta charge Cl to
any desired number of Input pulses in range point at which Q4 fires and delivers one
from 2 to 90, without binary counter or clamped at 6 V by Dl and applied to base of output pulse.-5. Domanski, Circuit Divides
decoder. Input pulses trl99or one-shot mvbr constant-current source Q3 for chargln9 Cl. Pulses Without Binary Counters, Eledronics,
Ql.Q2, which delivers 150.µs pulse that is Setting of 1O.turn precision pot Rl determines Sept. 30, 1968, p 81-82.
52SV.t~1.
270V't~.,,
130Vt~'lo
R1 R3 Rio
..OMA IOMn l•OMn
C4
Z504S R1 Rg Z504S
33k!l B2kn
GOA
GOB
••·9 •o • •1~9 ~.
Ncixt
stagci
C1 C3 Re C5 Rn
470pF' 41'00 47k0 IOOOpF 21okn
pF
+40V
-12v~:r~o---+---------~--~>----~--~-------<j.-..--~
-110v~;r.:;:o-.--------------------------------
Tube Coupling Circuits for the Z504S Stopping
40.HZ COLD.CATHODE COUPLING-Circuit provide economical and rollablo coupling be- Tubo, Philips, Pub, Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd•
shows mothod of using Z700U cold-cathode twoen gas·fllled decade counter tubes in coun- hovon, The Notharlands, No. 15, 1965, p 16-
trigger lube In self-extinguishing circuit to ter chaln.-G. F. Jeynes and $, Zllkha, Triggor 25.
----
R5 LOAD LOAD LOAD
I 2 3
CRI CR2
R2 C9 R6
RI
l
120 VAC
SW~
C2 C3
-------
C4
+
1 Cl
R3 Rl2 Rl3
R4
SCR2 SCR3
CR5
CR3 CR4
RI ADJUST TO GIVE 120 VOLTS CR&

ACROSS Cl (DEPENDING ON LOAD)
R2 4.7K 2W
R3 IOK 1/2 W CI : 100 p. F • 200 V QI : GE 2N2646 UJT
R4 500 K LINEAR POT C2 ,C3,C4: 5p. F,200V SCRI, SCR2,SCR3 : GE C208
R5 10011112 W C5, C6, C7 :.Ol p.F LOADS: 100 W
R6 I MEG V2 W ca :1p.F,2sv
R7 47'1 l/2W C9 : .I p.F 200 V ADDITIONAL STAGES MAY BE
RS, R9,RIO: IK 112 W CRI -CR4: GE AIOB ADDED BETWEEN DASHED LINES.
Rll, Rl2, Rl3: 33K 112 W CR5 : GE Z4XLIB ZENER
Rl4 : 330 , 112 W CR6 - CR8 : GE Al3F string of lights soquontlally as for advertising
signs.-A. A. Adem, Flashers, Ring Counters
THREE·STAGE SCR RIN~
COUNTER-Each stago to 100 W. Dovolopod for counting applica• and Chason, General Electric, Syracuso, N.Y.,
can handle lamp or ~ther roslstlve load up tions, but can be used also for turning on No. 200.48, 1966, p 5.
+En_
40/o'SEC LOW-COST UJT RING COUNTER-Uses 3N84
~._..""\.t~~-+-~+--+~.----+~---+--.. scs ahead of D13T1 programmable ult count•
Ing stages. When power is applied, anly
scs turns on. Next input pulse turns off
D29A4 transistor momentarily, thereby turn·
Ing off scs and turning on tlrst Dl 3Tl whon
power is rostorod after momontary interrup•
tion. Next pulse turns off first ujt and turns
on noxt, with similar actlon,-W. R. Spofford,
Jr., Tho D13T-A Programmable Unijunctlon
Transistor, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 90.70, 1967, p 13.
2N3415
+ 12
2.2K 2.2K
.001 .001
12K 12 K
BINARY COUNTER WITH LAMP READOUT-
High11aln transistors and low-cunont lamps
oliminato need for separate driver stages.
Continues to work whon either or both lamps
are burned out. Can drive other identical
151< 15K
circuits to form binary counter chaln.-R. M.
Muth, Digital Circuits with Visual Readouts,
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.3,
1966, p 9.
680pf 680pf
TRANSISTORS - 2N3415'S DIODES- IN4148

LAMPS-# 344,-IOV, 15 mo TOGGLE
S25V t~·"
270V t!I'<.
R1 02 R4
l•OMn 0A210 6BOkn
C4
130Vsll.,.
3300pF
R3 R7 Rg
l•OMO k{l 12okn
Z504S Z700U Z504S
GOA GOA
0
GO GOB
011.,.9 •o •
0
C3 C5
3900 820pF N11xl
PF stogz
R:_.
210kn R6 03 Re
Ot 39 1<811~ IE!Okn
OA202
Mn
40V
+30V 33V
-12v~:~~,._____.._______________~---------7--------------------------------+-----
-17ov~~~o-------------------------------..._------------------------------------
aro carefully chosen to provide sumclent timo
400.HZ COLD-CATHODE COUPLING-Cold· for recovery of trigger tubo after tiring, with· gor Tube Coupling Circuits for the %5045
cathodo Z700U trigger tubo provides reliable out false triggering. D-c restoring diode D3 Stopping Tube, Philips, Pub, Dopt., Elcoma
coupling between gas flllod docado counter
0
onsuros that C4 discharges complotely ofter Div., Eindhovon, lho Netherlands, No. 15,
tubes In counter chain. Circuit components each pulso.-G. F. Joynes and 5. Zilkha, frig· 1965, p 16-25.
l
400.HZ PULSE-SHAPING COUPLER-Throe·
I ,...---->----+- -o4~V:!:S.'te
transistor coupling for gas Rllod decade coun•
0
I
ter tubas will transfer pulsos at speeds up to I
400 Hz by producing now pulses of deRnod
shape and amplitude for driving next 25045 I
stepping tube. TR1 Is current ampliRer, feed·
ing cascade connection of TR2 and TR3 using
I
inexpensive ACY17 low•voltage transistors I
instead of one high-cost high-voltage transis- I
tor. Input can bo from external source
through network CIN·RIN, or from cathode of hs
previous stopping tubo V1 .-G. C. Chappell
and G. F. Joynes, Transistor Coupling Circuits
l u -....
for the Z5405 Stopping Tube, Phillps, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether·
I
lands, No. 15, 1965, p 26-38. I
I
I
I
I
I >lOkll
II --.-R3_$_2-·21<..._D._1_-_,,-l"'J--_...__1____
... IOO
___. --4-----01~
R3 ,_ 5•6tD. !er C°""l1ng $1N1- tiqlOw 100ppo.
33 33
0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 IW IW
RESET
-
470
COUNT •I s •I s •I s
T2 T 2 T 4
0 •I c 0 c 0 •I c
1'2 MC790P 1/2 MC790P 1/2MC790P 1/2MC790P
1/2MC724P
CARRY
I
LOW-COST INCANDESCENT READOUT-Uses time, but dimly. EfFoct Is minimized by supply voltage across OFF bulbs.-D. E. Lan•
1
only seven switches to control 'ton bulbs. balancing resistors, to apply full supply volt· castor, For Low Cost, Count on RTL, Elec•
Sneak current paths keep all bulbs on all the age only to ON bulb, with one-third of Ironies, Jan. 22, 1968, p 74-76.
ClOUNTER ClIRClUITS 1'71
15K 15K 680K
BIQUINARY COUNTER WITH READOUT-Con•

IZOK sists of binary flip.flop driving five-stage
(quinary) counter. Two high-voltage Iran•
sistors perform both memory and driving
functions in binary stage. Automatic reset
of ring counter is provided by 4.:T·Y zoner.
Operating limit is 5 kHz.-R. M. Muth, Digital
Circuits with Visual Roadouts, General Elec-
ZllS859 •GV
12VttV
LAMP-DRIVING RING COUNTER-When source
voltage is applied, one stago will be domi·
nant and its transistor pair will turn on first.
Click pulse turns off this stage and turns on
next stage in ring. To obtain indication of
stato of counter, 560.ohm resistor may be
replacod by 8.Y 0.1-A lamp in series with 2.
47°ohm resistor, or additional transistor may INPUT'o..J\N"-1-1:
be driven from top on 560.ohm resistor to l 2k.n.
0
control brighter 12-V 2.2.w lamp. With

transistor drive, counter continues to operate
if lamp fails.-"E-Lino Transistor Applica·
lions," Ferranti ltd., Oldham, Lones., England,
1969, p 18.
5110
.A.
2 n
All n-p·n transistors. type ZTX300 (BCWIO).
All p-n·p transistors, type ZTXSOO (BCWl I)
All diodes, type ZSl40.
I o Io RING COUNTER WITH RELAYS-Low-cost com·
~
bination of thermal dolay relays givos ade-
~ quate performance for low-speed counting
applications, Involving cycle times from 2 s
to 3 min. If chain is closed, as indicated by
dashed lines, counter runs continuously. Out.
puts are taken from third set of contacts on
relays. If start switch is momentarily closed,
circuit runs through ono complete pro9ram
and stops.-G. Richwell, Free-Running Ring
Counter Uses Relays, EEE, Feb. 1967, p 144-
*CONNECTED TO POWER (NOT SWITCHED) 145.
+Vz o-~~~~~~~~~~~~..-~~~~-..~~~~""""'4r-~~~--,
+v1 o----•
.n.
TRIG o----- Ce
V1 •IQOVOLTS±I% R1 •Rz•R3•R10•4700±5%
V2 • 2Q!S VOLTS± 1% R11 • 5.6K:!: ID%
TRIG> 11 VOLTS, I0-30,11S R12• 2.2K± IO%
Dz-De •HD6001 (SILICON) ±
c, • Cz-c5 °100011,.td 20%
Q 1 •2N395 C. • OJ ,.td :t 20%
Oz -Qs • 2N492
UJT RING COUNTER-Arrangement shown Is

superior to othor ult versions, on basis of
dosign margins, flexJbillty, and ovorall per· "on" state ono stage to right, than back tlon Transistor Characteristics and Applica-
formance. Any number of stages may be frem QS to Q2. Trigger width can vary tions, Gonoral Electric. Syracuse, N,Y., No.
used. Each input trigger pulse advances over wide range.-T. P. Sylvan, The Unljunc• 90.10, 1965, p 68.
SET
swz
VARIABLE-TIMING SCS RING COUNTER-Wiii

perform rellobly over wide range of voltage,
temperature, loading, and frequency. For
telemetering, transducers can be used in
ploce of timing resistors RT, so duration of
output Is Indication of measured quantity.
For visual indlca tlon, connect low•curront lamp
between each output (V) and ground. Addi-
1
tional stages ca~ be added as desirod.-"Uni·

junction Circuit Hints.'' General Electric, Syra•
cuse, N.Y., Fig. :12.
..""'
•O
0•4tU il*""'JI OM•ll;Wt ~ l&OIJ' te""Co,,rtllf
4-KHZ SIX-DECADE I SCALER-Uses 4°kH1 three additionol decade steppe·rs with asso- Joynes, Transistor Coupling Circuits for the
triggered blocking oliclllator to drivo first ciated thrao•transistor pulse-shaping couplers. Z5045 Stepping Tube, Philips, Pub. Dept., El·
cold-cathode stepping! tube In counter chain. Includes reset circuit for setting all counters coma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No.
Power supply Is designed to handle up to back to zero.-G. C. Chappell and G. F. 15, 1965, p 26-38.
SUS BINARY DIVIDER CHAIN-Siiicon uni· I,

lateral switch reduces number of compononts, -H--
as comparod to transistor flip-flops, Output
at point B is free from transients. 2N4987
''
sus may also bo UJDd.-Silicon Unilateral
Switch 2N4983/2N4986, General Electric, Syra•
cuse, N.Y., No. 65.25, 1967.
sus'S-2N4983
*'
.....f1_f1_
CL.OCK
12V
470
v•20v
R1
4,7K
R:s
270
Oz
ESI 2Nll32
LI LS-2
Rz
680
IW
GE47 LS400
_J l!IK
O:s
C2 0
2Nl671
+ R+ INPUT
o, c OUTPUT
2N697 1µ.t
SCRI
2Nl!l95
UJT COUNTER-Gives 100:1 count-down for

FOUR.sTAGE RING-Time constant of lamps 1Cl·kH1 Input, to give one output pulse after
limits upper counting froquency to about 20 100 Input pulses. Capacitor C charges
Hz in simple arrangement for counting clock through constant-current source Q2 each time
pulses having widths botwoon 2 and 10 ms. Ql Is saturated by an Input pulse. Circuit
Count can be stopped mechanically by block- values are chosen from design equations
ing light boam between lamp and corre- given, so voltage across C will fire ult Q3
sponding light-sonsltlvo silicon controlled rocti· and discharge C through R4 at 100th pulse.
flor.-R. Carvajal, light-Sensing SCRs Maka -R. A. Wilson, High-Ratio Pulse Counter
Simple Ring Counter, Electronic Design, Feb. 3, Utilizes UJT Switch, Electronic Design, March
1964, p 50-Sl. 15, 1965, p 58-59.
+170 v
scs's - 3N83's ISK

OIODES- IN4148
47K
NIXIE WITH AUTOMATIC RESET-Silicon con· +12V 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
trolled switches combine functions of momory
eloment and high-voltage driver for ring
counter. Feedback from last stago to first
is accomplished by breakdown of 4.7-V zoner,
causing all stages to turn off. First stage
comes on automatically when power is 33K
applied. If any other stage also comes on, it
will bo automa6cally cleared out by sue•
cooding input pulses.-R. M. Muth, Digital
Circuits with Visual Readouts, General Elec-
+l.5V
2204 IOK IOK IOK LOW-POWER RING-Requires only 6 mW ot
1.S V, with shift pulses of 1 to 6 V. Trailing
11. edge of roset pulse turns on first stoge.
.002 Maximum shift pulse width increases wilh
SHIFT PllLSE voltage, approaching 70 µs for 6-V supply.-
prf ''°KC
pw• 10 TO 20,.S 22K Planar Silicon Controlled Switch 3N81 /3N82,
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 6S.16,
1964.
1fRESET PULSE
7V FOR > IOO,.S
flRST STAGE SECONO STAGE LAST STAGE
+170V
l:!K
r-------- -------'l
I I
I I
+12V~
"' -- - - - - - ---
20% I 0 0 0 0 I
- - _.,, IOOK
68K
IK 68K
VARIABLE·TIMING RING-Intervals between

ujt•genorotod shift pulses aro controlled by
values of RT and CT, which can be different
for each sta9e.-Planar Silicon Controlled PLANAR PNPN SWITCHES DRIVE NIXIE-Usos
Switch 3N81/3N82, General Eledric, Syracuse, one 3N83 switch for each Nixie electrode.
N.Y., No. ~.16, 1964. Chief advantage is freedom from tri99orln9
I by fine transionts.-Planar Neon Driver Silicon
Controlled Switch 3N83, General Electric, Syra•
cuse, N.Y., No. 6S.17, 1964.
-----,.--t----------~+Z4V
-t--..--....------- +12V
~----1~--------~-----+Z4V
3
<: ----t1--..1------- +1ZV
""R1 R4
o, c, 3
2~1~.--11-~--1.-.~_.,
BRY39
D1
.._~~~~~~ ......~ov
AND GATE WITH DE1AYED OR-Used with
scs ring counter to carry out switchin9 and
logic fundions In synchronism with clock
pulses appliod to terminal 1. Ne9alive-9oln9
12-V input pulse at terminal 2 produces GATE WITH TWO DELAYS-Used with m
square-wave putput pulse for as lon9 as clock ring counter to carry out switchin9, lo9lc,
aulse is on 1,lprovided at least one of D1-D2· and delay functions as controlled by clock
D3 OR inputs Is at zero level. If all OR pulses. Diodos D1, D2, and D3 provide AND
diodes aro at positive 12 V level, input pulso function, wherein negative-goin9 Input pulses
has no effect. R2-C2 introduces delay to in· at terminal 2 Initiate square-wave output only
sure that chan90 of d-c level has no offed if all d-c inputs to diodes have zoro potential
until next clock pulse arrives. Values: R1 and no input is at +12 V or higher. Values:
22K; R2 6.BK; R3 lOK; R4, RS lK; Cl, C3 180 Rl 22K; R2 6.BK; R3, R4, lOK; RS, R6 lK: Cl,
pf; C2 1 nf.-D. J. G. Jan.ssen, Circuit Louie C3 180 pf; C2 1 nf.-D. J. G. Jansson, Circuit
with Silicon !Controlled Switches, Elocttonic logic with Silicon Controlled Switchos, Elec-
Applications, rhlllps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., tronic Applications, Philips, Pub. Dopl., Elcoma
Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 1, Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No.
1966-1967, p 1-11. 1, 1966-1967, p 1-11.
IOK
4.7K 4.7K
SET
PUSH-
.002
.002T 20-KHZ SCS RING-Shift pulse turns off con•
BUTTON ducting scs by reverse-biasing cathode gate.
TO~EDING
+20Y STAGES Charge stored an coupling capacitor then
FIRST
triggers next stage. long shift pulse Is used
STAGE to turn off all stages by charging all capaci-
IH4009 IN4009 tors. Grounding anode gate of stage will
sot it.-Planar Silicon Controlled Switch 3N81 /
TRIGGER ~INE
3N82, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
65.16, 1964.
+1ZVO>--~~~~~! ~~~~ ...
H·1 5w
0.47
LAMPS #44
250 ma
SET @ 6.3V
390
.n
c
~-'_........ ...(
ovo-....~--1to-~-6o-~~~ LJ--t i--

RESET PULSE GENERATOR-Closing of switch 40µ SEC
produces single pulse for simultaneously re• 100 CPS
setting scs ring counter to zero after numerl· !S VOLTS
cal indicator tube has been darlcened.-D. J. driving functions, with decimal readout by
G. Janssen, Circuit logic with Silicon Con• HIGH.CURRENT RING COUNTER-Operates at lamps.-R. M. Muth, Digital Circuits with
trolled Switches, Eleclronic Applications, up to 2 lcHz and will count elthor with or Visual Readouts, Genaral Electric, Syracuse,
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, without lamps. Combines both memory and N.Y., No. 671.3, 1966, p 12.
The Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 1, 1966-1967,
p 1-11.
IOOOpf
IOK
5V, 20µ.S
SL
RING COUNTER FOR SMALL LAMPS-High
sensitivity of slllcon controlled switch permits
use of smaller capacitors. Arrangement
saves one diode par stage because anode
2N3415 gate load prevents triggering &y rate effect.
SCS's - 3N84's -R. M. Muth, Digital Circuits with Visual
Readouts, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
LAMP -# 2182 - 14V, 80 MA 671.3, 1966, p 13.
1'76 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
BIPOLAR PULSE COUNTER-Either polarity of

input pulse malces Q3 deliver positive output
JUL pulse for driving countor.-R. L Billon, Find
OUTPUT the Absolute Value of Bipolar Pulses, flee•
02 +IOV PE,AK Ironic Design, Feb. 15, 1970, p 84.
2N2219
+164V
01
2N2905 ALL LAMPS T2·27·WR500
t,c lOOK
o----11---..-..-~@::::::______ DIODES:
1Nl763
. l IJf
VO
04 Dt
FD
100
FD
100 ©
RESET
SINE WAVE INPUT
t-20Mc T
COUNTING PULSES AT 1 TO 20 MHZ-Flip-flop
uses additional fast diodes to provide switch- DECIMAL RING COUNTER-Can count up to turns off VO and turns on VI, with count ad·
999 without need for buffor omplifler, at rotas vancin9 one stage for each su«eoding pulso.
ing times under 10 nf.' F1>100's are for pulse
steering, FD6's prov t collector saturation, up to 500 Hz. Each stage has neon glow Resistor and supply values are not critical.
and long•storage FD3 's complete triggering lamp, which can be used for visual readout Known as Manloy-Buclcley ring counter.-W.
action.-20 MC Cou or Flip Flop, Electronic (circuit shows only first three stages of G. Miller, "Using and Understanding Minla•
Design, March 2, 1964, p 58. decade), P1essln9 reset button fires VO to turo Noon lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indi-
indicate count af zero. First input pulse anapolis, Ind., 1969, p 55.
IOK IOK
FORWARD QI OFF, 02 ON NOTE: ALL CAPACITORS •.001

REVERSE 01 ON, 02 OFF ALL SIG DIODES• IN4009
SBS REVERSIBLE RING ~OUNTER-Type Dl3Q1 Operation can be about 10 lcHz. During ford, Jr., Applications of tho New Silicon
silicon bilateral sw~hes permit changing switch from forward to reverse count, stored Bilateral Switch and the Silicon UnUateral
direction of stepping! of sta9es simply by charge in bottom p-n region of sbs servos to Switch, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
switching states of transistors QI and Q2. remember which stage was on.-W. R. Spof. 67t .3, 1966, P a.
COUNTER CIRCUITS 17'1
330Jl 3.3K 39K

DI
IN414B
45V
28V
70
28V
70MA
I 14.7K 28V
78MA
MA
47K I I
IK
PULSE
47K
I I
INPUT I I
scs~~~T
2.2K SCS NO.I .OI
3N81
3NBI ; y
I I
t--.,____,
SCS NO.n
3NBI
4.7K 4.7K I 4.7K
AUTOMATIC RESET-In this variation of lamp. thon turns on only if all other stages are off. N.Y.. No. 90.24, 1965.
driving scs ring counter, breakdown diode Is -R. M. Muth, A Ring Counter for Driving In·
used to couple last stage to tint. First stage candescent Bulbs, General Eledric, Syracuse,
+164V
All LAMPS l'2-27·WR500 OR HPN·27-l
All DIODES lOW PIV @ 50mA OR BETTER
TO ex
IN TRIGGER---..----------+---~--------------.
CIRCUIT
VO
RESET
c T_.T .00311
__
NEON RING COUNTER DECADE-Has ten iden- supply voltage Is not critical. Input pulses
tical stages, with carry fundion that resets can be obtained from any typo of trigger clr- TOTRIGGEROF ...,. -
decade to zero and aduates trl9ger stage of cuit.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Understanding NEXT DECADE
next decade. Power supply can be two Miniature Neon lamps," H. W. Sams & Co.,
Z82R10 miniature neon regulators In series; Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 58.
"CLEAR
AND SET
Input
c~
330
OF
SUS-2N4986 pulsq o----+----·--4-----'

{IQV)
LAMP-DRIVING RING COUNTER-Uses 2N4986

(or 2N4990) silicon unilateral switches to
drive incandescent lamps of ring counter.-
Silicon Unilateral Switch 2N4983/2N4986,
100.KHZ HIGH-CURRENT ECClES-JORDAN-
Transistors are BFY50 and diodes AAZ12.
1967.
Input trigger pulses are negative.-Applico•
tions of the BFY50, BFY51 and BFY52, Philips,
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The
Netherlands, No. 428, 1965.
RIPPLE COUNTER-Two 0.01-µF capacitors and

two 270K roslstors added to MC846P NAND
gate make low-cost ripple counter for appli-
c =.01,.f cations whore high speed is not important.-
R •2701< S. Kass, NAND Gate Counter is Cheaper to
A, B,C,b-MC846 P Mako, Elec1ronin, Jan. 20, 1969, p 87.
STAGE I STAGE 2
I
primer
Vee •12v
selection
puiso .......MAMJl,1..-11---1--H
n
I
I
I
I ov
I
I
Jh. input signal - t0 t t t8 t
9
NUMERICAL DISPLAY WITH MEMORY-Used
for controlling one numerical Indicator tube each digit acts as switch and memory, with logic with Silicon Controlled 5witcho•, floe·
In bank of such tu~es used for displaying digit remaining lit after input signal that tronic Appl/cations, Philips, Pub. Dopt ., Elco ma
parallel digits representing Information from seleded it has ceased. Article describes Div., Eindhoven, The Netherland•, Vol. 27,
computer ar calculat~r. Scs associated with operation in detail.-D. J. G. Janssen, Circuit No. 1, 1966-1967, p 1-11.
+ 170 VOLTS
NIXIE
IOK #6488
(BURROUGH SI
'' r
4.7Kl2WI
ANODE-COUPLED SCR RING COUNTER-Modl-

flcalion of basic cathode-coupled scr ring
counter, CH required for driving Nlxio docade
roadout tube.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition,
Genoral Electric, 1967, p 162 •
...Ji....AJo._
S~llFT LINE
+24V
Oz9
Rs
510 52.o
d.c.input -o - -- - - - - - - - - 9 add
35-ms outpul pulses up lo 300 mA. Article
DRIVING NUMERICAL PRINTOUT-First and lolls how to modify circull for driving faster D. J. G. Janssen, Circuit Logic wilh Silicon
lasl slages for energizing coils of prlnloul printout devices. Values are: RI S.6K; R2 Controlled Switches, Electronic Applicalions,
device are shown. Operation is similar to 3.9K; R3 lOOK; R4, R10-R21, R3D·R41, RSO- Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
that of monostable mvbr, wilh normally-on R61 I K; RS 390; R70-R79 I OK; Cl-C2 I 0 ,.F; Tho Nolherlands, Vol. 27, No. I, 1966-1967,
scr SI conlroRing period. Circuit produces CIO-C19, C3Cl-C31, 180 pf; C20-C29 I nF.- pl-II.
NOTE: To locato addi1lonol circuits in the category of this chapter, use tho index at tho back
of this book. Check also the aurhor's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
McGraw-Hiii In 1968.
CHAPTER 21
Current· Control Circuits
4.7K 2.2K
+ 03
"':"' 25V
3.31(
(IW) .OIJ.lf
200-400
VO~TS
2M
2.2K (RI)
AOJUST
OUTPUT
.....~~.....~~~~--<1.....~~~~~~+-~~~~~~~~~~cuRRENT
03, 04, •GE D29A4
ADJUSTABLE CONSTANT-CURRENT SUPPLY- and differential amplifier Q1-Q2. Zenor CRI
RI gives range of 50 p.A to 1 mA for output provides reference input. Output error signal
' current of scr regulated supply. At 500 p.A is appllod to scr gate after amplification by
current is hold constant within 0.1 % when Q3..Q4.-D. R. Grafham, Using Low Current
d-c supply voltage (at right) varies from SCR's, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
2l>0-400 V. Load current Is sensed by RI. 200.19, 1967, p 40.
Rs
750
o.o'"' too"' +
CIOv)
Rt
t,470
c Rz
I t,470
+ I
o.ot"t OOl'f I
ltOv) I
1*02
_J 2N3638
E IL
tB5ma
+--
*TRANSISTORS OPERATED AT Lt
EMITTER-BASE - BREAKDOWN 75"h
185-MA CURRENT STANDARD WITH IC-Can oto several amperes of constant current if must havo low tomporaturo coofllclonts.-C.
bo built for about $\to, hos excellent regu- appropriate output transistors are added. S. Popper, IC Amplifier Servos as Stable Cur-
lation, and can servo! as laboratory standard Foodback loop goes from pin 2 of IC to R3. rent Source, Electronics, March 6, 1967, p
for calibrating magnotemoters. Can genor- Passive components outside foodback loop 131-132.
180
CURRENT CONTROL CIRCUITS 181
+15v
-15v
Rz
6.:>v
(()l,IM()r.
FET CONSTANT-CURRENT SOURCE-Q3 and vides automatic current llmiting. Choose

RS are added to conventional voltage regu· value of RS to bias fet at 4.5 mA drain cur•
INPUT later to improve regulation by making current ront.-J. McPhai~ FET Improves Voltage Ragu•
through zoner CRI less dependent on input lotion and Allows Current Limiting, EEE, July
voltage and load current. Circuit also pro- 1968, p 97-98.
COMPENSATION NETWORK FOR SUMMING-

Pnp transistor and 1.5-mog resistor compan•
sate for bias current drift, independently af
source impedance, for summing amplifler.
Circuit is effective only over narrow range of
positive supply voltages. Amount of tem•
porature drift depends on how closely betas
of IC and external transistors track.-R. J.
Widlar, Linear IC's: Compensating For Drift,
Electronics, Feb. 5, 1968, p 9D-93.
• 2'l v 0----0-----'
OPTOELECTRONIC CURRENT REGULATOR- load current. Regulation is within 10% for

Lamp of Rayslstor senses current changes, and load range of 0 to 1,000 ohms.-Raysistor
photocell in feedback circuit initiates com• Optooloctronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy,
ponsation for change. RI is sot for desired Mass., 1967, p 23.
CONSTANT-CURRENT
SOURCE
ZTl711
Rt
13k
20k
330
INPUT
I
500,.F
INPUT
2 4
14-24 v
8
l(S38A
-15v
DRIFT-FREE DIFFERENTIAL INPUT-Three tran·

sisters and soledod resistors RI and R2 pro•
vido bias current compensation for difforen.
tial-input IC amplifier, Independently of
source Impedance for both inputs over entire STABILIZED DIRECT CURRENT SUPPLY-Uses current changes only about 0.03% per valt of
common mode rango.-R. J. Widlar, Unear Ferranti ZLD2 as error signal ampliflor, with chonge In d-c Input voltage.-Mlcrolin Ampll·
IC's: Compensating For Drift, Efedronics, Fob. d·c error signal being proportional to sta• flers ZLD2S and ZLD2T, Ferranti ltd., Oldham,
5, 1968, p 9D-93. bilized output current of d·c supply. Output Lanes., England, No. 11, 1967, p 15.
.----'""",..-ill2V Oi.Oz TYPICALLY

2N33~2 1 3
SSL REGULATOR-Two-transistor sink arrange-
ment provides 4% current regulation for e+
variations in supply voltage and 0.3% par
deg C for thermal variations, for current• SSL
sensitive devices such as solid-state lamps.
Suggested value for R2 Is ll/10. Supply
voltage con be as low as 3 V, with maxi· Rz
mum value limited by transistor rotings.-
L. M. Hertz, Solid State lamps-Port II, Gen•
oral Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3-0121,
1970, p 27.
100
+12v
CONSTANT-CURRENT SOURCE-Addition of 02
to conventional current source and careful
adjustment of circuit values minimizes tem-
perature drift and overcomes dissipation
problem in Ql when handling emitter currents
above o few mA. With values shown, load 01 1 Oz TYPICALLY
current changes less than 0.5% over ambient 2N5354,5
temperature range of 0 to 70 C. Applica•
tions include differential ompliflors, timing
e+
generators, and fet stobili111rs.-W. G.
Jung, Temperature-Stabilized Constant-Cur•
rent Source, EEE, Oct. 1968, p 126-127.
SSL REGULATOR-Two•tronsistor source ar•

rongoment provides 4% current regulation
for solid-state lamp. Resistor values depend
on current roting of lamp. Supply voltage
con be as low as 3 V.-L. M. Hertz, Solid
State lamps-Port II, General Electric, Cleve-
land, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970, p 27.
IIL::Izmin
SSL tlO
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION WITH DIODE

-Two-pellet diode i~ constant-current source +
I
compensates for vari\tions In transistor boso-
emitter voltage due o temperature changes,
-Silicon Multi-Pollet Diodes MPD200/MPD-
LOAO
300/MPD400, Genera Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 75.42, 1966.
r-------,
I • :
I I
I
MERCURY
BATTERY
Eref
1 l·V CONSTANT-CURRENT SUPPLY-Any

change in current thr~ugh R3 modifies bias
of power transistor, changing its differential I
I
impedance in such a "ray as to bring current i
through R3 and load bock to original value.
Uses power zenor.-Z,nor Diodes and Their L------- power omplitlor, to change current through
Applications, Philips, Publications Dept., El- WIDE-RANGE CURRENT CONTROl-Usos var· lood.-D. l. Boos, Complementary Transistors
como Division, Elndho\,en, The Netherlands, ioble reference voltogo, obtained from mer• Expand Current Supply Range, Electronic De-
Technical Information 17, 1966. cury battery, with complementary-transistor sign, June 8, 1964, p 72-73.
CURRENT CONTROL CIRCUITS 183.
BIPOLAR CURRENT-LEVEL DETECTOR-Dired•

couplad two-stage ampliflars drive two lamps
to indicate when current between input-output
terminals excaods about 10 µ.A, with appro-
priate lamp lighting to indicate direction of
currant flow .-R. Gerdes, Sensitive Current
Detedor Indicates Direction of Flow, "400
Ideas for Design Selected from Electronic De-
sign," Hayden Book Co,, N.Y., 1964, p 150.
10 to 20V
CURRENT REGULATOR-Circuit is basically

grounded-base, with collector and emitter cur-
rants essantially equal because of high current
gain of transistor. R3 must draw enough
current through roferenco diode so its voltage
drop will remain at 8 V as current regulator REGULATED
is loaded, load current romains essentially I OUT
constant until load rosistanco is increased to so voe 50-200 MA.
UNREGULATED
point where voltage drops across load and R3 INPUT
become equal.-Current Regulator, Delco Radio,
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Kokomo, Ind., No. 4·B, May 1965. RANGE ·55"C TO 71°C
INPUT
TERMINALS
{+
_ R2
tOOM
NANOAMPERE SENSING-May be used as
sensitive current detector, or as voltage de-
+2avo--..~~--11--~~Tt~~~....-~~....-~~~ ....~~~-. tector having high input impedance. Sampling
technique gives input currant sensitivity below
150
OHMS 35 nA and input impedance above 100 meg.
Rl is adjusted so circuit wlll not flre in ab-
Q2GE sence of current input slgnal. Input signal
2N2646 then charges C2 through R2 toward emitter
SCRI firing voltage of QI. Relaxation oscillator
GE
QIGE Cl!IF Q2 supplies series of 0.7S.V negative pulses
2N494C OR C22F to base 2 of QI to drop its firing voltage
momentarily and permit firing even though
Cl CZ 27
Jpf .otpf OHMS R2 cannot furnish required peak point firing
current of 2 µA.-"SCR Manual/' 4th Edition,
General Electric, 1967, p 166-167.
-l!>V
CONSTANT 40 MA WITH 0.1% REGULATION

-Operc:ites over wide range of supply volt·
c:igos, temperc:itures, and loads yet cost of
ports is only $5. Basic reference voltc:ige,
provided by zener Dl driven by constant cur·
rent, is buffered by emitter•follower QI driven
by constant-current source Q2.-R. C. Gerdes,
Constant-Current Source is Stobie and lnex•
pensive, Electronic Design, March IS, 1969,
p 254.
IN746A
+l~V
Vee
CONSTANT-CURRENT
-20V SOURCE
tlMV
13k
7.5Vl! D1
20V
INPUT l!
22 TO
35V
RA YSISTOR CONTROL OF 30 MA AT 20. V- simply protects lamp and helps offset posi-
Comblnation photoro1i1tor and lamp (CK· tive temperature coemciont; type is not criti·
114) provides oloctrically isolated compensa· cal.-K. Myers, Raysistor Compensates Current
tion for input voltage changes from 22 to Generator, Electronic Design, April 13, 1964,
35 V in constant-currant generator. D3 p 75-77. -15v
CONSTANT-CURRENT SOURCE-Three pnp

transistors and selected I 3K transistor serve
0 as bias-current compensation network for
noninvorting IC ampliflor requiring large com•
man mode ranges. Circuit provides tight
drift control but over limited temperature
rango. Feedback resistance of IC must be
OPTOELECTRONIC REGULATOR-Additional
kept low.-R. J. Widlar, Linear IC's: Campen•
transistor Q2 Increases loop gain of optoelec-
sating For Drift, Electronics, Fob. S, 1968, p
tronic con1tant-curront regulator to provide
improved regulation.-Raysistor Optoelec- 90-93.
tronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy, Mass., 1967,
p 24.
NOTE: To locato additional circuits In tho category of this chapter, uso the Index at tho back
of this book. Chock also the author's '"Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 22
D-C Amplifier Circuits
.----K1kn
TR2
BCI08
VOLTAGE GAIN 150,000-lnput resistanco is
s2kn
240K and output rosistonco 10 ohms. Pro•
vides singlo-onded output of 10 V with eithor
polarity at up to 20 mA. Output voltage is
0 V for zero input. Uses two differential
2okn
amplifiers at input to kaap differential volt•
age drift at required valuo of loss than 12
µ,V par deg C.-"Circuits Using Low-Drift
Transistor Pairs," Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, 1968, p 11. ov
°-:1.
'-------------~--+------ --.:.-15y
+48v
2.2M c,
20pf
o,
2N3332
02 2N2641
Rt !Ok
1011.
-48Y
R'
IM
FET STABILIZATION-Addition of fot Qt to and gives high open-loop input lmpodanco FET Boosts Impedance of D-C Feedback Am-
d-c amplifler improves stability for wido for operational amplifier applications. plifier, Eledronics, Od. 16, 1967, p 98.
range of temperatures and supply voltages, Article gives gain equations.-N. C. Voul9aris,
185
62K
DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT IC WITH 90-DB CMR- A,

Usos Ferranti ZLD2 IC low-powor d-c ampli·
flor having high common mode rojection, B
common mode range within 2 V of either
1upply voltage, and largo output voltago
swing.-Microlln Amplifiers ZLD2S and ZLD2T,
Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, No. 11,
1967, p 4.
Jw•rling VOLTAGE GAIN 70,000-Four•stago d·c am·

tn;>u 0t -+--II-I' plifler hos differential input stage and single-
endod output. Combinod emitter currents of
first stage are stabilized by constanl•current
Non-
i111111rtmg TR lb
source TR2. Nominal output voltogo Is 10 V
input at either polarity for up to 10 mA. Com-
mon-mode rojection ratio is 600. Dlfforen-
TRs tial voltage drift is 6 p.V per deg C. Fre-
llCI07 quency response drops almost linearly from
ov 0 96 dB at 10 Hz to 0 dB at 700 kHZ.-"Cir·
cuits Using Low-Drift Transistor Pain," Philips,
Netherlands, 1968, p 20.
C3
IOnf
-ISY
t.Jon-
1n~l1ng
VOLTAGE GAIN 100,000-Usos throe difforon- "'OUt
tlal stages and single-ended output, with TR2
serving as constant-current source for hold·
ing input stage emitter currents constant.
Output stage usas long•tailed pair TR4°TRS
to drive TR6. Frequency response falls about
6 dB per octavo from 100 dB voltage gain at
100 Hz down to 0 at 10 MHz. Output volt•
ago is 1O V of either polarity at up to 2.5
mA. Differential voltcogo drift is 3 p.V por
dog C.-"Circuits Using low-Drift Transistor
Pairs," Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
hovon, The Netherlands, 1968, p 22.
i
'
-15V
D-C AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 18'1'
DUAL OUTPUT-Modified vorsion of difleren·

tial amplifier provides dual output along with
higher gain and higher efficiency than con•
ventional dlfferontial output stage. Dashed
line indicates second output phase that is
available, but d·c voltage excursion available
is less desirable. Lowered current require•
ment makes this circuit highly desirable ·In
analog systems using many ampliflors.-5. G.
Freshour, Differential Amplifier Offers Efficient,
Dual Outputs, Electronic Design, July 19,
1965, p 37-38.
VOLTAGE GAIN 1,500,000-Single-ended out.

put delivers 10 V of either polarity up to I 0
mA. Frequency response drops essentially
linearly from 115 dB at 10 Hz to 0 dB at I
MHz. Intended for use as operational am•
plifier, being stable with over-all voltage
gains down to unity.-"Directly Coupled Am·
plifiors," Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
A,
Eindhaven, The Netherlands, p 40. •l'kO
A17
1oon
TR3
BCY57
•e
120ktl
VOLTAGE GAIN 40,000-Differontial input

stago uses low·drift transistor pair, with con.
Stant-current source TR2 fixing combin11d emit-
<MM
ter currents. Output is single·onded, deliver-
ing 10 V of either polarity at up ta 20 mA.
Frequency response drops about 6 dB per
octave from 93 dB at 10 Hz to 0 dB at 2
MHz.-"Diroctly Coupled Ampli6ors," Philips,
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div,, Eindhoven, The
Netherlands, p 34.
+t2V
R9
2·4kl\
TRz TR4
8CY71 BFX86
Rl R4 R1 Rio
56n ~•n 22n •5•n
VOLTAGE GAIN 6,500-All three stages are c, Rs
Jnpwt
push-pull. Differential-input first stage uses IO•n
T'O•F
transistor pair, and second stage is Iona· R6 Re R II
tailed pair. Output Is zoro when there is no tRlb
56•0 22n 15•0
input signal, pormittlng use of over-all noaa•
tive feedback without altering d-c conditions.
Frequency response is intentionally shaped to TR3 TR5
8CY71 8FX86
fall about 6 dB per octave between 1 kHz
ov ov
and 10 MH1, from voltage gain of 76 dB be-
low 1 kHz. Output voltage ls 10 V of °"].. I'
either polarity at 10 mA.-"Circuits Using
Low-Drift Transistor Pairs," Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The Nether-
lands, 1968, p 18.
+15V
-,
I
IOK IOK I 630
R5
200
INPUT I
INPUT 2
L
~
-- -- 20K
RG
OUTPUT
33K
Rz
3.3K
R3
....
2K
1....
....
IN456
3K
!SK IOK
R4
•15V
THIN-FILM HYBRID-Has open-loop gain of

500 and zero cfrlft below 10 p.V. With out- anco. Shorting bars on R1 ore cut as required reducing surfac-roa requirements of compo-
put capacitor, can be used as o-c amplifier to correct for d-c unbalance, and on R6 to sot nents.-A. Tuszynslci, Skirting Thin.film Desian
for any gain between 1 and 500. Dlfferen• open-loop gain. Dashed lines enclose IC Problems, Electronic D.eslgn, Au9. 30, 1965, p
tial-pair Input stage has 1-meg input resist• which uses techniques described in article for 38-43.
D-C AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 189
8--@
~---- __....__________...,__________..,_________- i__ ~-----------.1..--------.1----~---a-6¥
I··
470n. ISOA
KS31A KSlBA
-6Y
+100•
l·····, IOA
ZR32
ZR30 o I
All RESISTORS 1070 ~ W
UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
All CAPACITORS Zrl/0
EJCCEPT ELECTROLITICS
0 IA
3W
-6v
1-KW D-C AMPLIFIER FOR IO.OHM LOAD- voltage sawtooth waveform whose level oncl load. Output stage contains two 10-A
Uses pulse-width modulotion technique, whh above zero Is proportional to doe input volt- 130-V m016 transistors in parallel, driven
~- age. This is applied to Schmitt trigger that by 2N3585. Input of 4 V gives full output,
lndudive Alter In series with load to attonu•
ate carrier. Output of 300-Hz mvbr Is lnte· delivers recton9ular pulses having marlc-spoce corresponding to power gain of 54 dB.-
grated to give llnear sawtooth for adding to ratio proportional to d.c level, for use in 1-lcW D.C. Ampllfler, Ferranti, Oldham, Lanes.,
amplifled d·c signal level to give constant· switching power transistor in series with filter England, No. 32, 1966.
INPUT
.:!:.&v e
COUPLING BY MEMORY SWITCH-For d-c am•
pliflers, noon pravidos offset voltage to permit
OUTPUT ±ISV input and output voltogH ta operate about
---+---MIN. LOAD ground potential. Bottom af gain pat could
RES.• loott be returned ta output terminal for increased
SIOK long-term stability.-E. Bauman, "Applica•
tions of Neon.. Lamps and Gas Discharge
Tubes," Signalito, Neptune, N.J., p 75.
+48v
R1
2k
STABILIZED AT 2,000 GAIN-Common-mode 03

noise and thermal drift are canceled in d-c
differential ampliller by feeding input signal LOW-LEVEL
DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUT
forward instead of using feedback. Tech· D·C INPUT
nique gives gain of 2,000 with excellent
Rz 300
stability, for delivering up to 2.5 A to servo- 2k
motor in IBM 2310 disk storage drive. Cir-
cuit also provides loclced-ln temperature -3v
compensation, to prevent spurious triggering
pulses 'from destroying bridge by turning on
both sides at once.-F. J, Sordello, Forward
feed Stabilizes D-C Differontlal Ampliller,
Etectror"· Nav. 28, 1966, P 84.
ALL TRANSISTORS
2N1316
+48v
+12V
9.lkn
1•1,
·12V
62kn
+-"'-NNit.l'-0~
inputs
1.5kn
•
+
l.
,.,.
9.lkn
•12V ·12V
DIFFERENTIAL-TRANSiSTOR AMPLIFIER-UH gain of 60,000 and gain-bandwidth product Transistor Pair BCY55 Employed in a D. C.
of silicon planar tra~sistors encapsulated to- of I 0 MHz. Stability is bettor than 3 p.V Ampliller · Having High Stability and Low
gether and connected as differential pair and I nA per dog C. Report gives circuit Drift, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
gives highly stable opamp with open-loop design proceduro,-K. Hart, Tho Differential hoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 322, 1966.
D-C AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 101
+IOV
IK IK
01 2K Oz
25324 25324
0.0021' E1•-2BV
INVERTING WITH GAIN OF -30-Diodo D
0.0021'
brings Input voltago closo to soro to mini-
o, mize dependonce of output voltage on supply
2SSl2 voltage. Articlo givos dotailed dosign pro-
IOOK cedure.-T. Mollinga, Designing D-C Ampll·
flers, EEE, Feb. 1969, p 46-51.
PULSE OUTPUT FROM STRAIN GAGE-Four mvbr Q3.Q4. Resulting output may be moas•
transistors transform output signals of stroin ured by av,roge•roading voltmeter connected IOOK
goge into modulated pulses. QI and Q2 between collectors of Q3 ond 04.-Strain
form differentiol omplifler for amount of un· Goge Output Amplifier Produces Modulated
balonce in strain-gage quod, ond control Pulse Signal, Electronic Design, May 24, 1965,
mork·space output rotio of saturated-mode p 52.
+450V
CANCELLING AMPLIFIER OFFSET VOLTAGE-

Use of potentlomoter as one of source resist·
ances pormits adjusting rosistonco value until
difforential voltago produced concels out off·
set valtage of IC Inverting d-c ompllfler.
Drawback of mothod Is tondency to Increase
offset temperaturo drift.-Microlin Ampliflen
ZLD2S and ZLD2T, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham,
Lanes., England, No. 11, 1967, p 11.
lk Ill
elHo-....,,,._..( >-----e.N
f-------r!I
I
IL ___ _ ____ _JI
+
35 DB GAIN-Developed for use with 24-V

d-c supply. Book elves design procedure
for determining value of each component.-
BOOSTING OUTPUT AND SPEED-Two-tran· ply, as roquired for improving performance. "Voltage Regulator (Zenor) Diodes," Philips,
sistor circuit added to CA3005 IC differontial -W. E. Peterson, Highor Speed, Gain, Output Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Eindhovon, Tho
amplifler permits oporation from 450-V sup· from IC Diff Amp, EEE, Jan. 1970, p 128. Netherlands, p 53.
192 .ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MAN'U AL
24V
1:1 LEVEL CHANGER-With Input of o-9 V,

output is 9-0 V with highly linear relation·
2NH7
ship. Temperature stability is goocl.-R. S.
Hughes, Stable DC Amplifier Makes Good
ZK
level Changer, "400 Ideas for Dosign s..
loded from Elodronic Design," Hayden Book
ZK Co., N.Y., 1964, p 19.
z.z K
zI(
7·5•0
'/'•./V\r----+------------- +1$V
VOLTAGE GAIN 150,000-low·drlfl transistor

pair Is used In differential input havln9 re•
sistanco abovo 200K. Output voltage Is 10
V with either polarity at up to 20 mA and
output resistance is 20 ohms.-"Dlrodly
Coupled Ampliflors," Phillps, Pub. Dopt., El·
coma Div., Elndhoven, The Nethorlands, p 31.
R3
r~·n
---------~------- -1$Y
68kA~1% 2·7k.n. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _....._..r ZTXSOO
Tri Tr2
ZTX330 ZTX330
OUTPUT
Vrl 1001\
INPUT
10kA
8-2k.IL
800-KHZ BANDWIDTH-Maximum output volt·
aee is 11 V with either polarity, al up to 10
mA. Nominal volta90 goln is 100. Circuit
must be shioldod from drofts to provent tem· 15kA
perature differential botw.eon TR1 ond TR2
that could causo lar90 drift in output voltago.
"E•Lino Transistor ,\ppllcotlons," Ferranti Ltd.,
Oldham, Lanes., En9land, 1969, p 45.
-12V
D·C AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 193
fj Rf
l'o) 12k
t
NONINVERTING D·C AMPLIFIER-Applying In•
E1f+l2V) put between ground and terminal 1 of Fer•
rantl ZLD2 IC difforentlal-lnput d-c ampliRer
TWO·WAY INVERTING-Circuit is symmetrical, gives noninverting ampliRcation of d-c input
with output stage repeated at input side. signal. Voltage gain is 10.-Miuolin Ampll-
Voltage gain is slightly loss than unity. Rers ZLD25 and ZLD2T, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham,
Article gives design equations.-T. Mollln9a, lanes., England, No. 11, 1967, p 11.
D111i9ning D·C AmpliRen, EEE, Fob. 1969, p
46-51.
+av
E2•-28V INPUT IOK
0--0•
;. 9VOLTS
...
1
1 MEG #•IK
OUTPUT I
r•::" IOOU
ti
e; .~ 1 3k eo
..L
- -
LOW-LEVEL FET-Gives output of 0.4 to 9 V
on Input of 0 to -1.5 V for scopes, vtvm,
or as rolay ampllRer. To get output down to 6.Sk 300
zero, add dashed circuit and use its terminal
as ground for output. Adjust lOO-Ohm rheo•
stat for zoro output with input groundod.- -av
"Tips on Using FET's,'' Motorola, Phoenix, TO 1 MHZ WITH GAIN OF 100-Addins col-
Ariz., HMA-33, 1969. lector resistor (10 ohms) for 2NI 893 in·
NONINVERTING WITH GAIN OF 30-Diode D creases bandwidth, to give essentially ftat re•
brings input voltage dose to zero, to mini· sponse from d-c up to 1 MHz.-T. Mollinga,
mlze dependonce of output volta9e on +28 Dosignins D-C Ampliflers, EEE, Fob. 1968, p
V supply voltage. Article gives detailed de- 46-51.
sign procedure.-T. Mollinga, Designing D-C
AmpliRers, EEE, Fob. 1969, p 46-51.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In tho category of this chapter, use the Index at the back
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 23
Delay Circuits
E111 +6V
o,
r,=4ma
0-C CONTROL OUTPUT
CURRENT 0- 6ma
D2 1N916
Rt
1.2k R
47f,
1 J""""""L
I mo INPUT
T t1 t3 -~---"""
03
1N916
ADJUSTABLE LEADING-EDGE DELAY-Chong· to 11 few microseconds.-T. Horncilc, Control

ing direct current thr~ugh tunnel diode pro· E2 11 -6V Current Slows Pulse's le11din9 Edge, flec-
vides proportioncil ch~ngo in delciy between leciding edges of output cind input signcils. troniu, Aug. 18, 1969, p 96.
Vcilues shown give delciy rcinge from zero up
+ 15V
RI R7
220k IOOk 39k 27k 3.9k
ZZOk
04
2N4888
06
2NZ102
05
ZNZIOZ
RZ
220k
<D IM
INPUT
~IV
01
2N2102 R8
6.8k 220k 1!5
IOpF
PULSE COMPRESSOR OR EXPANDER-Length current Is mado proportional to second Input

of output pulse is proportioncil to length of provide wide cidjustment rcinge (0.1 to I 0) signal.-T. Weisz, Compress or Expand Pulses
Input pulse, with output pulse being delciyed for rcitio of input to output pulse width. Ccin With A Simple Circuit, Electronic Design, Doc.
for durcition of input puhe. R4 cind RS be used for pulse width modulation if Q2 6, 1967, p 122 and 124.
194
DELAY CIRCUITS 195
Re3
55k MONO FOR LAB USE-Remains in unstable
Re1
200k state for length of tlmo determined by reoc•
Ct 0.003µ.F
tive elements in circuit. Can be used for
genoratin9 delay pulsa1 and for standardiz·
Ing pulses of rondom ON times. Cl helps de-
- - Vee Output termine duration of unstable state; reducing
oo:m-o + 20V 20V Cl reduces unstable time and therefore in-
creases frequency.-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse and
l logic Circuits," McGrow·Hill, N.Y., 1968, p

220.
TTUDTL CLOCK PULSE
-I I- 1
CLOCK
ALL GATES• 1/4 SN7400
_n_
'CLOCK• 400 ns for
'cLOCK !:: 1 MHz
2N3829 2N3829
1N914 1.5K R R 1.5K 1N914
2N3014 2N3014
-23V
TTL/DTL
DATA INPUT
-9V TTL/OTL
DATA OUTPUT
3 4 6 7
1/4 SN7400
3N161
DATA INPUT TMS 7C 3003 LA DATA OUTPUT

1 2
DATA OUTPUT 1 GROUND DATA INPUT 2
2 5 9
200-BIT DIGITAL DATA DELAY-Includes +5V MOS Static Shift Registers and TIUDTL Sys·
complete interface and clock driver circuitry MH1. Report describes operation of each toms, Texas Instruments, Dallas, Texas, CA·
for operation ot rates from d-c to above I sedion of system in dotail.-G. B. Hoffman, 114.
OUT
OAl82 AAll2 65Cf&H

(IN501) 8p.H UN87AI
ULTRASONIC
DELAY L IBO AAll2 1k
lnF UN87AI 470pF
LINE
lk
BCI07A
OAl82
UN501)
IOnF 12N3416)
ITLI1_
PZY87
--JtrT---1
llN312MI n:21
t21#'•
3V<A<20V
repetitive positive pulses. Other lengths or pulsod r-f signal at output of delay line is
types of delay lines can bo used to obtain demodulated to fllter out r f.-P. Zamporonl,
0
64-MICROSECOND PULSE DElAY-Solf-pow• different delays. lnpvt pulsos provide supply Ultrasonic Delay line Needs No Power Sup•
erod circvit vsos 7-inch glass rod driven by voltago for transistor oscillator. Oscillator is ply, Electronic Design, Avg. 15, 1968, p 230
r-f oscillator as vltrasonic delay for singlo or amplitude-modvlated with Input pulses, and and 232.
MONO WITH POSITIVE-GOING EDGE DELAY

-Usos Philips TAA293 goneral-purpose am-
plifier. Circvit has offed of delaying posi-
tive-going edgo of redangular input pvlse.
Delay time is about 100 µs when C is 10
nF. I Times for other values of C are in di-
rectl proportion to C down to about 1 µs.-
The TAA293 as a Schmitt Trigger and Multi-
vib?-tor, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
Elndhovon, Tho Nothorlands, No. 25, 1968.
+sv
C1
100pf
INPUT------111---1-----11-1 IN914
+Svl
Ov L_ +Sv n
Ov_j l _
-Sv
20-NS PULSE WITH : DELAY-One.shot mvbr and fall times of only 10 ns. Pulse widths turo and voltage changes.-l. V. Hendricks,
depends on fast removal of itored charge ar delays up to 100 ns are determined by Fast Discharge Roducos Multivibrotor's Riso
ta give pulses as narrow as 20 ns with rise setting of RI. Stability is good for tempera- limo, Eloclronics, Nov. 25, 1968, p 82-83.
DELAY CIRCUITS 197
... .. J ZkQ
••• •••
DELAY-LINE PULSE STRETCHER-Uses high·

speed mosa•transistor fllp·flop in which width DELAY MONO FROM IC AMPLIFIER-Uses
of output pulse is accurately controlled by Philips TAA293 general-purpose amplifler.
delay line, independontly of input pulse Output terminal rests in low state. Roctangu.
width. Accuracy of output pulse width is lar input pulse makes mvbr switch, driving
the same as 1 % accuracy in length of delay. output terminal to high state at 6 V. Cir-
With I-MHz square-wave input, loading edge cuit reverh to rest state after time delay, to
of pulse switches output of flip-flop and goes give effect of delaying negative-going edge
through dolay lino to reset flip-flop from of input signal. Circuit cannot be retrig-
other side, giving 0.8.µs output pulso when gered until after recovery time nominally
using 0.8-µs delay lino. Remaining 0.2 µ.s equal to delay time, both of which are about
is suftlcient for flip-flop recovery.-J. Shir· 100 µ.s when C is 10 nF. Times for other
man, High-Speed Pulse-Stretcher Depends values of C are in direct proportion to C
Upon Delay Une Time, "400 Ideas for Design down to about 1 µ.s.-The TAA293 01 a
Selected from Electronic Design," Haydon Schmitt Trigger and Multivibrator, Phillps,
Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 46. Pub, Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho
+12v----..----~
''v---..----......---.....-+----
R2 Rs 0
680 33•
c,
OOl•f
,.
Ru
@-o--l~--.f-.1
CR1
111914
•l2Y ·6Y but delayed from 0 up to 2.5 ms. AI is

differential comparator, and one-shot A2 uses
400·HZ VARIABLE APPARENT DELAY-Circuit on value of control voltage or setting of RI. standard SUHL gates.-L L. Pechl, Valtago or
sensos positive excursion of 400-Hz input Delayed signal triggers 1.25-ms one-shot, to Pot-Varloblo 400-Hz Dolay, EEE, Oct. 1969, p
square wave and provides delay depending make output look like original square wave 112.
INPUT
BUFFER AMPLIFIER DAMPED RLC II OUTPUT ADAPTIVE
NON·INVERTING AMPLIFIER CLAMP
I
I ~~335 II
20pF le •oR 2Nna
r.;;:ia~--t-r"-t~..,-~~~~;::.... ........l.._
R L c, lk s.6k I
470 ~~ ID pf
4.n I
6-MS SIGNAL DELAY-With positive input, 13°k ~~F
circuit provides 6·ms delay over range of +25V +25V I •25V
25 to 150 Hz. Output amplitude follows INPUT ( \
L (\ ~'ftUT
input amplitude linearly over dynamic range
of about 30 dB.-D. J. Savage, Simple Ana•
ATA...J
I ~ L_DELAYED
log Dolay, EEE, Oct. 1969, p 109.
r0 T1 To I To Ti T2
I
IK
INPUT GATE
IK Lr+24V
Lf
Your
-ur
- DELAYED
OUTPUT -!!-
GATE PLUS
DELAY
R:s
12K
PULSE DELAY WITHOUT DISTORTION-Single

DELAY EQUALIZER-Uses Fairchild IC opamp transistor and tunnel diode generate delayed
as d·c amplifier lo compensate for delay dis· pulse or gato while maintaining or oven im·
tortion in facsimile, high-speed telegraphy, proving sharp rise-time of input signal.
and data-transmission carrier systems. Acts With 0.002 µF for C, delay is 10 µs. Larger
as all-pass circuit having amplitudo charac• values of C give delays up to several sac•
toristic that is independent of froquoncy ovar onds.-R. L. Shaum, Tunnel Diode Circuit
useful frequoncy rango.-J. Tofller, Tho Into• Offers Non-Distorted Delayed Pulse, Electronic
grated Oporationol Amplifier: A Versatile and Design, May 10, 1965, p 46-47.
Economical Circuit, "Microeloctranlc Design,"
Haydon Book Co., N.Y., 1966, p 189-194.
3.0V
L T O FREQUENCY COUNTER
300 pSECMAX TESTING IC SWITCHING SPEED-Circulating
284!? IK~!
loop lost for ASLT modulos permits rapid
measurement of switching speed for each
INPUT MODULE OUTPUT critical path in modulo. Unique test circuit
Uffs\R -· - - - :'\ drives input modulo from its own output,
[L·"_.,__ ~
delayed in time by electrical longth of cable
in ns, ta produce switching action. Counter
thon indicates number of switching actions
I i during time period for test, from which
switching speed is dotorminod quickly and
I
_ _ _ .J accuratoly.-R. F. Sechler, A. R. Strube, and
J. R. Turnbull, ASLT Circuit Design, IBM Jour•
nal, Jan. 1967, p 74-85.
+Sv
Rt ·15k I/&
9016
9316 J
DELAY A CP BINARY TC C CP
9601 i - : : . . - - - - 8 " "......_ COUNTER
RETRIG- FLIP
GERABLE L.::.i_.-.... MR FLOP
ONE-SHOT
MASTER
RESET _ __.
(MR)
MR
A DELAY 1
Sl'sec
B
c
D
E
TRIGGERED DELAY FOR A/N DISPLAY-Used time ofter arrival of trigger pulse, genorale Retriggarablo Ona-Shots Form Delayed-Key
in alphonumorlc cothoda-roy disploy systems prodotormined number of clack pulses, than Oscillator, Electronics, Sept. 29, 1969, p 96.
requiring thol an oscillator stort at preset shut down until next trigger arrives.-A. Liu,
CHAPTER 24
Detector Circuits
balance
+12V
SOkS2
6 16 ~ 13 7 17 19
wire
THREAD MOTION DETECTOR-Photocoll and

Philips DZD40 differential zoro dotector have trips DZD40 and makes Its output switch to Slow changes in light on photocell have no
sufficient sensitivity to dated shadow caused full supply voltage of 12 V. After wire has effect.-Detection of Small Moving Objects
by moving wire or thread. Voltage peak passed, sudden fall in photocell resistance Using the DZD40, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
produced across 56-nF capacitor by photocell makes DZD40 switch back to 0 V output. Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 29.
+5v TO +20v
100k DETECTOR OUTPUT

TO
2.2 M LOAD
Cc
1N414B
0.01 µf
Qz
IN414B 2N4B53
03
3N86
01
2N2222 1.6 k
UJT·SCR SIGNAL DETECTOR-Voltage across

load rises to indicate presence of input signal.
When input si9nal torminatos, ujt timing
r
pulse arrives before 02 Is triggered, time
lapse Is restarted. Holding time con bo any•
Ct; 47K and 0.1 µ.F give 7ms, and 390K and
2.2 µF give 1.4 s.-D. K. Smith, Signal Deloe•
circuit Is frHd aftor time lapse detormined whore between a few microseconds and sev· tar Operates From 5-Volt Supply, Electronics,
by period of ujt circuit; if another input oral seconds, depending on values of Rt and Mar. 30, 1970, p 95.
199
SIGMA 35 JP2 1000 VG SOI_J-...----
RAIN·GAGE RECORDER TURN-ON-Activator RELAY 100011 6.5mA

_:]
circuit turns on recorder only when it is rain-
ing. Hold feature prevents turn-off at drizzle
rates. Used wilh system of tipping-bucket
rain gagos, oach of which produces coded N914
II
lone bursl wilh arrival of each hundrodth
inch of precipilalion. Each filled bucket pro•
ducos 12-V 200-ms pulse at base of Ql to
turn it on and charge Cl, which takes 20 ms.
Circuit then pulls in relay that turns an re• 2.2k
corder. Wilh 100 mog switched in to gate af +12-v
fet, Cl holds charge and keeps recorder on PULSE
IN
for 1.3 hours of drizzlo.-J. Pike, Data-System
Activator Has Hold Feature, Electronic De·
sign, June 21, 1970, p 96 and 98.
+12v
I
I
+12V -12V I
I
C1 PULSE WIDTH SORTER-Simple bootstrap cir·

INPUT 200pF B cuit delivers output pulse only when tri99ered
A by input pulse whose width is grealer than
R4 predetermined value. Leading. edge of posi·
101( c tive-9oing output pulse coincides with trailing
odge af input pulse. Usoful as sync detector
R1 in pulse data systoms.-C. Becklein and M. Ya·
4.71(
I
gud, Pulse-Width Sorter, EEE, Feb, 1967, p
Rz Cz 146-147.
OK IO.Ol~F
+28V DC
SCS PHASE SEQUENCE DETECTOR-Provides supply, however, opposite condition occurs,

warning of incorrect phasing and detects re- with scs remaining on while phase B logs
versal of throo-phaso motors. Scs is nor- phase A. Will handle loads up to 250 mA.
LINE
FREO.
c,
mally off. When opposite phase sequence Wilh AD107 scs, load can be 1.6 A.-Phase
occurs, wilh phase B lagging phase A by 120 Sequence Detector for Throe-Phase Systems, 60eps .03µfd
deg, scs is triggered on for aperaling lamp, Solid Slate Products, Salem, Mass., No. 13. 400eps .0047µfd
relay, or control actuator. Wilh a-c anode
PHASE A o------''V\Ar----,
IOOK
C2
0.5 ,Ufd
30NEUTRAL
DETECTOR CIRCUITS 201
SIGNAL
VOLTAGE
'€)11
DETECTING SIGNALS BURIED IN NOISE-
DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT WEAK-SIGNAL DETECTOR Amelco FG37 200-V field-effect transistors con•
-Variation of paired Schmitt-trigger detector nected back-to-bock provide detection of
can dotect absolute valuo of differonco be- millivolt in-phase signals burled in noise hav·
tween two Input signals riding on common· ing poak amplitudes several ardors of magni·
mode input signal of O.S V P•P at. 14 MHz, tude greater. Reference voltage is 60-V p-p
for absolute difference values down to 15 square-wave. May be operated at frequen•
mV. Dual input reduces hysteresis of detec· cies well up into higher audio range, with
tor one ordor of magniludo.-T. Weisz, Pairing negligible switching time.-W. D. Hindson
Schmitt Triggers Produces Lower Hysteresis and T. Nishizaki, FET Makos High Level Phase·
and Faster Switching, Electroniu, Nov. 28, Sensitive Detector, "400 ldoas for Design Se·
1966, p 7S-79. lected from Electronic Design," Hayden Book
Co., N.Y., 1964, p 29.
+Z4v
3.9k
+ 150VOC B C
112
IN647 lN647
A-! ON
+150 V DC
OFF
2 IN647 -300V DC
MEG 56K SIA ITEST
•A079
I
I
IN3051B
200V
_r
SIB I
IN980B
62V IOOK
':'
-300
voe ':'
LOW-CURRENT DETECTOR-Will detect 1-µA

n n SIMULTANEOUS PULSES-With S1 in ON po·
+so currents with accuracy of 1 %. When input
A__JL_.___JL.._50 sition, neon lamp lights only when all three signal exceeds preset threshold, sum of cur•
,......, r-+50 SO-V positive pulses, at A, B, ond C, occur rents through backward diode D1 switches
B __J l-...J -50 at same time.-E. Bauman, "Applications of it to high-voltage state, generating pulse far
,-----, +50 Neon Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Sig·
c __J L__ -50
amplification by fet output tlago. Threshold
nallto, Neptune, N.J., p 1S1. jitter is negligible.-E. Elad, Backward Diode
f t Plus FET Detects Low Currents, Electronics,
LAMP NO Oct. 16, 1967, p 95-96.
LITES LITE
MEASURING 2·MS PULSES-Provides output

pulso whenever input pulse is less than mini·
mum valuo or greater than maximum value. A
C>--
Can also be used as pulse-width error do·
tector by providing error pulsos of width
equal ta amount that input pulse width de·
viatos from allowable limits. Developed for ALL GATES ARE
LOGIC ELEMENTS
measuring 2·ms pulse widths within test win· OF SG 143•5
dow of 10%-1. Spector, Pulse-Width Dis·
"NOMINAL VAWES
criminator, EEE, Sept. 1969, p 133-134.
202 ELECTRON·IC CIRCUITS MANUAL
10k B C 0
B 0 'LAG-- - -, +12Vfrf1
1 IOk
N
1 OUTPUT
I NETWORK I
1111
C ~--,-1""0 0-k---o.-5r--w.---4
A
1 ·12V
INPUT L- --r_!I~ 2 OV INP\JT 8
an amplitude. If distortion is severe, addi·

.n. l'>---'l~\r-...-.....:;;.;;:._.r;-
SLOPE CHANGE DETECTOR-Output is square tional filtering is required In input line to

wave in which high and low lovels Indicate make use of fundamental frequency. lag l"CI
changes in slope of input signal. Operation network ahead of IC apamp has time con-
is independent of input level, and independent stant of 50 ms and is u111ful from 0.1 to 10 20V t~T A
of distortion provided irregularities in dis• Hz.-R. Antelman, Change-Of-Slope Detector, .n
torted signal do not reverse slope at too high EEE, June I 970, p 94-95.
SCS PULSE COINCIDENCE DETECTOR-Volt-

age is developed across load Rl only when
inputs A and B occur simultaneously with
amplitudes of 2 to 3 V. Pul111 overlap of
less than I µ.s is sufficient to give output. To
detoct coincidence of negative inputs, use
scs units in complementary scr configuration,
with detection by gates GA instead of GC.
BUFFERED DETECTOR-Input of 1 mV p-p will
-Planar Silicon Controlled Switch 3N81/3N·
fire circuit comparable to Schmitt trigger but
82, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 65.16,
with buffer Q2 in feedback path. Hysteresis
1964.
is low for wide range of reference voltages.
-R. H. Zimmerman, Buffered Detector, EEE,
April 1967, p 138.
+jV
0.47 0.47 0.47 0.47
~do, FOi f}o1

2.7 2.7 2.7
_8001
":' I ":' ":' -=-
68 lk 180
200
FD100
05
2N744
2N3010
Ot
2N2894
INPUT OUTPUT
47
47
4.7k
220
LOW-LEVEL SIGNAL DETECTOR-Pairs of quoncies. Can be used as sense amplifiers factorily at 13 MHz, with hysteresis of only
Schmitt triggers provide high switching and in high-speed computer memory systems. 2 mV.-T. Weisz, Pairing Schmitt Triggers
cycling speeds with e~tremely low hysteresis, Articlo gives operating thoory and limiting Produces lower Hysteresis and Faster Switch·
for detector of low-level signals ot high fro- design equations. Circuit performed satis· ing, Electronics, Nov. 28, 1966, p 75-79.
DETECTOR CIRCUITS 203
+20
510 ~ Eour + Oz
2113819
R Eo
L i::-;G·
2.7K
02
C0 0.01µ.f
) hn-"' o,
I'
-~~--
"
CGD2
fv
NO .., j-6t
2113819
IOV •[LJJ XI
z,z,,
j_ -
lo Id
- -- PUl.SE •FR
LLL c,
CGDI
·~
",,....
1·8 p
E1~[J_J__
lo t"
lol E2l~~lllJ-
10 Id
~) 7-~--<----i.---:--t~~~-+-~~-'\.l\J
~lj
Xz
.,1.0~
~
....
o=>
2'2"
PULSE xFR
~; ~s
:I~
a: 0
O>
0
z o 90 180 270 360
lb)
PHASE OIFFERENCE 14'1 IN DEGREES SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR-Circuit shown
ovorcomos capacitance problem in typical lot
chopper by producing signal opposite in
SQUARE-WAVE PHASE DETECTOR-Nonsotu- polarity to sync signal and feeding it to
roting ftip-ftop provides linoar overage volt• drain of fet through capacitance exactly
age output as function of phase difforonco oqual to gate-drain capacitance. Dynamic
between two 1-MHz square-wovo signals. range is 80 dB at 100 kHz.-R. P. Lackey,
Average output voltage is zero whon inputs High-Speed Synchronous Detector, EEE, May
El and E2 aro in phaso or 360 dog out-of· 1970, p 103.
phaso. Transistors ore 2N2222.-J. F. Pani·
cello, Flip-Flop Phaso Dotocts RF Square Wava,
Electronic Design, Nov. 9, 1964, p 71-72.
+3v
.-----o----0+12V
INPUT 8
wvn 47
'"PUTA
IK
33K
PULSE SEQUENCE DETECTOR-Resistor divider VOLTAGE BAND DETECTOR-Modification of

botweon Ql and Q2 prevonlS input B from paired Schmitt triggers produces output only
triggering Q2 unloss Q1 is conducting. whon Input 2 is within predetermined limits
When pulse is applied In input A to make that oro above voltage at Input 1. Circuit
Ql conducting, next pulso at input B triggers thus detects absolute differences between
Q2 and sends currant through load RL.- two low-level Input signals.-T. Weisz, Pair-
Planar Silicon Controlled Switch 3N81 /3N82, ing Schmitt Triggers Prod~cos Lower Hystere-
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 65.16, sis and Faster Switching, E/edranics, Nov. 28,
1964. 1966, p 75-79.
CHAPTER 25
Digital-Analog Converter Circuits
+IS,
50
DIGITAL
TO 2N4275
ANALOG
CONVERTER
BOOSTER-Slmple differential preamp ahead - 2N42SB

If!oo(x-v 1I
of cro provides nocessary gain and sensi·

l.Of11 4.7k TO
tivlty for measuring rise and settling times of
d·a converter. Sufficient offset is provided
100 SCOPE
by voltage source to look only at top of con•
verter waveform.-J. J. Pastoriza, Know Your PRECISION -rs,
D·A Convortor's Capability, E/ec1ronic1, Nov. VOLTAGE 2N427S =
SOURCE "1
10, 1969, p 129-130.
lk
r-
Rl5
lk
+12 v
Al2
.:~ r-A-8-"'11Ak-- RI&

R2 510
510 1.2k
01 CRI
2N709 IN914 04
2N709
cs
O.OIJ'F
C2
47pF
r,i R9
3.0k Rl4
lk
RIB
510
10.MHZ DIGITAL DATA-Converts to either

positive or ne9ative analo9 signal. Each
___JL_
{:
C3 bit ef binary-coded input is applied to base O I I
47pF of transistor switches QI, 02, and Q3, which
R6 RIO
I : L
!110 6.7k are normally biased on. When bit turns off
switch, 4-V reference voltage E·ref is summed
,,, o
---1I
r-+-i---:
:I II L
throu9h opamp. Values of input resistances 0 •
R7 I I
c o~••:•
l.5k RB and R2 are chosen so each allows cur•
rent flow proportional to weight or signifi·
0.97V
cance of Its respective binary digit.-J. Mace 1.71 v
and J. W. Bain, Digital-To-Analog Converter
":'
I Is Fast and Simple, Electronic D"ign, June 6, 4.0V
C4
47pF' 1968, p 118.
204
DIGITAL-ANALOG CONVERTER CIRCUITS 205
-REF(IOl/I -BIAS!2XREFll20V)
lOpf
.--I(--,
I I
INTEGRATED CHOPPER-Digital-to-analog con•
version is produced by spdt action of lnte--
I I grated chopper 02, without complex drive
JO. I K I
clrcuitry.-J. M. Cohen, Integrated Chopper
R2 (2 X R1I Forms Sim pie Digital-to-Analog Converter,
20K Electronic Design, Nov. 22, 1965, p 60-61.
INPUT
I
I
I
I
I
Switch Control (Dn):
Qun I
o'\Nlr
lOK
98598 1
-.J
En
MULTIPLEXER-Any number of Burr-Brown
9B59/l 5 integroto-hold olectronic switch mod-
ules may be combined as shown for multi-
plexing at output of opomp if properly se-
quonced control pulses aro fed to switches. -20V
With properly weighted input summing resis-
ton, set of n switches may b~ used to con- 6-8k.n.
struct n-bit digital-analog converter or n-bit
multiplying digital-analog converter.-lnte-
grate/Hold Electronic Switch, Burr-Brown Re-
l
search, Tucson, Ariz., PDSl89, 1967.
..
>
!
4-BIT DIGITAL-ANALOG-Usos complementary
transistors as switches. Driver transistors at
e
I!!
left operate from higher negative supply volt- ~ 5kJI.
age to ensure that switching transistors will ~
boHom satisfactorily. ladder network, mado s§
up of close-tolerance resistors, Is usad for c
summing outputs.-"E-Lino Transistor Appli-
cations," Ferranti ltd., Oldham, lanes., Eng-
land, 1969, p 49. j
DY ANALOGUE
OUTPUT
HIGH-SPEED OPERATION-Bit rate is limited

primcnily by speed of associated opamp, and
can be up to 1 MHz for monolithic units or
above 3 MHz for hybrid units. Rosolution is
up to 10 bits and accuracy half of least slg· High-Speod, Current-Summing, Digital-to-Ana-
nificant bit. Report gives design equations log Converter, Sprague, North Adams, Mass.,
and application data.-N. S. Palazzini, A No. TP-68-9.
.C POS 81.IS I .1$V)
SK
OUTPUT
AL
LOGIC +SV
INPUT
1<?:3V
BIPOLAR-REFERENCE LADDER SWITCH-Crys·
LADDER SWITCH-Crystolonics CDAl-2 pock· tolonics CDAS hybrid package for digital·
agod laddor switch for digital-analog con• analog convortors hos maximum switching
vortors occoph either 6-V positivo or 24-V doloy of only 3 p.1, oporoting from either posi-
nogative triggers directly from logic. Con• tive or negative 4-V reforence.-Hybrld IC's,
tains sories•shunt switch and driver. Usos Crystalonics, Cambridge, Moss., 1969.
chips bonded directly to substrate.-Hybrid
IC's, Crystalonics, Cambridge, Mass., 1969.
a+
30V
Cz
D
0 1,0 2 ,06 ,0 7 ,08 •••• 2N697

Rzz
03··· •••••••••• 2N722
04, 05 • • •••••••• 2Nl71 I
COMPONENT VALUES
RESISTORS (OHMS) CAPACITORS (FARADS)
R1, R2 , R4 • R5 , R •••• 100 K c,,Cz ........... 47}L 0 35VDC
6
R3,R17•Rz3 • •• ...... IOK C3,C4 ........ IOOp
R7,R9· •• (LIN. POT.) IOK C5,C6 ,C7 ,C 8 IOOOp
R9,R14•Rzo,Rz4'" •• 47K
R1o•R11 ••.••••••.•• 4.7K DIODES
R12 ,R1:s,R16 ....... 3.3K 0 1, D2 ,D5 ,o6 ... IN38
R15· •••••••••••• I K
R1a•Rzz· ......... 2.7K
D3.D4 ,D7,D9 ••• .IN443B
Zp z 2 ........ IN758 (10V)
/
Z3 •.•••••••• IN759 II 2VI
CONVERTING PULSE .WIDTH TO VOLTAGE- channels. Output is llnoorily proportional to Con handle up lo 10,000 pps.-A. l. Now.
Can bo · usod to convert voice-modulotod var• pulse width. Operates over duty-cycle range comb, Jr., Solid-State Integrator Combines
ioblo-width pulses back to analog voltages from 0.06 to 60%, with pulse periods up to low Duty Cycle With low Ripple, Electronic
over narrow-bandwidth spo'8 communication 500 ms. Requires only about 600 mW power. Design, April 12, 1965, p 42-45.
DIGITAL-ANALOG CONVERTER CIRCUITS 207
Vee
-ISV
CLAMPED LOAD-Diode-resistor arrangement
at right cuts cost of OFF level standardizer
for driving flip-flop in digital-analog con•
verier driven by countor or register, For S·V
logic lovol, output voltage error is loss than
0.2 mV per dogroo C. Diodes can be un•
matched but should be mounted close to• i1
gather to minimize temperature orrors.-E. J.
Rogers, Accurate Binary Levels In a Clamped
f3.3ma
Circuit, Eledronic Design, April 27, 1964, li3

~6.6ma
p 91-92. R2
3K
+15V
11 -REF. l-10Vl POS. 8

TRIGGER
INPUT
Oto+3V
o,
2N3218 LOGIC
INPUT
._--+--I.I 1~2.BV
GROUND Os0.6V
2 NEG. BIAS
l-15Vl
NEGATIVE-REFERENCE LADDER SWITCH-
Crystalonics CMDAl hybrid package for digi- POSITIVE-REFERENCE LADDER SWITCH-Crys•
tal-analog converters gives 1O·blt accuracy talonlcs CDA4A hybrid package for digital·
when used with 10K/20K ladder. Works analog converters givos 12-bit accuracy, works
directly from logic. Consists of series-shunt directly from logic, and . uses positive 10-V
switch and drivor.-Hybrid IC's, Crystalanics, reference.-Hybrid IC's, Crystalonlcs, Cam•
Cambridge, Mass., 1969. bridge, Mass., 1969.
MOST
SIGNIFICANT
LEAST BIT
SIGNIFICANT
BIT
4.7k OFFSET
1.5k
270 ANALOG
R OUTPUT
8.2k
12 TIL GATES FOR RESISTIVE LADDER-lnex•

pensive, easily assembled d-a converter inverter. Currant proportional to digital in- ·value of R should be between IOK and SOK
serves as low-cost drive for crt display ter• put is summed into one input of opamp. for best accuracy cind settling time.-C. S. L.
mlnals. TIL usod must have open collector Resistive ladder network weights currents Keay and J. A. Kennewell, D·A Converter
for external resistor ond power supply, such switched by logic gates according to signill· Switches Digltal Inputs with nL Gates, Eloc-
as SN7401 quad NAND gote and SN7401 hex cance of their input bits on binary scale. froniu, Dec. 8, 1969, p 89.
+t2V PWM TO VOLTAGE-Provicles linear conver-

sion from pulse wiclth to analog output volt•
age, from input repetition froquencies of 1
kHZ to 1 MHz ancl cluty cycles from 5 to 95%.
Ql generates linear ramp across C2, with
clura6on and height controlled by input pulse
width. Ramp voltage is appliecl to one input
of differential amplifier Q4, ancl Inverted out·
c, put of amplifier Q2 Is appliecl to other input.
k-i1-'"-F+-~=-tt: C2 C4
0,47uF
Feedback tencls to maintain output voltage
INPUT across C3.-0. Lykins, Simple Circuit Converts
Pulse Duty Cycle Into Analog Voltage, EEE,
July 1968, p 911-99.
SWITCH
INPUT o------ 2N3677
-----+----~
2N!ll66 SWITCH
OUTPUT
+ISV
431 7.Slc
7.Slc
7.51.
2NS066 2NS066
DIGITAL
CONTROL
INPUT
COMMON
-ISV
HIGH-LEVEL SIGNAL SWITCH-Controllecl by slstors Isolate drive from signol current. resistonce is about 10 ohms.-R. C. Gerdos,
standard nL or Dn logic having ON-OFF Can be used for digitol•onalog conversion, High·Level Analog Switch, EON, Sept. 1, 1969,
time of about 200 n~. Complementory Iron• video switching, ond somple-ond·hold. ON p 73.
I
I
NOTE: To locote odditional circuits In the cotogory of this chapter, use tho index at tho back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits.'' published by
· McGraw·Hill in 1968.
CHAPTER 26
Display Circuits
llSVACO--JV\,..,_------------.
22K
Sl POSITIONS
1-0FF
2 - RIGHT ELECTRODE
3 - l!R ELECTRODE
cI
4 -FLASHING
S-BOTH .Olllf
VI .....
SIG LT2-32-1
.....
FIVE-CONDITION INDICATOR-Represents any BISTABLE INDICATOR LAMP DRIVER-Lamp Is
of five states, using single noon lamp, by turned an by short trigger pulse at input A
switching Sl.-W. G. Miller, "Using a'nd Un- and thon remains on. Lomp is turnod off by
derstanding Miniature Noon Lamps," H. W. positive pulso at A and will remain off.
Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 23. Used with loglcal fllp-flop.-A. C. Giiiie,
"Pulse and logic Circuits," McGraw-Hll~
N.Y., 1968, p 260.
v.
ANODE-SCANNING DISPLAY-Dynamic drivo numerals. Valu11: RI 180; R2 220; R3, R4,

circuit far ZM I 000 numorlcol indicator tuba RS, Rn IOK; Cl, C2, C3, Cn 100 nF; DI, D2,
is externally oxcitod by 5-V base drivo pulses, D3, On BAX13; D4, 05, D6, Dn, BAX16; 07-
mutually shifted in time, that mako TRI ta D-16 BAX16; TR1-TRn 516BSY.-D. J. G.
TRn conduct in succession. Indicator tubes Janssen, A. G. Kortoling, and P, H. G. van
10a85X21 aro thus sequentially seleded far display, Vlodrop, Cold Cathode Numerical Indicator
CQtf\.04f lwtt:Ch with cathode drive transistors made canduc- Tubes, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eincf.
tivo at appropriate lnstont to show correct hoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 327, 1968.
209
~BLEEDER
~MAY BE SERIES DRIVE FOR EL-Electroluminescent
·---- __ ..; REQUIRED panel is off when switch is open. When
AC SUPPLY 230V RMS switch Is closed, scr gate is positive and scr
60 CPS _,,. 2 KC/ S conducts, with a•c load current flowing
C50Xl42
through scr, switch, 1K resistor, and control
- ~rf-CH---' ballery.-D. R. Grafham, Using low Current
3V =
+ L-----------4~-------___,J
SCR's, General Eleclric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
200.19, 1967, p 40.
Xl TO ADDITIONAL
ll5 VAC o--~l--"NI.------------ INDICATORS
1Nl763 3.3K ~ 56K 160 MAXI
LOW-VOLTAGE NONLATCHING INDICATOR- X2
Neon receives -18 V when Ql is cul off
by 1-V pulse. Together with zener vohago,
this fires lamp.-W. G, Miller, "Using and Un-
derstanding Miniature Noon Lamps," H. W.
Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 20.
RIO
12kQ
3K
Y AMPLIFIER FOR NUMERICAL DISPLAY-

Rll Differential output stage is fod by preamp to
2kQ which deflection signals from bar matrix gen-
erator and column or row selector are ap-
plied. TRll is BSX20; TRl2 and TR13 are
BSX21.-A. P. Tanis, Numerical Display with
Bar Matrix Character Generator, Electronic
Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
Elndhoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 2,
1966-1967, p 73-83.
R1
v"~r--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--~~
-~ I
~ell----'----.--..----.
•11V I
stltetlon
DU:llt
JL.
I
I
I
I
: GV'---------L.-.......1
I
I
Jh-ol;ftol- t
0
t t-·-------------t t
DISPLAY BANK WITH MEMORY-Circuit con- meral is visible. Display Is blanked out by R 1 :.: 16 IJl R7 8.2 k1l
trols one numerical indicator tubo In bank of applying positive pulse to all selection pulse R2 = 10 k{l RlO to R19 8.2 ldl
such tubes, displaying parallel digits rep- inputs, to turn off every conducting scs and
resenting informati.on from computer or cal- extinguish all indicator tubos.-D. J. G. R3 = 1.2 k{l R2D to R29 3.3 kfi
culator. Scs associated with each digit acts Janssen, A. G. Kortoling, and P. H. G. van R4 = 2.2 IJl c 2.7 nF
both as switch and memory so display is held Vlodrop, Cold Cathode Numerical Indicator
RS= V DR SO to 59 = BRY39
after Input signal has coasod. Display tubes Tubes, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
R6
are energized In sequence until entire nu• hovon, Tho Netherlands, No. 327, 1968.
DISPLAY CIRCUITS 211
SWITCHED SEQUENCE-First microswltch to

close causos three neon lamps to glow, Sec··
ond switch lights only two· lamps, third lights
one, and fourth doesn't light any lamp.-
E. Bauman, "Applications of Neon Lamps and
Gas Discharge Tubos," Signalito, Noptune,
90V N.J., p 143.
~..._____)_ )_ ) _ l+I
ALL LAMPS- A079
ALL RESISTORS- IOOK 112 W
R6
SKILLET HEATER
~ rm ostigmctism c~
50kQ 0.1µF
THERMOSTAT
117 VAC
R14
APPLIANCE ON INDICATOR-Neon lamp in· 120kQ
dicates when thermostatically controllad
heating oloment is on.-E. Bauman, "Applica•
tions of Neon Lamps and Gas Dischargo
Tubes," Signalite, Noptuno, N.J., p 138.
(+)
I RE~Eij
I
CL903
,,
.33M
- ---
l/4W
LTG-27-2
.33M
114W
(-) - - --
WRITE WITH FLASHLIGHT-Light oxcites one
photocell in bank of 1,000, causing corre•
•ponding thre-loment neon lamp in bank ®
of 1,000 to glow. Lamps remain on until
roset button is pu1hed to turn all lamps off at Z AMPLIFIER-Providos unblanking of crt at BAX13.-A. P. Tanis, Numerical Display with
onco. Power source is 145 V.-E. Bauman, requirod instants in scan of flguro-8 bars, Bar Matrix Character Generator, Electronic
"Applications of Neon Lamps 11nd Gas Dis- under command of input rogister and decoder, Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
charge Tubes.'' Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p for generating desired numeral on crt dis• Eindhovon, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, Na. 2,
116. play. Transistor is BFl 77 and all diode~ aro 1966-1967, p 73-83.
8+•+180VOLTS NIXIE DRIVER-Ser biasod as romote-base

transistor makes excollont high-voltage tran•
® NIXIE TUBE TYPE 6844A RL• IOK sistor for driving each eloment of Nixie, noon,
no
K
220
I<
220
K
220
K
......_.___..--+_:_-_:-_ ~) or other type of digital display. Common•
emitter current gain is 2. For memory fea•
ture, with display initiated by pulse and
holding until reset eicternally, connect C5
conventionally as scr.-"SCR Manual," 4th
Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 170-171.
TUBE "ON" TUBE "OFF"
o"L_J
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
4 V TURNS ON NEONS-Low·valtago IC ftip·

flop turns neon glow-lamp indicators such as
NE-23 on and off oven though IC cannot
handle 71-V breakdown of lamps. Pulsating
d-c voltage at V2, obtained from a-c line,
can turn lamps on and off with each cycle
of a-c line. Only one lamp of a parallel pair
can llro at a timo. When lamp connected to
"1" output of IC (4 V) turns on, VI drops
to maintaining voltage of 60 V and other
lamp cannot turn on.-G. V. Wintriss, Inte-
grated Circuit Drives Neons Diroctly, E/ec•
rronics, ,Nov. 13, 1967, p 99.
I.AMP
1.0AD
120VRMS
60 HI \19[~*
I
INPUT
SCR DRIVER FOR LAMP-Designed for No. 24

24-V lamp requiring 34 V rms from trans-
former secondary for normal brilliance on
1
half-wavo.-D. R. Gfafham, Using Low Cur-
rent SCR's, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 200.19, 1967, p 25.
Rs
+SIJJO-~-'llN'I.~~~--.
27K
Vl
XN
ALL LAMPS- T2-27-IWR760 Y NORMAL + 60 V X NORMAL - 60 V
ALL RESISTORS- 221< Y •oN" +105V X "ON" -105V
NONLATCHING INDICATOR-Neon glows only NEON X·Y MATRIX-Any ono lamp lights zero. Information may be fed in by X and
when negative pulse, which might come fram only whon both X and Y voltages on that Y ring counters. Readout may be visual or
transistor colloctor or other low-voltage line are increased to spociflod value. The thraugh photocells coupled to individual
source, is prosont.-W. G. Millar, "Using and matrix may be resat either by momentarily lamps and transistor circuitry.-E. Bauman,
Understanding Miniature Neon Lamps," H. W. removing voltages or by reversing polarity "Applicatlans af Noon Lamps and Gas Dis-
Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 20. along either axis so voltage across lamp is charge Tubes," Signalito, Neptune, N.J., p 76.
95-120DC OR R6
RECTIFIED AC
150K
NE·81
+2.6V•ON
O•OFF
INITIALLY R7
INPUT
ill 09
PLANAR PNPN SWITCH DRIVES NEON- CT 010
Serves as low-cost latching•typo driver for
single neon indicator lamp, immune to trig- LF 011
gering by line transients.-Planar Noon Driver
Silicon Controlled Switch 3N83, General Elec·
Irie, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 65.17, 1964.
R16
15kQ
llOVOl.TS DC llor tolchintl

{ llOVRMS lnon·lotchl•tl
tSOK
RI
22K
180nFQC
R5
iOQ TRI
,
+6V
SCR DRIVER FOR NEON-low-current scr has

ample voltage capability far handling 110 V
required for driving neons, Nixios, and other
types of glow lamps. Rl provides holding
current for scr.-D. R. Grafham, Using low
Current SCR's, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 200.19, 1967, p 25.
~!----------.
470ll
12ov. At
60HZ tN34 ~
SSL·22
A·C LINE VOLTAGE INDICATOR-With solid. BAR MATRIX GENERATOR-Output of saw- of 12 numerals oach. Decimal point is
state lamp, power dissipation in circuit is less tooth generator (center) is selectively gated formed by allowing beam to rost in fifth po·
than 0.2 W. Surge-limiting resistor and to X (top) and Y (bottom) doftoction ampli· sition of scon for period of 1 bar (32 µs).
surgit-handling capability of diode and ssl flors of crt to ropoatodly trace rectilinear fig· Field repetition frequency of 80 Hz elimi·
make indicator self-protected from most lino ure 8 with decimal point slightly to its right, nates flicker.-A. P. Tanis, Numerical Display
spikes or switching transionts.-l. M. Hertz, with beam being unblanked during sweep with Bar Matrix Character Generator, El8'·
Solid State lamps-Part II, General Electric to display bars required to farm desired rronic Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Co., Nola Park, Cleveland, Ohio, Applications numeral. All transistors are Philips BSX20 Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, Vol. 27, No.
Manual 3·0121, 1970, p 25. and diodes BAXl3. Display shows four rows 2, 1966-1967, p 73-83.
-El-SVJ +Elt751
601 60pl
IOK IOK 1201( R-S FLIP-FLOP FOR NIXIE-When both tronsis·

tors are on, output is -E (-5 V) and Nixie
51( cathode is off. Circuits hold al this state
until new information is received from
2N2907 external circuitry. Flip-flop thus serves both
as driver and storage.-G. K. Kostopoulos,
Nixie Driver Flip-Flop Also Stores lnforma•
IOK tion, Electronic Design, Sept. 13, 1965, p 82.
IOK
!-!>VJ· E ,._.....,...
101( ·E1·5VI ""
Ov
·E ~
CLOCK
20K LAMP
28V@40mA
95 TO 105V
DC FOR LATCHING
AC FOR NON-LATCHING
.-----<J>----0
2K
431<
Oz
2•i1711
NE·81
+IV•ON 3N85
O• OFF
INITIALLY 62K
x y
INPUT THREE-MODE INDICATOR LAMP-With both
z switches open, Ql-Q2 form part of ostoble
mvbr that makes lamp blink once per sec-
PLANAR SCS DRIVES NEON-Gives high re• ond. With SI open and S2 closed, lomp stoys
liability and uniformity of operation at low on. With SI closed ond S2 open, lomp goes
cost. Immune to : voltage transients.-Planar out. Transistors or reloys moy be used in
Silicon Controlled [ Switch 3N84/3N85, Gen• ploce of switches.-P. E. Dingwall, Three-State
eral Electric, Syra~use, N.Y., No. 65.18, 1964. Indicator, EEE, Morch 1967, p 166.
Rl 15 k11 RlO to R19 1 k11

vba~----1 R2 1 kU R20 10 MQ
+180V R1
R3, R4 = 5.1 k0 Cl, C2 4.7 nF
RS kU
10 CID to C19 330 pF
R6 = 2.2 k11
SO to S9 BRY39
C1 C2 so 51 52 58
input 1f R2 T T
pulse~
dork R20
ov.-----------------------.. . . ------- - - - ___ ..._____..._____,

MULTl·DIGIT DISPLAY-Uses Ks ring counter When ring counter goes from position 9 back
........
Jansson, A. G. Korteling, and P. H. G. van
to provide static display on several numerical to 0, carry pulse is produced to drive iden- Vlodrop, Cold Cathode Numerical Indicator
indicator tubes, with final count being held tically designed succeeding display stage. Tubes, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Eind-
ofter train of counting pulses is terminated. Maximum count rote is 40 kHz.-D. J. G. hoven, The Netherlands, No. 327, 1968.
•El+170VI
IOK
c, 60pf
IOOK '
UIM 200K - - - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - - - 4 - " "
SK 5K
NIX!( TUBE BURROUGHS 85031 OR 85092
2N2907
IOK IOK
FLIP-FLOP STORAGE DRIVES NIXIE-Circuit ternal circuitry. Power dissipation is very Is +1 V, and Nixie is on.-G. K. Kostopoulos,
shown drives one Nixie cathode and holds low. Both transistors are either on or off; Nixie Driver Flip-Flop Also Stores Information,
until new information Is received from ex• when on, output voltago to cathode of Nixie Electronic Design, Sept. 13, 1965, p 82.
evtn anodt ko-1 kz-3 ka-1 odd anode
Rl :::: 15 IJl R12 10 kll

R2 = 210 kO R13 to R17 100 kll
BIQUINARY INDICATOR DRIVE-Uses levols of conducting. Now, if ono of the cathode
R3 = 6.8 lc!l R18 = 270 kll 3 V for conducting anode and 0 V for non• switches TR3 to TR7 Is made conducting, an
R4 :::: 750 IJl R19 15 IJl conducting anodo, corresponding to "1" and "oven" anode ignites and an "even" nu•
= 6.8 kll "0" signals respedively. With "1" at "ovon" moral Is illuminated on display. R9 11 VDR.-
R6 = 15 IJl R21
anode terminal, TR2 will be bottomod and D. J. G. Janssen, A. G. Kortoling, and P. H. G.
R7 .47 lfl R22 = 47 kD baso of TR1 pulled nosatlvo to cut It off. van Vlodrop, Cold Cathode Numerical lndl·
RS ., 330 kO R23 = 15 lcU Simultaneously, "O" Is applied at "odd"
anode input, to cut off TR9 and make TR8
cator Tubes, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
Eindhoven, The Netherlands, Na. 327, 1968.
Rll c 470 kO R24 = 750 kO
.
"
Fl
115
VAC o------- 1150----0
VAC
Rs 220K
FUSE-CONDITION INDICATORS-Glowing
Fl neon lamp Indicates either blown fuso In first
circuit or good fuse in second.-W. G. Miller,
"Using and Understanding Mlnlatura Neon
lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind.,
1969, p 23.
Vl NE2
COMo----------o COMo------+---~
DIODES FOR NEON LAMP-Two lnoxponslve

25v d·c
~
diodes replace costly hlgh·voltagu transistor
for switching noon lamp on and off. Dashed 3.9k
connections show how additional lamps can
be connected in parallol and oporatod from 22k
same supply. Diodos aro part of logic cir·
cuit producing docimal readout for time and RECTIFIED
frequency meter. To hold lamp off, point A Dt Dz SINE-WAVE
is connected directly to 25-V supply; lamp SUPPLY
comn on when point A Is grounded to raise
lamp voltage above 75-V minimum for fir-
ing. While lighted, lamp tums on and off
120 times a second but fllckor Is not notice-
able. In decimal readout, DI Is arm of AND
gate, 1 and D2 is arm of OR gato.-C. J. ~I
rick, iDiodas Reduco Cost of Switching Nq~n
Lamps, E/ectronici, Fob. 6, 1967, p 70.
•V1
RI Display Tube~
ZDX1R ZOX1R
D C S
ZTX300 BCW I0
ZTX34 l BSV28
--------------.....----------------DY
NIXIE DECODER AND DRIVER-Circuit ac• of gas-fllled indicator tube. Uses two stages required number falls, and SC1cand stage du·
copts a-lino logical ! input in 8-4·2·1 binary of saloctlon, based on fact that If least slg· cides whether numbar Is odd or oven. Only
coded docimal and decodos It to obtain decl• nlflcant digit is eliminated, pairs of odd and one output can satisfy both conditions.-"E-
mal equivalent for energizing appropriate even numbers share same logic. First solec• Line Transistor Applicatlans," Ferranti ltd.,
dl9lt from 0 to 9 stackod together as cathodos tion stogo decides into which af five pain Olclham, lance., England, 10,0, p H.
040
TR 1, TR2 ... TRn =5168SY
TRJO, TRll ••• TRnl:::: BC147
dtcOdtr
driver
NANO-gates-
binary logic °"tput- "'" digit In -11,. digit WtiU
Rl 1 MU Cl 100 nF
R2 = 2700
R3 = 210 n C2 = 33 pF SELF-EXCITED DYNAMIC DRIVE FOR INDICA·
R4 10 k{} TORS-Circuit is designed to display Informa-
ClO, C11 ••• Cnl 1 nF
tion presented to all digital Inputs In parallel.
R10, R11 ••• Rn1 10 kil C20, C21 ••• Cn2 10 nF After operation of start switch, anode
R20, R21. •• Rn2 150 kO 01, 02 ••• 010 = BAX16 switchos TRl through TRn are activated in
R30, R31 ••• Rn3 3.3 k{} turn in continuous cyclical order to provide
011 BRY39 scanning of binary information supplied to
R40, R41 ••• Rn4 100 k{} 020, 02 l ... On2 = BAX16 NAND gates.-D. J. G. Jansson, A. G. Korte-
RSO, RS1 ••• Rn5 10 le{} 030, 030 ••• 0n3 = BAX16 llng, and P. H. G. van Vlodrop, Cold Cathode
R60, R61 ••• Rn6 1000 Numerical Indicator Tubes, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
040, D41 ... 0n4 = BAX16
Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Netherlands, No.
327, 1968.
l
+170 RIGHT LT2-~2-I
+6V
1•1---1M._L_E_F~f
..J : SI
~~-4'1,d-11---.
33K
3.3K1l
BOTH OFF
115VAC 112W
000
--i_r NIXI~ FOUR·CONDITION INDICATOR-Uses slngle
CLEAR (WITH NEON USE 3N85.) noon lamp. By switching SI, either right,
left, none, or both electrodes of lamp may
NIXIE OR NEON DRIVER-Requires I mA in·
bo actlvated.-E. Bauman, "Applications of
put to set and 2 mA to clear. With AND
Noon Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Sig·
gate at Input, contents of register can lie
nalite, Neptune, N.J., p 149•
...JL 3.3K1l
sampled and loaded into series of similar
SET driver stages. Inputs aro compatible with
DTl loglc.-R. M. Muth, Digital Circuits with
Visual Readouts, General Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 671.3, 1966, p 11.
X AMPLIFIER FOR NUMERICAL DISPLAY-

Difforential output stage Is fed by preamp
to which deflection slgnals from bar matrix
generator and column or row selector aro
applied. NANO gato connected to base of
TRI 0 centers numeral I in Its space. TRB Is
B$X20, TR9 and TRIO aro BSX21, and diode
is BAXl3.-A. P. Tanis, Numerical Display
with Bar Matrix Character Generator, Elec·
tronic Applicalions, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhavan, The Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. : O.:,Y_ _ _.....1._ _.L..--..1...----L---J--__J
2, 1966-1967, p 73-83.
+15 Vdc
R3
INPUT A 270
R4
6k o,
DI
INl520 MPS3703 rjj~ED;;;L:;-UNill
+ 15V de 5.6V xI
cw R1 I I
Ds
I 1NS99A
Oz D1
RIA
50k
s---- BAIO() 1500
IN599A I
I
CCW R4
INPUT B 470
SCR1
2N5061
SCR 2 I
2NS061I
Lz L1
1818
I
1818
I I
15~& I I
I I
ccw 24 VRMS I I
RIB
5011,_......_ _... L _____ J
cw REMOTE LAMP DRIVER-Circuit minimizes num·
·15Vdc ber of llnas to remote lamp displays. Diodes
In series with lamps, connected with opposite
polorlty, and scr's similarly connected with
POT POSITION DISPLAY-Simple transistor opposite polarity at sovrco cut numbor of
amplifl~r for meter provides accurate display lines to one for every two lamps, plus one
of potfntlometor position on motor. DI pro- common lino. Inputs are compatible with
tects meter against large position changes. Motorola MRTL logic. 24·V lamps are re-
Dual ~ot permits setting electrical zero at quired for long life, because half-cycles from
any potentiometer positian.-R. M. Reinking 24-V source heat fllamants of 14.4-V lamps
and D. R. McCuskar, Simple Circuit Solves exco11lvoly and shorten lifo.-W. Undenbach,
Position Display Problem, Electronic Design, Lamp Driver Minimizes Lines to Remote Dis-
Nov. B, 1967, p 122. play Unit, EEE, Dec. 1969, p 91-92.
+ 751/ 0-_ _ _,..,...,..,__ ___,
27K TECH·NEON
A079
MOTOROLA Tl2N337
MPS 2924
l.2K SHORT.PULSE INDICATOR-Noon fires upon

application of pulse and remains on until C
dischargos through QI and 1OK roslstor. ln-
I
C .Olli
lOK
croasing C allows lamp to romaln on longor •

TRANSISTOR-OPERATED INDICATOR-Neon
but decreasos input sensitivity of circuit.-
fires upon application of voltago pulso.
W. G. Millor, "Using and Understanding Min-
1.2K resistor prevents false starting by mini-
iature Neon lamps," H. W. Sams & Co,,
mizing leakage effects.-W. G. Miller, "Using
and Understanding Miniature Neon lamps.''
p 22.
AS
ll5VACo------i
ONE-MILLION-HOUR INDICATOR-Use whore _ .l.
Ill:. SUPPLY z~v AMS extremely long life and low powor dlssipa- C .031Jf
EL 60 10 ZK HERTZ lion are requirod. Capacitor Is usod Instead
of resistor to limit current to half the design
curront, theroby increasing life of lamp by 1
factor of 64.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Un-Vl C2A
derstanding Miniature Neon lamps," H. W.
SHUNT DRIVE FOR El PANEL-Eloctroluminos• Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind,. 1969, p 24.
cent display is on when switch Is open (no
3-V control slgnal).-"SCR Manual," 4th Edi-
tion, General Electric, 1967, p 171.
All
C6
ovfl----.-....Jl.....---L.4-----.......Jl.----.J'-f-------'-----'-t-------L---__..-+__.
ZM111110 ZMlllOO ZM1DCD ZMlllOO
..jfu--
TA2is--L.r"° FOUR-DIGIT ANODE-SCANNING DISPLAY- R4 680; R6-R9 220; R11 5.6K; CloC4 8 pf;
Dynamic display, using voltage stop-up trans- C6 2.2 pf; Dl-1>4 BAXl3; D6-D9 BAX16; TRI·
TA3L.r-1.J formers for indicator tube drive, is fed from TR4 BSX20.-D, J. G. Janssen, A. G. Korte-
low-voltage d·c source. Scanning repetition llng, and P. H. G. van Vlodrop, Cold Cathode
TA4LJ1. rate is 25 kHz. Transistor base drive signals Numerical Indicator Tubes, Philips, Pub.
1DxBSX21 are shifted simultaneously so numerical in· Dept,. Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether-
cathode switch dicator tubes conduct in tum. Values: RI· lands, No. 327, 1968.
+
SYLVANIA
PSB6
6V140mA
R2
E
lk
INPUT J2V
2A l
_jf3v 02
2N3528
•0.IV
R1 R3
47K IOK STANCOR
P-8130
---
~.>100 BINARY STATE INDICATOR-High Input of 3
Z1N -
V for logical 1 malces scr conduct on oach
OPERATING NEON ON 1.5 V-Ujt oscillator positive half-cycle of a-c line and lceop lamp
and transformor step up battery supply volt. on for as long as input is at high level.
ago to that required for driving noon power• low input of 0.1 V for logical 0 will not
on Indicator, for uso in battory•oporatod trlggor scr and lamp wlll not light. low
equipment whore power drawn by incan- Input current requirement of about 0.2 mA
descent pilot lamp is moro than that drawn malces circuit excoUent as readout for inte-
by circuitry itsolf. By lceoping frequency and 9rated circuits. ·Transformer spoclRed can
duty cycle low to give flashing Indication, drivo up to 14 identical roadouts.-P. Galluzzi,
powor consumption is further reduced. Al- Readout Circuit for Digital ICs, EEE, Jan.
most any ujt may bo used for 6 to 40 V, but 1967, p 115.
2N2840 should be used If supply Is single
1.5.Y coll. Choose Rt and Cl to give de-
sired froquoncy.-l. Toth, Circuit Powers Noon
lamps from low-Voltage Sources, E/edronic
Design, May 10, 1969, p 136.
+7v
6.Bk
O.z {
oi{
v, =+3v
R .. 56k
0 0 1 , 0 2 - NPN SILICON
SWITCHING
TRANSISTORS
LAMP DISPLAY
A
e/ G /F
c/-D /E
9~~....,.:::~~-1-~~~+-~~~1-~~-+~~~-+~~~+-~~~r-~-
t ~
Rbo •
DISPLAY CODE
DIGITS
DIGITAL DIS,LAY-Seven-segmont numerical negligible. Input terminals of matrix talce 0 I 2 3 4 5 .6 7 8 9
display uses 21 ·reslstor matrix and gives signals from decoder that converts bed out· A x x
greater roliab;llty than more costly 49-diodo put of binary counter into decimal numbers. B x x x x
conventional !natrix. All lamps glow when Numeral 8 is formed when all lamps are on, c x x x x x x
there Is no i~put. Desired digit is obtained so no input terminal is needed for it.-R. K. D x x x
by turning off unwanted lamps. Use of high· Sharma, Resistors Como to Ught In Digital E x
value resistors malcos current deHvorod to Display System, E/edronie1, Jan. S, 1970, p F x x
undesired tronsiston smoll enough to be 97-98, G x x x
CHAPTER 27
Electronic Music Circuits
PSYCHEDELIC DISPLAY-When connected to

hi.ti speaker, circuit activates throe sots of
colored lamps in accordance with volume and
froquoncy of sound, to give multicolored
display changing in time to music. Uses No.
93 12-V 1-A automotive lamps permanently
colored by manufacturer; blue is for low fro-
quoncios, rod for mld·froquonclos, and groan -
for highs. Six addltlonal No. 1488 colored llM>-i~~-t---+r
lamps roted 12 V at 150 mA (not shown)
are used at sides and corners of aluminum 1111'111'
reflector behind translucent plastic panel.
U1ed in Elco Model 3440 kit. Pots in Inputs
of two channols pormit changing patterns
as desirod.-Naw Color-Organ Kit, Efedronl"
World, May 1969, p 80.
-Ill'
IOY
ILAMP POWER
Q~02•2NHlll
RI
1.$11
llCIO
+1ev CIRCUIT POWER RID
1.ZOV
111 DZ COLORED
LAMP
PLI
IM14H
SCRI
CIOB
IOOJl
C.T.
R8
D:S 04 2.71(
RZ
1110
£114748
--~~~~~~"'"~~~~~~-"'~~~'V""~~J,~~~~~~~'V""~~~~-'~~
POWER SUPPLY INPUT ACTIVE FILTER TRICIGER OUTPUT

REPEAT THIS SIOE 4 TIMES
COLOR ORGAN-Music input is divided Into 2,500 W Illumination in four difforont colors R3 widens filter bandwidth to givo offoct of
four frequency bands by four active filters, that change dynamlcally with musical tones color blendlng.-J. M. Powell, A Now Ap-
each amplifying one frequency band much ovon at low levels. Values of C In µ.F oro proach to Color·Organ Desl9n, Electronics
more than others. Each channel can drive 0.1 for groan channel (lows), 0.047 for blue, World, Jan. 1969, p 39 and 61.
up to 625-W lamp load, to give total of 0.022 for rod, and 0.01 for yellow (highs).
221
QI
2Nl097
THEREMIN-Producos wailing sounds that
RI change with frequency as honds are movad
180K in air noar 38-inch whip antennos Inserted
vertically In 5-way binding posts JI and J2
mounted 7 inches apart. Place near back
of a•m broodcast radio tuned to midband
and adjust C3 until hissing sound is hoard
over radio, then adjust C4 for vary loud
+_ Bl whistle. Readjust C3 for lowest pitch, then
=- 9V play. LI and 12 are vori-loopsticks. Book
gives construction data.-"A Modem Tronsis-
tor Workbook," Radio Shack, Boston, Mass.,
1965, p 49.
SING~E·VOICE ORGAN-Basic tonos are

formed by clock oscillator Q3.Q4, with output
being froquency-moduloted by opplying very
low frequency sine-wave output of QI to
baso / af Q4 and collector of Q3. Valuas
shown give tremolo of about 6 Hz. Series·
connected resistors R19°R31 provide chromotlc
scolo, and flvo series capocitors permit keying
up or down two octaves from middle octavo.
Sawtooth output at terminal 9 and pulse
output at terminal 7 are fed to external mixer
for changing character of tones before food·
ing audio power ompliflor.-"Hobby Circuits
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p. 106.
•2 -t lllOll~E I l
OCTAVE
Ca C2 = 0.22 microfarad, 2S volts or or greater Ru R21 R22 = 1000 ohms, 1/2 watt,
greater, paper C 14 = 0.056 microfarad and 0.0068 · 10%
C3C10C11 "' O.S microfarad, 25 volts microfarad in parallel, 25 volts Ru = 1500ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
or greater, paper or greater R13 = l80ohms, l/2 watt, 10%
C 4 .. SO microfarads, IS volts, elec· Q,Q 2 Q. = transistor, RCA SK3020 R 14 = potentiometer, 1000 ohms,
trolytic Q3 = transistor, RCA SK300S linear taper
C 6 .. · 100 microfarads, 6 volts, elec- R 1 = 33,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% Ru = 1200 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
trolytic R 2 R 3 = 220,000ohms, l/2watt, 10% Ras = 470ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
Cs C1 "' 4 rrticrofarads, 2S volts, elec· R, Ra= 330,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% R11 2.2 megohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
trojytic R1 Ru .. 100,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, R1t Rio= l IOOohms, 1/2 watt, 5%
CeCe"' 0.lmicrofarad,2Svoltsor
I
10% Ri3R2, = 910ohms, l/2watt,S%
greater Re = potentiometer, 10,000 ohms, RuR2s = 820ohms, l/2watt, 10%
C 12 = 0.25 microfarad, 25 volts or linear taper R21 = 7S0ohms, 1/2 watt, S%
greater R1 .. 3300ohms, 1/2 watt 10% R211 Rn = 680ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
Cu = 0.12 microfarad and O.OOS R, = 270,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% R30 620ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
microfarad in parallel, ~5 volts Rio = 180,000 ohms, I /2 watt, 10% R31 = 10,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
ELEOTRONIO MUSIC CIRCUITS 223
RTI
~
22K
UJT CHROMATIC-SCALE ORGAN-Glvus full
RTl3
octavo of sharp sawtooth tonos that can be
shaped or voiced at output, under control of ~~K.h
_;_ 9
13 keys. Octavo can be moved up or down 82 -=TO
with R2 from 130.81 Hz (C below middle C)
to 1,046.05 Hz (C above middle C). Values For 8-key diatonic scale, omit sharps (#) and
=25V
in ohms of RT2 through RTl3 for chromatic use for remaining resistors 1,500, 3, 150,
scale are 1,500 (8), 1,500, 1,650, 1,800, 3,300, 4,200, 2,200, 4,700, and 5,400.-
1,800, 2,000, 2,200, 2,247, 2,470, 2,470, and "Hobby Manual," General Elodric, Owon ..
3,000 (C). Rt serves for initial calibration. boro, Ky., 1965, p 92.
68K ~SK 56K

"PITQi "ANTENNA
RI Cl
8-
Ql
R2
Ll
1.2 MEG
J 8-
2Nl10
t
lAFAYBTE
.01 32-ff-41111
270K
+
'N
SIMPLEST THEREMIN-Mdes use of ordinary
broadcast receiver to supply 6xed froquency 0
oscillator ond mixer for Tharemln. Place

Tharemln ca fow inches from back of rocaivar
DRUM TOM· TOM BONGO BLOCKS and tuna to fairly strong station around 900
RS- 22.000 82,000 82,000 330,000 lcHz, then odjust slug of L1 until most plea..
R6- 10,000 82,000 (Not used) ing whistle tone Is obtained. Moving hand
82,000
near pitch antenna then makes tone chango.
R9- 2700 6800 6800 6800 Metal plate about 10 Inches square may be
RIO- 2200 2200 2200 2200 used as antonna.-J. P. Shields, "Novel Eloc·
R11- tronic Circuits," H. W. Sams & Co., Indian-
82,000 22,000 27,000 (Not used)
apolis, Ind., 1968, p 76.
R12- 1 meg O.S6 meg 1 meg 1 meg
R13- 2700 2700 2700 6800
(Note: All resistors are 11~ watt, 10'7<.)
Ct- +MY
.1 .047 .047 .047
114
C2- .1 .01 .01 (Not used)
C3- .1 .047 .033 .01 115
···~
SA
C4- .1 .027 .OlS .0033
cs- .1 .027 .015 .0033 Ill
C7- .1 .1 .01 .1
TO 22K Rl6
OUTPUTS
1-4 8- 9
- ~s ot=fl1J!-=tl1
RIB 81 82
+
CIO IV 9V
+ Ql•llPSHZI
TWIN-T AUDIO-Basic drcult using Motorola

high-gain silicon transistor with R-C networks
Rt4 ls basic oscillator for many electronic music
4.7K shaping circuit (QI -Q4). Pressing pushbutton applications requiring up to I 0 kHz. Article
switch for desired Instrument gives ono boot gives nomogram and design procedures for
regardless of how long button is hold down. choosing capacitor volues. Cl should af..
Some or all buttons can bo pressed simul- woys equal C2, in range from 0.0003 to 0.1
taneously. Preamp QS permits use of in· µF, and C3 should be twice as Iorgo os
DRUM, TOM-TOM, BONGO, BLOCKS-Uses four strument with almost any audio system.-C. eithor.-f. B. Maynard, Twin T's: Designs &
identical one-shot twln·T oscillators, each Muller, Electronic Percussion Instruments, Appllcatlons, E/ectronk1 World, Aug. 1968,
with its own froquoncy-detormlnlng and Electronics World, Feb. 1967, p 36-37. p 35-37 and 64.
R2 • 27 llO
7-HZ VIBRATO FOR ORGAN-Used to modu· Vl•,b • £CL82
R3 • 1.C
late froquoncy of oach af 12 master tone
generators in six·odave olectranic organ. R •
4
1 MSJ
Provides wavering variation of pitch without Rs• 1 MO
affecting loudness. Triode in R·C phase• R6 • I Kl
shifting network gonerates 7-Hz signal for R • 220 II{)
7
driving pontade operating as cathode follower R • 1.8 llO
8
to match output to impedance of vibrato con• Rg • s llO
trol potentiometer. RI is voltage-dependent
resistor.-Electronic Organ with Cold-Cathode C 1 •270pF
Tuba Frequency Dividers, Philips, Pub. Dept., c2 - IOjlF
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. c3 • 22jlF
112, 1966. c4 • 27jlF
TO VIBRATO CONTROL Cs• 27jlF
c • 200jlF
6
+14V
lMEG
-1 I CYMBAL AFTERBEAT EFFECT-Special zener

noise diodo Is combinod with sustain control
generator for uso in electronic organ to create
a desired noise effect, Transistor and DI
types are not critical.-''Zener Diode Hand·
book," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1967, p 9-5.
MOTOROLA
NOISE
DIODE
IC HAWAIIAN GUITAR-Also callod Glide- This frequency is divided by IC2 (HEP558)

tono. When fed into audio amplifier and to creato tone exactly one octavo lower.
spoaker through shiolded cablo, generates Stops S1 and 52 faad these tones singly or
unique sound with sudden attack and decay togethor to Q2 (HEPSO) which provides sus-
like that of plucked strings, bells, and tain offoct. Ql (HEP251) provides 6-H1 vi·
_,._.._,.,__ chimes. ICl (HEP556) is tone gonorator ad- bralo. Circuit is thus similar to small portion
RB justable within tw-ctavo range by R16. of an electronic organ. Article gives con•
I.BK
slruction details.-"lntegrated Circuit Proj-
53 6V
ects," Motorola, Phoenix, Aris., 1966, p 70-
79.
1112
2K
--tl-""
Rl6>-..........
z.s JI PLI TO Alll'
HI~
470K
Hl1
I Mt:O
METRONOME-Produces audiblo beeps at rate socond, may be used in darkroom for timing
determined by setting of R9, for motoring oxposuros.-"Hobby Circuits Manual," RCA,
musical cadonco. If beep rato is set at 1 per Harrison, N.J., HM·90, p 103.
C 1 C2 = 20 microfarads, 12 volts, R. = 3900, 1/2 watt, 10%
electrolytic Ra = 470 ohms, I /2 watt, IO%
ReRs = 150ohms, 1/2watt, 10%
Q1Q3 transistor, RCA SK3005
R7 = 120ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
Q2Q• transistor, RCA SK3020 Rv = potentiometer, 50,000 ohms,
4
R1 R3 1000ohms, l/2watt, IO% linear taper Rg
R2 = 68 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% Speaker = 3.2 ohms
ELECTRONIC MUSIC CIRCUITS 225
+zssv~..-~~--1>-1~~~~--.--.~~~~..-..-~~~·
ORGAN TONE GENERATOR-Inexpensive, 0
llEG 0
stable, and highly reliable circuit covers six
odaves, using basic triode master oscillator
and flvo bistable neon oscillators as frequency
dividers, each cutting previous frequency In
half. Capacitive voltage divider in each
stage prevents output tone from coupling
back into previous stage and causing audible
distortion. Values of unmarked resistors,
which depend on leakage resistance of neon
lamps, are not uitical if type A078 lamps
are usad, Output 5 is 523.3 Hz (C above
middle C}.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Noon
Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalito, OUTPUTS- 4 J
Neptune, N.J., p 4o-43. ZOH-SMI- I0'7-tsf5- SZ:S.S-MJ.1- 2'1.7-415.1- 1so.1-u1.1- H.41-
CAPACIT011S: DEc:mA&.S 111 llf'D - lllTHll&l.S 1111 111 lllW llJ.I..,
TO KEYBOARD
,......_,.
Nola: C
Q72
8
1902
A#
7459
A G#
1040 6645
G
6272
F#
5920 551!3
F 8
5274
D# D c#
4911 4699 4435. Ha
C1 po1, ••,..... 125 v 1.2 1.2 10 12 12 IS 15 18 22 22 27 27 Ill'
c2 polJ•ll•r 125 v 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 pF ORGAN TONE GENERATOR-Circuit shown
c 3 polr••ter 400 v 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.7 2.7 2.7 3.3 3.3 3.3 nF (for C natural) Is one of 12 master tone gen•
c4 ceramic 350V 0.68 0.68 Cl.112 0.82 0.12 1,0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 nl'
c5 polreater 400V
erators in eledronic organ for homos or small
330 330 330 390 390 390 470 470 470 560 560 560 pF
c6 polreatar 400y 390 390 390 390 470 470 470 470 560 560 560 560 pF public rooms. All notes comprising slx-odave
c1 polroa1ar 400 v 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 1.0 1.0 J,O 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 nF range of instrument aro darivod by ZA 1001
c1 polro11or 400V 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 nF cold-cathode relaxation osclllaton operating
c 9 po1r••t•r 400V 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 nF in cascade as successive frequency dividers.
c 10 po1r••t•r 400V 1.2 1.2 8.2 1.2 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 nF Final stage, including V13 and Vl4, Is omitted
c 11 polr••tar 400V IS nF fram tone generators for other notes. V1 is
c12 polr••tar 125 v 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 2. 7 2. 7 2. 7 3.3 3.3 3.3 nF
half of ECC82 double-triode. Resistors are
c 13 polre•1ar 125 v 3,9 3.9 3.9 3.9 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 nF
c 14 polreatar 125 v U U U U WWW W 12 12 12 UnF
identical for all 12 tone generators except for
C IS polr••t•t 125 v 11 11 18 18 ll 22 22 22 11 27 27 27 Ill' R11·Rl7 whoso values must be selected for
c 16 po4'. .t•r 125 v 39 39 39 39 47 47 47 47 56 56 56 56 nF vibrato and frequency adjustment, and R1
C 11 polJ••ter 125 v 82 82 82 82 100 100 100 100 120 120 120 120 nF whoso values are given in table along with
c 11 polr••ter 125 v ISO nF capacitor valuos. Values are: R2 47K; R3 22K;
c 19 coremlc 350 v 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 pF R4-R10 4.7 mog; R11-R17 1.8 to 22 meg; RIB·
c20 ceramlc 3SOV w w w w w w w w w w w w~
R23 10 mag; R24, R25 4.7K; R26 1SK; R27-
0
c 21 ceramic 350 v 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 pF
c 22 ceramic 350V R33 220K; L is 45 mH with core K30024 ond
Cu coromlc 3SOV "
47 "
47 22
47 "
47 "47 22
47 "47 "
47
22
47 22
47 "47 22
47
-
pF 850 turns wild-wound, topped at 210 turns.
c 24 cenmlc 350V 100 pF Report gives complete design and construc-
c 25 caamlc 350V 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 JO 10 10 10 10 pF tion data for ontlra organ.-Eledronic Organ
c 26 ceramic 350 v 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 JO 10 10 10 10 PF with Cold-Cathode Tube Frequency Dividers,
c11 cetamlc 3SOV 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 pF Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
c28 caromlc 350V 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 PF
The Netherlands, No. 122, 1966.
c 29 c .....u: 350V 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 pf
c 30 c ..•mie 350 v 100 - pl'
22 22 2c 27 27 33 33 39 39 39 0 47 lo!}
226 ELE·CTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
RI
560!1
BAT~
6V-='
S6
or
IC SINGLE-OSCILLATOR ORGAN-Unear am·
plifler IC.1 and eight switched-in resistors
Rl5-R21 servo os oscillator for generating
eight notes of diatonic scalo-do, re, ml, fa,
sol, la, ti, do, though not nocessarlly with
perfect tuning to lntematlonal musical scale
unless resistor values are slightly changed.
Othor three IC's are J-K flip-flops that gen·
erate suboctaves by exact frequency division.
Ql Is 6-Hz vibrato generator, Stop switches
51-S4, each providing different sound, are
used singly or in combinations to provide
voicing. Q2.Q3 servo as audio amplifier.
IC·I • HEP 556
Artlcle gives construction details.-"lntegrated
SS lC·2,3,4 • HEP $$8 Circuit Projecis," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
QI· HEP 251
Qt, Q:I • HEP 250 1966, p 32-45.
Rl4
2.2K
r------------..-----c+1av
A4
'·"
,----------- ---.,
I 01-ltPUSI\
I 01.a1-w1 &SIO
I
I ltl RI
RT I
I
9
1
_c , o
aus•
Rl4
IK aus St
sz c• +
INPUT OUTPUT
MAGNETIC
OR
TO
...... '°""' 10•
CERAMIC
AMPLIFIER
••• +M
RT'
PICKUP TWIN·T GLIDING-TONE-Used in oxparimontal
musical Instruments to provide shifts and
glides at any intervals within 1.5-octave fra•
quoncy ranges of multiplicity of twln·T oscii-
TREMOLO FOR GUITAR-Ql is 6-Hz phaso- lators employed. Only part of circuit is
shift ascillatar acting on voltage amplifier Q2 shown, with values given for first oscillator
to vary Input signal strength and provide Ql. Article gives dosl.en details fer achiev•
added depth to any muslcol instrument using ing desired musical offocts.-F. 8, Maynard,
plckup.-W. R. Shippoe, Simplified Tromolo, Twin T's: Designs & Applications, Efoctronics
Electronics World, Oct. 1966, p 89. World, Aug. 1968, p 35-37 and 64.
R4
e.et
BONGO-Provides ringing function for sim·
uloting musical instruments when R3 in basic
twin·T oscillator is adjusted until circuit just
becomes quiescont. If this is close to cutoff,
duration of ringing can be up to 30 sino
waves. Can bo triggered by positive square TOVCKING AllY OF THESE POINTS WITH
waves or by touching Indicated terminals. .TH[ FlllGfR WILL TRIGGER THE RIHG
At around 100 Hz, effect sounds like boss
drums. Middle frequencies simulate tom.
toms and bongos. Above 1 kHz sounds of
gongs, resonant wood blocks, and cloves are
generated. Con also be used for doorbells
and signaling devlces.-F. B. Maynord, Twin
T's: Designs & Appllccatlons, Electronics
World, Aug. 1968, p 35-37 and 64.
cs
.lpF
--
PSI
GUITAR-Uses two IC R-C osclllaton, one
topped to prav\de notes over tw-ctcave
scale (250 to 1,100 Hz). Other gives flxod-
frequoncy output around 12 Hz which may
be turned an and off by SWI, adding ca
rapid string-plucking sound to Instrument.
Artlclo gives construction details, Ampllfler
dellvers 200 mW to speaker.-"lntegrated Cir·
cult Proiects," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1966,
p 80.
R1
330!!
0
I
~o
L.. ... 9v
2 +9V
C, "' 0.01 microfarad, 25 volts or
greater
C2CaC, "" 5 microfarads, 15 volts,
electrolytic
Q1Qa .. transistor, RCA SK3020
Q1 "' transistor, RCA SK3005
R1 Rt Ra R1 = 100,000 ohms, 1/2
watt, 10%
R, 3300ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
R5 potentiometer, 5000 ohms, lin-
ear taper
Re 15,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
FUZZ BOX-Can bo usod with guitar or any COMMON Ra Rio .. 2700ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
other Instrument whoso muslcol output is of signal at Input to Q2 ond therefore con· R1 "' 47,000ohms, l/2watt, 10%
ampllfled. Will change charoctor of sound trols amount of fuzz. Q3 Is biased to clip top Ru .. potentiometer, 10,000 ohms,
produced, to give variety of sounds not of signal Input and further change character linear taper
otherwise available from tho instrument. Q2 of sound. Circuit requires 1 V input.-"Hobby
is biased almost to cutoff and therofore ampli- Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, "'·'·• HM-90, S 1 .. switch, double-pole, dou blc-
fies only half of input signal. RS changes level p 91. throw
r----------------'\iV\..----~MODULATED
UNMODULATED~ 33K AUDIO OUTPUT
AUDIO INPUT - '!'QLl!ft'I~ .l .--------_.-22.SV r~p~rPLIFIER
CONTROL "' - - - - -
4.7M
4-8 HZ TREMOLO-Circuit modulates audio
input from stringed oloctrical instrument by
using first fot as phase-shift oscillator that
0.1 ..1 controls resistanco of second fet. Basic oscilla·
HRN8318D HRN83180
tlon frequency is determined by setting of rato
control pot. When depth control is in full
clockwlso position, output of subsonic oscilla·
lM tor Is shorted to -22.5 V power supply
1N697 and linear resistance of second fet does not
vary, so audio signal is unmodulatod.-C. R.
RATE 1N697 Perkins, "Application of MOSFET Devices to
CONTROL 2.2K Electronic Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach,
Cal., 1968, p 10•
.
RI
PM SPKR
~i
A·C METRONOME-Simulates pendulum-typo
usod with pianos. R3 controls boat rato.
Tl Is Morit A-2900 universal output trans•
formor; 11 NE-2 pilot lamp; Cl 2; C2 20;
C3 40; Rl·R2 120K; R3 7.5 mog pot; R4 470.
-R. M. Brown, "104 Simple Ono-Tubo Proi·
octs," Tab Books, Bluo Ridge Summit, Pa., I Note: Insulate these/ I 17V AC
1969, p 119. I controls to prevent I
..__ _ __,
., __ - - - - - __,
shorting to chassi7
-t2.v
·---------- -------,
1
Lt
30·130mh
I
T0880
I
I
440,220 I
110,55hz c I
MULTI VIBRATORS )Gi,...;...: ---1------~ '-41~VV'\r--l---....i J.+--..:....-1-----i.__ _.JVV\.....i
tOpf
I
I
I
C4 C3
91k
R4
I
21k oDotsT o.ooe2 T I
I
"'-= "'-= ~12~
___________ .JI
ALL TRANSISTORS: 2N2614

L-- ----------------
1760hz MULTIVIBRATOR
-' L
HARTLEY OSCILLATOR
BUZZ-FREE ORGAN-Addition of capacitor C4 ara gonoratod alone with each fundamonJal.

to mvbr and modification of Hartley oscillator Output of Hartley Is stable onough to sorve
with Rl and Cl eliminate buzzing sound as sync slenal alone with organ noto.-R. F.
croatad by fast flyback of sawtooth voltaees Woody Jr., Puttlne Electronic Organs In Tune
in oloctronic orean. Rodesisn of circuit also With Natural Saund, Electronics, Juno 24,
adds richness to music, because all harmonics 1968, p 100-102.
C4
rpF) + R6
620
.....0+12'1
"SUSTAIN" EFFECT-Twln-T oscillator provides

effect heard in pianos, bells, and string in·
struments, in which tono decreases gradually
in intensity. Article has nomogram for
choosing twin·T component values to give
desired frequency. Voltage stability is sufR·
clently good that maximum deviation from
constant frequency cannot be detected by
RI most persons. Ql is Motorola MPS6521.-
F. B. Maynard, Twin T's: Designs & Applica·
tions, Electronics World, Aug. 1968, p. 35-37
.005pF and 64•
----Jl\o-11-- HIGH HARMONIC TONE OUT
Cl
FET VIBRATO-Gives tremolo or othor speclol

effects to guitars, accordions, and reed-typo
electric chord organs. Connect high-imped·
ance pickup or microphone to Input jack Jl,
and connect output jack J2 to high-imped·
ance input of any audio ampliRer system.
Twin-tee oscillator Ql produces ~Hz sino-
wave output, adjustable by Rl 1. Article
gives construction and adjustment details.-
"Field Effect Transistor Projects," Motorola,
Phoenix, Ariz., 1966, p 15-25. C6 R9 _ GROUND
+ lµf 1K - TO CHASSIS
C1 15 microfarads, 10 volts, elec·

trolytic
•12'1
TO
TERMINAL C2 = 100 microfarads, 6 volts, elec-
No.7 3 trolytic
c3 50 microfarads, 15 volts, elec-
TO trolytic
TERMINAL l ~---<t-.
No.8 Qi = transistor, RCA SK3020
R1 R& Re Rg' = 100,000 ohms, 1/2
TO watt, 10%
TERMINAL
No.9 R2 potentiometer, 5000 ohms, lin-
ear taper
COMMON Ra 2.2 megohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
ON 6
R, = potentiometer, 250,000 ohms,
linear taper
MIXER AMPLIFIER
R7 potentiometer, 10,000 ohms,
ORGAN MIXER·AMPUFIER-Sawtooth input to fler stage. Output at terminals 4 and S may linear taper
R3 and pulse input to Rl from single-voice be fed into hi-A audio amplifler.-"Hobby Rs 330,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
electronic organ are mixed to change char· Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, Rio = 12,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
actor of tone beforo feeding into audio ampli- p 107. Ru = 3300 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
CHAPTER 28
Filter Circuits-Active
Vee +22.5 v
IOK
18K ZOK
INPUT
EB!-i Eour OUTPUT
100µ.f c, IM19
lµ.f
SK R2 C2 +
lµ.f
I25µf
3-20 DB BANDWIDTH NOTCH FILTER-Adjust-

ing values of RI and R2 alters bandwidth 0-1 HZ ACTIVE FILTER-low-pass flller with
without affecting notch attenuation. With voltage gain to 2.5 has rolloff of 12 dB per
1,375 ohms far bath, notch bandwidth is much decade af frequency and noise (referred to
narrower than when RI is 310 ohms and R2 input) of only 15 µV por root cycle, as com-
is I OK. Article gives response curves and pared to 140 with ordinary low-noise tran-
phase characteristic for operating range of sistor.-T. F. Prosser, Field Effect Transistor
100 to 150 Hz.-H. E. Butler, Variable Band- Improves low Poss Filter Action, "400 Ideas
width From a Notch Filter, Elecrronic Design, for Design Selected from Electronic Design,"
April 27, 1964, p 90. Hayden Boek Co., N.Y., 1964, p 15.
620pf
··'1!''
Stk
330 -= lk
510pf
···1:··· 104
FREQUENCY (hz)
l.6k 6.2k
+15v _
-tsv
PHASE-LOCKED LOOP-Two-soction active 70 dB down from d-c gain, 10-kHz second sign equations.-B. Walling, Active Fillers:
filter using opamps was developed for fra- harmonic 60 dB down, and all other harmonics The Op Amp Saves Timo and Money, Elec-
quency synthesizer requiring d-c voltogo gain at least 50 dB down. Phase shift at 1 kHz tronics, Feb. 3, 1969, p 82-90.
of 15 VIV, 5-kHz reference frequency at least must be less than 50 deg. Articlo gives de-
230
FILTER CIRCUITS-ACTIVE 231
6o.HZ NOTCH FILTER-Usos FS-20 or equiva-

lent IC adivo filter with unity-gain inverting
opamp providing adjustable notch depth.
Notch frequency may bo changed with lOK
pot.-G. J. Estep, Now Applications for IC
GAIN AOJ Adivo Filters. EEE, Od. 1969, p 60-63.
NOl'CH Vo
ll DEPTH
500k
IOk
NOTCH
FREOUEMCY
I
I
NOISE AND RUMBLE FILTER-Noise filter
switch gives choice of 16, 12, and 7 kHz for
I
3-cls.down froquoncy response limits. Fra. I
quoncy limit of rumble filter is fixed at 45 I
Hz. Voltogo gain of filter is 0.95.-"Tronsis· I
tor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mullord ltd.,
London, 1969, p 138.
I
I
L __
SIGNAL
INPUT
o,
2N3390
+
c,
10.056
+VEE
SU700 (PAIR)
03 04
IR31 IR41
CONTROL
INPUT -=-
ACTIVE TUNABLE BANDPASS-Uses pair of Permits transmission of narrow band of on• active filters with Q up to 100 for frequencies
fet's os tuning element to sovo money and coded information that can bo converted Into up to several hundred kHz. Bandpass version
spoco. Developed by Philco-Ford for speech intelligible synthetic speech on earth. Filter shown has overall gain of 2.-J. M. Loo, FET's
bandwidth compression system needed by frequency is linearly related to control voltage Coll The Tune In Active Filter Design, Elec-
NASA to roduco tran1ml11lon powor for voice for 20:1 frequency range. Article covers de- tronics, Oct. 3, 1966, p 98-101.
communication from Man and deep space. sign of low, high, and bandpou filters using
RAYSISTOR DRIVE
-25 v
2K
10 ~
OPTOELECTRONIC CONTROL OF NOTCH Fii,.
TER-Doe control voltage applled to lamp of
CK1102 Raysistor makes adivo notch filter
track from 800 to 1,200 Hz. To make track·
ing fllter automatically follow applied signal
frequency, in same range, use Schmitt trigger,
differentiating circuit, and doe amplifier to
provide d-c control voltage of 0 to 1 V whose
value varies with appliod frequency.-Raysis- 1.5 K l.S K
tor Optoelectronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy, o.s ISK 3.3K
Mass., 1967, p 19.
DIFFERENTIATING
SCHMITT TRIGGER CIRCUIT O.C. AMPLIFIER
OPTOELECTRONIC TRACKING FILTER CON·
TROL-Converts input frequency in ran90 of
800 to 1,200 Hz to proportional doe output
voltage from 0 to 1 V for lamp of Raysistor
In active notch fllter providing automatic
tracking in same frequency ran9e.-Raysistor
Optoelectronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy,
Mass., 1967, p 20.
RAYSISTOR
CONTROL
+sv
0.01µ.f
RF INPUT ~1-----..----------<
!Ok 1k
VARIABLE-BANDPASS FILTER-Fet in feedback

loop of IC wideband amplifler acts as variable -6v
resistance that controls amount of feedliock
and thereby changes Q of tuned network.
-6v
Will give Q values up to several thousand at TIS 34
frequencies up to 30 MHz. Useful in r.f and (TEXAS INSTRUMENTS}
i-f stages.-G. A. Yonder Haagen, FET Vories 10k
Q of Tuned Circuit l:iy Several Thousond, Elac•
(Q MULTIPLIER
Ironies, Sept. 29, 1969, p 9S. TUNING VOLTAGE CONTROL I
O.Olp.f t O-t50v
3.3K
251'f 56K
I25V
'='
8-HZ TWIN-T IN MOSFET AMPLIFIER-Filter
INPUT >---f-"'111.,,___--t--t network in negative feedback loop of two-
.01 stage mosfet amplifier gives bandpass with
8-Hz center frequency. Output transistor
provldos additional gain and relatlvely low
output impedance. Basic circuit can be
----OUTPUT
lOOM lOOM adapted for detecting Iorgo number of dis-
crete audio tones, for power analysis of audio
spectrum, or for synthetic reconstruction of
s2p1 27K speech or music.-C. R. Perkins, "Appllcatlon
lM
1.,.. of MOSFET Devices to Electronic Circuits,"
Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968, p 15.
lOOOpl lOOOpl
2M
...
+Vdc Supplies +&Vdc.-&Vdc

Q, 2N886
Q, 2NSSS
-'Ir R, CR. 1NlS7A
Input Outpul
CR. 1N629
c, CR, 1N629
R, S&OK
R, 68K
SHARPENING FILTER-Eloctronlc switch and R, 82K
discriminator servo as frequency-sensitive R. 5.6K
means of sharpening slopes of filter response -Vdc R. 8200
curve. Can bo used ta eliminate interference Re 9.lK
caused by overmodulatlon of f.m transmitter R, 6.8K
in subcarrler telemetry systems. Square-wave R. S9K
input from froquoncy•modulated subcarrier and no longer holds CRI open; resulting low•
R, 16K
impedance path from baso of Q2 to ground
c, .oos,,.F
oscillator Is canvertod to sine wave by LC c. .oos,,.F
Input bandpass flltar, ampllfled by QI, then causes signal voltage to be dropped almost c. .ua,,.F
converted to positive d-c voltage at point 8, entirely across R2 to give eloctrenlc oquiva• c. 2.2 J&F, 20 V de
proportional to amplitude of signal voltago at lent of narrower fllter.-"Salectod Electronic c. 1 p.F, 20V de
point A. Whan Input frequency goos beyond Circuitry," NASA SP-5046, 1966, Government c. lp.F, 20 V de
cutoff point of LC flltor, voltago at B drops Printing Ofllco, Washington, D.C., p 51. c, 1,,.F, 20Vdc
Li lH
L. lH
JI,
Supplies -18 Vdc tKc lOKc lOOKc
.vdc + 12 v de Comp. Filter Filter Filter
JI,
(', II, c, 01 2Nl182
o. 2N1182 R, 6.8K 6.SK S.9K
c·J1, JI,
JI,
o. 2N1182 R, 2.2K 2.2K 8.2K
Input Q, CR 1 1N695 R, 22K 22K 89K
~er CR, R. l.2K 1.2K 3.9K
t., <",
R. lK R, S9K 39K 24K
R,
R,
5000
2200
R,
c.
lOK
. 0.068µ.F
-
o.osa 11F -
820pF
c, 150pF (2)•
c. 0.47,,.r, v de
60 L, 0.25H 8mH 2.5mH
PULSE CONVERSION FILTER-Convorh rectan·
c, 0.068J&F (2).
c. 0.06811F
gular Input slgnal· to highly stable sine-wave c, o.oss,,.r •t Kc Filter, Two Filter Stages.
output. QI applies ampliflod Input signal to
flltor whoso values are given for throe diffe.. of roctangular Input waveform; 50% duty
ant center fraquenclos. In each case, tuning cycle gives optimum operation. Circuit can
of tank circuit to desired frequency Is done provido coordlnatod timing signals for sovoral
by changing value of C3. Amplitude of locations.-"Seledad Electronic Circuitry,"
sln-avo signal at output of Darlington NASA SP-5046, 1966, Government Printing
emitter.follower Q2.Q3 varies with duty cycle Office, Washington, D.C., p 54.
l!IV ZENER RIPPLE SUPPRESSION FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE

\ .---t<--...---0+ SUPPLY-Capacitance multiplier circuit keeps
anodo voltago vory low for high-voltage
RECTIFIED c1 photomultlpller. Gives output of 2 kV at 2
H.V. 0.25p.fI c
3301( FILTERED
H.V. mA. Transistor typo Is not critical.-G. P.
Epstein, Photo-Multiplier Filter Adaptable Ovor
-oo--6---------~4---~--~--oo-
5p.'I Wide Range, Electronic Design, April 13, 1964,
p 73.
,_._ __,_ __. -Voo ~ -12V
TWIN·T MOSFET-Fet pair ads as differential ----------------1Jt--__,ll~OUTPUT

ampllfter with extremely high input Imped· 1.0,.1
ance. One side of differential amplifter is
conneded to twln-T filter to give notch ftltor r-------,
at frequency determined by valuos used for INPUT}---tt----1--1----....i 1--+---lt-+-+-.J\l'.'.llr-....--'Vl'---I--'
R and C. Overall impedance of twin·T net• m~ 2R I
work should be above lOOK for proper circuit
lLI ______c c
oporation.-C. R. Perkins, "Application of
lM 18K lM
MOSFET Devices to Eledronic Circuits,"
Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968, p 17. 2C R I
_J
+Vss " • 12V
R2~--------------,
I I
R,r-------,
I I II OMll 50MSI 100.W 200Mll 300.\lll 400M1l 500MU I
I
I I ~ _J
I I
IN
BYPASS I lMll 5Mll lOMn ze».UI I
O--+-+--<>-...O~P_ASS..;.;..._Fl~LTE-=.;.R_ _--l__. OUT
TT OUT L.---- ___ J I
REJ. FILTER 1.0 90KD
0
I
o•I
I I
---- ______ J
~-------,------------------------------------------------------
' I 1.0
oi
II ..---1'------------------------------1 ~~~
20Kll
0.1
ll\UI
s-;
INDICATES
SHORTING
SWITCH
TWINTI
FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER
!
0.04-10.99 HZ TUNABLE TWIN·T-Used In and 1 Ha. Multiplication by faders between jedion filter. Article describes performance
measuring transvene dHS effect in bismuth 1.0 and 10.99 in steps of 0.01 is achieved by and gives details af measurement procedure.
at llquid helium temperatures. Switching varying elements of three equal resistance Opamp Is Philbrick USA-3.-R. D. Brown Ill,
matched sets of ftxed capacitors gives three arms. Can bo used in feedback line of Now Mothoda fer Do Haaa-Shubnlkov Meas-
rans•• havin9 minimum values of 0.04, 0.1, opamp as pass tilter or In input line as re- urements, ISM Journal, Nov. 1966, p 462-471.
WWV 1-KHZ TICK-PASSING FILTER-Diode

and transistor form blasod-base clipper In -av
circuit that passes 1,000-Hz seconds-tick tono
in timo signals from WWV while rejecting
440 and 600 Hz tonos also transmitted, IOK "TICK"OUTPUT
Each tick consists of 5 ms of 1,000-Hz tono. IOOOcpa
TO AUDIO
Undesired tones last longor than 5 ms and AMPLIFIER
Fil.TEAED
croato back bias on diode, so do not appear AUDIO INPUT
in output.-T. E. Fay, Biased Base Cllppor IOOK
lsolatos WWV Tick Tone, "400 Ideas for De-
sign Selected from Electronic Design," Haydon
Boole Co., N.Y., 1964, p 137.
NOTCH FILTER
-12V
R1 Ri
4.7K
R3
10k
SHARP-BANDSTOP NOTCH FILTER-Notch fil-

ter alone is useful at low frequencies whon
bulky inductors aro undesirable. Addition of
+12V opamp in active network, with R3 adjusted
to make amplifier unstable, gives simplo as•
THREE--SECTION All-PASS-With 0.01 p.F for
cillator whoso frequency corresponds to contor
C and 10K for R (l.67K for R/6), time delay
froquoncy of filter (about I 0 kHz). Artlclo
of fllter Is 100 p.s. Article gives doslgn equa-
gives design nomograph for notch flltor.-P.
tions and examples of values for othor timo
V. Wanek, Nomograph Charts a Fast Way to
delays.-T. Mollinga, All-Pass Networks, EEE,
Build a Notch Filter, Electronics, Septombor 15,
Oct. 1966, p 84-88.
1969, p 119.
-12v
+25v O.OIJ&f
FREQUENCY
TRIM 0.7-20pf -12v
220
359-khz
INPUT
-12v
+t2v
J1.. 1.I" -12v
QUENCJi or JL
DUMP SIGNAL T'our =t}'sec
359·KHZ ACTIVE BANDPASS-Gated Q mufli- cation system. High·Q tank circuit provides kHz center frequency providing positive in-
plier Integrates, stores, filters, and analyzes loaded Q's greater than 3,000 for Integration. tegral during integration period.-R. J, Turner,
audio tones that may bo separated by as Tones are sequentially analyzed by filter, with Q-Multiplier Analyns Audio-frequency Tones
little as 80 Hz in phase-modulated communi- only tho one tono that is tunod to the 359- Electronics, May 25, 1970, p 94. '
DELCO 2Nl74 j4IN111~.ll.LELI MFE 2133

INPUT OUTPUT
IOOk
INPUT OUTPUT
31.4VDC IK 2evoe
15AMP. jllAX.1 2W IS AMP!llAX.I
3VP-P RIPPLE
OIAXI
120 Cl'S RIPPLE
-tov o, I D2 ARE SILICON
250:1 ELECTRONIC RIPPLE FILTER-Supplo· FET CONTROLS R·C FILTER-Switching of fet

ments conventional LC filter after that has by pulse width modulated source varies cir·
roduced ripple to a value bolow 3V p•p, to cult resistance, thereby controlling corner fre-
reduco ripple eledronically to Y.!soth of that quoncy (frequency seledlvity) of R-C fllter. As
at input. Uses parallolod transistors to dissi- duty factor of. pulso source is varied from 1
pate hoot, Report gives theory of operation to 0 In circuit shown, affective resistance varios
and doslgn consideratlons.-Eledronlc Ripple from 10,000 ohms to inRnity.-L. L. Hamilton,
Filter, Dolco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., No. 28, Pulse-Train Duty Factor Controls RC Filter,
1965. Eledronlu, Aug. 4, 1969, p 93.
+15v 10k
O.OOlµf
3k
MPSAIO
IC ACTIVE LOW-PASS-Gives transfer func·
tlon of sin'gle•pole low-pass filter whoso pole 14
location can be controlled linearly by ex• 6 Vo' 4 y
tornal d-c voltage Ve. Can bo used as adap-
tive audio fiher or voltage-tunable low-pass MCl59SL
network. Gives ono full decado of control
in audio frequency rango by varying Ve be·
tween 0.5 and 5 V.-E. Renschler and D. -15v
Waist, Try the Monolithic Multiplier as a Ver-
satile A·C Design Tool, Electronics, June 8, 1lt
1970, p 100-105. YOFF
o.s ~Ve s s.o Vd·c

V1 (mail " 1v PK
-15¥
16k 160k
16k
O.OOlµf
E, 16k
0.11'1
Eo
O.OOlpf
8.2 k l.5k
l.5k
DUAL-OPAMP ACTIVE FILTER-Uso of dual IC transfer function. Article glvos design equa• second Is 1O, sa ampliflor Is compensated for
operational amplifler as active lllter takes tions. Componsating networks are added to gain of 10.-B. Welling, Active Filters: Tho
advantage of isolation botwoon ampliflors to both amplifiers to avoid Instability with dlf· Op Amp Saves Time and Money, Elodronlc1,
simplify calculations for obtaining desired ferent d-c gains. First-stage gain .is unity and Feb. 3, 1969, p 82--90.
FILTER CIRCUITS-ACTIVE 23'7
01 2N176
Q3 Rl
5K,2W
!!.- QI
UNFILTERED FILTERED
v,+ INPUT OUTPUT
lK, lW
~
- v2 ...v1 - TWIN-T ACTIVE FILTER-Circuit Is adjustod
lOOOllF
• 25V
1, ... 0 5V -Vb well into activo region by choice of resistor
values, to sorvo as active bandpass network. ELECTRONIC FILTER-Filtering action is com·
UNITY GAIN-Basic circuit fulfills stonclord Useful for wavo-shoplng, as when producing parable to that of 10,000-µF capacitor, re-
conclitlon1 for active very low frequency flltor, flute or tibia voices from square waves in ducing ripple in transistor powor supply cl-c
wherein V2 =
Vt oncl Input curront is zoro. electronic organ. Bandpass Is equivalent to output of 25 V to only a fow millivolts. Cur·
Zener cllode V2 serves only for blosing.-J. L. about 1 octave of frequency. Article gives rent rating is 0.5 A.-J. P. Shiolds, "Novel
Hagin, Active Fiiters, Electronlcs World, April nemogrom for selecting filter elements for any Electronic Circuits," H. W. Sams & Co., In·
1969, p 58-60. center frequoncy.-F. B. Moynorcl, Twin T's: dionapolis, Ind., 1968, p 8.
Designs & Applications, Electronics World,
Aug. 1968, p 35-37 and 64.
c ACTIVE ADJUSTABLE BANDPASS-Requires

only low-cost opomp and five cllscrate com-
O.OlµF
ponents. Values of Re from 1,100 to 406
ohms give canter frequency range of 1.6 to
. 2.4 kHz, without changing gain of 26 dB or
bandwidth of 260 Hz for 3 dB clown. Article
I
t
ei
3k eo
gives procedure for designing flltor for other
poramotors.-L. Robinson, Actlvo Bandpass
1 l Filter with Adjustable Center Frequency and

Constant Bandwith, EEE, Fob. 1968, p 124.
Cz
R2
V Rt C1
~--+.--
IC BANDPASS ALTER-Fairchild µ.A709 opomp

provides both gain and hoquency selectivity
without use of Inductors. Rx varies Q of cir· TONE SIG"IALING SYSTEM-Uses Burr-Brown
cuit indopenclently of cantor froquency doter• active bandpass Riter moclule to detect and
mined by valuos of R·C inductor-synthesizing Indicate presence of 560-Hz signal tone at
feedback elomants. Fiiter is useful for f-m 0.1 V rms. Proclslon rectlflor with gain of
recording in range from 1 to 1,000 Hz and 10 and time constant of 0.1 s converts de-
other applications wharo bulk and weight of sired a-c signal into d-c signal for compari-
Inductor would creato problems. For Q of son with reforenco voltoge. Relay or lamp
20, vohago gain ls 7. Article gives transfer Is octuatecl whenever d-c signal excoecls pre-
function equatlen.-J. F. Gifforcl and M. Mark- set input thre1hold.-Burr Brown Computer
0
kula, Linear IC'11 Part 5, Ins and Outs of Op Designed Active Filters, Burr-Brown Research
Amps, Electronics, Nov, 27, 1967, p 84-93. PDS-203A, 1968, p 10. ,
238 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MAN11 AL
SHARP CUTOFF-Three iclentical RC networks

and three inexpensive unity-gain transistars
-15v
servo as sharp-cutoff low fraqu11ncy filter
0
whose response can be shift11cl over wlcle

ranee by adjusting ganged resistors R. Plot
of output voltaea vs frequency Is thlrcl orcl11r
0
Butterworth curvo, maximally flat with 18-

dB-por-adave ralloff after cutoff frequency
determinecl by values of R ancl C.-P. Bilcl·
stain, Thircl-Orcler Active Filter Usos Three
Transistors, Electronict, Oct. 14, 1968, p 122.
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
BELCO 2N174 ll 111 IMALLLL I
FET-SWITCHED NOTCH FILTER-Notch fre-

..n.n.n.. quency of Twin·T fllter is acljustable from 30
...n..n..
PULSE
0-4~~.......-tl to 800 Hz by changing frequency of 2.S·µ•
input pulses from 10 to 200 kHz. Change in
GENERATOR duty cyclo of input pul101 chanees effective INPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
31.25VOG
ro1i1tanco of fet switchol In resistive arms of 5A>'P!MAXJ 28 VllC
fllter.-S. Summerhill, Electronically Tuned 3VPPR<PPU!Cro1Al(J•--'\.JV\.,....-+-----,
120CPS RIPPt.E ~~ 5AMP
Natch Filter uses FET as a Resistor, Electronic
Design, March 15, 1970, p 212 and 214.
f - - - - - - - - - - - - - ._ -11~ GROUN 60:1 ELECTRONIC RIPPLE FILTER-If conven-

tional LC filter hos rocluced power supply
I
ripple below 3 V p•p, this simple alactronic
I flltor will reduce this residual ripple to %0th
I of its value. Thus, if power supply has 60-
I mV p-p ripple Initially, ripple at output of
electronic filter will bo only about 1 mV p-p.
7 Report coven theory and design.-Elodronic
Ripple Filter, Delco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., No.
3 I 28, 1965.
,:r
I l1NPUT
i
I A2
1K
I
I
:9
I OUTPUT
J
·tsvo.----------
tOL---- _ - - - - - - - _J
OPTIMUM ACTIVE FILTER-IC version, pre- through 40 kHz, with any Q up to about
sented 01 example of dotallod design pro- 2,000, with no tendency to oscillate. Fre- 2Cl-MHZ BANDWIDTH-IC uses super-gain
cedures elven for 24 different active filter quency response curve corresponds to that of transistors in fallowor requiring 1G-nA bias
designs, uses biasing arrangement that mini• ideal R·L-C- flltar.-J. W. Mullaney, Adiva Fil- current and giving 30-µs slow.-Bandpass
mize1 1on1ltlvlty to thermal and supply volt• ters: Part II-Varying the Approach, Electronics, Filter (National Semiconductor ad), Eledronic
ago variations. Can be tunocl from d-c July 21, 1969, p e6-93. New1, June 8, 1970, p 11.
CHAPTER 29
Filter Circuits-Passive
l!>OnF'
lnputo--1
COMBINATION LOW·PASS HIGH-PASS AUDIO

FILTER-High-pats soloctor switch (for copaci•
tors) givos cholco of 11, 9, 4.5, and 3.2 kHz
for cutoff frequency. low-pass switch (for
divider resistors) gives choico of 40, 80, 160,
and 720 Hz for lowor cutoff frequency.
Unity.gain buffer in sorlos with RC networks
provents lntoraction between flltors.-"Transis-
tor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mullard Ltd.,
London, 1969, p 136.
FREQUENCY
METER
VOLTAGE- FILTER
CONTROLLED 1--~'-------------+t UNDER TEST
OSCILLATOR (LOW PASSI
1----------------.
r- ----------, 47k I A B
r------------ -,
47k 4n I
1 47k
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I
I
I I I 47k -= I
LN~~l:!!!E_!!'.~~--------.J
I - 47k I
I I
L!~l,!.1 !! ..!!_E_!.E~OR _ _ _ _ _ _ .J MEASURING FILTER CUTOFF-Three NEXUS
SQ·1OA lntogratod circuits aro connectod as
shown to standard vco and frequency motor,
for automatically and quickly measuring cut·
off valuo of a low-pass filter. When differ-
onco betwoen output and input levels of flltor
falls off to a specified voluo (usually 3 dB),
frequency of vco equals cutoff valuo of filter
and Is measured with motor. To test high-
pass fllton, positive and ne9ative detectors
are rovorsod. All diodes are 1N459A.-J. M.
Kasson, Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Measures
Filter Cutoff, Electronics, June 26, 1967, p 110.
239
+v PULL-UP RESISTOR
FOR HIGHER NEGATIVE
R VOLTAGES
Dz
NEGATIVE BIAS SUPPLY-Provides -2.4 V

for transistor moro economically than by
placing extra transformer winding and cir·
cuitry in regular power supply. First throo
about 33 MHz. Fourth goto applies resulting
squaro wavo to capacitor-diode circuits for
fllloring and roctlflcatlon.-J. Kotas, IC Os·
. c,I
IN4153
-1
Eo RL
gates in IC quad NAND gate are connoctod In

loop to form astablo mvbr that oscillotes at
cillation Sots Up a Mini-Sized Blas Supply,
Elecrronits, July 6, 1970, p 76. -:- -:- +! -;-
~----------------~
I Ll I TO: TO SENDER OR RECEIVER
: mn : 75-0HM CABLE
BEING EQUALIZED
(RESISTANCE> IOK OHMS
CAPACITANCE<IOOpfl
I= C21~1
0
CFEMALEI (MALEI
I Cl ° 75
±5%
TO SET .,__ _~..,_...,..'TO LINE
I
39
01•.r OlaE I
C3r·.WI - C4 I ·W/1 Ll, l2 • 20 TURNS
~o~-+-~......\JJJJ ~ I I
0
116 ENAMEL WIRE
314" DIA.
l2 I
~-------~--~---~
1000 2000
FT FT 500
..,. GROUND CWJ

POWER·LINE INTERFERENCE FILTER-Usod In 75·0HM COAX EQUALIZER-Passive filter net-
a·c line to tv or radio rocelvor to suppress work compensates for amplitude attenuation
interference travoling over power line from and phase retardation at video froquoncios
nearby fluorescent lamp, electronic mixer, noon In four different lengths of cable. When used
sign, or other sourco of rfl. Metal housing at both ands, provides 5 dB gain at 5 kHz and
of filter should bo grounded. For tv sot, slight loss below 200 kHz. If used only at
wind coils with No. 14 enamel wire. Use one end, other end must ba terminated in re·
line cord at lino side, and outlet for set.-J. sislance within 25% of 75-ohm nominal cable
P. Shields, "Novel Electronic Circuits," H. W.. impodanco.-A. H. Turner, Equalizer for 75-
Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1968, p 59. 0hm Cables Reduces Phase Retardation, Elec-
tronic Design, March 30, 1964, p 71.
52.5mh
Z>>570
570
900 SEPARATED IN
PHASE
jE:"nwt+8+90°
Z»
G
220mh 1170
_ PHASE SPLITIER-Comblnos simple unipola all-

pass network with duopole flltor to give out•
puts separated by 90 dog, operating from 1
E sin wl +9 to 3 lcHz, with toloranco of 5 dog, Article
570 RESOLVER\ gives design equations for each typo of filter
and proceduros for combining them for use
with two-phase resolvers, single-sideband
systems, and phase modulation applications.
-C. C. Routh, All-Pass Fillers Accurately Split
tho Phaso, Electronic Design, Jan. 18, 1965, p
220mh 38-43.
FILTER CIRCUITS-PASSIVE 241
l>.7741 o. 7511 3.873

(0.1232pf) (o.119Sf1F) (0.616' f1F)
3.s~1
I
o---f
i
I
15.40
(2.A52pF)
I (0.5668 pf)
p2
u11 1 (20000)
I 0.6791 1.226.
I (A32mH) (780mH)
SUPPRESSING 60-HZ PICKUP-Simple LC fllter

•
improvos performance of sensitivo d-c am•
pliRers for microvolt d-c signals in tho pros- HIGH-PASS RLC-Provldes attonuation of 52 gives dosign procodure.-P. Allemandou,
enco of 60-Hz powor-llne pickup up to 10 V. dB below 24S Hz and only 0.044 dB above Transfer Fundions of RLC Filters, IEEE Trans-
-R. L. Nuttall and D. C. Ginnings, Is 60.Cycle SOO Hz when inserted betweon voltage gen. actions on Circuit Theory, Doc. 1968, p 483-
Pickup Degrading tho Performance of your orator and 2,000-ohm resistance. Artlclo 48S.
DC Amplifiers? Electronic Design, Dec. 20,
1965, p 34-3S.
Ila
L NINTH-ORDER LOW-PASS-When prodistortod Tuttle, Slmpllfled Procedures for Approximo•

for average dissipation factor of O.OOS, pass- tion and Predistortion in Filter Synthesis by
band loss varies betwoon S.23 and S.S dB over Digital Computer, IEEE Transadions on Circuit
passband of 0 to 1.0 frequencles.-W. N. Theory, Doc. 1968, p 488-492.
SUPPRESSING SCR AND TRIAC RFl-Single L·C
low-pass filter having resonant frequency of
50 kHz gives about 40 dB of noise suppros•
sion at low end of broadcast band, for sup-
prossing conducted rfl generated oach time
triac T2 (or sc~) Rros In resistive circuit such .1148
as lamp dimmer. At each firing, occurring
120 times per second with full-wave phase
control, load current jumps from zoro In frac·
tion of microsecond and generates almost 2.S78
inftnlte spectrum of energy. For loads be-
tween 150 and 1,000 W, L can be 100 µHand
C 0.1 µF.-J. H. Galloway, RF Filter Consld· COMPUTER-DESIGNED BANDPASS-Values cantor frequoncy.-W. N. Tuttle, Slmplifled
orations for Triac and SCR Circuits, General shown oro for sixth•ordor symmetrical band· Procedures for Approximation and Predlstor·
Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 201.19, 1966. poss filter predistortod for averago dlsslpa· lion in Filter Synthesis by Digital Computer,
tion factor of 0.02. Attenuation is 7.4S dB IEEE Transactions on Circuit Theory, Dec. 1968,
for bandwidth of 10% above and 9% below p 488-492.
82 T2
G·E IN1697 +350VDC + 330 voe + 290 voe
;m1 650 121

120V ·TRIAC Tl 200.n. 7h 850,tl
60~ VRMS
8 25W 116fi 6W
@
I 385VOe
=
TH YR ECTOR 4 G·E IN1697
GE·Xl4
+
121
13011f
DAMPED R·f FILTER-Suppresses broadcast•
band conducted rfl created by step-function SILICON RECTIFIERS FOR TUBES-Givos proce- will give about 10% higher output voltage,
adion of triac. Upper resistor and capacitor dures for substituting silicon rectiRers for which Is usually not objectionable. To re-
provide damping required for proper opera• vacuum, gas, or mercury redifier tubo. Ar· duce supply voltage, place resistor (around
tion under light load conditions, as for 60-W rangement shown Is for SU4GB. Only other 200 ohms at 25 W) In sorles with each pair
lamp dlmmer.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, change is addition of thyroctor across primary of roctiflers.-"Hobby Manual," General Elec·
General Electric, 1967, p 334-335. to absorb llno transients. Silicon rectifiers Irie, Owonsboro, Ky., 1965, p 192.
10-MHZ FIVE-CRYSTAL NARROW·BAND-

Bandwidth for 3 dB dawn is 20 kHz, using
CD AT-cut crystals and autotronsformors having
0 10-µH indudance, Q of 150, and unity cou•
a>
q piing. Artlclo gives deiign oquatlons for
Chobyshev•type response and I-dB possband
ripplo.-D. S. Humpherys, Network Synthesis
of Narrow-Band Crystal Filters, Electro-Tech·
nology, Nov. 1965, p 36-43.
20.n ZENER REPLACES CAPACITOR-Use of zener in

0--.oe--/W\AIW'------o+ place of output capacitor In smoothing filter
5Dc.'s roctifh~r
gives smoothing comparablo to that of 1,000-
vvv 7.SV µF capacitor. Load current may vary from 0
16Yrms nominot to 300 mA.-Zener Diodes and Their Applica•
tions, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind·
hoven, The Netherlands, No. 17, 1966.
I~
lO·MHZ CRYSTAL FILTER-Design Is bosed on formations. Bandwidth Is 20 kHz for 3 dB Humpherys, Network Synthosis of Narrow•
left-half-plane roAoctlon zeros, with hybrid down, using AT-cut crystals and autotrans• Band Crystal Filters, Eledro·Toclinology, Nov.
transformers at each end for impedance transformers having 10.µH lnductance.-D. S. 1965, p 36-43.
IOOmh IOmh
1 - - - . . , . - - - Esin wt +8
126 1
.,,.... ...
~:::)
Q. Q.
I 1-
0;:,
...
:.: 0
IOOmh IOmh
1---~.----E sin wt +8
t90°
397
IOOmh IOmh
oquations, phase rosponse graphs, and logical
CASCADED PHASE-SPUmR-Wideband opor• Outpuh are soparated by 90 dog, as required design procedures.-C. C. Routh, All-Pass Fil-
atien from 1 te 100 lcHz is ebtoined by cas- for use with resolvers, ssb systems, and phase ters Accurately Split tho Phase, Eledronfc
cading all•pass Alters in both channels. modulation systems. Artlclo gives design Design, Jan. 18, 1965, p 38-43.
FILTER CIRCUITS-PASSIVE 243
,.:-o---a1------------------------------_,--+45ov;l60mo
)....-0---------'Y"'lv~,Y'------------------t
: 20-150 t
SECTION I
+ 20-150 I
6-----------------------------------------t-+300v;200mo
T, + 50-150 t
SECTION 2
,--o-----------'----------------------------------------------------.,....--+12ov 0 12oma
l
+ 100-150
t
SECTION 3
.___ _ _ _ _ __.__ _ _....,__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-+---COMMON__l_t
270k 270k
+ 16-450 SECTION 4
!
9
10
r-------~~~~~~~-------------------------------r--300v; 2mo~
~Vs-+j 0.1-600 SECTION 5
'--'liVll--........Y'IJr...--4--'\M_.--.l\lll'v-------------o-- -800 v; 0.1 mo

!
ALL DIODES• INl763 transformer Tl (not shown) connects to a-c ceduros for calculating and winding sections
FIVE D·C OUTPUTS WITH ONE CHOKE- line, and secondary windings Tl supply re- of choke to give desired d·c output voltages
Woight·roducing design requires only ono quired a-c voltages for tho five choke-Input and current.-A. G. Lloyd, Choking Up On LC
multiple-winding choko. Primary winding of rectifier sections. Article gives detailed pro• Filters, Electronic•, Aug. 21, 1967, p 93-97.
NOTE: Jo locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use the Index at the back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPT·ER 30
Flash Circuits
111110 OHMS aw
PC I
GE-X6 R2
1.2 K
~
;:
I
I
I JOO YDC
+ I SOUllCE C1 +
.=-&v I
Cl20µf. I 1000,,, -
I
...&..
.:::.
LASCR SLAVE FlASH-Dovoloped for multiplo-

PHOTOCEl.1-CONTROlLED FLASH-Can be used
light-source hlgh·speed photogrophy. Uses
as forgot for light gun, to give flosh each
standard flash gun, modified to uso loser in
time light sourco gun is accurotoly aimed.
0
place of camera contacts or trip switch.
Wiii flash continuously for steody light.
Response ls fow ms, giving perfect sync b..
Sensitivity control should be adjusted until
twoen mostor and slave. For high ambient
floshing lusts stops whon not illuminated by
light lovols that could trip laser, l·H choke
desired light source.-"Hobby Manuo~" Gen·
l1 is added to servo as low Impedance to
oral Eloctric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 78.
ambient light but high impedance to ftash.-
E. K. Hawaii, Tho light Activated SCR, Gan•
oral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.34, 1965.
TRIGGER CIRCUIT WATERCOOLED

.-----------, FLASH TUBE
MULTISECTION PULSE
+400-1000
voe
I 101<
1
"' 1
1
j ,--------1
I
FORM I NG NETWORK
La I
22M
I I I
I I I I DC HIGH
VOLTAGE
+20-30
voe o--f"i
1I 111r I
I
c, I
I
POWER
SUPPLY
I I
I I _ I
I L _____ _: __ _J
I EG8G '::" La= INDUCTANCE PER SECTION
I TR-149 I Ca• CAPACITANCE PER SECTION
LT• TOTAL INDUCTANCE OF NETWORK
L _________ J CT• TOTAL CAPACITANCE OF NETWORK
1.8 to 3 kV d-c depending on ftoshtubo. Can
EXTERNAL TRIGGERING OF WATER°COOLED current (for KN-4) for primary of trigger trans- be usod for optical pumping of high..norgy
FLASHTUBE-Applicatlon of 20 to 30 V d-c to former, to trigger water-cooled ftashtubo by losors, photography, and other applications
trigger circuit using Krytron four..loment gas- applying 25 to 30 kV to external olectrode. requiring high.. norgy sources.-Linoar Wate,..
flllod cold-cathode switch tube gonoratos 10- Operating voltago of ftoshtube, appllod Cooled Xenon flashtubes, EG&G, Boston,
µs pulso at 5,000 V d-c and 2,500 A poak through pulse.forming network, ranges from Mass., No. 1004, 1968.
244
FLASH CIRCUITS 245
+ A·C FLASHTUBE SUPPLY-Circuit is typical of

NE·2
most small and low-cost olodronic photeflash
+ Cl + C2 R2 units, in which shutter of camera closes firing
525p.F 525.,f L5 MEG or triggering circuit that discharges capacitor
475V 475V 112 W
through stop-up transfarmor to produce single
high-vohago pulse that ignites flashtube.
Ono serious drawback is that discharge of C4
may soon burn out shutter contads and give
52 user harmless but unploasant shock that may
cause him to drop expensive camora.-l. E.
Greenlee, SCR Trigger for Your Photoftash,
RI
Radlo·Electronics, Nov. 1965, p 4G-41.
117VAC 2704 IOW
DI
LOW.COST STROBE-Uses ujt relaxation oscil-

lator as cloclc for driving high-voltage trigger
and xenon flashtubo discharge circuit, with
conventional 300-V voltage-doubling power
supply. Switch S1 gives choice of throe flash
rangos: 2·12 Hz, 8-60 Hz, and 4400 Hz. R7
adjusts flash rate within each range.
Article gives construction details, calibration
procoduro, and suggestions for use.-S. Ten-
non, Ponnyplnchor's Stroboscope, Elementary
Eloc1ronic1, Mar.-Apr. 1970, p 29-33 and 99. SI LO 2•1ZHI
POSITIONS MEO &•&OHi
HI 40-;,ooH1
-,-1
l12v
I
I
~---
50-JOULE FLASH-Gives 120 flashes from 0.5
A·hr 12·V rochorgeablo nickel-cadmium bat·
v
tory. Capacitor charging time varies from 8

s for fully charged battery to 16 s after 120
flashos. Battory drives two-transistor inverter
oporatlng at about 1.5 kHz, with osclllation Closing camera flash contacts 52 discharges Kodachrome II. Report 9ivos design equa•
accomplished by saturating transformer. 0.25-µF capacitor through pulso transformer, tlons and transformer winding data.-A 50.
Secondary voltage Is rectified for charging and resulting hlgh-volta90 pulse makos CD14 Joulo Photographic Flash Unit Using Siiicon
&00..uF capacitor to about 400 V. Noon then flash unit turn on sa lar90 capacitor dis- Transistars, Ferranti ltd., Oldham, Lanes.,
glows to Indicate that unit Is ready for use. charges through it. Guido number Is 40 for England, Na. 21, 1965.
/
246 ELEOTB.ONIO OIB.OUITS MANUAL
v
----1.11111------0
9·25
STROBELIGHT SLAVE-Serves as switch far

triggering additional electronic strobe without
01 using intorconnoding wires. Unaffected by
MRD-300 ambient light. Will trigger reliably up to
100mH about 20 ft from master strobe. Range can
INPUT TO STROBE be increased by using lens or parabolic re•
RFC
FLASH UNIT
flector to concentrate light on phototranslstor.
-"Somicondudor Power Circuits Hondboolc,"
R1
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-42.
1.2 k 02
2N4216
+
ca, THRU CR5

IN538
FLASH-ACTUATED SWITCH-Random flash of lASCR

l9B
light fires laser, turning on load. Cl and C2
thon bogln discharging. Setllng of R3 doter•
mines how Ions flash-actuated switch romalns
on. Switch can turn on at any phase angle,
but will turn off only at current zero, so rfl Is
lOAD UP
nogligible.-L. M. Hertz, Solid State Lamps- 120V 60Hz TO
Part II, General Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 25 WATTS
3-0121, 1970, p 19.
One of three lamp houses

r----- ----------~----
I
I
Flash I
lamp I
EG&G
FX·ll3C·l I
4 capacitors, I
..,.__ _ _ _R_ed~---- each 2501.1F. 250Vdc I
Sprague type 6010 I
View from 045495
pin side
rPM6PLR
. ; : -3-resistors,
---- --------------------~
---------------- ----,
PM6PLS PM6H I
I On each 2 kQ, 25 W with hood
1
I B1 -soo v
Braun
power 3 capacitors.
each 0.5 itF.
plug 400 v
to Braun 1---""'-""'°B3
F-800
560k'2
0.5 w
-275 v
Winchester I
connectors
0.01 itf Winchester
PM6SLS withl 100 v I connectors
PM6H hood 1 -10 v
Neon lamp I Sync. llPM6SLRN
(one of three)
Leecraft lOitF
No. 2300 I
I 15 v
I 1 P.B. II
Jones
I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .JI
_S302AB
No.
L------------
THREE-LAMP STROBE FOR COLOR-Provides '::' Control box per lamp with 28-deg spread.-H. E. Edger•
65-µs flashes, as required for photographing ton, V. E. MacRoborts, and M. Khanna, Im•
wing tips of hummingbirds In color without Stored onorgy Is 31 joules per lamp, with provements in Electronics for Nature Photog-
blur. Circuit is powered by Braun FBOO unit, light output of 1,500 beam candela seconds raphy, IEEE Spectrum, July 1969, p B9-94.
FLASH CIRCUITS 24'7
R (LIMITING RESISTOR)
FX-41
FLASHTUBE
c
DC (MAIN
SUPPLY DISCHARGE _
CAPACITOR)
TIME MARKS ON FILM-Miniature xenon flash·

tube produces 3.5-µs flash for exposing pho·
tographlc paper or film. Can be externally --.~~--11--~~-e1--~~~-oo +
triggered, or solf·tlashed by applying voltage EG6G
200·300
above 2 kV across main electrode. D-c sup• TR-132A
VOLTS DC
ply is 1,400 V and capacitor is 0.5 µF.-FX-41 INPUT
Miniature Xenon Flashtube, EG&G, Boston,
Mass., No. 1007°1, 1968. TRIGGER CIRCUIT
RI
2okn MEASURING FLASH ENERGY-With S2 open,
Philips DOA42 IC opamp at loft measures
photocell currant in four ranges, keeping volt·
ago across photocell lower than a few milll·
volts so relationship botwoon currant flow and
tight Intensity Is linoar. To measuro total
light oner9y, as from flash lamps, S2 is closed
and 53 open, for integrating output of first
ampllfler. Supply voltages aro +15 and
-15 V.-J. Ph. Korthals Altos, Measuroment
of Light Intensity, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No. 85.
to
meter
ov
1021
/SN4
VI
R5
STROBOSCOPE-Audio oscillator QI generatos

variable-frequency output whoso frequency is
determined by settings of Rl and R2. Tl 11 GllAs TUNNEL DIODE
power transformer used in reverso, with 6.3-V
secondary in asclllator circuit, so stop-up ratio
of oscillator output is about 18.5:1. Diodes
rectify stepped-up voltage to charge Cl to
point whore It fires Strobotron Vl. Article
gives construction details. Used for studying TIMING DURATION OF LIGHT PULSES-Uses pulse widths is 1 µs to 1 s. Values are: Cl
rotating objects, by adjusting flash rate until LS400 npn planar silicon photocell for sens- 100 µF Mylar1 Rl 4.7K1 R2 1K1 R3 l.5K1 R4
motion appear• to bo atoppocl.-S. Daniola, ing flash of light. Duration of flash In· sec- 3.6K1 RS 500.-Preforred Somlconducto,. and
Stop Light Stroboscope, Science and Electron• onds is oqual to one-tenth of reading of vtvm Components, Texas Instruments, Dallas, Texas,
Ml In volts. Range of moasurable light CC101, 1968, p 27402.
ics, Jan. 1970, p 37-39.
R 1 810 OHMS '/:#
R2
"T' IM
I
I UTC NO. PF7
I Tl +
: 300YDC Cl +
I SOURCE
I I00011F
_._
I
G-E
R3 FT-106
I.BM
LIGHT-TRIGGERED ONE-SHOT-Ujt triggers

about 0.6 s after pulse of light turns on typo
R4 LBF laser. If pulse of light is then ended,
II
LI
56K
laser turns off. If light is still on, ujt oper•
atos as relaxation oscillator but will turn
lhy
laser off the first time it fires after light is
removed. High resistance of dork laser then
LASCR SLAVE FLASH-With 51 closed, Cl reverse-biases loser for positive turnoff. Re- provonts ujt from oscilloting.-"SCR Manual,"
charges to 300 V and C2 choreas to 200 V. sponse tlmo ls few mlcrosoc, giving porfoct 4th Edition, Gonoral Electric, 1967, p 297.
When master flashgun Is fired by contact$ on master-slave sync. Choke l1 provonts trig•
camera, its light output tri9gors light-acti- 9erin9 by high ambient light.-"SCR Man•
vatod scr, which thon discharges C2 into ual," 4th Edition, Genoral Electric, 1967, p
primary of Tl to trigger slave and discharge 299-300.
Cl. Resonant action between C2 and Tl
FLASH TUBE FA-104, ETC.
SCR-TRIGGERED PHOTOFlASH-lmprovod cir· NE-2

RIO
cuit usos scr to give more reliable triggering Cl~+ + 470K
0
of flashtubo wltho~t discharging C4 through OFF IW
shutter contacts. Maximum cunent through Sl~ C2
R9 475V
contacts is less than t mA, which practically 2.2MEG
eliminates pitting. Voltmeter indicates actual FUSE IW TRIGGER
voltage across storage capacitors with far IA RS TRANS
I MEG T2
greater accuracy than neon flasher. Article IW
gives construction details.-L. E. Greenlee, SCR R7
Tri99er for Your Photoflash, Radio-Eledronics, IMEG
IW
Nov. 1965, p 4G-41.
..--~------.....i.---+:R0-6-..;.;;.;.;....___,,]C~
1001( l/2W _
@
IN4725
' II +STROBE
LIGHT 2N324
REGULATING PHOTOFLASH SUPPLY-Transis-
tor and relay keep electrolytic capacitor volt·
ago at correct charging level of 300 V, to
prevent overcharging that shortens capacitor
life. When voltage drops to about 290 V, re•
lay drops out and charging starts again.-T.
lamb, Transistor and Relay Regulate High
+12Y d·c Voltages, Electronics, July 22, 1968, p 70.
FLASH CIRCUITS 249
SIMPLE SCR PHOTOFLASH-Closing S1 dis-

chargas C2 through primary of trigger trans•
former when scr flras, to produco required
high voltage across secondary for firing pho- R2 R4
IOK IM
tographic flashtube.-Electronlc Photoflash,
Popular Electronics, April 1970, p 92 •
..:.. 20V
117VAC
•zooo '• • •coo ..

FLASH-DURATION SENSOR-With no light, scs 2'0lh9
conducts. When flash of llght turns on laser,

scs goes off and 4-µF capacitor is charged.
After about 0.6 s, scs turns on. If laser is Cfa ~Pl'll
now dark, it goos off. If flash lasts longer THYRATRON TRIGGER-2021 thyratron trig·
than 0.6 s, laser remains In conducting state. gers EG&G flashtube when input trigger is
-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, Genoral Electric, applied to control grid. 20.meg resistor in
1967, p 298. power supply lead ensures that bath flashtube
and thyrotron are cut off after flring.-D. N.
Bailoy ond D. M. Hercules, Flosh Photolysis-A
Technique for Studying Fast Reactions, Journal
of Chemical Education, Feb. 1965.
ov
®
5WI ""05W2
+1211 ARE GANGEO
®SW2
E060
Vl9
470
kn
zs120
.. 21170<'
25120 vre
ZS 120 •• t• •.
x2~ Xii!"
"'MJuo;TEO Clll Z!
zs120 AWMINIUM HEAT SINK
ov
WIDE-RANGE PORTABLE STROBE-Switch gives which produces 4-kV pulse at transformer sa~ winding· dato for all transformers.-A Wide
choice of flvo repetition rotes per second: 1-5, ondory. Blocking oscillator VT1 also drives Ronge Stroboscope Using Silicon Transistors,
3-15, 10-50, 30-150, 150-SOO. Draws maxi· VT6 for switching off inverter VT7°VT8, to pre· Ferronti ltd., Oldham, lanes., England, No. 27,
mum of 1.5 A from 12-V bottery. Timing vont salf-retriggering of flash tube before gas 1964.
circuit VT1-VT4 drives flash tube trigger VT5 d11ionizos on fastoll range. Report gives
CHAPTER 31
Flasher Circuits
MULTIVIBRATOR LAMP AMPLIFIER S
ONCE·PER·SECOND FLASHER-Will handle

lamps up to 1 A at 12 V. ldoal for port•
LAMPl
TYPE
able use. Lamp flashes at frequency of mvbr
2N441 - using pair of 2N217 transistors. Values: Cl
25 µF; C2 100 µF; lamp 12 V al 1 A; Rl,
-=12V R4 2K; R2, R3 100K; RS 120.-''Transislor
+
Manua~" RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC-13, p 535.
+ - St
Rl
lOM
MOSFET FLASHER-Combination of npn tran•
sistor and p-channol mosfot 9lvos extremely
long duty cycles for flasher, roducin9 average
power di11ipation and increasing battery life. Q2 9V
2N2102 ":"or
Time constant Is dotorminod by Cl, RI, and 12V
R3. If common jundion of these three timing
components is connected to photocell, flasher
will aparate only whon photocell is dark.-
C. R. Parkins, "Application of MOSFET Devices R3
lM LAMP
to Electronic Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach, #1850
Cal., 1968, p 45.
:100.J•
ICC\ '°"' 0$
40.1'• 2N'3<0
1!0 I~ llXI• SI
C.1~
0'
01 2N"39'8 •28V
:NU01 $1
Al
FRIE.RUll!UMG
MUL TIYIBAATOA ::.. ....
01 1.5.lO•
10 12
4
. .
!,.•.,•••---••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••oa••••••.J
RI
~
,,..
110 LI L2 LJ u
NO, 1683
~,,, C.I 1)0 ICC• ••• t...: '
['-'" iN4001 ·1'
_.J :1
LONG·LIFE FLASHER-Circuit sonsos load cur· Circuit automatically rosels whon defects aro 1.-R. A. Phillips, Lamp Flasher Outwits
rent, withholding full load current until lamp corrected. Maximum pulse current Is limited Shorts and Surges, EON, Feb. I, 1970, p 54-
filaments are warm or shorts are romoved. to about 20 A by R2. Normal flashing cycle Is 55.
250
FLASHER CIRCUITS 251
1-KW BLINKER-Ujt 01 operates as relaxation

oscillator at frequency determinod by Rl, Rl
which may be potentiometer. Each ult out·
put pulse enorgizes relay through amplifler RELAY
stage 02, to apply power to lamp through 2.5K COIL
relay contads. Gives about one flash per
second with values shown.-J. P. Shields,
"Novel Electronic Circuits," H. W. Sams & Co., Cl 1.0
K • PanER BRUllf IELD lMs-2500 OR EQUIV
R4
l.2K SI
1-
8-:-
• 6V
AUTO BREAKDOWN FLASHER-Will flash 6-V

II automotive lamp to full brilliance for use as
#1850 warning light when breakdown occurs on
LAMP turnpike. Operates from 6-V lantorn battery.
Uses relaxation oscillator, in which 01 is
2N170, 02 Is 2N155, Cl is 50 µF, and Rl is
47K.-High Powered Flasher, Elementary Elec•
BICYCLE FLASHER-Two-stage diract-coupled
Ironies, Jan.-Feb. 1968, p 14.
flasher is connected as froe-runnlng mvbr op·
orating from 600.V dry-cell pack. Can road·
ily be mounted on bicycle for night safety.
Cl
Rl controls both duration of flash and Inter- RI 15V
val between flashes. Can also be used for 100 3.t:> f
idontlfying car at night in Iorgo parking lot,
or identifying house for guests arriving after
dark.-"Hobby Manual," General Electric, QI 02
Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 78. 2N438A 2N565
TINY FLASHER-No. 47 lamp at Pl flashes

about once a second. Increase size of Cl to
get brighter flash.-"A Modern Transistor
Workbook," Radio Shack, Boston, Mass., 1965, Bl
p 64. R3 6V
0.82 MEG
SI o-=tll~
Tl-120: 12.6 STEPDOWN

TRIAC 1-TRIAC 2:GESC45B FOR
IKW LOAD
: GE SC408 FOR
600W LOAD Tl
CRl-CR4: GE Al3 F 120
CR5,CR6: GE I N4009 v
AC
QI : GE 2N2646 UJT
02,03: GE 2N3416
Cl: 500p.F25V
ELECTROLYTIC
C2:.2p.F
C3,C4:.o5,.F BASIC A·C TWO-LAMP FLASHER-Free-running
RI' !16A2W RI
R2' 2MEG TRIMMER
ult oscillator 01 triggors Olp-flop 02·03 that
R3: IMEG alternatoly fires two triacs eoch capable of
R4: 1000 handling 1-kW lamp load. For on-off flashing
R5,R6•330 of one lamp, omit second triac and make
R7, RS, R9: 6800
RIO, Rll, R12,Rl:S•IOK connection as indicatedt A-c flasher 11 n:iore
popular than d-c version when handling hun•
dreds of watts of powor. R2 dotormines fre-
quency of 01. Synchronization of flashing
with 01 minimizes rfl.-A. A. Adam, Flashers,
Ring Counters and Chasers, General Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.48, 1966, p 2.
•lfOJ
MERCURY RELAY
l'IEST[Rll £l£CTRIC
Pl
6X Z75C Al #312
47K NC 1.5 k R6
12 ...
+
-=- 24 v A
CAPAC ITV: 2A C3
VI 02
2N4441 2µF
!AMPS: HPN·21-l
01 03
1N971A 2N4441
27 v
Cl
RELAY CONTROL FOR 3-HZ FLASHER-Neon·
O.SµF
lamp mvbr is here used ta keep mercury relay C4
do-energized five times longer than it is ener· 10 nF
gized, to give flash rate of 3 Hz for lomp
connected to relay cantacts.-W. G. Miller,
"Using and Understanding Miniature Neon HIGH·RELIABILITY FLASHER-Basic flip-flop is along with 40% saving in power over maxi·
Lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., modified sa only one scr can came on at any mum duty cycle. Developed far boats, air·
1969, p 65. time, to prevent circuit latchup. Duration of craft, and emergency vehicles.-"Semiconduc-
flash is adjustable from 10% to 50% af duty tor Power Circuits Handbook.'' Motorola,
cycle: about 30% gives maximum visibility Pheonix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-35.
- INCREASE
FLASHING RATE
LOAO
240W llAX.
Re
22000
l1
NE·83
•
K02103
C2
50,.F
LOAD VOLTS ·DC Rs
CURRENT 15 47000
N0CUAR£NT
240·W WITH O.S-S FLASHES-RI adjusts Inter• and with 1-s OFF time. With buzzer as load,
vals between flashes having fixed duration. can sorve as motronome.-"Silicon Controlled
for warning signals, typical adjustment Is 40 Rectifier Experimonter's Manual," RCA, Harri-
flashes per minute, each lasting about 0.5 s son, N.J., 1967, p 69.
INCREASE
FLASHING RATE
r
LOAD cw
240W MAX.
240-W FLASHER-Time of each ON pulse is

fixed at about 0.5 s, and duration of OFF time
is adjustable with RI to provide desired
number of flashes per minute. Can be used
for Christmas-tree lights, advertising signs,
warning signals, or for driving alarm bell
having clapper hitting gong. Values: c1; C2
50 µF: diodes SK3016; Fl 3A: 11 NE·83; QI
SK3005; Q2 SK3020; RI IOK; R2 3K; R3, R4
Cz _ R& 2.2K: RS 680; R6 47K; R7 4.7K; RS 22K; R9
150; SCRI KD2100.-"Hobby Circuits Manual,"
RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 159.
R2 DAYLIGHT-OFF FLASHER FOR BUOYS-Photo·

47K
SCRI oloctric switch turns on 6-V single-lamp scr
GE-XS flasher at night and shuts it off at dawn, to
conserve battery power and lamp light. For
RI use in Isolated locations at which a-c line
2.2K power is not available. Gives about 12
6V + flashes per minute. Mount photocell to re•
+ ceive as much light from flashing lamp as
Bl = Cl
IOOpf
possible without lnterforing with visibility of
lamp, so flashes lower resistance of photocell,
6VOC Uses flasher-type lamp having built-In bime-
+--- -- -- - - --- II tallic switch that opens when lamp hoots up
+--- - - - -- --- (1 or 2 s) and closes again after 0.5 s of lamp
cooling.-"Hobby Manual," General Eledric,
RI
l·KW DAYLIGHT.CONTROLLED FLASHER-Op- CR3 IOI< CRI
GE-X4 GE-X4
erates from a-c line, for uso as warning light
on tower, pier, or construction hazard, as R2 R3
well as for advertising signs. Photocoll 33K IMEG.0.
starts flasher at sunset and turns it off at
dawn.-"Hobby Manual," Genoral Electric,
CR 4 CR2
GE-X4 GE-X4
II
1000 WATT
LAMP OR
OTHER
LOAD
OPTIONAL REMOTE
CONTROL CIRCUIT
+ ''OFF"
TIME
RB RIO soc
270
A13F
250
R4 LOAD
750K 04
4
28 vo.c. DI A13F
02 CI06F
C4
CI06F
A13F SCRI SCR2
Cl
0.47
05
0..( FLASHER-Flashes single battery-powered

lamp at adjustable on ond off times, for
automotive or portoble trofllc hazord worn• rent is within Its roting, but SCR1 can ~bo tr.Siapplied.-A. A. Adam, Solid-State Flosh·
ings. Uses capocltor-commutatod scr flip· lower roting. Network R9·C3·05 Insures thot ors for light Displays, Electronics World, Aug.
flop. SCR2 should be solected so lamp cur• only SCR1 will be turned on when power is 1967, p 83-84.
RI R9
+ I MEG .n. R7
12V 6801\
Bl
.=.. PERIOD IOOJl.
ADJUST CR3
R6
IN1692 47K
R5 81
47K~
E o o
B2 CR2
IN1692 RB
E IK
QI Cl
GE-XIO 15 TO 201& f AT
C2 350 VOLTS AC
.22p. f
150V
+ II
R4 GE N0.1125 LAMP RIO
C3 112 V, 3Al 22on
IOJLf 471\
25V
GND R3 40-W 12·V FLASHER-RI controls flash rate

47K to give up to 60 flashos per minute, with
photoelectric daylight control and independent
SYMMETRY conttol by R2 of on and off times.-"Hobby
ADJUST Manual," General Eledrlc, Owensboro, Ky.,
196S, p 86.
+ 12V
3.3K
BARRICADE FlASHER-Uses two scr's to drive
single lamp at flash rote adiustablo by R3 R3
in range of 36 to 160 fleshes per minute. 250K QI
Circuit is self-starting when power from 12-V GE 2N2646
battery is applied, and operates reliably even SCR2
for fluduating (noisy) battery supplies. Cl06Y TYPE I
Cl ION HEATSINK)
May also be used in autos and boats.-D. R.
4 µ.F/15V C3
Grafham, Using Low Current SCR's, Goi:ieral
.01 µ.F
Eledric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.19, 1967, p
38. NOTE: ALL RESISTORS 1/2 WATT
GE
11'1073
LAMP
SCRI
GECI06Y
V3
LNE5l
I NOTE: ALL RESISTORS 112 WATT
12-~ SCRJUJT . LOW-POWER FLASHER-Pro- NEON SEQUENTIAL FLASHER-Flashing so·

vid~s 36 to 160 ft~shas P.Or minute, depending quence will either be 1:2:3 or 3:2:1, but start•
on setting of R3. Ult QI 0P.rato1 as relaxa• ing sequonco 11 not prodictable.-W. G.
tion oscillator, delivering train of trigger Miller, "Using and Undorstanding Miniature
pulses to two scr gates.-"SCR Manual," 4th Noon lamps," H. \V. Sams & Co., lndlanapo-
Edition, General Eloctric, 1967, p 160. lis, Ind., 1969, p 47.
111
0FFe1
TIME
28VDC
SCR FLIP-FLOP D·C FLASHER-Ha• Independent

adjustments for on and off timH of •Ingle
lamp load. Circuit is capacitor-commutated
scr flip·flop, with network R9.c3.CR5 added
Rl,R2 500K, LINEAR POT to ensure triggering of only ono scr when
R3,R4 750K l/2W power I• first appliod.-A. A. Adem, Fla•hers,
R5 IOOll l/2W Ring Counters and ChaseH, General Eledric,
R6,R7 ; IK, 112 W C4 4 ,.F, 50 VOLTS NON- POLARIZED Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.48, 1966, p 3.
RB : 270.ll 112 w QI GE 2N2646 UJT
R9 : 4.7K, 112 W SCRl,SCR2 GE Cl06F
RIO : 250.ll ,5W CRI • CR5 GE A13F
Cl : .47p.F 50V LOAO GE 50C l.4A LAMP
C2,C3 : .22,.F 50V
LOAD-I LOAD·2
IKW IKW
MAX. MAX.
120 v
6QN
l·KW FLIP·FLOP FLASHER-Flashing rate, de·

tormined by ujt QI, can bo adjusted from
about 0.1 to 10 s with R2, to drive triacs
through flip-flop Q2.Q3.-J. H. Galloway, T1
Using tho Triac for Control of AC Power, 03
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.35, GE
2N34t6
1966, p 16.
GE A13F (41
Dt -4
IZOV 60 HZ
l1t STAG&. 2nd STAGE LAST STAGE
LOAD
600W
CHASER-Turns on lamps sequentially, at

equal intervals, with each one staying on
until all are on. Circuit then tums all of
them off and start• again with first lamp.
Used chiefly in advertising signs.-A. A.
Adem, Solid-State Ring Counters and Chasers
for Ught Displays, Electronics World, Sept.
1967, p 84-85.
FOR IOOO·WATT LOAD USE

ALL SCR'S GE CIO&Y ALL RESISTORS V2 W GE SC45B TRIACS,
ALL OIODES GE Alli F ADDITIONAL STAGES MAY BE INSERTED BETWEEN DOTTED LINES.
Ill 24V
1/ZW I.AMP
\.OAO
+
24-V LAMP FLASHER-With compononts 2pF 50V
shown, gives about 60 flashos per minuto. +
To vary flashing rate, ·use O.S•meg pot and 2N1771
24V
0.5-meg resistor in place of 1M resistor.-
D. Cooper, SCR's and Triacs-the Rovolution
Continues, Electronics World, Aug. 1968, p 2Nl771
25-28. 50V
0.47pF
20Y
47J\
l/2W
rrL!r:r. .,",,UT
RELAY- P 8 9 1(9 17AG
OR
I~
PHILLIPS ADVANCE
LGA/4C/115VA
r" --....,
I I POWER FLIP·FLOP-Combination of scr and
dual-coil latching relay provides variable-fre-
quency on-off switching cycle. Extra contacts
+ IN645 on relay can bo used to drive warning flashor
47K
or, with unequal rosistonce paths for charg•
Ing capacitor, provide asymmetrical flip·flop
Rz action. Valuos shown give operating fre-
120V NE·SI quency range of 12 to 180 cyclos per minute.
DC 2N1595
SCR This range pormits use as metronome or as
interval timer.-V. P. Holoc, SCR Relay Circuit
Mokes Flip-Flop ar Interval Timer, Electronic
Design, Juno 7, 196S, p 39-40.
120V 60Hz --.o

Ql,Q2,03,Q4:2N2646
550W 550W
LOAD 2 LOAD 3
RIO Rll +
C5
33 33 2
ADJUSTABLE-TIMING CHASER-Turns ori each

lomp in turn, with separately adjustablo limo
delay in oach lamp stage (Rl, R2, R3, R4). chiefly in advar1;s1n9- signs. Any numbor of A. Adom, Solid-State Ring Counters and Chas-
All lamps stoy on until end of sequenco, lamp stages can bo usod. Additional stages ers for Light Displays, Electronics World, Sopt.
whon all go out and procoss repeats. Used may be insortod botween dashod linos.-A. 1967, p 84-85.
Ill
lllll:GA
PElllOO
AD.lllST
RT
IOOA •OA "' 40 W WITH DAYLIGHT-OFF CONTROL-Oper•
ates from 12·V battery and gives up to 60
Rashes per minute as determined by setting
115
of Rl. R2 gives Independent control of on
4111 and off limos. Photocell R3 shuts off flasher
Clll during daylight, increasing battery llfe.-F.
1111111
Ill W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy
Ill
QI
2112141
C2
.zz,.r
150¥
.
- 10,.r
cs 114 RIO
4TJI. 220A
HY
llll
GND 4'1'11
/112
S'fMlllTll\' 500 II 20U
AD.IUS'f ~
...115 llOAO I IOOMA
AU
prf • ICPS
DUTY FACTO~ '°""
0.1,.1 0.1,.1
117-V A·C FLASHER-With optional photocell, I-HZ FLASHER-Generates one flash per sec•
flashing rate varies with ambient illumina• ond with 100 mA through 24o-ohm lamp
tion.-D. Cooper, SCR's and Triacs-the Revo• load RL without need for electrolytics. When
lution Continuos, Electronics World, Aug. one scs triggers on, 0.2-µF commutating ca·
1968, p 25-28. pacitor turns off other one and charges Its
llTVA.C:. goto capacitor to negative voltage through
20 mog until retrlggering o«urs. Circuit efll.
ciency is 88%. 20-meg resistors can be
made variable for changing frequency or
duty factor.-Planar Silicon Controlled Swikh
3N81/3N82, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 65.16, 1964.
CADMIUM 5111.PKIDE PKOTOCOllDUCTIVE

CELL (OPTIONAL) C5 •IZO
••
.,. JC
XENON TRIGGER-Two xenon flashtubes op- "·'°

erating in 6o-400 Hz range can provide pulses
of light for triggering laser's (light-activated
acr's). Ujt relaxation oscillator provides al·
ternato pulses for scr's, turning thom on and
making 0.22·µF capacitors discharge Into ...
•?O 471C 4'hl 470
....
UTC
primaries of high-voltage trigger transformers,

to givo 6-kV pulses for Ionizing flashtubos to
give pulses of light.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edi•
tlon, General Electric, 1967, p 118-119.
.,.
••
Cl11?'a •Gl: Z4JU4D
Qi ,o, -Gt:tNtM&
SCR1•1CRt • 0£ =cl
+161N NEON BLINKER-Simple circuit flashes once

every 5 s.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Neon
6.8 6.8 lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Slgnalite,
meg meg
Neptune, N.J., p 153.
Cl Zif
CZ
lllf +
Vl vz
NE2H NE2H
~
2114011
I :2:2:2:1 :2:2:2 SEQUENTIAL NEON-Flashing
sv
sequence may be varied by changing capaci·
tor valuos. large capacitance values permit llC
bright flash.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Un-
derstanding Miniature Noon lamps," H. W. .,,,,.
llV
+
8llNKING NIGHT LIGHT-Gives about 50 since battery drain is below 75 µA in day•

flashes per minute when darkness falls, for llght.-J. G. Rabinowitz, Photocells-Types,
+180V drawing attention to hazards. Two type-D Characteristics, and Applications, Electronics
culls will oporate flashor for several months, World, Sept. 1968, p 23-26.
BULB
R1
IMPeDANCE
100k
>100 HOT
SOlJARE RATE & STEADY R3
WAVE ON CONTROL 2 k
OUTPUT R2
510 82
...:...12 v
E
300-HZ FLASHER-Provides sllghlly Imperfect

Cl
square-wave output at approximately 300 100 µF
Hz. Ono use is as sequence flasher.-E. Bau- 2SV
man, "Applications of Noon lamps and Gas
Discharge Tubos," Signalito, Neptune, N.J., p
36. l·W 12·V FLASHER-low-cost circuit gives 6 tor Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola,
to 120 flashet per minute, each adjustable in Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-34.
duration from 40 ms to 0.5 s.-"Semlconduc·
----
R5 LOAD LOAD LOAD
AIOB IOO I 2 3
DI D2 IOOW IOOW 100 w
R2 C9 R6
RI 4.7K 0.1 IMEG
t s~ C2 C3
-------
C4
120 VA.C.
0.5 0.5 0.5
+
1 Cl
100 Rl2
331(
Rl3
3'31(
R4
SCR2
f
AIOB 05 0.01 '
03 D4
05:Z4XLl8
~ • { a -
DB
SEQUENTIAL FLASHER FOR LAMPS-;Uses ring
counter In which each scr is triggorecf"ln turn AIJF Al3F Al3F
to operate its load. Can bo used for dis· botw0en . the dotted lines. Article tells how across Cl .-A. A. Adam, Solid·Stato Ring
plays, traffic warning lights, and advertising to change components to handle higher• Counters and Chasers for light Displays,
signs. Addilional lamp stages can bo added wattage lamps. Adjust RI to give 120 V Electronics WorlJ, Sepl. 1967, p 84-85.
Yoe·----------------------...,..-----------,
25V
R7 307
200
05 L
FOi
TWO-ADJUSTMENT FLASHER-On and off times
are individually sot by R2 and R4 in vorsatllo
lamp ftasher. Any number of load-controlling
scr's may bo added, each with Its own timed C4
pulso spacing.-E. Kiburis, Sequential Control 511F
with Silicon Controlled Rectifiers, EEE, March 50V
1970, p 100-103.
TR Rg SCR3
2N4987 IOk 2N2323
Cs
C1 R5 Cz O.l11F
0.511F 50 O.l11F
tOV SCR2 tOV Rt0
tOV 2N4I08 !500
Rs Re
50
500
FOi
.,•OOA ••
..._.. NOA
+12V
:1.
_...
.._--.-1.~,.......
+12v
....
lbf
inhibit
.....
. ..... ••
•11\
...
HOA
5
... ...
9Pltl
.....
40-W NIGHT.ONLY FLASHER-Photoeledric BAlU3 BAXl3

daylight control turns ftasher on at sunset and
off at dawn to conserve battery light. Tim· av ov
Ing of scr flip-Rop Is controlled by ult oscilla·
TRAFFIC LIGHT FLASHER-Combination of two
tor having variable control for Rash rate and
Philips NORbit blocks and LPA ampliRor
indopondont control of on and off times of
servos as simple astablo mvbr, used for driv·
flash.-Hlgh-Power, Battory-oporated Flasher
ing nM thyristor trigger modulo for switching
With Photoelectric Control, General Electric,
ono or two thyristors at given repetition rate
Auburn, N.Y., No. 630.15.
as dotorminod by values of capacitors used.
With 12-V supply and values shown, flash
rate is 1 Hz.-L. J. Lemmons, Multivibrator
Circuit for Control of Thyristors, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether•
lands, No. 61.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In the category of this'chaptor, use tho Index at the back
of this book. Chock also tho author's "So.urcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 32
Flip-Flop Circuits
r.oaoe,
ntea•
•
~.5:~ ..
Cl
u,.".'!'°"'
"
••..
(.01,llF 200¥1
..
••
CSOOIO,
t.0&092'
IJSOAJ
~
.FTR--
0
.
- .:. .. .:'
'
.; ''
' FREE-RUNNING HIGH-VOLTAGE SCR-Oper·
ates as low-frequency astable mvbr. By in·
creasing sizes of timing capacitors C4 and
Cl
tClll~.JOOWJ
..
:::. : ~ ... C6, circuit can be made to operate at very low
frequencies; it can thon be used as high-
SUI
icse•
-••• ••
fllfJ ••
- ••• IC•I
CCH• .
I
voltago flasher driving lamp loads.-D. R.
Grafham, Using low Current SCR's, General
::-. '"" Eledric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.19, 1967, p 27.
... ' .
(. (. ::-. acl:j
•••. s
t•iqrq
......
cs :!~ i '
•••
"'"' " I t ' f '=
.OSJ&' :~
ClHliflC CClt6*
c•I SCRZ
• G•OU1'D CONOUCIS T~ltS
+6v
CONDITIONO CONDITION I
.J .T
.
&80 680 20k
. SUMMATION 0 -12 v (RESET) SUMMATION I
QUINARY TRIGGER-Six additional diodes· as quliia,Y' memory in pattern recognizer de- crltical.-G. L Clapper, Machine looks, lis-
(Dl·D2 and D5-D8) In Eccles.Jordon flip-flop veloped by IBM for spoken words or graphic tens, learns, Electronics, Oct. 30, 1967, p 91-
provide three additional stable states. Used inputs. Transistor and diode typos are not 102.
260
FLIP-FLOP CIRCUITS 261
~1~ BASIC BISTABLE UJT-Circuit has two stable +v1 +vz

operating points, called tho ON and OFF 12V 25V
75K states. When OFF, only vory small current
Rs flows thraugh load and power dissipation in
load is below 1 nW. When trigger is applied
c to input X or Y, or both (positive for X and
negative for Y}, load power dissipation be·
comes about 135 mW. Negative trigger at X TRl~ER llt--Mc:;.i.;;-,:
Vl •51Jf will turn circuit OFF.-T. P. Sylvan, The Uni- INPUT X
junction Transistor Charaderistics and Appli-
+24V T cations, General Electric, Syracuse, N. Y., No.
INPUT°""""1 90.10, 1965, p 59.
•• 21Jf RK
+ 4·Sv (4 o-so)
..,.
RI AZ
SETo I IOK
33pl 33pl
!OK
•21Jf
RESETo I
.21Jf OUTPUT OUTPUT
BINARY NEON-Zero potential applied at R3 R4

RESET torminal extinguishes V2 and permits
lOOK IOOK
Vl to ignite. Chooso value for common cath-
ode resistor RK such that V2 cannot fire.
24-V pulse at input, of duration depending RS TR1 TRZ R6
IOOK ZTX300 100K
on time constant of RK and 0.2-µF capacitor, ZTX300
causes flip-flop to switch, indicating count of
ONE. Same lamp is lit onco for ovory two ZSIZO
ZS120
input pulses. All lamps are 5AB-B.-W. G.
Millor, "Using and Understanding Miniature
Neon Lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, LOW-DISSIPATION BISTABLE-Power dissipa•
Ind., 1969, p 50. tion is only 2.2 mW with 4.5-V supply. Will
operate up to 220 kHz unloaded and 190 33pl~33pf
kHz into 68-pf lood. Report gives design
procedure.-"E-Line Transistor Applications,"
Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969,
p 13. !.NM
+4v Re COMPLEMENTARY
4.7k
OUTPUT OUTPUT
03
2N2894
-4v v
R13
lk STROBE
DIGIT LINE
COMPLEMENTARY
DIGIT LINE
Dt
IN3605
C1 C2
22pf I... =!=22pf
MEMORY SENSE AMPLIFIER-Picks up differ• +4v computer stor119e developed for long space
enco between currents in complementary digit flip-flop to state towa·rd which difforenticrl trips.-D. E. Brewor, S. Nissim, and G. V. Pod-
lines, to bias flip·flop Q1-Q2 through differen- amplifier previously bicrsed it, to 9enor11te razcr, Suitca-ize Memory for Longer Space
tial amplifier Q5.Q6. Strobe road signal sets appropricrte complemontcrry outputs. Used in Trips, Eledronics, Nov. 13, 1967, p 138-146.
vee + 45V (40· S·oiQ +3V ±5%
RI R2
410J\. 470.n.
IS pf
OUTPUT<>----+-----+ i - - - - - T - - - O OUTPUT
Rl R4
I
4·7K 4 7K I
I
1,
RS TR 1 TRZ R6
4 7K ZTXl12 ZTX312 4·7K
ZSl40
.... .....
-3'45"1o
10plL.-110pf COMPLEMENTARY SILICON TRANSISTORS-Usa
of complementary transistor in place of col-
lector load rosistor in basic flip-flap gives
FAST FLIP-FLOP-Can bo usad as froquency

!INPUT
along with modification for incroasing spoed

highor operating ofllciency, highor operating
1pood, and lowor output lmpodanco. Article
givos design procoduro for determining optl·
mum values of components, for operation at
temperatures from -55 to +150 C at 1-mA
divider up to 7 .5 MHz. Roqulres only one 4.5- to 13 MHz.-"E-lino Transistor Applications," collodor curronts.-P. Ward, Complomontary
V supply. Used in Johnson decade counter. Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969, Flip-Flops Improve Bistable Performance, Elec•
Report givos design proceduro and equations, p 11. tronic Design, May 11, 1964, p 5~5.
BAXl3
RA
I>
NOR60 LPA60 NOR60
U1A ..__ __.U3A
ov +Vs
2
3 I>
4 NOR60
U1B
LPA60
U2B RB .....NOR60
___,u3e 4 NOR60
..__ __,UJD
8AXl3
3
4 NOR60
-rs= +24 v
Relay type SZC7 l 22 OV 0 T s
(3522 289 97481)
voltago.. is remavo_d because of powor failure montary outputs aro takon from terminals Q,
MEMORY FOR POWER FAILURE-Divido-by-two or any other reason. · Uses Phllip1 ampliftor -L. J. Lemmons, A Non-Volatile Flip-Flop,
flip·tlop uses bipolar relay to provide memory and gate blocks. Terminal T Is Input. High Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon,
function so information is not lost if supply level at terminal 5 stops flip-flop. Compl.. Tho Netherlands, No. 72.
+6
100
~·t
-6
01
2NHll
12 K
IOK
·20Y
TUNNEL-DIODE FLIP·FLOP-Usod in converting
COLLECTOR-FOLLOWING EFFECT - Operation analog voltago waveform to digital logic
doponds on driving base potential of slnglo levels. Provides faster rise time than con•
saturated common-omittor transistor rapidly ventional Schmitt trigger and maintains ac•
toward cutoff. Collector voltage thon follows curate zero-crossing information without
base, If collector resistance is sufflciontly high. phase distortion. Circuit requires only ono
Article gives theory of operation. No trans• supply voltage, plus lamp voltage if desired.
former Is required. Will operate for collodor Output is clean square wave al any frequency
roslstancos of 2K to 1OOK for variety of tran· from 1 to 25 kHz for 1-V p•p input signal.-
sisters ranging from 2N1613 to 2N706. Fro• C. S. Miller, Fast Squaring Circuit Preserves
quency of sine-wave sourco is not critical. Phase Information, "400 Ideas for Design
Can bo used as shift register, dolay, and radl· Solectod from Electronic Design," Haydon Book
ation dotector.-R. E. Briley, One-Transistor Co., N.Y., 1964, p 96.
Flip-Flop, Electronic Design, Aug. 17, 1964.
p 132-134.
.--------------------Yoo~ -20V
lM lM lM
TRIGGER )--i l--.f---1-N_45_6_ __, 1N456

INPUT lOOpf
27pf OUTPUT
BISTABLE MOSFET-Extremely high Impedance
of mosfot circuit makes power dlulpatlon of IOM lOM
flip-flop loss than 0.5 mW.-C. R. Perkins,
"Application of MOSFET Devices to Electronic
Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968,
p 33. lOM
+12s voe
SCR2
G·E C22B ~-.....--
100
c
2 MFD,200 VOLTS LATCHING STATIC SWITCH-load current flows
N.P. whon pulso is applied to gale of SCRI, which
thon triggon and latches on. To turn off load,
pulse is applied to SCR2 to turn it on and
7AMP G·E A44B IOK short out SCRI momentarily through C to
LOAD (FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS) 2W. make SCRI drop out. Can bo used as'flashor,
heavy-duty •!lay, hoator· · ;~ntrol, circuit
breaker, power mvbr, etc.-F. W. Gutzwiller
and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Semicon-
ductor Applications, Gonoral Eledric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 4.
l.5K
IOOpl
t--+----s
--------o----.o+
s s
CONTROL
l,OV
ll_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _..
SWITCH
G1-G-E 2NHl71A
ClzPJ-G-E 2NJ418
Cll1,CRz-G·E INITIO
BOUNCE-FREE SWITCH-When logic si9nal is ~- AIJAZ
to be generated by manual switching of flip·
flop, bounce at switch contacts can be elimi·
400-HZ TRIGGER-Delivers square-wavo gale
nated by using spdt switch connected as
signals alternating from 7 V positive to 7 V
shown, to short-circuit one transistor of flip·
negative through transformer for driving scr
flop each time switch is operated to make
flip-flop change its state.-B. Ross, Flip-Flop o.r triac gates. Current Is up to 800 mA. Can
be free-running, or driven by ujt for precise
Switch Eliminates Contact Bounce, "400 Ideas
timing.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General
for Design Selocted from Electronic Design,"
Electric, 1967, p 85-86.
Hayden Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 232.
POWER GATE INPUT

ll;+v 05
2N3640
r----------------------------------,
t (8) I
I I
I R4 Rs I
I 3.6t R1 Re 3.6k I
I
I
c l.Sk t.Sk c I
I (71 (6) I
I I
I I
I I
C I 1c2
1bop1; 1tOOpf
I Rg Rio
I 1.Sk t.Sk
o, I
IN3207 I
I I
I -
I GME t34D2 I
L---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ___ _J
SET U1 RESET (3)
SET
,Jl.______..0....._ _ ___..I L_
RESET 1•..l---~n.________,n._______
POWER
GATE
INPUT
cal clock rate under 1 p.s. Article describes

how circuit can be usod In redundant error car•
rection doslgn to obtain high reliability without
CIS power penalty, as required In spacecraft elec•
Ironic systems.-R. E. McMahon and N, Childs,
MICROPOWER FOR REDUNDANCY-Use of a few micrewatts Instead of the usual several Micropower Redundant Circuits Correct Errors
pulsod or 9atod power mode for Philco-Ford milliwatts. Supply voltage Is gated to digital Automatically, Electronics, Feb. 6, 1967, p
set•reset IC fllp-ftop cuts operating power to elements only during clock Interval, with typi· 66-69.
-14 ±zv
COMPLEMENTARY GERMANIUM TRANSISTORS
-Complomontary arrangement with germa•
nium transistors gives higher operating efll·
ciency, higher operating speed, and lower
output impodanco. With circuit unbaloncod
to ground, only ono supply voltage Is needed.
Circuit also illustrates uso of commutative
triggering from positive-going input. Article
gives dosign proceduro.-P. Word, Comple-
mentary Flip-Flops Improve Bistable Perform·
anco, Electronic Design, Moy 11, 1964, p 50-
55.
• 12VDC
2200
LOAD
IOK 12G ISK 10K
IOw Rt
A 2700
INPUT l+5V TO+l6V STEPJ
+IOV
IOl__J
REGENERATIVE OUTPUT FOR FLIP·FLOP-Am· Vo
pliflor 03 boosts poak powor to 10 W for 12· ov
ohm load. Circuit at loft of points A·B is asta· TUNNEL·DIODE HYBRID-When power Is ap-
blo flip-flop, but technique con be applied to plied, silicon transistor stays off. Addition of
stable and monostable flip.flops as well.- input current through coupling capacitor
R. A. Durand, Rogonorativo Stogo Enhances switches tunnel diode to its high-voltago stato,
Flip-Flop Power Output, "400 ldoas for Design making transistor turn an. Applying negative
Soloctod from Electronic Design," Haydon Book pulse at Input mokos circuit switch back to
Co., N.Y., 1964, p 180-181. low-voltage state, giving oquivolont of flip-
flop action.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Applications
Far Tho Now Low Cost TD 700 Series Tunnel
Diodes, General Electric, Syracuse, N. Y., No,
90.66, 1967, p 8.
4 71 Hl
ZS140
ZS140
zruoo L;t-t---.,..--tl...- - t 4 " - - - ; 1

tBCWIO,
47K
ZZOpF
r ZZOpF
t - -...- .....--tH--t---IHS::.J
411
ZTUOO
(BCWl01
5£1 RESIT
SET·RESET BISTABLE-Cross-coupling of two signals are available to t~igger bistable H- ground or below 1 V.-"E-llno Transistor
NOR gates gives logical flip-flop that is use- twoon its two slates. .Jnputs ore normally up, Applications,'' Ferranti ltd., Oldham, lanes.,
ful far control purposes whoro two separate and triggering occurs when 'input is pulled to England, 1969, p 10.
CHAPTER 33
Frequency Divider Circuits
't20V +12v
lk
8kHZ OSCILLATOR
SUS- 2N4985
02
2N914
SIMPLIFIED 8 KHZ:l KHZ DIVIDER-Sawtooth
output of oach silicon unilateral switch stage
is half tho froquoncy of preceding stage. May
also bo used with 2N4989 sus.-Silicon Uni.
lateral Switch 2N4984/2N4985, Gonoral Eloc· 47k 330
Irie, Syracuso, N.Y., No. 65.27, 1967.
1 - - - .12v-I
I lk u I
DIVIDE·BY·12 MVBR-Provides procise division

I
up to 12 with values shown, and up to 1,000
by adding self-controlled input gate and
I OUTPUT
1·MHz crystal clock feeding three circuits in Isoopt Im • ., n
cascade. Circuit In dashed area is added to
generate noatly squared l·ms pulses for syn· I 2N914
I l-.J L +4v
chronizlng another divider stage. Use mini·
mum value for C and adjust pot lo give
desired fixed division factor. Generated pulso
I
can be stopped or started with any positivo
edgo of clock pulse.-V. Mosca, Ono-Shot
II 330 II
Multivlbrator Yields Division up to 12, floe·
Ironies, April 14, 1969, p 96.
L ___ ;:_ _ _J
'.'
Rz r---+---- OUTPUT
68k
D1
68 k
I
60:1 WITH ASTABLE MVBR-Clrcuit easlly syn•. djvision. Components R3 and C3 are selected Q3 stops mvbr.-A. L. Plevy and E. N. Monac-
chronizes to 92-V sinusoidal or square·wavo to offer' ripple. to. baso of Q3 at clock fre- chio, Foil-sofa Frequency Divider, Electronics,
clock input ovor frequency range of 10 to 600 quency; ripple is amplified by Q3 and fed to Sept. 19, 1966, p 127.
kHz and gives either 10:1 or 60:1 frequency mvbr Q1.Q2 to lock it to clock. If clock foils,
266
FREQlJENOY DIVIDER CIRCUITS 267
OUTPUTIZ.5kHll OUTPUT 1250H1 I

DECADE DIVIDER-Starts with 2.S·kHz ujt os•
clllator. Each following transistor•ujt stago
.l)lpf 10 clivicles froquency by 10. C1 and C2 are
Cl
1-~EA 0.0047, R1 is 100K, R2 is 1 meg, ancl R3 ancl
STAGE R4 aro around 1K, aclfusted to match ujt's,
For next stage, product of R2 ancl C2 should
be ten times that of proceding stage, with
R2 between 27K ancl 10 meg.-Slllcon Co~
R4
plementory Unijunctlon Transistor D5Kl, Gen•
oral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 60.15, 1967.
C1 1N456
10v R C2
p-p 120k O.lµf
Ve
1___r !:.Ve
Vo
_ _k..___ _L
JITIER KILLER-Control voltage Ve of ujt clotor- actorlstics of ujt make it tolerate largo
mines frequency division ratio, in rango of amounts of jitter In lnput.-J. P. Budlong, UJT
2 to 20. For values shown, circuit operates Gives Frequency Divider an Immunity to Input
over frequency rango of 20 to 150 Hz. Char• Jitter, Electronics, July 7, 1969, p 105.
1390 CPS 695CPS 347.5 CPS 173.5CPS

MASTER OSCILLATOR RI DIVIDER 2nd lllVIOER 3rd DIVIDER
2.2K (+21 (+2) (+21 ..
25V
AT
20MA
2.2K l.2K
12V
AT Cz
t.5MA
0.068
Z4XL128 IOOK
lG.E)
250flf
15V -
tooth waveforms ancl pulso outputs of either

NOTE: Lj -450 mlly SLUG TUH£0 COIL
CASCADED UJT'S DIVIDE 1,390 HZ BY 8- polarity are available from each divider 0•6 ATIKC
Simple ujt relaxation 01cillator1 are cascaded stago.-J. F. Cleary and D. V. Jones, Cascaded DCRES.4800
and synchronized from 1,390.Hz Hartley oscil· UJT Oscillators Form .Stable Frequency Divider,
lator to give reliable frequency cllvlsion. Saw• Eleclronlc Dealgn, Nov. 8, 1965, p 52.
DIVIDE·BY-2-Uses 3-olemont noon lamps pow•

ered by a 200.V supply which also runs 880..
Hz master oscillator. Output Is 440..Hz linear
sawtooth.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Neon
lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Slgnallte,
440 CPS 220 CPS 110 CPS
TUNNEL-DIODE DIVIDER-lowest of five diodes

in series string Is chosen to have highest poak
point current. First trigger pulse turns on
diode having lowest peak point current, cre-
ating first voltage lump at output. Successive
TUNNEL DIODES
trigger pulsos will In turn trigger other diodes
GE T0712 one at a time, until finally the bottom diode
is turnod an. Voltage across entire string
then drops to zero, turning off all diodos, and
GE
2N:H05 sequence begins again. Can be used as 5:1
pulse froquancy divider or 01 staircase wave-
form genoratar.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Appllca•
tions For The New low Cost TD 700 Serios
Tunnel Diodes, General Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 90.66, 1967, p 10.
4.7k 470
,.. .. ~--~~......~:-----.J\JV\i.------.... ------..11.IU\.---+ 3v
l~g;'.'
I ~,,(~~.
I ~,,;;.:±_.:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L-------
OUTPUT
SELF-DIVIDING IC CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR-
Fundamental resonant frequency is divided _l_
by 10 automatically, without separate fre- tvoll~(IOOkhzl
quency-dividing mvbr, when switch S Is in
I 0-kHz position. Circuit adually oscillates at
T
20 kHz but waveform is asymmetrical and
has strong 10.kHz submultiplo. IC is low-cost
..1..
tvo11 fr-------------.. u-----11okhz1
Falrchild µl914 dual two•lnput gato.-J, Alt-
houso, Dividing tho Frequency of an Oscillator .To• •
to •
20 30• •
40 •
50
I
60
by 10, ffedronics, December 11, 1967, p 98. TIME,µ sec
FREQUENCY DIVIDER CIRCUITS 269
+z +s +z +2
DIVIDE BY 2 OR 3-Transistor coupling be. 4.7111 4.7111

tweon stages prevents audio signal of one
stage from leaking back into provious one. A
low-Impedance sine-wave generator in series
with II provides dividing signal. Circuit may
..I
N
be used as argon tono generator if second

stage Is adjusted to divide by 2.-E. Bauman,
2.2
"Applications of Neon Lamps and Gas Dis-
charge Tubes," Signalito, Neptune, N.J., p 50.
1111
• 1111
112 I~ I 1/IZ U24
@'YYYYl @ ~ © YY1 @ -r-r-v
Bk Hz 4kHz 2kHz I kHz

OSCILLATOR
\
\
\
L,: 51/z T, Iva· l.D., .,,.DIA TUBE, COPPER, 11a• l\JRN SPACING
1..z: 71/z T, &Ill" l.D., # 16 ENAM. WIRE, CLOSE WOUND
VARACTOR FREQUENCY-SPllmR- Converts
SUS-2N498!5 50 MHz to 25 MHz wilh 80% emciency, Spuri·
ous harmonic energy Is 20 dB below 25·MHz
TRANSIENT-FREE SUS 8:1 DIVIDER-Spikes in output and Input vswr below 1.2 for input
center of sawtooth are oliminated In this sill· power range of 7 to 125 W.-B. A. Zlegner,
con unilateral switch circuit by triggering at Varactor Achieves High Powor Subharmonic
gate. May also be used with 2N4989 sus.- Frequency Division, Eledronlc Design, Sept. 27,
Silicon Unilateral Switch 2N4984/2N4985, 1965, p 64-65.
1967.
'""''
Ir'
UUSISTOkS rtl SlO 1·

CIODl $ lSO SI& 0. 1$20 SIA
C't 10,000,f CUANIC
locks circuit to signal, so unstable state moves

3-STAGE RING DIVIDER-Intended for feeding of collectors (V, W, and X) are at three differ- one stage far each Input half-cycle. Can
with sine-wave input. Can only have odd enl voltages levels-intermediate, low, and handle inputs above 300 MHz, If load lengths
number of stages. Supply voltages aro not high. Intermediate level ls unstablei In ab- are mlnimlzed,-A V.H.F. Ring Divider, For·
critical, and can be as low as 10 V. When sence of Input, this level moves around tho ring ranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, No, 39,
transistors aro In states shown, tho three pairs and gives self-oKlllation. Small input slgnal 1969.
-IOV i20'l'o DIVISION FROM 1 TO 10-Adjusting Ct or

number of turns on Nt of toroid core changos
division. Circuit Is largely immuno to temper•
aturo changes. Output is sufllclont across RS
(3 V) to drive another divider for further fre-
quency division.-E. J. Willetta, Magnetic Coro
Frequency Divider Uses Fewer Components,
E/edronic Design, Oct. 26, 1964, p 54-55.
R1·150 T1 • 122DI000-18 (ARNOLDI

Rz. 820 80505-IA·MA IMAGNETICSI
Rs. 180 0. • IN751A
"". 390 0.r IN:S7!0
"5. :S.9 N1• 31 T\IRNS
Rg- 18 Na· 60 TUAHS
c, • .C>68µf
~- :SOTURNS
o,. 2N2905
Oz· 2N2905
I
/
DIVIDE BY TWO IN 1So-450 MHZ RANGE- ,l
INPUT I
f5 !;;
Adding tronsformer T1 to astable mvbr spoeds (
turn-on and turn-off of transistors, increases
maximum oscillator frequency, and makes
divide-by-two operation available over ontire
uhf range for sine, square, or pulse input.
For 4:1 division, feed output to similar circuit
!;;
in which input pad R1-R2-R3 is omittod.-D. -13¥
E. Sandors, Adding a Transformer Halves Uhf Tt • FERROX·CUBE CORE 56·590·65•38
Frequencies, E/edronlcs, March 4, 1968, p I TURN NO. 36 BIFILAR WIRE, 2 TU~NS TOTAL
87-88. Lt• FERROX·CU8E CORE 56·590·65·38, 6 TURNS NO. 36
tlOV
l·SV o·ev l·SV

.:..
lk IK llC
I
I· 5 V -IOV
S·STAGE RING DIVIDER-Can be used to

divide frequencies well abovo 300 MHz. Gives
decade frequency divider when combined'
INPUT~ with binary circuit. Switchos betwoen three
different voltage levels; in absence of input I--
OUT·
7 signal, will self-oscillate at rate determined PUT
by .delays around ring (about 250 MHz).
TRANSISTORS ZTX3204 .. " Additional stages may be added, but total
must be odd number.-A V.H.F. Ring Divider, •IOV
DIDOES KSO 33A OR k5Z033A
Ferranti ltd., Oldham, lanes., England, No.
c·,. 10.000pf CEl\AMIC
39, 1969.
20111c
'"li"
DIVIDING 20 MHZ-With input rosonant cir•
cuit tuned to 20 MHz and output to 10 MHz,
T2 circuit porforms woll as frequency divlder.-
H. F. Veno, Jr., Simple Circuit Halves 20.Mc
Supply Froquency, "400 Ideas for Design
Selected from Electronic Design," Hayden
20K
Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 174.
-"l.flV
3,3k0
4.7k
CRYSTAL DIVIDE·BY·TO MVBR-Emittar-coupled

mvbr with crystal In place of timing capacitor
makes oxcollllnt pulse generator for driving
chain of synchronized divldo-by-10 mvbr
2:1 PULSE SCALER-Used when counting pulses put frequency for circuit Is about 35 kHz.- stages used In calibrating time bases of pre-
at frequencies above reliable opHatlng 1pood "Countlng Units for Programmed Control," cision oscilloscopes.-G. W. Harrison, Crystal
of counter, generally around 2,000 Hz. For Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Gives Precision To a Stable Multlvibrator,
higher count-down ratio, soveral such stages Tho Netherlands, 1964, p. 18. Efoclronics, Nov. 11, 1968, p 121.
should bo connected In sarlos. Maximum in-
~ 4· sv
R, Rr. T,' Ta ZTX300

Ta ZTX500
c,
FROM~ Di. • Da ZS140
Re
OSCILLATOR Cs ·OlµF
Ca lOOpF
Ca lOOpF
Ra 560kl1 R.s
Ra 1001.tn -----o/P
R4
2•2k11 TO STAGE 3
Re
R, lkn
12kn R,
Ro
R• Uln T,
II., 22kl1
R, 12kn
SINE-WAVE DIVIDE·BY.S-Used at first count• running, as form of mvbr, with no input, but of 5 for this stage of clocll.-A Crystal Clock
. Ing stage of battMY-powered clock controlled synchronizes to exact multiple of sine-wave Using Plastic Transistors, Ferranti Ltd., Old-
by 100.kHz crystal oHlllator. Circuit Is free- input. R6 is odjustod to give required count ham, Lanes., England, No. 34, 1968,
+15V
33k
150MHz
o-f
IOOpF
75MHr
L2
INPUT 2.7k
0.35µ.H
(200mVl 220
820 OUTPUT
SIMPLE 100:1 DIVIDER-Requir11 only three

ujt's to get 200 Hz output from 20,000 Hz
Input. With division ratios of 4 and 5, poten• VARACTOR DIVIDER-With Cl and first coil
tiomoter adjustments will be required for the r11onatln9 at ISo.MHz Input frequency, action
capacitor-charging resistors.-T. P. Sylvon, of voractor makes L2·C2 resonate at 75 MHz,
The Unijunction Transistor Characteristics and operating over 4% bandwidth, Cost is much
Applications, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., loss than that of IC designed for thoso fro-
No. 90.10, 1965, p 73. quendos.-M. Stevons and D. Steward, Vorac•
tor Diode Is the Koy to a Simple Frequency
Divider, Electronic DesJgn, Feb. 15, 1970, p 88.
AVALANCHE-MODE DIVIDER-Operation of
transistor In avalanche mode gives simple
relaxation oscillator that can bo oporatod +12
either as frequency divider or as low-output• Rt
lmpodonco voltogo genorator. Capacitor Is 3.9k
chargod until breakdown voltage of transistor 4~Y~
Is reached, thon discharged through transistor
to givo next output pulse. Period of divider INPUT f=4.8hz
con be adjusted by changing input amplitudo
and value of coupling resistor from preceding
..___-i.__ OUTPUT
stage. Division ratio depends on values of f,~Y_il_L
R, C, and input amplitude, and is 5:1 for
c
f=24hz 47pf
values shown.-A. Molraghl, Single Transistor
Divides Frequenq in Avalanche Mode, Elec-
tronics, Sept. 29, 1969, p 96-97.
S2
(UNITS) ITENSI
I 2 4 8 2 4 8
PE Po P, Pz P, PE Po P, Pa P5
Cp 9310 r. - - - - - . . . I C 9310
(UNITS) C £P (TENS)
0 0 01 0 2 0 5 Cp 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3
+5v
INPUT
5.1 k
+sv.......ivv-
~TPUT
S1 ANO Sz ARE OIGITRAN DIGISWITCH
1
9601
13 o,
TYPE 327 OR EQUIVALENT
2 2N3014
ONE-SHOT
I 3
GATES 1 AND 2 ARE t 9003 4
MULTIVIBRATOR
TRA~SFORMER T1 IS TECHNITROL
11 KCB OR EQUIVALENT
UP TO 9":1-Two thumbwhtel switchos, SI frequency divider. Will handle froquo11cies former.-K. Erickson, Divider Splits Frequency
and 52, can be sot to provide any division exceeding 10 MH:r. Uses two IC decade into Any Ratio from 1 to 99, Electronics, April
ratio from 1 to 99 far programmable pulso counters and IC ono-shot to drive pulse trans• 13, 1970, p 107-108.
+ 135V OUTPUT (2.5KHz l

BATTERY
.Ol~F
.01 Cl
f /400 ..... --it----1 ~TO
NEXT
2 MEG DIVIDER
(VARY FOR f/8) STAGE
301<
,...----~l\r--+-+--\t-- OUTPUT
.001 .0005
ADJUST---..
FOR SYNC.
2.5KHz _J._ +10 FREQUENCY OIVIDER_j
SCALE-Of.8-Simplo battery-operated neon cir- rI.,__osc1LLAT0R T 1
cuit produces ono pulse every 8 Hz of 400.Hz 10:1 DIVIDER-Complementary ult DSK, with
sourco.-E. Bauman, "Appllcatlons of Noon highly predictable voltage threshold, gives
L'!lmps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalite, excellent porformance in largo-countdown
Neptune, N.J., p 50. frequency dividers such as are used In tele-
vision color bar genorators.-W. R. Spofford,
Jr., Complementary Unijunction Transistor,
1968, p 13.
+4-SY
R1
A.,
Cs
R1
l/P O/P
T,
Re
Ta
n. 12kfl R, lkfl Stoge !lo, .!<&

Ro }300 Ro 12kfl } 220pP
Ro lkn Ro 221tll 4 lOOOpP
L 12kll Ra.a 12kll 5 5000pP
Ila 12ldl 6 O•C2µP
L Stages } to 10 11111 plun 11111 pl'eaet. 7 0·1111'
Ro Stose 11 4111l plun 11111 preoet, 8 0•5111'
Ta• Ta ZTX300 9 2 •211P
To ZTX500 c. 4/00pP 10 10.,.P
Dt., Dt, D1 Z.Sl40 Co lOOpP 11 lOµP
DIVISION BY 5, 4, OR 3-Usod in battery• by setting of R6. Division ratios of stages

powered 100.kHz quartz crystal clock to give 3-11 are 5, 4, 5, 5, 4, 5, 5, 4, and 3, following
one pulse every half-minute for driving ratchet stage 2 which divides sine-wave output of
mechanism that moves hands of clock crystal by 5. Accuracy of clock Is about 1 sec
half a minute per pulse. Circuit synchronizes per week.-A Crystal Clock Using Plastic Tran•
on integral number of narrow trigger pulses sisters, ForrClnti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England,
from preceding stage, with number dotorminod No. 34, 1968.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category· of this chapter, use tho index at tho back
of this book. Check also tho author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," publishad by
McGraw Hill In 1968.
0
CHAPTER 34
Frequency Measuring Circuits
STD Ci FREQUENCY COMPARATOR-Compares stond·

ord frequency ot one input of dual NOR
... goto with unknown froquoncy ot othor Input•
If unknown Is lower, d-c level at output of
comparator Is low. If unknown Is highor,
R, output d-c level Is high. When input fraquon•
cies are equol, circuit functions os linear
phaso discrlminotor having no tuned circuits.
May be used os vco control, go-no-ga fre-
quency comporator, or as frequency discrimi·
nator. Output may be either polarity by
solocting approprlato terminal of ICS.-R.
Ricks, Frequency Comparator Usos ICs, EEE,
July 1967, p 128-129.
Oz
2tf4l74
IO 20 25 ~ IOO IOOO
•
SI 3000
pf
0 0 Tl
RI R3 R4
30 ~ 33 201(
K K K
Rl5
IOK rJI
CRYSTAL CALIBRATOR-Uses only 10().lcffz

and 1,00o-kHz crystals In three-tran1lstor cir-
101
cuit to provide a"urato colibratlng signols ot odju1tmonts with WWV. Blocking oscillator
10, 20, 25, 50, 100, and 1,000 kHz, with transformer Tl is Stoncor A-8111. Lt Is 2.5•7 choko.-A. A. Mangieri, Solid-State Crystal
harmonics well beyond 34 MHz. Book gives mH (J. W. Miiier 6316), L2 Is 35-300 pH Calibrator, "Bonch-Tostod Communications
construdion details ond tolls how to chock (J. W. Milltr 2002), and ~ is 2.5emH r-f Projects," Haydon Book Co., N.Y., p 116-121.
274
FREQUENCY MEASURING CIRCUITS 275
FREQUENCY METER-Full-scalo rango is 2 kHz,

08o, Q; and a«uracy is within 20 Hz at midscale.
Accuracy Is amplo far ssb and radiotoletypo
CK722 0-200"°
applications. Sillcan rectifiers are nat critical,
2N175
2N404 ,.Cs~CR2
... 15 - if piv rating is abave 100 V, as In SarkH
loput~K
~ . ~R
Tarzlan K200 diedes.-J. Alan Biggs, The
Aud".o
IOI( Cf!4 CR5 W3ZP Meter, CO, July 1966, p 70-71.
4,S0t :100'1 db
- s --i1111111!-.
' 911.' v
·ZbV
IM lk
VA RAC TOR
CONTROL IM OI
1/P.<>--l--'1.,.,.,._ __..--4
&AIOZ
150k
PRECISION FREQUENCY COMPARATOR-1.13-
MHz Clapp vco with amplitudo cantrol is IOOp
CZ
used in phase-cantralled laop for high-precl• 4l00p
sion maser frequency comparison. Based on
multiplication af boat signal obtained after
1·5k
comparing two frequency standards.-J. V.
Murphy, Frequency Measurement Using tho
IOk
Phase-Controlled Oscillator, Proc. IEEE, July
1967, p 1144-1153. IOk
SbOOp
r------ - - - - ---- - - -- --- - - - - --,

XTALCASE
20-35VDC
+ Cl
25pF
Re Re
-ft- +--~
Tl T2
ON930 ON930
~------------
.i
400-HZ FREQUENCY STANDARD-Provides
square-wave output at 7.5 V p-p with fr•·
.._..:...ii~
quency a«uracy within O. I% of 400 Hz from
O to 100 C. To compensate for temperature,
resistor decade boxH are substituted for ~~::.:.;,::__..!.,._-II Gi~E· sv--
base resistors RA and RB and temperature INPUT
runs are made to obtain curve of temperature
vs base resistance to yield symmetrical square
wave at coned frequancy. Two sensistors RECEIVER CALIBRATOR-Provides birdie ovary
and two Hries resistors are then 19lodod to 100 kHz for calibrating short-wave and ama•
track tho curves obtained. Rx, abaut 111 OOth tour radla rocolvers. For optimum accuracy,
of RA+ RSI, Is adjusted for fine-tuning to can be adjusted ta zero-beat against WWV.
exad frequency. Other values are those of Uses crystal and single IC in simple circuit
co1ivontlonal mvbr and power supply.-E. B. "' ·· · operating from'3-V battory. Article gives can-
Nelson, Multlvibrator Adapted As Frequency strudion and adjustment dotails.-D. Lan·
Standard, Elodronlc Dosign, Fob. 17, 1964, p caster, Build the 100-kHz Standard, Popular
94-95. Elecrronin, April 1970, p 56-58 and 105.
Cl
GRID DIP METER-1-mA d-c meter dips when•
ever clrcuit is brou9ht near resonant circuit
osclllatin9 at samo frequency. Once variable 3A5
capacitors In tank of 3A5 oscillator aro call•
brated for froquoncy, circuit can be used to
identify exad frequency at which transmitter
Is puttin9 out 1l9nal. Bl 11 1.5 V and B2 67.5 LI
V. Values: Rl 5.6K; R2 750; R3 1.lK; R4
UK; Cl, C2 0.0025 p.f; C3 100 pf per section;
ZERO ADJUST
C4, C5 51 pf; RFCI 2.5 mH; L1 plug·ln coll
for desired ranee (wlndin9 data given In
book).-R. M. Brown, "104 5implo One-Tube
Prolects," Tab Book1, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa.,
1969, p 149.
+
- - -.....--------,,=-TUNING FORK
400hz
5.6k
3v
~----OUTPUT
400hz
HEP183
J.k FLIPFLOP n n7v
_. LI L-ov
Tl2N335
IC FREQUENCY STANDARD-Accurate, com· l.5k

pact, and simple-to-oporato 100-kHz crystal
oscillator and flip-flop frequency divider for s 47k
checkln9 or aligning frequency 1ettlngs of
receivers. Has harmonic-rich square-wave
outputs at 100 and 50 kHz, from which lower
values can bo obtained by adding various
combinations of divlde-by-2 and divide-by-S FORK-STABILIZED 400-HZ-Uso of tuning fork worked 39 hr on two AA cells, using Vara
IC fllp-flops.-''Tips on Using IC's," Motorola, in place of pulse transformer in blockln9 oscil· Model 6250l-400 fork.-S. V. Scheffel, Tuning
Phoenix, Ariz., HMA-32, 1968. lator converts circuit to portable frequency Fork Drives Portable Frequency Standard,
standard with square-wave output. Circuit Eledronlcs, Nov. 14, 1966, p 122-123.
SCOPE COHHECTIONS
RT GND HORIZ
J3 ~J4 J5
"='
INPUT A INPUTS
R4
R6 500K
J2 J7
cies. May be used with practically any

unknown frequencies are applied to inputs magnitude of signal, so resulting cycloid pat· oscilloscopo.-T. Jaski, Cycloids for Frequency
and R2 or R3 adJustod so phase difference Is terns are much easier to road. loops on Measurement, Raclio-Efectronics, July 1965, p
90 deg. Shifting of phase does not affect cycloid are counted to give ratio of froquen• 6D-61. \
l
FREQUENCY MEASURING CIRCUITS 2'7'1
FET GRID-DIP METER-Performance Is oqulva•

LI lent to tuba-typo circuit. Wiii worlc up to 150
MHz, using plug-In coils. Motor shows dip
when unit is tunod to resonant frequency of
coll to which it is coupled. Book gives con•
structlon details, Including coil-winding data
and calibration procadura.-1. G. McCoy, A
Fiold·Effoct Transistor Dipper, "Tho Mobile
Manual for Radio Amateurs," ARRL, Newing•
ton, Conn., 1968, p 179-182 •
. - - - - - - -....-------<1------0+1sv
2.Zl
n. zo• .. DT
FREQUENCY COUNTER FOR SCOPE-Designed
for uso with kits or loss expensive scopos, to
servo In ploce of calibrated time base found
"'
100•
on more costly instruments, for accurate fre-

quency measurements. Consists of Schmitt trig•
gor Ql and monostable multivibrator Q3, with
Q2 common to both. Circuit triggers at about 8.Zt
lllPUT
2 V. Values of R2 (ohms) and C dopend upon
frequency range, as follows: 0-250 Hz-
15,000 and 0.0072 p.F; 0-2,500 Hz-8,000 and
0.001 p.F; 0-2,500 Hz-1,000 and 300 pf;
0-250,000 Hz-200 and 150 pF.-R. l. Carroll,
Simple Frequency Counter, Elodronics World,
NOTE: TRAllSISTO"s ARI ZNJ44.
July 1969, p 82. OIOOES A"E 1Ntl4
....
.-----..--vvv--.----.----------------
33k
+15~
\ 430
DIP/WAVE METER-Usos mosfot oscillator with

set of sovon plug-In colls to cover range of
FREQUENCY-VOLTAGE CONVERTER-Useful In 1.16 to 110 MHz. With power switch off, cir·
frequency motors and for measuring carrier cuit becomes absorption•typo wavemeter that
frequency drift of r·f signals after damodu· measures resonant froquency of energised
lation. Will operate in audio range. Uses r·f circuits. Needle of meter jumps upward
fot Q3 with phase-shifted inputs to gate and slightly when frequency of oscillator in motor
source, whoroin amount of phaso shift de- matchos that of l.C circuit being measured.
pends on frequency and on setting of pot R. With power switch on, motor measures reso-
With 90-deg phase shift, d-c output voltage nant froquoncy of unenergised r-f circuits.
of phaso-sonsitive detodor Is zoro. At lower Book gives winding data for plug-in coils.
frequency, output is positive, while higher Values: Rl 47K; R2' 1K; R3 lOK: R4 6.8K;
frequencies produce negative output.-J. Cl 50 pf: C2, C4, C5 0.01 µF; C3 0.001 p.F;
Kalinski, FET Phase Detector Can Bo Froquoncy- CRl IN914; QI 3N128; M 100 p.A.-"Hobby
Voltago Converter, Elodronics, July 20, 1970, Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, NJ., HM-90,
p 87--88. p 141.
MC788P
TIME BASE Iii
$400 UNIT MEASURES CB FREQUENCIES-U101
IC'• and Nlxle1 in spoclal circuits to cut cost
while moetlng FCC requirement of 0.005%
measuring accuracy. Combines Motorola and
Fairchild logic units. Control cim.tt1, signal•
conditioning section, and main gate are
shown. Schmitt trigger changes input signal
to pulse train having one pulse for each cycle
MC790P of signal Input. Article gives IC lnterconnec·
tion1 and circuits of the throe power supplies
u1od.-F. E. Cody, A 50.mHz Digital Counter,
Elodronics World, March 1969, p 4o-42 and
14
61.
Z.Zk
NIXIES
(ANODES)
-- .OZJIF
MC:t580
61GllAI. CNPUTOO----)u-............- - - : . 1
*CIRCUIT USES l/4WATT RESISTORS

:tc's lil"D· IT MOTOROLA
-sv.,,..
-!-
CYCLOID ADAPTER FOR CRO-Based on use J4 SCOPE GNO
of two sine waves 90 deg out of phase, to
produce cycloid patterns on 1croen from which
ratio of unknown to known frequency can be
seon at glance. Artlcle gives 14 such patterns.
Technique is comparable to that using' Ussa-
jous figures. One drawback of adapters
shown Is that changing of phase relationship
with Rl or R2 wlll also change amplitude,
distorting pattern and making frequency ratio SI
more ditRcult to rocognlze.-T. Jaskl, Cycloids
for Frequency Measurement, Radio-Eled10nlc1,
July 1965, p 6G-61.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, uso the Index at the back
of this book. Check 0110 the author'• "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 35
Frequency Modulation Circuits
R·F INPUT STAGE-For use in high-quality f.m

broadcast rocoivors. Minimum noise flguro
is 2.2 dB at 100 MHz. Article discusses 2.7pF
~sgll~C-1_._ .__...._--1------+---•~-pF-'----'~~..
theory of circuit design.-G. Wolf, Recent Do·
volopments in Circuils and Transislors for
Television Rocoivors, Eledronic Applications,
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, __
Tho Nelhorlands, Vol. 26, No. 4, 1965-1966, ,.
p 14S-165.
TO <\GC
-12v
IK
56k
I
I
I
e FM CARRIER I
1
OUT I
Im I
I
INPUT !Op.H I
--·~
IOK CHOKE
'=' TO '=' FARADAY

MODULATOR REG.IOV SCREEN
UJT OSCILLATOR
500.HZ DEVIATION OF 2 KHZ-Simple ujt re·

laxalion oscillator is frequoncy-modulaled by
npn lransistor, neither of which are critical
as to typo. Transistor lnpul of 0.45 V at base
sols centor frequoncy at 2 kHz.-D. Learned,
UJT Oscillator Makes Simple FM Modulator,
Electronic Design, May 10, 1965, p 47-48.
680K 560
r--~~~""".,....~~~~~Wi...... -12v
INPUT
t•3SSMc Zz 4.5Mc If
3·10v
rms ~.CJ---.-rrrn..--+.1c TO CONVENTIONAL
4 5Mc 2 STAGE IF
ANO DISCRIMINATOR
H RESONATOR GIVES LARGE f·M SWINGS-

Twintron H·shaped piezoelectric resonator 01-0,• NIPPON
ELECTRIC TYPE
with Q of 4,000 acls wilh out-of-phase trans• 2SA214 (EQUIV.
ducers to make f·m discriminator produce TO 2N384 APROJU
largo change in output for small shift in fre• SHIELDED TO PREVENT OSC RADIATION
quency. Effect is that of ultra-narrow-band DOUBLE-CONVERSION RECEIVER-Crystol In audio distortion caused by norrow j.f pass-
discriminator. Article gives other applications overtone circuit converts 40-MHz first i.f down band. Crystal can bo low-cost CB unlt.-
for Twintrons in tone communication systems. to 4.5 MHz. With crystal control, afc Is not L E. Geisler, Double Conversion Improves
-H. Balcer and J. R. Cressey, H·Shaped Roso• needed. Intended for uso in areas having Transistorized FM Rocoivors, "400 Ideas for
nators Signal Upturn in Tone Telemetoring, many f- stations, whore roceivor must hondlo Design Selected from Electronic Do1l9n," Hay·
Electronics, Oct. 2, 1967, p 99-106. both powerful and woak signals without don Boole Co., N.Y., 1964, p 33-34.
279
247F- +5721l7'V
10.7-MHZ TWO.IC l·F STRIP-Requires triplo-
•r---~~~~I ---=i:-;74 dB r-----,
fili
tuned filter ahead of first IC to provide ra- GEN. 400,.V 1
quirod selectivity. Available gain of strip is 1
65 dB, but limiting by second IC raducos this I
ll ' £0.00I
about 17 dB.-"Linear Integrated Circuits,"
RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 283.
:I 50
l'F
I I
_____ .J L.--
150
+9V
10.7·MHZ CASCODE l·F IC-CA3028A IC r·f

amplifler is used In hlgh 9ain, high-perform•
0
anca cascodo configuration In conjunction

with CA3012 IC f·m l·f ampllflor havln9 sen•
sitlvity af 7.5 p.V. T3 is TRW 22486 and T4
is TRW 22516. Provides 155 mV audio out•
put for 140 p.V lnput.-"Linaar Integrated Cir·
cults," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 217.
-15V
IIOOOpf
I pf
390
~':'
39K 18K
820
FIRST OSCILLATOR FOR DOUBLE SUPERHET-
I pf Q3 passes only fifth harmonic (betwoen 2D9
--------101-----+---i l....-J'Y",f'Y'\o.~ and 219 MHz) of flfth-ovortone crystal oscilla-
CRYSTAL HARMONIC tor. Negative-resistance oscillator Q4 boosts
OSCILLATOR 3K Lz level of fifth harmonic far Injection by L4 into
L =10 TURNS N0.26 3116 DIA
mixer of double-conversion superhotorodyne
1 f.m receiver using monolithic construction on
Lz= 2 TURNS NO. 26 3116 DIA
printed-circuit card.-1. F. Barditch, Adapting
Ls= 7 TURNS NO. 26 3/16 DIA Conventional VHF Equipment to Molecular
L4~ 2 112 TURNS NO. 26 3/16 DIA. Electronics, Electronic Design, Fob. 17, 1964,
TAP I l/4 TURNS p 44-51.
FREQUENCY MODULATION CIB.ClJITS 281
10.7°MHZ IC l·F STRIP-Uses two IC r·f am·

pliflors, ono connodod as cascodo amplillor
having 50 dB voltage gain, and tho other
as differential ampliflor having 42 dB voltage
galn.-"Llnear lntagratod Circuits," RCA, Har•
rlson, N.J., IC-41, p 219.
140 ,.v 44.!lmV l!l.8mV 2Vrms
Ta: Interstage transformer TRW #22486 or equiv.

T.: Ratio detector TRW #22516 or equiv.
::::•35V
22K
I
I
94-WB••
50
(so u R~E)
JI o...
o_ _...
IOK
100
IOK I
I
I
L_ - - _s_o_o---11-::R"'F~T=u~.,., _ _:_j L :__J

500
P1 RF AMPLIFIER Pz
IOOK '=' CARDS IOOK
IF AMPLIFIER CARD
.....--+------ --------+-i
1000
OSCILLATOR
TUNING
·22 l/2V
OVERALL GAIN 20 TO 30db

OVERALL BANOWIOTH::: 20KC Oscillator Injection to i·f card acting as mixer
INDUCTORLESS 94-108 MHZ TUNER-Thre11 tor, with potontiomotors used for tuning. is achieved by proximity.-!. F. Barditch,
1OO·MH1 R·C soloctive amplifiers using mono· Chief drawbackl are distortion and detuning Adapting Conventional VHF Equipment to
lithic construction on printed-circuit cards aro for signal levels above 1 mV, and Instability Molecular Electronics, E/odronic Design, Feb.
combinod with distributed•lnductanco oscllla· with small changes In source Impedance. 17, 1964, p 44-51.
R, 15K CURRENT-CONTROLLED f.M OSCILLATOR-Ql

c, 0.01 p.F is Tl 926 totrodo driving 455-kHz crystal Yl.
c, 0.5p.F Frequency is controlled by faeding input cur-
c, 82pF rent to second baso 82 of tetrode operated
c, 200pF In reverse mode. Can be usod in small f-m
c. 220pF
transmitters and vco applications. Supply
Input c, 0.6p.F
voltage is 4 V. Choose CR1 to allow 0.5
L, 2.6mH
L, mA. Thermistor is 10K Fenwal 4151.-"Sa-
2.6mH
L, 48G-800p.H
loctod Eloctronlc Circuitry," NASA SP-5046,
1966, Government Printing Office, Washing-
ton, D.C., p 18.
lpF
IC FRONT END-Pair of IC r-f ampliflors servos

as complete tunor for 88-108 MHz f-m re-
ceiver. Bonk gives winding data for coils.-
"Llnear lntegratod Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., IC-41, p 221.
•50GB-----
IOp.f
+tOvd·c
IOk
DEGENERATIVE
FEEDBACK
C!..!!.C.!!,!T_ _ _
r+iov d.c -----1
I +tov d·c I +tOv d-c
I I 3.3k
I I
I lOpf
I -
4. 7k I
100k
I +IOv d-c
I I
I
I AUDIO
( OUTPUT
I R4 R3
I +IOvd-c I tok~.--........ zok IOp.f
I I
I
J_IOp.f
I 0.05p.f
I .__._.._ _ _ _ _ __,.<5k If CONTROL

VOLTAGE
I I
I - I +tOv d·c
L--------
TALKtNG TO DOLPHINS-Circuit shown is
- :__ J
spooch. Rosultlng froquoncy•modulatod hu-
audio frequency range. With sawtooth con•
trolled voltage, con be used to swaep output
modification of Wion·bridgo oscillator In audio man speech Is thon similar to whistle signal across ontiro audio spectrum for checking
signal generator. Used to mako audio output of dolphin and can be used to control his frequency response of systoms.-5. L Moshier,
frequency vary with d-c control voltage do· movements. Degenerative feedback circuit FET Oscillator Helps Dolphins Understand
rived from human amplitude-modulated koops output amplitude constant ovor wide Pooplo, Electroni", Fob. 5, 1968, p 85-86.
FREQUENCY :MODULATION CIRCUITS 283
----..::..-o+9V
5-1Bpt(...10pf)
c c,
88-IOiMc~ 2N706 0.5-8pf
.
v.our.
B:t
TAP
La0,25 51
Jlh
T1•13 TURNS No.26IPRIMARYI Re

I 112TURNS No.26IOUTPUTl
CORE • INOIANA GENERAi.
TYPE CF-102
MATERIAi.. 05
-12v
SIMPLE F-M PREAMP-Provides substantial dUAl MODULATION-Modulating both emit·
gain a~~oss 88-108, MHz band, by taking ad~ ter current and collector voltage of transistor
vantage of low noisit and high ealn of tran~ In 100-MHz Hartley oscillator provlcfes good
sistor ., and wlda-bcihd properties of forrite hnearity ancl stability when only small devia-
core iit transfor~er. Gain is about 16 dB tion is required. Dovfation seniltivity is
at center freque11cy and down only 3 di at high, being up to 2.5 MHz por V. Modula-
band li.tiits.-G. Coita, FM Preamp Uses VHF tion can be audio or video.-R. J. Turner,
Ferrite fransform~r, Electronic Deiign, Feb. ~. Stablo f.M Oscillator Offers Sensitivity and
1964, p 51. linearity, ifecrronics, Aug. 18, 1969, p 95.
RYC 1011M
f;M WITH VAkACTOR DIODE-Frequency mod-

ulator giv!'s ~aviation of ~5 kHz abofe and
below 52 Mkz. Voltage l,nput is limited to
2po mV. Article also describes other methods
of using varactors in pl~ce of bulky tuning "i''if.~~
capacitors.-1. Carroll, V!lriable-Capci~itance .,,.. .....
Diodes, Elec1roiiic1 World, July 1969, p 38-40. Lg ';;{i~u:·-s
l/l"llA.
Cu
..."'
;:: Ls
I
Cz c, C4
310 Ito 9·2pF
14pF' 7p~
\
\
'-------- ..-
\
\ C19
..-......--~..,,......,_...___,\ \
l•BpF
THREE-GANG TUNER-First stage uses BF200 \

silicon planar transistor having low noise fac-
tor and excellent signal-handling ability.
Fixed Inductance l1 matches tuned antenna
circuit to this transistor. Oscillator stage
•10
TR3, operating below Incoming signal fre- IOkl\
quency, delivers only 50 mV to base of mixer
TR2, virtually eliminating oscillator harmonics
lnF
at input of mixer without affecting convor·
1lon gain. Discussion In book covers repeot- continuous-beat suppression, spurlous-ro- rejedfon.-''Transistor Audio and Radio Cir-
spot suppression, double-boat sup9resslon, sponH suppression, Imago roioction, and 1-f cuits," Mullard ltd., Landan, 1969, p 146.
TO MIXER
OUTPUT ~HH-<
95 DB GAIN AT 10.7 MHZ-Two IC i·f ampli·

fler stages faod discriminator. Input limiting
lcnee for strip is 30 µ.V. T2 Is TRW 21969
and T3 is 21590.-"Unear Integrated Circuits,"
RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 291.
t9V
TUNER USING DUAL-GATE MOSFET MIXER-

I
I TA7151 mixer is precedod by single-gate mos-
I
I fot r·f ampliflor that provides 13 dB power
I
I gain at 5 mA. Total gain of tuner Is 31 dB.
I
I Requires only three coils, with minimum shield-
I
ALL lltSISTOAS ARE ing. Report gives coil data and complete
114W.IO'll.~,'
I
dosign proceduro.-H. M. Klolnman, Applica-
I
I tion of Dual-Gato MOS Field-Effed Transistors
I
I In Pradical Radio Recoivors, RCA, Somerville,
,I N.J., ST-3486, 1967.
I
I
I
I
I ZZK
-'----- ••• J
0·44V
22K
fio IOK Eio
22K
fio 10 22K
qoo
100 100
ADDEO ADDED
STAGE IOOK STAGE IOOK
CARO NO. I ~ :! X ~~ X 0.032 INCHES) CARO N0.2 ( :~ X ~~ X 0.032 INCHES)
238-270 MHZ R·F AMPLIFIER-Used in oxperi- transistors are 2N700. Stability is fair, but Adapting Conventional VHF Equipment to
mental 243 MHz to 28 MHz R·C tunor-con· gain falls rapidly at higher frequencies if Molecular Electronics, Electronic Design, Fob,
vorter using potentiometers for tuning. All fixed bias supply is used.-1. F. Bardltch, 17, 1964, p 44-51.
FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUITS 285
COMPLETE 10.7·MHZ l·f STRIP-Provides 155.

mV audio signal at output of ratio detector.
Capture ratio varies from 5 dB at 2 µ.V to 1.2
dB above 500 µ.V. Book gives performance TUNER
r-- ·--------- .......... --
!l~P~ ~.
curvos.-"Unear Integrated Circuits," RCA, •9Y
Harrison, N.J., IC·41, p 287.
I :
.
I
I
:....... - ---------··-j
o
:
~9V
I OUTP:T
AF
TWO-STAGE IC l·F STRIP-Combines high gain

with singlo-stage-per•package approach.
Both IC ampliflers are used In differential·
mode connection. Gives l·f sensitivity of 15
µ.V.-"linear Integrated Circuits," RCA, Har•
rlson, N.J., IC-41, p 289.
0.01
,.F
I
l!IOOp.V 600jN
I ~75 v
I I I
3ktl I kA 3ktl
·12V
FET TWO-GANG TUNER-Use of fet In r.f In·

put stage gives excellent suppression of spu•
rlous responses, low noise factor, and high C15 16
input Impedance. Transducer gain of tuner 3tol4 lto7
r:F pF
ranges from 26 to 30 dB ovor f·m band. Os-
cillator and mlxor stages ore conventional,
with oscillator operating below incoming
signal frequoncy.-"Translstor Audio and
Radio Circuits," Mullard ltd., London, 1969, p
156.
500pt
~F_-~M'----11----<........t
INPUT
PULSE TRAIN DISCRIMINATOR-Logic gates MC789P
I -3 convert incoming f·m signal into pulse
train with repetition rate proportional to sig· Rt
nal frequency. Digltol circuit is inherently
quieting, because oil circuits remain inactive !Ok
until they roach threshold voltage much
greater than noise, MC790P flip-flop di·
vides signal frequency by 4 for trlggoring
mono using logic gates 4 ond 5 with Cl and
---------4
R2. Period of mvbr Is 400 ns, less than half +3v
the period of 1·MHz conter frequency for MC790P
f·m signal. Finol goto 6 inverts output and
feeds high-frequency d11emphasls notwork
that converts pulse train to audio signal R3
whoso omplitude vories in proportion to AU 010 OUT PUT ----j 1--+---'\i'VV---'
change in ratio of on ond off times.-R. Bisey, 75k
No Tuned Circuits In IC Wida-Range F-M Dis-
wlO.OOIJLf
crimlnotor, Electronics, Nov. 24, 1969, p 108.
DYNAMIC
MIKE
r-----....------.. . . --"""",..,.,"----o.Ybb ISV
0.05 SIMPLE MODULATOR-Dynamic microphone, In

33K series with negative supply load of stable
transistor oscillator, provld" frequency mod·
ulatlon with dovlotlon of 4 to 6 kHz. Carrier
0.05 frequency is In range of 3 to 4 MHz, depend-
ing on valuos used for L and C In tank cir•
cult. Operation doponds on transistor Inter·
electrode capacitance becoming part of tank
having high L/C ratio.-R. E. Baird, Modulated
IOK Oscillator Makos Simple FM Source, floctronlc
Design, March 30, 1964, p 72.
I
---0 Output
to 680-C)
loocl
I
I
I
(
''
'' '(
T,: Radio Industries #IB300 (ur equivolent)
Tz: Radio Industries #18301 (or equivalent)
COllS
l,: 4 l #18 bus, X{' ID, ¥4 " lt!!ith,

Tums Ratio "" lfi lo 4.
lz: 4 T#18 hus, '<•" ID, ¥4 " le!!ilh,
1' c L1: 1 µII
th 15 L.: 3 l #18 bus, J<t ID, l/4' length
R,: 8.2 kfi R11 : 1 kn C1: 10 pf C,z: 3.3 pf

Rz: 33 kO R1z: 120 n Cz: 30-45 11f Cu: 30-45 pf
I
F-M TUNER WITH l·F STAGE-Uses four npn
R1:
R4 :
1 kn
12 kn
R11 : 330 n
R,., 10 kn
C1: 3.3 pf
C4: 0.001 p.f
C14: 10 pf
c,,, 0.001 p.f
planar silicon ~anslstors. Power gain is 54 R,: 2.7 ill R11: 3.9 ill C.: 10 pf C,.: 0.01 p.f
dB. Image rejection at 98 MHz ls 50 dB. R.: 1 kn R16: 1.2 kn C.: 30-45 pf c,,: 0.01 pJ .I
R1: 330 n R11: 120 fi C,: 0.001 p.f c,,, 0.01 p.f
l·f input voltage V2 Is 1.5 mV and output R,: 330 0 Ru: 330 fi Ca: 3.3 flf c,., 0.01 p.F
V3 is 19 mV.-Proforrod Somlconductors and
Components, Texas Instruments, Dallas, Toxos,
Rt: 15 kfi 119: 10 kn C.: 240 pf Czo: 2.2 pf I
R10: 2J kn Rzo: 3.9 ill C1o: 0.82 pf C11 : 0.01 p.f
CC101, 1968, p 1030. All resislcrs Yi W, Im percent tolerance. C11 : 0.001 p.f C22 : 0.01 p.f
FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUITS 28'7
Dz PULSE FREQUENCY MODULATOR-R3 varlH

22 -9• repetition frequency of fast pulses linearly
-9•
-j 1, r- from 1,300 to 2,600 pps. Pulse width Is 10
µ.s. D1 operates as fast switch that turns
Q4 on and off to produce output pulses.
"_xy}
Article elves desi9n equation, performance
curves, and detailed operation.-T. W. Slan,
Tunnel Diode Speeds Pulte Frequency Modu-
lation, Efodronics, Jan. 22, 1968, p 73.
'------"t---OUTPUT t•IOpm
Ct
O.Olpf n D1
IN3853
10.7-MHZ MEDIUM-GAIN l·F IC-First IC is

connocted as differential ampllfler, ond noxt
serves as wide band f.m i·f amplifier. Book
gives transformer data.-"Linear lntagrated ~--------~ IK
Circulll," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 220.
I
400,.v 2V1m1
RI Ra Rll RIO
471C 11.&K 47K IOK
Ql·Qll•2N697
-- R8 RB
CT
.l,11F
121( IK
--
SCA BACKGROUND-MUSIC ADAPTER-Permits
Source of power can be 6.3-V 1-A filament
tronsformer connected to terminals at upper
tuner i1 not turned off for this position of
function switch of set. ·. Input jack should be
listening to continuous music uninterrupted by right. Adapter 11 conneded between detec- conneded to sot thrau9h Isolation resistor of
commercials or news, on f·m 1ubcarrler that tor ond R·C deemphasis network of f·m re- about 3,000 ohms, with exact value depond·
11 offset from re9ular carrier frequency of f-m ceiver. Output of adapter moy be fod either Ing on receiver used.-W. F. Splichal, Jr.,
station by 67.5 kHa:. Called SCA for to separate amplifier and speaker or to aux· Simple SCA Adapter, Popular Electronics, June
Subtldlary Communications Authorization. illary Input lack at roar of sot, provided f·m 1970, p 49-52.
CHAPTER 36
Gate Circuits
+250 +150V
Vz
l,•fln_
~n--~1- ........~~~~ FASTER FALL TIME-Use of zoner diodo as
I switch gives low output impedance for both
I
•.I. positive and negative excursions of gating
TCL pulse. This offsets shunt capacitance in load,
I
to give fast transit limos with conventional
~ circuit and components. Article gives oqua•
lion for fall times; for values shown, it is 0.9
µs, ond 0.5 µs for riso limo. Capacitor
values are not critical.-B. I. Wolff, Gate Gen•
orator Arrangement Speeds Up Fall Time,
-150V
Electronic Design, Oct, 26, 1964, p 53-54.
F£T BLOCKS SPIKES-When control signol

switches from 9 V to ground, drain resist• tl2v de
ance of fet 03 drops from several mag to VOLTS
90 ohms and cleanly transfers input signal
to output. Arrangement eliminates differen•
tiatod spikes and other spurious signals nor- R& INPUT
mally arising In bidirectional analog gates 390k
during switching. C2 provides common•
mode rejection of small differential pedestal Dt CONTROL +9v
spikes passed by Miller capacitance of 03.-
IN702 PEDESTAL Ovl--"-~--------
3.Zv
T. J. Davis, Analog Gato'• Output 11 Cleaned
Up By FET, Electronics, Nov. 25, 196B, p 81,
C4 OUTPUT
~ltµ-f-IVVtw~~~--t--~2-N-3-72-9--+--~J OUTPUT
Ra I
2.Zk
II
R10 ~
220
.~
(
J
288
l
GATE CIRCUITS 289
@ @ ®
FET ANALOG GATE-With Crystalonlcs CAG7
package having oxtornal components shown, ------- J---------- ----,
1
provides olthor spdt or dpst action, Resist-
ance when ON Is maximum of only 6 ohms.
Turn-on and turn-off times are both maximum
of 1.5 t£s.-Hybrid IC's, Crystalonlcs, Cam•
bridge, Mass., 1969.
,,.
Q) v... ,
'
I
I
I
I
___ .J
'
... ©
DUAL FET ANALOG GATE-Crystalonics CAG13

paclcago provides spst action with 5CIO-ns
switching speed, brealc beforo-malco, and in·
0
herent zero offset voltage. Handlos pesitivo

and negative 9-V signal levels directly from
most logic circuits. Maximum ON resistance
is 50 ohms at room temporature.-Hybrld IC's,
Crystalonlcs, Cambrldgo, Mass., 1969.
+15v
M05m MULTIPLEXING GATE-Paralleling of
mosfot's Ql and Q2 Improves coupling char-
1k acteristics of linear gate and cancels splices
Q4
produced by turn-on pulso. Useful In multi·
100k 2N3906
plexing or sampl-nd-hold applications.
Resistance of linear gate Is 200 ohms when
0.01 p.f on and 10 meg when off.-J. M. Firth, Two
I'· o,
s 0
MOS FET's Form Transient-Free Linear Gate,
ffedronie1, March 16, 1970, p 89.
2N4352
INPUT OUTPUT
2N3904
07
s 0
c
O.Otp.t 4.7k
.
I' 2N3904
4.7k too
100k Os 4.711
..rt:.!!
GATE
820
-15v
290 ELl;CTRONIC CIRCUITS ¥ANU4-L
--------<J •1!1\1
16• 15•
U•146
SIGNAL IN 0.1)1 F
LINEAR FET GATE,...Can also serve as alee.
trenlt 1wl,ch for amplitude modulator.-J. H.
2V P-P 'V\JV ~~ . .......,._, Wulelc, Jr. and M. E. McGee, Field·Effed Tran•
slstor Clrc11ih, Electronics Wqrld, May 1967,
p 32-33 and 75.
IOOk
-ISV
SG•22 +IOV
CR•2 ~ f. •••
Oz u LLb+.;
0
l!N4065
l1£HC
-I i.0.81£IOC
+15v 0 .._, I
·6-;LJ 0--"112""20""'4---1-1
BLOCKING OSCILLATOR AND GATE-Produces

standard olltput pulse only when input sig•
nal1 are 11pjilled simultaneously to both tran•
sisters. Gaie at lnppt 1 must be wider than
O.B•µs outpllt pulse, in order ta koep Q1 con•
ducting until output pulse Is terminated.
Diode prevents tri99or feedback from Input 2
I Into transformer.-A. W. Zinn, Bloclclng Os·
PRECISION ANALOG GATE--Usos Fairchild cillator·And Gate Produces Standard Output
p.A.7'19 Jpamp with fot switches In feedback Pulse, "400 Ideas for Design Selected from
loop. Gate Is opened and closed by alter• Electronic D•tlgn," Hayden Boole Co., N.Y.,
natoly driving the two switches 02 on and 1964, p 77.
off. Circuit operates as unity-gain inverting
ampliffer having euontially zero on-gate re·
si1tance, Isolation between Input signal and
load is nearly perfect.-J. F. Giffard and M.
Mar~kula, linear IC'1: Part 51 Ins and Outs
of Op Amps, Electronics, Nov. 27, 1967, p
84-.-93. .------------------0 +Yee (1-sv)
Rb Hk
•MK
%5140
ZS140
t------o OUTPUT
IOmA Max.
ZSt40
ZSIZO ZSIZO
DTL NOR-ProvidL fan-out of 11 for low-
ZTX300 (BCWIO}
veltago low•powe~ noncritical dlodo•translstor
logic appllcatlonl.-"E-Ll11e Transistor Appli•
~atlon1," Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, lanes., Ens·
land, 1969, P a. 4Tk
0-------------~-------------a.---------- ....----~· 0
GATE CIRCUITS 291
AC
SIGNAL
INPUT
+12v
IOK
5.6K
15K a1
DC 2Nl308
INPUT GATING A-C WITH D·C-Simple transistor ar•
rangomont achieves positive 9ati119 of 2·V
rms a-c signal by 12-V d-c Input. Blocked
signal output is 46 dB down.-T. A. Radomski,
22K 220 150 Transistorized Switch Provides A·C Signal
Gato, Elodranic: Detlgn, Jan. 18, 1965, p 49-
50.
-12v
(al
INPUT I
.L 200pf
r- - ----------,
20k I
+6v I
IN914 I
01 02 I
2N2894 2N2894 2N918 2N918 I
I
13k I
I
FJ!;ITIVE C1 I
CHANNEL I
100pf
R1 39k 68 I
I
I
Rz 39k
200pf
se II 30
NEGATIVE I
CHANNEL C2 I
13k I OUTPUT
I
I
IN914 I
-Gv
I
I
I
I
OUTPUT OF •. ~ ~ I
POSITIVE CHANNE.h..,,.,_r-P. SEcs-...._ __ 20k I
I
I
OUTPUT OF
NEGATIVE CHANNEL
L...-_ _ _,! T200pf
L-----------...J
I
INPUT2 DIRECT-COUPLED.
PULS~
DRIVER STAGES
RESULTANT inputs 1 and 2 acting on mvbr's Q1-Q2 and box) to handle loads of up to 30 ohms.-M.
Q3..Q4, which also sharpen pulse by holding McGee, Symmelrlcal Gato Delivers Narrow
PULSE.SHARPENING GATE-Width of output rise and fall times to 1011 than 5 ns. Two Pulses to Fan-Oul, Electronics, Dec. 11, 1967,
pulso is determined by time interval botwoen d-c ampliflers are used as drivers (dashed p 99.
+25V REGULATED 0 TO 5 V DC ANALOG INPUT
ZS140
FROM CONTACTS
ON DISK -IMEG
)
IN458
... t----OOUTPUT
POSITIVE·ONLY GATE-Responds only to

poaks abovo zero voltaso lovol, to provont
frequency-doubling of sisnals picked off muf. KS3TB
tiphaso sonoroting disk. Used with elec-
tronic commutator disk having 32 contads ZTX300 (BCWIO)
around edgo to provide gating for 32 chan•
nols.-J. P. Spacer, Jr., Pick Off Multiphaso
Signals From a Disk, Efedronfc Dotlgn, July 471t
19, 1965, p 2~23.
u--------------.. . ---------+------oo
HIGH NOISE IMMUNITY-Provides d-c nolso
Immunity of 4 V minimum, for oppllcatlons
INPUT Ci Rz having switching transients in o-c llno and
O--j1---.----'..,.,.,----.....-------oouTPUT stray masnotlc or electric flolds. lntondod
~ IOI<
~~
for low-speed systems. Maximum fan-out Is
t 0.-''E-Llne Transistor Applications," Ferranti
ltd., Oldham, Lanes., Ensland, 1969, p 10.
'+iovTL
6.BK
-IOV
VIDEO CONTROL GATE-Whon base of tran•

:slstor Is made negative by square-wave con•
.
i trol signal, gate passes both posltive-golns
and negative soing video si9nols. When
I
0
boae Is made positive, sate Is closed. At·

tenuatlen of 20.kHz sisnal then exceeds 45
dB.-R. Vokoun, Bipolar Video Gate Needs
Na Balancing Circuit, Efedronic Design, May
11, 1964, p 86-87. +24Y
240
PHASE·LOCKED BURSTS-Deloy-line gon•rator Lt
circuit is used to produce pulse bursts whoae RGSBA/U IN3016A
phases ore lecked to start of sating cycle.
Bursts of from t to 10 pulses, each 25 ns
wide, are obtained by increasing spacing of
gating pulses from 40 to 490 ns In 50.ns In•
cr•ments. Q2 and Rt control time lnt•rval
of oscillations. Circuit will work at 211-MHz
- R1
-
repetition rate. May be used to trlee•r 100
tlmo bas• of sampling oscilloscope.-J. Kar111,
Simple Gatin9 Yields Phaso•Lockod Pul.. OUTPUT son
AAi!l3 TERMINATION
Bursts, Efoctronlcs, Jan. 6, 1969, p 96. 16k
- 02
BSY63
SYNC OUT
s, AAi!13
'
GATE OIBOUITS 293
I
~mi
I
l
I
[zss73e I
II
I I
14 HYBRID GATE TRANSMISSION LINE

~
I
TRANSMISSION-LINE DRIVE-Uses third of ternal transistor and one resistor to drive Range of Siiicon lnte9ratod Circuits, Ferranti
Ferranti ZSS73B hybrid gate with single ex• 150.0hm transmission line.-Tho Mlcronor II Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., Englond, 1967, p 64.
2kJl lk.C'l 2.4k.C'1 lk.C'l
_!LNPUT 2111976 lµF

(t$J R1
- +
a, o,
!1olk.C'1
+ lµF
+
1.,F
10k.C'1
HIGH-SPEED FET ANALOG GATE-Crystalonlcs
CAGIO package provides spst adion with
switching speeds of 50 ns working directly GATE ..1.
from loglc. Maximum ON resistance Is about
INPUT
~v
50 ohms.-Hybrid IC's, Crystalonlcs, Cam- FAST.PULSE TRANSMISSION GATE-Operates Q3 for transmitting Input signal to output.
bridge, Mass., 1969. In current-switching mode to provide reliable Gate rejodlon Is 100:1 for 1.5-ns pulses.-
isolation of signal Input from output when J. D. Nickell, High.Speed Pulse Transmission
goto is turned off. Positive pulae of about Gate, EEE, July 1967, p 130.
1.5 V at gate input cuts off Q2, to tum on
HIGH-VOLTAGE SWITCHING-Fol pair Inserted

at virtual ground Input of opamp permits
handling signal voltages limited only by max• c
lmum signal swing of opamp and Its slew 20pf
rate. Up to ten pairs of these fet switches
may be stacked to give ten-input commutator
for ten Input sl9nals. Wiii operate at switch·
Ing rates up to 100 kH1.-F. J. Honey, DTL/ 10k
nL Controls Large Signals in Commutator,
Electronics, March 16, 1970, p 90.
±f5v INPUT
OUTPUT
+&v M ----+"'I
ov ...J L-
COMPLEMENTARY
GATING SIGNALS
+6v
DY -u-
TYPICAL (10 UNITS)
CHAPTER 37
High-Voltage Circuits
8+
300V
. 500K 500K
1,000.V PULSES-Combining of avalancho

transl1tors a1 shown, for charging capacitors
in parallel and di1charging thom into load in
serlo1, permits use of lower-voltage transls•
tors for high-lovol pulse output stages.
-.: f\IKv Load can bo placed at elthor end af circuit,
to give choice of polarlty.-E. J. Snyder and
A. Whetstono, Serios-Parallel Connection Pro•
50 ) "'-
duces High-Level Pulsos, Electronic Design,
Dec. 6, 1965, p 52.
I
ALL TRANSISTORS NSlllO
I
WIDE-RANGE INDICATOR-Neon gives visual
crz:
indication of presence of voltages from 90 to
4,000 V. At about 500 V, circuit becomes
rela:ication 01eillator and lamp will ftash Vl
brightly.-W, G. Miiier, "Using and Under- A057B
standing Miniature Neon Lamps," H. W. Sams ffs • 4·5001(12W RESISTORS IN SERIES
& Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 19. ...
BYXIO
All co;xxitors ~!>nF'. 311V
+16tV
16 KV D..C FROM 4.5·V BAmRY-Doveloped without light source. Ono application is for•
for Muilard 6914 diode Image converter used gory dotectlon. Power output is 320 µW.-K.
in converting Input pattern of near-infrared A. Cook, Diode Imago Converter Tubes and
radiation Into visible output pattern for vis· Their Applications, Mu/lard Tochnical Com•
ual observation or photographic recording municarions, Sept. 1967, p 256-260.
(
294 I
HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUITS 295
c
=
.530.1\
:~Mn
STABILIZED lO·KV P.C SUPPLY-Output volt-
-9V
age is adjustablo over rango of .S.10 lcV by
adjusting reforonco current at input stage of
d·c amplifier. Maximum load currant is 1
mA d-c. Voltage regulation Is 5 V, or 0.05%
at 10 lcV. 9.y st.ablUzed negative supply and
19°V positive regulated supply operato from
a-c lino and furnish operating voltoge1 for
Vol\ng~ UYlttrlier
drive inverter, output Inverter, and d·c am•
pliflor. Voltage multipllar steps up output of
inverter to required 10 lcV, and foods baclc
portion of output through attenuator to d-c
amplifier that acts on input Inverter to pro-
vide regulation. Report describes operation
In detail, and gives both design and constivc-
tion data.-IOfcV Stabilised E.H.T, Supply
Using Silicon Transiston, Ferranti Ltd., Old·
ham, lanes., England, No. 24, 1964.
5~
<.'SV
-.
JI FENCE CHARGER-Solid-stato circuit oporatos

oithor from 45·V battory or a-c: lino. In ad·
DI
11£D ditlon to convontlonal charging of singl-lro
112 Ill fonco enclosing horse or cow pasturo, may bo
IOA llC 114 usod to koep dogs out of molal garbago can
2511 insulatod from ground by dry wood or plastlc.
+
Delivors disturbing but harmless olodrlcal
C2 sting to any parson or animal touching
Z!ICl)IF
charged metal, and should thorofore be turned
117YAC off on garbage colloction day. If soil Is vory
ri.\\o. dry, molsturo may be roqulrod for good
ground contact.-L E. Greonloo, Eloctric Fonco,
All 119 "Eloctronic Exporlmontor's Handbook," Ziff·
220.n IMEG. Davis, N.Y., 1969 Spring Edition, p 15-18.
BLIC
J2
KRYPTON ARC DISCHARGE-Usod for c-w pulse, hi9h voltage qcron arc lamp drops be-
90kSl pumping and other applications roquirln9 low 200 V d-c: 10 diodes in main supply cir-
continuous operation. Requires powor· sup- cuit conduct and operate lamp continuously.
ply having high d-c: Impedance or providing Provides both infrared and ultraviolet output.
3kVdc constant currant. Once d·x xenon or lcryp• -DC Xonon and Krypton Arc Discharge Tubes,
40mA
SUPPLY ton arc discharge tuba is trl99erod by 20-kV EG&G, Boston, Mass., No. 1008, 1968.
ADDITIONAL BALLAST TO
MAKE TOTAL SUPPLY
IMPEDANCE 5 Sl kV
/
INTERNAL
IMPEDANCE STARTING DIODES EG8GTM-ll
(3kV INVERSE
250-300Vdc 10-SOSl TRIGGER MODULE
30A·60A) DC ARC
30-&0A OR
SUPPLY EQUIVALENT
16µF 15-20 kV
TRIGGER PULSE
400 ENERGY STORAGE

1000 voe
KRtrRON·TRIGGERED SPARK GAP-Four-olo·
mont cold-cathode gas-flllod switch tube pro-
tM
o-~,.,.,,.,,..,...~.... CAPACITOR I µ.F
~~..-~~E-...:...
FlASHTUBE
duces high peak current for short duration 22M R TRIGGERED
through trigger transformer, for developing SPARK GAP
2D to 30 lcV pulso for triggorlng spark gap
or xonon ftashtube.-Krytrons-Cold Cathodo
Switch Tubes, EG&G, Boston, Mass., KR·IOO,
T~ii
153
lC
1968.
SPARK-GAP SWITCH-High-voltago tri99er

transformer turns oh spark gap with 5 to 25
lcV pulse when ca~acitor discharges through
primary. Whan gdp is triggered, full lD kV
of main storage capacitors Is applied to two
ftashtubos, making them tire. Stora90 ca- FU!IH TUBES
pacitors thon begin char9in9 automatically
for next flash. Protoctlvo relays short stor•
ago and trl9911r capacitors through appro-
priate resistors wh~n power Is off, whllo relay
in primary of trldger transformer prevents
accidental flrin9 of; lamps. Used in 1tudyin9
oxcitod-st~to proceilsos in orga_!'ic molecules.
-D. N. Bailey and D. M. Horculos, Flash IOVAC I
Photolysis-A Technique for Studying Fast
Reactions, Journal of Chomlco/ Education, Fob. KILO VOLT
1965. METER
HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUITS 297
I( o: " 111:
32o -.J\_28V-.r
56V'=~~--_h e-
6
----
0 25p.s 0 25p.s
.I
28V_
p Ill IN914
Plt):~3V
PUl.SE GENERATOR------..
0 IOp.1
SCR ELECTRIC FENCE CHARGER-Generates 28 V TO 3,500 V-Only one 1cr Is needed,

1-ms pulse once per socon.d, with short-circuit becau10 resonance of transformer primary
current and total energy limited to safe value forces scr to turn off. Pulse generator for
by charaderistlcs of capacitor and automotive triggering scr can be operated at up to 3
Ignition coil used. Power transformer isolates kH1. load capacitor can be copacltanco of
a-c lino from fence circuit. Will easily handle pulse-forming network if load is thyratron
quarter-mile of fence. Power consumption is for switching energy from network to 200-
about 20 W. Grounding of line by sunflowers ohm load. With fixed reslstlvo load, feed-
or other plants will not damago charger but back from load to pulse generator for chang•
will cause rfl and reduce strength of voltage Ing frequency can bo used ta regulate lead
pulses. Dired short will blow fuse In primary voltago.-W. B. McCartney and E. 0. Uhrig,
of transformer. Neon flashes once per second Inverter U1e1 Only One Siiicon-Controiied
to Indicate charger is worklng.-E. T. Hanson, Roctlflor, Eledronk De1ign, Nov. 23, 1964, p
SCR Eledrlc Fence Charger, Radio-Eledronics, 61-62.
July 1965, p 35-37.
20V AT 5AlolP
v8a6V
r R1
3K
Rs
500
R4
3K
042 C3
IOOnf
2kV
J Cz
3µf
Oz
2Nl771A
c, c,
2.2µf IOp.
2-KV SUPPLY FOR CRT NUMERICAL DISPLAY- ARC-LAMP STARTER-Simple scr power supply
Usos d-c converter oporatln9 at 20 kHr. with boosts 20-V d-c Input to 20 kV a-c for starting
transistor BD121 to step up 6-V d-c supply arc lamp having 2-cm gap. Inexpensive
to 2-kV accelerating voltage required by crt standard auto Ignition coll, modified to give
for figure-I numerical charador generator. required 200:1 ratio, was used for 11. Duty
Diodes D40 and D41 are BAY39 and other cycle is loss than 10%, permitting use of less
diodes are BY153.-A. P. Tanis, Numerical exponsivo scr's than those shown.-D. Duffy,
Display with Bar Matrix Character Generator, low-Cost SCR Multlvibrator Yields 20 Kv from
Eledronk Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept., 20-V Input, "400 Ideas for Design Selected
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nethorland1, Vol. from Electronic Design," Haydon Book Co.,
27, No. 2, 1966-1967, p 73-83. N.Y., 1964, p 214.
OPTOELECTRONIC OVERLOAD PROTECTION-

Intermittent short-circuit In tubo, or other over•
load that causes increase in average current
through neon lamp of Raysistor, reduces re-
sistance of its photocell, to energize low-cur•
rent relay which in turn pulls in high-voltage
vacuum relay to open circuit and prevent
Low Cutt"n damage to components. Rotpon1e time is
Set1shiwt
Ael01 = rapid because current flows continuously
through lamp circuit. For higher load cur•
rent, change to CK1108 having filamentary
lamp.-Raysistor Optoelectronic Devices, Ray•
theon, Quincy, Man., 1967, p 15.
+10,000VOLTS
POCKEL CELL PULSER-Two EG&G Krytron 9a1·

82 flllod switch tubes generate up to 10.lcV
MtG
pulses at repetition rates from 50 to 750 pps
R5 for switching pockel cell crystals. Output
IMEG
coax serves as energy storage capacitor in
82
c, serios with Rl, to permit locating pulser sev-
500pl
MEG eral feet away from cell.-Krytron Pockel Cell
+----I~ TRIGGER IN Pulser, EG&G, Boston, Mass., No. KN·22, 1968.
IMEG
1000 VOLT PULSE
~
R7
CRI R2
I.SM 1000
l1Q
2N4198
RI
22M
ll&V SIGNALITE
2N4198
QC Al63 B
I '-"'V<.'--+---+---'<:Y SCR
R3
IOM
Cl C2 +
2N4198 20µ.F
0.047µ.F
IOOV 250 v
2N4198
GAS IGNITION-Timing circuit, switching cir·
cult, and high-voltage transformer, In unit
X(NON fLASH TUBE called Electronic Match, produce 18,000.V
GENERAL ELlCTRIC
TYPE ~FT 100 1parlc at gap once par second, as substitute
for pilot flame in gas appliances.-F. Egan,
Whether It's Cold or Whether It's Hot • • • ,
Electronic Design, April 12, 1967, p 17-22.
0.1
MUL Tl·OUTPUT FIBER OPTIC
.n.
6 kV 2N4198 510
ALBION OPTICAL LB
TYPE ~71F
PEAK
POWER 0.1 FLASH·TRIGGERED SERIES-SCR HIGH-VOLTAGE
SOURCE
SWITCH-Xenon flash ading on ten phota-
tran1istors through flbor optics provides simul-
2N4198 taneous Jriggoring of ten scr's In series, for
applying 6,000-V power pulso to load,
I
2N4198
Triggering with light glvos simultaneous firing,
without Inductive delays occurring with con•
vontlonal wiring, and also eliminato1 need
for costly special trigger transformers to
handle high voltages involved. Used in high·
voltage crowbars and pulse-farming net•
2N4198 worlcs.-"Semiconductor Power Circuits Hand·
boolc," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-
23.
HJGH•VOLTAGE (JiltCtTITS 299
E
ltN
•I 1"2~
w r
2·KV PULS!wGENEllATING SWIT~H-When 5.y
pul10 Is apjtllod tq lnpllt to turit oil
Qj, ro.
malnlng f.ailr mesa transistors (cetnnoctod In
serlt1 and oporatinq In avalancl10 mode) are
turlled oh fb servo a~ 11conomlcal hleh·volldge
switch f;r 9enereatln9 2·kV ne9ativo.goih9
output pulso.-5. A. llltterman, A l•KV O.toA
Switch Uses MesC1 Ttilnslstors, fl11ctronlc De·
RI tign, Oct. 11, 1967, p 102.
47 +2W
Ol•Q2•Q3•Q4•05 •2N5095
HIGH VOLTA!tl: FOR l!llON 5101\fS.fiost,

size, and wel1ht are all much leH th_!!" for
LI CR3 C4 convelltlonal 60.Hz Atfpup ttdhsfotllitr.
25mH GEA148 I
r----...,
CR4 1
Rectified 60.H• llno voltape Is collvertid to
1,.F 1,000 Hz with Kr invirttr, and #erritf!-core
R2 400V I I
I transformer Tt t~en utod fo stop lrbltd.o up
louTPUT : ta deslNd value al t,06o Hz. t# doe ilutplit
I I la required, 111,nlum rectifier stack ti.\ 1ht1uld
I be telectod ac,!Jrding to c14rrent arid volta9e
I I
L----..J req11lrements. For 7,500 V d-c e1tid '~plcl·
Cl tlve load lip t9 4 mA d.C In half.wave •lrtlllt,
100,.F CR4 can be le11eral Elettrlc 6R59PH2;l>PHi1.
200V Can also l:lp Uttd for eleclrf!tlatlc ptllclj!ltlitbrs
a11d copying machln111.-A. Adom, Hlgli Volt·
Ilg• Powot Supply for lbw Current Ajtpllta•
ti6ht, General Electric, Syr9cute, N.Y., No,
201.18, 1966.
FLYaACK TRAN~FORMER
I KV FROM PEN~IGHTS-Usitd In Mafsl!thlta
1.lol1tch-dla9oncd tv operlltlng from S.V · pltll•
ll9ht bottorles. PoMype flybqck ttllKlfqt!fter
cgro prevent• lndudion of hl9h.valtoge pul111
Into other ~lrculh. Voltau• multlpllcatlon
TOCRTGRID2 consltta of pro9tt1slve s~orip9 and tralUf•r
of charge from lar9er Input capacitor& to
1111all1r outp11t tapacitors,~R. Sdtakl c111d IC.
+29v
Io.001sl'r Uno, Low-Power Design It Heart of Pen!ltht-
TUNING VOLTAGE ":" Powered Ml11l·fv, Eledtonic1, Juno 8, 1970,
p 1116-113.
D1 D4 f40Y
RQ29A BAX16 TO VIDEO OUTPUT MODULE: EXO 22VXOI
*'"'
TO DEFLECTION YOKE
HORIZONTAL BLMlKING PULSE ~

0.001¢ "-~~~~~.~~~~-
CRT FILAMENT
r
":"
3,000pf 2,500pf 2.000pf l,500pf ~OOOpf 500pi
[2_ _ _
+sv
HIGH VO~TAGE TRANSFORMER ANO RECTIF1£Ff
TO-..-.ofc._
5.6K
TO DEFLECTION YOKE
100.f'f
I
":"
BOOST CAPACITOR
CHAPTER 38
Hobby Circuits
C1 02
.0511130 v HEP 54
B
8 !l
c
B 01
HEP57
E
C2 PANIC BUTTON-Pross button and get true

5011115 v siren wall. Article gives construction detoils.-
+ "Solld State Projects Manual," Motorola, Phoe-
nix, Ariz., 1968, p 17-20.
"------1• 1l11i-----
9V
ASTAllL.E M.V. FUP.Fl.CP#I FLIP·,l.OP#Z
- 9Y
sn
4 lk
TCA
PL2
PLS
Al.L TAANSISTORS-ZN404 ALL DICDES•IN34/A DR INllB DR EQUIV. ALI. PL'S-#48, ZVAT llOmA
are inhibited, to ellminato unwanted decimal
CRAPS-Thra..tago binary counter drives touching alligator clip to terminal. Breakln9 numbers 0 and 7. For actual game, swikh can
seven pilot lomps arranged Hice dots on dice, circuit mokos counter stop at one of Its six be actuated twice to simulate rolllne two dice,
Counter is driven by free-running multlvlbrator posslblo states, In truo random fashion cor• or two Identical circuits can be bullt.-A. L.
(above 60 kHz) that is started and stopped responding to rolling of hand-thrown dice in Plovy, Electronic Dice, Elodronics World, Oct.
by single-polo "1omentary·throw switch or by crap gamo. First and ol9hth states of counter 1968, p 82-84.
!
300
HOBBY CIRCUITS 301
CRAP GAME-Gate and driver circuits shown

are used to drive seven lamps at upper right
that flash randomly for few seconds and then
stop at pattern conespondlng to numbers
from 1 to 6 on dice. Eliminates problem of
loaded dico, Beek gives construdion details.
R& -"Hobby Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison,
N,J,, HM-90, p 131.
14
INPUT
CR 1 through CR, = silicon· rectifier, SK3020

type IN270 R1 through Re 1200 ohms, 1/2
I 1 through 11 = any 12-volt lamp watt, 10%
drawing 150 mil-
liamperes or less R1 through Ru = 680 ohms, 1/2
Qi through Q1 = transistor, RCA watt, 10%
+
- Bl
T22•112V
OBNOXIOUS NOISEMAKER-Q1.Q2 start with

loud low-pitch wail that Increases In frequency
to very high shriek, then suddenly drops back SI
to low tone and starts over again. Q3-Q4
provides sufficient ampllflcation for speakor to
disturb ontiro apartment building. May bo
used either to break loaso or coiled hospitali-
zation for broken nose.-5. Braskend, ''Tho
Lease-Breaker" and ''The Drip/' Popular Elec•
Ironies, Feb. 1968, p 33-35.
TO TRACK
MODEL TRAIN CONTROL-Provides smoother
control of speod than conventional wlro-
Rl wound rheostat. D-c output of about 25 V Is
Xl,X2,X3,X4 • 1N2482 SPEEO CONTROL >4-- - - ' applied to tracks through miniature self-
Bl •SYLVAN IA El£CTRIC 10000 rosotting circuit breaker Bl .-J. P. Shields,
fM.B.·215 'lW "Novel Electronic Circuits," H. W. Sams & Co.,
Tl • STANCOR P-6469 Inc., Indianapolis, Ind., 1968, p 15.
301 ELEOTRONIO CIRCUITS MANUAL
Qi = transistor, RCA SK300S

Qi = transistor, RCA SK3020
RUNNl"'G OSCILLATOR FOR SLOT MACHINE- R1 .. 1500 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
l!lectronlc 1lot machine u11s three vertical col· R2 "" 47 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
u111ns of ll9ht1 ln1teod of splnnin9 wheels. Ra "' 1000 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
Oaclllator cltcult shown Is used in two ver·
slo111, a1 runnln9 oscillator producing pulsos
R4 "' 15,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
at rapid rate when power is applied, and for
R, "' 4700ohms, 1/2 watt,10%
thrtt •lop osclllaton each producin9 a pulte Stop Oscillator (3 req'd)
about once tvery 4 s but at different ratOI C 1 .. I00 microfarads, I5 volts,
far 111 la119 as power Is on. Book tells how electrolytic
ta connoct oscillators with tllp-flops, NAND Qi .. transistor, RCA SK3005
gatet, shift regl1ter1, and lamp• for completely
randorn tcorlng actlon.-"Hebby Circuits Man· t---+--..j,3 Q2 .. transistor, RCA SK3020
R 1 "' I 000 ohms, I /2 watt, I 0%
val,'' RCA, Harrlaon, N.J., HM-90, p 121.
'-----~~ . R z "' 68 ohms, I/2 watt, 10%
R, "' lOOOohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
R. "' 27 ,000 ohms, 33,000 ohms,
Running Oscillator (1 req'd) 39,000 ohms, one in each of 3
C1 "' 2 microfarads, 15 volts, electro· oscillators
lytic Rs .. 470 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
R1
R3
01 NPN Tr•n1111or
02 PNP Tran1i1tor
Rl,R3 68.000 Il RHistor lhw•ll ll)!j,
R2 22,000 Il Resistor ~wan Ill'!.
R4 47 n Resi11or ~wall Ill'!.
Cl !O µF 12V Elocuolyllc
C2 0.05 µ.F Oise. Ceramic
Cl IOOµF 12V Elecuoty11c
SIREN-Operates from 9.y transistor radio bat·

tery, driving speaker to produce piercing wall
that rises and falls. Can be used as home
or 9arage burglar alarm, auto theft alarm, ar
for onlivonlng dull parly.-Calectro Handboolc,
GC Electronics, Rockford, Ill., FR-69-C, p 42.
a::w:!N n,__ TO TERMINAL
10 No.7
OUTPUT
CRAP OAME-Dl9lt11I pulser and six-stage torn corresponding to numbers from 1 to 6 on 3 4
1hlft rogi1t1r are u11d In circuit for actuating dice. Boek gives construction details.-
arran91ment of seven lamps that flash ran- "Hobby Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
domly for fow .aco11ds and then 1top at pat· HM-90, p 132.
I
C1 "' I mictofa rad, 25 volts, electro- Q2 = transistor, RCA SK3020

lytic I Q3 Q10 through Qu -= transistor,
C1 .. 500 ~icrofarads, 25 volts, elec- RCASK3010
trolyllc
c, "' 100 n}icrofarads, 6 volts, elec- R 1 .. 1500ohms, l/2watt, 10%
trolytjc R2 Rs = 47 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
C • C 1 through C 11 .. 0.05 microfarad, R 3 ... 27,000ohms, 1/2watt, 10%
25 volts or R 4 R, R 12 through Rie = 1000 ohms,
J greater, ceramic
Ca .. 10 m crofarads, 25 volts, elec-
tro! c
CR 1 through CR a .. silicon rectifier,
. . type IN270
1/2 watt,
10%
Ra = 3300 ohms, I/2 watt, 10%
Ra .. IS ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
5 6
ELECTRONIC SLOT MACHINE-Circuit is ono
of throe Identical NAND gates used with other
dl9itol clrcuill to simulate random action of
spinnin9°wh11I slot machine, with three col-
CR 7 CR, ... silicon rectifier, RCA Rs = S600ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% umns of lamps Indicating score. Book gives
SK3030 R10R11 "' 470ohms, l/2watt, 10% construction clata. Values: Rl lK; R2-R3 IOK;
Qi Q 4 through Q9 .. transistors, RCA R11 through Rn = 270 ohms, 1/2 Cl 0.1 p.F; Q1..Q2 SK3020.-"Hobby Circuits
SK3005 watt, 10% Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 122,
HOBBY CIBO'UITS 303
• lWJ
6.8 6.8
RANDOM NEON-Flashing sequence is totally
unpredlctabl1.-W. G. Miiier, "Using and
Understanding Mlnlatura Neon Lamps," H.
W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p All
48. lAMPS
NE2H
r_·5-llf___.r._...·_51Jf_r....___·5J._lf
rL-:_5if_.... _._.5_i.f___.r .SIJf
1
111
SA
114
4'IOA
Cll4 CllS 1111 CllS
AIOA AIOA IM AIOA
MODEL TRAIN CONTROL-Uses scr to apply

power to angine In pulses through rolls. R1
varies width of pulses to give smooth start•
Ing, stopping, and speed control.-Madel Rail-
SCRI road Contro~ General E11ctrlc, Auburn, N.Y.,
CIU
AIOA
cu
AIOA
Cl
o.,... "'IOI\ C~ICSZI
No. 630.15.
sov
___.INCREASE DELAY
Rz
It
CHESS-PLAYER TIMER-Sl9nals end of pre-
• determined interval agreed upon as thinking
time for chess or card players. May also be
used to provide electronic delay that allows
photo9rapher to 9at Into picture before
camera clicks. With valves shown for·R1, R3,
and C2, delay ranee ls 5-120 •· Will handle
loads up ta 2 A or 240 W.-"Habby Circuits
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 162.
Rv = 33 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%

C1 50 microfarads, 15 volts, elec- transistor, RCA SK3004 S1"' switch, 125volts,3ampercs,
trolytic transistor, RCA SK3020 double-pole, double-th row,
C2 50 microfarads, 150 volts, elec- potentiometer, I megohm, 2 toggle
trolytic watts, linear taper SCR 1• = silicon controlled rectifier,
CR1CR2CRaCR,• "' diode, RCA R 2 .. 3000 ohms, 5 watts, 10% RCAKD2100
SK3016 Ram 47 ,000 ohms, I/2 watt, 10%
mounted in R, "' 10,000 ohms, I/2 watt, 10%
fuse clip for Rs"' 150ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
heat sinking Rs"' 470ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% •These components are available in
F 1 = fuse, 125 volts, 3 amperes R1 = ISO ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
I 1 = lamp, neon, NE-83 or equivalent Re IOOohms, 1/2 watt, 10% Experimenter's Kit KD2105.
R7
5n ~TPUT
RI
50K
R4
47on >.......
CR3 SPEED CR5 TO TRACK
SCR CONTROL FOR MODEL TRAIN-Applies IN1693 R6 IN1693
CONTROL IK
power to engine through rails In controllable·
width pulses to give smooth starting and Fl TI
stopping along with reversing. Will handle
up to 1.2 A continuously. Transformer Is
Stancor P-6469 having 25·Y secondary.- ,~I
Hobby Manual, General Electric Co., Owens-
boro, Ky., 1965, p 98. R3
1.5 K
R5 SCRI
10011 GE·XI
CRI CR2 Cl
IN1693 INl693 05pf
C, 50 microfarads, 12 volts, elec-

trolytic
C1 0.018 microfarad, 25 volts or
greater
Q, transistor, RCA SK3020 POLICE SIREN-Pressing S1 produces wailing
sound that slowly increases in frequency.
Q2 transistor, RCA SK3005 When switch Is released, sound slowly de·
R1 27,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% creases in frequency. Increasing value of Rl
Ri 68,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% or Cl lengthens rate al which frequency of
Ra 56,000ohms, l/2watt, 10% oscillalion increases. Battory drain Is only 400
Re 470ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% µA with S1 open, so power switch Is not
s, switch, any single-pole push- normally nocossary.-"Hobby Circuits Man•
button type ual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 117.
Speaker = 3.2-ohms or 8-ohms
CERAMIC
Mlt<E
SOUND-ACTIVATED-Clap of hands or other

sharp sound closes relay, which remains closed 0
u"til manually reset. Sensitivity Is adjustable 680U
with SK potentlometer.-"Tips on Using FET's,"
N RESET
V9~WITCH
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., HMA-33, 1969. ...L!.NORM. CLOSEDI
+4.SV
68012
47k'2
CJ TRS
330
nF TR3
WHlmE CONTROL-PXE (piezoxldo) ceramic get full supply voltage. Next whlstlo com• Working range can be somewhat greater be-
material In detector serves for converting mand will make bistable mvbr switch over and cause mvbr will switch over for Input sig·
sound waves of ordinary whistle Into audio stop molar. frequency of whistle should nal of about 25 mV.-PXE Dotoclar, Philips,
signals for controlling motor-driven toy. If match that ofPXE detoclor, in which case out• Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho
first whistle note makos TR4 conducting in put of PXE detector wlll be about 50 mV when Netherlands, No. 43, 1969.
mvbr, TR5 will also conduct and motor will whistle is blown firmly about 20 foot away.
HOBBY CIRCUITS 305
(-)---------. 5
C 1 C2 = 560 picofarads, 25 volts
or greater
c3 = 0.01 microfarad, 25 volts or
~ 180V 6 greater
L2 CR1 = silicon rectirier, type
LT2-32-I LT2-32-I 1N270
(+)--~"------' Qi Q2 = transistor, RCA
7 SK3020
FLICKERING-NEON FLASHER-Uses two noon
R, Rz = 1500 ohms, 1/2 watt,
lamps which light altornatoly, with light fllclc-
orlng from oloctrodo to electrode on each to
10%
get attontlon.-E. Bauman, "Applications of
4r~~~~~~~--' R3 R4 Rs= 10,000 ohms, 1/2
Neon Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubas," ELECTRONIC SLOT MACHINE-Throe identical
watt, 10%
Signalita, Neptune, N.J., p 154. flip·Rops are usod with other digital circuits Re R1 = 6800 ohms, 1/2 watt,
to simulate random action of spinning-wheel 10%
slot machine, but wllh throe columns of lamps construction data.-"Hobby Circuits Manual,"
for lndlcatin~ score. Boole gives detailed RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 122•
.i'
~3v ~400V L2
LNE-17
l + l - - - -..... ---......1r-, .----, ON
SOUND.CONTROLLED TURTLE-lnoxponsivo scr
L.I __J L--J l-.. OFF
is turned on and off altornatoly by loud shouts
rl .----, ON
of "Gol" and "Stop!", to drive or stop small RI ___J L--1 l-.. OFF
d-c motor Inside toy turtle. Sound plclced
L. 2 --, ,---; ,.-- ON
up by transducer momontarily broalcs ground L...J L.....J OF' F
on scr gate, turning on scr to onergh:o motor.
Whon motor starts, It trips shaft that moves
R2-., r---, r-- ON
L...J L....J OFF
lover of malco-boforo-brealc switch S2 from
A to B. Noxt shout then turns off motor and
rosets switch lover to A. Requires two D calls to sido.-E. Bauman, "Applicalions of Noon
for 40 hours operatlon.-Toylng With SCR's, PUMPKIN BLINKER-When noon lamps are In· Lamps and Gas Dlschargo Tubes," Signallto,
Electronics, Sept. 18, 1967, p 46 ond 48. stalled as shown, tho lights bllnlc from side Noptuno, N.J., p 154.
C 1 = 2000 microfarads, 15 volts, elec-

trolytic
CR1 through CR1 = silicon rectifier,
RCASK3030
CRs = zenerdiode, 13 volts, I watt
F 1 = fuse, I.ampere, 3AG
Q1 = transistor, RCA SK3005
Qz = transistor, RCA SK3009
R1 = 1800ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
R2 = 68 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
Ra= 470ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
R4 = 100 ohms, 25 watts, adjustable
120V S 1 = toggle switch, single-pole single-
60Hz SCORE LAMP COMMON throw
SLOT-MACHINE POWER SUPPLY-Provides reg• (UNFILTERED T 1 = transformer, primary 117 volts,
ulatod voltages required by digital drcults FUl.L-WAVE
used to simulate random action of spinning•
RECTIFIED ACI secondary 25 volts at I ampere,
whDol slot· machine, with throe columns of tion data.-"Hobby Circuits Manua~" RCA, Stancor No. P6469 or equiv-
lamps indicating score. Book gives construe• Harrison, NJ.. HM-90, p 123. alent
308 ELJlbTRONIC CIB.dtJITS MANUAL
.IRE.N IN Bc:?~""'Solld-state electr~nlc timer is

colnbinod wjt~ eledranic .siren. Dileo a ~u~,
qui person turl!s It on, oliher instantly by ftlp·
ping 54 or ffh'r 4Ck dolqy If ho Rljls 52 first,
sf;en con "' stepped only by pulhin9 con•
foiled swlf~h 53 through hole In perfboard
RI coie. Wiii tt~liven dull party or conference,
56K
(SEE ~lit should ~· ro~ovored and turned off before
TEXT) 1d1neone fhff!~• It out window. Sirin module
Is Lafayette 1?Es5053 or oquivaltilt. Spoolcor
is 8 ahms 011~ 2Y:t Inches. Cl is 100 p.F, 6 Y:
~ Value shown ior RI gives timilta delay of
12 oltbut 40 s for Ql-Cl-Rl·Kl delaj drcult. Ql
Is HEP250 q11~ scr's ore GE IOEYl.-5. Donlel•i
lrilervol Screoriiir, Elementary Eloctronic1, Ma;.
,p
~Apr. 1970, 62-65 and 102. · ·
0
KD2l04
MOP.EL-TRAIN SPEED CONTR!Ji.-Sln9lo scr

prov"iilos smooth fiill·wavo corlttol of s~lied,
cilon9 °with regulcifion, ovor co111plote reins~
from :iioro to full Apeod, for m~~ol t~alris or
tro~~-gui~od '"!'~i' race con '~"ulrln9 ujl to
12 Y d-c.-"Slllcon Controlled R1ctifl11r Exjlerl•
mentor's Manual,'; RCA, Harrisop, N.J., tf67,
P. 84. . . .
• USE THREE 5 OHM/20 W RESISTORS ll'l SERIES
117M7GT
N.C; R2
c, ; 40 mfd, 250 WVDC electro;
lylH::: I .. • C2
TO
CONTROLLED
C2 .: 30 mfd, 250 WVDC electro.: CIRCUIT
lytic
C3 ~ 5 mfd, 250 WVDC electro·
lytic 6
VOICE-OPERATED TRAIN-Power is appliod to

modal train, eledric fan, or other device con-
neded to relay contads, for as long as voice
Rl • 150, 2· watt Is being picked up by mlaophone. Relay is
R2 - 18 2.5K, diode Is 75-mA 117-Y selenium rodifler,
R3 • 470K Tl is Stancer A-4352, and 12 Is Stancer A·
4713.-R. M. Brown, "104 Simple Ono·Tubo
Projects," Tab Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa.,
SWI 1969, p 109.
HOBBY CIRCUITS 307
CONTROL
CIRCU.'.T
BATTERY
I I
I I ALARM
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
MAGNETIC COMBINATION LOCK-Combina·
tion af normally open and normally closed
magnotlc reed switches can be activated only
o o 2
o o o o
3 4 5 6
by correct pattern of small permanent ma9• ELECTRIC COMBINATION LOCK-Power is ap· reel combination even if alarm is somehow
nots on card. Security factor increases with plied to control circuit only if toggle, lover, or disabled. Manual or other moans should be
number of switches usod. Normally closed self-latching pushbutton switches are closed In provided for releasing all switchos.-K. C.
switches are used to prevent operation with one correct sequence. For all other sequences, Herrick, Circuit Determines Correct Operating
single largo magnetic flold.. Switches should alarm circuit goes off. Additional switches Sequence, Electronic Design, Nov. 23, 1964,
bo concealed by nonmagnetic matorlal. Can can be used to Increase difficulty of finding cor• p 62.
be usod with electric door latch or as auto
ignition switch.-R. M. Zilbarstein, Reed
Switches Form a Nonmachanical lock, Elec-
tronics, Oct. 28, 1968, p 92.
meg
ALL LAMPS
NE2H
LOW SIX-LAMP RANDOM-Gives interesting and Understanding Miniature Neon lamps," H.

z unpredictable pattern of blinking noon lights, W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 48.
SPKR
using fow parts.-W. G. Miller, "Using and
INSANITY GENERATOR - Produces gantle-

sounding chirp about onco per second, for NOR GATE FOR SLOT MACHINE-Circuit is one
annoying next-door neighbors without In· of scoring gates used with other dlgital cir-
curring risk of having lease broken. Sound cuits to simulate random action of spinning·
is comparable to Chinoso torture in which wheel slot machine, with throe columns of
water drips slowly on forehead of victim lamps Indicating score. Book gives construc-
strapped to floor. Use either small speaker or tion data. Values: R1-R6 4.7K; R7 3.9K; R8-R9
low-impedance earphone.-$. Bre11kond, ''Tho 180; CR1·CR2 SK3030; QI, Q3 SK3005;
Loasa-lreakor" and ''Tho Drip", Popular Elec- Q2 SK3010.-''Hobby Circuits Manua~" RCA,
tronics, Feb. 1968, p 33-35. Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 122.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use tho index at tho back
of this book. Chock also the author's "~ourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 39
1-F Amplifier Circuits
75
4
18pl
0.005
IN 1:4 "'
'b
ALL DIODES FD 700

ALL DECOUPLING CAPACITORS O.DI ,.1
ALL COILS MICROMETAL L52 ·12
INTEGRATED AMPLIFIERS A1,A2,A3 AND A4 ARE FAIRCHILD A703
INTEGRATED AMPLIFIER A5 IS A FAIRCHILD l'A 702
45·MHZ 1-f WITH IC'S FOR BRIDGE-Gives low·
cost detector for bridge network. Logarithmic video summing amplifier AS. Large input slow logging makes it unsuitable for radar.-
transfer characteristic is genero,ed by sam- signal forces successive stages to limit In R. Q. Lane, Low-Cost IC's Improve 45-MHz
pling outputs of cascaded IC ampliflen At, sequence, dropping slope of transfer char- l·f Amplifier, fledranin, March 20, 1967, p
A2, A3, and A4 and combining samples In aderlstlc 20 dB. Circuit Is highly stable, but 88-89.
CRYSTAL
FILTER
INPUT
FROM MIXER TO RATIO
DETECTOR
5pf 0.01 0.01
I- I
0.1 0.1 0.1
I
iSv d·c
i :c :r
_ _
:r: TO AGC AND
METER AMPLlrlERS
:r ::r:
HEATHKIT F-M WITH IC'S-Two crystal filters
and two RCA wideband high-gain ampfifler- to 1.8 dB, and adjacent-channel selectivity ls that of eight 1ln9lo-tunod transformor-couplod
llmiters Improve performanco of f·m i..f. 70 dB. Four-polo laHico•dotlgn qu~rt:11 crystal circult1.-IC'1 Sound Bettor, Eloctronlc1, Janu•
Overall gain is 120 dB, capture ratio 11 reduced filters together give seloctlvlty comparable to ary 23, 1967, p 41-42.
308
1-F AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 309
120 OHMS 850HMS
54-I}J--2
C5
47
4
68nh
1
LI
6 I
lc2
I470
•c3
I~~I68
C4
-= -=-= ":"'
L2 L2 +120C
RFC RFC
Cl
l
60 MHZ WITH FOUR IC STAGES-Four stages
r470
IC used, with bandwidth of 8.4 MHz overall With Integrated Circuits at 60 Mc, Electronic
pravlde total gain up to 43 dB, depending on -s. G. Shepherd and A. E. Seman, Design Design, July 19, 1965, p 32-35.
-9v
IOOk
.01
4.7k
TRANSFILTER-Ceromlc transfllter serves In

place of transfarmer as coupling clement,
and also forms oscillating element in 455-lcHz
l·f system. Frequency stability Is 0.1 % from -6V
20 to 60 C. Transistor can be either pnp or
npn, depending on power supply, but should
have beta of 50 to 100 and cutoff of 10 MHz. +6V
-C. Hartloy, Oscillator Has a Transfllter As 0.001
The Resonant Device, Electronics, Feb. 3, 1969,
p 78.
-----1I
_ _,_._ _ _ _ T4
l
I I
I
I ..__......:1--1 OUTPUT
I I
I 6
SOOpt
sooo-1
t I I
SOURCE I = I =
o-; 4
r°9T l _ _-2~ {------_J
0 TO+&V
AGC
-6V
VDD
3.~:: o-3 Lo -6V
1. Transformers Ti and T, are Ferramic Q-2 Toroid Types
TETRODE FET WITH 40-DB AGC-Power gain Notes: (unloaded Q = 200).
Is 15 dB In 45-MHz single stago shown. Can 2. Transformers Ta and Ta are slug.tuned with carbonyl
also be used as video amplifler having linear
gain control.-J. S. Sherwin, Need High Z
IT-71 material (unloaded Q 70). =
and Low C? Turn to the Tetrode FET for HF 12·MHZ GAIN·CONTROLLED A·M l·f-Uses stage Is 60 dB and 3·dB bandwidth Is 160
Design, Electronic o..lgn, June 7, 1965, p throe IC r·f ampliflers In cascade to provide kHs.-"Unear lntograted Circuits," RCA, Har·
20-25. 25 dB gain per stage. Age range for first rison, N.J., IC-41, p 214.
11·30)pF
30.MHz IC-Singlo-endod coupling at input

and output eliminates transformors. Power
gain is 50 dB. Uses Motorola dlroct-coupled
high-gain IC amplifier.-R. Hejhall and B.
Trout, lntegratacl Circuits for tho World of
VAGC '=' 0.002pf •12 Vdt High Frequency, "State-of-tho-Art-llnears In
Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p
l1 • 12Turns122 AWG Will cna Tcltoid Core. 21-26.
CTlH Micro Mtlll or Equiv)
l2 • 11 Turns #20 AWG Wirt ona Toroid Core,
(T44.6 Miuo Mtlll 01 Equiv)
+4.5V
10011
+6V
+4.5V
OOOl
r ---r-----1
I ..--.....------....,T4 I .!SUBSTRATE
I ~11
I
I
I 30 DB AT 1 MHZ-Uses RCA CA3018 IC tran•
sistor array as flnal i-f amplifier stage and
I cascaded emitter-follower Q3.Q4 as second
I dotector.-"Linear lntogratad Circuits," RCA,
I
T4 I
10 T o--i tr<'r 3 T
a9,.Ho-3 C-o -4.5V
Notes: l. Transformer T, is a Ferramic Q-2 Type (unloaded

Q[ = 200).
2. Transformers T:, T•• and T, are slug-tuned with carbonyl
ll75 material (unloaded Q 75). =
12-MHZ UMITING 1-F AMPLIFIER-Uses three
IC r-f ampliflers In cascaclo to provlcle 26 ell
gain per stago for f•m UIO, Limiting action
begins at about 30 µV .-"Linear lntograted
Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 213.
1-F AMPLIFIER CIRClJITS 311
+6V
1~~F !1suasTRATEI
~~~~.....:;__~~.....:--...y~~~~;.._~~~~~I
CA3018 CONFIGURATION
Io~~,.~
111-MHZ TWO-STAGE IC 1-F-Uses two IC video cation, and d·c ampllflcatlon.-"Llnear lnto-
amplifiers and CA3018 IC transistor array to 9rated Circuits,'' RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41,
provide required 86-dB f.f voltage goln at p 177.
10 MHz along with detedlon, audio amplifl•
Vcc9+9v
Rt Ct
68k 0.001
J'f
R3
tk Cs ~lk -
O.OtJlf ( 1
~
68 330pf --
r~·-·
INPUT
6.8k 6.Bk
37db------.... ...j,___ -9db - - - - - - 74db --.i
20µv t,200p.v 4001'v Zvrms------1

T3: INTERSTAGE TRANSFORMER TRW NO. 22486 OR EQUIVALENT
T4: RATIO DETECTOR TRW NO. 22516 OR EQUIVALENT
P. Koller, Linear !C's: Part 3-Dlfferontlal
10.7-MHZ l·f WITH TWO IC'S-Two RCA IC'1 First IC 11 differential amplifier, and second AmpllflerJ At Work, Eledtonics, Sept. 18, 1967,
provide 100 dB of gain for complete l·f strip. provid11 limiting adlon along with galn.-J. p 96-104.
312 ELEOTRONIO OIROUITS MANUAL
+6V
•6V
455-KHZ TWO-STAGE IC l·F-Uses two IC

video ampliflers and CA3018 IC transistor
array to provide required l·f gain along with
detection, audio ampliftcotlon, and d-c ampli-
ftcation.-"Linear Integrated Circuits,'' RCA,
Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 178•
•
CA3018 CONFIGURATION
m AMPLIFIER OR OSCILLATOR-Choose l·f

transformers for 50 kHz, 455 kH1, or 10.7
MH1. Acid link coupling to convert to stoble
osclllotor; use 6 turns of wire at each end.-
"Tlps on Usin9 FET's,'' Motorola, Phoenix,
Arl1., HMA-33, 1969.
+l.5v
330ph
+ r------- ------.,
I
T1 1
50k 50pf/6v 120k I
I I
I 3
I
I
I
I 200
3.3k I pf
I
I
I
12';;-----
6pf
-
·MIXER
2 I
68,,f
5k
TO
I
A'
+
470 CJCJ
/
220 +
500pf/6v
AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
10ull3v - BF·455A SF·4550 0.02pl
4
10- .
1
t..fW11H TWO CERAMIC FILTERS-Used in filter Is tuned to 455 kH1 and provides emiHer- Ecl9e Out Costly l·F Transformers, Efodronics,
Sony model TR·1000 ten•tronslstor mulilband to-ground bypassing for ftrst l.f transistor Q1. Nov. 14, 1966, p 160-163.
portoble radio to reduce number of compo- Other filter ls double-tuned to 455 kHz, and
nents, simplify production and cut costs. First provldos lntorsta9e coupllng.-Coramlc Filters
l·F AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 313
12QOHMS HOHMS
1
WMll06 WMll06
____....c~
47i---o
LI LI
68nll nll
2
1470
'::'
-= '::'
L2 L~ +12DC
RFC Cl RFC
I
60-MHZ FOUR·IC WITH 43 DB GAIN-Band·
I470
-=
pirical approach, involving d-c moasuremonts,
cascadod.-S. G. Shepherd and A. E. Soman,
Design with Integrated Circuits at 60 Mc,
width Is 8.4 MHz and power gain 13.1 dB for selecting oxtornal camponents that will "Microelectronic Design,'' Haydon Book Co.,
for four-stage amplifier. Article presents om· not cause osclllation when four stages are N.Y., 1966, p 9o-97.
FORWARD AGC
+9v
Tz
,,1,.
II
200
/lf 11
,,
1,
MIXER
Ii11 DETECTOR
AND
II
LOW·PASS
f'ILTER
20k
CERAMlc.FILRR l·F - Lead..zirconoto-titonoto REVERSE AGC

piezoelectric ceramic filter in 1-f stage of low· transformer stages, eliminates need for align· -Coramlc Filters Edge Out Costly l·F Trans-
cost o·m portable radio provides soloctivity mont during production, and cuts number of formers, Electronics, Nov. 14, 1966, p 160-
comparable to that of throe singlo-tunod components. Usod in Sony model 2R 27 radio.
0 163.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use tho index at tho bock
of this book. Check also tho author's "Sourcobook of Eloctronic Circuits," published by
:. McGraw·H!ll in 1968.
CHAPTER 40
Infrared Circuits
!IOV
1!10
•n
ioµI" 1kn
400µ1"
RPY!ll 47•n 9ZY94 BiY~4
czo CIO
rpm disc having 16 radial slots. Circuit

IC TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION-Infrared features low noise and high gain stability.
micre1cepe uses Mullard RPY51 indium anti- Article gives design equations and other cir·
monlde detector cooled by liquid nitrogen for cults required for complete thormal micro·
measuring temperature of extremoly small scope 1ystem.-T. J. Jarratt, Infrared Micro-
area, such as portion of integrated-circuit scope for Temperature Measurement of Small
chip. Motor-driven chopper converts radla· Aroas, Mu/lard Toclinical Communications,
tion from target to about 800 Hz with 3,000- May 1968, p 101-107.
C1Uin
dower
ams ICYU
IR INTRUSION ALARM-Uses Mullard ORP10 drift differential amplifler driving alarm cir-
uncoaled Indium antlmonide photocell in un• cuit. Responds to minimum angular speed af
chapped system to detect objects with tem- abaut 1 mllliradlan per second by intruder.-
peratures above 10 dog C moving acrass fleld I. A. Locken, Passive Intruder Alarm Using
of view against steady background at room Infrarod Detector, "'ullard Teclin/cal C:ommu-
temperature. Detector is a-c coupled to low- n/cation1, May 1968, p 88-90.
.,
·,
314
11
INFRARED OIROUITS 315
INTRUSION ALARM-When R2 Is adiusted just

below maximum ambient lllumlnatlon, slight SI RI
Increase In li9ht falling on photocell makes IOOK
1cr oscillate and produce laud cllcltlns 1aund1
In speaker. ft'equancy af clicks Increases with
lllumlnatlan. Wiii respond to fla1hll9ht of
Intruder or ta turning an of room ll9hts in +
vacant office or home. Uses GE-X6 cadmium Bl
sulfide photaconductar. For Infrared dotoction 22-112v SENSITIVITY
Cl
or fire alarm, use cadmium solenlde coll.- lpf ADJUST
4 TO BA
"Hobby Manual," General Electric, Owens- 25V SPEAKER OR
boro, Ky., 1965, p 124. EARPHONES
+ZlY LOCATING RRE IN SMOKE-Uses uncoated

load 1ulfldt cell with lens to pick up 1ourco
Rz of fire or heat when vhlblllty Is completely
•7kA De inn
CtVI obscured by smoke, dust, or fumes. Coll 11
....
....k
Mullard developmental type 119CPY. Addi-
tional cell Rt Is blacked out and serves as
temperatur-ompensatlng load for active
cell, which drives adlustable-galn preamp
that controls bas• cunent1 of square-wave
+IV relaxation oscillator TR5·TR6. Emllttr-fot.
R15
100.A. lawer TR7 provides necouary current gain for
1lf drivln9 speaker which 9ive1 low note of about
ecm 100 H1 far no fire and lncrea1ln9 pitch
up to 10 kH1 for Increasing Infrared radio·
Tt tlon from fire. Unit Is portable and bafferyo
101 or
operatod, ta permit uso by firemen In almln9
hoso.-P. R. D. Coleby, Simple Heat Locator
Using Infrared Detector, Mu/lard Technical
Communfccrllon1, Moy 1968, p 86-18.
0A200
Motor
lkn
IOOuF +
0AZ204 IOV
SPX25 -&V
lkll.
s&on
-12v
IR CAMERA PULSE AMPLIFIER-Uses pair af receives pulses from scanning spiral of holes. range af spHd control. Uted for examining
BPX25 silicon phatotranslstors receiving light Resultlns electrlcol pulses are squared, ampll· patienh far cancerous 9rowth1, locating hot
pulses through rotating 3o.holo Nipkow scan• fled, and applied to time bosos of camera spah on circuit boards, and detecting flaws
·nine disc on which Infrared Image Is focuaed. feeding standard osclllo1cope. Motor drive in gla11 furnace walls.-M. H. Jervis, Closed
Ono phototranslstor receives 1ync pulses from circuit at right, far disc,· applies conttant volt· Circuit Infrared Televislon System, Mullard
uniformly· spaced holes on disc, and other as• ta motor, with 1K pot providing 10% Ltd., Landon, TP9SO, 1967.
c 1co Cus: MnF'

D1 to D 16: 8\'XIO
BFYacl
~3V
40uF' 31dl OA200
47nF' stopped up to 12 kV d-c by eight-stage Cock-

roft•Walton bridge. Applications of system
include observation of behavior of people in
tho dark, animals at night, scatter from lasor
12 KV D-C-Used with Mullard 6929·1 image radiation. Usos simplo bloclcing oscillator op- beams, and hot-spots on def11dive hlgh volt-
0
converter tube for converting near-infrared erating frorn 3.y battery to drive high-ratio ago insulators.-lnfrared Image Converter,
radiation to visible yellow-green omitted transformer giving 1.5-kV pulses. Those aro Mullard Ltd., London, TP898, 1967.
RADIATION THERMOMETER-Covers 100 to

500 C in flvo ranges, using linear ampliflca•
tion. Dotodor Is Mullard 61SV lead sulfide
coll having high infrared sensitivity at room
tomporature, for measuring radiant onorgy
from surface of target. Energy from target
is condudod to chopper wheel by light pipe,
for o-c Input to head ampliflor that provides
necessary transformation from high to low
impedance ond compensates for docroaso in
coll sensitivity with Increasing ambient torn•
peraturo.-P. R. D. Coloby, Radiation Thor•
momotor for Tomperaturos Greater than 100
dog C, Mullonl Technical Communicotions, May
1968, p 91-98.
3200
4·7 µF 47
kn 4V kn
IOkO Output
500pF
15
400µF kO 200µF
40V IOV
0AZ204
8CY71
2µF
150V
15k0
2·7kn
WW
8CI09 8CI09
2-7k0 12 4•7 27
WW kn kn kn
-Ve
6 bias
current once of dotoctor increasing frorn a few ohms -?V 1·2kn
at room temperature to about 200 ohms when
INDIUM ANTIMONIDE DETECTOR PREAMP- back of dotoctor is coolod by liquid nitrogen hole Nipkow scanning disc.-M. H. Jarvis,
Will deted temporature changes from room drip.feed system. Used in industrial and med· Closed Circuit Infrared Television System,
temperature down to 77 deg K, with imped- ical thermal scanning systorns employing 30- Mullard ltd., London, TP950, 1967.
INFRARED CIRCUITS 317
+'lillV
4700 1•n
lkO IR CLINICAL THERMOMETER-Coven range of
30 to 40 C, for meosuring temperature of
external auditory canal. Close!y approxi-
mates oral measuremonts. Uses Mullard
ORP10 uncooled indium antimonide coll for
which radiation is interrupted at about 600
Hz by motor-driven chopper. Resulting a-c
signal is amplified by tlat·response wideband
Oulout amplifler, mixed with signal corresponding to
room temporoturo, thon fad to phase-sensitive
rectitlor that dorives its reference signal from
interruption of secondary beam of radiation
200 (between 101CAY emlttor and BPX25 dotoc·
µF
r
tor) by same chopper blade. Direct current
from rectifier drives Indicating motor. Artlclo
glvos all clrcuits.-R. A. Lockett, Room Tom•
peroturo Radiation Thermometer, MuUard
Technical Communications, Moy 1968, p 98-
101.
I
nm
+12v
CODED-LIGHT DETECTOR-Tuned omplifler fol·

lowing phototransistor hos twin·T network
that greatly attenuates oil signals more than 1
Hz off from 2:1 kHz. Only light within this TRI
BCl08
narrow passband will turn on TR3 and enor•
gize load. One opplication Is In photoelectric
sofoty devices, where stray light might negote
interruption of safety boom.-Applicotions of
Silicon Planar Phototronsistor BPX25, Philips, IOnF IOnF
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhovan, Tho
OAZoo
ZOnF 1oon
150.ul
) +
.................,.--~~....-----10--o-.o-12.u1
.....:..-t1------'V'lil'lf-...... MYLAR 240k
22k
0.22,uf o,
MYLAR 2N2484 04
INPUT--t '----+ 2N2907
v,
SM Al5274B 03
!CARBON 2N2222 +ISOµf
FILM)
\ 51 ...----+--t(-OUT
IOOk
12k
6v
15-HZ NUVISTOR PREAMP-Tube input stage

has much lowor Internal noiso than bipolar stogos. Used In norrow·bond signal proces- -40 C to 60 C.-G. C. Kuipers, Front-End
transistor, and provides sufficient ampliflca• sor for infrared radiometer. Gain overall Is Nuvistor Lowers Transistor Amplifier Noise,
tion to overcome nolso of following tron~lstor 40 dB, with 1011 thon 0.1 dB vorlotion from Efecrronics, Oct. 31, 1966, p 71-72.
+3V +IZV
HIMO
1oon
CODED INFRARED SOURCE-Used when un·

modulated visible or Infrared beam may be
subject to Interference from nearby stray INFRARED DETECTOR-Uses BPX25 phototran• 100 ft when using either f:2 collimating
light sources. Galllum arsenide light-emitting sllfor which has good 1en1ltlvlty to near lonsos or parabollcal roRectors at light source
diode is energized by mvbr whose frequency Infrared wavelengths. With two ampliRer and at phototransistor. Far near Infrared,
11 adjusted to match that of coded infrared 1tagos, peak Input of 1 tux will produce p111k ordinary glass lenses are satisfactory.-Appli·
source. Although mvbr modulator gives output of 400 mV. R11ponso at 4 kHir is 3 cations of Silicon Planar Phototransittor
square-wave output, typically at 2.7 kHr, dB below that at I kHz. Provld11 compact BPX25, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
coded-boom detector responds to fundamental communication system giving secrecy and hoven, Netherlands, No. 316, 1967.
frequency.-Applicatlons of Silicon Planar frndom from interference at ranges up to
Phototran1l1tor BPX25, Phillps, Pub. Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The N1thorland1, No.
316, 1967.
Output
BCI08
BCY71
• IOOpF
12V
•• BCI08
(
3nF
• 680nF fl'ame time base -12v _,_

01' 22nF line time boso
•It IOOnF fl'ame time baae
+ v• tl'igg•,. pulse 01' 40nF line time boae
by phototransistor. U1pcl In medical and In·
IR CAMERA TIME BASES-Circuits for X and Y generators except for timing capacitor dustrial Infrared opplicatlons.-M. H. Jervis,
Inputs of display uo for Infrared Niplcow• cha111es indicated below dla9ram. Trl19er Closed Circuit Infrared Television System,
disc scannln9 camera are identical sawtooth pulH1 are obtained from put.. ampllRer fed Mullard ltd., London, TP950, 1967.
INFRARED OI.ROlTITS 319
NONCONTACTING TEMPERATURE SENSOR-

Slmple retistance bridge having Amperex
10011
61SV Infrared photocell in one le9 permits
m11a1vrln9 temperatvro of fvmaco, flat iron,
or other heated obiacts from distance of
several feet. When brld9a Is balanced, meter IR COMMUNICATION DETECTOR-U1111 BPX25
will raad upscale whon cell resistance is de- phototranslstor followed by two amplifying
creased by exposure to Infrared radh1tlon. 1tages to pick up modulated Infrared radio·
-J. P. Shields, "Novel Electronic Circuits.'' H. lion In communication system. Rans• i1 over
W. Sam1 & Co., lndianapoli1, Ind., 1968, p 11. 100 ft when using modulated gallium ane-
nldo diode 01 light 1ourco.-Sillcon Planar
Phototranslston, Mallard Ud., London, TP1000,
1968.
+12¥
IR COMMUNICATION SOURCE-Galllum arse-

nide ll9ht-emlttln9 diode Is fad by microphone
or other signal source drlvln9 thre-tage
amplitler. Rosponse at 80 kHz i1 3 dB bo·
low that at 1 kHz. Range Is up to about 100
ft when usin9 BPX25 phototran1ist11r at re-
ceiving end.-Slllcon Planar Phototransistors,
Mullard Ltd., London, TP1000, 1968.
IOOµF
27k0 IOV
180kll 27kfi I
lkO .!,.' 0·0411F

5µF T500V
64V
----'
16JJF IOOµF
OAZ207
150V 680nF BCY71 IOV
250V
BCY71 Output I
27kn
I Mn 220k.0.
Output 2
2·2k0
2·7k0
LEAD SULFIDE DETECTOR PREAMP-Provides red scannln9 systems, such as for monitoring -12 V
IOOkJl gain of 30 and bandwidth of 16 kHz, with furnace wall1.-M. H. Jervis, Closed Circuit
optional output providing gain of 3. Dotector Infrared Televlslon SY1tom, Mullard Ltd,. Lon-
+120V requires no cooling, but minimum detectable don, TR950, 1967.
or 240V temperature la 120 C. Used In lndustrlallnfra.
+12v
119CPY
200.n.
1001\F'
119CPV
2;xlk0 I
~--0~~---J_·oo_·~~-~~~-2 __0:.
INFRARED MODULATOR-Serves as transmittor
for short•range communication systom using FIRE ALARM-Infrared flame detector pro-
modulated Infrared radiation. light source at duces voltage for actuating alarm as soon
output of audio amplifier is CAY12 gallium as flame occurs in field of view of Mullord
arsenide dlodo. Can be usod well above 61SV load sulfide detector which contains two
audio range, becauso response at 80 kHz is 119CPY coils. Upper coll is covered, and
only 3 dB bolow that at 1 kHz. Poak diodo serves to provide tracking with temperature
current at 10 mA is obtained with input of changes. Circuit foods bistable circuit
150 mV peak from mlcrophona or othor (shown in article) that drives audible alarm
source.-Applications of Silicon Planar Photo• such as Mallory Sonolert.-P. R. D. Coleby,
transistor 8PX25, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Fire Alarm System Using Infrared Flame De-
Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 316, tector, Mullarcl Technical Communications,
1967. May 1968, p 82-86.
2001(1'1
2N914
IOK!l
SSL OSCILLATOR-Gallium arsenide solid-slate

lamp in avalanche-transistor oscillator pro•
duces IR pulse durations in nanosa<ond range,
with Infrared power output of a few mW and
pulso repotition rates of several kHz.-L. M.
Hertz, Solid State Lamps-Port II, Genoral
Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3°0121, 1970,
p 7.
NOTE: To locate additional drcuits in tho category of this chapter, uso tho index at tho back
McGraw•Hlll in 1968.
CHAPTER 41
Integrated Circuits
+l.22V
631!
-3V
3209
58.51J
~
LOADS
':'
4511 -lV
10511
-3V
ASLT IC FOR IBM 360/91-Double.level logic onco 1-GHz transistors by Incorporating

block with high fan power, prodictoble de- phoso-componsating network In emlttor cur- J, R. Tumbull, ASLT Circuit Design, ISM Jour-
lays, and 5°n1 propagation time utilizes full rent source. Article covers doslgn procedure nal, Jan. 1967, p 74-85.
switching-speed potontial of high-perform• for module.-R. F. Sechler, A. R. Strube, and
t----.. --.., I
I
03 D2
.r
_J._
I
Rts ..J.,
30 I i('I
I •'I
""r·
I
I
I
AUDIO AMPLIFIER-Circuit shown Is portion output. Operation is similar to push-pull nogllgible.-M. J. Gay, J. A. Sklngloy, and M.
of slnglo 20-pin IC containing oil drcuits for circuit but without phase splitter and output C. Sucker, Lots of Radio on Just One IC,
3·W British car radio except i·f filter and r·f transformer. Uses largo nogativo feedback Efodronics, Aug. 5, 1968, p 124-129.
tunor. Handles up to 1.5 A to produce 3-W for good llnoarity. Crossover distortion Is
321
322 ELEOTRONIO CIROUITS MANUAL
r--------------,I
I
+Vee
I R3 I MIC0201 AUDIO DRIVER-Doalgnod to drive

I 2 K R4 I slngl-ndod pnp germanium power output
I ~1 100 I OUTPUT tran•l•ton. Consist• of Darlington input
stage Q1-Q2 providln91il9h Input Impedance
I ~ ~
3.3K
I with both voltase and cvrront gain, feeding
common-emitter amplifier Q3. Require• 12
INPUTI Q1 : V d·c supply.-M. L. Deschler, Integrated Cir•
cult Audio Driver Amplifler, Mallory, Indian-
01 I GND apolis, Ind., APPN-1, 1968.
I
0
I ~~ ~ ~I
L-----------..l
MCl539 OPAMP-Motorola IC featuros open- IUVTL-'4

loop gain of 120,000, high slew rate of 34 V 11..-----+--+---r
per µs, Input diode limiting for overvoltage
protection, and output current-limiting pro-
todlon.-K. Huehne, The Continuing Domi-
··----.-!
..
CNVIHrll:G "'"''
..
.
nance of the Operational Ampllfler, "Stato-
of-th..Art-Unoan in Action," Motorola,
Phoenix, Aril:., 1969, p 5-13.
.
•o------..__.______ ......;~--'-.....J
INPUT FREQUENCY
COMPENSATION
I 8
,....________,...____..,_________--11--------...----------.... ---------+--------....7-v+
R14
20k
Rt Rz
25• 2511
INVERTING
INPUT 2
....----+----+-- 5 OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
COMPENSATION
NON·INVERTING~----iL... Q15
INPUT 3
t----1012
OPAMP-This popular Fairchild ,IA70P IC has

throe 1ta901, far input, coupling cind output,
with cholco of common-mode Input rotlstonco
approaching Infinity or much lower differen-
tial Input retlttonco. Article has detailed de-
scription of IC opomp characterlstica.-M. I. Ru
Leeds, Unear !C's: Port 4-lnslde The Opera- 2.411
tional Amplifier, Eledronics, Oct. 16, 1967, p
16-91.
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 323
TO I·F
FILTER
AGC
OSCILLATING MIXER-Circuit shown is portion SIGNAL
of single 20-pln IC containing all circuits for
3-W British car radio except i-f filter and l'•f
tuner. Serves as self-oscillating mlxor with
age, for handling poak signals well above
100 mV with 41-dB conversion gain and low
distortion. Articlo gives completo receivor
circuit on chtp.-M. J. Gay, J. A. Skingloy, and
M. C. Sucker, lots of Radio on Just Ono IC,
Efedronia, Aug. 5, 1968, p 124-129.
R·F
INPUT c,
IOpf
R,
50
600S2
4
TAA435 A·F DRIVER-Phillps TAA435 IC audio

amplifier is Intended for driving complemen-
tary output stages In modlum•powor audio
amplifiers. TRI and TR2 form dilforentlal
TRS amplifler pormlttlng both a-c and d·c feed·
back to be applied. Input lmpodanco 11
above 70K. Supply voltage can be 10 to 18
V.-Complementary Output Stages Driven· by
tho TAA435, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Elndhovon, The Netherlands, No. 18,
1968.
..---..........----.....-------41------------------..-----------------------------------c•
+12V
PERFECT TUNE LAMP DRIVE-Single IC chip lnterstatien noise Is flltorod, ampllflod, and K. J. Peter, New Concepts In HI-Fl Receiver
1erves as computor-type comparator circuit rectified to tum off light between stations. Design, Efedronia Worlcl, Feb. 1969, p 32-34
that turns on "Perfect Tune" lamp when set IC-304 chip was made by Motorola for H. H. and 69-70.
Is tuned to exact center point for f-m station. Scott hi-fl f-rn recelver.-L W. Fi1h, Jr. and
THERMAL STABILITY IN IC PREAMP-Used to 25011F~

+
determine frequency response of experimental
IC preamp noor lower limiting froquoncy of
4 H1. Effects of thermal feedback -re ox-
cludod as far as possible by making measure-
ments with load resistance Rl of output
transistor Increased to 1OK so collector dissi-
pation hero is negligible. Article deals with
methods of improving thermal stabllity.-H.
Schmidt, Thermal Feedback in Integrated Cir-
cuits, Electronic Applicalions, Phlllps, Pub. v.
Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nothor-
londs, Vol. 28, No. 1, 1968, p 29-39.
THERMAL FEEDBACK IN IC PREAMP-Expori-

montol multistage IC proamplifler was de-
veloped to Investigate transmission properties
of heat path from output transistor TRS to
input transistor TRl. With switch in position
a, TRS has constant collector dissipation, for
investigating thermal switching-on transient.
With switch in position b, sinusoidal hoot
wave Is gonoroted In TRS at froquoncios ·rons-
TR1 ing from 3 to 400 Hz, and propagation and
6 7 phase shift of wovo ore analyzed. Article
prosonts methods of improving thermal sta-
bility in integrated clrcuits.-H. Schmidt,
Thermal Feedback In Integrated Circuits,
Electronic Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nothorlonds, Vol
28, No. 1, 1968, p 29-39.
Re
+
R7 9.5k AG C SIGNAL
2.5k
Os D1 A-F OUTPUT
Qg I
r----"'""___. . I
I
I
I
I
"'
~INPUT Rio
I
..!.
I
.l-
>
... 121 -rI T
'--~--c~--"""'~u-----+----- I
I I I
I I I
..l. I I
--r- I I
l·F AND DETECTOR-Circuit shown Is portion used with mixer having 40 dB gain. Dotac- J. A. Skingloy, and M. C. Sucker~ Lots of Radio
of single 21).pin IC containing all circuits for tor is directly coupled to flnal i-f. Input from on Just Ono IC, Electronics, Aug. 5, 1968, p
3·W British car radio oxcopt l·f fllter and r-f mixer Is about 200 mV rms. Article gives 124-129.
tuner. p;ovides only 40 dB gain because complete receiver circuit on chip.-M. J. Gay,
lkll
.3·6K..n.
10
1
..
TAA293 AMPLIFIER-Contains throo transistors porator is followed by common-emitter stage
and four rosiston, which can bo connected to
and omlttor..follower output, with 6-V zoner
minimum of oxtornal components for uso as
8 for shifting output voltage level to give sym-
voltage-operated or current-operated Schmitt
metrical swing about ground with blpolor 12·
trigger, astable mvbr, or mono mvbr.-Tho SL701 D-C AMPLIFIER-Uses precision compa· V supply.-R. C. Foss and B. J. Graen, Tho
TAA293 as a Schmitt Trigger and Multivlbra• rotor front end with Darlington compound SL700 Sorlos and Applications, Plessey, Swin·
tor, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind· pairs in long•tailod pair conRguration. Com• don, England, No. 7.
haven, Tho Netherlands, No. 25, 1968.
5 10
60pF
80 pF 80pF
6 Q4 9 'ls clear. Counter can bo preset to any desired
condition. Will oporote ot 20% above and
DECADE COUNTER-Motorola MC938F IC will to increase capacitive drive capabilities. bolow nominal 5-V supply requirement.-
operate at counting frequencies up to 20 Outputs correspond to standard 8-4·2·1 bed, MDTL Decade Counter, Motorola, Phoenix,
MHz. Uses active pulkip devices in outputs with individual dired sets and common direct Ariz., PS65, 1967.
+v
INPUT +6v 9
01
220
TEST
120
36
1500
...i
~Cz
-6v 8CASE BANDPASS SHAPING
VOLTAGE VARIABLE 3-STAGE 4
ATTENUATOR WIDEBAND AMPLIFIER -VEE
PHILCO.FORD PA760l-Use1 voltag-ariablo RCA CA3000 VIDEO AMP-Video-type differ·

attenuator for gain centrol to preserve fre- ontial amplifier has flat galn-venu1°frequency
quency response, and Input transistor with response from d-c well Into vhf region
emitter degeneration in amplifying portion of (around 300 MHz). Offers both slngl-nded
IC to give broad bandwidth. Bandpass is 45 or double-ended output. Presence of dlf·
to 130 MHz at 3-c!B points. Article gives 70- fused resistors RI and R2 In collectctr legs of
MHz 1-f amplifier appllcation.-D. W. Ford, amplifier Identifies video-type IC. Article
M. M. Gutman, and W. F. Allen, Jr., It's Not describes methods of adapting to narrow
How Much ;an IC Costs-But How Much It Can band and other appRcatlens.-J, P. Keller,
Save, Eloct~nicr, Oct. 30, 1967, p 66-68. Unear IC'1: Part 3-Differontial Ampliflors At
Worlc, Electronics, Sept. 18, 1967, p 96-104.
RB
R14
2GkS2
s
10
TAA300 AUDIO AMPUFIER-Dellvors I W au• TR2 having 15,000 ohms Input lmpedanco, molnlng tran1l1tors.-A. M. Peters, TAA300
dlo power to B-ohm load when operating driver stage with TR3 provldin9 d-c coupling lntogrotod 1 W Clan B A. F. Ampllflor, Phillps,
from 9.y battery, at 10"' distortion. Con- ta TR4 and TR5 In cascade, and direct-coupled Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho
1i1t1 of dlfforentlal-ampliflor Input stage TRI• slnglo-endod push-pull output stage using ro- Netherlands, No. 136, 1969.
r--------------------
TAA300
RIO
4
---.,
I
1 IK
I
6 T9
RI
4.7K
..__-+---+----09
I Rl4 I
R2 20K I
I 9K
I
I ___ JI
L----------
TAA300 l·W AUDIO AMPLIFIER-Contains 11 10
transistors and 5 diodes mounted on 2·mm -The Amperex TAA 300 Monolithic Into• Amplifier, Amperex, Slatersville, R.t., 5-138,
silicon chip with 14 resistors and 1 capacitor. grated Circuits Used as a Complete Audio 1968.
+VA (+12V)
e
3 7
3:4 7.5K Rs
K
RB
3.4kQ
TR9
R2 R3
OV 7 3.9K 15K
t
Yo
TR3
R11
2.6kQ
R4
2.4kQ
4
·V8 (·6V)
0
TAA241 DIFFERENCE AMPLIF1ER-lnput stage
TRl·TR2 is dlfferenco amplifier, with TR3 In WIDEBAND AMPLIFIER-Circuit shown is that
common emitter branch to Insure high com- of RCA CA3023 IC, specifically designed as
mon-mode rejedion ratio. TR7, TR8, and multistage i-f amplifier providing up to 60
TR9 together form output stage, giving 1.oro dB of gain up to 10 MHz. Emittor·followor
output when there is no Input signal. Out• Q3 provides impedance matching and level
put lmpedanco is about 200 ohms. Open• shifting between voltage ampliflors QI and
loop voltage gain can be as high as 6,000. 04. Emitter-follower Q6 provides low-im·
-J. Cohen and J. Oosterling, Applications of pedanco output, while 02 and QS provide
a Practical D. C. Difference Amplifier, Phillps, agc.-H. M. Kleinman, IC R.F. and l.F.
Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Ampllflers, Electronics World, July 1968, p
Netherlands, No. 321, 1968. 45-48.
COMPENSATION COMPENSATION
LM108 SUPER-BETA OPAMP-Dosign goals for
National Semiconductor IC included lowest
possiblo Input currents and minimum power
consumption. Output swings to within 1 V RID
of supply voltages which may be as low as '11--+......;90

;.;;...-r-CIUTPuT
2 V. Requires external componsation.-Op·

Amp ICs With Super-Gain Transistors, EEE, Ru
240
Nov. 1969, p 16, 19-20, 22, and 24.
R1
2• 021 Ozo
- ( CONVENTIONAL
TRANSISTOR On R12
820
-n:. Sl.IPER·GAIN
TRANSISTOR
~
v-
R11 R1s
500
"
"'
Cll(ClCR
MJOIO
CAl'V(R
14
Zz.
I
Zs'&
TV SOUND 1-F-RCA CA3041 integrated cir•

cuit pro,,ides 70 dB gain as i-f ampllflor-
limiter, matched diodes for f-m detector, and
audio driver, yet is priced under $2 in quan•
titius of 11 or moro.-H. M. Kleinman, IC R.
F. and 1.F. Amplifiers, Eledronics World, July
1968, p 45-48.
It-•--------
•t0
s~
IF AMPUf'ICR - - - - - - - - •
!
120 3k
7.5k 7.5k
2.7k 3.3k 3.9k
8.2k 8.2k
2.7k
-25v -25v
furor. Nearly identical values of two com•
COMPUTER SENSE AMPLIFIER-lndudes bal- and output ampriflor stago, as used in Syl- pononts are easier to produce than specified
anced clifferontlal ampllfler fed by active con• vania MSP·24 IC. Author presents this as absolute volues.-H. I. Cohen, Avoiding IC
stant-curront source, pair of omlttor-followors, example of good IC design, that moots specs System Design Pitfalls, Eledronict, Aug. 5,
common-emitter pair, throe-resistor network. and has no unusual problems for monufac- 1968, p 110-116.
II 12 COUPEllSATIOH
PIODES DS AND D6 ACT AS CAPACITORS AND ARE USED TO

BALANCETHE DETECTOR SUBSTRATE CAPACITANCES.
COLOR AFT-Special-function IC was devel·
oped for automatic frequency control appli-
cations in color tv. Includes :zoner-regulated
2 COMP£NSA'llON power supply that Improves performance and
reduces system cost. Consists of 45-MHz
DUAL OPAMP~Used as equalized preamp limiter-amplifier Ql..Q2, four-diode matrix DI·
section of H. H. Scott Series 2500 a m/f·m
0
D4 forming balanced detector that converts
compact storoo system. Input transistors for oulput of phasa transformer to flltored d·c
tho two channels aro connectod as emitter• signal, constont-current driven differential om•
coupled differential ampliflors.-D. R. von pliflor Q3..Q4..Q5 providing sufficient sensitiv•
Recklinghausen, IC Op-Amp Hi-Fi Preampli· lty and power to pormlt use of low-cost tun•
fler, Electronics World, Juno 1968, p 44-45. ing olomont, and zener regulator DIO-Dll
operating from d-c supply of 15 to 30 V.-
w. M. Austin, H. M. Klainmon, and J. Sund.
burg, Application of tho RCA·CA3044 ond
CA3044VI lntagratod Circuits in Automatic·
Fino-Tuning Systems, RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
ICAN-5831, 1968.
11
391
80• 4J• I\'
MCIS66 VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Motorolo IC

II•
Is designed to float on output voltage, so
totol output volto90 is limited only by ex-
temol sarle1-9a11 transistor volto9e break·
down and sofa operating area. Control am•
plifier samples output voltage directly.
Separate differential ampliflor samples output
currant and produces limiting so sharp that
It is constant within 1 % plus or minus I mA.
-D. Kesner, Volta9e Regulators-Old and
New, "State-of-the-Art-linears in Action,"
RlllRUC( VOllAGI CURRENT OR OUlPUl
INUR~AL
CUAA("l CO~IAOl CONIROl AW'llfl(R
VOl lAGl .wtllfllR
AlGUlAlOR SOU AC I AM,llFllA
2 KVxVy 14 -KVxVy +
. . - - - - -....--0+15V
40K
13 3
By
500 500 500 500 500
7-
MC1595 LINEAR MULTIPLIER-Motorola IC IOK
linoar four-quadrant multipllor uses dual dif·
forontial ampllRors with collectors cross-
coupled to produce full-wave balancod mul-
tiplication. Circuit analysis is givon in
Motorola Application Notes AN-489 and AN· MILLER-FEEDBACK BIASING-Eliminates neod
490.-E. Renschler, Tho Monolithic Multiplier for Iorgo-value emitter bypass capacitor in
Broakthrough, "Stot-f-the-Art-Lineors in IC ampliRor. Article also covers techniques
Action.'' Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p for reducing resistor 1urfaco-area requirements
27-36. In various IC circuits.-A. Tuszynski, Skirting
Thin-Film Design Problems, Electronic Design,
Aug. 30, 1965, p 38-43.
3 13 2 9
110.-------~-------.....--'lt----~~1--....--~....~~-1---....--...-i-.a-.+-~----<11----<11----""'l4
7.0 v 9.1 k 260
,__--010
7.0k
4
2.Sk 5.0k
MC1351P TV SOUND-Designocl for tv sound 8 12 stage.-TV Sound Circuit Monolithic SiRcon

j.f limiting, dotodion, audio preamplifier, and rms. 1-f voltage gain is 64 dB. Will drlvo Epitaxial Passivated MC1351P, Motorola,
driver. Output voltogo swing is up to 3 V single external transistor sorving as output Phoenix, Aris., DS9126, 1969.
,.. +Vee
r---------------------------- ----------,, I
,
I
Q6 l.9K l
I
I
I
I
07 I
I
I
Rl 2.4K zi:I
R3 )K I
I OUTPUT
RZ 4.lK
03
'" '" ... 100
• FEEDBACK l RS
~•..al~bot'ltitto-.ttfd'''""'•fl.....,. '
~.w "" I
I'
3K
GND
MC1590 l·F AMPLIFIER-Motorola IC is direct•
coupled high-gain ampllAer Intended prlma•
I'
'I
,1.. . . ---o
rlly for 1-f applications up to 150 MHz. Wlde- 'L---------------------------------------
rango age characteristic makes It suitable for
many video ampliA11r applications. Moy be MIC0101 AUDIO·VIDEO PREAMP-Ideal for
vsod either slngl-nded or differentially tape playback and other low-level applica-
coupled at input and at output.-R. Helhall tions where input signals are 1 mV or less.
and B. Trout, Integrated Circuits for tho World Frequency response extends woll beyond
of High Frequency, "Stat-f-tho-Art-Unears radio froquoncies, to about 700 kHz for 3 dB
In Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p down. Consists of common-emitter Darling•
21-26. ton directly coupled to ampliAer Q3 for com·
blnad gain of about 60 dB. Serles regulator
circuit Q6-Q7 provides power supply filterlng,
while Q4 and QS serve as constant 1.4-V
d-c bias source. Companion MIC0103 hos
two identical MIC0101 chips in same pack-
age for stereo applicatlons.-M. L. Deachler,
Integrated Circuit Proampliflors, Mallory, In-
dianapolis, Ind., APPN-2, 1968.
•Vin
514 Rsc
~I Rl
.,,.
.,,.
Q9
L,_ Control
CR6
S.O~
RI
CR8
':' .,,. .,,.

VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Motorola MC1560 IC Rl
includes zero-temperaturo-coefllclent voltago-
referonco stage, d-c level-shifting regulator,
main series regulator, and supporting func·
tions.-D. Kosner, Voltage Regulators-Old
and Now, "Stat-f•tho-Art-Llnears In Ac·
tlon,'' Motorola, Phoenix, Aris., 1969, p 14-
20. 100
CHAPTER 42
Inverter Circuits
IMPROVED JENSEN-Saturable core in con•

vontional two-transistor Jensen inverter limits
switching spoed, reducing efficiency at high
froquencies. Improved circuit shown, using
uoss-couplod IC gates to form 20-kHz ftee-
running mvbr, has 90% eHlcioncy and good
voltage regulotlon. Frequoncy is independont
of load current. Maximum output is I kW,
and power-weight ratio is better than 100 W
por lb.-P. K. Edwards, Now lino-Operated
Inverter Offers Fast Switching and High Efll·
cioncy, EEE, Feb. 1969, p 115-116.
ARNOLD 6T-417901
(16
BURTON
STYLE 12479
1.0 µF 5 KVA 400 Hz
56CT:115V
10T
10T
#12
~-----------4---------1111---------<.
#12
28 v
DLOAD
MP-902
2N4442 1011
1N4747
10011
(16
for stabilizing output froquoncy.-"Somicon-

120-V A·C AT 2 KW AND 580 HZ FROM 28 wave output at efllclonciGS of 81>-90% de· ductor Powor Circuits Handbook," Motorola,
V D-C-High-power inverter produces square- ponding on load. Circuit has no provisions Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 2-47.
332
INVERTER CIRCUITS 333
TO TRIGGER DC -
PULSE GENERATOR
'
10.KHZ PUSH-PULL SWITCHING INVERTER-

Operates from 150-V d-c line and delivers 500
W at 10 kHz across terminals of output trans-
former T1. Lower frequency can be obtained
by using different pulse generator frequency
and different output transformor.-"Silicon
Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
SP-51, p 196.
TO TRIGGER
D1, DI = 600·voll,
= Inductor, 6·amporo fa•t.rocovory diodo PULSE GENERATOR
h 95 turn1 of No. 16 magnot wiro
wo•nd on Arnold Enuinoorln9 Typo AA· I 7172 Ns
HG
=
=
36 tur .. of No. 18 magnot wlro1 Ns =
21 turns of No. 18 magnet wlro1 core, two
Ti = Oulpul tran1formor. Nt = N1 = 9 tum•
lor equiv.I core 1011 of Siemon• Typo 266215-AOOOO·R026 Cor
af No. 18 ma9net who, two 1tronds: N2 = equiv.) wllh A·mil air tlllP
t12V
3.3K
4.3K
SOUAREWAVE
osc 2
01
I. 4 kHz
2N3642 6
CR1 200pf CR4
1N4154 C1 IN4154
03
C2 .J CRz
RIPPLE ~ 35 mV PTO PAT RL -10011 3 2N3642 CR3
200 ~F
RIPPLE • 20 mV PTO PAT II. • 10K 2.2K
1
.sv -
2
INVERTING 12 V WITHOUT TRANSFORMER-

Converts singlo-polarlty d-c source to bipolar
source prouiding both positiue and ·negative
4 12 V d-c for driving pair of IC comparators.
Roquiros external square-wave source but
oscillator frequency Is not critical. Zenor
current-limiting resistor Rz may usually be
omitted.-E. W. locheed, Jr., Transformorles1
Circuit Inverts Powor-Supply Voltage, EON,
July 15, 1970, p 63-64.
ov
6
Al 01
1.5 k, 5 w 1N3211
C2
s T B.6 pF
01
370 VAC
2Nt848
~
L1
..L C3--
20µF
370 VAC t20-V A·C AT too W AND 60 HZ FROM 48 V
D-C-Sino-wavo output frequency Is hi9hly
stable for both input and load valtago varia·
tions bocauso drive circuit is froquoncy-con-
trollod inverter havin9 two secondary wind-
x y
ings, for fooding terminals 5, T, X, and Y of
output inverter. Combination Is commor•
A2 02 TRANSFORMERS clally available as Falco Model W-t694 In·
1.5k/5W 1 N3211 T1 FD REST ELECTRIC W-1705 vortar.-"Somlconductor Power Circuits Hand·
T2 - FOREST ELECTRIC W-1704 book," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., t968, p 2-
INDUCTORS 38.
L1 - FOREST ELECTRIC W-1708 R6
L2 - FOREST ELECTRICW-1706 7.5
c:
L3- FOREST ELECTRIC W·1707 1W
C4 100 µF 50 V
(M~1~1_o_>~~~i1o-~~~~~
c:
03
A4
320/5 w
05
R7
7.5
R5 1N2976B 1W
200 04 T2
1 N3000B 1 N3000B
04
+
'"
'"1llL1
,.
IMP110)
""'---11----'
'" 48 v
•start of
Wn<!"9'
Tt
R4
0---il--~....~~.-R-2~~~~~~-R-3-e>--~....A-4~-+(11
~..._~~~ .....
~~~~~.,_~.....,.,__~--oov 3 k 3 k 82
2W
4-W FLUORESCENT SUPPLY-Uses two BFY50
transistors operating as squaro-wavo push·
pull oscillator drlvin9 lamp through trans-
former. Operating froquoncy is about 20
kHz. Rt and R3 aro 180, R2 and R4 aro 15,
and C Is 1 µF. Report glvos choke and trans- 01 04
former winding data .for both 4-W and 6-W
2N1558 2N1558
clrcuits.-Appllcatlons of tho BFY50, BFY5t
and BFY52, Phillps, Pub. Dopf., Elcoma Div.,
Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 428, 1965.
T1 - Phoenix Trunsformar PX2677
20-V A·C AT 50 W AND t KHZ FROM t2 V dona by mvbr Q2-Q3 rather than by feed-
D-C-tnverter driven by free-running mvbr back from output transformer. Useful for pre-
provides excellent frequency re9ulotlon for cision systems requiring carefully controllod
variations in both load and input voltagos. frequency and wavoform.-"Somlconductor
Output is square wave at 20 V rms. Switch• Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix,
Ins of output power transistors Qt and Q4 is Ariz., 1968, p 2-6t.
L2
2mh
..--------------<'>?
STANCOR IA2--0izN&9r -Q4IN1i32-----. s
TM-2A
I CR4 I
I IN484 I
TFI ~~ I I 03
TUNING FORK I~ I I 2N2983
OSCILLATOR -=- 3 I !eLu 4 GRN
RED
R1
IOK
BLK
R5
68K
CR2
IN703A
2
+. -~~- •~""l .
•v• I . I II.
I l.I -
... _..I1
L I - 'lREg7
n
10:1
E
1:1
I THORDASON TORROID
I TR-26
6
-------
Ol 2Nll32 .JI
I I .,.. c!,4
..___________________-<"4
4
1A1--o;2N697 -04m1132----, 5 1A:r--o;2N697 -04m1132-----. s

I R1
CR4
IN484
I
I
1,
I
CR4
IN484 I
I
I I
--
8.2K
03
I R R I I R I 2N2983
I 18~ 8.2~ ! 1 I e.2~ !eLU
7
GRN
E
2 I 2
I
I
.3 I 3
I I t)4
I L 'IRED YW~T4
+---¥~'; L!~i!l _.. I II I i- ---· I iW;..J I .. 1I THORDASON ~N2983
I H""'' I •'""ill"--- I II I
0
~ - I ~ I 10:
T2
I
TR-26
1:1
TORROID
I • ····--
I I
_Ol2Nll32-
_ _ _ _ _ _ .JI I
~}2~~---.J
~
7 1
28-V D-C TO 400-HZ 2-PHASE-Use of com- W to resistive load, and can be used to drive or relay will reverse motor. Article gives
plementary flip-flops results in high efficiency small synchronous motors at precise speeds. design details.-P. Ward, Complementary
Co)
Co) for inverter synchronized from 1,600-Hz slngle- No-load standby power is less than 2 W. Flip-Flops Improve Bistable Performance, Efec·
en phase tuning-fork oscillator. Can deliver 50 Reversal of one output phase leg with switch tronic Design, May 11, 1964, p 50-55,
01
C2
2µF
200
VAC 120-V A·C AT 120 WAND 60 HZ FROM 12 V
D-C-Used to operate a-c: equipment in auto-
T1
c
mobiles. Output is square wove whoso mag.
3•
....
.-~--'VV\l'"'"~.....~~~-+~11 _~~--1...-~....~-4-at
nitudo varies with load and input voltage •
Regulation from no load to full load is about
5 30%, which means that 6-W increase In load
13 v
docroasos output voltago 1 V. Efllcloncy is
75% at full load, which Is oxcollont for slngle-
transformor invortor.-"Somicondudor Power
Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1968, p 2-52.
T1 - ForMt Electric VJ-18
TH3
9Qlt
TRIGGER FOR 1-KW INVERTER-Ul generates

50-Hz square wave that is fed Into IC tlip-flop
U2, whoso outputs are 180 deg out of phase
and foed monostable mvbr's U3 and U4 having
same phase diff'oronco between their output
pulses. After amplitlcation, these pulses aro
fed to thyristors in stand-by Inverters served
by trigger. Transformers each have 150-tum
primary and 75-turn sacondary. Trigger ~an THI.
gate
be permanently connected to its battery sup-
ply because current drain is nogllglblo.-N.
Borgstra and R. i v. d. Linden, Stand-By In-
verter far Emergency Mains Supply, Phillps,
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho
RBI
112 0
cs
RI. UMQ RU RAI
ICIOV
cg ..
load
l
nov
r
l
4t. 1sc.,
RA)
0-0
l·KW INVERTER FOR A·C LINE FAILURE-Pro· starting circuit to prevent short-circuit at by saparato trigger generator operating from
tects critical produdlon operation from inter• startup if half of output transformer primary 12-V bottery.-N. Borgstra and R. v. d. Un.
ruption of a-c supply far more than a few was saturated at previous shutdown. Both den, Stand By Inverter for Emergency Mains
0
cycles. McMurray Bodford inverter circuit Is relays are 10 A at 220 V, 50 Hz. Gates of Supply, Phlllps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd-
used to obtain good regulation, with spacial thyristors are fed by trigger pulses produced hoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 96, 1970.
Tl TRANSFORMERS
T1 - ARNOLD CORE 6T·5340·D1
NA+ Ne 83 TURNS EACH #30WIRE
Ne 8 TURNS #26 WIRE
T2 - PHOENIX TRANSFORMER PX2677
350 V, 1 kVA, 1 kHz
INDUCTOR
R1 L1 - PHOENIX TRANSFORMER PX1710 2 mH, 30 A
05
24 v-=-- C1
03
2N4441
+ 0.1 µF
01 100 v
2N4919
T2
10n
1N4001
R7
150 k
II C3
25µF
50V 45-V SQUARE WAVE AT 150 W Willi INVER·
TER·DRIVEN INVERTER-Will operato from
C2
10-28 V d-c: and deliver 45.y a-c: 400 Hz
0.1 µF
2N4870 which Is indopondont of load and has high
100 v 04 06
C4
stability far input voltage variations. Elll·
2N5060 2N4441 ciency is 70%. Drivo circuit is current-feed-
0.22µF
back Inverter Q1..Q2 with ujt Q7 in starting
100 v
network. Windings on timing transformer
R4
drive pair of sonsitivo-gato set's (Q3..Q4)
10 k
which In turn drive main parallel-commutated
Inverter Q5..Q6 that supplies power to 10.
ohm load across 12.-"Semicondudor Power
1968, p 2-36.
C3 R2
N3
0.1 µF/100 V 10n
T1
TRANSFORMERS
T1 - CORE - MAGNETICS INC. #80623·1/20·080
Ne 15 TURNS OF AWG #26 WIRE
Ne 3 TURNS OF AWG #22 WIRE
T2 - CORE - ARNOLD GT·5800·D1
01 N1 100 TURNS OF 3 AWG #22 WIRES
MJ413 N2 104 TURNS OF 3 AWG #19 WI RES
N3 7 TURNS OF AWG #26 WIRE
Rt
100 k
Ct
N1
Nt
E]1oon
T2
10 µF
02 250 v
120.V AT 15 KHZ FROM 120 V A·C-Usod to
convert 60 Hz to higher frequency. A-c: lino
voltage is rodifiod with vory littlo filtering,
for driving 15-kHz Inverter that delivers
square-wavo output of 200 W with full-load
efRcloncy of 88%. Providos isolation from
D1 D4 a-c: power line with minimum size and
120 v wei9ht. Operates well on lndudlve loads
60 Hz (4) 1N4003 and on small loads.-"Somicondudor Power
D2 03 Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1968, p 2-59.
T1
TRANSFORMERS
T1 - ARNOLD CORE 6T 7699D1
Ne Ne 54 TURNS #20 WI RE
Ne 3 TURNS TWO #12 WIRES IN PARALLEL
01 C4 T2 - ARNOLD CORE 3T 6464·L4
2N4280 40 nF N1 12 TURNS TWO #12 WIRES IN PARALLEL
D1 C2 100 v N2120TURNS #16WIRE
MZ2360 30 N3 7 TURNS #20 WIRE
C3 nF
1 pF/10 V 00
•Ne
•Ne
02
E T2
D3 2N4280
MZ2360
120-V A-C AT 400 HZ FROM 12 V D-C-Hy-
brid0feedback inverter gives square-wave out-
• put of 400 W at efllciancy above 85% for full
Ne range af output power. Can be used with
ftuorescent lamps, 400-Hz 90-W motor, and
other inductive as well as resistive loads.
Feedback winding N3 ensures starting with-
out load.-"Semlconductor Power Circuits
C1 Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968,
6 pF/25 V N3
p 2-57.
115.Y A-C AT 10 W FROM 12-V BAmRY-

Q1.Q2 and transformer oscillate at 400 Hz
when 51 Is closed, with startup assured by
forward bla1 developed across R5-R6. Serles
regulator Q3-Q4 senses output of full-wave
bridge, which is proportional to a-c load
voltage, and controls ba111 drive of output
transistors Q1.Q2 to regulate both output
voltage and frequency. Developed as low•
cost reguloted a-c power 1ource for mobile
applications.-Ragulated Inverter, Delco Radio,
Kokomo, Ind., No. 37, 1966.
L1 and L2 - TRIAD C-49 V 32 mH CT, 5A

R1 T1 - TRIAD F·22A 120/6.3 V 20 A
Ct x 1.5 k R2 T2 - SPRAGUE 11Z13
20pF y 1.5 k
01
110 VAC 02
28 v 2N4870
120-V A-C AT 40 W AND 400 HZ FROM 28
v D-C-Glves pure sine-wave output with
10% voltage regulation for both Input and
T2 load voltages. Can be opMatod indoftnitely
with open or shorted load. Output voltage
01 D2
N4001 1N4001 11c: lncroasOI from about 30 to 130 V rms as load
Is applied; load rHistanco must therefore be
limited to certain range if voltage variations
are undesirable. Efllclency is about 40% for
C2 250-ohm load.-"Somicondudor Power Cir-
20pF R7
100 cults Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
100 VAC 1968, p 2-33.
~FlTi
TO TO
SCR1 SCRz
D,
Ti
=
= Zener diode, 20·•olt, '/1•woll
Pul10 tron1dormor; center-tapped primaryr
•econdarie-. Na= = Nt 100 turn• of No. 36
wlro1 core material: lndlana General Typo No.
N1 = N• = I SO tvrn• of No. 36 wiro; •Piii Cf902, or oqulv.
TRIGGER GENERATOR FOR INVERTER-Used

for triggering pair of thyristors, SCR1 and
SCR2, In 10-kHz push·pull switching inverter.
Transients that might exceod maximum rat.
ing of scr's are suppressed by network con•
sisting of R1, R2, R3, C2, C3, and two 1N547
diodes, D1 and D2.-"Sillcon Power Circuits
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 197.
R1 R16
240
390
2W
R4
390
C1
01 01
400µF
1 N4001
26 v 2N4871
06
05 1N4
2N4441 741A
C4
60 nF
76 v 07
+
=-28V
LOAD L1
4400µF 1 N4001 03 04
C2 02 1N4001 1N4001
26 v 06
06 1N4
741A T4
T1 - T4 - SPRAGUE 11Z12
Efliciency is about 65% at full load.-"Semi·
12°V A·C AT 60 WAND 465 HZ FROM 28 V generate well-regulated square-wave output condudor Power Circuits Handbook," Moto•
D-C-Uses Impulse-commutated scr inverter to that can be used to drive 400-Hz transformer. rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 2-41.
•
N3
R1 C1 T1 - ARNOLD CORE GT-5502-0500
1an N1 26 TURNS OF AWG #14 WIRE
0.51o1F
N2 52 TURNS OF AWG #14WIRE
1W 10 v 01 03 N3 3 TURNS OF AWG #22 WIRE
1N4003 1N3039B
R3 01
1 k
N1
E
2W
.,__-----+--~11...--
R4
1k 02 28 v N1
2W
04 52·V A·C AT 100 W AND 15 KHZ FROM 28 V

1N3039B O.C-High-froquoncy inverter provicles squaro-
02 wavo output with efllcloncy of 85% at full
R2 C2 1N4003 loacl. Frequoncy stablllty is excellent, boing
18!2 0.5 lolF cleponclont only on Input voltage ancl not
1W 10 v • loacl. Excellont for applications requiring
minimum size ancl weight.-"Semlconcluctor
N3
Powor Circuits Hanclbook," Motorola, Phoenix,
Ariz., 1968, p 2-54.
T1
T1
~
IOOT
AWG·Z6
520T
SELF-STARTER-Combination of low-cost plas- AWG·33 IOOT
AWG·26
tic-encapsulatecl ujt ancl scr provicles almost
Instantaneous saturation of Ql in inverter
circuit, for reliable startup at 400 H1. Once
Inverter is operating, starting circuit stays
turned off ancl hence consumes negligible
pow•r· Output to load Is 200 W at llS V. Rs
101\
-R. A. Phillips, Starting Network for Transis-
tor Inverters, EEE, Feb. 1969, p 114-115.
T1
IN3193
DI
10
R3 N3 Tz
N2 •+ 01
• 150 CORE
N0.2
2N3055
• RI
03 R5 51k •
N1
117V OUTPUT,
N1 +IZV
CORE + FREQUENCY
Nz
NO.I ~tllHz
150 ....
R2
04 R6 51k
Ns
R4
10
+• N4 _
CORE
02
2N3055
• N0.2
02
in switching spoocl.-D. M. Baugher, Darling•

CUTIING TRANSFORMER COST-Extra wlncl· recluco transformor si10 ancl cost without hav. ton lnvorter Foatures Turn-Off Drive ancl law
ings N3 ancl N4 on output transformer, plus ing excessive dissipation of conventional Dar• V-co(sat), Electronic Design, July 5, 1969, p
acldition of Dl and D2 to Darlington Inverter, lington approach. Circuit also givos Increase 86.
T1
T1 - ARNOLD CORE ST 4168S1

4ST OF #23 FOR EACH BASE WINDING
ST OF 3 #18 FOR EACH COLLECTOR WINDING
T2 - PHOENIX TRANSFORMER PX-2677
C1
C2
2.2 µF/25 V
r---llt--.. + 1 µF/400 V T 2
II LOAD
240-V A-CAT 1 KW AND 1,200 HZ FROM 120
V D-C-Square-wave output Is produced at
efficiency of 92% for full load, with oxcellent
02 frequency stability. Will operate over input
2N5325 voltage range of 20 to 160 V d-c. Circuit
will fail-safe if either input voltage or load
• is removed, even though self-excited. Has
no starting limitatlons.-"Semlconductor Power
1968, p 2-so.
Tl
22-W AUTOMOTIVE-Uses inexpensive Bon·

dlx plastic-encased power tran1i1tors to con•
vert 12-V storoge-battery powor to any
dosired highor a-c voltage determined by
turns ratio of transformer, or to d-c voltage if
output rectifier and filter are added.-D. E.
Lancaster, Plastic Power Transistors-Advan·
tages and Applications, Electronics World,
Fob. 1968, p 50-52.
270A
Tl-WESTINGHOUSE C CORE, CATALOG # H425 0 WlllDING lfl 20 WIRE
( B I 22WATT INVERTER
R9
2.2 k
01
15W
1Nl189
T2
Cl
6000µF
150 v
C3
200 µF Al R2
1k 1 k
+ 120 V AC
-=- 165 v A5
R4
1 k RS
RL 6.2 k 6.2 k OS
SM2SZS5
LOAD
C2
6000 µF
150 v
03 04
02
1 N1189 1N4001 1N4001
• T1
T2
SPRAGUE 11Z12
11Z12
120-V A·C AT 800 W AND 400 HZ FROM 165 regulated for load changes, frequency is In- -"Semiconductor Power Circuits Handbook.''
V D-C-Considered to be bost sino-wave independent of normal Input and load varia· Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 2-31.
vorter In use today. Output voltage is wall tions, and ofllcioncy is 60% at rated output.
R2
200
T1
......--------~--+---Ill
R1 2V
1 k
Q2
2N2728
CLASS A INVERTER-Circuit is self-commu•
tatod by resonating load, for transforming
T1 - Arnold Core 6T58000S1 cl-c to a.:C. Is most suitable for operation at
Ne ~ 1 Turn il4 Wire about 1,000 Hz, because L-C rosonant clrcuil
Ne a 7 Turns (116 Wire carries full load currant. Ser current is nearly
T2 - Phoenix Transformer PX2127 sinusoidal. Whan SCR1 is triggered, C is
charged to vollage approaching 300 V (twico
supply voltago). Currant than reverses and
35-V A-C AT 80 W AND t KHZ FROM 2 V flows back to supply through Dl while C dis-
D-C-Current-foeclback inverter provides maxi• charges. SCR2 is triggered next, with cycle
mum ofllcioncy of 87% for 30·W loacl ancl repeating at about 1,000 Hz to provide 120
70% for full loacl. Input currant from 2-V V a•c for load.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition,
battery has allowablo range af 10-50 A. General Electric, 1967, p 228.
Starting circuit far invortor consists of Rl,
Cl, R2, C2, ancl Q3.-"Somiconcluctor Powor
Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoonix, Ariz.,
1968, p 2-45.
Tl
6.2
C3
0.22 µF
CORES- MAGNETICS INC
100 v
Nol 50026-2F w1• Wz•66T No16
No2 55202-A2
No3 55202-A2
ARNOLD CORE 4T - 4179 D1
'Tl -
Ne 200 TURNS #20 WI RE
REED-SWITCH INVERTER-Converts 1-V d-c
Ne 20 TURNS THREE #16 WIRES IN PARALLEL
output of thormoelectric generator to 10 V
T2- TRANSFORMER 110-24 VCT FELCO VJ·1 a-c. Low-powor transistor fllp·flop clrlves
(PRODUCT OF FOREST ELECTRIC CO.I
reed switch coils, to eliminate contact bounce
problems. Operating. froquoncy of 100 Hz
120-V A-C AT 40 W AND 400 HZ FROM 12 V gives 1,000-hour reed switch life for 1 W do-
D-C-Givos froquoncy-stablo squaro-wavo out• liverod to load, with efflcloncy of 65%.-J. M. ·,
!
put. ERlcioncy Is about 80%.-"Somlconduc- Loo, Rood Switches Reduce Power Converter I
tor Powor Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Cost, Electtonlc Design, May 11, 1964, p 80-
81. I
Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 2-43. I
i
-12
+12
TUtllt•I llATCO•
1:a:?
-'b- IK
GI C•44&
IMc
I VPP
Zs•600
•12
IA Ql,2 -2N705
SQUARER-Uses transient-free current-mode

400-HZ INVERTER-Class C inverter with Ott inverter Ql-02, followed by saturating in·
filter converts 28 V d-c to 120 V o-c at 400 verter Q3, to convert sine waves ta square
Hz with 360 W output power into 28·ohm in· waves for driving switching circuits. Thor•
ductivo lood hovlng 20 ohms resistance. mal stability and noise immunity aro oxcollont
Input power is 424 W, for 85% ofllcloncy. and sonsitivity is high.-M. Neidich, Squaring
Article gives design oquations.-"SCR Man• Circuit Improves Symmetry and Thermal Sta•
uol," 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967, p bility, Electronic Design, Aug. 31, 1964, p 48.
235-237.
NOTE: Ta locate odditional circuits In the category of this chapter, use the index ot the back
of this book. Check also the aulhor's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
I
CHAPTER 43
Lamp Control Circuits
R1 ,----------------.
._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
R1•l.BKD,ZW 01•GECZ08 Ci•. OS,.ld ,ZSV

R2·470 02· GE 2N2646 Cz•Ol,.td.ZSV
R3 °1KO D1·GE A418 NOTE' ALL RESISTANCES
R4•8800 Dt·GE A13F V2w, IO% UllLESS
Rs - IKD .112w POT Z 1-GEZ4XU6 OTHERWISE NOTEO.
P.C.· GE A3S LpL2· 430W INCANDESCEllT LAW
860-W LAMP CONTROL-Uses controlled-half- mum, regulated within 1 % for 10% change ing d·c components. Photocell serves as
1
plus-flxed-half·wave phase control to ngulato In supply voltage. Not suitable for trans- feedback olomont In closed loop.-"SCR Man-
860-W lamp from half to full power. Ught former-fed loads, because this method of ual," 4th Eclltion, General Elodric, 1967, p
output ran9e Is then 30% to 100% of maxi- phase control 9ives unsymmetrical wave hav• 285.
2N6273
111n 'JkO 1k0
0.1 pf 0.1 pF 0.1pF

200 20n 200 :ion
120-VMAIN 1W 1W 1W 1W
.,;_ 8V
CURREN1'•1&111MPER6--------'"--------~----------~----------~--------..,..~•----~-'
DEVICE 1URNED ON
;--...........
RELAY FOR BANK N0.1 G A I N RELAY FOR BANK NO. Z [ ~V:MAIN
TRIAC CONTROL OF HEAVY LOADS-Low- rated at 25 A, for handling largo banks of dudors and Components," Texas Instruments,
power control arrangement turns on triacs lights or other loads.-"Preferrod ~emicon- Dallas, Texas, CC101, 1968, p 2460BA.
344
LAMP CONTROL CIRCUITS 345
LAMP LOAD
120 VAC
LASCR
L98
PREHEATER-Ult provldos preheating of re- talns fllament temperature lust below visible L M. Hertz, Solid State Lamp-Part II, Gen•
petitlvely programmed Incandescent lamps by lovol. R1 adiusts sensitivity ef laser to light, eral Electrlc, Clevoland, Ohio, No. 3-0121,
triggering laser late In each half-cycle, with to give reliable turn-on of lamp load under t970, p 17.
setting of R2 dotormining current that main- control of solid-stato lamp In programmer.-
I I G•E F8 LAMP C6
0.041'1
600VW
3
Fl
SI 5AMP
·~ RI CAI C5
220 GE·X4
OHMS LI 0.01 " '
BATIERY-OPERATED FLUORESCENT-Will oper· 52 200VW
01 2
ate 12-inch F8 fluoroscont fram 12-V battery
GE·XIO
for portable use, or from 12-V auta, boat, ar R4
81 + IOOK
trailer storage battery. Remove ballast and 12YOLT
starter from lamp fixture and roplaco with BATTERY C7
autotransformer for which book gives wind· 601'1
15VW
ing Instructions. Inverter circuit used Is hlah
enaugh in frequency ta give flicker-free lllu· a8l,.1
200VW C2 C3 C4
R5
68
R2 OHMS
mination.-"Hobby Manual," General Electric,
Owensboro, Ky., t965, p 138.
47
OHMS '"' i'
200
vw
iC:,
vw vw
L.AMP
L.OAD
R2
IM
120VAC
LIGHT FROM
O.lpf - - - -PROGRAMMER
PREHEATING FOR PROGRAMMED LAMPS- pragrammod off. This keeps lamp current at if separate gate resistor Rt Is used for each
Provonts thermal stresses on lamps that aro minimum (adjusted with R2) required to main· lascr.-E. K. Howell, The Light Activated
optically programmed on and off far long taln fllament temporaturo lust below visible SCR, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
periods of time. Ujt provides preheating liy level. Rt controls laser sensitivity ta llaht. 200.34, t965.
triggering laser late In each half-cyclo when Slnglo ujt ca~ servo several laser-lamp circuits
10 uf 16T 1126
l6T ....L
18Q
PORTABLE ULTRAVIOLET SOURCE-Converter
circuit operates from 2.5-V ·rechargeable bat•
tery and supplies 400 mA at 26 V d-c for
F5000 ultraviolet lamp. Frequency of Inverter
is 8 kHs.-"Circuits Manual," Motorola, Phoe-
nix, Ariz., 1965, p 7-1-7.
2N2912
2N2912
50 uf
ARNOLD CORE 6T 8043 DI
R1 15K
R 2W
F
------1
I
F
I
L TRIGGER LAMPS ON AT NIGHT-Lamp load Is turned
T DEVICE
E on by triac when drop in illumination on
R
c, PHOTOCELL
photocell increases its impedance enough to
make trigger diode turn on. Can be used
0.05p.F
200V for outdoor lighting controls.-"Silicon Power
Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51,
p 259.
0.111F
220V"- 250V'I.
S6kn
s.sw
3-KW ANTIPARAlLEL·THYRISTOR CONTROL- limits amplitude and duration of initial cur• 50-mm rod 10 mm In diamoter.-Lcimp Dim·
Will handle starting surges for lamp loads up rent surge for lnccindescent lcimps. Steepness mer, Phillps, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eind·
to 3 kW, and up to 7 kW if there are no of current trcinslents is limited by 80.µH choke haven, The Netherlands, No. 2, 1967.
starting surges. Thermistor jn R.C network consisting of 50 turns wound on Forroxcube
....
·~
•tv oc
°"
TGUC:M
D<eP
12voc
fOUCN
°"
.,,
TOUCH
LATCHING TOUCH SWITCH-Touching finger

DARLINGTON TOUCH SWITCH-lamp is turned. to both collector and base of LI 48 Darlington
on only while finger is touching both collector transistor turns on lamp, and light coupling
and base terminals of D16P Darlington tran• between lamp and L14B latches lamp on.
sistor. Works well with slightly moist skin, lamp 11 turned off by touching baso and
but may not work for dry-skin touch.-E. K. emitter torminals, bypassing light-generated In- SI
Howell, Small Scale Integration in low Cost ternal base current. Works well with slightly Cl
Control Circuits, General Eledrlc, Syracuso, moist skin, but may not work .for dry-skin 4µ.f.
N.Y., No. 671.9, 1968, p 19. touch.-E. K. Howell, Small Scale Integration
200 v
in low Cost Control Clrcuih, General Electric. NIGHT LIGHT-Automatically turns 15-W light
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.9, 1968, p 19. on at sunsot and turns it off at sunrise. Uses
GE-X7 magnetic reed switch for 51. Lamp
plugs into outlet In series with switch. Diode
DI Is GE-504. PCI is GE-X6 or equivalent
photocoll.-"Hobby Manual," General Electric,
+ 12.6VDC
10.n
12.n
5W
2W
SWITCH FOR SOLID-STATE LAMP-Used In

pulsed-light communication, with current-mode
0 IOOpf
, ___'I switch driving solid-state lamp with peak
currents of 2 A at 50-ns rise and fall times.-
INPUT - 3V l. M. Hertz, Solid State lamps-Part II, Gen•
L.J USE NON· INOUCTIVE oral Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3-0121,
RESISTORS 1970, p 21.
SOLID-STATE LAMP PULSER-Pulsing of ssl at

500 mA for 20% duty cycle lncroasos light out·
put up to flvo times. Asymmetrical fllp·flop
produces current drive for Q3 for 20% of
period, which acts al low-current switch for
constant-current source Ql.Q2 that pulses
solid-state lamp. Period of flip-flop is about
350 µs.-l. M. Hertz, Solid State lamps-Part
II, General Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No.
3-0121, 1970, p 26.
CURRENT LIMITING
CRI RESISTOR
A40F (AS REOUIREOI
EMERGENCY-LIGHTING SWITCH-Provides bat•

tery-operated emergency lighting Instantane-
+ ously and automatically when 120-V a-c lino
120VRMS 12.6 VOLTS ..=.. 12 VOLT power falls. When a•c power 11 restored,
60CPS RMS -=. BATTERY emergency lamp Is tumod off .and battery re-
charged. Suitable for restauranh, shops,
corridon, olevaton, and other places where
loss of illumination is undesirable or intolor•
ablo.-D. R. Grafham, Using Law Current
SCR's, General Electric, Syracuse; N.Y., No.
200.19, 1967, p 33.
EMERGENCY LIGHT-Turns on baffory•poworod

lamp instantly when a-c power service falls. GE CR2·GE A40F'
Emergency light turns off·when line power Is CI06Y
SCR R2•CURRENT LIMITING
restored, and battery then recharges from AS REQUIRED
a-c llno. Requires no maintenance.-"Silicon
120 VOLTS Cl
Conlrolled Roctiflor," General Eloctrlc, Syra•
cuse, N.Y., No. 150.9, 1969.
AC II IOOMF
18V
R3 ALL RESISTORS 112 WATT
RI IK EXCEPT AS NOTED
IOO
CHI
GE Al4F
120112 6 VOLT
TRANSFORMER
LAMP
+
6V
120V.AC
IK SCR
AUDI0---><.1/'GE C6U
INPUT CI06Y
IV.
NOTE: T1 IS A 6.3 It• I A. "FILAMENT" TRANSFORMER ADJUST

TRIGGERED LIGHT SOURCE-Can bo used wllh R1 FOR MAXIMUM RESISTANCE THAT WILL NOT TURN
appropriate focusing lens in light-source gun, ON LAMP WITH ZERO INPUT.
for sheotin9 alleys where target rifles are not AUDIO-CONTROLLED LAMP-Low audio input
permissible. Intended for uso with photo- voltage (I V) provides on-off control of 120-
electric tar9et that flashes when hit by li9ht V 500-W lamp. Switching action of scr•trlac
beam.-"Hobby Manual," Goneral Electric, combination is very rapid compared to re-
Owansbaro, Ky., 1965, p 79. sponse limos of lamp and human eye, so
effect produced with audio input Is similar to
proportional control circuit, If Input to scr
consists of phase-controlled pulsos, full-wave
control of lamp load is obtained.-J. H. Gal-
loway, Usina tho Triac for Control of AC
Power, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y .. No.
-12ov 60Hz 200.35, 1966, p 14.
HALF-WAVE CHASER-Used for turnin9 on

strin9 of lights saquontially to give offed of
moving sign. Each stage has individual tlm·
ing adjustment. When power is applied, all
scr's aro off; Ql starts timing and, after delay
set by Rl, fires SCR4 which energizes reed
switch. This tums SCR1 and first lamp on, and
initiates timing of Q2 for delayed flrln9 of
SCR6 and SCR2. Process continuos until Q4
fires, tumln9 on SCR5 and turning off SCR4.
Reed switch then drops out, turning off all
scr's except SCR5 and resattln9 circuit for next
04 sequential flashing cydo.-A. A. Adam, Fla1h·
ers, Rine Counters and Chasers, Genaral Eloc·
tric, SyracuH, N.Y., No. 200.48, 1966, p 7.
RI, R2, R!, R4 :sooK POTS Cl; 500,.F 2SV 01-04:(41 GE 2N2646 UJT
Rll,R6,R7, :1son1i2w C2,C3,C4,cs: 2,.F,IOV SCRI- SCR3 (31 GE C208
R8,R9 :IK V2 W C6:.22,.F IOOV SCR4 - SCR7 l4l GE Cl06Y
RIO,Rll :33n112w Tl: 120: 12.6 STEPDOWN LOADS : 550 WATTS EACH
Rl2 470'1 l/2W REED SW: GE 2DRl5 llAMPI
Rl3 :1MEG l/2W GE 2DR30 l3AMP) ADOITIONAL STAGES MAY BE
Rl4,Rl5,Rl6,Rl7: 3304 112W REED SW COIL: 10,000 T #39 WIRE 8254
CRI- CR4: 141 GE Al3A
ADDED BETWEEN DASHED LINES. -·
SINGLE-BUTTON ON-OFF TOUCH SWITCH-

Touching single pair of contacts ahernatoly
&.IGMT
IZV OC iUOK COUP\.1"5G turns lamp on and off. Lamp flashes if finger
-·
is hold on button. Latching is provided by
light coupling between lamp and L14B Dar-
lington transistor. Works wall with slightly
L-ATCHllll 0 Sldl.l IUTIOlll, ALflRllATD•O.rLAS.ctl" fftL.0.
moist skin, but may not work for dry-skin
·7~. touch. High-sensitivity modification ensures
dry-skin oporation.-E. K. Howell, Small Scale
.---es-.
Z•JJH
tuGM Slldl TIYlfl' MOOlllC.ATIOtl
Integration in Low Cost Control Circuits, Gen-
eral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.9, 1968,
p 19.
llOV 60 HZ
lat STAGE 2nd STAGE LAST STAGE
LOAD#3
600W
ALL SCR'S GE CI06Y ALL RESISTORS V2 W

ALL DIODES GE Al3 F
FOR 1000 WATT LOAD USE
GE SC45B TRIACS.
ADDITIONAL STAGES MAY BE ADDED BETWEEN DOTTED LINES.
A-C CHASER-Modification of ring counter Is of ujt tums on SCR3 and fires triac 1. one pulse, which makes porformanco moro
used for turning on string of lights sequan• Next two pulses turn on SCR4 and SCRS in appealing to the eye. If ujt frequency is 1
tially to give affect of moving sign. When turn and fire trlacs 2 and 3 in turn. Follow- Hr, each lamp is on 1 s and off 2 s.-A. A.
power Is first turned on, all scr's are off and ing pulse fires SCR2 which commutates other Adem, Flashers, Ring Counters and Chasars,
ujt oscillator is energized by bridge roctiflor. four scr's off. Noxt pulse starts cycle over General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200A8,
At ond of delay dotormlnod by setting of again by turning SCR1 on and SCR2 off. 1966, p 6.
Rl, ujt fires and turns on SCR1. Noxt firing OFF time thus tokes two pulses and ON time
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In tho category of this chapter, uso the index at the back
of this book. Check alsa the author'• "Source book of Electronic Circuits," published by·
CHAPTER 44
Lamp Dimmer Circuits
-
INCREASE
c,
0.01
,.F
Cz
O.Ot
,I
,.F I
I
I
o,
K02103
Oz
K02103
R6
IK
DUAL-SCR DIMMER-Can handlo 500-W in- motor, providing full rango of control and Experimenter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
candescent-lamp load) hooter, or unworsal high reliabllity.-"Sillcon Controlled Rectifier 1967, p 49.
I
MDA·942·3
RECTIFIER
BRIDGE LOAD
R6
10 k
01
R1 + 06
5.1 k
1N4936
05
120 20 v
Voe 1N4747
+
07 C4
T1 R9 1N4936 BµF
02 SPRAGUE 10 k 250 v
11Z12
04
L _J
800-W SOFT·START DIMMER-Combining soft· candoscent lamps, thereby extending lamp and C4.-"Semlconductor Power Circuits
start feature with dimmer control R4 prevents life. Accidental turnon Is prevented by spe· Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968,
high inrush currants to cold filaments of in· cial dv/dt network Including capacitors C3 p 6-14.
350
LAMP DIMMER CIRCUITS 351
Fl RI R7 600
20·MINUTE DIMMER-limo-dependent incan· WATT
doscent·lamp dimmer handles up to 600-W LOAD
load with triac spocifled. High Input imped·
once of Darlington Q1.Q2 permits very long
TRI
charging and discharging limos for Cl, to
give very slow turn-on or turn-off of lamp
load, depending on 59Hing of SW1. At max·
imum-resistance soHing of R3, about 20 min·
utes Is required for lights to dim automatically
from full-on to full-off. Also callod bachelor
light.-F. W. Gut:i:willer and E. K. Howell,
Economy Power Semiconductor Applications,
Genoral Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, CRI THRU Cll4 : G-E IHl693 RECTIFIER DIODE RI : 3.3KOHM 2WATT RESISTOR
CR5, CR6 : G•E Z4lCL7. 5 ZENER DIODE R2,R4: 4.7K OHl.l, 112 WATT RESISTOR
1965, p 14. CRT 1 G·E INl692 RECTIFIER DIODE R3 : 5 MEGOHM, I WATT POTENTIOMETER
Cl : IOOP.!i.15 WVDC ELECTROLYTIC R5,R7: I MEGOHM, 112 WATT RESISTOR
CAPAlo!TOR (G-E QTl•22) R6 : 2.2 KOHM, 112 WATT RESISTOR
C2 : O.l~f, 15 WVDC CAPACITOR R8 : 470 OHML!.f2 WATT RESISTOR
QI 02: ~ 2N2712 n-p-n TRANSIS'IOR SWI : SPDT SWITIOH
O! : G-E 2N2647 UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR SW2 : SPST SWITCH
TRI : TRIAC SC41B Tl : SPRAGUE 3!5ZM923 PULSE
Fl : 3 AMPERE FUSE TRANSFORMER
LOAO
800-W TRIAC DIMMER-Simple control circuit

controls conduction anglo of triac from zero
120 01 to about 170 degrees, providing better than
Vac MAC2·4 97% of full-powor control. One possible
problem is high starting current in lamps with
cold fllaments.-"Semiconductor Power Circuits
C1 p.6-16.
0.1 µF
LAMP
IN3493
FULL-RANGE DIMMER-Provides control from 02
full brilliance to ioro by switching out rocti·
tier and half of potentiometer resistance at 115 VAC
HIGH
midpoint of dimming range.-"CircuitJ Man- LOW LOW
ual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 10-
2-2. slA
LAMP
115 VAC MCR808-4 HALF-WAVE DIMMER-Providos from 70% of

FULL maximum brilliance down to zoro. Switch
DIMMING
RANGE bypasses control whon full brilliance is de-
sired. Rating of scr determlnos wattago of
470.Q lamp.-"Clrcults Manual," Motorola, Phoenix,
D Ari1., 1965, p 10-2-1.
1
1N4001
LAMP LAMP
I 2
CROSSFADER FOR SLIDE PROJECTORS-Tan- IZOV

dem dimmer circuit can be used for such
60~ Lz
R Rz
applications as fading between two slide
projectors, two movie projectors, or two
illuminated signs. Moving R3 to either side
of contor fires one triac earlier In each half.
cycle and the other later, with total light
output for both lamps staying about con-
stant for all control positions. Choice of
triac depends on lamp wattage.-J. H. Gal-
loway, Using tho Triac for Control of AC
Power, General Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
200.35, 1966, p 17.
R1 • Rz• 68004 , I WATT L1• Lz• 601'hY (FERRITE CORE)
R3• ISOK 11 LINEAR POT. IW C1•Cz"C;t0.1,.1 50V
"'" ffs•22Kll 0 t/2W. C4•C5• 0.1,.f 200 VOLTS
R4•15Kll,1/2W.
TR1• TR2•TRIAC NOTE: 'n>TAL LIGHT LEVEL ISUM OF
D1•D2• GE ST-2 DIAC LAMPS 1+2) CONSTANT WITHIN 15%.
CONTROL LEAD
POWER CIRCUIT
B
RLB A L I
L A :GROUND
20K L M 1PLANE
2W A p
REMOTELY
s I
I
T I
MOUNTED t
LINE SWITCH
r---, FUSE I
Ia BLACK
f I I
L-co'#.!TROL FULL-WAVE 600-W SCR CONTROL-Provides
117V
60 CPS ISOLATION manual dimming of lamp load with RS, but
TRANSFORMER
over limited range. Can also be used for
NUMBER OF BALLAST/LAMP COMBINATIONS
heater and fan control.-F: W. Gutzwiller and
IN PARALLEL DETERMINED BY CURRENT E. K. Howell, Economy Power Semiconductor
CAPABILITY OF DIMMER. Applications, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 671.1, 1965, p 15.
CONTROL CIRCUIT
5Kl,5W 270
GE INl693 (4)
x 4.7k/\
OE
x----... 0-500K
TRIAC
SC40B
SC41B
INl527
SBS 2N4992
Dl,02-GE 6RS5GCILAJ I
I adequate for all but largest Installations.
-COMMON CATHODE
FLUORESCENT DIMMER-Uses scr's connected
in Inverse parallel with special G·E 890718 Ground piano, consisting of metal strip 1" LAMP DIMMER-Silicon bilateral switch and
dimming ballast for one F40T12 rapid-start from lamp and connected to common or white triac give hysteresis-free phase control for
fluorescent lamp. lncludos rfl suppression. side of lino, is necessary as starting aid for lamp dimming and slmilar applications. 8-V
Excellent basic reference article on design lowest sottlng of control.-E. E. Von Zastrow, switching voltage of sbs Is stable over wide
requirements for fluoroscent dimmers. Fluorescent lamp Dimming with SCR's and tomperaturo range.-Silicon Economy Bilat-
Choice of scr depends on avorago value of Associated Semiconductors, General Electric, eral Switch 2N4992, General Electric, Syracuse,
current waveform; Cl 1 and Cl 5 types are Syracuso, N.Y., No. 200.18, 1962. N.Y., No. 65.32, 1967.
-1
C1 C2 = 0.068 microfarad, 200 volts, switch, 120 volt, single-pole, LAMP

LOAD
10% single-throw, capable of han-
F 1 = fuse, size suitable to load dling expected load current
I 1 = lamp, neon type NE-83
Qi = triac, RCA 40502 or RCA

40429 (the RCA 40429 may be
used with the Wakefield No.
NC40 I K or equivalent heat
sink.)
R1 potentiometer, 50,000 ohms, 2

=
watts, linear taper 700-W DIMMER-Triac provides full-wavo loads. Heat sinlc must bo used with triac for
Rr = 15,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, IO%, control from maximum brilliance down to loads above 300 W.-"Hobby Circuits Man-
carbon zoro illumination for incandosconf. lamp ual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 81.
TWO-SCR DIMMER-Handles 300-W lamp and

provides full rango of brilliance control, using
minimum number of low-cost components.-
"Circuits Manual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1965, p 1~2-3.
LOAD
load 25011H
220V Cl
"'
L2 power control of lncandoscont lamp load up

3,000..W LAMP DIMMER-Trloc controlled by to 3 lcW.-G. J. Derksen and G. J. Tobisch, Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 82,
scs handles starting surges and gives smooth Lamp Dimmer, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma 1970.
R
LIGHT TURNS ON LAMP GRADUALLY-Increase ~
in light on photocell causes preportlonal ro- F
dudion in coll resistance, te make trigger· l
T
triac increaso lamp load voltage proportion• E
ally.-"Silicon Pawer Circuits Manual," RCA, R
Harrison, N.J., SP·51, p 259. c,
0.05J£F R1
200V 6.8K
LOAD R3
RECEPTACLE 4700 FULL-WAVE DIMMER AND MOTOR CONTROL
TRIAC
~ T0600
RI
68K GE·Xl2
-Gives full symmetrical control from zero to
HEATERS }WATTS 100% of line voltage for lamp or motor
MOTORS·TO 2 AMPS R2 R4 plugged into load receptacle. Also Includes
47K 250K
cadmium sulfide photocell for turning lamp
120 VAC
on automatically in home at dusk. With
OIAC shaded-polo fan or blower motor, range of
SI GE·Xl3 speed control is about 4 to I. With motors,
performance is improved by placing 100-ohm
...... 1-W resistor in series with 0.1-µF capacitor
Ct PC C2 across triac.-"Hobby Manual," Genorol Eloc•
o.111f GE·X6 0.1 pf tric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 147.
200V 50V
SCR
MCR808-4
FULL-WAVE BRIDGE DIMMER-Givos full NE83
range of control from maximum brilliance to
zero continuously with single scr that Is phaso-
controlled ovor both halves of cycle.-"Clrcuits
10-2-2.
115 VAC
240.W DIMMER-Rt adjusts point in each half·

cycle of a-c lino at which scr is tri9gerod for
passing current through lamp load. Provides
full range of brightness control. Produces
some rfl, which can be reduced with L flltor
0
consisting of 0.05-µF paper capacitor on

which is wound 18 ft of No. I BE wire, with
choke in series with load. Capacitor Is con•
nected between lamp-coil !unction and other
side of lino.-"Slllcon Controlled Roctlflor Ex•
Re porlmentor's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J, 1
ISOOO 1967, p 45.
IW
LOAD
LF
02
RCA
40495
DIMMER WITH CLAMPING-Steering diodes

Dl and D2 act with R to permit larger con• 0069,.F
200V
duction anglos and prevent circuit from mis• Z1 r -
firing at low light levels when subjected to 120V 12V :
dips in line voltage. Circuit also oxtends 60Hz 400mW 1
lamp life by holding line voltage rises to
within 3% of 120 V.-G. J. Granieri, AC Volt·
Z2:
12V I
age Rogulators Using Thyristors, RCA, Harri· 400mw 1
son, N.J., AN-3886, 1969. L_
•DASHED LINES INDICATE MAJOR,

ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS REQUIRED
TO ACHIEVE VOLTAGE CLAMP
r------ - - - - ----- - -----...,I

DIMMER
117VAC PIT2 FU OUTPUT
LINE
~Bo---.--
FU
S2TI PICTI
I
CR~~~E!!_ ~~~T_E~~L!, :r,
I ~ I R1 CPI I
I DIMMER ~ U I
ti I
I
R11 I
SITZ CONTROL CIRCUIT SUPPLY
--1
I I
L--------
02 -------,
I
Cr:i
I
CAUB
Pl
'I
INCR
I
I
_ _ _ _ _ _ ...JI
L------------------------
DIMMER WITH PRESET AND CROSSFADER- from one circuit of preset and applied to an• 1·2 4 G-E 1N1695; D1 1N1527; 01·2 2N525;
Solid-state incandescent-lamp dimmer may other, takeover circuit applies the larger of Q3 2N1671A; D2 1N536; Tl UTC H51.-E. E.
have any number of presets, although circuit tho two voltages acting on it to dimmer as Von Zastrow, The Silicon Controlled Rectifier
show1 only one load with two-scene preset Input roforenco. Values are: Pl 1K; Rl 3K; In lamp Dimming and Heating Control Serv•
for theatrical applications. When crossfader R2 470; R3 22K; R4 220; RS 47; R6 330; R7 Ice, General Electric, Syracuse, N. Y., No.
control Is moved and voltage is taken away 22K; RB-10 3.3K; Cl 0.2 µF; CD 200 p.f; REC· 200.14, 1965.
600-W DIMMER WITH SERIES GATE RESISTOR R R1 200K

F 2W
-Resistor R3, In series with trigger device I
(usually avalanche diode) limits discharge
current from C2, to reduce Instantaneous V1 •120V ~
60 Hz L
voltage drop across C2 and minimize both T
hysteresis and quick·turn•on effect.-"Sillcon ~
SP-51, p 2SB.
R
F
I
F
V1• 120V I SINGLE-TIME-CONSTANT 600-W PHASE CON·
L TROL-Used as dimmer. Has some hysteresis
60 Hz T
E effect. Wiil turn on Incandescent lamp with
l
R appreciable Initial brilliance, for reasons ox•
C1 Ve
0.05µF plained in book.-"Sllicon Power Circuits
200V Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 256.
R
F
I
DOUBLE·TIME·CONSTANT 600-W DIMMER- ~

V1•120V L
Givos lower Initial load voltage and lower T
60 Hz E
Initial lamp brightness, along with le11 hys- R
teresis, than phase control circuit having single
time constant.-"Silicon Power Circuits Man•
C1
ual," .RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 257. 0.05p.F 0.05p.F
200V 200V
R
F R1
I
~
L
T 600.W WITH TRIAC BLEEDER CURRENT-Pre·
E vents triac from going completely out of
R
conduction, thereby preventing hysteresis and
preventing turn-en at undesirably high illu-
O.o5µF mination level.-"Silicon Power Circuits Man•
200 v
ual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 258.
12-V A·C LAMP DIMMER-Full-wave trlac

phato control circuit u1e1 D13Q1 silicon bi·
lateral twitch as trl99er ta achieve hysterosls-
freo operation for control of low voltago
0
TRIAC
load. Choice of trlac depends on load power.
-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Applications of the New
Silicon Bilateral Switch and the Silicon Uni• DI 8 D2· Al4
lateral Switch, General Eledric, Syracuse, Off SIMILAR HIGH
CONDUCTANCE TYPE.
N.Y., No, 671.3, 1966, p 8.
,
GE IN3!i71 (4)
6BK 150K lOW·COST FLUORESCENT DIMMER-Uses roe·

BLACK INCR tlflod ballast voltage dlrectly for control cir·
BALLAST 750K cult, to reduce number of components whlle
GE 89G71B
CONTROL still giving satitfoctorlly smooth dimming.
POTENTIOMETER
Does not include trim pot for making oil lamps
22 track when dimming large numbers in cove
F40 Tl2 LAMP K
117 VAC 2W or valance lighting. lamp requires ground
piano (metal strip) 1" away as starling aid
at low light levels. Excellent basic reference
47 0.1 0.2 article on design requirements for fluorescent
MFD MFD
dimmers.-E. E. Von Zastrow, Fluorescent
lamp Dimming with SCR's and Associated
WHITE Semiconductors, General Elodric, Syracuse,
'----v-------" N.Y., No. 200.18, 1962.
POWER CIRCUIT CONTROL CIRCUIT
RADIO FREQUENCY
INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION
r---,I
NETWORK
IOOJIH
ALL RESISTORS 112 WATT
HIGH-INTENSITY LAMP DIMMER-Used to dim
miniature low-voltage desk lamps operating
from small transformer. Includes rfl ftlter
I
that also serves to prevent transients from 0.2µF I
triggering scr. R1 should be 250K. Can al10 C200Vl A~ie
servo as speed control for 120.v a-c 1haded· I
pole fan motors ratod up to 1.5 A, if R1 Is 120V/IC
changed to 100K. Speed rcinge is about 3:1. 60Hz I
-D. R. Grafham, Fan Motor Speed Control- I
"Hl·lntensity" lamp Dimmer, General Elcc•
o.osµF I
<2oovll
L ___ _J
600W
LOAD
.05pf
82
200V
120V TRIAC
60- GE SC41B 600.W TRIAC LAMP DIMMER-lncludet built-In
damping for l-C filter to maintain proper
DI operation of triac during dimming octlon.-
J. H. Galloway, Using the Triac for Control of
AC Power, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 200.35, 1966, p 10.
IOOl'hy Dl.D2 11 GE A14B'S
600W
LOAD
r
.05pf
82 15K 250K
200V
120V
TRIAC
60- GE SC41B
DI
FULL-WAVE 600-W TRIAC-Provides manual
dimming of lamp load with RI, but over llm·
ited range. For photooloctric control, replace Dl.D2aGE Al4B'S IOOphY such as 60.W lamp.-J. H. Galloway, RF Fil·
RI with cadmium sulfide photocell such ·as 600.W DIAC-TRIAC DIMMER-Circuit includes ter Considerations for Triac and SCR Circuits,
G-E 8425. To reverse function of photoelec- damped r·f flltor for suppression of rfl with- General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 201.19,
tric control, place photocell in parallel with out affecting triggering of triac at small loads 1966.
Cl and change RI to IOK. Can also be used
for heater and fan control.-F. W. Gutzwiller
and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Semicon-
ductor Applications, General Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 15.
02 MTz
Rp llCA
4048!>
IOOK
,... . 120VAC
V 60Hz
c,
0.1
,.F
R2 SCR
IOOK A057B
Tl-40A2
LOW-HYSTERESIS DIMMER-Provides continu- fire, with lamp remaining extinguished until
ous control up to maximum conduction angle. control is readjusted to higher light level.-
If Rp is set for high resist.once (low illumina• G. J. Granieri, AC Voltage Regulators Using
IOOV tion) and line voltage drops momentarily, Thyristors, RCA, Harrison, N.J., AN-3886,
high brealcovQf voltage of diac Ql combined 1969.
PHOTOCELL-CONTROLLED DIMMER-Initial with high resistance could cause circuit mis-
light level is set with R2 when CdS cell is
darlc. As cell is exposed to light, neon lamp
triggers scr and power to lamp load de-
creases. Choice of cadmium sulfide cell de-
600W
termines light sensitivity of circuit.-E. Bau-
man, "Applications of Neon Lamps and Gas LOAD
Discharge Tubes,'' Signallte, Neptune, N.J.,
p 124.
SI CRl
~,___--~~~------ 120 VAC
60 H, Q1
' RCA
40485
115V R1
60- 120~
SCR2 c,
Tl-40A2 z, 0.33 ,,F
FLICKERLESS DIMMER-Since both scr's are

flrod by same timing ~ircuit made up of noon Ti
lamp and pulse transformer, unsymmetrical
firing problem is eliminated and there is no
flickering of lamp load at low light lovels. z,. MOTOROLA TRIGGER MPT·I OR ZENER OIOOE PAIR WITH Vz : llV
Tl may be Sprague 31%286 or equivalont
T,. I TO I RATIO, 15 TURNS NO. ll WIRE
1 :I :1 with 40 turni por winding. Sl is
ON lh -IN POWOEREO.IRON ROD, 1/4-INCH IN DIAM
ganged to R2 to disconnect load.-E. 8auma.n,
"Applications of Neon Lamps and Gas Dis- 600-W A.C LOAD CONTROL-Provides smooth duction angle for both halves of cycle.-J. J.
charge Tube1,'' Signalite, Neptune, N.J., P control of lamp or other load from 2% to Klinilcowslci, Cheap, Simple AC Power Control,
123. 98% of full power, with RI changing con• EDN, Jan. 15, 1970, p 63.
LAMP
LOAD
18k l.5k
ZW IW
117V A.C.
TRIAC
LOAD GE
SC41B
DIAC
FOR LAMPS UP TO 4QO WATTS FOR LAMPS UP TO 1000 WATTS GE ST-2
OR SMALL MOTORS I UP TO OR LARGER MOTORS (UP TO
Z AMPS! 5 AMPS!
DI- 04 • 3FZO-D ZOH820
sCR••_________z_N•_r_r4________.L....._______z_N_&e_s______~
LAMP DIMMER-With 2N1774 for SCRl and TABLE LAMP DIMMER-Dosigned for mounting
3F20.D diodes, circuit will handle lamps up to inside lamp, where spaco is usually at a
400 W or motors drawing up to 2 A. With premium. Only drawback is slight hystorosls
affect. Circuit takes advantage of availabil-
2N685 for SCRl and 20HB20 diodes, wlll
handle up to 100 W lomp load or motors ity of both sides of lamp load.-J. H. Gallo·
way, Using the Trioc for Control of AC Power,
drowing up to 5 A.-D. Cooper, SCR's and
Triacs-tho Revolution Continues, Efoctronic1 Generol Electric, Syracuso, N.Y., No. 200.35,
1966, p 19.
World, Aug. 1968, p 25-28.
LIMITED-RANGE CONTROL-Provides control

only over range from half to full power,
which is sufllcienl for most illumination
control opplicotions. Roctlflor supplies ono
half-cycle uncentrollod, with scr providing
ramp-ond•p11d111tal phase control for other
half-cycle. Low-resistance photocell is used to
givo fast responso timo and eliminate hunting. 120\L
60CPS A41B
-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy
I
120VAC I
I RI R2 HALF-WAVE LAMP-MOTOR CONTROL-Dual·
39K 330ll CR2
~.
IN1695
purpose single•scr. control circuit varies output
INCREASEf @Pl voltage from zero to about 70% of a-c line
LAMP
R4 voltage (up to 84 V). Whan 51 is in LAMP
CONTROL SI
IGE·Xt4 IOK position, incandescent lamp plugged into load
["~'>Kl
LAMP
SCRI 52 outlet is controlled by Pl from zero bright·
I
1
MOTOR
SP EEO
AOJUST
RS
soon
MOTOR
CR3
IN1693 GE·XI BY·~SS
SWITCH ness to about 30% of its normol visual light
CONTROL
I
I
SPEED
TRIMMER
R6
zoon
R3
. output. Closing bypass switch 52 bypasses
scr to givo full lomp brightness. With 51 in
IK • C2
I 2.0~1 MOTOR position, control circuit includes food·
I IOV back feature that tends to maintain constant
I spood for unlvorsal motor plugged into outlet.
I CR4 Cl
I 1.0111 Use only on motors having commutator and
INl6'33 400V
brushes.-"Hobby Manual," Gonoral Elocttic,
LOAO
RECEPTACLE Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 146.
DUAL-SCR WITH NEONS-Supplies power over

full cycle, using neon lamps to trigger su's.
Filter L-c3, used to reduco rfl caused by fast
I turn-on of scr's, is unnecessary with highly
I C3
I . 06 Inductive loads such as universal motors.
115 v I 200V Full countorclockwise rotation of R2 opens 51,
60""' l - cutting off power to load. Can be used as
dimmer for Incandescent lamps.-E. Bauman,
SCRI
TIX92 "Applications of Noon lamps and Gas Dis·
charge Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p
126.
Clll cu
UU6H Clrtllilll
llOYAC
CllS
or1e.1s
SOFT•OFF DIMMER-When switch is closed, With Sl in UP position, room lighh will be

lamp load up to 500 W plugged into load turned up slowly over same poriod, under
receptaclo will be slowly dimmed over ad· control of clock timer, for tho10 who must
justablo period of 1S-20 min 01 determined get up before sunrise. Combination of S2
by setting of R3, when SI 11 In DOWN po1l 0 and R4 gives option of fixed fast turn-on and
tion. Ideal for control of room lights in bod· turn-off.-"Hobby Manual," General Electric,
room after children have been put to bod. Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 134.
NOTE: To locate addltlonal circuits in the category of this chapter, u10 the index at the back
af this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
-McGra,w-Hill in 1968.
CHAPTER 45
Laser Circuits
POSITIVE -15v
INPUT
FROM TIME
EXPANSION
CIRCUIT
RAMP-TRIGGERED RECTANGULAR PULSE-

Pulse-forming circuit senses whon ramp voltago
of time-expansion circuit in lasor cloud height
radar exceods predetormlned threshold OUTPUT TO
value. Q4 Is then cut off, cutting off QS and INTEGRATOR
turning on Q6, to close electronic switch Q7
and start production of 10-V rectangular
07
output pulse. Width of pulse is 1,000 times (INVERTED
that of intorval being measured, pormitting SWITCH)
obsorvatlon on low-speed oscilloscopo.-G.
M. Ettinger, Chronometer Expands Pul1as to +10v
Moasuro Nanosecond Intervals, Electronics,
Jan. 23, 1967, p 108-112. +15v
04 - MULLARO LTD. TYPE BCY32 07 - MULLARD LTO. TYPE OC2

o5 - MULLARO LTD. TYPE BCY43 0 - MULLARO LTD. TYPE OA2
TIME EXPANSION CIRCUIT

START CIRCUIT STOP CIRCUIT
+33v
+15v
2.2k
vV');. 2.5~
2.Zk.
START
)
68
0 1, 02 , 0 3 - MULL ARD LTD. TYPE BCY43 EXPANDED

RAMP
D1 - TUNNEL DIODE- STANDARD TELEPHONE AND CABLES LTD. TYPE AEYll OUTPUT
D2 - FAIRCHILD TYPE FD6005 -ltOv
TIME-INTERVAL EXPANDER-Usod in loser longer pulses from which range information also be used for vory short-'range conven•
cloud height radar to rosolve time intervals can be derived. Valuo of Cl and 9•meg re- tlonal radar and for detection of nuclear par•
down to 10 ns and make it possible to dis- sistor are given for 8-µs range. Output is ticles.-G. M. Ettinger, Chronometer Expands
play timo interval data on low-speed scope. ramp waveform 1,000 tlmes longer than time Pulses to Measure Nanosecond Intervals,
Converts Input pulsos to proportionately Interval between start and slop pulses. Can Eledronlcs, Jan. 23, 1967, p 108-112.
361
Cl
!!JIF
C2
S,,F
C3
5pf'
R7 R9
680K IOK
C4
5pF
1,600.V AUTOMATIC-START LASER SUPPLY- conventional auto ignition coil that is critically Caution: Circuit is dangerous when power is
Will fire lasor automatically shortly after 620 damped with resistor across secondary to applied,-C, H. Knowles, Experimenters' laser,
V a-c is applied by meons of step-up trans- produce single spike. Amglo MT-55 ftash- Popular Electronics, Dec. 1969, p 27-32 and
former connected lo a-c line, Tl is 200:1 tube triggor transformer may be used instead. 110-111 •
..--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~---10vdc
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 TO+ 100vd-c ADJUSTABLE

- - - - - - - - - - - - 0 TO t 200vd-c ADJUSTABLE
l.0~0.05
100 0.01
270 1200
02
0.004 7
220
100 0.01
1200
0.0047 FD 100
INPUT __,
o, 0.0047 03
(t5 v PULSE)
0.0047 D1
220 220 GoAs LASER
DIODE
H2A5t4 GE
100
Slit 2.7 OHM 114-WATT - . _
RESISTORS IN PARALLEL
0.45 1200
04
0.0047
220
DIODE PULSER-Circuit till pulse GaAs laser
too O.QI
diodes continuously up to I 0 kHz, or up to I 00
kHz if duty cycle does . not exceed that for
continuous operation. Pulse length is about 1200
60 ns and peak currerits approach 200 A. ALL TRANSISTORS 2N3507
Inductance must be mjnlmized by keeping ISELECTEDI
current paths very short. Volumo of com• ALL CAPACITORS IN 11f ot
1
plete pulser is loss· than 0.5 cubic inch.-H. E. 0.0047 200 w vd·c
Brown, R. A. Bond, a~d J. C. Bloomquist, 220
Avalanche Transistors Drive Laser Diodes
Hard and Fast, Electronln, Nov. 14, 1966,
p 137-139. =
LASER CIRCUITS 363
1,600-V MANUAL-5TART LASER SUPPLY-After

620-V c:i-c is applied by means af step.up
transfermer connected to a·c line, switch 51
must be closed to fire laser. Caution: Cir•
cuit is dangerous once power Is applied.-
C. H. Knowles, Experimenters' Laser, Popular
Electronics, Dec. 1969, p 27-32 and 11~111.
r------------,
i 3sv I
Y_..,._.._2N3054.,,__...._~Hi-+cr
_su...P_.PL... 20 • REGULA TED
1
I
I Rt
I 3.3
1
I 500pf
I
I
IL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_J
LOW IMPEDANCE REGULATOR C3
10-1,soonr
SCHMITT TRIGGER
33
Oz
R& INl7G3
3.3
03
INl763 DELAYED
INPUT
[A CA
SWITCH SWITCH 05 and 06 until C3 charges enough to trigger
FIRING PULSE CONTROL-Combination of for pulses that Jlre gas discharge lasers in Q3, Opening switch resets tlmor.-P. F. How-
Schmitt trigger with stable linear R-C chars• ionization experiments. Input pulse makes den, RC-Biased Schmitt Trigger Times Pulses
ing keeps time intervals occurate within I % 01 and 02 conduct, but has no effect on Accurately, Eledronlts, April 1, 1968, p 64.
r~r,
l
: "KICKER"
I SWITCH I
... ANODE
eig POWER
SUPPLY
LASER
TUBE
-ltOv
LOW-POWER LASER-Generates 0.5 mW at
012, 013 - MULLARO LTD. TYPE BCY43 6,328 angstroms, considered safe for oxpori· J
LASER
mentation in schools and homes. Requires BEAM
ECHO AMBIGUITY RESOLVER-Used in laser
1,600-V d-c power supply, for which auto•
cloud height radar to eliminate ambiguity bo•
matic and manual-start versions are given In
tween echoes below 50 foot and extremely
article along with construdion details and
distant echoes (over 1 mite). Operates by
sources for laser and other special parts.
sensing state of transistor switch in chronome-
Caution: do not aim at eyos; light Is extromoly
ter circuit after each laser firing pulse, and
bright and temporarily blinding.-C. H.
energizing one of two neon lamps to tell ob-
Knowlos, Experimenters' laser, Popular Elec•
server whether or not chronometor has boon
traniCI, Dec. 1969; p 27-32 and 110-111.
reset and Is ready for next ocho.-G. M. Et•
linger, Chronomoter Expands Pulsos to Meas-
ure Nanosecond Intervals, Electronie1, Jan. 23,
1967, p 108-112.
SPRAGUE TYPE 118P FOR VOLTAGES UP TO 600VDC

LASER PUMP-Usos xenon annular flashtube
developed primarily far optical pumping of
laser crystals. Dosigned so crystal rod is
surrounded by gas discharge plasma. Outer
surfaco of flashtube can then be wrapped with
+
400-1000 voe o-------~--
SPRAGUE
TYPE 150D"-..
IOK
..
SPRAGUE TYPE CP70 FOR VOLTAGES UP TO 2KVDC
~/.&f
-u..--.
XENON 10"
FLASHTUBE IOW
aluminum or silver foil serving both as re- c - l-3KV

-suPPLY
flodor and ,rigger elodrode. Requlros 25 to
t20·30Vr.p.f
30 kV trigger voltage from trigger trans-
former.-FX.S3C-3, FX-53Z-3 Annular Xenon
Flashtubes, EG&G Inc., Boston, Ma11., No,
1007-3, 1968.
USE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING -=
EGaG TRIGGER TRANSFORMERS
TR•l32A(350V MAlC INPUT)
TR• 60 I IOOOV MAlC INPUT)
TR· 69 I IOOOV MAX INPUT)
TR· 153 ( 600V MAX INPUT)
LASER ENERGY MONITOR-Circuit provides
permanent record of total energy entering tl5v
eye of patient each time pulsed ruby laser
photocoagulator is fired. Dichrolc beamsplit· +3v f5k
tor reflects small fradlon of la1&r beam to
phototranslstor that foeds monitor circuit.
Output of monitor drives recordor. Circuit is
calibrated by measuring total boom energy
ZERO
ADJUST
with thermoplle.-E. J. Scribner, Circuit Monl· tk SENSITIVITY
tors Energy of Laser Photocoagulator, Elec· tOOk OUTPUT
Ironies, July 7, 1969, p 110-111.
Ot
2N3644
C2
0.68p.f
Ct
33pf
HOLDING
TIME
200t
-15v
LASER CIRCUITS 365
INJECTION LASER PULSE GENERATOR-EG&G ls-45mA

Krytron pulser producos pecak currents of sov-
ercal thousand camperes at repetition rates up '?OK
to 500 pulses per sCH:ond, for pulsing high- Ro
power injedlon leasers at roem temperature.
Outstanding features are simplicity, smcall 36M
size, and low cost. Capacitor C is charged Us
c SIOV
from 510-V d-c: source, then discharged
through laser diode D and Krytron switch.- 26tF luJtJ
W. Koochner, Extremely Small cand Simple
Pulse Generator for Injection Lasers, Review
of Scientific ln1trumenf1, Jan. 1967, p 17-20.
SPRAGUE TYPE I ISP FOR VOLTAGES UP TO 600VOC

SPRAGUE TYPE CP70 FOR VOLTAGES UP TO 2KVDC
600-
2000
voe tOK
+o-~-"J'l..f\J~~~~~-41~~~"4!~""'1
SPRAGUE 1,.1
TYPE 150;
11
20-30VOC
0·3 KVOC
SUPPLY
+
USE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING cal research: satellite flashers, phat.oreproduc•
EG&G EG&G TRIGGER TRANSF. tlon, and lighthouse beacons_ Trigger may
TR-149
TR-136A(l500V MAX. INPUT) be. operated by rem~te contr~I. ~oltage ro-
SERIES INJECTION TRIGGERING-Circuit TR-146A(l500V ) quired for sorlos lnJedlon tr199ering ranges
shown may be used with many different sizos TR-170 (2000V ) from 15 to 35 kV depending on Rashtube.-
and types of linear pulsed xenon flcashtubes, TR-179 ( 800V ) Linear Xenon Flashtubes, EG&G Inc., Boston,
for such applications as laser pumping, modi- Mass., No. 1002-B, 1967.
-15v
390
INPUT FROM PULSE

FORMING CIRCUIT
OUTPUT
TO METER
AND RECORDER
3.9k
+15v
TO CLAMPING
CIRCUIT
CLOUD-HEIGHT LASER INTEGRATOR-Output

RESET SIGNAL
vohago Is proportlonal to width of redangu- 241 d-c
lar Input pulse, which In turn is 1,000 times RESET
time interval between laser transmission and RELAY 't-1,.__ __,, Oua• Otn-
o.5"f
retum of reftedion from cloud. Input fet Q8
operat81 In zoro-gate-c:urrent mode to elimi-
nate current leakage that would prevent in-
I MULLARD LTD. TYPE OC202
formation from being stored In integrator Relay shorts integrator capacitor to re1ot to Pulses to Measure Nanosecond Intervals, Efec-
without degradation between measurements. zero.-G. M. Ettinger, Chronometer Expands lranics, Jan. 23, 1967, p 108-112.
CHAPTER 46
Latching Circuits
D-C LATCH FOR ALARM-Momentary oponing +2BVOC RESET

of either switch triggers scr, which then
latches and providos full load powor until
roset switch is pushed. Can be usod for
alarms, firing of oicplosive squibs, protodion
circuits, and display lamps.-F. W. Gutzwiller
and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Somicon-
ductor Applications, Gonoral Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 671.1, 196S, p 3. G·E
C22F
SCR
120 VAC
N.C. SI
ADJUST
TIME
DELAY
N.C. 52
GE
I
120V
SC468
TRIAC
60-
R4
100
IOO,.FD n
50V
60-S LATCHING DELAY-When Cl charges to
diac voltage, in 60 s for values shown, triac
LOAD
UPTO firos and energizes load until SI is operated
1200 to dischorgo Cl through R3 and R4.-"SCR
R6 C2 WATTS
15K l/lFD Manual," 4th Edition, Gonoral Eloctric, 1967,
200V p 148.
N.P.
S1
+
+24¥: II -15V
DC
R1
C1
2•A + 25µ.f
D1
Al4F
I
SOLENOID DRIVER WITH LATCH-Momentary
(-)
dosing of Sl onarglzo~ solonoid load, and

circuit holds in this condition until S2 Is mo- TIME DELAY 40 - 60 SECS. WITH COMPONENTS SHOWN.
mll'l'ltarily opened. Load current can bo up 60-S DELAY WITH LATCHING-Uses Dl3T2 tor and capacitor slzes.-E. K. Howell, Small
to 5 A.-A. Harris, Semiconductor Switching programmable ujt for both timing and latch- Scola lntogration In Low Cost Control Cir·
of Low-Power Circuits, Electronics World, ing of relay. High gate sensitivity malces cuits, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
June 1967, p 33-35. long delays possible with roasonable resis- 671.9, 1968, p 18.
366
LATCHING CIRCUITS 367
RESONANT
l
REED
RELAY Cl
''I:
TRIAC • II
GE RLT2-27-I
IZOV SC41B
60- RESET
l
B+
.02
STATION CALL INDICATOR-Servos as mom•

TRIAC TONE-ACTUATED SWITCH-Resonant ory device In selective calling of unattended
reed relay is pulled in by 280.8-Hz audio tone, two-way radios. Signalling tone from trans-
to apply trigger that turns on and latches mitter causes relay to apply total circuit volt·
triac, to apply a·c lino voltago to load. Re• ago to "call" Indicator neon 11, which lights.
lay releasos when tone stops, but latch adion Circuit remains latched until operator returns
of triac keops load energizod. Only 349-Hz ond throws reset switch.-E. Bauman, "Ap-
tone can make relay pull in the OFF arma·- plications of Noon Lamps and Gas Discharge
ture and bypass trigger long enough for Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p 71.
triac to open or block.-J. H. Galloway,
Using tho Triac for Control of AC Power,
1966, p 6. +28VDC RESET
7AMP
28 V D·C LATCH-Momentary closing of LOAD
switch triggers scr, which then latches ond
provides full load power unlil reset switch is
pushed.-F. W. Gutzwillor and E. K. Howell, r----
1
516
1965, p 3.
N~ I G-E
I C22F
'----·----......- SCR
I
100
SI
TRIAC
TRIGGER
"oN•
120 R2 QI
VAC 1200R IK,5W (AS FIG.21
1.0 240VAC
MFD
Cl• .5p.F TO 2µ.F
2SOV(ON 120VAC)
LOAD SOOVION 240VACI
470 LOAD
OHMS
SELF-LATCHING TRIAC-Mamentary closing af

Sl makes trlac stay on continuously until 52
TRIAC A·C LATCH-When triac is triggered out trlg9ering trlac. Choose triac to meet is momentarily closod, to 9ivo latching con·
on by external pulse, voltage developed load requirements.-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. trol of current through 6-A load. Use RCA
across capacitor by load voltage triggers K. Howell, Economy Power Semiconductor 40429 triac for 120 V and 40430 for 240 V.-
trlac on each succoedlng cycle, until momen- Applications, General Electric, Syracuse, N. Y., R. M. Marston, 20 Triac Circuits, Radio-E/ec·
tary closing of S2 discharges capacitor with- No. 671.1, 1965, p 8. Ironies, June 1970, p 51-53 and 97.
REMOTE-CONTROL LATCH-Uses two scr's

rated at 7.4 A, with momentary-contact +Z4Y
switches that can be remotely located. Ill
Whon SI Is actuated, SCR2 is gated on by 4.nA
romoto power supply voltage acting through
Rl, and load receives current. When S2 is
actuated, SCRI is gated on and acts through
Cl to turn off SCR2 by lowering its anode
voltage. The scr's thus operate in flip-flop
action so when one Is cut off, the other is
TRIAC LATCH-When Sl is closed, trlac sat·
conducting.-A. Harris, Semiconductor Switch-
uratos and Cl charges. At ond of first half·
ing of Low·Powor Circuits, Electronics World,
cycle, Cl discharges through gate and trig·
Juno 1967, p 33-35.
gers triac into saturation for nekt half-cycle,
Process continuos, to give latching action,
until S2 Is closed. Triac then cuts off at nekt
zero crossover and stays off.-A. Harris, Semi·
conductor Switching of Low.Power Circuits,
Electronics World, Juno 1967, p 33-35.
TRIAC A·C MOTOR STARTER-Servos as solid-

state equivalent of magnetic a•c motor
START~ starter. Choice of triac depends on motor
current rating and on a•c line voltage. Re-
sistor and capacitor values in voltage divider
THERMAL are chosen to give triggor voltage required
AC STOP~ OVERLOAD for triac chosen; capacitor is generally 0.1
SUPPLY µF. Triac latches when start button is pressed
momentarily, and is then retriggered each
half-cycle. Press stop button momentarily to
j tum off motor.-J, H. Galloway, Using the

Triac for Control of AC Power, General Elec•
120VAC
+ 135V o----------
Vl
•0031Jf
• 25V
INPUToo------11 ......- - _ .
MAGNAREED
120V
102MPCX9
...,~..
60-
LOAD
Kl
~56K
UP TO
!J,f,~
SWITCH
CLOSURE
INPUT
1,200-W TRIAC WITH DELAY-Adjustable de-
lay applies trigger to triac at predetermined
time aftor 51 Is sot at START, after which MEMORY FOR MOMENTARY CONTACT-
trloc latches on and applies full line voltage Shorting of switch contacts discharges 0.001 •
to load. Moving switch to RESET opons triac µF capacitor through noon, firing it and hold·
and recharges capacitor far nokt oporatian. ins relay closed until 135-V supply lino Is
-J. H. Galloway, Using the Trlac for Control oponed.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Under•
of AC Power, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., standing Miniature Noon Lamps,'' H. W. Sams
No. 200.35, 1966, p 6. & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 66.
LATCHING CIRCUITS 369
SI
~.~
TRIAC SCR LATCH-Closing St momentarily makes scr
saturate, sending up to 1.6 A through load.
I T~6~· Closing S2 momentarily causes commutating

capacitor C to begin discharging, thereby
turning off scr and koopln9 It off until an•
120 other gate pulse Is applied by 51 .-A. Harris,
VAC Semiconductor Switching of Low-Power Cir•
Cl
cuits, Electronics World, June 1967, p 33-35.
BASIC TRIAC LATCH-Used as switch for ap· +12V r70;

plying powor to load whon trigger pulse
r- -· ~---·1
roachos input tormlnal. Can be turned off
oither by interrupting power with St or by·
passing trigger with S2. Trlac is Initially
LATCHING LAMP DRIVER-Uses single planar
pnpn switch, oquivalont to pnp-npn comple-
mentary transistor pair, as low-cost driver
2.7K Io
~--
t o o ,
--.tt:---'
LAMP
for Nixie tubes, alphanumeric display tubes, ISK
blocking when load is applied, and latches
to conducting state because it is. rotriggerod and noon lamps. Circuit is Immune to tri9·
by a-c line each holf-cyclo after being turned goring by line transients.-Planar Noon Driver
INPUT IOo<
on by extornal trigger. Triac used must bo Silicon Controlled Switch 3N83, General Elec•
specially selected for triggorlng in Ill+ mode tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 65.17, 1964. +2.6V•ON
OT00.2V •
(third quadrant, positive gate currant and OfF INITIALLY
vohago), at load current required. For 220-
V line, change Ct to 0.5 µF,-J, H. Galloway,
Using the Triac lor Control of AC Power,
Gonoral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.35,
1966, p 6.
AA107
OR
2N3028
MAGNETIC-CORE READOUT-Provides high·
level output through scr for solenoids, mas·
notic clutches or brakes, and squibs without _A_
intermediate amplifier stages. Once circuit CORE OUTPUT
is trl9gerod on, it remains on until reset by AAl07 ·(3V·l.OµS)
opening d·c anode supply.-High Level Road· 2N302B- I 3V·O.lpS)
out From Magnetic Cores, Solid State Prod·
ucts, Salem, Mass., No. 2.
NOTE: To locate addillonal circuits In tho category of this chapter, use the index at the back
of• this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 47
Logic Circuits
i-- - -- +3.6Vdc
I ALTERNATE ......~~~-4~~~~~~~......,__~~~~~~~~~.-....;o
I INPUT S2
(MANUAL TRIGGER).~---,
L __-_ DIGITAL LATCH-Provides low-cost replace-

ment for conventional threshold circuits In
digital systems. Uses only dual•sato logic
eloment connected to glvo positive feadback.
Alternative connections for various applica•
tions are shown in dashed boxos. With
µL910 manual input S2, effect of switch bounce Is
6 eliminated. For variable threshold, lOK pot
is connected to input A.-N. Neidich, Threshold
Detector Uses IC, EEE, Jan. 1967, p 114.
c s,
RESET
OUTPUT
2vf---r-
.F=!-. • t I ~0~ERNATE RESET
~~LOGIC)
_J
+4v TO OIGIT
LINE
WRITE
DATA
Rs
47
WRITE
COMMAND
D3 D2
Rg 1N3605 1N3605
IOK
READ
SWITCH IN
MEMORY WRITE DRIVER-Write-command sig- mand pulse turns off Q2 and turns on Q3, trips.-D. E. Brewer, 5. Nissim, and G. V.
nal and binary 1 on write data lino togethar for fast discharge of digit lino, after which Podraza, Suitcase-size Momory for Longer
tum off Q4 and turn on Q2, to moke 12-V 04 turns on again to ground line. Used in Space Trips, Electronics, Nov. 13, 1967, p
signal appear on digit line. End of com· computer storage developed for Ions space 138-146.
370
LOGIC CIRCUITS 371
t----4""""-------+---....-----() V BIAS
DUAL FET ANALOG SWITCH-Crystalonics
510. IN 8 CDA2 hybrid package contains pair of basic
1
fet switches with integral drivers, working
SIG OUT A SIG. OUT B
1 directly from logic, Intended for switching
analog. signals to ground or virtual ground
only. Logic curront drain and power consump·
tion are kept low, by tradeoff with switching
speed. Can also be used as Integrator reset.
ONO
-Hybrid IC's, Crystalonics, Cambridge, Mass.,
1969.
LOGIC A '---------0 LOGIC 8
IC BINARY COMPUTER-Simple 3°bit adder is

excellent for illustrating binary arithmetic.
All transistors are Motorola HEP-51 and all
diodes are HEP·l 54. 51 -56 are dpdt slido
switches, and lamps B1-B4 are GE No. 48.
Article givos construction details.-"lnte•
grated Circuit Projects.'' Motorola, Phoenix,
Ariz., 1966, p 19-31.
IYMT
r-=-1111""-------...J
n\ 1¥MT
L---!N1~·;__~~----~--I
+6v
10JLf
Qt
INPUT Qz
2N3866
+6v
10JLf OUTPUT
o,
tk -=-
Dz
2N2907A.
-=- -=-
Q4
back to original logic level format, Will re•

coivo data at 600 kHz with s.v pulse amplitude
and 30.ns pulse width. Each pair of NAND
-6v gates forms latch hold in reset mode prior to
arrival of Input clock pulso. Clock triggers
CONVERTING TRANSMITIED DIGITAt DATA 1°µs one-shot while incoming data pulses set
TO LOGIC LEVELS-Accepts digital data trans- appropriate latchos made from NAND gatos.-
mitted long distoncos over four pairs of lines, K. Erickson, EC Line•Roceiver Converts Pulse to
with clock input from fifth line, and converts Logic Lovols, Elodronlcs, Jan. 19, 1970, p 94.
INPUT +70V +360Vn----

OUTPUT +lOV
200K
1 WATT
THREE·INPUT MAJORITY GATE-10.V output
appoan at X whenever at loast two of tho
throe lamps (Vt, V2, V3) oxtlnguish.-W. G.
VS Miller, "Using and Understanding Miniature
Neon Lamps.'' H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis,
Ind., 1969, p 53.
680K
All lAMPS
5AB-B
.------~~--.....--o-vcc
-12v
-12v Re
IK
A
E J
>------,..•B,,.K.,,__
U l-0.IVI
1-IOVI R1 FO--flh.....,
2N404
Oz
O:s c K
+VBB +V99
Oz +12V
CONVERTING NOR LOGIC TO MVBR-Addition

EXCLUSIVE-C)R-Uses only ono transistor and of liming capacitors to two transistor-resistor
threo diodes} none of which are critical as to NOR logic circuits gives astable and mono-
typo. Q1 is off when A and B are bo1h at stable mvbr operations. Article gives equa-
-0.t V or whon both aro at -10 V. Q1 is tion for values of Rb and external C to givo
on whon A and B are ot different lovols. 03 desired frequency. Flip·flop Is obtained by
may not be nooded if binary data levels are adding R·C differentiator stoerlng diode not•
maintained within a few tenths of a volt.- works.-L. E. Frenzel, Jr., NOR Circuits Easily
A. J. Franchi, Exclusive-Or Circuit Uses Fower Convert ta Multivibrators, Efedronic Doslgn,
Components, Electronic Design, Sept. 14, 1964, Fob. 15, 1965, p 76-77.
p 74-75.
+4v +12v
05
01 1N914
FROM 1N3605
HIGH-LEVEL:----t11t---+-_.._
DRIVER Lt
7
2 ·.....,
-,,.~ Jl.._.hl r-_ _ _ _ _ ADDRESS LINE
TO MEMORY
MEMORY LINE DRIVER-Power dissipation is
held down to 0.8 W by makln9 inductive
TO output Impedance form resonant circuit with
LOW-LEVEL----+111-------'
DRIVER 02 distributed capacitance of lino. Nonlinear
IN3605 characteristics of driver prevent ringing.
J
Usod in computer storage developed for long
space trips.-D. E. Brower, S. Nlsslm, and G.
I, 5: f : f '-----------....j~-JWl\.--7v V. Podraza, Suitcase-size Memory for Longer
Space Trips, Electroniu, Nov. 13, 1967, p
138-146.
LOGIC CIRCUITS 373
INTERFACE-Provides logic 1 output at re- +1.SV

quired lovel such as +3 V for any logic 1
INPtrr (100 ohms)
input. Uses OEI 9125 opamp. First opamp Is
absolute-valuo circuit, and second is small-
hysteresis that provides sharp transition from
one stage to tho other. Output is bound by
single zoner. When switch is up as shown, ourm
z (J.JK)
zero input givas logic 1 output. With switch
down, zero Input gives logic 0 output.-A
Universal Digital Interface, Optical Electronics,
Tucson, Ariz., No. 10132.
-6V -6V
3.9K +12V +12V 12K

2.7K 2.7K
3.9K AB+AB
ISK
-v
MODERATE TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMPERATURE
VERSION VERSION
12K
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS ON NOR-Circuit at
left permits fan-in and fan-out ratio of 4
for temperatures from -55 C up to mod· +6V +6V
orate temperatures. For higher temperatures, EXCLUSIVE-OR-Complementary transistors re-
negative voltage supply is needed to com• duce cost ond complexity. _When inputs A
pensoto for leakage current of transistor, and and B are both logical zoro (-6 V), output is
fan-in, fan-out ratio Is reduced to 3. logic logical zero. When oithor A or B is logical
speed of both vorslons is up to 4 MHz, but one (ground), output changes to logical one.
can be doubled by using 2N2369.-Basic NOR When A and B are both logical ono, output is
logic Circuit, Electronic Design, April 13, logical zoro.-J. L Shagena, Complementary
1964, p 66. Transistors Reduce Exclusive-OR Size, flee•
Ironic Design, March 16, 1964, p 102.
48'
RL
5v 2.2n
R3
100
R1
220 Rz R1
o.1n
20 02
2N3716
DTL
OR
TTL
INPUT
04
2N3920
R4 R5
ion O.tll Ra
o.1n
DTL CONTROLS 20 A-Complementary com• conventional digital IC logic. Signal at base

pound switch, operated by buffer transistor of QI saturates it, turning on Q2 and 10-A Curront Switch Is Driven by an IC, Electroni<1,
QI, permits control of loads up to 20 A with transistors Q3 and Q4.-L. S. Bell, High· lllov. 11, 1968, p 120.
INPUT •70V •360Vo----

OUTPUT •IOV
72K
I WATT
THREE·INPUT OR GATE-Converts high·lovol
(70-V) logic to valuo useful In solid-state cir• V4
cu its (10 V). Point X is at 10 V if oither Vl or
V2 or V3 is oxtinguished by 70.V input, Out·
put is taken from voltage doveloped ocross
27K resistor when VS fires.-W. G. Miller,
"Using and Understanding Minioture Neon
lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind.,
1969, p 51. 680K ---ox
All LAMPS 27K
5AB·B
t12v IVccl
2k
07
2N3764
Os +Sv
20pt IN914 2N4209
06 Oa
2N3736 2N2907A
Ct
ISO pf 03 04
5-25pt1
"::'
R3 R1
10k 100
"::'
100 Rs
INPUT LOGIC I0.90TO
156191) C2 0 1.10·
220
ISO pf
TO OTHER DRIVER
"::'
02 2N918
2N30tt
5.6k
THIN FILM INTEGRATED CIRCUIT)

-sv
\_.pusH-PULL SWITCH SELECTORS Your
COOL CORE DRIVER-Providos powor re· Uses difforontial amplifier Q3.Q4 to activate
quired to give fast riso time-in.core windings, either 5.y or 12·V supply, when triggered by
then automatically switches to low-power comparator that senses current flowing EQUIVALENT
constant-current source having low supply through core winding.-C. J. Ulrick, Core· CORE LOAD
volta90, to reduco power dissipation in tran• Momery Driver Runs Cooler, Electronics, Oct.
sisters and thereby improve circuit reliability. 13, 1969, p 102-103.
LOGIC CIRCUITS 376
LEVEL-SHIRER - Converts unbalanced input

pulses (0 V and +4 VI to balanced output
pulses (-6 V and +6 V). With values
shown, output Impedance Is 90 ohms. If In·
hlblt terminal 11 grounded, output i1 hold at
-6 V re9ardle11 of Input voltage. Circuit
was originally UHd to convert fast•rlso pulses
Rs to slow-rlso pulses for tron1mlnlon over long
180 llnes.-W. J. Travl1, Unbalanced to Balanced
INHIBIOT_ _....... 05 Lovol-Shlfter, EEE, Nov. 1966, p 155-156.
2N2n2
-12v
+Vele
Inputs CR1
R,
N
p
Ou1pu1
T
Transistors 2N708 s
Diodes 1N252
R, IOOK
R, lOK
ll, SOOK
C, 0.001 11F
PULSE STRETCHER WITH NOR GATE-Provides
output pulse having predetermined minimum
duration of about 1 ms, as required in squar.. I
root computers and digital otcillators. With I
all Inputs at ground, output is positive and I
current flow through Cl ·RI turns on Q2 until I
Cl 11 chargad. If inputs become positive - - - - __ J
whllo Q2 is still conducting, QI is not affocted
becau1e Its baH Is grounded by Q2. Input• ADDING INPUTS TO NAND GATE-By chang· high only when nogative voltage Is applied to
regain control when Q2 stops conducting.- ing value of Vee and adding resistor, throe all lnputs.-R. L Frank, NAND Gate Inputs
"Solecting Electronic Circuitry," NASA SP·5046, trlpl..lnput gates in common package can be Expanded by Adding Rosistor, Eledronia,
1966, Government Printing Office, Washington, converted to single 9·1nput gate. Output Is March 17, 1969, p 95-96.
D.C., p 78.
3.6v +Vee
450
-"-' OUTPUT
..n..2 .n.
,\
I Rz STANDARD PNP TRL
t Uk DISCRETE COMPONENT
..n..3 LOGIC ELEMENT
-6•-v,,
TRANSISTOR COUPLES NPN TO PNP--Germa• discrete transl1tor at right. Arrangement also Amplifler Mates NPN To PNP, Efedro·nics, Feb.
nlum 2N1303 Ql converts sl9nal1 from npn IC Improves Input noise rejedion capability of 5, 1968, p 89.
to corred polarity and levels required by pnp IC at l1ft.-G. D. Morant, Graunded-8aso
+~v DIODES SPEED PULSE INVERTER-Diode feed•

back keeps transistors In thoir active region,
avoiding saturation and cutoff. Delays are
reduced to about 2 ns. Transistor capaci·
tonces havo very little effect on switching
speed, as long as diodes are fast-switching
low-c:apocitonco typas.-A. P. Upps, Fast Logic
Circuits with High Noise.Immunity, EEE, Doc.
Oz 1968, p 100--103.
2N3904
R
+-SV 160ll
Vz
INDUCTOR L 15 5 TURNS OF 24 AWG
ENAMEL WIRE, 3116 ••.O•am.,AIR-COREO
200pF
INPUT I
c,
0.0012
39 k pF
OPTICAL LOGIC DRIVER-Output is zero at

all times oxcept whon Q2 is illuminated by V1
-l,65V
about 220 foot•candlas and 01 is not. 02
then saturates Q3 and givos positive output WORD-LINE DRIVER-Tunnel diode acts as one· riso and fall times are 4 ns. Pulse width is
for driving 10-mA load. Can be used to fur- shot to give fast switching speed and odjusl· adjustable from 15 to 22 ns.-W. W. Wu,
nish control signol for stotic switch.-"Semi· able recovery time while delivering 220 mA Tunnel Diode Speeds Word·line Driver, EEE,
conductor Power Circuits Handbook," Moto- to 160-ohm load. Delay time is S ns, while Jan. 1968, p 118 and 120.
rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 4-21.
+12v -18v -6v
3.3K IN270
SUM OR
15K o, DIFFERENCE
i 2N705
15K 7.5K
i
15K 12K
c
-=
IN270
15K 20K
15K Oz
2N705
15K 3.3K IN270
20K
t - -......- - - 0 BORROW
15K 15K
-,
15K
FULL ArJDER·SUBTRACTOR-Use of threshold given threshold boforo inverter will switch.

logic reduces number of components needed Article gives truth tablo.-R. Bouchard,
to provide complete complementary outputs. Threshold Logic Provides Complete Cample•
Basic element is threshold inverter having mentary Output, Electronic Design, Moy 24,
weighted inputs, samo of which must exceed 1965, p so.
~·
LOGIC CIRCUITS 377
INPUT +70V +360Vo---~

THREE·INPUT AND GATE-Convorts high-level
OUTPUT +lOV (70-V) logic to value useful In solid-state cir·
200K cults (10 V). Output Is takon from voltage
1 WATT developed across 27K resistor when VS fires.
This happens only when Vl and V2 and V3
are extinguished by 70.V inputs.-W. G. Mil-
ler, "Using and Understanding Miniature
Noon Lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis,
Ind., 1969, p 52.
72K
ALL lAMPS
5AB·B
+12v
V1
+6v nlNPUT 6.Blc
LOGIC-LEVEL SHIFTER-Although moro com· Ov
plox than single-transistor circuits used to
shift voltago lovels in digital systems requir- V2
ouTPurn-4v
ing two or more driving voltages, three-tran•
sistor version provides much more accurato
_,o.,
03
control of output level, has good thormal 2N2907
stability, and has high input impedanco. Sig·
nals can be shifted over 18-V range. One
desirable application is interfacing.-J. E.
Walters, Adding Transistors Makos Voltage
Shifter Adjustable, Electronics, Dec. 12, 1966,
p 108-109.
-12¥
+18V
EXCLUSIVE-OR-Used to compare binary bits
from film momory with binary numbers set
on switches. If preset switch Is opon, output
signal is high only if film switch is closed.
With preset swikh closed, output Is high only
if film switch is open, This gives exclusive-OR
function. Both sots of conditions allow point
E to drop bolow +12 V and turn on tran-
sistor.-F. Neu, Inverted Exclusive-OR Circuit
IN!5& IN!56 Compares Binary Bits, "400 Ideas for Design
Solected from Electronic Design," Haydon Book
Co., N.Y., 1964, p 83.
+IOV
Vee
. R INTERFACE-Output levols of adjustable·

•2,---- 4 hysteresis threshold circuit are compatible
I with TIL or DTL IC's. Tunnel diode switches
560
• te 1 Jl>+4.5V
to high-voltage state when input current Is
greater than peak current of diode, but does
not switch back to low-voltage state until
R1
\, 11~.__..J\.A/\,o..-4 ___ ._ _ _ _+-4
2N706A -!- -!- <+0.4V
input current is loss than sum af diode's
valley current and transistor base current.
Magnitude of 12 doterminos whether circuit
hysteresis is positive, zoro, or negative (un-
stable). Used for Interfacing within digital
computer.-0. A. Horna, Improved Tunnel·
Diode Threshold Circuit Has Adjustable Hys·
tersis, EEE, Fob. 1968, p 125.
\
LOGIC LEVEL INDICATOR-Lamp A glows

when output love( of LPA Philips 60-sories
input
from .. [> R
NORbit block Is high, and lamp B glows whon
tnt LPA level is low. Display is fail-safoi if lamp A
point
2JA60 tOOOn blows, lamp B Immediately goos dim. Opera-
tion depends on use of lamps having different
17
ratings; lamp A is 28 V and 0.1 A, while lamp
B is 16 V and 40 mA. High lovol hore 11 11.4
to 30 V, and low level is 0 to 0.3 V.-Loglc
level Indication By Two lamps, Phlllp1, Pub.
Dept., Elcema Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nether•
lands, Application Note.
Ct
TRIGGER 0.( p.f 0 OUTPUT
INPUT 2N527
I
L. R2 TOS~~ :JllT2
220 Tl
IOOtl IOK
GATES
- C3 A,B,C,ANO 0
o.tµf
TISN7400
_rt~ 39K
INPUT
C2 02VOR 07V
O.lµf
--------ill--~+-~~--1>---j I OUTPUT
llOV
AC T2
t - - - TRIGGER
INHIBIT
BRIDGE RECTIFIERS
SET·RESET FLIP·FLOP-Use of four gates on HANDLE TOTAL LAMP LOAD
single IC, connected as shown, Is convenient DRIVING LAMP WITH LOW·LEVEL LOGIC-
low-cost method of obtaining common logic Turns on 200.W lamp far 0.7-V upper logic
circuit not readily available In completely in- level, giving normal brlllianco, but doa1 not
tegrated form. Positive logic NAND gates A turn on scs and lamp for 0.2-V lower logic
and B form d-c bistable flip.flop that changes level. 2N2646 oscillator turns on 2N527 for
state when trigger Input to Cl goos to zoro. about 20 p.s at 1-lcHz rote; this pulse rota ads
To switch It baclc, tri99tr. Input to Cl must be through transformer Tl to trigger scr C22 and
returned to ONE state and negative input give full brilHanco of 110-V lamp.-Planar
applied to goto B. Gates C and D provide fast Siiicon Controlled Switch 3N84/3N85, General
recovery time. Will trigger on sine waves Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., 65.18, 1964.
down to about 50 Hz and generate clean,
symmetrical square waves.-R. Glasgal, Dual·
Quad IC Gives Flip-Flop a Fast Recovery,
fleefroniu, Feb. 5, 1968, p 86-87.
. - - - - - - - . - - - - - t l 8 v de REGULATED
500 EMICO 13205 METER
WITH SPECIAL SCALE
0·10 ma d·c
$10 PER DECADE-R111istar·translstor IC loglc,
although slower than DTL and TIL schemes,
gives operating speeds from d-c to 8 MHz
for counting decades, at about third of parts
cost of more modern IC's. All IC'1 u10 3.6
V d-c supply. Bell code is 1-2-2-4 weighted
biquinary, arran9ed 01 shown.-D. E. Lan·
caster, Far Low Cost, Count On RTL, Eleclronics,
Jan. 22, 1968, p 74-76. IOk
RESET
COUNT
ti
1
1/zMC790P /zMC790P
CARRY i
LOGIC CIRCVITS 379
PULSE IC SWITCHING-R-S fllp·flop IC SN510 ads as

GEN. selector to provide switched output without
interrupting pulse generator. Ellmlnatoa
chatter caused by manual switch alone.
When switch Is In OUTPUT' position, +6 V
is applied to rosot lino: output of flip-flop Is
than positive and no signal goes to SN514
dual NAND gate. In OUTPUT position, flip-
flop is near ground and SN514 controls
transistor driver that can furnish 4.5 V at up
to 75 mA for sovoral clock line pulsos.-G.
P. Carter, Circuit Prevents Pulse Interruption
or Chatter, Electronic Dos/gn, March 16, 1964,
p 106-107.
-12Vdc +12Vdc
INPUT +70V +36QVo----.

OUTPUT +lOV
7801(
vs
-12Vdc TO.l~F
DIGITAL TV DISPLAY-Converts 5-V logic 1 and All LAMPS

0-V logic 0 signals to EIA standards for video 5AB·B
C+l V video, -0.1 V blanking, and 0.4 V
sync) feeding into EIA standard 75-ohm load.
Usod for computor-genorated digital tolovision
displays. Several crt monlton may be fod NEON AND GATE-Hos 70-V Input and same
in parallel, with 70-ohm termination attached output for operating additional high-level
to last monitor. Froquency response Is flat logic circuits. VS flras only when Vt, V2, and
within 1 dB from d·c to 20 MHz.-T. A. Ander• V3 are oxtinguished.-W. G. Miiier, "Using
son, lnoxponsivo Video Distribution Amplifier and Understanding Miniature Neon lamps/'
Convorts logic Signals for TV Displays, EEE, H. W. Sams & Co., lndianapolls, Ind., 1969, p
Nov. 1967, p 124. 53.
r------
1 ®
---------.I Dz
IN4148
c Rz
I
I
I
'
I
I
I
IBOl'f 510
I I
I© I©
I I OUTPUT
I I
o, I I
IN4734 I I
I I
I I
L _____ J!...2~e~_ _ _ 0 _J
PROTECTING IC FROM NEGATIVE OVERDRIVE symmetrical to ground and which therefore positive inputs to 5 V and ne9atlvo to 0.7 V.
-Permits driving DTL, TIL, and other current• may exceed ratings of logic elements in noga• -R. K. Underwood, Convertod Generator
sinking logic with standard laboratory signal tivo dirodlon. Voltage swings of 25 V nega- Drives Heavy Logic loads, fledronia, Feb, 17,
generators that produce output waveform tive will not damage IC. RI and DI clamp 1969, p 97-98.
+10 v +Vee
R1
MPS6522
OUTPUT
r-+Ycc
ov.J
OPJICAL LOGIC DRIVER-Can bo used for
delivering control signal to static switch.
Output is positive, providing 2 mA to load,
OvL -1.0 TO-Vee
-=- 3.9k
at all times except whon phototranslstors Ql

and Q2 oro both exposed to bright llght of -Vee
about 220 foot-condles.-"Semiconductor NEGATIVE-POSITIVE LOGIC CONVERTER- throe transistors aro switched on, and in·
Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Transforms negative control signal into re• vortod signal appoars at output. Noiso immu•
Ariz., 1968, p 4-20. quired positive logic for digital IC, at clock nity Is bottor that 400 mV for 0 to 100 C.-J.
rates from d-c to above 2 MHz. Negative d-c A. D'Cunha, Negative Signals Converted to
voltage lovols below zero are changed to posi- Positive logic, Electronics, Morch 17, 1969, p
tive logic lovol of system, in range of 3.6 to 97.
7 V. When negative pulse reaches input, all
ov
39 k BOOSTING LOGIC OUTPUT-With input from
OPTICAL LOGIC DRIVER-Output Is zero at all IC and 6-V supply, low input gives 35 V
times oxcopt when both Ql and Q2 are illu· maximum output at S p.A, and high input
minated by about 220 foot-candles, In which gives 0.2 V mallilmum output at 100 mA.
case they saturate Q3 so it can provide at Diode is BAX13, RI is 560 ohms, and R2 is
least 10 mA for static switch or other load. 6.8K.-J. Dearson; FC Family of DTL Integrated OPTICAL LOGIC DRIVER-Provides positive
-"Semiconductor Power Circuits Handbook," Circuits, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind. output voltage for all combinations of illu•
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 4-20. haven, The Netherlands, 1970, p 139. mination on phototransistors QI and Q2 ox•
copt that when light is on QI but not on Q2.
Wiii furnish 2. mA to load. About 220 foot•
candles from flashlight shining on QI will
saturate 03 and reduce output to zero.-
Fie "Semlconductor Power Circuits Handbook,"
+18vc:c IK112W Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 4-20.
R1
IK
1W
RfGUl.ATEO Rz
150
INPUTS
2W cw
OUTP!;T
CURRENT
113 5•"4~
5 to 15voc
·~
l°N
-18vac RJ
C1 • C2 ....__ _._~-4---0V
100QpF - 250to500~F l·A LOW LOGIC-With input from IC logic

(MICA) 25V
LARGE
unit and 6-V supply, low input gives 35 V
HEAT S•NK COMMON maximum output at 5 µA and high Input
gives I V maximum output at I A. Valuos
CONSTANT-VOLTAGE SINK FOR CLAMPED bettor than 2 %. Circuit is similar to shunt• are: DI BAX13; TRI BFYSI; TR2 BFY50 with
LOGIC-Gives any constant voltago from S rogulated power supply except for rovorsed heatsink; Rl 560; R2 30; R3 6.BK; R4 470,-J,
to IS V d-c and will sink up to 3 A of load.-M. W. Raybin, Socond Broakdown Gives Doorson, FC Family of DTL lntogrotod Circuits,
rovorso current when serving as constant• Fast Pulses, EEE, March 1967, p 162 and 164. Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
voltage sink. Output voltage regulation is Tho Netherlands, 1970, p 139.
CHAPTER 48
Magnetic Tape Circuits
TOCOQCUIT
llA'tTHEON: IIi
CK 1104P: tf : 20k
.OllpF
t.__ !I
l.6k IOOk
TAPE PREAMP-Output is flat within 1 dB from
20 to 20,000 Hz with NAB equalization. Gain lk 1k
+14V
is romotely controlled electro•optically; con·
trol circuit changes intensity af light source
acting on photoresistor, altering effective
feedback resistance. Technique provides com•
pletely noise-free control of gain. Uses Foir·
child p.A709 or Notional LM709 IC opamps,-
5. L. Sliver, IC Op Amps Boost Audio Circuit
Performanco, Electronics World, Sept. 1968,
p 3D-32.
-14V -14V
470 47
MONITOR
120
0.0068pl
150k
AGC FOR RECORDING-Simple automatic gain -:- RECORD HEAD

control ampliflar, used in Sonymatic TC·900 lavol changos up to 30 dB. Age control tran· gain.-Recorder Gain Control Eliminates Level
tape recorder, maintains proper recording sistor Q6 acts as variable shunt Impedance at Indicator, E/edronics, Nov. 14, 1966, p 165-
level automatically within 10 dB, for input output of amplifier QI, to adjust overall 166.
381
3
BIAS RECORDING BIAS
TRAP ADJUST RIO
IOOK
BLK BLUE
+IBV (140ma)
.033±5% SWITCH SI
I UPPER TRACK ONLY
IOOOpf! IO% CI 1000pf±I09/e
2 STEREO
3 LOWER TRACK ONLY
Q2
2N3404
27
70-KHZ ERASE-BIAS OSClllATOR-UtH low• to 80 lcHz) to give minimum of 60 dB erasure coupled mvbr with tuned load,-D. V, Jones,
cost silicon transistors requiring no heat sinks. with stereo erase head. Total power output Tape Erase ond Blas Oscillotor, Generol Elec•
Provides sufficient power (over 10 mA at 70 is 1.5 W, with 60% efficiency. Circuit is cross- tric, Syrocuse, N.Y., No. 90.14, 1965.
NOTE: ONLY I CHANNEL SHOWN OF 4 WATT SYSTEM

1&.n
SINCE 2 ND. CHANNEL IS AN EXACT DUPLIC/&TE.
LOAD
+22V
20 ...
25V I-
=
125\i
20
6V
o-:i.-·---4 .047
p.F
IV
R6
100. 6.8K
470K
3V - .4.7p.F
TAPE HEAD
lNORTRONICS B2Q7K
OR B2L7K QI - 2N3900A
OR EQUIV.) izod for J°fa or 3~ inch per socond tape OR 2N5232A
4-W IC STEREO TAPE CARTRIDGE SYSTEM- speed. Treble equalization control is used to Dwight V. Jones, Monolithic 2 Watt Integrated
Usos GE PA-237 Integrated circuit to drive compensate for program material, tape head, Amplifter-Characteristlcs and Applications,
16-ohm load, with two-transistor preamp speaker, or servo as ordinary tone control. General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90j3,
between tape head and IC. Preamp ls equaf. Output is adequate for 8·trock system.- 1968, p 13.
MAGNETIC TAPE CIRCUITS 383
REGENERATING PULSES ON PLAYBACK-Sim·

pie one-shot mvbr reg11nerates d-c pulses
recorded on analog tape. Pulse width, pulso
amplitude, and time relationships of recorded
waveform are thus preserved at output of
channel. Extornal voltage divider can be used
to sot output amplitudo.-8. C. Tupper, Ro-
generator Restores Pulses Recorded on Anolog
Tape, Elodronlc Design, Nov. 23, 1964, p 61.
PECORO
u
INPUT
+28V
DC INPUT
PULSE
+
INPUT
2.2k 68K
LINEAR LOW·FREQUENCY MODULATOR-Uses
ujt to genorato sawtooth whoso period is con•
trolled by Input to give f·m signal for re-
cording on magnetic tapo. Low-pass flltor at
output attonuotes sawtooth harmonics above
audio frequencies to pravont them from hoter.
odynlng with bias oscillator of recorder.
Original d·c signal can be restored by playing lp.f
back Into limiter, discriminator, and d-c am•
plifler.-J. H. Hammond, Inexpensive FM
Modulator Hos Good Linoarity, Eledronlc
0.0047
p.t TI;r° LOW-:
Design, Nov. 9, 1964, p 72-75. PASS
OUTPUT
+t6v
300 IEour 1- Eour21

Eour 1 ~tt10mv
-llOmv-
v= GAUSSIAN
Ov
CENTER-TAPPED
READ HEAD
., IE1N,-E1Nzl~+5mv .-----~---------+-----------+25v
-5mv 3.1' GAUSSIAN 5.6k

A
~BY
Ov
UNMARKED DIODES IN9t4

_n_;av Ov
1.2k IN752 UNMARKED TRANSISTORS 2N930
5.6Y 5.6v WAVEFORMS SHOWN FOR HIGH GAIN MOOE ONLY SIGNALS FROM
SPEED LOGIC
-25v CONTROL
amplitude of reod·head output pulse when
-12v record11r is operated at slower of its two to-peak dilferonco amplitudes as low as mlili-
DIGITAL CONTROL-Two predetermined gain speeds. Spood-changing commands are de- volts while rojectin9 common-modo noise.-
lev11ls in proompliRer for digital magnetic tape rived automatically from speed control logic I. W. Salmon, Digital Commands Control Dif·
transport are selected by digital command. of rocordor. Differential amplifier Ql..Q2 ferential Amplifier Gain, Elecfroni", July 24,
Higher gain mode comp11nsat11s for reduced allows proamp to handlo signals with peak· 1967, p 85-86.
ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED SCR-Control signal

for bilateral scr can be either properly phased
60.Hz or any signal above 600 Hz. If T1
120V
is tuned, tones from tape recorder can be
:""'"~ ~II
60- used to activate selectively two or more of
those switches.-E. K. Howell, Bilateral SCR
T, •• Lets Designers Economize on Circuitry, Efec•
Ironic Design, Jan. 20, 1964, p 74-77.
C3
R2
PHONO
INPUT
/- ...,
cttANNELAf
NAB EQUALIZATION-Uses Model 425 IC I

opamp In network giving standard equaliza• CHANNELD\
tion for magnetic tape. Simpler network at
right will servo for less critical applications.
' R7
-B. J. Losmandy, Operational Amplifier Appli·

cation for Audio Systems, Opamp Labs, Los
Angeles, Cal., 1968.
OUTPUT
~CHANNEL
CIO D
/
CHANNEL Ar
I
I
CHANN!LD\
TAPE HEAD PREAMP-R.C network across
winding of tape head suppresses osdllation
in Model 4009 d-c opamp. Gain Is 500 (54
' RIO RIO
dB).-B. J. Losmandy, Operational Amplifier

Application for Audio Systems, Opamp Labs,
Los Angelos, Cal., 1968.
Tl CRI Rle R20
llTY 00""
OA91 OA91
C1 Cr-30 pf 25V Ra Ri:r-5.1 K

C4 Cr-0.1pf400V R. Ri.-51 K
Ca Cr-330 ppf RaRic-160 K
c, c.-o.001 pf RaR..-75 K
STEREO RECORDING LEVEL INDICAJOR-Meter C, Cao-0.047·pf 400V Ri R1r-l Meg
reading Is proportional to peak-peak voltage Cn-50 pf 150V Ra Rir-100 K
at collector of driver transistor in channel C11 C11-20 pf 150V RaRn-1 K
having highest recording level. At input of CR1-5elenium Rectifier 15 Ma DC Ri.--10 K "
R1 Ria-47 K R:io-22K
4 V rms, corresponding to point whore dis- R,R ..-270K T.-Power Transfonner: Ser.-125V. 15Ma: 6.3V. 0.6A
tortion duo to tape saturation becomes si9·
nificant In typical recorder, direct current PHONO-TAPE PREAMP-Developed for stereo tion for tape sottin9.-"Essential Characteris-
through motor is 95 µA.-"Transistor Audio magnetic phone cartridges and stereo tape tics", General Electric, Owensboro, Ky., 13th
and Radio Circuits," Mullard Ltd., London, heads. Gangod switch provides RIAA equali· Edition, 1969, p 363.
1969, p 79. zation ot phone setting and NARTB oqualiza•
l
+Sv
OUTPUT
2.0pf
INPUT-1'--._.,._ _.
lk
PNP TRANSISTORS-2N4126
NPN TRANSISTORS-2N4124
-5v
2-Bvpp~ I
INPUT
A
+sv-i.r-
- DIGITAL TAPE PEAK DETECTOR-QI and Q2
form complementary peak detector that de-
tects input signal of 2 to 8 V p•p over a range
of 5 to 15 kHz, and delivers pulse al each
Ov-
peak of input sine wave. Q3.Q4 clip detector
B +svd"L- outputs and deliver rectangular pulses whoso
Ov
trailing edges coincide with peaks of input
c +5v ==1'L- wave. Width of output pulses is detormined
Ov only by lime constant of R·C networks at input
OUTPUT
+5v~ to pulse amplifiers Q5·Q6. Circuit eliminates
Ov need for full-wave rectifier normally used to
make bipolar pulses from tape he11d unipolar.
-C. A. Herbst, Peak Detect11r Senses Bipolar
Inputs, Electronics, July 21, 1969, p 81.
Ps<ord .,.,., tMttr $00A. l",,0...... fot'

mo••~"" r~ •••••
.,,.
--
~·<Ool
Cryt'ct
tcl•C.,.opl'IQnG:
""
4-W FOUR·SPEED AMPLIFIER-lncluclos equali· c,o

zalion for four commonest tape speeds and n..-
c,,
choice of throe inputs for driving tape ro• ' IMfl,.=
corder. During recording, TRS and TR6 serve
as SO·kHz oscillator in which erase head is
.L__
•.
~~.i----~
~--~ -----------+--~-----'
used as oscillator coll. Frequency response is inch·per•s speed but cuts off al 12,000 and speeds.-"Transistor Audio and Radio Cir·
flat within 3 dB from 55 to 20,000 Hz for 7.5· 6,000 Hz respectively for next two lower cuits,'' Mullard ltd., London, 1969, p 70.
TAPE RECORDER MOTOR SUPPLY-Used for

quick checking of batteries in portable tape
recorders and phonographs. Two outputs, for
3 and 9 Y, handle practically all types of
motors used in these applications. 3.y supply
11 variable, for chedclng motors at specifled
operating voltages.-L. Chioma, Tape Recorder
Repair, G·E Teclini·Tallc, Fall 1967, p 1.
00 NOT CCINHECT THE GROlmOS OF llOTE: NO LOAO IOV OUTPUT

THE TWO SUPPLIES TOGE1'H£A-ICEEP WITI< LOAI> 9 2V OUTPUT
117V AC +AND- OF EACH SUPPLY SElllRATE .
•0!16 pF
'
2 4
4.7MH RECORD-PLAYBACK PREAMP-Uses TAA310
- I low-level linear IC amplifier having high input
I impedance, 90-clB voltage gain, and noise
I less than 4 dB. External components Include
I frequency compensation networks and volume
I
I control. Designed to feed 1,000.0hm imped-
I ance. Report gives charadoristic curves.-The
I Amperex TAA310 in Tape Recorder Preampli-
- L_____- - - - ,- -
- - _!WE~~~~~~~~~~--~
I - - 1- flors, Amperox, Slatersville, R.I., 5-132, 1967.
Rt
47k
Rz
50k
o, 04
2SC402 2SD211
C1
200pf Cz
100µ1
0
SWITCHING DIRECTION-HOLDING
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
AUTOMATIC 'REVERSAL-Switching ampRflor -E
sen1111 absent• of a-c signal on tape and
produces d-c ~alta9e that feeds throu9h con• D;
trol amplilleri to aduate dlredion-revening IT22
solenoid of Sony tape recorder. Circuit time
constants prevent tape from. reversing during 0
pauses In recordings and during startup.-
Sensor Reverses Tap• Diroctlon When the
CONTROL AMPLIFIER
Rocordln9 Ends, Electronics, Nov. 14, 1966, p
163-16S.
MAGNETIC TAPE OIRC'UITS 387
+12\/
COMPENSATED PLAYBACK PREAMP-UHt

•Vee Mallory MICOl 01 IC audio preamp with R·C
compensation natworlc connected to output
to compensate for lncrooH in Input signal
OUTPUT with increasing recorded frequency. Glv11
011ontlally flat aver-all responH. Values of
R and C should be seleded to give flat re-
R • 4700 OUTPUT sponse when NAB standard tape Is played
0
+ LEVEL
16013 GND
C • 0.47
through head whoso playback characteristla
are lcnown.-M. L. Deschler, Integrated Cir•
..,,..
0
1
"9'
cult Proampllflers, Mallory, Indianapolis, Ind.,
APPN·2, 1968•
TAPE PREAMP-Usos audio lntogratod circuit

with 7.y tingle-ended supply to provide 4-dB
noiH figure, 90°d8 voltage gain, and uncom•
pensated frequency limit of 15 kHz. Ideal
for tape record-playback preamp. Values of
unlabeled resistors should be chosen for opti•
mum rosult1.-D. E. Lanca1tor, Audio Inte-
grated Circuits-What's Avallablo?, E#edronlcs
World, Oct. 1967, p 34-36.
Cl5
470PF
RIO
IOK
Rll
220K - Cl4
+ I
IOV
13
+ Cl2
~33
.,.. 6V
n EARPHONE
'i EX.SPKR.
Ja
Rl2 02 JACK
330 SD-46
Cl8 Cl9 R21 SPKR.
.01 .01 10 SOHM
- '=" ':'
ERASE ,_.....___....
HEAD
LI C21
.01 C22+ Cl6
Rl8 500~500
3.3 IOV~IOV
CASSmE-RECORDER·PLAYER-Uses monaural IC requires only two additional transistors to

two-track tape running at 1% inches par sec- provide roqulrod fundions along with autO.
ond, and operating from either 9-V battery matic level control and accidontal-erasuro pre- Cassette Tape Recorder, Ma9navox Sorvke
or equivalent a•c adaptor. Special Magnavox vention for prerecorded cassettes.-IV9019 Manual 6293, Fort Wayne, Ind., 1969.
LOW-HEAT F·M RATE LIMITER-Constant-cur·

8.2k rent transistors Ql and Q2 replace resistors
in diode·bridge rate limiter for instrumenta·
lion tape rocording, to reduco undesirable hoot
dissipation. Use of complomontary transistors
gives constant-current operation.-D. F. Frank-
2.7k lin, Diodos Prevent Overload by limiting
Input's Slope, Electronics, Jan. 22, 1968, p
69-70.
INPUT 10 +Iv OUTPUT
·Iv
-----+30v
2.7k
ALL DIODES
IN916
8.2
INPUT 10 OUTPUT
F-M RATE LIMITER-Prevonts overloading c, ~lpf

caused by excessive rate of change and am•
plitudo when recording random signals on
magnetic tape for instrumontotion, using
wideband f-m. Slope of output signal is
limited to rote of chorgo or discharge of
ALL DIODES
1N916
Cl through D6. Has no effoct on bandwidth.
-D. F. Franklin, Diodes Prevont Overload by
limiting Input's Slope, Electronics, Jan. 22,
1968, p 69-70. '-------30v
TUNER
INPUT
CRYSTAL
CARTRIDGE
INPUT
MAGNETIC
CARTRIDGE cor--c~~-.J
INPUT
R,: I Mfi 110: 56 kfl 1, 1: 0-1 MO C,: 10 µf. 3 V, efe!lrolyti1 C. : SO 11f, 6 V, eledrolyli1
R,: 2.7 Mil R11 : 100 Ul 119: 47 kfl C,: 2 µF. 50 V, ele<1rolyli1 C, 0 : 0.003 µf
R1: 47 kH Rn: 33 k!l R1o: 0- 5110 kll C,: 50 p.f, 3 V, eft1lrolylic C11: 470 pf
R.: 100 kU R11 : 270 !t R11 : 82 kU C.: 20 µF, 25 V, eJedrolylic C12: 0.003 1•f
R,: 150 kfi Ru: 470 kn C1: 0.0033 11F C11: 5 µf, 6 V, eledrol)'1i1
R.: 330 n ···'
R,,, 2.2 kfi
I kfi R11 : 56 kfl C,: 47 pf C,.: I µf, 25 V, eleclrolyti<
R,: IS kfi R,.: 0-100 kfl R1.: 39 kfi (,: 1200 pf C,,, 20 l'F, 6 V, elellrolylic
Ra: 1.2 Mfi R17: 82 k!l Ru: 4.7 kfl C1: I µf, 50 V, efeclrofylic
R9 : 7S':kfi
RIAA.COMPENSATED PREAMP-Compensation, Output is 1 V for 4-mV magnetic cartridge harmonic distortion bolow 0.14% for any
for magnetic input only, is within 1 dB of Input, 220.mV crystal cartridge input, and input.-Preforrod Semiconductors and Compo·
ideal curve from 20 ta 20,000 Hz. Circuit lOO·mV tuner input. Response Js within nenu, Texas Instruments, Dallas, Texas,
uses npn epitaxial planar silicon transistors. 1 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz, and total CC101, 1968, p 1054.
12
C1C2C3C1 = 0.1 microfarad, paper
c. = 10 microfarads, 12 volts, elec-
trolytic
C6 15 microfarads, 6 volts, electro-
lytic
c6 5 microfarads, 25 volts, electro-
lytic
Ca 50 microfarads, 25 volts, elec-
trolytic
CR 1 CR2 = silicon rectifier, type
IN270
Qi Qz = MOS field-effect transistor,
type3Nl28
Q3Q4 = transistor, RCA SK3020
R1 Rz R3 R. R7 = 100,000 ohms, 1/2
watt, 10%
R13
R& potentiometer, 10,000 ohms,
LINE AMPLIFIER WITH MIXER-Used to pro-
audio taper duce uniform audio lovels required for high-
Ra 180,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% quality tape recordings. Circuit also includes
Ra potentiometer, 5000 ohms, volume compression to prevont overload by
straight taper loud passages of speech or music.-"Hobby
R, R13 = I megohm, 1/2 watt, 10% Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM·
Rio 15,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% 90, p 72.
Ru 10,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% 1200ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% 470ohms, 1/2watt, 10%
R 12 1500 ohms, I /2 watt, 10% 100,000ohms, 1/2 watt, 10% 2 megohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
2N508A
4-f
2NS08A
.
.;
~ PAPER
0 2Nl09
0
- 100,.f
.,
0
.....
..
.....
0
0 "'2
;;;S
+ bv
0
"' ..
~
Rl
OUTPllT
CLIPPING MOMENTARY STEREO PEAKS-Used plifier channel, for feeding side ampllfler
in rocordlng amateur performances on stereo shown here which drives lamp in Raytheon
magnetic tape, whore dB output cannot al· limiter for each channol, but rosulting wonder- Raysi!tor unit. Photocell of Raysistor varies
ways be accurately predicted in time for ing of stereo Images ls not as serious as mo- shunt resistance across Input of channel am·
manual redudion of gain. Intended to catch mentary overloads that are prevented. Block plifier (Al) to give desired limlting.-J. Young
only momentary poalcs, rather than servo for diagram Illustrates how input is taken from and W. B. Denny, Solid State Limiter for Tape
automatic gain·riding. Requires separate any convenient point following limiter in am- Rocording, Audio, Sept. 1965. '
390 ELECTRONIC ClB.CUITS MANUAL
+11\1
PLAYBACK PREAMP-Uses Mallory MIC0101 IC
audio preamp with input terminals connected
+Vee directly to tape playback head. Suitablo for
either audio or instrumentation applications.
MAGNETIC
TRANSDUCER'
O'APE HEAD
OR
I FEEDBACK
OUTPUT
+
Uncompensated overall voltage gain of 57 to
63 dB can easlly be obtained with 3·dB band-
width of 10 H11: to 700 kH11: and output of 3 V
P·P with under 10% total harmonic distortion.
TRANSFORMER -M. L. Doschler, Integrated Circuit Preampll•
SECONOARYI + LEVEL fiors, Mallory, Indianapolis, Ind., APPN·2,
6013 GND 1968•
....
•IZVOC
CHI
OllTPlll
IOK UVEl
TAPE PLAYBACK PREAMP-UHs Mallory MIC·

0103 dual-channel IC proamp with tape
heads connected dlroctly to IC inputs. In• 0!2
____ _j'..~••~r"'
.. o~&
eludes R·C compensation for magnetic tape
responso charactoristlc.-M. L. Doschler, Inte-
grated Circuit Preampllflers, Mallory, Indian·
apolis, Ind., APPN-2, 1968.
Ott 0.47
GND
1
Input
signal Output
signal V3
"1
Audio C5
omplllicir 12·5pF
25V
C&
r- - - - - - - - -, 125JJF
R3 2511
rn1 I 390kA
BCl•B J-t---'~....~"'.fl/V'<ir--e1----~-e>---MI-......
or BCIOB
Controllcul
varioblci
rosistancc
I I -:nv
L---------.J wherein loud and soft musical passages
AGC FOR RECORDER-Autoniatlcallr reduces current with motor or magic eye and manu-
galn of rocordlng amplifier when optimum i9- ~ally adjusting Jovel. Circuit responds very would be rocordod with oqual loudness.
cording level Is exceeded, to prevent saver• rapidly to overload signal, producing attonu- Book describes operation of circuit in dotall.-
dlstortlon that occurs at tapct saturation. atlon af 40 dB within 50 ms, but has long ro- "Transistor Audio and Radio Circuits/' Mui-
Elimlnates need for monitoring recording-head covary time to prevent volume compression lard Ltd., London, 1969, p 80.
+m +22Y
• "Cl761,.Cl28 PG>r """""

\IHd Wflh pl"l•ctn'Ohf..r
t 2·20 wMn Ulld with
pn-~fla"
ean
JJ•F'
A0162
68nF'
Eros.a
lf>A,.---: I-6-8_n_F----t-!)-.-6~ l!>A Boas
IOr
d'lamel 1
naacl
chanl\QI
2 ~·
I kn
Bias Bia$
for far
cnannoal2 chonn1al I
COMMON BIAS.ERASE OSCILLATOR FOR mentary pairs of transistors, but bias voltagH
STEREO-Keeps bias and erase frequencies for recording hoods aro still derived from
equal for stereo channels, to prevent pro- ora10 voltages across individual erase heads.
duction of audio beat frequencies. Tuned -''Transistor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mul-
erase heads are connected in parallel to form la rd Ltd., London, 1969, p 77.
load and feedback circuits for ono of comple-
C-1
2
GanF 1sn
-2
Blas
IOI'
LOCKED BIAs.ERASE OSCILLATORS FOR

STEREO-Feedback paths of Individual oscilla-
tors aro connactod together to malco bias and
orasa frequencies equal for bath steroa
MAGNETIC TAPE BIAS OSCILLATOR-Basic tuned circuit determines frequency of oscilla- channels, thereby preventing production of
transistor circuit for applying a-c bias uses tion and makes signal sinusoidal Transistors audio boat froquonclo1.-''Transistor Audio
common astable mvbr with canter-tapped aro not crltlcol for bias frequency. of 95 kHz. and Radio Circuits," Mullard Ltd., London,
transformer, In place of normal collector re- -J, G. McKnight, Biasing In Magnetic Tape' 1969, p 78.
sistors and capacitors, to complete parallel Recording, Electronics World, Aug. 1967, p
resonant drcuit with transformer. This 34-36 and 75.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In the catogory of this chapter, u10 the Index at the back
of this book. Check also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Clrc_uits," publlshod by
CHAPTER 49
Measuring Circuits
MEASURING LIGHT INTENSITY-Uses high·

gain apamp to hold voltage across photoemis- RI
sive cell at almost zero voltage, to take ad· 20k!l.
vantage of linear relationship botwoen current
flow and light intensity at coll voltages below 0.47µF
a few millivolts. Output voltage of opamp is
then equal to product of coll current and
feedback resistance Rf· which is selected In
steps by SI. Total light energy, as from
flash lamps, can be measured by closing S2
and apening S3 to Integrate output in second
opamp.-J. Ph. Korthals Altes, Measurement
of light Intensity, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 85, 52 IOk!l.
1970.
ov ov
ov
ov
©
Sic @
5.1 k
R
©
@ Sk
ZERO
ADJUST
.
INPUT
680
IM
lOk
SUPPRESSION
ADJUST
lOk SH I.Ok
+ ~~~~~~~~~ ....
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ....
~~~-'
MOVABLE-RANGE D-C VOLTMETER-Full-scale measured, drain curront of fot is sot at 350 ing on 100-µA meter. Accuracy is 2%.-R.
range of I V may be positioned anphere µA with suppression-adjust pot. Switch is Traina, Multlrange D-C Voltmeter, Electronics,
botween 0 and 7 V d-c input, such as for than moved to position 2, input voltage is Sept. 19, 1966, p 126.
reading 4 to 5 V. With switch at position increased I V above low limit, and callbra·
I, and input at low limit of voltage lo bo tion-adjust pot is set lo give full-scale reod·
392
MEASURING CIRCUITS 393
." ....
,,.
. tlOV
>41l >~~."'
~ ~ ~~0 .. 1
Al
.,0.
CZ
:t-
.... ..
16
O!Ok
- OUTPUT
MILLIVOLTMETER PREAMP-Increases sensitiv·
TR2
ity of rectlfler•type a·c millivoltmeter from 20
~ !";) mV rms down to I mV rms for full-scale de-
~ \.:;l
fledlon. Bandwidth is 800 lcHz, same as
ZTJJOl ZTllOZ
Cl rectifier stage. Voltage gain is 22, and may
be adjusted, while input impedance is 100K.
<>-II- .... Report gives design procedure.-"E·lino Tran-
1Nru sistor Applications," Ferranti ltd., Oldham,
>:~OK
RI '> .,
' ~4l0k Jl0A Lanes,, England, 1969, p 34.
TR,, TR, ZTX302 (BCWl4)
.u
•o•
TRANSISTOR STRAIN GAGE-Uses silicon npn

planar piezoeledric transistor collod Pitran
(made by Stow labs, Stow, Mass.), having IOk
emitter-base jundian mechanically couplod to
diaphragm in top af T0-46 can. ls sensitive
enough to respond to feather touch. Voltage +
change per unit strain is over 10 times better IOv
than metal and other types of strain gages.
Output is linearily proportional to mechanical
input, and ranges up to 20% of d-c supply
voltago.-R. M. Moore, Semiconductor Gages MECHANICAL INPUT
Meleo Sonse in Most Transducer Applications,
Electronics, March 18, 1968, p 109-116.
MEASURING TRANSISTOR-DESTROYING SPIKES hours watching cro screen. Meter pointer

-Uses voltage divider for accurately dividing holds its position as long as switch 51 Is on
spilce voltage generated by inductive switch- HOLD as shown. RESET position roturns
ing, then incroasos power content of resulting needle to zoro fast, and DELAY position
low voltage so it can be moasured with ordi· mokes neodlo return to zero slowly.-G. R.
nary microammeter. Used In development Phillips, FET Voltmeter Reads Transients, Elec-
work to locate and eliminate transistor-de· tronics, June 10, 1968, p 109-110.
straying spikes without having to spend 9v d·c
100 27k
03
2N3819
Re
s.
t9Yo:ift
AZ RS
lZ• a 11
Dl U.ul
nuo
100..A
tZSOn
OJ
ISl40 IS..1
A-C MILLIVOLTMETER-Gives full-scale doflec-
tlon on 100-µA llnoar-scalo motor for Input
of about 20 mV rms over bandwidth of 800
ZTIJ02
kHz. Input impedance Is 10K. Report gives
design procedure.-"E-Line Transistor Applica-·
tions," Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England,
IOI
1969, p 33.
15ul HI
llPUT o--ltt-----~I
ZQmV tmt
Z50ul
TR, ZTX300 (BCWIO)

TR, ZTX302 (BCWl4l
Rl2
IOOK
R2
VTVM ADAPTER FOR MULTIMETER-Uses only IMEG.
typical 60 to 100 µA motor of multlmoter,
for making low-voltage d-c meosuromonts RI
IOOK
(1-V and 10-V scales) at high Impedance.
Adaptor draws only 1 µA from measured
circuit at full-scalo dofloction, which is equiva- TEST
lent to sensitivity of 1 mag por V, Usos LEADS
silicon transistors in two-stage difforontial
ampliflor. Has no warm-up zero drift. RIS
Since standby battery drain is only fraction of IOK
µA, no on-off switch is required. Sat multlm-
ater to 60 (or 100) µA position and plug R2·RANGE ADJUST llOV RI&
SCALEl IOOK
fast leads of adapter Into corresponding lack. R9·RANGE ADJUST I IV
Does not Interfere with normal uso of multlm- SCALEl
otor.-"Hobby Manual," General Electric, Rt5· ZERO ADJUST
t µ.f 22k
1,000pf
180
MEASURING LOOP GAIN-Article describes from analyzer operating in bfo modo Is in-
improved techniques for using wave analyzer sortod at point A, 10 source and moosuromont
to measure loop gain of amplifier directly in circuits are funod simultaneously. Point B is
dB. Analyzer has finite-bandwidth tunable currant nodo.-W. T. Balarwaltos, Wava Ana-
window that can be moved across frequency lyzers: a Bright Futuro, Electronics, July 22,
range of amplifier undor test, for measure- 1968, p 62-68. -22v
ment of signals framod by window. Signal
RANGE
s,
':"22.SV
!OK
ZERO ADJ
PICOAMMETER-Battery operation minimizes
noiso and allows oxcollont isolation botwoon as omittor-followors to drive low·impedanco
input and motor. Mosfot Q3 provides high motor movomont. Will measure law d-c volt·
impodanco to minimize offoct on circuit being ag111 as well as picaampores.-C. R. Porlclns,
moasurod. Q4 provides roforonco for bal· "Applicatlan of MOSFET Devices ta Electronic
anclng motor whon Input is short-circuited for Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968,
calibration. Dual transistors are connected p 19.
IMQ
FLUX METER-Combination of Philips DOA40

opamp, DZD40 zero dotoctor, 0511 mvbrs,
GllO gate inverters, and PS10 pulse shapor
evaluates Integral of voltage Induced in N•
turn coil moving through unlcnown magnetic
flux, and prosonts value of flux in ·digital
form on pulse counter using numerical indi·
cator tubos. Accuracy is 1011 dependent on
speed of measuring coil than in flux motors
using ballistic golvanomatar. Output value
is hold after movement has stopped, in form
.,. directly applicable for control purposos.-
Fluxmotor With Digital Road-Out, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcama Div.. Eindhoven, The Nether-
lands.
3.3v
15k
.--2N3906-...
Im
12v
INPUT
? 4.7k
ZERO 1-VOLT
SET FULL SCALE 470
0.1 "'t 470
DEFLECTION
1Dk/v
DRIFT-BALANCING VTVM-High-impedance temperature changes. Output to meter is 1 Value of C doponds on voltage range desired.
voltmeter has current-measuring sensitivity of V at 100 p.A. Whon current to be measured -D. F. Wadsworth, Pair of Source Followers
1 nA. Two source-followers are connected is sent through 1,000-meg shunt across Input Koop a Voltmotor Steady, Eloctronics, June
to meter for cancellation of drift caused by terminals, meter wlll read 1 nA full scale. 23, 1969, p 103.
Tlitl • •::lQ ?"T 4.4 , T'O 74!':0

:1 - C~ %S'!C
" 1- l WC\'°" CCII. ~~
S• AT"tN~~ ·cc1J1Sf eCNr.n. /•Pel.£ 5 "A"l 2'10K ""-'N L'lll!CICE
S: l'lr'C'l"!CN S"'1fC>o ( ~ FC~E 4 Wl'r) Cll!CUIT
S3 i?
l'li:EO'Jli!IC'I ti.!'«;£ S\l/l'TCH POI.£ 3 Wli.")
S-' .,.e·~~ 1.1~,,. ~
qv I l'r9t"lJA"TOl1 "t1"'"£. CCNTlla..
qv2 CCA~ Bll.&-O:E
11\3 :,...;: el:.>..cE
~V4 l!E>.O ~O ~S!CllTICN
RiS SET 'llEiEq eo!,\£ (PRE~)
S2e distortion at lowest level. Technique involves

133A suppressing fundamental froquency compo-
nont of signal, thon comparing residual volt-
~l!W.TIO ~ age with total signal voltago by moans of
DISTORTION MmR-Moasures total distortion components up to tlfth. Signal levels meas- full-wave reditler metor.-Silicon Transistor
of audio signal in fundamental frequency ured can range from 150 mV to 75 V rms, A. F. Distortion Motor, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham,
range of 15 Hz to 20 kHz, including harmonic wilh sensitivity sufficient to measure 0.1% lanes., England, No. 17, 1965.
:MEASURING CIRCUITS 397
-500v INFINITE-I VOLTMETER-Used for mecuuring

insulation on hlgh·voltago conductors. Anode
af triode Is made nogolive with respect to
cathode, to give inAnite impedance. Insu-
lation look makes anode voltage drop, and
resulting change in grid voltage turns on
Schmitt trigger and signal light used as level
detector. Voltage limit af tube is 600 V.-
R. A. Parks, Reversod-Palarity Triode Meas•
ures Insulation, Electronics, Feb. 5, 1968, p
87-88.
5v SCHMITT
I
CENTER
.___ _-I TRIGGER
CONDUCTOR INSULATION
R5
200 K
IOK
R6 :;i
!ZERO ADJUS:I
METERLESS D·C VOLTMETER-Covers range of
0-500 V d-c, with 0.5-meg input Impedance R7
33
• K
=8.4V
::::::: MERCURY
minimizing risk of damage to components in ..:... BATTERY
tested circuit. Wilh tesl leads in position for
measuremenl, turn on voltmeter and rotate
R2 until audio tone is just heard; dial than TEST
indicates d-c voltage, either in earphone or LEADS
in nearby radio tuned ta quiet spot at low- 0-500V R4
frequency end of a•m broadcast band. Loop 10 K
IFULL-SCAL
should be close to antenna of radio. Radio ADJUST!
picks up high-frequency harmonics of audio
tone generated by ujt. Book gives calibra·
tion procedure.-"Hobby Manual," General PICKUP LOOP
FOR RADIO
Electric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 178.
L . , ,. PWM
p
220
27k
22k 22k 22k 221t

+ 120v D·C TO D·C --L...
L------+-----.......-----+-----____..,__...;..;.~'-t CONVERTER 14------o <>-+ f2v
SE124 SIGNETICS; At.t. OTHER IC'5 FAIRCHILD pulso•width modulator) into four-digit indi-
cation of input voltage on Nixie tubes.
fC DIGITAL VOLTMETER-Counter section of Crystal oscillator using Fairchild µL914 IC countor.-H. Schmid, Digital Meters for Under
mater converts pulse width (obtained from genoratos accurate 1-MHz clock frequency fer $100, Electronics, Nov. 28, 1966, p 88-94.
RI
22K
, ________ .,P,!!_
lr-~"IM ......~~~+----.,
I
I
I
I FET D·C VOLTMETER-Compact, inexpentlvo,
I and accurate motor features 22-mog input Im·
PROBE I iv v podance on sovon ranges, using three 9-V
JI
batteries far powor. Article givos constrUC•
tlon details.-"Field Effect Transistor Projects,"
300V Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1966, p 75-70.
GND
J2
®1
Riii R20
SI
l~K IOK
CUM MY ACTIVE
GAUGE GAUGE
1·2K IOOK
IK +12V
IC STRAIN-GAGE AMPLIFIER-Uses two con· -------------·- --.: IK

I
stant-current generators feeding about I 0 mA I
into active and dummy silicon strain gages. __ JII ._______.

Differential output of gages is fed Into Fer·
ranti ZLD2 IC differential ampllller. RI is
adjusted until output of ZLD2 Is zero, and R2 -12v
ICS36A
is adjusted for maximum common mode re-
jection of ZLD2.-Microlin Amplifiers ZLD2S
and ZLD2T, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes.,
England, No. 11, 5167, p 18. 2$120
INPUT
I LOAD
IOM
GROUND
+
OPERATIONAL
AMPLIFIER V2 DIGITAL
VOLTMETER
IOOM +
..-----------------------------"---~+
Ing moosurement. Any current drawn by
digital voltmotor during test is roplacod by
HIGH-ACCURACY ELECTROSTATIC VOLTMETER as compared to 2% accuracy of conventional opamp. Articlo glvos measuring procoduro.
-Chorgo transfer circuit usod with IC opomp oloctrostatic voltmotor. Circuit precisely di· -T. P. Kohler and E. H. Hudspeth, Operational
ahead of digital voltmeter permits measuring vides high voltage being measured and pro- Amplillor Overcomes Voltmeter Loading,
voltages up to 10 ,kV to accuracy of 0.5%, tects divided voltage from current drain dur• Electronics, Doc. 25, 1967, p 67-68.
•MEASURING CIRCUITS 399
2N2606 2N697 2N2484 -12
18K
IOOK
FET ELECTROMETER AMPLIFIER-Low•noiso

charadoristic of fat T1 makes it possible to
measure currents as low as 100 famtoamparos
at room tamparatura in audio range, over 1•
Hz bondwidth. Article gives design oqua·
tions. Transistor types are given at top of
dia9ram.-R. Munoz, Put FETs to Work in
47K Eladromators, Efodronic Das:gn, May 11, 1964,
p 56-61.
RI R2 RS
•s
, 4
SIB
D-C VOLT AMMETER-Dosi9n of currant ran90
0 0 t
selection circuit minimizes affad of variations INMA
z I
I
''I
in ran90 switch contad resistance. Accuracy
is bettor than 3%, yet total cost of parts Is R7 RB Rt t
under $30. Current ranges are 0.1, 1, and
10 A, and voltage ranges are 10 and 100 V.
Article 9lvos detailed construction and calibra•
POWER
INPUT
r-----
I
I
IOO 100
----..!
t
POWER
I 5
O.IA OUTPUT
tion procedures. R1 Is 18" of No. 16 onam• I IA
I 4
olod wire, R2 is 20" of No. 26, and R3 is 48" SIA' S tOA
of No. 32, all wound on 2·W fixed resistors
used as coil forms.-M. Chan and R. Brock,
Shunt Switching Method Reduces Motor Errors, IK RIO IOK
Efedronics World, Oct. 1968, p 76-77. Rll
R6
•·IK
3.6v
@ @
1.5 k s,
N
B NO
COUNTER
SWITCHING
TIME
470 T= (N)( I/fa)
/
SWITCHING TIME-Combination of three
µL914 R·S flip-flops, 100-kHz oscillator, and
counter providas accurate measurement of
response time of spdt microswitch S1, in 10k
millisecond range. When switch Is activated,
contact A opens first, making gate 8 trans-
mit oscUlator signal to counter after flip-flop istorad. With lo.MHz oscillator, switching
changes state. Whan contact 8 of switch timas down to hundreds of nanoseconds can
closes, flip-flop is resat, and signal to counter be measurod.-R. lltis, IC Circuit Measures
is blocked. Formula shown than gives switch· Speed of Switches, Eledronicr, May 12, 1969,
ing timo, where N Is number of counts res· p 108.
GALVANOMETER AMPLIFIER-Amplifies small

Fl5
tOkfl direct current sufflciontly to drive rugged
zero-center l·mA motor. Consists of long·
tailed pair directly coupled to two emitter•
followers connected to output motor. R2
permits adjusting mater currant to zero for
zero input voltage. With 10-ohm meter, 30-
12v mV input gives full-scale deflection. Corre-
sponding input value is 34 mV for 220-ohm
meter. Input currant for zero output is typ·
lcally 65 nA, and 90 nA for full scalo deflec•
0
tion.-"Circults Using Low-Drift Transistor

Pairs," Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind·
ov hoven, The Netherlands, 1968, p 15.
-7 2V
F15
82kll
GALVANOMSER AMPLIFIER-Gives full-scale 12'/

deflection of rugged zero-center I ·mA motor
for input current of 35 nA. Maximum differ•
ontial voltage drift Is 7.5 µV per deg C,
which is 2.5 times maximum voltage drift.
Uses bias arrangement in which half the
difference between input transistor base cur•
rents passes through signal source.-"Circuits
Using Low-Drift Transistor Pairs.'' Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhaven, The Nether·
lands, 1968, p 16.
+3v
CURRENT MONITOR-Permits chocking current

POWER in any number of loads without Interrupting
SUPPLY any circuit. Each load has pair of diodes,
connected in parallol front-ta-back, perma-
nently In series. For chocking load current,
monitor circuit is simply placed across each
diodo pair In turn. Motor is Woston Modol
LOAD LOAD LOAD 911, which has voltage drop of 100 mV at
full-scale reading of 10 A. lamp gives
warning against faulty diodes, to protect
DIODES - SILICON meter. If lamp stays off, indicating that both
MA - WESTON *911 diodos are good, momentary switch SI is
pressed and motor is read.-F. H. Horan,
load Currant Monitor Doesn't Break Circuit,
Electronics, Oct. 13, 1969, p 93.
o, ·~
n-otit•
~
rtF."'°'"' l"34A CK722 561)
•..
....,..
•5 • •
'Xl2Mf
-=.9v
UNTUNED FIELD STRENGTH METER-Untuned
T l sensitivity. Any other high-gain transistors
choko input for diode eliminates need for may bo used.-"Electronic Circuits Handbook,"
tuning and plug-in coils, and high-gain two• Vol. II, Cowan Pub. Corp., Port Washington,
transistor d·c amplifler provides required N.Y., 1966, p 82.
TRANSISTORIZED MULTIMETER-Use of fot with

its high input lmpodance, in cascade with
conventional transistor Q2 having low output
impedance, gives advantages of vtvm. Cir· +15v
cuit shown Is slmpliflod; complote circuit with
15k
transistor types and switching network is 180k
givon in Triplett Model 600 sorvice manual.-
BALANCED
Triplett Model 600 Transistorized V.O.M., Elec· ~--- DUTPUT--...-
Ironies World, Aug. 1967, p 74. PITRAN
IOk
PRESSURE PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL-PITRAN STRAIN GAGE-Output

is linearily proportional to difference between
0-1 pressures applied to two Pltran piezoelectric 6v
DIA transistors (made by Stow labs, Stow, Moss.), 3k
-15v
and can be up to 20% of sum of supply volt-
INPl1r ages. Applications discussed in article in- telemetry can bo obtained by adding simple
cludo seismic exploration, accelerometer,, and mvbr.-R. M. Moore, Semiconductor Gages
wind-tunnel research. Transistor typo is not Make Sense in Most Transducer Applications,
critical. Pulso width modulation output for Electronics, March 18, 1968, p 109-116.
WIDEBAND METER DRIVER-OE! 9300 opamp

with bridge rectlflor In foodback path responds TRANSPARENT OR OPEN
to average value of input regardless of ARE AS IN PHOTOGRAPH! C
whether it is d-c, sinusoidal, or any other FILM OR PHOTOETCHEO
waveform at frequencios up to 1 MHz. METAL PLATE
Serves as voltmeter.-Applying tho Model
9300 Monolithlc Oporational Amplifier, Opti·
cal Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10134. D
D
BOTTO~~ APERTURE D
DD
PLATE REGION D
D REGION C
~~~
3N37cr
2N170 REGION 8
0•1ma
D REGION A
LIGHT
FIELD STRENGTH METER-Simplo single-transis·

tor circuit can be used for transmitter tune-up, c:::::J l l l
c=i c::::J
DIRECTION OF MOTION
IN AND OUT)
~ ( OF PAPER
adjustmont of boam antennas, or as monitor
D'' Dbn' BOTTOM
~~rmuRE
BvB
If phones are connected in sories with meter
and 'ollector of transistor. Uso coil and tun-
ing capacitor that will resonate at desired
frequency; for 10 or 20 meters, coil can be
~~tfiER
six turns of No. 22 enamel spaced slightly CELL A CELL B CELL C
1i1es givo illumination on 1, 2, or 3 photo•
on 1-inch form and tapped two turns from POSITION INDICATOR-Three photocells com· cells, which with simple counting logic cir-
ground end. Any good npn transistor may bined with fixed and movin9 aperture plates cuits can be converted into total number af
bo used.-"Eloctronlc Circuits Handbook," can be arranged to measure oither linear or smallest units of displacement.-"Solld State
Vol. II, Cowan Pub. Corp., Port Washington, angular position with high degree of ac- Photosensitive Devices," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
N.Y., 1966, p 81. curacy. Combinations of different aporture p 25.
SWEEP
.,,. IN
PROBE -0.2A
POWERIN -44V 0.5Mll
2.5Mll CAL
CAL FINE
Ip COARSE
IM!l 5Mll IOOKD
HALL PROBE FIELD CONTROL-Probo consists
of Siemens FC-34 Hall element and circuitry HELIPOT
SWEEP
51111 TYPE A
needed to adjust for Hall arm offset, plus ATTN.
2Kll
loading resistors for lineoriiing probe re- HEU POT
sponse. Output of Holl olement is about 20 TYPE B
SKll
mV per kilogauss for input current of 0.2 A.
Used in measuring transverse dHS elfoct In
--,PROBE
I
CASE
IOKll
bismuth at liquid helium temporoturos.-R. D. SIEMENS fC34 MOD£

I NULL
Brown Ill, Now Mothods for De Hoos·Shubnl· I 111 .OUT
kov Measuroments, IBM Journal, Nov. 1966, I
p 462-471. : 3.SKU 2511
I
L.- --" PROBE 251!
OUT
~~IKll LINEAR
MATCHING
2511 RESISTOAS
c
+VR -VR
51k 51k
IOk
30v
ZERO 1M 015uf
ADJ
40k* 20k*
r------------ -,
I 2N2944 :
I 12k I
I
I
I
I
5,000pf I
I
I
I
I I
+4v L _______ ji~l.!Ql.J_J
+1ov~~~..-~--"wi..--~-+-_....~11A11r-~~-'ll\f'lr.:-.~"'V\o......,,.~--1
2k 20k*
BALANCE
20v + ADJUST
D1
r------- -----,
llif T MCR2225
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
Pll~ SWITCH 2 I
Dz L----------- ___ J
MCR2225
2k-1'Yo ALL RESISTORS WITH* ARE
O.OS'Ye WIRE-WOUND
-VA
r-------- -----,
I I
ALL 0THER RESISTORS ARE
1
5'• 4W UNLESS SPECIFIED
I I ALL LOGIC CIRCUITS ARE
I I CONNECTED TO +4v
I I
- I I SE 124 ANO 315 SIGNETICS
Ptx-,- SWITCH 3 I ALL OTHER 1c's ARE
L------------..J FAIRCHILD
IC DIGITAL VOLTMETER-UICI ·of low-cost IC convert unknown analog voltago to digital eludes rongo soloctlon, Integrator, comparator,
linear ampliAers and IC logic chips minimizes pulse-width signal that is converted from bed threo solid-state shunt switches, output logic,
cost of instrumont comparable in performance value in counter to decimal value for roading and roferenco voltago.-H. Schmid, Digital
to conventional four-digit voltmotors costing on Nixie tubes. Circuit shown is analog por• Motors for Undor $100, Electronics, Nov. 28,
over $1,000. Uses up-down modulation to tion, for pulse-width modulator, which in- 1966, p 88-94.
-12v
4.7K R1
RANGE FUl.1.-SCA\.E PHOTOMETER-Used to measure changes In
RESISTOR OPTICAi. DENSITY
VALUE CALIBRATION optical density of translucent materlols.
Setting of Rl determines full-scale ranga.
820A
s IOK o.o (100°/o TRANS) Minimum full·scalo rcan9e, for 0.01 % trcans•
IOOK 1.ouo•t. TRANSi mission or density of 4.0, is obtcained with
4.7K~ IMEG 2.0 (1% TRANS) 100 m119.-M. Shipley, U1ln9 Photo Field·
15K 18K IOMEG 3.0 (0.l"lo TRANS} Effect Transistors, Electronic Design, Aug. 31,
~ ~~7
IOOMEG 4.0 (0.01% TRANSi 1964, p 76.
I.AMP
S1A
Sz 2.7meo
FD VTVM-Can be mounted directly on small
meter. Input Impedance 11 30 meg. Ranges
.___..____+,. 5.4V
are 2, 10, and 20 V. Resistor values are:
Rl 15 me9; R2 12 me91 R3 1.S me91 R4 1.S
me91 RS 10,0001 R6 5,000.-Fiold Effect Volt·
meter, Eledronlc Design, Jan. 6, 1964, p 78. Rg .J::,
aMATCHEO
DIFFERENTIAL MICROAMMETER AMPLIFIER-

Dlfforontlal ampliflor, using dogoneratlve
biasing and calloctor food to 1110.l'A motor,
gives excollont null stability and 2·!'A lnstru•
ment sonsitivity.-J. P. Graham, Galvanomotor
Amplifier Has Greater Sensitivity, Elodronlc
Design, Fob. 17, 1964, p 9D-91.
500K 2.7K
SENSITIVITY
I : 53
PRESS
TO NU\.\.
C:l,CZ• 15•140p'
Ll,.L2,L3•50pH 'CA Z·5MllJ •-+-....;IA~--+--
llL.
1.ZpH 'OR 27 MHr
% MODULATION ON CRT-Operates off 12·Y

battery for measuring porcenta90 of ampll·
tude modulation of transmitter whon no a•c
power Is available. Porcenta90 Is Indicated
as ratio of radii of two circles on 1·Inch
cathode-ray tube.-D. Stephani, Amplitude
Modulation Tester, Electronics World, Jan.
1968, p 51.
L3
404 ELECTRONIC CIRC·UITS MAN'U A;L
d -11-
DISPLACEMENT DETECTOR-Object being moni-

tored is attached to movable top plate,
which may be photographic fllm or etched LIGHT TRANSPARENT OR
metal having opertures only a few thou- OPE~ AREA IN
- PHOTOGRAP~IC FILM
sandths of an inch wide. Movement equal to
aperture width changes light on photocell
t.!OVABLE
" - d _, r tttt OR PHOTOCHEMICALLY
ETCHED METAL PLATE
fram maximum to zero. Resulting change in - ~CJ Cl Cl Cl Cl CJ Cl Cl c::=i_l
photocell current or impedance is then meas• DIRECTION c;=i CJ Cl Cl Cl Cl CJ Cl Cl..----...--. h
OF t.!OTION / '----' T
ured with conventional meter-driving circuit
that can be calibrated to read displacement.
"Solid State Photosensitive Devices.'' RCA,
STATIONARY ~ ~ ~ l
-e
Harrison, N.J., p 25.
EXTENDING RANGE OF D-C MICROAMMETER

-Uses Ferranti ZlD2 IC differential amplifler
as d-c amplifier for conventing 100-0-100 µA
meter to rugged 10-µA mater. Offset of IC
is eliminated by adjusting 200-ohm pot until
output is zero for zero input. F~r calibra-
tion, apply known input current and adjust
1OOK pot until correct output reading is ab-
talnod. For 1% meter accuracy, temperature
200 ·12V
should be held within 3 C of calibration
temperature.-Microlin Amplifiers ZlD25 and
ZlD2T, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, lanes., England,
No. 11, 1967, p 19.
I
I
I
I
I
: 107V
12
10 n
BCZll
Y.a
I
I
I
I
I
/,() A I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7Kn
l:ISmA
\
\
\
\
\ !
ElECTROMETER-Provides readings of direct \ ___ :_ __________________________________ J
currents from 0.1 pA to 1 µA on logarithmic
scale, using Philips type 4068 eloctrometer niques ond precautions fer achieving maxi· Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The
tube. Report deals with measuring tech- mum occuracy.-Electrometer Tubes, Philips, Netherlands, No. 11, 1965, p 6.
INPUT
RI 0 5V
91U\ A4
SY IMll G
SI
AZ
IOOk sov
VTVM-Simplo kansistorizod vorsion of popu- mA. Changing R7 to 2,SOO ehms will give
LOW lar vacuum-tubo voltmeter circuit uses inox• better rosolution. (Changes are described in
CURRENT pensive fot to give input impedance of 10 reader letter on p 12 of Nov. 1967 Electronict
METER
meg. linear response permits using scale World.}-J. Randall, FET Voltmeter, Electronics
AUTOMATIC REVERSAL OF VOLTMETER-Low· markings of meter. Battery drain is only 1 World, Feb. 1967, p 63-64.
loss diodes in bridge provide automatic re-
versal of polarity, without switching, when
testing both npn and pnp transistors. INPUT
Diodes are inexpensive and often cheaper AUTOMATIC REVERSAL OF AMMETER-Low·
than reversing switch, and do not Introduce loss diodes in bridge provide automotic re•
moro than 10% error when measuring volt• versol of polarity, without switching, when
ages above 5 V.-R. M. Mann, Low•Loss moking current measurements In npn and
Diodes Rovorse Motor Polarity, "400 Ideas for pnp transistor tost circuits. Error due to
Dosign Solocted from Eloctronic Design," Hay• bridge is nogligiblo except at eictremely small
don Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 152. currents, because loakago in diodes shunting
motor is extremely low.-R. M. Mann, Low.
Loss Diodes Reverse Motor Polarlty, "400
Ideas for Design Seloctod from Electronic
Design," Hayden Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 1S2.
Ant.
OUTPUT
1N34 2.7ml\ +12v
,,,.,
22
1K
30q.o
J +
LINEAR LIGHT MmR-Fecdback auoss omit·
ter resistor of BCY70 transistor stabilizes gain
DIODE METER-Though low in sensitivity, will af BPX25 phototransistor. With values
provide satisfactory indication of relative shown, l,000 lux gives full-scale deflection
signal strength of transmitter in same roam. of meter. May be calibrated either against
Antenna is short length of Insulated wiro.- standard light source or with another lux• •70
ktl
"Eloctronic Circuits Handbook," Vol. II, moter.-Applications of Silicon Planar Photo-
Cowan Pub. Corp., Port Washington, N.Y., transistor BPX25, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
1966, p 89. Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 316,
1967.
100nF
to
m~tor
R6
IOkn
no transducer signal, possible error signal

TRANSDUCER DRIFT COMPENSATION-Used to from transducer is amplified by opamp U1 error, so moasurod value appears without
eliminate or greatly reduce zero error caused and applied to opamp U2 connected os hold error at output of U3.-P. Havas, Compensa•
by drift in transducer and preamplifier af circuit feeding differential amplifier U3. tion of Transd11cer Zero Error, Philips, Pub.
measuring circuit. Requires +ts V and -15 After about 1 s, 52 is closed and transducor Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nether·
V supplios. With S1 clasod (52 open) and activated. Stored signal then cancels zoro lands, No. 78.
1k 2.5mh
0.01µ.f
M
Rl lOK 100-0-
1001.IA - +
METER
6V J_
..,,.. OUTPUT
COMPARATOR-Circuit determlno1 which of
two photocoll1 11 Illuminated and drlvo1 zoro•
center motor accordingly. May bo u1od for
comparing brilliance of two light 1ourco1,
1on1ing position of vane moving botwoen
photocells, and comparing colors.-J. P.
Shlold1, "Novel Eloctronlc Circuits," H. W.
PCl,PCZ • lAfAYmEl99-H-6309 Sams & Co., lndianapoll1, Ind., 1968, p 80.
Q MULTIPLIER-Simple opamp circuit provides

moans for varying Q of tunod circuit with
C1 single pot. Davolopad for low-leval moasuro-
11,
o---418pf 2.7K
mont1 in communication receivers and activa
flltors. Will oparato up to 3 MHz. Valuas
shown aro for rosonant frequency of 33 kHz.
RF CR1 Cz
IN IN994 0.011-'f -R. C. Gordo1, Q.Multiplier Circuit U1os Op
CRz Amp With LC Feedback, Electronics, May 26,
IN994 1969, p 92.
PEAK-READING VOLTMETER WITH DIODE- overload by oponing above upper motor cur•
+Vdc
Addition of cliodo CR2 in series with motor rent limit as detorminod by R2 and Vl. Por-
of conventional peak-reading voltmotar im· formanco is good up to 2SO MHz, for input
proves its sensitivity, temperature characterls· voltages below 0.4 V.-H. T. McAloer, Diode
tic, and low-level sensitivity and linearity. Improves Voltmotar'1 Linearity and Stability,
Extra diode also protects motor from currant Electronic Design, Nov. 22, 1965, p 65-67.
R, lOOMo R, 18K
R, 47K C, lOOOpF
R, lOOK c, 0-lpF
R, 470K C, 10,.F
R, 6.8K C, l 1AF
R, 22K C, l 1AF
ELECTROMETER AMPLIFIER-Uses fot to meas-
ure currants os small as 0.1 pA at room tom•
poroturo with 1 Hz bandwidth and opproach·
ing thoorotical noise limit. Should be used
with external flltor that limits bandwidth, for
optimum noise performance. Ql is 2N697,
Q2 11 2N2484, Q3 is 2N2606, and supply is
12 V.-"Solocted Electronic Circuitry," NASA
SP-5046, 1966, Government Printing Ofllca,
Washington, D.C., p 3.
NOTE: Ta locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, usa tho Index at tho bock
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcobook of Eloctronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 50
Medical Circuits
PACEMAKER-Tv·type blocking oscillator Ql

generates fixed pacing pulse at rate deter-
mined before implantation and connection
to heart. Oscillator generates very low•
powor pulso for triggering Q2, which thon
makes C2 deliver l·ms pulse to heort.-J. T.
Prentice, Electronic Implants, Electronics
World, Juno 1968, p 46-48.
OUTPUT EL£CTROD£5
I TO LEFT VENTRICLE:)
llpA
De modulation
,__--i and variable "1-_...-..._.....
suppression
Mixer Differentiation
A· scope display
(oscilloscope beam 1)
12
Transmitter trigger
input Time-to-voltage 1l!oscilloscope
Cathode Z-modulation
beam 2 I
analogue
3·3ms
converter I
monostable +ISV I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 -1sv HG1oos I
ANALOG CONVERTER-Converts ultrasonic

L~------------------J
-P. N. T. Wells and F. G. M. Ross, A Time·
Output to recorder
pulse-echo output of cardiac monitor to to-Voltage Analogue Convertor for Ultrasonic
square-wave pulsos suitable for rocording Article descrlbos operation of circuit in dotail Cardiology, Ultrasonics, July 1969, p 171-
with high-.peod ink-jet strip-chart recorders. and gives examplos of recordings obtained. 176.
407
EMG KEYER-Electromyograph pubes picked

up by silver electrodes hold against stump
musclo of amputee are fod to low-noise dlf·
ferentiol amplifier through impedance trans-
former. Output goos through conventional
two-stage high-gain amplifier, detector, and
d-c amplifier operating output relay used for
keying amateur radio transmitter. Operalor
merely thinks of moving missing or paralyzed
arm, to make relay operate. Bandwidth of
amplifier is 50-500 Hz, corresponding to range
of omg signals being picked up. Q13 is 2N-
398 and other lransistors are 2N708. Relay
is Sigma Sll2500 or equlvalent.-G. W. Horn,
Tho Third Hand-An Aid for the Handicapped
Operalor, CQ, Fob. 1966, p 54-57.
EMG SERVO-Used with electromyograph am•

plifler to convert ampliflod muscle potontlal
(taken ahead of detector) lo appropriate In- IOt< 47• 10><
put for position servo providing continuous
control of angular position of tuning knob .!
for amateur radio transmitter or roceiver. Po· @--i
sition of output motor shaft is proportionol
at any instant to mental effort exerted by
amputee on slump muscle. Relaxing muscle
makos shaft rolurn lo zero position, because
decreasing signal voltago pulls In other out-
put relay and reverses motor. Q16 Is BFY- In EMG All'lp
I •
L---·-----~~!~!!.._ _______ _J
56, Ql7 2N398, Q18 BFY64, and others 2N-
708.-G. W. Hom, The Third Hand-An Aid
for the Handicapped Operator, CQ, Feb. 1966,
p 54-57.
+12v
-12v
A A1
BIOELECTRIC PROBE AMPLIFIER-Used to om• form negative-capacitance impedanco con• resistance to probe, wilh input capacitance
pllfy millivolt pulses produced In protoplasmic verter, followed by d-c ampliflor Q4 and below 0.02 pF.-G. W. Horn, Feedback Re-
membrane, for feeding into recorder. First omittor-followors Q6 and Q7 operallng In duces Bio Probe's Input Cqpacitanco, Eloc-
throe transistors in Darlington configuration cascade. Circuit presents 20,000-mog input fronlcs, Morch 18, 1968, p 97-98.
MEDICAL CIRCUITS 409
+J_
....--.x- +12v
56"f-=!=-
IOk IOk
l.02M
.ifi'
.-------E2
IM
IM
+IZv
MUSCLE SIGNAL SIMULATOR-Simulates generator, is amplified and filtorod to give

white nolso gonoratod in flexed muscle, for required 1-kHz bandwidth of nolse.-W. Pais-
use in dovoloping amplifiers and sorvomechan• nor, D. Antonelli, and W. Waring, Zener Simu-
isms for controlling artificial limbs. Oulput lates Muscle Signals, Eloctronics, June 10,
of zenor, serving as broad-spectrum noise 1968, p 111-112.
-t24v
01
MPF 105 10k
Oz
2N3644
46.Sk
Sk
r-------------,
I I
I 300pf
-Z4v---...,.,,..,_-~
!Ok I Rz 470k
P1 -::- I 470k 03
110 TURNI I Di 2N2102
I lN3728
I 47k
FIVE IN ONE-Changing feedback network I
of level detector shown gives four other types I S.6k
of operation, as astablo, monostable, bistable, I
or gated oscillator. Values shown aro for IL ____________
FEEDBACK _]I
level dotoctor driving 5,000-0hm reloy load,
usod to analyze electroencophalographs. In- change network for othor types of operation. Chan9es In Feedback, E/ectronla, Oct. 2,
put can be 0 to 20 V. Article tolls how to -G. Silverman, Five Valuable Circuits From 1967, p 95-96.
VOICE-OPERATED KEY-Developed for c-w

amateur rodlo operators lacking full use of
hands. Duration af sound at mike deter-
mines whether keying relay Kl produces dot
or dash. Clearly spoken dah-dit-dah-dit
dah-dah-dit-dah will give accoptable CQ in
code after very little practice. Whistling also
works. Other applications include keying of
transmitter from magnotic tapo recorder for
on-tho-air code classos.-A. Horst, The Vox
I To Koy, CO, Jan. 1965, p 29-30.
ry-·--""'?
I 9'11 .._,
I
I
• "u
°""'-~
FET FLATTENS STEPS-Fet Q2 isolates wave-

forming capacitor from ujt of staircase gen-
erator, to prevent exponential decay or droop
of staircase stop voltage. Used as pulse
counter, for accurately monitoring uterine
contractions, heart boat, and respiration rate.
+IOv
-K. J. Bray, FET Keeps Long Staircc110 Stops
Flat, Electronics, March 18, 1968, p 94. +av
-24v
IOk Oz
R1 2N404A
56k Cz C3
0.001,uf 0.001,uf
o,
2N404A
Rz R&
12k 1211
8,uf
R4
4.711 33K Rs
30v CL Al REX
904L
LIGHT-CONTROll.ED OSCILLATOR-Addition of in light-sensitive resistor RS. Ono applica- tiometor in place of RS will control frequency.
omittor•follower Q2 to phase-shift oscillator tion is as psychological testing dovico that -G. Silverman, Emitter Follower Enhances Os-
QI boosts output frequency 1.4 times, and measures ability of subject to follow moving cillator's Frequency Variation, Electronics,
gives greater frequency sensitivity to changes light source. For other applications, poton- Dae. 26, 1966, p 73-74.
- t.211 v
"":="91
MOVEMENT SENSOR FOR BLIND-Used with RS
1120
Interchangeable lentos to detect movements
at various distances up to lnRnlty, In science ]@7'
labs for blind students. Photoresistor Rt ...=..112
(Clairox CL904l or equivalent) produces fre- + L25V
quency change in two-transistor RC feedback
audio oscillator having small magnetic ear-
phone In its output. Plt Is t .25-V groin-of·
wheat lamp used for cell Illumination, as re-
quired for reading thermometer and sensing
position of meter polntet.-Light Ptebo for tho JI
Blind, Electronics World, Nev. 1967, p 77.
5V +Va
81AS
WINDING
OUTPUT:
UV FOR
Z0-50•1
n
IN4009
100• IOk
IAI PULSl STRETCHER (Ill VIBllOTACTOR
VIBROTACTOR-Developed for transmitting

emorgency signals to astronauts without
using voice communication. Tiny vibrator,
with solenoid winding, is attached to skin
and actuated by pulses from communication
link. Since taps on skin shorter then 0.5 ps
cannot bo felt by man, four-transistor pulse
stretcher is used ahead of vibrator stage.-
L G. Lawrence, Communications Via Touch,
Electronics World, Moy 1968, p 32-34 and
80.
OUTPUT
Cz 3·17V SWEEP
t--o SYNC INPUT
0.01
2N489
Rs
IOK
SV +Va
GYRATOR-Consists of two voltage-to-current
negative-impedance converters, connected to
SLOW SWEEP FOR CARDIAC MONITOR-Slow produce output current proportional to Input
linear swoep, adjustable by RI from 1 to voltago. In addition, reverse transconduc•
30 s can be used for monitoring cardiac tance makes input current proportional to
waveforms. Voltage romp produced has output voltage. Serves as active filter for
less than 1 % displacement error from line- very low frequencies used in oceanography,
arlty.-J. l. Aker, Unijunctlon Oscillator Givos seismology, and medical electronics. Article
30.Sec Sweep, "400 Ideas for Design Selected gives application circuits for specific froquen-
from Electronic Design,'' Haydon Book C:o., cies.-J. L Hagin, Active Filters, Electronics
N.Y., 1964, p 189. World, Aprll 1969, p 58-60.
+UV
6k
PNP-2NS138
NPN-2NS133
HYBRID PACKAGE +9V
r _____\ _____ _
I
--------------41I
I I
I 6k 2.41.
I
I
I
I
NERVE AMPUFIER-low noise hybrid IC am•
0
I
plifler substitutes for olectrometer tube in I
I
amplifying nerve and muscle-fiber impulses
pickod up by alactrodas attached to body.
Circuit has high Input resistance and good
linoarity.-J. Y. Lottvin, Low-Noise Eloctromo·
D°il A
OUT
ter Amplifler, EDN, Sept. 1, 1969, p 69-70. ])011

IH o-..;...+--l'.No--1.. I
I
I
I
I
t
I
co--+----+---.... I
I
I
121. 21< I
I
t I
t I
L----- ---.I
GROUND
-9V
-lSV
2MA
-l\l'llVVV\-1 b1 ~~
41,41
2.1K
l ,\IA
1(1( e,
fUSE
ISOUTIO'-N....l\Jl\l\/1ll\J\--'JV---l"V'--------.!..J\/\JIJl\l\..-4--Alllt/.-.!M
TRANSFORMER
no danger or discomfort, for monitoring smoothing fllter.-A. S. Khalafalla, S. P.

impedance changes in 37 normal sub- Stackhouse, and 0. H. Schmitt, Thoracic Im·
PLETHYSMOGRAPH-Low-frequency impodance jects under various conditions of lung ven- pedance Gradient with Respect to Breathing,
plathysmograph provides current of 1 mA tilation. Output of 883022 voltage com· IEEE 1ran1actions on Bio-Medical Engineering,
at fraquancies as low 111 10 Hz to subjects with parator drives strip chart recorder through July 1970, p 191-197.
+33 111 + 15 v
5288 100" 100 I: 100 I:
Sl
Dlode
ID'
o11tp11t
Oz 1R5288
2N525
100 l 100 lt 100 lt

OUT
Sl DlCMle
ll!A
MEDICAL THERMOMETER-Usos one diode to
establish referonco temperature, and sil:con
diode to sense temperature being compared.
If sensed tomporaturo is lower than refer•
once, output will 90 positive, and vice-versa.
Output drives panel moter.-Two Eloctronlc
Thormometors for Medical/Industrial Use,
Optical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz .. No. 10075.
CONSTANT-CURRENT PULSES-Provides con· and as driver for some typos of sensors.
stant curront within 3%, adjustable from Capacitor loading of output gives sawtooth
200 µA to 10 mA for pulses that aro variable with fast fall time and good linearity.-R.
in frequency and duty cycle, with rise and Dobkin, Pulse Generator Delivers a Constant
fall times under 1 µs. Circuit is ideal for Current, Electronic Design, March 15, 1965,
neurophyslological testing, pulse beta testing, p 63-64.
+6v
3.3k 22k 2.4M 22k 470k
OUTPUT
22,000
pf 330k 68,000
pf
INPUT
01
BAY44
BCY58
Rt
tOOk
o, BAY44 Ca
0.47p.f
01,
R
22,000pt 470k
BAY44 interpreting 60-Hz pickup as sign of heart ac•
PACEMAKER CONTROL-Provents false trig· minute or 2.5 Hz. Mono Q2-Q4 inhibits lion and turning off pacemaker whon it is
goring by 60-Hz pickup from faulty system cardiac pacemaker whon heart ls operating actually nooded.-V. Bleile, Monostable Pro-
grounding leads, by suppressing input pulses on Its own. Q3 and associatod diodo fro- tected Against 60-He~tz Pickup, Efecrronics,
above normal heart limit of 150 boats per quency-voltago converter prevent mono from May 11, 1970, p 101.
RECTAL TEMPERATURE MONITOR-Cathotar·

VECO typo thermistor probe in Whoatstono bridge
32A8 9.66K circuit covers range of 30-50 C for studying
tomporaturo rosponsos of dogs to various
+ physical stlmuU. Provides signol for driving
o.ev-=- standard d·c millivolt rocorclor. Source Is
IOK 0.8 V.-M. Sapoff and R. M. Oppenheim, A
4.97K Blanlcet Approach to a Linear Thermistor Not·
850
work, E/ocrronic Design, April 12, 1965, p 36
and 3~0.
-ev----
R5
o, tOM
IN456
Rz
511 Dz
tN456
ON-OFF RATIOS FROM 20 TO 300-Dovelapecl R4 establishes lowest frequency, ancl R2

for biomedical application requiring 3-ms ostablishos highest frequency.-E. A. Pfeiffer,
pulses at repetition rates adiustablo from 1 for large oloctrolytlcs otherwise required tor Multlvlbrator Provides Short Pulses, Wide
to 15 pps. Use of fot Ql eliminates noocl such widely spaced pulses. Rl adjusts prr, Spacing, E/ecrtonics, April 3, 1967, p 98-99.
NOTE: To locate acldltlonal circuits in tho category of this chapter, use tho Index at tho back
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits.'' published by
CHAPTER 51
Metal Detector Circuits
GIMMICK
200MMF 400MMF
2~27 er l!i60K
2E29 ...
I
2029
AFC
33K 2,2M
SQUIB
T-172 MORTAR SHELL FUZE-Major Innovation Editor, "Radio Proximity Fuzes for Fin-Stabi-
in this proximity fuzo circuit Is loop antenna. lized Missiles," Div. 4, NDRC, Vol. I, 1946
Bunt hoight over water was 23 ft. Uses (available from Clearlnghouse, Springtleld,
readion-grid-detector circuit.-A. V. Astin, Va.), p 244.
TPTEST
SELECTED
T-171 MORTAR SHELL FUZE-Us111 propeller•.
driven generator as power supply. Develop-
ment and testing wore completed at close of approprlato semiconductor devices.-A. V.
World War II. Produced detonation by prax• Astin, Editor, "Radio Proximity Fuzos for Fin•
imity effect at hel9ht of 8 ft over water. Stabillzod Missiles," ·Div. 4, NDRC, Vol. I,
Tubes are submlnlature military types, no I 946 (available from Clearin9hou111, Spring•
longer available, and can be replaced by flold, Va,), p 244.
REGULATING
415
LI
LOOP ANTENNA
r--
1
I
I
I
I
I
TRANSMITIER FOR IC METAL LOCATOR-Wiii I
locate pipes and valves buried as deep as 7 I
I
ft, and smaller objects at lessor depths If I
larger than coffee cans. Nat intended far I
I
locating coins. Transmitter is 455-kHz IC I
I
oscillator controlled by ceramic Transfllter
()CTAL), with singlo turn of four-conductor flat
I..-- .,
I
I
cablo forming 9 x 11-inch loop, mounted at I
ono and of SO.inch wood carrying rod. Ro- I
I
coivor at other ond of rod has similar loop I
fooding high-gain throe-IC trf circuit tuned I
to 455 kHz, with loop orlontod for null, ~-------~----------
Article gives construction dotails and sources
tbCb
for required parts.-D. Lancaster, Build IC·
67 Molal Locator, Popular Electronics, Jan.
1967, p 41-48, 94, 96, 98, and 99. l Bl
rl.5V ----
~
c:rj
c:::::J
c:::::J
+ l.5V
82 HIGH LOW OFF
SI
LI
LOO' ANTENNA
.-:.:-:·-;.;:,:·
·al'l
IOTO-SWcl
: ' . ., ~ .
L-------------------:..------------ -------------
.,,.
.llfCI
\
'' . ' .
------~~~------:-
'
116
IM
RECEIVER FOR IC METAL LOCATOR-455°kHz GAIN
three-IC trf recoiver with 9 x l1°inch loop is
mounted at opposite end of 1S·lnch wood red
from 455-kHz single-IC transmitter having
similar loop oriented for null. Provides both
meter and audible indication for largo burled tails and sources for required parts.-D. Lan• Electronics, Jan, 1967, p 41-48, 94, 96, 98,
metal objects. Article gives construction do- castor, Build IC-67 Metal Locator, Popular and 99.
METAL DETECTOR CIRCUITS 417
COIN·FINDER-Will detect dimes 4 inches

from loop and gold or silver rings up lo 5
Inches away in dry or slightly damp ground.
Uses 2, 100-kHz surplus military crystal, but
160-meter amateur crystal will work If coll
turns are adjustod, Soarch coil L is 8 turns
of No. 24 plastic-covered hookup wire
throadod through %th-inch copper tubing
.! bont into split ring 101/2 inches in diameter.
•'
I
.
I
Article gives construction details. Transistors
are npn with minimum beta of 30 and alpha
cutoff above 3 MHz, such as 2N334, 2N1090,
I
PREFAB AMPL
I
: or 2N2926. IC audio amplifier is Lafayette
99R9039 or equivalent. Audio beat note In
Rl4
s phone changes in frequency when search coil
RE81""'°
CRG
GRN
4.7K
.,'':
I
I is near metal.-G. H. Gill, Summer Fun With a
Sensitive Metal-Finder, Radio-ffectronict, July
1966, p 55-57.
_._"'I ____ ••• .J
- BATT 2 fi!:...J"-·············-·· ---··
9V
VT BOMB FUZE DETECTOR-Reaction-grid-de·

toctor circuit shown was used in M·166 bar•
typo bomb fuzos to initiate detonation at 50
to 100 .feet abovo ground whon dropped
t.MPLIFIER
from aircraft. Antenna is nose of fuze. Coil
values are adlusted to obtain required fre·
quency and sensitivity. Valuos aro: Rl 1K;
R2 3; R3 33K; R4 47K; Cl 25 pf; C2 SO pf;
Triode NR3A. Oscillator and antonna coils
for l1 aro wound on samo coro. L2 is r-f
R2 R2 TEST
choko.-A. V. Astin, Editor, "Radio Proximity
LEAD
Fuzes for Fin-Stabilized Missiles," Div. 4,
NDRC, Vol. I, 1946 (available from Clearing·
house, Springfleld, Va.), p 225-226.
Bt A SUPPlY
B+ TEST A TEST <;·TEST E9 TEST TG UST T P TEST FIRING TEST

EXTERNAL JUMPER
\
:SOIUIF
LZ
SW·I RFC
- ...
*BREA!< AS REQUESTED
.....:·
VT ROCKET FUZE-Developed just before end tonation automatically when missile was conductor devices.-A. V. Astin, Editor, "Radio
of World War II, as T-2005 rocket fuze. within kill distance of aircraft. Tubes are Proximity Fuzes for Fin-Stabilized Missiles,"
Intended for shipboard defense against at• subminiature mllltary types, no longer avail• Div. 4, NDRC, Vol. I, 1946 (avallable from
tacking enomy aircraft. Fuse initiated do- able; modern versions undoubtedly use semi· Clearinghouse, Springfield, Va.), p 241-242.
WATERPROOF ANCHOR·FINDER-Solder-sealod
single-transistor transmitter suspended from
boat Is used with ordinary transistor radio In
boat for locating lost outboard motors, an•
chon, or other relatively large metal ob-
jects under water. Beat-fraquency oscillator
should be added to radio, or coupling should
be Introduced between two l·f stages to molce
osclllatlng i-f serving same purpose. Trans•
mltter operates at about 600 lcHz. In depths
greater than 30 ft, connect insulated antenna
wire to receiver and run it poraRel with trans-
mitter suspension rope. Article gives con•
structlon details for search coll which Is 4
turns of Insulated wire threadod through 23·
Inch-diameter split ring of V2-lnch copper
tubing. Permanent magnet outside housing
holds improvised magnetic-blade switch
open; remove magnet to turn on transmitter.
-0. Klippberg, Underwater Metal Hunting
for Fun or Profit, Radlo-Efectrania, Juno
1966, p 311-39.
AUDIO-MODULATED 180-KHZ TRANSMITTER-

Ujt relaxation oscillator Q2 produces low.
frequency audio tone for modulating transistor RS
47K
r-f oscillator Q1 which radiates search signal
from L1 (34 turns No. 22 enamel wound
around 6.8 x 5.3-lnch plastic case of trons-
SI~_r
mlttcn). Receiver is mounted at othor end
of 30-inch support rod, with its loop ot right
angles to that of transmitter, Operating
froquency Is around 180 lcH:r. Intended for
locating burled objocts larger than pie pans, C3
such os metal pails filled with gold coins. 10,000pF
Article gives construction detoils.-C. D. Rolces,
Treasure Witcher, Science & Efectranlct, April/
Moy 1970, p 39-44 and 80. cs
JuF
SI
Cl4
.2ZJiF
Rl4
IK .i
tv-
+ NOTE:LETTERS INDICATE CONNECTION

POINTS TO PRINTED CIRCUIT LOCATING SMALL BURIED OBJECTS-Designed
for locating such small objects as coins or
rings on beaches and bullets on old battle-
fields If not more than a few inches deep.
Maximum detection dopth for larger objects
Is about 2 ft. Usas 1lnglo loop circuit with
0
l2 two r..f oscillators, operating In range of 400

SEARCH COIL
,,-- .... , to 500 kHz, with detector and audio ampl!.
••••••• J
, 'I flor. Audio beat note from speaker changes
I in tono when search coil is near metal.
--·---.
.. __ .,,' I. Article gives construction and adjustment do-
tolls.-D. Meyer. Build the "Beachcomber,''
Popular EfoctroniC1, July 1967, p 27-32 and
84.
LI
(SEE C2
TEXT) 5000pF
180-KHZ RECEIVER-Single IC is equivalent of ohm headphones and Indicating meter.

threo transistors In providing gain of 129 dB Pickup loop LI has 34 turns of No. 22 enamel
for amplifying tone-modulated signal picked wound around plastic case of receiver. Use
up from transmitter at other end of 30-inch 9.y battery such as Eveready 216BP. Meter
support rod whon in presence of metal is 500-µA d-c. Article gives construction
Diode 02 demodulates signal after first IC details.-C. D. Rakes, Treasure Witcher, Science
stage, and other two IC stages amplify re- & Elecrronics, April/May 1970, p 39-44 and
sulting audio tone sufficiently to drivo 2,000- 80.
+
81 -
vv-
Rl:S
56K
l·o-'wov.o,f.,.,,
.!;.~ ____-1)1" cs l
i;oc:it;.__._...... >
dopth of 2 inches, or garbage-can lid at 2¥2
P:S ft. Has maximum sensitivity for Iron objects.
VE~t\el;,,--
I
- --- - -- - ----- 'I Each horizontal coil has 470 turns of No. 32
: ~-----------------~ wire on 1Y2 x 3 inch form, and vertical coil
HORIZONTAL
COlL j
t HORIZC!lTAL
COIL
has 870 turns on 1 Y2 x 2* inch form. Article
gives construdion details. Tone in head·
phones has maximum volume when hidden
ance bridge method of deteding, with a-f motal Is midway between vortlcal coil and
]; rather than r•f coupling. Circuit breaks Into either horizontal coil. Oscillators QI and
Pl _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - oscillation when metal is present between Q3 are about 2 lcHZ.-L. Huggard, Build a
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - horizontal and vertical coils. Will detect 3. "Different" Metal Locator, Popular E/ecfroni'5,
THREE-COIL TREASURE FINDER-UJGs induc• inch nail ar aluminum bottle cap buried at Feb. 1969, p 53-~8.
•9V
Ca Co • 0.004 microfarad. 2S volts or Rio - I0,000ohms, l/2watt, IO'JI.

greater Ru• 91,000ohms, 1/2w:all, 10%
Co • 680 microfarads, 2S volts or Ru • 680ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
greater Ru • 6800ohms, 1/2 wall, 10%
C 11 • 20 picofarads, variable type, Q,Q,Q, • transistor, RCA SK3020
Hammarlund No. MAC-20 or L1 • .SO to 140 microhonries, adjusta·
equivalent ble
C '' • 0.02 microrarad, 2S volts or Copper tubing: 1/4-inch diameter,
12 TURNS 3.14 feet (enough for
No.24 greater
ENAM£LEO C,. • SO microrarads, 6 volts, electro- loop of I-foot diame-
COPPER ter)
WIA[ lytic
C 11 • 0.1 microfarad, 2S volts or No. 24 enameled copper wire: about 40
sreater reet (enough for 12 turns of I-foot
CR 1 CR• • silicon rectifier. type diameter and connections)
IN34A Coaxial cable: about 3 feet (euct
amount depends on
length of handle)
Earphones • 200 ohms
R1R1 • 22,000ohms, l/2 wait, 10%
C1 c, Cu - 0.01microfarad,2S volts Ca C 11 3900 pico"1rads, 2S volts or
- RiR1 • 47000ohms, l/2watt, 10%
or greater greater R.R1 • 2200obms, 1/2 watt, 10%
C, - 1800 picoforads, 2S volts or c,c.c,. - 0.001 microfarad, 2S R, R1 - I megohm, 1/2 wall, IO'JI.
greater volts or greater • • 68,000 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
METAL DETECTOR-Can be usod to locate QI Is approximately 300 kH1 as determined maximum sensitivity as indicated by motor-
burled treasuro, underground pipes, and by L1 and C2, and Q2 operates at froquancy boating sound. Book gives comploto con-
other buriod metal objects. When search coil determined by Cl 1 and Inductance of search struction dotalls.-"Habby Circuits Manual,"
is near obiect, tone In earphone changes or coll and objects near It. L1 Is adjusted for RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 138.
cuts off completely. Uses two oscillators; tono in phonos, and Cl 1 than adjustad far
FINDING HIDDEN BRASS NAILS-Oscillating

detector frequency changes about 1 kH1 when COPPER SHIELD TO RECEIVER MIXER
nonmagnetic screw or nail is In magnotlc
flold near gap In cut toroid. Used to detect
concealed fasteners that could wreck saw
blades or tear sandpaper during refitting of
wood deck or bulkhead of ship. Coil Is in
tank circuit of Colpitts oscillator, clamped to
laminated copper plate acting as oloctrostatic
shield. Chango in oscillator frequoncy
changes beat frequency output of receiver
mixer, producing change in audio output.-
D. B. Hoisington, Osclllator as Detector, Efec-
froniq, March 18, 1968, p 95.
T-132 MORTAR SHELL FUZE-Circult of T-132

proximity fuzo obtains supply voltages from
propeller-driven generator on mortar shell.
Fuzo initiates detonation in air above ground
target. Tubes are subminiature military
typos, no longer available; modern versions
(classiflod SECRET) undoubtedly use semi-
conductor devlces.-A. V. Astin, Editor, "Radio
Proximity Fuses for Fin-Stablllzod Missiles,"
Div. 4, NDRC, Vol. I, 1946 (available from
Clearinghouse, Springfield, Va.), p 243.
IC BURIED-METAL DETECTOR-Consists of
DI
single-transistor transmitter using 2N2646 ujt
as oscillator driving scr, to feed highly di·
roctional 4 by 6-lnch loop L1 wound around
transmitter housing. Receiving loop of samo
size is similarly wound around rocelver using
Westinghouse WCl83T IC and GE-5 transistor
Q2. Transmitter and receiver are mounted at
opposite ends of 3-foot wood rod hold horl-
zontolly several foot above ground while
walking over area being searched. Whan
loops are properly oriented at right angles to
each other, with no metal in vicinity, nothing
is heard in phones. Metal object within
. .·
range gives 175-Hz tone in phones and un·
usual deflection of 1-mA d-c meter. Book
gives construction and adjustment data.
Valuos are: RI I SK; R2 220; R3 22; R4 470; .: . . . . . . . . . . . · · · · - · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · J'
RS, R6 270; R7 SK; RB 471<; R9 330K; RIO

1.BK; Cl 0.3 µf; C2 1 µF; C3, CS, C6 0.001
µF; C4 2,000 pf; C7, Clo 0.003 µf; ca, C9, Cll
10 µF; Bl, B2 9 V, B3 4.5 V; Dl, D2, D3 IN38B;
D4 2N3228 scr; Ll 74 turns #27 tapped two 1
.;n
turns from end; L2 68 turns.-R. M. Brown,
"Electronic Hobbyist's IC Projects Handbook,"
TAB Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa., 1968, p
116.
LEAD MAY BE CONNECTED

TO EITHER ENO C2
OF COi L LI
REACTION-GRID DETECTOR IN FUZE-Usod in

M-168 and T-92-El bomb fuzes to initiate
detonation about 50 feet above ground or
water. Antenna Is nose of fuze. Values
aro: Rl lOOK; R2 47K; R3 2.2K; Cl 5 pf;
C2, C3 30 pf; C4 5 pf; C6, C22 150 pf; RI
triode NR3A.-A. V. Astin, Editor, "Radio
Proximity fuzes for Fin-Stablllzod Missiles,"
Div. 4, NDRC, Vol. I, 1946 (available from
Clearinghouse, SprlngRold, Va.), p 225.
TO AMPLIFIER a A+
TEST LEAD
's::E TO LOAD
IOOK PRODUCTION-UNE METAL DmCTOR-Uses

unstable osclllator with coil In sensing probe.
C3 Circuit is adjusted to oscillate when no metal
.0015
is near probo. Presence of metal then acts
like shorted turn In coil, stopping oscillation
and making relay pull in to actuate electro-
mechanical counter or other load. Pickup
+ coil is 150 tums center-tapped and scramblo-
wound on l·lnch-dlameter paper form.-D. D.
IK
Darling, Simple Rf Proximity Detoctors, Radio-
Electronic1, Doc. 1966, p 47-48.
~:+
150V
METAL DETECTOR-Will doted any metal.

Nonmagnetic matoriols increase circuit losses
of sonslng indudor, thus reducing its Induc-
tance, whereas ferromagnetic materials reduce
reluctance of magnetic circuits and thereby
increase lnductanco, Can be used for locat-
ing metal, such as nails and shell portlclos,
embedded In wood to bo worked with ma-
chine tools, locating iron rods in reinforced
concrete, locating pipes and wiring In walls,
locating metal objects In cows before surgery,
locating bullets at scene of murder, and trac-
ing burlod pipes. Lt and L2 are 550 turns
of 0.2-mm enameled coppor wound on ferrox-
cube typo 4B rods 10 mm in diomoter and
10 cm long. Transformer T has 180-turn COMPONENT VALUES
primary and 200-turn c-t secondary of some R1 82 kO Rio = 4.7 kO
R1 18 kn Ru = 18 k!l
wire wound on typo 22/12-4C4 pot coro van Oort, Briof Items of Interest, Electronic R3 220 U R12 330 n
without air gap. Frequency of oscillator TRt Application•, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., R4 390 kU Ct 12 nF
i$ about 3 kHz. Article gives construdion, Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 25, No. 3, • n kU ~ 39 nF
alignment, and operating instrudions.-J. F. Ro S.6 kll C3 0.111F
1964-1965, p 123-128. R1 330 11 C4 60 11F
Rs 390 kU c~ 0.111F
R9 = 20 kll Co 0.111F
BRASS-NAIL DETECTOR FOR BOATS-Will such as J, W. Miller 6300. Lt is modified by

doted nonferrous objects as small as brass removing tuning slug ond cutting off brass
brads concealed by paint, to prevent damage tuning screw flush with core. Article gives
to sanders or power saws when working on other modifications required, along with con- phone HSI which changes when Lt is near
beah. Will also detect magnetic objects, strudion details and sources for ports. Qt metol.-J. 5. Simonton, Jr., Carpenter's Mot-
although maximum rango is about 2 Inches. and Q2 ore audio oscillators that boot to Tiny Metal Locator for Tiny Metal, Popular
Lt and L2 are high-Q ferrite antenna coils, produce audio tone in high-impedance ear• Electronics, Sept. 1969, p 69-72.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use the index at the back
CHAPTER 52
Modulator Circuits
+12v
MODULATED
OUTPUT SUBAUDIO ON 2·KHZ SUBCARRIER-Requires
only two transistors in simple differential
20k ampliflar circuit. Article also givas modifica-
.-1---+-I t--i tion for amplituda modulation at radio fro-
MODULATION quencies.-A. Pichard, 100% Amplitude Modu·
INPUT CARRIER lation With Two Transistors, Electronics, June
INPUT
12, 1967, p 104-105.
-12v
r------
1
- -- -- - --- -- ------------- ----
Rl 5.6k
- - --,I
I
I
I
I
I OUT
I
FULL-WAVE PHASE-SENSITIVE-Analog switch INPUT
Q1-Q3 is controlled by key or reference sig· I
nal, usually 0 to +3 V logic. With analog I
+ISV ISi.
I
switch closed (key ot 0 V), amplifier gain is I
-1. With switch open, gain is 0. May also
be used as square-wave modulator. Fre-
quency ranga is d-c to 500 kHz. Output
voltage raitga is -9 V to +9 V.-F. L.
KEY
I
I
5.6k
QI
2N32SO
,..~~~
4.7k
...
~~--
Q2 I
I
I
I
I
I I
Schmid, Full-Wave Phase-Sensitive Demodu- I
lator, EDN, Sept. 1, 1969, p 73. 'L.-----
I
--- --- ------- - --- ----------.J
I
GND -ISV
Rz
tOOk
20v d·e 0.05 µf

Rt
-0.3v d·c IOt
15k OUTPUT VOLTAGE
R7
230k
R4
90.9k
A-M WITHOUT CARRIER SUPPRESSION-IC without carrior suppression in double balanced input of IC.-K. Hanneman, Modulating Cur-
opamp delivers modulating output that varies mixar. D-c Input at upper left changes level rant Supplied by Op Amp, Electronics, Aug. 5,
around d-c level, for amplitude modulation along with a-c signal fed to noninverting 1968, p 107.
423
61.9K" 61.9K"
Ru R10
tc,
0.001 0.001
Cz
3. 2
T.P. •
1201< xvc,
~ 221<
VIDEO
INPUT I • 4
l~ULATOR +150 Cg
5/50 +2BV VC •PSI TYPE 61.9K"

MOD. __..______it-<----~ 251< I PC 113 VARICAP Ra
SIGNAL-...---,
L 1 • 1.8 #'hrs ADJ. +150V
51K 0.47
I
.,.. Ca
VARACTOR PHASE MODULATOR-Input of 7

V p-p produces 1 radian of phase modulation
at I 50 MHz from oscillator-doublor of crystal-
controlled vhf signal gonarator.-G. Costa, L.O. 150K
VHF Signal Uses Varactor for Phaso Modula· INPUT .,.. R13
tlon, Electronic Design, Oct. 26, 1964, p 58-59.
" I % RESISTORS
OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
USE COIL FORM SIMILAR TO CTC TYPE 2271·2 WITH 7 LUGS,MINIMUM
1
cf f
2
PRIMARY
3 4
7
SECONDARY
(WOUND ON TOP OF PRIMARY!
54-DB CARRIER SUPPRESSION-Special trans•

former simplifies nulling of carrier in balanced
RING MODULATOR-Uses four diodes from modulator using 7360 beam deflection tube.
CA3019 diode array for suppressing both Transformer consists of bifilar primary, wound
carrier frequency and signal frequency, so first and lacquarod in position, and split soc•
output theoretically contains only upper and ondory wound on tap af primary.-J. L Chris-
lowor sidebands. For single-sideband trans- tensen and D. Johnson, Balanced Modulator
mission, one sideband can be eliminated by Transformer Increases Carrier Suppression,
selective flltoring.-"Linear Integrated Cir· Electronic Design, Jan. 18, 1969, p 46-47.
cuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 306.
+10v~--.....- - - - - - - - - - - - -
8.2k
Ov]J
CARRIER INPUTS
-6v
2N930
-----1 t---------1
MODULATION
INPUT
t.Ov
UC200
SUPPRESSED
r - : - - 1 ' - - - t - - - - CARRIER
OUTPUT
2k
6.2k
SWITCHED-FET SUPPRESSED-CARRIER-At 100 tion 60 dB. Requires no transfo,..,ers or com• -C. H. Mi:Darmott, Suppressed Carrier Madu·
kH1 modulated with 5 kHz, carrier signal ro- plax balancing techniques. Modulating signal lotor With Noncritical Components, flectronlcs,
joction is 50 dB and modulation signal rejac• must be maintained bolow 1 V peak-to-peak. Oct. 31., 1966, p 70.
MODULATOR CIRCUITS 425
+15 v
5 6 10 11
ECosw1t 4 3k
BALANCED MODULATOR-Uses IC linear mul·
tipller al suppre11ed-carrler modulator, with
ECosw 2t
y Offset
9
8
MC1595L 2
3.3 k
3.3 k
I +
1.0µF
1.6-kHz audio tono on 40.kHz carrier al ono
applicatlon.-E. Renschlor, Tho Monolithic Mui·
tlplior Breakthrough, "Stato-of·tho-Art-Llnears
14 - in Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p
27-36.
x Offset 123 13 7
( oeout
1Els5.0 V
:::r:: !_-0 µF
- - -15V -
40-KHZ BALANCED MODULATOR-Motorola

monolithic multiplier servos as balanced modU· ey =E coswmt
+
later for 1.6-kHz Input signal. Article tolls
how to design external circuits to handle
maximum input voltage swing without intro-
ex =Ecoswct---
!-'"'
...
ducing nonlinoarity.-E. Renschler and D.
Weiss, Try tho Monolithic Multiplier as a
OFFSET
Versatile A..C Design Tool, Efedronics, Juno
ADJUST
8, 1970, p 100-lOS.
-l5v
. ._ _ _ _ _ CONSTANT CURRENT GENERA TOR. _ _ _ _ _'"'"

ANO LEVEL SHIFTER
I
.12v I
I FREQUENCY MODULATOR-Squaro•wavo out.
I put pulses are generated at froquoncy pro-
portional to ratio of two d-c Input voltages.
I Can bo used al comparator, ratio motor, mul.
I tiplier, process controller, and mony other ap-
I plications. When used in timo-of·fllght
computer for aircraft navigation, Inputs are
I rongo and velocity data, and updated arrival
15k
I time is then proportional to output prr.-R. G.
INPUT 1 I Durnal, Frequency Modulator Servos Two
Masters, EDN, May 1, 1970, p 60.
+4T0-6V I I
I -12v I
1---- -:i
1 I
I I
I
I 1k
I
I ~......--1 (
... - - 0 JUL
I R1
0.015 OUTPUT
I
INPUT 2 22k I
0 TO -6.SV -6.SV I I
I ~2V I
r--- RAMP GENERATOR ANO RESET SWITCH --11'*'1.,_t- BUFFERS -+I+-- COMPARATOR --.:
lk
+12V
2k
I Ok
1511F
IOV
SIGNAL
• f-o REFERENCE
INPUT l 4.7k
!INPUT
...
2k
10 HZ-1 MHZ RING MODUlATOR-Opamps
roplaco transformers, to provide rellablo opcir•
IOOk ation over wide frequency range without
lk component changes. Al and A2 gate hot•
carrior diedes and condition signal. Incoming
51 signal is passed into each unity-gain ampli·
OUTPUT
fler during half of roforonco cycle and dis·
connected during othor half. A3 sums oulputs
t of A1 and A2.-J. R. Niolsen, Transformorless
Ring Modulator, EEE, Feb. 1970, p 116.
% MODULATION ADJUST
Ry Rx
8.2k 8.2k
R1
ey = Ecos wmt -----1 ..--=-~"'*'-~ 3.0k
"'"""fV'....-- Vee =+15v
IC FOR A·M-Motorola monolithic multipllor
performs amplitude modulation by adding ex=Ecoswmt-----9
MC1595L
d-c term to modulating signal with pot Pl.-
Y-----18
E. Ronschler and D. Weiss, Try tho Monolithic
Multiplier as a Vonatile A.C Design Tool, OFFSET ADJUST 12 t4 E
Eledronics, Juno 8, 1970, p 100-105.
x 3 7 t3 1-----tt~--eo
6.8k -Q; l.Op.f

ex,ev< 5Vp-p '":"
-t5v
,------~
I -V 00 ·• -22.SV I
I
I
I
I
I
AUDIO~
I RIO
--VRLVV-_ _..,. 20K
INPUT' I ci MOSFET BALANCED MODULATOR-Provides
1.01,.1 47K audio modulation of r·f carrier signal for
double-sideband generation. Mosfot 01 ads
I as phase splitter having extremely high Input
impedance, for driving other two mosfots out
I RS
C4
.01,.1 I of phaso to produce double sideband. RlO
I IM
I
servos for balancing output signals accurately,
for use in modulating linear r·f power ompli-
I I cs~ .01,.1 DOUBLE SIDEBAND
OUTPUT
flors.-C. R. Perkins, "Application of MOSFET
L_ ~~S~TTCR _ _J
R7 · 220K
Qi ~ Q2 Q3 HRN8318D
Devices to Electronic Circuits," Hughns, Now·
port Beach, Cal., 1968, p 42.
MODULATOR CIRCUITS 427
10k
A-M WITH IC MULTIPLIER-Similar to balanced .,.. Ry • 8.2k RX = 8.2 k

modulator, but with d-c term added by moans POT ;3
of potentiometer 3. IC is Motorola linear •e • E coswml RI=
four-quadrant multiplier. With careful align• Y 3.0 k vee =
ment, 100% modulation is posslble.-E. 9
•15v
Renschler, The Monollthlc Multiplier Breok· •ex= Ecosc.101 o--o-- RLI =
through, "State-of-the-Art-Lineors In Action,'' MC1595L 2 3.3k
8
Motorolo, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, P 27-36. OFFSET AOJUST y 14 Ru= • +LO 11F
x
12
33k l'
1'
oeo
6.8 k 3
'ex. ey < 5 Vp.p
O.lµFl
-15V
+5v
16llN4154
LIMITING
+5v +12v +12v
AMPLIFIER
PHONE
LINE
r- - -10NE r-- -:--i

INTEGRATOR· COMPARATOR
I START FF I REC
SN7473NI I t/3 SN7404N DATA
I I ZERO
UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN
ZERO OETECTOR
CLEAR
I ALL DIODES ARE IN995
SN7473N ALL TRANSISTORS ARE 2N2369.
-------i
I
SHIFT I I
PULSE I I
GENERATOR! SHIFT FF I
I +5v
SHIFT I 1,200.BPS MODEM-Developed at U. of Illinois
I--+-+----. for Ploto (Programmed Logic for Automatic
Teaching Operations) system. 4.8-kHz oKil-
I later using 2N2369 transistors and 1N995
diodes drives two•stage counter thot reduces
I frequency to 2.4 kHz in first fllp·flop and to
I 1.2 kHz in second flip-flop. When binary O
is present In dato input, two cycles of 2,4-
I kHz signol aro transmitted; for binary 1, ana
I cycle of 1.2-kHz signal Is transmitted. Re-
I I
sulting composito digital signal is changed
into approximation of sine wave by low.
pass pi filter for ampliRcatlon and feeding
I through transformer to phone llne.-J. Stifle
113 SN7404N
and M. Johnson, Design Pruning Trims Costs
of Data Modom, Electronics, July 20, 1970,
p 99-101.
+Sv
DATA.
+6V Tz
81FILAR
9 31
~----'"--.----------~ Y3
ttf
90· 400 OUTPUT
~~ ~ i>-----L-vcc ......__....~
0 0 1 , . r p 6 V T1
9·6 I SO
•2
560·870 I~ OSCILLATOI'!
CARRIER
pr ~ 17SMHz
-: ~
SUPPRESSED-CARRIER MODULATOR-Uses IC
PHASE MODULATOR FOR 60..MHZ l·F-Provldes r-f amplifier as double-sideband modulator.
180-deg shift in phase of output signal each Carrier suppression Is fundion of bilateral
limo switching signal Is applied to modulator, symmetry and modulation-to-carrier drivo
to give codod noiso-llko output. Oporatos ratio. Carrier output 11 25 dB below double-
with pseudo-random codo having maximum sidoband output when drive Vl Is 10 mV and
codo rato of 5 megabits per second. Switch- V2 is 31.5 mV.-"Llnear lntogratod Circuits,"
ing time Is faster than 30 ns. Uses two RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 229.
gated IC video ampliflors fed in parallel, with
outputs fed to push-pull transformor.-S. G.
Shophord and A. E. Soman, Design With lnto-
gratod Circuits at 60 Mc, Eledronic Do1i9n,
Aug. 2, 1965, p 3o-33.
c,
t.O,uf E1
OUTPUT 1
E1N --~~-4---t
INPUT
Ez
OUTPUT2
01
2k2222
INPUT VOLTAGE
FOR 100% DUTY
CYCLE= 10 Ri/Rz L----3"'s"'.1.,..k---,-1NM-91-4------~
MINIMUM PULSE WIDTH =
3RaCt/IO
MAXIMUM FREQUENCY = +E
IO/R2C. EiN 01~------+-------- TIME
-E
BANG-BANG SUBSTITUTE-Provides variations +6Y
in pulse width and frequency for solonoid-typo
pneumatic valves In missilo and space vehicles,
+3Y
to give both coarso and ·flno control having INTEGRATCR Ei o .J--L----~,....------
many advantages ovor conventional bang• OUTPUT -lv
bang systems. Circuit gives largo savings In -6v
gas and energy consumption. For small con•
trol signals, valves are modulated with mini-
mum pul10 width for just barely opening
E+IOY
0-1----1...1...L.J...L...__________
valve. For largo control signals, system 1
changos to bang-bang modo.-W. A. Cooke, +12Y
Pulso Modulator Rogulates Pneumatic Valvo E2 o+--------....i1.1.o.....,.._........_
Closure, Elodronics, Sept. 1, 1969, p BD-81.
MODULATOR OIB.ClJ'ITS 429
Rs
60K
MICROWAVE
TUBE
VouT
BEACON MODULATOR-Input pulse trips Kry·

tron gos-fllled switch tube, producing high
peak cunent through pulse-forming network
and output transformer, for pulse modulation
of high-power microwave radar tube.-Kry·
trons-Cold Cathode Switch Tubes, EG&G, Bos-
ton, Mass., KR-100, 1968.
TRANSFORMERLESS MODEM-Uses Fairchild IC

opomp as full-wavo modulator-demodulator
operating over wido range of frequencies.
Input switch Ql alternately switches IC from
inverting (transistor A ON) to noninverting
(transistor B ON) amplifier. Push-pull drive
signal con bo obtained from IC flip-flop.
Values shown glvo gain of 10 and bandwidth
of 10 MH1.-C. J. Amato, Tho Integrated
Operational Amplifier: A Versatllo and Eco-
nomical Circuit, "Mlcroeloctronlc Design," ANALOG MULTIPLIER-Single opomp con-
Hayden Book Co., N.Y., 1966, p 189-194. nected as one-shot accepts input frequencies
from 1 to 1,000 Hz and control voltages from
0.1 to 15 V, and delivers constant-width
output pulses with amplitudes proportional to
product of input frequency and d-c control
voltage. Multiplication accuracy is 0.1 %.
QI may bo any suitable switching transistor
with low VCE.-B. Stojanovic, Pulse-Height
DSB OUT4<1111----------~------ -i Modulator Multiplies Voltage by Frequency,

EEE, July 1968, p 99-100.
~~·.
rA.F.
~INPUT
I
'=
MODULATED CRYSTAL IC-Introduction of

DOUBLE-SIDEBAND GENERATOR-Slmplo crys- audio signal at terminal 2 of IC d-c amplifier
tal oscillator drives two mosfet r·f switches operating as crystal oscillator gives a-m
that are modulated out of phase with audio modulation. High-pass filter must be used at
input signal to gonorate double-sideband r•f output. Carrier frequency may be up to 1
carrier slgnal.-C. R. Perkins, "Application MHz, depending on crystal used.-"Unoar In•
of MOSFET Dovicos to Eloctronlc Circuits,'' tegrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41,
Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 196B, p 43. p 125.
5K
Vs
I
_L_
Rm
l
f r"°·:r-
ef
~ 1e.6V,
TRIGGER Vc
I
KC WIDTH• l.61'sec
20
TRIGGER
l_ =
IC PDM-Audio input voltage varies resistance
of mosfet Q3, which in turn varies base volt• r,-TECHNITROL No 851166 OR EQUIV
age of Ql and duration of output pulse.
Designed for construdion as integrated-circuit IC BALANCED MODULATOR-Uses CA3019
chip. For peak input under 1 V, output pulse four-diode IC array in symmetrical brldse
amplitude is above 2 V and modulation network that minimizes carrier frequency at
index is 0.25 to 0.75. Trigger rate of 20 kHz output. Carrier of one polarity makes all
was chosen because it is high enough for diodes conduct and effectively short·clrcults
sampling audio signal and law enough for signal source. Carrier af opposite polarity
easy flltering. Unmodulated pulse duration cuts off all diodes and allows signal current
is 25 µs. Uses RCA insulated-gate depletion• to flow to load. If oil diodes are identical,
type mosfet.-A. J. Wall, Converting a Pulse bridge Is perfectly balanced and no carrier
Modulator Into An Integrated Chip, Efedronic current reaches load.-"Linear Integrated Cir·
Design, Feb. 17, 1964, p 6G-65. cuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 300.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use the index at the back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Source book of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 53
Motor Control Circuits
CAI RI
DIAC·TRIAC FULL-WAVE WITH DELAY-Built·

in time delay for automatic tum-off permits
setting P2 to turn off motor of mlxor or
other appliance automatically after desired
period of operation. Circuit can be reset
for next cako by switching SWl to OFF/
RESET position. RUN position bypanos delay.
R2 -A. A. Adom, Speed Controls for Unlvenal
Moton, Goneral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., Ne.
200.57, 1966, p 11.
UNIVERSAL MOTOR
C4 R5
CAI THROUGH CR5 GE Al48 Tl I l•I PULSE TRANFORMER (SPRAGUE llZIZ)

01 GE 2N2646 Cl• .l11F 50V C4 .II' F' 200V R5-R6 1000 l/2W
DIAC , GE ST2 CZ• 100,.F 50V Rl•R2 SSIC 1/2W R7·R8 II( l/ZW
SCRI' GE
TRIAC• GE
CI068
SC40BX43
C3• .s11F 200V RS
R4
39001/ZW
IOK l/2W
IOI< 2W
Pl
P2 ...
SOOK l/2W
l/2W
RI
220
to
v.ov
"'
L1
250~H
4.S·KW SQUIRREL-CAGE FAN MOTOR-Circuit in motor speed). Circuit is designed for 220. press rfl.-G. J. Derksen and G. J. Toblsch,
has no hysteresis effoct (no lag botwoon 250 V a•c line operation. Choke L1 limits Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elndhovon,
change of speed setting and resultant change steepness of current transients and helps sup• The Netherlands, No. 80, 1970.
431
tCCW
TH2
ccw·
cw
'"~
cw•
D-C MOTOR THYRISTOR TRIGGERING-U101

Philips IC unit to convert clockwlse ond coun•
terclockwiso commands from loglc circuit to
triggering required for operating d-c motor
at either of two predetermined speed lovels
in either direction or stopping motor. Report
describes operation In detoil.-W. B. Roslnk,
Reversible Two-Speed D. C. Motor Supply,
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon,
The Netherlands, No. 79.
ov
ccw
cw
D-C MOTOR CONTROL LOGIC-Roquiros a-c high to low spood. At still lower signal lovol, Output ioods CCW, CW, ond T go to thyristor
control signal that con bo varied In amplitude motor stops. If signal phase is then ro- triggering circuit for motor.-W. B. Rosink,
and phase, appllod to tormlnol E. Gives vorsod, motor starts In opposite direction, and Reversible Two-Speed D. C. Motor Supply,
control In both directions at two predator• runs at low or high speed lovol depending Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Eindhoven,
mined spoods. Whon control signal drops on amplitude of control signal. Operation Tho Netherlands, No. 79.
below certain valuo, motor changes from of Philips IC units is described in report.
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITS 433
EXTENDED-RANGE FULL-WAVE-Uso of extra

capacitor C2 In basic 600-W diac-trlac circuit
extends range for reliable phase control,
particularly at low output settings. Place
120 v. load in alternate position for motors.-F. W.
60"' Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy Power
l C2
0.1,uf
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 16.
BAnERY·VEHICLE CONTROLLER-Uses rapid·

acting scr switch, known as Jonos chopper, In
series with d-c sories motor to control speed
of battory•powered vehicle such as golf cart.
At low tpaeds, ON time is much less than
OFF timo so avorage voltage across motor is
low. OFF time is changed by R2 In timer,
for smooth control and high efficiency. Op-
erates as variablo-fraquoncy constant•pulse-
width system. Pulse repetition rate range is
obout 100 to 400 Hz. Values are for 36-V
battery and maximum motor current of 110 A.
Article gives dotign equatlons.-"SCR Man•
ual," 4th Edition, Goneral Electric, 1967, p C1-0.lpl,100V R1 -220Jl,2.W SCA1-G E C1541
C:t-0.1,111,IOOV Rt-OTO IOOIC POl'EHTIOMETERITAPEAZ) SCRz-o E Cl408
237-243. CS-0.22,111,IOOV II s-ZOK, lllW Tt } PUl.Sl EH011iEER1NG
C4-~Jlf,ll!IVAC GE21fll02 114-UM,llZW Tz TYPEPIEZZZ9
01-GEIN2IH 1t5 -Z70A,ZW Ts - o E IT41Y100t
Oz-G E INS673A Ro-5500,llZW Z1 - G E IN1171
q. -THYRECTOll GE 6R521VA20D R7-lllM,ll2W Zz ---Gii: INl771
01-G IE ZNlMI Ra -1004,112.w Zs - G IE 111117S
02-G E 211Ze47
+16v
D2
MCLl304
l,OOOpl o,
IN754
02
2N2219
200 tk 6.2k
CONSTANT TORQUE-Foedback circuit adiusts -t6v R2 for no-load spood indicatod, then adjust
voltage of d-c motor and inserts negative RI for proper torque with motor stalled.-E.
or positive adjustable resistanco In series with iations in strength of permanent magnet. S. Busby, Feedback Circuit Keeps Motor's
motor, to offset typical variation af up to 20% Uaad for conttant-spoed, constanl•tention Torque Constant, Electronict, Sopt. 2, 1968, p
In slopo of torque-speed curve caused by var• magnetic tape drive. To adjust for slope, set 72,.
RI GE
47K CI068 TYPE I SEWING-MACHINE MOTOR CONTROL-Can be
112 w SCR used in place of carbon-pile speed control
for sowing machines, food mixers, and other
C1 household appliances using universal a-c/d-c
IMFD_ R210K
SO VOLTS motors. Speed-dependent feedback gives ex•
114 WATT
120 WLTS SPEEO cellent torque oven at slow speeds. Cl Is
AC ADJUST optional, and may sometimes improve per·
MIXER. formance. A selenium 6RSSPX7 double diode
GE o SEWING
MACHINE.OR assembly moy be used in place of tho two
Al4B
SIMILAR Al48 silicon diodes shown.-Sllicon Controlled
UNIVERSAL Rectiflor, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
MOTOR
(MAX CURRENT 150.9, 1969.
1.5 AMP)
r "STANDARD" MOTOR
SPEED CIRCUIT
"ON"
CR2
GE
UNIVERSAL·MOTOR CONTROL WITH SELF- INl693
TIMING-Shuts motor off automatically after SPEED POT
predetermined time delay detcinninod by
CRI
GE
1ooon
R3 p (2W) GE
Mttting of R3. R2 determines speed. Sult· IN1695 I50 K OT C22B
able for blenders and larger food mixers hav• (TIME ADJ} SCR
Ing motors rated at up to 2 A. Maximum
obtainable delay with circuit shown is above 120V RMS
GEC6B I
OR CI0,_6;;..;;B;.;;;2+--+--_.
30 s. Pilot lamp remains on until main 60 Hz 150
power switch Is turned off, after timer stops
motor.-D. R. Grafhani, Using Low Current PILOT IN1693
SCR's, General Eledrlc, Syracuse, N.Y., No. LAMP
200.19, 1967, p 37. Cl IM GE
0.1
100 "' IN1693
200V + s't}v
DRIVER CURRENT
SCHMITT MODUl.ATOR AND FEEDBACK
OUTPUT SENSE
+li.2 v RIO, 100 5%
R4 Dl R11 12 v
2k MZ1000·11 Jk R14 02
5% 5% 1N4002
-: 100
C1
1.0 µF
25 v
C2
R2 2N3905 l2)
R1
1 k.,_,...,:.....JVV\.-...~~e--+-~
SPEED
ADJ R9
11 k
5%
03
MR2262
DC MOTOR A
5% 4 A RUN
C4
15ASTART :.! µF
r25V
•ADJUST TO SUIT MOTOR ALL RESISTORS ARE ±.5%, 1/2 W UNl.ESS MAR KEO
12-V PWM P.C CONTROL-Provides speed waveform whose duty cycle and frequency diode 03 supprosses inductive kickback of
control of 12·V 4-A d·c motor, with good are a function of RI ond feedback current motor, while 02 protects QS from voltcsgo
rogulation at any given speed. Schmitt through Rf. Output of Schmitt modulator transients of motor.-"Somlconductor Power
trigger Ql.Q2 and phose inverter Q3 pro• foods Darlington-connected power ampliflor Circuits Handbook," Motorolcs, Phoenix, Ariz.,
duce voricsblo-width voricsblo-frequoncy pulse Q4..QS that drives motor. Free-wheeling 1968, p 1-30.
HALF-WAVE CONTROL FOR SHUNT MOTOR-

Provides speed control for d-c shunt motor
designed for operation on half-wave rectified
120-V a-c: supply. DI provides fleld cut'l'ent, D1 Ds
with D3 smoothing its waveform. Diac-scr GE·Al3B GE-
combination supplies armature current, with A40B
DS for smoothing. At end of each positive
half-cycle, field voltage drops to zero and Cl
dischorgos through D2. Voltage ocross Cl GE·Al3B
Is thus zero at start of ooch positive holf· SCR
cycle, regardless of setting of speed control GE-C20D
5AMPS
RI. Voltogo rating of scr is twice thot FIELD MAX.
required for resistive load, or 400 V, becouso I AMP 03 DIAC
MAX GE·Al3B GE·ST2
of counter emf of armature at high spoeds.- C1
E. K. Howell, Speed Control for Shunt-Wound 0.1
DC Motors, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 200.44, 1965, p 5.
INl693 3.31< INl693
220
2N2647
UJT
Cl58
PHOTOELECTRIC-FEEDBACK A·C CONTROL-
47 Contrifugol mechanism acts as variable shut-
120V. tor between lamp and photocoll, to hold speed
60"' IN 1693 of Induction motor constant within fairly tight
limits.-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell,
1965, p 21.
LAMP
NO LOAD OPERATING POINT

LIGHT
ON I••
PC ••
I
!-FULL LOAD OPERATING POINT
~--1~~~~~..LL'--:-=:=o.....,,.--
NTROLRANGE
CJ INDUCTIVE
~ LOAD
dv/dt Re
SUPPRESSION
600-W RAMP-AND-PEDESTAL-Refined control C2
circuit for inductive load eliminates d-c com·
pononts of load current by deriving ujt supply IN1692
.voltage directly from a-c lino to ensure sym· D1
metry of triggering angle on each half-cycle.
TRIAC
SC418
Circuit design provides reliable triggering of SC468
triac under all conditions.-F. W. Gunwiller 100.n
and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Somicon·
ductor Applications, General Electric, Syracuse, t-rV. IN692
2 o3
N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 16. INl771;,
IOV.
05
1N4003
(4)
1N4003
or MOA942·3
FULL-WAVE FOR SHUNT-WOUND-Power for
Yi.sth-hp 5,00Ckpm 115-V d-c motor is sup-
4.7 k plied from full-wave bridge. Froo-whoolin9
5.0W diodo D5 is necessary across armaluro for scr
QI lo turn off. Four-layer diode D8 provides
07 stoblo Rring point for QI. Speed pulsations
1N4003 100 k 06 occurred only al very low speed settings.
SW 1N4003 Provides much better speod regulation than
with comparablo half-wave conlrol.-"Semi·
FIELD P1 conductor Power Circuits Handbook," Moto•
01 rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-25.
08
2N4172
1N5159
C1
+
2.0µF
25 v
R5
ISOO
UNIVERSAL MOTOR CONTROL-Widely used

for power tools and sowing mochlnes. Com·
par111 voltage across capacitor with goner·
ated emf in armature to regulate motor speed.
To avoid changing motor connections, series
Rold may be left in armature circuit.-F. W.
Gut:r.willer and E. K. Howell, Economy Power
Semiconductor Applications, Gonerol Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 23.
GE-Al4B
05 GE-Al4B
05
120VAC 250K
SCR
FIELD OIAC
NOTE:
GE·ST2 D1 -04, 07 SCR SELECT
c, Rs ON CURRENT REQUIRED
47
O.l)lf BY MOTOR.
LINE-VOLTAGE COMPENSATION WITH SPEED directly ocross roctlRer. Compensation for K. Howell, Speed Control for Shunt-Wound
CONTROL-Provides armature voltage control changes in line voltoge Is provided only at DC Motors, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
of 115·V d-c shunt motor operating from reduced speeds, by shifting voltage required No. 200.44, 1965, p 4.
0 -c lino through bridge rectiRer. Field is ocross Cl to produce triggering of scr.-E.
CR2
REVERSIBLE HALF-WAVE UNIVERSAL-Arma·
ture current is always in same direction be·
cause scr Is fed by bridge rectifier, Direction
120VIAC
of fleld current depends an which polarity of
applied voltage is present at time scr con•
ducts. Direction of rotation Is changed by
causing conduction in oither positive or noga·
tivo half-cycle of supply voltage. Feedback
control of motor speed Is achieved by com•
paring counter emf of armature with capacl·
tor voltago.-F. W. Gutlwlllor and E. K.
Howell, Economy Power Somiconductor Ap· SCR C20B
R1: 1500 C1: 200,uf
plications, Goneral Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y., R2: 1500 C2:5pf CR& A40B
No. 671.1, 1965, p 23. R3: 3000 CT CR1-4: A40B MOTOR SERIES, REVERSIBLE
R4: 1000 CR&-7: INl694
Rs: 470
(4)
MR1033A or MDA952·4
AC
LINE
REVERSING SHUNT-WOUND-Controls both

SW speed and direction of ~sth-hp 5,000-rpm
• 115.Y shunt-wound d·c motor. Field Is con•
R2,4.7 k nected across bridge rectifier and armature is
SW in scr bridge. Switch revenes armature cur·
rent and direction of rotation by triggering
opposite diagonal pair of scr's. RI controls
as spood.-"Somiconductor Power Circuits Hand·
2N5062 book," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-
27 •
T1
••
•
T1 and T2 are Sprague 11Z13
GE-A40B (4)
BRIDGE
RECTIFIER
~
ARMATURE D3
D1 GE-A41B
GE-INl694 SPEED
CONTROL
120VAC
60 CPS FIELD R2 GE-
250K IN1694 SCR
GE- C20B
SHUNT D-C CONTROL-Simple low-cost solid·
state circuit gives smooth control of speed DIAC
over wide range, by varying voltage applied GE- ST2
lo armature. Bridge roctiRer provides full· C1
wave rectification of a•c supply to give 120 0.1 µf
V d·c for Yeth·hp motor whose fleld wlndln9
Is connDCtod directly acroll rectiRer. Arma•
turo voltage Is controlled by changing point with .~r turning off only at end of each half· Wound DC Moton, General Electric, Syracuse,
in each half-cycle at which scr is turned on; cycle.-E. K. Howell, Speed Control for Shunt· N.Y., No. 200.44, 1965, p 1.
MOTOR
r---------i
LOW.VOLTAGE D-C MOTOR CONTROL-low·
FIELDS cost control operating frol'll battery solves
commutation problem with mechanical can•
tad that bypasses scr twico per revolution
of motor. Speod of motor is synchronous
with that of ujt which turns on scr, giving
very preciso control of spood.-F. W. Gutz•
willer and E. K. Howell, Economy Pawor
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.I, 1965, p 24.
NOTE: C2 AND R1 OPTIONAL L---------.J
120
VAC RI SCRI
PLUG IN SPEED CONTROL-Single black box

0 0
half wavo scr phase control can be used an

0
variety of electric appliances and tools hav•

ing serios universal brush-typo motors, such SI
as with electric drills, power saws, sanders, :J CR3
lathos, fans, -movie projectors, and food mix- GE·Xl4
ers or blenders. Requires no rewiring af
motor. For motors rated 3 A max, uso GE· OUTPUT
XI scr, 3-A fuse, and 2,500-ohm 4-W resistor RECEPTACLE
R3 FOR MOTOR
for RI. For motors up to 5 A, uso C30B scr, 2001l. PLUG
5-A fuse, and 2,500-ohm 4-W resistor far RI. TRIMMER
-"Hobby Manual," General Electric, Owens-
boro, Ky., 1965, p 131.
CR2 UNIVERSAi.
INl693 MOTOR
02
SI
_.....r.'
I C1
I IOOpt +
II
118:!, 150V
_.>;
04
01·0io012 & 0i3 •O·EA138

PRECISION SPEED CONTROL-Uses aperture Faster response time af laser permits highor input frequency below reference frequency,
disc on armature shaft to lntenupt light from oscillator frequoncy and either higher motor and nearly zora output far inputs abovo
lamp to laser and produce scr turnoff signal speeds ar multiple Interruptions per revolu• referonce.-E. K. Howell, Solid State Control
for ujt-synchronous drive through tllP-flop tion. Phase-detedor principle employed pro- far DC Motors Provides Variable Spoad with
and scr. Optional system eliminatos woar of duces linear output far full 36Cl-cleg, range Synchronous Motar Performance, General Elec-
0
mechanical switch and does not load motor, af phase error, with full output for any tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.43, 1965, p 7.
3
MOTOR
WINDINGS
3·PHASE INDUCTION-Forced self-commutated

Inverter for three-phase Induction motor Is
actually ring counter having one motor wind-
ing as load for each stage. Successive firings
of scr's croate moving flux fleld around stator
for developing torque on rotor for speeds up
R2 RS RS to 7,200 rpm. Interchanging any two of the
C6
1.5 k 1.5 k 1.5 k
0.1 µF throo windings with switches will reverse ra-
300V C4 tatlon.-"Somiconductor Powor Circuits Hand•
01 0.1 uF book," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-
300V 02 03 17.
2N4172
R1 ':" R3 ':" R6 R9
1 k 1k 1 k 1k
':"
01 -=- 02 03
1N4003 1N4003 1N4003
TRIGGER
PULSE
INPUT
r-------------~--r----------.
ARMATURE-VOLTAGE SPEED CONTROL-Uses turo rise In windings or changes in supply 330. 024 and R39 Improve speed rogula-
bridge to measure back emf of motor, which voltoge. Dosigned for 5-hp d-c shunt motor. tlon.-J. Merrett, Thyristor Spead Control Cir·
Is proportional to motor speed whon flold is B is Mullard thyristor staclc with currant rat• cult Design for 0. C. Shunt Motors Supplied
constant. Short•torm spaod regulation ing 1.5 times full-load motor current. 013 from A. C. Mains, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
against load change can be as good as I% and Dl4 are Mullard BYX22-800 or others to Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 438,
at full speed, and long-term regulation as suit field current. R2 is Yioth of armature 1967.
bod as 10%. Chief causes of spoad drift resistance, Rl4 Is U,4th of fleld resistance,
aro changes in fleld flux caused by tempera• and R15 Is ~2nd of fleld resistance. R25 Is
ARMATURE
SOFT-START SHUNT D-C MOTOR CONTROL-

Addition of R6 and C3 across scr Improves
commutation in basic ormaturo voltago con-
120 trol circuit by limiting roto at which voltage Is
VAC FIELD R6 applied ta scr after turnoff. If motor failed
10 to commutate at low-speod setting, violent
GE-A139
De spoed fluctuations would occur because it
THYRECTOR would be driven suddonly to high spaod at
which commutation occurs reliably. Thyroctor
across a-c lino suppressos high-voltage tran-
c1 c2 + sients that could damage semiconductors In
0.1 200pf circuit. R2 controls spood.-E. K. Howell,
150VDC Speed Control for Shunt-Wound DC Motors,
Goneral Eledric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.44,
NOTE: 1965, p 3.
MOTOR SIZE DETERMINES TYPES SCR, D1- 05, a THYRECTOR
•
(4)
MR1033A
or MDA952·4
AC
LINE
Rt
REVERSING SERIES-WOUND-Controls both

speed and direction of rotation of Yisth-hp •
5,00D-rpm 115-V series-wound d-c motor.
Sc r's Ql ..Q4 are connected in bridgo and
triggered in diagonal pairs according to sot•
ting of reversing switch Sl. Conducting pair
dotormlnes direction of rotation bocouso it as ARMATURE
dotorminos direction of fleld current while 2N5062
armaturo current always flows In some diroc• (21
tlon, Speed control is Rl .-"Semiconductor T SPRAGUE
2 11Z13
Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoe-
nix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-26• ••
4TO IV -
•
G-E llC
.,._""'"W,._.....+-<_J2N292!
SMALL P·M MOTOR CONTROL-Four-transistor that energizes motor. Switch Sl, driven by revolution from 1 to 2 to 4 to 8, otc., mnchani-
circuit provides adjustable speed control, cam on armature shaft, reverse• flip-flap and colly or electrically.-E. K. Hawaii, Solid State
synchropous with output af ujt rolaxation thereby interrupts motor current 1overal tlmos Control for DC Motors Provides Variable
oscillator, for small battery-operated porma• per revolution when closed momontorlly by Spoed with Synchronous-Motor Performance,
nent•magnet motors such as are used In cams. With fixed oscillator frequency, motor Genoral Electric, Syracuse, N. Y,, No. 200.43,
phonographs, tape recorders, and recording speed can be changed in discrete octave steps 196~, p 7.
instruments. Ujt oscillator drivos flip-flop by changing number of switch closures por
35-V P·M CONTROL-Uses step-down trans•

former and bridge rectifier to permit use of or MOA942·3
component values that give phase control of
~II
d·c motor over full half-cycle. Gives excel·
lent speed control from stall up to 20,500
rpm. Small but not objectionable pulsation
occurs at light loads and slciw speeds, but
effect vanishes when motor is fully loaded.-
"Somiconductor Power Circuits Handbook," 35V
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-28. PERMANENT
MAGNET
MOTOR
HALF-WAVE SCR WITH REGENERATIVE TRIG·

GERING-Uses two-transistor rogoneratiYD
trig9er approximating performance of ova•
lanche diode. R7 must bo matched with
!ftOtor rating, in range from 0.1 ohm for
~~-
I
I
MOTOR
c1
~~,
\
MOTOR
.., I
lar9er universal motors to 1 ohm for smaller
typos. For scr ratings up to 25 A, CR I is
1N3755 and RI is 75K with 120.V o-c supply.
-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, N.J.,
SP-51, p 246.
VOLTAG ', _, /
__JA....____ _A_ _
GATE CURRENT GATE CURRENT
LIGHT LOAO HEAVY LOAD
r-------------- -.,
1
I
03 'SHUNT
G-EA40F
~FIELD
D2
Rs G-E
750 A41F
'--------·------ --...------------~~---
P-M MOTOR SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL-Main-
tains speed of shunt or permanent-magnet
..
closes and bypasses scr. Motor is then with·
out current until next trigger. Motor speed
...--- ---- -- -~
motor cannot be turned off because commu-
tating switch S2 is not tripped; SI must then
d-c motor at rate determined by output of is hold in synchronism with oscillator up to be opened.-E. K. Howell, Solid State Control
variable-frequency ujt relaxation oscillator torque limit of motor, with that torque being for DC Motors Provides Variable Speed with
Qt. Each ujt output trigger malies scr pass maintained 'at all lower speeds down to Synchronous-Motor Performance, General Elec-
motor current until cam switch on armature locked rotor. However, with locked rotor, tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.43, 1965, p s.
or MDA942·3
FIELD
COMPENSATED FULL WAVE DRIVE-Uses full•
0
wave roctifler on a·c lino to drive series· RI

wound d-c motor, with scr providing speed 3.0 k 05
control. Diode D5 provides current path for 2.ow
energy stored in inductive flald of motor, to
allow scr to turn off. Designed for 1/i51h-hp
5,000.rpm 1 IS·V d·c motor, but circuit is QI
capable of controlling motors up to ~th·hp. 06 2N4172
-"Semiconductor Power Circuits Handbook," 1N4003
5.0 k
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-21. 5.0 w
UNCOMPENSATED FULL-WAVE DRIVE-Uses

three-layer diode DI with triac for speed
01
control of series-wound 115-hp 5,000·rpm
MACl·4
AC 115.y d·c motor operating from a-c line.
LINE Motor can provide greater maximum torque
than with half-wave control.-"Semiconductor
Power Circuits Handbook," Motorolo, Phoe-
Cl nix, Ari1., 1968, p 1-20.
0.1 µF
200 v
10,......--.....
A
11
12
13
A
10.---...... 1.----
11 2
e 12 3
10r----., 13 NOR60 4 NOR60
11
NOR60
1:l
13 NOR60 14 10,.---.....,
A At
11
1
B1--------~ r--~-, NOR60
12
2
1,.---....., 13 NOR60 ..__....;4=1_NOR60
3 ..__ ___,u22 _ ___,U24
2
14__4""l.___
,_ NOR60 _, UIS
3
4
IMO
12
1,......--......
-
10---- lr----
5 2 2
s 14
NOR60 TU60 NOR60 4 NOR60

..__ __..u20
4 9 4 9
11lf' 11Jf
SPEED-SYNCHRONIZING LOGIC-Combinotion to voltages required for speeding up or slow· ior Motor Speed Synchronization, Philips, Pub.
of Philips NOR60 and TU60 gates converts Ing down appropriote motor to give syn• Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether·
outputs of speed•synchronizing level detector chronization.-L. J. Lemmons, Control Circuit londs, No. 66.
(1£ A408 l•I

8RIDG(
AECT..,IJ'IER SHUNT-WOUND Y.2-HP D-C MOTOR CONTROL
r---'
-Simple, low-cost solid-state spHd control
uses bridge rectifier for full-wove rectification
g: ...,11 of a-c supply. Field winding Is permanently
connected across d-c output of bridge. Pro-
vides smooth wide-range control of spHd by
controlling voltage applied to armature.
IZD VIC
GOH1 Speed regulation is 10%.-"SCR Manua~" 4th
Edition, General Eledric, 1967, p 213-215.
Cl
02,.t
+12V
ov
6 16 s 137 1719
p" CzA101 V Yp
8
SPEED-SYNCHRONIZING LEVEL DETECTOR- DZD40 03
Combination of Philips DOA40 opamps and
DZD40 zero detectors delivers logic Informa-
tion on speeds to oloctrlc motors being syn-
chronized, when d-c voltages proportional to
ov
speed are applied to Inputs a and b by ta-
100kQ
19 19
2kll
-12V
8
Q
+12V A1
@ +in
Yn Yn
12 9 4 2 12 9
U3 us p' C2A1 01 V Yp
8
DZD40 03
OY Y Z A2Q28 Yn U8
2151214189
ov
ov
Diodes type BAX13 16 5 13 7 17 19
6
12okn p" C2A1 01 Y Yp
8
DZD40 03
U9
6 6 19
3 OV
•12V 8
@ Yn Yn
4 2 12 9 4 2 12 9
U4 U6
chomotors. If spHd of motor Ml is higher ov -12v

than M2, output A Is high and Al Is zero.
If M2 is fast, Al Is high and A is Hro. If 1okn
difference in motor speeds Is greater than
limits covered by outputs A and Al, oither
81 or 8 is Hro depending on which motor
Is faster. Outputs are used to drivo logic
circuit that malros necessary spood correc•
tions to give synchronlzotlon.-l. J. Lemmons, .._-;.;,.....,Y....;;:Z~A;.p2~0;:2!.:B;....:V,~n..1 UlO
Control Circuit for Motor Spood Synchroniza- 2 15 12 14 18 9
tion, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd-
hovon, Tho Nothorlands, No. 66. ov
SUS SPEED CONTROL-Switching action of

GE 2N4986 (or 2N4990) silicon unilateral switch
C229 permits use of smollor capacitors without af-
fecting reliability of thyristor triggering.-
115V rv Siiicon Unilateral Switch 2N4983/2N4986,
60HZ Gonerol Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 6S.25,
1967.
SERIES WOUND
UNIVERSAL MOTOR
06
1N4003
05
1N4003
01
1N4003
HALF-WAVE FOR SHUNT-WOUND-Field of AC 01
shunt-wound Yi.sth-hp 5,000-rpm 11S-V d-c: LINE 03 2N4172
motor Is supplied through diode D1 during 1N4003
half-cycle in which su Q1 conducts. D2
serves as free-wheeling diode across fleld.- Cl 04
+
"Semicondudor Power Circuits Handbook," 02 2011F 1N4003
Mot~rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-23. 1N4003 25 v
Oc
2N2476 2N2476
-6V
COMMUTATOR-Prlidas up to 0.5 A at 28
V of throe-phase !full-wave power directly
to armature of d..C motor as substitute for 2N2881
2N2881 2N2881
brush-type commutator. Efficiency is 88% o1
at peak load and 75% at rated load. De-
signed for uso with throe external photofot's
that assure zero overlap, preventing switch·
through even if all throe sensors aro acci·
dentally Illuminated simultanoously.-P. A.
Studer, 3-Phase Electronic Commutator for -28V
DC Motors, EDN, Sept. 1, 1969, p 72. o---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --------------
~ a A~
MOTOR CONTROL C:IRC:UITS 445
FIELD
FULL-WAVE D-C MOTOR CONTROL WITH

FEEDBACK-Requires separate connections for
armature and tlold. Full-wave bridge sup•
RI
CR2 CR 2K CR6 GE Al4B plios required d-c voltage for circuit and
GE A45B IW motor. Counter emf of armature provldos
foodback signal. Ono drawback is po11lblllty
SCRI of hunting at low spood sottings, whore thero
GEC22B may not be sufficient time for scr to turn off.
-A. A. Adem, Speed Controls for Universal
Moton, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
Pl CRI 200.57, 1966, p 10.
5K GE Al4B
2W
ARMATURE
CR4 CR5
GE A44B
-
INCREASE
·CW r- - - - " "" " - "" - ,
5-A UNIVERSAL SERIES-WOUND-Uses two

scr's, each conducting on one half-cycle, for
smooth control over entire spood range. May
also bo used as dimmer for 600-W lomp
load.-"Slllcon Controlled Rectifier Experimen-
ter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967, p
57.
I
l..-------
C4
l.OpF
D7
KD2104
RI
PA60
RS
RL IOkO
C2 PULSE-TRIGGERED TRIAC CONTROL-Uses PA·
L.7k0
800µF 60 IC ampliflor connocted as mvbr in control
12sv1 circuit that will sustain or suppress gate
drive for full 180 dog in any half-cycle, to
+ insure relloblo trlac control ovon for strongly
22k0 at v, 001 , • 2LV R7
RJ Inductive motor loads. Triac typo depends
IOknotVcontr • 12V L.7kn on load curront.-Triacs-Operation and Use,
Ycontr The Netherlands, No. 17, 1969.
446 ELECTRONIC CIBOVITS MANUAL
BLACK
ANODE 2 TRIAC POWER CONTROL-Simple and lnox·

(STUD) pensive control may ba used for universal
motors, incandescont lamps, or other devices
to a maximum power of 600 W. Article gives
0
GREEN construction details. Pl is polarized outlet.
1 R2 varies speed or brightness from 0 to 98%,

but for electric drills tho torque will be low
at low speeds. For continuous use ot full
load, mount trlac D2 on heat sink to prevent
ANODE I overheating and 1011 of control.-"Solid State
Projects Manual," Motorola, Phoenix, Arl:r.,
1968, p 55.
WHITE
FULL·WAVE REVERSING D°C MOTOR DRIVE-

Dosignod around SCR2°SCR3 with common
cathodes controlled by ujt Ql and SCR1·SCR4
with common anodes controlled by ujt Q3.
Transistor clomp Q2 synchronizes firing of Q3
to anodo voltages across SCRl and SCR4.
At extreme left-hand position of Rl, full out•
put voltage appears across load. When arm
of Rl is moved to right of cantor, polarity of
load Is ravanod. If Rl is moved rapidly
through center position, plugging occurs
(motor ads 01 gonorator).-"SCR Manual,"
4th Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 216-217.
•1-cio• ........ IJlO, CJt1,(jt1P'J.~P1.U1-Gl •HHt
llf..1-4JD 4"11.Ulmff •11.•11 HOO 0-Wl.l•attt Cl:p Qf ..., .
....1-io•.•••'" •....•~----~~'~,:,~~:u,Olfllll-
•J.•t-UCO G91,111eatt 0.,0s
01
ffiJlll'IA
IJl.US
•s-4'00 o-s.111 ••n c•.c1----1u•'o t.,T1 PUISt 0 U~NSl1,0llCUALQt
1C•4,ICl1.'"'t1C14-· 9C" tYO\f&lt UfllfGDl'lll...
Olliff Cllll HCO.OAlf tla•S'CI"•
-C• \fOt.t&Ht
::> &I lltCOUUtlD IT LOia
A-----------.-----..-----
v - - - - . - -......----~----4------
st• !"'!"'I •to•t r·1·1
e---+---+-----+-----+----l---.-
N--.......--1---1--.----.+-----4---'----I-
RBI I I
A41
+24Y
BRAKING 3..PHASE MOTOR-Circuit deteds

excessive drop in speed of motor and applles of operations on production lino, then blocks.-A1ynchronou1 Motor Braking Control,
d-c braking current to windings to stop motor switches off brokin9 current to avoid burning Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon,
quickly and minimize disruption to soquonco out motor winding. Uses Philips IC logic Tho Netherlands, No. 92, 1970.
HALF-WAVE SCR WITHOUT REGULATION-

Gives maximum conduction an9lo of about
170 des and 8·V flrln9°voltago threshold.
RI Is 75K speed control for 120-V scr's han•
dling loads up to 25 A a•c, CRI is IN3755,
and scr depends on load current rating.-
"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Har•
TYPE
rison, N.J., SP-51, p 241. 2N:S241A
AC
SUPPLY
f"ah Motor
Field Cod
FB 4otf
RI too ..
Rl 4.7 lcfl, 7.0 W

220V + R2 2.0 kn; 2.0 W FB
INl612
"' Cl
•R3 120 0; 0.5 w IOOOMI
R4 = 500 0; 0.5 W ...______ .,___~·
20•
q
*Cl 47 µF; 63 V
CONVERTER FOR FAN MOTOR-Operato1 from
Dl, 02= BYX 10 12-V storage battery, drawin9 2.5 A, and
• these values depend on the develops sufficient powor to drive cooling fan
02 minimum speod requirement, motor at frequency of about 68 Hz without
noiso-produdng d-c motor brushes. Motor
'
MIXER SPEED CONTROL-Single low-cost
only two connections to motor, as compared
to circuits in which thyristor Is between arma•
can bo ordinary rim-drive phonograph motor
with Rold coil rewound as shown, or Gonsot
thyristor provldos smooth continuous speed ture and one field coil.-Slmple Spood Con· 115.011 motor available from Mamco, Ra·
control of universal a•c molar for mixer or trol for Small A. C. Serles Motors, Phlllp1, cine, Wisc. Transistors are RCA 40251.-W.
electric drill. R3 determines minimum spoed Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The F. Franlcarl, Brushle11 D. C. Fan Molar, CQ,
setting. Typical speed ratio Is 3:1. Roquires Netherlands, No. 17, 1968. May 1966, p 49.
OSCILLATOR DELAY LINK MOTOR

IM
l20AMPS
+MAX.
----
1 c
C1
0.3>tf
ca
O.l>af
SYNCHRONOUS SERIES-MOTOR CONTROL-Re- bypoHes currant around scr. Motor Is then tlons to maintain synchronism with ujt fro-
laxation oscillator QI generates triggor pulses without current until arrival of next trigger. quency.-E. K. Howell, Solid State Control for
for scr. With operation from d-c source, scr 02 eliminates most of arcing at S2. Article DC Motors Provides Variable Speed With
conducts current through motor until cam gives detailed description of circuit action Synchronous-Motor Performance, General Elec-
switch on armature closes and momentarily during under-speed and over•speod condl- tric, SyracuH, N.Y., No. 200.43, 1965, ".' 4.
RESISTOR B+
B+
8+
TRANSISTOR SUPPLEMENTS CENTRIFUGAL T. F. Bright, Bridge Circuit Tomporature Sia•

SWITCH-Q1 provides dynamic braking path bilizos Relay Operation, "400 Ideas for Do· Qi.Qt 2N718
for cormature and improves speed ro9ulation. sign Selected from Electronic Dosign," Haydon Q,.Q. 2Nl804
When switch contads open, Q1 Is biasod on Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 98. CR,, CR, 1N750
through R2, to reduce corcing cot contacts.- R,,R, 4.7K
R,.R. 4.7K
R.,R, 4700
B+
R,.R, lOOK
Cir C, 0.1,...F
From To
UNIVERSAL MOTOR capacitor motor
commutator windin11
RI
IOK
l/2W
Pl CAPACITIVE SWITCHING OF WOUND POLES

250K -Can bo used wherever d-c motors or o-c
l/2W SCR I synchronous motors without brushes must op•
GE C22B erato with minimum maintenonco. Ono sol
of four ccopacitor stator plates is provided for
each wound polo of motor, and swilchin9 is
accomplished by mountin9 capacitor rotor on
DIAC motor shaft so It pa11es botwoon stacked
Cl GE ST2
.1,...t stator plates. Rotor plates should bo In•
IOOV sulatod from shaft, and roquiro no electrical
connection bocauso they merely servo to
couple stator soctlons. Madulotod output
from stator is detected and usod to switch
HALF-WAVE CONTROL WITHOUT FEEDBACK- load is removed, motor runs at no-load appropriate wound poles of pormanont-mae-
Diac•triggerod scr, for spoed control of uni• spoctd for setting of Pl .-A. A. Adem, Speed net motor. Amplltudo of modulation is in·
vonal a-c/d·c motor, has wide control range, Controls for Universal Motors, General Elec• dopondont of speed, which moans that capaci·
although absence ~f feodback signal makos tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.47, 1966, p 3, tor system performs equally well for motor
motor slow down a~ load is incroasod. When starting, running, and restarting from stall.
D-c supply Is 100 V and oscillator is 1OO·kHz
slne·wavo.-"Seloctod Eloctronic Circuitry,"
NASA SP-5046, 1966, Government Printing
Office, Washington, D.C., p 70.
220V l.SpF
""
250pH
BASIC SCS CONTROL FOR TRIAC-Usos BRY39

silicon controlled switch with triac for con• motors. Control range is 20 to 170 deg. Triacs-Operation and Use, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
trolling power to low·indudanco loads such largo changos In lino voltage coffcsct trigger Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho Netherlands, No.
as lamps, hoators, and squirrel-cage fan anglo excessively for certain applications.- 17, 1969.
STARTING WINDING
1-- - - Roe :-7- - - - - -1 TRIAC MOTOR-STARTING SWITCH-Used to
control starting winding of V:z-V single-phase
I I 115-V induction motor. Elimlnatos need for
I SINGLE centrifugal switch that would cut out winding
I I PHASE when rotor reachos about 75% of full-load
0
INDUCTION
I Roe C2 I MOTOR speed. Operation Is baseci on starting cur-
I =2 150pF I rent in maln winding being several times
I ROTOR I running cunont. Trlac Ql is triggered by
L-- ------ _ _ _J drop across Rl whenever main-winding cur•
AC
MAIN rent exceeds threshold level. Values shown
LINE
WINDING are for motor having peak starting current of
01 R2 40 A and peak running current of 8 A, with
MAC2-6 5 trlac triggering on only for currents above 12
R1 C1 A. Current drops below 12 A after about 12
0.04 1 pF cycles.-"Somlconductor Power Circuits Hand·
300 v book," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 4-5.
3W
•10 Vdc AT fl7 mA H s •18 V"c A.J2o mA H s

U2mAFS • ·~7AFS
HALF-WAVE SCR WITH REGULATION-Highly

effective for speed control of universal motors.
Counter emf, which Is function of speed, de-
termines point in each positive half-cycle at
which su fires. Skip-cycling may o"ur at low
speed settings of R2, making motor speed
erratic. Uses 1N3755 for both diodes for
motors drawing up to 25 A from 120-V a-c
line. Book gives valuos of Rl and R2 for
eight different scr types.-"Slllcon Power Cir- 4o-400 HZ CONTROL-Uses wideband IC am• May also be usod as servo amplifier. Deliv·
cuits Manual," RCA, Hcmlson, N.J., SP-51, p pllfler to drive 500-ohm load through trans- ors 29 W.-"Linoar Integrated Circuits," RCA,
244. former and four-transistor power amplifier. Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 274.
r--
--
OSCILLATOR
-.., DELAY LINK ,-----
' MOTOR
---,
IM I
R1
471<
!20 AMP
MAX. I
I
I
I
SCR
I
G·EC30F I
_____ .JI
L---
_ _ _ _ _J
L----
UJT-SCR CONTROL FOR SERIES MOTOR-Re- make it turn off (commutato). Time botwoon quire a-c synchronous motor. Use of cam
laxation osdllator Ql generates periodic tum-on by ujt and tum-off by scr depends switch gives simplldty and low cost.-E. K.
pulses that trigger scr carrying motor current. on motor load. Arrangement provides high Howell, Precise Speed Control, High Torque
At one or more points In rotation of motor starting torque at any speed below dosired Can Now be Combined in DC Motors, Elec-
shaft, cam bypasses current around scr to synchronous speed that would otherwiso re- tronic Design, Doc. 6, 1965, p 20-25.
450 EL E 0 TB 0 .NI 0 0 I B 0 U ITS MANUAL
fl
SCAI SPEED CONTROL-For 2·A universal motors
Al
use 2N1774 for SCRl, 3 A for Fl, and lOK
for RT. For 5·A motor use 2N685 for SCRI,
SPEEO
llA40 ·-
IW 10 A for FT, and SK for RT.-D. Coopor, SCR's
and Triacs-the Rovolutlon Continues, E/oc•
CONTROL Ironies World, Au9. 1968, p 25-28.
1.n llOV
llTV A.C, zw
ZOOA
IW UNIVERSAL
MO TOA
LOAD
SWITCHING 3-PHASE MOTOR-Philips IC NOR

circuits, power amplifler, and TIM thyristor
tri99er module, when conneded to brid9e cir-
cuits as shown, will switch on 3-hp 3-phaso
motor M when 1-level pulse is applied to In•
put A, and will switch motor off when I-level
is applied to B. Temperature-sensitivo PTC
resistor provides overload proledion.
Values are: RI 22; R2 1O; Cl-C2 1 µF at
1,000 V; aR diodes are BYX25/800R; thyris-
tor TH Is BTX12/600R. Thyristor bridges aro
ldentical.-C. Rosiello, "Control System De-
sign Manual for 60-Sories Norbits," Philips,
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho
Nothorlands, 1968, p 147•
.
HA
.,,,c,
• -••
>-nft
SIMPLE SPEED CONTROL-Simplifled version of

armature voltage bridge for sensins speed
provides economical control for- d-c shunt Diodes D3 and D4 are Mullord 8YX22-SO, C2 trol Circuit Do1i9n for D. C. Shunt Motors
motor. R7 sets spoed. Uses Mullard thyris• Is 20 µF, and R3 and R4 depend on armature Supplied from A. C. Mains, Phillps, Pub.
tor stack rated at twi~o motor full-load cur• resistance. Report gives complete dosl9n ln- Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nether·
rent, plus two other Mullard modules. formatlen.-J. Merrett, Thyristor Speed Con· londa, No. 438, 1967.
Load
20.A MOTOR SPEED CONTROL-New five-
layer F001h switching thyristor trl99ered by
1ookn blac provides smooth wide-angle control of
speed for a·c motors rated at up to 20 A.
~ Wiil also handlo lamp or hooter loads. Speed
AC 200V control i~ 450K pot.-FLS Five-Layer Switch
(Hitachi ad), Journal of Asia Electronics
Union, No. 1, 1970, p 32.
0.1 p.F
INPUT
Al
1500 SERIES
22 K flELD
22K SCRI
T r.:
V9 ~·---._.,....,..,...,._.....,.....J
G(
CUBlt?O
s;~:r
11111.ac
9.IY
1
IZOVAC "c
Gt
CR3
4XL9.IB
I
couples pulses to scr, to provide full-wave SLOW-SPEED HALF-WAVE WITH FEEDBACK-

ELIMINATING SNEAK-PATHS-Provides electri·
control of a•c motor through flve·diode Gives stable operation at all speeds. Motor
cal Isolation between d·c control circuit and
bridge. Serles resistor and capacitor across residual field provides speed feedback signal.
aoe line, without resorting to bulky Isolation
bridge suppress motor•producod translents.- Circuit p~mlts very short scr conduction time,
transformer. With bias as shown, ujt re-
S. Stockier, Motor Control System Isolates AC for stable operation at low speeds. Nood for
laxation ascillator starts when Cl charges to
Unes from DC Circuits, "400 Ideas far Design separate armatvro and fleld connections to
7 V. When input control vokage Is Increased
Selected from Electronic Design," Haydon motor Is possible drawback.-A. A. Adam,
above 7 V doe to increase speod of motor,
Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 217. Spood Controls for Universal Motors, Gen•
pulse repetition rate lncreasos up to prr cor-
oral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.47, 1966,
responding to zoner limit of 9.1 V. Tl
p 5.
field coii
BTIOI
RI
820 R3
100
R5
100
ELECTRIC DRILL SPEED CONTROL-Uses low•

INPUT
cost thyristor and minimum of othor com-
Q3
ponents to provide smooth continuous speed
1
2N3638
control above minimum speod setting doter•
mined by values of R3 and Cl, which are
typically 270 ohms and 16 pF. RI Is 5.6K,
R2 Is 1K, and diodes are BYXIO. Developed
for use with aoe series unlvonal motors In ....
hand drills, food mixers, and similar appll• REVERSING SWITCH-With Input open, per- and 04 conduct, turning off Q2 and 03.
ancos.-Simple Speed Control for Small A. C. manent-magnet doe motor runs in one direc- Applications include reversal of batt•ry·
Sorios Motors, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma tion. When Input Is shorted by ordinary powered tape recorders.-C. 8, Smith, SPST
Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 17, switc'h, switching transistor, or other means, Switch Reverses PM DC Motor Rotation, E/oc•
1968. motor rovorsos. Closing switch makes 01 tronic Design, April 26, 1967, P 245 •
2·A UNIVERSAL FOR POWER TOOLS-Provides

full·wavo control over entire spoed range,
with essentially constant speed for any given
setting of RI under changing load conditions.
Operatos smoothly at low speeds, but motor
may overheat because built-in fan cannot
provide sufficient coaling air at low speeds.
Intended only far universal sories-wound
motor, but can bo used for dimming lamps
up to 240-W.-"Sillcon Controlled Rectifier Ex·
porimenter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
1967, p 53.
K02103
Re
15000
OC OUPUT TO
REGENEATIYE LOAD
3 PHASE INPUT
FROM
r--------------- ---
1 .-~...~~~~~-+~~.....___.
TRANSFORMER I
I
I REGENERATIVE·LOAD POWER ABSORBER-
I
I Uses scr's In regenerative central circuit to
I absorb energy from regenerative loads such
I
I as elevator and crane motors. Is quiet, has
I adjustable time delay, and has long life.
A-c line variations do not affact set point.
Circuit valuas are for 1.5·kW regenerative
control unit having 220 V at no-load. Re·
generative load Is picked up at 230 V and
dropped out at 220 V.-S. P. Leo, Regonerativo
Load Enorgy Absorbed by SCR Circuit, Elec-
tronic Design, May II, 1964, p 87-89.
+28v
CW LIMIT
-----,I r----------, ANTENNA
I I
I I
A I
GEAR
TRAIN
DC I
I MOTOR:
L---------.J
CCW LIMIT
IN4719
.,,.
1k ...,, +28
01
2N1711 1k
YM 0
Rp
10
~28
SRF-REVERSING-Damplng resistor RD dissi· -

pates initial energy of motor when power is slops, Q3 turns on and pulses latching relay tenna whon limit switch operatos.-J. E. Bjorn•
removed, and develops signal th.at turns on L to reverse molar connections. Con bo used holt, Dynamic Braking EMF Signals Motor To
QI as mater is slowing down. When motor to reverse scan diroction of motor-driven an· Reverse, Electronics, June 22, I 970, p 84.
R3
5.6K
l/2W
TYPE TYPE
IN375'4 IN375'4
TYPE
FULL-WAVE SCR WITHOUT REGULATION- IN37&4
Simplo full·wavo proportional control uses
a-c phase shifting to provide gato phase-angle
control. Small pulse transformer provides
isolation. Conduction angle range is 30 to
150 deg. Book gives values of all compo·
nents for eight different types of scr used
with both 120-V and 240-V a-c linos.-"Sili•
con Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, FULL-WAVE SCR UNREGULATED WITH 5-170 supply, R2 is 75K and scr's depend on motor
N.J., SP.SI, p 248. DEG CONDUCTION RANGE-Large conduction curront rating. For 240-V a-c, R2 is 1SOK.-
angle range Is more desirable when higher "Sillcon Powor Circuits Manual.'' RCA, Harri-
power Is to bo controlled. For 120-V a-c son, N.J., SP.SI, p 249.
(10) .03 "'"36 v

R31 - R40
R31 R22
2Nll65
OR MP505 (10)
QB TO Q17
250 K
02 c2 03
2200 Rl9
uuf 120
R5
20W
6.8 K MOTOR
2N697
MR1210 0
8
70 A
1N4001
01
10Ml2Z GND
lN2976 L---4~~~--1~-+---4~---_.'VI
PWM CONTROL FOR 36·V GOLF CART-
Handlos up to 200 A under stall or starting for control of series d-c motor. Book tells trol spood.-"Clrcuits Manual," Motorola,
conditions by using ten transistors in parallel how pulse width modulation is used to con- Phoonix, Arir., 1965, p 6-4-8.
454 ELECTRONIC OIROVITS MANUAL
RI R7
u1cg
SCRI
VAC GE C22B
117 VOLTS
Pl
150
FAST
SETTING
HAl.f..WAVE WITH FEEDBACK-Uses fndback +

by motor residual flold to Induce back emf C2
In armature proportional to apood. Su Is
located between armature and sorioa flold
VOitage
winding. When load on motor Is lncroasod,
..1..-
foedback adion automatically advances firing d~de
angle of scr, thereby increasing motor torquo BZV94-

whllo maintaining ouontlally constant speed. gz
Chlof drawback is 25-W power dissipation In
Rl ·Pl. Operation ls unstable at low spoeds.
-A. A. Adam, Speed Controls for Universal I
sibccn ltll
Motors, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. COiiWiid l.2k0
switch
200.47, 1966, p 4.
LOW°COST THYRISTOR CONTROL OF SMALL scs at point In each half-cycle corresponding
FHP MOTOR-Phillps BT102 thyristor makes to seHing of spoed control R2, to giv.. 7:1
smooth, continuous speed control economical speed range. Tachemotor is disk of coramic
for sowing machines, food mixers, eloctric magnetic material mounted on motor shaft,
drills, and other appllancos using small frac- inducing pulses In coll wound on suitably
tional-horsepower motors. Tachometer on shaped stator.-Serles Motor Speed Control
motor shaft provides feedback to stabilize Systems with Tachometer, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
spood against variations In motor loading, Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho Nothorlands, No.
while zener provides stabill1atlon against line 6, 1968.
voltage changes. Thyristor Is triggered by
+Vs
ISV
T1,r2 ~R~~fzCRl.IER 111

LINE
115VCc
••
111 Q4 Q3
L R
ll'l:'¥i~~~~o'ir~U~t orL
TRIACS REVERSE CAPACITOR MOTOR-Simple
trlac bridge controli direction of rotation for
fracilonal·horsopow, r capacitor-start motor.
Power la obtained from a-c molar lino. Loft
and right rotation command signals aro ob-
CONTROL
INPUT
oo..... ~~~~...... t 01,02 - 2N2906
tained from trigger circuit (shown also) 03-06- 2N2222
PROPORTIONAL D-C CONTROL-Drives 15-V DIODES- IN647
through transformers Tl and T2, with trigger
In tum controlled by low.fovol logic from d-c pormanent-magnot motor rated at 100 creased from 0.8 to 2.5 V, with proportional
flip-flop or othor source.-High-Volta90 Trlacs mA. Bridge-typo proportional control ampli- chango in speed. Control switch determines
Reverse Capacitor Motor, "Electronic Circuit flor Q1..Q4 is driven by common-emitter diroctlon of rotatlon.-J. Ayer, Proportional
Doslgn Handhook.'' Tab Books, Blue Ridge stages Q5-Q6. Motor voltage varies from DC Motor Control Requires Low-Level Inputs,
Summit, Pa., p 33-34. 9.5 to 14.7 V when control Input voltage is in· Eledrenic Design, Aug. 15, 1968, p 236.
______ , SOYOLT
...
••
r-
I
nno 1 .,,.
I
I
I
I ,,
IOOK SCRI
HALF-WAVE NEON-TRIGGERED-Simplest and
I l/IW lowest-cost speed control for unlversal, shunt,
I Gt:Al41 I
GICHI
llO..C I I or p·m motors. Uses one scr and minimum
I I number of components. Serles network R1-
--·
410141
IL.. _ _ _ I Gt:SAM P1.C1 supplies phase-shift signal ta neon that
fllllllOll.T
Cll-CTIH
'Oii SllUNT
UH triggers scr on at varying times In positive a-c
FIELD o.,.,Cl
IOOV ~
half-cycles.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, G•n·
oral Electric, 1967, p 215.
RI
331C
l/2W
C3
.OZpF 200Y
HALF-WAVE WITH IMPROVED SPEED REGU· 117Y.11e SCRZ

R2
LATION-Rellablo and economical circuit with IOIC GE CI06f
excellent performance at low spaad Is 112w,...._ __, SCAI
achieved by using ramp charge on Cl to pro- C2 CRI GE CUB
vide stable trl99ering point for SCR2, which .ll'f !IOV 1i£ A14B OR
In tum delivers pulse rather than continuous Cl GE C328
Pl
current for triggering gate of SCR1 .-A. A.
Adem, Spoed Controls for Universal Motors,
General Electric, Syracu111, N.Y., No. 200.47,
"''
!IOV 7.51<
l/2W
llC llZW
UNIVERSAL
1966, p a. MOTOR
CA2
GE Al48
MINIATURE
27 0-C MOTOR
R1""20
K at 830 RPM/V
150p.f
+6v
0.t TO 4,0v
CONTROL
VOLTAGE, Vs
-6v
CONSTANT SPEED WITHIN 2%-Negativo Im· noded with both positive and negative food· S. Bon-Yaakov, Negative Impedance Stabilizes
podanco In series with motor makes speed back serves as negative impedance converter. Motor's Speed, Eledronlcs, Mar. 30, 1969, p
011ontially lndepondent of load:· Opcimp con- Capacitor prevents circuit from oscllloting.- 94.
STARTING WINDING
r--------
1
----
Roe•7n
--- ------1
I I
I I
I I SINGLE PHASE
I
I I INOUCTIOtf
'
I
I
I
I
I
0
ROTOR ____ .JI'
I
I
I
MOTOR TRIAC STARTER FOR ~-HP INDUCTION-Ro•
plac111 mechanical centrifugal switch In dis•
connecting start winding when motor
AC L----
MAIN
roach" about 75% of full-load speed. Volt·
ago across Rl, proportional to current in
LINE WINDING
main winding, gales triac; use 1llde-wiro re-
QI sistor initially lo select correct triggor lovel.-
G. V. Fay, Reliable Semiconductor Roplac"
RI Cl Centrifugal Motor Starting Switch, Elodronic
0.04 lfLF Design, Aug. 16, 1969, p 248.
3W 300V
I.OW "'1111111 KIGM

UP'IOI""" UPTOSIW UPTD15MIP
NAU[Pl.ATt NAMIPl.ATt NAME Pl.ATE
111
HALF-WAVE UNIVERSAL SERIES MOTOR CON· RZ 1011: IW UC2W llCZW
TROL-Used In blenders, hand tools, vacuum
cleaners, mixers, and light Industrial appli· U•Zw
-
RI 47K1/2W ll•ZW
cations. Gives equivalent of infinitely vari- 'ca
able tap on motor. For full-speed operation RS nc:vzw ~··12• iSOXllZW
IZOVIC 1
RZ~...,.......+~~M-CR-~-+--">tv.~~ CPTtON&L oPf1CN£L
with half•wave circuit, 80-V motor must be
usod. Article gives theory of operation In
G£A148
Cl 05•t '°v 10,.1 -
io,.,_
detail. Tabla gives valuos of components 01,.1 tOV OJ,.t tOV
CZ 0.1,.1 IOY
required for throo different siz111 of motors. OPTICH£L oPTJONOI.
-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General Elec· SCRI GE GE GE
C106B C2211l'O CUI
trlc, 1967, p 210-211. CRZ
G(Al49
s, TAPE ADVANCE
STEPPING
CLOCKED IN4004
MOTOR COIL-
OPERATION 50 OHMS
0.15M
60-V RMS
A-C
SUPPLY
0 1 - PROGRAMABLE UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR (GE TYPE 013TI)

0 2 - SILICON UNILATERAL SWITCH (GE TYPE 2N49B71
o, - SILICON-CONTROLLED RECTIFIER (GE TYPE CI06Bl I
PROGRAM-TAPE STEPPER-lnadvortenl ad· point of pro9rammable ult QI. When QI Sl opens and closes at prescribed time ln-
vance of d-c stepping motor by supply nol10 fires, su Q3 Is turned on durin9 po1ltlvo half- lervals of about 1 s, clependln9 on time con-
is minimized if motor is activated by a-c cycles of a-c supply voltage, onerglzln9 step- stanl R1-C1.-J. H. Silverman, A-C Source
sienal. Tape advanco 1i9nal closes either Sl ping motor that indexes tape. Sus 02 en- Drives Tap..Sloppln9 Motor, Efodronin, Nov;
or S2, depondin9 on mode of operation sures that scr is 9alecl on at boglnnin9 of 24, 1969, p 109,
chosen. Closing S2 charges Cl to breakovor each positive half-cycle. In cloclcocl mode,
R1
01
2N4172
START~
I
AC C1
+
5.0µF
C2 10 µF
100 v AC STOP~ ( THEMAL
OVERl..OAO
LINE 100 v R3 SUPPLY
1.0 k
COMPENSATED HALF-WAVE DRIVE-Speed A·C MOTOR STARTER-Momentary closing of

regulation is much botter than for uncom• start button lotchos triac on and starts motor.
pensated drive. Back emf of motor provides Momentary closing of stop button, closing of
feedback whon scr Is off, to compensato for thermal overload contact, or loss of lino volt·
changes In load. Used with Yisth·hp 5,000- ago stops motor. Roslstor and capacitor
rpm 115·V d-c motor on 120.V a•c llno.- values are given in speciflcotions for trlac
"Somiconductor Power Circuits Handbook," chosen to motch motor rating.-F. W. Guts·
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 1-19. willer and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Semi·
conductor Applications, General Electric, Syra•
cuse, N.Y., No. 671.1., 1965, p 8.
I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7 SWITCH S1
I I
DRIVEN BY
MOTOR;
// CLOSE0<1r20"
"SPEED"
I OPEN=340
2M 220
I
PM
470
r--- rl MOTOR
ARMATURE
I
IOK
1 I G-E
I I IN4U54
I I
4 + I
I
TO.:.
6V-
I
I
2200
L-----
G-E
-.,I
2N292!1 I
I IK
I
I I
0.0!1 I
I
I G-E
2N292!1 I
I
I
100
I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ JI
UJT CONTROL FOR P·M MOTOR-Ujt relaxa- speeds, cam on motor shaft should close SI electrically. Speed Is synchronously related to
tion oscillator drives flip-flop to energize small several times per revolution. Motor speed o«lllator frequency.-E. K. Howol~ Precise
battery-operated pormanont•magnot motor. can be chan9ed in dl«roto octave stops by Speed Contra~ High Torque Can Now be Com•
Rotation of motor shaft closes SI, reversing chan9in9 switch closures per revolution frem blnod In DC Motors, Elocfronic D111i9n, Dec. 6,
fllp-flop and turning motor off. At low 1 to 2 to 4 to 8, etc., either mechanically or 1965, p 2~25.
-2ov
470 OHM
.oz
Vo
Cr
1.0
HYBRID SYMMETRICAL MVBR-Addition of ult

gives perfect symmetrical square-wave output
without need for balance control. lor9ost
copocitor is anly 1 µF.-T. P. Sylvon, The Uni-
junction Transistor Characteristics and Applico•
tions, Generol Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No,
90.10, 1965, p S2.
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I
: I I
~---r---r--.;-~+---~---P.~;...
I : .....:
I I I I l
-10
I
i.o---r--·
:
--T---
:
: :
I
---1--------~---
:
I
.l
:
I I I
'"---t---
I
---t---
I
I
---~--- ---~---1
I I I
-20 "===~·==~~..J!l.....--1:::==~·==::!.__..l:____:
..
0 1.0
TIME ISECONOSI
.---------------....----------------0---c +IZ
r-----------------------------------....---0-zov
4700HM 470 OHM
200 µtd
+
2_f0 µfd
Q!
2N491
i -tii I
I
I
+121 I I I
I I I I I I I
Vo
•B'- -L- +--1----t--I" -~--i
~ _l -1--~-~--f
VOLTS I I
I I
•4 -r--1
I I I I I I I Vo
l ! I I I
6
I
7
I
8
(VOLTS)
0 2 3 4 5
TIME ISECONOSI
HYBRID UNSYMMETRICAL MVBR-Usos npn
tronslstor flip-flop with ujt. Waveform shown
Is for volues specified for RT; with potentlom·
TIME (SECONOSI
eten here, lengths of two ports of timing
period con b. odjustod over range of up to BASIC TWO-TRANSISTOR CIRCUIT-Included
1,000 to 1. · Protective 3K resistors should for comporison, because output waveform
thon be In series with each pot.-T. P. Sylvan, deviates considerably from ldoal square wove.
Tho Unijunction Transistor Chorocterlstics and -T. P. Sylvon, Tho Unljunction Transistor
Applications, General Elodric, Syracuse, N.Y., Choracteristics and Applications, General Eloc•
No. 90.10, 196S, p 53. tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.10, 1965, p 51.
MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 463
2pf 8.2 k
30k
1'._1AI
IAli.r--
--1(..-2 pS
IB>...r---L
~ 16mS ~
OUTPUT
FD777 15pf
IOk
E-
Ik
FD777
fD771 200pf
10•
100 k
FD777
CONTROLLED BIPOLAR-Potltlvo trigger Input both pulses are independently adjustable.-G.
gives negative output pulse, while negative T. Flynn, Sequential Bipolar Multivibrator, EEE,
trigger gives positive pulse. Durations of April 1969, p 122-123.
30 k.Cl.
..-------------------o+l2V
2000pF 2700tl
+15V
9
OUTPUT
lk
FD777 10 kJl. 1.5 11F
lk
F0777
~ 200 pF
F0777 IOkl\
IOpFT 100 kll

HP5082·2800
D3 FDIOO
TRIGGER
Y INPUT
SEQUENTIAL BIPOLAR-Generates 2·µs nega·
tivo pulse followod by 16-ms positive pulto,
each time circuit Is tri99ered. Will trigger
as often as once every 20 ms. Output ampll· FAST-RECOVERY ONE SHOT-Pulse width of
tudes are -7 and +7 V. Duration of each four tran1l1tot mvbr is determined by d-c
0
pulse is independently adjustablo over wide voltage applied to base of Q4.-G. Marosi,
range by changing circuit valuos.-G. T. Flynn, Four-Transistor Monostable Multi Shortens Re-
Sequential Bipolar Multivlbrator, EEE, April covery Time, E/ertronic Design, Aug. 17, 1964,
1969, p 122-123. p 201-202.
464 ELEOTBONIO OIBOll'ITS MANUAL
R3 R4
22K 22K
o, 02
1N691 1N691
VARIABLE WIDTH AND DUTY CYCLE-Isolating
c and dividing timing resistor of astoble mosfet
Rl rnvbr Into two controls gives independent
Ql R2 Q2
HRN8318D lOM lOM HRN8318D control over pulse width and duty cycle, to
form basis for highly flexlble pulse generator.
-C. R. Perkins, "Application of MOSFET De-
vices to Elodronic Circuits," Hughes, Newport
Beach, Cal., 1968, p 24•
...
OUTPUT
TWO PULSES PER TRIGGER-Pulse duration and

interval are independently adjustable. Per-
formance is equivalent to that of throo ona-
shots.-D. R. Happo, Two-Pulse Monostable,
EEE, May 1967, p 84.
ALL 0100ES:IN3064 -5V
BASIC MULTI VIBRATOR
RL RI R2 R4 RS RL
47 kn 2 Mil IOM11 ~o kn
CRI
NORMAL OUTPUT INVERTED OUTPUT
Q2
Dl3T2
Q3
2NS1721 R6
680 kll
O.l·HZ WITH OUTPUT AMPLIFIERS-Addition
I of arnpllllor stages Q3 and Q4 to singla-
capacltor low·frequoncy programmabla ujt 0
Q4
mvbr Increases load capability and gives
choice of positive or negative output pulses.- 2NS172
R. Muth, Eliminate a Capacitor in Low•
- Frequency Multivibrators, EDN, Doc. 1, 1969,

p 61-62.
DOUBLER FOR MVBR-Circult In dashed rac-

tangle doubles output froquoncy of astable
mvbr Ql-02 to extend operating rango.
May also be used with most other relaxation
oscillators. Wlht values shown, output fre-
quency is 5.5 MHz, pulse width 86 ns, rise
time 15 ns, and fall time 5 ns.-D. It:. Hoppe,
Frequency Doubler for Relaxation Oscillators,
EEE, Fob. 1967, p 147-148.
+9TO+l2V
OUT
01 02 ~50k
R
FAST-RECOVERY ONE-SHOT-Simple modifica- Al.L 01 ODES - 15940

01,02- 2N5305 DARLINGTON PAIR OR TWO 2N3705
tion (dashed rectangle) cuts recovery time to
50 ns, as compared to about 6 p.s for basic
one-shot. Modification also improves output 140-1,400 HZ ASTABLE-Wlde frequency range
waveform and reduces dynamic output im· is achieved simply by adding DI, D2, and R
podance.-M. Felcheck and W. Kirschner, Im· to standard mvbr. Mark-space ratio 11 con•
proved One-Shot with Fast Recovery, EEE, Od. slant, Range shown for R covers entire fre-
1967, p 142-143. quoncy range of mvbr.-5. H. Dolding, 3 Extra
Parts Give Astable Multi a Wide Frequency
Rongo, Electronic Design, July 5, 1969, p 82
and 84.
Vee• Ve•
+18V +18V +6V
------------------12v
22k 820 1511 01 L

+6V
03 OA5
o_n_lf'HC
O.tpf
OA85
llN2701
llN2701
INPUT
o-j
20pf NPN
2N708 ](
:n o,
OC72
(2N708)
02
OC77
l2N708)
ALL DIODES IN3069

Vee• -18V Ve•
-----Hw
-18V -6V
REGENERATIVE SHARPENING OF RISE TIME-
Complementary transistors, connected as
shown, speed transition time of monostable ZENER BLOCKS STRAY PULSES-Zenor D2 acts
mvbr enough to make it indistinguishable with three conventional diodes in mvbr to
from 4D-ns rise and fall times of transistors block pulses from power supply and Induc-
themselves. Pulso repetition frequency Is tive load, and thereby prevent premature
960 kHz with values shown.-G. Klein, Mono- triggoring.-R. Ilic, Diodes Provide Noise Im·
stable Multivibrator Has a Sharp Riso Time, munlty for Monostable Muhivibrators, Elet-
Electronic Design, Fob. 17, 1964, p 88-89. tronlcs, Jan. 9, 1967, p 106-107.
.. 12v Vee +'1.8V
Rz Rs R7
Z20k 4,7k
*OMITTED WITH
TEFLON TIMING CAP * +4V r l Oii
o.sv.J LofF
'°"
GATE INPUT
0.005,.F
51 >-;1-----
IOK
Sz~05 2.37K IOK

,.F
·6V SYMMmlCAL A-C OUTPUT-Addition of 03

to keyed mvbr eliminates d·c level shift of
TRIGGERABLE·ANYTIME MONO-Consists of output that would cause sovore distortion in
modlflod SchmiH trigger and one additional a-c coupled load. Another advantage is that
stage that performs function of mono without circuit starts instantly with full-width first
having its drawback of Ignoring Input triggers pulso. Astable .mvbr 01-02 is keyed by
during output pulso. Circuit may be retrig· switching charging voltage of C2. Mvbr os•
gored at any time from any numbor of ciliates at about 3 kHz for +4 V gate Input,
sources. Triggers occurring during output and is turned off when gate Is below 1 V,-
pulso simply resaturate first transistor, dis- M. Convorse, Keyed Multlvibrator Produces
charging 0.1-µF capacitor to negative supply Symmetrical A·C Output, EEE, Nov. 1968, p
voltage and initiating normal pulse period. 141.
Values shown givo 5-ms pulse wldth.-B.
Pearl, A Retriggerablo Pseudo-Mono, EEE, Doc.
1966, p 78-79.
+IOv
lk O.lpf lk
IN914
221L 22k
OUTPUT
380pf 380pf
52
AUTOMATIC 1
o, MANUAL: 02
2N3646 I 2N3646
I
I
+IOv
y TRIGGER Piii.SE
+21.z----1..· - - - - - - - - -
+ZO I ---- N.C.
MICROSWITCH
Vc1
+zo I'
N.O.
+z
O.tpf IOk
+IZ
+z
-10v
+211
I ____ { __ _ ASTABLE-MONO SWITCH-With S2 In auto•
+15 matic position, circuit runs as unsymmotrlcal
~;R; ;~E-S;;_;ilh basic circuit shown, astablo mvbr generating 1.5-µs pulses at 150-
all voltaaos return to Initial values at ond of kHz repetition rate, for tasting counter and
timing cycle, so timing period is Independent logic circuits at high switching speeds.
of trl99or rate and duty cyclo.-T. P. Sylvan, Manual position gives one-shot actlon.-D.
Tho Unljundion Transistor Characteristics and Haggen, Switch Converts Multivlbrator from
AppUcallons, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., Astablo to Ono-Shot, Electronics, Nov. 28,
No. 90.10, i1965, p 55. 1966, p 80,
+4¥
(LOGIC
SUPPLY I
IK
FAIRCHILD
Fp.l. 91429
DUAL TWO
INPUT GATE
1·2¥_fl
+6.5V
+24V TRIGGER
+l.3V 50pF INPUT
TRIGGER IN ol
CURRENT-MODE MONO-Maximum repetition WIDE-RANGE ONE-SHOT-Combining two
rate is lMH1. Timing Interval or delay in cross-coupled NANO gates with ujt gives
returning from quasi-stable to steady state is stable, wide-ranee on-hot mvbr having
almost comparable to recovery time of capac- complementary outputs, with dolays of 100
itor.-"Hlgh Speed Switching Transistor Hand- ms to 20 s, in minimum spa~e.-A. C. Ward,
book," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 280. NAND Gatos and UJT Form Stable Hybrid
Monostable Multi, Electronic Dosl9n, April 26,
1965, p 45-46.
VERSATILE MVBR CONTROL-Constant-current

transistors Q3 and Q3' control frequency of
mvbr Ql-Q2 by controlline char9ln9 current
throu9h cron-coupling capacitors Cl and C2.
This char9lng current is, In turn, determined
by input vohage on 04 adlng as voltag..
variable resistor. Circuit works equally -11
for sine, sawtooth, or square-wave modula·
tlen on 04. For d·c control, C3 is shorted
and R2, R3, and R4 adjusted 10 Q4 Is off
when input Is zero. With values shown,
maximum linear swing of 20 kHz is obtained
lvcc I I •cc I for 100.kHz output carrior.-D. H. Roose, Jr.,
+12Y +12• Varying Capacitor Char90°Up Controls Multi•
vibrator's Rongo, Electronics, Doc. 25, 1967,
p 69.
OUTPUT
Eour
fc• 100kbz
+v,
+25V
V I ./1·-- + 12.5V
E ~ l-+3V
v0 +--...- l t.......~ v82 , .--.- + 21 v
SINGLE-UJT MVBR-Frequoncy Is about 1 kH1. 2N491 L....---1 ..___ + 16 v
Article gives equations for calculating times HD6001 1 / I · - - + 0.7
for tho two periods shown in wavoforms.-
Yo V k
T. P. Sylv11n, The Unljunction Transistor Ch11r•
acterlstlcs 11nd Appllcotlons, Genor11I Electric,
- -a.sv
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.10, 1965, p 74.
v cc
+12v
270 270
470pl 470pf
03
2N3250
NEG.TRIG
T C2 +
IN:S4 IN34 3 3µ.F'
QI
2N718
1100,.._ __, Re
0.'l'f
2.7k
I 560
20G-300 KHZ TUNABLE-Froquency is changed

ONE-SHOT SWITCH-Throe-transistor equiva-
lent of scr applies power to d-c load when
tri99ered by either positive or negative pulse.
with 500-ohm pot. Base bias is obtained Circuit draws negllgible standby current. Ar-
through diodo ' network to ensure reliable ticle gives equation for determining limo
starting.-M. W. Egerton, Tunable Multlvi- load current Is cut off.-D. Bron, Three-Tran-
brator Starts Reliably, "400 Ideas for Dosign sistor Circuit functions as a One-Shot SCR,
Solocted from Electronic Doslgn," Haydon Book Electronic Dosign, March 1, 1970, p 81-83.
Co., N.Y., 1964, p 184.
470
•IOV
TR2
Cl TRI
330pF
o--1----......
C2
0-16.µF
INTEGRATED
FLIP FLOP
RI R2 R6
39 390 60
kn n R4 n
16
n
FREE-RUNNING IC FLIP-FLOP-Only flvo oxtar-

nal components aro neodod ta convert stand-
-2ov I ard Fairchild or Amolco IC flip-flop to
EMITIER-COUPLEQ MONO-Delivers 500-mA astablo or free-running mvbr. R3 makes cir-
output pulso helving duration of 1.25 µ.s. cuit self-starting. Artlclo givos frequency
Transistors are BFYSO, and diode is AAZ12.- oquation.-G. Domjanonko, External Connee>
Applications of tho BFYSO, BFY51 and BFY52, lion Convorts lntogratod Flip-Flop To Mono-
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, stable, Electronic Design, Aug. 17, 1964, p
Tho Netherlands,! No. 428, 1965. 198-200.
-6V
Rs R5
3K 360
Rg
IK c,
r-----.
IL I
I
I I
I L- .,
I I ov
I ._ - - - - - , (HIGH
C CONDUCTANCE
I 5 I GERMANIUM!
I R~ I
I ~~I
I I
I I
11 Rn I
1.51<
I I
I I
I R9 R 10 R 12 I
I 3.9K e20 2.2K CRz I
I (SILICON OIODEI I
L- - - - - - - - - _+!_V _ - - - - _J MULTI-INPUT ASTABLE IC-Components out•

BACKWARD MONO-Changing capacitively sido dashod box are on Motorola MC301 IC
coupled input of conventional monostable having amltter-couplod logic. Connection
mvbr to direct coupling permits selocting one shown gives gated astable mvbr in which fre-
pulse from series of pulses, providing signal quency Is determined by values of components
whenever pulse is missing from pulse train, and supply voltage V. Oscillations stop when
and indicating null in servo system. Article any one of tho four input levels is high.
describes each application in dotail, with Features include fast oporati:>n, externally
waveforms. Cost of ports is only a few controlled repetition rate, and multi-input
dollars, even for O.l•µs rise and fall times.- start-stop control of operation.-A. Tojo,
I. A. Karlin, The Backward Monostable: A High Speed Multivibrator Controlled By Single
Time-Deloy Switch, Eledronic Design, Jan. 4, ECL, Eledronics, Sept. 18, 1967, p 109-110.
1965, p 58-61.
+24v +24v
Rt 3.3k
6.2 k
IN758A
2.2k
. 9.6vU
+0.7v
03
2N2219
100
f24v -24v
SM
Os
2N2905
+Sv
WIDER PULSES FASTER-Two extra diodes in QI is off and Q3 and Q4 conduct heavily•. Puhe width is then determined only by values
mvbr using Darlington Q3-Q4 give high noise With trl99erln9, voltage across Dl and D2 of Cl and current 11.-A. J. Metz,' Two Diodes
Immunity and fast recovery timo without lim- falls below zoner voltage and hi9h resistance Remove Pulse-Width Umitation, Eledronics,
itlng width of output pulso. In stable state, of Dl has effect of opening this diode path. June 12, 1967, p 105.
100.HZ SQUARE-WAVE OPAMP-Uses Modol

4009 cl-c opamp with only four oxternal com•
ponents. Positive foedbaclc loop sots trlggor
IOOCy
•o Sq
w....
thresholcl level of opamp, while R·C time
constant in negative feedback loop sets chars·
Ing time constant. Varying negative feed·
baclc resistor gives wide range of frequencies.
-B. J. losmandy, Operational Amplifler Appll•
cations for Audio Systems, Opamp Labs, Los
Angeles, Cal., 1968.
-Vee
-f2V
270pF
COMMERCIAL MONO-Input pulse of correct

I~
polarity and amplitude will malce OFF tran•
sister turn on and remain in this unstable
state for period of timo determined largely 3.3k
by value of CT. Circuit was devolopod by
General Electric Co.-A. C. Gillio, "Pulso and
logic Circuits," McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968, p
220.
IOOO
-u:-1
TRIGGER
01
FAST-RECOVERY ONE.SHOT-Provides ox•
tremely wide range of cluty cycles, good tim·
Ing stability, and clean waveforms while using
INPUT only low-cost components. Circuit can be
IOK rotriggerocl immediatoly after completing tim·
Ing cycle, without loss of timing accuracy.-
"Unllunction Circuit Hints," General Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., Fig. 5.
+12V
I K ""i--------.
l.2K l.2K
500K 270
27K
IOK IOK
I µf
27
Un.CONTROLLED MVBR-Ujt stabilises operat• Jones, Semiconductor Timers and low Fre-
Ing frequency, making mvbr produce good quency Oscillators, General Elactric, Syracu11,
1-Hz square waves despite changes in supply voltage and amblont temperoturo.-D. V. N.Y., No. 671.3, 1966, p 16.
I
24vd-c +lOOJo--------~
Vl
5SST2S
X2
I• 600 Hz
TRIGGFR I NPllT
WIDER PULSES-By adjusting capacitor charg-
ing voltago as well as RC time constant in CATHODE-COUPLED ASTABLE NEON-600.Ha
monostablo mvbr, range of variation in fundamental froquency is available, as well
output pulso width can be greator than as alternate waveform at 1,200 Hz. Ampll·
1,000:1. R1 adjusts charging voltage and R2 tudes of high-frequency signal aro equql only
adjusts timo constant.-P. Schiff, Voltage Ad- on alternate cycles.-W. c;. Mlllor, "Using and
justment Extends Multivlbrator's Pulse Width, Understanding Miniature Neon Lamps," H. W.
Electronics, Sept. 30, 1968, p 82-83. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 46,
CONSTANT PULSE WIDTH-Combining throe

NAND gates as shown gives fast monostable
mvbr In which width of output pulse is inde-
pendent of supply voltage and Input pulse
width. With 4 V for 1 level and less than
0.45 V for 0 laval, period of monostable Is
1.4 RC. To avoid gate overload, R should
OUTPUT OUTPUT be below 220 ohms.-P. Sandland, Integrated
SL l.f Gates Form Fast Monostable Multivibrator,

Eledronlcs, Juno 26, 1967, p 108-109.
X,Yond Z ore 3 of the

4 got es of o Sylvania SG 223
+6V -1av +6V
1-MHZ BISTABLE-Can be used for generating

binary outputs for computer appl!catlons, or
as electronic switch. Circu1t Is in stable state -&V0--9t--1~""1'""~T~Y~PE~r-~~~......
when either transistor is conduding and other 2N404
transistor is cut off. Stotos are swltchod oach
time positivo trigger pulse is applied to input
terminal at bottom centor. Output, which
may be token from either stage, or both, is
unit step voltage for single trigger and square
wave for continuous periodic triggering of
input. Frequency division of 2:1 is thereby :TYPE
obtained. Values: Rl, RI 5.1K; R2, R7 1.2K; INl26
R3, R6 11K; R4, RS 2.7K; Cl, C3 180 pf; C2,
C4 430 pf.-''Transistor Manual," RCA, Harri-
son, N.J., SC-13, p 534.
!
tNPur =
+
SWITCHING BY SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHANGE--
Insertion of zenor In one coupling arm of bf.
stable mvbr gives switching simply by chang-
ing d-c supply voltage. Can be used In
ovorvoltago alarms, trigger circuits, and pro-
tective clrcuits.-A. R. Hayes, Multivibrator
Switchos With Supply Voltage Chango, floe•
Ironic Design, April 13, 1964, p 74-75.
r-----+1;v-,
I IZOK I
I !
6.81( 6.8K I AND I GATE PREVENTS TURN-ON STALL-Use of ANO.
I GATE I gate starter (dashed roctangle) with symmot-
-----------11---1.--._.._.. 2N338
Q5
I rlcal free-running mvbr provides protedion
from stalling at turn-on, without Interfering
with normal balanced oporatien.-M. T. Pett,
Starter Circuit Pravonts Stall of Free-Running
Multi, "400 Ideas for Design Selected from
Elodronlc Design," Haydon Book Co., N.Y.,
1964, p 63.
INPUT.JL....__ +6
COLLECTOR
o,--,o
-&"--"""'"- --
r•O.7RzCt
27K Oz--,-§..---
BASE -t2V' r•0.7R1C1 Rz
FREQUENCY CONTROL COLLECTOR OUTPUT
CIRCUIT
-!IV Ttl +!IV
02~
OUTP~ l.2k
r•0.71R1+RzlC1
IMMEDIATE RETRIGGERING-Modiflcation of
single-shot mvbr gives timing capacitor Cl
extra fob of setting up circuit to roceivo next
trigger pulse Instantly, by reducing recovery Oz
tinio of circuit to zero. Duty cycle thus be· 2N706
comes essentially 100%. Values of RI, R2, 01
and Cl are selected to give desired output 2N706
pulse width.-J. L. Shagona and A. Mall, tOk
Single-Shot Multlvlbrator Has Zaro Recovery
Time, floctroniu, Nov. 27, 1967, p 83.
-6 VOLTS
I Rt
47k
o, tk
Ds .
1N756
n r'N~UT tN4148
"""u I~I800pt D2
l
1N4t48
R2
47k rrr
tlvo or negative pulses. Addition of Q3 con· output pulso.-W. Muller, Positive or Negative
BIPOLAR ONE·SHOT-Use of complementary vorts circuit to monostable mvbr, for which Pulses Trigger Ono·Shot Multlvibrator, flee•
transistors permits tri99erlng by either posi• alnglo rectangular input pulse gives double fronics, Aug. 18, 1969, p.94.
MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 4'73
Ve.
!+&VOCI
OPTIMUM ASTABLE DESIGN WITH GRAPHS-

Artlcle contains desl9n equati~ns, 9raphs,
and stop-by-stop procedure for optlmlzin9
ton dosl9n criteria for 9eneratin9 square-wavo
or unsymmetrical pulses with fastest posslblo
riso time. Circuit shown is worked out as
oxample, fer 100-kHz pulses with width of 1
µs.-C. W. Davis, Plottln9 Produces Total
Astablo Desl9n, Electronic Design, Sept. 13,
1965, p 6o-63.
75.5 ONE-SHOT FOR $3.50-Long-duration

OUTPUT one-shot uses low-cost components, Including
dual 9ote IC. Oporotes on supply as low
0
as 2.6 V d·c. Input and output levels are

6 compatible with standard mlcrolo9lc.-R. W.
Walton, Lon9·Duratlon One-Shot Usos Inte-
grated Circuit, EEE, Oct. 1966, p 140.
INPUT
pL914
-3v
2N706 2N706 2NZ635

820 47 820
c, C2 CRz
2N2635
EIGHT TRANSISTORS GIVE WIDE RANGE- tells how circuit worlcs.-A. Marosi, Wide-
NOTE: Additional transistors prevent locking of con• Range Multlvibrator Varies Frequency from 8
DIODES ARE IN662 ventlonal mvbr Into stable state, to 9lve fre• Kc to 3 Mc, Electronic Design, April 12, 1965,
quency range from 8 lcHz to 3 MHz. Article p 50.
----24v
820
r - -....- - + - - - - - - - - t - - - - 1 2 v
Oz -V•IOV
IN270
50
22• 15k
OAS
llN270)
0.1.uf
Jl o,
22k
OC77
12N70B)
3.9k
SIMILAR U.S. DEVICES
SHOWN IN PARENTHESIS i.-...-----+4v -V•IOV NOTE: IN46B•5V
ZENER STABILIZES DELAY-Uso af ztnor DI

DIODES BLOCK STRAY PULSES-Arran9ement
across timing capacitor makes timo dolay
provents relay or other Inductive load from
lndopondont of whother mono mvbr Is
affecting stabllity of mbvr, and at samo timo
trlggorod by random pulse pattern or by
provides immunity to pulses coming from
first pulse in burst of uniformly spaced pulsos.
common power supply.-R. Ilic, Diodos Provido
Article tolls how zoner changes time delay
Noise Immunity for Monostablo Mul1ivibro1ors,
equation.-G. Connor, Zoner Diode Stabilizes
Electronia, Jan. 9, 1967, p 106-107.
Monoslable Dolay Time, Electronic Design, Doc.
21, 1964, p 59-60.
_ ANODE OF Q2
+SV _____ ... M '
I
OUTPUT
-
j - -- ----------;t----
.. .-
1 - - I QI COLLECTOR
-lSEC ... - - ... - - I
I ..,.-- I
OV
"""""""1- --- -.1J1····································································;-- -- -.. _.,'-·········
I ;' • ,.--'-
. . .
.:i I .,.•' 11 SEC
.:: •',.·· ~
-5V ..
E ••••
:." .
:
V
••••••
QI EMITTER
r------,.------------t-------------...----...()+IOV
R2 R4 RS
RI 2 Mii IOMn 390 kn
47 kll Pl
100 kll
OUTPUT
IN4152
QI Cl
2N5172
I ,.F,•MYLAR'"
R6
I
•· 680 kn
O.l·HZ PROGRAMMABLE UJT-Roqulros only

one largo and oxpensivo fllm capacitor for of Cl changes duration of OFF period. load '::' Capacitor In Low-Froquency Multlvibrators,
operation well bolow: 1 Hz. Changing value must bo at least 50K.-R. Muth, Eliminate a EON, Dae. I, 1969, p 61-62.
MtJLTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 475
(+)VK <•lvcc
y BASIC MONO-Also called one-shot or delay
I flap. Has one stable state, and one quasi·
*
stable state Into which It must be triggered,
returning to stable state after given relaxation
--y::;;n~!-
I -R~
--Q
or delay time. Boak gives procedure for
calculating values of campanents.-"High·
Speed Switching Transistor Handbook," Mata•
V I rala, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 235.
s
1.,.. l- 330pF:r:
Hveo ~ RT , RP (CLAMPED)
•Sj\_ RT , RPRS
RP+ RS
(UNCLAMPED)
--t l-5115
VOLTAGE·DIVIDER ASTABLE-Usos voltage di·

vider In bias network. Frequency of opera·
tian is approximately equal to 1,000,000 di·
vidod by (0.025C + 2.5), where C ls value of -- Vee
crass•caupling capacitor in pf, or about 375 + 12V
lcHz for values shown.-A. C. Gillie, ''Pulse
and Logic Circuits," McGraw-Hiii, N.Y., 1968,
p 213.
+18
+12V
l.2K l.2K
33K 33K
IOK R~ + -
360-KHZ ASTABLE-BISTABLE-Addltlon of gat•

ing transistors Q3.Q4 ta feedback paths of LOW.COST ASTABLE-Provldos periods of 0.5
basic astablo mvbr gives bistable operation. ta I s. Upper 16UI dual-diode assures
Circuit Is free-running up ta 360 kHz far startup by preventing lockup .due to saturation
fixed Input, or changes state in binary fashion of bath transistors, Lower dual-diode pro-
when input Is pulsod.-T. Sounders, Madltlod tects transistars.-D. V. Jones, Semiconductor
Astoblo Multlvib~otar Also Operates In Bi· Timon and Low Frequency Oscillators, Gen-
stable Made, Electronic Design, Doc. 20, 1965, eral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.3, 1966,
p 48-49. p 16.
476 ELECTB.01'110 CIRCUITS MANUAL
Y1 • •t2V
r.:Co;TR~~O- - - -- -----,
1 CURRENT I FALSE TRIGGERING-Current source isolates
I SOURCE 111914 I
I IOk 11'1914 I I lino noise from timing circuitry of one-shot
I
5.&k I mvbr, to prevent false triggering by lino noise
I
I 01 I I when using long timo constants. Ql and
I 2~~ I OUTPUT capacitor C provide required isolation. RT
r-- Rr I
should be much larger than R, with lOK as
1 I minimum; this means that minimum pulso
I EIO duration Is about 50 µs. With 10 mos for
RT and 330 µF for CT, timo duration Is 1 hr.-
G. L Schaffer, Current Source Improves Im·
munity of Ono-Shot, EEE, March 1969, p 126
and 128.
UNREGULATED
+28V INPUT
26Y/IW 22K
ZENER
DIODE
0.5-10 HZ WITH NOISE IMMUNITY-Shockley SOOK

CLEVITE 4E20-8
pnpn diode connected as free-running mvbr Is PNPN DIODE
unaffected by radiated nolso of relays and
other devices. Used to drive stepper relays
at rate determined by setting of pot. Zoner
SIGMA SF
regulator prevents supply voltage changes
from affectin9 frequoncy.-M. E. T. Swinnen, IN91
i ·..·a,~
Multivlbrator Immune to Radiated Noiso,
Electronic De1ign, Doc. 7, 1964, p 71-73.
-I
- -
OU>PUTTG
STEPPER
•75V'o---------.
02
2N2412
Vl
01
2N2412 •Z4V
I
INPUTo-j ..._,.,___--J
.ZllF
331<
Rz
ALL LAMPS 5AB ·B

MONOSTABLE NEON-Vl is normally on but
Is extinguished by 24.Y input pulse which
permits V2 to Ignite. Howovor, voltage
OUTPUT
across lOOK resistor Is not sufllclont to koop
FAST-llECOVERY ONE-SHOT-At rest, Ql and cult returns to original state. For 0.01 µF, Vl from firing, so circuit returns to stable
Q2 are ON, Q2 is OFF, and output "is at output pulse Is about 280 µs. Pulse width stoto. limo V2 Is on depends on time con-
ground. Positive Input pulse changes all remains constant for duty cycles well above stant of 0.5•µF capacitor and two anode
transistors, driving output to about 3 V posl• 90%.-D. Colin, Monostable Configuration rosistors.-W. G. Miller, ''Using and Undo,..
tive. Value of coupling capacitor C2, acting Provides Unusually Fast Recovery Time, Elec• standing Miniature Neon lamps," H. W.
with R2, determines holding time boforo cir- tronic Design, Aug. 3, 1964, p 43. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 50.
-12 -12V
llC R2 8.2 K 820 8.2 K

RI
0.02µ.f
Cl
2N404 2N404
221(
330 330
~!-------
TRIGGER
INPUT
3.3K 470 3.3K
22K 4704
POSITIVE STARTING-Simple modification of

TRANSISTOR SPEEDS CAPACITOR DISCHARGE
standard mvbr, to prevent transistors from
-Addition of Q3 to monostable mvbr pro-
saturotln9, Insures osclllotion by precluding
vides re9enerativo dischar9in9 of timin9 ca-
pacitor at end of pulse poriod. Circuit has existence of stable state In which b11th tran-
9iven foll times as short as 0.1 µs on pulse sistors oFo on. Values shown give 100-kHz
widths af 1 µs to 15 ms.-R. W. Allin9ton, operation over wido temperature range.-N.
Extra Transistor Reducos Turn-Off Time In One- 0. Sokol, Free-Running Multi Has Suro-Fire
Shot Multi, "400 Ideas for Design Selected Starting, Efedronic De,J9n, Jan. 6, 1964, p 80.
from Electronic Design," Hayden Book Co.,
N. Y., 1964, p 69.
ZERO QUIESCENT POWER-When monostable

INPUT mvbr is switched to Its OFF condition, both
transistors are nonconducting and no power
whatsoever is drown from supply. Circuit
produces pulse widths ronging from severol
0 microseconds to several milliseconds. Both
Input and output aro compatible with DTL or
TIL dovlces.-M. Steele, Monostable Conserves
Power, EDN, Dec. 15, 1969, p 61.
0 +SV
OUTPUT Q2
2N:ml5
Cl
O.llOl l'F
CjJ CRI Ql
0 I 2N3905
INPUT Rl
I Ok
R4
OUTPUT
R2 R3
!Ok 470
+24V
LINEAR PULSE WIDTH CONTROL-Monostable
mvbr provides output pulso whoso width
varies linearily with respect to control vohago
of 0-25 V d·c appllod to base of Q4. Artlclo
giv:os equation for period of ono-shot. Oper-
ation depends on uso of emitter-follower con•
stant-curront gonorator. Pulso width range
is about 3 to 80 µs.-R. S. Hughes, Pulso OUT
Width vs. Control Voltage Mado Linear by
Generator, Electronic Design, Doc. 21, 1964, p
56-58.
lJ
01
2N916
_n_
IN
30 IK IOOK
t}6(1/0---------
800Hz
800.HZ ASTABLE NEON-Offen throe sym·

metrical waveshapos by tapping drcuit at
VI different points. Square wavo at B has 10-
NE2 µs riso time, and top may be mado ftat by
using diode clippor.-W. G. Miller, "Using and
0 Understanding Miniature Noon Lamps," H.
W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 45.
lDK /\ /\ /\
.,.
= 0 ©' v v \
15v
15k 4.7k
.,__ _ _ _•OUTPUT
x
20pl
INPUT - i '------+----lo'-..,.__ _1-4
04
2N559
FOIOO
02
1820 ZN916
Rz o,
l.5k
FOIOO
ONE-SHOT WITH 200-NS RECOVERY-Devel-

oped for computer and communications appli· of 1-MH1 carrier. Input at point X clamps time. Pulso width generated Is 600 ns.-J. J.
cations having vary high pulse repetition rato. output to positive supply voltage for dura• Moran and R. M. Gloriosco, Narrow-Pulse
Has boon used as pulso-ovoraging discrimina- tion of pulse. Discharging C1 through low• Ona-Shot Recovers Quickly, Electronics, Jan.
tor in f-rn system having 200-lcH& deviation Impedance path D1.Q4 gives short recovery 9, 1967, p 107.
Vcc•5VOLTS
IMPROVED TRIGGERING OF MONO-Shaping

of Input trigger pulses by differentiating cir-
cuit Cl-Rd makes performance of emlHer-
RCI
lk
c
033µ.F
coupled mono more reliable. Will tri99er
reliably with pulses above 3.9 V for all values
of d-c: control voltage between 1.1 and 1.8 V, 01
with this controlled range making output 2N3643
pulse duration vary between 1.1 and 8.35 ms.
Recovery tlmo 11 about 1.7 ms.-A. J. Duelm,
Wiring Modification Improves Voltage Vari•
able Delay Circuit, Electronic Design, Feb. 15, Re
1970, p 82 and 84. Mon
TRIGGER SOURCE
+14V +5V +5V

v
IOk +100 VB2
1
e1
~
IE Raz l
RANDOM
l 6.8 K i 3K
IOOK
NEGATIVE-
GOING
_J_
12 u·--u
OUT PULSE
TRIG
VEl
Vez
.,.. O.OOlfLF
J-
Ri.1
NOISE-TRIGGERED RANDOM PULSES-Provides
random pulse spacings ranging from tens of .,.. .,..
microseconds to milliseconds, for nL logic•
level pulse generator. Uses Schauer SZ9.1 FAST-RISE MONO-Gives essentially square-
zener with QI 01 broad-spectrum noise genor· wave output pulses with rise time of I n1,
ator. Q2 Is biased so only highor-level nolso foll time of 2 ns, ancl duration from 12 ns
spikes drive It to saturation and trigger IC to several µ.s. Wiii produce 12-ns pulses re-
mono mvbr. Varying noiso generator supply liably at repotltlon rate of 20 MHZ.-"High
voltage changes output rato.-R. J. Krusborg, Speed Switching Transistor Handbook," Moto-
Noise Spikes Trigger Random-Pulse Generator, rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 302.
Electronic Design, June 7, 1970, p 102.
+IV
-24V (Vee)
(eol
3.3V
QI
TRIGGER
ON AND OFF-Both ujt's of mvbr aro nor•

molly off. Input vjt QI provides redangular
COMMON·EMlnER MONO-Resistor in com• pulse wh.n positive input signal of sufll-
l.2K'1
men-emitter circuit Is connoded as shown, ciently high level arrives, causl'!g. Q2 and Q3
with base current supplied to ono side. Cur- to fire In sequence, oftilr which circuit ro·
rent through RB holds DI conducting and ( +)24V (VEE) turns to rest. Will handle repetition rates
koops Q2 on until QI Is trl99orod. Reconry up to 120 pps. Input must be at loast 4.5-V
of circuit is rapid, permitting duty cycle as so noise Is not a problem.-"High Speed positlve-solng pulse or 3.y rm1 slno-wave
high as 80%. Circuit 11 sensitive to small Switching Transistor Handbook," Motorola, slgnal.-Uit Manacyclo Multlvlbrator, Eloc•
trigger signals but Insensitive to their levol, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 281. tronics Wor/J, April 1969, p 61.
·f.1Sv
6-MIN PERIOD-Two 2N3436 fet's are con·
nected as sourco followers, with two npn tran· Ct
sisters sorvlng as switchos. Action is similar 510 510
to that of ordinary mvbr and is self-starting. C2
When Cl and C2 aro 4 p.f, rheostats can vary
period over rango from 8 ms to 6 min. With
100 pf, frequency range becomes 100 Hz to 02
3 MH:r. Stability Is good with long time
constants because large oloctrolytics are not
used.-G. Hanus and Y. Martine:r, Stablo Low
Froquoncios with FET Bipolar Pairs, fledron•
0
ics, Jan. 9, 1967, p 105.
':"
3VDC
Vs
2N3565
01 Oz
5.lk
c,
4700pf
-:r c,0.047p.t
VARIABLE DUTY CYCLE-Switching of dlodo

between two timing networks gives ratio of
up to 500 to I between on and off times of MAKING IC FLIP·FLOP GO MONO-Only two
unsymmetrical froo-running mvbr. With external components are needed to convert
values shown, froquoncy Is 600 Hz, risa time standard Fairchild or Amelco IC llip•ftop for
0.3 p.s and fall time 4 p.s. Article gives de· operation as monostable (one-shot) mvbr.
sign equations. Supply voltage can drop Width of one-shot pulse In seconds Is equal
50% without affocting frequency.-1. Blaser, to 0.37 RICI, whore RI Is in ohms and Ct in
Waveform Generation Eased By Two Timing farads. For values shown, width Is 18 ms.-
Networks, Elodronlcs, Sept. 18, 1967, p 110- G. Demjanenko, External Connection Converts
111. Integrated FRp.flop To Monostable, Electronic
Design, Aug. 17, 1964, p 198-200.
+IBv
STABILIZING WITH DIODES-Compensating equations. If used with highly stable power
diodes D are added to astablo mvbr to nullify supply, temperature change from -10 to 90
transistor changes that cause frequency shifts 2.n C shifts output of I-MHz mvbr only 10 Hz.-
In square-wave output. Article gives design J. Teixeira, Diodes In a Multlvlbrator Lesson
Frequency Variations, Electronics, July 8, 1968,
fN914 p 93-94.
fN9t4
30.91c
0.01 f
O.Ofl'f +
IOp.f
MULTIVIBB.ATOR CIRCUITS 481
V=-14 VOLTS
TWO-SUS ONE-SHOT-With silicon unilateral
swltchos, circuit is capablo of handllng duty
cyclos above 8S%. Requires potltlvo-golng
switching voltago of 8 V appbed to ana sus
to turn it on. Succeeding positlvo pulses then
have no effect, but first negative-going pulse
will turn on other sus and turn off tho one that
was conducting. After supply voltage is ap·
plied, sus having lowest switching voltage will
be ftrst to turn on. DI and D2 aro D13P1
sus swltchos.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Applications
of tho Now Silicon Biiaterai Switch and tho
Siiicon Unilateral Switch, Gonoral Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.3, 1966, p 4.
.001
1
R1 220
lk
30.NS PULSE WIDTH FROM ONE·SHOT-lm·

proved Input trigger circuit permits genoratien
of extremely fast pulses with width independ·
ent of trigger duration and amplitude. Re-
quires negative triggar.-D. R. Hoppe, High
Speod Saturated-Mode One-Shot, EEE, May
1968, p 122-123•
...-------------------......,.----u +12v
R3 Rs
IK IK
ZSl40 ZSl40
FAST MONO-Designed as part of generator
for producing pulses continuously variable in
width down to 100 ns. Report gives design
procedure. Value of CT Is chosen to give
desired width. Maximum repetition rate is Cr
5 MHz, rise time is 5 ns, and fall time is 10
ns.-"E·Lino Transistor Applications," Ferranti
Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969, p 17.
33pF
TRi. TR2, ZTX312 ---~· OUTPUT
(BSV25)
ZSl40
TRIGGER o--J------..
ISpF
TR1
ZTX312
TRz
ZTX31Z
0---------.. . .------------_..----(')0V
v
MULTI-INPUT MONO IC-Only five cempo•
NOR nonts, at right of dashed lino, aro nooded
G5 R1 R2
5.lk 5.1k with Motorola MC301 emitter-coupled logic
IC to givo monostable mvbr in which trigger
c, signal at any one of tho four inputs Initiates
25pf
61 TO 64 { ECL osclllotion. Frequency con be varied re-
TRIGGER motely by changing V.-T. Tojo, High Speed
INPUT Multivlbrator Controlled By Single ECL, floe•
tronics, Sept. 18, 1967, p 109-110.
REF D1 D2
-f.6v
AVOIDING BOTH-ON CONDITION-Free-run·

nlng mvbr is designed to preclude situation
where both transistors aro on and saturated,
as might occur if both halves of circuit aro
well matched and powor supply voltogo
comes on slowly. With transistors bath In
actlvo region when on and with loop gain
9reater than one, circuit cannot exist stably
with both transistors on.-N. O. Sokal, Trouble
Spots in Circuits, Electronic Design, Nov. 9,
1964, p 32-37.
470
12v
IOOOpf 3k ZENER
Oi
2N404
800pf
------11r--~~~~M-I----~
INPUT
2.5khz
SINE WAVE
5vpp
2.7k
ALL DIODES IN456 ©

2.7k
OUTPUT OF MONOSTABLE I WHEN MONOSTABLE 2

; 1s NOT, TRIG?ERED
1 1
I 04
2N71B
I I I : I 'i i I
OUTPUT OF MONOSTABLE 2 WHEN TRIGGERED 6.Bk
1 i I ; :
SI
OUTPUT O~ MONOSTABLE I WHEN MONOSTABLE 2

'----------------------1----------.:--..
IS TRIGGERED ©
CASCADING ONE-SHOTS-P"ermits doubling
pulse width for doalred time interval. lnl- pulse width, SI Is momentarily closed to trig- Is at collector of 02, and output of mono
tlally, Ql and Q3 ore on, and Q2 and Q4 are ger second mono. Duration of this mono, 2 is at collector of Q3.-K. Vllaya Raghavan,
off. Switch one Is open, so 2.5-kHz sine- 0.7 x R3 x C2, determines how long wider Two Ono-Shots Control Waveform's Pulso
wave input trlg9ers ,flnt mono. To lncroaso pulses will bo gated out. Output of mono Width, Eloctronics, Jan. 6, 1969, p 93.
I
MULTIVIBR.ATOR CIRCUITS 483
+20V
+Vee
R:!i
20k
ZERO STANDBY POWER-One-shot draws no
power from supply whon In normal standby Re iB Re
or OFF mode. When elthor d-c lovol or pulse IOOk
turns on scr, values of Rl and Cl determine
i1
+ POINT A
how long rogonorativo adion Is sustained ~
before scr is turned off. With lOK and 10 OINT 8
µF, ON time Is 270 ms, while with 1K and R5 RLOAD
Rio IOk
1 µF, ON time is 5.5 ms. Articlo gives values I Ok
for other times, along with design equations. R4 Cz
-A. l. low, Zero (Quiescent) Power Ono-Shot,
EEE, Dec. 1969, p 91.
l-6VI
-vo-----~-.~--~~~~--~~~~~-.
INDUCTOR-CONTROLLED-Use of inductor In
placo of convontlonal capacitor for controlling
timing gives rise and fall times limited only
by transistor switching spHd. Capacitor
charging curve Is eliminated from output
=fl:::T waveform. Circuit is stall-proof If small
Q
amount of realstanco Is usod In sorlos with
01
2Nl728 2Nlf28 inductor to bias transistors Into their linear
region; for circuit shown, d-c roslstonco of
inductor was enough for this purposo.-R. J,
Bouchard, Inductor Timing Improves Multivl•
POSITIVE brator Action, Efedronlc Design, July 20,
INPUT TRIGGER
1964, p 78-80.
CIRCUIT STRAY
CAPACITANCE
2.Zk 2.2k
05
100
50 HZ TO 100 KHZ-High-gain Darlington

transistors and quiclc-actlng omlttor-foll-or
=
QS and Q6 act as current sources, making
For voltago-controllod oiclllator, feed control
voltcigo cllroctly to bases of as and Q6.
transistors broaden frequency range of froo- linear tuning possible over range of 1,000 to Transistor typos are not critical.-F. B. Golden,
running mvbr. Q3 and Q4 boost upper fre- 1 with 251C pot. When Cl and C2 are 250 Darlington Transistors Widen Multlvibrator's
quency limit by discharging Cl and C2 faster. pF, frequency ran go is 50 Hz to 100 kHz. Range, Electronics, Nov, 25, 1968, p 82.
c QUAD NAND GATE RUNS FREE-Low-cost mvbr

ls self-starting, with rise and fall times below
50 ns, complementary oulputs, and wido fre-
quency range. C and R2 control•frequoncy,
while Rt changes symmetry of output. With
R1 and R2 both 510 ohms, output varies from
200 Hz to several MHz when C is·varied from
10 µF to 100 pF.-0. Q, Flint, Jr., Free-Running
x Multivibrator Is Made with a NAND Gato,
ffedronics, Jan. 6, 1969, p 95-96.
-6V
3.3K 3.3K
Rz
2N1728 2Nl728
7-KHZ ASTABLE-Provides square-wave output

with poak value equal to d-c supply voltage.
20-KHZ INDUCTOR-CONTROLLED-Use of In· Capacitors ore 0.1 µF, R1 and R4 are 60 ohms,
ducton In place of capacitors gives rise and ond R2 ond R3 aro IK.-"Transistor Manual,"
fall times limited only by transistor switching RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC-13, p 533.
speeds. Circuit Is stall-proof.-R. J, Bouchard,
Inductor Timing Improves Multlvibrator Action,
Electronic Deli9n, July 20, 1964, p 78-80.
Rz
3.2k
Re
l.2k
+12v
-6¥ -12¥ R13 04
2.7k -6¥
OUTPUT
ALL TRANSISTORS ARE 2N914
R9
ALL DIODESIARE SILICON l.6k D5
D6 IN761
FAST-RECOVERY ONE·SHOT-Duty cycle above 4.5¥
95% and fast rocov~ry minimize folso trig·
goring by Input pulst before completion of
preceding output pulse. Spood Is achiove_d -6v
by dischorglng timing capacitor through tran·
slstor Q2 directly Instead of through custo- -12Y
mary transistor. Output pulse width is 100 Is Insensitive to input variations oxcept for Shot Recovers fast, ffecrronlcs, March 31,
ns. Once timed interval has starte_d, circuit about 10 ns.-J. H. Williams, Full Duty Single 1969, p 89.
D-C COUPLING WITH DIODES-Multi-pellet

diodes provido d-c: level-shifting to give de-
sired output voltage swing In astable mvbr.
Operation is stable from several Hz to about
10 MHz. Only one capacitor is needed.
Riso time is about 5 ns.-Sillcon Multi-Pellet
Diodes MPD200/MPD300/MPD400, General
Eledric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 75.42, 1966.
RJ
IC MONO-Usos Phillps TAA241 difference
ampliRer as monostable mvbr that Is saturatod
In Its qulescont state and then ha1 output of
+10 V. Negatlvo-golng tri99er makes out•
~---.......,..-IJVo
Vt/I
y 1----
C2
put switch to now value of about -5 V. R1
is 8.2K, R2 and R3 aro 100K, C1 Is 10 nF, and
C2 Is 4.7 nF. With these values, pulse time
Is 175 µs, rlso tlmo 0.35 µs, fall time 0.7 µs,
and delay time 0.3 µ1.-J. Cohen and J.
Oo1terllng, Applications of a Practical D. C.
Difference Amplifier, Phlllps, Pub. Dept., El-
coma Div., Elndhoven, The Netherlands, No.
321, 1968.
1\1
470A
Cr
OUTPUT A
Rz
8·2K OUTPUT B
Ct
y TRIGGER IOOpF
o---1.__.______._.... TR1
ZTX300
TRz
ZTX300
0-----------------........,111------------------1---------00
BASIC MONO-Minimum output pulso width recharge through R3. Report shows how to
Is 1 µs. Report givos dosign pracodure. Ono overcome this with diode from CT to output.
drawback is slow positivo odgo of output -"E-llne Transistor Applications,'' Ferranti
pulso from TR2, occurring bocauso CT must ltd., Oldham, lanes., England, 1969, p 14.
ASTABLE FROM IC AMPLIFIER-Uses Philips

TAA293 general-purpose amplifier. Value of
C determines.period; 10 nF givas about 16 µs
with high-to..fow ratio of 0.6. Period for
other values of C is in dired proportion to
C down to 2 µs.-Tho ·TAA293 as a Schmitt
Trigger and M~ltivibrator, PhRips, Pub. Dept.,
,,.
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No.
25, 1968.
•ceo, •c,
SIMPUFJED ONE-SHOT-Complementary tran-
sistors give simplifled design, with negligibly
small quiescent currents (shown by dashed vee
lines). Will also operate as free-running +6v
mvbr or as trigger by making minor changes
in values of components.-A. C. Caggiano, LOCK-UP IMMUNITY-With complementary
Simplilled One-Shot Multlvlbrator, EEE, Oct.
-ir- transistors conneded as shown, circuit Is In•
~-NVl.--t------evo,
1967, p 140 and 142. e2 herently self-starting, immune to lock-up, and
0002pF useful over wide range of frequencies. Coin·
e, cident positive and negative output pulses
0002~F have equal amplitudes. With values shown,
Vo2o-_.________.._J\ll.,..... pulse width is about 2 µs and amplitude about
half of supply voltage.-C. R. Bond, Complo-
JL montary Series Multivibrator, EEE, Sept. 1967,
p 135-136.
Eapp o-------.
+16W
700-HZ ASTABLE NEON-Basic circuit may be

modified by changing resistor values to obtain
frequency up to 8 kHz.-W. G. Miller, "Using
and Understanding Miniature Neon Lamps,"
p 43.
Rl
1001
H
IOC ••
4•7k
cl
t
o'
OJ
~ 04
I
I
I I
I C1 I
I
I
I
Tai I
I
unoo I I
I I OJ
I ____________ JI ZSl40
•-------- ---- -
TIJ
ZTl300
01
ISOI
ZSl40
WIDE-RANGE MVBR-Glvos pulse durations ldentlcal values from 180 pf to 75 µ.F. TRI durations.-"E-Une Transistor Applications,"
ranging from 26.5 µs to 66 s in nine ranges, and TR2 form Darlington pair giving required Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969,
by switching capacitors Cl and C2 which have large value of base resistance for long pulse p 8.
SINGLE·UJT ONE-SHOT-Addition of rosistor

botwoen omitter and ground converts basic
slnglo·uit mvbr to one-shot. Method of add·
Ing transistor output stogo is also shown.-T.
P. Sylvan, Tho Unijunction Transistor Charo
acterlstlcs and Applications, General Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.10, 1965, p 76.
510
.------1-----:.--1-----+-- OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT
+6Bw-, r
o, LJ
150hz
04
2Nl279
PHASE-INDEPENDENT SYNC...-Multlvibrator 04·

QS is synchronized with pulsod Input signal
by Q2.Q3. Unique featuro Is ability to turn
SYNC SIGNAL off mvbr for specified time and restart It on a
INPUT desired cyclo regardless of when sync pulse
arrives during that mvbr cycle. 150-H1: out•
+t2w:-t.Jlr put hos stability of 3%.-J. S. Chomicki. Os-
Ow
dllotor Synchronil:Os With Pulses Of Any
Phase, Eledronics, April 3, 1967, p 96-97.
NOTE: To locoto additional circuits in the category of this chapter, uso tho index at the back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcebook of Eloctronlc Circuits," publish eel_ by
McGraw-Hill In 1968. ·
CHAPTER SS
Noise Circuits
\tc+3.6V
.•R1
••
,•4.7k
: 3.3k
R3
Cz
3~0pF
"
-4. 14 13 12 II 10 9 8
OUTPUT
PULSE
2 3 4 5 6 7
MOTOROLA
MC717P
SWITCH NOISE ELIMINATOR-Closing SI gives noise threshold of IC, sa one-shot seos clean
output pulses from 1 µs to 80 ms, with width fast trigger signal. I. lsrealy, IC One Shot
depending on value of C2. Built around RTL Generates Short-Duration Pulses and Elimi•
four.gate NOR IC, functioning as one-shot natos Switch Noise, EEE, March 1968, p 129-
driven by inverter. Switch noise is below 130.
12-25 v d·c
Lz
2.lmh
0.0015 0.002 NOISE SUPPRESSION-Uso of sine-wave Col-
pitts oscillator with diode bridge and simple
filter as inverter eliminates bursts of noise
INPUT occurring at square•wave switching points in
140k
VOLTAGE convontional inverter. Another advantage
of circuit shown is inflnltely small ripple cur•
rent even with large changos in load current.
68 k Coils should tune to about 100 kHz.-W. E.
Osborne, Sine-Wave Inverter Prevents Inter•
feronco, Electronics, May 27, 1968, p 104-105.
2.1 mh 2N1714
50-120v d-c
OUTPUT
I µf VOLTAGE
488
NOISE CIRCUITS 489
LONG-LINE NOISE SUPPRESSOR-IC opamp

serves as proconditioner to improve slgnal-to-
7
noise ratio In digital lino. Divider Rl·R2
Your permits handling largo Input signals (14 V).
Cl shunts out fast nolte spikes from high.
c, R2 R3 gain Fairchild µA710 opamp. Output Is gen-
200pf fk 470 erated when Input oxceods half tho threshold
level ostabllshod by roforonco voltage ap-
plied to terminal 3. Article contains thlrtoen
Vn1/2 other IC opamp application circults.-J. F.
Gifford and M. Markkula, linear IC's: Part 5,
Ins and Outs of Op Amps, Efedronlcs, Nov.
27, 1967, p 84-93.
GRASS SIMULATOR-Random-noise generator

covering 100 kHz to 8 MHZ, with content and
level both adjustable, simulates radar return
signal for use in test setup. Output is ad-
Co-,- ---- ---·1
M4L3052 I
justable from 0 to 3 V p•p.-D. D. Lacoy, 200pF Rr _ _ _ _ _ _ _
INPUT-l--+-l-+-11-JV'I,.,._ ~ OUTPUT
Nolsa Generator Simulates Radar Return-Sig- lk
L __
nal 'Grass,' Efedronlc Design, May 24, 1970, Cl
p 114.
DR
IN47.32
COMMON
ACTIVE NOISE FILTER-Dovetoped for timing

and logic circuits of Industrial electronic con-
trols having lines long enough to pick up
200pF severe 60-Hz radiation. Works like Schmitt
trigger though requiring no external d-c sup-
MCl836P
HEX INVERTER PKG. ply. Article includes tabla showing d-c
C2 switching lovols and ripple at various noise
frequenclos.-P. A. Lajoie, Simple Solid-State
8 11 Noise Filtor for Industrial Logic Systems, EEE,
Oct. 1968, p 124 and 126.
....____ ' "-0.003µ.F

cs
P2 DISC CERAMIC
511 OUTPUT
P3 (-o
285.,F
VIO, VII ARE

THE POWER
NEON ON-OFF SWITCH-In digital voltmeter UNKNOWN _ SO V THYRATRONS
INPUT
stage, noons lsolato driver thyratrons and am• BIAS (WHICH IS
VOLTAGE V6, V 1 ARE
plifler from stopping switches, preventing SAFELY BELOW
THE "DRIVER"
thyratron• from firing duo to noise pulses ALL NOISE
THYRATRONS PULSES I
created by pulsing the stopping switches.
Whan driver thyratrons are ignited on signal
from amplifler, neons switch on and Ignite
power thyratrons.-E. Bauman, "Applications
COMPARISON
VOLTAGE /
r·-. -
-----------·
~ I
of Noon lamps and Gas Dischar9e Tubes," STEPPING 10 VOLT STEPPING SWITCH
Signalito, Neptune, N.J., p 95. SWITCH- OPERATED PRECISION OPERATED DIGITAL
VOLTAGE DIVIDER SOURCE REACIOUT
490 ELECTRONl.C CIRCUITS MANUAL
-15 +15
~
O.OOlµf
~
O.OOIJif
COMMON
NOISE TO 500 KHZ-Avalanche diode noise FEEOTHRU FEEOTHRU ATTENUATOR
source gives 1 to 2 mV Into 50 ohms over CURRENT AD.IUST ADJUST
frequency range of 2 kH1 to over 500 MH1,
for testing broodband vidoo and r·f amplifier IOK
systems.-H. Penfteld, Why Not The Ava. IK
lanche Diode As An RF Noise Source? Elec- IK
fronk Design, April 12, 1965, p 32-35. HIGH· LEVEL
OUTPUT
O.lp.f
~ 20v
AVALANCHE
OIODE
ATTENUATED
OUTPUT
Iii 0.1µ.f
NOTE:
Lower frequency
ronoe moy be ntended
by Increo1lno all 0.1µ. f
copocitoncn.
51)8 or PEAK-READING NOISE METER-Ono module

lllPUf
51~ senses positive peaks of noise, while other
sonses negative peaks. Both outputs drive
meter that reads p-p value of noiso. Reset
circuit provides both polarities, to reset both
modules. Use OEI 5138 and 5139 modules
for d-c to 10 kKz, and others for 10 MHz.
+ 10 V to Whon measuring very low-level signals,
um 5139 or opamp preamp noise must be canceled by
5147 replacing meter circuit with opamp having
offset voltage added to signal.-A Peak Read-
ing Noise Meter, Optical Electronics, Tucson,
Ariz., Na. 10092.
+ 15 v
r--- - - - - - - - - - - -----------------------, E0 (Digitol)

PRECISION CLOCK PULSE GENERATOR
+15 v +svtJ
vLI
-s
f""LO
L..I L'
'
~ti.I-
Note:
For best oscillator
stability, the resistor~
should be metol-lilm E
type with lowtemper.l +15 V 1cp
L ~".:e_c~~i~e.:t~ _J _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ _ _ - - _ - - _ _ _ _ .J 0 0 0
~RANDOM NOISE GENERATOR-Based on low- 4006125 random noise generator module fo ~ ti. 1-
ti.- I ms
pan flltering of random binary waveform to produco tho random binary signal, for feeding
obtain analog noise source having known to low-pass fllter module. Resulting noise Brown Computer Designed Adive Filters, Burr-
po-r spedral density and rms value. signal has flat power spedrum from d-c to 1 Brown Rosoarch, Tucson, Ariz., No. PDS-203A,
Clock signal is applied to Burr-Brown kHz. Article gives design oquations.-Burr· 1968.
NOISE CIRCUITS 491
CONTAMINATED-SIGNAL REJECTOR-Simplo
circuit compares signal with noise In pulse
system and delivers squelch output for reject•
Ing noise-contaminated signals. Can be used
in pulse command and control applications, as
Supply +28 v de
Q, 2N'll8A
woll as for code communication. When de- Q. 2N'122
sired 111rle1 of pwm pulses reaches input, in· Q. 2N718A
tegrated value at A is insufficient to brook CR, 1N756A
down CRt. When noi111 Is presant with sig· R, 39K
no~ however, CR1 brooks down and resulting R, lOOK
signal at B turns Q2 off, making Q3 turn on R. 150K
and provide ground point for squelch.-"Sa- c, 1.0pF
lected Electronic Circuitry," NASA SP-5046,
1966, Government Printing OIRce, Washington,
D.C., p 71.
Si.RECTllN538)
POWER
XFMR
NOISE DIODE FILAMENT REGULATOR-Noise
output current of temperatura-limlted noise
diode Is hold constant at value determined by
setting af RI, in range of 0.5 ta 10 mA, by
NOISE ducal regulator and cadmium sulfide coll con-
DIODE NOISE trolling conduction angle of scr. Cell moni-
5722 OUT tors light output of noise diode, which ln-
LOA~
croasos with line voltage, to compensate for
line voltage variations. Can be easily
51 - adapted fer control of other nolso sources.-
H. D. Olson, Semiconducton Regulate Noisa-
Diodo Plato Current, Electronic Design, March
16, 1964, p 108-109.
lamp
1oon IOOnF 1500
TRIAC RFI SUPPRESSION-Used when it Is pas·

slble to insert chokes In series with line. 220V
Series resistors must then be odded as shown ,...,
to prevent oscillation, because load no longer
octs as damping element between filter and
270nF
control clrcuit.-Trlocs-Operation and Use,
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
The Netherlands, No. 17, 1969. r-----
LJlJ~~.I!. ...J
6
Vp
DOA40 a---- out
MEASURING NOISE-Two Phillps DOA40 IC
opamps cennoctod os shown provide ovorall
test 12
gain of 100 for meosuring oloctrical noise
potentio-
meter generated by potentiometers and other com-
ponents, at frequencies between 1 H1 and
current
ov 0.1 MHz. Capocitor blocks d-c slgnal.-Meas•
generotcr urement of Eloctrlcal Noise Using the DOA40,
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Eindhovon,
OV The Netherlands, No. 28.
492 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS M.ANU AL
NOISE PULSE SUPPRESSOR-Pulse-width dis-

criminator fires to provide output pulse for
each input pulse exceeding level of zoner CR3
and having width determined by setting of
Schmitt triggor.-A. A. Dargis, Pulso Width
Discriminator Reiects Narrow Noise Pulses,
Electronic De1i9n, Dec. 21, 1964, p 50.
-12VDC
RESET
PULSE
IN403
KILLING TURN-ON AND TURN-OFF TRAN·
SIENTS-Scr In solid-line portion of circuit
t~~0 011 ~~...,.---+-----..---~~~--,
(switch S closed) eliminates kilovolt spikes
I
-* ~
when lndudive a-c load Is turned off. Dotted ?22k
portion of circuit elimlnatas turn-en transients
(switch S is then left opon). Both radiated
~-~
and conducted r·f· interferenco are eliminated. t15 0-C
VOLTAGE SCR 1
Can ba usod in paper•tape punches, tape
transport motor drives, electric typewriters, CI06A~ I SCRz
4 .n I Cl06B
and other a-c motor or solenoid devices.-
I
J. L. Haynes, Reducing Transients in Switched IN403 I I
Inductive loads, Electronia, Oct. 17, 1966, p
88-119.
300 300 300 450 MOA 1333H
NOISE
TUB
+ + +
16pf l6pf t6pf
50 -
lpf
4.7k
MEASURING RADIOMETER NOISE-Single'------------------------'

power supply provldas 7-kV pulse for Ionizing voltage operation. Shunt regulator, using sorles, costing much less than l·kV pre-
gas-discharge noise tube and 300 V to keep two 2N3241 transistors with zener, lceeps cur• potted stack shown.-J. M. Payne, Zeners and
it Ionized. Ujt QI triggers SCRI to generate rent constant to prevent variations In noise SCR Fire Gas Discharge Tube, Elect"1nlu, July
pulse, then automatically swilchas to low• output. D3 can be seven I N4725 diodes in 22, 1968, p 71.
' .
NOISE CIRCUITS 493
+30V
R1
68k C2
R2 220pF
Tt 680k
2N3483 ~PUT
t
v. C1
O.Ol11F
o,
I
0.5-500 MHZ A·M NOISE GENERATOR-Ro·
quires only diode, ujt, and four other com•
ponentl. Amplitude of output Is sufficient for
CORRELATOR-Provides 35 dB rejection of un• checking operation of a·m receiver on ony h·f
correlated components for random signals In and vhf band without switching or tuning, by
10% band centered at 300 MHz, for radio foeding noise output to Input of receiver.-
astronomy applications. Complementary sili- I. A. Reitmeyer, Jr. and R. A. Gilson, Simple
con fat's are used as direct multipliers while Wideband A·M Noist Generator, EEE, Fob.
balancing out spurious responses.-Wideband 1970, p 116-117.
Correlator Uses Complementary FETs for Sig-
nal Multiplication (Texas Instruments ad),
Electronics, Oct. 31, 1966, p 107.
POWER SOURCE- OSILLATOR

EXCITED BY RINGING CURRENT CIRCUIT
3.5
µf 5600
IOOK
__
4UI 0.01 300pf 2TI
µt
\ TONE
RINGER
SIGNALITE
RT2-32-IA
TANK
CIRCUIT
r-------- 32 46 125
-----,
1 I INDUCTION
COIL
I I
I I
I I
I LINE DIAL
CONTACTS TELEPHONE I
I I
I I
I I
IL ___________ 22 _________________
, jI
* INSERT JUMPER TO DECREASE LEVEL Application requires that breakdown voltage replaces conventional bell ringer and Is acti•
DIALING SIGNAL SUPPRESSOR-Neon glow of neon remain constant within 8% over vated by same 20-Hz ringing voltaga.-E. Bau·
lamp in Ericofon handset suppresses undo- lifo of telephone. lamp has radioactive man, Glow lamp Prevents Telephone Dial
sirable dial-tapping sound that could some- matorlal that stabilizes its breakdown volt• Tapping, Eledronic De1ign, Dec. 21, 1964, p
,! . :;.,
times activate another extension or telephone. age. Circuit also shows tono osclllator that 46-48.
47K
SIGNAL TUNING 60-HZ SIGNAL BURIED IN NOISE-

INPUT 68K 12K 2000 3300 Uses synchronous modulation to got poak out•
<>+!r---'VV.,_--t--~-+--.JVV---t---'IN'll-.--..NV'""1 put level of desired signal at power-lino
10µ.f frequency oven though buried In noise exceed-
01 02 10µ.f - 04 ing it by one or two orders of magnitude.
IN482A IN482A + IN4821i Output actuates meter through RC flltor having
time constant of about 0.04 1.-H. L. Kohn,
1000
Peak Voltage Indicator Solvos Tuning Prob-
r-t---+----t-----~-{!~ lem, Electronic Design, Jan, 20, 1964, p 84-85.
lllETER
12.6\ICT = T l 0-100µ.o
1~~:!1
20k
20k OUTPUT
>-+---TO A-0
CONVERTER
R2 10k R:s
10k
----10.33µt
C2
LINE NOISE FILTER-Opamps separate line

noiso from analog signals boforo conversion,
without appreciably affecting converter
settling timo of 40 ms at 0.01 % of full scale.
Second opamp acts as summing network for
analog input signal, Its noise component, and
ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL inverted noise component passed by first
PLUS NOISE opamp. Adjusting R3 provides complete can-
cellation of line-froqoncy nolso.-D. Volasovic
and S. Stankovic, Op Amps RoJect Line Noise
in A-D Converter's Input, E/odronlcs,, Jan. 5,
1970, p 96.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In tho category of this chapter, use the indox at tho back
of this book. Check also tho author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits/' published by
CHAPTER 56
Operational Amplifier Circuits
LOGAMP-Usos Motorola opamp In circuit

that provldos logarithmic compression of In·
strumentation data. Transistor serves as
feedback element.-K. Huehno, Tho Contlnu•
Ing Dominance of the Operational Ampliflor,
"Stoto-of-tho-Art-Llnears In Adlon,'' Moto-
rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 5-13 •
...---------<> -15 v
+6V
Al A5
110•
l'!lo ....
no•
9V
C5 Al CT
O.Ol'°'F 1011 0.11'-f
50V IOV
C2
UOpF
AT Al5
'I~ ,...
5.8511
-ev
"= D-C TO 1 MHZ-Integrator ~perates with loss to got required combination of bandwidth
than 0.1 dB change over ontlre bandwidth, and low sourco current.-J. F. Fo1tor, Low•
with low enough source current to permit using Cost Op·Amp lntogrator Hos Rongo From DC
-INPUT Integrating resistors up to I mog. Opomps +INPUT To Ovor I MH1, Eledronlc Design, Nov. 22,
wore constructed with discroto compononts 1967, p 104-105.
495
0-C REFERENCE 40k IOk

VOLTAGES
¥-Ov,:!: 2,Sv, :!:Sv,OR:!:IOv
+IOv
ANALOG MULTIPLIER TESTER-Combination of
four opamps and scope serves for meosuring
MULTIPLIER UNDER TEST
gain and offset errors of anolog multipliers
i quickly, elllclontly, and accurately. SI gives
choice of four d-c input voltagos-0, 2.5, 5,
OSCILLATOR and 10 V-with either polarity, and also sots
INPUT gain for multiplier. Amplitude of sine-wave
input is not critical. Same test sotup will
measure frequency response of multiplier.-
T. Cate, Top Performance from Analog Multi-
pliers? Much Depends on Errors Gauged in
Your Circuit, Elodronics, April 13, 1970, p
114-117.
IOc TO VERTICAL
INPUT ON
SCOPE
OPDT SWITCH
x + x
S2·A sz..,9
INPUT
Rt
30k
SN72 709L
l.Sk
2 I +15v
3
4
5
6
7 St-A OUTPUT
a
9
to
3 2 I
4
5
0,0002µ.f
6
7 St-B -tsv
a ZERO
9 ADJUST
10
2I
3
4
5
6 3
51-C
8
9
10
GAIN°CHANGER-Pormlt1 changing gain of IC
2I opamp without roadjusting offset voltage at
3
4 output. Two switches give choice of 19 gain
5 values. S1 determines Integral value, and
52 glYOs cholco of multiplication or division
6 ~s~~~v-~---
1a
9
(Sl-D :i by Integer setting of 51. 1OK pot nulls out•
put when input Is 0, and Is adjusted only
once.-R. Guyton, 19 Op-Amp Gains Are
L----a 10 10 POSITION Switched Without Offset, Efodronics, March 3,
4 DECK SWITCH 1969, p 94-95.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS ~97
SQUARING-MODE
tlve low•cost fet•lnput opamps, IC solld·ltate equal inputs are integrated to give ramp vant oquallons and graphs.-T. Cato, Top Per·
switch, and scope serves for testing squaring functions, which In turn are integrated and formance from Analog Multlpllors? Much
accuracy of quarter•square or variable-trans· resulting curves subtracted from ramps to Depends on Errors Gauged In Your Circuit,
conductance•type analog multipliers. Two determine multiplier error. Article gives relo- Electronics, April 13, 1970, p 114-117.
:-34-y--- -
1
I
I 3.9k
I
14.3v + 0.83 v0 u1 I 390
IN744A
-14.3v + 0.83 v001
INCREASING INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE-Boot·
strapping bias supply (In doshed box at lop)
for unity-saln IC opamp permits use with
three to four times normal input voltage limit
of 7 V. Output current is 700 mA. Stability
is excellent. High open-loop gain (about
2,000 at 400 Hz) eliminates crossover dlstor·
tlon.-D. A. Younge, Bootstrapping Blas Supply 220
lncroasas IC Voltage Capacity, Electronie1, Oct.
28, 1968, p 911-91. 24v
UTPUT
100k
'"'·
220pl
4,700 pf 118k 1%
fN753A
O.tpl (6.2vl
+
56pl 27
7 , +15 Volts
8
DENOHINATOR
6 IN753A INPUT
IOK TWO.QUADRANT ANALOG DIVIDER-Input
and output signal levels are I 0 V full scale.
IOOK
NUHERATOR Numerator and output are bipolar but do·
INPUT 6 OUTPUT nominator is positive only. Division 11 ob·
talned by cannedlng analog multiplier 5500
111751tA in feedback loop of opamp.-Applylng tho
IOOK Model 5500 Monolithic Analog Multiplier, Op-
tical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. I 0138.
-15 Volts
-------------<J
IOOpF IOnF .......
-10VsVxs+1DV
15kn 15 kn
} VxVy
Vo =-10-
-10 vs Vys +10 V
10 II 5 6
Vy 4 2
Vx 12 +32V
IC MULTIPLIER-Accemmoclates Input voltages MC1595L 14

ovar range of -10 V to +10 V. Output 11 kn RL
dynamic swing will ride 22-V cammon•mocle
8
level. Frequency response Is clown 3 clB at 9
4.5 MHz.-E. Renschler, The Monolithic Multi- 7 13 3 9.1 kn
plier Breakthrough, "Stato-of-tho-Art-linoars
In Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p
X Offset
t 13
27-36.: Gain
!
'
'
- - Adj.
+32V
- -
+ 15 v d-c + 50 yd·~
~-------------- --~----~
0.01
II'' 33k
Jl
JL
~
JL 350k
OUTPUT
Dt
INPUT
SIGNAL 1f IN969
-15vd·c
VOLTAGE BOOSTER-Two tronslstors and
zoner cliocle give high output voltage from stability. Can be usocl lo measure phase Boosting Op-Amp Output With Twa Transis-
low-voltage opamp having gaocl gain ancl angle changes as small as 0.01 %,-A. Freilich, tors, Eleclroniu, Juno 10, 1968, p 110-111.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 499
+15 Volts BIPOLAR SQUARING-Consists of four-quad·

rant multiplier having 10 V input and output
signal levels of both polarities. Bandwidth
IOK RI IH RS is d-c to 10 kHz, but may bo increased by
z changing R7 and RS to lOOK. Whon inputs
are connected together as shown, circuit be-
V R210K comes squaring amplifier. R6 adjusts offset
IK at Y input or adlusts symmetry of output
R3 parabola when squarlng.-Applying the
Model 5500 Monolithic Analog Multiplier,
Optical Electronics, Tucson, Arl1., No. 10138.
33pf'
·15 Volts
IH
1.0K
R7
R6
- 1.S v - 1.S v
SQUARE ROOT OF SUM OF SQUARES-Uses

five OEI IC's to squaro X and Y inputs. First
9125 opomp sums the squares, 521 performs
square root, and 9125 at output cancels off·
set so output Is absolute value of input func•
tion. Inputs and outputs are all positiva.-
Genorating Square Root of Sum of Squaros Y • lllPVll:---i
Function, Optical El11ctronlcs, Tucson, Ariz.,
No. 10085.
+15V +ISV
+ISV
TRI TR2
ov voltage over input range of 100 µV to 10 V. ov

LOGAMP-Usos logarithmic voltage-current re- Opamp at lower right may bo added as buffer Circuit Is suitable for positive input voltages
lationship In semiconductor junction to pro- and amplifler for logarithmic signal. Tran· only.-A. Schechtman, A Logarithmic A111pli·
vide, by means of feedback in Philips DOA42 sistors TRI and TR2 can be selected oxamplos flar, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind·
IC opamp, output which Is logarithm of input of BCY87 having high hFE at low IC values. hoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 86.
24
IC DIFFERENCE AMPLIFIER-Provldos gain of
20, with froquency rosponse shown by curve.
IC can bo SNS21, or SN522 having added
emitter-follower for greater drive capability.
-L. Housey and G. McFarland, Using lnto-
graleds as Foodback AmpllRors, Electronic
Design, March 2, 1964, p 49-52.
IKc IOKc IOOKc IMC

FREQUENCY
vour
+15 Volts
(+) P·channel such
El as 2N4360
10K
El and E2 must
of opposite
polarities.
Change Inputs of _
the 5501 to reverse
input polarities.
(-) E 2 < > - - - - - - - l
lK Output
FF 1K
Fin o-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~---1
10-MHZ R·l·C BANDPASS-Gain Is about 20 (a pulse train)
. dB al resonance, and 3-dB bandwidth Is (Pulses compatible with the logic levels
about I MHz. Inputs are effectively of the flip-flop used)
groundod.-"linoar Integrated Circuits," RCA,
Harrison, N.J., lc.41, p 262. ANALOG DIVIDER-Analog input El drives grator and start procou over again. End of
Integrator, while analog input E2 is reference clock pulse resets Rip-flop. Output is rec•
level of analog comparator. When integra- !angular pulse train. Fllp·Rop may be any
tor output is groator than reference, com· RS type having sutllclent speed for clock rate
paralor sets Rip-flop FF, which changes state used.-An Average Value Analog Divider,
at next clock pulse, making fet reset Into- Optical Electronics, Tucsan, Ariz., No. 10145.
+t5v
PART OF pA726
2N2920
I
I
I I
\ ";" I
+15v \
' ' ....... , __.....
Rs
IK ,,/
I
6 -
R2
15M·
conversion occurs over 80-dB dynamic range

LOG AMPLIFIER-Two Fairchild p._A709 IC logarithmic fashion. The transistors, con- and wide temperature range.-J. F. Gifford
opamps and lronslstor pair from temperaturo- noctod as foodback stage botwoon IC's, add • and M. Markkula, llnoar IC's: Part 5, Ins and
compensated IC dlfferontlal ampliRor together the two signal lovels aflor they have boon Outs of Op Amps, Electronlcs, Nov. 27, 1967,
serve to multiply and divide signals in true converted to logarithmic form. Logarithmic p 84-93.
33K ISV 33K +ISV
1ooic non IOOIC 3.3M
-ISV
'z
50pf
•o• (e, )ft x 10•-n •• i

•0• l.OloOi"• 1.01o9.,!.y
I 'I
EXPONENTIAL FUNCTION OF VOLTAGE-Ex·
ponent generated is adjustable between 0.25
and 4 by means of single potentiomoter. PRECISION LOG OF VOLTAGE OR CURRENT
Dashed redangles are Analog Devices 751N RATIO-Provides accurate logarithmic convor•
log modules; 111 is reference opamp and sion on both inputs. Uses Analog Devices
230J Is chopper-stabilized opamp.-W. Bor• 230J chopper-stablll111d amplifiers with 751N
lase and E. David, Design of Temperature log element for positive Inputs (dashed rec-
Compensated log Circuits Employing Tran• tangle) or 751 P far nogative Inputs. Differ-
slstors and Operational Ampliflers, Analog ential amplitler 183K Is hlgh-impodanco type.
Devices, Cambridge, Mass., E020-10-3/69, p Circuit includes common mode response zero·
12. ing control and zero offset control.-W. Bor-
lase and E. David, Design of Temperature
Compensated le9 Circuits Employin9 Transis·
tors and Operational Amplifiers, Analog De-
vices, Cambridge, Mass., E020-10-3/69, p 12.
R5
+16V +20V
llOK
IN457
"::'
2Nll32
Etn Eo
R
IN OUT
R1 -R 5 =50k
ABSOLUTE VALUES-Requires only singlet IC
opamp for converting d-c input voltages of
either polarity to their absolute value. Ac· OPAMP LIMITER-Modification of differential
curacy Is 0.1 % from 0 to 50 C for bipolar omplitler circuit Q1.Q2 servos to limit output
Inputs of 0.5 to 15 V. Article tells how Input of opamp G to plus or minus 10 V. Coupling
polarity changes transfer fundlon. RI and biasing resistors aro not in feedback
through R5 have equal values, and forward loop, so arran9ement givos good hard limit•
resistancos of all throe diodes ore identical. ing.-P. A. Ralatos, Rosol Circuit Independent
-W. Spani, Absolute Value Circuit Needs Only of Amplitude and Polarity, Elodronic Design,
One Op Amp, Eledronics, Jan. 20, 1969, p 89. Oct. 25, 1965, p 70 and 72.
CLEARING
+6n
G
PULSE
II
100 r, -I I-
!IOO~sec
0.5~f +5VJ
..__ __,~-----4----15V
~---oeouT LIMITS FOUR.QUADRANT MULTIPLIER-Two OEI 5500
t!IV R1 20K analog multipliers food opamp to provide
-5V product of two inputs over four quadrants.
LIMITS
E n
-5V
T1 • 400 OHMS, I I RATIO MINIATURE AUDIO TRANSFORMER
Opamp is not critical. Output Is 10 V full-
scale with either polarity when R Is lOOK.
Frequency response depends on opamp up to
10 MH:r.-Two and Four Quadrant Multipliers
using the OEI Model 5500, Optical Electron•
CLEARING-Combination of dual-emitter tran- ics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10140.
sistor Ql, transformer, and diode Dl clears
integrator by discharging its capacitor whon
clearing pulse is applied, without producing
d·c leakage path between either ond of Cl
and control signal. Circuit will reset integra• Input
tor to within 10 mV of zero.-J. A. Wisnia,
Dual-Emitter Transistor Clears Integrator Cir-
cuit, Electronic Design, June 7, 1965, p 41-42. 10 k .I\. I k .I\.
-15 Vdc +15 Vdc
150K
+15 Vdc
.,
I
: Ro I
I
I I
I I
l RTc _____,I
I
L----
INPUT RANGE! I
lmV<t 1<10V or IOnA <I,< I0011A
I -15 Vdc
o 1 "R e1xl50K e1
·to• l.OloO,R R, •IOQ 15al00K •loQiQ(VI
1 I 15mV
1:•(-RE)C1 ,I . • - - •150pA +IS Vdc
401 min IOOMn
10 k .I\. I kA 10 k A
I ) •II
~-·( . _ 10 + 33K 10 "l.6ms
40al.5al0
LOG o·F :VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-Provides
logarithmic comprossion of inputs to 230J E0 = flOJeJ, where -10 s l s 0.
choppor•st~bilizod amplifier over wide dy· SQUARE-ROOTING-Connection shown for
namlc range (10 pA to 100 µA). Dashed Burr-Brown differential-input multiplior-di-
rectangle Is Analog Devices 751 N log ele- vider package provides nonlnvertlng squaro-
ment for positive inputs (use 751 P for noga· root mode of operation with offset nulling.
tlvo lnputs).-W. Borlaso and E. David, Design Multiplier is used to square output signal.
of Temperature Compensated Log Circuits Report discusses causes of square-rooting
Employing Transistors and Operational Am· errors.-Dlfferentlal Input Multlplior/Divlders,
pliflon, Analog Devices, Cambridge, Mass., Burr-Brown Ro10arch, Tucson, Ariz., PDS.
E020-1 o-3/69, p 11. 201A-2, 1969,
c 10µf
et e,
-
';" ';"
R1
D:s
- SYNCHRONOUS PHASE DETECTOR-Singlo-

ended lnpUI Is obtained by using opomp1 Al
and A2 as smoll-slgnal ractiRars and A3 as
04 combination difference amplifier and low·
pass flllor. Operating range Is 10 Hz to 10
R, R1
Ro=50 kHz. Useful also as tracking Riter or pha10-
lock f·m discrlmlnator.-A. F. Gangl, Op
R1=R2=10k
Amps Roplaco Transformer In Phase Detector
DIODES -1N4001 '="
Circuit, Electronics, May 12, 1969, p 109.
-lOV
+IOV -150V
¥,, Oa IN4S7 200K

R9 ZERO
ADJ.
~
SIOK ':"
-150V -IOV
RESET OUTPUT
E1
INPUTS
INPUT +IOI/
44111/U
Sin/Cos
Module
5.IK +ISOV
llOK R4
A
Lf1_
OV
tOV
-ISOV
RESETS OPAMP-Qt.Q2 provldo electronic re•
sot for intograting opamp regardless of aulput
ampUtudo or polarity. Differential IC current
amplifier Is gated ON for reset porlod and
provides full-signal negative feedback, to +lOV FOUR.QUADRANT SINE-Addition of two
convert integrator to zero-gain ampliflor. opamps lo Burr-Brown 4018/25 two-quadrant
Article doacribes function of Integrating ca• sln-01ina generator modulo gives four.quad-
pacltor across opamp, whoso value Is chosen rant response. Equations are given. For
to give doslrad dl1chargo rate.-P. A. Ralato1, 0.1 % overall accuracy, all roalstors should
Reset Circuit lndepandonl of Amplitude and be trimmed to 0.01 % of indicated values.-
Polarity, Electronic Design, Oct. 25, 1965, p Sina/Casino Function Generator, Burr-Brown
70 and 72. Research, Tucson, Ariz., PDS-210, 1968, p 5.
+15 v
lOK OUTPUT
R
lOK .,
*10 v • TWO.QUADRANT MULTIPLIER-Uses OEI
Model 5500 single-chip analog multiplier pro.
0 to +1V
ssoo ., viding differential output equal to product
~
of two Inputs. Opamp at output is not criti-
cal, and may be OEI 9302, 9125, etc. Valuo
J'.3 1K of R detormines output amplitudoi IOOK gives
10 V full-scalo bipolar output.-Two and
Four Quadrant Multipliers using the OEI
Model 5500, Optical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz.,
lK
No. 10140.
1K
-15 v
-15 voe
CUBIC FUNCTION GENERATOR-Uses two low-

cost unmotched fet squaring circuits with 121<
forced-motchlng scaling foder to approximate IOK
matched fet poirs. Used with quorter-square
multiplier and summing and inverting ampli-
fiers to generate cubic function. Circuit
shown squares over 60-dB output signal range
for Inputs from 100 to 10,000 Hz when driven
by sine wave. Article covers theory, design
equations, and other applicatlons for squarer.
-T. F. Bogart, Jr., Matched Transistors Pass
for FET Squarers, Electronic Design, Nov. 8,
1965, p 36-41.
100K 100K ISK

- 5 Volts
lOOK
~ In ut 16
Sin ~
IOOK
I
100K 100K ISK
+5 Volts 360.DEG SINE-COSINE-With basic OEI sine-
function and epamp modules, circuit arrange-
ment shown generates full 360-deg nonlinear
transfer function. Useful bandwidth for
"\
K
maximum accuracy is d-c to 1 kHz. Model
9110 modules buffor summing roslstor net-
work and drive 5217 sine function modules.
-360 Degree Sine/Cosine Function Generator,
Optical Eloctronlcs, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10154.
IOOK
Cos ~
-15
Y>O
Rf= 50 K
FOUR.QUADRANT MULTIPLIER-Combines TWO.QUADRANT DIVIDER-Combines Burr·

Burr-Brown 9648 and 9671 squaring modules Brown 9648 and 9671 squaring modules with
with three high-gain d-c opomps to glvo four- three high-gain d-c opamps to give two-quad·
quadrant multiplication of Input signals cat rant division of signal at X by sl9nal at Y.-
X and Y. Output opamp Is connected as No9ativo Input General Purposo Squaring
summing amplifler.-Negatlvo Input General Modulo, Burr-Brown Research, Tucson, Ariz.,
Purpose Squaring Module, Burr-Brown Re- PDS.180A, 1968.
search, Tucson, Ariz., PDS.180A, 1968.
+t v
R1
I
~-
I
'
'1'I
l
I
__,I
I
-15:/
24 kn• JO kil Rio 110 '1 Ru 24k0 100 n
1s n 8.2 kn Ru. R12 6.2 kO •• R16 2k0 ISkO
2k0 22 kO Ru. R1, 100 0 R 17 11 kn 33 nF
• ± 0.1 %, metal film resistors • • ± I % resistors
DIFFERENTIAL fET INPUT-Fol pair in flnt loop volta90 gain 99 dB, and slewing rate tlal FET Input, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
stage reduces bias and offset currents by foe- with componSC1tion network Is 10 V per ps. Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 332,
tor of 1,000 as compared to bipolar transit• Report gives design equations.-B. J.M. Over• 1969.
tors. Unity-goln bandwidth is 10 MHz, open• goor, An Operational Amplifier with Differen•
506 ELECTRON.IC CIRCUITS MANUAL
+22.5VDC +15v
Rx
8.2k
11 3.3k
1
3.3k
y
4
f'
MCl595L
2
+
OUT 8 Vo
21(
12 14
7 t3 3
y x
1
OFF OFF V "K ..!!..
SET SET 0 [3
.Yi_ .
13.8k I3 °14.3t +1m.o
V3
-22.5VOC
2 W FROM D-C TO 12 MHZ-Instability 11
avoided by limiting gain of oach stage and
t y
-
IC MULTIPLIER-DIVIDER-Motorola monolithic
-
using feedback for handling large voltage · multiplier provides slmultanoous multiplication
swings. Output stage can handle 20-V swing and division when used with component
Into 200 ohms, or 2 W for square wavo. values shown.-E. Ronschlar and D. Weiss, Try
Bandwidth Is flat within 3 dB and rise time the Monolithic Multipller as a Vorsatlle A·C
Is 25 ns.-R. H. McMorrow, Modified Opera- Design Tool, Eledronlcs, Juno 8, 1970, p 100-
tional Arnplifler Has Flat Bandwidth to 12 Mc, 105.
Elecrronic Design, Au9. 30, 1965, p 47-48,
10 k .A. 1 k .A. 10 k .A.
IOk +15 Vdc

+ISv 1%
10k 3,000pf +15 Vdc

75k
n<.
3
OUTPUT X1
or
2N2920 4098/25
Y1
x
EXTERNAL 10 75k
THERMOCOUPLE 1%
-ISv
OFFSET VOLTAGE DRIFT SUPPRESSION-Blas
current drift compensation techniques for IC
+15 Vdc
amplifier, described In article, are here ap-
10 k.... 1 k.... 10 k.... E _ x1v1
plied to complete amplifier having monoRthlc
transistor pair as preamp. Null potentiome- DIFfERENTIAL-INPUT MULTIPLIER-Cannodion o - l O
ter unbalances collector load resistors so zoro shown for Burr Brown multlpllor-clivlder pock·
0
output Is obtained for zero Input, Change ago multiplies Inputs at Xl and Y1 with Im-
of 1 V In ehher supply makes offset voltago proved accuracy by using offset nulling
change only about 10 p.V. Temperature drift principle, Accuracy is 2 % of full-scale for
Is low, comparing favorably with that of ox• 4097 and 1 % far 4098, Report dlscu11os
pensive chopper-stablllzed ampllflers.-R. J. offset orrors.-Differential Input Multlplior/
Widlar, Llnaar IC's: Compensating for Drift, Dividers, Burr-Brawn Research, Tucson, Ariz.,
Electronics, Fob. 5, 1968, p 911-93. PDS-201A·2, 1969.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS &07
68pF
OUT
o----.-.----o()dV(l)/dl
10
0.01
FR£QUENCV IN CYClES PER SttOHD
ANALOG CONTROL OF VOLTAGE-Output DIFFERENTIATOR-Usos high-gain Phllbrlclc

voltage Uo of Philips DOA40 ·IC opamp Is USA-3 opamp with capacitive Input and re-
proportional to difforonco botwoon input sis• sistive foodbaclc, Developed for observing
nal voltagos applied to 051 I IC monostablo transverse dHS effect In bismuth at· liquid
mvbr's. Multlvibrotors are connoctod to helium tomporaturos. Output drives X·Y ro-
DZD40 zero detector and to common cloclc corder.-R. D. Brawn Ill, Now Methods for
pulse generator. Output voltage is returned De Haas-Shubnllcov Moo1uromont1, IBM Jour·
to zero by operating reset switch 5 to short nal, Nov. 1966, p 462-471.
out Cl .-Elodronlc Potontiomotor With 40. and
10.Serles Circuit Bloclct, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho Notherlands.
+15V
1.2pF lnF
.
r-- -,
BCV SS ~I I
r-- --, I I
I I I I
I I I output
I
I I I
I 820'2: I SlkQ
input
·'I I I
+ I I
I I
I
I
I I
L ___ _J 2N930
10nF
ISkQ t nF
-15V
HIGH-GAIN D.c: DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER- width of 9 MHz, and common-mode rojodlon J. Oosterllng and S. Sljbtra, Operational Am-
Provldos open-loop d-c goln of 200,000, dlffer- ratio of 94 dB. Suitoblo for operational use pliflors, Electronic Applications, Philip1, Pub,
ontiol input Impedance of 100,000 ohms, In amplifying slgnol by known and accurotely Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho Nether-
common•modo input Impedance of 20 mog, determinod factor. Article includos mathe- lands, Vol, 26, No. 4, p 116-188.
output lmpodance of IOK, unity.gain band- matical discussion of ampliflcatlon errors,-
A·C/D..C: LOGARITHMIC CONVERTER-Uses

OEI Model 269 four-docado bipolar logamp f
having froquoncy response covering entire
audio spodrum down to d-c. Output Is in· 100 It
stantaneous log of input. With sine-wave
Input, output Is rounded-top steep-sided
waveform, with amplitude still equal to log
of input peak amplitude. Compruslon of ournr
ampliflor mean• that entire four decades of
Input produce output from 250-mV full-scale 100 It
peak down to abovt 25 mV for minimum in·
put. With d-c Input, output is d-c voltage
equal to log of lnput.-A Logarithmic AC to
DC Converter, Optical Electronics, Tucson,
Ariz., No. 10082.
BALANCED TERMINATION-Required for

transducen and other signal sources having
INPUI long lines. If common-mode voltage exists
between both inputs and signal ground,
opamp con reject voltage as common-mode
COMMON
signal. Arrangement shown provides for
68 >+,..,..--4--o 011rP11r nulling of d-c unbalance with pot. Capaci·
INPUr tors may bo inserted in d-c lines at points
marked X. Uso 16 p.F. High-froquoncy re-
sponse for -3 dB Is about 3 MHz.-An AC
Coupled Balanced Input Pro-Ampliflor, Opti-
cal Eledronlcs, Tucson, Ariz., No, 10115.
+ 1.5 Volts
0 0
Izt I,, IOpf
- 15 Volts
.J R
1N75JA
1N456A
r- -----------
I
751N R
0
--, I
c
I o, I
1N5J14 I I
I RTC I
I I
51K I
I Q
I I
L------------..J T
OutP11r I_ I0° 9A<I1 c:I0" 7A

• 0 • 1.0109 jlVI.
' I0"9A<Iz <I0- 4 A
I Ro +R,.c -II 4x10· 12 I

+ 1.5 Volts "t 1140i' (-R--) a 10 : - I sec,--» Ro
I TC I 4011
HALL-EFFECT PREAMP-OEI Model 9130 LOG OF CURRENT RATIO-Combines Analog
opamp provides differontlol input required Dovices 751N matched transistor pair and
for amplifying differential output voltage callbratod voltage divider modulo with
that may be as small as a few mV per gauH Model 144 fot ompliflor to provide logarithm
of magnetic field poning through Hall-effect of ratio of two Input currents greater than a
dovlce. Circuit has gain of 1,000, which nonoamporo ooch. Dlode-connoctod tronsis-
moon• that placement of Holl device with ton oro reversible. Used In colorimetry,
resped to earth's mo9J1etlc flold may affod whore overall accuracy of 0.1 dB con bo
output. Frequency response extends from malntoined.-W. Borlaso and E. David, De-
d-c to about 1,000 Hz. Uneorlty Is good if •ign of Temperature Compensated Log Circuits
bias current is set properly.-A Holl Effoct Employing Tron•lstors and Oporotlonal Am·
DDYlce Pro-Amplifler, Optical Electroniu, pliflers, Analog Devices, Cambridge, Mass.,
Tucson, ArlL, No. 10118. E020-1G-3/69, p 10.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
IOK
Rt
FOUR-QUADRANT FOR D-C TO 10 MRZ-Uses

OEI 5500 analog multlpliors. Bandwidth is I.OK
llmitod only by slow rato or froquency re-
R2 7
sponso of 9300 opamp. Output is 1 V full Xa:t I Vo I t
scalo.-Applying tho Model 5500 Monolithic V•:t I Vo It 100
Anolog Multiplier, Optical Electronics, Tucson, -::" R3
2 5500 6
Aris., No. 10138. v o-------jr"l..---.-r'-----'
3 "
IOOpF
•o
r-
1
I
751P
Ra
--. I
I
LOG OF CURRENT RATIO WITHOUT REVERSI·
BILITY-Analog Devices 751P log element Is
transdiode-connected, for . handling currents
from fow plcoamperes to hundreds of nano-
I a,,-------- I amperos with good accuracy. Model 302 am•
I I plifler error currents are much smaller than
I lowest signal currents which c~n be con-
I
verted. Transdiode connoctlen moans loss of
______________ ..JI reversibility, so uso 751P for negative Input
currents or 751 N for positive input curronts.-
.,. W. Borlase and E. David, Design of Tompera·
I0- 11A<I1 <IO-\ turo Compenscitod Log Circuits Employing
Transistors and Operational Ampliflors, Ana•
• icf 8A <I 2 <I0- 4A log Devices, Cambridge, Mass., E020.10-3/69,
p 11.
I RG +Rye -10 4•10- 11 I
r=4c)i(-R--)•10 =- 1- - set, 40I»Ra
I TC I I
5% 5%
8.2k 8.2k l.011F
Vy
~
TO
I
INPUT 8
OFFSET MCl595 2
AO JUST 12
CIRCUIT
14 vxvv
Vx
13 10
·IOV<Vx<•IOV
-IOV<Vy<•IOV 39k
68k
01. 03 - 2N930A 1% SOk
l.011F l.011F
1
Oz - 2N2905A
'OR MD6100
-15 v -::- ..,.
tor and straight ccipacitcince at output. High
·15V f-i
multiplier.-E. Renschler, The Monolithic Mul-
MULTIPLY WITH DISCRETE LEVEL SHIFT-Cir-
cuit tcikes differonticil output current and output impedance, with resulting limltcition tiplier Brecikthrough, "Stcite-of·tho Art-Lin•
translates directly to ground reference, using on drive capcibllity, Is ovorcomo by using ears In Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
Inexpensive discrote components. Upper opamp voltage follower at output. Input IC 1969, p 27-36.
frequency limit depends only on 7.SK resis- Is Motorola MC1595 linear four-quodrant
&no ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
Rs v, .
20Y AT tOmo
4.7K
ANALOG MULTIPLICATION-Two diodes

Rz driven by threeetransistor Darlington current
tOK
generator form low-cost logarithmlc ampliRer
providing multipllcation at 1 kHz over 3·
decade signal range. Diodes aro 1N914 sill·
con planar units.-J. F. Delpech, Logarithmic
tpf
Ampli&er Has 66-dB Range, Eledronict, Oct.
17, 1966, p 89-90.
Y1---t~~----.......,
Rt
Dz
4.7K
24
..,
A
! 20~------------------------~
i!; 16
IC NONINYERTING OPAMP-Provldes gain of 0
20 dB, 100.kHz bandwidth for 5,000-ohm a: 12
source Impedance, and frequency response LI.I
Eo
~
shown by curve. IC can be SN521, or SN522
having added emitter-follower for greater ~ 8
:I
drive capabllity.-L. Housey and G. Mcfarland, c
4
Using lntegratods as fHdback Amplifiers,
Electronic Design, March 2, 1964, p 49-52.
IKc 'IOKc IOOKc I Mc
INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCY
+15Y
INPUT INPUT SIGNAL
_:~4
Pt
100
+
c,
50pf
2nsec 5nsec
INPUT
Vt
.....- ...- ....~-..~~--l\l""r--~---=--+tov
2 OUTPUT
o, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _v..:2:- -3v
tN279
-- '-._~~-JVV'w-----V•3"--20v -t5v
-- TRANSIENT ANALYSIS BY COMPUTER-De-

scription of simple inverter circuit can be
punched on cards for inputting to computer
TRANSIENT PROTECTION-Largo positive-go-
ing voltage transients at input of IC opamp
I having NET·I circuit analysis program de- are suppressed by using ult at Input to servo
OUTPUT veloped at Los Alamos Scientific Lab. Com- as variable threshold limiter ond maintain
puter then produces printout of d-c steady· rulstanco of about 3 gigohms. To limit neg•
state and tronslent rosponHs, basod on ativo transients, use complementary ujt In·
characteristics of diodes and transistor usod. stead of or with this drcult.-R. Chapman,
-A. F. Malmberg, Not-1 Gets an "A" For Ufl Protects Op Amp From Voltage Tran-
Accuracy, Electronics, Fob. 6, 1967, p 76-82. sients, Elocfronlcs, Nov. 25, 1968, p 83.
OPERATION AL AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS 511
ourPur JK .3K OtrrPUI
lNPur .3K JK
typically
.3-15 pF
DIFFERENTIAL WITH GAIN OF 3-When driven

from balanced lino, bandwidth is well abovo WIDE·BAND ABSOLUTE-VALUE-Provides ac- OEI 9300 opamps.-Applylng tho Model 9300
10 MHz. Input Impedance is 300 ohms. curate full.wave redlflcation of input, from Monolithic Operational Ampliflor, Optical
Uses OEI 9300 opamp.-Applying tho Model d-c to 5 MHz for 1 V poak output, using two Elodronlcs, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10134.
9300 Monolithic Operational Ampllflor, Optl•
cal Elodronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10134.
100k
3 v :sov
lOV
UIC
TP·I
14V. - -71" ,,--
4V•• .f V L
tSOk
-r;f
1...f-1
A1' I
-~J1'! V/'l·.-_·tP-Z
,..- L
INPUT
1 I -:
i.-10.., SUMMING AMPLIFIER-Varloble resistor pro-
vides bias current compensotlon for linear IC
SQUARER-Output voltage of circuit is dirodly ago, "400 ldoas for Design Solod1d from u11d with fixed source Impedance. Tempera-
proportional to square of d·c input voltago.- Eledronlc Design," Haydon Book Co., N.Y., ture charadorfstics are excellent, but anango-
R. L. Colcord, Circuit Squares DC Input Volt- 1964, p 83. ment works only for flx1d values of feedback
roslstors.-R. J. Wldlar, Unear IC's: Compen-
satln9 For Drift, Eledronlcs, Fob. 5, 1968,
p 91>-93.
-V,.t•5• Rt
10011 MC1531
INPUT
1
X 0 TO BOTH FET S
0.75y MEM511A
IC MULTIPLIER-Input signals X and Y are
combined by fot's operated as voltago•var•
iabl1 resistors by keeping signal valtagos be-
low 0.75·V plnchoff of th11e fat's. Opamps 4.7M
Al and A2 thon make output proportional to
produd of X and Y. Useful in desktop com-
puters.-B. Shore, Pocket-Size Analog Compu-
ter Divides and Multiplies, Electronics, Dec.
25, 1967, p 66-67.
INPUT
Yout• kXY
y 0 TO 0.75v • 5,
+15V ·15V
IN
OUT
BOTH FET'S MEM511A
IOOk +24 0.3µ.F
INPUT
y 0 TO
0.75v =5v
RS
50k
RS
~--~~--~~----WI.~~--~-..----"""'
332k
.....
R2
IM
~-'
IC DIVIDER-Input signals X and Y are com-

bined by fot's operated as voltage-variablo TRACKING WITHOUT CAPACITIVE INPUT-
resistors by keeping signal voltages below Has independent adjustments for gain, offset,
0.75-V pinchoff. Opamps then make output and differentiating timo constant. Output
proportional to quotient Y/X. Used in detk· drifts only 10 mV per day and 0.25 mV per
top analog computen.-8. Shore, Pocket-Size de9 C.-J. Harris, A Trackin9 Differentiator
Analog Computer Divides and MultipUes, Has Noncapacitivo Input, Electronic De1i9n,
Electronic1, Dec. 25, 1967, p 6~7. Au9. 15, 1968, p 238.
+12
51K Rb 25 K Eo
4)-._____.~v-----.------<
0.01%
-JO,; E;n,; 0
2
Eo = + (Ein)
.._____-+-__..,,,...,..__...,.~~~~ 8 ouT 10
10µ.f Common
IOOK IOK
....._________...______ ~--o-50
SQUARING CIRCUIT-Burr-Brown 9eneral-pur·

ALGEBRAIC SUMMING-Minor modifications in pose ne9ativo-input 9671 squarln9 modulo
input of two-sta9e operational Inverter con• may bo used with variety of standard
vert It into excellent summing amplifier hav• opamps to provide current into opamp sum·
in9 gains up to 10, dependin9 on values used ming junction that is proportional to square
for input reslston and R2.-W. Rosenbluth, of applied negative input voltage. Modulo
Two-Stage Transistor Replaces Precision Oper- requires +IS V and -15 V from external
ational Inverter, Electronic Desi9n, April 12, regulated power supply.-Negativo Input Gen·
1965, p 5~56. oral Purpose Squaring Modulo, Burr-Brown Ro·
search, Tucson, Ariz., PDS-180A, 1968.
t15v
Rt
I
I
I
--------"WVV\~------
Rn
...... over ton times tho parallel combination of mV. Article contains thirteen other IC opamp
SUMMING-Circuit usln9 Fairchild p.A709 IC feedback resistor Rf and the source resiston. application circults.-J. F. Gifford and M. Mark·
opamp can sum many Input signals with hi9h With three inputs and with input resistors and kula, Llnoor IC's: Part 5, Ins and Outs of Op
accuracy, provided input resistance of IC is Rf all 20,000 ohms, maximum error is only 30 Amps, Electronics, Nov. 27, 1967, p 84-93.
+12
51K Rt1
...
IJ 30
:!!: 25
...:>
8 INo-11-"llR""llr--4-+-I ...:>
Q.
20 600
IOJ-lf 0
a: 15
!!I
""
:;
Q. 10
~~~-1---1111-~~+---tr---oeouT 2
<(
IOKIOJ-lf 5
IKC IOKC IOOKC IMC

OPTIMUM TWO-STAGE INVERTER-Providos
constant input impedance and unity gain of INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCY
opamp, along with broadbancl 1811-dog phase IC INVERTING OPAMP-Provides gain of 28
shift at much lower cost and less complexity. dB, bandwidth of 100 kHz, and choice of In-
Output Impedance is low, and gain Is indo· verting or nonlnverting Input. Frequency re-
pendent of transistor parameters. Can be sponse is shown by curve. IC con be 5N521,
used In analog computer to invert 400-Hz sine or, SN522 having added emitter.follower for
and square-wave signals. Gain depends on greater drive capobility.-L. Housey and G.
R2; if Rl is SOK, gain will be unity if R2 is McFarland, Using lntegroteds as Feedback
50.85K.-W. Rosenbluth, Two-Stage Transistor Amplifiers, Electronic Design, Morch 2, 1964,
Replaces Precision Operationol Inverter, Elec- p 49-52.
tronic Design, April 12, 1965, p 54-56.
IOOpf IOpf
ANTILOG OF VOLTAGE-Uses Analog Devices

751N log modulo (dashed rectangle) for posi-
tive inputs or 751N for negative Inputs, with
model 111 reference opomp and 230J chop-
per-stabilized opamp. With Input varying
from 0 to S V, output will vary from 10 V to
100 p.V, representing one decade of output
voltage chango per volt of Input voltage
chango.-W. Borlase and E. David, Design of
Temperature Compensated Log Circuits Em•
ploying Transistors and Operational Ampli-
fiers, Analog Devices, Cambridge, Mass.,
E020.1G-3/69, p 12.
·In
-1 < X < +t (Volt)
+ 6 v Its
0 < Y < +1 (Volt)
+In IK
10K
x OUTPUT
DIGITAL LINE RECEIVER-Uses analog com• IV-FS

parator IC to detect differential dlgltol signal
that may be riding on some common-mode
signal. Positive supply voltage Is sot for IOK - 6 Volts
logic-compatible output voltoso level. Lino
termination shown eliminates reflection prob-
lems of Ions line lengths, If RT is chosen for
best match.-Applying the Model 5501 Mono- TWO-QUADRANT FOR D·C TO 10 MHZ-OE! at 1 V output.-Applying the Model 5500
lithic Analog Comparator, Optical Electronics, Model 5500 analog multiplier and two Monolithic Analog Multiplier, Optical Elec•
Tucson, Ariz., No. 10147. opamps give wideband multiplier function tronics, Tucson, Arir., No. 10138.
©
Ro -Output• -V, Pin 2
INPur
1K 5
OEI p
2421 i-=-----~
•V
-----.s
+output, +V • Pin 4
POLAR LOGAMP-Two opamps and Model
2421 diode cluster having log characteristics
give 250.mV poak output, Inverted In polar-
ity from Input, as tomporaturo-compensatod
polar logamp or as wideband bipolar logamp.
POI.o\R -Applying tho Modal 9300 Monolithic Opor•
ourPur atlonal Amplifier, Optical Electronics, Tucson,
BIPOI.o\R our Pur Ariz., No. 10134.
Ro aeta the output soro lev.1
and th• aero TC Input lowl.
+15v
+ 1S Volts
IOOk
0.1 uF
ourm
IN453
7M
910 ohm
- 15 Volts
100 ohu
VOLTAGE FOLLOWER-Uses OEI Model 9186

uhf opamp with compensation for stablllzlng INPUT OUTPUT
as voltage follower with gain of 10, band-
BOOTSTRAPPING STOPS DRIFTS-Germanium
width of 30 MHr, and normal slewing rate of
diode and solodod 7-meg resistor provldo bias
600 V per p.s.-A Wida Band Voltage Fol-
current compensation for voltago-followor
lower, Opticaf Eladronlcs, Tucson, Ariz., No.
configuration of IC amplifier. Diode· boot-
10108.
strapping to ampllflor output provides high
input impodanco.-R. J. Wldlar, Linear IC's:
Compensating For Drift, Electronics, Fob. S,
1968, p 9o-93.
+6V
- ~
~"
~
......
ADJUSTABLE-GAIN AMPLIFIER-Gain depends .
on ratio of values used for R2 and Rl. Cir-
IO
Cl.OOI O.OI OJ I 10 cuit requires common ground point. Power
FREQUENCY-MHI supply bypass capacitors should bo disc 'ce-
·6V
ramic or equivalent high-frequency typos.
Use motal-fllm resistors for maximum band-
Rt" 91< SYNTHESIZING PEAKED RESPONSE-Nonln• width. OEI 9300 apamp has 6 dB/odavo
Ro vortlng IC opamp duplicates transfer fundlon rolloff over ontiro operating frequency range
II<
expressed by equation given In book, to give to 100 MHr.-Applying tho Model 9300 Mono-
Cn Rn peaked response shown.-"Unoar Integrated lithic Operational Ampliflor, Optical Elec-
68 pF 2.7 IC Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 2SO. tronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10134.
Rz
IC BUFFER-Uses Fairchild p.A709 opamp to

provldo any gain from unity to 25,000 with·
out loadina source. Clcised-loop gain Is do.
eour termlned by values used for R1 and R2.
Equivalent Input resistance can easily be
made greater than 10 meg. Article contains
13 other IC opamp application circults.-J. F.
Gifford and M. Markkula, Linear IC's: Part 5,
Ins and Outs of Op Amps, Electronics, Nov.
27, 1967, p 84-93.
9671
0.01% +
+
Vo
O>: Ein,:; + 10
Common
Eo =· ~
YIU tjn
ANTILOG OPAMP-Extends logarithmic rela-

SQUARE-ROOT CIRCUIT-Burr-Brown 9671 tion between forward current and voltage of
squaring module is placed In feedback path slllcon diode by canceling bulk resistance
of standard opamp, to produce at output the offed of diode at higher currents. Opamp Is
square root of an Input signal between zero Fairchild µA702; R Is 20, R1 Is 500, and R2
and 10 V. A«uracy Is poor for small Input Is I K. Common mode relodion of opamp
amplltudes.-NogatiYO Input General Purpose makes grounding of reference terminals un·
Squaring Modulo, Burr-Brown Research, nocessary.-5. Franco, Op Amp Log Circuit
Tucson, Ariz., PDS-180A, 1968. Eliminates Diode Bulk-Resistance Effecb, Eloc•
Ironies, Juno 9, 1969, p 101,
NEG. flllE
GAIN ADJ.
Ill
50K
"'
.05 ..
114
ANALOG IN 511,.05'!1.
INEOI 115
ANALOG IN .05'!1.
C POSI
POS. ,INE AZ 117 Ct

GAIN ADJ. 50K SK
.on. Z·fhf COMllON llODE
IA LAN Cl DIFFERENTIAL BUFFER-General-purpose dif·
ferontlal buffer ampllfler, dotl9ned for uso
ANALOG
ORD with dlfferontlal multiplexer and other aP-
~llcatlons roqulrln9 high common-mode re•
COVPOllENT VALUE 1edlon, can have differential eains of I 4
GAIN RS611t R56111 8, or 10, dopondln9 on resistor values .:..d•
+UV <!.X!D--- PIN I I MEO 5.0000K Available commercially as D-40B3 plug-I~
I Ult:O 10.00111 modulo contalnlna IC and all components.
ClllO
~PINZI 4 UllH 10.01511 Circled numbers are etched board connodor
-zzv ~l'INZI
TPO
10
• l.lllH 40.0llK
1011£0 110.0ZOIC
plns.-lntoarated Circuit Loalc Cards El
tronlc En9ineorln9 Co., Santa Ana Cal' 196ec-
p DS73. . I ., 9,
:· ~"\.
BOOSTING OUTPUT CURRENT-Adding cam•

plementary pair of emitter-followers to
Philips TAA241 difference ampllfler givos
higher output current. Emitter "slstors are
used to prevant thermal runaway.-J. Cohen
and J. Oostarling, Applications of a Practical
D. C. Difference Ampliflar, Philips, Pub, Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho Netherlands, No.
321, 1968.
-6V
v,
lµF
+12V
s,
.~o-.,
I I
--L-c=J-.L--,
1,1
t lbt
SOOkQ I
- I IOOpF
I
*100nF DIFFERENCE AMPLIFIER AS INTEGRATOR-

Uses Philips TAA241 diffarence ampliflor in
~
connaction that prevents feedback capacitor
ERROR COMPENSATION-Uses Philips TAA241 from being continuously charged by offset
diffaronca ampliflar with provision for com· voltage. Circuit will operate satisfactorily
pensoting erron lntroducad by bias or offset only above its break frequency, which for
current. Potentiometer ad[ustment procodure values shown is 1.6 Hz.-J. Cohen and J.
is given in report.-J. Cohen and J. Ooster• Oostarling, Applications of a Practical D. C.
ling, Applications of a Practlcal D. C. Differ· Difference Amplifier, Phlllps, Pub. Dept., El-
enco Amplifier, Philips, Pub. De;t., Elcoma coma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Netherlands, No.
Div., Elndhoven, The Netherlands, No. 321, 321, 1768.
1968.
v• >+15 v +15V
·IOV.;;vx.;;+IOV 15 k 15 k OUTPUT
·10 V.;; Vy.; +10 V Ry RX OFFSET
ADJUST ·ISV
vx 10 II
R9
13.1 k
12
MCISSS l Ra '=
Vy
910 k
14
8
1 13 3
RA
TO
INPUT OFFSET
ADJUST CIRCUIT
l.O,.Fi
R13
Rs }"
K FACTOR
ADJUST
R7
II k
v·· ·ISV -= -= '= ·15V
MULTIPLY WITH OPAMP LEVEL SHIFT-Aecom• set up to provide product of Input voltages Monolithic Multiplier Breakthrough, "State-of.
modates Input voltages from -10 V to +10 divided by 75, and opamp supplies &xod tho-Art-Linoon in Action," Motorola, Phoe-
V without using 32·V supply. IC multiplier is closod·loop gain of 7.5.-E. Ronschlor, Tho nix, Ariz., 1969, p 27-36.
10kQ 100kQ
V;
INVERTING AMPLIFIER WITH GAIN OF 50- INVERTING AMPLIFIER WITH GAIN OF 10-
Full-power frequency Is 500 kHz and wide· Full-powor fraquoncy 11 30 kHz and wideband
band noise voltage 2 mV rms. Uses Philips noise voltage is only 0.5 mV rms. Usos Phil-
TAA241 difference ampliRer.-J. Cohen and lps TAA241 difference ampliRor.-J. Cohen
J. Oesterling, Applications of a Practical D, and J. Oostorling, Applications of a Practical
C. Difference AmpliRor, Phlllps, Pub. Dept., D. C. Difference AmpllRor, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Elndhovon, Tho Netherlands, No. Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Netherlands, No.
321, 1968. 321, 1968.
t12V
10kQ
"•I
120kQ
SUBTRACTING AMPLIFIER-Uses Philips TAA· ·6V

241 difference ampliRer In circuit giving gain
of 10 that is flat within I di up to 8 MHz.- BOOSTING INPUT IMPEDANCE-Pair of emit·
J. Cohen and J. Oostorling, Applications of fer-followers ahead of Philips TAA241 differ•
a Practical D. C. Difference Amplifier, Philips, once amplifier Increases Input Impedance and/
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovan, Tho or permits operation with smaller Input cur·
Netherlands, No. 321, 1968. rent.-J. Cohan and J. Oostorling, Applications
of a Practical D. C. Difforonco AmpliRer,
Phillps, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven,
1kQ
IOOpF
INVERTING AMPLIFIER WITH GAIN OF I 00- FOLLOWER-Connection shown, for use with
Will supply 10 V output at full-power fre- Philips TAA241 difference ampllfler, givo1
quency limit of 350 kHz. Wideband noise unity gain. Input Impedance Is 7 mog and
voltage at output is 1.2 mV rms from 2 Hz output Impedance very low. Can handle •le·
to I MHz. Uses Philips TAA241 difference nals from +o.s V to -0.4 V. Response Is
ampllfler.-J. Cohen and J. Oostorling, Ap· flat to 2 MHz.-J. Cohen and J. Oosterllng,
llcatlons of a Practical D. C. Difference Am· Applications of a Practical D. C. Difference
pliRor, Phlllps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind· Amplifier, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
hovon, Tho Nothorlands, No. 321, 1968. Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No. 321, 1968.
.---------------...ri (-) ACTIVE RESISTOR-Two•termlnal output has

same veltago-curront characteristic a1 ·fixed
RI llR2 • IOK R resistor. Olfers po11ibllity of cast saving,
RI small size, oa1e of obtaining nonstanlfard
"OUTPUT"
values of resistance, and ability ta act as
load or ballast at low resistance values. Bo-
LOAD TERMINALS havos liko shunt rogulatar. Noninvortlng In•
R3 put of opamp 111nsos fraction of food volta911
and attempts to maintain this voltage
(acra11 R) tho 1am11 as at nonlnvortln9 Input.
Bandwidth Is 1 MHz. R3 supprossos tran•
R2
1lont1.-An Active Rosistar, Optical Electron•
(+) lcs, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10148.
ROOT·MEAN°SQUARE CIRCUIT-Oporatl11n1 of
10•
square and square-rooting aro combined to
give rms averaging circuit accepting bipolar
Inputs. Uses two Burr Brown 9671 squaring
0
modules combined with four standard

opamps. Averaging time of circuit Is de-
termined by cholco of values for low-pass
lo
filter elements R2.C1. Filter bandwidth
should be small compared to bandwidth of
signal being moasured.-Negative Input Gen•
oral Purpose Squaring Modulo, Burr-Brown
Rosoarch, Tucson, Ariz., PDS.180A, 1968.
NONINVERTING WITH 100 GAIN-Uses Phif.

ips TAA241 difference ampliRer. Wideband
noiso voltage is 1.1 mV rms. Frequency re-
sponse Is Rat to 1 MHz.-J. Cohen and J.
Oosterllng, Applications of a Practical D. C.
Difference Amplifier, Philipa, Pub. Dept., El·
coma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No.
321, .1968.
10K 10K
INPUr' ourm
10K
50-W OPERATIONAL POWER AMPLIFIER- ABSOLUTE-VALUE CIRCUIT-Use of 9el'llla•
Usos pair o~ silicon transistors in output stage, nium gold-bonded diodes with OEI opamp
upper of which 11 driven by emltter-follewer Improves high-frequency" op•ratlon and low·
EXPANSION FUNCTION-Thyrlte varistor and fod by opamp, In Darlln9ton conRguratlon. level signal operation beyond that obtained
OEI opamp together glvo expanalon function 32o.kHz rolloff network betwoen Inputs of with silicon dledos. Circuit has positive out·
having exponent greater than unity. By 111· opamp ensures stablllty down to unity 9aln. put, made negative by reversing both diodes.
lectlng varistor, squarln9, cubic, and quad• Circuit provides closed·loop 9ain from 2 to Useful bandwidth 11 d-c to 100 kHz.-Apply•
ratlc functions may be created.-Applylng the about 20.-B. J. Losmandy, Operational Am· Ing the Model 9300 Monollthic Operational
Madel 9302 Monolithic Operational Amplifier, pliRer Application for Audio Systems, Opamp Amplltler, Optical Eloctronlcs, Tucson, Ariz.,
Optical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10135. Labs, Los Angeles, Cal., 1968. No. 10134.
+6 v
C = .01, 0.1,or lpF
Switch
I O.OS~F I Control
L ___ j
+6V
100 K
.:• __
.._
9859
_.
: ON for INTEGRATE
: OFF for HOLD
•
I
I
~Kj
En
ANALOG INTEGRATOR-Burr-Brown 9859/15
oledronic switch foods opamp to give choice
55 K (TERMINALS
5,7,8,11 of either Integrate or hold modes of opera·
OPEN) tlon. With integrate mode (produced by +s
1500 pF V at switch control), circuit behaves Ilka low
fixed reslstanco and can accommodate Input
100.KHZ NARROW·BAND-lnverting•typo IC currents up to 1 mA. In hold mode, switch
-6V
opamp Is connected as tuned amplifier having resistance "Is almost Infinite, Isolating 1ummln9
IC OPAMP AS INTEGRATOR-External circuit peak response shown.-"Linear Integrated inputs from· ampliRer. Chief error Is duo to
provides doe feedback, so offset voltage can- Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 251. switchin9 time, which Is under 10 1'1.-lnto·
not continuously charge feedback capacitor 9rate/Hold Electronic Switch, Burr-Brown Re-
until ampllfler limits. D-c gain is 20 dB. search, Tucson, Ariz., PDS 189, 1967.
Weighting fador of Integration is about 1 ms.
-"Linear Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., IC-41, p 252.
0.2µ1
IOOK
+6V s 0
-v
L.J
0 singl-nded fat pulse gate for ro1ettlng of
LIMITER AND RESETIER-Eledrenically variable opamp lntegrator.-P. A. Ralatos, m limlt1
limiter for opamp has very high Input im• and Resets Operational Amplifiers, Electronic
podanco for controlling pulse, while acting as Design, Nov. 8, 1965, p 54-56.
Rs
I Ok
R1
INPUT IOk 02
•• IN914
lh
5k R4
IOk
-av Rz
10k
04
0 1N914 OUTPUT
SCALING ADDER-Uses IC opamp with invert· le,I
Ing feedback for summing and weighting two
different Input slgnals. Weighting Is possible
because virtual ground existing at !unction R1/R5 • 1.000
of feedback resistor and Inverting Input ter- ABSOLUTE VALUE-Provides hl9h accuracy yet can be up to 1 kHr, which Is adoquate for
minal 3 isolates each signal channel from requires only one pair of accurately matched anal09-digital converter systom.-M. A.
others.-"Llnoar Integrated Circuits," RCA, resistors (Rl and R5). Opamp A1 1orves as Smither, Improved Absolute-Value Circuit,
Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 254. Inverter and A2 as volta9e follower. Input EEE, March 1969, p 124.
10m IOk
tk
10 k
INPUT
VARIABLE-GAIN IC-Providos continuously .ad- 10 k
justable gain with sln9lo pot, for matching NONINVERTING AMPLIFIER-Variablo rosistor
circuit sensitivity to Input signal levols, Input R1 provides bias currant componsatlon for UNITY-GAIN FEED-FORWARD-First two
attenuation network R3-R4 minimizos com• linoar IC that has fixod sourco lmpedanco. stagos of Motorola opamp aro bypassed for
mon-mede orrors. Circuit gain can bo varied Rl should bo throo timos sourco lmpodance. high froquoncy ond signal is inserted at In•
from le11 than unity to very high upper limit. Will handle wido tomperaturo rango, and Is put to third stago. Gives output of 1O V
-W. D, Miller, Minimizing Cemmon·Modo unaffoctod by power supply or common mode P•P at 1 MHz. Oporatlng information Is
Errors in a Variablo-Goin Amplifier, Eledron· varlotlons.-R J. Widlar, linear IC's: Com- given In Motorola Application Noto AN-439.
ics, Juno 23, 1969, p 104. ponsoting For Drift, Electronics, Feb. 5, 1968, -K. Huohno, The Continuing Dominance of
p 9o-93. tho Operational A111plifler, "Stato•of·tho-Art-
Unoars In Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1969, p 5-13.
LOG OPAMP-Opamp cancels bulk rosistance

affect of silicon diode, to permit working
with larger forward currants in logarithmic
+ amplifter. Opamp is Fairchild µA702; RI Is
Rr
500, R2 and R3 are 1K, and R is 20.. Com-
mon mode rojoction of opamp makos
V; grounding of roforence terminals unnocossary.
+ -S. Franco, Op Amp Log Circuit Eliminates
Rz v0 Diodo Bulk-Roslstanco Effocts, Eledronics, Juno
9, 1969, p 101.
Rz
tOk
G >-~~-+-~~-OUTPUT
CONSTANT BANDWIDTH-Use of two matchod

GAIN CONTROL _ _ _ _ ___._ _ _ _--11+1
lot's with IC d-c ampllfler compensates for
VOLTAGE phase lag of amplifier through range of gain
values, to keep bandwidth constant. Article
gives design equatient.-G. Fontaine and G.
Reboul, Matched FET'• Stcobllbe Amplillor'•
Bandwidth, Elutronics, Moy 25, 1970, p 93.
1H ·15V
DIVIDE ISVllTCH S1 OPENI SQUARE ROOT !SWITCH S1 CLOSEDI

·Vz Vo NO Vy INPUT
Vo• Vy
v0 =-•..rvz
O<Vy<5.0V O<Vz<15V
SQUARE ROOT WITH MULTIPLIER AND DUAL feedback loop.-E. Ronschlor, Tho Monolithic Unoars in Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Aris.,
OPAMP-Also performs division of two input Multiplier Breakthrough, "Stato-of-tho-Art- 1969, p 27-36.
voltages, whon multiplier is u111d In opamp
ROOTING FUNCTION-OE! opamp circuit

OUIPUr
combined with thyrita varistor gives function
INPur
having exponont less than unity. Opamp
permits full 10-V swing with eithor polarity
to I 00 kHz but varistor may reduce this
bandwidth, Slnglo varistor• provide expo-
nents of 0.25 to 0.5, and combination of varis-
tors with or without resistors and diodes givos
wide variety of other nonlinear functions.-
Applying tho Model 9302 Monolithic Opara•
10K tlonal Ampllflar, Opticcd Electronics, Tucson,
Aris., No. 10135.
•ISV
S60!!
DIVIDE !SWITCH Sl OPENI
ilµF Vo• \/~
Vy
160 K
o.-.vv <1DV
TO
INPUT
OFFSET MCIS9Sl
Sl ADJUST
CIRCUIT 01, 03 - 2N930A
....----~12 02 - 2N2905A
14 VO • OR M06100
'13 3 !-----+----'
L-T----...;.y;.._--...,..-'
6.8 K
SQUARE ROOT !SWITCH S1 CLOSED:

NO Vy INPUT
K FACTOR
ADJUST
&I(
llµF vo • ~~vz
Vz:>O
·15V ·15V
DIVIDE AND SQUARE ROOT-Combination of with discrete level shift. Operoting lnforma. of-the-Art-linears In Action," Motorolo,
Motorola opamp and linear four.quadrant tlon is given In Motorola Application Noto Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 5-13.
multlpllor used as feedback elomont provides AN-490.-K. Huohno, Tho Continuing Dami·
functions of division or square root, along nonce of tho Operational Amplifler, "Stato·
522 EL E 0 TB 0 NI 0 0 I B 0 U ITS MAN U A-r;-----.~
~'"
Cln • 5 pF approx.
Signal sDUrce
V1N
POSITIVE VOLTAGE FOLLOWER-Uses OEI

9300 opamp as unity.gain ampliRor serving
as buffor for sl9nal source when driving 50-DB NONINVERTING-IC opamp with
lower-Impedance circ"ult or transmission line. phase-loacl compensation has 3"CIB bandwidth
RequlrH 6·V blpolor supply. With 1,00CJ.ohm of 3.5 MHz and unity-gain crossover at 150 VOLTAGE FOLLOWER-Connection shown for
generator impedance, bandwidth is abovo MHz.-"Llnear Integrated Circuits," RCA, Har• IC opamp, with terminals 5 and 9 shorted,
10 MHz.-Applylng the Model 9300 Mono- rison, N.J., IC-41, p 260. will transform 3.4 V p-p from 100,GOO-ohm
lithic Operational Ampliftor, Optical Elec• source to 470-ohm load. Higher voltage
Ironies, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10134. swing may bo obtained by Increasing posi·
tlve supply voltage.-"Llnear Integrated Cir•
cults," RCA, Ha~rison, N.J., IC-41, p 263.
THREE·MODE CONTROL-Uses two oloctronlc

switch modules feeding opamp. Rosel mode
Is obtained with 9580 ON (O V at control)
and 9859 OFF (0 V at its control). Compute·
mode is obtained with 9580 OFF (+5 V at
control) and 9859 ON (+5 V). Hold mode
Is obtained with both switches off.-lnto9rate/
Hold Eloctronic Switch, Burr-Brown Research,
Tucson, Ariz., PD5 189, 1967.
+t5v
Rio
l5k
OUTPUT
6
-fSv
LOW-LEVEL TRANSDUCER SIGNALS-Provides Samo sain can bo obtained without middle
uain of 3,000,000 for transducer sl9nals as IC If stablllty requirement Is less strln9ent,
low as a few millivolts, with hl9h Input Im- by changing values of some components to
pedance and high stability. First two IC those given In artlde. 2N2060B is transistor·
opamps are Fairchild p.A726, used for tem• pair IC.-J. F. Gifford and M. Marklcula, Lin·
peraturo stabilization and to prevent loading oar IC's: Part 5, Ins and Outs of Op Amps,
of high-Impedance transducers. Fairchild Eledronics, Nov. 27, 1967, p 84-93,
p.A709 opamp at right provides most of gain.
39 K Zt
---~~~~'\/\/\---~~~~~~
vouT
VouT
..----.., YIN
: i:~F ;
3
c2
~
L---,
VIN
Zr
-&v
Ci
150~50pF
270pF -Cl
DIFFERENTIATOR-IC opamp with connections 510il = IK

shown wlll serve as differentiating circuit,
n
TWIN-T BANDPASS-With values shown, gain
giving output peak for each side of square. is peak of 33 dB at 1 MHz and 3-dB band- =
wave lnput.-"linoar lntogrotod Circuits," width is about 0.1 MHz with twin·T network 10-DB GAIN AT 42 MHZ-Uses noninvertlng IC
RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 253. in foodback loop.-"Llnear Integrated Cir· opamp with phaso-lead and phase-lag com-
cuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 261. pensation, Response peaks about 2 dB at
20 MHz.-"Linnar Integrated Circuits/' RCA,
+ISv
R13
I.SK
Rz
20K
1% R11 R12 w.
12K 12K +15v
1% l"lo
pA726
Rs
SK
l"lo
E1N2
R4
ISK
"'• R10
!SOK
HIGH-ACCURACY IC SIGNAL MULTIPLIER- ·15Y f15Y

First Fairchild µ.A709 IC opamp supplies cur-
rent proportional to ono positive input volt- tlplios. Second µA709 converts resulting out• Gifford and M. Markkula, Linoar IC's: Part 5,
age. Other input Is fed directly to base of put current to voltage having desired scale Ins and Outs of Op Amps, Elodronica, Nov.
Qt in differential pair of µA726 IC that mul- factor, with low output impodanco.-J. F. 27, 1967, p 84-93.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In tho category of this chapter, use tho index at tho back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcebook ·of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 57
Optoelectronic Circuits
INPUT FROM
PHOTOMULTIPLIER
FAX PHOTOMULTIPLIER AMPLIFJER-Rayth.an
Ray1i1tor lamp·photoconductor, similar to ,----
CKI 116 but with oxtromely small fllaments
for fast response (dashed box), improves re-
sponse speed of baseband photomultiplier
'
I
I
~ OUTPUT
ampllflar for AN/GXC.S portablo facsimile '- 5.IK

systom that transmits graphic matorial.
'::' '::'
Diodes can be 1N2069.-H. Weisbecker, De-
signing a Feedback System? Control It With
a Photo Emitter·Sensor, Electronic Design, Aug.
30, 1965, p 32 and 34-35. IK
r. +
'="
IK
+ 300 v + 150 v
D1
1N471
Ra
..... 10 K
u
z
<(
_;
~
.1
0--. 50
.006
.01
WIEN-BRIDGE VCO-Changing ck control coll resistances In arm• of bridge, to vary 1 dB and Is reasonably sinusoidal.-Raysistor
voltage applied to lamps of CKl 102 or CK• output frequency over rango of 10 Hz to 50 Optoelectronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy,
1112 Rayslstor pair chang'os values of photo• kHz. Output has constant amplitude within Mass., 1967, p 20.
524
OPTOELECTRONIC CIRCUITS 525
6528
----,
Unregulated
DC Input
450K r
Regulated DC
!,
~
(Ebb) Output (V) y.aad
I
CK1102
l l
or
CK1121
R, Rb
0------------0--------------0- --- - _J
RA YSISTOR CONTROL-Uses combination lamp voltage to grid of series re9ulator triode. when input varies from 20G-400 Y.-Raysls·
and photocell in sln9le packa9e to sense out• Report 9lves desl9n calculatlons. Good tor Optoelectronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy,
put volta9e and apply appropriate controlled reuulation is obtained for 100 Y d-c: output Mass., 1967, p 13.
200V AGC-Provldes 20 dB dynamic control range,

on1tant Output with no chan9e in frequency response or
180K SK 8K
bandwidth, 9ood isolation, and no added
To Next
Stage noise. U101 li9ht source and photocell com·
5847 blned in ll9ht-tight caso.-Raysistor Optooloc·
6.IK tronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy, Mass., 1967,
p 9.
Varying .I •.7K (R 62 )
Input
CK1102
UK 20¢
20K
Lost IF Stage, Detector

or Output Transformer
+12v -6v 5pf DIGITAL SIGNAL ISOLATOR-Provides Isola·

lion of peripheral equipment from computer
SN74HOO to supprou high volta9e effects and electro-
0
1k magnetic Interference without affectln9 spood

INPUT at which digital data 11 transmitted. Maxi·
mum transfer rate of photodiode-coupled Isa·
MCDI 100k lator circuit is about 7 MHz. Di9ital Input
signal activates light-omitting gallium ano-
nlde diode coupled to sllicon diode detector by
clear opoxy.-G. L. Burkart, Optical Isolator
Speeds Digital Data Transmission, Electronics,
Nov. 10, 1969, p 104.
OUTPUT
1k
OFF-ON SWITCH CONTROL LAMP
Rz PHOTOELECTRIC APPLIANCE CONTROL-Low.

cost speed control for small unlvorsal motor
llSV 2K SW in kitchen appliances or for lamp loads up
AC MOTOR to 60 W requiros only cadmium sulAde cell,
i lamp, and knob-controlled vane. Additional
/ 6-V lamp provides optoelectronlc feedback
~/
/ " for speed regulation. Performance equals
FEEOBACK LAMP that of two scr's back•to-back.-Bargaln Com•
CONTROL panents, Electronic Design, Od. 12, 1964, p
KNOB 44-45.
R5 150 20W
.0069
f-o
BACKGROUND CONTROL FOR A·M FAX- OUTPUT
Raytheon CKl 116 lamp.photocondudor
(dashed box) and Darlin9ton In feedback
loop provide background control for a•m
facsimile signal goneratod In AN/GXC-5
portable facsimilo system for transmitting
graphic material. Also 9enarates audio fre- 7ll0K
quency-shift si9nal between 1,500 and 2,300
Hz, bolow 2,400-Hz a•m carrier. Output may
be transmitted by radio or over phone Unos.
Articlo givos design equatians.-H. Wois-
badcor, Dasi9ning a Feedback System? Con- IBOK
trol It With a Photo Emitter-Sensor, Electronic
Design, Aug. 30, 1965, p 32 and 34-3~.
IOOK
150
10
100
AUDIO !!HASE SHIFTER-Raysistor serves a1 from 200 to 2,000 Hz. Initial control voltage tardopandent, and affected by cholco of Iran•
variable resistance In servo loop, to provide applied to Raysistor lamp, value of Cl, and slstors.-Raysistor Optoalodronlc Dovlces, Ray-
constant phase shift of 90 deg within 2 deg operating frequency range aro mutually in- thoon, Quincy, Mau., 1967, p 23.
OPTOELECTRONIC CIRCUITS 52'1
+
-----+-------~r--012.6V
20on
IW
LIGHT·BEAM MODULATOR-Two-tronsistor
modulator Is lineor up to 80% modulotion of
li9ht beam genoratod by gallium arsenide
100pf
solid-stato lamp. Bondwidth is 30 Hz to
o----f 1-----4>----+-t 2N1132
2SO kHz.-L. M. Hertz, Solid State Lamps-
INPUT
Part II, Gonoral Eledrlc, Cloveland, Ohio, No.
3"°121, 1970, p 8.
+3V
270K.'1
2Nl'379
IOOOp.f
c,
Es SSL4 ~,. 150p SEC rt_
3-30Vdc
~ l...,__60mS ---.J
SSL
SMOKE DmCTOR TRANSMlnE!l-Uses gol·
lium arsenide lamp pulsed at 10 pps by re•
laxotion oscillator Q1.Q2. Draws only O'
LAMP DRIVE-Simple ujt pulse generator gives
mA from pair of D fla1hll9ht cells. Used
2G-ms fast-l'ise pulses for driving solid-state
with four mirrors to provide 8-lnch optlcol
lamps. RI changes frequency, and Cl
poth to sensor In receiver.-L. M. Hertr, Solld
chan9os frequency ran9e ond pulse width.
Stoto Lomps-Part II, Gonoral Electric, Cleve-
With 15-V supply, frequency ron9e is 10 to
land, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970, p 31.
200 pps.-l. M. Hortz, Solid State lomps-
Part II, Generol Eledric, Cleveland, Ohio, No.
3..0121, 1970, p 23.
• == 500 mA PULSE
30mA DC
BLOCKING-OSCILLATOR DRIVE FOR SSL-

Flashes from solid·stata lomp ore controlled .0015pf IKn 60T
by applying tri99er volto9e to blocking oscil-
lotor.-L M. Hertz, Solid Stole Lomps-Port
II, Gonoral Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No.
3..0121, 1970, p 8.
I
SSL.-4
IOT
SSL-5
2V. T~L--•---+111--....- - - - - - - - u + . . 2 TO l.SVDC

l.2KQ 120pf
LIGHT-BEAM MODULATOR-Gallium arsenide

solid-stato lamp can be modulated at fre-
quoncios up to 100 MHz, dopondlng an SSL
used, with conventional r·f transistor power 100,.f
ampllfter. Transistar types dopond on fre-
quency and on power roqulroments of SSL RF INPUT°'""~-~~...-~
used.-L M. Hertz, Solid State Lamps-Part
II, General Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3-
0121, 1970, p 6.
1304
Rt
20 K
UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION-When supply

voltage drops below prodeterminod level
established by zoner, voltage across noon
lamp in Rayslstor drops below oxtinguishlng
voltage and It 9011 out, incroasing photocell
resistance and turnln9 off transistor Q1, to
drop load current ossentlally to zero.-Ray•
slstor Optoelectronic Devices, Raytheon,
Quincy, Mass., 1967, p 26.
Al CAZ
All
220 WLT5
AM5 R6 R7 RIZ All .___ ___.
60 HZ
3·KW A·C VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Holds a•c

T2 • PULSE TRANSFORMER 1:I :I
ALADDIN PART NO. 90-2398 load voltage constant at 300 V for a-c line
ALL RESISTORS *IO'll> ANO 1/2 WATT EXCEPT WHERE MAllKEO T3 • TURNS RATIO 1:1.81 •KVA drop from 220 V to 190 V, and allows output
RI • 22K to drop only 1.5 V for Input jump to 2SO V.
CRI THRU CJ•· G.E. Al3D Cit A"D R2 • 2.2K Lamp L1 across load, soalod into photocell
ClS • G.£. Z•XL22 R3 • IBK
CR6· G,£, Al3F OR Al4F 14 • IOK MULTl·TUlN TllM POT
PC as GE PL581, gives sensing of phase-
CR7 • 08 • G.E. 16Ll423 as - IOK controlled true rms load voltage, which is
Cl - IOMF. 25 voe G.£. 62F204 R6 • 2.2K Initially adjusted to doslrod 300 V by trim.
MINIATURE TU8ULAR WET SLUG CAP,
R7 • 2.2K pot R4 In bridge. Articlo describes circuit
c2 - 0.22 UF, so voe
•IOll. G.£. 75F3RS·24•A RB· 2.2K operation In detail, tolls how to adapt far
QI • 02 • G.£. 2N2925 R9-5.6K soft-start during Initial transient condition
Q3 - G.E. 2N26ol6 RIO· •7K whon circuit is turned on, and shows how
SOU· SCR2 • G.£. C4Uo< Cl06Y R11 • 8.2K, 10 WATT
to use as currant regulator.-J. l. Broolcmiro,
SCil • SCU • G.£. C13!£ OR C35E 112 • 1.SMEG
R13 • IK
AC Voltago or Currant Regulator Featuring
Tl • 220 V llMS PRIMARY
12 V llMS SECONDARY RI• • RIS • 220 OHM Closed-Loop Feedback Control, General Elec-
100 MA RMS RAtfD tric, Syracuso, N.Y., No. 200.46, 1966.
5£CONDAiY CURRENT R16 • 9K t.l'W., I• WATTS
OPTOEL~CTRONIC CIRCUITS 529
REMOTE-CONTROL POT-Circuit Is sat up by R4 equals Rl plus R2. Circuit then oporotos

+ 15 v adiustlng R2 until Rl plus R2 equals R3, then as llnoor remotely-controlled pot In which
470 adjusting R5 until output photocell resistance error signal at Input of ampliRer produces
control current change In Raysistor lamp cir•
cult that correds R3 to make it equal to RI
plus R2. Output resistance R4 across con·
trol lines thon varies linearly with change
made In R2. With values shown, R4 fol•
2N414 lowed changes in R2 settings within 5% over
ran9a of 1,000 to 100,000 ohms.-Rayslstor
Optoelectronic Devices, Raytheon, Quincy,
Mass., 1967, p 25.
ISOLATED.INPUT TRIGGER FOR TRIAC-6-V LOAD LIGHT·

lamp, which may be energized remotely from EXCLUDING
battery, is sealed In box with cadmium sul- TUBEJ
Rda photocell. When lamp 11 on, photocell
120 OR
trl9gers triac just after start of each half· 240VAC
cycle, to givo full-wave switching of loads up
to 6 A. Uso RCA 40429 triac for 120 V and
40430 for 240 V.-R. M.· ':d~r~t11n, 20 Trlac Cir-
cuits, Rotlio-Efedronics, June· 1970, p 51-53
and 97. " "'· : "·. ·'
BIAS
E9
SCCIPE INPUT ""' No48
-
PHOTO
DIODE
OUTPUT
OPTICAL DOUBLER-Providos complete circuit

Isolation along with frequency doublln9.
Range Is from d-c to 500 Hz for lamp shown,
silicon phototransl1tor is rotated about its to 2 kHz for No. 2128 lamp, and to 10 kHz
light-detecting canter, each radiated light for plnlite. With switched d-c bias that ex-
pulse in turn can be seen on scope, for de- tinguishes lamp on nogatlve half-cycle, pro-
termination of position of phototransistor.- 9rammod output of f or 2f can be obtained.
POSITION DETECTOR-Three ujt osclllator cir· L. M. Hertz, Solid State Lamps-Port II, Gen- Distortion is low.-R. Dobkin, Simple Low-
cuits each drive solid-state lamp SSL-SC at eral Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3-0121, Frequoncy Doubler Provides Isolation, Elec-
difforent pulsing rate. As l14A502 planar 1970, p 22. rronic Design, Doc. 21, 1964, p 54-55.
MOA-920-7
01-04 r---'\IR~"v---11t--tl,__--11t-C-L-A-l-R-E-X--~
1 100-V REGULATOR FOR PROJECTION LAMP-
3 k R2 CL605
Holds rms voltage across 150-W lamp within
SW
2% of 100 V rms for all Input voltagos ba-
tween 105 and 250 V a-c. Uses photoelec-
tric feedback to firing circuit Ql.Q2 which
contrals conduction anglo of trlac Q3. Pho-
tocell sonsos red glow of back of reflector
insido lamp, as hooted by filament, to get
Integration of light output by mass of roflec-
tor and thereby eliminate 60-Hz modulation
AC of filament.-"Semiconductor Power Circuits
POWER Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968,
SOURCE
p 3-27.
SPRAGUE
L1 - 150 WATT PROJECTION LAMP WITH 11Z12 .----+---o+l2V
BUILT-IN REFLECTOR MIRROR
2.000
CKll08 pF
Vidt-o
Input ..__ _ _ _ _ _ __.
0-S v v.. ioblt Supply

Groun4e4
AUTOMATIC CONTRAST CONTROL-Whan

lamp of Rayslstor is anorgized by ampliflod
TAPE READER FOR PULSED LIGHT CIRCUITS-
-...
Designed for use with gallium arsenide and
vldoo signa~ automatic contrast control Is galllum phosphide lamps that can be pulsed
obtained aver range of 60 dB along with up at high repetition rates, to glvo low-drift par•
to 25 kV Isolation. Lamp filament providH formance of chopper ampliflor withaut using
automatic avoraglng effect because of Its chopper transistor. With low duty cycle,
thermal inertia.-Rayslstor Optoelectronic Dn- higher peak light intensities can bo obtained
vices, Raytheon, Quincy, Mass., 1967, p 15. than ore available from fixed light sources.
Can also be used for reading punched cards.
-Silicon Photocell Applications, Ferranti Ltd.,
c;>ldham, Lanes., England, No. 9, 5/67, p 10.
+24v
+5v Rs
47
R3
180k
MCDI 02 03
.-- -..., 2N3906 2N3904
R,
DTL
3.3k I
I
I -.........
). I
I
_ _JI
..
o, L- --- 04
2N3906
2N3904 K1
RELAY ISOLATOR-Gallium arsenide light· = and 400-0hm relay, thus eliminating relay ohms, Q2 and Q3 do not conduct and relay
omllting diode, optically coupled to silicon noise and spikes. With no light reaching is not energized.-W. Otsuka, Photodlode
p-i-n photodiode, .combine to produce c~m photodiode detector through light pipe, pho· Couplod Pair Isolates DTL from a Relay, Elec-
plete electrical Isolation between IC driver todiode is at maximum Impedance of 5 gig• tronics, July 21, 1969, p 82.
CHAPTER 58
Oscillator Circuits-A-F
1SnF
470.Q
19
10kQ
-i Vp
1-15 KHZ WIEN BRIDGE-Uaas Phillps DOA40 10 out
IC opamp. With 12·V supply, output 11 18 OV DOA40 0
V P•P sine wove (about 6 V rms). Ganged +i Vn
pots In two branchos of bridge control fro·
12
quoncy. Whon sot at 2,000 Hz, output did
not drift moro than 2 Hz during 8 hours of
oporation,-Wlen Brldgo Oscillator Using tho
!OkQ
DOA40, Phillps, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
hoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 27. ISnF
f30v
0.47 pf
- +
OUTPUT
c,
..1.
0.1,. f MERCURY
CELL
tM
STABLE AT 33 HZ-Output frequency Is made

stable to a few. parts In 10,000, with 011on•
tlally constant output voltago, by adding roclllled to charge integrating capacitor CS. baH of 04 to vary bias of QI and compen-
negative feedback to fet osclllator QI having Voltago across CS ls compared to stable d-c sate for output amplitude vorlotlons.-L. Mour•
unbalanced parallel·T network. Oulput of referonco (1.35-V mercury cell) in dilferenco lam, Jr., Feedback Loop Stablllzoa FET Oscll-
QI at 33 Hz Is fad through buffer Q2 and ampliller Q3 and error signal is applied to lotor, Eledronlcs, Sept. 4, 1967, p 97.
531
+6V'o-----.
+IOV
R4 220 !
OUTPUT
Rz
4011HC 20nse;
~
INPUTl 120pf
.... '='
- 6 V O - - - - - - -.....- - - - - - - ' IOµf

NO LOAD 220pf LOAD
0-10 MHZ TRANSFORMERLESS BLOCKING-
W 561111c 70nnc
furnishos narrow fast-riso pulse from low•
T1 12nHC ELIMINATING UJT START-UP ERROR-Addi-
impedance output, with value of Cl dotermin· 25 "'"
T2 U5nHc 99naoc tion of transistor to basic ujt oKillator com•
ing width of pulso. Requires -6 V trigger
with fall limo below 40 ns. Operates from ponsates for timing error duo to time taken
"400 ldoas for Design Selected from Elec·
d-c to abovo 10 MHz.-C. A. Karrfalt, Block- to c~argo capacitor during first cycle after
tronlc Design/' Haydon Boole Co., N.Y., 1964,
ing Oscillator Operates Without Transformer, powor is applied. Q2 saturates whon power
p 190-191.
Is applied, charging C rapidly. 02 is then
cut off, and current then flows into C con•
vonllonally through timing resistor Rt.-J. V.
Crawling, ModiRed UJT Oscillator Has No
Timing Error, EEE, Dec. 1966, p 120-121.
+9V
68k,R7
------- -----------
TWIN-T
OSCILLATOR
IM OUT-
PUT
CHIRP OSCILLATOR-Uses D13T1 program·

mable u(t. Oscillation starts whon switch Is
open, with decreasing amplitude as shown,
and stops in about 1 s or until switch Is
closed.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., The D13T-A Pro·
R3
680l
R4
IOk ---------------·
- ---- -- ---
grammable Unijunction Transistor, General
Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.70, 1967, p 9. START-STOP
CIRCUIT
+9V
MUIJMBRA'IOR
R9 RIO Rll CAN BE USED
68k 680k 680k TO CONTROL
C4 Cll
START-STOP
CIRCUIT
'=' ALL TRANSISTORS ...... 2N~ npn SILICON

DIODES-•. SI UCON.
1-10 HZ NEON-Simplo subaudio dual rolaxa• KEYED TWIN-T-Praduces 1 pps of 160-Hz which oscillation builds up will then dopond
tion oscillator usos close-toleranco noon lamps. signal when Cl and C2 are 1,000 pf and C3 on aeHing of Rl, and rato of decay by soHlng
Clamping diode typo is not uitical.-E. Bau- Is 2,000 pf. Amount of regeno:atian in os- of R2. Mvbr tums Ql on and off.-D. E.
man, "Applications of Noon Lamps and Gas cillator Is determined by Rt and R2 in series; Johnson, Circuit Kays Twin·T Oscillator With-
Discharge Tubos," Signalite, Noptuno, N.J., these aro adjusted 10 circuit will not oscillate out Gonorating Transients, Efoctronic Ooslgn,
p 35. unless R2 11 short-circuited by QJ. Rate at Aug. 16, 1969, p 246 and 24g.
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS-A-F 533
c INll6
O.lpf
CRYOGENIC-DIODE OSCILLATOR-Low-cost
cryogenic diode cooled by liquid nitrogen ox•
hibits negotive resistonce required for relaxa-
tion oscillator operating in range of 30 Hz -12v
to 30 kHz, depending on value of C. Output
amplitude ranges from 0.4 to 1.5 V, depend· CONSTANT-CURRENT CHARGING-IC opomp
Ing en diode used. Stability is excellent.- with fet supplies charging current for ult re-
E. Elod, Low Temperature Triggers Diode Re· laxation oscillator Q2, to give dlfferentlol
loxotion Oscillator, Eledronics, Aug. 21, 1967, linearity better than 0.1 % far output fre•
p 90. quency varying from 0 to 1,400 Hz.-J. M.
Kootsey, FET and IC Keep Oscillator Linear,
Efocrronics, Aug. 19, 1968, p 84.
VALUES
67 - l~O cps 03 /Lf
150 -650 cps 0.25 "''
650-800 cps 02 I'-' 820 e+
eoo-1600cps 0.1 "' 24'"""
r--======~;::::===r:;....____.J___.:(iTU\<
REED-CONTROLLED AUDIO-Resonont•rood re-

lay stabilizes two-stage feedback oscillator
T1-T2. Frequency depends on C2 and relay;
rongas obtolnod with different values for C2
and either of two Bromco relays ore given.
Osclllotor buildup time is 0.1 to 60 s ofter
random noise starts reed osclllotin9, depend·
ing on froquoncy and feedback setting.-
Resonant Reed Stabilizes Audio Oscillator
Frequency, Eledronic Design, Nov. 29, 1965,
p 76-77.
EIRAMCO
RE-I
OR
RE-IO
TRAIN WHISTLE-Rt, which may be remotely

located, .determines tone of whistle. Place It
noor train controls, with speaker ot other end
of track layout. T1 is audio output trans-
former with SK primary and 4 or 8 ohm sec-
ondary. Other values are: C1 0.04T p.F but
Use junkbo• .,., try other values for best tone; C2 0.01S p.F; c 3•
C4 20 p.F; RI 2K pot; R2 2.7K; R3 39K; R4
SWI
21
~·-R·,, M. Brown, "104 Simple One•Tvbo
Proiocts, Tab Boolcs, Blue Ridge Summit P
RI 1969, p 107. • a.,
534
ELECTRONIC CIRCl1ITS MANl1 AL
+15
PRE-TIMED 1·KHZ OSCILLATOR-Circuit uses
D13T2 programmable ult as 1-kHz osclllator.
220k Timing section Is formed by 2N2926 transistor
I01<F (used as zenor), 100K resistor, and 10-µF
GE76F02FCIOO capacitor. Whon power is applied, D13T2
latchos up. Pushing INITIATE switch chargos
capacitor to full 15 V. Circuit then oscillates
until capacitor discharges to point whoro
Dl3T2 latchos up again.-W. R. Spofford, Jr.,
Tho Dl3T-A Programmable Unljunction Tran.
013T2 sistor, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
90.70, 1967, p 9.
A·F TONES WITH H RESONATOR-Twintron 5-20 vd-c

H..hapod piezoelectric resonator with Q of O.Olpf
4,000 is used with tingle transl1tor to 9onor 0
ato audio tone that can bo tuned from 20

kHz down to fraction of hort1. Ovor 1,000
~
300k
1tatlon1 can bo connected to tono communlca• OUTPUT
tion 1ystom, oach having it1 distinct tone fro• Iv PEAK
quoncy for actuating Twintron receiving TO PEAK
resonator at central station. Ono application
is automatic reading of electric motors in pri-
vate homos with tono1 transmitted over tele-
phone lines.-H. Baker and J. R. Cressoy, H·
Shaped Resonatan Signal Upturn In Tone 150k
Tolemetering, floctronict, Oct. 2, 1967, p 99-
106.
':' ':'
r
rcoNTROLAMPuFlER--,
I 2.43 kn O,Ol611F I
-----------,
I ktl.
•o I
I
I 2.26ktl.
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
r -30
I
I
I 4-KHZ STABLE WIEN BRIDGE-Delivon 15 V
I nns, with amplitude stability boner than 1 %
I 2kl\ over temperature range of -50 to +lOO C.
I +l!W -15V IOkll I Article gives design procedure and equations.
Opamp LM101 servos as int~grator, feedback
factor and threshold clrcu1t.-B. J, Skehan,
'1 FEED8ACK 6.9 k.n .,... 111F I Dosig~ing Stable 'Wion-&ridgo 01clllators,
AMPLIFIER ... .J
~-------------
EEE, April 1969, P 79-Bl.
OSCILLATOR CIB.Cl1ITS-A-F 635
+15V
-30V
5k
R
R l.2M
IOk TO
50M R1 50k
2N4984
•OlpF 25k c• IOOk
r
02
OUTPUT
c'I
360pF
2N3904 E1
15k
- ...... IOOk
....
~
10 KHZ WITH SUS-Capacitor charges until 5,000:1 FREQUENCY RANGE-Simple modlfl·
8-V switching voltage of silicon unilateral cation of basic relaxation oscillator greatly 2·HZ RELAXATION-Discharge time of Ct Is
switch is roached. Sus then switches on, and Increases range over which frequency is con· Increased by placing Al in Hrlos with baH
resulting discharge through Inductor causes trolled by R. QI draws base current only of QI in modification of relaxation oscillator,
current to ring. Whon ringing current drops from timing capacitor Ct, speeding transition to permit generating frequencies down to 2
below holding current, sus opens and chars· from blocking to conduction,-G, R. Latham Hz without increasing slH of R to point whore
Ing cycle repeats. May also be used with IV, A 5000:1 Frequency-Rongo Oscillator, EEE, It Is affected by high humidity, Temperature
2N4989 sus.-Silicon Unilateral Switch 2N- April 1970, p 101-102. stability may be as poor as 10%, but this Is
4984/2N4985, General Electric, SyracuH, adequate for many low-frequency appllca•
N.Y., No. 65.27, 1967. tions.-G. R. Latham IV, A 5000:1 Frequency•
Range Oscillator, EEE, April 1970, p 101-102.
·--' -.-----------------
I
D29A4 0.1-HZ RELAXATION-Dollvers 20-ms-wlde
I
I Cl pulse ovary 10 s. RI is lOOK; R2 is 220 ohms,
I adjusted for optimum temperature compensa-
I .:.12v
I tion. Cl and C2 are 100-µF 20-V solid
I tantalum.-Silicon Complementary Unijunctlon
'+
:::!:::c2
Transistor DSKl, General Electric, Syracuse,
1- N.Y., No. 60.15, 1967.
1
1-- -'----+---+---"l.M--...- - . . J
• gy
/
Ri2
20k0
119
•OkG '"'
/
/
(
TR1
BCl4Bor
BCIOB
TR3
BCl48or ,,
BC•08 I R10
/.
I _, 20k0 J
Co I; Ion
- - ...J
IOOOµF
116
61'00
IQV
Re
lkO
01
8All4
C6
470
nF
1,11.
47
nF
4·7
nF
470
pF
Ion.
Output
15-200,000 HZ AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR- covered In four bands: 15-200 Hz; 150-2,000 to 10 V. R5 Is STC typo RS3 thormlstor.-
Wien-bridge oscillator supplies l·Y rms out· Hz; 1,500-20,000 Hz; 15,000-200,000 Hz. ''Tran1istor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mui-
put ovor entire frequency range, which Is Will operate with any supply voltage from 6 lard Ltd., London, 1969, p 178.
OUTPUT
STABILIZING AUDIO OSCILLATOR-Arrange·

ment acts os pulse-excited tuned cirtuit, with
no need to moke odjustment for loop gain of
unity as normally required with IC opamp
sine-wave oscillator, When output voltage is
low, nogative feedback loop is opon and
amplifler gain is high. Output then tends to
incroaso ropidly bocause positive feedback
path is closed. As soon os one diode con•
ducts, gain drops ta volue determined by
negative feedback loop. Pot regulates out•
put amplitude. Frequency is determined by
values of R and C in Wien bridge.-L. Moly· c
neux, Op Amp Sine Wave Oscillator Uses
Diodes far Stobility, Electronics, March 17,
1969, p 97.
OUTPUT
5k
R, Rz 1·HZ SINE-WAVE-Twin·T network with two
12k IZk opamps gonerates very low frequencies with
low distortion and stable amplitude. Oscil-
tOpF'
180k
lator runs free for most of oach cycle, but is
pushed for short time as output approaches
160k t.OpF Hro from either direction.-J. Potzick, Law·
Frequency Sine-Wave Oscillator, EEE, March
1.6M 0.1 pf 1970, p 130.
·"'~-
:__ T•--'- ~
I 0.25 RC
• 27 v DC
COMPOUND DIFF EMITTER
SCHMITT BlJFFER AMPLIFIER AMPLIF' FOLLOWER
SYMMETRICAL
CLAMP
R
30 lo< l.14M
CR 3
IN752
IN662
FILTER
NOTE' - 27 V DC
ALL Q: 2N2222
tapped off at indicated points and used for

long timo delays or very slow cro traces.-
SINUSOIDAL SUBAUDIO-Froquency of fiva- that couplos differential ampliRor to J. N. Bequette, Sub-Audio Sinusoids Goner•
stage oscillator network is determined by high-input-impedance compound ampliRer. oted by Integrator Foedbaclc Loop, Electronic
values af R and C in diode integrotor circuit Square-waves ond trlongular waves may be Design, Juno 7, 1965, p 38.
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS-A-F 537
22k
"A" ..:.. 3VOLT
..:... BATT.
•02 l!Sk
i£F
OUTPUT 1µF
o-J +
GAIN
OUTPUT
@A --u 1.2 VOLTS
-r
_j_
LI
..,.
2201l
HEP 580
DUAL 1-INPUT GATE
~
OUTPUT
@B 1,000-HZ IC-Features adjustable sine-wave
output from 0 to 2 V p•p, fixed at about
3-V RELAXATION OSCILLATOR-Operates 1,000 Hz, for general audio testing.-"Tips
from two flashlight cells, generating 1 kHz on Using IC's," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
with choice of two different wavoforms HMA·32, 1968.
shown. Uses 013T1 programmable ujt, which
is low-power triode thyristor. Battery drain
is low.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., The D13T-A Pro-
grammable Unijunction Transistor, Goneral
PRESS
FOR TONE
100 VDC--0....L. SIGNALITE
OR MORE o-~4v70111K
......- . , A057B
TO INPUT
OF AUDIO
.02 ---AMP. OR
TRANSMITIER TONE GENERATOR-lnexpen·
MODULATOR
sive neon relaxation oscillator can be used
STAGE
fer on·the-air tone identiflcation.-E. Bauman,
"Applications of Neon lamps and Gas Dis-
charge Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p 34.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use tho index al tho back
of this book. Check also the outhor's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 59
Oscillator Circuits-R-F
+4V
R!!
400 LI
5.0mH
1000-llHZ
XTAL
Rz C1
OUTPUT
.---~m 11-----t---......il----oouTPUT
.......
--¥~~~--.i11-- ..............
--11
200 47pf
R,
200
8-MHZ THIN·flLM CRYSTAL-Article givos

st•p-by-step procedure for adapting crystal Cl
IOpF R2
oscillator to version shown, suitable for thin· Ill
fllm hybrid construction using attached active
devices (crystal and transistors), thon givos
instructions for constructing circuit by doposi·
tion through masks in vacuum chambor.-L.
W. Sumney and C. E. Holland, fabricate Your
Own Thin-Film Oscillator, Electronic Design,
March 30. 1964, p 52-56.
1-MHZ PIERCE-With high-activity crystal, parasitic oscillations-the chief drawback of
clean sino-wave output Is obtained. Without this simple clrcuit.-F. H. Tooker, FD Sine-
loading, drain current should bo about 30 Wave Crystal Oscillators, Elocfronle1 World,
p.A; higher current, above 500 p.A, is due to June 1969, p 33 cind 83.
IOOph R-F OUTPUT

Io.01
RFC
R,
L1 -----~---~5M
L
2
0.001
SUBAUDIO TO GHZ WITH FET-Feoturos of noise, stability, tunability and swoepabillty MHz range.-T. F. Prosser, FET's Produce Stable
manually tunod drcvit shown aro low cost, ovor wide froquoncy range, and unloaded Oscillators, Electronics, Oct. 3, 1966, p 102-
load leveling for constant volta90 output, low
0 output up to 15 V peak to poak in 300 to 400
0 0 103.
538
OSCILLATOR CIB.OUITS-R-F 539
N•3T
#16 RI
---+--...---"> 318"01AM. ---~4\'\Tf.illW,....---t---.AN.IMWJlr--4-_.+IZV
IOOkHz l!I XTAL. l________...
0.001
3.3K
8pF 22 pF
0.001 Bl----+-----t ~OUTPUT
I ISK
0.001
50
E
L----....----1'-'tf-:l.
+20V
BIPOLAR-TRANSISTOR 100-MHZ-Chlof draw•
back of conventional silicon tran1l1tor 01cil· TISO
QI
lator 11 rolativoly largo chango in frequency
with tomporature, as compared to fet oscil- UJT CRYSTAL-Usoful for generating 100 kH1:
lator at samo froquency. Tatal drift is about when efllclency and waveform purity are rola•
70 kH1: from nominal 100 MH1: for 70 C tem• tlvoly unimportant. Both are affected by
poraturo change.-C. L. Farell, Designing FET supply voltage, adlusted hero by R2.-F. H.
Oscillators, EEE, Jan. 1967, p g6-A)O. Tooker, Ult Sino-Wave Gonorators, EloctroniCI
World, Fob. 1969, 82.
GE T0714 ~IMll
l.SV L c
IOj.111
TUNNEL-DIODE OSCILLATOR-Simple parallel

LC oscillator gives good sine-wave output,
though limited to rolativoly low power.-W.
R. Spofford, Jr., Applications For Tho Now
Low Cost TD 700 Sorles Tunnel Dlodos, Gon•
oral Eloctrlc, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.66, 1967,
p6.
R,--470 K
C1-50 pf variable R.-100 K
Cr-150 ff R7- l K
C.-50 p R.-2.2 Meg.
C.-2li pf R,-2 Meg. potentiometer
IM
C,-100 pf R1.-5.6 K
C.--0.001 ,.I Ru-10 K
100 C1-2li pf R 1r-2. 7 K
C.-20 PI. 20 ,.r, 350 volts S1-SPST toggle switch
C.--0.005 pf St-two-pole, three position rotary switch
CR1-IN1697 Position A-100 Kc
CRr-IN1697 Position B-Off
OSCILLATOR REGULATOR-Prevents froquoncy F,-1 ampere fuse Position C-20 Kc
drift and output lovol changes In crystal os- Li-16 henry, 50 milliampere choke T,-Power transfonner: primary; 117 volts, 60
cillator duo to p-er supply voltage varla· Ri-470 K cycles: secondary 1; 6.3 volts, 1.0 amperes:
tions. Noon lamp regulates to within 1 V Rr-150 K secondary 2; 500 volts, center tapped, 20
~.3 K milliamperes.
of 115 V. Plato supply should bo about 150 R.-100 K Y1-100 Kc crystal
V to insure broakdown of regulator.-E. Bau·
man, "Applications of Neon Lamps and Gas 100 AND 20 KHZ FREQUENCY STANDARD- kHz output from froquency divider connec•
Discharge Tubes," Signallto, Noptuno, N.J., p Uses single compactran and single 100.kHz tlon.-"Essontial Characteristics," General Elec.
go, crystal with switch that providos· optional 20. tric, Owensboro, Ky., 1969, p 352.
+ Vdc
-10scillator 2
DUAL REDUNDANT OSCILLATOR-Maintains
I
I
critical oscillator operation by automatic I
switchin9 between two identical crystal oscil· I
lators, either of which will supply corroct I
frequency and output amplitude to next I
sto9e or module. Oscillator I is prime and
under normal conditions feeds its si9nal A
throu9h amplifler Q2 to point C. If the am·
plitude of oscillator I drops below selected ,..........--f.....~..._~...___....._-'-~"'--a.~'-~~~--l
ci! I
value, bias is removed from oscillator 2 so it L..--------'
can take over. All transistors are 4j!IOAA CJ
and all diodes I N658. Other values are: RI
and RIO 120K; R2 2 me9; R3 and RB IOK;
R4-R7 2K; R9 1.8 mog; Rll·Rl4 3.9K; Cl 220
pf; C2 120 pf; C3-C6 0.01 µF.-"Selectod Elec-
tronic Circuitry," NASA SP-5046, 1966, Gov- C Output
ernment Printing Office, Washington, D.C., p
14.
+15011
!50pl CURRENT
MONITOR
I
-1.
500pf RFC
I +150V
BUFFER AMPl.IFIER
COAX.CAP.
l;-IOpf
IOOpl
if FEEDTHROUGH CAPACITOR
if* OISTR18UTEO ELEMENTS
22K 20Pf
6.BK 390 IK r0.003~,
'::' '::' '::'

OSCILLATOR +1!50v
PHASED-RADAR VHF OSCILLATOR-Cathode-

coupled crystal oscillator and buffer ampli-
fler were developed for use In binary combina- 600-1,100 MHZ POWER OSCILLATOR-Uses
tion of oscillators and mixers for generating coaxial cavity for which equivalont circuit is
largo number of discrete froquoncies roquired shown below. Suitable for pulse or.c-w oper-
in electronic scanning radar. Gives excellent ation. Either 2N3533 or 2N3866 ovorlay
reliability and stability in ran9e of I 0 to 70 typo of uhf transistor may be used. Article
MH1, with undesired second harmonic over 30 covers design and includes performance
dB bolow fundamental.-G. F. Ross, Binary graphs.-0. L. Meyer and D. C. Auth, Overlqy
Generation of Frequencies Saves on Hardware, UHF 1'ransistors as CW and Pulsed Power Os-
Electronic Detign, Nov. 23, 1964, p 38-42 and cillators, Microwave Journal, Aug. 1969, p
44-47. 59-66.
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS-R~F 541
IK
IOmh MULTI-PURPOSE A·M OSCILLATOR-Ampli·

tude·modulated oscillator operates as colloc•
tor-modulated class B amplifier for studying
properties of a•m systems. Carrier frequency
is 5 kHz. Values of biasing resistors R de-
pend on impedance of modulating signal gen•
erator, and C depends on modulating fre-
quency.-R. Brander and L. S. Bobrow, Low
Cost 2-Stago Circuit Forms Versatile At4 Os-
cillator, Eledronic Design, May 10, 1965, p
42 and 44.
MODULATING
SIGNAL
OUTPUT
L ILOAO•
2 50-100
27-MHZ CRYSTAL-Provides stable 4-mW out- OHMS)
put from common-emitter circuit, using posi·
live feedback from collector to base through
crystal. Values: RI 9.IK; R2 680; R3 200; C1
Cl 20 pf; C2, C4 0.01 µF; C3 22 pf; L1 15
tvrns No. 22 enamel on CTC L55 form with
powdered iron slug; L2 2 turns No. I 8 enamel
on cold end of LI; XTAL 27 MHz.-"Transistor
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC-13, p 507.
1 c:
50-'i~jill
I BO pl' 1-MHZ TUNED-DRAIN FET-Uses link output.
OUTPUT Puts out clean sine wave when core of L1 is
adjusted to tune drain tank slightly higher
than crystal frequoncy, so drain current is
minimum of about 150 µA unloaded.-F. H.
Tooker, FET Sine-Wave Crystal Oscillators,
Eledronics World, June 1969, p 33 and 83.
O.IJIF
100-KHZ CRYSTAL FET-Offers oxcollent fre-

C2 Ll
quency stability at low current drain, with
harmonics out to 100 MHz. Ql and Q2 are O.lT
..,r .,,.
R3
2.2K
Motorola HEP-801 and HEP-50 respectively.
Choke 11 is Miller 6304 or equivalent.
Article gives construction and calibration do-
tails.-"fiold Effect Transistor Projects," Moto•
rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1966, p 48-56.
CRI
C3 Rt R2
160 kHz
101'µ1 2.2M 3.3K
542 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANlJ AL
3•l5pl
.... 2
eRllSS ROD
INDUCTOR
ICOO
""
2,71\
pf 1 IW
.... 21111
CllllSIS /
GROUND
+--
,,,t. 1+114•
W • S/1&• :6: 1111•

d • ,, ... * ,,...
-IA
CURRENT
MONITOR
0·1001\
PUUE OR
CONTINUOUS
{ llC INPUT
I' TO 40V
1000
pf
350-750 MHZ POWER OSCILLATOR-Tunable

lumped-circuit oscillator for pulsed or C•W
1-3 MHZ THREE·GATE CRYSTAL-Any gates In
operation can uso either 2N3553 or 2N3866
DTL/TTL families can bo used if they are
overlay type of uhf transistor. Article cov•
buffer typo with low output impedance In
ors desigft and includes parformanco graphs.
high or low state. 932 buffer was used In
-0. L. Mayor and D. C. Auth, Overlay UHF
circuit. Frequency stability is essentially that
Transistors as CW and Pulsed Power Oscllla•
of crystal, which operates in sorilll mode on
tors, Microwave Journal, Aug. 1969, p 59-66.
fundamental frequency. May ba powered by
5 V of logic gates or any other value be-
tween 3.8 and 7 V d-c. Output is square
wave with about 40% duty cyclo.-S. D.
Culp, Crystal Oscillator, EEE, July 1970, p 87.
lk MPFI03
1-MHZ GROUNDED-DRAIN COLPITTS FET-

Adiusting core of output transformer for Al
2.2M
minimum drain currant gives cloanolt sine•
wave output. Grounded-drain configuration O.lpF
malcos circuit less susceptible to stray fields
and capacitancos.-F. H. Toolcer, FET Sino• 180pF
Wava Crystal Oscillators, E/ecrronics World,

Juna 1969, p 33 and 83.
PHILBROOK OPERATIONAL
AMPLIFIER, PP65A, OR
EQUIVALENT
c
0.018
-15V V. I
I Yos Ros
FET-P CHANNEL
2N2608 _J_
J_ Rz
D1
f'D3309
I~'
R· c -r'---<200K
20K 0.01 I AMPLITUDE
VGS TRIM
_L
tions. Output voltage can be above 10 V.-
FET STABILIZES OPAMP BRIDGE OSCILLATOR ponds on fad that an fat ads like llnoar var• J. J. Panico, FET Stabilizes Amplitude Of
-Arrangement provides di1tortlonla11 output iable resistance when its drain-source volta90 Wion Bridge Oscillator, Elocrronlcs, Oct. 3,
over full range from d·C to 100 kHz. Do- approaches zero. Article gives design aqua- 1966, p 107.
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS-R-F 543
·1511
20-115 pf'
G 01
01:u-110,u-112
U-146 OR U-147
CRYSTAL IC-Use of two external rosistors

and quartz crystal with IC d-c amplifior gives MIUER FET-Values shown are for 512-kHz
2t.1.n.
crystal oscillator op11rating up to I MHz de- crystal. but upper limit is 111veral megahertz.
Supply voltage can bo from 6 to 22 V, Out•
pending on crystal used. Output is taken
from colledor that Is not connected to crystal put cannot tolerato much loadlng.-J. H.
(tormlnal 10), and has waYllform about half· Wulek, Jr., and M. E. McGee, Fiald-Effoct
Transistor Circuits, Electronic• World, May
way betweon 1ino and square wave.-"Lin·
1967, p 32-33 and 75.
oar lntograted Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
IC-41, p 125.
t1ov
TWO-FREQUENCY CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR- c, o,

R1 L1
With negative voltago appll11d to supply tar• 221( 5.IMH 180 HDl002
minal, transistor operates in invertod mode
and 500-kHz crystal XI determines output r,
frequency. With positive supply, 600.lcHz -. . . . . )j
crystal determln11s output frequency. Adding
SGOKC
('...., _____ ..o
capacitors 01 shown by dash11d lines gives
1inglo output t11rmlnal. Fr11quencl11s may be
, ..
.~ ....
remotely salacted.-J. M. Tewksbury, Biiaterai
F'z
Crystal Oscillator Has Two-Frequency Output, 600KC
"400 Ideas for Do1ign Sel11cted from Elec- Rz Lz Cz D2
Ironic Design," Haydon Book Co., N.Y., ,1964, 22K 5.6MH 180 HD6002
p 179.
(MOTOROLA I r-~ L _ _<>.!'!IQ~.!:

RI R2 MP,.IO:S
MPf'f02 1 '' OUTPUT
TIS4!1
IOOk QI IOk 02 D
G
G
I
I
,,...
-.1.-
I
I
*u I
56k
OUTPUT
40
Mhz 20
pf
*c1 *SH TllCT
40o-HZ UJT SINE-WAVE-Output frequency FET IN CRYSTAL TRIPLER-Hiah 9ato-to-

ranges from 100 Hz to 100 kHz, dopendin9 sourco Impedance of fol mlnlmius crystal
on L1 and Cl. For 400.Hz slno-wavo output loadin9 in vhf-uhf oscillolor-multipllor. Tonk
with acceptable -voform purity, Cl is 0.047 circuit in source load is tuned to about O:T
p.F and L1 Is 3-H a·f choka.-F. H. Tooker, times 40-MHz fundamental of crystal.-F. B.
Improving Sawtooth Linearity, Electronics Cupp, FEB Cuts Down Crystal Locdln9, flee•
World, Fob. 1969, p 84. ftonlcs, Sept. 18, 1967, p 111.
100.KHZ GROUNDED-DRAIN COLPITIS FET-

Sine-wave output is cleonest when tank coil
is adjusted for minimum droin current.
Useful os signal source for time-base genera-
tors in digitol counter.-F. H. Tooker, FET
Sine-Wove Crystol Oscillotors, Eledronin
World, June 1969, p 33 and 83.
0
OUTPUT
+12V
20.MHZ FET-Self-bias developed ocross
source resistor RI is proportionol to operat-
ing current, giving negotivo feedback thot
tends to stabilize current. Fet is 2N3823.
Efficiency os closs A oscillotor is about 35%.
-C. L. Farell, Designing FET Oscillators, EEE,
Jan. 1967, p 86-90.
0.02
ST
1.68-GHZ L-BAND OSCILLATOR-Collector of
transistor connects directly to ground plono
of striplino circuit board. Power output Is
over 0.3 W ot 20% efficiency when operating
from 25-V d-c supply. l1 is 0.75-inch sec-
tion of 50-ohm microstripline; can be opor•
ated at ony frequency from 1 to 2 GHz by
chonging length of L1 slightly. With 0.8-
lnch lino, frequoncy is 1.5 GHz. Values: Cl,
C2 0.35-3.5 pf piston; C3, C4 470 pF; RFC 5
turns No. 28 on 0.125" form.-"Silicon Power
Circuits Manuol," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51,
p 364.
+J!">v
R14
25.BK
1% R11 1%
12K
1% +15v
R4
ISK
I"!.
R10
ISOK
PRECISE I ·KHZ TONE-Fairchild µ.A702A IC in ·15v +15v

fet circuit provides age ta minimize instabili· bock through R3 stabilizes gain and mokes torted 8·V sine-wove output.-J. F. Gifford
ties and provQnt limiting. Con be used os It independent of IC choracteristics. Positive ond M. Morkkulo, Lineor IC's: Port 5, Ins and
precision tone generator, timing signal gen- foedbock to noninverting input is mode equol Outs of Op Amps, Eledronics, Nev. 27, 1967,
erotor, or for computation. Negative foed· to negotivo feedbock by ogc, to give undls- p 84-93.
OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS-R-F 545
~20V
• 36fN o------,
JOmeq
c ISrf
30.KHZ CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE-Zoner DI
stabilizes oporating conditions and output 1.8-2,3 GHZ TUNABLE-With 24-V supply, de-
amplitude of emitter-feodback oscillotor. 3o-40 KHZ NEON-Neon chosen has very fast
livers 0.3 W at 16% efficiency with Hartley
Distortion in sine-wave output is less thon deionization time to maintain high-frequency
oscillator circuit. Values: RI 51; R2 1.2K;
1 %, and amplitude stability for combined stability. Sine-wave omplitudo varies from
R3 10; Cl 0.82 pf; C2, C3 100 pf; C4 0.01
variotions of o-65 C tomperoture change, 18· 1 to 14 V into 1-meg load.-W. G. Miller,
pf; CS, C6 0.35-3.5 pf; LI 0.05" longth No.
22 V d-c supply voltage chango, and load "Using ond Understanding Minioture Neon
22 wire.-"Silicon Power Circuits Monual,"
change from lOK to infinity is loss than 5%. Lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis,
RCA, Horrison, N.J., SP-51, p 365.
-M. Follor, Amplitude-Stabilized Oscillator, Ind., 1969, p 41.
EEE, April 1967, p 139-140.
SPLIT-DRAIN FET-Tunad-drain tuned-goto

crystal oscillotor puts out clean sino wave
LI
O.S-5.0mH II l!IOOpF
:S900pF
0 OUTPUT
when L1 is sot for minimum drain current of

abaut 150 p.A unloadod.-F. H. Tooker, FET
Sine-Wave Crystal Oscillators, Elec1roniu
World, Juno 1969, p 33 and 83.
OUTPUT 0 1,03,05 ,06 • BF184

02,04,07 • 2N4223
FREQUENCY CONTROL INPUT
VOLTAGE CONTROLLE01----VOL.TAGE CONTROLLEO---M INVERTING ..---..--.. VOLTAGE CONTROLLED

PHASE SHIFTER l PHASE SHIFTER ll AMPLIFIER ATTENUATOR
INPUT FREQUENCY
CONTROL VOLTAGE
AMPLITUDE
DETECTOR
----..1
O.S-5 MHZ FET-TUNED R..C-Ffold-effoct tran- froquoncy ranges can bo obtained by chang· Voltago-controlled attonuator Q7 is driven by
sistors acting as variable rosiston tuno R·C Ing capacitor values. Two phase shifters, amplitude detoctor 06 to provide constant
oscillator ovor ·docade rango with control phase inverter, amplifior, and attenuator are output voltage.-K. van der Geer, FET's Tune
voltago of 4.B to 7.2 V. Oscillator output connected in loop. Circuit oscillates at fre- RC Oscillator Over Decade Range, Eloctron•
amplitudo is constant within 1 dB. Othor quency in which total phaso shift is 360 deg. lcs, Fob. 17, 1969, p 96,
-Va
1.8-2.2 GHZ COLPITIS-Phase-resonant loop
L4.Cl provides necessary feedback. With 24· VARIABLE-FEEDBACK CRYSTAL IC-Adiustable
V supply, power output Is about 0.3 W. foedback path for IC d-c amplifier permits
Values: Cl, C2 0.35-3.5 pf; C3, C4 100 pf; adjusting crystal osdllator to give puro sine
L1, l2 mlcrostripllne (dimensions given in wave. Frequency depends on crystal used,
book); l3 5 turns; L4 SO.Ohm coax 1.5" long. and can be up to 1 MHz. Collector tuning
1-1.5 GHZ VARACTOR·TUNED-Delivers 600 -"Silicon Po-r Circuih Manual," RCA, Har-
mW over entire range when tuned with high· (terminal 10) will extend frequency range
rison, N.J., SP-51, p 366. above 10 MHz.-"Linear lntegratod Circuits,"
Q voractor diode having control range of 0
to 22 V and transistor colledor supply of 28 RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 125.
V. Values: Cl, C2 1-7 pF piston; C3·C5 470
pF; RFC 0.1 µH.-"Sillcon Power Circuits
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J,. SP-51, p 365.
c,
IOOpl
IN295 IN295
.001
.05 470k .002

-41________..__________.,_____________.____
i...__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,~ _____.__-"l'V'--+6•TO
MOSFET COLPITIS-Use of 3N128 mosfet In 3.6k

+15Y
.05
Colpitts oscillator gives stable output inde-
pendently of load and supply voltage Circuit can be froquoncy·locked to external N. H. Brown, MOS FET Stabilizes Oscillator's
changes, and improves waveform symmetry. oscillator through Input coupling capacitor.- Output, Efoctronlcs, Fob. 3, 1969, p 80.
+ 22 112 v
33K I.SK 470 5.1 K
IK IK
.·
47K ~=~
...
3.3K ......
500
3o-MHZ CRYSTAL-Used as second local os- Q4 servo as mlxor-ampllflor.-1. F. Bardltch, 3.3K
dllator of double-conversion superheterodyno Adapting Conventional VHF Equipment to
f-m receiver developed for printed-circuit Molecular Electronics, Electronic Design, Feb. -:::
card construdion. Ql can be 2N699. Q2· 17, 1964, p 44-51.
CHAPTER 60
Phase Control Circuits
-2ov
PHASE SPUTIER WITH GAIN OF 150-Dlrect· R1 _"
coupled complementary pair with feedback 3K V -
provides valtago gain and equal outputs 180 ..-------4-~J--oouTPUT I
dog out of phate. Values of RI and R2
must be changed according to output lmpod-
anco and R3 then adjusted to give circuit bias 2N388
for desired operating level of output transis-
tor.-R. E. Risely, DC Phase Splitter Adds
Voltage Gain, Electronic Design, Fob. 3, 1964,
p 46 and 48.
Rz
3K
+20
VOLTAGE-VARIABLE SHIFTER-Can be ulOd as

a-c motor speed control for mixers, blenders,
and drills, whore firing point of scr is
changed. Can also servo 01 correction cir-
cuit in foodback loop of automatic phase con-
trol system. Pho10 angle of low-frequency
Input signal can be shifted up to 70 dog
without distorting waveform. As odiustoble
phaso roforonco, one circuit can control many
servomechanisms. Reduction of 5:1 in output
omplitudo over phoso-1hifting range can be
cut to 1.2:1 by adjusting R1.-T. T. Kalal,
Zoner Diode Controls Variable Phasa Shifter,
Eledronia, Doc. 26, 1966, p 72-73 .
.---------..---------.--.v = +9to + 15V
OUTPUT
MOSFET TWO-STAGE PHASE SHIFTER-Gon9od

control permits shiftin9 phase of 400-Hz sig-
nal over full range of O to 180 de9. Can be
used to generate pulse or signal hovln9
known phase difference from that of refer-
ence signal.-C. R. Parkins, "Application of
MOSFET Devices to Electronic Circuits,"
Hushes, Newport Beach, Col., 1968, p 26.
54'1
220k
2µf
,___.._.. E----·~1-----+-~
CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE PHASE SHIFTER-
v-, +
Shifts sinusoidal signal over 180-deg ronge,
and revcrsol of input leads provides oddi-
lional 180-deg shift. Maintains constant out-
put amplitude ond low output impedance.
12v
111~-+-~~~~~~,,,_~...._~
i Vour
Used for phose·locking ompliflers.-J. J. Shin,
Signals Shifted 180 Deg os Amplitude Re-
'' \
mains Constant, Electronics, May 12, 1969,
p 110.
A 217126
220k
R1 -R 2 DUAL 100k, LOG TAPER
.
, ,., ,.,
<!lo-if--~~~~~~~~~~1--~~~~~~~~~l---
(i)o-if--~'f'"""~~~~~~~~f--~~~~~~~~__.
THREE-PHASE WITH STEPLESS 0-100% CON·
0 TROL-Uses separate triggering of eoch phose
for varying d-c output voltoge smoothly
down to zero, for applicolions such os ring
counters, flip-flops, ond magnetic firing con-
trols. Will not fall out of synchronism.
Power output deponds on scr's used. Track-
ing accurocy, controlled by pots RS, is ac•
curate within 1 deg at 60 Hz.-J. D. Atherly,
"'"• F. W. Gutzwiller, and F. Pastore, Three Phase
SCR Firing Circuits for DC Powor Supplies,
1962.
•• l.toO o,. Gt ,., .... SC•1 ·H-UH

•t S.000 •1
' • )90
47 Ot ·GC lUO• c•, ·Gt-n111'•
•3 •.0DO ll1J,...,l•&TT Os·Gf 1'111c&11o11
.... 1.000 t1 ro,1 04- to W'OLT Zl"l• ,,. un
. , \000 t1»·' "• - t1J nc. ...~ vat to . .
+1SVT0+20V
50-WLOAD IOkn 1ookn
lkU
115-VMAIN
50-W HALF-WAVE A-C CONTROL-Conducts TIC47

over range of 10 to 170 deg on olternate
holf-cycles. May be used for healor or motor
control, os reloy driver, or as lomp dimmer
if flickor is not objectionablo.-Preferred Semi· 330n 0.1 jlf
conductors and Components, T<txos Instru-
ments, Dollos, Texos, CC101, 1968, p 7108A.
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUITS 549
+12v FREQUENCY-INDEPENDENT 90-DEG SHIFTER-

Will produce 90-dog shift independently of
frequency in audio range, for producing ·cir·
culor swoops on crt. Can also be used for
phase measurements whore colibrated D-90
150 deg phase shifter is formed by adding signol
mv)
to quadrature component. Fet is used as
variable resistance in R-C phaso shifter, with
resistance controlled by feedback from phase
detector and opamp.-J. Kalinski, Variable
FET Resistance Gives 90 Deg Phase Shifts,
E/odronics, July 20, 1970, p 88.
-12v
r--..---------. -- -- - - - -,
I
~
100~
120V I
60N TRIAC I
I
I
2.2
k
PHASE
t-r---o---t DETECTOR
1o------..,_________._ - - -- --- ...
FULL-WAVE DIAC·TRIAC-Simplicity makes
(FOR
INDUCTIVE-_!_- O lp.fd
LOADS)
I
': • .
circuit ideal for many lamp, heater, and fan

speed controls, despite limited control range
and large hysteresis effect at low outputs.
Choice of trioc depends on load lo be hon•
dled.-"SCR Manual/' 4th Edition, Goneral
Electric, 1967, p 139-140.
fl
••
2~• r !!!:Gill' fil!C!!!! :_I•_ _
!500•1
I RI
120\t
CZ401') 01 I coJf1toL
ISOH1
I
l oz
°'•'
Cl
.
w
i
I
I
I
I Ct QI
FULL-WAVE WITH ALTERNATE RESET-Uses .

~ I
diode to reset capacitor at end of each posi- ~ I
;i
tive half-cycle. Does not reset ot end of I T2
l: L- - _.___~_-_- ..._-_
......._
.... - - UANSfORWIR
tiltllll.All'.S
negative half-cycle, but snap-on effect is
negligible.-"SCR Manual.'' 4th Edition, Gen•
.= us'"''"'
""AS[ X'M11tS•
oral Electric, 1967, p 188. f ~·!=------~-------+-+---------+ ...........
IUMt ITRtGGl•,
u I c1•eu1r 1
•"L n_J
Rl'.UTRAL,.
IOOk 82k
iltl -3.S11. 0 ' WAtf T 1 ... ISOL.l.TION TlllANIFORMtR w•TM

120 VAC lltZ -Sl( ' ' ' I IZ C l/OLT. t/4 61111,, SCCONOA•IE$,
R4 -IOK 0 1 WATT PlllUllARW AS RlQ.UIREO f01'
AS.it• ... zza. 2 wan SP(ClllC l,INI: \tOLfAG[
•P.R&-UA 0 2WATT T2 •PULU UtAN5'011tMER 11'1 IH9 0 UTC
.Ol11F •9.RtO • 4fA.tJZ WATT H'! OA [0UIVAL( .. T
50V
T J - ISOLATIOfl TRAltSFORM[llt WITH
Cl -0.1 MrD 120 'VOLT, 50 MIA '£CO~OAlllY. ll'RtMAAY
LINE-OPERATED SCR TRIGGER-Uses Dl 3T1 sc••. SCR2 .. •S
01-G C 211214fi
llt(QU111t£0
SCA9.SCllt4-G ( 2 .. 1$9~
AS lltlOUtR[O l'OR SPEC:lf'IC LIM£
YOLTAGl tfOlt 120 VO"T "•IMA•Y,
'f•lAO N-"IXI
triode thyristor as programmable ujt in phaso CRI fO Cllt4 -G ( 11'16~5
Cllt5~ CRI • G l'. •Nt16S
control circuit that derives required interbase CR7 -G 1£ INl59Z
CRI- 4j; t 0017t
vohage direcily from a-c lino. Potentiometer ger circuits ore between lino and neutral of
in rosistor divider controls point in each cycle FULL-RANGE THREE-PHASE CONTROL-Used each phaso. Ujt triggers pilot scr's. Article
at which scr (at right) is triggered.-W. R. in four-wire a-c system feeding throe wye- has five circuit variations for controlling the
Spofford, Jr., Tho Dl3T-A Programmable connected transformers. One pair of scr's is throe ujt's from single master signal.-"SCR
Unijunction Transistor, General Electric, Syra• in series with each line, and transformer Manual," 4th Edition, Generol Electric, 1967,
cuso, N.Y., No. 90.70, 1967, p 7. neutral is connected to system neutral. Trig- p 205-207.
MANUAL SCR CONTROL-Basic manually con·

trollod "; with ujt covars full ranee from
minimum to maximum powar. Zenor clamps
volta9a of control circuit to flxad lovol.-"SCR
Manual," 4th Edition, Ganoral Eloctrlc, 1967,
IZOOW
ca DS
T
- ••
IW
IOV
p 189-190. n
00 ....
Os
..
D1 • GE•l41LIO
Ot.J.,4 ,,•Gl-AIJa
INDUCTIVE
LOAD
+o-------------.
HIGH
6.8K IMPEDANCE 22on
GE CONTROL
INl692 ELEMENT
D1
2N491B
OR
Cl 2N24198
.001
RAMP AND PEDESTAL CONTROL-Dosi9nod

for inductlvo loads. Rectified supply volta9e
6.8K C2
0.2
llC PULSE
OUTPUT
is used with small pilot Kr to 9ive continu-

ous drive to triac 9ate aftor triggering, to
hold triac on until load currant is high enough HIGH-GAIN UJT-Simple modification of con·
for triac to latch.-J. H. Galloway, Using the vontional ujt-scr phaH-control circuit in·
Triac for Control of AC Power, Ganoral Eloc- creasos offactive 9ain up to 10,000 ti mos,
tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200,35, 1966, p 12. 9iving oquivalont of soveral slagos of tran-
sistor ampllflcatlon, Article covers choice of
capacitor values to give desired output pulse
amplitude.-"Unijundion Circuit Hints,'' Gan•
oral Eloctrlc, Syracuse, N.Y., Fig. 2.
RI
6800
2W
A2
DI D2 &800
zw
OS
IOOK
120Y R6
GOHa
DS D4 UJT
D7 SCA
!~e A5
100
GE Cl
NOtt• VALutl .. QI
NO!-• Z4al6 CZ
.......
AIU: FO'll40VAC QI
FULL-WAVE WITH REDUCED SNAP-ON-Con·

trol circuit is connected to supply to raduce
D1-11&•GEA138 NOTE• FOR 240 VOl.T OPEA4TION• R5,CZ•••ldl SUPPRt:SSION
snap-on offed wherein load current jumps Rl•R2•15K,4W SCA•GE CZ20
suddenly to value from which It Is smoothly Ot·DO•GEAISO TRIAC•GESC40D
controlled. This allows capacitor to rechar90 TRANSFORMERLESS TRIGGER-In smaller and scr. If tri99erln9 occurs before turn-off of
slightly betweon triggoring point and aod of lower-cost version of phase control for in· trlac, scr wilt be turned on and held by cur-
half-cyclo.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, Gon• ductive a-c loads, bridge roctlRor supplios rent through Rl.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition,
eral Electric, 1967, p 188. powor to ujt trigger and holding currant to Gonoral Electric, 1967, p 197-198.
'ti v
lk
EIGHT·OUTPUT SHIFTER-Provides outputs 45

deg apart from 0 to 360 deg with constant
amplitude and with phase nearly independent
of load impedance. Output impedance Is 2
ohms.-A. G. Lloyd, Multioutput Phase Shifter
Uses One Transistor, Electronic Design, Oct•
•• 25, 1967, p 130 and 132.
lk 2Vtsr_
e1 • e0 2VL!iQ!
12 • 2V/4!1• •s •2V/225°
13 • 2V /90° 97 •2V /?.70°
-7.5V e4 • 2V /13!1° e8 •2Vt31!1•
LINE-VOLTAGE COMPENSATION-R2 and Cl

add ta zoner voltage a d-c voltage propor•
tional to a-c: supply voltago, to serve as u(t
intorbaso voltage. Reducing supply voltage
reduces lntorbase and peak-point voltages of
ujt, to make triggering occur earlier on ramp
and compensato for line voltage drop. Holds
rms output voltage constant within 5% for
50% change In supply voltage.-"SCR Man•
ual," 4th Edition, General Eloctrlc, 1967, p
195-196. RI: 50001l,3W RS: 3300 R5: 5M C1,: 200141, IOw Ql:GE 2N2646
RZ: 5000 R4: IOIC R&: llC cz:o.1,.1 fl: Sl'llAGUE 11Zt2
,, t. ...:~: . ..J
r-------1-~
l
I
C'lo C•z
.,
PHASE·CONTROLLED D-C SUPPLY-D-c: volt-

age across load can bo steplessly adjusted
by R7 from maximum to zero, with scr's In
Lt single-phase center-tapped phase-controlled
roctifier. Single ujt QI develops gato signal
-.-Jltl,t.-.n "KC vaa.t.cit 01 T1 IS "6- - - -· --l11C.~mfl SC111.1C1tz-AI ltcUJUtlDl'f LOAD to flro both scr's on alternate half-cycles. At
"' VOL.Tl CACM $ICC Cit' c1111,u1• 11t1 'oa llKtA• JIOT CR1.D'1.ait.,.Cltr·O t llM8'S 60 Hz, R7 varies firing angle from 10 deg for
•i-•' A. i11 nn Oe- U•.~•ATT .., - - -..7H-.....O-
Clo----•«-- maximum load power to 180 deg for fully off.
"a WATT c, 02"""
lt),R•-11 Cl.
05-HOD,'lz•TT -IOH.L c•r•• O[Cl/llllO " t.C<oO CllOHNT -"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric,
1967, p 199-200.
L1-AS ~tlllD '01 'lLTPllJCO
A
3K a
5AH
120V
IOOK 60"v
)(
R
120VIAC y
0.1 llFO
r:: 01, 02 -200V DIODES (GE Al4B)
r::
SPRAGUE HYSTERESIS-FREE TRIAC CONTROL-Timing ca-
32Z28
pacitor is reset to same level after each posi-
tive half-cycle, to provide uniform initial
condition for phase-control operation. Ar-
rangement is useful only for resistive loads
FULL-WAVE NEON-SCR TRIGGER-Trans- scr's to alternate in firing. loss of load volt- such as lamps and healers, because firing
former-coupled full-wove o-c phase-controlled age is only about 5% of what it would be angle is not symmetrical throughout rongo
circuit uses SAH neon as trigger for two- without control clrcuit,-"SCR Manual," 4th from minimum to maximum load power.
lerminal system. Pulse transformer allows Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 199. Choice of lriac depends on load. For 220 V,
change Rl to SOOK, R2 to 22K, and Dl-2 to
A14D.-J. H. Galloway, Using the Triac for
Control of AC Power, General Electric, Syra-
cuse, N.Y., No. 200.35, 1966, p 8.
PHASE-LOCKED SIGNAL I N -
IOk OUTPUT
TO VCO
REFERENCE
SIGNAL I
0.1µ.F
IN 01'-----t·t-----.--t---t 120V
6 f'\J
50k
PHASE-LOCK DETECTOR-Mosfet operating in RI - 250K POT.

variable-resistance region provides d-c out- R2, R3 - 15K 112 W
put voltago proportional to phase difference DI, 02, D3, D4- 200V DIODES
between input signal and reference signal. (GE Al4B)
Used to drive vco of function generator, TRIAC CONTROL OF INDUCTIVE LOADS-Pro-
Value of C is chosen so its reactance is very vides symmolrical firing for hysteresis-free
much less than 10,000 ohms at oscillator fre- operation of inductive loads. Choice of triac
quency.-G. ,Worstell, Phase-Lock Detector Re- depends on load. For 220 V, change Rl to
quires No External Power Supply, Electronic SOOK, R2 and R3 to 22K, D1-D4 to A14D, and
Design, Oct. 2S, 1969, p 107. use 400-V lriac.-J. H. Galloway, Using the
Triac for Control of AC Power, General Elec-
tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No, 200.35, 1966, p 8.
FOA
l"OUCTIY£
LOAD
c•,
111 VOLT
S PHAH
.AC SUPPLY AO.iUST '011 COMPENSATION AO"UST FO•
10 CPS Off Ll,_f YOLTilGI:
,LUCTUATIOftS
OJ ro 'E•l
ATC • 120• LOAD
THREE-PHASE WITH COMMON TRIGGER-
Operates from three-phase 117-V a-c line and
provides control of d-c output voltage from
VOLT&GC
zero to practically 100% of maximum theo• 1t
2
CONTROL
retical value. Effoct of transients is mini·

mized. Firing circuit cannot fall out of
synchronism with a•c power system. Whon
d-c voltage is raised from zero, it jumps
abruptly to 2S% and then rises steplessly
above that value; this is not objectionable
•• ••
for such applications as lamp and heater
CPt 1 ·U) GI INllll ft4- 100 OHMS
control. Similarly, when control voltago is c•a - zo VOLT. I WATT ZfNElt osocr. uuer7 lt5, "• - Ito OHMS
reduced below 25%, output jumps abruptly c,.,,c••. ctt 5 • c1t1 ,- AS •rouu1&:0 'o" 1.o•D Cc.r rN2•te) ilt7,•J.S'l, IW
1C•1. SC•z. SC•J - . . OEOUlllED 'O• LOAD ru CS58 I " ' • SOO OHM POT« 2W
to zero.-J. D. Athorly, F. W. Gutzwiller, and o,. o,, - G[ 1•11•71A 112 -ca 2flrlS5 Rt • 500 OHMS
F. Pastore, Three Phaso SCR Firing Circuits lltr • lO• POT 1110 • "11•"rz -
:U OHMS
Ptz • ZOIC POT Ct ... o.e .,,o ·
for DC Power Supplies, General Electric, 1t 1 - 410 OtfMI Ct - 1.0 11'0
Syrocuse, N.Y., No. 200.21, 1962.
--..-----J LOAD I-----

••
120 Y&C
l240VA(1
,,.,.
12'0¥AC
G[tNIUe SCRI
l tt40V1
SOH1
T OIAC
G[ $T•2
Cl
"c o.e,.t
suvr
HALF-WAVE WITH UJT CAPACITOR RESET- NOTE'
FULL-WAVE SLAVE CONTROL-Half-wove v•Lun ,. PARtNTMESES AR[ ,OR Z40\l&C Sl.Pl>l.Y
Usos basic ujt ralaxotion oscillator to triggor
SCR2 circuit is triggerod oxternally on ono DIAC·TRIAC FULL·WAVE-Circult is simplest
scr during positive half·cyclos of a-c line,
holf·cycle ot predetermined phaso ongle. On full-wave phose control. RI detormines load
Capacitor is reset at end of each positive holf-
noxt holf-cycle, slon circuit triggers SCR1 current. Chief drawback is snap-on effect,
cycle, by discharging through ujt, to prevent
at same phase angle, to givo full-wave phose whoroin load current jumps suddenly to volue
cycle-skipping caused by residual charge on
control of loud current. Both scr's are C11 / from which it is smoothly controlled.-"SCR
half-cycles when scr is not triggered.-"SCR
C20.-"SCR Monucal," 4th Edition, Generol Manual," 41h Edition, General Elec1ric, 1967,
Manuol," 4th Edition, Genorcal Electric, 1967,
Elodric, 1967, p 69. p 187-188.
p 185-186.
SCR HALF-WAVE NEON-SCR TRIGGER-Combines

GE low cost of R·C diodo phose control circuit
C228
with improved performance of 5AH noon that
120YIAC triggers when voltage ocross ccapocitors
SWITCH reaches breakdown lovel of noon. Control
RlR FIA.L range is from full off to 95% of holf•wove
POWER
rms output voltcage.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edi·
lion, Generol Eloctric, 1967, p 198-199.
+IOV
2.2K
47K A
- - - - - · +C1
11'' 1.,f
----tL±__
Rl7 IN l~f 'oUr
470
~ ...+ _ _.,__-'-y
Rl6
33 +
e
50+1 Rl8
l()k
22K
A2
5.lk 501 2.2K
.,,. .,,.
-'lDV
ALL pnps ARE 2N2907 170-DEG PHASE SHIFTER-Used in servos and

RI ALL npn s ARE 2N2222A other phase-sensitive systoms to buck out
IOk residual phase shift. Transistor ads only as
PHASE-SENSITIVE DEMODULATOR-Moximum
+ eREF•.o--390M..---'11·5Yk11--I d-c output is 5.5 V, being positive when 400· phase splitter, to provide complomentary out-
IT+K)
~ 6.3
400Hz
Hz input is in phose with 400·Hz roforonco, puts from which desired volue can bo ob-
IN751A ond negative when input cand reference care tcainod by adjusting R1. Operates from 600
Cl
out of phcaso. R9 is zero adjust.-N. Noko- to 4,000 Hz, using 2N1306 tronsistor.-Tran•
IN751A moto, linoar Domodulotor Combines High Out• sistarizod Phase Shiftor, "Electronic Circuit
e111 -400Hz put and Phaso Sensitivity, Eloclronlc Do1ign, Desig~ Handboolc," Tab Books, Bluo Ridge
.,. Oct. 11, 1967, p 100 and 102. Summit, Pa., p 20.
1200W
'24-00•1
...••
11!.e•I
TYPICAL ClllCIOT VALU(S - r.,- IZO V

ICA: GI CU U1111110 HIUll)
It• 401 OHUI
c •.za wo
sc•' oi c111C10 tm1
It •lOltOMMS
C • LOll'D
c.1:G(tJllQJ
c•z: GI tMISlil
fV/ft luPPRESSC...
EXTENDED-RANGE FULL-WAVE-Has vtry ASOHlltlttD
HALF-WAVE SCR-Gives full 18o-degreo phase
little snap-on effect. C2 recharges Cl after parentheses are for 240-Y a-c llne.-"SCR
control of half-wave load current.-"SCR
triggering. R3 ls adjusted to compensate for Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967,
Manual," 4th Edition, Goneral Elodric, 1967,
p 69.
use of wlde-toloranco components. Valuos in p 189.
·12V
Rt
2501(
FULL·WAVE TRIAC CONTROL-Provides

smooth phase-shift control with Rl over
range of from S to 95% of full load powor,
although subjoct somewhat to lino voltage
variations. R3 is adjusted so triac just drops 360·DEG FET SHIFTER-Each stago provides
out of condudion when Rl is brought to adjustable shift of 0 to 180 dog, depending
maximum rHistance (minimum load power). on setting of ganged controls R.-"FET Circuit
Circuit has some hysteresis. Choice of triac Ideas," Siliconix, Sunnyvale, Cal., 1966.
depends on load. For 220 V, change Rl to
SOOK, R2 to 120K, and R3 to 200K.-J. H.
Galloway, Using the Trioc for Control of AC
Power, Generol Electric, Syrocuse, N.Y., No.
200.35, 1966, p 8.
120 VOLT
AC SUPP\.\'
llOCl'S
120V
1140Vl
'°"'
I
HALF-WAVE WITH SUS CAPACITOR RESET-

Usos basic silicon unilateral switch (sus) re-
!------..~"-------'
RI• ).JK, 5 WATT
R2• HOK, 2 WATT
R:S• J.:S IC, I WATT TO LOAD
TIIANS-R Oii OTMlll ll<llUCTIVE LO.All
R4· J30, t/Z WATT CRI TO CR4 • GE 1NIS93

laxation oscillator to trigger scr at controlled 1111,RG • 2211, :!. WATT CR5,CR8• G£ INl765
triggering anglo during positive half-cyclos of 111, RI· 3'11 , 2 WATT CR7 • GE INl892
R9,RI0· 4711, 112 WATT CRS• GE INITT6
a-c lino. If switching voltage Is not roached Cl,C2,CJ • 0.1 MFD Tl - ISOLATION TRANSfOllMEll 1:!0112.6112.1 vac,
during one positive half-cycle, sus triggor QI• OE ZNH46 PRIMAll\' VOLTAGE Dt!PINOS ON LINE
does not switch and high residual voltage is SCRI, SCR2 - CONTROLLED RECTIFl[RS, AS VOLTAGE IUTI; FT-10 FOR llOV.J
.~ .
loft on Cl, causing cydo-sklpplng. This is
REQUIRED
SCRS,SCIM• GE 2N1595
T2• PULSE TRANSfOllMER PE 2229, UTC HDI OR
$PAAGUE 93Z2Q EQllV-'UNT ·.
avoided by forcing 1us to switch at ond of TRIGGER FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS-Designed sired condudlon period. Ujt Ql 11 conneCted
oach positive half-cycle with R2 current when for phaso-controllod scr'1 feeding lndudlve across a-c lino by bridge rodlfler, for. trig.
lino voltago goos negative, Valuos In paren· a-c load. Obtains synchronization from a•c goring on both halvos of a-c cyclo.-"SCR
theses are for 240 V a-c.-"SCR Manual," 4th supply voltage rather than from scr volrage. Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967,
Edition, Gonoral Electric, 1967, p 185-186. Trigger signal is continuous for most of do- p 196-197.
CHAPTER 61
Phonograph Circuits
RI.(""""~~~-:;-:=~,._....,
PA·2ll... _ J
••• 11.ev
12.SV
R4
HOk
.047,11F
CERAMIC CARTRIDGE JM
800 TO IOOOpF BAL.
TO 2ND STEREO CHANNEL AMPLIFIER

4-W IC PHONO AMPLIFIER-Bootstrapping of porformonce at different volumo co1Urol set•
R2 to increase input Impedance Is possible tings.-D. V. Jonos, Audio-Frequency lnte-
because input and output of G-E Integrated grated Circuits, Electronics World, July 1968,
circuit ore in phase. Article analyzes circuit P 54-56.
CERAMIC PHONO
TUNER ·34V
RIO Rll Rl7 JUI R24 R29

41K UK UK OK IOK 5.6K
RI R23 R28 R21 RH R.33

3.GK IBK IOOK 12K 12K IGK
...
FET MONO AUDIO-Sorves as complete con• construction details, including circuit of 34-V fler, and single 2,000-µF fllter copacitar,-
trol center for high· and low-Impedance audio power supply using 117/25 V Stancer P6469 "Fleld Effect Transistor Prolects," Motorola,
sources, Including tone controls and necessary transformer, HEPl77 full-wavo bridge rodl• Phoenix, Ariz., 1966, p 57-74.
equalization for each source. Article gives
555
1.5·W LINE-OPERATED AMPLIFIER-Output

+13.2Y 3.UI.
stage is powered directly from roctified a-c
l ~~~m
lino, while driver transistor gets its voltage
from extra winding on phonograph motor
~OUTPUT
after rectification.-D. E. Lancastor, Plastic
Power Transistors-Advantages and Applica• HK THOAOAA90N
24 s 53
tions, Electronics World, Feb. 1968, p 50-52.
POWER GAIN FOR

CIRCUIT-&008
I.SK
33.n.
,__ _ __,_... ,~6~0...K,.__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ +1zov., ZMA.
+
LZO~F CHAltGE TO.OZ
tOOK Z7K "S" .OtS .............. FET PHONO EQUALIZER·PREAMP-High·qual·

ity performance is obtained with this voltage
DltN•t.8•A ampliflor design, which provides proper bias·
-05 Ing for field-offoct transistors. Feedback not•
w-J~...... work at bottom center gives exact RIAA
.
~ equalizatian. Alternativo network at lower
."'
....
., CARTRIDGE IMEG •
right (with 0.015 capacitor changed to 0.02)
is proforablo for organ music having pro·
~ LOAD nouncod low frequencies. Gain is 40 dB,
:;; ZZKTO 1201(
470K ond overload-to-noise ratio is 104 dB. Noise
!2 470 level is 7 dB lower than best tubo circuit,
~o---_ . . . ...___..,_....;:.,__. . . ___.__..____ ___ ~ ..__~ overload level is 5 dB higher, and dynamic
range Is much greater than with conventional
~~
transistors.-W. A. Rhoinfeldor, Phono Equal·
izer Uses FET's, Electronics World, April 1966,
Yrato,r p 32-33 and 93.
lltfSISfQtll
~7·01·AA
...
...,,..,..... .
023
u
.
.,
. ..
•••
·17'\I
f'~:FD
017
Z.ZK
...
no
....,
l·~
• Ct6
.
--14.0V
• .zsv
zz
.eoJ.Ol·e& ,. ••
u
AG P'Olrf.11 IM'Vf
Cll •
..,,. 01 IOO•lfO
IOV • ~...~t---~b r::..-::=r~:=o•
tlllltG pJ~~R
r----- TOV
u I I .,,
~-<.----1--..-.__.°',____...:-~"""••'-'-<:
-
I •,.
I I cu
L--- J · noo
""
OUTPUT
::.
I~
...
..... r---·
111!1
''"'I •2••• ""a
6-W PORTABLE STEREO PHONO AMPLIFIER-
Obtains 30 V a-c: from extra conter•tappod
winding on phono motor. Each 3·W chan·
..
a.I MlG
L____
02
.J •?.ov oro
llSN•I
PU•DRIVO
ra
1-.0
4
Cit
.,to•.......
ca
04
net has individual bass, treble, and loudness IOV 114P·I

OUTPUT
controls, plus common balance control. Op·
oration with both headphone and speakers
disconnocted may damage eutput transistors.
Capacitance values abovo 1 are pf unless Chassis, Magnavox, Fort Wayno, Ind., Service
otherwise indicatod.-A507 Series Amplifier Manual 4340, 1969.
PHONOGRAPH CIRCUITS 551
1-W IC FOR CERAMIC CARTRIDGE-Use of A14F

PA234 IC minimizes number of external com•
ponents needed for phono amplifier. A-c
feedback network is independent of d-c food·
back network. Spealcor coupling capacitor
serves also as a•c bypass capacitor across
d-c bias resistors.-Dwight V. Jones, 1 Watt
IC Amplifler for Ceramic Phono Cartridge,
1969.
150k
IOOK
CERAMIC
CARTRIDGE
-1a.sv
Rl28
4.7K
.-~~~~~.:.:.:.:.:..~~~..-~""'~t-~~..-~~~~
-19v
RJ27
12
......;:;.::.:...~-+,y;;,.~~~
I
oro1 ..
.....-tM-~RED
lt119
470 __1 TO PHONO MOTOR
~ l30::~:~IHD
ltl21
470
I R;~NT[R TAl'PEDl
OUTPUT 0102
Clll •9.?V 010!1
rOO
Al Of
rov +
-9.SV
RtU
2.7
Clll
100
25V
9TPI
CH-I
~~~--<1--~~~·~"---+~~~:..::.'--.._~~~"'-~~-u-.~~~-"'-,~;CL
J
330• Rll7 RJ2S
27 L7
-e.sv ..,
5
(IOI RIOl CIOS
IOOPr tSOK .I AUDIO AMP OUTPUT I
0101 QI07 I
Al09
94NI 9TN2
RI Of
2 MEG CtOl 220•
LOUIJMESS Al06 4700
pr
IUEG
RIOSA
CHI 25K
PHO NO
INPUT
TONE
Rl02 Cl04
4700
ZMEG
LOOONCSS •• -.rv OUTPUT
CIOZ 0108
.,
100
Rl0411
ISOK
Cf06
·' Rll8
97N2
Rl08
,...
27
llOK
CllZ +
IOO
JOY -9.7V OUTPUT
0106
AIZZ 97PI
470
RIZO
470
3 W WITH EIGHT TRANSISTORS-Provides 1.5 a-c to rectifiers for omplifior. Complemen· speciol Mognovox type numbers.-AS09 Series
W per channel of music power output, for tary•symmetry output stoge drives speolcer Amplifler Chonis, Mognovox, Fort Wayne,
use in portable stereo phonogroph hoving directly for eoch chonnel. Tronsisters have Ind., Service Monuol 4341, 1970.
extra winding on motor for supplying 30 V
+UV
R7
3-W RECORD-PLAYER AMPLIFIER-Designed oson
for uso with cortridges hoving 300-mV out•
put, such os crystol units. Rl 0 octs with C4
~""
os simple treble control. Spoolcor provides •a
•1on 16V
low-voltoga supply (with C6) for collector
of TRl .-''Tronsistor Audio and Rodio Cir· T..
ACl1C
cults," Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, p 44.
••
2°2n
Re
150
••
un
control
TNClle
control
~t
-
"'111111
MICRO·
ELECTRONICS (DRIVE eoosn
NO. Rl
RS8310 47K ADJUSTS
RS8312 68K IDLE
_,:~
RS8314 lOOK
RS8316
RS8318
150K
220K l'N IMICRO CIRCUIT B,:.; @
SUBSTllUTION CHART FOR RI
.,.__ ___:l::..;.9~V.f:l5
RS8310 10
~* TO ci..;..lW----1--....4.--~
MAX CONTROLS ICLOCKWISEI
· 21NtV RMS@lKHZ INPUT•
z.ii OUTPUT ACROSS SPEAKER @
eI 41~1 Rss31s
!BOTTOM VIEW!
+
150
15V
-
SPEAKER
" UNPUTl3 12GND. SYSTEM
~.
Al 22K
.55V @ 470
@1 @@ 23{1
CRYSTAL
MONO
CARTRIDGE
®
VOLUME
.Ol SOOK ..
10
2fN
t __
.._..........,
~-- '
\ ..__.
14
.6V
@* .OOi
A2
ID. C. FEEDBACK! ® 10
• IA.C. FEEDBACK)
* R.F. suppressors.
®
--------u-•---1 j 7 to 17 ma. I OLE
-
C~RRENT
CHANGER
SWITCH
A3
• -~r:.:11zszszs
IC PHONO-Bullt around single silicon chip
hoving six translators, she resistors, and
diode. Has true temporoture stability, well
above molting point of phonograph records.
Delivers 1.5 watts music power at no more
than 5% distortion. No-slgnal voltages are ' '---1 nsert 147 pilot lamp here du ring testing lo
shown.-A. F. Patria, First lnto9rotod°Circult limit current to sale value Uamp will not glaw
Phonograph, E/odronies World, Dec. 1966, p unless current exceeds ZOmaJ.
28-29 and 70.
+12WLTS OSCILLAlOR POWER SWO"CH COMMUTATIOM FEEDBACK
PHONO MOTOR SPEED CONTROL-Complo·

mentary ujt 3N81 (dashed box) Is used In
free-running relaxation oscillator to stabllize
speed of d-c motor drive for portable phono-
cw ..--ro:-,~;--i graphs and tape recorders. Light rofledod
SPEEOf off disc on motor is sensed by phototransistor
AOJUST
L14B, turning SCR2 on and turning off SCR1.
22k When 0.22·µF capacitor charges to peak point
and fires, SCR1 comas on again and process
repeats itself to make motor synchronous
with oscillator. Article doscrlbos operation in
detail.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Complementary
·a· ....A._ _,,_ _.___ _ _ _ .._.__,..a_ _,1..,1.___ Unijunction Transistor, General Electric, Syra.
cuse, N.Y., No. 90.72, 1968, p 15.
mREO PHONO PREAMP-Has 50,000.0hm DI

Input lmpodance for magnetic cartridges and IN4735A
delivers vp to 10 mV for audio powor am•
pJiflor. Both channels are Identical, oach
with Its own RIAA feedback network. Article
gives design procedure. If gain control is
used betwHn preamp and amplifier, It
should bo 25,000 to 100,000 ohms, without
blocking capacltor.-J. G. Holbrook, The C2
Engineer's Storoo Preamp, floctronics World, 0.033
May 1968, p 44-45.
500
,.t t&OHM
LOAD
-t34v
Rt .
680k
17.Sv 5-W AUDIO IC-Complete phonograph am-

pliRor is obtained simply by adding resistors
and capacitors to General Electric PA246 IC
audio amplifier. Frequency response is 30
Hz to 100 kHz. Dosignod for 0.5-V signal
from phono pickup and 16-ohm speaker loacl.
Can also bo used In radios and tape record·
INPUT ors. Requires 34-V supply.-IC Audio Am·
plifler Puts Out 5 Watts, Electronics, Nov. 25,
1968, p 111-112.
-ff-
_r~
15JIF -n=1511F
C3
.o•5
R2
4 •7 M
I
..,...
IOOK
..,...
GERMANIUM-TRANSISTOR PHONO PREAMP
-Feedback gives RIAA equalization and off·
sets inherent base-emitter nonlinearity, to
givo high fidelity along with required high
input impedance and low output impedance.
Gain is 40 dB. Current drain is 5 mA, and
overload-to•noiso ratio is BS dB.-W. A. Rhein·
foldor, Phono Equalizer Uses FET's, Electron•
ics World, April 1966, p 32-33 and .93.
01 +
Vco
OC44 v,
EF86
r=J +
I .OJ.JI
INPUT
Re
2k
GAIN BOOSTER FOR MAGNETIC CARTRIDGE

-Single transistor boosts gain of tube pre•
amp for crystal cartridge by 10, to permit
use of magnetic cartridge without adding
SINGLE-IC PHONO AMPLIFIER-Provides 25 step•up transformar or extra separately
dB gain for 0.5 V rms output of ceramic powered tube stage. Cathode bias of tube
pickup and delivers 1 W to 8-ohm speaker at is supply voltage for transistor.-Y. L. U,
5% harmonic distortion.-Westinghouse To Cathode Voltage Boosts Amplifior Gain Ton·
Unvoil IC Device, Electro11ic News, Aug. 21, fold, Electronics, Moy 15, 1967, p 95.
1967, p 84.
15V t22V to:MV
R~
47"ll 80s.$ COl"ltfOI
R6 R7
R4 47~Q eoOkO 11"'"1"
2Mll
C2
6•8nF
Orn;moe CGfVt<fg;I
R2
1•8Mll Ct
~10.V
lf11
·-
C4 C7
RGd•OIQ)Ut R3
270d) C3
•<v
16V
··- Re
2SOldl hnar
trobkt cont.rel Cg
lo,.F
16Y •11
20•11
Output
log
CERAMIC-INPUT AUDIO PREAMP-First stage
usas low-noise transistor, with switch giving
choice of ceramic cartridge or radio input.
Choose RI experimentally to give required to give with RI an 18.µs time constant. "Transistor Audio and Radio Circuits," Mui·
sensitivity with radio used, than choose C12 Balance control is provided for stereo use.- lord Ltd., London, 1969, p 42.
6 TO 30 VOLTS
INPUT
TO
MAGNETIC
CARTRIDGE
MEG.
2
+
- ~F
20 TO POWER
AMPl.IFIER
FET MICROPHONE OR PHONO-Gives excei..

1
lent frequency response over wide range of
supply voltages for ceramic or crystal miuo-
600pF .0068 phone or phono cartridge.-"Tips on Using
FET's," Motorola, Phoanix, Ariz., HMA-33,
LOW·NOISE PHONO PREAMP-Feedback from 1969.
lost anode into first cathode uses network
trimmed to give exact RIAA equalization.
Gain is 40 dB.-W. A. Rhelnfalder, Phono
Equalizer Uses FET's, Electronics World, April
1966, p 32-33 and 93.
LI
01
2N321
Cl C2
XTAL C3
PHONO JI 0.0514 t
INPUT H',____ 75pf
WIRELESS PHONO OSCILLATOR-Developed to R4

broadcast phono pickup signal of inexpensive RZ
phonograph to high-quality o•m receiver IOK 4.3K
nearby, for bolter audio reproduction. An· C5
tenna is limited to 1O feet by low. LI is
ferrite vori-loopstick, used for tuning to dead· +
spot at low end of broadcast band on re·
ceiver.-"A Modern Transistor Workbook.''
RI
IOK 81 -j 3V
Radio Shock, Boston, Mass., 1965, p 15.
SI R3
101<
ADJUSTS
ZERO
SIGNAL
c~i::NT ..__.....
19._V_.,
PAZZZ
'-..RI
l.9V 5 ~1~~~EDbl0---'--<~-I
MAX. CONTROLSICLOCICWISEI 24rnV RMS Clt-4-70-p"'F'-'-<l !BOTTOM IOV
AT llHZ IN~p~~~~~PUT ACROSS C6
't [INPUTI ' VIEW) IZGND.
.05 ZZk .55V

RBt C5 .05 R2 C3
CRYSTAL VOLUME
MONO
CARTRIDGE
c:1 000•
.01
TONE
*
C9 .OOI
+10-
20V
ASTATIC-146 I DC FEEDBACKI
R!tk
IA.C. FEEOBACKI
*R.F. SUPPRESSORS Cl ~ 7 TOl7ou\
.L--.......:::i~:c...-.....,....._1DLECURRENT
250 Z5V ........
-----+--+--, .OZVP-P-~·A··x_·
------ RIPPlE C-Y..-~-~
IC PHONO-Comploto audio amplifier circuit
for portable phonograph, built around six•
transistor IC audio cnnplifior, provides output
of 1.5 W with loss than 5% distortion.
Volume control is connected to provide boss
boost only at low level.-lntegrated Circuit
INSERT•47PU.OTLAMP DURING TESTING TOLIMIT
CURRENT TO SAFE VALUE Audio Amplifter PA222, General Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 85.20, 1967.
INPUTS
MIC.
DUAL-CHANNEL IC PREAMP-Uses two opera·

tional amplifiers on slnglo chip, similar to
Motorola MC1302P IC. Extemal connodions
oro shown for only ono channel; othor chon•
~
nel is wirod identically to torminols 1, 2, 5,
and 6. U1od in H. H. Scott Series 2500 o-m/
f·m compact storoo radio-phonos. Maximum
output is 3 V.-D. R. von Recklinghausen, IC
Op-Amp Hi-Fi Proamplifler, Electronics World,
June 1968, p 44-45. TO
M!Jl.TIPUIC
0£COD£R
-!-
115 DUTPUr
Sit
RIAA PHONO PREAMP-Designed for mag•

netic phone cortridgo. Uses either Fairchild
µA709 or Notional LM709 IC opamp with
compensating R-C networks In feedback loop
of first ampliflar. Requires 6-mV Input at 1
kHz to givo 4-dBm reforenco output lovol.
Circuit rejects signals below 20 Hz to mini·
mize translents.-S. L. Silver, IC Op Amps
Boost Audio Circuit Performance, Electron;"
World, Sept. 1968, p 31>-32.
r·······-PRECISION WIRED SYSTEM------

I ~®
----------····1 I
I I
I I
II l80K II v R20I
IO llJV
R202
IK
I
I RS RS
I 18 22K
116
I 47K
lEFTCBU. I
I TRACK, 4 CHANNEL
PLAYHEAD I
II~
H 4.7K
RI
2SC458 l.ZV 2.7V
68K 112 2NDAF AMP.

IQO TR2
114 • C4 R8
+
e5
-
ID ISV
u~ 5 IK C6
" SV DOU
CZOI •
50
ISV •
- C202
200
180K + 15V.
11106
47K
H • '.L._,!.•
J2
I lllGHTCHAN.
UV I
I
OUTPUT JACK
I ..__...,.._-''
POWER SWI~
I 1
.
I
:ft.
I Rl04
f.llK
• CI04
• ~v
RtOe
IK .iim :
I
RIO and R110. Frequency range Is i~
L--------------------------------------------J
STEREO CARTRIDGE PLAYER-Dolivors 0.1 V transistor ampliflers. To obtain 0.2-V out•
10,000 Hz.-Cartridgo Tape Player STP6S1,
Admiral, Bloomington, Ill., Sorvico Manual
por channel into 200K impoclanco, for driving put for tube ampliRors, clip 4.7K resistors S1213, 1969.
STEREO PHONO OSCILLATOR-Can be usod

with a•m radio to convert monaural phono-
groph for stereo records. Change to stereo
cortridge, feed ono chonnel to regulor phone
ompliflor, and connect other to JI for brood·
costing to rodlo used for second channel.
Cl For good stereo effect, place radio obout 7 ft
from phonograph. Tune rodio to doad spot,
ond od(ust Cl until music Is heard whilo
To one chonnel playing stereo record. Antenno can be fow
of stereo foet of wire (legal limit Is 10 ft). Valuos
cortridge output aro: Bl 1.S V; 82 30 V; Cl 36S pf; Rl SIOK;
(of phono or 82 L1 182 turns No. 30 enamel contor·tapped on
tape ployer)
M•+ %11 form.-R. M. Brown, "104 Simplo Ono-
Tvbe ProJocts," Tab Books, Bluo Ridge Sum·
mlt, Pa., 1969, p 166.
2·W IC PHONOGRAPH-Uses GE PA·237 into-

groted circuit for driving 16-ohm speokor, 1sn
SPEAKER
with ceramic cartridge at input. Minimum
cartridge output of 0.5 V gives 2 W power
output with about 2% total harmonic dis-
tortion at 1 kHz.-Dwlght V. Jones, Mono•
lithic 2 Watt lntogrotod Ampliftor-Charactor•
lstics and Applications, General Electric, Syra•
cuse, N.Y., No. 90.73, 1968, p 12. 12.SV
R8 R7
220K
..---- VOL. TONE 22
ll
MEG
470pt
C£RAMIC CARTRIDGE
600 TO IOOOpF
10 2ND
STEREO CHANNEL
AMPLIFIER
NOTE: To locate oddltional circuits In the category of this chapter, use the index at the back
of this book. Check also the outhor's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 62
Photoelectric Circuits
LIGHT-OPERATED ON·OFF SWITCH-Different

combinations of wiring give choico of oporat•
ing methods. With wiring A, increase in
light turns off load. With wiring B, increase
in light turns on load. With wiring cam·
bination of A and C, increase in light turns
off load but it is turned back on again whon
light levol increases to levol determined by
setting of RI, as roquirod for automatic night
lamp in vacant homes or for stroot lamp con- 1<02103
trol. Connedion D, for R9 and C2, is op· IOA
tional latching circuit. Maximum load is 600
W.-"Silicon Controlled Rectifier Exporimon·
tor's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 106.
©
- -- ------------
IN91 I 0 RELAY
--- _ ___,....__....
_.. 1
:;.12v
IN91
RI
I~
llE ALL PHOTOCELLS

ARE CLAIREX 703L
SCHMln TRIGGER DRIVES RELAY FASTER- ger. With circuit configuration A, relay pulls logic function. Reversing locations of RI and
Ordinary photooloctric control relay is in when light drops. With B, both cells must cells gives relay pull-In with increasing light;
tripped directly at high speed in response to bo illuminated for relay dropout, thus giving RI should thon be incroasod to SOK.-R. A.
small chon9111 in light intensity on photocon· AND logic function. With C, illuminotion on Farrall, light-activated Schmitt Triggers Con-
ductivo coll connoctod into basic Schmitt trig- either coll makes relay drop out, to give OR trol Relay, Electronics, May 15, 1967, p 98.
564
PHOTOELECTRIC CIRCUITS 565
120 v
2-A PHOTOSWITCH-Provides on-off action. 60Hz
When light on photocell exceods predoter• Rz
mined lovel set by R4, relay releases and 4
turns off lamp or other load. Whon light
drops below samo level, relay pulls in and
turns on lamp load ogaln. Values: Rt 150;
R2 5.6: R3 470; R4 250; Cl 5 µF; F1 3 A;
CRI SK303t; CR2 SK3030: Qt SK3005; Q2
SK3020; photocell KD2016; relay l.35K 12 V.
-"Hobby Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., HM-90, p 87.
OUTPUT
(M.t.X. CONTACT
CURRENT
2AMPERESJ
cos PHOTOCELL FOR SYNCHRONOUS SWITCHING-When photocell

PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL resistance increoses or control switch is
(OPTIONAL WITH S11 closed, scr•triac combination turns on load
currant only at next instant when· a·c supply
voltage passes through zero. Similarly, light
R3
IOK on photocell or opening of switch does not
turn off load until current next passes through
o, 02
zero. This gives minimum disturbance to
GE C5B power supply when switching, with conduc-
120V TRIAC tion only for integral number of whole cycles.
60- Eliminates rfi and oudio filtering · probloms.
02 With transformers or other Inductive loads,
SI
CONTROL eliminates fuse-blowing nuisance coused by
SWITCH GE INl692 surge of magnetizing current.-J. H. Gallo-
LOAD way, Using tho Triac for Control of AC Power,
General Electric, Syracuso, N.Y., No. 200.35,
1966, p 15.
IU
zrr--
Rl4 +cz
Vl'I
LIGHT-ACTUATED COUNTER-Designed
counting objects moving on conveyor
Operates only on leading edge of object, glv· i....._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,.__ _.__.,...._ _.._~-----~---1-h~-~-
ing output power pulso that is adjustable
between I 5 ms ond 5 s and is independont
of length or shope of object. Silicon photo·
cell feeds directly into base of first transistor
of Schmitt tri99er used to switch monostable
TR3 from stable to unstable state, wilh du·
ration of delay determined by Rt-Ct. Result·
ing pulse, of predeterminod length, is am•
plifled by d-c amplifier TRS·TR6 for driving
electromagnetic counter or other numerical
display device. Jitter of object does not
cause false count.-"Silicon Photocoll Appli·
cations," Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, lanes., Eng•
land, No. 9, t967, p 14.
+50Y
+20V
8PK2!1
~ M59A
1oon
DARKNESS-ON D·C SWITCH-When light on DARKNESS-OFF D·C SWITCH-Wilh phototran·

SILICON PHOTOCELL TURNS OFF TRANSISTOR
phototransistor drops bolow 1,000 lux, tron• slstor dark, transistor has no baao current
-Illumination on cell generates signal thal
sistor genorates trigger that turns on thyristor and no collector current, so thyrislor is held
turns off transistor. Can be used in punched
handling up to 16 A load current.-Applica· off. Ught produces trigger that turns on
lape readers.-"Silicon Photocell Applica-
lions of Silicon Planar Phatolransislor, BPX25, thyrislor to apply power to load. Requires
lions," Ferranti, Oldham, Lanes., England, No.
Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcama Div., Eindhoven, 1,000 lux to turn on 16-A load.-Applicalions
9, 1967, p 6.
The Nolherlands, No. 316, 1967. of Silicon Planar Phototranslstor BPX25,
LIGHT-CURTAIN GUARD FOR MACHINES-

Fail-safo a-c system uses li9ht source thal is
modulated by operating small-fllamont lamp
in series with rectifier from a·c line, to give
hiah 50-Hz (or 60-Hz} flicker content. With
modulaled light, system will fail safe either
if normally conducling transistor becomes
short-circuited or normally nonconductive
transistor becomes opon circuit. Curtain of
. light is projected across throat of punch press,
power shears, or other dangerous machlnos,
so operator cannot insert hand through cur·
lain without interrupting at least ono beam
of light and pulling in machine-stopping re-
lay.-"Silicon Photocell Applications," Ferranti
Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, No. 9, 1967,
p 18.
TR.-Tums ratio I : I •4-Primary Jnducwice = IH. MAIN
CONTAQ.
RL,-SOOO P.O. Relay Type 3000. CIRCUIT
2~00
IW
·~,,
F
5A KD2105
KD~
LIGHT-OPERATED TURN-ON SWITCH-Will
switch on lamp, heater, or universal molar
up to 240 W at predetermined light lovel de-
KD2!03 termined by setting of Rl. C2 and R7 form
optional latching circuit that keeps load on
until lino switch Sl Is opened. Applications
include turning on advertising signs when
illuminated by auto headlights, turning on
dock lights with spotlight or flashlight when
boat is returning ofter dark, and turnil'lg ·an
lights at darkness.-"Slllcon Controlled ·Reba
WHEN K02106 IS UNPLll§GED,
(NO LOAD CURRENT! \lO READS
tiller Experimenter's Manual," RCA, Horriso~
18.5 VOLTS. N.J., 1967, p 100.
220-V A·C TWILIGHT SWITCH-Relay releases

al darkness, turning on lamp lood. Coll is
cadmium sulfldo RPY20; diode is BYX10; VDR
is voltage-depondont resistor E 299 DG/P248;
R is I K; CI 0.22 µ.F; C2 8 µ.F; relay is 20K
with make al 45 V and break at about 20 V.
Capacitor across relay provonts pull-in by
220V"' Rashes of light.-M. Donkers and E. B. G.
Nijhof, Tho Application of Cadmium-Sulphide
+100/o,-15°/o 8µF Photo-Conductive Call RPY20 In Automatic
Twilight Switches, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 424,
1964.
v, + D
LOW·COST IC PHOTORELAY-Uses Philips 21·

· A60 two-transistor IC as amplifier for pho·
· tocoll. Intended for uso in industrial control
installations where distance between light
source and photocell is under 8 ft. Pulse-
shoping action of IC improves usefulness of
output signal for driving up to 20 counting
or logic units. Interruption of light on cell
makes voltage across unloaded output ter•
minals approach supply voltage.-Photoelec•
Irie Detecting System Using Light Sensor CSPD
and Lamp Unit 1MLU, Philips, Pub. Dept., El·
coma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No.
12, 1968.
____
Vs
,
-s
TU60
"':;;:"'-----"\
us
2
NOR60
U9
13 _NOR60
_ _ _ u11
5 0
IMQ
9
12 15
ov -s
TU60
U7
11&
c
H
NOR60
15 ,,
I
Vs 2
13 to relay
3 lmox IA,30VI
NOR60 NOR60 PASO
" UIO
9 10
Ul2
E other requiromonts for application. Pulses

of light from perforated revolving disk act on
phototransisters at inputs of circuit. Com•
T40jlF plate cycle consists of rotation of disk In
Diodes type BAX 13 given direction from Initial position, pause
ov ov dotection to determine whether disk is sta-
tionary for longer than 15 s, and return of
disk to Initial position. Cycle-terminating re-
FURNACE·EMPTYING DETECTOR-Basic circuit suspended on scales, so weight and time are lay cannot operate again until disk Is baclc
detects .long absences of action in industrial rogistored and hopper emptied automatically homo for start of new cycle.-H. Magro, De-
pfpcoss where action can bo converted into if nothing dribbles out for I 5 s. Uses com· tection of Long-Duration Pauses In Machine
p~lsos of light. Originally developed to blnation of Philips IC gates connected as Operations, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
control slow emptying of furnace Into hopper shown to provide required time delay and Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 67.
+12 v
--- --,
I
c4> ZS70
HIGH-SENSITIVITY PHOTO-DARLINGTON RE·
LAY-Addition of two transistor amplifler
..."
I
I
stag" to Ferranti ZM t 00 photo-Darlington I
pormits turning on l·A load with light level
of only 2 lumons per sq ft.-A Photo Darling•
ton Pair, Ferranti, Oldham, Lanes., England,
No. 36, 1968.
0-7SmA-l·SmA. 41mA-oJ: 20 v
AISB
r--, A AISB
12kci 4·7Kn
120VAC I 500pF
2.2K.n
I IZko
I Al5B
ZTZO MAX.l?RF.
I
.02,J zn3 >ZS Kc/s
I
AISB
L __ J
tokn
2·A PHOTORELAY-Load current varies with
intensity of light roaching photoconductivo PUNCHED CARD READER-Tiny silicon photo-
cell. Ult relaxation oscillator frequency cell with two-stage d-c amplifier is suitable
varies with resistance of photocell, to change for light intensities of 1,000 to 3,000 lumens
firing angle of scr and thereby change aver- por square foot, as commonly used in
age currant to load.-L M. Hertz, "Solid Stato punched card or tapo readers in which road·
Lamps-Part II," General Electrlc, Cleveland, ing is done while card is statlonary.-"Slli-
Ohio, No. 3..0121, 1970, p 21. con Photocell Applications," Ferranti Ltd., Old·
ham, Lanes., England, No. 9, 1967, p 7.
-!....•
SMOKE DETECTOR RECEIVER-Responds to 10-

;:;·.c·..
·~· r
pps pulsed light boom from transmitter. Op· ( · _·-:._[,.'.· · '.'_: ~t.~
tlcal path through area bolng monitored Is 8 :~- '.!I
Inches long, with four mirrors each 1A l11ch 'l,;·;;:f./· •'
square. Ono-shot triggers scr to turn on -·~- ·.· .
1.S·V bicycle-horn alarm if smoke Interrupts
pulsod baam. Draws only 3 mA from pair of
D tlashlight coils when horn Is off.-L. M.
Hertz, "Solid State Lamps-Part II," Gone~ai··
Electric, Clevoland, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970,
p 31. .
820A 39Kn
OUT.
MAX.P.RE
>25K~
nz1 MAX.HF.
ZTcJS >25Kc/5·
?T84
MOVING TAPE READER-Silicon·photocell cir•

HOT·STRIP DETECTOR-Use of single-transi•tor cuit usos Schmitt trigger in•tead of straight
d-c coupled amplifler stago between silicon d-c amplifier, for applications involving read·
photocell and input to Schmitt trigger T2·T3 ing of holes in slow-moving punched cards or
gives operation down to light levels of 10 tapo. Since circuit switches rapidly from one
fool-candles, as required for detection of hot state to tho other, operation is lndapondent
slrip in rolling mills.-"Silicon Photocoll Ap- of card or tape speed.-"Silicon Photocell
plications," Forranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., Applications," Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lones.,
England, No. 9, 1967, p 11. England, No. 9, 1967, p 7.
@1amp
u . . tlertromechclnical
transmission
system
DISPLACEMENT DETECTION-Circuit minimizes
effect of •pread in parameters and changes
in poromoters with time and temperature.
Purpose of circuit is to maintain two plates
in predetermined position with respect to each
other, with both photocells then receiving
equal illumination. Uses Philips DOA42
opamp hoving voltage gain of 12,000 to
drivo electromochanlcal positioning system in
correct direction for rebolancing photocells.-
J. van Stam, Accurate Positioning With Pho-
tocells, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd-
hovon, Tho Nothorlands, No. 81.
-;\
l\. ..
·~"~ •'
~~-~·: • ... ll
•...•/.~•• ?'
-·!J••1.;:,r•.
•.:
. -· ;.... POWER-SWITCHING IC-Phillps PA60 flve-
translstor IC, Including Schmitt trigger, pro-
vides sufficient output power for onerglzing
power relay when photocoll is illumlnotod by
. lMLU lamp from dlstanco under about 8 feet.
I
- ...:photoelectric Detecting System Using Light I
Son•or CSPD and Lamp Unit 1MLU, Philips, j 8ZV88
·C4V7
Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The [_ J·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·---·-·~
Netherlands, No. 12, 1968. '
.----'W'\A.t-------12v
7.5k
220k 220k
REGENERATIVE FEEDBACK FOR TWO PHOTO·
LIGHT..._ TRANSISTORS-Cascade connedion with feed·
INPUT-. back gives current gain of 20 for typical
illumination, as compared to gain of 4 with-
out feedback.-R. Sivaswamy, Current Feed·
back Enhances Phototransistor Sensitivity,
47k 47k Electronics, June 12, 1967, p 103.
~--.....,,_.----------....--<>+IOV
IK
02
DIRECTION INDICATOR-Low-cost circuit ac· 2N2712
22K
tuates flip-flop to indicate direction of inter•
ruption of light beam by moving object.
Output is negative-going at VOl if object
blocks light ta PCl bofore PC2. Far object
moving in apposite direction, output is nega•
tive"lloing at V02.-H. J. Hildebrandt, Pho·
tocell Control lndlccdes Dirodion of Malian,
Electronic Design, Oct. 12, 1964, p 80-81.
39K A
39K e
- -....-o+40V
___,.------....- -....---+-----t:~-o+&V
IKn 270
o,
FF-409
02
2N3677
IN914
.,__________ _,.--IM--~-2v RESET
D1
390k IN914
-6v
HIGH-GAIN PHOTORELAY-Threo-stage dlrod- LOW·DRAIN FET LIGHT CONTROL-No power
coupled amplifier with currant gain of 10,000 is dissipatod by circuit in darknoss, thus con•
gives reliable operation of telephone relay serving battery life. Chief drawback is poor
with light intensities as low as I lumen par noiso immunity, even though light·sonsitive
sq ft on silicon phatocell.-"Silicon Photocell fat arrangement gives high voltage gain and
Applications," Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., high sonsitivitv.-B. R. Smith, Light-Sensitive
England, Na. 9, 1967, p 11. FET, Electronics, Nov. 14, 1966, p 124-125.
B +20VDC
LOAD
PHOTO
CELL
NO. 1
120V
AC
PHOTO· 60Hz
CELL
NO.?
c c Y-----u OUTPUT OR
RELAY COIL
SENSOR, TRANSISTOR, AND RELAY-Emitter-

INTERNAL-TRIGGER TRIAC-Will control 720 follower Is used between 1N2175 and 8,000-
W at up to 6 A. With connedion A, lood is ahm rolay for impedance transformation.
energized when photocell is illuminated. Emitter voltage can also be used to drive
With B, drop In light energizes load. Photo- amplifier, flip-flop, trigger, counter, or scr.
cells are RCA 4453, triac is RCA-40431 silicon Relay pull-in current is 1.2 mA.-D. Abel,
with internal trigger, RI is 6.BK, and R2 is light Sensors-Bright Future for an Expanding
13K.-"Solid State Photosensitive Devices," Technology, Electronic Design, Feb. 17, 1964,
RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 22. p 76-79.
-1'12V
47UI
PUSH-PULL IC PHOTORELAY-Uses Ferranti

ZLD2 differential d·c amplifier with silicon
photocell at input, illuminated by Ferranti
XPIO gallium phosphide light-emitting diode
0.05 inch from adive face of photocell, Full
output swing of 10 V is obtained with 100%
interruption of light boom by punched paper
tape or shutter.-"5ilicon Photocell Applica•
-12V tions," Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lones., England,
No. 9, 1967, p 13.
600W
Cl
220k
TRIAC
120V
GE
SC418
60-
o, GE
220k 8425
IN914 PHOTOCELL
-12v - - - - - - +2v RESET

FET DOOR-OPENER-Light saturates fot QI DIAC·TRIAC CONTROL-When photocell is
and turns off npn transistor 02 to provide dark, voltage across dlac rises rapidly with
positive output voltage, as required for a-c lino voltage during each half-cycle, trig-
garage-door openers, smoke detectors, and gering diac early In cycle. When lllumlno·
popor-broak detectors. High voltago gain tion makes photocell resistance drop below
(above I 00,000) and sensitivity of 0.1 foot• 2K, diac is not triggered and lood power is
candle make circuit useful also in star track· shut off. For 240 V, change Cl to 0.1 µ.F.-
ors. Has good noise immunlty.-B. R. Smith, J. H. Galloway, Using tho Triac for Control
Light-Sensitive FET, Electtonics, Nov. 14, 1966, of AC Power, General Eledrlc, Syracuse, N.Y.,
p 124-125. No. 200.35, 1966, p 15.
RELAY FLOW MONITOR-Used to detod impending

MOVING OUTPUT
OllJECT catastrophic Jams of small components mov•
ing down convoyor chute at high speed and
I
shutting down lino, whilo Ignoring small self·
clearing pile-ups. Rt controls amount of
beam interruption permitted beforo relay is
120V60H1 energizod.-L. M. Hortr, "Solid State Lamps;-
Port II/' General Electric, Cleveland, Ohio,
No. 3..0121, 1970, p 18.
~ ~~~•~------~~n..__.--o
APERTURE
INCIDENT /'-...._,___ INCIDENT

LIGHT / ........... LIGHT
C:=J [:::::J c=J [:=J

TRANSPARENT
TUBING
COLORLESS-LIQUID DETECTOR-Photocell is
Initially positioned so light passes through
empty gloss tube to photocell, Apertures
should be positioned so light goes through
near Inner edgo of tubing, as shown. When
liquid is present, it refracts light owoy from
photocell, Any simple photoelectric reloy
circuit con be used to c~nvort change in
photocell impedonce to rolay or Indicator
oporation.-"Solid Stato Photosonsillve Do-
vicos," RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 27.
0
t +
c ISK
220
2.?K
HIC ev INHH
IP' l'OTTf;ll • lllUll,llLO
IOOV
LH•IOOO OHM
CLllllL
CIOH
~
ll'fVA.C.
•OMI
IA
,01)1'
SUNSET LAMP-Turns an night light or mast•
IOOV head lamp on boat when twilight falls.
Uses modified complementary Schmitt trigger
In which transistors condud hoavlly when
SCR CONTROL-Simple lino-operated modem dark resistance of photocell goos abovo 1,500
control usos scr to pull In relay whon lllumi· ohms. In daylight, photocoll drops below
nation on photocell incroasos to prodeter• 500 ohms, transistors turn off, and battory
mined level sot by potentlornetor.-J. G. Ra· drain drops to 400 p.A.-J. G. Rabinowitr,
blnowltz, Photocells-Typos, Characteristics, Photocells-Types, Characteristics, and Ap-
and Applications, Electronics World, Sept. plications, E/octronie1 World, Sept. 1968, p
1968, p 23-26. 23-26.
Rz
z~
IW
LIGHT-OPERATED TURN.OFF SWITCH-Rt de-
termines level at which circuit Interrupts
power to lomp, heotor, or universal motor up
to 240 W. R6 ond C2 provide optional latch·
ing to hold load aff until lino switch St is
opened.-"Sllicon Controlled Rectifier Expori·
menter's Manuol," RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967,
p 103.
WHEN 1(02106 IS UNPLUGGED,

tLOAD CLIRRENT FLOWS!
@ READS 18.5 VOLTS.
....
-
' L /
br.ak-contact S
CR
/ \'
0 - t o load
llOV
AC • c 110Vac
IOH1 L
( +10°/o ;-1so
•THE RElAY FRAii[ IS AT ARllAAAE POT[UIAI. A!IO SHM.0 8(

IN!llLA Tl DFROrll ACDIA\DN CMAlSIS FOR SAfE TT REASOllS.
LIGHT-RESPONSIVE ALARM-Illumination an
photocell, by burglar turning on room lights TWILIGHT SWITCH-Electrolytic capacitor power line. Diode Is BYXtO; Rs 3.3K; C 8 µF;
or ftashlight, energizes relay to turn on out· across relay makes circuit insensitive to short photocoll RPY20; VDR voltage-dependent re-
door lights, alarm, or hi-fl stereo recording light ftashes and prevents relay from chotter• sistor E 298 GD/A262; relay It 2t.BK, with
of vicious barking dog. Values: Rt S.6; ing as twilight falls and decreasing lllumina• make at 45 V d-c and broalc ot 18 V d-c.-
R2 25K; R3 2K; C 8 µF; CR 1Nt763A; photo- lion on photocell increases impodanco of cell M. Donkers and E. B. G. Nijhof, Tho Applica-
cell 7t 63; relay 1OK at 2 mA.-"Solid State to make rolay release and apply power to tion of Cadmium-Sulphide Photo-Conductive
Photosensitive Devices," RCA, Harrison, N.J., lamp load. lightning arrestor (Sigma Instru- Cell RPY20 In Automatic Twilight Switches,
p 24. ments A112) protects photocell from tran- Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven,
sients above 2 kV produced by lightning in Tho Netherlands, No. 424, t964.
•28V
114
27k0
TAI TA2 DI
TRJ
A~
120
n
DRIVE FOR SCHMITI TRIGGER-light on ORP· is maximum. At minimum sensitivity, circuit

12 photocell triggers circuit and energizes triggers at 3.2 lux and rotrlggors to turn off bo up to 6 W. TRt and TR2 aro BFY52, TR3
lamp or relay load at level determined by lamp at 6.5 lux. Chief advantage of using is BFY51, and DI is OAZ215.-Applicatlons of
R2. If sot to trigger at 0.1 lux, circuit will Schmitt trigger is that output is switched very tho BFY50, BFY5t and BFYS2, Phillps, Pub.
bo triggered again and lamp tumed off when rapidly and does not remain In condition of Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho Nether-
lllumlnation risos to 0.11 lux and sensitivity high dissipation for long. Lamp load can lands, No. 428, t965.
RS CARD READER-Schmitt trigger controlled by

R1 Bk 40011 photovoltaic cell operating in diode mode
provides consistent output from punched cord
or punched poper tape reader heod assembly
R4 for light levels ranging from 100 to 1,000
1.Gk
foot-candles. Output is compatible with TTL
or DTL logic ond independent of el1'otic move-
2N2219 ment of cords or tope.-T. B. Stephenson, One
2N2484 02 Hole, One Pulse From Fluttarloss Cord Rooder,
a, EON, Fob. 15, 1970, p 59.
18 KO
1 WATT LOAD
LIGHT-INTERRUPTION CONTROL-When beom

between solld-stolo lomp ond light-odivoted
115 v. 60Hz
scs is interrupted, onodo of silicon unilotoral
switch goes positive on next positive cycle of
o-c line, triggering sus and scr to energize
lood for as long as light boom is interrupted. C3011
SCR
-l. M. Hertz, "Solid Stale Lamps-Part II," 27KO
General Electric, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3-0121,
1970, p 16.
241( 20K 21(
>. IN217S
SIOK S uf OUTPUT
Tl 495
Tl 495
301(
100 ul
+ 20 ul
SI K
PHOTODUODIODE PREAMP-Provides voltage Applications include high-speed reading of ouoss IK load resistor is 4 V p-p.-"Preforred
amplification of 30 dB, flat within 1 dB from punched cards and punchod tape, light meas· Semiconductors and Components," Texas In·
10 Hz to 20,000 Hz, for signal output of IN· urement, conveyor-lino counting, and military struments, Dallas, Toxos, CC101, 1968, p
2175 npn, diffused silicon photoduodiode. light-cletedion systems. Output obtained 27804.
PHOTO,J:LECTRIC CIRCUITS 575
"ENERGIZED"
~ SIGMA
SIMPLE LIGHT-OPERATED RELAY-200 foot·
candles on phototransistor Ql saturates Q2
01 and pulls in d-c relay. Cl protects Q2 from
MR0300 11 F ·2300-GS IL
inductive voltage spike of relay coil.-"Semi·
R1 conductor Power Circuits Handbook," Moto-
1.5 k rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-38.
02
MPS3394
-l.5V
CLAIRElC O-IOOMA
CL·3
o-r
' SIGMA
41 FZ•IOACG
+1.5v
HIGH-SENSITIVITY DETECTOR-Differential of foot-candle in light then makes 12 drop LIGHT-CONTROLLED SERVO-Two 12-V pho-
amplifler circuit gives relay operation far about 20 mA, releasing relay and tripping tocell-Schmitt triggers connected bock-to-back
very small percentage change in light on alarm. SI must then bo open momentarily apply no voltage to motor when both photo-
photocell. Can be used In light-beam bur· to energize relay and reset system.-E. S. cells are illuminated. When either photocell
Gordon, Photoelectric Circuit Operates With is dark, its relay pulls in and enorgiaes motor
glar alarm systems and machine-tool safety
High light Resolution, "400 Ideas for Design for rotation In corresponding direction.
systems. RI is decreased until current 12 is
Selected from Electronic Design," Haydon Valuos: RI SK; R2 820; R3 270; R4 820; RS
just sufficient to hold relay in when photocell
Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 107. 1O; R6 1K; CR RCA-40266; Ql 40234; Q2
illumination Is normal. Decrease of fraction
40084; photocells SQ2508; relays 96 ohms 12
V (shown de-enorgized).-"Solid State Photo-
sensitive Devices," RCA, Harrison, N.J., p.·~7.
~
? \NIUA'\.Y
60"'-
I~~ •
SCR2
4700 4701<
2W
22IC
Olpf
~~ 1Nl692 t:
cscR2
SCRI
Leos PHOTOCELL WITH MECHANICAL

RAMP-AND-PEDESTAL CONTROL-Photocell SHUTTER FOR SETTING UGHT LEVEL
determines pedestal voltage to which capaci- of load current, low-voltage high-current
tor Is charged through transistor at beginning lamp is connected In series with load and
of oach half-cycle. Capacitor then continues placed near photocell. For proportional con-
to charge along adjustable ramp until ujt trol of lc:oad in response to mechanical posi-
triggers and flros load scr's through trans- tion, sensing oloment should drive shutter be-
former. With lamp load for illuminatic:on tween lamp ·and photocell.-F. W. Gutzwiller
control, rms voltage across load can be regu- and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Semican•
lated by exposing photocell to small pilot ductor Applications, General Elec1ric, Syra•
lamp connected across load. For regulation cuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 12.
676 ELECTRO.MIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
,.,_Q
8CI07
transistor, and biasing effect resulting there-

REDUCING DARK CURRENT-Illumination of from Is overcome with connection shown.
only I 0 lux produces output voltage change Ad(ust RI until phototransistor In dark Is just
of about 20 V in high-sensitivity circuit hav• cut off.-Applications of Silicon Planar Pho·
ing backlash of only about 0.5 lux. Dark totranslstor BPX25, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
current is reduced by connecting high ros.ist• Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nothorlands, No. 316,
anco botwoon base and emitter of photo• 1967.
RESISTIVE TO IAll'I
6-A TRIAC CONTROL-With illumination on

117V A.C. photocell, triac turns off power to load.-J.
IOHZ
G. Rabinowitz, Photocells-Types, Character·
istics, and Applications, Elocfronics World,
Sept. 1968, P. 23-26.
CAN USE RCA•40431 IN PLACE OF BOTH SllllCOllDUCTOllS (OMIT I.SIC RES.)
z~v
TO CO~TllOLLED
A B CIRCIJIT
tU
1JOV
( !!OHzl
8PIC2!1
A·C POWER CONTROL-When liaht on pho·

totransistor rises above about 700 lux, thy·
24-V SCHMln TRIGGER-With connection A, ristor is triggered and turns on load current ,. ~
rolay Is energized when light drops below up to 16 A from a-c lino. Circuit does not ·~!· ...
value doterminod by 11ttln9 of RI. With latch on bocauso thyristor disconnects supply
connection B, relay is energized when light from load at end of each positive half-cyc,le.
rises above predotormlnod level. Values: Circuit retriggors about 6 dog past zero volt-
RI IK; R2, R3 2.2K; R4 300; R5 12; R6 lOK; age if phototransistor still has sufficient illu·
R7 75K; CR 40266; QI, Q2 40084; photocell mlnation.-Appllcatlons of Silicon Planar 'Pho·· ·
No. 1 SQ2508; photocell No. 2 SQ2519; relay tolranslstor BPX25, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elc~ma •
360 ohms 24 V.-"Solld Stole Photosensitive Div., Eindhovon, Tho Notherlands, No. 316, ·, ·"
Devices," RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 21. 1967.
PHOTOELECTRIC CIRCUITS 57'1
6.3-V A·C TRIAC CONTROL-L19ht makes pho-

tocell Impedance drop, and re1ultln9 Increase
In cell current trl99ers trlac on. Wiii handle
lamp or other load currents up to 2.5 A, with
15 W maximum. Trloc Q Is RCA-40528 and
photocell Is SQ2519.-"Solld State Photosen·
sitive Devices," RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 21.
+12 v
IZOVAC
ZS70 LINE
27K
PHOTO.DARLINGTON WiTH AMPLIFIER- !SV, IOOmA

CONTROL
Transistor provides sufficient additional gain
for operating relay when light level on Fer- PHOTO-DARLINGTON AMPLIFIER-Two 2N·
ranti ZM100 plioto-Darlington is below 50 5n9 npn planar silicon gla11-hou1lng tron•
lumens per sq ft.-A Photo Darlington Pair, siston in Darlington connedion are lllumi-
Ferranti, Oldham, Lones., England, No. 36, !lotod by lamp whose Intensity vorios with
1968. control current, for control of loads up to
1,0!KI W. By lncreasln9 27K resistor to 56K
and using C122D scr's, load can be 2,000 W
at 240 V.-Light Sensor 2N5777·2N5780, Gen·
oral Elodric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 55.46, 1969.
STEPPING
RELAY
D1
Al3A 1k
lk
R,
150k
SCR 2
C2 C6F
SOpf + 50pf
10v
IOv + 1k
Z4XL 01pf
9.1 O.lpf
A 8 c
LIGHT t: INDICATES PLANE OF POLARIZATION

SOURCE
.1h~\·------ DUAL ELEMENT

PHOTOCELL CL703/2
. GARAGE-DOOR CONTROL-Polarized llght biont light. Artlclo coven method of mount• selection of single target from 9roup of pho-
·: ~ so111Ce,.on moving vohlcle can trlg9or photo- ln9 horizontal and vertical polori1in9 titers tocells.-E. K. Howell, Polarized Ll9ht Triggen
·: ~oll crf .. contro1 up to 50 foot away, without in system. Can be adapted for variety of Remote Control System, Electronics, Jan. 23,
risk of accidental triggering by stray or am• other romoto control appllcaflons, Including 1967, p 88-90.
·6V
RCA PHOTOCELLS:
No.1, TYPE SQ2508
No.2, TYPE SQ2520 6-V SCHMITI TRIGGER-With photocell con·
noction A, load is energized when light drops
Q1, Qi!: RCA-2N404 below predetermined level set by R8. With
Qa: RCA-2N388 connection B, load is energized when illumi·
R1. R2: 1200 nation rises above predetermined level.-
R3: 22 "Solid-State Photosensitive Devices," RCA,
R4: 1200 Harrison, N.J., p 20.
R5: 390
fta: 3900
R7: 1000
Rs: 1000
SINGLE-APERTURE POSITION INDICATOR-If

photocells are uniformly spaced on circum-
forenco of circle, wilh lamp and aperture
mounted on radius arm, meter will indicate
angular position of aperture by reading max-
imum voltage when only photocell No. 1 is APERTURE
+ LAMP
illumin_atod and minimum voltage when low•
est coll (No. S) is illuminated. All resistors
are equal, and can be any valuo that givos
reasonable power dissipation for d-c voltage
-ff
source used, while giving desired full-scale
voltage at meter for light on first photocell.
For conditions shown, with light on No. 3
cell, motor voltage is equal to source voltage OPAOUE
IMITRIAL
multiplied by ratio of sum of R3, R4, and Rs
R5 to sum of all five resistances.-"Solid State
Photosensitive Devices," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
p 26.
1
DIRECTION
Of r.tOTION
BURGLAR LAMP-When photocell is illumi·

nated and switch S closed, current flows
t through photocell and relay, so lamp is not
energized. At twilight, relay opons and lamp
is connoctod directly across a•c line. Used
li~V C+ R2 """JVIA..+"-"''1.-._.
to discourage burglars when homo is un-
occupied. Open S to reset. Values: RI
60Hz
5.6; R2 25K; R3 2K; C 8 µF; CR INl763A;
photocell 7163; rolay IOK at 3.5 mA.-"Solid
State Photosensitlvo Devices," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., p 23.
SENSITIVE LIGHT-OPERATED LINE SWITCH-

Cadmium sulfldo photocell turns triac on LOAD
through Schmitt trigger Q2.Q3 when light
level foils below preset value determined by
1200R IZVDC
R4. Circuit has very lilllo backlash, so only 240VAC LDR
tSEE TEXT)
small change in light level is needed to mako
triac turn on or off. load can be up to 6 A, RI
using RCA 40429 triac for 120 V ond 40430 llC
for 240 V.-R. M. Marston, 20 Triac Circuits,
A2
Raclio·Electraniu, Juno 1970, p 51-53 and
270.ll
97.
+12v +sv
ZS70
SENSOR AND RELAY-Hi9h sensitivity of

Toxas Instruments 1.5-400 npn silicon planar
light sensor permits direct drive of 2-mA re•
PHOTO·DARLINGTON RELAY-Uses Ferranti lay from 5.y source, eliminating need for HIGH-SENSITIVITY LIGHT-PRESENCE DETECTOR
ZM100 photo•Darlington having high sensi· transistor amplifler sta9e. Relay will pull in -Phototransistor and ujt allow much lower
tivity at law light lavals. Maxirnum dissi· on minimum li9ht intensity of 600 foot• levels of light to actuate scr. When light
potion rating of 300 rnW at room tamparatura candles.-D. Abel, Light Sensors-Brl9ht Fu· reachos phototransistor, ujt becomes rolaxa•
can ba increased 50% by rnounting on heat turo for an Expanding Technology, Electronic tion oscillator, at frequency considerably
sink. 60-W larnp 8 inchos away will pro- Design, Feb. 17, 1964, p 76-79. above 60 Hz. Ser is thon turned on early in
duce the required 50 lurnons par sq ft to positive half of each cycle.-"SCR Manual,"
switch reloy.-A Photo Darlington Pair, Fer- 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 299.
ranti, Oldham, Lones., England, No. 36, 1968.
LIGHT-INTERRUPTION DETECTOR-Whan light

ll!IV, 60H1 on light-activated silicon controlled switch
(loses) Is interrupted, anode voltage of 2N·
C3011 4990 unilateral switch 9oos positive on next
SCR positive half-cycle, triggering switch and scr.
Load is then energized for as long as there
271(
is no li9ht on lascs.-"SCR Manual,'' 4th Edi-
tion, General Electric, 1967, p 298,
,,..n
"9
PHOTOELECTRIC-INPUT SIX-DECADE SCALER-

Will count up to 25 objects por second moving coll. Four additional decades may be added, Coupling Circuits for the Z504S Stepping
through light beam if ORP60 cadmium sulfide each having gas-fllled Z5045 decade counter Tube, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elncl-
coll is used with 2,000-lux level, and up to and three-transistor pulse-shaper coupler.- hoven, The Netherlands, No. 15, 1965, p 26-
13 objects per second with I ,OOO·lux RPYI 5 G. C. Chappell ond G. F. Joynes, Transistor 38.
AT AMPLIFIER LOCATION
VOLUllE-CONTROL
AT REMOTE
LOCATION
REMOTE POT-Pormlts adlustlng volume of hi·
• fl or p•a system from pradically any desired
distance, using only battery and pot R at
remote location. When arm of A is at 1,
upper .lamp is out and lower lamp is lit, so
lower photocell has minimum resistance and
eour provides maximum attenuation of audio 119·
nal.-"Solid State Photosensitive Devices,"
RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 27.
120-V A·C PHOTORELAY-Will operate at llOV

AC
light levels as low as 1 foot-candle. R2 'OHt
adjusts sensitivity of circuit. Suitable for
either on·off control or gradual chan9os in
Illumination. Values: RI 5.6; R2 25K; R3 2K;
'--------+-------u oc·
RELAY
'THE RELAY FRAY! IS Al AR~.ATURE POIE~TIAL A~D SHOULD SE
C 8 p.F; CR INl763A; photocell 7163; relay r-
1-IULATEO FR°" A C~ON CHAlllS FOR SAFE lY REAI0"1
10K at 2.5 mA.-"Solld State Photosensitive
Dovicos," RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 21.
e IQ
COhTROLLEO
CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE-SENSITIVE SWITCH
t SECTION I SECTtc.'I 2
120.v A·C SCR CONTROL FOR 150 W-Switch

S reverses operation of circuit; when sot at
X, scr Is on when photocell Is dork, and in•
crease in li9ht makes it turn off load. When
sot at Z, load Is ener9ilod by Increase in
light lovol. Values: RI 4.7K; R2, R4 150; R3
56K; RS, R6 4.7K; R7, RB 15; C 0.22 11F; CR
1N2861A: photocell 7163; load L 150 W.-
"Solid State Photosonsitlve Dovices," RCA,
Harriton, N.J., p 22.
+
LOAD
-----1
I
c~S70
i.:.
____ _, I
I 120V
AC
60H1
ZT90
c
120-V A.C TRIAC CONTROL-When photocell

is dark, its Impedance is high and C charges
to firln9 voltage of noon L, tri99erin9 triac BIN LEVEL INDICATOR-Con bo used with
PHOTO.DARLINGTON FOR 1·A LOAD-When on and dollvorln9 power to load. Increase any numbor of levels. Wiien 9;a1n or other
llluminatlon on Ferranti ZMIOO photo Darllne•
0 In light reduces photocell impedance, so C dry material In bin blocks li9ht. from lamp
ton Is above 50 lumens por sq ft, only one cannot char90 enough to fire noon and trig· to photocell, associated noon 3AG lamp comes
transistor amplifier stage Is required to turn 9or trloc; load Is then off. Q can be RCA on. Highest lamp 9lowln9 on indlcotor panel
on l·A load. lndudivo loom require diode 40429, 40485, or 40575 silicon triac. Photo• corrosponds to level In bin. Photocells ore
in parallel to roduco voltage translents.-A call is RCA 7163, L Is 5AH noon, C is 0.1 p.f, RCA SQ 2503 and resi1ton oro 330K.-"Solld
Photo Darlington Pair, Ferranti, Oldham, and R is 1SK.-"Solid Stato Photosensitive Stole Photosensitive Devices," RCA, Harrison,
Lanes., England, No. 36, 1968. Devices," RCA, Harrison, N.J., p 22. N.J., p 26. '.,
-12v
LOAD 0.7~ .Io :S2.7mo

7.0:S Av :s 10.6db
·--.+---I
-----
100 Cl INCIDENT 8 ouT
RADIATION
J WATTSlcm 2
+
RMS AT 0.9/L
WAVELENGTH I
I
..:..2ov :~:2!5pf
T-
I
IMEG
II
56Kll
CHOPPED-LIGHT DETECTOR-Photo•fet in
LIGHT-TRIGGERED ONE-SHOT-With no light Useful for detecting prosonco of pulses of simple circuit provides 8 dB gain for chopped
on laser, scs conducts but load is off. Short light lasting longer than some. minimum time. incident light, in much loss space than photo•
pulso of light on laser turns it on and turns For longer pulses, laser remains conducting diode-transistor combination. Uppor fre-
off scs. Load, which may be indicator lamp, and indicator stays on.-L. M. Hertz:, "Solid quency limit is about 7 kHz:.-M. Shipley,
is then onorgizod. After delay of about 0.6 s State Lamps-Part II," Gonerol Electric, Cleve- Using Photo Field-Effect Transistors, Electronic
while 4-µF capacitor charges through 220K, land, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970, p 16. Design, Aug. 31, 1964, p 76.
scs is turned on and laser Is commutated off.
'------o-&V
TAPE READER WITH ECCLES-JORDAN TRIG-
GER-Gives reliable reading of holos in mov·
Ing punched cards or tapo, for light intensl•
tios of 1,000 to 3,000 lumens per sq ft. Am·
bient temperature can bo up to 100 C.-
12-V SCHMITI TRIGGER-With connection A, 10K; RB 1.2K; CR 40266; QI 40234; Q2 40084; "Sillcon Photocell Applications,'' Ferranti Ltd.,
rolay is onorglzod when light drops below photocell No. 1 SQ2508; photocoll No. 2 SQ· Oldham, Lanes., England, No. 9, 1967, p 8.
value dotorminod by setting of RI. With 2536; relay 96 ohms 11 V.-"Sotid-Stote Pho-
connection B, rolay Is onorgizod whon light tosensitive Devices," RCA, Harrison," N.J., p
rises above level sot by R7. Values: RI SK; 20.
R2 820; R3 270; R4 820; RS 10; R6 IK; R7
+24V
8PX2!!1
SOLAR-CELL BUZZER-Flashlight boom on solar

coll makes pnp transistor Q1 turn on paral-
lolod npn transistors Q2 and Q3 to close 3-V
DIRECT CONTROL OF RELAY-With 24-V tlashlight•cell circuit to small buzzer. R1 is
1,000.0hm relay, illumination of about 10,000 SOK pot. Transistor typos are not critical,
HIGH-SENSITIVITY LIGHT-ABSENCE DOECTOR lux will onorglzo rolay. Lowar illumination and may be low-cost units. Solar coll and
-When phototransistor is dark, ujt operates can bo used with higher-resistance relay.- other parts are available from Radio Shack,
as relaxation oscillator and onorgizos scr and Applications of Silicon Planar Phototronslstor 730 Commonwealth Avo., Boston, Ma11.-L19ht
loC:d on positive half-cyclo.,-"SCR Manual," BPX25, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Elnd· Operated Bu:uor, Elementary Electronics, Jan.-
4th Edition, Gonoral Electric, 1967, p 299. hovon, The Nothorlands, No. 316, 1967. . Feb. 1968, p 14.
+12V
IC TRIGGER-Ferranti ZLD2 IC differential am·

pliflor is operated with positivo feedback to
give triggering when silicon photocell gener·
ates voltage in excess of S·mV input hystore-
sis value. Potentiometer servos to compon•
sate for offset voltage of amplifier.-Microlin
Amplifiers ZLD2S and ZLD2T, Ferranti ltd..
Oldham, lanes., England, No. 11, 1967, p 19.
+12V
POSITION-SENSING SERVO-Two silicon MS.

98 photocells mounted side by side are
illuminated by single narrow beam of light.
Relative movement between beam and pho·
tocells causes one photocell to generate more
output than the other, for ampliflcation by
Ferranti ZLD2 IC differential ampliflor. Po·
larity of output depends on which photocell
has more illumination. Output is zoro for
equal illumination. Gain is 100 with parallel
voltage feedback as shown.-Microlin Am·
plifiers ZLD2S and ZLD2T, Ferranti ltd.. Old·
ham, lanes., England, No, 11, 1967, p 20.
~
6
..a.o
--
L~\ 'ofn!tltiVf SCtvritt tN:lgor (>!M» pulM

PotirntlOI diviCIQr' C$f'Cu1t •l'IGPing c1rcu1t
25-HZ PHOTOELECTRIC COUNTER-Will count lux when object Interrupts light boom. Al· cold-cathode decade stepping tubo.-G. C.
objects moving through light booms at speeds ternativo RPY1S coll roquiros only 1,000 lux Chappell and G. F. Joynes, Transistor Coupling
up to 25 objects per second if ORP60 cad· but counting speed is limited to 13 objects per Circuits for the ZS04S Stepping Tube, Philips,
mium sulffde Input network is used; this re· second. Photocell drivos Schmitt trigger that Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho
quires illumination level of at least 2,000 generates pulse with roquirod rise time to Netherlands, No. 15, 1965, p 26-38,
lux, falling to background level below 10 operate ACY17 cascade circuit feeding Z504S
INl694 l•)
CR
IOK
2W
12GV
c.
AC
25
wan !Gt:___ .__.~~~~~
'THE RELAY FRAME IS AT AR1'ATURE POTENTIAL ANO
SHOULD BE IN$ULA1!0 FRO\! ACOl!\!ON CHASSIS roR
SAFE TV REASONS.
TINY 25-W PHASE CONTROL-Consists only of TWILIGHT TURN-ON AND CLOCK TURN·OFF-
miniature lamp, laser, four small diodes, and For window display tights in stores. 24-hour
two rosistors, almost fitting in walnut sholl. timor is set so its contacts close in mid-after-
Can bo used for continuous phasu controt of noon and open at desired turn-off time for
small heating element such as soldering iron display in late ovoning. lights cannot come
and for dimming lamps up to 25 W. At low on in daylight, howovor, becauso relay Is
applied voltagos, miniature lamp will still onorgi1ed when photocell is illuminated. At
roach laser firing level in about 3 Hz because twilight, photocell impedance goos up, relay
of its small low-ass fllamont. lamp volt- drops out, currant flows through lamp load,
age drops to zero when laser fires, protoding and timer lakes ovor. Values: RI 5.6; R2
lamp and resetting it for next half-cycle. 25K; R3 2K; C 8 µF; CR IN1763A; photocell
lamp should touch lascr.-E. K. Howell, Tho 7163; timer lntermalic Tl 01.-"Solid Slate
Light Activated 5CR, General Electric, Syra- Photosensitive Devices/' RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
cuse, N.Y., No. 200.34, 1965. p 23.
DIRECT-COUPLED PHOTODIODE SWITCH-

Supply -4 V de Uses low·cosl components lo provide tempera·
CR, 1N758 luro compensation, for accurate sensing of
CR, 1N2175 light In control applications. Responds to
R, l.2K very slow changes in illumination.-"Solocted
R, 5IOK Electronic Circuitry," NASA SP-5046, 1966,
R, 82K Government Printing Offlco, Washington, D.C.,
R, t.Sn p 88.
1.4v \----
5
.l.-----,
+~ I
1
2.2•
OUTl'tJT
QI
INUS 470k
H•-=.
OS
IOK
02
2N491 :"°' CL60l
Cl
·•~f
VARIABLE-THRESHOLD AMPLIFIER-When In·
cidenl light on photocell roaches prodeter•
VIEWING PANEL LAMP REMOTELY-Photocell mined threshold level set by 1OOK pot, circuit
in housing is taped or otherwise fastened switches rapidly from 12 V output to 0
over panel lamp, to actuate 1,000-Hz oscil- output, for driving standard logic, low cur-
lator that drives speaker. When lamp comas rant drain permits battery operation. Dovel·
on, tone can be hoard by technician working oped to detod change from daylight to
al rear of oqulpmont or elsewhere. Eliml• darkness and automatically select bast oper•
nates need for setting up mirrors or walking ating frequency for radio transmitter. Will
around equipment to observo effect of each function equally wall for other applications
change on fronl•panol indicator lamp.-E. 5. with thermistor or humidity sensor In place
Kennedy, Monitor for Hidden Indicators, Eloc- of photocell.-C. Beckleln, Photocell Throshold
lro11ics World, Aug. 1968, p 76. Circuit, EEE, April 1967, p 139.
BISTABLE AMPLIFIER-Operates with Illumi-

nation levels as low as 50 lux. Will drive
electronic countor at speeds up to 6,000
counts par second. Whon phototranslstor Is
illuminated above 50 lux, circuit has no out•
put. Without Illumination, output is 8 mA
at 8 V into 1K load. Suitable for elevator
doer-safety control, level Indicator, card
roador, batch counter, or burglar alarm op•
plicatlons.-Applications of Silicon Planar
8PX2!1 Phototransistor BPX25, Philips, Pub. Dept., £(.
coma Div., Eindhoven, The Nethorlands, No.
316, 1967.
T UOK
BURGLAR ALARM-Hupp class-2 cadmium fails, to trip alarm conn11cted to contacts.

sulfide photocell T varies frequency of free- With small focusing lens on photoc111l, Inter-
running mvbr 01-02 In accordance with var• ruption of beam from ordinary two-cell flash·
iations of incident light. Wilh full illumina• light over 200 ft away will trip alarm, ovon
tlon, duty cycle of osclllator pulse train Is in presence of high ambient light. Transistor
about 15%. When beam of light is inter• types are not critical.-J. Port11r, A Cadmium
rupt11d, as by intruder, duty cycle increases Sulftde Photocell Indicator, "400 Ideas for
to about 65%. Amplifier 03 drives omitter• Design Selected from Electronic Design," Hay-
follower 04 to lcoep relay normally energized. don Boele Co., N.Y., 1964, p 103.
Rolay opens whon beam is broken or power
lOOKO
+ LOAD
~20V
11SV, 60Hz
C106
SCR
.022µf
·..0:1
-·n .. ,
l14A 22Q
...
HIGH-SENSITIVITY LIGHT DETECTOR-Enor. then operating as relaxation osclllator.-L. M. Eloctrlc, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3-0J 21, .J 970,
gizes load on positive half-cycles wh11n light Hertz, "Solid State Lamps-Part II,'' General p 11.
is removed from pholotransistor, with ujt
s: .
•· '!.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use the index al the back •.. . .~t..·
of this book. Chock olso tho author's "Sourceboolc of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 63
Photography Circuits
7AMP.
O.C DELAY RELAY-Turns off 7-A load at G-E LOAD
Al3A
precise predetermined time after switch is
closed, from 1 to 60 s, as determined by
setting of Rl. For shorter delays, use smaller
values for Rl and Cl. Applications include
enlarger control in photography, process con•
trol, alarms, otc.-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K.
Howoll, Economy Power Semiconductor Ap·
plications, General Electric, Syracuso, N.Y., Z4XLl8
No. 671.1, 1965, p 3. .
IN34
lk 1k
03
2N2646
01
2N2646
+ C2
+
220 20µf
.
-
..
TIME-LAPSE CONTROL-RI adjusts repetition
rato of output pulse ovor range of 2-60 1
between pulses, and R4 adjusts pulse dura-
tacts, and handling of other small loads either
diroctly or through relay. When Cl Is
charged to firing voltage of ujt Ql, scr Is
•
placos junction of R2 and C2 also at virtual
ground, and C2 charges until it fires Q3 and
thereby turns on Q2 to open scr and relay.
t~- from 0.5 to 25 s. Applications Include
. iflilffor control in time-lapse photography, turned on and relay is energized. Since scr Cycle then repoats.-T. T. Kalal, Pulse Width
· ,.~ 'c~ntrol ·of strip-chart recorders, starting and hos negligible voltage drop when conduct• Varied by a "Switched Ground.'' Electronics
stopping of motors connected to relay con• ing, its anode is at virtual ground. This April 28, 1969, p n. '
585
FIVE·RANGE PHOTOMETER-Ranges from 0.01

to 100 foot-candles aro in decade stops.
'OOTC•NDLU Load resistors for photocell are chosen so
+ each range gives full-scale motor roading.-
.01 6V J, G. Rabinowitz:, Photocells-Types, Charac·
teristics, and Applications, Eledronics World,
.I 10 Sept. 1968, p 23-26.
5.IM ,!Jell Hll
SPECTROPHOTOMETER OUTPUT CONVERTER EJ

-First throe modules convert measured trans-
mission value at particular wavelength to
density value by obtaining difference of two
logorithms. Next two modules (complement
of 2357) are required only when obtaining
exposure from density. Dynamic range is
90 dB for d-c to 1 kHz, or 40 dB for d-c to
100 kHz. Ri is 1,000 ohms for 1O·V full·
"alo input. light-sonsitivo current devices
may be used in place of El and E2.-Con•
version of Transmission to Density and Den•
sity to Exposure, Optical Electronics, Tucson,
Ariz., No. 10133.
+90R+IZ VOLTS
RANGE I
SWITCH
S1
4
ENLARGER EXPOSURE METER-After correct

exposure time is determined experimentally PHOTOCELL
with tost negative, photocell of motor is
plocod on easel of center of interest, and RB
is adjusted for zero motor deflection with
tost negative. Negative to bo printed is
then Inserted in enlarger, photocell is moved
to center of interest for that negative, and
iris of enlarger ·Is adjusted for zero deRec•
tion. Photocell is removed, printing paper CR1CR2CR3CR4 =silicon rectifier, R3 = 2200 ohms (12 volts), 3300 ohms
inserted, and exposure made for same time type 1N270 (9 volts), 1/2 watt, 10%
as test negative. Low range of motor covers R4 = 47 ,000 ohms, I /2 watt, IO%
0.2-6 foot-candles, and high range 6-400 M = meter, 0 to I milliampere, 12
volt, or 0 to 500 microamperes, R$ = 100,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
foot-candles.-"Hobby Circuits Manual," RCA,
Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 78. 9 volt Re = 10,000 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
Photocell = RCA KD2106
Ra = potentiometer, 50,00Cfohms
linear taper · .~ '
01Q2 = transistor, RCA SK3020 S1 = range switch, single-pole. dou-
R1R2R1 = 4700ohms, 1/2watt, IO% ble-throw
PHOTOGRAPHY CIRCUITS 587
J20 VAC
••
250•
TIM(
TIMER FOR ENLARGER-Print-exposuro timer AO.IVST
gives adjustable delays from fraction of sec-

ond to 1 min for automatic turn-off of printer RS R2
COlmCT
...,
CUSE ~Cl
or enlarger after exposure is started. Timing 3.:SK :S.JK
accuracy is 2%. Will handle relay or other

loads up to 5 A. T1 is 12.6-V filament trans•
former such as Triad F25X. MR1 is 24·V a-c CJU CAZ
lttllO•) •lal•S
relay such as Potter & Brumfield MRSA.-
"Hobby Manual," Ge11eral Electric, Owens•
boro, Ky., 1965, p 164. CR)
lltll95
SCltl
GE·O
Cl
IOOJlf
SOOY
• ••
IU£0
.I
CU05HL
DARKROOM EASEL PHOTOMETER-Sensitive

circuit can be used for measurements or com-
parisons over wide rans• of light levels. R1
may be calibrated In exposure tlmo, R2 In
paper contrast or filter number, and R3 In
relative paper speed.-J. G. Rabinowitz, Pho·
tocells-Typos, Characteristics, and Applica•
tions, Eledronlcs World, Sept. 1968, p 23-26.
NIGHT EXPOSURE METER-lncldent•reading

motor with ranges of 0.01-0.1, 0.1-1, 1-10,
and 10-100 footcandlos Is sensitive enough
for low-light-level night photography.
Higher ranges can serve also for reftected·
light measurements and as enlarger exposure
04 meter. Usos cadmium sulftde photocell with
2N3591 four-transistor differential amplifier. Article
2N3391
gives theory of operation, along with con·
struction and calibration procedures.-J. l.
Barnum, Design of a Light Meter & Exposure
Calculator, Electronics World, May 1969, p
52-54 and 78-79•
•I
Ml
O•lmA
METER
A5
IOK
LAB PHOTOMETEl-Glvos high 1onsitlvity, gas tubes. When indicotln9 voltmeter M Is

wide range, and high accuracy for moasuro• colibrated In densities (density = log 1/trans-
mont of fllm transmission don1ity, rofloction mission), tho four ran901 ore for densities of
coofllclont, and very low valuo1 of light in· 0-1, 1-2, 2-3, ond 3-4. Report covers
tensity. Logarithmic relation of anode volt· design and colibrotlon.-A 4-Docado Unoar
ago to light flux, necossary for linear donsity Density Scale Photometer Equipped with tho
scale, Is obtained by stabmzing anodo cur- XPll 10 Photomultiplier Tube, Philips, Pub.
rent of XP1110 photomultiplier with EL81. Dopt., Ekoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nothor•
Hlgh·voltago supply Is stabilised at about lands, No. 318, 1967.
2,000 V with series connection of 25 %%1000
OFF a
COMMON LINE RESET
.....__ _ ___. SINGLE

SHOT
+ B
EXTERNAL
TRIGGER
St 22K
Aco--f i--...,---1([3:.----t--._R_5....____.~~~7~5V.;._......1
C1 0.1 SINGLE SHOT TRIGGER BUTTON
ONE·SHOT TRIGGER FOR SINGLE.SWEEP

PHOTO-Camera Ions is opened, swoop is
trl99ered by applyin9 external trigger or
pu1hln9 button, and lens is closod. Elimi•
notes 1mearln9 that occurs when recurrent
trace Is not completely synchronized with
swoop spood. Input signal of about 0.6 V
will fire tri99or and give 6-V output for
oxternal-tri99er Input of scopo. Q2 is opor•
ated al low voltage and current, so can bo
any inexpensive scr. Q1 can be almost any
pnp transistor.-A. M. Schotz, Ono Shot Trig·
gen Scopo For Single Sweep, Electronic De-
sign, Jan. 6, 1964, p 82 and 84.
+100
47K
2N1310
3K
FILM TIME-CODE MARKEi-Light from transis-

tor-driven noon lomp marks time Information
In binary code on 35-mm Instrumentation
fllm.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Noon
Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalito,
PHOTOGRAPHY CIRCUITS 689
R3 R5 R7
10K IY 3300
R4 n, -
IOM HEP 310
B2
E
02
O.S-180 S FET TIMER-Useful In photography

a, C HEP 320
either In TIME ON or TIME OFF mode as de- G

+ C2
termlnod by position of 52. Articlo gives con•
struction detalls.-"Solid Slate Projects Man-
ual.'' Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 63-
f
- 25V
ro,J
R6
27'1
-
68.
-
Rt
40k
--L...
1'o----
STANO-BY I
SWITCH
25 I
~ I 47k
INl764
Ct + 10.W
INCAN·
450v
DESCENT
230v 321'1 LAMP
50tlz
. Cz
O.lµf
PRINTER CONTROL-Whan standby switch is PrHsing switch of uit-scr timer shorts Rt to terminate exposure. Releasing tlmor switch
cluocl, rectified 320 V d-c acro11 Cl supplies send 43 mA through lamp to give maximum then restores standby condition, RS controls
'6·3· mA to 10-W Incandescent lamp for pho- illumination for printing and Initiate tim(ng. time.-D. Liar, Photographic Printer Controlled
·~. tographic printer, to keep filament tempera· C2 then charges through R3 and RS until QI by UJT-SCR Timer, Efoctronlcr, March 18, 1968,
titre close to visible illumination point. fires and gates scr on, to shunt lamp and p9~7.
. ...'r-----------------~-----------------1I
IM
IJUJOD
I
l
I
I
I
R2
IOK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5K COIL
:sv SI
&ID
PHOTOGRAPHIC TIMER-Timing cycle begins

PHOTOELECTRIC APERTURE CONTROL-Servo when Sl is opened, removing short across
motor moves shutter to adjust aperture until Cl. When Cl charges sufficiently, base cur-
resistance of photocell aquars that of load rent flows through QI and relay is energized,
circuit potentiometer. Uses two complemon• opening relay contacts and cutting off powor
tary Schmitt triggers to aduato motor con· to la..:ip or other load. Increasing value of
trol relays.-J. G. Rabinowitz, Photocolls- Rl lengthens timing cyclo.-J. P. Shields,
Types, Charaderistics, and Applications, Elec• "Novel Electronic Circuits," H. W. Sams &
tronlcs Wotld, Sept. 1968, p 23-26. Co., indianapolis, Ind., 1968, p 91.
R2
250K
TIME
ADJUST
RI NC
3.31< MRI GE
CONTACT (24VAC) Al3F
3.3K
CR2
120VRMS GE
60 HERTZ Al3C
12.6V
TIME RESET Tl
0 R3 TRIAD
IM F25X
----- 12.6V
CR4
INl692
Ct
CR3
IOOµf
+ INl692
200V
ENLARGER PHOTOTIMER-Whon Sl Is at RE- comes on and Cl dischorges at rate deter• enlarger lamp. R2 gives range of 0.01 to
SET, Cl Is charged to peak negative value of mined by setting of R2 until Its voltage has 60 s for exposures.-D. R. Grafhom, Using
supply voltage (165 V) and enlarger lamp is become sufflciently positive (about 2 V) to Low Current SCR's, General Electric, Syracuse,
off. When SI is set at TIME, enlarger lamp trigger scr and energize relay to turn off N.Y., No. 200.19, 1967, p 29.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use the indox at the back
of this book. Check also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits,'' published by
McGraw-Hiii in 1968.
CHAPTER 64
Power Supply Protection Circuits
+
DC INPUT
24-30 v
A1 A2
300 4.7 k
D.C CIRCUIT BREAKER-Protects load against

transient voltage or current overload. Acts 01
in 4 to 10 µs, os compared to 8 ms for me- 20V
chanical circuit breakers. Requires momen- 1W
tary closing of 51 for resetting. RI sets over- 1N4747
current trip point ond R7 sots overvoltage 2
point; both are precision 10-turn pots.-
"Semiconductor Power Circuits Handboolc,"
DC INPUT
1N4003
(ALL DIODES!
INPUT
t15Y
400hz
1001't
SURGE LIMITER-Circuit shown was designed for system normally drawing 1 A and having out of saturation and thereby maintain out-
for uso in series-type regulator for airborne tum-on surge of 3 A. For normal output, put at desired level.-M. Kanner, Nonstop
military power supplies requiring protection series transistor is saturatod. When output limiter Absorbs Transients, E/octronla, May
from long-term voltage tronslents on both exceeds preset level, error voltage Is devel- 26, 1969, p 106-107.
a•c ond d-c supply lines. Circuit shown is oped and amplilled to bring series transistor
691
IOK
1N758
OUTPUT
LINE
OVERLOAD-SAMPLING CURRENT TRANS-
2K IN755 FORMER-Tl samplos current supplied to series
voltage regulator. Rectified sample of cur-
rent triggers Kr when predetermined value
of overload current is reached. This removes
TO
SENSE base current from 01 and 02, turning off
AMP both transistors, Circuit can bo reset man-
ually with SWI or by interrupting input volt·
age. Tl has 8°turn primary and 120-turn
20K secondary on El·l87 core.-S. J. Amold, Cur•
I
0154
R1 rant Transformer Gives Fast Overload Protec•
10
tlon, EEE, Sept. 1966, p 146.
~-------
I
I
I
TRANSISTOR CURRENT LIMITERS-Protects cur· E+ Eour:

rent-limiting series transistor 02 from oxcos-
sivo power dl11ipatlon by brooking circuit for IN658
overloads, short-circuits, or oxco11lvo supply IN658
voltage. Load current Is adjustoblo ond
stable over rongo of I to I 0 A, ond output
voltage Is only 3 V below 35.y supply volt-
age. Cl slows down rato of current Inter•
O:s
ruptlon, to prevent breoklng of circuit by
'----Ii-----.,. 2N2219
transients; for foster current Interruption, Cl
may bo omitted.-R. K. Monherz, Solld-Stote
Curront·Limiter Functions os Circuit Brooker,
Electronic Design, March 15, 1965, p 59-60.
3/s AMP
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
+
30k 2k
5w 20w 03
2N4852
>c >c
o"' ow
CD ti
N....1
t\i!;i
I~
I ...J
>~
>Cl oc.:>
o"'
Na:
NZ -en "'
a:
~
1.0 Jlf
Dt 03
IN753 1N914
6v 02
C68
R1
50
OVERCURRENT-Ujt circuit Is activotod only keep ujt Q3 off until currant roting of sup. tors of voltage rogulator.-J. Durnin and M.
when current capobility of a11oclotod rogu· ply Is oxcHded. Ovorcurront thon turns on DeClcco, Unl(unctlon Circuit Provents Dam·
lated power supply Is exceeded. Curront- 03, scr D2, 02, and QI in turn, and current ago to Tronslstors, Electronics, Juno 9,. 1969,
sensing resistor RI Is Initially adjusted to drawn by Ql blows fuse to protect tronsls- p 100-101. .
POWER SUPPLY PROTECTION CIRCUITS 593
CURRENT OVERLOAD-Tunnel diode and tran·

slstor provide bettor protection than fuse
against current overload of power supply.
Fast switching speod of diodo provides shut•
down before overload cvrront can damage
111rios-rogulating transistor Q2. Values
shown givo cutoff at 1 A; article gives design
equations for other cutoff values.-R. B. Jones,
Tunnel Diode Provides Fast Current-Overload I 0
Dotodlon, E/11dronic Design, Nov. 22, 1965,
FFI
p 62. S R
~ESET
l..N
IMPEDAHCE r-------. I
2.2K HIGH.SPEED CROWBAR-Useful for protect-

ing d-c circuits against Input line voltage tran-
sients and load shorts. If d-c supply voltage
• Ya.TAG£
exceeds value determined by setting of RI,
24 vat.T • SEHSITl\IE UJTI fins and trl99ers SCR. Full supply
D<: SUPFLY 1..0AD voltage Is then applied to trip coll of circuit
breaker to open supply line. Circuit also
loads d-c bus Instantly to prevent load volt-
age from rising until breaker has time ta
oporato.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, Gen·
eral Electrlc, 1967, p 158-159.
'---~
2N2907A D=s
KD2103
6k
-• c,
10,.F
800
Eo1•+14.5V D1
9k
KD2I03
IOA
15k
Eo2 •14,i'5V
s, I
-28V!4V I
I I
!
15k - .J
R12
II<
?N718A
R10 1'0
BUILT-IN PROTECTION-Addition of upper
two transistors and 4311-ohm resistor to con- 600.KW OVERLOAD SWITCH-Uses regonera·
ventional series regulator hoving IC opamp tlve switch (dashed rectangle) that conducts
provides overvoltage protedlon for IC if whan overload condition as preset by RI oc•
series regulator falls or becomes shorted. curs. This tums off scr's Yl and Y2, intor-
Similar protection circuit II used in lower ruptin9 powor to load. Line switch must be
regulator providing rogulated -14.75 · V opened momentarily to reset after overload
from -28 V.-A. P. Bjork, Overvoltago-Pro- clears up.-"Silicon Controlled Rectifier Ex·
tedion Circuit for EC Power Supplies, EEE, perimonter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
Dec. 1968, p 101-102, 1967, p 123.
RELAY·PROTECTED VOLTAGE REGULATOR-

Consists of proportional voltage regulator
that delivers constant 12.6 V d-c output
within 0.6% while 17·V d-c input is varying
15%. When voltage across series rogula·
tor transistor Q2 rises above preset value do•
E OUT termined by. setting of RS, voltago-sensitive
REGULATED relay Kl operates and shorts emitter of Q2
EIN to its base, thereby turning off collector cur•
17 v.o.c.
~15'l'o
rent of 02. Excess voltage could be caused
by largo increase in input voltage, overload,
or shorted output. Fu so or circuit breaker
would not react in time to protect circuit
from damage under these conditions. CRt
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE -55° C. TO 55" C. is IN1770 and CR2 is IN3491.-Voltago
Regulator, Delco Radio, Kokomo, Indiana, No.
3-8, 1965.
12V
FUSE
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION-Combination of .047,uf 1.ekn

2N4985 silicon unilateral switch and scr blows
line fuse for overvoltage. Circuit triggers
between 13.2 and 14 V for rapidly rising
voltages, and between 14 and 17 V for slowly
increasing voltages. May alsa be used with
2N4989 sus.-Silicon Unilateral Switch 2N·
.047,uf 2k!l
4984/2N4985, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., IOOll.
No. 65.27, 3/67.
r--------~----------------,----------------
1 OVER·VOLTAGE
DETECTOR II OVER·CURRENT DETECTOR II POWER DRIVER
1
I
LINE "A"I I I
I D1 R3 D9
I
R6
I 1N4004 1k
15 k RL
1N4004 I
10W
I 1W R9 I
I 3.3 k
1W
I
I 200 v C3 I
I 400 v I
I 0.5µF
I
I 2.2kl
120 V ACI
60 Hz I 5k D7 DS RS
1W
I
1N4004
I I
I D5 Q3
I
I
II
1N4004 2N5062 C2 as
I MPT-28 2N5169
I
I R1 R5
I
I 10 k 1k
I
I 1W I
LINE "B" I
•Rs ==0.1 I I I
R~~ L-------L--------------~---------------J
A.C OVERVOLTAGE AND OVERCURRENT PRO·
TECTION-Protects resistive load RL In power prevents load from being connected across of R11 determines overvoltage level at which
driver from excessive voltage as well 01 line in event of short-circuit. Overvoltago load is disconnected. Circuit resets auto-
excessive current. Ser QS is slave-tired by detector senses negative half-cycles of lino matically.-"Somiconductor Power Circuits
Q4 which carries load current. Overcurrent voltage and similarly prevents 04 from turn• Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ari1., ·1968,
detector prevents D8 from Rring 04 and thus Ing on 01 long as ovorvoltago exists. Set1in9 p 4-14.
+20V
10
IOOma FUSE BLOWER-Protects series-pass transistor
NORMAL from burnout even for direct short across
+
SERIES "f>ASS" LOAD regulator output, by acting faster than series
TRANSISTOR transistor. R2 provides voltage drop pro•
portional to short-circuit current, which turns
Ql on whan drop is about 0.7 V. Ser then
SCR 10 VOLT turns on quickly ond blows fusa. R3 prevents
2N2322 REGULATOR turn-on surge current from blowing fuse.-P.
R11
Galluzzi, SCR Arrangement Improves Short•
IK Circuit Protection, Electronic Design, Sept. 28,
1964, p 55-56.
R2
3000
5W
OVERLOAD SWITCH-Serves as electronic cir·

cuit breaker that interrupts power to load
at predetermined overload point determined
by setting of Rl. Can bo used for hoater M02104
and universal motor loads up to 240 W.
Incandescent lamp load can be protected
only if Rl is turned to maximum-curront set•
ting before 51 is closed, to allow for high LOAO VOLIS DC
R1
starting current through low cold resistance CURRENT 8.4 50
NO CURRENT 7 R5
of lamp, then turned back to desired trip 0.27
IW
INCREASE
setting. PhotoAood lamps cannot be usod.- ALLOWABLE
"Silicon Controlled Rectifier Experimenter's CURRENT
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967, p 120. CW l
...
'IO~ftO.t(I
IOGct
on
lstU
•"SV
'-
•
-cu
•ff
tr.t:U
DJ
9A1r16
evxn
D'
av
•V, OS BlYH•ClC
Vs= +24 V ± 25 %
U2B
THYRISTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT ALARM-Comb!· pulls in and removes powor from thyristors. Foult Detection and Display Circuit For a Thy·
nation of Philips IC gates and opamps trips Used to prevent unwonted and possibly dan• ristor Operated load, Philips, Pub. Dept., El·
alarm whon either of sorles thyristors con· gorous operation of machine when thyristors coma Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No.
ducts when trigger is off. Solenoid then control electromagnetic clutch.-D. Hofman, 73.
22·35v d·c
+
PROTECTING SATELLITE SUPPLY-Curront-llm·
iting feedback loop between inverter and d-c
supply of spacecraft prevents inverter or out-
put shorts from draining battery pack. When
high-surge currtnt boosts drop across R2 and
biases Q2 into conduction, Ql is forced into
cutoff. Current-limiting resistor RI and Q2
are then in series with lino in place of R2,
to limit battery current drain.-R. Burkett,
Feedback Protects Spacocraft's Power Supply,
Elecrronlcs, Jan. 8, 1968, p 91.
COMMAND RESET
DARllNGTONS AS OVERLOAD FUSE-Ar·

rangemont shown for series regulator gives
overload protection of power supply without
adding scr and transistors. As load In·
MANUAL RESET creases, conduction in Darlington pair
increases. Voltage rtgulation continues until
--~;_1_
Q3 roaches its maximum current as deter-
mined by zoner and value chosen for R3.
Output voltage drops as load Increases, until
Q3 turns off. Darlingtons then turn off, de-
activating power supply. After overload Is
eliminated, rosetting can bo manual or auto-
matic command.-F. J. Messina, Power Supply
Regulator Uses Fower Parts, Efoctronlcs, Jan.
6, 1969, p 94.
+ +
AUTOMATIC
RESET100k
IOl 22k
---J\/V'I;---
02 Vour
2N325t
IN4571
28V DC
FAULTS AND OVERLOADS-Provides on-off SUPPLY
power control, eliminating neod for self-do·
structing fuses and for circuit breakers thot
are too slow to protect semiconductors.
02
Time constant of R2·CI prevents tripping by 2N4236
transient overloads such as start-up of in·
candescent lamps. Allowable current gain R2
for load is 0 to 5 A, and circuit will limit 10k 01
2N3714
overload to 7 A for shorted output.-A. J. 03 I Ok
Marek, Solid-State Relay/Circuit Breaker, 2N718
EEE, Juno 1969, p 141-142.
01 RD1
IN4002 IN4746
AUTOMATIC-RESET BREAKER-Solid-state
R~
breaker trips within 100 µs ofter load is 1 25 0 02
shorted, and reduces fault current to zero ON· OFF o-.......,..,-...--1 1N4002
CONTROL
within 500 µ.s, for protection of printed-circuit LOAD
wiring and interconnections. Ideal for uni·
2 ., Cz ~19
l
versol lob power supplies. Automatic reset
reapplies power after interval depending on RESET~tt--t......,,.,.,....
leakage in Ql.-C. J. Ulrick, Power Supply R7 6pF Re
500 lk
Breaker Acts in 100 Microseconds, Electron• .,
ics, Fob. 3, 1969, p 79.
PROTECTING SERIES-PASS REGULATOR-Addi·

tion of Inexpensive components shown in
shaded area protects seriet-pass regulator
against short11d output and restores normal
Input
operation automatically when short is re•
Output
moved. Under normal operating conditions,
21 to 28 R3 16.5 to 19.5 v
470 Volts protective circuit is biased off and does not
Volts
affect regulator action. Sp11ed of protective
action is limited only by storage and fall time
R5 of soriot-pass transistor Qt, which Is about
2k 1 ms.-"Somiconductor Power Circuits Hand·
book," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 3-
30.
21 TO 28 VOLTS INPUT OUTPUT

Qt
2N4921
02
2N3903
0.001 620
p.f
17.25 TO
i8.75 VOLTS
Dt 470
1N4744
2N3903
2k
SUPPLY CURRENT LIMITER-02 and. z11nor D1 mal 36-ohm load, prot11ction circuit Is bla111d
are added to regulated power supply to pre- off and does not affect r119ulatlon.-B. Phil-
vent series transistor QI from damage by aoner D1 draws rovorae current and drives Q2 lips, Transistor and Zenor Protect Serles Rogu.
load . short before fuse blows. With short, Into saturation, cutting off QI. With nor· lator, Electronics, July 8, 1968, p 92.
.-~~~~~~~_.,.~~+28v
MANUAL-RESET BREAKER-Solid-state breaker IN2090

trips within I 00 µs after load is shorted, and
reduces fault currant to s.oro within 500 µs,
for protection af printed-circuit wiring and
interconnections. Ideal for universal lab
power supplies. Pushbutton must be mo-
mentarily pressed manually to reset breokor
after short. Leakage current of 01 must be
low enough so it cannot turn itself on and
reapply power to load after fault.-C. J.
Ulrick, Power Supply Brooker Acts in 100
Microseconds, Electronics, Fob. 3, 1969, p 79.
TO IC BOARO
$6 INSURANCE FOR IC-Inserted between l4·
V supply and IC load to protect against over•
IN4745A voltages caused by supply failures or noise
ZENER IN400? spikes, and against wrong polarities caused
10µ.F by human errors, Uses I N4002 silicon diode
to blow fuse before reverse voltage damages
IC's. Capacitor protecls against spikes and
prevents them from producing unnecessary
510 crowbar action by scr and diodo.-A. Goiers•
bach, low-Cost Circuit Con Protoct a Boardful
of High-Cost ICs, Electronic Design, May IO,
1969, p 138.
+ BFY-55
24-V INPUT or EQUIVALENT
FROM ZENER
REGULATED
SUPPLY Rt R2
5.6k PRESET
POTENTIOMETER
SET TO 575
Vo 10 RV0
SENSING +
RESISTOR REGULATED
CURRENT 15-V OUTPUT
l.IMIT
REGULATOR
VOLTAGE
SENSE
p.A723
·/'
·~~,.~~·
SERIES REGULATOR PROTECTION-Addition of vides shart•circuit protection. Article tells voltage rogulators.-W. Gro'1tar-,': Short-Ci,.
Q2 network across serios•pass transistor ter• how to compute resistor values for use with cuit Protection for Voltage · i~lators, Eloc·
minals of µA723 IC voltage regulator pro• other voltages and currants in serios•typo tronics, April 27, 1970, p 91.
OVERVOLTAGE TRIP CIRCUIT-When 1upply

R1 Rz Rs voltage rlsos above value sot by ratio R2·
2.2k 3.3k 03 2.2k
R3, programmable ult Q3 fires and generates
Oz
013TI
_...._-11E--oA r complementary pulses A and 8 that may be
2N5061 used to trigger alarm circuits or sorve other
'--;;..;_;_---l----l.---4--ll-- B k functions. In addition, firing of Q3 turns
R4 on Q2, to cut off QI and load, Circuit stays
C1 "'01
ao111F 470 off after circuit trips, until supply voltage Is
IN5234
shut off so Q2 can commutate and rostt cir·
cuit.-V. R. Laul, Adtustablo-Ovorvoltage Cir·
cuit Brealier, EEE, April 1970, p IOI.
5.S·A ELECTRONIC FUSE-Switching action oc·

curs in 90 p.s, for protection of transistors In
l2·V S·A rogulatod power supply. Wh•n
fuso ads, Q2 is on and QI off, so powor is +
bypassed around transistors in regulator. RESET
Circuit Is reset, aftor removing ovorload, by
momentarily opening reset switch to remove
power.-"Clrcuits Manual," Motorola, Phoe-
nix, Arl1., 1965, p 8-2-3.
02
~~~~~-+~-'-~~~~.-~~..,_.......2N3613,-"""1,__~-1~~-1.....-~~-..~~---I--~-.~~-----..:=
30k 820 330
04
2N4126
o, Yo
t4-t8v 1N4001
12v±20mv
(AT 2A MAXI
c,
0.02p.f
+ +
50
0
...."--·•'
SERIES REGULATOR OVERLOAD-Single tran· turning off regulator. Circuit has good fem• Walko, Single Tran1l1tor Protects Power Sup-
sistor ~;,ft..:cut off by drop across R5 when peraturo stability. Protection is achieved at ply from Overload, fledronics, Juno 12, 1967,
output. cu~nt of regulated 12·V supply In· much lower cost than with conventional flip- p 102-103.
creases beyond permlssiblo maximum valuo, flop or scr and separate d-c supply.-S.
PROTECTIVE PREREGULATOR FOR SERIES r---------------------~

TRANSISTOR-Circuit shown in dashed area
I
decreases hoot dissipation of sories·pass tran· I
sistor, making largo hoot sink unnecessary. \Ok I
Ser is normally conducting. When power I
supply voltage exceeds zoner breakdown, scr I
cuts off. Average power dissipation of pass I
transistor is product of current drawn and 2N3569 I
zener voltoge.-P. Pohl, Zenor in Prorogulator I
limits Series Transistor Dissipation, Eledron· I
ics, Oct. 27, 1969, p 98.
r----------
1
_ _J
I SERIES PASS
E
I TRANSISTOR
I
L_______ _JI
SA SCR
r
OUTPUT
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use the index of tho bock
of this book. Check also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 65
Protection Circuits
AUDIO AMPLIFIER PROTECTION-Developed dropping supply voltage to zero.. Dashed

primarily to protect high-cost complementary lines show operation for negative supply.
44-60Vdc output transistors from short-circuit, under• Requires manual reset after fault has been
+EullREG
voltage, and overcurrent conditions. Acts by removed, by interrupting power for about 10
s.-M. W. Kyle, Jr., Simple Circuit Protects
2 N3503 SERIES PASS loudspeaker and Audio Amplifier, Eleclronic
,-- --;N;;: ---, Design, Dec. 6, 1967, p 124, 126, and 128.
I 03 +40Vdc
JL •2.2A
+EREG
T 2Nl711
lk CRI 3.32k
Ez 5.lk
IW ±1•1o
1.51< IN975B 112W
*
Rs R2
4.7k 5-lk
+4 33µF lk
·~1:t
_75 de 75Vdc -
C2
+
l.5k
I
---- T
:!:1%
l/4W IN746A
I
1-EREG
1-40Vdc
IL2.2A ,------,
SERIES PASS
2N3790
Q4
'::::'
44-60Vdc
-EUN REG
I I R1
l.5k c,
- I I 6.8k 4.7fLF
I
-1
5001!-F 75Vdc
lLf Ru.Ao
+
50Vil4:
I T
S.lk
IW
3.32k
!1%
l/2W I I R4
T IN9758 L ___ _ _J 6.8k
R3
&.lk 4.7k 6.8k
1-5k
+33µf' +1%
-75Vdc ii4w
*SELECTED FORAN EzOF 39.0Vdc

1. Q3 ANO Q4 ARE MOUNTED ON A COPPER PLATE (4 IN. X l. IN. X 1/8 IN.)
601
!
.
+'1.o---o-+-~~~~~~~~~~~~~'--T""-L~_J-"""T--'
SJ
_
......... ,.
fo1¥e
+Vs
ov .. 51 8AXI)
ov :; 51
_ ,.
.. '""'
•ftt<nt IO•ll
•••
• '""'" u2S. un. uJ

U11.Ul5.Ul7
'°"'Tov
EMERGENCY DIESEL CONTROL-Failure of a-c
power line initiates series of oparation1 re-
quired for starting engine of standby power
supply. Philips IC gates and other blocks
first energize engine glow plug for time
delay determined by block UIS, and ener•
glzo start motOt" aftar shorter delay dote,..
mined by UI 2. If engine starts, it delivers
I ·level signal to prevent further operation of
starting circuit Including units US to UI 3. If
engine falls to start after three attempts, ·\ ....: .
acoustic alarm circuit 11 activated. Operate•
from 24-V battery. Timer capacitor for U25
is 320 p.f and all other timer capacitors are alarm clrcult.-W. Klein, Control Circuit for Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho Nether-
32 p.F. Loads at right go to warning and Emergency Diesel Generator, Philipt, Pub. lands, No. 74.
\
1.
PROTECTION CIRCUITS 603
+
22nF
C3 cs
311F 3µF
BTX30•400 L2o 2SD1-1H

14xl
190V 1D1-1H
d.c.
t ().1250
x y
1.5·KW THYRISTOR BRIDGE INVERTER-Con· has 190-turn primary and 220-tum secondary.
vorts 190-V d-c to 220-V 400.Hi powor. In· -N. Borgstra and R. v. d. Undon, Overload
eludes trigger connected to thyristor gates and Current Protection for a Bridge Inverter,
overload sensor connected to points X and Y, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon,
for protecting thyristors from overload. T1 The Netherlands, No. 95, 1970.
tng<nt
t•MPttoture
too h.gll
_.,-,·
.-n9111>t 011
ptt'SWrt
t~ h<gtl
-··r
•"G•ti.t dol"I
not 5t011
u----c>o---•v,
EMERGENCY DIESEL START-UP ALARMS-Com·

binatlon of Philips IC gates and amplifiers
onorgisos indicator lamps for temperature
and oil pressure after emergency diesel 9on• TD'"
orator starts, and both lomp and acoustic ov
alarm If onglno falls to start after a-c powor-
lino falluro.-W. Klein, Control Circuit for
Emergency Diesel Generator, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Ekoma Div., Elndhovon, The Nether-
lands, No! 74•
.•
/
+ 28VOC FROM TO
AMPLIFIER GALVO
2sn
2Nll32
01
2N697
X2
X3
ALL
XI DIODES OUTPUT
IN658 MAX SWING:
X4 :!:22 VOLTS
AT 50mo
XS
02
2N1132 GALVANOMETER GUARD-Overload safety cir·
cuit provonts damage to high-frequency gal·
5.6K vanometer driven by very low lmpodance
amplifier. Protection Is achieved by using
relay to switch 100-ohm resistor into ground
line to bypass galvanometer current on either
positive or negative ovorvoltage. 1OK pot
-2avoc in base circuit of Ql adjusts sonsitivity.-T. B,
Whiteley, Transistor, Relay Switch Safeguard
OUTPUT TRANSISTOR PROTECTION-Maximum
Sensitive Galvanometer, "400 Ideas for Design
current through either output transistor af
Selected from Electronic Design," Haydon
complementary pair 01·02 is limited to 50
Boole Co., N.Y., 1964, p 145.
mA. Diode XI providos forward bias that
is self-compensating far temperature and
minimizes crossovor distortion.-R. S. Young,
Complementary Output Stage Provides Short
Circuit Protection, Electronic Design, Juno 22,
1964, p 71-73.
•ror-Cj~
BZYl8·Cl8 BZVH•Ct&
rc=1-ov rc=1-ov
IOldllUWI tO•AIS.SWI
THYRISTORS IN PHASE ANGLE CONTROL-Pro·

vidos protection against thyristor-damaging
direct current that can flow in phase angle
control circuit if conduction occur• during only
half of cycle. Circuit using Philips IC gates divide-by-two circuit in such a way that
obtains information from two sources as basis failure of one thyristor to conduct stops trig·
for protective action. Synchronous pulses gor pulses for next half-cycle.-J. v. Schoorl,
from line transformer Tl are rectified, then Protection of Thyristor Circuits Against DC
limited to 18 V by zener DI. Thyristor infor· Curretns, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
mation is obtained from T2 and fed through Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 70,
16-A D-C SCR FLIP·FLOP CIRCUIT BREAKER-

Circuit Is basically parallel capacitar-cammu•
tated ftip-tlop. Prossing start button mo•
montarily makes SCRl conduct and deliver
power to load. Pressing stop button mo•
montarlly will interrupt load. If load cur-
+ rent exceeds forward voltage drop across
diode string CRl and goto flring requirement
125 VDC of SCR2, load is interrupted automatically in
SCR2 less than half a cycle. Value of RI and
number of diodes determine level at which
circuit will trip out. For values shown, maxi-
mum trip currant should not exceed 100 A.
Evon with fault curront rise of 10 million am•
peres por second, breaker will interrupt fault
RI 11 3/llrip OHMS NON· INDUCTIVE Cl i 0.4 llrip MFO in 20 µs and keep peak fault current below
R2•2200HMS, l/2 WATT SCRI· GE C40B 50 A.-"SCR Manual.'' 4th Edition, Goneral
R3· IOO OHMS,112 WATT SCR2· GE C40B Electric, 1967, p 156-158.
R4· 2200 OHMS, 10 WATTS CRI • 131 G.E. A13A
R5· 2200 OHMS, 5 WATTS CR2 • G E 1N2158
STARTING-CURRENT SURGE LIMITER-Protects

components from damage by initial current
surge through loads having low initial im·
pedance, such as capacitors and incandoscont
lamps. Circuit converts voltage source seen
by lood into current source for duration of
start-up. R·L limo constant should bo chosan
to match duration of translont.-B. Borman,
Q·R·L Network Limits Surge lo Low-Starting
221< BIAS
Loaded SCR, Electronic Design, April 12, 1965, 112W RESISTOR
p 52-53.
200T/200T Rz
ON 217 A CORE
A.C. INPUT
+6V
7
9
FCL101
UI
4 10
tOOO
7
ov
THYRISTOR BRIDGE OVERLOAD-Circuit is of. +6V FCH171
fectlve on flrsl half-cycle in which overload
currant occurs, for protecting thyristors in 14 3 2
bridgo Inverter from ovorlood currant. Doos
not provide short-circuit protection. Used
with trigger circuit connected to points A, B,
C, and D, for controlling 1.S·kW 190-V d-c to 4
220-V 400-Hz inverter connected to points X A
and Y.-N. Borgstra and R. v. d. Lindon, Ovor• B
load Current Protection for a Bridge Inverter,
Philips, Pub. Dopl., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven,
92.t\ 20k
• 70 K
179 K
BZV8BIC6V2 1N4746 IOk
v
12V~
25
(18 VOLT
ZENER DIODE) IM
I.IA
BZV88/C6V2
ZENER PROTECTS MICROAMMETER-18·V OPAMP PROTECTION-Inexpensive fot at out•

ZENER SPIKE CLIPPER-Two zonors in anti· zoner provonts overloading of 100..µA meter put of opamp provides protection against
phase serve as full-wave stabilized amplitude movement without affecting meter linearity. voltage source up to 40 V applied oven mo•
limiter than can bo used to protect other cir· Chief advantage over thermal protection is mentarlly to output by limiting maximum
cuit elements against voltage surges or spikes. instantaneous action of zener, provided re· output current to 10 mA. Effect on perform•
Clipping occurs at zoner voltage lovol regard- poatedly and indoflnitoly with no reset time. once of opamp is almost negligible. Diodes
less of input voltage, but highor input makes -"Zoner Diode Handbook," Motorola, Phoe- similarly protect against excessive input volt·
output waveform more square so load takes nix, Ariz., 1967, p 7-13. ages.-J. D. Spalhts, FET Protection for Op·
more powor.-Zener Diodes and Their Appli· amps, EEE, Feb. 1970, p 115.
cations, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd-
hoven, Tho Nothorlands, No. 17, 1966.
IC OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION-Reod relay

and zenor diode protect low-voltage IC mod-
CONTACT ule from regulated power supply defect by
~lamping supply voltage at safe 5.1 V if,
,, IC
for example, failure of series-pass transistor
REGULATED 4.SVDC ,' z I WATT LOAD
In supply shoots volta9e up to 9 V. Reed
POWER (NOMINAL 1% relay is then onergi111d to open IC supply
SUPPLY OUTPVTI REED RELAY 4.SV,
I.IV Vz•S.I 2AMP circuit beforo 111nor gets too hot.-J. J. Mc·
IOOHMS Manus, Integrated Circuit Protoctod by Roed
Relay-Diode Combination, Electronic Design,
Nov. 29, 1965, p 78.
SCR LOAD PROTECTION-Prevents shorted scr FUSE r--·i

from dumping excessive current into load.
Bucking diode across load draws high cur• SCR
rent during normally missing half-cycle when
scr fails, forcing fuse to blow. load-shunting AC
diode may bo damaged before fuse blows DIODE LOAD SHUNT
PROTECTION PROTECTION
unless application permits Inserting suRlciently RESISTOR
,_.....__,
1
DIODE
high limiting resistance in series with load.
-J. T. Lamb, Shunt Diode Protects Load in I I
SCR Circuit, Electronic Design, Oct. 25, 1969, I t

p 109. '----
------f ~ '-------o 120V

MANUAL RESET SWITCH
~
METER 50·60 - r ' \ - - - - - 4 g I a
cps
R4 R6
lM lM
CRI
~21D2
CR2 -:"9V
O.C METER PROTECTION-Low-cost ·-·volt•

age low-current silicon rectifiers such as
TN1692, connected across motor with oppo• RS R7 C2
LAMP
47K 47K 0.1,,f
site polarity as shown, will protect 50-µA tt185D
meter of typical multimeter against heavy
fault currents without introducing more than
I% error. With l·A overload current, motor
current is loss than 1 mA because roctiflors Ql. Q2, Q3 - HRN8318D
begin conducting heavily when voltage across POWER FAILURE INDICATOR-Flasher is . system sorving unattended refrigerators or
them excoods about 0.5 V. For higher fault turned on by a-c lino power failure, and keeps froozers, where power falluro could cause
current, use higher-current rectifiers such as flashing until manual rosot switch is operated, food spoilage.-C. R. Perkins, "Application of
GE-X4.-"Hobby Manual," General Electric, as indication that a-c lino power has boon In- MOSFET Devices to Electronic Circuits,"
Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 156. terrupted. Ono application Is for a•c power Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968, p 46.
\
+70V
0.01µ1
T,
INPUT
~60J8
o,
2N963 OVERLOAD PROTECTION-Triode cathode fol-
lower In cascade with ernitter follower pro·
vides very low output impedance (below 10
TRANSISTOR ohms) and protects against large d-c over•
- - - ,--1 AMPLIFIER loads. Article describes operatlon.-L. A.
I Egherrnan, Emitter-Follower Circuit Protects
IM IBK *Cin Against Overloads, Eledtonic Design, March
I
I
15, 1965, p 61-62.
-:$-
-toov +&.:!Iv +11ov
11
+6V
10kn OV
BAX13
7 12
7 U4
4 us
FCJ111
FCUOI
14 10
c
~
1oon +&V
ov
7 4 U7
11
THYRISTOR BRIDGE OVERLOAD TRIGGER-

Provides required trigger signal for driving
gates of four thyristors in 1.5-lcW 190-V d-c
to 220-V 400-Hz inverter, for turning off one
of thyristors of conducting pair if load cur•
rent t!Xceods preselected value. Points A, B,
C, and D go to overload-sensing circuit. All
tronsformers hove 150-turn prirnary and 75·
turn :secondary on H20 core.-N. Borgstra and
R. · v:· cl. linden, Overload Current Protection
for a Bridge Inverter, Philips, Pub. Dept., El·
coma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No.
95; 1970.
t28V
MULTIPLE-LAMP FAILURE-NE2 neons, shunting
28·V Incandescent lamps connected as loads
for Darlington Ql.Q2, glow only for lamp
failure. Circuit values aro not critical and
depend mainly on current ratings of lamps.
QI can be 2N718A, Q2 2Nl613, diodes IN·
4245, Rl 47K, and other resistors lOOK.-D.
A. Vaughan, Combination lamp Driver and
Failure Indicator, EEE,,May 1969, p 117-118.
SWITCH
o,
SZ7·5A
+
LOAD
NICKEL-CADMIUM BATIERY-Provonts com- 22.5Jl 2.n .47511 .025A

plete discharge by sensing when battery
voltage falls below zoner point of DI and
then turning off Q2 to open circuit. Pre-
vents buildup of gas pressure and rupturing
IOmA 500mA
,
of cell, and increases battery lifo. Switch
must bo opened after each protective action,
so Cl can discharge and permit turn-on.-D. +IOA ·
l. Haskard, Voltage Sensor Umits Discharge
in Batteries, Electronics, April 1, 1968, p 62. PROTECTOR DIODES FOR SIMPSON 260-Two
Ohmito silicon diodes can be added to pro•
tect meter from current-range overloads.
Bussmann AGX fast·blow 0.125·A instrument
fuse can be added for extra protection, al·
though 3,000-ohm resistor already in circuit
will act as current limltor.-A. A. Mangieri,
Diode Meter Protectors, Electronics World,
Nov. 1966, p 56-57 and 76.
CIRCUIT T,
BREAKER r------- --,I
GE6RS20SP4P4
ff
MIDNIGHT LINE SURGE CllPPER-Protocts ro- occur in Iota evening hours. Bridge rectiRor in filter at 117 V a-c.-L. E. Greenlee, Bridge
frigerators, froozers, and control equipment and its load RI ·C4, connoctod to a-c lino fll· Rectifier Clips Dangerous Voltages, Efeclron-
from damage by high line V\lltage surges that tar, clips peaks of transients to keep voltago ics, March 4, 1968, p 89-90.
PRO.TECTION CIRCUITS 609
-60V
+28V IUNREGI
LAMP FAILURE-Provides reliable indication of
failure of incandescent indicator lamp for
critical information on instrument panel.
lamp being monitored is load for two-stage
Darlington amplifier. Neon lamp connected
across indicator glows only when incandescent
lamp burns out.-D. A. Vaughan, Combination
Lamp Driver and Failure Indicator, EEE, May
1969, p 117-118.
LT2-27-I
+ Imo SENSITIVE PROBE

T
's1.!.v
~ 2
~mo SENSITIVE PROBE
lmA
LEAKAGE CURRENT-Shock hazard from elec· FAUCET OR
PROTECTING CURRENT RANGES OF VOM- Slf>'ILAR GROUND
Two Ohmite OMC7111 silicon diodes in par• trical appliances due to insulation leakage
allel back-to-back provide protection against is determined by neon lamp Indication.
overloads of oither polarity. Since diodes are Anything above 5 mA is considered danger-
connected directly between test leads, fuses ous and makos neon glow.-E. Bauman, "Ap·
must be added to protect against accidental pllcatlons of Noon lamps and Gas Discharge
overvoltage. Use 1/a·A fuses, which will Tubes.'' Slgnalito, Neptune, N.J., p 146,
break circuit in 1 s at 220 mA.-A. A. Man·
gieri, Diode Metor Protectors, Electronics
World, Nov. 1966, p 56-57 and 76.
1N4004
(3 DIODES)
4.3k 100 100 360 -12v
175µf 6.Sv
1N30168
PHASE A 115v
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
Rz
500
1N4004 IN916
(3 DIODES) 100µ.f 175µ.f
30v 15v l.2k )Ov 1N916
M4L2054 IN916
POWER FAILURE PROTECTION-Protects equip· trol overvoltage and undervoltage trip points;
ment from loss of one phase or from high or controls are interlocklng.-D. K. Smith, Moni-
low lino voltage. Compares sum of three- voltage and removes power from equipment tor Guards Throe Ways Against Power Fail·
phase line voltages with regulated supply when necessary. Settings of Rt and R2 con• ures, Electronia, Oct. 27, 1969, p 97-98.
DEAD·BAnERY CUTOFF-Simple transistor ar·

rangomont wilh zenor opens line botween
EQUIPMENT load and 24-V battory when battery dis•
CIRCUIT charges down to 18 V and affects accuracy
of calibrating equipment. Particularly deslr·
able far nlckol-c:admium batteries because
-=- 24v they can bo destroyed if discharged below
I
30% of full capacity. For external lndica•
tor that comes on when llne opens, place
24-V lamp between emitter and collector of
Q1.-E. R. Deloach, Transistor and Zonor
- Monitor Calibration, Electronics, Juno 24, 1968,
p 102.
100 K 0-:1 v
I HONEYWELL
MS3Tl
Un.ZENER PROTECTION-Provides meter pro-

tection with only two components, without
causing orron by loading external circuit.
Dovolopod for application where voltages
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION-At low voltage lamp fires and makes photocoll resistance measured wero 2 to 3 V but with accidental
levels, transistor Q1 is saturated because drop to low lovol, cutting off transistor and ovorloads up to 14 V occasionally. Even
photocell resistance of Rayslstor acts as bias removing load voltage.-Raysistor Optoelec 0
with 16 V, voltage across meter is only 6.7 V.
resistor. At overvoltago lovol dotormlnod by tronic Dovlcos, Raytheon, Quincy, Man., 1967, -R. l. Charnley, FET Provides Automatic
firing voltage of zenor and noon in Raysistor, p 27. Meter Protection, EEE, March 1969, p 128.
o,
2Nt74
Dt
tN2995
OUTPUT
D2
fN2995
FUSE
-
PROTECTING POWER TRANSISTORS-lnductivo
8-
shorts or opens, to interrupt drivo current and
B-
ston, Foodbaclc Protects Amplifier During Load
feedback circuit shown In heavy line acts on thereby protect output power transistors from Failur~s. Electronics, Dec. 25, 1967, p 68-69.
driver stage of audio amplifier whe11 output breakdown or thermal runaway.-G. 5. Leh·
IONIZATION GAGE-For aerospace sounding

rocket, noon lamp with high breakdown volt· DC
age prevents d-c amplifler of cold-cathode AMPLIFIER
Ionisation gage from being overloaded by INPUT
abrupt rise In input current before external CURRENT
circuitry con switch In appropriate series re- lj.lA. TO 3 MA.
sistor. Use of noon Instead of Hner diode
maintains accuracy of gage roadlngs.-E.
RLT2-27-IA
Bauman, "Applications of Neon Lamps and
Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalito, Neptune,
N.J., p 91.
+6v
Vo ANODE VOLTAGE
-I R2 51k
SATURATED
REGION
Vp---
PEAK FIRING
PROGRAMABLE
VOLTAGE
UNIJUNCTION
TRANSISTOR
PROGRAMABLE UNIJUNCTION-
TRANSISTOR CURVE
OUTPUT PULSE
SWITCH BOUNCE ELIMINATOR-Program• charges until it reaches peak firing voltago of or to contact bounce produced· by switch.-C.
mable ujt generates clean pulses, fne of ujt, then discharges through ujt to produce Brogado, Unijunction Device Eliminates Con•
switch contact bounce, over wide range of positive output voltage across R4. Circuit is tact Bounce, Electronics, April 13, 1970, p
supply voltages. When switch Is dosed, Cl immune to occidental triggering by transients 106.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, use the lndox at tho back
McGraw•Hill in 1968,
CHAPTER 66
Pulse Generator Circuits
SQUIB FIRING-Energy for firing squib Xl is

supplied through scr by 2e-V d-c supply. To
provent scr from firing when anode voltage is
I On
applied rapidly, input network Ll-Rl-Cl limits
C2 rote of voltage rise. Time delay network
R2-C2 and diode Are scr I s after circuit is
O.lpf armed by connecting to power supply.-High
Reliability Squib Firing Circuits, Solid State
Products, Salem, Mass., No. 3.
+28V
SINGLE
PULSE
RI ~
IK
10 AND 100 PPS PLUS ONE-SHOT-Originally
used as pulso source for stepping motors.
Pulse width and repetition rate can be ad·
justed to any reasonable ratio, ossentiolly 19V
independently; width is 850 µs for values
shown.-G. E. Singleton, Pulse Generator Gives 3.6K
R4
Low Frequency Otuput, Electronic Design, Jon.
20, 1964, p 79 and 81. 02
R2 Cl R6 2N699
I.BK 33
+Vee
24 v dt
390
1µ.f
EIN----4-------T-t Vee
-.-...~--'l6vdc
F·M FOR PROCESS SYNC-Frequency-modu-

lated pulse genorotor was designed for syn•
chronizing two processes or tost instruments.
----Eo l....k_l -*-
Zv
~
Con be built for less than $3. Modulating
input signal con be sinusoidal, square, or any
other shopo. Amplitude of input determines at which output changes. Increasing value omitter of ujt Q2.-G. M. Nickus, Froquency-
period of output, which is up to 0.0001 s for of Cl increases period; above 10 µF, insort Modulatod Output from low-Cast Unijunction,
value shown, and frequency of input sets role 1 ohm per µ.F between A and B to protect Eledronics, Nov. 14, 1966, p 122.
612
PULSE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 613
...
POStTIVE
TRIGGER
--; UNEGATIVE
OUTPUT
100:1 PWM-Modification of ono-shot permits
changing pulse width by means of R2, or
externally with aithor d·c voltage or a-c
modulation signal.-5. J, Erst, Improved
Monostable Multivibrator Allows Wide Range
T of Pulse-Width Control, EEE, Jan. 1969, p
NEGATIVE
TRIGGER 114-115.
3.3k
SELF-POWERED GENERATOR-Produces sharp

+6.0Vdc
output pulse, with rise time of 100 ns during
_r----t_
50.µs fall timo of 6·V rectangular input signal. Fall time
01 and 03 are 2N2894; 02 is 2N2369; all
diodes are IN4153; Rl and R4 IOOK; R2 3K;
50µ sec
...,1/'11\,...__,, Output -1\__
Rise time
R3 IOK; Cl 0.1 ,.F.-"Selected Electronic Cir· IOOnsec
cuitry," NASA SP-S046, 1966, Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., p 57.
Rs l30V)
+TRIGGER -, I
SCR
10.001 UTC H-63
.:.. 01 CI06 R4
~r IN2069 IOk
SI
- .J
R3 Cl
lk 0.01 µ.F
RI R8
IN660 12k 4.7k
C2
0.2~µ.F
PUL.SE
DEL.AV
S.--oTO
2K 21( OTHER R2
e.o:s 3.3k
ADJUSTABLE PULSE TRAINS-Eight idontical

cascadod blocking oscillators generate pulse CONSTANT PULSE WIDTH-Random-duration
train in which spacing botween pulses in closing of St produccis fixed-duration output
adjacent oscillators Is adjustable in range pulse with width adjustable by R9 from 2.5
from 0.1 to 0.9 of previous pulso width. to I 00 ms. May bo used as pulse stretcher,
Pulse width is largely dotermined by valuos pulse shertonor, and contact-bounce elimi-
of R and C connected to emitter. Wavoform nator. Varying supply voltage from 15 v
at omittor is triangular, so potentiomotor can to 4S V produces loss than 0.2-ms change in
adjust triggering time of next oscillator with· output pulse duration.-R. W. Murro, Any
out affecting pulse width.-G. Mador, Blocking Switch Closure Produces a Fixed-Duration
Oscillators Simplify Adjustable lntorpulse Output Pulse, Electronic Design, Feb. I, 1969,
Spacing, Electronic Deiign, July 6, 1964, p 52. p 72 and 74.
614 ELE.CTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
B+(IOV) Suppb· + 20 Vdc

+ Vdc SCR, 2N886
CR, th1"0ugh CR, 1N64o
K, BR6-1K
RI Q,,Q, 2N1671B
27U R2 Q, 2N930
).U
QI
c, O.Olp.F
c.. c. lOp.F
c. O.lp.F
c, 2.7 p.F
Cl c. lp.F
'800pf
y R, lOOK
R, 2.2K
+ Vd~ R, ~ 4.7K
return R. 68K
Rh Rs.. R,. R10 lOOn
R, tOK
R, 33K
TRANSISTOR RELAXATION OSCILLATOR-Two Ru 3.3K
ordinary transistors connected as shown will R,, 27K
equal performance of ujt relaxation oscillator. MULTIPULSE GENERATOR-Circuit was devel· SCRI to initiate capacltor-chorging action for
Component values are for I kHz.-W. A. oped at Goddard Space Flight Center to gen• generating required pulses.-"Soloctad Elec-
Vincent, Using Transistors as Negative-Resist• erato pulses about 150 ms apart for oporal· tronic Circuitry," NASA SP-5046, 1966, Gov•
ance Dovlces, Electronics World, Juno 1969, p ing shutter used to protect optical system from ernmont Printing Office, Washington, D.C., p
38-40 and 62. excessive light. Input trigger pulse tums on 24.
50-0HM
CABLES
FROM POSITIVE
GENERATOR
L2
200,,.h
FROM POSITIVE ALLEN-BRADLEY
GENERATOR 89922
04
2N3252
FROM NEGATIVE-:- 50
GENERATOR 02
2N3252
...:ii--~~..foll~~~ ....~~~....~~........ ,~~----'
FROM NEGATIVE CORE

GENERATOR TESTED
TECHNITROL
31EHA
50
COMMON ATIENUATOR-Providos single-dial
omplltudo control of four or more pulso gen-
erators used to measure parameters for com•
putor memories. Gato-generator signals
switch Qt or Q2 to deliver either positive or
negative write pulses to core being tested. +
Article describes adjustment procedure for 12Y
setup. Maximum output current of generator
Is t A Into 50·ohm load. Repeatability of otor bocklosh ond generator stability.-W. M. oral Pulse Generators, Electronics, July IO,
amplitude settings is limited only by attonu- Chu, Single Control Adjusts Outputs of Sov• 1967, p 82-83.
PULSE GENE)itATOR CIRCUITS 615
-vee
100 v
117V
60CPS
Cz
1.0
200V
DELAY-LINE GENERATOR-Uses SO-ohm delay repetition rate, but rate is primarily doter•
lO·A PULSES AT 160 V-Scr with slmplo mag- line Z with transistor operatln9 In avalanche mined by value of lino capacitance and there•
netic firing circuit swltchas half-cycles of lino mode to generate positive or negative pul1111 fore by pulse width. Pulse amplitude Is
voltage to give hl9h·power pul1es for indus• with controllable amplitude and duration. chan9ad by usin9 different line impedance
trial control circuit application.-T. P. Sylvan, To get ne9otlvo pul1es with circuit shown, and tron1istor.-"Hi9h Speed Switching Tran-
SCR Quarter-Wavo Rediflor Forms Hi9h Power 0 load RL is placed in series with emitter-ground sistor Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
Pulses, Electronic Design, April 27, 1964, p connection of transistor. VCC and RC affect 1969, p 295.
95-97.
Rr
IOOK 2N3028
CS-I
o,
M _A..
INPUT
Rz
IK 200pf
c,
Cr
IOOOpf
FIRING EXPLOSIVE BOLT-Ct storas energy allowing Cl to recharge. Can be used for
for flring squib Xt. Positive 1·mA pulse detonation and for rocket engine Ignition.-
500-KHZ UJT RELAXATION-Sin9le transistor flres scr, makin9 Cl discharge throu9h squib. High Reliability Squib Firln9 Circuits, Solid
and resistor extend frequency range of basic Circuit resets automatically after tost flring, State Products, Salem, Mass., No. 3.
ujt.-M. Gramln9a, Modified Unljunction Os·
clllator Reaches 500 kHz, EEE, Sept. 1966, p
144.
+ZOV
RATE TRIM 4700

•V I 10 YO~TS
~OOOQ
CUJT
c G·E
270 D5K
p,,, .,--..._.;;;'I !IOK RATE
LINEAR
STICK POT
IOK 22K c
+ o.os,.1 33'1
2!1 \IOLT
GNO
50-KHZ COMPLEMENTARY UJT-Operates as FREQUENCY-CALIBRATED POT IN UJT RELAX· providin9 ot least one octavo of variation.
relaxation osclllator with good immunity to ATION-High stability of ult relaxation oscil- Trim pot is independent of Rl .-J, H. Phelps,,
supply voltage changes.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., lator permits calibratln9 settings of poten- Unijunction Oscillator Has Frequency Trim
Complementary Unljunction Transistors, Gen• tiometers. Center frequency Is approximately Control, "400 Ideas for Desi9n Selected from
eral Electric, Syracuso, N.Y., No. 90.72, 1968, 1,000 Hz, with Rt providing at least ono Electronic Desi9n," Hayden Book Co., N.Y.,
p 10. decade of variotion and with trim control 1964, p 177.
ONE, TWO, THREE, OR BURST-Versotlle pulse Vee

generator costing obout $20 delivers combi- •14V R4
IOk
nations of 5-V pulses in frequency range of
400 to 15,000 Hz. With R3 at maximum, RI
18k
R2 is adjusted to give single pulse when
power is applied. R3 is then adjusted to
give double- or triple-pulse groups or to give
C2
continuous burst of pulses. Ql may bo any 0.005fLF
transistor serving os inverter and isolation OUTPUT
stage.-G. Lawson, A Four-Loyer Diode Forms
Double-Pulse Generator, Eleclronic Dosign, SCR2 R7
2N2323 200
April 26, 1967, p 243.
R3
50k
Al SK
VARIABLE-PHASE DOUBLE-PULSE GENERATOR

A2 IOK
-Dolivers high-power pulsos alternately from
two soparote outputs, as required for such
applications as firing an scr paralleled in·
verter having noninductivo load. Circuit con-
sists of two ujt relaxation oscillators, syn-
chronized through C3, with R2 controlling the
phase difference betweon outputs and Rt
controlling frequency over range of 200 to
800 Hz. Output pulses are about 4 V peak
ond 10 µ.s wide.-T. P. Sylvan, Tho Unijunction
Transistor Characteristics ond Applications,
1965, p 78.
2.2 k
I I I ..,! .__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _....,r, Output
4.7 k
t
~ 14-
2 1-1 ;;-k:--;0~:-10i3n~
TP
3
I I
I
D..D.4
:
Current
Amplifier I I
l.rc:..J
I I.,
+ER LJ--'\~-""'""'""' I I I
L __________ _JI
c,
E1 10 k ....
Input C>--------------------------~V..,1\,.-J Tp = o < e1 <+10 v
Signol
VOLTAGE TO PULSE WIDTH-With connections pulso train is synchronized. Pulse width of input voltage varies from 0.1 to 10 V, Cl can
shown for Burr-Brown 4013/25 switched inte• output is linear function of input signal volt· be 0.01 µ.F and RI 90K.-Sample/Hold
11 rator, very linear and stable synchronized
ago El. Values of ER, Cl, and Al are chosen Modules, Burr-Brown Research, Tucson, Ariz.,
pulse-width modulator Is obtained. Pulso according to dynamic rango and pulso rope· PDS-211, 1969, p 10.
train provides clocking signal to which output tition rote desired. If clock is 1 kHz and
PULSE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 617
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR-Uses npn diffused

silicon breokdown diode ond minimum of
other components to prod uco shorp output
pul101. Breakdown voltoge of T142A is in
range of 28 to 36 V, so battery supply volt.
ago must be enough for capocitor to charge
through series resistor enough to exceod
breakdown voltago ond give desired repoli·
tion rote.-"Preferred Semiconductors ond
Components," Texas Instruments, Dollas,
I O~M
Texas, CCI01, 1968, p 24108.
NOISE-IMMUNE NEON ONE-SHOT-Switching

of neon tube converts o·c voltage or long d·c
gole into short 20..V output pulse hoving
loss than 1·µs rise time. Circuit locks out
other signols as long os trigger signal is
present, and is immune olso to signals and
noise for predetermined time ofter romoval l.!IM
of trigger. Product of R2 and C1 deter· Rz R3 PULSE
mines lockout timo.-A. M. Patlach, Neon Tube IOK OUT
Circuit Forms Ono-Shot Pulse Generotor, Elec•
ftonic: Design, June 7, 1965, p 38-39.
COAXIAL LINE
PULSE FORMER
IOM
PULSE FORMER-Input pulse from 50-ohm 3.3k
coox is stepped up by transformer to trip
Krytron gos·fllled switch tube that produces
~igh peolc current for short duration, around
several ns, through resistive lood.-Krytrons
-Cold Cathode Switch Tubes, EG&G, Boston,
Moss., KR-100, 1968.
3.Jk /\
OUTPUT
A
(-12VJ
LOAD COIL
(eppt01,4mH,
•20)
PRINT liAMMER DRIVE-Duol scr delay flop

(monostable mvbr) delivers constont-energy PWM-Arrongement shown requires only
pulses to solenoids of line printer hammers or single capacitor on IC triangular-wave gen-
popor tape punches, at repetition rotes above erator for pulse-width modulation in audio
100 pps. Output is 170 V at 5 A. Circuit ampliflors. Also produces two square-wave
resets outomotically.-S. W. Piccione, SCR1 outputs. Charging of Cl by collector cur-
Simplify Monostable Coil-Driver, EEE, Nov. rent of 04 forms leading edge of sowtooth.-
1967, p 129-130. 0. Boode, Ono Capacitor Makos IC a Pulse-
width Modulator, Eledronlcs, Sept. 2, 1968,
p 71.
NOTE: To locote additional circuits in tho cotegory of this chapter, uso tho indox at the back
CHAPTER 67
Pulse Shaping Circuits
1okn IOki\
SUS PULSE SHARPENER-Simple 2N4983 (or

2N498ll 2N4987) silicon unilotoral switch circuit uses
INPUT oner9y stored in capacitor to 9onorate rapid
PULSE
rise or fall timo.-Silicon Unilateral Switch
2N4983/2N4986, General Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 65.25, 1967.
(a) POSITIVE OUTPUT lbl NEGATIVE OUTPUT
INPUT TO / 15V
BOTH CIRCUITS _/
ov-----....-
o~
OU~
(cl TYPICAL WAVEFORMS
INDUCTIVE
INDUCTIVE OVERSHOOT-Single transistor UlAD
stage inserted between coax and inductive 80 l'h
load prevents pulse overshoot by componsat• Dt
Ing for Inductive roactanco. R3 is adjusted IN914
to terminate cable in its charactorisic imped-
ance. R2l1 should equal product of RI and
Inductive load, for best compensation.-T. E. S.1k 0.811'1
Skopal, Transistor Circuit Cancels Inductive
load Effects, Electronics, Doc. 9, 1968, p 83-
84.
-12v
R2 4.711 tk 2.2m 5.6k

t.8m
02 y
OC140 OUTPUT
-u-
INPUT
Dt
FD177
a,
3N98 o.t11r.
R1
c, 4.7k 22011
50 15pf
330
STRETCHING 2,000 TIMES-High impedance of of pracedin9 stage. Circuit provides strotch- "':' -J. Holland, MOS FET Prevents Loadin9 By
mosfot transistor, in circuit for stretching nar- in9 factor of about 2,000 for 2.5-ns no9ativo- a Pulse Stretcher, Electronics, March 3, 196,,
row pulses by largo factors, prevents loading 9oin9 pulse havln9 peak of at least 0.5 V. p 95.
618
PULSE SHAPING CIRCUITS 619
la
I
i '300 r.,_1 ',300
50
I
0.1µ.f
so
MAlfB100
LEADING • EDGE SHARPENER - Charge-con•
TRAILING • EDGE SHARPENER - Chargo•con·
trolled diode Is connected across load to pre•
trolled diode In series with load reduces out•
sent low impedance that holds output voltage
put voltage until it switches into high-impod- PULSE SQUARER-Combination of series and low until all Its stored charge is removed, then
ance state. For S-ns fall time of input pulse, shunt charge-controlled diodes sharpens both switches to hlgh·lmpodanco state. Output
sharpening action reducos fall time of output leading and trailing odgos of pulsos in digital pulse is narrower than input pulse by amount
pulse to loss than 1 ns.-B. Siegal, Simpler circuits. By varying bias currents, circuit will of delay time. With values shown, input rise
Digital Circuits in a Snap, Electronics, Juno 9, also serve for pulse position control and vari- time is about 12 ns, and output rise time is
1969, p 105-108. able pulse width control.-B. Siegal, Simpler narrowed to less than 1 ns.-B. Siegal, Simpler
Digital Circuits in a Snap, Eleclroniu, Juno 9, Digital Circuits In a Snap, Eleclronics, Juno 9,
1969, p 105-108. 1969, p 105-108.
+15 +IS
C1
0.01
~PUT 11--t--..,-----t-1
+15
PULSE WIDENER-Modification of monostable

mvbr gives equivalent of two standard mvbr
circuits, for applications requiring elongated
Rz output pulso. For values shown, pulse width
IOK
A can be adjusted from 0.05 to 1.8 s and B
from 0.1 to 4.5 s. By adding OR goto 04-
05, width of output pulse at C becomes sum
of times A and B. Circuit may also bo used
to provide timing function with zero recovery
time and duty cycle approaching 100%.-R.
W. Fergus, Modified Multlvlbrator Has Elon•
gated Pulse Output, Electronic Design, March
INPUT - - t 15, 1965, p 59.
o-v.....---
A i-1'--
a~
TIMEB
cµ---L
TIMING CHART
PUSH~
FOA
PULSE
200k
GROUND
5.Ck TO RESET
02
5.lk
02
FET TYPE T (MINUTES)
01 & 03 AAE AHY
OF THE FOLL.OWING U·llO 4
2N3B55 u-112 2.5
2N3391 U·l46 6
2N3'594 U·l4T 5
PULSE STRETCHER-Senses peak amplitude and Q3 provide Impedance transformation and selecting diode and capacitor with very low
holds this voltage level for much longer than isolate fet Q2 from source and load. Pulso leakage.-J. H. Wujok, Jr., and M. E. McGee,
width of pulse. External source can bo used can be stretched as long as 30 hours by using Field-Elfoct Transistor Circuits, Electronics
in place of pulse-initiating switch. QI and expensive fot with low gate loakago and World, May 1967, p 32-33 and 75.
CENTERING WITH DIODES-Delivers output

pulse hoving equal amplitudes abovo ond
below ground, when incoming pulse has
+ voriable amplitude and duty cyclo. C1 and
c, D1 provide positive clomping, so slgnol ot A
6.&JLI is reproduction of input shiftod below d-c
150,1"1. ground. Similarly, C2 and D2 provide nego·
K tive clamp os ot B. Resistor notworlc acts as
EouT instontoneous adder to provide dosired result.
IN64312) -T. B. Hooker, Circuit Provides Pulse Equolly
Centered About Ground, Electronic Design,
Oz Nov. 9, 1964, p 79.
150,l"I.
Cz K
6.8JLI
~o ,.....__,,_........,......................................................--0+28V
---~---
REl.AY
1
L. ,
COIL 1500 11192 1500
500
SCR PULSE STRETCHER-Will detoct 3.y pulsus

as short os 20 µs, either singly or in trains,
ond stretch them os shown by wovoforms.
For valuos shown, relay is onergized about
50 ms for single pulse. For repetition rotes
IN
obovo 20 per second, reloy remoins energized
during ontiro pulse troin, but releases within
OUT
50 ms ofter lost pulse in troin.-A. Bolint, SCR
Pulse Stretcher Resets Aftor Pulse Train, "400
ldeos for Dosign Selected from Electronic De· IN
sign," Hoyden Book Co., N.Y .. 1964, p 40.
OUT
+24v
DI 15121
CONTROLLED·
CURRENT
INPUT
_n__
R4 560
2Nl917
o,
02
c, 25701
Olp.I
Rz R5 OUTPUT
820 270 LOAD
18
TRAILING-EDGE SHAPER-Faodboclc network is after Q3 conduclS, to shorten exponentiol With RS os potontiomotor, pulse width may be
used between avalanche-switching input cir· decay time by foctor of 10. Tho resulting voried.-K. J. Foard, Simple Feodboclc Network
cuit ond output stage of pulse generator to sharper decay permits use of trailing edge of Shapes Trailing Edges, Eledroniu, Oct. 2,
turn off Q1.Q2 sharply at desired Interval output pulse for triggering other circuits. 1967, p 96-97.
PtTLSE SHAPING CIRCtTITS 621
+12V
+12v
RISE-TIME BOOSTER-Riso timo of conven• 3.3K

tional squaro-wave oscillator is greatly in· ,__........,,.,.,....-uOUT PUT
croasad by connecting Cl and C2 to split ~v.fUUl_
collector loads of transistors. Circuit also
provides clipping of output wavaform.-P. 320 cps
D. Gargiulo, Fast Rise Times From Slow Cir·
cuits, Eleclronic Design, April 27, 1964, p 93-
94. 3.92K
02
ZT2475
Jl PEAK-HOLDING SPIKE STRETCHER-Will hold

level of single pulse os narrow as 20 ns, with
t Vour
poak ranging from several hundred mV to
5 V, while increasing width of pulse up to
100,000,000 timos.-1. D. Crawford, Pulse
Stretcher Remembers levol of Narrow 5piko,
Electronic Design, June 7, 1970, p 96.
Cl
1soopFT
R2
470k
R3
470k
C2
o.22 11 FJ
.... '----------u-12v .,..
+12v
03
2N3643
---------oYout
o,
2N3643
A /
I
v
I I
GNO
To T1 Tz
TANGENT FUNCTION-Diode generator is com·

bined with differential amplifier to raiso am•
plifier gain soquontially as input signal in-
creases, for generating complex voltage NOTE: ALL DIODES - 1N914
waveforms such as tangent functions and 1k ALL POTENTIOMETERS - 10k
other functions that become unbounded in
magnitude at key points. Throe pots are R8 3.3k
used to shape positive section of output, and
three for negative saction.-W. E. Paterson,
Diode Generator Yields Complex Functions,
Electronics, Oct. 13, 1969, p 95. -12.v
E+
./
.rR.---
c•IS ,~ _J_
~1 300mv
INPUT
'- J TRANSFER
ZONE
l.2K
OUTPUT
~o-~l~µ-'--....-------.---~
CR2 o,
IN914 Cl
0.001
T MYLAR
300
PULSE STRETCHER-Uses nogallve feedback

for opamps to glvo unity gain, When posl·
live pulse having rise limo above 2 µs is fed BIDIRECTIONAL. CLIPPER-Symmetrically limits
lo first opamp, positive output of opamp excursion of input signal about its average
charges stretching capacitor Cl through R1 valuo. Transfer zone is only 300 mV. If all
and CR1. When pulse dios away, CR1 be· diodes oro same typo, altawod signal oxcur•
comes reverse-biased and ~1 discharges with sion will bo nearly zero, bocauso it is only as
long time constant. Stretched output is thus largo as variations in diodes. For larger
obtained from second opamp serving as volt· signals, uso all silicon diodes, such as 1 N459
ago follower. Typical pulse•stretchlng R·C for Dl and D2, and 1 N456 for 03 and D4.-
time is 1 s for 3-V pulse. Dynamic rango is V. J, Kaneski, Simple Bidirectional Clipper
ovor 200.-J. H. McQuaid, Linear Pulse Has Small Transfer Zona, Electronic Design,
Strotchor has Wida Dynamic Rango, Electronic Juno 22, 1964, p 68-69.
Design, July 5, 1969, p 80 and 82.
+12v
PULSE EXPANDER-EJltornal triggor is fad

into ujt Q6 through transistors Qt, 02, and
03 to make stable mvbr expand 5-µs pulse
up to 100,000 times In width whllo main·
taining recovery time of loss than t O µs.
Used to make 5-µs computer pulse generate
sharp and accurate 3-ms pulse for control of
05
readout equipment, Article doscribos opera-
2N2369
tion in dotail.-D. A. Brooks, Unijundian
Transistor Controls Stable Ono-Shot, Efec-
rroniu, Jan. 8, 1968, p 89-90.
04
2N2369
820
+15v 300msec
I
OUTPUT
07
2N2369
ALL OIOOES IN919

PULSE SHAPING CIRCUITS 623
+24Y
IN4009
.01 27011
4Y FOR •
o.s,.s
Vour Jl - 5N81
SQUARE OUTPUT
TRtGG£R PU~SE 22Y FOR
INPUT
20 TO 50115
IN4009
IOK
IOOK ~OAD
STRETCHER-Provides both ampliflcation and SINE-DRIVEN TRAPEZOIDAL-Gives trapezoi·

UJT SHAPER-Un of inductanco in ujt relaxa- dal output waveform for sine-wave input
widening of 4-V 0.5°µs trigger input pulse,
tion oscillator cuts rise and fall times to 0.3 voltage largo enough to drivo transistor al·
with 5-µF capacitor and 4.7K resistor doter•
µs for 12-µs pulse width. Wilh 47-ohm ternately into saturation and into cutoff.
mining stretch interval and same capacitor
resistor in place of inductance, rise time is Typical value for battery is 10 V. Output is
with 1OOK resistor determining circuit recovery
same, but fall time goes up to 3 µs.-"Uni· produced by clipping of input.-A. C. Gillie,
time. Gives square-wave output of 20 to 50
junction Circuit Hinh,'' General Electric, Syra• "Pulse and logic Circuits," McGraw-Hill, N.Y.,
ms at 22 V.-Plenar Silicon Controlled Switch
cuse, N.Y., Fig. 1. 1968, p 278.
3N81/3N82, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 65.16, 1964.
+60VDC
Rz + C;s
10 -I10µ1 SCR AMPLIFIES ONLY LEADING EDGE-2N·
1596 scr acts as low-impedance pulse ampli-
"" (60V fier, eliminating nood for shut-off for circuit
INPUT
2N1596 _j'-.__ requiring only loading edge of pulse. Pulse
period of 8 ms Is determined by Cl, RI, C2,
OUTPUT and load. Article gives operating details.-
A. J. Fishman, Shut-Off Is Not Required in
SCR Pulso Amplifier, Efocfronlc Design, March
16, 1964, p 107-108.
+12v
r---s----,I
I
I
I
I
5.lk I
I
I
PULSE I
INPUT 7 14 I I
~~:.lJ-"'~-t
R
s2o
+Sv
'::'
OUTPUT
CONSTANT DUTY CYCLE-Single-shot mvbr Circuit permits varying frequency of pulse to 93% over frequency range of 100 to 1,000
coupled to integrator delivers output pulse generator over wide range without slmul· lcHz if Cl is 500 pF.-W. Ross, Pufso Train
train with constant duty cycle while matching taneously adjusting pulse width control. Frequency Varied as Duty Cycle Stays Con-
output frequency to changing Input frequency. Duty cycle can be sot anywhere from 7% stant, ffodronict, July 21, 1969, p 84.
-25V -3V
RISE TIME ft2

CONTROL 5K
02
C1 2N964
0.05p.f
IN995
03 C2
Rt 7-365pf. ----OUTPUT
47 RISE ANO FALL
R1 \ r+o.sv
INPUT ...- TIME CONTROL
IN914
3.3K
\__/-3V
3V
I1 ov
RISE AND FALL TIME< 10 NS
R1
12K
+25V
FALL TIME
CONTROL
+25V +3V
SQUARE TO TRAPEZOIDAL-Converts positive vary output rise and fall times over range af pononts, rise and fall times can be increased
square waves into negative pulses having ad- I 0 to 200 ns. Rise time only is affected by to ms range.-D. N. Lee, Trapezoidal Gener·
justoble linear rise and fall times. With R2, while RS changes both rise and fall times. ator Forms Variable Linear Ramps, Electronic
controls R2 and R5 sot at minimum, C2 will With larger values for these adjustable com- Design, Doc. 7, 1964, p 66-67.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use the index at tho back
of this book. Check also tho author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 68
Radiation Circuits
+1ov GROUNO BIAS REFERENCE

IOK UNHARDENED-Evon with special transistors,
RLs<5.3MEG
flip.flop shown is sensitive to radiation be-
---+---1o'loolllo,...K__RL4 <5.3MEGr---'\lw----t--......... cause its relatively low base-collector off.
IOOpt
current makes it vulnerable to being turned
off by transient pulse. Articlo discusses tech-
20K 20K niques for hardening such circuits for military
equipment. Dashed lines show resistance
paths that can carry radiation-induced leak·
ago curronts.-Designing Hardened Equipment:
.... Several Methods Are Useful, Electronic Design,
June 8, 1964, p 46 and 48-51.
IOOpt
.------..-------TO
HARDENED SCR SWITCHING TIME-Article OSCILLOSCOPE
gives equations into which meosured param•
eters of components without radiation can
be inserted for predicting response under ra·
diation. Circuit shown is used to display on
cro, in manner suitoble for photographing,
switching time of scr under test. Pulses are
simultaneously applied to gate and anode.
When anode pulse disappears, scr turns off !Omo + 12 v
until next gate and anode pulsos arrive. 5 µsec 500µsec
Equation then gives performance under radi· .I1..
ation.-J. T. Finnell, Jr. and F. W. Karpowich,
Skipping the Hard Part of Radiation Harden·
Ing, Electronics, March 4, 1968, p 122-127.
+40v
430 430
A--.IV\1\.--....-------~~-..~,
Rt
75k
-40v
REACTOR ROD DRIVE-Bridge ampliller con- isolation botwoen input and output and en• A and 8.-M. A. Hassan and T. A. Greine-
trols 100.W d-< motor for positioning control sure class B operation. Load current Is vitch, Bridge Amplifler Provides Isolation,
rods in nucloor reactor. QS and Q6 provide proportional to differonco botwoen voltages Electronics, Sept. 30, 1968, p 83.
625
TO
DIFFERENTIAL
150 AMPLIFIER OF
OSCILLOSCOPE
+
IOOmo
5 l'sec l2v -=- 12pl
_n_
HARDENED TRANSISTOR STORAGE TIME- for 2N2222 transistor, which gove saturation
Artide gives equations into which moasured or storage time of 3 µs. Equation gives
paramotors of compononts without radiation storage limo undor gamma dose ralo of 0.1
can be inserted for predidlng response undor terarad/s as 4 µs, as compared to 3.8 µs
radiation. Circuit shown Is usod wilh cro measured under actual radialien.-J. T. Finnell,
to measuro timo requirod for transistor undor Jr. and F. W. Karpowich, Skipping the Hard
lost to rocover- after being driven into salura• Part of Radiation Hardening, Electronics,
lion by loading edge of pulse. Values are March 4, 1968, p 122-127.
RUU
sr
........
1
1ATT
...
CNlCC
SS
4JO•
1 111 I
'nJo& =s csoe I
~--....JJo.ooos
C307
o.oos o.os o.s I
I
_______ JI
CALIBRATION GONTROl.S
llUECTOll
"4
I
I
~:_
ltlOI
llK
RI
2'•
-11.0
R4
S[CTION I
fRONT
SIA
SCINTILLATION METER-Can be used either as

111•11$ alpha or beta-gamma dotedor. Commercial
Eborline version PAC·IS is calibratod to give
meler reading from 0 to 2,000,000 counts per
minute of nuclear radiation in four ranges.
Article describes operation In dotall and gives
suggestiens for maintonance.-J. G. Ello, Scin-
""01 R<O) 11404 R"05 11 .. 06 11401 11409 ~409 R411 tillation Radiological Survey Metors, Electron-
IZM IZM IZM IZN 1ZM IZM IZM 22M
IZlll ics World, Jan. 1970, p 39-43.
RADIATION CIRCUITS 627
r-----...----..--------0+12v
l.2ma,
LOW NOISE FOR RADIATION DETECTOR-Sill.
con fot input staga has high input impedance
!ilK 01 2N2386
and low noise level, to provide maximum
Oz2N930 si9nal transfer from hi9h impodanco photo-
0
03 2N697 voltaic radiation dotedor. Amplifier stages

Q2 and Q3 have dlred coupling, with over-all
a-c feedback loop to give desired frequency
response. Over-all voltage 9ain is 115 at
1 lcHz:.-C. R. Seashore, Fiold-Effed Input
Sta90 Gives Low-Noise Preamp, Electronic
Design, May 25, 1964, p 70-71.
+IOV
GROUND BIAS REFERENCE
RL <0.5MEG
3
IOK
r - - -....--"'"'11~----.
RL 4 <0.5MEG
..---.,,,,.i.---.....----.
2K 2K
0.33 --,.~R
~II~-=
+6 ,• L4
-r
HARDENED-Common-base preamp, using

special hlgh·froquency small-signal transistor
having short carrier transit time, loses only
3 dB of gain in high-radiation environment. HARDENED FLIP-FLOP-Circuit is designed for
Has stabilized voltage gain, with input Im- reliable operation in high neutron fluxes, as
pedance Increased by negative feedback to required In military equipment. Base bias
base. Requires exact input and output power circuitry Is designed to prevent turn·off by
matching. Article gives circuit hardening transient pulse. Dashed lines show resistance
tochniques.-Dosignlng Hardened Equipment: poths thot can carry radiation-induced leak-
Several Methods Are Useful, Electronic De1i9n, age currents. Special transistors are used.
Juno 8, 1964, p 46 ond 411-51. Article discusses circuit hardening techniques.
-Designing Hardonod Equipment: Sevoral
Methods Aro Useful, Electronic Design, Juno 8,
1964, p 46 and 48-51.
-{)3EARPHONE
ls2 0
I
l,I __
""9·
A!.L CAPACITORS !>.6~F, 35\ldc
SWITCHED-CAPACITOR GEIGER-Printed-cir· with battery to give 300 V d-c required for throe small 9~V batteries In series.-D. J. Pis-
cult switch charges copacitors In parallel to Gelger tube. Counter will operate over 30 tulka, Panivo D-C Converter for Geiger Coun-
27 V, then connects all capacitors in series min on single charge of capacitors. Uses ter, EEE, Juno 1967, p 137.
BISTABLE NUCLEAR·REACTOR TRIP·ALARM TO ALARM QRCUITRY
DRIVER-Uses Fairchild IC apamp, with radia·

tion·monitoring transducer fed through RI
to noninvorting input. Since 0-10 V rango
of sensor is outside input limits of IC, level·
set pot is roturned to -12 V to shift input
signal levol to zero. Once adjusted, increase
of a few mV above this threshold makes IC
switch on and operate roloy driver and alarm.
Triggering repeatability is order of magnitude
better than can be obtained with more ex•
pensive discrele·componenl circuits.-K. A.
Zimmerman, The Integrated Operational
Amplifler: A Versalilo and Economical Circuit,
"Microelectronic Design," Hayden Book Co.,
N.Y., 1966, p 189-194.
GEIGER COUNTER-Operates from 1.25-V cell

1886 GEIGER VI TO MAGNETIC 82 and 300-V battery Bl, using Victoreen
1DN5 hEADPHONES
ELEMENT 1886 Geigor elomenl. Values are: Cl·C2
CI ~--~f----®J I
T
0.025 µF; Rl·R2 4.8 mog; R3 1.2 meg. Some
C2
J2 clicking is always heard, due lo normal bock·
R3 ground radiation on earth. Increaso in
clicking indicates strong sourco of radiation,
such as losl shipmont of uranium or radium.
-R. M. Brown, "104 Simple One-Tube Proj-
ects," Tob Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa.,
1969, p 122.
6V ..,,,.
.rr--411---~28
1.Sk!l
MOSFET SURVEY METER-Mosfel QI serves in

place of conventional eleclrometer tube in
providing input impedance of 100 leraohms.
Eliminates tube warm-up time, reduces weight
READ
and cost, and extends battery life. Range is 0
50 mR/hr full-scale al selling XI of range SIA
SELECTOR SET
switch, and ten limes that al other settings. SWITCH
-R. L. Brayden, Radiation Meter Uses MOSFET,
EEE, July 1967, p 129-130.
0.8pl'
......_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __._ _..._-1------lf··24V
LOW-NOISE PREAMP-Use of Mullard BFWl 1

fet's signiflcanlly reduces noise as compared when used with high-impedance rodialion Slate Radiation Deleclor, Sasto Eleclronic
lo that with conventional bipolar transistors sonsor.-Reduce Pre-Ampllfler Noiso in Solid News, England, Sept. 1969, p 2.
CHAPTER 69
Receiver Circuits
SI
IN-FLIGHT AIRCRAFT RECEIVER-Nonradiating

pocket-size rocoiver using diode detector and
two audio stages pormits listening to 110-
JI
EARPHONJ
:i
135 MHz pilot-ground transmission whilo fly-
ing, or control-tower transmissions while
visiting airport. Range is about 500 ft from
CRI
BAfiERY =
transmitter. Signals ore picked up with IN34A.S RI
three-turn loop antenna wound around baso 5K
of plastic pillbox containing entire racaivor.
-"Hobby Manual," General Electric, Owens-
boro, Ky., 1965, p 74. C2
0.01,.1
....
RIO Y0U.IM£
VAi
;:~-""'-1"'.•'"'v-H
""
...•• CIO
.01
Cll
.01
""'
I "
...
410111
••
..
].lJ(
1801C
Ct2 CZ
4700 4700
AGC
TAS
s8!6 2SBUO
si~o
ICY
l.
•
ail'Z9
t00
C20
Z2CMFO
IOV
. .,oz
A
AUCIO ""1' ••o ,,,

TR?
ZSllllK
).)tl
....
uo
~-i-----~-~~---t--it-'---+---~ ...... ,."""°"'

.....,.
•?Q
12-TRANSISTOR A·M PORTABLE-Operates for o•c lino. All capacitors with values loss 535-1605 kHz.-IR1005 AM Portable Radio,
from four 1.5-V Evoroady I 015 AA cells or than 1 ore in µF, and greater than 1 in pf. Magnavox Service Manual 1439, 1969,
equivalent or from separate 6-V d-c adaptor No-signal battery drain is 12 mA. Covers
629
+14V
C2
40µ~T
S·W CAR RADIO AMPLIFIER-loudspeaker is 16VJ,,
driven by center-tap choke having small wind·
ing that provides feedback to first stage.
Choke inductance is 30 mH and voltage ratio
of choke to secondary is 13: I. Operation is
class A.-"Transistor Audio and Radio Cir•
cuits," Mullard ltd., London, 1969, p 90.
C5
47nf'
Vol um«
control
R5 ANT
,.
DETECTOR
t·±tt 11"@1"'
Cl6
I-:- 68pf' ~-----4
C8
.047
I CIO
200/6,4V
R4
56011
Rl2
&an
C9 Cll
0.1 _200/ 6.4V
RIO
IK
Rl7 18K
~-
5 4
PORTABLE A·M RADIO-Single Amperex TAO. 2N4105 and 013 is 2N4106). Output power tide gives construction dotalls.-L Auer and
I 00 IC (shaded area) includes all active stages is then 1.5 W into 4-ohm speaker. T3 ls H. Thanos, Experiment With One-IC Radio,
for driving earphone, and requires only two Amporex 822-41Q.42010 ceramic i·f filter. Cl Radio-El1tdronics, Nov. 1969, p 49-51.
additional transistors for speaker (012 is is 280-pF two-section tuning capacitor. Ar·
RECEIVER CIRCUITS 631
.
0--0
9VOLTS
100 150-MHz FET-Battery-operated circuit gives
pld
14-clB gain with low noise for 2-meter re-
ceiver. Coils Lt, L2, L3, and L4 are respec•
tlvely 5~ turns tapped at 1 V4 turns No. 26,
INPUT Mf(OUTPUT 9'h turns No. 34, 5 turns No. 26, and 1V4
___
L4
turns No. 26 at low end of L3, all wound on
._ brass-slug ceramic fonns.-"Tips on Using
FET's," HMA-33, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1969.
VIA,B,C •6AFll
1-COMPACTRON 5-W RECEIVER-Covers 250

kHz lo 16 MHz with plug-in coils. Uses triode
regenerative detector, triode audio voltage
omplifler, and pantode power ampliflor.
Choice of antenna connections is provided ta
increase selectivity and tuna out dead spots.
~°l
c u
Can servo as backup In case larger receiver
breaks down. Article givos construction
details and coil-winding dota.-"Hobby Man-
ual," Goneral Electric, Owansbaro, Ky., 1965,
p 108.
('J2
_r-!>oJ3
THREE POSSIBLE
ANTENNA CONNECTIONS
... " .. 100

I.I•
••••
___, _,
.:,............_____
L---------------~
CLOCIC•11MlR lllCHAft9!1t
r
I ~............i....;l
I :,.. TH.. .l.Tl:D ClftcutT
I ______________________ J
L----------------------------
I
CONYCllJTlft ttT '"'

AllllP.
IND'-'·
AMP.
AUOIO DtUYllll AUCNO OVT~UT
I
E. Q. Carr, World's First Single-Chip lnto-

IC RADIO-G·E Model P1740 radio uses single ponents. External components include bat- 9rated-Circuit Radio, f/edronics Warld, Nov.
15-load integrated circuit for all active com- tery charger in clock-timor.-J. R. Cacciola and 1966, p 44-46.
ANTENNA
L3 Cll
lmh SOµf
VOLUME
CONTROL RS C9
SK 122
l2 .,,. .,,.
lmh
R4
33K I.02
CS
.,,.
MOSFET A·M REFLEX-Extremely high Input

t~l~
Impedance of mosfet makes Input tank cir· signals. R·f output signal is flltored and fed and flltored Into speaker.-C. R. Perkins,
cult detarmlne seladlvlty. Q2 buffers signal to peak detector farmed by R9, DI, C6, RB, "Appllcatlon of MOSFET Devices to Electronic
Into low-Impedance Input of rellex ampllfler CS, and 12. Resulting audio signal is fed Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach, Cal., 1968,
Q3.Q4.Q5 that ampllfl" both r·f and audio through volume control R5 back into amplifler p 39.
FERRITE OSC'fMIXER BANDPASS

RF ANTENNA FILTER
11
__ ___
II
11 Lz
II,,,
u,,r
11
II Dz
,. . . . :.'.l
15 II BAl63 ,,,
1.8 I-F
pf
f5pf 1s,,r
200
ph c,
,,,
47
240
pf
220k 33k
+
O.Spf
-- -6v
·I T0-12'
A·M VARACTOR-DIODE TUNER-Doveloped In ing mixer transistor QI operates in common• Design Problems In Varador·Dlodo Tuners,
Europe for covering 510-1,610 ltH1 broadcast base mode. Maximum voltage required far Efedronie1, Jan. 6, 1969, p 88-92.
bond. Provides tuning accuracy and stability tuning across bond is 12 V. Varador diodH
neodld for pushbutton tuning. Solf-osclllat· should be matchod.-H. Keller, Overcoming
C2 C3 VLF WHISJLER RECEIVER-Covers vlf portion

f--"i
0.02,.1
I of r.f spectrum, from 4 to 16 kH1, for llston•
Ing to whistlers (descending-frequency
whistles caused by lightning), chirping and
cliclclng sounds at sunrise known as dawn
chorus. and sounds aHeciated with launchln9
of spacecraft and flrin9 of nuclear explosions.
Navy code broadcasts on 14.8 kH1 may also
be hoard. Loop antenna is 200 turns of No.
\.I R4 25 enameled wire weund en frame consisting
6.2K
of two 4-ft pieces of weed formed Into X by
Bl notdiin9. Rotate loop to point where power•
L - - - 4 - - + - - -......~<Hll + line hum 11 minimum. J1 should 90 to hl9h 0
SI 6V impedance input of hi-fl amplifter.-"A Mod·

ern Transistor Workbook," Radio Shack, Bos-
ton, Ma11., 1965, p 43.
+6V
Ill
IC PRODUCr DE1'ECJOR-IC r·f amplifier Is

connected to provide doublo-ondod out-of.
~-------OUTPUT·Z "•
phase output whon driven through 50-ohm
adlustable feed by double-sideband signal
from separate suppreHed-carrler modulator.
-"Lin oar Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., IC-41, p 230.
W.,4
n,·---+----'·
MODULATED
SIGNAL
••
D •
10 1.0 J: l
MllH IZ
•tlVOC
LOW
I··
ZS"!I.
••I
-·"°"
UGHT
llULTIMTH llDIU NOIH

lllOICATOll OUT IN
HI-Fl l·F WITH IC-Usos Integrated circuits do- first two IC'1 to Improve phase linearity over stereo 1ignal.-L. W. Fish, Jr,, and K. J, Peter,
1l9ned for H. H. Scott f-m rocelvors by Mato• onlire bandwidth. Output terminal 10 drives New Concepts In Hi-Fl Receiver De1l9n, Elec-
rola, with quartz crystal flltor (C-301) between "Perfed Tuno" lamp to show exact tunin9 of fronin World, Feb. 19691 p 32-34 and 69-70.
RJ • 14"../
J9kn
R4
l·Sk.n
TRz
R1 IWX88
21kn TR3
A0161
TR1
BCl48
or ec1oa R1
Ra C5
500 VAl077
C1 R6
32 .Cl. IOOOµF IOV
o--t 1-skn
IOOnF
Rz C4
IOOkA C3 TR4
200µF IOnF A.0162
IOV
Rg
1800
Rs
15.tl
6-W CLASS B AMPLIFIER-Designed for use in this reduces effect of ripple in supply and
car radio. Circuit is conventional except that increases input resistanco by bootstrapping
decoupling capacitor C2 in input stage is re- base resistor.-"Transistor Audio and Radio
turned to emitter of TR1 instead of to chassis: Circuits," Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, p 92.
II.TV
B20K IOOK
+ 0.1
100 -
ALL-SILICON A-M RADIO-Higher gains and

D2 only &lightly higher cost make four-transistor
GE all-silicon table radio feasible for mass pro•
ductlon. 25-W lamp used to drop line volt-
o 1• 2N2926 IREOI OR 2112715 OR 2N3394 age costs about same as powl!r resistor but
Oz,Os,2N2926 IORANGEI OR 2N2716 OR 2N3393 Bl· llOV, 25W LIGHT BULB
also performs regulating function.-lhe 2~
a•. 2N2196 OR 2112107 (ATTACH TO HEATSINKI Tl EX-516Bl4K/IKI
Transistor, Electronic Design, Oct. 12, 1964, p
DI SI DIODE 1114009 T2 13964 ( IK/IK I
02 GE OIOOE IN60 T3 35K/100 411-42.
03 1111692. T4 250/8
II USE I.Op! WITH 2112926 AND 2N3391 SERIES TRANSISTORS, O.Spl WITH 2N2715 SERIES.
EXTERNAL
ANTENNA
y
C1
L1
0\ N Channel FET HEP 802

.1 EXTERNAL 02 NPN Transistor
PNP Power Tr•nsistor (Germ11uum)
.,,. GROUND OJ
01 Si\ln•I Diode
Cl 365 PF D V ariablo Capoc:itor
C2 0.01 µF Disc:. Ceramic
CJ 0.02 µF Oise. Ceramic
0.1 µF Disc. Ceramic lmh
C4 8.2K
LI Fatttte Antenna Coil (V&u1blt)
R\,R2 4 700 U Resistor Y. Wan 10%
RJ 1'MEG UResistor y, Wan 10%
R4 500,000 n Trim Potentoomtttr
RS 100,000 H RHtstor Y, Wan 10% 6.ZK
RS 50,000 1l Potentiometer
SI Sw•lcl\ Part of RS +&v .....
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~+-
3-TRANSISTOR A-M RADIO-Use of fet as r-f VLF RECEIVER-Uses Darlington circuit as Q.

amplifler contributes to selectivity and gain multiplier to give good selectivity over entire
of trf circuit feeding diode detector and two- vlf band. Tl has 1 :15 turns ratio. All tran•
transistor audio amplifier driving small sisters are 2N527. Output can be fed to
spealcor. Requires 12 V, obtained from eight ordinory R·C amplillers to give desired out-
1.5-V cells in series. R6 is volume control, put level.-R. W. Couch, Simple VLF Receiver
and R4 is bias adjustmont.-Caloctro Hand- Uses Single Tuned Stage, "400 Ideas for De-
book, GC Electronics, Rockford, Ill., FR-69-C, sign Selected from Electronic Design," Hayden
p 41. Boole Co., N.Y., 1964, p 33.
Ll
.Ol Xl
VOLTAGE-DOUBLER CRYSTAL SET-Gives best
L2 C2 performanco with crystal headphones or w.hon
OUTPUT connected to high-impedance Input of audio
C3 .1 amplifier. The longer the antenna, the louder
X2 the signal.-J. P. Shields, "Novel Electronic
Circuits," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis,
Ind,, 1968, p 64.
= Ll • lAFAYETTE 132-H-4111
l2 • 5TURNS 120 WIRE WOUND
AROUND CENTER OF Ll
X1, X2 • 1N34A
TWO-TUBE BROADCAST-BAND REFLEX-First

tuba, Vt, serves as r-f amplifier and then as
a·f ampllfler, to minimize number of com•
ponents required. Article givos construction
details, including those for a-c power supply
required.-C. Groen, Build Twofer-Flex, Radio-
TV Experimenter, Jun-July 19'9· p 37-41.
,I
I
I
6.3 VfC
taTER
taTER
REFLEX-RECEIVER SUPPLY-Output terminals

n
':"
-
I
I DOUBLE-SIDEBAND
SUPPRESSED CARRIER
l.7DI + l.6D9 MHr
-6V
are numbered to correspond to those of two• PRODUCT DETECTOR-Use• ~C i-f amplitler

tube broadcast-band rotlex recelvor shown with only three extornal cqmponont1 for
in this chapter. Article givo1 construction handling 1uppreuod-carrler signals. Output
details. 11 Is NE·51H noon lamp.-C. Green, capacitor provide• t1ltorln9 for high·froquency
Build Twofer°Flox. Radio-TV Experimenter, component• of oscillator tlgnal at output.
Jun-July 1969, p 37-41. Goin Is maximum for otclllator volta9e range
of 1 to 2 V.-"Unoar Integrated Circuit•,"
RCA, Harriton, N.J., IC-41, p 158.
IMPROVING SHORT-WAVE RECEIVER SELEC-

TIVITY-Insertion of Miiier 8902-B IC l·f strip,
including dotoctor, ahead of audio in budget.
priced short-wave rocelvor boo1t1 gain 100X
(40 dB) and gives additional 18 dB of sele<·
tivlty at 10 kHz. Receiver must have 455-
..-~ ....-e~~~~---&v
kHs i.f. Will operate with althor positive or ~05 /SEE TEXT
na9otlve grounds. Selactlvlty Is greatly im· CZ OUTPUT
proved by using Millar 8901-8 1-f transformer -"--'-•+~E-To AF
ahoad of modulo. Article 9lvo1 construction AMPLIFIER
details and Instructions for connecting to set. RI
8901-B 8902-8 4700
C2 Is 0.01 µF.-H. Friedman, T1io 100Xer, Elo- IF TRANSFORMER JF AMPLIFIER
mentary Electronia, Mar.-Apr. 1970, p 43- MODULE
48. +6
+20v
tOOk
O.tp.f
INPUT ---1 . . , _ _ _ ._ __.,._~
1
E1 -----i
tSk I 330pf
"':'
...
0.1p.f
REFERENCE--+,__-------------' output signal. Will operate up to 30 MHz.-
E4
TRANSFORMERLESS PHASE-SENSITIVE DETEC- signals roach both diodes simultaneously but A. H. Hargrove, IC-Size Photo Detector
TOR-Extracts phase and amplitude modulo· out of phase. Reference voltage combines Doesn't Need Any Inductors, Electronics, Aug.
tlon data from 20-MHz l·f signals. Incoming with diode outputs by vector addition to give 4, 1969, p 91-92.
+6V
r~
•6V
ENVELOPE DETECTOR-Uses IC i·f amplifler
with fixed 15K resistor connedod extornally ENVELOPE DSECTOR-Operation of IC i-f om•
to · roduce emittor current of output transl•· plifier with external connections shown 9iv11
envelope detector with distortion below 3%
tor, to 9lve op•ratin9 point providin9 re-
quirod nonlinearity for detection of audio for input signals from 10 to 100 mV. Riter
modulation signal. Distortion Is below 3% capacitor acro11 output removes r.f signal
from deteded audio output.-"Llnear Into•
for input si9nols from 12 to 60 mV.-"linaar
grated Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41,
Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC·
p 156.
41, p 156.
Dt R1
HP3001 lk O.lph
TRANSISTOR +t2¥d-C
SWITCH
c,
C2
t,OOOpl l'.'
(0.Spf ci
l,OOOpt
TO MIXER
(
C4
0.5pf
EMITTER- TUNABLE- COLLECTOR-

BIAS RESONANT REGULATION
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
-12 vd·c +t2vd·c
FAST-ON OSCILLATORS-Tunable oscillators In shunting out signal until receiver 11 tuned to providing oscillations within 50 m1.-A. Ba.
wide-spectrum communication oqulpment ore that band. Whan signal is desired, command rono, P l N DlodH TurR On Microwave
0 0
kept in oscillatlon continuously to prevent sl9nol is applied to transistor switch, restor- Bonds Fostar, ff1ctronlc1, April 29, 1968, p
transistor wormup delay, with p·l·n diode D1 in9 naturally high resistance of diode and 67.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits IR tho category of this chapter, use tho index at th• back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 70
Regulated Power Supply Circuits
2N2108+
DELTA 207
HEAT SINK
12 V AT 100 MA WITH REFERENCE AMPU·
FIER-Uses zener and npn silicon transistor
11-----4------n+
packaged together, such as RA·I to RA-3B, to
perform functions of voltage reference and I.SK
error voltago amplifier for precision power 4.7K 4.7K
supply. Output voltage regulation Is better
than 0.3% for line voltage variations of 10%.
Output is 12 V at 100 mA.-T. P. Sylvan, An
J
Integrated Reference Amplifler For Precision
Power Supplies, General Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 90.15, 1963. +soo"f
sov
25V
IA 2.2K
IN3639(4)
+15
5.6V
3k
+
01
2N4250
T1
02
2N3566 4.3k
10k
12k
02a
2N3638
•
3k
3300 -15
BIPOLAR 15 V-Provides sufficient power for age regulation is within 0.2% for loads from shunt regulator driven by current source Q1.
up to four averago-slze IC's, delivering up 600 ohms to infinity and a-c: · line voltage -R. W. Forsberg, Shunt Regulator Has Opti·
to 25 mA with only 1-mV p-p ripple. Volt- changes from 105 to 125 V. Uses high-bota mized Gain, EDN, May 15, 1970, p 53.
638
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 639
aa!lvOl.T.S MIN.
asOVOl.1'1
IOOMA.MAX.•
+
"1•
...
E
TO •AS 7,
ex•1.H~7
HlATlAS
...
...
,
.SUl'l'l.V
o•asv
C, Ct-16 pf 600V Li-15 H 200 Ma R1R.-l Meg. 350 V AT 100 MA PLUS BIAS-All-tube ver·
Ca C.--1pf600V k-15H 60 Ma R..--10 K 10 Watt slon of series regulator uses separate diode
C.-8pf 450V R,-470 K R.-500 K Pot. for adjustable o-35 V negative bias supply.-
C.-4 pf600V Rs R. Ru-330 K Ria-20 K 5 Watt "Essential Characteristics," General Electric,
C. Cr-40 pf 450V R.--100 K Ru-5 K 5 Watt Owensboro, Ky., 1969, p 348.
C.-0.1 pf 600V R.-20 K 10 Watt Rir-5 K Pot. 5 Watt
01
T• t8V
J 0
02
RI
ion
R2
4.7
R3
10
kQ
TR2
TR4
C3
2)1F'
Output
9-"v
II~
tkO
kO
Cl C2 R6
~00 ~00 TRI .-i1--------<~oo
µF' )IF' n
03 R7
R4 lkO
1·2
kQ
14 V WITH LONG-TAILED PAIR-Two of four transistor regulator. Changes in output cur• 250 mA.-Applications of tho 8FY50, BFY51
BFY52 transistors are arranged as long-tailed- rent do not affect current or voltage of zoner and BFY52, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
pair differential amplifier giving higher gain D3. Regulation is 1.5% over output voltogo Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 428, 1965.
and better regulation than conventional three. range of 9 to 14 V, with load currents up to
.840 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANU' AL
MDA942·3 or
4CIN40021 R2
11-32 V D·C AT 700 MA-Use of series-post
·Oii--- RC
I k
IW
REOULAT£0
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
rogulaton provides eittremely good regula·
tlon, low rlpplo, and low output Impedance,
with oitcellent dynamic response. Can read·
lly be adapted for remoto voltage sensing,
remote programming, and currant•regulatlng
STANCOR
P64H R5 or current-limiting applications. Overcurrent
L---~-..c:·~ protection is provided by R2 and Q3.-G. V.
RI Fay, Serles-Past R09ulaton, Efoclronlcs World,
8.2 k March 1969, p 48 and 78.
111169!1 INl69!1
HIGH·POWER REGULATED A·C SUPPLY-
Output current depends on ratings of 1cr'1,
and for those shown is 32 A (3.7 kW). Uses
a-c phase control, with regulation for changes
in line voltage. RI makes peak voltage In·
crease as lino voltage increases, thereby re•
tarding firing angle of 1cr'1 and reducing
f
ll!IV
SPRAGUE
31Z286
non
voltage applied to load. RI can bo adiusted 60CPS
to hold load voltage constant for given var•
iation in line voltage. R2 determines output
voltage. Size and cost are only one-tenth
of comparable constant-voltage transformer
l 2Nl671A
O.ZJLf
and Varioc.-T. P. Sylvan, Tho Unijunction

Transistor Characteristics and Applications,
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.10, IN169!1 1Nl69!1
1965, p 79.
01
L1
2N3792 R13 TRIAD C-49-U
AC~ D5
1N4001
IN~
R9
200 C3
MR1121 2W 1 l'F
R10 100 v
R11
12 k 3.3 k
RS C2 + REGULATED
51 5 µF DC
50V OUTPUT
D4
6k
C1 + D3 1N4732
sov 1N3880 In series
2500 µF
R14
......,1---+~+-4.._-1~2son
04 1W
MPS6575 + cs
25 l'F R12
50 v 2.4 k
38-V D-C PWM SWITCHING PREREGULATOR operating frequency is about 16.5 kHz and about 150 mV below 38 V at full load.-
-UsH voltage-11n1ln9 property of Schmitt is estentially constant from no load to full "Semiconcluctor Power Circuits Handbook,"
trigger Q3-Q4 to provide drive for Darling• load of 5 A. Output voltage dropa only Motorola, Phoonlit, Ariz., 1968, p 3-21.
ton series switch Ql.Q2. With values shown,
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY OIROUITS 641
+35V
+Z&V
1N4003
T1 141 Of 07 +C10 AUDIO AMPUFIER TEST SUPPLY-Developed
TRIAD
R·2011A C8 llOV 21111F for testing 50-W audio ampliflers. Provides
llO y
4DDDllP filtered but unregulated 35-V outputs of both
polarltle1 for output transistors and zener•
regulated 25 V for Input stages. Two 6.3-V
UllV
so-
ONO windings are used as bucking voltages lie-
cauH secondary voltage of transformer was
too high. Both positive and negative sup-
+ Cll
plies should come on at same time, to pre•
+
C9 llO y 20pF vent damage to transistors If power 11 op•
ODY plied to only one 1lde.-"Semlcondudor
Power Circuits Handlloolc," Motorola, Phoe-
08 Dll nix, Ariz., 1968, p 5-50.
-28 y
2N37ee
-311V
Al
100
01
Tl 18Y
14-V ADJUSTABLE-Gives 2% regulation for

output voltage range of 9.5 to 14 V d-c and
Cl C2
up to 250 mA load. All transistors aro !100 !100
BFY52, diodos D1 and D2 are BYIOO, and
D3 Is OAZ202.-Applications of tho BFY50, "" ""
BFY51 and BFY52, Philips, Pull. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 428,
1965.
R2 R3 A5
111•-22v 56Jl. 470.ll. •70.n.
o, D3 c,
r~
OA81 OA81
Mains
ONIOFF" 2•0V
1811
IA FulQ 22011
20011
R4
7.n.
.ow
St
02
8'1'100
I. N £
BENCH SUPPLY FOR TRANSISTORS-Output Is most transistor circuits. Cannot lie damaged Rogulator (Zoner) Diode•,'' Phillps, Pub. Dept.,
adlustable from 0 to 15 V d-c at 0.5 A and lly accidental short-circuits, as long as trans- Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The Netherlands, p
partially stabilized, to meet requirements of former secondary can supply 2.5 A.-"Voltage 38.
ZENER: ALLIED Z439358 13. 9111 -----.oREGULATED

+164V
Xl
X3 e lOmA 164-V NEON·REGULATED SUPPLY-Provides
two stable voltages at low current, for op·
•
~xz
F--+-_..;:;_.....,__,V\/<..--+----l~IJ..+--o+l60V plicotions such as counters, oscillators, and
1Nl763 lOK REGULATED timers. Consists of half-wave voltage
'JN Vl @ lOmA
200V • Z82Rl5 doubler, neon regulator, and zener dlode.-
110-120 + + W. G. Miller, "Using and Understanding Min-
1Nl763 40J.lf
VAC 350V vz iature Neon Lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., lndi·
anopolis, Ind., 1969, p 80.
• Z82Rl5
T2-90-120 V, 10 A Variable 03
Autotransformer, Superior Type F236 2N5170
MDA942·3 or
120-V A·C REGULATOR-Clrcuii holds voltage T2
across 12-ohm load within 2% of 120 V by
regulating 90-V input to stepup transformer
T2. Load current is 10 A. Circuit has no
feedback, but regulation is provided by T2.
02 ond 03 are both pulsed ot same time by
RLOAD
ujt QI through Tl, but only the one thot is 105 TO 125 V 112m
forward-biased by supply voltage at that AC
instant turns on. R5 and R6 interact and POWER
may require several adjustments after load SOURCE
change or supply voltage change, to keop
load volta9e exactly at 120 v.-"Semicon·
R5
ductor Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola, 1W
Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 3-28.
56'1
IW
+
l.5K
IN821
DI
IN3605
02
+ 50011f
50V
+ 500.Q
+ 2511f
(2) 2Nll31 25V
25V
IA R2 R3
4.7K 2.2M 2.2K
IN3639(4)
REFERENCE AMPLIFIER WITH DARLINGTON- Output current is 100 mA. 2N2785 Darling• at full load aro below 10 µ.V.-T. P. Sylvan,
Chan9e in 12-V output volta90 is less that ton Is used as series re9ulator. R3 is ad· An lnte9rated Rofarence Amplifier for Pre-
0.0001% for 10% change in a·c line volta9e. justed to oplimize regulation. Output im· cision Power Supplies, General Electric, Syra-
pedance is 0.03 ohm, while ripple and noise cuse, N.Y., No. 90.15, 1963.
C 1C3 = 500 microfarads, 25 volts, R 1 R& = 220 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%

electrolytic R2 470ohms, l/2watt, 10%
C2 =
5000 microfarads, 25 volts, elec- R3 = 6800ohms, l/2watt, 10%
trolytic R4 = 10,000 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
Rs Rs = trimmer potentiometer,
c, = 100 microtarads, 10 volts, elec- 5000 ohms, Mallory MTC-1
trolytic or equivalent
CR 1CR2CR3CR, = silicon rectifier, R7 potentiometer, 5000 ohms, lin-
RCA SK3030 ear taper
CR 6 = zener diode, 6.8 volts, I watt S1 switch, 120 volts, I ampere,
CR6 "' zener diode, 12 volts, I watt single-pole, ~ingle-throw
F 1 = ruse, I ampere, 120 volts T1 transformer, primary 115 volts,
Q 1 "' transistor, RCA SK3027 secondary 15 volts, I ampere,
Q2Q3 = transistor, RCA SK3020 Stancor No. TP-4 or equivalent
12-V VARIABLE-VOLTAGE-Full-range supply section uses two zeners connected in opposi·

provides maximum of 1 A at any voltage up tion.-"Hobby Circuits Manuol," RCA, Harri·
to 12 V, operating from a-c lino. Regulator son, N.J., HM-90, p 54.
+35V DELCO
DTG·llO
IN3492 IN3492
9.W.
IA 1\llbtt
SLO·BLO + %11111'
'!00011f
11f 40V.
100\L
tt7V.
80'\, +
to0Jtf
tt7V:52VCT
+ +
25V.
* -a ALTERNATE lll·C SECTION OF D6QA

100 uf/2!1V. MAY IE usm.
llB492R 92R !00011f
40V
20•V D-C FOR TRANSISTOR STEREO AMPLI·

FIER-Can handle two SO·W powor ampli-
I v I
Rors. Sories regulator In output is optional. ·315V I I
-50 Watt Audio Powor Amplifler Dosign, ~ - - - - - -y- - - - - - ..
Dolco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., No. 36, 1967. Optlonal R19ulotor*
0-20 VAT 20 MA-Commerclolly available ot iustable down to zero, with negative-feedback
$48 for single output or $87 for two identfcal regulator circuit maintaining constant voltage
units sharing common power tran1former. with low ripple ot any setting, regardless of
Overload-Indicator lamps glow brightly wh11n vorlotions In load or a-c line voltage.-RCA
output currant appreclobly exc1111ds full roted Models WP·700A, WP-702A Power Supplies,
load of 200 mA. Output is continuously ad- Eledronics World, March 1969, p 68-69.
01 • 2N363B SERIES SWITCH

200 Oz• 2N4356
03• SE9060
04 • 2N3643
130
35
f
E1N
l'L914
© @
10.V IC SWITCHING REGULATOR-Two RTL 20 mV p-p. Differential amplifier (at right) changos duty cycle of IC mvbr at left and
AND gates, on. used os differential omplifler operates 01 error detector by sonsing differ- 1erl11s switch 03.-M. English, Voltogo Regu-
and the other as ostable mvbr, give load ence between reference voltage ..t by RI ·R2 lator Built From Two AND Gatos, Electronic.,
regulation of 0.2'MI from no load to I A for ond output voltage topped by R4. Amplifler Dec. 23, 1968, p 57.
output of 10 V. Output ripple Is less than then produces error current from QI that
R1 R2
10 V at 250 MA-Furnish111 well-Altered and
stable voltage. fer any transistor drcult re- D, Q,
quiring 9 to 10 V. Article gives construction RJ
details. Parts values are: Rl 1; R2 2.4; R3 T1
150; R4 200; c1-c2 500 µ.F; Dl HEP154; D2
HEP101; Ql HEP230; Fl 0.25 A; Tl 117 R.
V:12.6 V Triad F-25X.-"Solld State Projects
Manual," Motorola, Phoenix, Aris., 1968, p
41-43.
II +
c,
+
Ci Di
---...
l2l
Rs
~w1w----------~ + lBV !ZV
18K 'JN 2" RECUlATED
50mA 0-4mA
2DOPIV
lOIJf
200V
llSVAC
C3
LOW-VOLTAGE NEON REGULATOR-18·V rof- 20 V AT 100 MA-ProvidH 0.5% replation

oronco is achiovod at output by algebraic addl· and short-circuit protection at parts cost under
tlon of no9ativo 100-V maintaining voltage of $10. To convert to negative 1upply, change
Vl to positive 82 V of V2. Regulator faa· both n-channol fot's to p-channol and change
turos common ground and is accurate over Q3 to pnp tran1l1tor.-H. Wu, Dosignln9
wido temperature rango.-W. G. Miiier, Power Supplies with FETs, EEE, Dec. 1968, p
"U1in9 and Under1tanding Miniature Noon 68-69.
Lampi," H. W. Sams & Co.; Indianapolis, Ind.,
1969, p 34.
-24• d-c
--------+----- AT tomp
5!l.
!Ow
l,300p.f 2.5k
I.50v 3w
IN3029
50p.f 24v
50v ZENER
c, + 07
50p.f INIOB2
t50v
05 + IN30449
1NIOB2 IOOv
Cz Os
50p.f INI082
.._----~~---...------liillf-----.rirTTii----+-'\.Al<'-'.,_____ -IOOvd~
+ UTC H·70 AT Bma
150v IOh 925fi 30-V rms valta9e at transformer secondary.-
24 and 100 v WITH DIODE MULTIPLIERS- transformer secondary. Each capacitor- M. E. Conver.., Multiplier Stages Replace
Can provldo one output In ran90 of 100 to diode multiplier boosts no-load d-c output of Power-Supply Transformer, floctrenict, Dec.
200 V and another below SO V with slnglo previous stage an amount equal to 1.4 times 9, 1968, p 84,
IN400S
(41
DIGITAL COUNTER SUPPLIES-Isolation trans-

former is usad in 170-V supply, and 6.3-V
3-A filament transformers in the 5·V supplies
far precision 50-MH:i: CB frequency monitor.
-F. E. Cody, A SO-MH1 Digital Counter, Elec·
fronics World, March 1969, p 41)-42 and 61.
~r
Rt R2
1 5~ 470
2W DESK CALCULATOR SUPPLY-Report gives de·
1~
f
-12!; VAC
c.
2~1'F
sign procedure for meeting pawor supply
Vee requirements for various types of small tran-
l
~ov
sistorized calculotors, with one circuit os ex•
l ample. Intended for operation from 220-V
50-Hz line, but tronsformor winding data in
12 V D-C FROM A·C LINE-Unused gato in report con readily be adjusted far 120-V op-
Amelco 303CJ multiple-gate IC may bo can· eration. Provides 3% stabili1otian far 12-V
ne<ted as shown ta provide regulated 12 V outputs, and 8% stobili1ation for higher out•
d-c for digital IC and reed relay. Other puts. Series regulators are used with zeners
NAND or NOR gates could bo used as woll. and voltage-dependent resistors in low-volt-
Will provide up to 10 mA.-B. Horn, Sparo IC age supplies.-A. P. Tanis, Design of Power
Gate Serves os Regulator, EEE, Fob. 1970, p Supply Units far Electronic Calculators,
115-116. Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcama Div., Eindhaven,
The Netherlands, Na. 833, 1967.
MDA942·3 or
4(1N4002) R2
T1
R3 R4
AC 1.5 k 1 k
LINE
II 1W 1W
REGULATED
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
STANCOR
P6469 RS :i.
B
15 k
A 1W
05 R6
1N5240
8.2 k
32·V D-C WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION values were chosen ta limit maximum currant mA for outputs bolaw 25 V.-"Somicanductor
-Output voltage is adiustable ovor ranga to about 700 mA, which means that voltage Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoe-
of 11 to 32 V by RS, with avercurrent pro• regulation is degraded far loads above 500 nix, Ariz., 1968, p 3-12.
tectian provided by R2 ond 03. Circuit mA at higher output voltages and obave 600
12-V 500-MA CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE-

Ripple is below 1 %. CB is circuit breakor
used in tv receivers. Almost any lower-lovol
pnp transistor can be substituted for the 2N·
414.-M. S. Rifkin, Variable Low-Voltogo
Power Supply, Electronics World, Oct. 1967,
p 79.
100 V D·C FROM A·C LINE-Modilled bootstrap

arrangement, with Fairchild p.A709 opamp as
control element, gives regulation better than
0.01 % for output adjustment range of 60 V
below moximum. Power transistors ore used.
INPUT
120-170v Article contoins 13 other IC opamp opplica•
tion circuits. DI, D2, ond D3 are seners.-
OUTPUT
100v J. F. Gifford and M. Markkula, Linear IC's:
Part 5, Ins and Outs of Op Amps, Eledronics,
R1 C3 Nov. 27, 1967, p 84-93.
9.IK 51&1
IW
ISOv
,----
\
--.\
\ \
\
29k
B
1/4amp ~ V38•45rms
v29 •30rms Your
V1 •15rms
8
f TO POSITIVE l+I LIN_E_ _..y V30UT • 30y d·c
UNMARKED DIODES CA210 v2our • 20 v d·c
•MEASURED AT FULL LOAD Vtour • IOv d·c
!500mal is Rlamont transformer rated 6.3 V at 9 A,
0.1-30 V WITH ZENER-Developod to provide with 6.3 V winding replaced with No. 22 wire
wide ran90 of ro9ulator volta9os ot maximum to give taps at 11, 22, and 32 V.-B. M.
looding of 500 mA, for testin9 transistorized Wajer, Zener Power Supply Answers Current
oscilloscope circuits durln9 development. T1 0.2 Problem, Electron/cs, Jan. 22, 1968, p 71-72.
DIFFERENTIAL LOW-VOLTAGE REFERENCE- +l1V fMX

Output voltage Is difference between main• 50mA 8.2K lW fN ADJUST
taining voltages of neon lamps at points A 200PIV ADJUST
and B.-W. G. Miiier, "Using and Understand·
ing Miniature Noon Lamps," H. W. Sams & + 50i.f
Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 32. llOVAC 20CN
OUT
Vl
5AB-B
l
+
117V ··~·
~v
eo~
SWITCICD
OUTLCT
30 AND 50 V D-C FOR TRANSISTOR STERJ!O-
Provides unregulated balanced 50-V, plus 30-
V ro9ulat11d, for handlin9 bath 80-W channels
of all-transistor steroo system. Regulator is
series-typo using :zoner for reforonce.-160
Watt Storeo Audio Power Amplifler Design,
Delco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., No. 35, 1968.
Tl
4UV
50
""'
r
T~ +Sr
.,_~~~~~~~~--i,__~~~~~~~--___l_______jov
+270V
COUNTER SUPPLY-Provides regulated 270 V
and two unregulated voltages for decade
counter tube chain. Can be oporated from
120 V a-c line by using appropriate powor
transformer. Uses Z806W gas trigger tube
os voltage regulater.-G. F. Jaynes and S.
Zilkha, Trigger Tube Coupling Circuits far the
ZS04S Stopping Tuba, Phillps, Pub. Dept., El·
coma Div., Eindhaven, Tho Netherlands, No.
15, 1965, p 16-25.
D7
KWO • lllOV
7-15 V WITH OVERLOAD PROTECTION-Usos

sv one pnp and two npn transistors with other
ZENER inexpensive components. Overload cutout
current lncroasos with output voltage settln9
Rz of R2. Chooso QI to withstand full d-c In•
IK put voltoge under short-circuit conditions.-
W. F. McCarthy, Regulator Power Supply Im•
proves Overload Protedion, Electronic Design,
Sept. 14, 1964, p 71.
500p.f +
r 130 300
- 0-400NO
o-•-
....
.--
D-400 V SUPPLY-Uses four subminlatura noon
voltage regulators as reference. Bias is 0-
100 V and output Impedance is loss than 10
ohms.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Noon
lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalite,
01
TYPE IN3193
R1
6.8K
IW R9
1.2K
112W
'"'-' 12ov
60Hl
Rz
51K
IW
c,
0.1,.F
200V
R1
1.5 K
112W
network. Voltage across 10-ohm load varios

loss than 2% for 20% chongo up or dowri
in linct voltago.-G. J. Granieri, AC Voltage
Regulators Using Thyristors, RCA, Harrison,
N.J., No. AN·3886, 1969.
650 ELEOTRONIO OIRCl.JITS MANl.JAL
NO TRANSFORMER-Series capacitor C1 pro>-

----o+ vide• voltage-producing function of trans-
former to save space and reduce cost of
low-voltage d-c power supply using full-wave
bridge-rectifier circuit with conventional se-
REGULATED ries voltago regulator Q1. ldoal for battery
OUTPUT chargers. Value of C1 is chosen to give de-
sired rectifier output voltage, and VR 1 is
seloctod for desired regulated output. Other
components are conventional power supply
sizes and are not critical.-A. T. Crane, Ca·
pacitor Replaces Transformer in Low Voltage
Power Supply, Electronic Design, April 12,
1965, p 57.
z: f 14
100,1
•275 Vdt
MJE340
0-250 V D-C AT 0.1 A-Uses Motorola MC· 13 MC1566L

1566 IC high·veltage regulator to provldo
complete voltage regulation right up to limit·
ing current.-D. Kesner, Voltage Rogulators-
Old and New, "Stote-of·the-Art-Linears in
Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 2.5
14-20.
8.5 k 10 k 5110
• Vout
1oµFI Rl
-=- -=
Tl
+44V
six.
117V A.C.
PL2 PLI
D8
IN400ll Cl5 Cl& CIT
1100
250 Zll12
0.1 -rCl!I
~CHASSIS GROUND
NEGATIVE COMMON
RETURN
REGULATED 12, 44, and 50 V-Uses conven· for reference, while Q12 and Q13 provide -M. Chon, Transistor Curve Tracor, Electronics
tional voltage doubler with readily available series-shunt regulation that minimizes ripple. World, Jan. 1968, p 55-58, 60, and 66.
power transformer. Zener D9 provides 12 V Designed for use with transistor curve tracer.
T-1 IN3194
OUTPUT
Rz
Ik c,
Va·c
2000 "'
IN31914
$3 SCR REGULATOR-Devolopod for use with hibitive. Regulation is falri for input rango regulation.-P. Volkov, Inexpensive SCR
consumer equipment in which cost of convon• of 95 to 130 V, d-c output range is 11 to Regulator For Consumer Equipment, Electron·
tional regulated power supply would bo pro- 12.5 V for outputs up to 0.3 A, ofter which ics, Feb. 5, 1968, p 88-89.
transformer gradually saturatos and impairs
Tl
.-
Cl
4jlf
IOOOV
.1;~ II C2
4JOf
IOOOV
450 and 800 V TRANSMITIER SUPPLY-Silicon

RI
rectifiers oliminato 30-s warmup of mercury• 50K
vapor rectifiers formerly used in amateur 25 WATTS
radio transmitter supplies. Circuit shown
handles typical IOO·W transmitter. Gives
800 Vat 175 mA intermittent duty with 16% C3
load regulation and I % ripple. Other out- 20,111
600V
put is 450 V at 25 mA, with 0.02% ripple,
for proamp and oscillator circuits. Tl is
•
Stancor PC8412 ar equivalent 20G-mA trans- C4
20111600V
former having 800 V secondary.-"Hobby
Manual," General Electric, Owensboro, Ky., RZ
1101(
1965, p 182. VZ t450V TWO 2201(, 2 WATT )
( RESISTORS tit PARALLEL GROUttD
J 60v o·c
MDA1591·2
1,100~•1
+
t
SOvd·c
TRANSISTOR BlEEDER-Roplacoment of con·

ventional bleeder resistor In choke-input tllter
with transistor improves omcioncy. QI draws
520 mA at no load, just above critical value full load of 3 A, bleeder transistor curront is places Bleeder and Regulates Power Supply,
at which choke losos flltoring capability. At nogligilsle.-C. K. Fitssimmons, Transistor Re- Eloctronlu, Jan. 22, 1968, p 7~71.
12V lSmA
LOW-RIPPLE 12 V AT 35 MA-With values

shown, ripple In 12·V output Is only about lkA 3°31cA
IS mV p p.-E•Llne Transl1tor Applications,
0
Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969, SOC!uF

251/
p 47. VRI
lkA
220A
Rz
C1 5000 microfarads, 25 volts, elec·

.. R2 = 10,000ohms, I watt, 10%
trolytic RJ R& = trimmer potentiometer,
C1 "' 100 microfarads. 6 volts, electro· 5000 ohms, Mallory MTC-1
lytic or equivalent
CR rCR2 -= silicon rectifier, RCA R. = potentiometer, 5000 ohms, lin-
SK3030 ear tape:
CRJ = zener diode, 3.9 volts, 1/2 S1 c switch, 120 volts, I ampere, sin·
watt gle·pole, single-throw
F 1 = fuse, I ampere, 120volts T 1 = transformer, primary 115 volts,
Qi "' transistor, RCA SK3027 secondary 15 volts, I ampere,
Q1Q3 = transistor, RCA SK3020 Stancor No. TP-4 or equivalent
R\ .. 6800ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
4.5 TO 12 V AT 1 A-Provides limited range zoner serving as voltage rofarence far con•
of adlu1tmont for output voltage. Regula• trol transistors 02 and 03.-"Hobby Circuits
tion 11 provided by series tran1i1tor Ql, with Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM·90, p 53.
IN4003 r--~~~~~~~~~~~~~ .....

~-o+
15V
IN4003
2k
TOP VIEW
3AG
IA
500J&F + t-~~~~~--''::---+~~~~_,.~lk
50V \
TA9 THERMALLY HEAT SINKED \
9UT NOT GROUNDED ELECTRICAUl'
IN4735 2k
IMOTOROLAJ
COM.
AUDIO ic AS SERIES REGULATOR-lnoxpen· about 2.5 ohms.-H. D. Olson, Inexpensive

1ive l·W PA234 IC audio amplifier con· up to saveral hundred mA, at lower cost than Audio IC Sarvas as Regulator, Elocrronlc Do·
n•cted as shown provides regulated 15 V at di1creto componenh. Output Impedance is sign, Nov. 8, 1969, p 101.
L1
t 6.J'Z8
=
250 V WITH COMPACTRON-R4 permits ad·
117ir~ lusting regulated output from 150 V at 40
'°Ll mA to 250 V at 60 lllA. Pentode section of

6JZ8 compactron Is In load drcult 01 serl11
regulator, with triode section controllln9 grid
bias of pentode. Intended for 1moll recelv·
era and converters. Diod11 are 1Nl696.
~PINS Other values are: l1 8-H 75·mA Stoncor
ll 1&12
C1355; Tl Stancor PC8419 with 6.3 V 3 A
and 480 V CT 70 mA secondaries; RI 2.2
mes; R2-R4 1 mes; RS 470K.-"Hobby Man•
ual," General Electrlc, Owensboro, Ky., 1965,
p 187.
6.3V
12 V AT 0.5 A-Two-transistor shunt re9ulotor

and 12-V reference battery provido 0.25%
regulation. Battery current drain is nos• EVEREAOY
llgible. Ql must be able to dissipate some I •22a ""
power as load.-R. Selleck, Transistor Shunt I
I
1Mto, &
Regulator Improves Voltage Control, Elec-
i'12V- I >
I PNP I Ill
tronic Design, June 8, 1964, p 73-74, I 4.TJ'fd 2N43 I II
I 1
I
L-------------- - ----- ----- _______ J
Cz
2000p.f
24 v/300ma
MAGNETIC.RESONANCE CURRENT-LIMITING- forms low..Q series resonant circuit with ca• gives design equation. Pealc-cllppln9 action
With zoner diodes in brid9e-recti6er power pocitor In primary, to runlt current flow. malces output voltage easy to Rlter.-0. A.
supply, re9ulotin9-current drain of diodes is With circuit shown, load current remains Horna, Magnetic Resonance limits Zoner
limited by saturation of power supply. above about 250 mA until. output voltage Diodo Currant, Eloctronia, Dec. 11, 1967, p
Transformer then acts as inductance between reaches 16 V, ofter which current drops rap- 97-98.
Its primary and secondary, and this in turn idly and reaches zero at about 17 V. Article
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho cole9ory of this chapter, use the Index at the boclc
of this boolc. Checlc also tho author's "Sourceboolc of Electronic Circuits," published by
McGraw•Hill In 1968.
CHAPTER 71
Regulator Circuits
I.BK
l CONSTANT
CURRENT 100 V AT 4 A-Holds d-c output constant
within 0.2 V for maximum load variation and
25 V swing in unregulated 150.V input.
Poralleled series-regulator transistors are used
in design to stay well within safe-area rat•
ings. Three 5.y zeners in series give better
t.emperoture coemclent than I S·V Zener. Pre•
1N752 01 regulator Q6 supplies constant current to dif·
ferential amplifler and driver, to help ellmi·
nate ripplo current.-"Silicon Power Transistor
2 7K Handbook," Wostinghouse, Youngwood, Pa.,
p 6-19.
100 v.
REG.
UNREGULATED
INPUT
150V ! 25V. 3K
3K
j 22K
+ 02
2N3053
Rt D2
+
470 40,uf 154 tk
5.6v
1N708
INPUT O.OOlµf
26v d-c
FROM +
FULL 150µ1
WAVE
RECTIFIER 03
2N3565 lk
IN457A
r
o,
12v
R3 04
TRANSFORMER 68 IN457A -2.7v
CENTER TAP OUTPUT
2.7•V REPLACEMENT FOR MERCURY CEll- operating voltoge of amplifier that detects to input lino variations.-E. Luttrell, Low Volt·
Glves 0.01 % rogulation from 28.Y d·c line voltage differences. DI merely acts with age Supply Produces Good Regulotlon cit Low
and load regulotion of 1%, at ports cost Rl to establish constant voltoge source at Cost, Electronics, Jan. 23, 1967, p 91.
under $7. Zener diode 02 in regulator boosts junction with R2, making Ql less susceptible
654
REGULATOR CIRCUITS 655
IOm!I
SWITCHING-MODE REGULATOR-Uses scr in l.5K

commutating circuit. Output voltage is com· * *
pared with voltage across reference dledo
and difference usod to control current flow p~ 2.7K 250
into frequency control section of ujt oscillotor I
whose pulses trigger scr on. Frequency of
ujt thus controls output voltage. Article de·
scribes operation in detail and gives design
equations.-R. T, Windackar, Which Device for 100
High-Power Switching?, Electronic Design, µ.f
Sept. 14, 1964, p 64-69. 5.3K
TRANSISTORS 2Nl308
UNIJUNTION 2N494
SCR 2N683A
* MAGNETICS INC 51001-2A ORTHONOL CORE No.14 WIRE

FERRAMIC 03 TYPE 50t ON PRIMARY
** 50t ON SECONDARY
____..
-tJOV l.l11151&111lt:O
INPUT-_..._... LM109 (tll T01'26Y)
Rt ••H•
3 300
Ct 1%
0.1 p,F
R2
1K
IC REGULATOR FOR LOGIC SUPPLY-Requires

only three connections to provide regulation
and thermal overload protection far standard zu!~ 1 :1-~----/-~::o,. ••
I SA
5-V digital logic power supply. Gives output
currents over 1 A.-Adjustable-Output Regu• '"
CUHlaT
lator (National Semiconductor ad), Electronic ll"''

News, June 8, 1970, p 11.
•~rt
zu;:; D-+---' .. CC1Mt•1tcS '"'
••C\l Of l•I YO.UI"
sutc•~• s.11c11.
30-YOLT UNR[GULllTEO SUPPLY
~11 so
OUTPUT
c111rru1 o-iow
0-1 01
&l\. fOOA ....

OPAMP REGULATES AND PROTECTS-Shunt
regulator Q1 drives Fairchild IC operational
amplifier, with zoner Dl serving as voltage
reference. Pl adjusts opamp gain, thereby "•
UIJOO
...
11000
20 V ADJUSTABLE AT I A-Provides current•
changing output voltage over range of 6
to 25 V. At 15 V, load currant can vary from limiting overload protection. Report gives
0 to 60 mA with little effect on voltage. design procedure. R6 chango1 stabilized out•
Short-circuit current is limited to 120 mA. put volta9t In increments of 1 V within 2%.-
External low•power zenors provide 15-V "E-Une Transistor Applicatlon1," Ferranti Ltd.,
supply voltages for IC.-R. D. Guyton, IC Op· Oldham, Lanu., England, 1969, p 37.
U)Jt
£..uuu11l
erational Amplifier Makes Supply Short.Circuit
Proof, Electronics, Sept. 18, 1967, p 106. •JOY •4 SY
656 ELECTRONIC OIR011ITS MANUAL
COMMON·REFERENCE DUAL REGULATOR-

+Eo ·Eo • ·6.2(Rl/R2) Provides two voltages having different values
7
and opposite polarltles, regulated by means
+Eo • +6.2(1+R3/R4) of one zoner diode. Voltage values are de·
R3 termlned by resistor value1.-Applyln9 the
Model 8100 Monolithic Voltage Re9ulator,
+30v
0.35ma
+&v
3.4v AT 25°C
Re +0.43"4/°C
25K Zo•210HMS
Oz SE3035
R3 2N222 a,
5.6K
SENSISTOR
R4
3.3K
SENSISTOR
Rs OUTPUT
GND IOK 2·5v
IOOmA
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION-Uses sensis- IG VOLTAGE-LOWERING REGULATOR-U111
tors to tomperotur...tobillze volta9e at which Fairchild p.A709 opamp operating at unity
ranees aro chan9ed in count-t'at• meter. 9ain, with Its Input topped across zoner ref·
Output of 3.4 V Is adjustable. Temperature erence D1. Q2 provides surge protection.
coefficient is +0.43%.-5. Thomas, N·Docado Article contains 13 other IC opamp applica-
Count-Rate Motor, Electronic Design, March tion circuits.-J. F. Gifford and M. Markkulo,
15, 1965, p 34-39. linear IC's: Port 5, Ins and Outs of Op Amps,
Electronics, Nov. 27, 1967, p 84-93.
12V~
2V
0 100 ,.,.
mP-DOWN SWITCHING REGULATOR-Can be

60V u11d as d-c step-down transformer for ob-
0-IA
talnln9 low d-c volto9e from a-c Uno. Input
to re9ulotor 11 100 V d-c obtained from line
throu9h rectifier, and output Is 60 V d-c for
loads up to 1 A.-"Sllicon Power Circuits
~------<.1 +20 to +40 Vol ts
~II
MCR 2Tn
2304-2
ALT. IN9'11
10
K OUT
Ile Tl
L
IN980
~11
Tl 1 - -_ _ ,.__-+-----4--~11 +
POSITIVE SWITCHING REGULATOR-Output CORE: ARNOLD HT 5340 Dl DDl BATTERY
voltage is equal to 99% of reforonco voltage. PRIMARY 125 TURNS AWG 38
Smoll amount of positive feodback causes SEC fl 125 TURNS AWG 36
SEC 112 125 TURNS AWG 36 ult circuit, Shorting output does not app,._
regulator to switch. Avorago voltage across TRIFJLAR WOUND
output smoothing capacitor is sensed and clably increase maximum output current of
used to govern output voltage lovol and OUTBOARD-ENGINE ALTERNATOR REGULA· alternator, Servos to protect bridge rodi-
switching activity of 8100.-Applylng tho TOR-Controls 15·A d-c charging current to flors agaln1t hlgh•voltage stre11 othorwlao
storage battery by shorting output of pem occurring if alternator circuit woro openod.-
Model 8t00 Monollthlc Valtago Regulator,
alternator flold when battery Is charged, ''Zonor Diode Handbook," Motorola, Phoe-
Optical Eloctronics, Tucson, Ariz., No, 10141.
whon scr's are tri99ored by voltaga-..nsltlve nix, Ariz., t967, p 8-8.
ALT.
V;•l8±2V OUT
-t
SERIES TRANSISTOR WITH ZENER-Providos
..
MCR 1304-2
~-..-~-.
8 EC fl
...
~~.--~-
SECi2
ossontially constant output of 12 V d-c at 250
mA for input of 16 to 20 V d-c. Book gives
dosign oquatlon1.-"Voltago Regulator (Zoner) TJ.
Diodes," Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div,.
Elndhovon, Tho Nothorlands, p 35. CORE: ARNOLD f4T 6340 01 001 BATTERY
PRIMARY 125 TURNS AWG 36 OUTBOARD-ENGINE ALTERNATOR REGULA·
SEC #1 125 TURNS AWG 36 TOR-Designed for alternators havln9 porma•
SEC i2 125 TURNS AWG 36 nent•magnot flold1. Rogulah11 t5-A charging
TRlFILAR WOUND current for battery by shorting output of al-
ternator when tri99ored by uJt volt1190-
sonsing circuit. With most alternators, 1hort-
ln9 doos not approciably lncrea11 output cur.
rent. Avoids damaging bridge roctiRers with
Inductive volta90 spikos that would occur If
output circuit woro openod.-"Clrcuits Man-
02 ual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 8-4-3.
TYPE
2N3055
o,
TYPE
2N1479
22-30 V SERIES REGULATOR-U..1 throo par-

+ alleled transistors In 11rl11 with load to hold
INPUT _c2 output voltago constant by varying load cur-
40-50V OUTPUT rent. Roforenco ls zoner CR connoctod with
DC 22·30V
O•IOA roveno bias. Gives line rogulatlon within
DC 1% and load rogulotlon within 0.5%, R9
varies output voltage. Valuos: Rt 1.2K; R2,
R4, R6 0.1; R3 2K; RS 570; R7 270; R8, R10
1K; R9 1K pot; Ct t µF; C2 100 µF; CR 12-V
zonor.-"Translstor Manual," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., SC.13, p 515.
=
!,
05 TYPE
IN3193
BZY88-CSV6
'\,
120V
60H1
V.=
22V.tl0%
C2
0.561'F
zoov +
"IN THE CL.OSE01.00P REGULATOR Rs IS REPLACED BY A DI

t
v.
PHOTOCELL. RCA S02520 ANO A POTENTIOMETER
IN SERIES WITH A 6-VOLT INCANDESCENT LAMP IS t
CONNECTED IN PARALL.EL WITH THE HEATER TERMINI.LS
NOTE: ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS
CONSTANT LAMP VOLTAGE-Usod to maintain COMPLEMENTARY CONSTANT - CURRENT

constant voltage across heater of tube or fila- SOURCE-Highly stable constant-current s09rce
ment of Incandescent lamp. Full voltage Is provides stabilized 6.5 V d-c output across
applied for one half-cycle through D4, whlle load for input voltage as low as 18.5 V.-
other half-cycle Is phase-controlled by Kr High-Stability Reference Diodes BZX47 Family,
to provide regulation. Circuit Is open-loop Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
regulator with built-in protection against open The Netherlands, No. 331, 1968.
or short-circuited component. Ql has thy·
ristor characteristics approximating those of
ideal four-layer diode, switching at about 8
V.-G. J. Granieri, AC Voltage Regulators
Using Thyristors, RCA, Harrison, N.J., Appli-
cation Note AN-3886, 1969.
B+ ALTERNATOR
OUTPUT
R1 o.osn
MR322
1
+Eour lOOn
BIAS DIODE
04
2N3714
SENSING
ZENER
DIODE
2Nl539
I Sn TO ALTERNATOR
FIELD COIL
IN2609
\R•T FIELD
70n
30n JTHER- SUPPRESSION
"' MISTOR DIODE
Rs
..,.
0
THE VALUE OF RT DEPENDS ON THE SLOPE OF THE VOLTAGE REGULATION
VERSUS TEMPERATURE CURVE.
ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Moni-
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE VOLTAGES-Shunt tors battery voltage level, allowing charging
rogulator can provide any combination of current to flow from alternator when battery
positive and negative output voltages whoso voltage is low, and switching off charging
sum is equol to output of single regulated current when battery is fully charged. Uses
supply. Differential amplifier Q1-Q2 com- 1 N2609 diode across alternator field to pro•
pares ground reference (formed by R2-R3- vent buildup of high Induced voltage when
R4) to ground. Table gives values of com- coil current is Interrupted. Switching action
ponents for two combinations of input and occurs many times per second, to keop bat-
output voltages.-A. J, Mayle, Shunt Regula- tery fully charged at all timas.-"Zener Diode
tor Provides Dual Output Voltages, Elecrron- Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1967,
ics, Oct. 14, 1968, p 121-122. p 8-4.
...--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--<ALTERNATOR
OUTPUT
100
ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Used to
2Nl539 control charging rate of auto storage battery.
TO ALTERNA- Switching adion o«urs many times per sec-
TOR FIELD ond, to keep battery charge essentially con-
COIL stant at maximum value for optimum opera-
tion. Choice of thermistor resistance depends
30 on slope of curve for voltage regulation vs
1N2609
FIELD temperature.-"Circults Manual," Motorola,
SUPPRESSION Pheonix, Ariz., 1965, p 8·3·2.
DIODE
Vo 15VOL.TS
VIN lo 40mo
+ +
Z2 R3 RI
IN746 68K 4.2K
r-11-..,I
I
+
I RP
15 VAT 40 MA-Gives about 1% regulation. 600 02 soon
Developed from design equations given in 25V
R4 R5 R6
report, covering transistorized regulators hav-
270 270 270 2N3904
ing various degrees of complexity, for output
voltages of 2 to 30 V.-J. G. Rogers, Simple, ZI
Inexpensive Low-Voltage Regulators, NBS IN750
R7 R2
Technical Note 371, Natloncd Bureau of Stand· 2.2K
900
ards, Washington, D.C., 1968.
t5mtl
YIN
2200 pf
Vz
40
•·wlUWOUND SW
t 10 AVOID $"'llOUS 0$(1UATIONS,
ERROR-SENSING OPAMP-Motorola opamp IT MAY II NICUSAlV t0 CONNtCT THl
compares output voltage of power supply Wlifllt Of nus '°' tH•U .01 "' fO GROUND ·iOV
with zoner· reference voltage and adjusts cur• PWM SWITCHING REGULATOR-With d·c In· livers error slgnal to trigger Q4-Q5, for turn•
rent through serios-pass transistor accordingly. put varying 25 V above and below 250 V, ing series transistor Ql on or off in accord·
Opamp derives Its own operating power from output is constant at 200 V within fraction ance with load requirements. Off and on
Input voltage. Load regulation is bettor than of volt for 2·A load current. Efficiency varies times of Schmitt trigger change with load, as
0.1 % for currents up to 300 mA.-K. Huehno, with power output, in range of 80% to 92%. also does switching frequency, to give pulse
The Continuing Dominance of the Operational Differential amplifler Q2.Q3 senses propor- width modulatlon.-Pulse Width Modulated
Amplitler, "Stat-f·tha-Art-Linears in Ac· tional amount of ripple present in output, Switching Regulator, Delco Radio, Kokomo,
tion," Motorola, Pheonix, Ariz., 1969, p 5-13. compares it with raforonce zoner, and de· Ind., No. 39, 1967,
6mH
•V;n •Vo
·;,___.,__
2N3791 _.._.,rv
1+28 VI 1•5 VI
1N3879
56 24k
-=
Rsc 1.s
SWITCHING REGULATOR-Self-oscillating cir- 3
cuit using IC voltage regulator servos as efR- 6 4
ciont switching regulator.-D. Kesner, Voltage 15 • Co
SOµF RL
Regulators-Old and New, "State-of-the-Art- MC1560R
5
9
Unoars In Action," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1969, p 14-20. Jk
6.8 k
-=
100-V 0,3-A SERIES-REGULATED-Book gives

complete design procedure for circuit operat· +2SV
Ing from 150-V d-c Input and using 8.2-V
OUTPUT
reforonco supply.-"Sllicon Power Circuits + •
5.5K Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 215. 6
l
VouT _ _2_2_0:!-'3 8100
RI
j
1N7S5A IOK
4K LONG-LINE COMPENSATION-Used to over·

come poor regulation In system having re-
mote sensing of many physically Kattored
O·IOOK
loads. Insertion of small amount of positive
feedback into IC regulator causes voltage to
Increase in proportion to Increasing load cur·
rent.-Applylng tho Model 8100 Monolithic
Voltage Regulator, Optical Electronics, Tucson,
Ariz., No. 10141.
UJIREGULATED INPUT ~TAG£
WITH R1•IOA
) r - -..........-,, ·~---41~'Y""ILr1r\.e---<> +24 V

lOOpH
R1 R2 2A
6.g k 1oon C1
511F
25 v
REGULATED
UNREGULATED OUTPUT
INPUT RS VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
1k
C3 + +
R&
420Sl
D3 2000µF 50 v
1N3800 50 V
24-V D-C SWITCHING VOLTAGE REGULATOR- T1 - FERROX CUBE POT CORE transistors Q2.Q4. Q3 and Q4 servo as
Output is hold within 1 % of 24 V for load 3622P-3E; 100 T PRIMARY dlfforoatlal voltage comparator with 1oner
15 T SECONDARY D1. Maximum frequency of blocking oscil-
currents of 100 mA to 2 mA and for supply
voltage changes of 10% above and below lator action Is 6 kHz. at highest input voltages.
40 V d-c. Power switching transistor Ql is -"Semiconductor Power Circuits Handbook,"
controlled by feedback winding of T1 and Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p ~15.
PROPORTIONAL VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Pro·

vldes 12 V at 2 A whllo d-c input varies as
much as 15% in oithor direction from 17 V. 2N392
Voltage proportional to output is compared
to that of reference diode CR4, differential
signal is amplifled by Q3, and resulting out•
put is used to control current through series
transistor Qt In such a way that voltage 17 VOLTS
across load remains constant. Best suited .tin. 2000
for applications requiring very low internal pF
impedance to a-c load currents.-Pulso Width
Modulated Voltage Regulator, Delco Radio,
Kokomo, Ind., No. 9B, 1965.
,......~~~~~~~~~~~--~~~--i.s(NOM)
+9 to 11 01·2N371S OUT
o-.!!!...--.--~~-----e----..---.....,(
R7
RI 100
IK
REMOTE
SENSING 5 V FOR HIGH,CURRENT LOGIC-High-power
pass transistor Qt permits handling largo
R2
220 currants up to limits of hoot sink usod. In·
cludes short-circuit protoction and connection
for remote sensing of output voltage. Lo·
cation of Rs ahead of control loop damps
supply impodance and improves stability.-
04 R. C. Sanford, 'Perfect' Regulator Satisfies
06 2N3250 Logic Circuits, EON, Doc. 15, 1969, p 51-53.
2N2221 (REF.)_
S.6V (NOMl
IN752A
--
.....---------~--------~--.-_J~:__...........,_~
I
I
R8 I
I
I
07 R7 I
C3 I
I
ACLINE
19010
140 \IRMS)
1C4
T
I
500-W A.C LINE VOLTAGE REGULATOR- I
Holds a-c output voltogo within 2% of 120 oa I
I
V for a-c Input lino voltage range of 90-140
V. Uses phas-ontrollod triac Q2 to adjust
iL :
Tl I
voltage applied to output transformer. Con· I
l
trol circuit is basic ramp-and-pedestal typo I
for scr. Article gives adlustmont procoduro ................~------------------------.__------------....... ---J
and load options. Somo typos of a-c mot~rs RI •SK OHMS RS • 4.7M OHMS• DI ,02 OS• GE·Z4XL20 Cl •200pf,IOV
may not fundion properly on output because R2 • 500 OKitS R6 • I K OHMS 03,04 ALL QI • GE·2N2646 C2•.lpf
of its harmonic contont.-5. Zimmer, 500 Watt IQ • 3.3 K OHMS R7 • IOO OHMS 06,07 :~ OR 02• GE·TRIAC SC41B C3• .rpt
R4 • IOK OHMS R8 • IOO OHMS 08 SCRI • GE-C6U,Cl06Y2 C4• .l}lf
AC Lino Voltage and Powor Regulator, Gen•
L~ IOOpH
oral Elodrlc, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 201.12, 1965. Tl• PULSE TRANSFORMER, SPRAGUE NO.llZ12
T2 • 24 IQ.TS CT 300mA, KNIGHT #612416
T3 • SEE DESCRIPTION OF FIG. NO.I IN TEXT
* RlR ADJUSTABLE GAIN, USE ,,_RIABLE RESISTOR HERE.
2N3055 Rsc •Vo
NPN CURRENT BOOSTER-Uses Motorola IC

voltogo regulator with npn transistor to boost 3
maximum output current availoblo at rogu• 51
lated output voltage above 500-mA rating for 6 4 1N4002
IC alone. Input voltage is 20 V.-D. Kesner, MC1560R
9
Voltage Regulators-Old and Now, "State-of• 5
10
the-Art-Linears in Action," Motorola, Phoenix,
Ariz., 1969, p 14-20. 8 7
2 Case 10
CN Co ~ RL
O.lµF*O.lµF* 100uf~
'::' '::' '::'
Voiode 0.6 V
'sc = ASc- = 0.1211
15 c = sA
SWITCHING VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Gives

efllcioncies as high as 80%, even when d-c
Input voltage is several times larger than
d-c output voltage. Q2..Q3 form free-running
mvbr whoso duty cycle Is function of current
flowing into base of Q2. Mvbr turns QI
on and off In such a manner as to keep volt·
17V!l!l'X. ago across load constant. Report gives de•
v•• sign criteria. Operates satisfactorily only
when ripple in source and load voltages is
at frequency substantially below switching
frequency of rogulator.-Pulse Width Modu-
lated Voltage Regulator, Delco Radio, Ko-
komo, Ind., No. 9B, 1965.
+30v
E•20VOC
UNREGULATED
03
2112034
R4
6K
.--~"',..,. _ _ _ _ _ _.,_+OUTPUT
Eo 10·25•,
100mA
R5 ''voe
O.ISA
0.56K
o, +REGULATED
111821 - 22f'f
D3 Rs
IN816 0.39K
IC VOLTAGE-RAISING REGULATOR-Operates
SHORT·CIRCUIT STABLE-Provides stability from single positive supply, using Fairchild
over wide temperature range, with no more µ.A709 opamp, and delivers precisely rogu•
components than for non-short-circuit·stablo lated output voltage above that of tompora•
voltage regulator. Regulation from no load ture-depondont zener reference DI. Q2 pro-
to 180 mA Is 0.7%. Regulation for 15% vides surge protection whon output exceeds
change in unregulated 20-V supply is also 100 mA. Article contains 13 other IC opamp
0.7%. Article gives design oquations.-R. L. application circuits.-J. F. Gifford and M.
Moser, Self-starting Voltage Rogulotor is Markkula, linear IC's: Part S, Ins and Outs
Short-circuit Stable, Electronic Design, Fob. 15, of Op Amps, Electronics, Nov. 27, 1967, p
1965, p 79-81. 84-93.
R4
Dz 21100
Al4B 3W
LAMP VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Simple re9ula•

1011-l:SOV tor, dosigned for specific 150-W lamp, meas·
80Hz.
ures lamp power by measuring fllament
rosistance. During negative half-cycle, lamp
LAMP
ISOW receives full current through D2. At begin·
IOllV nlng of positive half-cycle, R4 provides bias
current to develop voltage V2 that depends
on lamp resistance, for comparison with ref·
oronco voltage VI. Phasg.controlled trigger•
Ing of scr occurs when V1 is more positive
than V2. Drawbacks are 13-W powor dlssi·
potion in R4 and RS and flicker noticeable
with peripheral Ylslon.-E. K. Howell, Small
Scale Integration in" Low Cost Control Cir·
cuits, Goneral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
671.9, 1968, p 20.
CASE I : LAMP R LOW, TRIGGERING ADVANCES TO al; LOW LINE VOLTAGE.

CASE 2 : LAMP R NORMAL, TRIGGERING AT oz; MEDIAN LINE VOLTAGE.
CASE 3 : LAMP R HIGH, TRIGGERING AT o~; HIGH LINE VOLTAGE. FROM
FILTER
NOTE: GAIN a STABILITY CONTROLLED BY Cl (PHASE SHIFT 4'1 OUTPUT 2-6080'5
72 72 72 72
220K
120 120 120

l.TK
FROM 6V DC
WINDING REF. OUTPUT
12 V AT 50 MA FROM 18 V D·C-Two.tran-
sistor series regulator uses zener as reference.
Use of amplifier stage TR2 to control series
transistor reduces output impedance of supply
and thus greatly Improves stabilization fador.
-"Voltage Rogulator (Zener) Diodes," Philips,
Netherlands, p 43.
0.1,.1
+ 82K
MPD
200
REDUCING OUTPUT IMPEDANCE-Modification
of series-regulator power supply for servo
provides 400 mA with dynamic Impedance
below 1 ohm at frequencies from 1 Hz to
12·V DIODE REGULATOR-Multi-pellet diode 100 kHz. Two•1ta9e double-dlfforentiated
provides good rogulation (about 0.5%) d-c ampllfler Is referenced to constant d-c
against change In voltage source for tran- voltage of 082. Corrected output signal of
sistors. Output lmpodance of regulator is 6AH6 final amplifier is applied to grids of
about 5 ohms, and efficiency is high com- series regulators to keep output voltage con-
pared to that of resistive voltage-divider stant within very narrow limits despite load
regulator for same impedance.-Slllcon Multi- changes.-E. G. Fonda, Servo-Modification
Pollot Diodos MPD200/MPD300/MPD400, Gen- Improved Dynamic Impedance, Electronic De-
eral Electric, Syracuaa, N.Y., No. 75.42, 1966. 1ign, Feb. 3, 1964, p 48 and SO.
2·7K
REFERENCE VOLTAGE SUPPLY-Roforonco volt·
ago is generated by Ferranti KF77 reference
voltage package, which has high stability If
IK oporatlns current is hold within 5% of 5 mA.
Combination of Ferranti ZLD2 IC differential
amplifier and npn transistor provide this cur•
rent with required stability over temperature
IK rans• of -SO to 120 C and with largo varia•
IK
lions In d·c supply voltases. Potentiometer
is adjusted to give 5 mA accurately through
KS77.-Microlin Amplifiers ZLD25 and ZLD2T,
Ferranti ltd., Oldham, lanes., England, No.
11, 1967, p 16.
02
COMBINATION CURRENT SOURCE AND 40361
SINK-Provides constant S·V output by sink· CR4
Ul914
ing up to 100 mA when output voltage rises
..-----T---------i---i------(JEO
above 5 V. Zener CRl establishes value of 1+5Vl
output voltage.-R. S. Conero, Voltage Regu• CR2 IN914
lator is a Current Source or Sink, Electronic 03 +Cl t,.F115V
Design, Juno 7, 1970, p 102. 40362
•Vin 2N4904 Rsc •Vo

o-.---~ r------------.-"'11\/\r---<;i
o.3 1sc " 2A
20
. -........fV\,....+----t 3
6 41'"""----..
MCIS66R
9
1
8
Case + Co
sao .. F
+
12 V WITH TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION-
Effects of temperature chanses on TR2 are re•
duced to about 0.045% par dos C by adding PNP CURRENT BOOSTER-Uses Motorola IC
similar transistor TR4 to series regulator. voltage regulator with pnp transistor to boost
Arransamant does not compensate for effect maximum output current above 500.mA rating
of temperature changes on zoner, howovor.- for IC alone. Input voltage is 20 V.-D.
"Voltase Regulator (Zoner) Diodes," Phillps, Kosnor, Voltage Regulators-Old and Now,
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho "Stat-f·the-Art-llnears in Action," Moto-
Nothorlands, p. 44. rola, Phoenix, Ari1., 1969, p 14-20.
REGULATOR CIRClJ'ITS 665
775Q 3.lkQ
+
RI R2
l
PRESTABILIZATION-Two zeners stabilize input
v,.
30V:t100/o
l!ZY88-C6V2 02
r
Vot~I 01 v. I\
voltage, to make output zoner much more
effedive in holding output voltage at desired
6.5 V d-c.-High-Stability Reference Diodes
68kQ
BZX48
l 1i!ZY88-C6V§ DJ
l i BZX47 Family, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,

Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 331, 1968.
R1 Rz IL
650 60 5mA
DOUBLE SHUNT·DIODE 12-V REGULATOR-Use
of two multi-pellet diodes instead of one +
gives much bettor regulation (about 0.07%)
against voltage source changes.-Silicon Multi- MPO MPO Rl vL
Pellet Diodes MPD200/MPD300/MPD400, Gen- 300 200
oral Eledric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 75.42, 1966. Vg
12V
• Olllf
:ir-----+------•ll7V TO+ 122V

l.,_ REGULATED O·lOOmA
5'Jo REGULATEO 60-lOOmA
.OOllJf
220K
TWO-NEON VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Output
Vl AND V2 HAND SELECTED voltage is sum of maintaining voltages of
FOR EXACT VOLTAGE noons minus 0.6 V jundion drop of transis·
tor.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Understanding
Rr 500K Miniature Neon Lamps," H. W. Sams & Co.,
L1 L2 LOAD
02 1.7mH l,7mH CURRENT
+.........------...2N3447.,....._.,...._____.nn~~~-J-v-Y-,-"'--t------,-~t-•s_v,....~_sa __
01 lk
2N4036
BOOSTER
OUTPUT 2
25v UNREGULATED ro-L-M
- - --'1L..M1',....---'
30 5 CURRENT LIMITING l~IOOp.f
INPUT VOLTAGE
3 REGULATOR REGULATED OUTPUT 02
8 5·7v INVERTING
4 6
C1 Sp.I
22p.f FEEDBACK C2
o,
50v 47-IOOp.f 7.5v
35·50v
3.3k
15-V SWITCHING REGULATOR-Operates at to 100,000 for maintaining d-c load voltage
20-ltHz switching rate. Shunt opamp pro- within few microvolts for load currents of 0 Efllciency of Rogulatecl Power Supplies, Elec-
vides additional d-c loop voltage gain of up to 5 A.-W. l. Brown, IC's Savo Power, Boost troni", July 20, 1970, p 94-97.
R1 03 04
180'1 1 N4002 1 N5232
1
I
R2 I
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
100 k
f RLOAD
1N4002
01
1N5232 I
02 I
28-V SHUNT REGULATOR-Holds output volt-
a9e constant within 0.0125 V of 28 V for
0------------------------------0-J valuo of Rl (or R3). Circuit can be oporatod
7o-MA D-C TWO-TERMINAL CURRENT REGU-
input changes af 7 V above and below 49 V LATOR-Provides current regulation only if at rogulatod currant lovels up to 700 mA if
d-c. Book givos dotailed design procodure. supply voltage is greater than sum of volt- supply voltage is above 13.S V.-"Semicon•
-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Har- age drops across cill four diodes, which is ductor Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola,
rison, N.J., 5P-51, p 218. 12.5 V for components shown. Level of Phoenix, Aril:., 1968, p 3-25.
current regulation is diode drop divided by
Rs @ • 20Vdc
+3W/O---'IAA---- +30(7,/ t3V
SK lW If. REO
14
VI 0·12mA
l
25Vdc 13
MC1466
MCl565
V2
lmeg
I 7
8
0.1
131 SIG lmeg

ZIOOR12 V3
ISk
VOLTAGE
ADJUSI
300-V THREE-lAMP REGULATOR-Noon lamps
are initially ionized by current through 1·
mog shunts whk:h also permit uso of supply 0-5 V D..C AT 10 A-Uses precision wide- regulation is 0.1% plus 1 mA.-Precislon
range Motorola IC voltage and current regu. Wide-Range Voltage and Current Regulator
volta90 loss than sum of breakd-n volta9es
lator, with output voltage and current both MC15661/MC1466L, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
of lamps.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Undor-
adjustable. Both lino and load voltage regu- 059130, 1969.
standing Miniature Neon lamps," H. W.
lation are 0.01 % plus 1 mV, and curNnt
Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., J969, p 30.
+50 Vdc
14 14
l
25 Vdc
0.1
"f
13
MC1466
MCIS66
l
25Vdc
0.1
"F
13
MC14~6
MC1566
I 1N4001
on EQUIV I 1N4001
OR EQUIV
300 k
10.F I
o--40 VD-CAT 0.5 A-Gives laboratory power 0-250 V D·C AT 0.1 A-Gives laboratOIY
supply performance, with line and load velt· power supply performance, with lino and
age regulation 0.01 % plus 1 mV, using load voltage regulation 0.01% plus mV, using
Motorola IC for stopping up 25-V d-c source Motorola IC for stepping up 2S·V d-c source
voltago.-Preclslon Wide-Range Valtas• and voltage.-Proclslon Wide-Range Voltage and
Curront Regulator MC1566L/MC1466L, Moto- Curnnt Regulator MC1566L/MC1466L, Moto-
rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 059130, 1969. rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 059130, 1969.
VA[f
• l2Y
IMPROVING EFFICIENCY-Permits lower un·
regulated Input voltage to series-pass regu-
l
lator for low-voltage (5-6 V) regulated out• Ra
14H
put for IC circuits. With circuit shown, no c,
a, ·~
dovlce iundlons aro in series with output to • I •F
subtract from available output voltage. v... Az
2N5138
UNREGULATED (21
Pnp differential pair Ql·Q2 drives psoudo- 2.4k Cz
I
Darllngton Q3.Q4. Handles loads up to 300 Ra 001
R1 5.6k •F
mA with 1% regulatlon.-W. G. Jung, High. 220
Efficiency Series Regulator, EEE, April 1970,
p 100-101.
l-11-T-A-2--------te'.'=~I\ Yo•l2V 2N3415

ASV"lll
MPO
o, 400
8ZV78
+
12 VAT 360 MA FROM 18 V D-C-Addition of 12·V DOUBLE-DIODE WITH EMITTER-FOL·
third transistor ampllflar stage to series rogu· LOWER-Addition of transistor improves both
lator boosts maximum load current, although efficiency and regulation In transistor supply
at expanse of increased ripple In output.- opplicatlons.-Silicon Multi.Pollot Diodes MPD·
"Volta90 Regulator (Zoner) Diodes," Philips, 200/MPD300/MPD400, General Electric, Syro·
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho cuso, N.Y., No. 75.42, 1966.
Netherlands, p 43.
R2
- 40 v 100
5 J&F
C1
R5
30 k
UN RE GU·
LATED
INPUT D3
20-V D-C INVERTED OUTPUT-Switching volt·
ago regulator regulates output within I%
100 l'H
for load currents of 50 mA to I A. Drive 01 L1=====: 1N5250A
for blocking osclllator Ql·TI Is obtained by +20V
foodback from output. Operating frequency T1 1N4934
of 6 kH11 provides optimum compromise be-
tween output rlpplo (which decreases at REGULATED
15 T OUTPUT
higher froquenclos for given flJter) and tran-
sistor powor dissipation which along with 2000 50 v
l'F
coro loss lncroosos with frequency. Volta90
ro9ulatlon Is 1% for 10% input volto90
changes at output currents up to 1 A.-"Somj.. + T1 - FERROX CUBE POT CORE
conductor Powor Circuits Handbook,'' Mato· 3622P-3E; PRIMARY - 100 TURNS
rola, Phoenix, Ari11., 1968, p 3-18. SECONDARY - 15 TURNS
: ..... 113,1 1c-12v
II( 101(
!I
G
2·51(
2
1001"
e ~G"
104
cev
Cv
10-12 V STABILIZED FROM 14 V-Uses Plessey
high-gain d-c amplifler with two zoners and
series regulator transistor to give stabilization
DIODE REGULATOR WITH EMITTER·FOLLOWER ratio of over 1,000 and output resistance less
-Addition of cathode follower to diode volt· than 0.1 ohm.-R. C. Foss and B. J. Groen,
ago regulator gives higher efficiency and The SL700 Series and Applications, Plessey,
botter regulation against voltage source Swindon, England, No. 7,
changes. Output impedance is higher than
with diode alone.-Silicon Multi-Pellet Diodes
MPD200/MPD300/MPD400, General Electric, ,7 10 9
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 75.42, 1966. IN
Rl
Rs lK
• 16(1,IO---'l.f\A.----1~• lOW .t IV R2
430Q 100 ~ REGUL\TED 620
Xl IOIH20mA
Rr
l20K
04
2N3250 -., (REF.l
S.lV (NOMJ
1N705A-8
HIGH-CURRENT NEON REGULATOR-Permits
load currents mony times maximum rating of
lamp. Fuse protects noon if load is removed
or reduced. Xl may be any 400.plv 200. 4.5 V AT 100 MA FOR LOGIC-Simple regu· veloped for logic circuits in which lina regu•
mA or better diodo.-W. G. Miller, "Using lator acts like trigger having two stable lation is much lass important than ioad ragu•
and Understanding Miniature Noon Lamps," states, corresponding to conditions before lation.-R. C. Sanford, 'Perfect' Regulator Sat·
H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p and aher change in load current. Darlington isfles Logic Circuits, EON, Dec. 15, 1969, p
32. pass transistor acts as emitter-follower. De· 51-53.
+15v
+-r---r------t"----\. ..-.:1----fe~}-------"t-----.--------......------~~~O~LO~AD~
I
J_
Tc• tk R1
IOk
I
I
lk I
I NON-INVERTING
I
I I
..L 7.5v
.,..c2 Rz
I IOk
I
15-V LINEAR SERIES-SHUNT-Circuit is excel·

lont for use when desired output is large suppression and Cl for loop stabilization, fast-switching load.-W. L. Brown, IC's Savo
fraction of source voltage. Dashed lines In· Values of Cl, C3, and R3 are chosen to mini· Power, Booll Efficiency of Regulated Power
dicato optional components, with C2 for noise mizo load voltage overshoot when driving Supplies, Eleclronics, July 20, 1970, p 94-97.
AC
Ct R6
10V
+o------'
5.6 V D·C WITH ZENER AND TRANSISTOR-
Rs :5M
Powor transistor, mounted on same heat sink
R&:IK good regulation over wide range of a-c input
with power zoner, but electrically insulated,
providos voltage stabilization at higher power A·C LINE VOLTAGE COMPENSATION-Ramp- voltages.-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Hewell,
level than zenor alone.-Zener Diodes and and0pedestal control depends on relationship Economy Powor Semiconductor Applications,
Their Applications, Philips, Pub, Dept., Elcoma between pedestal height and peak point volt. General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1,
Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No. 17, ago of ujt. Cosine-shaped ramp provides 1965, p 13.
1966,
CR
INPUT OUTPUT
45T055V 28V, 0 TO 0.5A
DC DC
"=' input range of 45 to 55 V. CR is 27-V ref·

28-V SHUNT-Simple two-transistor shunt•type erence diode, Rl is 28, and R2 is 1,000.-
regulator holds output voltage constant within "Transistor Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC·
O.S% for load currents up to O.S A, over d-c 13, p 516.
IOV TO 25V DC 2N3766

OR RECTIFIEOo----------«
REGULATING BELOW ZENER MINIMUM-Two

transistors and resistor provide zener action
for regulating voltages bolow 2-V zener mini· 1'3.311F
mum. Arrangement has 1.5-V zoner char-
acteristic and zero dynamic impedance from EXTENDING ZENER RANGE-Constant-current With values shown, regulator delivers 40 mA
20 to lSO mA. When applied voltage is diode addod to conventional zoner of series at nominal 6 V d·c.-P. Kestenbaum, Fixed
greater than 1.4 V, both transistors begin to regulator extends range of roferonce voltage, Bias Extends Zoner Rongo, EEE, May 1970, p
conduct .-H. Stadler, Transistor "Zener" has for handling wide range of input voltages. 103-104.
Zero Dynamic Impedance, Electronics, March
31, 1969, p 86-87.
R, -lK 5 Watt R, ,-120K

R2 -5.6K D, -IN1767
Rl -68K 1 Watt D, -IN4735A
*R• -6.34K lf2 Watt Dl -IN4735A
tR 5 -SK Pot. E D, -IN4734A
"R 6 -191K 1 Watt OUT Q, -DTS413
R1 -56000 I.CAD Q2 -2N3439
Ra -56000 Q3 -2N2711
*R• -121K 1 Watt a. Q5 -2N2712
R,o-150K C, -5mfd 450V
C2 -0.0lmfd 1 KV
WDENOTES 111GH •STABILITY Fl~ED FILM RESISTORS
t WIRE WOUND LOW TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT
SERIES D·C VOLTAGE REGULATOR-Provides change In 320-V d·c input voltage. Report proof.-DC Voltage Regulator With High Volt·
output of 290 V d-c for loads up to 600 mA, describes sensing and correcting operation of age Silicon Transistors, Delco Radio, Kokomo,
with regulation bettor than 0.5% for 15% circuit In dotall. Circuit is not overload· Incl., No. 38, 1966.
+ o------4-----.c~J RLOAD
7G-MA D-C CURRENT REGULATOR WITH
ZENER-Combination of 5.6-V zoner and
value of R2 gives current regulation at 70 mA
for load range of 10 to 50 ohms. Value of SUPPLY
Rl Is not critical. Circuit has good regula- VOLTAGE
tion with temperaturo.-"Somlcondudor Power 01
Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1N4001
1968, p 3-24. 02
1N5232
·-----------
TRI
V;•
22V:!.100/o 02
.J-t.T::Rc--2-------oK=~0.11. Vo-12V
+ ASY'J6
01
t
v.
~
CONSTANT-CURRENT SOURCE-Use of two· +
terminal constant-current generator to stabl· 12 V AT 360 MA WITH LOW RIPPLE-Addi·
liH input current permits use of lower Input tional zener D2 acts with R5 to roduco amount
voltago than with voltage prestabilizer. With of ripple fed Into output through Rl and
2 mA supplied to roforonco diode Dl, 100 TR3, but input voltage must bo increased to
µA is supplied to load at essentially constant 22 V to allow for voltage drop across these
6.5 V d-c.-High-Stabllity Reference Diodes components.-"Voltage Regulator (Zenor) Di·
BZX47 Family, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., odes," Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind-
Eindhoven, The Nothorlands, No. 331, 196g, hovon, The Nethorlands, p 44.
lo..,1-
06
R2 3.3 2N3715
34V R1
390 R3
100 RS
R7 11k +C2
1500 100 srF
01
2N2907 30V
RS 820
R9 Vo
3160
CURRENT LIMITING-Addition of f11dback

loop to current limiting circuit of series regu- and permitting uso of smaller transistors.
lator makes output current decroaso when Q2 In added feedback loop ads 01 current
output voltage drops with overload, thereby source. Regulated output 11 27 V.-T. Ru9en,
reducing peak power dissipated In series-pass Simple Feedback Loop Lowers Rogulator Cost,
transistor, reducing hoot sink roqulromenfl, ~ EON, June 1, 1970, p 55-56.
+52Wo---
1500MINI POSITIVE POSITIVE
(+25V)
OUTPUT
lOK
- - - .•41JN tllV
lfo REGUIATED COKHON OUTPUT
Vl O-lOmA
COMMON
lOK
AlllAMPS NEGATIVE
V2 ZUXIR12
OUTPUT
V3 NEGATIVE
roquirlng tracking in which any chango in
DUAL 15-V REGULATOR-Uses pair of OEI negative output voltage causes corresponding
regulator chips with circuit In which only change in positive output. Range is 12 to
one reference is needed. Ono adjustment 18 V.-Applying tho Model 8100 Monolithic
V4 sets output voltage for both positive and Voltage Regulator, Optical Elodronics, Tucson,
negative eutputs. Developed for opamps Aris., No. 10141.
400-V NEON REGULATORS-Adding lamps in
series permits higher reference voltages. Use
of additional resistors low,rs supply voltage
requirements, as In circuit at right. All
noons are Z100R12.-W. G. Miiier, "Using and
Understanding Miniature Neon Lamps/' H. W.
R2
1.3k Eo • 9·25V
AT IOOmA
9-25 V AT 100 MA-Opamp isolates zener LINE REGULATION. LOAD REGULATION:

reference from load changes, improving load .. 0.4 "4
.. 0.1"• AT Vout • 9V
re9ulation. Simple divider chan9os output V,. VARIES FROM
volta9e. Output Impedance Is below 0.1 20 T030V r Iour• O·IOOmA
ehm.-M. En91ish, Applications for Fully Com• R•
l.2k
pensated Op-Amp ICs, EEE, Jan. 1969, p
63-65.
ZTl711
560
500pF
14-24V
.
8
12V
IOK
SK
KS082B KS37A
IOK
STABILIZED D·C SUPPLY-Uses Ferranti ZLD2 ceives error sltnal proportional to output voltage.-Mlcrolln Amplifters ZLD25 and ZLD·
IC as d-c error 1l9nal amplifier, with nonln• volta9e stabllhred by series power transistor. 2T, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., En9land,
vorting input held at constant volta9e derived Output voltage deviates from desired 12 V No. 11, 1967, p 15.
from reference diodes. Inverting Input re- 'by only 5 mV per volt of chant• In Input
-15 v DIODE PREREGULATOR-Field-effect current•

regulator diode 1 N5291 functions as con•
220
stant-current source that eliminates effect of
9. lK
20V input variations on bles voltage of 2N930
Reference error amplifier in series voltage regulator.
6.2K Designed for 200-mA load current. load
regulation is 0.1 % from zero to full load,
L 10 K and line regulation is 0.02%.-A. Butvidas,
1N753A CRD Simplifies Design of Voltage Regulators,
-20 to -40 Volts IOV
EEE, May 1968, p 124 and 126.
NEGATIVE SWITCHING REGULATOR-Negative
regulated output voltage is essentially same
as negative reference voltage.-Applying tho lH<(AT S1No< WITH WllK[fl(LO l;F"209
Model 8100 Monolithic Voltoge Regulator,
Optical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10141. +Vdc
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION FOR REFER·
J
ENCE DIODE-Thermistor is used to reduce
temperature drift of zenor, for applications
+ o------411-----o~ RLOAD requiring precise internal reference voltage.
Intended for use with zenen having inverted.
parabola temperature-drift characteristic. For
IN940 zener, RT1 is 100 ohms, RT2 10K, Rl
SUPPLY 22 ohms, R2 47K, and R3 715 ohms.-"Se·
VOLTAGE lected Electronic Circuitry," NASA SP-5046,
01 I 966, Government Printing Office, Washington, Ou1pu1
1N4001 reference
D.C., p 65. voltage
70-MA D-C CURRENT REGULATOR WITH

SINGLE DIODE-Provides very good current
regulation for loads from 10 to 100 ohms if
supply voltage is held constont. Voltage
drops ocross R2 ond R3 oro equal, and level 15 k
of current regulation is equal to drop across IN649
ISk +170 v
R2 divided by resistance of R2.-"Semicon·
1----~H----.j~--'Vllv--- TO THREE
ductor Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola,
15k } NIXIES
Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 3-24.
- -......'\/\.I\,..--
O.lµf
1N649
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H i - V RETURN
+5.Sv
2N2880 22
.10k 18k
B
ALL RESISTORS - 1'2 w I 5%
LMIOO 350µt
6
25v
4 (TANTALUM)
BATTERY
INPUT
(ttOv + 32µf
-=..to +tSv) 30v 5.6k 6.8k
(TANTALUM}
1N16t4R
5.5 V AND 170 V FROM 12 V D·C-Extra V far nL logic. Efflcioncy is about 80%.
winding on smoothing inductor of switching Uses IC regulator at switching frequency of
regulator drives voltage doubler to provide about 9.8 kHz.-D. B. Newton, Switching
150 to 210 V d-c needed for Nixie display Regulator Drives IC's and Nixies Off Battery,
tubes. Circuit also provides regulated 5.5 Eledronics, July 6, 1970, p 77.
...
(•13V TO •l6V) FET CONSTANT-CURRENT REFERENCE-Qt sup-
plies constant current ta R2 to produce volt-
age drop as reference for d-c voltage regu-
lator. Reference voltage can be much smaller
than 6-V lower limit of most :i:eners. Tem-
perature coefficient is adjustable and can
o, either be set to low value or set to compen-
2~4382
Vfltf [7V} sate for temperature effects in other circuits.

Modifled Darlington Q2-Q3 supplies output
"z current up to 250 mA. Temperature coeffi-
J6•
cient depends on fot drain current.-C. N.
f011f
Gold, Zenerless Rogulator with Adjustable
111>v!'.if!¥1 Tempco, EEE, Aug. 1967, p 128-129.
+ o-------~----o~} RLOAD
(+) •
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
6U8A
UNREGULATED
250V
70-MA D-C CURRENT REGULATOR WITH BIAS-
INPUT
75-150V ING DIODES-Current level at which regulo-
l
1-)o-----....__ _ _...,__ _ _ _ H
REGULATION AT LOW POWER-Noon sets ref-
OUTPUT
to be set at any value between 75 and 150

tion occurs is equal to 0.7-V drop across D2
divided by valuo of R2, because base-emitter
voltage of Ql matches drop across Dl. Cur-
rent remains essentially constant over load
range of 10 to 100 ohms.-"Semiconductor
erenco level and its maintaining voltage V.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Neon lamps Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix,
establishes lower limit for voltage regula• and Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalito, Nep- Ariz., 1968, p 3-24.
tion. Potentiometer permits output voltage tune, N.J., p 88.
+o------,
OUTPUT
28VDC
100WATIS
MAX.
22¥ ·28VDC
INPUT
22011
471(
-~
100-W 28-V FlYBACK SWITCHING REGULA· L------------------'

TOR-Provides efficient regulotion by pul111 triggers monostable mvbr, with mvbr also power outputs down to 15 W. Developed fer
width modulation at output voltages as high receiving voltage-sensing signals from output use in aircraft.-28 Volts Flyback Regulator
as 6 V above d-c input voltage. Switching that determine pulse width. Efficiency is 87% Switching, Delco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., No.
rate of 9 kHz Is provided by oscillator that at 80 W and better than 80% for other 42, 1968.
CHAPTER 72
Relay Circuits
ULTRELAY O.l·OHM RESISTANCE CHANGE DETECTOR-

TYPE AIA-AO U1e1 Airborne Acco11ori111 ultrasensitive static
,.- -,
I I
20 relay in bridge circuit for produdion testing
of components whose resistance value Is
PIECE OAD
+ l.5VDC T~ST I crltlcal. Static switch contains magamp•
I I STATIC
I I 0.1 SWITCH (REJECT driven scr that can be used to activate 1010·
MECHANISM)
I
I .rt"
I
nold reject mochanlsm that either labels or
I I 115 removes faulty test piece.-Sensitive Static
I..- _J VAC Relay Detects Resistance Limits, Electronic
60'\o
De1lgn, Nov. 29, 1965, p 75,
----
11 + OK IOK IOK IOK
r~
R1 Rz 113 Rn
SEQUENCING OF RELAY PULL·INS-Serios pot
for oach rolay is set for pull-In voltago de-
sirod. When switch is set at 28 V, capacitor
500.n
WW
R4
SOYDC
I
I
I
l"v1:
I
I"~ I
1Ry3 I Ryn
charges through R4, and each relay pulls in lie ':" I - 1- 1-

~-
~~ ~-
when capacitor voltage roaches preset value.
When switch Is released, relays drop out In
reverse order of pull-in.-M, E. Swinnon, Relay
Arrangement Slmplitlos Contact Soquoncing,
Electronic Design, Nov. 23, 1964, p 62.
1 1 1 T
Ry1, •••• Ryn• SIGMA 5F, 10,000.Q
+24v +48v +115v

+12v 115¥ O·C
IOR lt0·140v d-c WITHOUT Oz)
02
1N4004
TO OTHER LAMPS
II
IN4004
IN4004
.
TRANSISTOR DRIVES RELAY AND NEONS- and operating relay with single transistor.
-
dlfferont supply voltages.-J. H. Sllvorman, '!lj.~·
/~
Addition of isolation diode to conventional Circuit at right shows how to add Isolation Diode Isolator Combines Relay and lamp
relay driver permits turning on neon lamps diodes for driving two or more relays having Driver, Electronics, May 1, 1967, p 72.
674
RELAY CIRCUITS 675
RESET
r-~~--.~~~~1--~~~~ -10V
NC
01
RED 1N4001 SIGMA
11 F-2300-GS IL
''ENERG~ +10V Q1
MPS3394
"OE-ENERGIZED" CONTROL
IOK VOLTAGE
TRANSISTOR CONTROL-D-c relay Is con-

trolled by 0.5-mA signal current applied to
transistor. Diode protects transistor from
inductive voltage spike of relay coil.-"Somi-
condudor Power Circuits Handbook,'' Moto-
TWO-STEP LOCKOUT-First input pulse pro· rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-37.
duces voltago stop at output. Second input
pulse makes output return to different lovol,
fallowed by roed relay lockout. Devolopod
for use in counters. Uses two 3N60 silicon
controlled swltchos In 111rios, lower of which
cannot be fired until upper switch Is fired.
Input pulses must be bolow 5 V to prevent
both switchos from firing on first pulse.
Lamps show circuit condition. When lower
switch fires, on second pulse, transistor pulls
in relay and holds It until reset switch 11
pushed.-&. Soroka, Lockout Circuit Operates
With Single line Input, Electronic Do1ign,
March 30, 1964, p 72-73.
a• CONTACTS TO COMMAND
112 VOCI BE USED AS r:NAL
n __...._,.,,
o----T-gw-~ D"i
SW a+
TO LOAD
10 7
a "oFF" RELAY
COIL
+ Cz
Ra.AV
Paa 122,...1
SLllDA
OFF -
COIL
D, Dz
IN4859 IN4859
SCR
2NBB5
POSITIVE
TRIGGER
INPUT
LATCHING WITH PULSES-Load is switched
on and off by consecutive command signal
PULSES FLIP LATCHING RELAY-Positive trig· pulses, with minimum signal power. Uses
ger Inputs applied to scr serve to alternate three scr's and dpdt magnetic latching relay.
contacts of latching relay. Circuit draws very Circuit Is shown with polos Pl and P2 In
little power and provides current overload position corresponding to onor9i1in9 of ON
protection for coil. Time botwoon succosslvo relay coil. Filter network RI ·R2-C1 desensi-
trigger pulses should be greater than 2RC to tizes circuit to random noiso spikos.-J. N.
give sumclent tlmo for charging of coil capac· Libby and J. C. Schaffert, SCR Relay Flips,
-~~-
..
~··
ltor.-J. S. Poole, SCR Pulse-Follower Circuit Flops on Consecutive Commands, "400 Ideas
Alternates Latching Roloy, Electronic Design, for Design Selected from Electronic Design,"
Doc. 20, 1965, p 51-52. Haydon Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 110.
+o-----..
TIMER DRIVES STEPPER-With 90.V d-c supply, IOM

stepping relay is operated at 5-minute inter-
vals with value• shown, with interval deter- O.IM
mined by Rl .c. R2 determines minimum
time. With half-wave rectified a-c line
power, intorval is 10 minutes. Can also b.r
IOk lPBI
used with ordinary relay or other inductive
GMIN12A
load. Noon conducts at about 65 V and
triggers scr, to make C discharge through
relay coil and scr.-L. Eaton, Low-Power Timer
Drives Stepping Relay, Electronic Design, Aug.
16, 1969, p 238 and 240.
12VDC (+I
o--~~~~~~~-L
{-~:f1
1-) +
Vee 120
0-+----11----~11 .o:.:.:,2
TRANSISTOR~~
- + - + 0.4 t,Aog
RELAY DRIVER-Uses 2N1483 npn silicon

power transistor for anor9i1ing solenoid or TO
relay. Delay time is only 0.2 µs and pulse TWO-FREQUENCY AUDIO DECODER-Provides transfers capacitor charge to transistor base
rise and fall times about 1 µs. Values: decoding far control function only whon tho (or tube grid) for control action. Bleeder
Rl 50; R2 700; R3 59; V-BB 8.5 V; V-CC 12 V. two reeds of Bramco slgnol-coil relay are resistor across capacitor prevents switching
-"Transistor Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., activated in sequence by their respective action by undesirod codes.-Multiplo-Reed
SC-13, p 167. different frequencies. First frequency, fl, Rolay Acts as 2-Frequency Docodar, Electronic
charges capacitor. Second frequency, f2, Design, Nov. 29, 1965, p 71.
-12.11 voe
+B
tNT62-2 12-24 voe
CR
r-=COMMON
6v ~N.C.
ZENER
~N.0.
:SKCHM
RELAY
th, 100.Q
RELAY
-v,:.1. .--... " ! II
'-----<l----l1-----·
OFF I ON "\ OFF
.. RELAY COIL STATE
TIMED LOCKUP OF LATCHING CIRCUIT-Con•
LOW-COST DIFFERENTIAL RELAY-Sharp-turn· tacts of fraquoncy•selective resonant-rood
on charactoristic of mosfot QI gives relioble relay discharge Cl through Rl lo make tran•
operation of inexponsive common roloy on sistor conduct and pull in power relay at
voltage difforential lass than I V. Pull-in and desired time interval after input signal Is
drop-out lovols can bo changed, to place 1-V applied. Whon rood stops vibrating aftor
differential level at any desired location in input signal is removed, Cl charges up to
range of 1 to 12 V, by appropriate choice of transistor cutoff point, and power relay is
zanor and value of R.-L. G. Cowles, MOS then released. Lockup time is 5 to I 0 s for
Transistor Provides Shorp Differential Relay value of Cl shown.-Resononl Reed Controls
Switching, Electronic Design, Morch 29, 1965, Timed Latching Relay, E/edronic De1i9n, Nov.
p 32. 29, 1965, p 80.
RELAY CIRCUITS 677
.25µ.f I Kn
CONTACT ARC SUPPRESSION-Transistor sup·

plements capacitor action in suppressing arc
2N441 occurring when relay contacts open. With no
suppression, peak voltage across opening
I contacts was 640 V, ·Capacitor alone re-
1"0~-----4.._ ________ ducad this to 340 V, and capacitar•transistor
combination brought peak down to 12 V.-
ELAY
I
M. Dickey, Amplified Capacitor Suppresses
Arc More Completely, "400 Ideas for Design
Selected from Electronic Design.'' Haydon
&VOLTS LOAD Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 100-101.
+
B-
3()1( 30K
IOMao
Ip.I
C1 lMIN.l
0.5µ.f 115VAC
;- ' -.· ·::_~,
i : , .1
• . .·.·32~.< .. . .
l .
' · 11£97". - .~SIL·' . "· ..
./~~. ·-:'J :. '. . ,#i·., I. l
.
-;~-,., r}, ~8 -l2.:~.----

~ "\..1..:r.~:;· ~ . .! . ~i
,..____ r
~ t \, 3.31( o---+----i.-__,,_....;.;.._, '::~ :·<:~L. ·. -~:~ ~·,.ij
I
--"
BRAMCO
RE-I OR
20.MINUTE FLIP-FLOP-Bistable magnetic·
'::' RE-10 B+ latching polarized relay and neon lamp serve
600A 24VOC as free-running mvbr having cycling times up
DAMPED TONE GENERATOR-Damped audio lo 20 min, depending on settings of pots
tone with extremely narrow bandwidth is and size of capacitor used between them.-
eenerated each time reed reloy is pulsed, Polarized Latching Rolay Forms Free-Running
Tone is amplified by Tl and clipped to desired Flip-Flop, E/ecfronlc Design, Nov. 29, 1965,
level by T2.-Rosonant Reed-Relay Produces p 74.
Pulsed Tone, Eledronic Design, Nov. 29, 196S,
p 74.
15VDC
R, RELAY
251( COIL
1.21( 191(
(IOOOHMSI
IK
40,1.11 '-----o+
Eo
20,1.11
STEP FUNCTION FROM MVBR-PULSED RELAY-
Generates repetitive low-level steps (up to
60 mV) for modulating small d-c signals. RI
adjusts repetition rate between 0.1 and 8
pps. R2 determines percentage modulation.
2Nl391
Action of mvbr makes relay contacts short out
lower half of voltage-divider R2 to generate
output voltage EO that is between O and 60
mV and is abaul one-hundredth of monitored
voltage V.-Pulsod Relay Generates Low-Level
Step Functions, Electronic Design, Nov. 29,
196S, p 81.
TRIAC CONTACT-PROTECTOR-When switch Is RELAY

closed, relay is energized and triac is fired, N.O.
CONTACTS
sending current through load. Since trlac
stays on as long as load current flows, there
is no arcing of contacts while they bounce.
Furthermore, load current flows through con•
tacts when they are closed, rather than
through trlac, so heat dissipation in trlac
is negligible. When switch is opened, relay
contacts open but triac remains fired long
enough to eliminate contact arcing because it
opens only at natural current-zero time. Cir-
cuit can thus be used for load currents higher
than relay or triac could handle alone.-J. H.
Galloway, Using the Trlac for Control of AC
Power, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. NOTE: FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS USE RC dv/dt SUPPRESSION
CIRCUIT IN PARALLEL WITH TRIAC
200.35, 1966, p 13.
0
0
Kl
•c Value depends on drop out 220K

time desired and coil
characteristics of relay K 1
c !!! 1000,.1
INPUT
CONTACT-CLOSING SEQUENCE-Both neons

should glow when S1 is closed. With Sl SIGNAL-OPERATED RELAY-Two mosfet am•
open, noon which glows shows which con· plifler stages ahead of transistor provide
tact closed first, If neithor lamp lights, both sufficient voltage gain for detecting signals
contacts closed simultaneously.-&. Bauman, as low as 2 V and energizing relay.-C. R.
"Applications of Neon Lamps and Gas Dis· Perkins, "Application of MOSFET Devices to
charge Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p Electronic Circuits," Hughes, Newport Beach,
144. Cal., 1968, p 35.
R3 C2
47 0.1 µF
60 AMP 01
LOAD
MAC2-4
TRIAC SUPPRESSES CONTACT ARCING-Triac
tums an during first positive half-cycle after
SI is closed, and carries load current befDre
GUARDIAN relay coll has had time to close Its contacts.
A410-061751·00 Similarly, trlac conducts for several cycles
AC after relay contacts open, bacause of energy
LINE
D1 stored in C2. Maximum voltage across con•
tacts is only about I V when they open, per•
1N4004 miffing use of smaller relay and reducing
noise of relay closing. Trlac shown will
handle loads up to 50 A.-"Somiconductor
Power Circuits Handbook.'' Motorola, Phoenix,
Ariz., 1968, p 4-7.
RELAY CIRCUITS 679
I~
+96v +Vdc
I R,
I ,
('
~R1ISk 100k tOOk lnpu1

("R, K,
I
4Hy
I
+1~645
I 0
I
I
Supply
K,
SCR,
+ 12 V de
Z20n
3J60
Q, 2N16718
CR., CR., CR. 1N646
2N3439 R, 2.2K
RELAY
R. 4.7K
R.,R.,R, 1000
R, lOK
Rz S.8k QI c, 100,.F
2N38S9A
c, 1,.F
ONE-SHOT RELAY DRIVER-Will pull in relay
for about 50 s out of every minute, with im-
1N645 2.2k munity to both positive and negative power
supply transients. Initiating trigger pulse
must be long enough for relay current through
SC Rt to rise above its latching current, Ujt
Qt turns off scr when Ct has boon charged
FASTER RELAY-Shortens pull-in time of indus- and generate large voltage spike that is through R3 to point whore It discharges
trial control rolay or solenoid from normal 16 integratod by l2·R2 to give fast build-up af through Qt and RS. Circuit was developed
ms to 5 ms. With switch opon, Q2 Is on and current through relay coil. Dl and RI are at Goddard Space Flight Cantor, and should
curront flows through indudor Lt (which can optional, for protodlng Qt against collector• be useful for general control applications.-
be another rolay like 12 with armature emitter breakdown while increasing delay "Seloctod Electronic Circuitry," NASA SP·S046,
jammed open). Closing switch turns Q2 slightly.-J. Goon, Storage Coil Cuts Relay t966, Govommont Printing Ofllco, Washington,
off and Ql on, causing flold of Lt to collapse Pull-In Delay, Electronics, Avg. 3, t970, p 74. D.C., p 68.
+150v
10k
IZO
ALL DIODES 1N4003

O.IM IZO ALL SOLENOIDS 150v d·c, IOw
s,
FOUR·STEP ACTUATOR-Four scr's in cascade gizos l2 directly and triggers SCRI. This in
serve in place of stepping relays to provide turn energizes Lt. Remainder of seciuenco Is
four-stop aduating sequence for four sole- then obtained by moving S2 ahemately to C. H. Harris, SCR Ring Circuit Replaces Stop-
noids controlling semiconductor bonding positions b, a, b, a, and b. Continued ping Relays, Electronics, July tO, 1967, p 80-
process. Closing momentary switch St ener• operation of 52 then repeats entire cycle.- 8t.
R2 SPEEDING SOLENOID RECOVERY-Use of R·C

network to control timing speecls recovery in
150 v SOLENOIO circuits aduating solenoid-operating devices.
COIL Beforo operoting solenoid, switch is opened
r ---1
RL I
so C charges to supply voltage. Closing
switch malces C discharge through Rl and
I 25
+ 1N4001
I I add to solenoid excitation curront.-F. E.
36v-=.. Vs I I Mueller, Pick-Hold Coil Driver Recovers
10mh I Quiclcly, Eleclronics, April 14, 1969, p 96-97.
I TYPICAL:
L ---J
!:"o ~
-<
, ..... ~ ~
POTTER & BRUMFIELD /~
#KA5A6 I K1
I
1.,-
°'-h._
I
a(>
I ....._
.
,_
Jr
I
.....
270
I I
IN!l39 I ......
J\_ l
120 V, 60 Hz \
AC ADVANCE
RESET
POWER STEP Kl Kn
RELAY
LINE
01
02 SCR I -·SCR n -6E No. C 22 B
MDA-920-4 K I- Kn- TELEPHONE TYPE RLY.
03
BRIDGE
04
SCR STEPPING AND HOMING-Combination of
A·C RELAY CONTROL-Diode bridge provides
telephone relays and scr's gives bettor reli·
d-c for transistor while passing a-c for opora·
ability, faster stepping, and faster homing
tion of relay. Cl protects transistor from
or reselling than conventional stepping
inductive voltage spikes of relay coil. One
switches.-E. Pacia, Relay Combination Im·
drawback is that control signal must be
proves Step Switching, Homing, Electronic
isolated from a-c power lino. Control volt·
Design, Oct. 26, 1964, p 52.
age source must provide 1.6 mA to base of
transistor having gain of 10, to pull in relay
coil requiring 16 mA.-"Semlcondudor Power
1968, p 6-38. --l1ooms I-
,._~~~~~~~~~~.-:o~UT:.:.:..:PU~T~lo~
r-isec--j
OUTPUT 2
o~
R,
24 ·30 v d-c 15
3.9k Dz
IN661
R3
lk D3
D1 Rs
tN4747 SCR1 IN4747 lk
01 2Nf595
., 2Nl671B
Cz
C1
IOOµf 5p.t
SLOW PULSER-Solid-stole componenh and pulse width range of 50 to 150 ms at prr of Actuator Producos Ono-Hour Pulses, Electron•
rolay can stretch output pulses over ronge 1 pps. DI and D2 (20-V zoners) hep timing ics, Nov. 13, 1967, p 100-101.
from 20 ms to one hour, clepending on values circuit voltage constant. Dpdt relay gives
used for Cl and R3-R4. Values shown give complementary outputs.-D. L. Pippen, Relay
CHAPTER 73
Remote Control Circuits
IKtl
PULSED-LIGHT RECEIVER-Photodiode with with mvbr providing required drive power.

simplo lens picks up pulsed light from solid- Pilot lamps indicate, by intensity, frequency iblo ambient light does not affect perform•
state lamp up to 2 ft away, having one of being transmitted. Alternatively, reed relays anco.-L. M. Hertz, Solid State lamps-Part
four different pulsing rates. Speaker gives could be usod to provide direct response to II, General Electronic, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3·
audible indication of tone being transmitted, each signal. With infrared wavelength, vis- 0121, 1970, p 33.
VIDEO SIGNAL
TELEVISION
RECEIVER
s
!Ok
FROM
TV
CAMERA
DETECTOR
VIDEO TURNS ON CCTV RECEIVERS-All re· are sent over closed circuit by tv camera.
coivors connected to system aro turned on lamp absorbs inductive surges.-W. Simister, 117ro-c
automatically by circuit shown, whenever SCR Helps Video Signal Gato A·C Power &Ollz
video signals that may be as small as 30 µA line, Eledronics, April 29, 1968, p 66.
681
Tl: DESIAED RESONANT RIEED
SELECTIVE-SIGNALING TONE GENERATOR-

Can be usod either with wire line or with
4.nn. modulator of radio transmitter, for radio re-
mote control, selective CB or mobile radio
communication, or for operating lamp or
latching relay of frequency-selective receiver
10
ktl connected to wiro line. Uses Motorola Mini-
tono resonant-reed dovice capable of operat-
ing al any one of 200 preselected frequencies
botween 67 and 3, 150 Hz. Rood unit is con·
nocted In feedback oscillator Q1-Q2. Emitter-
ezn follower 03 matches high impedance of
oscillator to load.-L. Solomon, Tono Selective
0
Signaling The New Look, Electronics World,

220
A Sept. 1967, p 88-90.
SPLIT PHASE
120VAC CAPAOTOR·RUH
.2.
=
MOTOR
Vee TO
----.---------HIGH LOAD
lk
+VBATT
(12V) RECEIVER
ot-----------------015v SUPPLY
POWER
BILATERAL SBS TRIGGER-Provides high Input

impedance and draws negligible standby cur-
rent, while providing reliable turn-on and
turn·off of scr controlling heavy lo9ic·system
load. RI must be large enough to couple
substantial pulse to gate of scr but small
enough for quick discharge af Cl and C2
for turn-off; good compromise Is 1K. Ser
type deponds on load, while sbs can be Dt 3E,
MPT28, or MPT32. Can easily be driven by
simple detector circuit such as Schmitt trigger. LOWER
-C. H, Davis, Remote-Controlled Solid-State LIMIT
Switch, EEE, Nov. 1968, p 142 and 144. RECEIVER
~~~ 15V
letnote
NUVISTOR
INPUT
+-jll--4-.f-l
••
REMOTE AUDIO GAIN CONTROL-Requires

only 1OK pot at remote control location for GARAGE-DOOR REVERSING CONTROL-Triacs delay mono mvbr. During door travel, trans-
adjusting gain of 20-dB audio compressor eliminate arcing problems obtained with re• mitter lceying will control motor direction In-
using IC opamp.-B. J. losmandy, Operational lays when rovorsing split-phase capacitor-run dependently of motor switches.-"Silicon
Amplifler Application for Audio Systems, motor commonly used with radio-controlled Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., ·•
Opamp Labs, Los Angeles, Cal., 1968. garage door opener. Circuit includes time· SP-51, p 252.
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS 683
..ru-trL.1v •-I'
UllOl:A ALL COllOmCllS
....'"
2N491
llZ UJT
DtOOl •w111oow•
IOOk IOOk
.o~!, .::I:.
01 •11'9 HZI
02•111'1 IHO
"'iF Dl 1 Dl,Ol-tN4001
Cl CZ
Mr~i"
"'="' by diode window and fed to three twin·T
lWIN·T RESONANT AMPUFIER-low•powor resonant ampllAors, each tunnel to one mod.
o-m tronsmittor on 27-MHz CB channel, modu· ulatlon frequency ancl clriving relay (only PULSED·LIGHT TRANSMlmR-Ujt oscillator
lotecl ot 300, 400, and 500 Hz by twin·T one 11 shown). Reliability of system is goocl. pulses solld•stato lamp to produce pulsed ll9ht
osclllotors, feecls superhet receiver of experi· -F. B. Maynarcl, Twin T's: Designs & Applico- boom for remote control. Ran90 Is about 2
mental racllo romoto-control system. Demod· lions, Electronics World, Aug. 1968, p 35-37 ft whon u1lng simple lens over photodlode
ulated control signals are clipped to 0.6 V and 64. In receiver. Swltch11 9lve choice rtf four
pulse rat11 providing four different control
functions In receiver, Supply voltage can be
01 low al 3 V, from pair of D flashlight colts,
if low-volta90 ult Is used.-L. M. Hertz, Solid
State Lamps-Part II, General Electric, Cleve-
land, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970, p 32.
1000~1 IOOO I
Cs
TRI At
SCl418
A14F
POWER
··~·
Cg
POWER SUPPLY OETECTION a COUNTER

OUTPUT
652.5 Hz
MURATA
OUT TUNING '<lflK
LIGHT SENSOR I PRE-AMP ONE SHOT FREQUENCY"':' DETECTOR
TUNED-RELAY RECEIVER-Silicon photodiode I ms for driving tuning fork. When trans- Additional channoh aro requirod If more than
recelvos pulsod light boom in rango of 300- mltted frequency corr11ponds to that of fork, . one control frequency Is used.-L. M. Hertz
,.· 1,200 pp1 from transmitter up to several hun• fork output triggers gate of scr, to close Solid State Lamps-Part II, General Electric'
drod foot away. Ql amplifies output and reed switch and tri89lr trlac that applies Clovoland, Ohio, No. 3°-0121, 1970, p 35. '
drlvos mvbr Q2.Q3 to stretch pulses to about powor to a-c rocoptocle for load up to 2 A.
LAMP FAILURE INDICATOR-Noon glows if

three-way switch in kitchen does not turn on
garage light because it is burned aut or ro-
moved.-E. Bauman, "Application of Noon
Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes/' Signalito,
I I Neptune, N.J., p 139.
_ _ _ _ _ _J L-
l<ITCHEN .- _ _ ., GARAGE
SWITCH I I SWITCH
GARAGE 1
LIGHT L ___ JI
HOT
117 VAC
ll l!
0.1
"" ' r
lSO ?nF
68kSl
9V
tr- j
0I
I
00
A 1
..: 1
'" +
15-KHZ MAGNETIC DOOR OPENER-Devel-
~~ 0.01 oped ta solve problom of rodio-controlled
:~ LiOOI ! .µ
•
aon<W vuw
garage doors that open when jokester drives
past wilh transmitter In car, or photoelectric
T openers that are opened by boys wilh flash-

lights. Inductor wound on 12-mm rod of
~! r-1~ - ~ ,; - -~:I::- -J--- il!i

forroxcubo 48 12 cm long servos as element
01
of tunod circuit for Hartley oscillator and os
$M.!A$ ASOV! - - - - - -- - - - - - - - magnetic antenna. Will operate in band
from I 0 to 100 kHz, permitting operation af
~c111s l um
two or more different systems close together.
Control range is about 15 feet. Requires
T
CASSETTE TONE COMMANDS-Dual-channel
trolling two side-by-side projodors. 3,200-
Hz tone stops sound tape. Bridged-T net-
similarly tuned magnetic roceivor and can•
trol actuator driving garago door motor.-
J. van Oort, Briof ltoms of Interest, Electronic
Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
pulse circuit converts 1,000 and 3,200 Hz work forms feedback loop thot passes oll
Eindhovon, Tho Nothorlands, Vol. 27, No. 1,
tone signals on second frock of I SO.mil stereo frequencies except tho one to which it is
1966-1967, p 38-40.
topo cassette to useful control commands, tunod.-W. Szabo, Control Commands, A-V
such os for advancing slide projedor or con- Communications, Doc. 1969, p 6 and 31--33.
+
100~
1son
15-KHZ MAGNETIC RECEIVER-Operates from ing up to 500 mA. With larger motors,
3.y supply, drawing only about 125 µA on switching relay should be used. Radiation
standby. Responds to 15-kHz magnetic ra- is in form of alternating magnetic field, and opening motor.-J. van Oort, Brief Items of
diation from single-tube transmitter up to 15 is deflnitoly not electromagnetic wave. Interest, Electronic Applications, Phillps, Pub.
feet away, for remote control of garage-door Article covers possible sources of magnetic in· Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nether-
aponer having control actuator motor draw- terferenco, such as stray flolds from door- lands, Vol. 27, No. I, 1966-1967, p 38-40.
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS 685
-Vee +12V
0
a o
o~OSERVO
BRY :SS
0-200 pF
RADIO CONTROL FOR GARAGE DOOR-

Simple receiver circuit requiros only single
scr in high-Q tuned antenna circuit. Signal
input of only 30 µW, obtained from whip or
100 wire antenna up to 100 feet from low-power
o---il---.-~ .....-+-~~~ transistor transmitter in auto, will trigger scr
TRIG and pull in rolay.-P. Antoniazzi, Inexpensive
INPUT Radio-Controlled Door Opener Uses Only Ono
SCR, Electronic Design, Nov. 8, 1969, p 109.
ao CABLE TO REMOTE
r-"°.LO---Oc SWITCH •13V
..,!,. RESET
• P.8.
THREE-MODE REMOTE CONTROL-Single
shielded wire going to remote control givos
choice of three modes of operation: single. +270 v
shot with minimum ON time; single-shot with
ON timo determined by CJ and R1; bistoble
operation with ON time determined by man•
ual preset. Transistor types are not critical.
-D. E. Campbell, Three-Mode Multivibrator
Uses Single Control Wire, "400 Ideas for De·
sign Saladed from Eledronic Design," Hay·
I
den Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 192.
DRIVER
T1.
REMOTE 10,..F TRANSFORMER
CONTROL
+20VOC TRANSMITTER
R1
8.2K
C1
0-~UT
Hl·l
SIGNAL
1-f,Tr---= -
I
CONTROL
RELAY
SOLENOID II C1
II
CONTROL
RELAY
SOLENOIO II c,
-,
I
1;ifOK I o, :I TO
r:
ADDITIONAL
INPUT
·:
l I ,.Fl
10 •
r CHANNELS
k'1 ~
L1
1;' RE~-OTE LO·Z I R<IK)

SIGNAL SOURCES
L ·- - L
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
EXCLUSIVE-OR GATES FOR MIKES-Developed
for paging and public address systems hav• ULTRASONIC REMOTE CONTROL-40-kHz
ing many push-to-talk carbon microphones acoustic wave from remote ultrasonic trans-
feeding common amplifier from different la· mitter is pickod up by microphone and am-
cations. When switch at any remote loca· plified by wideband IC ompllfler driving fre•
tion is closed, corresponding ujt gate Is trig· quency-sensitivo control relay. Additional
gered. Resulting emitter current makes emit· channels aro tuned to difforont frequencies,
tor voltage stabilize below trigger love! of above or bolow 40 lcHz. Moy be used for
other ujt stages, blocking all athor mikes.- remote tuning and control of color tv set.-
R. F. Sherwin, Remote-Controlled Excluslvo "lineor Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
OR Gate, EEE, Dec. 1966, p 119. ·N.J., IC-41, p 296.
LOAD RECEPTACLE
500 WATTS MAX.
120VAC
20
LOW-VOLTAGE
BELL" WIRE
ISOLATED REMOTE SWITCH-Requires only
boll wire, because switch simply shorts 6.3•V VIA, VlB • 12AU7
secondary of small filament transformer to
Tl • STANCOR PS-8415
make it saturato and thoroby trigger triac on. ELECTRONIC LOCK-Uses sorles-fed Hartley
Ideal for controlling outdoor light, lawn• oscillator, adiu,tod to osclllato normally
sprinkling systems, irrigation pumps, and whon key L3-C3 is removed. Triode V1A
similar loads that may bo at inconvenient thon draws only very low ploto curront and
locations.-F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, relay is open. Whon key Is brought near
Economy Powor Semiconductor Applications, oscillator tank circuit, It absorbs energy and
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, loads oscillator, making Its plato current rlso
1965, p 9. and pull in relay that actuates electric door
lock. To adiust, place key 0.5 in. away from
plate end of L1 and slowly adiust Cl until
relay energizes. Relay will then drop out
whon key Is removed. Koy Is small parallel
resonant circuit having same frequency as
L1-C1 .-J. P. Shields, "Novol Electronic Cir-
cuits," H. W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind.,
1968, p 83.
INPUT
lt5v 60hz OUTPUT
LOAD RECEPTACLE "FILAMENT"

500 WATTS MAX TRANSFORMER
Fl
!I AMP
"3 AG"
FUSE
120V
AUDIO
TRANSFORMER
RI
50 OHMS
2WATTS
DIODES ARE tN2069 NOTE.

SOLID-STATE RELAY-Ujt produces pulse after MOUNT GE· X12 ON A
LOW VOLTAGE 3•x :s·x 1/16" COWER OR
each zero crossing of lino voltage, but react• "BEU:' WIRE ALUMIMJM COOLING FIN.
111nce of tranJf111rmor prevents gating of pulses
to scr when primary winding is open. Wh•n SI REMOTE
SWITCH
primary is shorted at remote control loca-
tion, gating pulsos trigger scr at start of each
half-cycle, to give effect of closing switch CONTROLLING 500 W WITH BELL WIRE- bypasses transformer primary and prev•nts
between a-c lino and output.-J. B. Johnson, Closing remote switch shorts socondary of burning It out. Will handle lamp ar appll·.
Lino-Operatod Relay Uses Isolated Actuating small filament transformer and trlg9ers trlac anco loads up to 500 W.-"Hobby Manual,"
Input, Efecrronln, Fob. 3, 1969, p 78. for turning on load. Wh•n trlac conducts, It General Electric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965, p 162.
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS 68'7
+9T0+1zvo-...-----.--------------t-------+-------.
Z7U\ IOUI.
HOA IH4001
ZTClll.
01,Z,l- llPS Htl 011 ZltHH
lUkA lk4 04-RCA 40341
Tl -OUIRIO llUDUllT llHO
FREQUENCY-SELECTIVE RECEIVER-Uses Moto• Ql, detected In diodes, and used to activate

rola Minitono rosonant-reed device at Input, Schmitt trigger Q2.Q3. This turns on 04, to
tuned to same frequency botweon 67 and send current through load which can be latch·
3,150 Hz as in companion transmitter. Input Ing relay, signal lamp, or other dovico.-L.
can be from wire lino or from audio output Solomon, Tone-Selective Signaling Tho New
of radio receiver. Tono signal is amplified by Look, E/odronlc1 World, Sept. 1967, p 88-90.
INPUT DC- FREQ CONVERTER

PULSE GENERATOR
5Kn
Rn
AUDIO
MODULATION '3.'3Kn
R12
L1 = 115µH, 60 turns #24 wire, Genelax Core G59N/30.1

L2 = :=::: 1µH, 6 turns #26 wire, 3/4" dia. air core
D1 , 0 2 , and D3 = glass signal diodes
OPTICAL F·M TRANSMITIER-Used to tran1mlt colved signal strength do not affect fldellty adjustable constant-currant sourco Q3. Audio
analog Information, with signal volta90 bo· of transmitted signal. Pul10 generator usos information can be transmitted by frequency•
Ing converted Into pulse repetition rote that solid-state lamp and scr having actual switch. modulating tho transmitter. Rl 1 then deter-
11 adjustable from 50 Hz to 50,000 Hz by d·c Ing time of only 40 ns, to give effective duty mines carrier frequoncy.-L. M. Hertz, Solid
control voltago. Pul10s are 500 ns wide, with factor of about 0.025 at 50 kHz. Analog- State Lamp-Part II, General Electric, Cleve-
peaks af several amperu.. Variations in re- froquoncy converter uses ujt Q2 controlled by land, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970, p 37.
120K.n
Rg
I
IOK.0.1 50
R5 R
I
"
SSL
2 NICAD.
CELLS
IK!l
Rs 'OUT PUT
TUNING FORK OSC. RELAXATION 05C.
POWER SUPPLY IMURATA 652.5 Hz PULSE GEN.
TUNED·RELA Y TRANSMITTER-Operates from frequency of relaxation oscillator Q2-Q3. Hertz, Solid Stato lamps-Part II, General
a•c lino and drives solid-state lamp at puls- RB covers range of 300 to I ,200 pps. Used Electronic, Cleveland, Ohio, No. 3-0121, 1970,
ing rato corresponding to frequency of tun- with receiver having appropriate tuned relay p 34.
ing fork uaed (switch at Bl or at free-running circuit for each transmitting channel.-L. M.
PRE-AMP MONOSTABLE MULTl VIBRATOR
LIGHT
INPUT 22K.il 220Kil 10K!l
SIGNAL Ll4A Rs
R2 R3
.01,..f
Cs
BIAS
LAMP 70pf C
3
150K11 R7
120K11
Re
I OEMOOULATEO
68KJ.l OUTPUT
IOKJ.l
25K11 Rt R4 .Ol1<f
Rg
C5
OPTICAL f.M RECEIVER-Detects pulse-fre- pulse. M2 avera9os lhoso pulses for visual
quency-modulated light beam and converts output, while d-c output is obtained across minimum of about 100 Hz.-L. M. Hertz, Solid
prr back to analog output. Mvbr Q2-Q3 CS. System gives highly Intelligible voice State Lamps-Part II, General Electric, Cleve•
generates one pulse for each detected light communication al maximum prr of 50 kHz and land, Ohio, No. 3-0121, p 38.
CHAPTER 74
Sampling Circuits
STUT
+•?11~-----......- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
..... R·C MULTIPLICATION AND SAMPLING-Free-
running mvbr with very low duty cycle applies
timing voltage through diode 5325 to 1-meg
1-µF R·C timing combination, to produce
chopped exponential waveform like staircase.
At end of each mvbr charging cycle, negative
pulse is applied to base of sampling transistor
through 470-pF capacitor and diode, to give
about 10-µs sample period.-W, R. Spofford,
IN41Di4 Jr., Complomontary Unijunctlon Transistor,
CI G£ ~YC.lllllO'f•Tt 1'4,SIA,05 General Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.72,
CZ G! ... u! ~·v 1•14At04 1968, p 13.
C:Ji GI SL.VI .Jli"r ilAU.110)
TlltA-.11STOltS • H 2 .. 2924
INPUt
Ill Rf
LONG HOLD-Command signal of 0 V inilioles c

sampling, and -10 V gives hold. Report
discusses frequency limitations of arrango-
menl.-A Wide Band, long Hold Sample and
Hold Circuit, Optical Electronics, Tucson, Ariz.,
No. 10131.
COMMAND OUlPUJ:
+15v
+15v 620
-ISv
t011t
+
-I 1N914
7
IN753A
tN914 . -
10k
,, C040160 I SIGNAL
IN
2
GATE_ 2N2219
IN 10• OUTPUT
0
10
lOk
2k ",I+ 01 2.5k D2 -
-:- IN753A
IN753A
(6.2v) (6.2vl
IN914 1N914
INCREASING DYNAMIC RANGE-Usos com-
plementary-channel mosfot sampling-gate IC -l~v -
to increase dynamic range of sample-and-hold Zenors with series resistances soften sharp namic range of switch.-R. J. Turner, Zeners
circuit. Keeps transient peaks in load 46 edges of drive waveform applied to IC, to Cut Corners in MOS Gate Driver, Efodronics,
dB down from moximum gating amplitude. reduce transients and thereby increase dy· Juno 22, 1970, p 82.
689
INPUT
SIGNAL
TO BE
SAMPLED
•1---t"""4-I
v.
~107
r····r
-
Ct
-
..J'L. Yz-1 .,__.__ ....,..~
INPUT
GATE 2.SK FD300
SIGNAL
-v.
DATA SYSTEM PUUES-Wlll sample pul11 In·
put signal and hold for up to 1 min. Tran•
alstor beta of 100 glvos signal transfer ratio
of 10,000, making high-beta transistors un•
nocessary.-R. S. Culkay, Circuit Samples A .IOnFIZkYI
Signal, Holds It Up To 1 Minute, Electronics,
Oct. 3, 1966, p 106-107. GATING PHOTOMULTIPLIER-Nogatlve-golng
pulse applied through transformer makes
transistor short bleeder resistor between dy·
nodes S2 and 53, dropping voltage between
thom and reducing goln of photomultiplier
by factor of about 100, which ls usually
enough for 1amplin9 applications such as aro
used In spectrometry.-J. M. Schonkeren, "Pho-
tomultipliers," Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, 1970, p 99.
IC Input
(RESET}
I
Integrator I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...JI
Input O'V\Nll
c6
2N3641 IOOOpF
PERIOD-VOLTAGE CONVERTER-Allows sam- cl
pling at rates approaching Input frequoncy, SWITCHED INTEGRATOR-Uses Burr-Brown
without Introducing oxcosslve ripple. lnstan• 4013/2S sample-hold modulo, with input
taneous output voltage Is proportional to signal applied through external summing
.j
Input slgncal period or frequency. Consists resistor RI as shown. When switched cur-
of mono mvbr Ql.Q2, llnoar ramp generator rent ampliflor in modulo Is sated off, Input :I
Q3.Q5, and sample-and hold circuit 04-A1.
0 signal Is lntegratod with integrator gain of
Sample-hold allows accurato tracking of rapid I /RI Cl. In ropotitive operation, Initial value
changes In period, because each stop Is ind•· of time integral is sot by IC (Initial-condition)
pondont of procodlng changes.-J. M. Ka11on,
Linear Porlod·to•Voltoge Convortor with low
Ripple, EEE, Jan. 1969, p 117-118.
input voltage used for switching to roset
modo.-Sample/Hold Modules, Burr-Brown Ro·
search, Tucson, Ariz., PDS-211, 1969.
"·...
~
SAMPLING CIRCUITS 691
Signal
Input
fi01 - iOk- - - - -40137251
I .
Switched
II
I Current Amplirier I
I I
I
Mode
I
__,___
3 I
..JI
Control _ I C =0.01, 0.1,
Input L ___________
Q-.tw---------J or I 11F
....___ C1
Analog
SAMPLE-AND-HOLD FOR ANALOG SIGNALS- Input DYl-+--11---Jl--l---t-t+-t-t--
Used to acqulro and track analog input signal timo intervals, and conversion of pulse height Signal
and hold its Instantaneous value when com• to pulse width. Cl is holding capacitor, and
manded to do so by mode control logic Input. should bo low-leakage polystyreno.-Sample/ +SV!'- Com_pu_i_o_
1 __
Can bo used in analog-digital converters, Hold Modules, Burr-Brown Research, Tucson, Sw;1ch RcKtt I Ro..,1
pulse amplitude detectors, measurement of Ariz., PDS-211, 1969. Control av4-=:.:....i---:"-:--:--4-....;;;.;;.~
I Swirch-to-
"""'I 1-Compuro
I I Time
Initial
Ccndition
!Ok Analog
+v Rt Output OV'-+---++---~--t-+---
Signal
2,000pf SWITCHED INTEGRATOR-Burr-Brown 9580

Ct sample-hold elodronic switch gives choice of
+ISv reset and compute modos of operation for
Im opamp.-Sample/Hold Elodronic Switch, Burr·
Brown Research, Tucson, Ariz., PDS-188A,
-ISv 1968.
IOm
RI R2
Yo v,o--c=::r--t------c::=:::i----,
+~ ISkl\
-sv C1 330nF
u--------t
y +ISv
3.9k
-v
_ ~1 k 2 trim +v
BmER TRACKING-Accuracy of sample-and· 1
hold circuit is Increased by placing dual tran• OV OOA42 out V0
sistor at input of opamp to limit discharge
current of feedback capacitor and thereby
decrease holding error at output. Static and
dynamic accuracy Is bettor than 0.1 % full MEASURING MOMENTARY VALUE-Simple
scale, with a holding error of 1 to 2 mV, for hold circuit using Philips DOA42 block
input voltage range of 10 V for either polar• charges R2-Cl network to hold Information,
ity, fraquencies from d-c to 1 kHz, and tem- after which switch Is changed to position 2
perature range of 0 to 50 C. Circuit values so input signal can bo removed.-Hold Circuit
shown give track and hold time of 200 #'S.-G. Using a DOA42 Block, Philips, Pub. Dopf.,
Koch and U. Mecci, Dual Transistor Reduces Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No.
Error of Track and Hold Circuit, Electronics, 71.
March 17, 1969, p 94-95.
Input
Signol+'I.---'---.~-~---
SAMPLE-HOLD-Uses Burr-Brown 95BO sample.
hold electronic switch to give choice of track
and hold modes of operation with opamp.
Whon 9580 is switched off by applying posi· Q-'W'----
tiva 5-15 V control signal, circuit switches
from track modo to hold modo In about 200
ns.-Sample/Hold Electronic Switch, Burr•
Brown Research, Tucson, Arl:r., PDS.188A, c = 0.01, 0.1 -..-
'
Acq1,1i~i1 io"
1968. or I 11F fil'l";C'
\I• ••2 ._.Cl.Tl
OUTPUTS
START
.. p~;~~PLIHG
U
VT
XAG('tATfC
,._,(
111 CMIMS
'•
GE Bl.ACK HAWK • • "aao ;.,
75F3R5A224 •••
C• GE POLYCARBOllATE 74FOt9-205
47,{l
80-SEC TIMER WITH SAMPUNG-Threshold
sampling is achieved with complementary·
ujt 80-s timer by turning QI off for 10 p.s at
C•GE BLUE JAY AAl8AIO!IC
10-Hz rato with external sampling pulses.
LOW-COST SAMPLER-Usos innxpensivo ujt When capacitor voltage becomes large enough
such as 2N2646 or Dl3TI in oscillator con- to fire the ujt, DI 3T1 programmable ujt is
figuration. When 0.22·µF capocitor dis- triggered inJo conductlon.-W. R. Spofford, Jr.,
charges, voltago across 47-ohm resistor is Complementary Unijunction Transistor, Gen·
liftod positive for few microseconds, back- eral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.72, 1968,
biasing diode and allowing lnterbase voltage p 12.
of complementary ujt DSK to reach its normal
value.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Complementary
Unijundien Transistor, General Eledric, Syra-
cuse, N.Y., No. 90.72, 1968, p 12.
INPUr
INTEGRATOR WITH SAMPLE & HOLD-Usos
OEI Model 9186 uhf opamp having high
slewing rate and very wide bandwidth at
unity gain. In integrating mode, amplifler COMMAND
has integrating capacitor between output ond INP17l
inverting input, while noninvorting Input is
ot signal ground. During integrating mode, OU?PDr
fet switches are on and not in circuit. When
placed back in circuit and oponod by sampling
command input, output equals value al mo-
ment before switches wore opened. For 20-
V p·p swing, maximum frequency Is 800 kHz.
-A High Spood Integrator and Samplo & Hold
Circuit, Optical Electronics, Tucson, Arb., No.
10079.
Vee
+12V
03
1N916
INPUT 07
05 2N929 FILTER WITH SAMPLE-HOLD-Circuit functions
IN916
R5 as unlty•goln ampliflor having two different
IOK limo constonh that ore solocted by grounding
02 06
OUTPUT or opening goto terminal, for use as gated
IN916 2N2604 low-pass flltor operating in range of 0.1 to
1,000 Ha. Removing R6 converts it to
06
1N916 sample-hold circuit functioning as ampliflor
whon gate is grounded. When gate is
R5 opened, output is held at lost voltage lovel.
GATE IOK 05 -R. S. Hughos, Gated Filter and Sample-Hold
2N916 Circuit, EEE, Nov. 1966, p 154-155.
R4 Ra
2K 1QK
m ::c. 0.68
)If
_g-----u- ':'
ff k
::r: 0.68)1f
T
";;"
l1k
~ 0.68)1f
_g----u-
I
ALL TRANSISTORS ARE FNI0'34
ROTARY SWITCHING-Pairs of fet's replace tor. Used in sampling, with each -capacitor
two rotary switches in series-switched digital exposed succauively to segment of signol.-
fllter. Switching is controlled by chain of W. R. Harden, Digital Fiiters With IC's Boost
delayed pulsos applied to coupled gates G, Q Without lndudors, Electronics, July 24,
and output is token across grounded capocl- 1967, p 91-100. ':"
SAMPLE----..
.LOAD·INDEPENDENT HOLDING-Opomp using
super-gain transistors provides improved hold·
ing occuracy by minimising error currents.
Opomp buffers holding capacitor Cl to pre-
vent It from being discharged by any output Rz
looding.-R. J. Wldlar, Designing with Super• OUTPUT
IOk
Beto Transistor Op-Amp ICs, EEE, Dec. 1969, INPUT
p 70-73.
C2
30pF
+20v
Dt
HG5004
1.Sk
330k
-20v
SAMPLING 10-V SIGNALS-Modification of drive. Arrangemtnt permits sampling of slg· piing, as in sampling oscllloscope.-D. J.
conventional sampler uses balanced drivo to nal amplitudes comporoblo to power supply Grover, Large.Signal Sampling Without o
diode bridge, in place of pulso transformer voltage. Ideal for progressive signal sam· Transformer, Electronics, Nov. 27, 1967, p 80.
+15 v
R2
INPUI
OUIPUI
FASTER SAMPLE-HOLD-Matched transistors

- 15 v Q1..Q2 give low offset botween sample data
input and held outp_ut, to give 300-ns output
HIGH-SPEED SAMPLING & HOLD-Whon switch rosponse to stop input level and 0.1% accu-
is opened, OEI Model 9245 opamp becomos racy. Logic input applied to Dl controls
unity-gain amplifier having same output volt- state of circuit.-J. Downey, Sample-and-Hold
age as that across C. When switch is closed, Circuit is Fast Yet Accurate, EEE, March 1968,
circuit is in sample modo and behavos as p 125.
augmented integrator. If C is 150 pf, band·
width for 3 dB down is 10 MHz.-The 9245
As A Hi9h Speed Sample and Hold, Optical
Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. I 0117.
. . . . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . , -12v
39K
FET BOXCAR SAMPLE-AND-HOLD-Wiii sample
either d·c or a•c signals at repetition rates 0.02uF
-1---1~ ~1-6-_. _______L--..Jt--GATE
from 200 to 250 kHz, and store sample volt- INPUT
a9os havin9 width of only 0.5 µs. Ql and 39K
02 form cross-coupled series switch that con- SIGNA~ 0
INPUT 04
ducts in both directions for transferring G
3Vck 2N2606
either increasing or decreasing input si9nal1 5VP·P
to 9lass storage capacitor during conduction.
Gato input for fat's is -12 V swifchln9 pulse OUTPUT
Olo2.5V
lastin9 0.5 to 20 p.s.-J. J. Contus, Boxcar
Circuit Uses FETs, EEE, April 1967, p 136.
-15v
tOk
t+l GATE INPUT
lk
15k
INPUT IOk eo r-------------

1 C1
-,I
I B O.Olpf
IOUTPUT
25k
+
+15v HGATE INPUT

SAMPLING 30 HZ Wini l·MIN HOLD-Low• sample wldth.-R. A. DoParna, Signal Is
.cost IC opamp and single transistor sample Sampled and Hald for 1 Minute, Electronics,
30-Hi sine wave once por cycle with 0.4-ms May 1, 1967, p 71-72.
+12Vcle
c
IOK
02
2N3251
~
2N3251
-E
-
HOlO
+E
SAMP~E
ERROR REDUCTION-Modification of conven·

tional fet sampl-nd·hold circuit reduces
errors caused by ON resistance of fat. Dur·
ing sampling interval, both fet's are on and
Q1 is cut off. During hold interval, situation -&we
is reversed. With lot's inside feedback loop HIGH SPEED WITH SIMPLICITY-Chorge ond
of high-gain opamp such as p.A709C, ON discharge connot occur simultoneously in slm·
resistance is reduced by open-loop gain, so pllfled circuit shown, and therefore no tpeod·
charging speed is essentially limited only by inhibiting current-limiting resistor is needed.
output current capability of voltage follower. Sampling periods con be as short as 1 µs.
-1. Cohen and D. Clark, An Improved FET Betwoen pulses, sompllng pulse troln Is al
Sample•ond·Hold Circuit, EEE, Sept. 1968, p ground potential, holding Q2 in soturotlon.
104 ond 106. Article describes operollon In detail.-B. Pearl,
Sample-Hold Circuit, EEE, Dec. 1966, p 121-
122.
Rt
10011
INPUT 10 k 10 k
R
Rz
iOk
t C1
T111F
Cz t TEFLON, POLYETHYLENE OR
•WORST CASE DRIFT LESS 30pF POLYCARBONATE DIELECTRIC Control
THAN 3mV/SEC CAPACITOR Signal
HIGH-ACCURACY HOLD-Error-producing leak-
age current across substrate-droln junction is INVERTING SAMPLE-HOLD-Burr-Brown 3064
routed to output of high-goin opamp through fot·input opomp modulo, used with 9580
RI to prevent it from contributing to residual switch having current ampliflcation foctor of
error current thot affects accuracy of samplo- 1,000, gives inverting unity-gain amplifier
and-hald circuit. Hold capacitor must havo performonco when switch is on and set to
low leokage and be free from dielectric somple or trock mode. Time constant of
polarization. For sample interval under 100 circuit Is shert.-Operatlonal Amplifiers, Burr·
µ.s, use faster IC such os LM102A.-R. J, Brown Reseorch, Tucson, Ariz., ll-227, 1969, p
Widlor, Designing with Super-Beta Transistor 43.
Op-Amp ICs, EEE, Dec. 1969, p 70-73.
TRIGGER
---+~~~t--i(INPUb
Cl 330pf y
6800 220 3.311 820
pf
PWM MVBR-Combines somple, hold, and

~PULSE WIDTH MODULATION OUT
pwm operations. Q3.Q4 form mono mvbr,
with C2 os chorging capacitor. l'Dsitive peak ulation. Maximum prr is 45 kHz ond range Width Modulator Uses Menostoble Multjyj.
of voltage at B is limited to instantaneous of output pulse widths is 1 to 20 µs. line- brotor, Electronic Desi9n, Nov. 8, 1969, p
valuo of low-frequency Input lo achieve mod· arity is excellent.-A. Shoh, lineor Pulse- 103 and 105.
CHAPTER 75
Sawtooth Generator Circuits
UNIVERSAL SAWTOOTH-Converts 4.y p·p -IOV

sine, squoro, or triangular waveform in range
of 80 to 800 Hz to 0.3 V sawtooth at lower
froquoncy and 1.5 V sawtooth at higher fre- OUTPUT
quency. Diode con be any type, such os
I N457. Circuit is easily set up, oven though
Cl
not highly accurota.-C. Eddy, Simple Circuit
Converts Any Waveform Into a Sawtooth,
Electronic Design, Dae. 20, 1967, p 110. r~···
'='
.-- -4---- ...... - - -,
('
TRAPEZOIDAL VOLTAGE SWEEP-Transistor
sarvos as switch for two wave-shaping net•
works, one shown by broken arrows and the i
other by solid arrows. When input pulse
swings negative, transistor turns on and CC
discharges over broken-arrow path. Output
V1 -9:r t 0.01µ.F I
~
I
waveform is tropezoidal.-A, C. Gillie, "Pulse ) Cc
and logic Circuits," McGraw-Hill, N.'I'., 1968,
'...
p 2n. ..... -- ~ ---
__../ /
-Yccl-9VI
RI R7
1.lll 1.811
QI COLLECTOR iY
CIL701 OF QI
02
2N869
COLLECTOR 8.,v
R8 or 02
,00
R2
O.lp.F
03
2N2369
. ~,";" ..'
little power. Sawtooth can be as narrow as ''' ''
3.311 R9 I µ.s, with ramp starting accurately at zoro~"'.
470
voltage and with no step. Pulses can also:' ·
be as narrow as I µ.s. QI Is constant•current; ·:
source for emitter-coupled complementary pair ·;. ::.
NEGATIVE RAMP AND POSITIVE PULSES- Q2.Q3.-U. S. Singh, Circuit Generates Linear'. · · J
Provldos 2~µs positive pulses with 15 ms paromotors, along with no9ativo-gain9 ramp Ramp and Short Duty Cycle Pulsos, Elocrronic ~ ' ~-... f.
OFF time for use In measurin9 transistor having excellent linearity. Consumes very Design, May 10, 1969, p 134. '
698
SAWTOOTH GENERATOR CIRCUITS 697
+riv MIO LEVEL

llZ RS RI
100• 4,n ZOii
oz 01
OUT~ INITIAL--
.u,,,
CZ Cl
l>'lf!IF
LEVEL
--FINAL
LEVEL
011Cll-1114S-TIXAS INSTllUlllllTiUIG.lllllCTIGN TIWlllSTOll

IMPROVING LINEARITY-Instead ef feading
timing capacitor from constant-current source,
circuit uses two ujt sawtooth oscillators oper-
ating lndopendontly except for sharing com- +15Y
ZI
mon base•2 resistor R3. The two ujt's now INIT'l'IA
fire In unison, with the fastest ujt determining Ok
repetition rate, which is about 500 Hz for
values shown and 375•mV output signal.
Increasing ratio of time constont R2C2 to RI
Z2 lk lk
R1CI improves linearity.-F. H. Tooker, Im· IN771A
proving Sawtooth linearity, Efoctronics World,
Feb. 1969, p 84.
IOOk
QUTPUT
.r
&Ok
NONLINEARITY COMPENSATION-Addition of R3
18K-0.05 p.F Integrating network provides 50k ....
second-order compensation for nonlinearity af SERVO CONTROLS RAMP-Produces ramp that systems. Program is Initiated by activating
bootstrap sawtooth generator. Output stage rises from inltlol level to mid·level in Inde- relay Kl and terminated by activating K2
can be any npn emitter-follower transistor.- pendently adjustable time, remains at con• (coils not shown) manually. R6 determines
I. P. Sylvan, The UniJunctlon Transistor Char- slant level for adjustable time, than drops to upslope time.-G. E. Cook, Servo Pro9ramm1r
acteristics and Applications, General Electric, preset final level in adjustoblo downslope Generates Linear On and Off Ramps, flee•
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90,10, 1965, p 48. time, as required In mony industrial control tronic Design, Nov. 8, 1967, p 118 and 120.
+tOv +tOv +tOv +tOv +10v
SCR
ZNBL5
IOk
SYNCHRONOUS
OUTPUT
!Ok
o,
1N914
:.
-tOv
PULSE l,OOOpt
TRAIN - - - ) i------119--+---~
INPUT
10k
-IOv
Oz
1N914
+10v
~LSE
TRAW INPUT
SWEEP OUTPUT
SYNCHRONOUS
OUTPUT
ffi
SWEEP IN FREQUENCY DIVIDER-Generates place of 1overal fixed-frequency dividers. kHz. Input-to-output ratios can be as high
output pulses in synchronltm with Input pulse With values shown and 1·µF capacitor for 01 1,000:1.-S. Weisman, One Transistor
train, for pulse or digital systems. Permits Cl In llnoar sweep, output frequency can be Sweeps Clean, flecrronlcs, June 12, 1967, p
using one varloble-froquency generotor in varied from 10 to 1,000 Hz for input of 10 ID.6-109.
125mH
COMMON-COLLECTOR OUTPUT-Usas basic
1N459 transistor current sweep coupled into class A
common-collector amplifier serving also as
30k bulfor.-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse and Logic Cir•
cuits.'' McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968, p 273.
Output
Yee • 10
a& 01
IZOh U140
T•I
f:'l~C! RT
~110"
.,
us SllO.,
ZTUOl OUTM'
02
U1'0 _/l_
TA6
Al YRI
10< KSS8A
ZUlOO
TH !AS
u
ru
IOl
llA }....
RS
lTUCO
SO•
04
AHPUTU0£
ZS140
., 010 All
IZOI ll• 2SC.'\
Yrc •SV
Cl
.:v-
Tl1"U
-ZZOOpl
I TR,, TR, ZTX302 (BCWl4)
TR, ZTXS02 (BCWIS)
TR., TR •• TR. ZTX300 (BCWIO)
1-MINUTE LINEAR RAMP-Provides adjustable transistor gives rapid flyback and recovery. gor. TR6 discharges C rapidly.-"E·Llno Tran·
ramp times up to 1 min and adjustable out• TRI and TR2 form constant-current source, sistor Applications," Ferranti ltd., Oldham,
put amplitude up to 8 V. Separate discharge TR3 is buffer, and TR,..TRS form Schmitt trig· lanes., England, 1969, p 24.
+v
2.2k 2.2k
SWEEP-DRIVING FLIP·FLOP-Convontlonal flip- 0

flop changes state from binary 1 to 0 when
positive trigger is applied to set input, and
reverses state when positive trigger is ap• 2N708 2N708
plied to reset input. Can bo used to drive
linear sweep clrcuit.-S. Weisman, Ono Tran-
sistor Swoops Clean, Efectronic1, Juno 12,
1967, p 106-109.
SET -v RESET
INPUT +18v
4VPP R:s R4
nn lk
1....
.01µ.F
Cl
5K
ISEC
50K
IOSEC
s
SQUARE TO SAWTOOTH-Two-diode circuit
provides quick means of obtaining sawtooth RECHARGE
from Bo-800 H11: square wavo. Accuracy Is
fair.-C. Eddy, Simple Circuit Converts Any
Waveform Into a Sawtooth, Efectranic Design,
01
2Nll32
IL l PULSE
Doc. 20, 1967, p 110.

x
c
50µ.f. 50'1
x
+12Vdc
SWEEP
OUTPUT SWEEP
OUT
B
Ra
4.7K
(BLANKING) (BLANKING)
05
2N71B Rg
4.7K
TRIGGER C3 RIO
INPUT IOOpF 2.2MEG
LINEAR RAMP-Changing value of coarse 10.S SWEEP-Cenerates negative-going highly

swoop speed capacitor Cl gives swoop linear swoop with adjustable duration of
frequencies from 0.1 to SOO Hz, along with from .I to 10 s and sweep spood error under
positive and negative blanking pulses syn• O.S%. Polarity is easlly changed to got
chroniaed with output. Reliable triggering is positive-going sweep. Q1..Q2 chargo C.
achieved for swoop durations ranging from Sweep output Is buffered by Q3-Q4, and QS
2 µs to 10 s. Swoop output is 6 V p•p.-P. M. discharges C, which Is polystyrene type.-D.
Salomon, Unijunction Transistor Simplifies Breslow, Infinite I-out Current Source Gener-
Trigger Sweep Generator, EEE, March 1968, ates Long, Linear Sweeps, Electronic Oosign,
p 128-129. July 19, 1965, p 28-31.
'700 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY SWEEP-Circuit delivers

sawtooth swoop waveform to horizantal Input
of era, with linearity af sawtooth ramp as• + 12 Volta
1NS297
sured by current-limiting diode, and swoop
width determined by setting of Rl. Center
frequency of sweep depends on OEI Model
Po
70 IC voltage-frequency transducer which
delivers sinusoidal output whoso frequency Is
-0
directly proportional to d-c Input voltage.
• 12 Volta
Fat follower provides low output impedance
for cro. Used In testing networks Inserted in 100
vertical feed from sweep generator to era.-
CO!ltON
Sweep Generator Using a Vohage-To-Fre·
quency Transducer, Optical Electronics, Tucson,
Ariz., No. 100S9.
'rO Oacl1le-
acope
Rorlsotltal
Input
+18VDC
16"
270k
z 2.7k
!I: v,
..,g Rz 05
~J
IOOk 2N3711 R1
0
0 Q. VERSATILE RAMP-R2 adjusts shape of romp
u;;)
Vz
G o, ftom concave upward through linear to con•
MPFl07
cave downward. Different values for Rl and
5 R2 givo ramp durations ranging from 0.1 /LI
llOk OUTPUT to several hours.-L. s. Mclaughlin, Long
Oz Duration Variable Linearity Ramp Generator,
2N3711 EEE, Jan. 1970, p 127.
llOk 20k c, 100 3.3k
ALL RESISTORS 114 W

RELAY
C1 IS IOV CONTACTS
+12Vr--i
INPUT
0
___J L._
I I
I I
I I
R1
l.5M OUTPUT : ~
0----i:::"\Tb-
2700
TRIANGULAR-SAWTOOTH CONVERTER-Tri• RAMP GENERATOR-Duration of rectangular

angular wavo generated by opamps Al and Initiating pulse determines width of highly
A2 Is converted to sawtooth output by fot and llnear ramp or sawtooth sweep 9enorated by
two diodes connected as shown. Used to simple two-transistor circuit that is boot-
sweep voltage-controlled osclllater in phase- strapped through blocklng capacitor. Uno-
lockod loop as part of automatic acquisition arlty of ramp Is bettor than 0.25%.-J. Portor,
system. Output of sawtooth is symmetrical Input "Pulse Width Controls Simple Ramp
with rnpoct to soro voltago.-E. F. Prozoller, Generator, "400 Ideas for Design Selected
m Converts a Triangle Generator to a Sow· fram Electronic Dni"n," Haydon Boole Ca.,
tooth Generator, EEE, Doc. 1969, p 92-93. N.Y., p 189.
+15Wc 4
.13 MEG.
MEG.
-4t-'\Nlr_________.,......,;v.,...-'\Jv.----+
SAW-TOOTH FINE
·1~lI I{oi l
OUTPUT FREG.
A078
150V
-4
~i ~
J .001
SYNC TO 60 HZ-Developod for scr control SYNC
circuits requiring sawtooth generator syn• INPUT .05 ~[C! -r
chronlzod with o-c line. Ql and Q2 form
switch that is periodically oponed and closed
I_ 8~1 l
under control of 11 S·V a-c voltage applied to TIME-BASE VOLTAGE SOURCE-Covers range
input. Whon Input voltage has peak value of 5 to 1,500 H1 for Inexpensive modoratoly
above 22 V, Ql Is turned on and Q2 off, linear time bases. Used as horizontal swoop
allowing ujt oKlllator Q3 to generate one for small oscilloscopes.-E. Bauman, "Appli-
output pulse for each cycle of line voltage. cations of Neon Lamps and Gas Discharge
Applying positive full-wave-rectified llne +20V Tubes," Signalito, Neptune, N.J., p 34.
voltage to Input gives one output pulse
every 8.3 ms. If R6 is made variable, charg-
ing timo of Cl can be variod to change time
delay of output pulse with respect to zero
crossing of power line, to control scr firing
anglo.-C. L. Wiison, Unijunction-Translstor 47 p.F
POSITIVE
Oscillator Locks to Une Frequency, EEE, Dec. .__ _.,t\AAMP /""1
1967, p 93-94. OUT V V
O.Olp.F 0---
0------
NEGATIVE
BIDIRECTIONAL RAMPS-Each ramp starts RAMP
near 0 V and departs linearly, one In posi· OUT
tlve direction, and the other negative. Uses
GE D5K1 complementary ujt and Siliconix
Cl6810 fleld-offect diodes to achiove sym- 2N2647,051(t-GE
metry.-H. Olson, Symmetrical Ramp Genera- CL..6810 - SILICONIX
tor Uses Now Devices, Electronic Doilgn, Nov. 2N 4 360 - FAIACKILO
-20V 2N4302 -AMELCO
8, 1967, p 114.
+10v HOv HOv +IOv
8.2 k
1------PULSE
OUTPUT
TRIGGER _ _ _ __,
INPUT
2.2"
TRIGGER
INPUT
SWEEP
-IOv PULSE
OUTPUT
..•
.°lwEEP GIVES VARIABLE-WIDTH PULSES-With pulse width can be linearly changed from 1 SWEEP and SWEEP-DRIVING FLIP-FLOP.-5•
. /"calibrated multlturn linearr.pot for Rl, and to 100 ms. Circuits in boxes appear else- Weisman, One Transistor Sweeps Clean
__: ~· l·µF charging capacitor In sweep generator, where In this chapter under headings LINEAR Electronics, June 12, 1967, p 106-109. '
t3.6v
1Ct•Z•3•5•914
03
lC4 •900
D1,D5 •SILICON
Dz,D3 •GERMANIUM
Oi.03 •2N697
Oz •2Nll32 -
SENSITIVE LOW-COST IC SWEEP-Will trigger

on as little as 200 mV from d·c to over 10
MHz. Input stage ICI serves as preamp and flip·flop IC3. Buffer IC4 drives QI at Inputs reaches 10 V, zoner breaks down and initiates
phase inverter to allow selectien of positive- above I MHz. Resultant sawtooth has good retrace.-E. Feuer, Sweep Circuit Triggers On
or negative-slope triggering. Schmitt trigger linearity, with sweep speed af 0.5 µs when Only 200 Millivolts, Electronics, March 3, 1969,
IC2 supplies fast•rising positive pulse to R·S C is 100 pf and R is 3K. When sawtooth p 96-97.
+12v
o~
2N914
500pf 2k
DELAY
+3•-. r-
-1• L...I
+ 3 • ..., r-i r-i r-1 r-i r-i

200k
A -Iv W L.J L.J W L.J L.
lk
8+12•~
c+12v~
+12•
D
-6v
A - INPUT
8 - OUTPUT WITH NO DELAY
C - OUTPUT WITH SMALL DELAY
-6• D - OUTPUT WITH MULTICYCLE DELAY
RAMP SLOPE CONTROL-Complex ramp func· ity. Ramp duration can bo varied from sev• ing Cl at rate set by RI, to control slope.-
tion generator for multiple-axis cro scanning oral hundred ns to several hundred µs, by J. Downey, Capacitor Discharge Sets Shape of
provides 50:1 rango of slope adlustment for changing duration of input pulse. Uses con· Ramp Function,· Electronics, Doc. 8, 1969, p 90.
ramp segments without affecting their linear· stant·current generator Ql·Q2 for discharg·
+ 15 Volta
0.0lp.F
1N528)
IOk.0.
Re2 10 K
0.06V
- 15 Votta
CURRENT SWEEP-Chief function of transistor
is that of switch. When transistor Is on, cur• TIME RAMP-Generates ramp to simulate time
rent flows from battery through inductor into as Y input, to give output voltage that Is
collector. Currant Increases with maximum equal to constant multiplied by X input hav•
linearity at about 2,500 pps for values ing time (Y) as exponent. Ramp begins
shown. Transistor opens during flyback time when switch Is opaned and ends when switch
of sawtooth output. Book gives design pro· 11 closed to discharge C. Switching transistor
cedure for obtaining maximum linearity.- may be used instead of actual switch con·
A. C. Gillie, ''Pulse and Logic Circuits," tacts.-Time as an Exponent, Optical Elec-
McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968, p 268. tronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10101.
• 1611.1 a----'l.Afl------
4. 7 meg FREQUENCY
CONTROL
1-KHZ SYNCHRONIZED NEON-Adjust SOK
control for proper synchroni1atlon with 50..
SYNC INPUT µs input pulse.-W. G. Miller, "Using and
Cl Understanding Mlniaturo Noon Lamps," H. W.
lr~µF
Sams & Co., lndlanopolis, Ind., 1969, p 41.
lkHz
t
-lCN Rk
50K
+IOv +tOv +tOv +IOv +tOv
B.2k
SCR 1
2N885
2.2k
TRIGGER INPUT
IOk
SWEEP RESET(N.C.I
DELAYED CONTACT
CLOSURE
SWEEP CONTROLS RELAY TURN.ON TIME- repeatobllity. With values shown and 50..µF fixed relay tum-on-time.-5. Wolsmon, Ona
Length of generated sweep determines turn- chorging copacitor In sweep generator, roloy Transistor Sweep• Clean, Elecft0nic1, June 12,
on time of time-delay relay with excellent delay can be varied from 50 ms to 5 1 plus 1967, p 106-109.
SWEEP OUTPUT
BOOTSTRAP WITH CAPACITOR FEEDBACK- a, o,

Elimlnates nood for nogotivo supply, makes 2N708
IN914
frequency largely Independent of supply volt·
age, and Improves linearity of sawtooth SWEEP
output.-T. P. Sylvan, Tho Unljundion Tran• LINEAR SWEEP-Single-transistor constant• 02 OFF
slstor Characteristics and Applications, Gen• currant swoop using minimum of components IN914
oral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.10, 1965, provides output comparable to that of
p 48. complex foodbaclc-typa generators. Rt Is
typically 1,000 ohms, In series with slope. -v
adjusting potentiometer of around 10K. Sup- circuits using this versatile basic swoop.-S.
ply voltages can be 10 V. Article gives de- Weisman, Ono Transistor Swoops Clean, E/ec•
+160V
sign equations and five examples of other tronics, June 12, 1967, p 106-109.
T2-27-IRIOO
OUT OUT
T2-27-IRIOO
____
.....
BOOTSTRAP WITH ZENER FEEDBACK-Ar·
rangomont Improves linearity af ult sawtooth
generator that drives any npn omltter-fol·
lower output stage. Capacitor charging cur•
ront is held constant ovor complete cycle.
SAWTOOTH FROM TWO NEONS-Symmotrlcal Output transistor also serves as driver for
output from dual-neon relaxation oscillator bootstrap clrcult.-T. P. Sylvan, Tho Unijunc.
reduces power supply ripple and noise, and tion Transistor Characteristics and Appllca•
gives twice tho voltage of single noon cir· tions, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
cuit.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Neon 90.10, 1965, p 48.
lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Signallte, {DI BOOTSTRAP CIRCUIT WITH
Neptune, N.J., p 36. ZENER DIODE FE£0BACIC
SWEEP +IOv
RESET
SWEEP
OFF
FAST SWEEP
SWEEP ,-------------OUTPUT
SLOW
SWEEP
SWEEP
OUTPUT
+IOv
o.
2Nl893
NOTE:
"O" • 0 VOLTS
"t" • + 10 VOLTS
SWEEP R E S E T - - - - - - - - - -IOv
470
SWEEP OFF
-IOv
FAST SWEEP
SLOW SWEEP
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED SWEEP-Digital slg·
nals can reset linear swoop, change its slope,
ing capacitor in sweep, slow swoop is 10 ms
and fast sweep is 1 ms. Sweep slopes can
trol signals.-S. Weisman, Ono Translsto1;
Swoops Clean, Electronics, June 12, 1967,
t'k·
or turn it off at any lovol. With 1-µF chars• bo changed to form complox timing and con• 106-109.
SAWTOOTH GENERATOR CIRClTITS 70~
200011f r=
3.9k
2sk I
1
SET RAMP 1
PEAK
VOLTAGE I
I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _JI
+18Y
CONSTANT AMPLITUDE-Feedback amplifier frequency. For values ahown, frequency
compares peak voltage of ramp with refer- range is 1O Hz to 1 kHz for constant output sated phase delay.-P. R. Adby, Sawtooth
ence set by 25K pot and uses error to control within 5%. When combined with compara• Generator Delivers Conatant Peak Voltage,
charging current. Ramp height is thus kept tor set between O and 100% of ramp ampli• Electron!", March 3, 1969, p 97.
constant regardless of variations in trigger tude, con also servo as frequency-compen-
-20•
SLOPE
CONTROL P1 Rz 3.9k Rr 211
IOOk 2k 3.9k
Oz
2N2635
PULSE
GNO OUTPUT
R1
tk 03 -20R
IOOps
1
I r
o,
2N2635 R&
R3 8.2k
&2k
o, 02 04
5.lk lk lie Ra
15k
·:\
":
'ALL DIODES IN662 RAMP 220pf
OUTPUT ~GNO
INPUT---1 '"--....a.......
- - / ~ -16v
)· ·:
.r.~
1
-I
-~ILL£R·EFFECT RAMP GENERATOR-Simultano-
l-I0011s
loading. Article gives de1lgn equations and
1011
fou1ly generates train of positive-going wave- describes circuit operation In detail. · Q1.Q2 circuit, and put out 9otin9 pulses as by-
}~forms and train of negative-going square are in Miller-effect ramp eenerator, and other product.-G. Marosi, Gain-Multiplied Capacl·
. 1/ waves. Romp is linear to within 0.5%, re- tran1i1tors are in differential Schmitt trlg9or tance Generates Ramp Waveform, Electronla,
•· quires no clip ping, and is not distorted by that can terminate ramp at any point, reset March 6, 1967, p 130-131.
STAGE I STAGE 2
v•----------...--+--i
+24Vdc
10 KHZ WITH REGENERATIVE TRIGGER DIODE

-Allows uso of rolotlvely low supply volt·
ages, to reduce circuit dissipation and lower Cz
voltage rating of capacitor. Fairchild FT805 I047uF
trigger diode in scr relaxation oscillator gives 500.-2,000 HZ FREQUENCY SWEEP-Cascaded
high ofllcioncy In comparison with circuits ujt relaxation oscillators provide highly linear stage. First stage determines repetition rate
using throe-layer triggers. Moy be synchro· frequency swoop output that can be passed and frequency range of swept output, while
nizod with external reference frequency by through narrow bandpass filter to produce second stage determines amplitude of its
feeding positive sync pulses directly to goto of short-duration signal. Ql generates low• generated higher-frequency sawtooth wave·
trigger diode. Gives either pulse or soW• frequency sawtooth that controls higher-fro• form.-R. Smith, Jr., Cascade UJT Oscillator
tooth output.-M. Cottrell, Triggor·Dlodo Sim· quoncy sawtooth of Q3. Second stage must Generates Linear Frequency Swoops, EEE, April
pliftes Efficient Goneratien of Sawtooths and usually be at least 10 times frequency of ftrst 1968, p 106-107.
Pulses, EEE, March 1968, p 130.
+15V
BUNKING
1,5' OUTPUT
Os
c
2N2222
10.V LINEAR SWEEP-Combination of fet and
µA709 opomp gives highly linear triggered
sweep with very low d-c offset, along with TRIGGER
blanking output for cro. Schmitt trigger at IN~ll'-.-.......-1-1
input drives Q3 and Q4 to provide unblank·
Ing output and to Initiate swoop by unclamp•
IO• A
.. SWEEP
OUTPUT
ing fot QS. Q6 is buffer for low·impodonco

load. Provides sweep speeds from 1 H1 to
• v
·15V ·15V
R'
.
SWEEP
100 kHz, depending on values of C, R, and Clll STOP
IN914
R'.-D. A. Moyer, Triggered Sweep fCIJltures
Low D·C Offset, EEE, Nov. 1969, p 106. CA2
10•
••••
IN914 .15y
+20v
180k Oz
IN629
+1.ewm 500k
-3v
INPUT
05
D2 2N2906
IN629 +12v~
Ov
OUTPUT
ACTIVE LOAD SPEEDS FlYBACK-Load roslstor
of Miller swoop Is replaced by common·base -20v
transistor serving as active load, to reduce megohms of dynamic impedance. Positive charges to start Miller rundown at collector of
flyback time and Improve linearity. Tran• gating pulse makes Q4 charge C through D2 Q3.-D. K. Basu and B. Nag, Improved Miiier
slstor acts as current source drawing only a and switching transistor QI. When pulse Sweep Uses an Active Load, Electronlca, March
few mA of collector current while providing goos nogativo, Q3 is turned on and C dis- 31, 1969, p 86.
+tv INDEPENDENTLY VARIABLE-Dual ujt multivi·

brator generates waveforms with two differ-
R5 Ill ent repotition rates alternately when R3 Is
moved away from midpoint. Can be used
as tone generator for electronic organ. If
usod as dual·rate horizontal swoop for oscil-
loscope, rectangular waveforms at baso-2 of
ujt's can drive electronic switches that apply
tho signals under observation alternately to
vertical input of scope.-f, H. Tooker. Dual·
Rate Sawtooth Generator, Electronin World,
May 1969, p 74.
R4
4.1' Ill
R93
56k
ASTABLE·MVBR SAWTOOTH-RC is adjusted

until sawtooth wavoform across CC has Its
most linear rise and fall. Common-collector
amplifier T3 provides isolation betwoon CC
and output.-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse and Lagle
Circuits," McGraw·Hlll, N.Y., 1968, p 280.
-9v
1-3.6 ma)
R1 R2
B.2 k 220 k
FREQUENCY TUN ING

o, c, 02
0.1,,.1 Rs R9
10 k INVERT.
LOG
+ OUTPUT
C2 R6
5.6k
Trigger
INPUT
R3
!Ok
10 p.f IOk
11111 Dt ~9v
l-3.6ma)
~~~6-~~~~
C3
....~~~~~~~...~~~~--...~~..__.....~"'""'<.._~
C5 C& C7...~......,_~~~~~~~~ov
DRIVER FOR PORTABLE SCOPE-Covers 6 Hz running frequencies ore determined by capac- large enough lo remain almost fully charged
to 450 kHz in 5 ranges, with good sawtooth itor values: C3 =
8 p.F for 648 Hz; C4 = over complete sweep cycle.-C. C. Hoo, Saw•
slope linearity and constant amplitude. Trig· 0.68 p.f for 47-630 Hz; CS = 0.068 p.f for tooth Generator Drives Cathodo-Ray Tube,
ger Input must be 0.5 to 5 V rms. Transistors =
470-5,900 Hz; C6 6,800 pf for 4.7-59 Electronica, Sept. 19, 1966, p 124-125.
are AF117 germanium-alloy diffused. Free- kHz; C7 = 560 pf for 50-450 kHz. CS is
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter. use the index at tho bock
of this book. Check also the author's "5ourcebook of Electronic Circuits.'' published by
McGraw·Hill in 1968.
CHAPTER 76
Servo Circuits
Vz
22K
117VAC
22K
VO
Mil>-..-~-------------'
MOTOR
ARMATURE
Cfl1,cilz.SCA1,SCR2: AS REQUIRED 8T LDAD
R1: UKL,..;.. NOTE As: IK C1: D.l.111
flt: UKJ~ Rf: 47R 01: GE2H2646
RJ: UK,2W Ra: zsoon CR4:GEIN1776
A4: UK,2W At: 47n CAs-a:GEIN1&9=i NYQUIST PLOT GENERATOR-Uses Falrchlld
R=i: 2 MEGOHMS Rto: 47n CA3: GE IN 1692
IC opamps to insert disturbance In feedback
BALANCED-BRIDGE REVERSING SERVO- path of closed-loop serva system to measure
Phasa-sensitive servo drive supplies rovors- open-loop response in system that cannot be
iblo half•wavo power to armature of small operated under opon·loop conditions. Ny·
p-m or shunt motor. R1 can bo GE B425B quist plot Is then readily mado.-R. W. Alline·
photoconductor, GE 1D301 thermistor, posl· ton, The Integrated Operational Ampliflor: A
tion-sonsing pot, or output from control am• Versatile and Economical Circuit, "Microelec-
plifler.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General tronic Dosign," Haydon Boalc Co., N.Y., 1966,
Electric, 1967, p 217-218. p 189-194.
R3
R1 2.4 k
24 k
C1 T2
51&F
o-i 1-.-.--H 01
LJ
INPUT 2N2222A
RL
25 v 1.76 k
R4 + C3
430 10 uF
10 v
R2
C5
3k
50 nF
R5
51
•
5.1 k
7.5•W WIDEBAND TRANSFORMER.COUPLED-
Drivas small a-c motor RL from a-c signal drive for transformer keeps phase shift below motor winding. Boak gives tranlformfr
whoso frequency may range frqm 50 to 5,000 1O deg over frequency range handled, to pre• winding data.-"Semiconductor Power Circuilt
Hz. Uso of common•collector (omlttor fol 0 0 vent instability. Feedback Is derived from Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ari1., 1968,':,'.
lower) stago to provide low source-impedance
0 separate winding rather than from load or p 5-11. !;.
'708
SERVO CIRCUITS 709
TOROID-BRIDGE TACHOMOER-Serves as In•

expensive equivalent of tachometer 9enerator
in 9enerating error•rate•feodback signals for
servomotor loop. Brld9e pot is adjusted for
precise null with motor stalled. Circuit can
be used only if there Is no common connec-
tion from input of amplifler to output and if
SERVO amplifier has sullldent gain and power out-
AMP.
put to compensate for brld9e losses.-F. Close,
Error-Rate Feedback Generation in Servomotor
ERROR-RATE CONTROL PHASE
FEEOBACK OF KEARFOTT
Handled by Toroid, Electronic Design, April
119·2 SERVOMOTOR 12, 1965, p 50.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' R•312 \. AT 400"-'
x •445'
+lloV +29v
6·W TRANSFORMERLESS SERVO-Suitable for

driving control winding of 400·Hz two-phase
size 15 servomotor. Class B push-pull out-
put stage uses ZT1479 transistors. Othor
four transistors can bo either ZT20 or ZT40.
With bulky output and driver transformers
eliminated, amplifier Is compact as well as
low in cost. Report Includes design proce.
dure.-6 Watt-400 c/s Transformerless Servo• INM u
Amplifier using Silicon Transistors, Ferranti IZO
Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, No. 13, 1965, v MHDI~ IN
SERIES.
+l&!V
R6
1W IW +
470 470 12 v
R27
2k
s~:~JC2
D1
1N473B RIO 10 k
R2 D2 R4 D9
16 k 1N4001 1N3879
1 k ..,,.
R3
20 k
2200
R30
2W 2200
R31
2W
R
LOAD
D4
1N5237
010
1N3879
PWM DIRECT-COUPLED AMPLIFIER-Input volt·
R17 R24
age of Schmitt trigger Ql.Q2 is that across 1oon
6.2 k
C1, usod with Rl, R2, and R3 to integrate volt- IW IW
'· ages applied to theso· resistors. Reference
t voltage across R2 sets duty cycle of output v
..
,.~ waveform at 50% when there is no input.
Schmitt drives signal-spllttor Q3, which fur-
nishes feedback voltage to Input through R3,
and feeds output drivers Q4-Q5 and Q6.Q7.
12
-"Semiconductor Power Circuits Handbook,"
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 19611, p 5-26,
RS
2.4 k
1W
•
R1 C2
3.9 k
MZ2360
C4
C1 50 nF
5.l'F R3
25V
IN.?uT -+~~>'-~...,..._~~~~+~~~....~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--.
j1-+....
R2 C3 50011F
4.7k 25V
7.5·W TRANSFORMER-COUPLED-Designed to mize phase shift, for applicotions where op• ing. Book gives winding data for both
drive small a•c motors. Provides stable volt· orating frequency is nearly constant. Foed· transformers.-"Semiconductor Power Circuits
age gain of 100 with only three transistors. back for ampliRer is derived from separate Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968,
C2 tunes driver transformer primary to mini· winding rather than from load or motor wind· p 5-10.
OPAMP°FET MULTIPLIER·DIVIDER-Fot's servo

as input and feedback resistors for IC opamp.
Voltage multiplication range is 15:1 with
fixed bias on fet al left, representing input
resistor. Division range is 1:1/30 when bias
of feedback fot at right is fixed. These
values correspond to 30 dB of age range,
which is suitable for use as age of servo
error command. Input voltages for multi·
plying or dividing can be 0.1 to 1.5 V.-E.
Hoolkon, FET Feedback Configurations Pro•
vide Accurate Logic Functions, Electronic Do·
sign, Dec. 21, 1964, p 52-54.
-32V
01 02 R2 I SHIELD +30V
5.6 k
06
2N3741
OUTPUT
CS 0.25 .l'F
sov
T
R16
51
C3 2W
SOµFT
5V C4
1 µF
NON- ":::"
POLAR 100 v
1O.W COMPLEMENTARY·OUTPUT-Designod R3 R7
for servo motors requiring 20 V rms. Re- 6.2 k 12 k 07
quires no transformers. Use of direct coup- 2N3767
ling throughout permits driving d-c servos as
well, provided that Cl and C3 ore shorted.
Voltage gain is 37 dB.-"Somlconductor Power -30 v
Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., ..L
1968, p 5-15.
SERVO CIRCUITS '711
2R R R R R R A·C
(OUTPUT
2R 2R 2R 2R 2R 2R
-18v~~~~--~-t-~~~+--+-~~~---+~~~-----if--~~--~-'-~~~~-+-~~
A-C INPUT~~--~+--+-~..--~1--+--..~-+--+~.....-~+-+---0~-+--1~-----.
Vp < Vz
v~ = -7v
+
D1 02 O;s Dt\
"--~~~~~~~~~~~,-~~~~~~~~~~~../ (MOST
SIGNIFICANT
DIGITAL INPUT ov-, BIT)
L..--12v
R1 = 2.2k R4 =I.Om C = O.lµt

R2 = 2.7k R5 = 5.6 k 01 -012 = 2N3644
R3 = 1.Sk R = 1.0 k FREQUENCY - 1 Mhz
LADDER-TYPE CONVERTER-Delivers a•c out• supplying most signiffcant bit Q12 with a-c ment binary input code.-D. J. Gawlowicz and
put with amplitude proportional to weight of voltage 180 dog out of phase but with same R. A. Fisher, Ladder Network Converts Binary
sot of binary loputs, for use in a-c servo sys• amplitude and frequency as that used for Input ta A·C Output, Eledronics, July 7, 1969,
tom. Circuit can be made phase-sensitive by other bits. This permits use of two's compla. p 106-107.
R7 5 k +160
C2 + 5W
0.4 µF/200 V:
2so"FJ
200 v
C3 I
I
T1
125 µF Q3
150 v
MJE340
I
IC4 +
Cl
I
o-) ...._.....__...
10µF
I
200 v 15 k
1W
1N4001
DRIVER
R12
Tl PRIMARY: SOOT #38
SECONDARIES: 250 T #28 Blfilar Wound 4.3
CORE: ARNOLD El-625 -160
7.S·W 115-V RMS COMPLEMENTARY·OUTPUT OUTPUT
-Uses high-voltage transistors to deliver high without pow or transformer. R9 and RIO rated output voltage. Frequency response is
output voltogo to load RL without using out· should be adjusted so quiescent currant of down only I dB from 95 to 2,000 Hz.-"Semi-
put transformer. This reduces phase-shift aoch output transistor does not exceed 15 mA conductor Power Circuits Handbook," Moto•
problems ond permits operation from a•c lino at 100 C. Amplillor has good linearity up to rala, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 5-19.
VARIABLE COMMON-MODE LEVEL-With d·c +15 v

sorvo ampliflor shown, using Burr-Brown dif·
Ga'i n-- 1 + -R--
20 """
forential-input ampliRor paclcago, common• Input
modo voltage will vary from -10 V to +10
V as sorvo follows input voltage. In this
orrangomont, common°modo rojoctlon may bo
trimmed up with R for operation at a particu•
lar gain, but error from common-mode input
cannot be trimmed out by adjusting offset
voltage.-lnslrument Amplifiers, Burr-Brown 56 k
Rosearch, Tucson, Ariz., PDS-207C, 1969.
Common
Geor 1
Troin(ZJ
+10Vdc
8201!
SSL CONTROL-Photocells in two Schmitt trig· -10 Vdc

gers coupled baclc·lo·baclc are energized by
solid slale lamps. Under sloady·stato con•
0
ditlons, both photocells ore illuminated by

lamps, relays are deonergi111d, and no voltage
is appliod lo d-c motor. When light on
•POTTEReBRUMFIELI>
MRD~·961112VDC
either photocell Is interruptod, c~rresponding
reloy pulls in and applies voltage lo drive
ALL RESISTORS :i W. motor in ono clirection.-L. M. Hortz, Solid
Stalo lamps-Part II, Genoral Electric, Cleve-
land, Ohio, No. 3°0121, 1970, p 24.
=
VICKERS
SP·l30
SCR-2 C·350
AMPTRAP SW
FUSE
SCR·I C·350
MOTOR:
DIEHL
F084·25·1
VAR FIELO
TO IOOV PHASE IOOVOC
FIELO OC PULSE 0.31 AMP
OUT
+
CURRENT
Ill LIMIT
z 2.2V ADJ
-w
........ z, o,
.... ,..
t-U
ou
>o
!!?'°
SERVO CIRCUITS 713
REVERSING DRIVE WITH D-C CONTROL-Po-
r
sitioning servo drive provides adiustment of
balance, gatn, and deadband. Polarity of
6.V d-c control signal determines direction
R2 R3
of rotation. Mechanical control may be ap.
5600 5600
plied to balance control. Alternatively, pair
R& of resistance transducers may be substituted
120'tt R4-2SK 25K
60 CPS "BALANCE" "GAIN" for balance control, to give control either by
light or tomperaturo.-F. W. Gutzwiller and
I CR2 E. K. Howell, Economy Power Semiconductor

INl694 Applications, Genaral Electric, Syracuse, N. Y.,
C2 No. 671.1, 1965, p 24.
0.lpf
OUTPUT
• VOLTAGE
30-W SERVO AMPLIRER-Uses Motorola am-

plifler providing 70 dB current gain and unity
voltage gain, precoded by MC1439 opamp
providing high voltage galn.-Power Booster
MCl438R, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., ADl-14RI,
1969.
+20V
RI RS
33 22
kn ~n
C3
40µF
26V
TRI Control winding
Cl
I······--1
lµF
C4
nT
µF
,,,,\.
..
,, 400c/s
C2 Rqfcrrcrnc~
supply
40,µf'
'"J.
I
,-~--
-;;~·. {1·,.J: R2 R4 RS R7
~\ 12 820 1·5 1·5
'Y~.·1 ~~·--------~----------------------~---------
kn kn kn kn
t
r·
6-V 400-HZ DRIVE FOR OB, 10, AND 11
ERVOS-Provldes 35 .dB voltage gain when
• using BFYSI for TRI and BFY52 for other
transistors. Suitable for systems using ve-
loclty feedback, .but not those depending ~n
inherent viscous damping characteristics of
~
motor.-Applications of the BFYSO, BFY51
and BFY52, Phillps, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div.,
Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 428, 1965.
+19v
R4
20k 03
2N3499
+1evnn
H5vRMS
°u
+18v.n.n
D2
R3 IN9!4
20k -tev
04
400hz 01 1N914
1N914
-1evnn
-t8v
SQUARE WAVES FROM 400-HZ LINE-Provides of servo control amplifiers in ships and air- metrical Switch, Electronics, May 13, 1968,
highly accurate and stable frequency, with craft having 400-Hz power.-H. W. Candel, p 74.
high peak voltage, for demodulating output Sina Waves Bocome Square, With A Sym•
DISCRIMINATOR-Gives linear changes in out-

put voltage for changes In input duty cyclo.
Output is independent of amplitude of input Rg Cc
pulses because Q1 and Q2 aro oporated in Ei 39K luF Voe Eoae
switching modo. Used In self-balancing servo ---~~
loop in which R2 was pot geared to servo•
motor. Output voltage swings between fixed
Fl!.TER I
positive and negative voltages, with average
value therefore depending on duty cycle.-
P. Cutler, Pulse-Width Discriminator, EEE, Nov.
1966, p 152-153. -Vee •-t2v
+35 v
R3 R4 R9
20 k 20 k 2k
J_ I
I
0.1 µF I
I
R12
RL ~
1k
02
MZ2360 I
I
I
I
R13 I
6.8 k
0
I
SW
~
-35 v
28-W 28.Y D-C-Can drive 1·A load. Dlf· tivo feedback. Gain is about 22. Second complomantary-translstor connoction.-"Semi-
ferential ampliflBI' Q1.Q3 receives other input stage, 04-Q5, is difforontial-to-single-ended condudor Powor Circuits Handbook," Moto-
from amplifier output through RB, for noga- converter. Both driver and output stages uso rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 5-23.
SERVO CIRCUITS 715
+!16V
+c~
r- 2m~b
OUTPUT
TO
CONTROi.
PHASE
OF
MOTOR
6-W 400-HZ AMPLIFIER-Upper tran1i1tor 3.3K; R6-R7 18K; R8-R9 400; RIO-Rll 4; Cl
handles positive half-cyclo1 of output signal 10 µF; C2 47 µF; C3 20 µF; C4 500 µF; Tl
and lower transistor handles negative half· 1,500 turns primary and 225 turns oach soc•
cycles, so voltage. swings are equal at motor. ondary bifilar wound.-"Transistor Manual,"
Values: Rl 68K; R2 5.6K; R3 56; R4 560; RS RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC-13, p 529.
VELOCITY SERVO INTERFACE-Required when

system must provide bidiroctionol rotation for
both analog and digital inputs, with positive
voltage providing drive in ono diredion and
negative voltage In other direction. Combi·
nation of two opamps accepts either input
·FAST logic levels from digital circuits or bipolar
manual input such as from speod control, for
either fast or slow motion in either direction.
Manual input can be continuously variablo
from -15 V to +IS V, while other four
inputs take 5-V logic. Output ranges from
-10 V to +10 V.-J. E. McAlister, Bipolar
Analog/Digital Interface for Servos, EEE, July
1970, p 85-86.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use tho indoJC at tho back
CHAPTER 77
Shift Register Circuits
DARLINGTON DRIVER-Shift pulse Input sat•

urates lower 2N2714, depriving Darlington
combination (obovo it) of bose drive. Re-
sulting negative pulse on 1.$-V lino is differ•
entiated to give desired positive output trig·
ger pulse at its trailing edge, for driving
INTERRUPTED shift register. Requirod 16-V powor supply
-~~-----o+l5V TO REGISTER Is synthesized from 18 V by using 1N1692
.1,.1 (1.0 AMP MAXJ
rediflers.-Planor Silicon Controlled Switch
3NB4/3NB5, General Eledrlc, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 65.18, 1964.
SHIF'T PULSE LINE TO REGISTER

JL
___ io.•
..
c.•
...
o••
All dloJ<ts type 8AXl6
RI u 10 lcO
~ 10 nF
SYNCHRONIZED DYNAMIC DRIVE FOR INDI· R2 a 10 lcO
CATORS-Will display Information contained C2 10 nF R3 a 10 i.ll
in shift register. Clock pulses (10 kHz) sup- R4 10 kO
plied to FCJl 11 flip-flop provide synchroni- Cl ; 100 nF RS u 2700
zation to each digit 11 displayed by correct R6 u ID lcD
Indicator tube.-D. J. G. Janssen, A. G. Kor• ClO, Cll ... Cn I I nF RIO, Rll ••• Rnl u 10 k{}
teling, and P. H. G. van Vlodrop, Cold TRl. TR2 ; BCY72 R20, R21 ••• Rn2 u 150 lcD
Cathode Numerical Indicator Tubes, Philips, TRIO, TR11 •.. TRnl a 516BSY R30, R31 ••• Rn3 a 3.3 lcD
718
SHIFT BEGISTEB CIRCUITS '117
---,
/
un
-12V
MAGNETIC-CORE PULSE GENERATOR-Used to 12·Y 1upply.-J. P, Vlam, A Colncldont-Cur-

supply 12°µ,s 3-mA current pulses to vertical drlvon. " Each transistor Is part of triggered rent Magnetic-Coro Shift Register, Philipa,
wires in shift register. Rln time of 0.15 µ,s bloclcing oscillator using square-loop ferrite Pub, Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The
is independent of numbor of coro1 to be cores as transformers. Circuit requires only Netherlands, No. 825, 1965.
o----------+1av
IOK BASIC SCS STAGE-Planar 1c1 gives immunity
o - - - . - - - + - - - - INTERRUPTED to voltage transients without affecting trig·
IDOIC +1sv gering sensitivity or transient response time.
IOOK
.o~
2
ITo NEXT
Shift pulse from drivor should be les1 than
15 V. Anode supply i1 interrupted prior to
FROM
STAGE each shift pulse to turn off all 1tage1. Stored
PREVIOUS
STAGE capacitor charge determines which sta9es will
be rotriggered.-Planor Silicon Controlled
SHIFT
PULSE Switch 3N84/3N85, General Electric, Syracun,
IN4009
Jl~--~~~~~--' OR 11'14154 N.Y., No. 65.18, 1964.
SHIFT
LEFT
SHIFT
RIGHT
DATA
LEFT
X3
pk
o,z 'i, 4
II II II
- -
• 114 680A tor 6 11111 or IHL Sllifl Left SlliltR~I Mocla
SHIFT LEFT 112 659A tor 7 lo IB llits.
0 0 No SMft
Clock RotH to 5 MHi. 0 I Sllifl Righi
· CLOCKO-------....., 0 Shift Left
Not Allowed
:'
·~ . jf ' " ' " " ' " ' .....--::7,....__J
SERIAL-ENTRY BINARY-Used for 1torln9 and with direction depending on which shift line clock rates up to 5 MHz.-SP/ST600-Serlea De·
;'·. transferring binary numbers in or out in ls high at cloclc time. Uses Sign1tlc1 IC gates 1l9n Dala and Appllcotions, Sl9netic1, Sunny·
_.. either direction (loft-right) one at a time, and J.K binary IC elements. Wiii operate at valo, Cal., 1966, AN108.
. }, ~'
exti~tion
pulse
RS
to information input
r---- - -----------,
I
TRIGGER FOR RUNNING TEXT DISPLAY-Used

for writing information into shift register
R7
having neon trigger tubes serving also as
lamps for running-text display. Function of
51 is normally performed by punched paper
tape reader containing text for disploy.-J.
G. M. Thoans and P. H. G. van Vlodrop,
Running Text Display with Cold-Cathode Trig·
ger Tubes, Eledronic Applications, Philips, ________________ )
Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 3, 1966-1967, p
92-102. 4.7 kn, I w ± 5%
R 1 100 kn, !W ± S% Rs
R1 2.2 Mn, ! W ± 10% C1 2.2 nF ± 10%
R3 10 kn, ! W ± S% C2 2.2 nF ± 10%
R, 82 kn, t W ± S% C3 220 nF ± 10%
R 5 10 Mn, ! w ± 10% C4 64 µF ± 20%
R6 22 kn, l W ± S% D BYXIO
R1 3.3 kO, IW ± 5% Y ZCI050
extinction pulse
ignition pulse
82 kO, t W, 2.2nF ± 15%

22 kO, i W, 470nF ± 15%
I MO, !W,
BYXIO
ZCI050
10 MO, ! W ± 10%
10 kO, i W,
100 kO, ! W,
SHIFT REGISTER FOR RUNNING TEXT-Used denum cathode and very high light output. gives all circuits and construction .cfotails.-J.
to activate one of sovan rows of neon-ftllad Other advantases aro high switching speed, G. M. Thaens and P. H. G. von Vlodrop, Run-
trigger tubos on which moving letters aro complete lack of afterglow, and guaranteed ning Text Display with Cold-Cathode Trigger
formed in 5-by·7 matrix. Neons serve also minimum life of 10,000 hours. Size of ma• Tubes, Eleclronic Applications, Philips, Pub.
as switching elements Vl-Vn of shift register, trix is limited only by budget; seven rows Dept., Elcoma Div!/ Eindhoven, The Nether·
because ZC1050 neon trigger has pure molyb· are minimum for readable letters. Article lands, Vol. 27, No. 3, 1966-1967, p 92-102.
SHIFT REGISTER CIRCUITS 719
24!4V
47K 47K 47K
5·KHZ WITH UP TO 10 SCS STAGES-Shift IK IK IK

pulse at input turns off all 1cs's. Trailing
odgo of turnoff pulse is differentiated for Jl
SHIFT PIA.SE
turning on appropriate stages. Will oaslly prl•!)KC
handle up to ten stages.-Planar Silicon Con• P.•••s.10•0,.s
trollod Switch 3N81/3N82, Gonoral Electric, SKIFTIOIG CIRCUITRY
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 65.16, 1964.
RETRIGGERlllG ~lllE
®
.......
..ttnction
Transformer T: H20 core: -ondary: 2S tums O.JS mm diameter enamelled copper wire: primary:
1001urn• 0.28 mm diomeler enomelled copper wire wound on lop of and insulated from Ille secondary.
R, S.6 kll, IW Ru 22 kfl, IW Rio I kll, !W c, 2.S J'F electrolytic

R, 27 n. 1w Rio 2.2 kll, 1w Rio J.9 kn. 16W c, I f'F electrolytic
R1 1oi.n. IW Ru 12 kll, IW R,. IOkn. 16W c, 4.4 f'F polyester
R, IOUI. 1w Ru IOkn. IW Ru IOkll. fW c, 2.2 nF
R, 470 n, IW R,. 470 n. IW Ru s kll, I Wpo1. c, 12 nF
R• 100 kCl, I Wpol. Rio S60 n. IW R1• 1.S kn, IW c. 220 pF
R, 410 kn, 1w Ru IOkll, iW Ru 3.3 kn, IW c, 330 pF
Ra 270 kll, IW Ru JO kn, lWpot. R,. l.S kn. IW c. 8.2 nF
Rw l.S kll, lW Ru I kn, lW Rn JJO n. tW c. 220 nF
Rio l.S kll, !W Ru 6.8 kll, IW Ru JJ n. aw c,. J.3 NF
Ru 220 n. IW Ru 4.7 i.n. IW { 39 kll, s.s w C 11 1000 f'F elec1roly1ic
Ru IS kll, fW Rao S60 n, tW R1• in porallel with Cu J.J nF
Ru 22 kll, IW R., 27 n, 2W 68kn, I W Cu 8.2 nF polyester
R,. IS kll, IW Rn I kO, lW R,o IS kn, s.sw C.. 40 f'F electrolytic
c,.. J.3 nF
SHln REGISTER DRIVER FOR RUNNING TEXT TR2. Whan S2b is closed, this output pulse 11 G. M. Thaens and P. H. G. van Vlodrop, Run-
-Generates extinction and ignition pulses for amplified and Inverted by TR3 and fod bock ning Text Display with Cold-Cathode Trigger
driving shift rogistor using neon trigger tubes to bose of TIU, mo king circuit ostoblo ot Tubes, Eledronic Applications, Phillps, Pub.
that servo also as lamps for running-text dis· repetition frequency odjustoblo by R6 from Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nether•
play. With switch 52a closed, each opora• 8 to 90 Hz. Article describes circuit opera• londs, Vol, 27, No. 3, 1966-1967, p 92-102.
tion of 51 makes Schmi;t trigger TRI -TR2 pro- tion in detail. Values shown are for dlsploy
duce one positive-going pulse at collector of having soven rows with 100 tubes each.-J.
720 ELECTRONIC CIROUITS MANUAL
+12V
C1 = 100 m.icrofarads, 10 volts, elec-

trolytic
Ct C, Cs C N .. 0.05 microfarad, 50
volts or greater
c, = 10 microfarads, 15 volts, elec-
trolytic
CR1 CR2 CRN "' silicon diode, type
IN270
Qi Q, Qa QN' = transistor, RCA
SK3005
Q1Q,QN = transistor, RCA SK3010
R1 R1 RN= 1000 ohms, 1/2 watt,
10%
Rt= 47 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
R, = 5600 ohms, I/2 watt, I0%
R,R& = 470ohms, 1/2watt, 10%
COMMON Ra Ra RN'= 270ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
L--------4...,_----f-----+------+---'Ul4
2 N
/TERMINALS\
OUTPUT \ '3-10 )
tlon by regenerative action. Load cennect11d.
TEN-STAGE CIRCUIT-Requires 2-V negative to 12·V supply. Each register stage Is basi- to oach output terminal should be under 1,000
pulse at terminal 13 ta change register to cally two-transistor regenerative switch using ohms and draw less than 200 mA.-"Hobby
next stage. Required 10.6-V d-c supply is npn and pnp transistors; if either starts to Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-
obtained fram two diodes connected In series conduct, both are quickly driven Into satura· 90, p 56.
B+ LINE
Dt 03
llOv
o·c
Ct
50-500/Lf
__
..... C3
.......50j.tf
22k IOk
POWER ":"'
SHIFT
PULSE~-------------------------------e------+-----------'
INPUT
_rt_+l~V
10
k
LOAD
INPUT lk STAGE
..r-i.:1:· ~--<t----l.......~--t~--1 ~2~-r~--t----1--~~~~~~_.~......~~~.......
...........
RETRIGGER LINE
DIODES - IN4004 TRANSISTORS - 2N3053 SCR's - 2N5060 \
NOISE REJECTION-Can be used n11ar factory nents passed or reiected by automatic testing line frequency if 0.05-µF scr caupling capo~
production lines where electrical noise would machine. For 60-Ha line, maximum shift rate tors are reduced in valuo.-J. G. Silverman,
cause false triggering of conventional shift is 120-Hz pewer supply ripple frequency.
0 SCR Shift Register Can Take a Lot of Noise;,,
registers If usod to record data on compo- Higher shift rate can be obtained with higher Eleclronics, June 23, 1969, p 104-105.
•
SHIFT REGISTER CIRCUITS 721
REGISTER REGISTER REGISTER

REGENERATIVE-SWITCH REGISTER-Each shift' No.I No.2 No. N
resistor stage may be made re9enerotive by
connecting points A and A'. Circuit con
readily be adapted for other output current
levels than 40-mA value obtained with 12 V
for El and 9 V for E2. Values in parenthe-
ses will give output level of 3 A with 27 V TRIG cz
for El and 24 V for E2. With r09enorotive
connedion, may be usod os rin9 counter.
Can havo any number of 1to9es.-"Tronsistor
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC·13, p 530.
OUTPUT A OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT N
-12v
From 1hHt register

·12V
L
,.,1
II
II
II
~--.----J MAGNETIC.CORE SHln REGISTER-Used for
storing information In desk calculators. Con-
tents of magnetic cores are shifted sequen-
tially by means of coincidence of two currents.
Requires ollly one core per bit. Operates in
low-speed region, involving odd or subtract
time of about 10 ms and multiply or divide
time of 100 ms. Blocking oscillotort TR16
and TR17 servo os switches triggered by
From llhlft ra;;1tar pulses from shift reglster.-J. P. Vlom, A Co-
incident-Current Mognotlc·Coro Shift Register,
~-~------1
Phillps, Pub. Dept., Scoma Div., Elndhoven,
Tho Notherlonds, No. 825, 1965.
TR15 I Via cores ~IFig.9)
to tht fT•·NMing
_J 01ciUator(Flg.101
Vz 1·7VI
NORMAL OUTPUT
R9
so
Re
I V:a
.J"l.._j""L_
I (IOVI '="
RGI
IK I Rg
r
I
I so
I INVERTED OUT
I
I
R5 I RT
12K 1
._ _________
ZK
_ D: Si; 0 3 ,Q4 :GI
. V4 1+20V)
,- SHln REGISTER TESTER-Square-wove genera• the other reprltlClntlng writing pulses, for test• pnp.-P. Maostrlnl, Generator Tests Register
.•.. tor provides two separate waveforms, one Ing register at its maximum clock rate. Tran• At Maximum Clock Rates, Electronic De.Z9n,
roprosonting Information to bo stored, and slstors can be 2N797 for npn and 2N976 for Oct. 12, 1964, p 74-75,
CHAPTER 78
Single-Sideband Circuits
•7MlG
0.05
VOICE-CONTROLLED BREAK-IN-Provides VOX

"l'ipi ,.f;"'°''"°
operation along with positive anti-trip for ssb
receiver. Receivor audio voltage, taken from
voice coil, Is applied to circuit through T2
which may be almost any low-power tube to
voice-coil transformer. Interstage trans- Ta 4101( o.z5
former T1 is not critical. Book gives con•
struction and adjustment details.-L. 0. Loigh,
Universal Voice-Control Circuit, "Single Side-
~i~11
band for the Radio Amateur," ARRL, Newing-
ton, Conn., 1965, p 231-232.
+
• ••
--'"' VOX FOR SSS-Four-transistor unit provides circuit that provents triggering of VOX unit
delay adjustable from near zero to several by sounds reaching mike from speaker.-
BT 1 S1 seconds between time of last words spoken Transistorized VOX, ''The Radio Amateur's
..._..•,..ro,.__+'-11111 ~ Into mike and oponing of reloy that switches Handbook," ARRL, Newington, Conn., 1969,
ISV. over to ssb transmitter. lndudes 'anti-trip p 269-271.
'122
SINGLE-SIDEBAND CIRCUITS 723
6-METER SSB TRANSMITIER-Comploto self- Ing need for band-changing switches. U&es dotails.-C. Johnson, A Six Motor S. S. B.
contained transmitter is designed lo produce push-to-talk switch on mlko. Article gives Transmitter, CQ, May 1965, p 26-31 and 104.
only 50-MHz (6-moter) ssb signal, eliminat- complete circuit description and construction
e+
250 v
Audio
Input
.01 2M
Audio
Amplifier 0.01
Stoge
------n---o Constant Level
Audio Output
CK'103
2M
-----
RAYSISTOR AVC CONTROL-Particularly use-
ful in ssb supprossed-carrier roceiven whore
Input from Output Transformer
sourco of optooloctronic devlco, to vary resist-
ance of photocell used in place of normal
moy be enorgiHd by d-c voltage. Gives
greater thon 60 dB control range, for photo•
normal ave will not operate because there is volume control. Has fast ON action (10 ms) coll resistance change from 200 ohms to 2
no carrier whon thore is no modulation. and slow OFF oction (800 ms), which is ldeol meg.-Roysistor Optoelectronic Devices, Ray-
Audio output of rocolver Is fod into light for ssb roceivor. For remote control, lomp theon, Quincy, Mass., 1967, p 10-11.
r---------
I
I AFC
2.-
I
0 .------------.,
I
I
I
I
I
I
$00 10< I 10K I l'l
I I I 6AN8
I 001 I I
I 2.5 ... I 2.- I
CA
Rte I
I I I RFC
I
I
L_ ------' L----- __ J
'""".--..-~~~11-~~-t
.....__________.____..cp-~,
Ss'i----------------·
~
·- ' I
MONITOR-Two onvolope dotoctors shlolded

from oach other permit monitoring of ssb
voice signal or two-tono test signal on cro.
Diodes are matched RCA IN445B. Diagonal
straight Uno on scroon for voice modulation
means no distortion. Input to horizontal ter-
minal of cro may bo taken from any linear
stage preceding final amplifler.-"Electronic
Circuits Handbook," Vol. II, Cowan Pub.
Corp., Port Washington, N.Y., IM6, p 52.
TWO-TONE AUDIO-Provides choice of two
rr= ~
different audio frequencies in range of 250
to 2,000 Hz with good waveform, as roquirod
for ssb transmitter testing. CRI is 75-mA
selenium redlfler and Lt is S H at 50 mA.
l_ ___ .J IK
Cit and Cl2 are 120 µF; C13 is 40 µF.-
ero R. F. Tschannen, Two-Tone Tosi Generator,
+'"
SSB RING DEMODULATOR-Diodos can be
"Single Sideband for tho Radio Amateur,"
ARRL, Newington, Conn., 1965, p 204-206.
I N788 or any othor having low front-back
resistance. Performance is excellent if bfo
signal lnjeded through i-f transformer Is clean
and stable sine wave.-C. J. Schauors, SSB
Ring Demodulator, CQ, June 1965, p 73.
SIGNAL
I
: ! I
OON~LJSht
PULSE
I
-12v T Ov
ALL DIODES FAIRCHILD BA 130
MEM511A
Ov
100
AUDIO D C2
rv INPUT 2 o, O.Ofp.f TOAVC LINE
2N3702
l.2k
AVC FOR SSB-Fet in enhancement modo pro- by external ujt relaxation oscillator, dep,iidt
c3
TIME CONTROL
PULSES --t vides threshold action that maintains sensi-
tivity of receiver to signals buried In noise,
on whether mode of transmission is 11b, ~. ·
or c-w.-A. Ai~tila, FET Source .Follower ~ . ,,c}}
~.{if.
~ 0.04t-7µ-,.---- with fast rise timo required for ave, Opti• hances Slnglo-S1doband, fledronrcs, Sept. 18:·.'; 1(1:Jj:.''·;
mum repetition frequency of time-control 1967, p 106-107. ~~.IJI-
T= O.l-1 sec pulses that determine ave speed, generated .,,, ..
SINGLE-SIDEBAND CIRC'UITS 725
·-
SllllUI
I 6AZBIPI 6AZB ITI
FROM 9MHI. !'

BAL.MOO. ltO
IN
OUT
z-S60A
.ooQ:
+ 12SV•
SSB SPEECH CLIPPER-Dosigned to operoto

,..
..I.!!... SR!Oll
following 9-MHz balanced modulator of com• +

merclal ssb transcoiver. Increases average
~:l: I'~ ?"':hnrv.
power as much as 20 dB, which moans that
hl9h-lev11I stages must havo amplo reserve
power capability.-''The Radio Amateur's
LjJA.C.
Handbook," ARRL, Newington, Conn., 1969,
p 259.
.1311h
~l
.1
T-3 2N3297
20 T
2k
llh
18 JI h i·l 1811 h
18,uh
+2.8 v
18 JI h 18 p h
+25 v
~-1 ~·l
T , T #32 Blfilar Wound Toroid on Mlcrometals T-20-6 Core
1 2
·;' T #22 Bifllar Wound Toroid on Micrometals T-44-10
·~·
3
.,10-w 311-MHZ SSB-Requlres only throe Iran· order distortion products are more than 30 vlde current feedback for stobillty.-"Clrcuits
:. slstors to give ovorall power gain of 35 dB dB down from reference level. Unbypossed Manual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p
. ·: "fer ssb operation. On two-tone test, all odd- resistors in emitters of first two stages ·pro- · 12-3-2.
Cl
0.002p.f
01
C2
0.002p.f
C3
0.002J1.f
2N408 ...
otl-o•
RI R3
lOK IOK
Bl
2.2.SV L-----1"'•~--4--.--.:i::~
OUTPUT 39•
.----+----+---R-
8----411.:!:l+ 111111111111-
R4 R6 680K
JACK
v ••
~· ·-·····
J'""'"
•&,
*.1~705
IOK IOK Te. zentt
•9'.t.:~
·~'~'
PRODUCT DETECTOR-Circuit werks equally
wall on c-w and ssb. By switching out bfo,
works on· a•m as well.-C. J, Scheuers, Tran·
sistorized Produd Detector, CO, Nov. 1964,
ca p 113.
0.004p.f
tone linearity measurements.-"A Modern

TWO-TONE 558 TEST OSCILLATOR-Output Transistor Workbook," Radio Shock, Boston, ·12V
can be fed into 11b genorotor to make two• Man., 1965, p 11.
0.1111 BFO IN
l--0502kHZ
· ~(2vrmsl
2N364t
ITOIOY
'·" ZNIJOS Smh
S•WTOOTH
.jef>T ~
o.1111 •12V
ZS•
2kc
AUOIO
OUTPUT I
FET TETRODE PRODUCT DETECTOR-When
z.n 100,, 500.kHz i-f signal is fad into one gate of fet
and beat-frequency oscillator voltage Into
othor oscillator, output currant Is proportional
LI• 1111.Ll!:R ••SOO to product of the two voltages over wide dy·
namlc range. 2N3641 transistor isolatos bfo
TEST SWEEP FOR SSB FILTER-Gives sweep tal sideband fllter between 460 and 466 kHz.
from fet and provides proper bias for fet.
range of about 25 kHz for sawtooth input of -R. A. Gonallle, Ferrite Coil and Crystal
Can be used In ssb roceivers.-H. Olson, Prod-
about 8 V peak from any scope. Designed Sideband Filter, Electronlc1 World, Juno 1967,
uct Detector Uses FET Tetrode, EEE, Sept. 1966,
for chocking passband characteristics of crys- p 46-47 and 8()..81.
p 146.
Cl,C2·1500pF !!%(MATCHED P"IR} 6.3Y 195Y

+
,11,JZ-PHONO J"CK
·LI LZ •HIGH:d'FEAAITE "NTENN" COIL (MILLEA 41163001
'Tl -•!I0••75,H1, 1,F. TR,.N5'0RMERIMILLEA#llZ•Cll XT,.LI, XT"L Z• •65.Z77lH1 1 FT·z ... ,. CllTSTAL, CHANNEL 335, M"TCl<ED PAIR I TEXAS CRYST,.LS)
TZ• • • " l • # 112•"1 XTAL:S, XTAL•·•&Z.963lH1 1 " • • • , • 50, • • I • • J
SSB CRYSTAL FILTER-Uses four easily obtain· oration of about 2.3 kHz betweon pairs of impedanco output to l·f stage. Article gives
able quartz crystals uniquely combined with crystals gives bandwidth of about 2.9 kHz construdion and alignment details.-R. A.
ordinary ferrite antenna coils to select ona far reasonable voice quality. Consists of two Gonaille, Forrite Coil and Crystal Sideband
sideband. Filter con serve as starting point cascaded half.lattice crystal-fllter sections Filter, Electronics World, June 1967, p 46-47
for building ssb transmitter. Frequency sep• arranged for low-Impedance input and high- ancl 8()..81.
CHAPTER 79
Square-Wave Generator Circuits
R4 R5
4.7k 270
0.01
I'
-
FLIP-FLOP TESTER-Provides positive or nego-
tlvo squara-wavo pulses at repetition rates
up to 50 MHz for testing fast flip-flops, using
gallium arsenide tunnel diode DI (similar to f6v INPUT
0.01
RCA 40062) as relaxation oscillator. LI con- +2v INPUT
trols frequency; at 0.5 µH, prf is 25 MHz.
I
RI changes ratio of pulse width to repeti-
tion period. Output terminal 1 gives posi-
tive and negative pulses In sequence, while
1-
terminals 2 and 3 give polarities shown.
For 2-V supply, output pulse Is 1.8 V and Rs
output impedance I 00 ohms, for feeding Into 100 3
IOG-ohm coax.-0. A. Horna, Bipolar Pulse '1r
Generator Tests Fast Flip-Flops, Electronics, OUTPUT
Dec. 12, 1966, p 109.
-= -= -= -= -= -
+6v
lk lk
...n.rt.rL
II
GI Gz G3 G4
2
c, ct
+6v
lk
14
10
EXTERNAL TRIGGER 13 OUTPUT PULSE
+'1.5vJ +5v, r-1 r-1 r
Ov, Ov U U U
G
1
62
G G4 •FAIRCHILD OTpL 946
3
G5 G6 •FAIRCHILD TTJlL 103 Rongo of values shown below for C2 gives
c1 • 10 pr-111r pulse widths from 30 ns to about 2 ms and
range for Cl gives 500 Hz to 12.5 MHz for
C2 • 68pf-lpf prr.-M. V. Pitka, Two Flatpacks Furnish
VARIABLE WIDTH AND PRR WITH IC'S- repetition rate of monostable mvbr G5-G6. Pulses for IC Testlnq, Electronics, June 26,
Push0pull oscillator G1-G2-G3 establishes pulse G4 shapes output to desired pulse waveform. 1967, p 107-108.
727
7.5-20,000 HZ SQUARE-WAVE-Economical
and self-contained unit for general audio
testing. Covers a·f spectrum in three ranges.
r
Article givos construction details. Parts
values aro: R1 25K; R2 l.2K; R3 2.4K; R4-R5
3K; R6 2.SK; Cl 1 µF; C2 0.1 µF; C3 0.01 µF;
C4 S µF; CS 0.25 µF; 01.Q2 HEP253; 03
HEP254.-"Solid State Projects Manual," 2nd
Cs
R. >4---tr-o Edition, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 27-
32.
Rz Rs c.
5'-o---o+
SWz
TO TO TO TO
'Tj 1:~wj tJ t:-,YJ

CJ
UTC
+24V A22
T2
UTC
A22
~A'}
R3
IOK
R2
SK
Rn
s,
50K
R4
IOK
}·,. 470
O.Olµf 0.01µ1
02
2N2647
03
o, 2N2219
22K 2N861
CT2
IOµf
lcn
100µ1
15 IOK IOK
.______ w .,._______ z
o, FROM T1 FROM T2 D2
IN3671 IN3671
-------w bf .---~----z
FROM CONSTANT
CURRENT SUPPLY
BOO VOLTS,
2.5 AMPERES
04
IN3671
,_______ y
FROM T2
'------x
FROM T 1
y x
HIGH·POWER SQUARE WAVES-Used for capacitors, but circuit losses become severe cult go to scr's in lower circult.-S. I. Gaytan,
measuring earth conductivity In goophyslcal above this value. Uses bridge inverter to Low-Frequency Oscillator Supplies High Pulse
applications, for which square waves of 0.1 provide bipolar square wave, eliminating Power, Electronics, Oct. 17, 1966, p 9G-91.
to 4 Hz are usually required. Frequency can need for center•tapped comtant-current sup•
bo boosted to 100 Hz by changing timing ply. Transformer connections in upper cir·
SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 729
330K -12V
OUTPUT OUTPUT
Vdc
lOK
A1IYI c,
INPUT }--t 1----t--{: 1)-6-"N~"I
fo - 0.025/Cr kHz, CT In uF REFERENCE
I
PWM-Analog comparator chip connoctod as <6VP-P
shown functions as flexible square-wave oscil- 0 VOi.TS
lator having good frequency stability, with
IOOK CR1
stable duty cycle and pulse-width modulator 6800
capability. Positive feedback causes output
to bo at either +10 or -10 V when power
is applied, charging CT until pin 2 voltage +12V
equals pin 3, when 5501 changes state to
begin cycle again.-Applying tho Model 5501
Monolithic Analog Comparator, Optical Elec-
Rz
tronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. I 0147.
+IOVdc
r PULSE OUTPUT
68K OUTPUT
INPUT
01 THRESHOl.O
2N708 COMPOSITE INPUT
02 B
2N708
Rs
120K
CONTROi.
C2 A
.__..___.~t--~0.051JF
c,
0.021JF
1-5 KHZ ADJUSTABLE·WIDTH-Four·layer

diode DI breaks down at threshold voltage of 0-100% DUTY CYCLE-Standard clamp circuit sum of voltages exceeds input threshold of
about 10 V, to give simple relaxation oscil· using CRI, followed by conventional two- QT. Input may have any waveform. Tran•
lator for generating pulses adjustable in stago d-c amplifier Ql..Q2, gives infinitely ad- sistor typos are ·not critical.-T. Hart, Genera•
width from 300 ns to 3 µs. Can be packaged justable pulse-width generator. Reference tor Permits Infinite Pulse Width Variation,
in less than 0.5 cu in. Cost of components and control inputs, added at point B, make Electronic Design, Juno 22, 1964, p 69-71.
is about $10. Rise time is about I 00 ns, but QI fire and produco output pulse whenever
2N4137 transistors will bring It below 20 ns.-
G. B. Jordan, Pulse Generator with Variable
Rate and Width, EEE, Fob. 1967, p 145-146.
I ·KHZ SYNCHRONIZED TO 60 HZ-Output

shifts regularly between positive and negative
saturation to give 50% duty cycle at fro•
quency determined by voltage divider and
p.c time constant. If output is in positive
saturation when sync pulse arrives, It stays
positive. If output is in negative saturation,
sync pulse makos it switch to positive satura•
tion. To sync at higher frequencies, chango
opamp to µA702 or µA710. Fol Is 2N3792.-
M. R. Utonick, FET and IC Make Syncable
Oscillator, EEE, July 1969, p 105-106. -ISV
Ez VARIABLE-WIDTH AVALANCHE PULSES-Uses

two NS1110 avalanche transistors and two
trigger inputs, one for stort of rodongular
output pulse and other for end of pulse.
Pulso width is thus continuously adjustable by
changing time interval between triggers, from
a few ns to over 1 p.s. Rise and fall times
are about 2 ns.-B. H. Bell, Avalanche Circuits
O.lp.f Aro Moro Versotile Than You Thlnlr, Elec·
tronic Design, June 8, 1964, p 56-63.
+30V
CI06F
IK
r-
UJT-SCR ONE.SHOT-Input pulse triggers scr 1
and energizes load. Voltage drop auoss FOR I
load energizes ujt timer. When ujt tires after
time interval, voltage pulse across R2 turns
INDUCTIVE~ Cl
5µf
LOADS I
off su to give single square-wave output
pulso.-D. R. Grafham, Using Low Current I
SCR's, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. L - -.-------------"
200.19, 1967, p 26.
-12v
3.9k REGULATED
FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER-Five sequentially
!Ok DIFFERENTIATION ANO switched transistors and associated differen•
PHASE REVERSAL
tiating, amplifying, and pulse-shaping circuits
multiply 100.Hz triangulor-wavo Input by
oven integer of 2 per stage, or 10 for five
IN34A switches here, to give 1,ooo-Hz square-wave
2.2k D1 output. Circuit was developed for data proc-
1N34A 011ing of seismograph records. Article also
Dz covers modifications needed for odd-Integer
multipllcatien.-R. See, Sequential Switching
Enables Low-Frequency Multiplication, Elec-
tronics, Aug. 21, 1967, p 87-89,
1000hz
15 v P·P
JlJUUUl ,•'
OUTPUT
1N34A
INPUT
+IZv
P& REGULATED
'·
NV AMPLIFICATION AND
., -·,I._
. .,,,.
IOOhz PULSE SHAPING .. ff
01-07 2N1379
i ·~~··
MVBR·DRIVEN BLOCKING OSCILLATOR-Pro-

duces rectaneular eate pulses up to 1 A, for
trieeerlne thyristors in Inverters, pul59 modu·
lotors, and other circuits requirine fast
turn-on.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General
Eledrlc, 1967, p 85.
"°'°'
en OW1GL Rt •.,.Cl
ill AU. CAPACltiUICl WiUO ltt 11t t.N.ISS onowt:SI lflOWlll
MO CZ 10 ~ fttfCl.CICT
(3) Tl IS 1'I nm4 ([ACM MNQiNi) 01 • SZ Hf', lltl'P.,AR WCUG ON
- tiD0.11. '1-...C OS•CFUO COW:
+tsv -1sv
+3vd·c----------p---
Z4k t.2k
CONTROL
GATE o, 100
hpa Ofl4
O.OZµ.f 18k
NANOSECOND PULSES WITH STEP RECOVERY
DIODES-Pulse width is determined by differ•
ence In storage times of two diodes, which
SCS RELAXATION OSCILLATOR-Consumes varies llttlo with temperature, so width re·
less power than ujt, operates at levels as low mains constant from -55 to 80 dee C.
as 2 V, and produces more powerful output Pulse width may be varied from 1 to 1,000
pulse with sharpened loading and falling ns by chaneing forward bias current.-l. St.
edges. Frequency Is 1 kHz and rise time Marie, Fast Pulse Generator is Temperature
about 60 ns.-J. 5. Hayhurst, SCS Outperforms Stable, Elodronics, Fob. 6, 1967, p 70-71.
UJT In Relaxation Oscillator, Electronics, Sept.
16, 1968, p 100.
Vee
o,
2N5040
30,000:1 PERIOD-TO.PULSE RATIO-Used for

generating fast-rise pulse or train of pulses
with very narrow width In comparison with
total period. If Rl is variable, con be used
as astable, monostable, or bistable mvbr.
Ql and Q2 are simultaneously in either on
or off state, with other three transistors
Oz always In opposite state to Ql..Q2. For
o, 2N3567
values shown, pulse width is 50 p.s, rise time
Oz 200 ns, fall time 20 ns, and periods ranging
from 500 µs to 1.5 s depending on setting of
R2.-D. R. Matthews, Ultralow-Duty-Cyclo
Pulser, EEE, March 1970, p 129.
+15V •16W
R LINEARITY CONTROL
l meg ~ 160K
-15V
TEMPERATURE-STABLE SQUARE WAVES-Con•
verts sine wavos to square waves, with good 500-HZ SQUARE-WAVE-Uses neon mvbr to
holotion of output from input and excollent generate G-4 C p-p sloped square wave, and
trigger stability for temperature changes. diode clipper to straighten its top. Linoarity
Shaded area covers differential ampliRer and control is used to adjust pulse width.-W. G.
feedback loop. Output is 25 V p·p.-B. Pearl, Miller, "Using and Undorstanding Miniature
Improved Squaring Circuit is less Tempera• Noon lamps," H. W. Sams & Co., Indian-
ture Sensitive, Electronic Design, July 19, 1965, apolis, Ind., 1969, p 45.
p 4()-41.
+6V
RI RI&
3.01 II Rl5 !160
1% Ill
R2
470 C5
22pF
QI C6 R IT
2N36'16 47pF 10
Cl
220pF
C3
O.tl'F
R4 R5
825 1% 250
GNO
RB
8251%
"'
"l...
INPU OUTPUT
C2
220 pF C4
O.IJ'F
Rll 1121
TllO 5% 10
C9
22 pF
R22
lk
Rl4
3.0111 R 23
...,.l"to.._~~....~~.....~~.....~~~~~~~-~_.~~~~+-~~-o-6V
590
10-V p.p SQUARE WAVES-Provides excellent for input of +2.5 V and -5 V for input of sis level. Dividors in bases of QI and Q4 set
isolation between input and output over pass• -2.5 V. Output currents aro 16 to 21 mA. precise Rring levels for Q3 and Q6,-J, f,
band of d-c to I MHz, with less than 0.1 dB Q7.QIO form bistable regenorative output Foller, Bistable DC-Coupled Switch Has 5.
variation in output magnitudo over frequency •witch driven by hysteresis switch Ql•Q6, Nanosecond Riso Time, Electronic De1i9n, Nov.
range. Riso time is 5 ns. Output is + 5 V 01 .Q2 form comparator for negative hystero- 8, 1967, p 120.
El E2
-JOO ·100
•4i
Ft•O A
R4 +28VOCO-O
SI
24 K
T2
56011
2W
33011
c .02 VD2 l/ZW
ll"' R
8
V•4V
133 fl
03
2Nl595 2N49Z
SCR '::'
Rz
47
l/ZW
HIGH-CURRENT PULSES-Gives square-wave
output woveform with amplitude of 5 V and ADJUSTABLE PULSE WIDTH-RI and Cl de·
width of about 200 ns at 0.5 A. Recovery termine width of square-wave output Inde-
time limits maximum repetition rate to range pendently of load. Values shown give 20.V
of 40 to 140 kH1, depending on permissible pulse ot I A, adjustable from 100 µs to 10
reduction in pulse amplitude.-"High Speod ms. Uses series regulator In combination
Switching Transistor Handbook," Motorola, with ujt time delay Q3.-G. E. Bloom, Time·
Phoenix, Ariz., 1969, p 300. Adjustable Pulse Gonorator Combines Uni-
jundion, Zener, SCR, Elecrronic Design, May
25, 1964, p 6B •
.---------------------------<p-----------~~--------------r------------0 +28V
IOK
RS Rl6
RI 4.71(
IK
I.BK
02 Rl3
03
R3
l---4~--_..._ __...________________.___.__________________,._____....,..._______....,.....-0GNO
OSCILLATOR FLIP/ FLOP BUFFER
20-20,000.HZ SQUARE WAVES-Covers out range switch. Triggered flip-flop 03-04 zoner-stablllzed.-C. J, Ulrick, High.Quality
· range with single-turn frequoncy control. servos as frequency divider for 4o-40,000-Hz Square-Wave Generator, Electronics World,
Relaxation oscillator Ql ..Q2 Is acllustablo over output of oscillator, while creating ideal Nov. 1966, p 43 and 82.
1,000:1. with R7, to cover audio band with· square waves. Power supply should be
-2ev
GUARANTEED SINGLE PULSE-Schmitt trigger

ond ompliflor produco one and only one pulH 03
when pushbutton Is prassed, regardlou of 2N337
contact bounce. SI is hold down until Cl ovy;____
hos charged to about 5 V, Schmitt has flipped,
PRECISION
and lamp indicator has come on. When SI PULSE
is rolaasod, Cl starts discharging; when be· GENERATOR
CIRCUIT
low 5 V, Schmitt flips again, lamp goos out,
C2 starts charging through RI, and 03 gen•
orates 26-V negative output pul1a.-G. Dom• Rv
2.2K
janonko, Push-Button Single-Pulse Generator
Is Moro Dependable, Electronic Design, Aug.
3, 1964, p 43.
·lOV _ _ __,,,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _o
R,
l•
30 v
"•
300 UUlf
OuTPuT
DOUBLING SQUARE WAVES-With 25-kHz 30-
V p-p square-wave input, output is 50-lcHz
square wavo of saine amplitude, with better
than 100-ns riH and fall times. Value of C2
depends on frequency; for 20-kHz input, use
,., "' _ _ _ _,..,.._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-4
"i
0.02 µF.-C. R. Seo, Square-Wave Doubler
Usos Four•Layer Diode, "400 Ideas for Doslgn
l2K
Selocted from Electronic Design," Hayden Book
0 Co., N.Y., 1964, p 155.
c,I 0001
1Jl
Vee
Ps - 1 0 to +10 V
RELAXATION MONOS'J"ABLE PRE·ORIVER COMPLEMENTARY DRIVER
osc. MULTIVIBf!ATOR
I R6
I Widlh 250 k 02
R1 %M27AZ5 C9
I
J
2.5 M 0.1 µF
FREQ I
I R4 R11
I 10 k 2.2 k
I R7
MPS6562
I 5.6 k
05
I
I
I
I
I CF
150 pF
1k
T5nF C1
I
I
I
I
I
R15
03
1N4933
I R3
"" R3 510 I
68 I
I 2W I
I I 04
I
I %M27AZ5
-= I
I I C10 C12
I 0.1 µF 1500µF
I
I
I
Ps-21
I
Vee - •
•·
l·A PULSE GENERATOR-Output pulse can be o to -10 V \
-22V
positive, negative, or both, adjustable from
zero to 10 V maximum, for maximum output quency adjustments are provided. SI Inverts -"Semiconductor Power Circuits Handbook,';•i
of 20 V p-p at 1 A. Pulse width and fro- output pulse. Rise ond fall times are I 0 ns. Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-32.
RI
SO-HZ SQUARE-WAVE-Uses three-element

SWI neon lamps.. Closing SW1 makes cycle self·
completing.-E. Bauman, "Applications of
Neon lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Sig·
nalite, Neptune, N.J., p 37.
C2
l'.01
L..f"VOUTPUT LTG-27-2
IN9618 Dz
J IOV
5n
v • ••20 To mo v 2N4944
LINE REGULATION:
;>0.06 %
r D1 Vour • IOOV
AT IOOmA
V1N• 120-170V IN753A
6V LOAD REGULATION:
'"D.06 ~o
FULLY COMPENSATED OPAMP-Providos out- ,30V
put proportional to derivative of Input, so Vour• IOOV
..,__ ____. IN9728 lour• 0-IOOmA
triangular input gives square-wave autput.
R1 Is required to limit high-frequency gain,
Improve dynamic stability, and give better 9.lk
immunity to high-fraquoncy noiso.-M. Eng· IW
lish, Applications for Fully Compensated Op·
Amp ICs, EEE, Jan. 1969, p 63-65.
1t MOUNTED ON HEAT SINK IF

LONG-TERM SHORT CIRCUITS ARE POSSIBLE
+30V I +9 v +30V
I
I
I
C8
I 1 nF
I
I
I
031 010
MPS6531 I 2N4398
I
I
I
01 I RL2
1N4733 I 5
180W
R4 I MAX
R16
1001 100
I
I
I
I
IR& R6 R12 R16I
11.2k 2.7k 2.7k 1.2kl
....... I I
I I
I .,,. .,,. I
I I
I I
I I
I I
R14 + C5
I 41'F I
1.2 k
~l
POWER STAGE
*
I
T
-=· -=
PULSE GENERATOR
25 v
~
I POWER STAGE
, :;;/· tDJUSTABLE 6-A PULSE GENERATOR-Astable ranges that can be lncreasod by Increasing pable of furnishing 6 A to 5-ohm load.-
...... :- ./"? mvbr Q5.Q6 has indopondont controls for on values of capadton ex across C4 and C6. "Semlcondudor Power Circuits Handbook/'
and off times of rectangular pul1111, over Pulse generator drive• two power stages ca• Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-29.
tl2Y
RELAY
/
o---'
28 ohm
4W
OY , r+12v
lJU -6v L..J Ov
02
2N2270
~t-l
"'-.2s ms
300k
ALL DIODES IN458

SIMPLE PULSE STRETCHER-Gonorates 25-ms tion of input pulse. Eliminates transistor pot.-K. Wahl, Constant Relay On-Timo for
output pulso for driving 4-W relay momen• stage normally required for pulse stretching. Any Input Pulse, Electronics, March 6, 1967,
tarily, independently of amplilude or dura• To adjust ON time of relay, replace R2 with p 133.
R
It< 30.A PEAK PULSES AT 130 KHZ-Transistor is
driven into second breakdown, to givo 40.ns
+ Vee pulses at 5 A, with generating cyclo com•
- 120V _n_ pleted before thermal buildup becomes exces•
TR1GGE R PulSE sivo. Rise time of output pulse is less than
FROM HP214A
GENERATOR 10 ns.-E. B. Hakim, Variable-Voltage Cur-
rent Sink, EEE, March 1967, p 166-167.
Cl. 330 pf to 1.0 ,.F

300 KHZ FOR $4-Addition of five resistors ..sv switch in astable mvbr configuration. Cl
(Rl·RS) and two capacitors (Cl-C2) to µA730C rise and fall times are both under 200 ns. determine frequency range, while R2 varies
IC differential amplifier gives inexpensive Output pulses are easily adjusled to switch prr over 6:1 ratio.-C. Bragado, Convortod
general-purpose pulse generator having fre- above, below, or precisely at ground. Differ- Diff Amp Goneratos Pulsos, EDN, June 15,
quency range extending to 300 kHz. Pulse ential amplifier operates as current-mode 1970, p 5 .
-30V RZ
1.8K
Rl
IK IK
2N527 2N527
tF • IOO ns
41<Hz < f < 25KHz
SQUARENESS RATIO• 1600@ 4KH1
4-25 KHZ SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR-Uses
dual diodos having common cathodes. Pro-
vides excollent output waveform.-W. R.
Spofford, Jr., Practical Circuit Applications for
Tho Now F16U Dual Diode, General Elodric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.53, 1965.
R1
soon
R8
5100
6-60,000 HZ SQUARE WAVE-Frequency is perfect square wave. Two HEPSO transistors

variable over four ranges: 6-60, 6o-600, provide ampliflcotian. Article gives construeo
60o-6,000, and 6,00o-60,000 Hz, and ampli- tion details. Designed for use with era to
tude over throe ranges: 1,000, 100, and 10 check rosponso of oudio equipment.-"lnta.
mV. IC-1, a Motorola HEP556, is ot centor groted Circuit Projects," Motorola, Phoenix,
of bosic R-C oscillator which triggers IC-2, a Ariz., 1966, p 46-62.
HEP558 J-K flip-Rop, to provide an almost
+BV to +IBV
+sv
\. QI turns off. RI
2. Q2 fires (Cl is not fully discharged). 50k Q2 lk
4.7~ 2N489t
3. QI turns on ~elore Q2 con lire again.
(Cl is fully discharged)
01 03
(A) (8) 2NS449 2NS449
\ \ 2.7k
©- ....... #V\/"o--1
Cl
O.t
12.6V nns 270
100
LINE-SYNCHRONIZED TIMING PULSES-Ujt os-

cillator Q2 generates sharp ond cloan 60-Hz
-
sovero noise on lino may cause output pulso
train to skip a boat. Invert output to obtain
wave rectifier, change C1 to 0.05, and adjust
bias resistors controlling Ql .-B. Heniford,
UJT Generates Useful Timing Pulses, EDN,
timing pulse virtually unaffectod by noise
and transients on line. Only extremely positive pulse. For 120-Hz output, use full- March 15, 1970, p 87-88.
+25 v
471( LOW°CO* SQUARE-WAVE-Control voltage of

TWO-CONTROL UJT-Two pots provide con- Re 0 to 12 V on ult relaxation oscillator glvos
trol of frequency ond duty cycle ef square- duty-cycW variation over completo range
wave output. Value of C offects rise and from 0 tol1 100% of pulse poriod.-V. Kanoslci,
fall limos, and can be between 0.01 and 50 CONTROL Simple rrangoment Provides Economical
VOLTAGE
p.f.-J. H. Phelps, Unljundion Generator Has 0·12V Variable· uty Cycle, Electronic Design, Aug.
Varioble Square-Wave Output, "400 Ideas fer 3, I 964, p 43-44.
Design Solocted from Electronic Design," Hay•
den Boole Co., N.Y., 1964, p 191.
•:move r - - -.........--.---+-+-
Rsss 10 meg
0 N\
40-180 HZ MULTIPLE OUTPUTS-Consists of
neon regulated powor supply and nean os·
cillator. Positive 1·I'S pulse is available at
C.-W. G. Miller, "Using and Understanding
Miniature Neon Lamps," H. W. Sams & Co,. VI
Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, P 40. NE2H
V2
NE2H
PULSE PULS!:: GENERATOR GATE BISTABLE MULT VIBRATOR

SHAPER
+12v
330
5M} RII
1ook I
1M
OUTPUT
I c
I o,
I
I
I 270pf
.............-+....-+------12v
I
0.1-100 S PULSE WIDTHS-Wide range is ,t
ALL TRANSISTORS 2N3904 tainod by gating pulse generator with

stable mvbr.-S. Boll, Ono-Shot Genera
270pf
~PUT •
UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR 2N1671B
1 TRIGGER
Wide Range of Periods, Electronlc1, Moy
FOR C= 6Jl-f. SWITCHING TIME = t- 30 SECONDS 1970, p 102. -~.Lr
-12v
OUTPUT
PULSE SHAR ZERO-REFERENCE PULSE-Output pulse
+6V Is generated when shaft of 360.deg pot Is
HELIPOT, MOOEL J at zero. Leading edge of pulse coincides
201( with position B of wlpor arm. Appllcoble
only to unidiredlonal drive, as by digital
motor. Repeatability of pulse position ls
within 13.5 min of arc. Output pulse width
is about 10 p.s. Capacitor Is charged during
clockwlse rotation from B to A. Charge is
hold until wiper arm crones gap to B, then
12K
discharged to drive transistor Into saturation
and create output pulse.-W. E. Milroy, Shaft·
I Position Generator Provides Zero Roferenco,
I +6V
Eledronic Design, March 15, 1965, p 64-65.
COUPLED TO
SHAFT
+10 IN4009
=
VARIABLE FREQUENCY AND DUTY CYCLE-
TUNNEL-DIODE ASTABLE-Simple free-running Frequency range Is 60 to 1,000 Hx, adjustable
(astable) oscillator generates clean square independently of 0-100% duty cycle range.
wave. Frequency Is determined by value of Conventional ult sawtooth followed by two
charging capacitor used.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., transistors provides positive-going output,
Applications For The Now low Cost TD 700 with rise and foll times about 1/SOOth of
Sories Tunnel Diodes, General Eledrlc, Syra• period of osclllation.-"Unijunction Circuit
cuse, N.Y., No. 90.66, 1967, p 9. Hints," General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., Fig. 7.
'--------vvl\o------- PULSE 1 PULSE Z PULSE·3 PULSE 4
OUTPUT I
OUTPUT Z
VALUES SHOWN YIELD A PERIOD
OUTPUT 3 OF I MILLISECOND.
OUTPUT 4 THE IC IS AN MC789P.
t--cmsec--i
fOUR·PULSE SEQUENCE-low-cost RTL hex· D, E, and F generate their pulse• sequentially, quency can be up to a few MHz. Adding
jnvortor IC delivers repeated soquence of with duration of oach dopondlng on RC net• more hex-Inverters increases number of pulses
ifour pulses, with equal or independently ad· work at inverter input. For values shown, In traln.-F. Cupp, 4-Pulso Sequence Genera-
.!justable pulse widths. IC inverters A, B, duty cycle ls 20%, leaving dead period be- tor Built With 1 Hex-Inverter, Electronics,
and C form basic pulso generator. Inverters fore start of next four-pulse train, Pulse fre- Feb. 3, 1969, p 79-80.
.J'
-av STEP-FUNCTION TRIGGERING-Adding QI to

feedback loop of mono mvbr pormits trigger-
ing by stop function, to generato variable-
width trigger pulse for digital system. Step
function is obtained from shaft encoder.
Negativo 0.5 V input step gives 7.S•V output
OUTPUT pulso 0.25 p,s wide.-R. J. Hoss, Pulso Gener·
ator Triggerod by a Stop Function, Electron·
ics, March 31, 1969, p 87-88.
C1
0.005µ.f
INPUT 1---+-1
-~,;:L:. 4MHz
Xto1C
c
1100pF Vcc•5.0v
4·MHZ PULSE TRAIN-Crystal controls repeti• ate wit'\ crystals from I 0 kHz to I 0 MHz.
tion rate and R·C networlc dotormines pulse Stability f• better than 0.02% within tempera·
width in squaro-wavo generator using quad ture ran11e af IC.-K. Yu, Crystal Controls Rep
two-input gate. Square input to first gate Rate af imple IC Pulse Generator, EEE, Jan.
can bo used for stop-start control. Will opor• 1968, p 16-117.
+5 v
14 DT11L R3
Rt 946 tk
tOk 6
3 s 0
C2
IOOpl OTµ.L
2 948 +
T C3
60,.1 OUTPUT
12 9
e
c 0
~ S1
c,
0.01µ1 7
Co
5
FLIP-FLOP BLOCKS BOUNCE-IC flip-flop ar·

ran9oment is used to inject narrow pulse into
equipment under test by closing SI man-
flip-flop. Closin9 SI discharges Cl, trig9er
ing flip-flop and biasing QI into cutoff so col-
0
100 ns, t discharges enough through R2
to malce I satur'ate and form falling edge
of pulso. L. V. Hendricks, Flip-Flop Isolates
ually. Spurious voltages caused by contact lector is moved from ground up to 5 V to 1 Switch Bounce, Electronics, Aug.
Pulse Fro'r
bounce in switch are isolated from output by form loading ed90 of output pulse. After 19, 1968, 84-85.
·.~ ;,'
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, use tho index a the baclc
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits.'' pu fished by
McGraw-Hill In 1968. I
I
CHAPTER 80
Switching Circuits
+
R1 R2
5AMP C1 2k
LOAD 2oon
10 µF 1W
100 v
03
40V 2N1597
02
01
2N4178
C2
+
5 µF
100 v 40 V "ON"
CONTROJI_ "OFF"
SIGNAL
SCR STATIC D-C SWITCH-Control circuit turns
on Q2 and load when control signal is ap•
04 plied. When signal is romovod, 02 opens
2N5062 RS and turns off load.-"Somiconductor Power
Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Aria.,
1968, p 4-12.
1N5240
-14v
,RI
300 TO TO
GATE 1 SCR 1
ON WITH
K
+Ve I~ 1k
+_Ch
INPUT
GATE 2
750 10
ON WITH
-Ve
•
INPUT
<l~hZ --r=i - 1c....::J-L..:.
- _o_+__ o
-
I P1 P2
1--- I 2v--""i--- 12v---t
1
n! n : 50.,.m I I
...J L.i--J L4--PULSE
__n__n_
10
\
. \.
SYMMETRICAL ALTERNATE FIRING OF SCR'S-
Hlgh•powor firing pulses are olternated be-
low-powor rectangular-wave input. Circuit
delivers oxact pulso to ono scr, stalls until
cuit Fires Ser Pair, Electronics, Oct. 31, 1966,
p 71.
tween pair of scr's by three-transistor pulso next half-cycle, and thon delivers identical
circuit, with timing af pulsos controlled by pulse to other scr.-8. McConnell, Pulse Cir·
'141
7 PA424 4
Cs
IC-TRIAC ZERO.VOLTAGE POWER SWITCH- 100 6ti
Circuit provides for shifting triac gate pulse p.F 9 10 II
in time to ensure roliablo latching with small 15Vdc 5
load. Triac used should latch at minimum
loacl currant of 4.2 A. Table gives compo•
nont valuos roqulrecl for four clifferont values RI
of minimum load current and 120..Y a-c
supply.-R. W. Fox, Low Power Zero Voltage
Switching Using tho PA42A, General Electric,
AC
SUPPLY
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 201.22, 1969.
Approx. Min. Apprcm. Pulse

Load c
(watts)
R1 llz R3 Piii•• f Shill
500 10 K 0 0 100 µsec.
400 "'m 7.5 K 2.2 K 0.01 µId, 20 v 100 µsec. 2r. µs~c.
7.5 K 2.2 K 0.022 µfd, 2 v 100 "'sec. 50 µsec.
250 CD
200 6.8 K 4.7 K 2.2 K 0.047 µId, 2 v ISO µsec. 75 µsec.
REMOTE TURN·OFF
S•C.NAL
+28Vdc
R2
4.7k
CR 1
R5
39k R1
A 2~~
CR2
OUTPUI
TO GATE
Sz Rg
FIRST-PULSE PRESERVER-Switches frueotun·
STOP nlng signal o load without interrupting tlrst
0 2.2k
pulso, rogarClles of instant when start switch
I
Is actuated. Input squaro waves should bo
about 5 V if"P and wider than 50 µ.s. Fre-
quency ran is from near zero to about 1
kHz.-D. E. Mannon, Switching Circuit En·
sures Full Fi st Pulse, EEE, Nov. 1967, p 126
ANO· and 128.
GATE
FULL·FtRST
PULSE OUTPUT
A-A: CONNECTIONS FOft

LOAD POWER OFF
03 WITH NEGATIVE SIGNAL
K02103
B-8: CONNECTIONS FOR
lOAO POWER ON
WITH NEGATIVE SIGNAL
l·KW AUTOMATIC SYNCHRONOUS SWITCH- .

Either negative or positive 1-mA d-c Input ·,_ ~l'·
signal, deponcling on connections at AA ancl
BB, applies powor to load at next point in
Instantaneous lino voltage that is low enough
to prevent rfl goneratlon.-"Silicon Controlled
Roctiflor Experimenter's Manual," RCA, Harri-
son, N.J., 1967, p 95.
,.
l .:'..
'"°'·
' -,,
,~~
Ir
SWITCHING CIRCUITS 743
40VAC LOAD
All!D
8°KW SYNCHRONOUS A.C SWITCH-In ab-
UP TO 8 KW sence of 1witch-oponin9 signal, scr's doliver
ON A44F full power to load, in full cycles and thore-
240 VAC
foro with minimum rfi. Ideal for applications
whore magnetizing Inrush currant to trans•
formors and motors causes nuisance fuse
G-E """_ _ _,,. blowing, or whero sensitive test equipment
C330 must be operated near switch lacatlan.-F.
SCR2 W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy
Electric, Syracuse, N. Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 10.
15fl
LOAD
R1
02
SCR STATIC A-C CONTACTOR-Small switch 01 1 k
1N4003
sorvos as static contador for turning on ono 120 v 2N4178
scr during positive half-cycles and other scr AC
during negative half-cyclos. Whon switch ls LINE 2N4178
opened, scr's remove load from line.-"Soml· 01 02
conductor Power Circuits Handbook," Moto· 1N4003
rola, Phoenix, Ari:r., 1968, p 4-9.
lFCR INOUCTIVI
LOADS)
6.8K .---9*---,
I I
A448 2W. '"(692 9 I
;;;;....-M-""""'~LOOO@I--.._~~~~--~~~
900WATT O.ll Cl
AC LOAO MAX 680 4.7K sco
IW 12.e.v CIOIYI
4.71< ADJUST G·E
120 RI TNRESHOLD Z4XLl6 IZOVIHIS
VAC IO"'
12.IY
2N2646
WT
A4!58 47 C2 * lRANSOUCER
APPROX. Ill<
0.1
*FOR UGHT SENSITIVITY, USE G-E 84258 PHOTOCELL

PEAK POINT
~;·,·~~-~ST-- r-~~~·~ tt :• 111112.6 VOl.T r•LAMENT TRANSFORM[R
·-~~>~--~': -~~t ~
UK
PHASE-SENSITIVE SWITCH-Circuit trl99en scr
for elthor dirodlon of bridge unbalance, but
'~·'·£<ii.~ "'I~· TIME- transformer and steering Cliodes detormine
. "''r'' OFF ON which of tho two loads comes on for particu-
·~~-:,~· ',_,·:·.~' - SNAP-ACTION A·C THRESHOLD

and Cl determine sproad betweenSWITCH-Rl
pickup
lar direction of unbalance. At balanco, bath
loads are off. Ideal for monitoring or warn•
and dropout of a•c load up to 900 W. Can Ing systems, whero loads can be lamps
bo used for tomperature control, lighting con· labolod HIGH and LOW, rolays providing
J ·~ trol, ond other applications, depending on corroctivo action, otc. Sensor may bo photo-
f .-.·'.·)·. type of transducor used.-F. W. Gut:rwillor
and E. K. Howell, Economy Powor Semicon·
cell instead of thermistor shown.-D. R.
Grafham, Using low Current SCR's, Goneral
ductor Applications, General Eloctrlc, Syracuse, Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.19, 1967, p
. :;' N..Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 10. 31.
,.r
-SV
HYBRID LADDER SWITCH-Trim value is 4
ohms in first three bits, and accuracy well
within 1 mV. Has been usod in 11-bit
analog·digitc:I converter, and time-shared as
9-bit succossive•appraximotian 200·kHz ana•
log-digital convorter.-C. R. Luobko, Ladder
Switch, EDN, Sopt. 1, 1969, p 76.
-15V
CHASSIS MOUNTED
+12V REMOTE SWITCH
TERMINALS
03
K02103
J-o----ouT
K02100
IK
Y2
.-
C2
10.l'F
D2
120V KD2103
60 Hz
KD2100
v,
REMOTE-CONTROL PHASE SELECTOR-Relay
I
and unity-gain transistor amplifier permit l·KW SYNCHRON~US SWITCH-Provides
seloction of o-c signal or 180-deg phase- switching without go~eration of rfl, using low-
invertod version while minimizing system current switch S2 which may be remotely
noise of long signal paths.-M. I. Neidich, locatod.-"Silican Co~trolled Rectifier Experi-
Remote Switching Technique Reduces System menter's Manual," R A, Harrison, N.J., 1967,
Noise, Electronic Design, Feb. 15, 1965, p 78- p 93.
79.
ANALOG I N P U T - - - - - - - - - - .
1M
D
-15v 01
2N5459
GATE
INPUT
MAKE·BEFORE·BREAK FEY-Spikes associated
with switching of analog signals by fet's
are overcome by operating fot pair in make-
before-break mode. One transistor is
switched on prior ta gating analog signal, ta IM +15v
provide low•impodonce path to ground that
minimizes spikes. Positive gating signal turns
on Ql while Q2 remains off, allowing analog
signal to be transmitted through opomp to switch by turning on 02 before turning off Improves FET Switch, Eledronics, April 27,
output. Negative gating signal opens analog Ql .-L. F. Halio, Make·Boforo•Bt~ak Modo 1970, p
GE GE
A44B A44B I
1-KW STATIC SWITCH-Operates from a-c: line
and provides 120 V d-c: for 1,000.W load. ----------+------------------t
AC SUPPLY GE GE
I
I
Control signal applied te reed switch will
120 VOLTS IN1693 IN1693 I
turn load on or off in one cycle. Designed for I FOR
applications having high duty cycle, such as HEAVY 1000
*
WATT
motor controls for machine tools and con• INDUCTIVE DC
LOADS LOAD
veyors, welding controls, battery chargers, I ONLY
temperature controls, and process controls.-
I
F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy GE GE I
Power Semiconductor Applications, General C22B C22B I
Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 196S, p 6.
I
R1 R2
5AMP SCR STATIC D·C CONTACTOR-Requiros only
LOAD 2oon 2oon momentary contact of spring-loaded spdt
C1 switch for turning on or turning off S·A d-c:
10µF load. Once scr 01 is turned on by gala cur•
rent through Rl, gala drive is no longer ro•
40V 100 v quired and switch can be released. When
01 02 switch is pushed to OFF position, scr Q2
S1 R3
2N4178 2N1597 receives gate current and comes on. Cl then
CENTER OFF soon discharges and turns 01 off. C2 then charges
ON OFF to supply voltage and turns 02 off. 02 is
much smaller than 01 because it is used to
commutate 01 off.-"Semiconductor Power
5 µF
C2 Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
100 v
1968, p 4-11.
L.OAD
240 W MAX.
R2
3000
K02103 5W
Rt R3
680 1800
K02IOI
1<02103
K02104
SYNCHRONOUS SWITCH-Prevents rfi by op• supply voltage at that instant is less than
plying powor to o-c: loads up to 24 W only 13.S V, to apply powor safely to load without
at near-:rero points In a-c: cycle. Triggering of rR. If supply voltage is above 13.S V, scr
scr occurs at 6.S V. Regenerative-transistor stays off for remainder of that input half-
switch triggers al 2.8 V with Sl open and cycle, and is triggered only when voltage
13.5 V with Sl closed. With Sl open, switch reaches 6.S V on succeeding half-c:ycles.-
therefore conducts and blocks scr so load is "Silicon Controlled Rectifier Experimenter's
off. When Sl is closed, scr conducts if Manual,'' RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967, p 90.
Cl
0.llJF + ----, I
I
R1 01*
100
l(REQUIRED FOR
40V
20W IINDUCTIVE
- - - - ..J LOADS)
mains
220.0. w
magnet 01
1
2N3713
STATIC POWER SWITCH-Lang-life roed relay

servos as simple trigger for triac control af
" · r·
singlo-phaso a-c load. Hermetic sealing of
relay permits uso in presence of gasoline TRANSISTOR STATIC D-C CONTACTOR-Small d·c load up to 5 A.-"Somiconductor Power
vapor or in lines having explosive gases. switch, which can bo remote from load, turns Circuits ~andbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
Valuo of RI in ohms should be about equal on transistor QI when closed. Will handle
to a•c line voltage in volts, to givo gate
current of about I A for triac. R2 and Cl
suppress transionts.-Triacs-Oporation and
Use, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind-
hoven, Tho Netherlonds, No. 17, 1969. .4.----~-
04 05
11112070 11112070
D2
M4L20S2
R, OOTPUT
ll<l'Ul o, 07
L 1rt4742 '"2070
____ IZV
.__~_._ ____ r,•·._...,.__.._._ _.___..._
UTC-1151
12ov
IOH1 SIGNAL.POWERED SWITCH-D-c control volt· full firing of scr during each 60-Hz a-c cycle.
age above 9.3 V at input turns on four-layer Pulse Ira dormer Isolates voltage sensor from
broakovor diode D2 in simple relaxation oscil- load. M y bo used to control alarm horn,
lator circuit that induces train of pulses in lamp, or a-c relay.-P. A. Lajoie, Signal·
fll secondary of Tl, to gate scr on and apply Powered D-C Voltage Sensor Controls A·C
TRIAC FOR A·C LOADS-Power line triggers power to load up to 1.5 A that scr places Loads, E , Jan. 1968, p 117-118.
gated bidirectional controlled roctlfler when across a-c Jina. Pulse train ensures almost
SI is closed. When SI is opened, trlac will
cut off at next zero crassovor of a-c lino and
remain off until SI is again clostd.-A. Harris,
Semiconductor Switching of Low-Power Cir-
cuits, Electronics World, June 1967, p 33-35.
a -1 +tov
o,,.....J-av
CONTROL
V0\,1Mll ~ IOA IMAU
SI
RI
4.7'JI. load
THI
Cl
o.z .., ,
.
•',•
...... .
I
·.. :;_'.'.\
A·C STATIC CONTACTOR-Will gito mllllons
of operations silently, with minim m rfl and
oxtromoly low control power. Use thyristors
ISOLATED CONTROL-Transformer provides THI and TH2 connected In antip rallol, for ..
.....
isolation of control circuit from a-c load. handling load roted betwoon abo t 0.5 and
Closing SI starts relaxation oscillator QI 35 kW; thus, for 25 A rms loo s current,
which operates in range of 600 to 6,000 Hz. operating on 220 V a•c line, thyri or can be
First pulse of each half-cyclo of a•c lino causes Philips BTX81-300R. Both diode can be
triac to saturate for remainder of that half· BAl45, BYl26, BYXIO, or similar ypes. For
cycle. Triac cuts off momentarily at first 220-V lino, RI is 56 and R2 is 220 for 115-V
zero crossover of a-c lino, but is triggered on line, RI· is 39 and R2 Is 120. Swit h may be
again by the first pulse received from QI read-type, microswitch, or thermos t contact.
after the next half-cycle begins.-A. Harris, -A. C. Static Contactor, Philips, ub, Dept.,
Semiconductor Switching of Low-Power Cir· Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, The Nethe lands, No.
cuits, Electronics World, June 1967, p 33-35. 20, 1968.
SWITCHING CIRCUITS 74'7
150
LOAD
r20'Vdc 01
TRIAC A·C STATIC SWITCH-Trlac remains on 120 v __J CONTROL R1
SIGNAL MAC2"'4
until control signal is removod, and turns off AC "ON" 1k
·o~dl___f1_
when current next drops to zero. Wiii handle LINE
raoctlve as well as resistive loads on 60-Hz 1W
a-c llna.-"Samiconductor Power Circuits OR
Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, SYNCHeD
p4-8. TO LINE
FREQUENCY
+12v +12V +12v
Dt 4.7K
tN270
LOt.O 1No--f OUT
R4 CD
IOk IOK
r-1
REMOTE
INVERT L1
-15v
·1 '::' '::' '::'
4,7K
PHASE SELECTOR WITHOUT RELAY-Two-tran·

BOUNCE ELIMINATOR-Turning on scr QI si·
sistor circuit permits remote solactlon of a-c
multanaously with closing of switch aliminatos
signal or 180.deg phase-lnvartad version
false triggering signal or noise caused by con·
wltheut use of relay. Whan inversion Is de•
tact baunce. Ser consumes no quiescent
sired, switch is cloHd.-M. I. Neidich, Remote
powar.-R. A. Wilson, SCR Takes Bounce Out
Switching Technique Reduces Systom Noise,
of Switching, Electronics, Oct. 30, 1967, p 69.
Efectronlc Design, Feb. 15, 1965, p 78-79.
tNl763
+6 vd·c
INl763 IN2071 s +
*20p.f
... .
....
~ ·~
I 17 v
'\.,
+6v d·c Dz
1Nl763 LOAD
t. .,.. - - - 4..__ _ MC 844P r,

~ -=
flows through primary of inexpensive audio
transformer, Inducing same half-ave recti-
a-c line to supply current to load. D2 shunts
Inductive splkes.-G. V. Wlntre11, IC Gata
JA·C CONTROL WITH GATE-When IC Is gated fied volta9e In secondary for tri99erln9 trlac Controls Triac with Audio Transformar, ffec-
· on by throe slmultaneau1 Inputs, current into conduction every half-cycle and allowing fronlcs, Aug. 5, 1968, p 106.
120VAC
I
I
..__
o.s:::j::
I
RLOAD
2NZI02 6.8K +24V fOR ON
OV fOR Off
TSW-31
I
..,. 10
HALF-WAVE NORMALLY OPEN-Static power 300 mA as set by JO-Ohm pot.-J. A. Means,

switch con be used for heater loads, limit FAST-ACTING SCR-Simple scr circuit brooker SCR Circuit Breaker Hos Fast Operation, "400
switches, and other applications requiring operates in less than 2 µs to interrupt lood Ideas forl Design Selected from Electronic
switching of half-wave a·c power. Closing current at any desired value between 100 and Design," Hayden Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 220.
switch 51 fires scr and energizes lood.-F. W.
Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy Powor
Semiconductor Applications, General Eloctric,
Syracuse, N.Y., Na. 671.1, 1965, p 6.
1201'1C
1200R
RI
240VAC 22on,112w
QI
SI SI 52
FORWARO RE\1£RSE
SELF-TRIGGERED TRIAC-When switch 51 is

closed, triac is triggered on just ofter start of
each half-cycle (ot about 6 V). Sl may be TRIAC AS STATIC REVERSING SWITCH-Pair by other eons, With appropriate firing cir-
relay contact, but must withstand full lino of triacs servos as static switch, in place of cuit, orra gement con servo as motor over•
voltage. load can be up to 6 A. Use RCA contoctors, for reversing-type psc motor, ta tomperoture control that senses motor winding
40429 for 120 V and 40430 for 240 V.-R. pravido rapid-response reversal, SI and 52 temperot~e direclly.-"SCR Manual," 4th
M. Marston, 20 Trioc Circuits, Radio-Electronics, con be reed switches, or triocs can be gated Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 222.
Juno 1970, p 51-53 and 97.
Vee
2A
SOK R1
D
9
le
C1rOOOI
h4
0
VcE
.,.. .,..
SOLENOID DRIVER-Will switch loads up to BASIC AVALANCHE-Con be used with any and 4 b fore circuit is ready for another
5 A. Diode DI protects 02 by suppressing appropriate avalanche transistor moating load ovalonch • Can be usod in pulse generators
voltage transient developed when inductive roquiromonts. Values shown ore for NSl 110, and volt ge comparators.-B. H, Bell, Ava-
load is de-enorgized.-A. Harris, Semicon• having load lines at right. C1 supplies rush lanche Ci cuits Are Mare Versatile Than You
ductar Switching of low-Power Circuib, Eloc• of current for avalanche between point 0 and Think, E ronic Design, June 8, 1964, p 56-
tronics World, June 1967, p 33-35. 1, but must be recharged between paints 3 63.
120VAC r - - - -......--+l4V
'I
I
I
Ill
IOOA
o.s*
I
I
I 1200R
L--- 240V
AIH 50-50Hz ......~~-v.,.,,...--c~
RI
sv 1
IUl. BATT_l_
~g~ QI• 40429 (RCA) ON 120 VAC

HALF-WAVE CLOSED-When
t!--GAT[ VOLTAG£ • 40430 !RCA) ON 240 VAC
NORMALLY
switch is open, scr and load are energized. TIMING SWITCH-Actuating SI gates SCRI BASIC TRIAC SWITCH-Switch S1 handles only
Closing of switch shorts out trigger to gate on ond energizos load, whilo commutating about 40 mA in triggering triac that carrios
and opens scr, turning off load.-F. W. Gutz- copocitor Cl charges through SCRl and Rl. 6-A load current. For 120 V a-c, use RCA
willer and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Relaxation oscillator UJT produces one cycle 40429; for 240 V, use 40430. Will handlo
Semiconductor Applications, General Electric, of oscillation under this condition, duration surge currents of cold incandescent lomps.-
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.I, 1965, p 6. of which is determined by setting of R2. At R. M. Marston, 20 Triac Circuits, Radio.floe·
end of cycle, SCR2 is gatod on, UJT is dis- tronics, June 1970, p 51-53 and 97.
abled, and SCRl turned off.-A. Harris, Semi·
conductor Switching of low-Powor Circuits,
Electronics World, Juno 1967, p 33-35.
o-.,.....~~~~~~~~~~~-.~~~~ ......
-~--,
+ I
R3
2k
01,I
I
(REQUIRED FOR
INDUCTIVE
L.OADS)
40 v 02 ___ _JI
2N2193
"ON" 40 V
(A)
"OFF"S1_ CONTROL.
SIGNAL. Q1
LAMP DRIVER-Goto drive of only 3 V ot 40 2N3713
mA on scr will handle lamp load of 35 A,
provided lamp power source is full-wave
rectified a-c, without filtering. When lamps
ore to be turned off, SI is opened, and lamps
are de-energiHd at next return of d-c wave- TRANSISTOR STATIC D-C SWITCH-load is on Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
form to zoro.-A. Harris, Semiconductor anly whilo control signal is present to turn 1968, p 4-12.
Switching of low-Power Circuits, Electronics on both tronsistors.-"Semiconductor Power
World, June 1967, p 33-35.
+6v
DIODE T SWITCH-Serves for switching r·f
TRANSFORMERS CF101 signals up to 200 MHz from input to output.
(INOIANA GENERAL) Circuit is normally on when no switch-off
6 TURNS Bl Fl LIAR pulse is present. 6-V positive pulse at input
of gate turns on both gate transistors, gen-
erating 6 mA for changing bias on diodos
and opening switch.-R. J. Turner, P-1-N Diode
T Switch Consumes little Power, Electronics,
I Dor
+~ 2N708 ts ma Feb. 2, 1970, p 99.
SWITCH-OFF
PULSE
-
2N708
4ma
Vee 1sn
+24V LOAD
R1
120 ... 1k 01
AC 1W MAC2-4
LINE
I
TRIAC STATIC A-C CONTACTOR-Smoll switch reactive ~d rosistivo loods.-"Semiconductor
applies gate current to triac, to close load cir· Power Cirtuits Hondboolc," Motorola, Phoenix,
cuit. When switch Is open, triac turns off Ariz., 196 , p 4-9.
R2 when current next drops to zero. Will handle
47k
R3
10
R
j_ 2Nl595 OTHER
UNITS
SNAP-ACTION SWITCH-Utod for on-off con-
trol of relay or other load. Complementary
i:)~INPUT
silicon transistors behave liko Schmitt trl99er, T
with both turning on for 1.4 V d-c at Input,
and turning off at 1.1 V. When off, current
drain Is zoro. If input Is voltage drop acro11 UNIVERSAL SCR DRIVER-Used to drivo 20- lnductonc ; typical valuo Is 100 µF. R is
sensor, circuit may be used 01 slmplo and chonnel operations recorder having pen do· usually 5 ohms, chosen to give fast re·
roliablo temperature, photoelectric, or other flection coils operating from 24-V d-c sourco. charging f C.-J. Gray, Jr., SCR Circuit a
control,-A, Anzanl, On-Off Solid-State Switch Whan scr is fired by input pulse, C discharges Versatile Driver of Many Loads, Electronic
Is Simple and Inexpensive, Electronic Design, through load and charging current source is Do1ign, A rll 13, 1964, p 74.
Sept. 27, 1967, p 70. clamped. Value of C is determined by load
LOAD UJT TRIGGERED TRIAC-When ~1 is closed,

0
ujt oscillator applies continuous train of

I
trigger pulses to gate of triac 01 through
isolating transformer Tl. With trigger at 2
1200R kHz, triac is triggered on very 1shortly ofter
240VAC start of each 60-Hz half-cycle, ~or full-wave
control. Switch handles only 2 mA, and
can be replaced by transistor dJivon by any
type of transducer. Use RCA 140429 trlac
for 120 V and 40430 for 240 v,-R. M. Mar·
ston, 20 Triac Circuits, Rodio-ElectroniC1, Juno
1970, p 51-53 and 97.
Tl
(1:1)
OUTPUT
. ·~
SWITCH REFERENCE IREFERENCE I PRECISION LOAD SUMMING AND -~

LOADING ONE I SWITCH BUFFER AMP FOR
DRIVER
COMPENSATION l(ONLY
NEEDED) YPICAL APPLICATION 'f
OVERCOMING CHEAP SWITCHES-Vorlotlons '<
of up to 1,000 ohms in contact resistance of mode acts as precision low-contact resistonce
0 G. R. Lat m 4th, Inverted Transistor Swltch~s
cheap switches havo no offoct on oporotion switch. Designed for applying precision ref. Precision D·C Voltage, E/octronlcs, Aug, 4, . .
of circuit, in which Q2 connectod In invertod erence voltage from 9°V zoner to IC opamp.- 1969, p -93. ~~
CHAPTER 81
Staircase Generator Circuits
+12V
10kA
OUTPUT
---f 9X ZS70
---{
10kA ---.1 1.•v
EQUAL STEPS-Roferenco chain of forword-
biased diodes givos known oqual stops of •
0-....;..,-1•~:
voltogo, when reference points aro connected L ••••• .1
soquentially to common load by switching ZTX310
ZDXIR
transistors. Johnson decado countor Is used
with diode decoding to provide sequential
swltchlng.-"E-Lino Transistor Applications,"
Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969, 1.s1c..n.
p 21. ov
I
.L
HORIZONTAL
DRIVE ..---.....----.....----....""""4'""""----.....--....-----..'""""--------+------4'""""----t-----.,_.+9v
at 12Ma
120K 4.7K
4Vppn
f~ &3.:sL
I p.Hcl
+I~
DIODES - INl94
"::'4.7K l
TRANSISTORS - 2N388
GRAY-SCALE STAIRCASE-Produces 7 to 12
linear stops botwoon horizontal drlvo pulses
coming from tv sync gonorator. Q2.Q3 oper-
ate as synchronized free-running mvbr around
160 kH1, and QB is stop capacitor-dlschargo
clrcult.-W. Rial, TV Staircase Generator Usos
Inexpensive Components, E/edranic Design,
Feb. 3, 1964, p 46.
AJ
L 63.3
fllOC
j
751
V• +ZO vDlts
100
---, I
I
TI51
R:1
47
~<>
TI4951
___ .JI
4·71& 4·7kQ
EQUAL-STEP llNEAR-Producos linear staircase
voltage waveform for ultrasonic image con•
verter using switchin9 matrix and pulse tech·
niques for reproducing object image on array
UJT STAIRCASE WITH COUNTER-Will operate of 100 transducer elements.-S. O. Harrold,
at inputs up to 10 kHz. Negative input pulse Solid State Ultrasonic Camera, Ultrasonics,
trig9ers Q2 on for period set by R2, to fur• April 1969, p 95-101.
nish drive for curront source Q:J.01 that
charges C. At ond of period, C dischorgos
slowly until next negative pulse arrivos. R4
dotermines height of oach voltage stop on C.
When volta9e is high enough to fire ujt Q4,
C discharges and cycle repeats. Addition
of Q5 discharges C faster, to double maxi-
mum opcratin9 frequency.-8. Crawford and
R. T. Dean, The Unijunction Transistor in Re·
loxotion Circuits, Electro-Technology, March
1964, p 41)-45. +IOOV
Q~
~ R3
"'
035
+6V
R9
3.9kQ
A B -~_:::,:.._©
Li~4·k-Q
RIO
ROW·SELECTING STAIRCASE GENERATOR-
® Usod in figure-8 bar matrix numoricol display
j8.2kQ
to step down crt boom one lino and return
ov
it to left after every 12 generated choradors. COLUMN·SELECTING STAIRCASE GENERATOR
Circuit makes uso of clock pulses (250 kHz) -Used in figure·B bar matrix numerical dis·
and control logic levels, as described in article. play to shift crt beam one place to right after
Flip·flops A and B give four possible ovtput formation of each character. Sequonco of
conditions, one for each row of characters gotos identifies ond of oach character and
displayed. Potentiometers adjust spacing be- triggers generator for producing noxt step
twoon rows. Diodes are BAX13.-A. P. Tanis, of staircase. All transistors are BSX20 and
Numerical Display with Bar Matrix Character all diodes BAX13.-A. P. Tanis, Numerical
Generator, Electronic Applications, Philips, Display with Bar Matrix Character Generator,
Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Eindhoven, The Electronic Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 2, 1966-1967, p Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, Vol.
73-83. 27, No. 2, 1966-1967, p 73-83.
STAIRCASE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 753
Co 1N442A
FOUR-STEP STAIRCASE-With neon lamp
shown, firing at about 42 V, negative input
pulse slightly greater than this value will
requiro four chargings of Ca-Cb for series of
four stops, with lamp firing on edge af fifth
step to discharge capacitors and initiate new
staircase.-A. C, Gillie, "Pulse and logic Cir·
cuits," McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968, p 266.
.,. _____
IN64 _
THREE-TRANSISTOR LINEARIZING BOOTSTRAP

-Used with staircase generator (not shown) .01
to give essentially constant increase in pulse
voltage increments, so corners of steps are OUT
on straight line. Solid arrows show path by
which Cd discharges, and broken arrows show
its charging path. T3 acts as switch. For
optimum linearity, value of Cc in µ.F should
be changed for each frequency band, as fol·
lows: 200-500 pps-1; 500-1,000-0.5; 1-20
kpps-0.I; 20-50-0.01; 50-100-0.001.-A.
C. Gillie, "Pulse and logic Circuits," McGraw•
Hill, N.Y., 1968, p 292.
TWO-TRANSISTOR LINEARIZING BOOTSTRAP-

Used with staircase generator (not shown) to
O.Ol give essentially constant incroase in pulse
"'F voltage increments, sa earners of steps are on
straight line. Depends on variable voltage
feodback from ampliRer whase voltage gain
is unity. Maximum swoep•period time varies
with battery voltage, for which typical value
is 10 V.-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse and logic Cir-
cuits," McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968, p 289.
Note: Cb should be changed to 150 pF for sweep F > 50 kilopulses
r-
B Ct A
fRc
.OOtp.F
-
.01 p.F
+
i
ONE·SHOT LINEARIZING BOOTSTRAP-Used
t
-
with staircase generator to give equal incre•
ments, so corners of steps are on straight
line. Solid arrows show path for Cf charging OUT
Re2
current; final value of this capacitor is best
determined empirically while observing out•
10k pot
l
- -
put waveform on scope.-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse
and Logic Circuits," McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968,
p 294.
- F• 20k pps
'754 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANU' AL
+l!IVo--....-------+---....,
3300
C2
.---+---+-~~t-oJL
.01 PULSE
INPUT
IOK
4.7K
PULSE TRAIN GIVES STAIRCASE-Each input
DI· 04 • IN4009 pulse produces current pulse at output of
8106 for charging capacitor in such a way
that capacitor voltage increases linearly with
each pulse to give staircase. Fet source
·ISV
follower or low-bias-current buffer amplifier
WIDE FREQUENCY RANGE-Npn·pnp amitter. must bo used to isolate capacitor from low.
follower output circuit gives high Input impod· impedance loads. For repetitive staircase,
onco and low output lmpedanco, to reduce outpuf. voltage level is sampled and used to
droop in autput voltage between pulses. triggor fot switch that discharges capacitor.
Npn transistor bias is effectively boolstrappod Staircase thon builds up again from zero to
on output, as also is diode-capacitor pump. same negative levol.-Applying the Model
Steps por cycle depend on ratio of Cl to C2 8106 Monolithic Precision Current Source, Op·
and amplitude of input pulse1 for values ti cal Eloctronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10168.
shown, 12·Y input gives 10 steps.-"Uniiunc-
tlon Circuit Hints," Goneral Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., fig. 6.
+1Zv UNIJUNCTION A~
SAWTOOTH
GENERATOR STAIRCASE I~
20k o. SAWTOOTHI~
2N356S
STAIRCASE2~
SAWTOOTH2~
no STAIRCASE!~
SAWTOOTH!~
DIVIOE·BY- SAWTOOTH I ., SAWTOOTH A + STAIRCASE t , ETC.

THREE
COUNTER
._-~-=----y.,:.~;.....----SAWTOOTH t
..··,.. .
t-----"o/'h=="--~---SAWTOOTH 2
.,
'------"""""""'-......_.,_._ _ SAWTOOTH 3
A --'Vl,.,,.,.56='-k_ ..
3
BI -""N.,_:5._,6::..;:k'---t ,~
STAIRCASE c z --'lly,..5:.6:.k--........ SUMMING
NETWORK
t.·:!
GENERATOR
THREE-OUTPUT SAWTOOTH-Combined analog genorating long sequontial sawtooths in syn•

chronism for crt displays, swoop drcuits, and
Q7 sequentially. Any numbor of sequon~l~.
and digital circuit ganerates staircase whose sawtooths may bo produced.-E. G. BreozJ#
equal-amplitude steps are added olgabrai• character generators. When ujt fires, countor A Staircase and a Ramp Yield Multlplo Saw'-
cally to ramps of sawtooth generator, for starts and its outputs switch on QS, Q6, and tooths, Electronics, March 2, 1970, p 105. ''-
STAIRCASE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 755
--~---i-o
SIGNALITE
f •2350 CPS
0 ""\J'" 5K
1
1N r LI
VTC R1
AC82Rt0
(10
TURNS)
IL
~
I l
HVC-8
R2 '- 2
MEG
OUTPUT Sk L1
VTC
HVC·8
Cz
0.021'f
TEKTRONIX 105 DUAL-FUNCTION NEON-Provides both fre-

NEON STAIRCASE-Less complex than similar quoncy and voltage division with minimum
circuits not using noons. May also be used components. In one modo, circuit divides
as frequency divider. When input voltage of input voltage into equal stops. In second
54 V is introduced, 3 stops appear across C2. modo, it acts as frequency dividor in separat•
Reducing amplitude of square wave by vary• ing odd-numbered pulsos in input train, olimi·
in9 5K pot increasos number of steps. Below noting need for decoding logic in binary sys-
40 V, circuit operates as frequency divider toms. Mode of operation is determined by
separating out odd pulses.-E. Bauman, "Ap- range of peak·to•peak input voltage; 32 to
plications of Neon lamps and Gas Discharge 40 gives frequency division, and 44 to 54
· Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p 44-48. gives staircase generation with 4 to 13 steps.
-A. B. Cistola, Noon Tube Staircase Genora•
tor Performs Two Jobs, E/octronics, Dec. 26,
1966, p 74-75.
Romp Buffer I Tunnel- diode Sw•IChes I Synchron1zollon Oulpul

generolors omphf1ers I : swilch amplifier
I
51 k
R,.
10 k
R,.
CTP309
o,
. 1-MHZ TUNNEL-DIODE-Maximum amplitude betweon 20 p.s and 2 ms. Stops aro equal.- tro-Techno/ogy, Sept. 1964, p 48-53.
,•• ,of long ramp is 10 V, with duration variable T. Mollinga, Tunnel-Diode Applications, flee-
.···
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In the category of this chapter, use the index at the back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits,'' publi1hed by
CHAPTER 82
Tachometer Circuits
No. of PRECISION TACHOMETER-Designed for 12-V

Cylinders negative-ground ignition system. Counts
4 6 8 number of times distributor points close per
Cl in mfd for 2- minute, to give rpm. Uses 500-µA meter
Cycle Engine 0.33 0.22 0.15 movement calibrated linearly in rpm. Zener
XII, rated 8.2 V at 1 W, prevents battery
Cl In mfd for 4- and generator fluctuations from affecting ac-
Cycle Engine 0.68 0.47 0.33
curacy.-"Hobby Manual," General Electric,
NOTE: WITH 6-VOLT NEGATIVE

10-2ov
GROJNO SYSTEMS, USE SEPARATE
6-VOLT DRY CELL IN SERIES WITH
AUTO BATTERY, OR USE SEPARATE
12-VOLT ORY BATTERY. QI
RI R2 GE-I
CRI
GE-XII
TO
POINTS
PULSE TACH I LEVEL I COMPARATOR SP EEO

SHAPER !SHIFTER! AOJ
+B.2 V
R1S R16 12 v
R7 R9
04 I
I
I
R11
I
,
... I
R12rC4
R13
l
C2 I I
rl R6
I
1
R14
-: I I
ALTERNATE BLACK SCHMITT MODULATOR DRIVER ANO OUTPUT
ANO WHITE STRIPES
- 10 EACH
R22
R17 cs R19
RIB R20 ~r4AOCMOT0~6

RUN
• 15ASTART
OPTICAl-FEEDBACK CONTROL-Armature of output feeds through pulse shaper to tachom- voltage for control of pulse width modulator
motor was painted with 20 alternating black eter circuit whoso d-c output is proportional (Schmitt} QB-Q9 that drives motor through
and white stripes, and fibor optic system to input frequency and hence motor speed. Darlington power amplifier Qll-012.
used to transmit reflected light to phatotran- Differential ampliflor in comparator compares Speed regulation is excellent.-"Somiconductor
sistor QI, to give chapping at frequency de- voltage from speed control Rl 3 with output Power Circuits Handbook,'' Motorola, Phoenix,
termined by speed of motor. Phototronsistor of tachometer lovol shifter and delivers error Ariz., 1968, p 1-33.
756
TACHOMETER CIRCUITS 757
R1
P·M MOTOR SPEED-Counter-emf of perma· 2.000
nent-magnet motor charges Cl between
power pulses. Voltage across Cl, equal to
open-circuit counter-emf and proportional to
motor speed, is read out on d-c voltmeter.
Measuring circuit ignores resistance drop of
Oz
IN53B
load current.-J. B. Tiedemann, Permonent-
Magnet Motor Measures Its Own Speed, Elec-
tronics, May 29, 1967, p 84-85. MOTOR
24-VOLT, l·A MPE RE / D-C VOLTMETER

GYROMOTOR
SSL4,5
r--J"IA.f\r--t~~~~--~~~~~~~~~~-e~-o9V.
+
OPTICAL TACHOMETER-Dab of white point

1Kfl on rotating shaft reflects light to l14A pho·
totransistor when illuminated by solid-state
lamp. Filter excludes ambient illumination
CORNING GLASS CS 7-69
IR TRANS. FILTER that might falsely trigger l14A. Circuit con•
verts light pulses to proportional current
values indicated on microammeter calibrated
in rpm. Will measure speeds as low as 60
IKfl
rpm.-L. M. Hertz, Solid State lamps-Part II,
General Electric, Nela Park, Cleveland, Ohio,
No. 3-0121, 1970, p 23.
0.03.Q
flywheel
diode
BYZIB
R7
330Q
240V
TACHOMETER-FEEDBACK CONTROL OF LARGE
"' FHP MOTOR-Philips P.T102 thyristor makes
smooth, continuous speed control economical
for lorger fractional-horsepower motors such
as are used in automatic washing mochines.
voltago Ceramic magnetic material mounted on motor
ref"d":: DI shaft induces pulses in adjacent coil to give
BZV94-C12 tachometer feedback for stabilizing speed
RI.
39kn against variations in load. Thyristor is trig·
gered by blocking oscillator at point in each
thyr1star half-cycle ~orresponding to setting of speed
81102 control RS, to give 30:1 speed range.-S&ries
Motor Speed Control Systems with Tachome•
ter, Philips, Pub. Dept.. Elcoma Div., Eind·
hoven, The Netherlands, Application No, 6,
1968.
47k
SPEED AND DWELL ANGLE-With switch In

tachometer position, upper two gates operate
as one-shot triggor drivon by signal from
distributor of auto engine. One--shot output
pulses have fixed amplitude and duration, so
motor reading is proportional to pulso fre--
quency and thoroforo to angina speed. With
switch in dwoll position, lowor loft goto of
IC is usod as inverter feeding output gate
(lowor right) for second inversion. Pulse du·
ralion at motor varies with dwell angle of
distributor cam, Meter adually reads ratio
of time points aro closod to time they aro
open. Article givos calibration procodures.
-s. J. Arnold, Combined Tachometer and
Dwell Meter, EEE, Aug. 1967, p 126-127.
SWoT(H POS:l10"'5: •·OFF, 2 · IA(H, 3-0WELl
r- - - - - - - - - - - - - ---.0.'Yli"O: ~-- - - - - - - ----1

I "• ••
TACHOMETER SPEED CONTROL-Error ampli· down to 20% load. Report gives design tor Speed Control Circuit Design for D. C.
fier uses balanced input to reduce drift oquations. D13 and D14 ore Mullard BYX- Shunt Motors Supplied from A. C. Mains,
caused by temporature or supply voltage 22-800 or others to suit fiold currant. B Is Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon,
changes. Controls 5-hp d-c shunt motor op· Mullard thyristor stack, D is Mullard MY5051 Tho Netherlands, No. 438, 1967.
erating from a-c lino. Speed regulation Is currant-limiting module, and E is Mullard
better than 1 % at full speed from full load MY5011 trigger modulo.-J. Marrett, Thyris-
410
LASCR OPTICAL TACHOMETER-Trigger pulsos
may be oithor light on laser or electrical pulsos
RL 5K at G. Average anode currant of laser is
"CAU8RATE"
+
o, J proportional to repetition rate of pulses, per-
IZV "': Z4XL9.I mitting calibration of voltmeter in rpm.-E.
DC - K. Howell, The Light Activated SCR, GaHral
Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.34, 1965.
111 •L~r R5
IDK
POSITIVE-GROUND TACHOMETER-For auto

engines having posltlvo torminal of 12-V bat• C1 microfarad, 50 volts or positive ground, RCA SK3020
tery grounded to framo. Meter speciRed greater for negative ground
gives full-scalo roading of about 10,000 rpm C2 0.5 microfarad, 50 volts or transistor, RCA SK3020
when pulses from distributor points are ap- greater 22,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
plied to torminal 1.-"Hobby Circuits Man- CR1CR2 = silicon rectifier, RCA 220 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
ual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 111. SK3030 1500ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
M milliammeter, 0 to I milliam- 330 ohms, l /2 watt, 10%
pere range (see text) potentiometer, IOOO ohms,
Q1 transistor RCA SK3025 for trimmer type, linear taper
IOOK
IW
IDK
to use transistors in place of tubos.-A. V,

TACHOMETER FOR MISSILE FUZE GENERATOR afars used in proximity fuzos. Consists of Aslin, Editor, "Radio Proximity Fuzos For Fin-
-Circuit shown was most satisfactory of ampliRer, wave clipper, and vtvm reading Slabilized Missiles," Div. 4, NDRC, Vol. I,
largo numbor developed during World War average voltage across R-C network (pro- 1946 (available from Clearinghouse, Spring•
II for measuring rotational speeds of 9ener• portional to speed). Can readily be adapted fiold, Va.), p 295.
+IZY !ACCESSORY CONTACT ON IGNITION SWITCHI R9
C3 SHIFT-INDICATING TACHOMETER-Circuit
+~
turns on red warning lamp at pretetermined
20K ongino rpm value to toll driver to shift goars.
Eliminates noed for watching polntor of ta-
chometer. Bullt around integrated circuit
342CG having two Identical ono-shot multivibrators.
I Can be calibrated with audio oscillator.-R. A.
I ONE-SHOT #2 HirKhfeld, IC Engine Tachomotor and "Rod
ONE-SHOT #I I (VOLTAGE
(THRESHOLD lino" Indicator, E/ectroni" World, May 1967,
!TACHOMETER) I DETECTOR) p 37-39.
I
I
TRIGGER OUTPUT(
2 '*,.,,.,,,,..,.......""""'......-<
470
RIO
IN4001
CZ
0.01 ................~~~~~....~~-+~~~....~~.....~~~~--'
12okn
BAXIJ
O.lµF
6 19
OY 2.2kn 470k0 470kn
8
motarM1
vso
NOR60
Vn ®
4 2
BZY88
C15
TWO-MOTOR TACHOMETER-Used to provide
very fast synchronization of speed of two
electric motors without ovorshoot. Pu Isos
proportional to speed are obtained from ov
coils (VSO) thrugh which vanes on motor
shafts move. Circuitry through outputs of •12Y ·12V
Philips DOA40 IC opamps servos to convert
pulse rates to proportional d·c voltages.
Points a and b then go to lovol detector cir- BAX13
cuit that compares the two voltages, for feed-
ing logic circuits that bring motors into spoed .... ..
~
synchronizatlon.-L. J. Lommens, Control Cir· Ii

cuit for Motor Speed Synchronization, Philips, •''a
Publications Dept., El coma Division, Elnd· 6 19

O.lµF
hoven, Tho Netherlands, Application Note 66. Vp
I ov -in : ..
10 8
2 S6nf' I OV DOA40 Q
motor M2
vso
NOR60 U2
ov
r-1 <l>A 12ov P·P 10K

I
I +24.5V © 20k
3300
HEPllO
I DUAL
I 01 Oz
IN643 IN643
:MNPllTOATE
I Eour uon
I @ 1K
L_J··· T TO o-j 1-""""..--4
TACHO <l>e ... = POINTS O.Oll'F
·24.5V
A·C JACH-Circuit delects whether there is T501'F ;oon
911-deg leod or log between phases af two· ..l ZERO
phose tachometer, and can be used with
-=- ";" ADJUST -:-
peok detector and suitable threshold circuit PRECISl ON IC TACHOMmR-Eosily odiustable
to provide two discrete output logic levels for different ronges and number of cylinders.
that indicate direction of rotatlon.-T. B. Calibrating instructions are glven.-"Tlps on
Hooker, Phose Indicator for AC Tachometer, Using IC's," HMA-32, Motorolo, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1968.
EEE, May 1969, p 118.
14 lrOLT l.INE
\__ _
TAPE PLAYER SPEED CONTROL-Tachometer rectified and resulting d-c voltoge applied to cuit and Inverted Cam Mechanism, Delco
on shoft of drive motor produces a-c voltage three-transistor d-c ompliflor that chongos Radio, Kokomo, Ind,, Bulletin 60·1970-1,
directly proportional to 1peed. Tachometer voltage across motor as required ta give de· Supplement Na, 3, 1969, p G·19.
output is applied to speed control pot, then sired speod.-Now Molar Speed Control Cir-
NEGATIVE-GROUND TACHOMmR-Usod to
~."· indicate speed In rpm of auto engines having
12-V storage battery with negotivo terminal
:,;if;~ ;g~ounded to fro me. Pulses from distributer
.· ·; ",, ;olnts are applied to terminal 1 to turn Ql
~ ai:.<and off as points open and close. Meter
dlon Is proportional to rate of closing. C1 microfarad, SO volts or positive ground, RCA SK3020
acts as zoner to make circuit insensitive to greater for negative ground
""~ · voltage voriations. RS Is used when collbrat•
C2 O.S microfarad, SO volts or transistor, RCA SK3020
, .:. .'./';····.
\ ing tachometer.
·full-scale rooding Meter specified
of 8,000 will rpm.-
to 10,000 have greater 22,000 ohms, I/2 watt, IO%
. :J.• '"Hobby Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., CR1CR2 = silicon rectifier, RCA 220ohms, 1/2 watt, 10%
•? . ..
Or,.'.'· HM-90, p 111. SK3030 ISOO ohms, I/2 watt, I0%
M = milliammeter, Oto I milliam- 330 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
-~
pere range (see text) potentiometer, 1000 ohms,
' ·! Qi "' transistor RCA SK3025 for lrimmer type, linear taper
1oon
LASCR TACHOMETER-Light-activated scr
5K
serves as low-current gate-turnoff switch,
triggered either by light or electrical pulse, + Z4XL9J
12\l..=.
Meter reading depends on repetition rate of
triggering pulses. Voltmeter should be sot
for full-scale doftectlon when trigger rate is
high enough so average current and peak cur.
rent of scr are equal. Further increase in
trigger rate then gives pulse-skipping or fre-
11uoncy-dividing action in which laser con-
.....
~~~~~ ...
~~~~
automati~ 2:1 change in range.-F. W, Gut1•
......
~~~ ...
~~~~~--------~

ducts only on alternate pulses. This gives willer and E. K. Howell, Economy Power Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.I, 1965, p 25.
E1 ~ ·20 ..!. .,, Torque

Ky
Spood >< Torque BALLAST

A
Instantaneous
+
Power}
Model
4029/25 e.
BREAKEA POlllTS
OA AMPLIFIER
BALLAST-RESISTOR DRIVE FOR TACHOMETER-

MOTOR SPEED-TORQUE PRODUCT-Uses Burr· Clean voltage pulse of 4 to 12 V is available
Brown 4029/25 quarter-square multiplier-di· from I-ohm ballast resistor used in every 12-V
vider to give instantaneous product of motor automotive ignition system, in form of length
speed and torque, as required for measuring of resistance wire connected between ignition
instantaneous output power. D-c tachometer switch and positive terminal of ignition coil,
on motor shaft gives speed in electrical form, Value of calibration potentiometer R2 depends
and current through p-m d·c servomotor on meter used. Circuit eliminates transient
servos as other input because it is linoarily errors, so linearity Is limited only by that of
proportional lo torque. Article gives relevant meter used,-R, l. Carroll, New Approach to
equations.-Quartor-Square Multiplier/Divid- Engine Tachometers, Electronics World, Sept.
ers, Burr-Brawn Research, Tucson, Ariz., PDS. 1967, p 71.
2D1C, 1969, p 7.
r-------~--------+30v d·c
~-----,
3.6k
,_,..OUTPUT
~~
Oz
2Nl613
TACHOMETER AMPLIFIER-IC opamp con· flywheel of slowly rototing shaft. Core of

nocled for gain of 1,000 delivers pulse ca• coil is Alnico magnet.-G. D. Morant, Op Amp
pable of driving Ql Into saturation, as re• 30-V negative output pulse. Input is voltage Boosts Pick-up Voltage, Efedronics, Aug, 5,
quired for emitter-follower Q2 lo produce induced in relay coil by triangular magnet on 1968, p 108.
CHAPTER 83
Telemetry Circuits
STRIP-CHART DRIVE-May be '!sed also with

c - v---..,t".lto.,.1:..----<J - 1S v
X·Y and T-Y recorders. Values shown ore
for 1 V full-scale. For telemetry systems re·
quiring 5 V full-scale, increase feedback
resistor to 270K plus I OK in series. Uses OEI
Model 267 logamp to drive opamp. Systom
accuracy is within 2%.-Using Low Cost Input
Logarithmic Amplifiers in Data Recording, Op·
tical Eloctronics, Tuscon, Ariz., No. 10080.
RI
-6.2V tOk I'll. R2 IOk 1% RN60C
REF RN60C
V.n INPUT OUT
R3 R4
499k 1~. 27k
+l!~V RN60C
C4 Rl6
500pF 2.7M
04
2N3824
01
TIS43 Rl7
UJT 2.7M
05
Rl!S 2N3824
IOOk
Rll
47k C!S C6
!SOpF 0.00l!if&F
ov
03
2N697
R12
4.7k
-l!iV
are Analog Devices IOSA.-5. Ben-Yaalcav,
ANALOG·PERIOD CONVERTER-Converts input range of -1 V to +I V. With opamp Analog To Period Converter Can Simplify
0 0
voltago to sawtooth whose period is linear (serving as summing amplifier) omitted, cir· Telemetry Systems, Electronic De1ign, Aug, 16,
function of input voltage over input signal cu it is analog-frequency converter. Opamps 1969, p 240 and 242.
763
'1'64 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
IC RECEIVER-Sinu1oldal Input from tolometry 1.? to 40 flN

rlaput 5v 5.4 It 100 flN
transforming media goes to Model 571 IC :.-----I OUfPUl'
frequency•to•vQltage transducer, and resulting frOll 1.0 Millivolt to
logarlthmically cornpro11ed signal Is converted traM•lttllll 1o0 Volt Dita
back to original data voltage input in Model •di• Cllttpat llli np
326 antilogarithrnlc amplifler.-A Wido Dy·
namlc Range Telemetry Systom, Optical Elec·
tronlcs, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10062.
AMP -----1 + 12V

200kc
F/F I-DRIVER-I
LE 7621 2N996
INPUT
l--CRM4 --1
f•IO-IOOkc
CR4
C1 IN697
Cz
4.7ftf
CR:s
IN697
SENSISTOR
Rg
I.SK
GNO
+3.4V
.....___ CRM 3 ---1

GATE 3
t• 1-IOkc 0-0.55mo MAX
+3.4V ot 25°C+0.43%/ c
0
C;s
100 0.047 NOTE:
IOOV
MYLAR + I. 2N2222'9>100
2. 2N2484'9>250 al 0.1 mo
c..- 3. 2N2511 MAY 8E USEO
4.7iJ-f IN PLACE OF 2N2484
IOV 4. +6v,+12v a-v
REGULATED 1%
CRg
IN697
t-- SUMMER - - - i
IN697 IN754A SIOK
i---- CRM 2 ----I 1----- GATE 2 ------1

Cs t •100- tkc
R:sg
160K
0.47
IOOV
MYLAR C7 +
IOfLf _
IOV
R311
160K
SCALE ADJ 43.3~ -ev
R40
50K
SQUARE TRIM
t--CRM I 1-----GATE
I •10-1000 CPS
4.7f't
IOV
.·
FOUR-DECADE CRM-lmprovos utilization of out. Eliminates decrease in rosolutlon that outputs ore paralleled through OR gates so
two telemetry channels. Ono channel is would occur If one rate metor covorod ontlre only highest is road out Into telemetry sys•
switched from ono count•rato motor (CRM) range. Circuit consumes little power and Is tom. Froquoncy coverage Is I 0 pps to I 00
to next as input rato chan901, whilo other unaffoctod by wide temperature swings. kHz.-5. Thomas, N-Docade Count-Rate Motor,
channel indicates which motor is being read Docade Inputs are conneded in parallel, whilo Electronic Design, March 15, 1965, p 34-39.
TELEMETRY CIRCUITS 765
+15VDC
Cll4
RS INlll
l.ZK
Cl
AZ 02
REGENERATIVE SWITCH-Removes sino-wave 470pt CAI
~-"'?':::::-e-----t 2N414
QI 27K
carrier in f-mlf•m telemetry, leaving only
required pulse modulation waveform for uso IN~ t-..--tt-.....--1 2NIS5
INIZIA
in digital circuits. Values shown aro for 20-
kHi carrier and digital transfer rate of 2.5 -'\J\J\r
kH1. Filter in feedback circuit keeps hyster- OU PUT
CAZ
esis low.-W. S. Silbert, Regenerative Switch INIZIA
RI Rl.r-1_
Demodulates Sinusoid, "400 Ideas for Design IOK IZK
Solectod from Electronic Design," Hayden
Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 195-196.
GND
, - - - - PREAMP----.._ ,.--FM SUBCARRIER OSCILLATOR~ r- FMTRANSMITTER

MODULATOR-
"'l
6BK
BIOPOTENTIALS-f.m telemetry circuit has 20-

mog Input Impedance for nerve signals and
2.2M 0.5-120 Hz response. Used In research for
measuring signals along various paths link-
ing retina of oyo with brain. Values of
asterisked components depend on desired
battery lifo and transmitting rango.-D. Har-
nar, Bio-Engineering Scores Wider Successes,
Eledronic Design, Dec. 21, 1964, p 6-9.
+6v
Ra Ct A Rz
INPUT~l-----.....J\iM,.-~~--t-1
IOk 0. 078 100k
µ
f C2
150pf .:I: 04
2N2484
Rs 500k I I I I I 0 I 0 I I I 0 I
FD600
INPUT
•
2
Pm-TO-PEAKJ
n1Y1n
U- U LAJnLJmn
-U L
.. GAti?iii•
SLICING
1
+l.4•n ~'""
mn
POINT A
•o• -o.s.
:F~ ~
NOISE SPIKES
OUTPUT
•G.o., n nnn nr
-5v
GROUND LJ LJ u u LJ LI
NOISE SUPPRESSOR-Provldos a.dB improve· over input varies from its nominal level by Elecrronlu, June 8, 1970, p 97.
mont in slgnal-to•noise ratio for 4-kH1 Input only fow milllvolts.-J. Schlageter, Telemetry
signals by driving output to full value when. Signal Conditioner Centers Its Slicing Level,
kq.ulalcd
LIZARD TEMPERATURE TELEMETER-Tiny o~tpul
pulsed Hartley oscillator operating at low

duty cycle has average battery drain of II O
VSI
p.A, giving transmitting life of 130 days with #'4(11' + Hgull
350 mA hr mercury coll. Pulse rate is con•
0
1·25
trolled by tomperaturo sansing resistor RI.
0 v
Transmitted signal has narrow bandwidth In
range of 0.5 to 2 MHz.-H. Spencer, Thermally
Stable Telemeter for Thermoregulation Studies, l~F
Science, Aug. 1968, p 574-575.
6.SV 12V
Regulator Regulator
Input
Supply +28Vde +28Vdc
Vee· 20 v Q,,Q, DEPOSB DEP088
CR,,CR, l!\645 l!\645
CR,,CR, 1N756A 1!\9658
CR,,CR, 1!\3018B 1!\29798
R,,R, 43000, 12\V 1600 O, ~~\V
R,,R, 910 n. 2\V 3000,3\V
1500 pF T 1500 pF =
RFC - RFC FAIL-SAFE DESIGN-Achieves high reliability
0.22 JlH - 0.22 JlH
through redundancy. Regulated output re•
mains constant if any singlo component fails
or If ono of many combinations of multiplo
failures occurs, with no oxcessive voltagos on
circuit. Intended for power supplies al relay
stations, satellite equipment, and romoto un•
attended communication and data telemetry
stations.-"Solected Electronic Circuitry,"
NASA SP-5046, 1966, Government Printing
500-MHZ MICROSTRIPLINE OSCILLATOR-Pro· sensor. Taps on output stripline can provide Office, Washington, D.C., p 36.
vides I W when operating from 20-V d·c sup- matching to wide range of loads.-"Silicon
ply, for use as telemetering transmitter, Power Circuits Manual.'' RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
radiosonde, artillery fuze, beacon, or remote SP-51, p 346.
ES
EG
E7
B+ 1.4K
E1
lEa llN Ez
E3 OUT
E4
lE, )IN
Rt& R17
3.16K GK
E9
.__~t-+----:::--:o,.c;t..+-~.._~+-~--+~~~-+-~__.j~~~-E~l~OGRD
E12 B-
DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR-Combination of greater. IC usos throo cascaded direct• 15,000. Article describes other TRW custom
custom monolithic IC and outboardod lovol couplod differential amplifier stages working IC's usod in samo system.-D. P. Schulz and
shift resolves signal difforoncos in telemetry into single-endod output. External I .4K load D. J. Dooley, Integrating Space Tolomotry
system and provides linear output level in· resistor and pnp level-shift stage 014-015 Systems with Compatiblo Thin Films on Sili·
dicatlng which of two input voltages is help maintain minimum overall gain af con, Electronics, June 26, 1967, p 111-122.
TELEMETRY CIRCUITS '76'7
+l.35V
B.0.
INPUT OUTPUT
S1.....Jl.____f
RECOVERED PULSE WAVEFORM
SUB-CARRIER BURSTS
~KHZ SUBCARRIER BURST REGENERATION-
Frequency-selective L.C Input network with
100-Hz passband recognizes only desired
pulse modulation of 4-lcHz subcarrier. Cir-
22-KHZ IMPLANT TRANSMITIER-Used to mon- cuit delivers clean regenerated pulse. D2
itor intestinal prossures in animals. Strain provides 0.5-V threshold against noise pulses.
gages (in bridge) aro sutured lo small In- -J. H. Phelps, Selective Circuit Providos High
testine, and degreo of balance of bridge arm Pulse Regeneration, Elecr,onic Design, March
is used to modulato subcarrier that in turn 16, 1964, p 103.
modulates carrier oscillator. Signal is picked
up by f-m receiver having subcarrior filter,
a-m detector, and recorder.-W. H. Ko and
M. R. Neuman, Implant Biotelemetry and
Microelectronics, Science, April 1967, p 351-
360.
-
TRANSMITTER
MODULATION
+t2 VOLTS
BOTTOM ANTENNA
16.5 FEET
39k 26 WIRE
TOP ANTENNA
+ + 4.7k 16.5 FEET
26 WIRE
_20,.1 _10,.t
ALL TRANSISTORS 2NZ925, EXCEPT AS SHOWN
ALL DIODES Tl•7
GHOST BALLOON TELEMETRY-Four identical ter is shared by four sonsors.-E. W. Lichflold
nip-flops in 16-counler, five NAND gates, and HOri1ontal Sounding Technique). Circuit op- and R. W. Frykman, Ghost Balloons Riding tho
mvbr switch servo as code generating and erates on maximum power of 150 mA at 12 Skies Will Report the World's Weather, flee•
ropeating circuits for Project GHOST (Global V ganeratod by solar-cell panel. Transmit- ·ironies, No. 28, 1966, p 98-106.
1,000-MHZ LUMPED-CONSTANT OSCILLATOR

-Simple circuit delivers 0.5 W at 700 to 1,000
MHz, for use as low-power transmitter In
telemetry and other appllcatlons.-"Silicon
SP-51, p 347.
c,
l-IOpF
THREE·IC TRANSMITTER-Input signal is com-

pressed In OEI Model 254 IC logamp and
resulting signal with 3:1 dynamic range fod
to OEI Model 570 voltage-to-frequ.ncy IC 1
output
transducer to give proportional sinusoidal 1.0 •llllnlt to
to 1.0 Volt
output for transmitting over telephone lil!os, DatAll tl'au-
a•m or f·m radio link, laser boam, or light Input •l t t l q
befllm. Modal 9125 opamp ostablishes proper llang• medl•
voltage lovels for 570. Upper limit of fre-
quency response is 1 kHz.-A Wide Dynamic
Range Telemetry System, Optical Eledronlcs,
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In tho category of this chapter, use tho Index at tho back
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcebook of Eledronic Circuits," published by ,.
McGraw•Hlll In 1968.
CHAPTER 84
Telephone Circuits
MANUAL PHONE PATCH-Prevents tripping of

0"~
....
RIC:.0
..,.---
S11
""°'C-----~-~--
ii Mih
Xmtr.
Inpul
transmitter at wrong time, with rasuhant

doubling and need for repeats during ox·
citement of carrying on radio conversation
from remote telephone. Parts values are not
critical, except for transformers that must
provide required impedance match.-G. L.
Erland, A Junk Box Phone Patch, CO, Oct.
1969, p 47-48.
26•4'- PHONE-PATCH TIMER-High-accuracy circuit

...
49()
(TNw ltezftl
KrJ'ff n Uttd, can be set to produce speaker beep and
warning li9ht flash at any rate from one per
second to one ovory 12 minutes. Can be sot
as 10-mlnuto reminder for Identifying ama•
teur radio cal~ 3-mlnuto reminder for long·
distance phone calls, and as beep 9enorator
required by law for rocordln9 phone con·
vorsatlons. Rosol switch may bo used at any
time to Initiate now tlmln9 lntorval.-J. Ouol·
letto, Tho Ten Minute Minder, CO, May 1965,
p 60.
ICAP. DECADE FOR

R·C LINE EQUALIZER-Eliminates bulky induc• I0-5000pF) we GAIN AOJ
tors when transmitting data over phone lines.
Circuit is easy to ali9n to attenuation char•
adoristics ol given lino. Ustd for transmit·
ting SO-kilobit data in which wavoform has
frequency components from 10 to 70,000 Hz.
Article gives equolizer transfer function equa•
Cl
2000pf
C2
\
tion and Bodo plot.-A. R. Campbell, Line 20k IOOk
Equalizer Uses Active RC Nelworlc, Electronic l/4W 112W
.·.Design, Feb. 1, 1969, p 74 and 76. 2k
l/4W ~
20k RZ
1:1
LINE IOOkH1
~ t
INPUT L.P. FILTERS OUTPUT
135ll/135ll
Tl T2
+15V -15V E1 +ISV -1sv E2
AOC PRODUCTS ADC PRODUCTS
COM # Al6300
#Al6300
r- INPUT
STAGE ·I· EQUALIZING
STAGE ---1 789
TELEPHONE AMPLIFIER-Used for listening to

both sides of telephone conversation on loud·
speaker. 11 is commercial Induction coil
made for telephone pickup, placed near tele·
phone set or telephone line (Radio Shack No.
44°533). T1 is transistor audio output trans•
former with 500-ohm primary and 8-ohm soc•
ondary, driving small 8-ohm speakor.-"A
Modern Transistor Workbook," Radio Shack,
Boston, Mass., 1965, p 24.
BLUE
03
2N255A
POWER SOURCE OSCILLATOR

EXCITED BY RINGING CURRENT CIRCUIT
SOLID-STATE TONE RINGER-Used in Ericfon

ono·pieco telophone to givo pleasant war•
bllng tono Instead of nerve-jangling sound of
standard boll. Ringing 20-Hz voltage rocti·
flod by power source is applied to transistor
oscillator via neon lamp. Oscillator produces r--~----- I~~~
sino•wavo output of varioblo omplitudo which 1LtNE :::-~-~-T-1S_,..,, _ _ _ _.._.rr........._......,f"V'\_._-....J...,....'\.....ol T::~ - :
couses diaphragm of receiver to vibrato, gen· 1
orating tone.-E. Bauman, "Applications of 1
PHONE I
Noon Lomps and Gas Dischorge Tubes," Sig· I - .____________...._.l\Nv. ....A..i'---.J I
2
nallte, Neptune, N.J., p 98. I I
L-------------------- _j
* INSERT JUMPER TO DECREASE LEVEL
10 MIC~OPHON(
L,
12
16
Pl
-----------
I JI
l~(SS·IO·IALK
; } C !~CUii
......_ _.._ : MK.INPUT

c '-~........~~~~--' I
I
I ~
I
4·0HM
I PAO
CB PHONE PATCH-Can be connected to tole. company. If person at distant tolophono is receive over station equipmont connected to
phone lino through telephone jack, or through called conventionally by phone and switch phone patch.-Phono Patch, CB Magarine,
protective network furnished by telephone 51 is closed, that person can transmit and July 1969, p 16, 34-36, and 38.
TELEPHONE CIRCUITS 771
-IOv
lk
TUNNEL-DIODE PCM SHAPER-Similar to
Schmitt trigger, but simpler, more stable, and
INPUT a, requires less power. Operation is mono•
2SA417 stable. Used in Japanese PCM-24 telephone
(GREATER
THAN system.-H. lnose ond H. Fujisaki, Japanese
5VOLTS) Stay with PCM to Meet Mushrooming Growth
in Telephony, Electronics, Dec. 12, 1966, p
134--147.
GND TELEPHONE LINE

l+I
A1 Az
C1 Cz
0.00411f 0.0041'1
Rz
D IOk
2N3436
PHONE NOISE CANCELLER-Feedback circuit

shown is inserted in telephone line at sub-
scriber's location to cancel largo noise volt-
ages induced by power lines. Circuit senses,
amplifies, and reintroduces these longitudinal
,-----,
I 5 3 1.......i.----'
noise voltages 180 deg out of phase to give
cancellation.-R. G. Stoneman, Feedback Elim- I I
inates Noise in Telephone Circuit, Electronics,
·Nov, 27, 1967, p 82. lL _ _:__ 4- ~
f"-r1
-48, SUBSCRIBER'S
STATION
-IOv Es=5V
Ra
lk
l.2k
+3v
ALL RESISTORS
PCM SWITCHING-Transistor-tunnel diode com• l/4W ±5%
bination provides hlgh·speod switching olong
with memory, in Japanese PCM-24 telephone DATAPHONE CARRIER DELAY-Gives adjust·
system In which speech signals ore sampled able delay of up to 9 ms for leading edge
8,000 times o second. A set signal switches of input pulse when carrier-detect lino from
tunnel diode to high-voltage state, whero it Dataphone comes an, ta ovoid noise that
remains ofter set pulse is removed. Reset normally appears during first 4 ms due to
signal switches diode to low-voltage state, line deflections. Advantages are low cost,
where it remains ofter reset pulse is removed. noise immunity, ond ability to provide delays
-H. lnose and H. Fujisaki, Japanese Stay with up to several seconds without need for large
PCM to Meet Mushrooming Growth in Teleph· capacitors.-D. J. Duffy, Delayed-Action Data
ony, Electronics, Dec. 12, 1966, p 134--147. ·Receiver, EEE, Oct. 1968, p 127-128.
'1'12 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
97.5 143
5725 5236 5725
'°" IOk
16 16 16 16 16 16
4979
16 16 ~
IOk
16-20 KHZ CHANNEL BANDPASS FILTER-De- Maximum reflection coefficient is 0.15 avor and D. F. Sheahan, lnductarloss Bandpass
signed with coupled rosanator units. lnduc• equal-ripple passband of 16.2 ta 19.5 kHz. Filters, IEEE Journal of Solid-State Circuits,
tances are in mH and capacltancos in pf. Gyration resistances are 4K.-H. J. Orchard June 1970, p 108-118.
3pf
~·
1600
t0pf/15wv
TELEPHONE-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER-Fairchild
µA716 law-distortion IC apamp matches 600-
ohm lino impodance and provides flat fre· TELEPHONE-CHANNEL IC AMPLIFIER-Provides
quoncy raspanso aver channol bandwidth of 40 dB gain with less than 0.1% distortion.
0.1 ta 3.2 kHz. Output Is 13 dBm. Artlclo Output noise level is minus 75 dBm aver any
contains 13 other IC opamp application cir• 4,000·Hz bandwldth.-D. E. Lancaster, Audia
cuits.-J. F. Gifford and M. Markkula, linear lnte9ratod Circuits-What's Available?, Eloc·
IC's: Part 5, Ins and Outs of Op Amps, Elec• Ironies World, Oct. 1967, p 34-36.
tronlcs, Nov. 27, 1967, p 84-93,
TO RESISTOR ENCODER Pl.ATE

' 2
0
- --..,
Y,
:'..
~
~-
ooz212sv
1_ • -·-PUU£jj----L--.
1•
::
11
::
..
'II
I
I Ill
I
KOTESo
RUISlORS· 114 w
PNP- ZIU:l0712-I
l Wlil'l l'EIO
NPll-:Zlft-ZN~HI llOT£D
1'11'
ll<PUT
811 SPl<ll PllolSPDT,ORl.U
Hfl)AE-lll<PUT
IPOl.EI
DI000-llt34 T\'1'£
NPN's-a IN DECODER llN AID CONVERUR 1 llt OSCILLATOR
IOC.,_TD.:.=.,;P£H.=:,~SW:_ __________________________ ~
ASCII CHARACTER TRANSMITTER-When

acoustically coupled ta conventional handset, selection pen in hunt-and-pock fashion. sure-actuated switch that advances counter.
generates coded Iona sequences for 128 Tano sequences correspond to those goner- -M. H. Lewin, Portable Electronic Keyboard
alphanumeric characters when user dials re- atod by most Tolotypo-Datophone terminals far Computer Input by Telophono, IEEE Trans·
mote machine and inputs messa9e by paint• In typical time-sharing systems. Pon closes actions on Eledronic Computers, Juno 1967,
ing at symbols an keyboard with hand-held conductive path and at samo time has pros- p 332-334.
TELEPHONE CIRCUITS 773
O.Oll'F IOK
200V 200
5.6k
2W
TO AUOIOIAUXI
IN914 IN914 INPUT
301'F
50V
NON·POl.AR ~g~~
...._......,..~--~~-------4f---o LINE AMPLIFIER-Provides gain of 100 (40
1-----o TO RECORDER dB) when inserted in 600.0hm telephone line.
- REMOTE INPUT audio input to recorder by IN914 diode pair Output across secondary of lino transformer
AUTOMATIC RECORDER-Requires connection and kept out of relay coll by 30-µF copcacltor.
is 22 dBm. Uses model 409 IC opamp.
to telephone input wires LI •l2, which are When receiver is lifted, varistor In phone
With ISO.ohm primary in output transformer,
normally 48 V d-c. Whon phono is on hook, drops L1·l2 voltage to about 6 V d-c, and
output level goes up to 30 dBm.-B. J, Los-
this voltage enorgizos relay Kl and keeps relay drops out for starting recorder and
mandy, Operational Ampllflor Application for
recorder switch contacts open. Combination recording both sides of convorsatlon. Relay
Audia Systems, Opamp Lobs, Los Angelos,
of relay and series resistor must be well above can be Sigma 65F1A or equlvalont 24 V d·c
Cal., 1968.
2K to prevent off-hook Indication. Ringing unit.-H. Metz, Automatic Telephone Ro·
voltage of 90 V at 20 Hz is blocked out of corder, EEE, July 1970, p 85.
235 Z35 272 272 169 169
~
1410A
1275 1300 1136
/ 109.2 I03.2 108.55 I03.7 108.35 101.3 110.8
POLE FREQUENCIES kHz
104-108 KHZ CHANNEL BANDPASS FILTER- efllciont of 0.1 ovor equcal-rlpplo passband tivo-ccapcacitonco circuits that simulate com•
Usod in multiplex tolophony. Designed with from 104.5 to 107.85 kHz. All gyration re- ponents shown.-H. J. Orchard and D. F.
grounded inductors that are call 1.523 mH, sistances aro I .BK (Riordan gyrator), Supply Sheahan, lnductorloss Bandpass Filters, IEEE
and negative capacitors whoso values are voltages of 10 V positive and negcativo wero Journal of Solid.Slalo Circuits, Juno 1970, p
given in pf. Gives maximum retloction co• used for opamps in both gyrators and noga· 108-118.
+5v
FREQUENCY DIVIDER
IOOk
SN7473N SN7401N
r------1 ,----1
I I
I
L ___ -----1
fI
l,200hz
'2,4oohz
o I
1+5v 4. B khz
OSCILLATOR
\, I
DA
I
L---
___ J
TEST POINT A
-tlv~+-~~~~~~-6-~~..__,
1,200-BPS MODEM-Developed cat U. of Illi-
nois for Plato (Programmed Logic for Auto• converted bock to digital form by limiting flip-flop, whilo 0 pulso turns It off, to rostoro
matic Teaching Operations) system. Input amplifler and integrator-comparator whose digital equivalent of transmitted data.-J.
signal from phone lino, consisting of two threshold is set so that only the 1 pulses, Stitle and M. Johnson, Design Pruning Trims
cycles of 2.4-kHz slno weave for binary 0 twice as wido as 0 pulses, rise above Costs of Data Modem, Efodronlcs, July 20,
and ono cycle of 1.2 kHz for binary 1, is threshold. Resulting I pulse turns on data 1970, p 99-101.
COMPARATOR WITH AND GATE-Used In

FROM feedback encoder for Japaneso PCM·24 tole·
SUMMING
AMPLIFIER phone system, for comparing amplitudos of
pulsos creatod by sampling spooch signals
8,000 times par second. Input must be above
specified level and timing pulse present to
got pulsod output.-H. lnose and H. fujisakl,
Japanese Stay with PCM to Meet Mushroom•
1k Ing Growth in Tolophony, Electronics, Dec. 12,
f3v 1966, p 134-147.
TIMING
r~~jf n =
TIO TB
TJ
HANDSET L-.r---.
C2
1•8
T2
TONE T4
Tll 0 RINGER
T12 0
TIJ 0
Tl4 0 8T4
---+B
Tl5 n--------""-
THI T/6
8T2
BT5
5- BT6
L..-~~~~~~~~~~~~).JY"'f""'~<>-'~~~~O-~~~ ~~~~~-ll.._n-~6--ll---+A
I
l. INOUCTION -
_£0...!,L_j
T20 4
single-transistor oscillator, giving moro pleas-

5 T/9 T/8 BTJ
speech circuit .-J. S. P. Roberton and A. C.

TELEPHONE TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT-Used in
new handset developed for British Post Of- ant ton. than harsh magneto boll. C2 and Beadle, Doltaphone, Electrical Communication,
fice telephone system. Includes highly effec- RS servo as dial spark·quonch circuit, olimi· 42:2, 1967, p 212-218.
tive automatic lino regulator. Tone ringer is nating unwottod cradlo switch contacts from
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chaptor, use the indox at tho back
CHAPTER 85
Television Circuits-Black-and-White
• •200'1
VIDEO AMPLIFIER WITH ZENER BIAS-Volt·

age regulator diode in cathode circuit of To C41hod<>
o• cr.t.
pentode makes constant black lovol more
readily obtainable and givo1 higher gain be·
cau1e it introduces no degeneration. With·
out cathode deBoneration, howevor, thoro Is
no selfcompensation for tubo aging.-Voltage
Regulator (Zoner} Diodes, Philips, Pub. Dopt.,
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nothorlands, Ap-
plication Book, p 59.
IMtl
SYNCH +12v
+ 120
R1
Di 620 Ri
H22A 510
1130
3.6k
500p.f ymo
VR1
HOLD
lk 50 + +
p.f 560
620
BLANKING
- - 560 1.5
OSCILLATOR - -
TWO-TRANSISTOR VERTICAL DEFLECTION- portable tv. Blocking oscillator Qt poriod· age.-Caroful Swoop Design Cuts Power Drain
Number of components is minimized with cir- ically dischargos Ct, which is charged through and Cost, Electronics, Nov. t4, t966, p t67-
cuit vorsion used In Sony modol 700U 7°inch Rt to generate vertical sawtooth sweep volt• t69.
775
RF' TEST POINT VHF' /UHF' IF'

AMPLIFIER OSCILLATOR MIXER AMPLIFIER
,...- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - o.o.iH'"ii - - - - - - - - - --11- - - -- - - - - - - -,
I
0.6ph II
I
LOW· PASS 1,000

FILTER '------1--+ pl
i.-j._ _ _ _ _ ..:0.005
p.I
'~ faa
30pl -=
TEST +4• IF'

POINT OUTPUT
VHF TUNER
ANTENNA AGC TUNING

INPUT VOLTAGE UHF TUNER
VHF-UHF TUNER-Matsushita design operates screon. Mixer stage of vhf tunor doublH as
from 5·V battery and requires only single j.f amplifier in uhf mode. Usos electronic
combination vhf/uhf antenna. Used in retuning through variablo-capacitanco diodes,
ceiver drawing only 1.35 W from sot of pen- llxod inductors, and switching diodes. Vhf
light battori111 and having 1.5-inch-diagonal 4: 1 frequency ratio requires coil switching
TELEVISION CIRCUITS-BLACK-AND-WHITE 777
CATV DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER-Uses power

fet maae by Crystalonics, ta give excellent
stability with 2 W output up to several hun-
dred megahertz for community antenna tv
distribution systems.-J. Tamosaitis, The
Power FET, Electronlu World, Juno 1969, p
34-35 and 82.
JC:AR048
560
VIDEO
1-FINPUT
FROM TUNER I
I
I -1 I
I
o.6-o.e,ih - - - -
I IOpf 15 I I 33pf 0.3'lh
I
I
I
I
IL_ -t33,ir _
I
_J
I 2.7k
I I 470
I I OUTPUT FILTER
I I
I
IL __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _J
I
I 0.001,if .J :i:.150pf
VIDEO 1-F AMPLIFIER

J-F BANDPASS FILTER
IC:AW049
DETECTOR VIDEO PREAMP VIDEO OUT
!Ok
6.8k
5.6k ':" 47
f40v
-~~~.. +4v TOSOUNOl-F TO CONTRAST TO CRT
. ;;~~::t,, .
CONTROL
NOISE IC:HF050
CANCELLER AGC
+4v
. . VIDEO 1-F FOR 1.5-INCH SCREEN-Uses three
. . stan~ard IC radio ampliAers all operated 6.8k 3.3k
· •• ·: . . '!. · frerd 5-V penlights of Matsushita portable tv.
'·I'• 7 12k
. . f.,,Jlinsistor detector Q5 gives 12 dB gain, as
~~,~·~~~pared to 8 dB loss of diode detector. 470 TOTUNERAGC
.;~ •· Noise cancellor QB improves sync circuit sta-
~· :' ''"·' · bility by removing noise from video signal. 470
. '.~4 Operates from transistor voltage regulator
.: :' .._ ' that holds voltage within 0.1 V of 4 V as
tOk
I0.05µ1 IIOµI
·1P. · ' ·· ., battery voltago drops from 5.5-V frosh value.
't· ' ;;:
A
-R. Sasaki and P. Uno, low-Power Design
' Is Heart of Penlight-Powered Mlnl-Tv, Eloc- TO SYNC. SEP.
- =!;:.10pl
':'
J:005pf
.. Ironies, Juno 8, 1970, p 106-113, '::'
o,
AFI09
IBpf
IOk
'-~JV.A..---+--.+---.+-----_. ..........~------~------~-----+---f---+~~------~-+~....---+12v
lk
'----1------------~--------------~----+--+---+---------~---+--+t-+2T024v
4.7k 3.9k
Inf Ok
TV VARACTOR·DIODE TUNER-Developed in
Europe for covering 50-65 and 170-220 MHz
vhf tv tuning ranges. Uses two switchable
broadband input circuits with three varador
._-----0--1>--t-........ diodes and three transistors. Tuner band·
width is 9 MHz and power gain is 25 dB.
Providos fine-tuning accuracy and stability
needed for pushbutton tunlng.-H. Keller,
Overcoming Design Problems in Varactor-
Diodo Tuners, Electronics, Jan. 6, 1969, p
88-92.
0511
HEAT SINI(
220 VARIABLE +
OUTPUT
OPTION
7 SK 360WW
WW (12-30 VOLTS!
24V
rms
.2A
STANCOR C2685
35~0.7Jl
• 1000
• 50V
680
IOI<
HEAT WW
SINK
IOK
WW
0501. 510,531,541 •2N2102 •100
0502,511,540' 2N3054 • 25 • :sv
50V
Q 520 •2N3442
0 530 • CA3018
TV CAMERA SUPPLY-Provides I A at 30
with 0.005% load regulation, for vertical ential amplifier which drives 2N3422 serios as decoupled roference for ampliflor load re·
deAection service. Noise and ripple are regulator QS20. Transistors Q510 and 0511 sistor.-0. H. Shade, Jr., Stablo Solld·State
more than 100 dB down p•p, and line regula· form additional regulator stage neoded for Vertical Dofloction for High·Doflnilion Tolevi-
tion is better than 0.01 % for 10% chango in good line isolation while providing power for sion Systems, RCA Review, March 1970, p
a-c line vohage. Q530 is CA3018 IC differ• matching and driving network, and sorving 120-147.
.o~~
1£F th-----g B + 12 VOLTS
111'1
7 3 8
12
IC QUADRATURE DETECTOR-PAl89 linear IC 4.5MH1--1-------.
i-f amplifier is used hore as quadratura.dotec• 220 II
l
tor type of f·m discriminator for b·w tv.
Arrangement is moro economical than ratio
detector but has about I 0 dB less a·m re-
jectlon.-E. L. Haas and D. J. Hubbard, linear
.0051'
Integrated Circuits in a TV Sound System,
,_F ,j,
1968.
82pF
68
IC:SN056
IC:AP057
FROM SYNC ,_....,...__,__._ TO HORIZONTAL

SEPARATOR OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
0.001
3.3k !Ok
1 µf
To.oi
µt
':' ':'
TO FLYBACK O.Olp.f 680 Dto MA23

TRANSFORMER HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
-= TO TO
DEFLECTION CRT
+4v +Sv YOKE GRIOt
+Sv
IC:HA053 IC:SN054
470k
IC: AP055
SYNC SEPARATOR
0.022µf
AND
T,,.. VERTICAL DEFLECTION
DEFLECTION WITH 5·V SUPPLY-Used in Mat· age. As battery voltage drops with age, ness docreases.-R. Sasalci and K. Uno,
sushita 1.5-inch·diagonal Iv operating from deflection amplitude and high voltago fall Low·Powor Design Is Heart of Penlight-Pow•
5.Y ponlight batteries. Both IC oscillators proportionally; since roquired deflection am• erod Mini-Tv, Eledronics, June 8, 1970, p
use emitter-coupled multivibrators, with afc plitude is inversely proportional to high volt· 106-113.
roquirod only for horizontal oscillator volt· ago, rastor width still Alls screon but bright·
A
s
20K
+6V
2
TYPE
OTS402
HEAT
SINK
HOR.
s~,-~~
0.47
H
680
-6V -30V -6V =

HORIZONTAL DRIVE-Circuit lncludos drive. line tv system. Developed for use with 4.5· cuit.-0. H. Schade, Jr., linear Solid·Stato
waveform controls, switch circuits, and hori- inch return-beam vldlcon camera. Terminal Horizontal-Deflection Circuit For High Deflni·
0
zontal drive approaching Ideal In stability S goes to horizontal ramp generator, and tion Television Systems, RCA Review, March
and linearity, for use in high-definition 4,000- terminal A goes to horizontal switching cir· 1970, p 148-170.
001 • !29
LTl$V
UK
av
.m-
10
Tz
• $0
.;DY - 26de re
zontal drive circuit.-0. H. Schade, Jr., lin·

HORIZONTAL RAMP GENERATOR-Provides v111on system. Operates ot 1 MHz. Ramp oar Solld-Stato Horizontal D11flectlon Circuit
0
superior stability and linearity for 4.5-lnch output at R goes to horizontal switching cir- For High-Definition Television Systems, RCA
return•boam vidicon camera of 4,000-llne tela. cuit. Terminal S at upper loft goes to hori- Review, March 1970, p 148-170.
TELEVISION CIRCUITS-BLACK-AND-WHITE '781
HORIZONTAL SWITCHING-Uses logic circuits

to regulate control voltage levels and power
supplies, as required for fast and slow scans minal A goes ta horizontal drive circuit, and tal·Defledlon Circuit For Hl9h Deflnitlon Tele-
0
in 4.5°inch retum beam vldicon camera of

0 terminal B goes to horizontal ramp generator. vision Systems, RCA Review, March 1970,
high-definition 4,000-line tv system. Ter• -0. H. Schade, Jr., linear Solid.State Horizon. p 148-170.
Lc1 L1 L3 Lc3 cs
-
Rs=SOQ
R4
L6 Lc4 C10
. ':. ;_'
~
..
.;;:. 220 pf disk, -20/+50%
6pf
5 pf disk, ::: 10%
742-750 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER-Pro-
vides 9aln of 30 dB for European channel 55,
560 pf disk, -20/+50% with 7.cfB noise factor and 80.mW output
1.5 nf feedthrough, -20/+50% signal.-J. Tuil, Transistor Equipped Aorlal
L., L 3 , L 6 24 mm Ag plated Cu strip 4 mm x0.5 mm Ampllflor1, Electronic Applications, Phlllp1,
L2, L 4 , L 7 15 mm Ag plated Cu strip 4 mm x0.5 mm Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, Tho
L5 24 mm Ag plated Cu strip 4 mm x 0.5 mm Netherlands, Vol. 28, No, 2, 1968, p 60-78.
L8 10 mm Ag plated Cu strip 5 mm x O.S mm
L 9 , L 10 40nH, 4 turns 0.7 mm enamelled Cu on 3 mm dia., 1.5 mm pitch
L 1 ., L 12 4 beads ferroxcubc 303
L(' 1 single loop 1.0 mm Ag plated Cu, length 28 mm, width 12 mm
L" 2·L"4 single loop 1.0 mm Ag plated Cu, length 23 mm, width 12 mm
SYNCH. THERMISTOR
+IOV
LINEARITY
OSCILLATOR DRIVER OUTPUT
LOW-CRAIN VERTICAL SWEEP-Design goal givos doflection curront of 134 mA p·p with circuit.-Careful Sweep Design Culs Power
for 4-lnch Sony 4·20UW battery-operated only 20 mA d-c. Power drain is thus less Drain and Cost, Electronics, Nov. 14, 1966,
portable tv was reduction of battery drain. than half that of more conventional doss A p 167-169.
Combination of four transistors used as shown
R1 !\60 kn RH 12 k!l R1s 3.3 k!l R22 10 k!l

c" !\0 tLF
R2 0.9 MU R" 6.8 kn R.,, 100 n R1J 68 n c, 250 !LF
R3 6110 k!! Rio 24 kU R., I kU c, 0.1 ;.r.F Cs 25 pf
R4 270 n R11 180 n R1s 270 u Ci 80 µF c., 80 !LF
R5 1.2 kU R12 420 n R,,, 10 !l C3 0.1 µF C10 0.6 nf
R" 8.2 kH R13 I kU Rio 680 u C4 100 µF C11 I!\ nF
R; 3.3 k!l R14 27 kU R21 12 kU Cs 80 µF C12 125 tLF
PLUM81CON PREAMP-Circuit shows complete noise figure. Circuit makes uso of frequency- Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcama Div.,
preamp for b-w tv camera tube such as dependent feodback. Miller effect in inpul Eindhoven, The Netherlands, Vol. 28, No. 4,
Plumbicon. Frequency response is subston- stage is avoided by using TR3 in coscode 1968, p 155-159.
tially flat to 5.5 MHz. Two fet stages in with parallel fet's.-8. Overgoor, A Camera
porallol in input stage givo required low Tube Amplifier with FET lnpul, Electronic
120,1.1H
picl.lub~
t.7n
" ' " - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -.....--:J+V51(12V)
BASE-CIRCUIT CONTRAST CONTROL-R2 and tarted at maximum setting of. contrast pot, con Planar Transistor BFl7B in a Video Am-
R3 lceep blaclc level constant while contrast but distortion can be cleared up by turning pliflor, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind-
Is controlled with R4. Video signal is dis- back tho control.-A. Cense, The N-P-N Sili- hovon, The Netherlands, No. 251, 1966.
-
Rs•50Q
L1
R., Rs 39 kU, i W R9 33 kn, Aw Ch C4 2.7 pF ceramic, ±0.S%

Rz, R6 } R11 t.3 kn, J w Cz, C6 82 pF ceramic, ±5%
220 n I iW R13 12 kn, 1 w cl• c,,
Rio. R14
R3
R4 , Ra, R"12
3.9 kn,
13 n.
Jw
!w
R1s
R16
S60 n , J W
15 n, l w
C9, C10
C 13 , C 14, C,6 } 680 pF disk, -20/+50%
t w 91 n. l w
R, 2.4 kn, R., Cs, Cs. C12
C 1s. C, 8 } 2.2 nF feedthrough, -20/+50%
All resistors, ±5% c, .. c., 1.5 pF ceramic, ±0.5%
choke Type 3122 108 20150
40 nH, 4 turns 0.5 mm enamelled Cu on 3 mm dia., 0.5 mm pitch
FOUR-STAGE 4o-&60 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLI- sipatos static charges accumulated on an- tor Equipped Aerial Ampliflers, Electronic Ap-
FIER-Provides gain of 26 dB and 70-mV tenna, to protect transistors from damage by plications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
output per signal over entire European tele- sudden discharge. Further protection is pro- Elndhovon, The Netherlands, Vol. 28, No. 2,
vision band, with noise fador of 6.9 to 10 vided by BAXl3 diode connecting base of 1968, p 60-78.
dB. lndudor shunting input terminals dis- input transistor to ground.-J. Tuil, Transis-
+145V
+
50Hz / " \ / ' \ ,
8.2nF
~0~:1 f'~
J!lOpF
10µF
1
~~1 "
I
0.SMHz
1
I
~. : ~· j 12nf'
j ov
r I I
I
·saoQ IOOQ
+12V
MEASURING VIDEO AMPLIFIER LINEARITY- tooth with sufficient amplitude to drivo out• Circuits and Transistors for Telovision Receiv·
Connoctions are shown for showing gain and put stage from cutoff to kneo. Other input ors, Electronic Applicarion1, Philips, Pub.
colloctor voltage simultaneously on screen Is 0.5-MHz sine wave with 10 mV p•p am• Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nethor•
of dual troce cro. Ono Input is SO.Hz saw•
0 plltudo.-A. Censa, Recent Developments in lands, Vol. 27, No. 2, 1966-1967, p 41-52.
+85V
picture
-----•tube
spark
gap
C4
ov
+12V
Fig. 3. Circuit diagram of lhc video output amplifier.
R1 :?.7 kU. 1W R~ 470 u. lW R,, 180 u. 1w c. 4.7 pF. 500 v c~ 10 :.1.f. 16V
R2 1.:?kU, lW R., 300 u. pol. R 1o 8:?0 u. iw Ci 10 :.1.F. 16 v C,. 6.H nf. 500 v
R_, I kU. 1W R, 47 u. !W R11 4.7 kU. 55 w c.• 6.8 nf. 500 v c, :?O :.1.F • :?50 V
R .. 390 kU, l W Rs 1:?0 u . IW R12 1.5 kU, IW c.. 180 pf. 500 v C8 6.8 nf. soov
625-LINE VIDEO AMPLIFIER-Uses two direct· voltage (block to whlto) Is 50 V and gain Is
0 0
Tolovlsion Receivers, Eloctronlc Appllcarions,
coupled stagos to drive 11 ·Inch picture tube. 30. Black level Is lndopondent of contrast Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhovon,
Bandwidth is at loast 4 MHz for 3-dB down control or picture content.-A. Conse, Recent Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 3, 1966-1967,
at all settings of contrast control. Output Developments In Circuits and Transistors for p 85-91.
SYNC SEPARATOR FOR MONITOR-Works

equally woll on standard or closed-circuit
signals In television monitor. Dopends on B
coincidence of vertical sync signals and non- 3.9K GE
Z4XL20
coincidonco of horizontal sync signals in
coincidence circuit, Gives improved vertical r--t---------.----..-...,1---~Po--t-~
resolution, accurate lntorlaco, and noncritical
IK DELAY 2.41( 151<
vertical hold adjustments.-H. F. Stearns, De-
&µSEC
lay-lino Sync Separator Improves Video Reso- +
lution, Eledronlc Design, Nov. 22, 1965, p 60. IN625 IK
IO}'f
+
+ IOI(
471( IOµf
NEGATIVE
VERTICAL
IOOK SYNC
NEGATIVE OUT
COMPOSITE
SYNC
IN
.: .
·•V
CAMERA FOR HOME RECEIVER-Has both r-f

and video signal outputs, for conneding di-
rectly to antenna terminals of sot, or can be
used with video line ampllfler to drive video
tape recorder or ham tv transmitter. Article Q16 SA599. With short whip antenna con•
gives construction details and sources for nected to output of oscillator, camera will
yoke and focus coils. Alternative vidicon transmit picture to tv set about 50 ft away,
having higher sensitivity is 773SA. Diodes -G. Davis, Jr., Build All-Transistor TV Cam•
Dl·D7 aro GE-504; DB·Dll 1N60; Ql..Q2, era for $100, Rodio-Elecrronlcs, July 1969, p
Q6-Ql3 2N3638; Q3 2N2926; Q4..QS, Q14· 23-26 and 92,
1k t5nf
+ 5.6nf
osc
IBCl7BI
DRIVER
(BDH51
2.Z k 5.6nf
240
Z.7 nf
for dosigning all-transistor large-screen tv. -

AU-TRANSISTOR HORIZONTAL SYSTEM-Do· put stage is dosignod so it cannot bo dam- W. Hetterscheld, All-Solid State Design Over•
volopod for 23-inch Philips tv sots. Oscilla· aged by suddon failure of oscillator or takes Large.Screen Monochrome TV Sets,
tor should havo froquency adjustment. Out· driver. Article gives stop-by-stop procedure Electronics, June 24, 1968, p I 04-111.
L., Lz 190 nH,9 turns 0.5 mm enamelled Cu on 4 mm dia., 1.0 mm pitch

'·J
L 4 • Li,
14
J5
nH,
nH,
20 mm loop 0.6 mm Cu
2 turns 1.3 mm Ag plotted Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch
Ls, L, 20 nH,I turn 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia.
Ls 611 nH,3 turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.5 mm pitch,
tapped at I~ turns from earthed end
L., !\II nH, 2! turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia •• 2.5 mm pitch
L 10 -L 15 choke Type 4312 020 36701
174-230 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER-Providos output per signal. Article gives alignment Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon,
gain af 39 dB for European band Ill, with instructions.-J. Tuil, Transistor Equipped The Netherlands, Vol. 28, No. 2, 1968, p 60-
noiso factor of 6.2 to 6.7 dB and 10-mW Aerial Amplifiers, Electronic Applications, 73.
TELEVISION CIRCUITS-BLACK-.AND-WHITE 787
•Vszll,SVI R4
270
120,uH +
HEIGHT R5 Ce
Rz lk 511F
lk +
picl.lubc
C1
1000
18V
BOpF
o,
SE8002
IN R10
1zao:.1t
Re C4 390
2.7kn 250 +
..._---------o+V51 (12V) lL
___,
sYNC
C3
0.2211F
3511F 3511F
SINGL(.STAGE VIDEO AMPLIFIER-Silicon +

planar transistor supplios sufllclont drivo for c R9
270
C&
all large-screen pldure tubes. Circuit values 411F
are for European 625-lino systom. Ono draw-
CHOKELESS VERTICAL SWEEP-Eflicioncy of
baclc Is Inability of video dotoctor to operate
cholcoloss vertical deflection circuit for small-
at low input levels because high base cur-
scraon b·w tv. is improved by resonating
rant flows through dotoctor load resistor RD
yoke with capacitor and Isolating yoke for
and causes reveno voltago for detector diode,
that portion of retrace pulse which oxceods
with resulting distortion in peak white sig-
B+. Generates yoke current of 0.6 A p•p
nal. Another problem Is insufficient band-
in 25·mH HI-ohm yoko from 18-V supply.
width.-A. Censo, The N-P-N Silicon Planar
Retrace time is 1.35 ms.-J. M. Tucker, Higher·
Transistor BF178 in a Video Ampliflar, Philips,
Efficiency Chokelen Vertical Swoop, EEE, July
Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho
1969, p 106.
,.__.
Cl
L2 L5 Cl2
BFWtS
C5
-
Rs .. 602
R6
L9
R1 27 n, ! W 6.8 pF ceramic, ±0.5%

R2 2.2 kn, t W 10 pF ceramic, ±0.5%
R3 1.5 kO, i W 100 pF ceramic, :!:5% 87.5-108 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER-Pro·
R4 I kO, ! W 12pF vidos gain of 43 dB for European band II
Rs 7.5 kn, i w with noise factor of 6 to 6.5 dB and 25·mW
R6 470 n , ! W 4.7 nF disk, -20/+50% ~utput per signal. Article givos alignment
R1 1.2 kO, i W 15 pF ceramic, ±5% 1nfo.rmation.-~. Tuil, Transistor Equipped
Rs 82 n, t W 22 pF ceramic, :t 5 % Aerial Ampltflers, floctro11ic Applicolions
All resistors, ± 5 % 4. 7 n F feedthrough, -20/ +50 %
Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div,, Elndhovon'.
Li. L3 380 nH, 14 turns 0.5 mm enamelled Cu on 4 mm dia., 0.5 mm pitch The Nothorlands, Vol. 28, No. 2, 1968 p 60-
l2 28 nH, 2 turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 4 mm dia., 2.5 mm pitch 78. ,
l4, L 5 135 nH, 5 turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.5 mm pitch
l6 DS nH. S turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.5 mm pitch,
tapped 2! turns from earthed end
70 nH, 2 turns·l.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch
choke Type 4312 020 36701
+ 15 v
VIDICON PREAMP-Input fot Is used as
source follower to provide impedance buffer•
ing for wide range of vidicon target loading
circuits. High open-loop gain of 1,000 for
opamp and I-MHz bandwidth make arrange-
Input ment ideal for video amplifiers requiring
(fro• Target high·frequoncy peaking and low noiso.-A
I DAd circuit) output Video Pre-Amplifier for Use With a Vidlcon,
- 15 v
video output
stage
VERTICAL BLANKING CIRCUIT-With ter·
mlnals 4, 5, and 6 connected to field (verti·
cal) output stage, circuit generates suitable
blanking pulse fer feeding directly to emitter
of video output transistor in small-screen bat·
tery-operated tv receiver. Diode clips initial
peak of flyback voltage.-A. H. Nilloson, Field
Deflection Circuit for Tiny-Vision Receive,.,
3.9k2
Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
All resistors, ± 5%
R1 10 n, lW 12 pF ceramic, ±5%
Rz 2.2 kO, i W 10 pF ceramic, ±0.5%
R3 1.5 kil, i W 12 pF
R4, R, I kil, ! W
R6 750 n. 1w 4.7 nF disk, -20/+50% 47-68 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER-Provid
R, 410 n. i w 82 pF ceramic, ±5% gain of 52 dB for European band I, witfi
Ra
R9
1.2 kil,
82 n.
*t ww 56 pF ceramic, ±5%
4.7 nF feedthrough, -20/+50%
noise factor of 6 to 6.5 db and 1O·mW output·' .
per signal. Article gives alignment lnfor•1.
mation.-J. Tuil, Transistor Equipped Aerial •-.
500 nH, 21 turns 0.5 mm enamelled Cu on 4 mm dia., 0.5 mm pitch Ampllflers, Electronic Applicarion1, Philips, · !
Pub. Depr., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The
200 nH, 8 turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 1,5 mm pitch
85 nH, 4 turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.5 mm pitch Nethorlands, Vol. 28, No. 2, 1968, p 60-78. . -.:~:. •;
240 nH. 11 turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch, ,\ !:
tapped 4t turns from earthed end
75 nH, 3 turns I mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch,
choke Type 4312 020 36701
TELEVISION OIROUITS-BLAOK-AND-WHITE 789
181<V
40011A
1500pl
OTS-402
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT-Uses silicon power

.0075 .22 transistor designed ospocially for operation
ORS·l07 from 60-V supply in horizontal dofledion
DAMPER stage of largo-screen monochrome tv sot.-
]II
820
OIOOE K Video Horizontal and Vertical Output Tran•
sistor Pair, Delco Radio, Kokomo, Ind., DJS.
401 DTS-402, 1968•
..,.
picl. lube
VIDEO WITH CONTRAST CONTROL-Shows
method of applying contrast control in col·
ledor circuit of video output transistor. R5 I
and R6 provido constant black level during -'-
contrast control. Report discusses design
problems, including thot of capacitance in·
lC2
troduced by long wires going from contrast
pot at front of set to video ampliflor. Total
value of Cl and C2 is about 30 pF.-A.
Cense, The N·P·N Silicon Planar Transistor
BF178 In a Video Amplifler, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether•
lands, No. 251, 1966. .___ _ _._-o +Vs 1U2V)
B+ 12VOLTS
.. t.
·~' 1'. •
680
+
10
..__..._t 6800
I.--------
i-...
i' 470
.005
.0051 · 1 02 IOOk ~ L__ AUDIO OUT
~--,r-ro 237
IC l..f AND RATIO DETECTOR-PA189 linear with bandwidth of at least 50 kHz. 1-f bard, Linear lnlegratod Circuits in a TV Sound
IC with external components shown gives value is 4.5 MHz. Sensitivity Is 200 p.V for System, General Electric Co., Syracuse, N.Y.,
good a•m rejection and very high gain along 3 dB limiting.-E. L. Haas and D. J. Hub- Application Noto 90.74, 6/68.
Cl
/
+
24V
R1 1.2 kil. ~ W 12 pF
R2 2.2 k!l. ! W 15 pf ceramic, '.: 5 " 0
R3 l.S kil, ! W 4.7 nF disk, -20;.; 50".,
R,. I k!!, A W A II rcsislo rs, ;uu 27 pF ceramic, · 5 " ..
R5 470 il, l W 4.7 nF feedthrough, -20/ : 50'.',.
R., 1.2 k!l, ! W
R1 82 U, ! W
L 1 450 nH, D turns 0.5 mm enamelled Cu on 5 mm dia., 0.5 mm pitch

L 2 400 nH. 12 turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 1.5 mm pitch
L 3 300 nH. IO turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch
L,. 165 nH. 6 turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch
L 5 275 nH, 10 turns 1.0 mm enamelled Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.5 mm pitch, lapped 4! turns from earthed end
L., 300 nH, 7 turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 12 mm dia .. 2.0 mm pitch
L;·L,1 choke Type 4312 020 36701
flors, Electronic App/icalions, Philips, Pub.
61-68 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER-Provides 7°dB noise factor and 150-mW output signal. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nether·
gain of 50 dB for European channel 4, with -J. Tuil, Transistor Equipped Aerial Ampli· londs, Vol. 28, No. 2, 1968, p 60-78.
AGC KEYING PULSE~
+12~
-
AFC COMPARISON PULSE----- CRT
2.5mh 630mo ANODE
6.8
SD07
BOOST
200 DIODE
pf
0.001
f
SOIA
FROM DAMPER
AFC
OIOOE tOOk
0.01
I~'
+100v +100v
VIDEO CRT-G2
OSCILLATOR OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
TWO-TRANSISTOR HORIZONTAL SWEEP-Used tiva foodbock to base of Q2 to offset gain stage Is only 9,5 W. Swoop Eliminates Driver
in Sony 7·inch 700U portable tv. Tertiary lost through omission of driver stage. · Total Stage, Electronics, Nov. 14, 1966, p 169-171.
winding on flyback transformer provides posi- power consumption of horizontal output
TELEVISION OIR 0 UIT S-B LA OK-AND-WHITE 791
1201JH
3.9kQ
picture tube
SINGLE-STAGE VIDEO AMPLIFIER-Providos

bandwidth of 4.5 MHz at 3-dll-down points
and 80 V black•to-white output voltage for
typlcol larg-creen picturo tube such as
A59·11W In European 625-lino tv recoivor: 120Q 680pF
Transistor is direct-coupled to video detec-
tor circuit. Contrast control is in base cir-
cuit, where it places no restrictions on circuit
layout or wiring, and does not affoct either
bandwidth or transient rosponse.-A. Censo,
Recent Developments In Circuits and Transis- ov
tors for Television Roceivers, Electronic Ap-
12V
plications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 2,
1966-1967, p 41-52.
+14SV
1---..----picture
tube
spark
gap
C4
ov
R3 C5 C6
+12V
R1 .!.7 k!.!.
W !
R. .! . .! k!.!,
W l RH 100 !.l, IW CJ 6.8 nf, soo v
R; I ki!,
W l R°' I SO !.!,
560 !!.
lW
lW
C4 :220 pF, soo v
16 v
R4 560 ki!,
W l Rio C5 10 t.tF,
R5 680 !!, W l R11 3.9 kil, 5.5 w c" 6.8 nF, soo v
R0 300 !l, pot. R12 l.S kil. IW c, .!O t.tF, .!SO V
R1 S6 !l, I W c. 4.7 pF, soo v Cs 6.8 nF. soo v
Ci 10 :tF. 16 v L l.!O ~.1.H, air coil
VIDEO DETECTOR AND AMPLIFIER-Direct
coupling is used throughout to keep blade vide required bandwidth. Spork gop pro· cont Dovolopments In Circuits and Transistors
level constant and independent of picturo tocts transistors from high•voltago spikes for Tolevi•lon Receivers, Electronic Appllca·
content in European large-screen 625-line tv appeorin9 ot picture-tube cathode as result tlons, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd·
receiver. Collector circuit compensation is of flashoven. Maximum breakdown volt- hoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 2, 1966-
used in first video amplifler stage to pro- age of spark gap Is 3,000 V.-A. Conse, Ro- 1967, p 41-52.
SELECTING FIRST LINE OF FRAME-Signal· Cl

75A ~4711-F
powered coincidence gato delivers output
trigger only when pulses are prosent al both SOURJICE El:NPUT~~-R-IZ~~~~11--~~......~--YR~I.--~.....,
inputs, for triggering cro coincident with first DftlVE 270k
field of each frame in interlaced television ....
-3
scanning system. Overcomes problem of de· I I C2
fayed time base in cro that may lock onto ~~ INPUT 680 pf
first or second fleld pulse at random because
:-----iVERT,.......,._.....
il
l
it cannot distinguish between them.-0. Har·
per, Coincidence Gate Generates First Field 75 DftlVE
Reference Trigger, Electronic Design, Sepl. 27,
1967, p 66.
SOURCE
•3
I ,-
IN459 OUTPU~
TRIGGE:.u_
I
1 I
1
lsao11-s -2.8 v., ,-
1 I
I I
61'-•
7 14 5 +140VOC
CA3042
r r-----r-
I
I
I
I
llQ<ls~U:.
I I
I I
I I
13 I
I 0.1,.F
lI +2'10 V DC
FEEDBACK VOLUME CONTROL-Used with
CA3042 IC to cut production costs through
use of smallor coupling capacitors. Delivers
0.00471 I IN3195
,.F I 2 W audio power output at 7 kH1 maximum
.... I deviation from 4.S·MHz carrier.-L. Kaplan,
I Feedback·Type Volume-Control Circuits for
I TYPE RCA°CA3041 and CA3042 Integrated Circuits,
2N3585
L J RCA, Harrison, N.J., No. ICAN-5841, 1968.
+GOV
VERTICAL OUTPUT-Uses silicon power tran·

sistor designed especially for operation from
60-V supply In vertical deflodlon stage. Has
good gain linearlty.-Video Horl1ontal and
Vertical Output Transistor Pair, Dolco Radio,
Kokomo, Ind,, DTS-401 DT5-402, 1968.
+IOOVOLTS
39k
+12 VOLTS SOLID-STATE VERTICAL DEFLECTION-Uses
VERT.
250k OUTPUT D13T1 progrommoblo ujt as relaxation oscil·
15k 330k XFMR. lator operating at 60-Hz sweep rate, with
. 001 synchronization by 4-V negative pulsos•
~o-1t-t-------t---~
Dl 6P1 high-gain Darlington drives output
'' power transistor, and multipellet diode pro-
vides d·c level shifting. Bootstrap feedback
SYNC. 4.7k through 500K improves linearity.-W. R.
Spofford, Jr., The D13T-A Programmable
Unljunctlon Transistor, General Electric, Syra•
•lp.F CAPACITORS-GE 75F3Rl-I04 cuse, N.Y., No. 90.70, 11/67, p 10•
PHOTOMULTIPLIER AMPLIFIER FOR FLYING-

SPOT SCANNER-Used for detecting high·fre·
quency modulated light from flying-spot scan• 47•1\
ners used for slide reproduction in television
studios. For color slidos, throe identical am•
pliRers are required. Photomultiplier shown 47
will handle bandwidth from d·c to 100 MHz, kll 47 560
~11 nF
but XP1210 will go up to 3SO MHz.-J. M.
I
Schonlceren, "Photomultipliers," Philips, Pub. I I
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nether· XPtOOO
lands, 1970, p 102.
UI*
IN~I
... If
r---- ~
c,
I
II ',
-----H
1Ntu1
I c, I
C1: 47 pf C,: 2·811F air trimmer C11: 1000 11F feed-lhru

c,, 47 pf C, 0: 39 pf feed-thru Cu: 5.6 pF
C1: B.2 pf C11 : 2-8 pf lrir trknmer C,.: 0.5·3 pF air lrimmer
C.: IB pf leed-lhru C11 : 30 pF fecd·thru ( 10 : 11100 pf feed·lhru
C.: 30 pF feed·thru ( 11 : 1000 pF letd·lhru C11: S.6 pf VHF TUNER-Uses npn planar silicon transis-
C.: 0.68 pf c,., 10 pF feed·lhru C11: 2.5 pf feed·lltru tors. Power gain ranges from 39 dB for
C,: I000 pf feed·lhru Cis: UIOO pf leed·lhru C11: IClllO pf leed-lhru channel 2 to 35 dB for channol 13. Noise
C.: 1000 pf feed·lhru c,., 3.6 pF c,., 5.6 pf Rgure ranges from 5.5 to 6.2 dB, j.f rejec•
RESl510R5 l'/z W, ten 11ercent) INllUCTORS tion from 55 lo 84 dB, and image rojection
11: I kfi 11: 10 kfi l 1: UHF matdting coll •,, neutralizing toll from 66 to 88 dB. Tl Is balun assembly,
R,: IS n R,: S.Hn l 1: UHF matching Nil L1: RK including i·f traps, and T2 Is 1-f output trans-
R1: 560 0 It,: 10 kfi L1: as required per ch1111nel Lt: RFC former.-Prefarrad Semiconductors and Com•
R.: 390 0 R, 0: I kfi L.: m required per ch1111ntl ponents, Texas Instruments, Dallas, Texas,
R,: 1.2 ltO 111 : 10 kfi l,: as required per channd
Bullotin CCIOl, 1968, p 1039.
R.= 220 n l,: as required per channel
7 14
DEAAFl..-
YOKE
U~F "';:;:"
=
+90V
4.7
IOOk
0.11
l'F
IOOK
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT WITH B+ AND HV
SUPPLIES-High-voltage rediflor circuit of G-E
Model TA 9-inch tv uses conventional throe-
VOLUME CONTROL WITH IC-Circuit Illus- roctiflor two-capacitor voltage-doubler with
trates method of using conventional volume unique method of operation. With 5-kV
control with IC audio amplifier for tv sound. positive pulse from 11, first and third rec•
-L. Kaplan, Foodback·Typo Valumo-Cantrol tillers act in effect as peak detectors during
Circuits for RCA·CA3041 and CA3042 lnte· retrace, and middle rectifier conducts during
grated Circuits, RCA, Harrison, N.J., No. trace time. Result is maximum output of
ICAN-5841, 1968. about 9.5 kV.-W. H. Buchsbaum, Line-Op-
erated Transistor TV Sots: G-E, Electronics
World, Oct. 1966, p 29 and 70.
C16 --£!,?--
L9 ~LIO
t.6 Ul, I w 3.9 pF ceramic, :!:0.5%

2.4 kfl, i w 10 pF ceramic, ±0.5%
3.3 kO, l W
12 pF
I k!l, i W
7.5 kO, i W All resistors, ±5%
.,
I nF disk, -20/+50%
150 n, :l w 3 pF
1.8 kO, l W 2.2 pF ceramic, :L0.5 %
180 n. l w 4.7 nF feedthrough,
470 n, l w
,•-•j
-20/+50% ,,·
,.~~
1.2 kO, :l W
82 n . 1 w
'':.;.·' .
Li. L 3 , L4 35 nH, 2 turns t .3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch
L2 120 nH, S! turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch 202-209 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER-Provides
Ls 35 nH, 2 turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch, gain of 44 dB for European channel 9, with·.
tapped 3/4 turn from earthed end
6.3-dB noiae factor and 150-mW output slg·
100 nH, 41 turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., :?.O mm pitch
60 nH, 3 turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., :?.5 mm pitch, nal.-J. Tuil, Transistor Equippod Aerial Am·
tapped 3/4 turn from earthed end pliflors, Electronic Applications, Phillps, Pub.
165 nH. S! turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 11 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nether-
choke Type 4312 020 36701 lands, Vol. 28, No. 2, 1968, p 60-78.
TELEVISION CIRCVITS-BLACK-AND-WHITE 795
ON·OFF
SWITCH
270
PENLIGHT REGULATOR-Holds output constant
within 0.1 Vas 5.5.Y penlight supply for 1.5•
Inch Matsushita portable tv ages down to 4
r
I. . ~
=
V.-R. Sasaki and K. Uno, Low Power Design
r~·
I200µf
0
is Heart of Penli9ht Powored Mlni·Tv, Eloc·

0
ftonic1, June 8, 1970, p 106-113.
T.P.
BLANK OUTPUT
+24Vdc
RB
24Vac
1011.
LINE-LOCKED VERTICAL SWEEP-A-c Input at

C6 24 V is applied to half-ave redlflor-filter
0.033p.F I~ delivoring nearly linear line-locked vertical
R7 sawtooth that Is amplified by QI for driving
YOKE
deflection yoke. R7 and CS sat d·c reference
for centering control. Blank output may be
0.022p.F + used to tri99or sync and cathode-blanking
C4 CS 'T"' functions of camara.-J. M. Meacham, TV·
C2
25p.F +
47 T
"='
IOOµF.!.-
':'
Camera Vertical Swoop Produced by Filter
Ripple, Electronic Design, Feb. 1, 1969, p 72.
ZOVJ NOTE:
'=' RB R7 IS CENTERING CONTROL
BZ
50µH +vcc 140Vdc

15pF
Po,= 0.5 Wat 7.5 kHz Oeviati.on
Po = 3.5 Wat 25 kHz Deviation
0.01 µF
INPUT~
O.lµF I
R
llBJ
10:1
4
IN4001 OR EQUIV
:.}.:~_.:-· .·
.· ·. } 7
MJE340 OR EQUIV
.. .(~
.• 50 pf
..
~
I0.003µF
0.01 30
27k
COMPLETE TV SOUND WITH IC-Input from o.1~I,..F
µF -
····r Ir-=
4.5-MHz sound j.f Is limitod, detected, and IOk
paued to audio preamp and driver In IC, 1--~VV~t-~~-.~V'IJ"y-~~--. Ra Vcc-11.6
47k 0.031
then fed to external single-transistor output
0.1 µF
stage that delivers 3.5 W through trans-
former to speakor.-TV Sound Circuit Mono·
lithlc Silicon Epitaxial Passivated MC13SP,
~5k
VOLUME
Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 059126, 1969. CONTROL
R3
750 CONSTANT-HEIGHT VERTICAL OUTPUT-Volt·
Cl
age-dependent resistor R4 and C2 ore shuntod
50011F R4 across deflection yoko to maintain constant
VOR height despite output voltago variations in
G-E Model TA 9-inch portable tv.-W. H.
CZ
511F Buchsbaum, Line-Operated Transistor TV Sets:
G-f, Electronics World, Oct. 1966, p 29 and
70.
18kv
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION-Addition of Q2
to output driver stage eliminates need for
power transformor and hi9h-volta90 transis·
tors in Siemens AG tv developed for 250-V
European a·c lino voltagos. Q2 switchos roe•
tlfled 250°V supply to deflection circuit dur·
ing flyback interval, when voltage across
yoke is at peak. Winding n3 is on T2.
Arrangement also gives low-level d-c for
vertical deflection and audio stages; control D·C CONTROL VOLTAGE
voltage properly appliod to Q2 keops this
source stable oven for 20-W power drain.
Uso standard 300.V transistors.-Add Ono
(Electronics Abroad), Eloclronics, Foll. 19, 1968,
p 238.
e
<D ©
d
+
640µF
6.4V ®
@ ®
TINY-VISION FIELD OUTPUT STAGE AND blanking pulso during retrace. Circuit de- d-c and a-c feedback ta driver simpliflos ad·
DRIVER-Tormlnals I, 2, and 3 come from sign minimizes current drain by using twa justment of circult.-A. H. Nillesen, Field De-
flold oscillator of small-scroon battery-opor· medium-power transistors in complomontary flection Circuit for Tiny-Vision Receivers,
ated tv receiver, and terminals 4, 5, and 6 connection, without usual transformor. Out· Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
go to blanking circuit that supplies suitable put stage consumes only I. I W. Use of both The Netherlands, No. 256, 1967.
Rg
39K LOW-
FREQUENCV
OUTPUT
C4 Rio Rn
r:
56pf 56K 56K
Cg C10 Cu
r.5K IOOpl IOOpf IOOpf
5.5Mhz
l
C1
750pf
I I- I
- -
coil can bo used. Overall gain is about 60
NO-COIL IC FOR TV SOUND 1-F-Only coil European f·m intercarrier freq11ency, converted dB from 50 to 450 kHz, with 12 V output for
used in Standard Elektrik Lorenz IC mono• to sound i·f of about 250 kHz in mixer. about 7-mV inp11t.-Electronics Abroad-West
lithic chip is in mixer, and requires no ad· Hartley oscillator can deviate 150 kHz with· Germany-Uncoiled, Electronics, Oct. 17, 1966,
justment. Designed for standard 5.5-MHz 011t affecting mixer porformance, so fixed p 223.
C9
BFYSO
-
Rs=60Q
-
C16 -- C17 --
L8 ~ L9
C18
LIO~ L11
t.6 kn. &w 4.7 pF ceramic, ±O.S%

2.4 kU, AW 5.6 pF ceramic, ±0.S %
3.3 kn, Aw 12 pf
3 kn, l w
3.9 kn, &w A II resistors, : 5 ~,,; t nF disk, -20/+soy.
1.3 kn, Aw 3 pf
910 n. l w 6.8 pf ceramic, :~0.5%
1.3 kU, AW 2.2 pf ceramic, :J:0.5%
410 n. ! w 4.7 nF feedthrough, -20/+50%
1.2 kU, JW
16s n. i w
La. LJ·L 5 2 turns 1.3 mm Ag placed Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pilch
35 nH,
Li S! turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch
120 nH,
L" 3 turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 8 mm dia., 2.S mm pitch,
60 nH,
tapped 3(4 turn from earthed end
L1 165 nH, 5! turns 1.3 mm Ag plated Cu on 11 mm dia., 2.0 mm pitch
L 8 -L 1 J choke Type 4312 020 36701 Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div.,
60-MW 202-209 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER nel 9, with 5.7-dB noise factor.-J. Tull, Tran- Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 28, No. 2,
-Provides gain of 48 dB for European chan• sistor Equipped Aerial Ampllflers, Electronic 1968, p 6~78.
LOW-PASS FOR NOISE ABOVE 5.5 MHZ-

Used after preamp of television camera to
suppress noise above desired bandwidth,
-
?SQ
!63pF ]260pF
-
75Q
which pealcs at about 8 MHz and extends
beyond 12 MHZ.-B. Overgoor, A Camera
Tube Ampliflor with FET Input, Efedronic Ap·
plicalions, Philips, Pub, Dept., Elcoma Div.,
"
Eindhoven, The Netherlands, Vol. 28, No. 4,
1968, p 155-159.
-
EMlnER-CIRCUIT CONTRAST CONTROL-Con•

trol R3 is hore located In emitter load of
video output stage of two-stage video am•
plifler. One advantage 11 that long leads
may be used between contrast pot and video
amplifier without affeding performance. R2
and nogativo supply voltage together hold
black love! constant during contrast control.
-A. Conse, The N-P-N Silicon Planar Transl•·
tor BF178 in a Vidoo Amplifier, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nather•
lands, No. 251, 1966.
;J; +24V
Rs"SOQ Cl R9~
L1
. ~. ,.. ..
--:.,...
~-.· ~
·;·;.
R, 33 kn, i w 1.5 pf ceramic, ±0.5 %
-
Rz, R6 240 n, t w 82 pF ceramic. ±5% .
R3 3.3 k!l, w
t 680 pF disk, -20/+50%
~-
"
R4 , Rs 13 n.tw All resistors, ±5% 2.7 pF ceramic, ±0.5% '_·

.
Rs 22 k!l, t w 2.2 nF feedthrough, -20/+50% o ••P
.
R, 1.8 k!l, l w ..'
R9 91 n. t w ./.i.
' ,;
L1 choke Type 312210820150
L2 SO nH, S turns O.S mm enamelled Cu on 3 mm dia,, 0.5 mm pitch
L3 30 nH, 3 turns O.S mm enamelled Cu on 3 mm dia., O.S mm pitch
4G-860 MHZ ANTENNA AMPLIFIER-Provides tors having very high transition frequency cations, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind-
gain of 13.5 dB for 30-mW output per signal and very low feedback capacitance, for com• hoven, The Netherlands, Vol. 28, No. 2, 1968,
over entire European television band, with man-emitter conflguration.-J. Tull, Transistor p 60-78.
noise factor of 6.3 to 10 dB. Uses tranSis- Equipped Aerial AmpliRors, Efedronic Appli·
TELEVISION OIROUITS-BLAOK-AND-WHITE 799
LOW-COST FEEDBACK VOLUME CONTROL-

Usos minimum number of components with
CA3042 IC. Although staady-state current
flows through ¥olume control, it is limited to
about 1.5 µ.A under worst-case condltlons.-
l. Kaplan, Feodback•Type Volume-Control
Circuits far RCA·CA3041 and CA3042 lnto-
gratod Circuits, RCA, Harrison, N.J., No.
ICAN-5841, 1968.
,--,
1 I
I I
I I
I
I
FEEDBACK VOLUME CONTROL-Used with L-,
CA3041 IC to increase power output and I
gain over that obtained with conventional I
lossor typo of control. At 4.5 MHz, circuit I
provides I W power output at 8,5 kHz dovia- L-
tion.-l. Kaplan, Foodback-Typo Volume-Con•
trol Circuits for RCA-CA3041 and CA3042
Integrated Circuits, RCA, Harrison, N.J., No.
ICAN-5841, 1968.
2.7kD.
' .. ."~ .. _ ';.
,'.. ....
. ·~
.. •';\*
i.
56k0
IOpF lnF
2.7kO lkO
.. t.'·
VIDEO l·F WITH SEPARATE DETECTORS-Cir• circuit in series with detector dlodo.-A. Cense,
cuit shows how separate lntorcarrier sound •2SV The N·P·N Siiicon Planar Transistor BF178 i11
detedor can be usad with ¥ideo output stage lntorcarrier 1l9nal1 have separate takeoffs, a Video Ampllfler, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
of European 625-line Iv receiver, for com. 10 sound carrier con be heavily suppressed Div., Elndhoven, The Netherlands, No. 251,
patibility with color programs. Video and In ¥ideo detector by 33.4-MHz parallel tuned 1966.
Pll JI Cl R2
TOTVANTl~~~Jt--~..-R~llV'.,........1.~+
3GO -OHM TV TWINLEAD
CZ
1--~~~~......:. ............
Cl. 2 • 76 p!d
C3 • 51 pld
C4 • 51 pfd variable
CS, 6 • .022 mfd
Rij I cs'="
Lt_ • 26 ! urns ~ 30 enamel, clock -
wise on 3 /8" slug~ tuned form
RI, 3 • 180
L2 • 4 tums linkwound over center
R2 • SI :SHIELD of LI
R4 • 110 RFC! • 2.5 mh RF choke. Na·
~ B+
lllOY OC
rionul R ·100
6.3Y AC
TV SIGNAL BOOSTER-Can be inserted in 300- shielded from rest of circuit to oliminate un-
ohm twinload at back of sot, to boost signal desirable interferenco and hash.-R, M.
strength of weaker signals in reception area. Brown, "104 Simple One-Tube Projects," Tab
Parts at left of broken shield line must be Books, Blue Ridgo Summit, Pa., 1969, p 168.
+11V
CD
220Q
560~
from sync.
&eparalor 4.7kQ 4.7kQ
TINY-VISION FIELD OSCILLATOR-Makes use operated tv receiver. Terminals 1, 2, and 3 Receivers, Philips, Pub, Dept., Elcema Div.,
of Miller integrator principle to generate saw- go to fleld output stage. Report describes Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 256, 1967.
tooth voltage having sufficient amplitude to operation of oscillator In detail.-A. H. Nil-
meet requirements of small-screen battery· lesen, field De8oction Circuit for Tiny-Vision
NOTE: To locate odditional circuits in the category of this chaptor, uso tho index ot tho back
of this book. Check olso tho outhor's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits,'' published by
McGraw-Hill in 1968,
CHAPTER 86
Television Circuits-Color
MATRIX FOR CHROMINANCE SIGNAL-

Chrominance signal is fed to base of delay
line driver transistor TRl. Usos Philips Dl40
delay line having nominal frequoncy of
4.433619 MHz and phase deloy of 63,943
µ1. Output of delay line is bolonced with
2:1 stepdown tronsformer to simplify addi- R7
tion of delayed and undeloyed signols.- 1800
C. A. M. Sidler, Pal Matrix Circuits Using
Delay lino Dl40, Philips, Pub, Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nethorlonds, Application RB
1800
Note 88, 1970.
COLOUR OlFF AMPLIFIERS KILLER DETECTOR
2.lnF 18-VI
260V CLAMPS
Intl
EAA91
-(B-Vl signal
-IR-'llsignal
c" cu
t-+----"'....J1 rF
COLOR DIFFERENCE ing to anode of B-Y amplillor. This diode taneously.-A. Boekhorst ond W. Groat,
forenco signals are oppliod to control grids circuit detects nogotivo-going burst in B-Y Chrominance Circuits for N. T. 5. C. Colour
of pentodos for amplificotion and odjustment signol. Double-diode clomp at output of Television Receivers, Philips, Pub, Dept., El-
of gain in occordance with NTSC specifico- each color difforence amplitler gives same como Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No.
tions. Double-diode circuit is used for killer clomping level for call three signals, with 234, 1966.
detection, in G-Y matrix circuit bronch go• brightness control changing all levols simul-
801
X·RAY HOLD·DOWN-U111d In Zenith 1970

television rocolvers to provide automatic pro• 9
6DW4 68pF
toctlon against oxcessivo x·ray emission from .~...;;_MA----'f--
high-voltage power supply. Circuit limits 150V
horizontal, drive voltage to about 27 kV re- 27
0.1
gardless af llne voltage and load. Also pro·
vides protection if voltage regulator fails or f50pf
Is removed from soclcet.-Consumer Hazards: 350V
How They Can Bo Fixod, Electronics, Aug. 3,
IOOk
1970, p 62-67.
C9
cs
~
,
05 R24
C10 BA145 BA145 RZ6k
~ ~
line +23SV
8-V 200Yp-p
-4-
G-v 1oov• ., ll·Y 170\lp.1
+220V
flyback
B·Ydtmod
ll·Y <ltmod.
11IJJrr4.4v
4.lV>-•
Jirasv
&v, ••
R1 4.7 kn, pot. R11 27 kn, 1 w R21 2.2 kn,! w C1 2.2 nf, -20, +50%
R2 I kO, ! W Ru 16 kO, 5.5 W R22 100 n, 1 W C2 390 pf, ± 5% •.'
R3 2.7 kn, i w R13 1.8 kn, i w R23 I Mn, t w C3 82 pf,:!: 5%
R4 2.2 kn,! w R14 3.3 kn, t w R24 I Mn, t w C4 2.2 nf, -20, +SO%
Rs 100 0, ! W R15 620 0, ! W Rls 200 kO, pot. Cs 120 pf, ± 5%
R6 10 kn, 5.5 w Ru; 100 kn, t w R26 390 kn, t w c6 56 pf,± 5%
R, 220 n, ! w R11 11 kn, 5_5 w R21 2.7 kn, 1 w C, 2.2 nF, -20, +50%
Ra 910 n, ! W Ria 680 n, i W RlB 2.7 kn, I W Ca 47pf, ±5%
R9 1.6 kn, t w R111 100 n, ! w R29 2.7 kn, 1 w C9 10 nf, -20, +50%
R 10 I kn, i W R2o 4.7 kn, pot. L., L 2 , L 3 : 1.2 mH r.r. chokes C 1o 10 nF, -20, +50%
L 4 : 35 mH billlar winding, tapped at I : 2 and I : 4 turns ratio, with ferrite tuning core. Recent Developments in Circuits and Transis•
COLOR DIFFERENCE AMPLIFIER-Supplies of two stagos minimize croutalk and en- tors for Television Recoivors, Eloctronic Ap·
drivo voltagos roqulrod by each of three sure maximum bandwidth. Article covers pfications, Philips, Pub. Dopf., Elcoma Div.,
electron guns in typical 25-lnch shadow•mask circuit design in detail. Spark gaps protect Elndhovon, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 27, No. 4,
color picture tubo. Cascodo arrangomonts against flashovers In picture tube.-A. Cense, 1966-1967, p 147-154.
TELEVISION CIRCUITS-COLOR 803
Vs
.e IOkA
: ::.· ~OCP P.lllf

.s
N7SO
U.H.F.
TUlllll
~
lOOkHz
osc.
MAGNAVOX AFT TUNER-Shows how control

voltage dorivod from video l·f is applied to
diode that controls transistor oscillator of
uhf tuner to achiovo automatic fine tuning. work at output of amplifier supprosso1 saw-
Complete circuit is given in Magnavox 1968 COLOR DIFFERENCE LINEARITY-Circuit for tooth and applies IOO-kH1 1ignal to dual.
top-of-line color tv service manuals.-F. H, chocking linearity of cascaded-transistor trace scope, with other trace showing voltage
Belt, Inside tho 1968 Color Sets, Electronics color difference ampliflor applies two signals 1wing at collector of output stago.-A. Censo,
World, .Jan. 1968, p 41-4S and 72-75. to Input of ampliflor-50.Hi sawtooth with Colour Difference Amplifiers Using the N·P·N
amplitude that drives output stage from cut- Silicon Planar Package 40822, Philips, Pub.
off to knee, and 1OO·kHz sine wave with Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nether-
amplitude of 10 mV P·P· Difforontiating not- lands, 1966.
+IZ
ez tk
680 4.7k
0(
100 OUTPUT
Eour-01~3
33k ":' I
I
+tZv 2.7k I
t
~"1
tOk
2.2k 2.2k
+IZv
Iii. 680
'.: O.IOJ'f 33k
-
gamma variotions of 10% in either direc-
tion to compensate for differences In camera
GAMMA CORRECTION-Forward-blasod fat pickup tubes. With 2N3823 fot, 0.65 V for-
followed by throe apamps compensates for ward bias is used. Choice of opamp Is not
nonlinearity of gamma In color or black- critical.-R. Williams, Unoarity Corredor Does
and-whito tv camera circuit and also provides Double Duty, E/ectronict, June 9, 1969, p
tomporaturo stability. Single pot provides 110-113.
Ee-r COLOR DEMODULATOR-With chrominance

CHROMI NANCE OUT
INPUT information applied to gate 2 of dual-gate
L1 transistor and 3.58-MHz reference signal on
310-B60ph gate 1, demodulation is accomplished by
3.58 Mhz
c,
B-Y PHASE
REFERENCE T200p R
2h
synchronous detection.-Outlook Bright for
Dual-Gate Transistors, Electronic1, July 10,
1967, p 141-142.
Cs
0 005pf
't 16v
270ll 27C
to IJftC
and age
'"'uit1
EQUAL CATHODE DRIVES FOR GUNS-Lumi-

nance amplifler is pentode with contrast con•
trol in screen grid circuit. Age is supplied
to anode, to permit grounding of video de· back of circuit is that color controls are in·
tector. Symmetrical clamp circuit using dependant, making some skill necessary for
double-diode is connected to each picture- adjustment.-A. Bookhorst and J. Gerritsen,
tubo control grid. Clamping levels are ad· Video Drive Circuits for Colour Picture Tubos,
justed individually to obtain simultaneous Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
spot cutoff for all throe guns. Ona draw• Tho Netherlands, No. 233, 1965.
C1
09
L
04 06
BA14S BA14S
C2
+220V
f\
fly· back pulse
from hne tronsf.
luminance ampl.
I Mn, :lW Rs 390 kn.~ w 47 nF. 500 V, ::, 5 ~{.

1 Mn. ~w Lt 35 mH 2.2 nF, 500 V
100 n, I W Ci 10 nF, 500 V 2.2 nF, 500 V
220 k!l, potentiometer C2 10 nF, 500 V 2.2 nF, 500 V Television Receivers, Electronic Applications,
SYNCHRONOUS CLAMP-Used for restoring lishes reference voltage to which clamping Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
equal direct voltage levels to three color dif- diodes are returned.-A. Censo, Recent De· The Netherlands, Vol, 28, No. 1, 1968, p 22-
ference signals. Brightness control R4 ostab- velopmonls in Circuits and Transistors for 28.
to chrom. amp!.
r--------------------.------ ------------1
----'-- 2xAA119 :
I
from burst I
I
I
pl\an det. I
I
I
I
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
..J
I~
UTOOSI
to(R-V) to(B..lt)
SUBCARRIER REGENERATION - Two doublo- obtained from 4.43-MHz Colpitts pentode coolour difference colour dill•rence
diode demodulators convert signal from crystal oscillator.-A. Boekhorst and W. amplifier amplifier
chrominance ampliRer into R-Y and B-Y Groat, Chrominanco Circuits for N. T. S. C. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether-
signals. Required subcarrier voltages are Colour Television Receivers, Philips, Pub. lands, No. 234, 1966•
.-MMA_.....,......,,""-___ a+
3004
ANT. +:SV(NOMlllAL)
e&l'hCGOrROL
UHF TUNER WITH AFT-Zenith version uses

transistor as oscillator, with Varicap receiv· l.~M
MIXER
ing corrodion volfago from control discrim- .n. CO.UPLING
LOOP
inator fod by third i-f, to provide automatic
fine tuning for color programs.-F. H. Belt, MIXER
LINE
lnsido tho 1968 Color Sets, Electronics World, MIJtER
Jan. 1968, p 41-45 and 72-75.
v·b 390
6.8k
~--..... vb
line flyback pulse ,
.. X" demodulator .. Z"d•~ +il1~-

X-Z MATRIX-Consists of three identical fiers through coupling capacitors. Requires
color difforence amplifiers operating with d-c coupling to picture tube, because clamp- Colour Television Receivers, Philips, Pub.
common cathode resistor, with X and Z sig· ing is impracticable.-A. Boekhorst and W. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Nether-
nals applied to grids of two triode amplj. Graat, Chrominance Circuits for N. T. S. C. lands, No. 234, 1966.
+270V
R24
mod. ·210V 5.6Mfi
AUXILIARY HORIZONTAL OUTPUT-Pantode
1ta90 is stabilized a9alnst line volta9e varla•
tions, to keep plduro width from chan9in9
with line voltage. Transistor d-c amplifier,
with zoner holding emitter at 9 V, has suffi·
ciontly hl9h gain lo provide stabilization and
completely compensate for agin9 of tube or
transistor. Stage is modulated to provide
East-West raster correction, with modulation
such that deflection currant is about 13 %
less al top and bottom of picture than at
center.-C. J. Boers, Circuits for 110 Degree BZY88
9V
Colour TV Picture Tube, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No.
261, 1969. R27
C23
68kfi
1.2nF
.,
IMll
... .,,
•t
C2
llOOF
.....
<•
I220,,
Cl
e• •• •••
A
u~, -II
.,... •••
"'" A
n
.. ... LC::=i-...-f~~~......~---~·
..,lo'IC
'""
_.
.....
C\lrrtat ;t1Htttflc:I'
··~
------'-1
' '~ '

Jt - ,..
~:·~f.
.•
COMPLETE HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION-In· half of deflection power. Stages at right Circuits for 110 Dogroe Colour TV Picture
eludes main stage at loft which supplies supply power for shift circuits and other half Tuba, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elnd.
extra hl9h voltage for 110-deg color picture of dofloction power, with modulation to pro• haven, The Netherlands, Na. 261, 1969.
tube, power for difforonce current drive, and vido East-West master corrodion.-C. J. Boers,
lJt ...
IR·V)
Vref. 39pF
.
II
II 180pF
II
....
~ ~~~~~~ .....
~~~~--
27pF
+ Chrominonco Circuits for N. T. 5. C. Colour
THREE DEMODULATORS-Individual clemodu· color difFeronce signals con be applied to Television Receivers, Philips, Pub. Dept., El-
lotors for R - Y, 8 - Y, ond G - Y stages three completely independent color differ• como Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No.
give groater design flexibility. Resulting ence ompliflers.-A. Boekhorst and W. Groot, 234, 1966.
®VA.C. ' ' .e--<'" SWITCl4

.....
DIA:AT '1
DIOOE I
I
JJOk I
INSTANT-ON-Used in Westinghouse 1969

color sets to keep tube heaters worm while
set is off. Picture is obtained within about
4 s oftor sot is turned on. 52 disconnocts TO CllT ll(ATEll
warm-up feature, as might be dosired when
going on vacation.-F. H. Bolt, Coler-Tv for IOOk
1969, Electronics World, Jan. 1969, p 25-30
and 66-67.
+ZfSY
IOK 390
T901
SOUND 1-F FOR PORTABLE COLOR. SET-U1es

7T two 4.5-MHz i-f stagos followed by ratio de·
toctor. Providos high ·gain lo offset heavy
100 trapping of 41.25-MHz sound carrier in video
i-f.-E. L. Hoos ond D. V. Jones, Portable TV
,. Sound Sy1tom, Gonoral Electric, Syracuse,
·-:. N.Y., No. 90.78, 1969.
··:t ,,r·· . ... VOLUME CONTROL
0.01 2.2K 0.01 220 O.OI 3.9K ODI IK .005 AUDIO OUT
25K
from
current difference
drive circuit
NORTH·SOUTH CORRECTION-Corrects for +20V -20V
pincushion distortion of rastor in North-South
direction by adding current at horizontal or
R311.
lino frequency to vertical deflection current.
-C. J. Boers, Circuits for 110 Degreo Colour
3.3k0
r--.-~~--,·~~
r--·---,;
AT1060
TV Picture Tube, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma I

'vert.
Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. 261, : defl.
1969. •coil
C308
39nF
R321
120
L------J
T2
t-------- 111
r,,
C307
C311
;k22nF
from
vert. output
tronsft>rmer
C313
220nFJ;
to
current difference
drove circuit +3V
I00,41H .Olp.F
TO B-Y AMP
- - ...J20pF I00,41H lkQ
I .01
I 3.3kn
p.F
I
r.5kn TO G-Y AMP
I
'3.3pF I
t
120pF 100,41 ..
lkQ
3.3kn .01
p.F
TINT TO R-YAMP
3.3kn
lkQ
TO CHROMA AMPLITUDE CONTROL
G-Y signals are avail11blo at output of the chronous dotoctors.-0. A. Kolody, Simplified
TRANSFORMER MATRIXING-Domodulotion three synchronous dotectors. Both second· Transistor Color TV Procossin9 Circuitry,
transformer (dashed boxes) performs matrix- ary windln9s and tho tertiary winding are General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.63,
ing function, such that R-Y, B-Y, and center·tappod to maintain a-c balance in syn- 1969.
RCA AFT CONTROL-Takes signal fram 3rd

i·f and canverts it to d-c corroction voltage
of up to 5 V for correcting fine tuning of
tuner in RCA CTC-28 chassis. Complete vor·
sion of this simplified circuit is given in RCA
service manual.-F. H. Bolt, Inside tho 1968
Color Sots, Electroniu World, Jan. 1968, p
41-45 and 72-75.
from N-S
AT4040/33
.-----~,,,.-..---...-rr"'!:r'--..---1 ...
C 206
1------
t tL-----•1>
correction ci~it
to centre tap
2.2~F Tl
8A148
v
l201
,,..,.,
from vert. output
4
Tl
5mH
DIFFERENCE CURRENT DRIVE-Used to make
beams convorgo in corners of picture on 11 O·
deg color crt. Includes wave-shaping net-
works. Report describes circuit operation in
5
detoil. Field-frequency voltage that modu-
lates difference current is supplied by tran-
R216
sistor amplifier in which feedback loop is
shunted to ground by voltage-dependent re- 1.2kfi
sistor R207 .-C. J. Boen, Circuits for 110
fl
Degree Colour TV Picture Tubo, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Nether- R211
lands, No. 261, 1969. 2.2kfi
••deo ddector
picture i.f.
185V
chromtnance signal
1'A
to k1lltr detector o,
CHROMINANCE AMPLIFIER-Designed for use double-diode demodulators. Gain r.ontrol is Chrominance Circuits for N. T. S. C. Colour
in NTSC color television receiver. Consists partly automatic, using burst amplitude as Television Recoivors, Philips, Pub. Dept., El·
af gain-controlled pontode and triode cath- reference (obtained by burst amplitude de- coma Div., Elndhovon, The Netherlands, "'·'·
ode follower, with output going to two tector D4).-A. Bookhont and W. Graat, 234, 1966.
GRAY·SCALE TRACKING-Helps chroma gain

to follow tho settings of contrast control In
,__________ _.~~~:ir:~:~~~
Hoffman 196B color sots. Complete circuit .Z2 f~ TO CATKODE

TO SLIDER 6 - - - - - - - 1 \""'"OF BLAllKER
can bo found in Hoffman 196B tv service IUll.
ON
manuals.-F. H. Bolt, Inside tho 1968 Color CONTRAST IOUl COLOR
C01'4TROt TRAC
Sols, Electronics World, Jan. 196B, p 41-45 RANGE
and 72-75. IOOkll.
aaon
-:;;;:" 150V
LOAD
(7!50)
. . - - - - - - - - - T O ,LYIACK X,1111.
47
5~
IOW
L..._IWI_---<.,. IOOST a+
-VE +Vee 410
C1, C., C. = 0.002 pf
C. = 8-60 pf, Arco .CO• or equiv.
~~--.....j 1-(-----•1 PULS! FllOll fLYIACK X,1111,
Co = 0.03 pf
R1 = =
Ca. ,, 1.500 pf
390 ohm1, '/1 wall
llZ .,07
..,.. IOtY
R2
Re
=
= 330 ohm1, 1 wall
6.8 ohm1, 'la wall 150t
Rr = 200 ohms, 'Ii won
T = .C·lurn blllle&r winding, *a ID, No. 30 wire;
H
Coro: G.I. material Qi or equiv.
54-216 MHZ WIDEBAND CATV-Uses single

500t
2N5 I 09 transistor to provide gain of 12 dB.
HVADJ.
Suitable for CATV applications. Usos fer- "'ii"
rito-toroid wideband transformer with 4:1 of triode, to produce negative d·c voltage
impedance ratio at output to transform 75- PULSE H V REGULATOR-Used in Olympic
0
that increases with pulse amplitude and
ohm load into 300-ohm collector laad.-"Slli- CTC-31 color sot to keep high voltage below thereby counteracts increase in high voltage.
con Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, level of dangerous x•rays. Keying pulse -F. H. Bait, Color-Tv far 1969, Efectronict
N.J., SP-51, p 342. from flyback transformer is applied to anode World, Jan. 1969, p 25-30 and 66-67.
IOOK
EQUAL CUTOFF VOLTAGES FOR GUNS-Pan·

toda luminance ampllfler with contrast con-
trol in screon grid circuit feeds color picture
tubo In which control grid voltages for all
three guns are equal, as also are screen grid
voltagos of guns, so guns have equal cutoff
vollagos. Tracking of gun grid voltages
with voltage of black-level vollage divider
Is obtained by moans of vollago-dopondent
resistor VDR. Complexity of circuit and drawbacks.-A. Boekhorst and J. Gerritsen, Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
limited brightness control rango aro chief Video Drive Circuits for Colour Plcturo Tubes, Tho Netherlands, No. 233, 1965.
MANUAL DEGAUSSING-Used in Philco 19-

mo color tv. Normally, switches 52 aro
closed and dogauning coil is shorted out.
For degaussing, volume control is turnod
further counterclockwise after sot is turned
off, to open soctlons of 52. Sot · is then
turned on by pulling outward on volume-
control shaft. Coll than degausses crt for
few seconds, until voltage-doubler capacitors
at right hove charged. Volume control Is
then rotated clockwise to close 52.-F. H.
Bait, Color-Tv for 1969, Electronics World,
Jan. 1969, p 25-30 and 66-67.
Tv 2,.d
6ondpou
, - . . . - - - - - - Col0t Out +
, - . . . - - - -. . Co,or In
1 o Color
C°"'t•ol
cm
COLOR MONITOR-Automatically adjusts .Ollff
color signal so correct flesh tones aro main· IWV'l~-1
talned during switching of stations, pro-
grams, tv cameras, or scenes. Mounted at
rear of vhf tuner, to permit short leads for
picking up color signal at color control.
Proference control permits adjusting for most
.I
pleasing flesh tone. Manual describes op•
oration of circuit in dotoil.-14H12 Color
Television Chassis, Admiral Service Manual
Supplement 51062N, 1970.
20VB + - t
2
J.SB MHz
OIO)E
~ 2l.uh RZOZ
I .L
....
3 2K
L-- - - ___:::__ -
R"13 R·Gltot.
11431
R415 El•l<lt. t2Ul lkll kn
390
R419
Ukn
R405 R413 R420 R4H 1
U•n lkll lkQ U•n
2l•n R43S
12011
R430
CONVERGENCE-Circuit ~rovides static con•""""= n
vergonco by moans of diroct current through u
R·G ..... IMll
vertical convergence coils. Complete dia-
gram of vertical convergence circuit Is shown. tail.-C. J, Boors, Circuits for 110 Degree Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No.
Roport doscrlbos operation of circuit In de- Colour TV Picture Tube, Philips, Pub. Dept., 261, 1969.
270
-------IR-V)
..-~~~-t-~--11-~....._~--c:=::J-~9"""i~Vb 62•0
'ROM
A-tSYNC----T-1
-(R-V) OtMOD
Uoll CG-VI
-------(G-V)
10M
PCL81.
L70 .tp• l 040~
30otl
•2
no 11n 47011
10k •ROM
0 •Y $Y?ct ----T-1
OtMOD
------+-+-•
10M
(8-V)
...L.'
--• 470 100nF
:::1+--++Vt,
PCLSI.
~
390 COLOR DIFFERENCE AMPLIFIER-Used in
JS011H transistor color tv receiver to amplify R-Y
and B-Y color difference signals coming
-(8-V) from synchronous detedors and matrix tho
KEYED-DIODE CLAMPING-Color difference back lime.-A. Bookhorst and W. Graat, signals to got required G-Y color difference
omplifler usos triodes os keyed diodes to pro- Chrominance Circuits for N. T. 5. C. Colour signal.-0. A. Kolody, Simplifled Transistor
vide asymmetrical clomping of color differ• Television Receivers, Philips, Pub. Dept., El- Color TV Procossing Circuitry, General Elec•
once signals. Requires that blanking be ap- como Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No. tric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.63, 1969.
plied to chrominance amplifler during fty- 234, 1966.
C16
_r-.--.---.---tl---- !(l(1
1.8nF
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT-Developed for 110..

deg color tube. Output stage is not stabi·
AT2100 lizod against lino voltage changes, but high
voltage for pidure tube (oht) is stabilized
21 12 BA148 against load variations. Width of picture
does not change because horizontal deftoc•
tion current is mode to change half as much
as high voltage, using stabilized auxiliary
horizontal output stoge.-C. J. Boers, Circuits
for 110 Degree Colour TV Picture Tubo, Phil-
ips, Pub. Dept., Elcomo Div., Eindhovon, The
C17 Netherlands, No. 261, 1969.
1nF
C12 R21
C3 2.2nif l3kfi
J;220nF
, ~
AT1060
MAGNAVOX VHF AFT TUNER-Automotic

fine tuning voltage derived from 3rd video
i-f is applied to semiconductor diode that
1.8 controls tuned circuit of triode oscillator.
NPO
Complete circuit is given in Magnavox 1968
V.H.F. R5
color Iv service manuals.-F. H. Bolt, Inside
TUNER _,.1,·/<~,,1<, __ Vee• t30VOLTS
osc. tho 1968 Color Sets, Electronics World, Jan.
1968, p 41-45 and 72-75.
4.71111 470A c 0.001
RZ RS
6I,l'F L1
= (46.IMHrl
47kn
A.F.T.
DIODE
IUV
C9
68
pF
FROM .l.F.T. CIRCUIT
L1 ANO Lz PHASE DETECTOR

TRAllSf'ORMERS
L1 •TRW No. 23754
OR ECWIYALEllT
L2 • TRW No. 23 7~~
OR EQUIVALENT
L3• TRW llo.23753
OR EOUl\IALENT
t 470• TO SNO. OET

PICTURE IF AMP
TO 2 NO. DET
SURST
INPUT o, COLOR AFT SYSTEM-Uses RCA special-func-
S£:.025
tion IC to provide accurate tuning reference.
System locks on picture-carrier i-f and holds
tuner oscillator within 25 kHz of picture car•
rier to give high-quality picture at all times.
Report describes operation and givos per-
formance graphs.-W. M. Austin, H. M. Klein-
man, and J. 5undburg, Application of the
RCA·CA3044 and CA3044Vl Integrated Cir·
cuits in Automatic-Fine-Tuning Systems, RCA,
Harrison, N.J., ICAN-5831, 1968.
3.58-MHZ PHASE-LOCKED OSCILLATOR-Volt·
age-dependent resistance characteristic of fat
is used to vary affective tuning capacitance
of crystal subcarriar oscillator for color tv.
Permits fine adjustment of oscillator fro·
quency to give accurate control of picture R94
tint.-N. P. Doyle, FET Controls Crystal Os- +275V
cillator, EEE, Aug. 1968, p 136-137. C88
line output
stage
control
lM
voltage
C81
10nFlR82
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR-Circuit is conven· 6.8k.Cl.
tional except that small part of parabolic
voltage derived from cathode of vertical out• ,
put tubo PL508 is fed to cathode and grid
both in PCF802 reoctonce tube. Potentiome-
ter R89 con then be used for straightening
vertical lines in picture.-C. J. Boers, Circuits
for 110 Degree Colour TV Picture Tube,
The Nothorlands, No. 261, 1969.
. - - - -....- - - 0 400Y
._--+.--!------- TO RED GRID

F'AOM 5104
R-Y OEMOO
.---+--+-----+-o TO GREEN GRID
F'AO.M
G-Y OEMOD
+Vij
.vb .....1=--------lt--t
(Q...Vhtr.phtlld• (R-V}
' 1.5U1 IG -YI
q
i 2.2nF
-(R-Y)
sognal PCf80
JSO~
IO '1IOM
11-YOEMOD
00 15Ul (11-YI
4A-V)a~it\ld4
l.8'A J; 15pf'
SYMMETRICAL CLAMPING-Chief advantage
of circuit is immunity to nolso, making blank·
ing unnecossary.-A. Boekhorst and W. Graat, COLOR DIFFERENCE AMPLIFIER-Nonmatrix·
Chromlnance Circuits for N. T. S. C. Colour Ing ampliAers use D40N transistors. Input
Television Receivers, Philips, Pub. Dept., El· impodanco of G-Y transistor is 1,000 ohms
coma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. and that of other transistor Is 6,000 ohms,
234, 1966. to provide different voltage levels required
for driving picture tubo.-0. A. Kolody,
Simplified Transistor Color TV Processing Cir·
cuitry, General Eloctric, Syracuso, N.Y., No.
90.63, 1969.
•250V
•250V
ISOkn
-(R-V)
G-Y CATHODE MATRIX-Crosstalk betwoon

R-Y and B-Y amplifiers is a few percent,
but ofhotting advantage ls that ovantual
hum on anode voltages of those stages is
not phase-Inverted on G-Y amplifier anode. COLOR DIFFERENCE AMPLIFIER-Produces
Pontodes are used throughout to provide G-Y signal by matrlxing R-Y signal and
required gain.-A. Bookhorst and W. Graaf, B-Y signal In cascade arrangement af tran•
Chrominance Circuits for N. T. S. C. Colour slstors.-A. Cense, Colour Difforenco Ampll·
Tolovislon Receivers, Philips, Pub. Dept., El- Aers Using tho N-P·N Silicon Planar Package
coma Div., Eindhovon, Tho Nothorlands, No. 40822, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind·
234, 1966. hovon, The Notherlonds, 1966.
DOUBLE-DIODE DEMODULATOR-Used for chrominance

signal _ ___,
phaso demodulation of chrominance signals.
Desired signal provides output voltages with reference
equal phases from both diode circuits, to voltage
give color difference signal at function of
load resistors. Provides no gain, but has colour
efficiency of about BO% with load values difference
shown.-A. Bookhorst and W. Graaf, Chro- signal
minance Circuits for N. T. S. C. Colour Tole·
vision Receivers, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No. 234,
1966.
DISC. TRANS.
r-1~11-ot-t-"~Nk~ll~t-•TJ~EA
1
A.f.T. DEFEAT
SWITCH SHOWN
IN DEFEAT PO$.
IOlln
MOTOROLA AFT CONTROL-Takes signed
from 3rd i-f and converts it to d~ automatic
fine tuning voltage for tuner of color sot.
Includes neon-lamp indicator circuit to Indi-
cate when fine tuning needs manual adlust-
T·ooii!
~ 120kJl
IOOV .,..
LA~P
ment. Complete circuit is given in servico
manuals for 1968 Motorola color sots.-F.
H. Bolt, Inside tho 1968 Color Sots, Electron·
ics World, Jan. 1968, p 41-45 and 72-75.
1nod1 (8•VI
dlll. ..,.i.
_A _ __/\ _ Ce
BURST PHASE DETECTOR-Demodulated R-Y -v------v- ~~2-?Gp---,~~..........-
color difference signal, in which burst is zero c, 2.EAA91 IM
if phase of burst is corroctly received, is am· b•rsl o~Ulltr
plifled by triode Vl, fed to clamp V2 to re- )~H200
duce blanking level to zero, then appliod
to phase detector V3 to detect any deviation
of burst from zero.-A. Boekhorst and W.
Groat, Chromlnance Circuits for N. T. S. C.
Colour Television Receivers, Philips, Pub.
Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The Nether•
lands, No. 234, 1966. "-' cathode
IA·YI d!lf. 111\>1. IB·Yl dill. llftlll.
·ZSV ·21DV Rl24
Ll02
Rm ·lV
22n -i.
sllift
Cll4
ens Rl20
:;!; ZOrnf +lV
r· . J;zapF I.SA
!If + cm
to lino dlfl dtCIOt
J;54pF
I UV'-' (E•Wcott.I
= to .........
VERTICAL DEFLECTION-Sawtooth voltage is to scs. Integrating network RI 22-Cll 3 in TV Picture Tube, Philips, Pub, Dept., Elcoma
derived from synchronized rolaxotion oscilla· cathodo circuit of output pentode provides Div., Elndhoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 261,
tor using BRY39 scs. Sync signal is ampli· roquirod 5-corroctlon of deftoction curront.- 1969.
fled by BCl 48 transistor before being opp lied C. J. Boers, Circuits for 110 Degroo Colour
FAOll PHAIE DETECTOR

llOpF L.._ TO
.------t--------.....:::.O.;:;.J\'-'8;~
:SpF
12l
1
,,. r--""1....."" w'-+-- +zsv
270 .I
.zz
200
PEAKER FOR CHROMA BANDPASS AMPLIFIER
llEACTANCE
-Simple a•c coupled pooker stago for tran· ADJ.
sistor color tv receiver improves performance
of chroma bandpass ampliRer. No auto- JFET 3.58-MHZ OSCILLATOR-Jundion fet
matic color control is used on this stage.- sorvos as reactance control for oscillator in
0. A. Kolody, Simplified Transistor Color TV chroma section of Admiral K10-2A 1969
Processing Circuitry, General Electric, Syra· color tv.-F. H. Belt, Color-Tv for 1969, Elec-
cuse, N.Y., No. 90.63, 1969. tronics World, Jon. 1969, p 25-30 and 66-
67.
@
TO U.H.F. ANO
A.F.T. V.H.F. TUNERS
DETECTOR
IO•n
•nn
INPUT FROll 220 100
3RO l.F,
A.F.T. OHEAT SWITCH

1011 TUllERI
l£•50mA
45.751
llHr
c. = 1.5 - 20 pf
c. = 0.002 pf
l::= 3 turns, M1"
diomot•r, No. 26 wit•
c. = 55 - 300 pf
c.. c.. = 0.02 pf
R•
R:
=
= 30 ohins
390 ohin&
Cs, Ct =
1000 pf
Co = 32 - 250 pf r =
R> = 220 ohin&
-'·turn btfllcr wind· AUTOMATIC FINE TUNING-Used in Magna- citing princlple.-F. H. Belt, Inside the 1968
Co = 7 - 100 pf ing, ~- ID; Coro1 vox top of 1ine sets to adjust tuner accurately
0 0 Colar Seh, Electronics World, Jan. 1968, p
==
C10 8 - 60 pf G.I. motorial Qo or
lt 7 •••••• ~- OQUiY. so color burst is not lost. Article gives oper- 41-45 and 72-75.
diameter, No. 26 wife
54-216 MHZ CATV AMPLIFIER-Sophisticated

wideband ampliller uses variety of match·
ing, peaking, and feedback techniques to
Increase gain-bandwidth product. Provides
minimum gain of 14 dB over entire band. ioo .,... 11N> no
•'lib~'-.,\".:.·.-•..,..__.,.,,.~
Used in trunk line and bridger amplifiers
usually having two to four stages, with tilt
to
\~
control generally incorporated only in second °'J"(
stage.-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, A6l-11X ,,I
/
Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 342.
: '...........
.:
" '"'"'
1li"' l'" !l"' ,-·
•.,
~
;E s 9H~0': .. )
~
!000
VDR FEEDBACK IN GUN CATHODES-Re· ::i ~ .. ;:1 2'M >~i

~ ~
1M
:.
H1001)
quired drive ratio for guns is obtained by .._--t--+--------+--+--1.•w,\',....Ln~ Jl

cathode feedback, with screen grid and con• and a djustmont. Gives good gray-scale iso• •'lOO
trol grid voltages being held equal. Bright· tracking.-A. Boekhorst and J. Gerritsen, •o•·;:r T--"" ,..,,,,,
·T····Q,1"
ness control varies both .control grid and Video Drive Circuits far Colour Picture Tubos,
screen grid voltages by same amount, to Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, .Jl If
avoid color shift. Circuit is simple in sotup The Netherlands, No. 233, 1965.
1/2 6KZ8
r: fcH.131
3fcH.1zl
osc.
1 ,3tc11.n l
L,__.,J
e.o•n
..._,WAm.--e+
5V 0.C. CORRECTION COLOR-BAR GENERATOR-Unijunction tran-

VOLTAGE fROll sistor serves as down-countor, triggered by next stage. Generator usos total of four
A.F. T. CIRCUIT
21an every 14th pulse of its input, in B&K Model ujt's.-F. H. Bolt, Color Generators Roach the
1242 keyed-rainbow color generator. Diodo Solid Stato, Eledronics Worlcl, May 1968, p
~
114W
aids stability and slu:1pes output pulses for 25-29 and 64-65.
A.F.C.
DEFEAT 5VIREF.1
SWITCH
RCA AR-Shows method of applying auto• 10k 1Sk 8.Zk

matic fine tuning control voltage to oscilla· 68k SOk lBUk
tor control transistor in RCA KRK-131 vhf
tuner. Complete circuit can be found in
RCA service manual for CTC-28 color chassis.
-F. H. Belt, Inside the 1968 Color Sets, Elec·
tronics World, Jan. 1968, p 41-45 and 72-
75.
G-Y ANODE MATRIX-Provides two-phaH Boekhout and W. Graat, Chrominanco Cir·

pentode domodulation, with triode as phase cuits for N. T. S. C. Colour Television Re·
inverter and amplifier for G-Y signal. Ad· ceivers, Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div., Eind·
vantages include minimum crosstalk.-A. haven, Tho Netherlands, No. 234, 1966.
AT4050/00
2
CSOl l501 R529
31Qnf ltd 1200
L--+--5~ comp.
,,.,,,
current d1ff•rtne:1 AT"°50/0I
drtwt ccrC'oPt 3
lSC6
blue
R527
150
-~v-------l,_..-.+-----l--+----<.__----t--+--""'"',.-.----4--._,~----'
17v ...-ll'°'"!!!!!.~'----f-------+--t--------'
1 12
A
v.,v5DOV_.~::;,:.~---+---------t---------,
v zsov-.!L+-+--+-------+-c:::::n
CSOI
Inf
HORIZONTAL DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE- scribes oporotion of circuit and gives wave- Colour TV Picture Tubo, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Complomontary pair of omittor·followors is forms of horizonal convorgonce currents and Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No.
used for oach convorgonco coil. Report do- flelds.-C. J. Boors, Circuits for 110 Dog roe 261, 1969.
CHAPTER 87
Temperature Control Circuits
RELAY OR
OTHER LOAD
Fl IAMP
120VAC
Tl
4·A SCR CONTROL FOR RELAY-Permits con· LOAD CD
trol of high-current loads plugged into load
RECEPTACLE •
WI
rocoptaclo. R1 can bo GE 10303 thermistor
having 1,000 ohms at 70 F, cadmium sulfldo
MRI @
photocell, or other sonsor. Rolay can be 6·V NC
d-c such as Potter & Brumflold PTll .-"Hobby CONTACT
Manual," General Electric, Owensboro, Ky., (IFANOTHE
RELAY IS
1965, p 160. THE LOAD!
• 01
Kl Rl2
Cl)
!:j
0
>
..
0
N
II:
l&.I
Cl)
z
l&.I
...
0 c
z
0 a:
CD 0
u (/)
2 (/)
...
l&.I
a:
II.
~
... ..,
:I!
0
u
04
818
TEMPERATURE CONTROL CIRCUITS 819
CR7 R9
06
2.4-KW FULL-WAVE PROPORTIONAL CON·

TROL-Provides zero-voltage switching in 240 V
which ratio of load on time to off time J:i':.
varies as function of thermistor error signal.
May bo usod to slavo-drive additional trlac.
load combinotions each having all compo.
nonts at left of R4.-J. L. Brookmiro, Tom- C2
poroturo Controls Incorporating Zero Voltago
Switching, Gonoral Electric, Syrocuso, N.Y.,
No. 200.45, 1966, p 9. TO SLAVE
FIRING CKT
CRI • G.E. AIJB • Al48 Rl •470, IW R16 • 100 C4-JUF, 20WVoe
CR2 • G.E. AIJF • Al4F R4 • IK R17 ·220 C6 • 100 Uf, 20 WVDC
CR3 • G .E. A13F • Al4F R5 • ISK, IW R18 • 6.8K C7 • 500 UF, 25 wvoe
CR4 • G .E. AIJF • Al4f R6 • ISK, 7W Rl9 • IK QI, 04 • 2N3638 (foh~hildl
CR5 • G.E. AIJF • Al4F R7 • IK R20 • IOK POT 02, OJ· G.E. 2N2923
CR6 ·G.E. IN4009
CR7 • G.E. Al38 • Al4B
R8 - 4.7!(
R9 • 6.SK, SW
R21 • IOK
R22 • 4.7K
T "l~ ~~~~~m~
TEMPERAT~E
}
G .E. TYPE a
2H502 • SK AT 25 C.
CR8 • G.E. IN4009 RIO· 22K R23 • 10K POT
OS - G .E. 2N21>16
CR9 • G.E. Z4XL6.2 R11 ·22K R24 • 47
CR 10 • G .E. 1N4009 R12 ·22K R2S • 150 SCRI • G .E . ODX260
CRll ·G.E. Z4XLl6 R13 • 12K Cl -0.82 UF, 20ll., 400 voe SCU - G.E. C6B OR CI068
RI ·lK, IOW RU• IMfG C2 • 0.47 UF, 20ll., 400 voe 06 • TillAC • G. E. SC.SO· 10 AHi
R2 ·S6, IW RIS • 1MfG Cl, cs -
I Uf. l()l(., IS voe
(MYLAR Oi G. E. SC4GO • 6 AW
LON LEAKAGE TYPE)
• Rl6
T2
+
C4
R20
HEAT
MAX
., 7.5KW
~~·
.. Rll RESISTANCE
HEATER
~· ;
~•~/o-'·
~~
h·~. ,. .,,.
~·· l •.::_...
.. ·-·
-+--------Rl2-------._,i
R,. n .. R6. Rl •• 11, ... R,.-••1'"424
R2
• • •
l,$1\ohm
1113---2.2Kohm
11,.
1
R19 - - IOOohm
6 -
11 . --.t7obm
c
C
c'
2 -
-OE43F~723AA9
-22~· sov
..,.p
G£ ..SF'"R5AIO~
0
25011[d25V
1 11 fd~\'
~C3~
QllhniQ6 - l•l'A424
Q 1 , Q• • 0" ~·
Q 0 -UE6RS21AJ2Dl2
z• - GE Z 'XL12
:!'
,_.., .. R R R II\ oh '
~·•• •!•. ~~--- IOK ohm ~6F02Kt..'2'20 - All~ln 02-2062
r
3• 11 u· 12 m c3 - GE 22:51fd 2SV T
• :~~K-:.., !IT - - - CE 2R114 C 4 ·CE 16F02KMIOI IOOp[d 2$V ~2
, ll - - - 120 ohm D, D , D
7
- OE AIU Tl • 220 PRI 24V CT SEC
R~ S.3K ohm n lhru ~ - In 1'"424 25 WA·rr
11 1
10 $K ohm air conditionor, for rogulating room tom·
IC PROPORTIONAL FOR 7.5-KW HEATER- transformer. This isolates thermostat from porature under all woathor conditions.-T. A.
Uses invorso parallol scr combination Q7-Q8 hlgh-voltogo powor lino. Components in Penkalski, Bottor Room Conditioning via
operating from a•c line, with triggering cir· General Electric PA424 IC aro shown in thin Solid State Controls, Gonoral Electric, Syra•
cuit operatod from low-voltogo secondary of lines. Can be combined with control for cuso, N.Y., No. 200.51, 1967, p 5.
01
MPS3638
SCR SLAVE-Slave circuit QJ-Q3, added to
half-wave control scr Q2, gives full-wave
D1 control. Each time Q2 turns on, It feeds
RLOAD 1N4003 single power pulse through QI to gate of
scr Q3, making Q3 turn on and pass load
C1 +
current for half-cycle following that in which
5 µF
Q2 was on. Control signal at gate of Q2,
POWER 50 v
LINE either d-c or power pulso, will thus act on
120 VAC both Q2 and Q3 to give full-wave control.
If control pulse is synchronized with a-c lino,
switching occurs only al zoro point.-"Semi-
02 conductor Power Circuits Handbook," Moto-
+o-----J 03 rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-13.
CONTROL
SIGNAL
02 AND 03
ARE DEPENDENT
ON LOAD
'0., 1
____ r---------------------~
I
I • I I
I DI 021 Rll
3-A BLOWER CONTROL-Phaso-cantrollod I I
blowor regulatos temperature produced by I
external heat source, May be used in sys- I
tems having single blower for regulating I
both room heating and cooling. Room tem-
perature is monitored by feedback thermistor llOV I
Ta. Foodback signal is compared in ujt error
60-Hz
I
detector with reference RS, and resulting I
error fed to triac QI which supplies power to Cl
I
blower motor. Thermistor Tw and flip-flop Dl ,I
Q2-Q3 sense waler temperature when wator
Tl
I
is used either for heating or cooling. Circuit
provides rfl suppression. Will maintain tem-
perature within 3% of thermistor resistance
Rl•SUll
lt2-4.11CA.4W
ltS•IKA
LI
"9·!1!11<0
RI0•4.7KA
Rll-IOCQ 0 l/ZW
I
----------------- -----
DI THRU 04 •GE GRSl&PlllLAJI
05 THAU 01 •Cl( Al3'
QI• GtSC410
Ml• l AMI' SHA0£0 POU MOTOR
-S( ....._..,.
Tl • lr'RAGUl llZIZ
-·
for I 0% variation in line voltage.-"SCR A4•"'A P01.112W Al2• UCO oz.as- Cl( 2"2112 NOTE: Al.L MSISTAllCtS 112 w,
Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967, RS- &KO POT. V2W Cl -0 U,.Od,ZGDV 04- GE 2"K4S tlO... Ut«.ESS OTHERWI$£ sP£ClFl£D.
116•3.lKO C2-.0,~ld, zoov ZI •GE Z4XL20
p 287-288. At•,KQ POf,llZW Cl•0....,.,50V Tw-GE: 'DIOS. SK• 2'•c '14RMl$TOR
118-221<0 (4-01...ol.'OY t'•c
Te -GE liDCOl.5K #' llCAla$tOR
CONTROL
o, VOLTAGE
2N3823
Rs
R2 !Ok
10k
I 65 c as determined by setting of R4. After
RESET-1 I temperature drops below trip . point, reset
switch must be closed manually to Initiate
another hooting and control cycle. Article
describes operation in detail. Adlon de-
pends on change of fet transconductance
-12v with tomporaturo.-E. Elad, FET's Resistance
HIGH-TEMPERATURE CUTOFF-Fat circuit ago for cutting off heater when temperature Change Trips Hooter Control, ElecrroniCf,
placed in heat chamber provides control volt• reaches desired maximum between 35 and April 29, 1968, p 65-66.
L040
240 W MAX
K02103
K02107,
K02108,0R
K0210'3
Qt - GE 3&"8 CR• G[ AISC

01· GE ZNl41~ TH• !o(JC NlC
~Al- G( CI06al a,.- ~~l=~~ATltt
HALF-WAVE ZERO-VOLTAGE SWITCHING-

Duplicatos. function of bimetallic switch
normally used in electric blankets, Ser Is JI Pl
fired oither at beginning of caltornate half·
cycles or biased off completely. On-off cyclo
repecits cit rate determinod by room tempera•
ture, so ON timo incroases when temperature
is low. Switching at zero voltcige mlnimisos
rfl, eliminciting neod for fllter.-"SCR Man•
uol," 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 240-W COOLING CONTROL-When thermistor out rfl. Optional latching circuit RS-Cl would,
149-150. T sonses that temperature is cibove that called if used, keep fcin on until line switch SI is
for by setting of RI, transistor switch and opened.-"Silicon Controlled Rectifier Experi-
scr are retriggered early in each succeeding menter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967,
half-cycle of ci-c input to give full-wavo cur• p 110.
rent through cooling fcan or other load, with·
hot Junction lchromef- atumelJ
ov
compensating
cable )'
8S.6Q
19
00A40
cold
Junction 2 4kQ
1°/o
copper
___ _J
1011
1°/o
ov
lkll
".,.
THERMOCOUPLE CORRECTION-Philips DOA-
40 differential opomp ond temperature-sensi-
tive rosistance bridge provide compensation
for variations In cold (unction temperature.
Designed for use with thermocouple having
Chromel-Alumel hot junction giving tempera-
100 turo range of 0 to 1,000 C with 15-V supply.
µF
l25VI If temperature of cold (unction increcises 80
degroes, error In reading is only about 6
dog when corroctlon circuit is used.-Temper-
cature Measurement With o Thermocouple
(Compensated Cold Junction) Using tho DOA-
40, Jlhilips, Pub. Dept., Elcomci Div., Eind·
heven, The Netherlands, No. 26.
R14
0 TO 250
MULTIPURPOSE TEMPERATURE CONJROL-

Differont combinations of wiring give choice
LOAD
of operating mothods. With wiring A, load
is turned off when temperature increases, for
heating applications. Wiring 8 gives oppo·
site effect, fer cooling applications. With
wiring C, circuit does not lock in either mode.
Wiring D will latch control in either mode,
depending on whether used with A or B.
With D, R14 and C3 should be removed and
replaced by jumper.-"Silicon Controlled Rec•
tiller Experimenter's Manual," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., 1967, p 117.
THERMISTOR
r---------.,
SLAVE CIRCUIT
01 I
1N4005 C3 I
R1 0.47 µF I
12 k 400 v I R11
5W I 24 k
AL I !_5%
LOAD J 2W
r--
RS•
I
3k
_t5%
I R12
05
I 10 k
1N
I 4005
_t5%
I 2W
230 v
60 Hz
03 04
Cl MZ2361 2N5166
40µF lgt MAX
50V 02 30mA
MZ2361
TEMP.
04
MZ2361
R9
4.7 k
•LOW TEMP. COEFFICIENT

FENWELL QR51J1 100 k THERMISTOR load, it energizes slave circuit that fires QS industrial applications where separate trons-
and appllos following ne9atlve half-cycle of formors ore ovoiloble for supplying banks
power to load. Modulation involves divid· of hooters, because switching of load power
ing line frequency into 12-cycle 9roups and on and off at 6 Hz may cause undesirable
4·KW MODULATED-SCR CONTROL WITH applyin9 1 to 12 cycles of each group to flickorlng of incandescent lamps connected
ZERO-POINT SWITCHING-Designed for 230- load, for modulation in 8% steps from 0 to same lino.-"Semiconductor Power Circuits
V a-c line operation. Eoch timo master scr to 100% duty cycle. C2 controls number of Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968,
Q4 applies positive holf·cycle of powor to cycles per aroup. Intended primarily for p6-8.
Dt CONTROLLING HEATER AT 800 F-Tunnel

A44F diode compares output of thermocouple with
reference voltage appearing only al begin·
ning of oach half-cycle. When tunnel diode
switches, pulse is appliod lo ujt operating in
latching mode, for triggoring scr at beginning
of each half-cycle. Will hold lomperaturo
within 20 F of 800 F sot point.-F. W. Gut1•
willer and E. K. Howell, Economy Power
2 Syracuso, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 11.
R1z,D7 OPTIONAL FOR DIFFERENTIAL ACTION (HYSTERESIS)
c,
--- -- ------,I
I
I
240V
60141
5-KW ON-OFF-Usos holf·wovo 1oro voltago 0
switching lo control low-power hot-wire relay

that In turn switches large heater or other
load operating directly across power line. To
Feedback element, reference, and error detec- LOAD
tor (in dashed block) regulate within 0.2%
of thermistor resistance over I 0% variation
in liAe voltago.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition,
R1 0 R6-5600, IW C1- 20.1' fd, IOOV NOTE: ALL RESISTANCES
General Electric, 1967, p 281-282. 112 W,!10"4 UNLESS
~,R
3 • 1.8K'1 o,.o2 .o 3 - GE Ct06F
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
R4 - IKll POT 112W o,,oz.D3 - GE A13A
Rs - IOOll Ta - GE 20102. !Kt> 2s•c THERMISTOR
R7,Re - !Kil K 1- KING SEELEY 63552 llOllCOILI
LOAD·SKW HEATER
LOAD
240W MAX. 1500 IN547
120V
AC
K02107,
1000
KD2108,0R INl531R
K02109 IOV
K02103
----., -
FAN i_
I- - AIRFLOW TO
1
I - - - EQUIPMENT
JI Pl 11__
...
-----'
SPST
COOLING FAN CONTROL-Maintains equip-
240.W HEATER CONTROL-When thermistor ment at preselected temperature by adjusting
T senses that tomporature is below that called volume of cooling air with fan motor spood
for by setting of Rl, transistor switch and scr control circuit, to compensate for variations
are retriggered early in each succeeding in air inlet temperature as sensed by thormls·
half-cycle of a-c input to give full-wave cur- tor. Temperature variation of about 10 C
rent through load, without rfl. Optional will change speed of universal motor lin·
latching circuit R5-CI would, if usod, keep early from standstill to full speed.-H. B.
hoator on until lino switch 51 is opened.- Opladon, Control Circuit Maintains Constant
"Silicon Controlled Rectifier Experimenter's Operating Temperature, Elecfronic Design,
Manual,'' RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967, p 113. Oct. 26, 1964, p 55-56.
824 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANl1 AL
15°A IC·TRIAC HEATER CONTROL-Usos PA·

424 IC zoro•voltago switching trigger com•
bined with triac to givo equivolent of thormo-
+ stat having differential of less than 0.2 F,
TRIAC response limo of only a few seconds, and
SC508IOJ
no rfi. Controlled temporaturo must ftuctu•
ate in order to operate switch, and rcisultant
120V hunting may be unacceptablo for some appll-
l240VI cations.-E. K. Howell, Integrated Circuits for
60Hz Sophisticated, low Cost AC Power Conlrol,
1968, p 23.
(l···I= 240V COMPONENTS]
l6YDCI
llRI COCL
llO~
Cfl2
60H1 IN1692
CRI
IN1692
BATH CONTROL-Low-cast thermistor-opor· Tl

ated controller is ldaal for molten lead and ~~ACLE • ©
other ftuid baths, soldering irans, temporature
• SCRI
ll7V WI 12.6V Cl06YI
ovens, and olher heat loads. May also bo
used to control cooling system such as fan
or air conditioner, by connecting load to nor• @
llRI
mally opon conlact on relay or by reversing NC
CONTACT
connections to secondary winding W2 in
bridge. Will hold lemperaturo within 1 dog CR:S
INl692 Cl
of desired value in range of 20 to 150 F.-
D. R. Grafham, Using low Current SCR's,
ltW'
General Electric, Syracuso, N.Y., Na. 200.19,
1967, p 30.
Tl•· UTC F'TIO OR £QUIV.
Al302 A13F2 6.8K,5W

240 VIC
UPTO 7.5K 0.1

8KW 5W
LOAD
IN4009 Z4XL6.2 Al3F2
A44F
O.IHY SK
2on
+soow
SCR2
C330
_25V
..
sooon
THERMISTOR
AT SET
SCRI POINTIG-E
C6U !0103)
j\
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL WITH B·KW SYN· High-gain control circuit, consisting of ther- F. W. Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy· -
CHRONOUS A..C SWITCH-Under control of mistor in bridge folio.wed by error-signal Power Semiconductor Applications, Gonoral ?'
thermistor, heater Is 1wi1ched on and off ampliflor Q1.Q2 driving SCR2 and SCR3 Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 11.
In whole number of cycles, thereby oliml• through Q3, Q4, and SCR1, maintains tem-
noting rft and malclng r·f fllters unnecessary. poralure of system within I F of sol point.-
WORKING
THERMOCOUPLE
THERMOCOUPLE·DRIVEN CONTROLLER-Low·
6 7 8 level solld-state relay servos as lnexpenalve
trip control that responds to voltage differ•
+ ence betw•en thermocouples in range of 0-
50 mV. Arrangement Is particularly useful
when ambient temperature Is fairly constant.
ACROMAG -Microvolt DC Relay Makos Inexpensive
570 RELAY Thermocouple Trip, Efeclranlc Design, Nov.
29, 1965, p 81.
REFERENCE
THERMOCOUPLE
4
TO LINE
... .,
"'
., ""
140¥
'°"' I
I
I
9.6-KW ZERO-VOLTAGE SWITCHING-Pro· I
vldes either proportional or on-off control
of four 2.4-kW heaters, using master trlac
a • I
'I
Q3 and three slaved triao Q4-Q5-Q6. Con·
trol circuit, In dashed block, consisting of I
feedback olomont, roference, and error dotec:•
I "'
______ J
tor, has regulating accuracy of 0.5% of thor• L-----
mistor resistance for I 0% variation In lino IU·iZZU2W •o-sec.tow A$•10A oa.0,.01,01· GtA•SD
RZ·•t10A •n-Ha a-$0,.ro.Hv 01 01,CI • G(A1)A
voltage.-"SCR Manual/' 4th Edition, Gen• RJ•lllCA AtZ·tCKa cz· 00.. 11.nv 04 ·HAlJf
A4•J914.,ZW MS•21K.tw c:s·o~.400" Z 1 • G£ Z••L•4
eral Eladrlc, 1967, p 280-281. R5•2ZICA.1W RJ4•IOOA C4-04f-'t..ZSV Z2 •G( l4XL.l:I
1K·IGPOT0 V?W Rl5•221CA U-Goi.tc,- Te• GC 10.ot llCtlZ!i•C IME:MnSTOlt
R?·ZZOGi lf"6•69MA C6·5.. rf, "" LllM•UL4 • 24KW K(&TtRS
a&-UOIC.:11 AJ7•c0.Q Ol,OI• GI CIOt'n NOTC &1.L RtSISTORS Ila W)I01'.
Q-HOICA R'l•ICA QS TMltU GS• GE SC41D ~USS OIH(RWISI: $P(CCPl(D
R11
50 k
R1
560
;!.5% R12
04 3900
MZ2361 5·w
VL
120 v
60 Hz
01
1N 03 • A4 THERMISTOR,
4738 MZ2360
8.2 v R9 FENWALL GA45P2
R7 1500
02 4.7 k
MZ2361
R4°
2-KW CONTROL WITH ZERO·POINT SWITCH· controlled, and thermistor R4. Cycling rate size when heater is switched on and off
ING-Cycling rate is controlled by tempora• can be mado slow enough, such as once per without proportional contral.-"Semlcon·
turo, so It will overshoot slightly because of minute, so it will not cause objectlonable ductor Power Circuits Handbook," Motorola,
time lag between heat source, surface being blinking of lights or changos in tv picture Pheonix. Ariz., 1968, p 6-11.
0---...-------------------,----., I
HALF-WAVE CONTROL WITH I-OHM SEN-
SOR-Uses pulse and pedestal zero-voltage
I
switching, with sensors ranging from fraction
12.5 v LOAD -*-cRl
TAP RELAY ... of ohm to 100 ohms. Differential is 0.5%
I
I
I
of sensor rosistanco at set temperature. Cl
12ov RI
RMS --..J is not needed in this circuit, but may bo
60cpa required when. using different type of trans•
Cl
I
former, to give some differentiation for more
CAI SCR2
zero-voltago switching action. Circuit is best
for resistivo loads becauso it is not entirely
CAZ free from rfl. Diodo CR3 (A 138) is not
neoded if load is thermal relay.-J. L. Brook-
mire, Temperature Controls Incorporating
Zero Voltage Switching, Gonoral Electric, Syra-
R1 • 28 OHMS, 4W cuse, N.Y., No. 200.45, 1966, p 5.
CRI • CR2 • G.E. Al3F • A14F
R2 • 2SO OHM POT.
S • < I OHM THRU 100 OHMS
R3 • IK
R4 • IK
~6 ·II(
~5 • IK
LOAD • 12 WATTS TESTED
(RESISTIVE)
QI· G.E. 2N33'IO, 2N3391 OR LONER GAIN TYPES
SUCH AS 2N2925 Oii 2N27 ll SERIE~. C1
KRI • G.E. CI068 [
0.05p.I
KRl _ G .e. c
1068 1c68 MAY &E sumnuno
Rz
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL WITH OPAMP- 200k
Feedback between IC operational amplifler
and temperatura-sonsing bridge gives pro•
portional temperature control and long-term
stability. With amplifler operating as 100-
Hz oscillator, output power lnueases 01
sensed temperature decreases. Response Is 2.2M
obtained to changes as small as 0.01 C.
Thermistor used as sensor is IOOK at 25 C.
Article gives design equation.-H. D. Val-
liant, Exact Temperature Control With Op-
erational Amplifier, Elecrronics, April 3, 1967, Tt •HAMMOND 145H
p 97-98.
r------------,
I 471( IOOI< 47K I
o, 02
I
I
---IN4003_.....
r--
1
OVEN
----------- --, I
1100}lof
I IOWV
I
IOOfdl
10WV1
I
I Rr I
I TA45Ll I
I I
ll5v I I
60hz I
__ JI
L-------------
R1 c,
5.lk IOpf
HEATER
115 v. 60 CPS Pa\'IER
'="
SCR OVEN CONTROL-Circuit varies charge RESPONDS TO 0.02 C CHANGE-Bridge cir·
on capacitor to control firing angle of scr. cuit feeding ultrasensitive solid-stato relay
This, in turn, controls the time that current serves as precision temperature controllor for
flows through heating coll, for regulotlon of small ovon. Rs Is adjusted to oqual thermis-
ovon temperature. Potentiometer R3 ad· tor resistance at desired sot-point tempera•
lusts temporaturo control polnt.-D. E. La ture, which is from 350 ohms at 50 C to 70
Plante, Ser Triggered by Capaci1or Lowers ohms at 100 C.-Ultrasonsltlvo Relay Forms
Cost of Oven Control, Eledronin, Nov. 28, Precise Temperature Controller, E/ecrronlc
1966, p 83-84. Design, Nov. 29, 1965, p 76.
WT TfilGGEROIG LEVEL
P£1l(STAL---11-+-
\
\
L21tW LIWI \
r---- --------~,
~---<>--,._-o-------~ I I
Al
R2
I
DI D2 I
D3
120VllUS
60NI
• II:
L-- - -- - - - - ----'!J
At,AZ • UOO OIUIS, 2 WATTS Ot • GE 2112646
R3 • 4700 - S . 112 W OZ•GC SC46B
A4• THEAIHSTOA,APPAOIC ~OHllS AT Tl • SPRAGUE 3U111923
0P£AATING TEMPUIATLI!(, GE-4H OR [QlllVALENT
A5 • I0,000 OHMS W.W. POTENTIOMET[R 01·04• GE tM693
R6• ~ MCGOKM POTCllTIOMt:TCR D~ •GE Z4XL22
R7• '001(0 1 1/2W 06• GE 1111692
RB• LOOO OtMS. tt2W Cl• 0.l,.,fd.30V
1.2-KW REGULATOR-Phase-controlled proci- to hoator load. Feodback-circuit thormistor turo to within 2% of thermistor resistanco
sion temperature rogulator uses cosine-modi- R4 sensos temperaturo for comparison with RS despite 10% variation in lino voltago.-"SCR
fied ramp-and•podostal phaso control. Trlac roforonco signal In ujt error dotoctor, to con• Manual," 4th Edition, Gonoral Electric, 1967,
supplies full-wavo phase-controllod a-c power trol turn-on of triac. Will control tompera- p 278-279.
-------------------------------~--------
CRI
- ---- __,_ 1
I
--
I
240V R2
RMS
60HZ Cl E
CR2
CRI, CR3 - G-E Al3B OR Al4B

CR2, CR7 - G-E 16Ll423 ZENER
CR4,CR5,CR6 - G-E A13F" OR A14F
RI - t5K, 2W Rl5 - 470,IW
R2 - 470 Rl6 - 220
R3 - IK Rl7, RIB, Rl9 - 100
R4 - I MEG. Cl - 100 IJ.F, 15 WVOC
RS - IOOK e2 - 100 IJ.F", 25 WVOC (115 SEC. PERIOD) FOR 120 VOLT OPERATION
R6 - IK C3 - o.e2 JJ.F, 20%, 400 voe CHANGE TO
R7 • 22K C4 - o.47 JJ.F, 20%, 400 voe RI IOK.IW
R8 • 250K POT 01 - G-E 2N2646 Rl3 150 OHMS,2W
R9 • t5K 02,03,04 - G-E 2N2923 Rl4 l.2K 7W
RIO'- IOK POT 05, 06 - G·E TRIAe (Se450, 10 AMP Rl5 IK 2W
Rll - 5.6 K OR Se400, 6AMP) C3 21.1.F 200VOe
Rl2 - tK SCRI- G-E C5DX2BO C4 IJJ.F: 200VOC
Rl3 - 56 OHM, IW T - 2K AT SENSING TEMPERATURE SCRI CI06B OR C68
Rl4 - 3K, tow (G-E BEAD TYPE BIB· 20202) 05,06 SC408 OR SC45B
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL WITH RFI SUPPRES- for load power, and only 2 F for high gain. whoso poriod of oscillation is dotermlned by
SION-Procision control for convection base- load can be over 10 kW. Cycling period C2 and R4. Dashed lines show method of
board heating systems and combinod central (ON plus OFF time) may bo changed in slave-driving additional triacs.-J, L. Brook-
oir conditioning and eloctric heating systems steps from 1 to 115 s by changing value of mire, Proportional Zero Voltago Switching
has manually ad(ustoble gain control. At C2; that shown Is for 115 s. Circuit Includes Temperature Contro~ General Electric, Syra-
low gain, spread is 21 f from full on to off free-running sawtooth generator Q1-Q2-Q3 cuse, N.Y., No. 201.20, 1966.
l'OR INDUCTIVE LOADS DUAL-OUTPUT MONITOR-Can be used to

CR2 r-M-,
• GEA13A drive lamps or relays responding to both
• 1 I
high ond low temperatures. Secondary of
LOAD#2
Tl Is connected Inside brld90 (lower right).
When bridge Is balanced, its a-c output is
zero and scr receives no goto signal. If
bridge Is unbalanced by raising or lowering
ambient temperature of thermistor T, a-c
NOTES: Ill Tl: 6.3 FILAMENT
voltage will appoar across gate-cathodo of
TRANSFORMER scr, in phase with a-c supply for load·I
121 T: GE 20052 THERMISTOR current and I 80 dog out of phase for load-2
currant. Circuit responds to temperature
changes of 1 to 2 C.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edi-
tion, General Eloctric, 1967, p 167-168.
R;s
5600
120V. R6
10-KW CLIMATE°CONTROLLEO HEATER- 60 CPS 25K
"GAIN"
When temperature drops below reference
lovol datermined by setting of SK rheostat, c, 10 .t
CRt CR2
left-hand 2N3417 transistor of differontlal GE 1111694 GE INl694
input stage conducts more and tums on
C2
2N3251 to givo faster pulsing of 2N489 ujt. 0.1.1
R5
As a result, triac is triggarod more often 100
through output transistor and transformer,
to increase heater load curront.-D. Cooper, OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
SCR's and Triacs-the Revolution Continues, +
Efocfronics World, Aug. 1968, p 25-28.
+----~--""-----CONTROL
+ VOLTAGE
...
r---.,
THERMOSTAT
GE I
40203
330K
l/2W
Cii
N
:
4 <>-+--/_.,'1._, sJ35l OXI
I&. 9
+220
ele
N
11fd.
15V
GE
PA424 10
l&J
II ~·
"'
;
2 5
N 't'
I-
D:
l&J
15K x
(5W) ~
3,600-W IC HEATER CONTROL-Provides pro- by 013T2 programmable ujt and makes de-
.,.~
N
portional control over 2-dag band with cision whether to trigger triac at noxt lino•
repetition rota of 30 s and thermistor time voltage zero.-T. A. Penkalski, R. H. Tull, R. '---------<1~-
constant of 19 s. IC compares thermostat In- C. Cape, Optimum Solid State Control Param• Electric Heating Systems, General Elactric,
formation with reference sawtooth generated eters for Improved Performance of In-Space Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.12, 1968, p 53.
CR2
LI A4CF
II 8QmH
IJOOH>IS
PRECISION I .S·KW HEATER CONTROL-Wiii

maintain load. temporaturo within 1 F of set
t20\IAMS
point. Thermistor should be about 1K at
60CPS set point. Artie lo descrlbos circuit operotlon.
CRt SCA2 SCAJ -D. R. Grafhom, Using Low Current SCR's,
L 7.SVOl.TS 1Nl692 CJ08 CJ08
GE +----11+---""-l/ General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.19,
l4Xl,.7.~
1967, p 34.
SC'tl
CI06'12
Tl).1 :- GE IN29JO OR RCA 40065
SHADED·POLE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL- DI

Arrangement shown Is for heating applica•
tlons requiring sophisticated ramp-and•ped·
estal system having high control gain, for
shaded•pole or psc motors, in response to
thermistor. When used to control cooling
IZOY
coil temperature of air conditioner to prevent 60141
frcieze·up, RS and R6 should be interchanged.
l
Thermistor R6 should be somewhere betwoon
3,000 and 5,000 ohms at temperature doslrod,
RS should be set to provide full-on control
at desired upper temperature limit, and R3
then set for full-off or zero-spood condition
at dosired lower•temporature limit of R6.
Circuit includes r·f noise suppression.-"SCR Ot-D4 : GE A14B Al : 680042W A7 HOll2W
Manual," 4th Edition, General Eledrlc, 1967,
p 220-221.
05; GE A14 A
06: GE INl776
01 : GE 2N2648
A2
RJ
R4
:
:
:
470Kll 112W
5 MEG llZW
IKll 112W
~~ ~:':~ ~~ ...
SPRAGUE llZl2 OR EOUIY.
Cl 8 C2 : 0.1,.1, SOY RS : IOKA IW C4 0.1,.. f 400Y
A6 : SEE NOTE A8 470K4 112W
llOV 220k
AC o,
05
D4
1·
r,
·.'.·
D:s 2070
12V
•'···'
I' Oz
D2 40327 o,
COOLING FAN CONTROL-Ordinary serle .. glued to outside of tuba In condensed mer- of fan.-Y. Alon and M. Jonas, Diode Con•
connected a-c: fan In simple spood-c:ontrol cir· cury region, serves as sensor. Temperature• trols Spaed of Fan That Cools a Thyratron,
cult holds temperature of condensed mercury dependent reverse current of diode, rogu. Elocfronics, Jan. 6, 1969, p 95.
In high-voltage thyratron within 0.5 C of lated by l·m•s pot, Is ampllRod by Q1.Q2
constant temperature. Germanium diode D4, to vary Rrlng angle of Kr and change 1p11d
04
K02103
COFFEE WARMER-RI is adju1ted manually to

give desired ratio of conducting to non•
conducting time of load, over conduction
range of 5 to 95%, with switching occurring
only when input a-c voltage panes through
zero point. Circuit is oxcellent for electric
coffee pots, electric blankell, soldering irons,
and other heater loads up to 1 kW. Does
not produce rfl.-"5ilicon Controlled Rectifier
Experimenter's Manual," RCA, Horrison, N.J.,
1967, p 130.
- - - - -... TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL THERMISTOR
R3 TRIAC R2
2N2222 GESC41B 100
120V
60Hz OIAC
GEST2
TRANSISTOR SENSOR-Single transistor, with CZ

collector connected to case for fast response OJ11ld
to thermal changes, provides high-level out•
put with linearity of I% from -40 to + 125
C.-J. M. Loe, Linear Temperature Sensor Uses
FURNACE BLOWER CONTROL-Thermistor R3 continuous air circulation and maintain lu•
Only a Single Transistor, Eleclronic Design,
responds to changes In air temperature to brication of motor bearlng1.-"SCR Manual,"
Feb. 15, 1970, p 86 and 88.
control a-c power supplied to blower induc- 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 219-
tion motor. RI and its phase control net• 220.
work set minimum blower speed, to provide
03
1N4003
A3
100 k
100
RS AG 3kW
4.3 k 4.3 k HEATING
2W 2W ELEMENT
R2
l17 v
LINE
1 k MPS
6512
C2
0.SµF
200 v
I
01
RT•
02
MCA2935·5
03
R4 MCA2935-5
01 1k
1N THERMISTOR 02
4737 Sk NOMINAL 1N4933
0
Thermiuor, 5 k nominal. Mount in proximity of heated area. to load in full cyclos.-"Somlconductor Power
3-KW CONTROL WITH ZERO-POINT SWITCH- paint of a-c line voltage, to prevent elec- Circuits Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
ING-Load switching is done only at zero tromagnetic interference. Power is applied 1968, p 6-6.
NC
A5
13 IC BLOWER CONTROL-Uses PA436 phoso•
IOK
ZW
control IC with triac to drive psc blower or
fan motor. Cooling application is shown.
~··
120V
60"• 14
For room-heating fan, thermistor and RA aro
9
R1 reversed as at right so increase in tempera-
ZZOK P.>4l6
C1 ture will reduce fan spood. Triac should
TAIAC .05 IZ
match motor rating.-E. K. Howell, Applica·
THER ..ISTOA
lions of the PA436 Monolithic lntogratod
1... _ _ _ _ _o+--+----<1--+06
.J 1 ,,10 5•@ 10 Phaso-Control Trigger Circuit, General Eloc•
RF' FILTER tric, Syracuse, N.Y., Na. 671.9, 1968, p 12.
8 d•/dt SUPPRESSOR COOLING
LOGIC
t
AS "EEOEO ... EATl~G
LOGIC
&OOW
HEATER
AC
150
3K +
tow l}JF
TYPE
2N3241A
CR1 CR2
IOK
HALF-WAVE SCR 600-W HEATER CONTROL-
Regulatos tomporature within 0.2 C, using
singlo scr in roctifter bridgo.-"Silicon Power
p 254.
llOV
AC
35000 AT OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
'"'
..,
•• ... r··-
r· - - - - ---------- ---- ---,
I . .. ... ...
I
•••I ..
,_
~
I
... ...
-
I
I I
WI.TS I I
IOMI I I
[[" 1 QS
I
. ..
I I
I u
I •• I
I
,.__________
I Tl
__.
I
C"I CllM
•• I
~--------------------~ I
"l•HKa
•io·uu
"lt•elKQ,.IOMTT
•a:·•s•roa
ia1·••a
1114-IUS •rJQl'W
11116•tJttl,._J4 WATJ'S
lltlJ'·U"I•
ltlt-»e.tw
U• UlliUNOCIUlllT lMllll 0' GI PlW• CLAW•PHO'fOCU.U lllHGAN.. HUl'WTICAU.Y sr-.10 ~
f'C"CMIMW M.'llC PMOfOCC'-'- 01 M P'-Sll CLIWl"''"°TIXa.L.• •llfHitw.. ICllllCTICM.LY SIEM.ID l,llft
peraturo variations is achiovod with differ-
Al.I, ll!lSISTOltS 1llO'&M1)112 w•JT OC(l'T WtCRI ._.,TlD ential ampliller and ujt, ramp-and-pedestal
3-KW PHASE-CONTROLLED-Regulatos rms in parallel with load, shining on photocell, phase-control, and ujt working wilh scr's.-
value of unRltored phaso-conlrollod vohago provides roquired long averaging time con- "SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric,
across heater or othor resistive load. Lamp stant. Stability against voltage and tom- 1967, p 282-283.
832 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANU.AL
AC
LINE I
HIGH-GAIN IC PROPORTIONAL CONTROL-
Uses PA424 IC zero-voltage switching trigger
fed by thermistor in external circuit that pro·
7
vides narrow, adjustable proportional band
that makes heater power proportional to RA
error of measured temperature from set
point. SCSOB (triac) and 1S·A heater load
13
are connected between a-c lines 1 and 2, with
trioc gate going to terminal 4 (not shown)
of IC. Gives precise and stable control of PA424
temperature. Article describes circuit opera•
tion in detail.-E. K. Howell, Integrated Cir·
cuits for Sophisticated, low Cost AC Power ll
Control, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 2
671.9, 1968, p 23.
Rs
6800.n
3W
AC
LINE 2
+12V
OUTPUT
FAIL-SAFE THERMOMETER-Circuit delivers

Ru
output pulsa conventionally when tempera·
2.7~ turo at PTC thermistor T reaches predeter-
Cz mined critical value, and in addition gives
output pulse if thermistor opens or shorh.
+12V In either case, output pulse shuts down asso·
-6V elated Industrial control system. Circuit Is
11'<914
capable of distinguishing between shorted
thermistor and one having 30 ohms resist-
03 ance. IC operates as differential comparator.
21'<3646 -G. J. Granieri, Fail-Safe Temperature Sensor,
EEE, Sept. 1967, p 132-133.
+14V
IV TlllAC
oc 190ma
SUPPl.Y AC 3300
l11<£ @>14V
LOAD
(Al(( POWER
FACTOOI)
33K
•v
I 6V
:!O"'A
REUIY COIL ZN 80ma
2926
DC
SuPPLY L:: @14V
IC ZERO-VOLTAGE SWITCH-Con be used

for temperature control, driving relay from
8-V d-c source. For larger loads, transistor
can be used to trigger triac. Integrated cir-
cuit here octs as comblnotion threshold AIR-CONDITIONER MONITOR-Bottom lamp is
detector and trigger circuit. Applications in· on at low temperatures, and top lamp when
elude photoelectric and heater centrol.-lnte• temperature rises above sot pe>int. Cost of
grated Circuit Zero Voltage Switch PA424, all parts required is under $1.-R. M. Muth,
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y ., No. 85.21, Digital Circuits with Visual Readouts, General
3/69. Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.3, 1966, p 9.
R5
680.2W
~--~__,~__.v,
Rg AIR TEMPERATURE AND VELOCITY-Used to
...
--~e.--- 10...,0.,.. 114w 027
sense overheating of power supply. If am•
~
·~w
blont tomperature exceeds predetermined
o, SUS
i2v.1w ·~~·.I 2N4990
MOTOROLA
limit for combination of exhaust air or If
IN4746 ...---+--OPti--..,__J MCR2918·2 forced air cooling supply fails, scr fires and
c,. A, o, blows fuse or opons circuit breaker.-H.
OhF 100 Groen, Thermistor Circuit Senses Air Tempera•
1ov· l/4W
ture and Velocity, EEE, March 1969, p 124
and 126.
+12v
IK
ADJUSTABLE DEAD ZONE-Uses IC dlfferen·

tial amplifier in bridge with two transistors
IK
for on-off temperature control having excel-
lent stability at set value. Voltage gain of
IC should be above 20,000, and output im· OUTPUT
CONTACTS
podanco about 1K. Stability can be im·
proved still more by using platinum resist-
ance thermometer in place of temperaturo-
1ensitive resistor RT. Rd sets dead zono.-
---~-
L R. long, Adjustable Dead Zone Improves
Tomporature-Controller Stability, Electronic
Design, July 6, 1964, p 52.
IK
+ISv +ISv
604
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
Oz
5
HEAT GENERATOR
'~" ·~ 04 o,
MATCHED TRANSISTOR
PAIR
··-· IN914
13 3 101 17
R4
-15v 20
3.16k
+15v
. -15v +15v
4,7k
Rt
-t5v
2.49k
Rz
to Or
2Nl711
tM
SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE CONTROL-Cl temperature to hold input offset voltage of lumbo, Regulator Holds Temperature of Chip's
sorvos as temperature sensor and Q2.Q3 as matched pair below 5 mV over 30().MHa Substrate Constant, Electronlo, Fob. 2, 1970,
hooter for holding Q4.Q5 at desired ambient bandwidth.-D. P. DeAngeli1 and M. Pa. p 100.
10K
CRI
+15 v -15 v
100 It
100 It
RI R2
240V
RMS
60cps
CRI - G .(. Al33 - A"8 RS • 820, IO'i. TO SLAVE

C?.2-G.f. Z•Xll2 n ·680. 10>0 ORIVE CKT
CRJ • G .£. IN4(1()9 RIO. 1ax. IO'li. SI
CR4 - G .£. IN@9 Rll • IX Dlod9
CRS - G .(. 16ll•23 Z!NH< Rl2 ·3K, ICW
CR6 • A138 • AU8 RIJ • 56, IW
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETER-Temperature-
CR7 • AIJF - Al4f RU· 470, IW
sensing silicon junction diode, driven by
CRS - AIJF - Al•F c1 • 100 uF, icw voe
C2 ·0.82UF. 20'!., @voe
1 N5288 current-limiting diode giving true
CR9 - AIJF • AUF
RI • IG>:, Z,.•1 Cl ·0.47 UF, 20'4. 400VOC constcint-current operation, drives pcinol meter
R2 -JJa, 10>~ 01 • 02 • G.!. 2NJ390 ·MAY SU8SlllUI! 2N3391 through OEI Model 9125 opamp. Sensing
RJ • 47K OJ· 400V0ll, lOAMP TRIAC • G.E. SC4SO • 10 AMP diode should be on probe using shielded
R• ·SOK POT. G.f. SC400 • 6 AMP ccible. Temperciture coefficient of diode is
SCR • G .E. CSDX280
RS· I.:, 10"\. -1.5 to -2 mV per deg C, which remciins
I ·GLASS COATED 8£AO, lOOK AT SENSING TEMP.
R6 • 3.JK, 10% G.E. TYPE 81610401 • IOOK Al 2S"C constant over wide rcinge of tempercituras.
R7 - I .SK, 101;. Ccin be calibrated in water-ice slurry cind in
HIGH-PRECISION FUll·WAVE SEMIPROPOR· boiling wciter.-Two Electronic Thermcimoters
TIONAL-Provides zoro-voltago switching, for Mediccil/lndustrial Use, Opticcil Electronics,
May be used to slave-drive additional trioc• Tucson, Ariz., No. 10075.
load combinations each having all cempo·
nents at right of R11. CR9 may bo omiHed
if only one triac is being driven. Differontial
is 0.1 F above and below set temperature.
Ar.tide gives changos required for 120-V
operation, at which differential is bettor thcin
twice cis good.-J. L. Broekmire, Temperature
Controls lncorporcitlng Zero Voltcige Switch·
ing, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
200.45, 1966, p 6.
Tl
• • 04 T2
• •
+ c
., z
!:; >
j > ~
..
0
N
!!
....0
00 R23
0
N
0 R
• RI
> VENTILATING
!! MOTOR
®
:=::
c .. OE 4.)f9:"UAAt no11~ 2!\"
~· =~~~~f
R 1• ~I' Rz-i • IK Qft.m • "" dl.m
~· R4 •4.1KoMi ·2 aorun ~I ·O&iSFUUAtit OG4111fd50\"
R.)
1\$
·f-SKctim
• IOOK ot'.m CZ :~~ :::::::~ ::::.d·:~ rt {- ::;:;~oo 2-3\"lZS
Ra
"1R , Ra
·SOK ctu:.
·• ISXob.rai
l.SlC.abm
: ;~:: :: ~; . ~tr:~•R.•·~~3 ;.,O::tlfd
01 •oov Tl t4V er SEC
UtA.ATT
1 • 41 ct11n Ql ·CE DUA4. L • l'JO~ti
1
ftt - S. JK dMft •UO~tn ~ .Cl)Klll&
R 10 • 5K Mm •GI 2RI It :: t~~~b~~t 2~)313
Ru • 4::'0K '*ta pressor is operoting.-T. A. Penkalski, Bettor
BLOWER CONTROL-Provides proportional ture devicitions oither cibovo or below set Room Conditioning via Solid State Controls,
·motor speed control with rft suppression cir· point, because central control determines in- General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., Nci. 200.51,
cuit. Blowor speed is increasod for tomporci· dopondently whethor hoator or cooling com- 1967, p 10.
,,
IC ZERO-VOLTAGE SWITCH-Gives on·off con- .. Ir
trol of heater load with only 0.2 F differential
I
when usod with solid·stato thermostat con-
sisting of thermistor RT and set-point poten- ., 1
I
I
tiometer in serios. Triac Q turns off at end

of each half-cycle and removes power from .CV
. I
,,,
I
I
•($fSTAllU
>CATI.A
LCA0
heater, to provide zero-voltage switching of I
heater. With appropriate trioc rating, IC can •ac-.i 'I

I
control heater loads from 500 to 4,150 W on
..
I
supply voltages up to 277 V a-c.-T. A. Pen-
kalski, Better Room Conditioning via Solid
., I
I
' - - - - - - - - ________ J
State Controls, Goneral Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 200.51, 1967, p 4. "
..
llOV 5.6 K TYPE

AC 2W IN3193
1.2KW HEATER
TYPE
IN3193
RCA
40319 FULL-WAVE 1.2-KW ZERO-SWITCHING-Uses
anticipation-typo control with two thermistors
as sensors. Book describes operation in
dotail.-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual,"
4.7K
AC
5000fi AT OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
MRI REL.AY OR
OTllER 6 VOL.T 1.0AO
-==
CR2
A44F
LOAD
RECEPTACLE
Tl 0
TEMPERATURE-OPERATED RELAY-Thermistor •
in bridge energizos relay through transistor WI
and scr when heat is called for. Accuracy
is within 1 deg in temperature range of 20- @
llRI
150 F. For illumination control, cadmium NC
sulfide photocell Is used in place of thermistor CONUCT
(If MIOTK£R
R1 .-Precision Tomperature Control, General RELAY 1$
TH( LOADI Cll:S
Electric, Auburn, N.Y., No. 630.15. IN1692 R1
2204
RESISTIVE
LOAD
------1
R1 SCR 2 I
100 fCR2
o---..___________._ -- -- J'''
CRI • G .E. Z•XL6.2 ZENER DIOOE
RI ·6.81\, 'Pl, 10%
c1 - 0.22 uF, 10%, 200 voe
C2 - 0 .33 UF. 10%. 10 voe
-15 -ISY R2 • •.71\,
R' Is mode equal to thermistor resistance at (RJ • R•) ·TOTAL RESISTANCE" I .251\
CORRECTING THERMISTOR LINEARITY-Com·
SCRI • G .E. CIOOI OR G .E. C68
binin9 opamp and senor with thermistor cantor of desired temperature range. R3 11
RS· 100 OHMS
boosts output voltage 150 times without OJll• odiusted so Vo Is -0.067 V.-J. M. Nemchlk
SCR 2 • G .E. C20S
coodlng submilllwatt rating of thermistor, and and R. J. Fritsch, Circuit Improves Thermistor's T • 100 OHM THERMISTOR AT SENSING TEl.V'!RATU~E.
makes output voltage true linear fundlon of Unoarlty and Boosts Output, Electronics, Juno CAN BE GlASS COATlD 8fAD OR HIGHER DISSIPATION
TYPES. MAY USE G,E. TYPE 3005' (1000HMS"~2SoC).
temperature over range of -20 C to 70 C if 9, 1969, p 99-100.
HALF•WAVE CONTROL-Uses pulse ancl peel·
100 WATT HEATER LOAO
ostal zero-voltage switching. Voltage is ap•
pliecl to load for all of oach negative half·
cycle, whilo positive half-cycles are switched
on and off In semlproportional manner as
GE C5B called for by thermistor T. Sensing cliffor-
OR ential is 0.25 F above ancl below set point.
Cl06B 120 VAC Zero-voltage switching action eliminates need
MERCURY THERMOSTAT/SCR CONTROL-Ser 60CPS
for rfl flltorin9.-J. L. Brookmlro, Temperature
servos as current ampllfler for sensitive mer-
Controls Incorporating Zero Voltage Switch·
cury·in-gla11 thermostat and as main load
GE 1N538
Ing, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
switching element. Can sense changes as
CRI -CR5 200.45, 1966, p 4.
small as 0.1 C. With thermostat open, scr
tri99ers on each half-cycle and delivers RI
O.lpl 5101<
power to heater. With thermostat closed,
scr can no longer trigger and heater gots no
power. MoJClmum current through mercury 'TWIST LEADS TO MINIMIZE
PICKUP
of thermostat Is below 250 p.A rms.-"SCR
HG IN GLASS THERMOSTAT
Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric, 1967, (SUCH AS YAP AIR Diii. 206·44
p 168. SERIES; PRINCO# Tl41, OR
EQUIVALENT)
HEATER
SK
NEON-TRIGGERED SCR~lgh-rosistance ther·
IOOK mistor determines amount of power delivered
A0578 Tl-40A2 to heater, Desired temperature 11 set with
TOOK pot.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Neon
Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Slgnalite,
THERMISTOR Neptune, N.J., p 124.
relay 3522 2 4 7 68870

240fi 12V J10/A1
8ZY88·C6V2
8ZY95
640µF C12
+ 116111 +
T 40011F
8 125111
FCUOI
10
ion
1'18w1 _..___..._ ___ - -
IOG-300 C PRECISION ON-OFF CONTROL- than 0.5 deg C, actual overall precitlon de- C for range coverod.-Triacs-Oporatlon and
Although oledrlcal precision with thermistor pends on thermal time constant of objed Use, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elncl·
sensor and FCLI 01 IC level detector 11 better being heated, and is generally about 2 dag hovon, The Notherlanclt, No. 17, 1969.
150 WATT {~~~Ir~ LOAD
120VRMS GE
2N2646
60CPS
UNIJUNCTIO
GE
CI06B PHOTODEVELOPER HEATER CONTROL-Ujt-scr
SCR circuit varies power 1t11plessly to 150-W
Z4XLl2 T Cl
ZENER 0.02 hooter in response to thermistor In liquid
GE
THERMISTOR 47 bath.-D. R. Grafham, Precision Temperature
CSK (.1i)2s•c Controller, Gonoral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
No. 201.9, 1965.
*REVERSE THERMISTOR AND RI FOR COOLING LOAD
-1
l.8kn
!118WI
lkfi
l'leWI
·jl 9
4
FCLIOI
8
1oon
relay 3S22 247 68870

12V 310/AI
2322 680 90006
ON°0FF TRIAC TRIGGERING CONTROL-Suit· FCL101 level detedor and transistor.-Triacs-

ablo for range of 30 to 45 dog C. Uses Operatlon and Uso, Philips, Pub. Dept., El-
thermistor with positive temporaturo coeffl· coma Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands, No.
cient of resistance, to aduato relay through 17, 1969.
NOTE: To locato additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, uso the index at tho back
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcebook of Eloctronlc Circuits,'' published by
CHAPTER 88
Test Circuits
T2 C2 6.Y VERSION OF CONTINUITY TESTER-Pro-

ducos tono in oarphono when continuity ex-
ists botween points in circuit to which tost
leads are touched. Reversing test loads will
tell whether path contains electrolytic, be-
VIA VIB cause for one polarity tone will die away
,_ in few seconds; for resistive path, tone is
I '\ same loudness for both polarities. Tone
\ I changes with resistance of measured path,
R2 giving rough indication of amount of resist-
Tl Cl ance; measuring assortment of known re-
~]
4·!S 9 sistance values will show how tone changes.
6.3 SINGLE Parts values are not critical: Cl and C3 25
VOLTS EARPHONE µf; C2 0.005 µF; CRl·CR2 IN34AS; RI 150;
R2 470K; R3 250K; Tl 6.3 V 0.3 A filament
RI
transformer; T2 any audio interstage trans•
former; VI almost any twin-triode such as
12AX7, 12AT7, ar 12AU7.-"Hobby Man·
ual," Gonoral Eloctric, Owensboro, Ky., 1965;
TEST LEADS p 175.
A-C~
VOLTMETER
100
R6ft R~
4k 600
TEST
St A
R:
300
CAL
ADJUST
100 R3*
R10 ft
60
Ru Rg C2
100
5.62 k ft 100 *PRECISION
20 R2 RESISTORS
30
at gote of fot pormits use of different types
R~ of a-c: voltmotors, including digital voltmeters,
10 for reading transconductance values. Arti·
cle gives design equations and detailed cali·
brotion and test procodures.-C. D. Todd,
FET TESTER-Measures broad rango of trans• bias conditions. Automatically compensates Tokins tho Measure of FET Transconductance,
condudance values, evo~ under abnormal for most sources of errors. Range switch E/oclronics, AprU 3~ 1967, p 88-92.
838
TEST CIRCUITS 839
SCR·TRANSISTOR TESTER-Simple circuit turns

on lower DEVICE S/C lamp to indicato that
solid-stato dovice undor test is short-circuited.
Good device turns on only upper lamp.
Other fault conditions turn both lamps on 12.6 V C.T.
or leave both off. Practically any jundion 115 v oc
diodes can be used In test circuit. Not rec· 60-
ommended for devices having loss than 12
V colledor·baso voltage, peak collector cur·
rent less than 100 mA, or dissipation below
50 mW.-D. Wadsworth, Go/No Go Tester 0
Checks SCRs, NPN and PNP Transistors, Elec• 6.3 V,40 mA

tronic Design, June 6, 1968, p 112.
E B c c e E
pnp npn
A G c
SCR
r:
540~
6810.n.
+ o--._.,,w.;..,,_.-<
>
..."! Ic:
12.&Y ..-0
TRANSISTOR ANALYZER-Chocks both power
2A
and signal transistors without removal from
e
circuits. Identifies npn or pnp, as well as
lead connections. Roads d-c gain dirodly.
Measures collector-emitter and collector-base
ssc.1111&1. 10~.n
leakage currents.-Seco Model 260 Transistor
Analyzer, Electronic• World, Oct. 1967, p
z.n
76-77 .
•
2-
• •
• •
BETA• • icco
DYNAMIC--.0 elc10 ""='"
FUNCTION SELECTOR
VARIABLE CAPACITORS: 7-IOOpf l.Onf

OC BIAS INPUT
5.6k
47 IN919 1.0nf VcE
IPEAKI
OUT .
FEEO-THRU
CAPACITOR
I.Ont ing cost of r·f amplifler circuitry. Articlo
gives design equations for utilizing this r·f
breakdown phonomonon, and presents block
T.___.,__....T 0.1,uf diagram for automatic go•no•go produdion
- ::!: setup for making r·f breakdwn test in 30 ms
per transistor .-P. Schiff, R-F Breakdown
TRANSISTOR R·F BREAKDOWN TEST-Meas· frequency, using sine-wave r·f input. Once Phenomenon Improves the Voltage Capability
uros r·f breakdown voltogo while transistor limit of transistor is determined, it can be of a Transistor, Electronics, June 12, 1967,
is operated above its specified alphd-cutofF oporated at much higher frequencies, lower• p 97-101.
840 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS ::MANUAL
+5v
ALL TRANSISTORS
TYPE 2N3646 1k 1k
STOP
Rz o,
10k 1N4154
0.5 SEC.
r--i =
___tui_ ____ ...fl..tL
':' I I
I I OUTPUT
~UN STOP
switched off in middle of cycle. 01 keeps
2·HZ CHECKOUT-Exira transistor 02 in low• watch logic oporale visual indicator, with oscillotor running until cycle is ended.-P. T.
speed oscillator permits chocking of digital no risk of false output because of contact Rux, Oscillotor Waits for Switch ta Ouiot
circuits al 2 Hz, slow enough so operator can bounce in switch or because oscillator is Down, Electronics, Nov. 13, 1967, p 103.
MC1530/31 MC1533 MC1709

MCl430/31 MCl433 MC1709C
- 0.001
FROM
._------------------1---+--+-------------------+---+----------------------+---<DRIVE
CIRCUIT
0.001
Lo 2k ALL CAPACITOR VALUES

0
IN µF UNLESS NOTED
.. 1sv
HI Switch al lower loft changes input pins.-B.
OPAMP TESTER SOCKETS-Provides nine dif· IC opamps during incoming inspection. Re- Bolos, An Operational Amplifier Tester, Mota•
feront sockets for lasting commonest tvpes of quires power supply and drive circuit. rola, Phoenix, Aris., No. AN-400, 1967.
TEST CIRCUITS 841
SI
IOK
RI
CONTINUITY TESTER-Gives reliable ind.ica· 2N363B

tion of continuity down to 0.1 ohm on go/ 02
no-go lamp or by tone in earphone, with no +
risk of damage to sensitive transistors and Bl_
JV--
integrated circuits. RS should be about 0.1
ohm less than maximum value for which con-
2N2714
tinuity indication is desired. Use RX2 ter- 03
minals for chocking down ta 0.1 ohm.-C. D.
Todd, A Sub-Ohm Continuity Tesler, Elec-
tronics World, Feb. 1969, p 78-80.
DI
IN4152
0.4 RB
+15 voe
ICHASSIS
1N400l I PAHTITION
OPAMP TESTER-Includes drive circuit shown,
IS753 providing horizontal swoop drive for stand-
ard X·Y scope, foed to input terminals of
all nine opamp test sockots, and 60-Hz volt·
~..
5 k_ _ _ _ _ _ TO SCOPE age al point A, oblainod from s!Kandary of
HORZ. power supply transformor. Dovelopod as
AMP.
simple and inoxpensive tostor for uso by cus-
ADJ.
tomers in chocking shipments of opamps.
49. 9k , 1''0 Cro display shows transfer function of
opamp.-B. Botos, An Oporational Ampllfler
Toster, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., No. AN-400,
---~ . . . ------+----'VV'v-----
5tn, r7i
IS TOPUTS
DEVICE
1967.
.15 voe
SWl
r 1
·6 voe
50f? 360!?
IW l 1 2W
50011F
25V
5001tF
25V
son 360!?
lW 1/2W
'-----------+--+--t-ll-_....,__-+--------~---"Vllv----4.....-'\/l/lr--+----~-6VDC
THIAD
F-40X
L ___ _. Q) MATCHED 1N3793's
MOTOROLA -15 voe
OPAMP TESTER POWER SUPPLY-Uses con· MDA920A-2 @ MATCHED IN753"s
venllonal shunt zoner regulator, with pilol off indicator and as bloedor for capacitor An Operalional Amplifier Tester, Motonla,
lamp bridged across flllor capacitors as on- charge aftor power is turnod off.-B. Botos, Phoenix, Ariz., No. AN-400, 1967.
TRANSISTOR LEAKAGE-Basic circuit measures LI

I reverse-biased collector to base current. R4
0 0
+o-----........MJ
A5 ~ limits meter current to I 00 p.A if transistor
under test is shorted. Used in battery· TIME
- - 81 1.0~ GENERATOR
- 6.TSV powered tester that checks gain, leakage,
+ I
I and breakdown voltage of small-signal and
----'
OOTTEOLIHE
power transistors. Also checks diodes.-M.
0·2IOA LEAK· J. Moss, Versatile Transistor Tester, Electronics
AGE TEST Ot<LY CONNECTOR OUTPUT
World, Aug. 1967, p 56-58.
CONTACT
8 ~
I
... I
r•D------~- ...
I .oRI INPUT
~~ I :
I I
L,.L.,o--+-.. ---.j.._...______,
CONTACT°CHAnER TESTER-Immunity of scr
to noise excitation makes it far superior to
Bl +_ conventional thyratron In discontinuity taster
tl.75V-- used for monitoring circuit Interruptions in
0•50~A POWER TRANSISTOR GAIN-Basic test circuit 10°µs range. Once scr conducts and turns
.---------..(Ml + for measuring beta or gain, using higher col· on indicator lamp, 52 must be opened mo•
A7 lector current than for checking small-signal mcnlarily to reset circuit.-J. A. Ray, Dis-
12• transistors so higher leakage currents of continuity Tester is Insensitive to Noise, "400
power transistors do not mask true measure- Ideas for Design Selected from Electronic
AS
68• ment. Collector current is sot at 50 mA, Design," Hoyden Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p
corresponding to beta of 100.-M. J, Moss, 152.
8 Versatile Transistor Tester, Electronics World,
Aug. 1967, p 56-58.
R31A IM£G
+~ov
AZG
ft3t8 200k
221(
AIT
A31C IOOK J60
0
ASIO ZOK e&SE
CUAACNT
SELECTCA 0
ASIC JOI( I
RSIF 1.01< BAS£ DIAGRAM

Ut<IJUNCTION
TRANSISTOR
SIA
CCCWl
0
!! (CW)
[!]
p•n•p OF' n•p•n
SI T£R..,NALS CODE
AZ
•l'O
...---'WAWS2w•....., 100
..._ _,....20
A19 ASH
ISK
T.P.2
1011:
------- 2
IU20
TO VERT
~
RIO
~----~-+INPUT OF
2.ZK --=-51'-"GO-----....-.fi"l CID SCOPE
OJ
R6 .,_~Sl~[o-..-------------------.._-+-~gOPt
GND
1 .:ICU
TPI 1
1135
L•F
LCVEL
=~~~~~c CGMMON ..,... 44, and 50 V. Note that negative common
SOK L,._ °1 cs
~~~~=! roturn is not grounded to chassis; this permits
_,.,__ _ _ _
I...... 0.1
switching chassis ground for testing either
TRANSISTOR CURVE TRACER-Generates fom· design prablems. Parts cost is loss than pnp or npn transistors.-M. Chan, Transistor
ily of characteristic curves for display on $50. Construction details ore given. Re· Curvo Tracer, Electronics World, Jan. 1968,
scope, as aid to solution of transistor circuit quires rogulatod power supply providing 12, p 55-58, 60, and 66.
TEST CIRCUITS 843
A IOK
SI
R1 J 11!5
B 60-
tot IOk TEST
JACKS
Rz
c
50
A079
ll3 CAPACITOR LEAKAGE-Blinking neon lamp
9.9k with SI closed indicates capacitor connected
to test jacks is leaking.-E. Bauman, "Appli-
R4 cations of Noon lamps and Gas Discharge
D M Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p ISO.
100
E +
81 -
6.7sV--
K
0·SO•A
~------6---'MI +
F Rs A6 A8 A4
1k 300~
'·" 62k
L
R4
G
100 B
R3 9.9k
K
AUTOMATIC OPAMP TESTER-Simple, versa· are output lines. Resistor values must be
tile interface fixture circuit shown permits adjusted for apamp under lest; thoso shown SMALL-SIGNAL TRANSISTOR CURRENT GAIN-
checking of opamps and other linear cir· are for Amelco 809. Article gives setup Basic circuit for measuring current gain of
cuits with automatic testers designed pri· and measurement procedures.-R. Mcintyre, pnp transistor uses base current of about
marily for digital IC's. Opamp is con• Adapter lets Digital IC Tester Check on 20 µA. Used in battery·poworod tester that
nected through pins E and F, and receives Operational Amplifiers, Electronics, July 21, checks gain, leakage, and breakdown volt·
power from pins M and N, while K and l 1969, p 94-96. age of small-signal and power transistors.
Also checks diodes.-M. J. Moss, Versatile
Transistor Tester, Electronics World, Aug.
1967, p 56-58.
r----------------u-----------------1 0
F£T S OR TRAl<SISTORS
UNDER TCST
:I 116 IK
I~
I
: R7 2K : I •
I
••
• : ~~0 e R8 UK ZO : I RIB
I A9 IOIC 5 10 I I
t.S1C
RZS
• I
I
I
A2
100
8 SI
MAl<UAL Oii
MOTOR DRIVCN
RIO 20 IC
I
I
I
I
EIS
a.sic ....o,\AM2N7-··--'----C:Jo)....I As. I RllH K,5 )

TRANSISTOR
AZ$ 'lT Rl2100K CUAREtn
VOLTAGE
9.tK .z STEP SIU .2 STEP SIZE
R29 (VOLTS) Al) 200 K (•Al BIG
IOK ..........wlow--•
·' 114 K A17
At• »OK .05
R25
010
ld02&.
RS • • AIS IMH 02 01
101( 100 AtG 2Ml:O
rt To
HORIZ. GND VERT
IN4S0l
CURVE FAMILY GENERATOR-Used with cro 00 1:;' 0

0-IZOV 11•nes
stepper switch 51 can be driven at
300 rpm, if all curves are to appear
about
to display entire familios of characteristic Fl SA 117VA~. simul·
curves for junction or field·offect transistors laneously.-H. l. Moore, Transistor Curve
on cro. Article gives construction details. Tracer, Eleclronics Worlcl, March 1968, p 53-
For genorating five curves and base line, 56 and 84.
Vee STAGE n :lTAGE n+I +24\!

+6V
+12 v
500ll
10 VOLT INPUT COMMON
:-rI
0.1 jl.f PULSE ONLY IF INPUT
TEST IS PASSED
= 0
:~; 0 0
STEPPING RELAY
\
'=
INDICATORS FOR SEQUENCE TESTER-Ser and
VEE lamp for each position of stopper rolay pro•
-6V vlde visual Indication of passed tests and
SINGLE-ENOED COMMON-MODE GAIN. ihourlll•1N Indicate position of stepper. All lamps ara
IC R·F AMPLIFIER TEmR-Determlnes single- resat by opening 24-V supply for few sec•
ended common•mode gain of IC r-f amplia ends. Lamp Is ON at stepper position, but
fler at 1 kHz. With variable·frequoncy slg· stays ON only If passed-test pulse arrives
nal source, test can be made over entire and turns on scr before stepper moves to
useful frequency range.-"Llnear Integrated noxt position.-E. Pacla, Visual Readout for
Circuits," RCA, Harrison, NJ., IC-41, p 200. Tester Uses Silicon-Controlled Switch, "400
Ideas for Design Selected from Eledronic
Design," Haydon Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p
146-147.
+12V
TO
LOGIC
+INPUT
I lmh
I LI
I
I lmh 200
R1
I L2
I
J_UNKNOWN lmh
L3 +
T 26VOLT
FLOATING
I lmh
SUPPLY
I L4
I RESET
I lmh TO
I Ls DIGITIZER
I
I lmh
Lg
I
-INPUT
CAPACITOR CHECKER-Used for measuring 26 VOLT
capacitance values even when capacitor Is l.Sk FLOATING
shunted by resistors. Unknown capacitor Rs SUPPLY
and inductors form tank circuit that gener- +
ates damped sinusoidal whoso frequency Is
inversely proportional to copacitance. Wava +12v -12v
is amplified by differentlol amplifler Ql•Q2
and squared by IC dlfForentlal comparator Ing of C3 for first quarter-cycle to give volt• Ristad, Resonance EfFocts Yiold ln·Clrcult
whose output turns on 1olid-1tota switch for ago proportional to pulse width and to ca• Capacitance Checks, Electronics, Oct. 14,
duration of first pulse. This Initiates chars• pacitanco, for roading with digitizor.-C. H. 1968, p 119-120.
TEST CIRCUITS 845
TO DEVICE
UNOER TEST
4.Tk
ZENER TESTER-Permits quick check of :zener
voltage and current characteristics of un•
marked zener diodes. Can also be used to
chock forward voltage drop across diodes.
Adjust variable resistors until desired values
of current (0.2, 1, 5, and 20 mA) flow
through milliammeter. Uso heat sink with -::- 22.5V l.2k
transistor.-G. V. Pollottino, Simple Zoner• +
Diode Tester Uses Single Transistor, Electronic
Design, Oct. 25, 1967, p 140.
T2 C2
AURAL CONTINUITY TESTER-Continuity is in·

dicatod by tone In earphone, ollmlnoting
need for watching meter. Sends only very
R3 small current through circuit under test,
VIA VIB
minlmlzln9 damage to components under
\ test. None of ports ore critical; Vl con be
almost any twin-triode hovlns 12.6·V flla·
SINGLE
ment, such as 12AX7, 12 AT7, or 12AU7.
4 5 EARPHONE T2 is any intorsto90 audio transformer.
R2 Values ore: Cl 25 µf; C2 0.005 µF; CRI
I N34AS; Rl 150; R2 470K; R3 250K. R3
adiusts tone; If not hoard, reverse connoc·
lions to ono winding of T2.-"Hobby Manual,"
General Electric, Owensboro, Ky., Socond
Edition, 1965, p 174.
TEST LEADS
+6v
VOLTAGE POLES
CURRENT
POLES
A/O
CONVERTER
3k SWl8 SWl68
CURRENT
POLES r
I
r
I
I I
.__ _____________
VOLTAGE POLES L ,____J
L
CUP CORES
FERROXCU8E
1107PL00-4C4
1I
')';... .·. 4k 13k
30k
I
I
I
. "~ ~ .. .I
IN
I
2k
I
I ~----&&-----+
390
pt I
VOLlA11I:.
1~
3N76 POLE
+6v -6v
7 POWER
GROUND -:- GROUND SHIELD, ONE OUNCE COPPER,
0.0014 in. THICK
_ _J
FOUR-WIRE RESISTANCE CHECKER-Used in is connected. 14-MHz Hartley Q2 turns on grounds for four-wire resistance measuro-
computer-controlled component testing in current and voltage switches in about 2 µs. monts.-C. H. Ristad, Switched Oscillator
which voltage or current drive is applied to Transformer provides Isolation between Controls Four-Wire Resistance Checks, E/ec•
component under test and appropriate meter switch control and measurement circuit Ironies, July 6, 1970, p 78.
Ee l50VOC---ci1..1..1~ •0.43V
CLEAR
R R
82k 82K
NO•GO GO NO-GO GO
l.()K!l
Sl!l -----'.,\'I,,___OUTPUT
51!?
WIRE I WIRE 2
TRANSISTOR CHIP TESTER-Variation of cir· cable in ns, according lo equation given in

culating loop test is used to check switching article. Frequency counter Is used to count
NEON CABLE TESTER-Simple and economical speed of transistor chips beforo committing number of switching operations and thereby
tester for one or more wires uJOs neon lamps them to ASLT module for IBM 360/91 com- determine switching speed.-R. F. Sechler, A.
with different Aring potentials. NO-GO puter. Transistor drives itself on and off R. Strube, and J, R. Turnbull, ASLT Circuit
lamp glows only whon cable under test is at rate determined by sum of its turn-on Design, IBM Journal, Jan. 1967, p 74-85.
open.-E. Baumon, "Applications of Neon and turn-off delays and electrical length of
Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalito,
-30v
D1 D2
y,:.
IN645 IN645
I~
I,
91-I
15 msec f"'
-30v
1-
0.2µ,f
+30v
R4
!OM
LAMP SHOWS NARROW PULSES-Uses fat, ms. Lamp system is equally as effective for circuits.-W. A. Magoo, Stretching Video
gated into conduction while 15-ms pulse at troubleshooting pulse circuits as moro ox• Pulse Koops Indicator On, Electronics, March
test point in radar rocoiver is slowly dis- pensive oscilloscope systems. Can also be 4, 1968, p 90.
charged, to hold indicator lamp on for 180 used for testing color tv and f·m multiplex
+-4·5V
0--
SE
R1 R2 R3 R4 Rs R5 R7 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 RIG
330 220 220 33 22 22 3·3 470 560 56 18 270 10 10
kn kn kn kn kn kn kll n n n n n n n
3 4
2 4
2 5 01
SA BAll4 Sc
6
5
So
R17 R1e
------, p-n-p 100
n
2·2
kn
c I
Transistor t
unde>r tczst1
-v..
" _____ _JI
n-p-n Switch positions
Sc
se2 Position Ba so c urr .. nt Position Motor r.sd.
TRANSISTOR TESTER-Measures collector cur·
rent of transistor undor test, using 1-mA p-n-p I 0 I lmA
2 IOµA 2 3mA
motor with suitable shunts. Switch permits five ranges for measuring static forward cur- 3 30µA 3 IOmA
measuromont of collector-emitter revorso rent transfer ratio.-''Transistor Audio and 4 IOOuA 4 30mA
leakage current while baso current of tran• Radio Circuits," Mullard Ltd., London, 1969, 5 300,IJA 5 IOOmA
6 lmA
sistor is zero. Switch SA gives choice of p 180.
TEST OIROlTITS 847
-22.5V
IK
PHASE-SHIR NETWORK TESTER-Simplo am·

IK
0 pliflor serves for evaluation of distributed·
IOOpf parameter networks for i·f tuned amplifiers.
-1. F. Barditch, Adapting Conventionol VHF
Equipmont to Molecular Elodronics, Electronic
270 pf
'----------t 1-----<? IOK
Design, Fob. 17, 1964, p 44-51.
-910 -30V
CRI
., . l LF
Cl IN497
1500,.1 n__120VAC
50·60cps
':'
GO-NO-GO FET TESTER-Produces avdiblo R2 RS

tone when good fet is properly inserted in 22K 2.2K
test terminals at loft. Fol under test servos
as half of low-frequency mvbr, with lower
D DRAIN
fol of tester as other half, Upper fet servos
as buffer for complomontary•transistor out.
put stage. May be used on fet production
line to verify connections and operation be·
fore final encapsulation.-C. R. Perkins, "Ap·
plication of MOSFET Devices to Electronic
Circuits.'' Hughes, Nowport Beach, Col., 1968,
p 2.
G GATE
S~ SOURCE
HRN83180
C41
so,.1
40!!
B , SUBSTRATE
.,,.
-15v
20k > i i - - - ,
50k
!Ok
.Zo-c
Ezco·cl
TIP33
{TEXAS
rv OSCILLATOR INSTRUMENTS)
=
:E:
POWER
SUPPLY
UNDER
TEST
Euo·cl
10k
REGULATOR TESTER-Measures dynamic out· cies vp to 500 kHz. A-c component from nal response without lowering gain appre-
pvt impedance of regulated power supply, oscillator and d-c component from pot are ciably.-R. D. Guyton, A Dynamic Load
using high-gain feedback amplifier that ac• fed into opamp. Transistor circuit connected Tester for Regulatod Power Supplios, Elec·
cvralely sets a-c load current at frequen• to pin 7 improves high.frequency large-slg· tronits, Feb. 2, 1970, p 98.
E9
R R
St
IPUSH
lO TESTI 1 lCTAL t---r----t--1
UNDER icxfJ
01
2N708
CJ Dz
IOVl50mA
PILOT LAMP
+9V~
TEST
pF t---t-IOOO-tt-p-F,.__IN~3~6-0~0--t-1
NO-GO NO-GO GO c::::::i
T2-32-I • T2-32-I ,cfd Rz

lk
pF
T2-32-I T2-32-I
RESET
WIRE I WIRE 2 CRYSTAL TESTER-Will check any crystal In
ranee of 3.5 to 90 MHz almost instantly.
Crystal is inserted In test socket and switch
SI pushed. If crystal Is good, untuned Col·
NEON HARNESS TESTER-Compact and inox• pltts oscillator goes Into oscillation, and its
pensive neon flip-ftop circuit continuously output signal is rectified to turn on Q2 and
monitors oach individual wire in cable pilot lamp.-M. Kaufman, Self°Containod
harness. Resistor values depend on E; for Crystal Tester, EEE, July 1970, p 84.
250 V, R is 220K.-E. Bauman, "Applications
of Neon Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes,"
Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p 142.
+ 11~111--_- R I - - .
TRANSISTOR BREAKDOWN-Same circuit can
be used to measure collector breakdown to 11.f~v :lv m
emitter with base open and collector break. RZ
down to base with emlttor opon, for up to 111n
50 V breakdown. This felt provides data r------
for deciding if givon transistor should bo
used In high-voltage circuit. Can also be 1
I
used to measure breakdown voltage of zener I
diode, and for determining whether given 8
transistor is germanium or silicon.-M. J.
Moss, Versatile Transistor Tester, Electronics
World, Aug. 1967, p 56-58.
+
SI SHOWN IN ••NP NM POSITION
81 -=-6.7SV
S2 .. "SMALL SIGNAL POSITION N
+ S3 " "GAIN" POSITION

e2--=..4sv S4 " "NORMAL" POSITION
22K
:.~4a__.,.._ 68
R9
R2
IMEG
S4110---
+ "'' 12K SOI
----oc
R7
55
Sic
S211
R6 S3c
300 K
R3 68K RS
S4o
R4
TRANSISTOR/DIODE TESTER-Circuit features battery supply, so te1t11r is ready for instant gives operating instructions, along with
simplicity of operation and lack of critical use. Circuit doslgn makes It virtually im· changes needed to use lOO·µA meter.-M.
adjustments, for chocking gain, leakage, and posslblo to damage oithor metor or transistor J. Moss, Versatile Transistor Tester, Eleclron·
broakdown voltaee of small-signal and powor undor test oven If switches are set wrong. lea World, Aug. 1967, p 56-58,
transistors. No on·off switch is noeded for Also makes zenor breakdown tosts. Articlo
TEST CIRCUITS 849
100
SURPLUS-CRYSTAL CHECKER-Providos quick
porformanco chock of used or surplus crystals
often available for as little as 10 cents each.
r 50
Tube circuit operating from a-c: lino will 01• mh '22K
cillato for crystals throughout 2-30 MHz

range and for fundamental crystals in 200-
SOO kHz range. (Transistor oqulvalont was
extremely critical as to frequency.) Good
crystal gives meter reading of 0.3 to 1 mA,
whlle bad crystals road below 0.2 mA.
Chocker is easily calibrated with a few good
crystals.-E. H. Marriner, Tho Crystal Checker, 1450.
• u; ... t
CQ, July 1964, p 30-31. ...
n•n
10nF
+
ov
Es
+11V
•12V
non 1101\
ov
I Ok A
ov ov
LAMP TESTER-Measures deviation in current
ov IWJ
of lamp under lost from that of standard
lamp. Gives high accuracy, because com• +12v
ponont variations produce proportional out•
put error anly In tolerance reading, not In
total measured current. Philips DOA42 IC tivo indication, drcuit at right of dashed
opamp gives 100 times amplification. With linos can bo added, to drive lamps or other Ul
standard lamp LAs in drcuit, either R3 or indicators showing that lamp Is outside uppor uon
Vrof is adJustod for zero output of opamp or lower tolerance limits determined by lOK lion from Standard Using A DOA42 Circuit
os Indicated by zero-cantor voltmotor. lamp pots connoctod to DZD40 Phillps IC zero do- Block, Phlllps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind·
testing can now bo carried out. For posi- todors.-P. Havas, Measurement of Devia- hovon, Tho Netherlands, No. 83.
-. Rz
02 R4
Im 15k
E1(?0)
04•
Rt R3
10m IOk
V•-tOv-----....,------------------1-----------------------------------11~--------------~
AUDIBLE VOLTMETER FOR !C'S-Circuit pro· E, OUTPUT FREQUENCY readout Is Inconvenient. Rheostats can bo
ducos throe different squeals from loud· - . . . . : . . . - i f - - - - - - - - adjusted for wide rango of other input volt·
speaker-250 Hz for opon circuit, 300 Hz for OP~~ ~ig~~ ages and output froquencles.-T, F. Piatkow·
0 V, and 1,000 Hz for +s V, to speed +Sv 1000 hz ski, ICs Are Checked Faster With Audible
chocking of DTL and nL IC's when visual Voltmotor, Eloct1onie1, Jan, 20, 1969, p 88,
c OPAMP FAULT DETECTOR-Senses and indi-

ccites presence of signal at inverting input
of opamp. Detection takes place in another
lOK 1 MEGOHM opamp connected in polar integrator cir-
FAUL'I OITIPllI
cuit, to give positive d-c voltage as indica-
tion of fault output. Can be usod to drive
indicator lamp, resot analog computer, or
stop process under control. Choose value of
OA ls the maln C for desired R-C time constant with 1-mog
operational a~pll
fler such as OEI feedback resistor. 1 µF gives 1 s. Values
Models 9125, 9130, of Ri and Rf depend on opamp OA under
?186, 9245, 9263, etc, test.-An Opercitioncil Amplifier Fciult De-
tector, Opticcil Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No.
10168.
OtrIM
-v
+12V
ov
33Q
LEVEL DETECTOR-Uses Philips DOA40 IC
opamp to provide simple yes-no indication
of whether diode leakcige current drifts
within certain vcilue over certain period of OV ov ov
tima. Report describes operation in datail.
-A Level Detector Using Tho Operational
Amplifier DOA40, Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma
Div., Eindhoven, Tho Netherlands.
+12v
6v
LAMP
240
REGULATED
CURRENT SOURCE
-1.2v
forced through. With opamp adjusted for
COAXIAL CABLE PROBES voltage gain of 100, output of opcimp is
then 6 V. If resistance exceeds 0.31 ohm,
·multilayer printed circuit boards much fcister detector-zoner combination turns indicator
WIRING CHECKER-IC apamp followed by than with digitcil ohmmeter. Maximum per- lamp off.-D. Hciggan, Tester Moasures Ro-
two-transistor detector with indicator lamp missible resistance is 0.3 ohm, which gives sistcince of Multilayer P-C Boards, Electron-
checks resistance of critical conductor runs on voltage drop of 0.06 V when 200 mA is ics, Sept. 16, 1968, p 100-101.
TEST CIRCUITS 851
TRANSISTOR·DIODE·SCR TESTER-Measures S4
leakage current and d-c current gain {beta) n-o-n CALIBRATE
of transistors, indicates open er shorted junc•
lions via lamp, indicates whether scr will
condud when current is furnished to gate
and will turn off when voltage is removed,
and checks for opens or shorts in diodes.
Ql and 02 should have beta over 20. Arti· : SI
1n·p·n -0-11-p
clo gives construction and calibration pro· I 52
codures.-M. Gross, Semiconductor Test Set, I LEAK
Elecltoniu World, Nov. 1967, p 74-76.
47
R4 R5
OK
53
GAIN
~
r~:::
-=-
T~~-
3VOLTS
68K
OPTIONAL
...
22K
HEP580
DUAL
O.lp.F &K 2·1NPUT
,_....__-4-....t.._-__, GATE IHIOO
CURRENT GENERATOR
SIGNAL INJECTOR-Helps locate defective r·f
or audio stago In radio or tv tasting.
Square-wave output is variable from 200
to 2,000 Hz, with amplitude adjustable from
o to 1 V.-''Tips on Using IC's," Motorola,
Phoenix, Ariz., HMA-32, 1968.
Vcs ADJ Vas ADJ

SOOK 500K
330K
SM II
ISKII001ol
.,.. MOSFET PARAMETER TESTER-Designed for
testing p-channel enhancement-mode mosfet
lmA
CURRENT devices. May be assembled In small box
SOURCE that mounts on terminal plugs of curve tracer
far dynamic testing, In conjunction with
static dired measurements on digital volt·
metor.-C. R. Perkins, "Application of MOS-
FET Devices to Electronlc Circuits," Hughos,
Newport Beach, Cal., 1968, p 3,
DRAIN
GATE
SOURCE &
SUBSTRATE
SWITCH POSITION NOMENCLATURE Position 4 = RoN@ lmA

Position 1 = v. s aov@ 10,.A 5 = Nonnal Scope
2 = BVo S 80V@10,.A 6 =Vos for lnA
3 = BVo S 80V@ lO"A 7 = lnA Adj Monitor
CHAPTER 89
Timer Circuits
+6.ZVOC VARIABLE-DELAY ONE-SHOT-With Cl 0.22

p.F, Rl 47-S47K, and R2 and R3 10K, range
of delay times Is 7 to 80 ms. With Cl 10
µF and other values same, range is 0.4-4 s.
OUTPuT
May also bo used as countdown circuit or
one•shot driving 1K load. IC opamp con•
tributes to high performance. Input trigger
-6.2v should be greater than 2.5 V p•p, with 5.
µs riso time and at least 1O·p.s pulse width.-
W. R. Walters, IC Opamp Improves Stability
of Monostablo Multivibrator, EEE, Dec. 1967,
p 92-93.
l+I
NEON-OPERATED FLIP·FLOP-Poak voltage T2-27-

and duration of driver pulse from neon are IRIOO
dotormined by value of capacitor between
neon lamp and flip·flop. Book has nomo-
graph (p 31) for detorming values of R and
C to give desired time.-E. Bauman, "Appli- c
cations of Neon Lamps and Gas Discharge
Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p 61.
OPERATE
r-~~~~..-~~~~~~--~~~~-.~~~~ .....
~..-~~~~~-+-~~~~e-:-+ ....-n+24V
10 k
010
2N4151
I
100 I I
27
C2 I C4 C6 I
.n. 1.o"FT I 1.o"FT-= 1.o"FT I
START "::' ~I - -1 -
PULSE STAGE 1 I STAGE 2 STAGE 3 - I TURNOPF
SEQUENTIAL UJT TIMER-Can have any num• between Q10 and Ql makes sequence run CIRCUIT
ber of stages. Output pulse from each stage continuously. Delay time of each stago can pulses are desired from scr gates, theso re-
follows that of previous stage by adjustable be anywhere between 10 ms and 5 s, sot by sistors should be 100 ohms.-"Semiconductor
interval. Q10 serves only to turn off scr in S·meg pot. Rl, R2, and R3 can be relays Power Circuits Handbook,'' Motorola, Phoe-
last stage (Q7). Addition of timing circuit or other types of loads for scr's; if output nix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-27.
852
TIMER CIRCUITS 853
INCREASE TIME-
S-120 S TIMER FOR 240 W-Provides con•

trolled on time for enlargers, house or garage
lights, and universal motors, with automatic Cz
turn-off at end of Interval by single scr in ~ ,.F•
snries with laad.-"Silicon Controlled Rectifier
Experimenter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J.,
1967, p 62.
- INCREASE DELAY
ON
R,
IM
I1 5-300 S TIMER FOR 240 W-Timing capacitor

NE-83 C2 gives maximum delay of 2 min before
• applying. power with values shown, but
larger capacitor will increase delay to 5 min.
R9 In addition to lamp, heater, and motor appli·
100 cations, can be usod to turn on alarm at end
of desired time interval such as for signaling
l·min limit of thinking time in chess or bridge
game.-"Silican Controlled Rectifier Expori·
menter's Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., 1967,
p 66,
DISCRETE Vee
+15v
COARSE
ADJUSTMENT
CONTINUOUS
FINE ADJUSTMENT
j ·..
.
,·..
Cz
0.001JLf
05
MPS6515 TD 710
Ip=500JLO
30 HR WITH 1% ACCURACY-Values of Cl current of QI is then converted Into time

and R2 have maximum effod on interval be- delay. With feedback from output to resat
tweon input and output signals; 30-hr delay input, circuit can be used as current·froquoncy
Is obtained wilh 28K for R2 and 1 p.F for also be used to measure small currents such converter.-G. Black and K. C. Smith, BIFET
Cl. For 70·min delay, Rl Is I 00 billion ohms, as fet gate leakage currents in plcoampere Circuit Yields Time Delays Up to 30 Hours,
R2 Is 1BK, and Cl Is 0.1 p.f. Circuit can region, by removing RI and Q2; loakage Elecrroniu, May 26, 1969, p 94.
NEON-OPERATED PHOTOCELL-light from

1+1~~~~-+~~~~--.
noon reduces ro•istance of cadmium sulfide
l R or cadmium selonldo photocell, permitting

relay to lock up. Book has nomograph {p
31) for determining value• of R ond C to give
···rv desired timo.-E. Bauman, "Application• of

Noon lamps ond Gos Dischorgo Tubes," Sig·
nolito, Neptune, N.J., p 59.
(-)
OPERATE
+25 v
R5
10.HR FET TIMER-Circuit is bosicolly ujt sow• 1 k
tooth oscillator, in which conventional
chorging rosistor for CE is replaced by cur•
rent source Ql·Rl·R2-R3. For timing oc•
curacy of 10%, voltage supply must hove B2
2.5% regulation. Book anolyzes sources of 2N4125
error in tlmlng.-"Semiconductor Powor Cir• R2 01
cu its Hondbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1k 81
1968, p 6-24.
RS
27
01
load
Rl R2
SI,' b
I
r·+RL
Rl········II
52
0
,'n------------................._.
Cl
R3
+
C2
R 100 0; %W Cl = B p.F - SOO V

1
R
2
56 kO; S.S W c2 =BOO µ.F - 40 V (2222 060 17801)
R 4.7 kO; % W C S p.F - 16 V
3 3
R 20 k!l; potentiometer
4 RL = relay 35 V - 7 mA
Rs 2 lvO; potentiometer
R 2 MO; potentiometer o1 = BYX10 or BY100
6
R7 lvO;
3.3 ~· W 0 = 0A200 or 0A202 HIGH-ACCURACY 20.MIN DELAY-Energizes
RB MO;
2.7 %W 2 relay with high reproducibility at ond of
0 = 0A202 delay interval that is continuously adjustable
R ic!l;
56 %W 3
9 up to 20 min with RS. Setting of R4 deter•
R = 220 idl; 1W TR = BC147 mines minimum time ond R6 maximum time.
10 1
R = 4.7 idl; %W TR = BC147 Oporotes from 220-V o-c line through half·
11 2 wove rectifier DI, with relay connectod to
R 12 = 120 fl·• %W hondlo a•c load.-Tronsistorized Timon,
R = 1.2 ic!l; % W Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhoven,
13
R = 39 kO; 5.5 W The Netherlands, No. 443, 1968.
14
TIMER CIRCUITS 855
l +ZBV
RT EXTERNAL
LOAO
ZK
TO
!IOOK
B
1
IBV
IW
ZJ209F
+ CT OR
o.z CIOF
TO
,.,d
100
l·MINUTE DELAY FOR 1,200 W-Static a•c

time delay, adiustable up to I min, handles
inductive or resistive load. Simplicity of PRECISION UJT DELAY-Range of values in· pot, delay can bo set accurately over wide
triac a-c latch is combined with low cost of dicated for RT and CT gives timo delays range after one Initial calibration.-T. P.
diac triggering. For industrial and cammer• from 0.4 ms to I minute, Load current is Sylvan, The Unljunction Transistor Charac•
cial control applications requiring delayed limited only by rating of scr. If RT is pre- teristlcs and Applications, General Electric,
switching an of load and quick reset.-F. W. cision calibrated potentiometer such as Heli· Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.10, 1965, p 77.
Gutzwiller and E. K. Howell, Economy Power
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, 1965, p 9.
load
---.. I ·---~-;·I
Cl
R 100 0; 14 W C = 8 µF - 500 V
1 1
R 47 kO; 5.5 W C =2x2.2µF - 260 V
2 2
R 18 kO; 1 W c 3 = o.56 llF - 160 v
3
R 4 = 100 kO; potentiometer
R 27 Ml; % W RL= relay 35 V - 7 mA 2-MINUTE TIMER-Uses foll-dielectric timing
5 capacitor having extremely small leakage
R6 = 2.7 MO; % w current and narrow tolerances, to eliminate
0 = BYX10 or BY100
R7 = 56 kO; % W 1 noed for preadjustment of time. Switching
D = OA202 time is adjusted by varying Initial capadtor
R = 150 kO; 1 W 2
8 D = OA202 voltage with R4.-Translstorizod Tuners,
R9 3.9 kO; 14 W 3 Philips, Pub. Dept., Elcama Div., Elndhoven,
R 10 = 120 O; % w TR = BC147 Tho Netherlands, No. 443, 1968.
R = 1ok0; 1w
1
11 TR 2 = BC147
R 12 = 33 kO; 5,5 W
INCREASE TIME-
2.2k
60.S DELAY WITH Dl3T1-Singlo program•

mable ujt servos both as sensitive time-delay
element and as switch for applying power
to load. Whon circuit is energized, capaci-
tor charges to full supply voltage. When
INITIATE switch is closed, diode side of ca-
pacitor raises to twice supply voltage, and
capacitor discharges through resistors until
gate of D13TI becomes forward-biased and
ujt turns on, applying power to relay. De-
S-120 S TURN-ON TIMER FOR 240 W-Will capacitor C2 so circuit is reset. Values: RI lay is independent of supply voltage, in
turn off enlarger, heater, lamp, or universal 3K; R2 33; R3 1 meg; R4 470; RS 150; R6 range of 40 to 60 s.-W. R. Spofford, Jr.,
motor after time Interval determined by 47K; R7 IOK; RB 15: C1-C2 50 ,uF; Fl 3AG: 11 The Dl3T-A Programmable Unijunctlon Tran•
setting of R3, when 51 is set at ON position. NE-83.-"Translstor Manual," RCA, Harrison, sistor, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
OFF position of S1 servos to dischargo timing N.J., SC-13, p 524. 90.70, 1967, p 12.
(-10-------"W......
113
R9
T2
]II T1
Rz
SCR
1
v
AC
•l3
SC!l
RH 2
c.
used with Wakelield No.
c• Rll •2h
C1 10 microfarads. 200 volts, elec-
•
trolytic NC40 I K or equivalent heal s,
c, D IO microlarads. 200 volts, elec- sink.)
ca
trolytic R1 Rt • IOOohms, 1/2 wall, 10%
c, • SO microfarads, IS volts, elec- R1 a IS,OOOohms. l/2watt, 10% MOIOOSTABl.t: 1111011 CUllRE!IT
trolytic a. - potentiometer, 10,000ohms, MVLTIVIDRATOR
hLOCKING OSCILLATOR 1 A, C, CIRCt~T
c. - 4 microfarads. sec text linear taper
C 1 c. a 0.01 microfarad. 2S volts or R, - 1000ohms. l/2watt, 10%
greater, IM> Ro • 3000 ohms. S watts, 10%
CR 1 CR, • silicon rectifier. RCA Rr • 390obms, 1/2 wait, 10%
R • 1. 2 K12
1 R
9
• 18012 c3 - 0. 5µfd T
1
- Weld -trans.
SKJOll Ro • 4.7 megohms, 1/2 watt, IO'l>. R2 • 30012 R
10
• 68 KD c4 • 240µµfd T 2 - Arnold Core
F, - fuse, size depends on expected sec text R 3 • 1 K12 Rll • 10 K12 C 5 • 0. 01 µfd '4T5651Dl
load Rt • S.6ohms. l/2watt, 10% turns as lndl.
Q 1 • MOS field-effect transistor, Rio • 3900ohms, l/2wall, 10% R 4 • 3 KD R • 100.Q Q - 2N650 cat ed on sketch
12 1
type3Nl28 Rn• ISOohms. l/2walt, 10% R 5 • 24012 R13 • 10.Q above.
Q 1 a transistor. RCA SK300S R 11 Rii - 470ohms, l/2watt, 10%
Q
2 • 2N650
R • 3 KD R14 - lOD Q - 2N651
Q, • transistor, RCA SK3020 S 1 • switch, 12S volts, double-pole, 6 3
Q, triac, RCA 40S03 or RCA
D doublc·lhrow, capable of han· R
7
- 5.1 K12 c -5oµrd
1 SCR
1
- 2N2577
40429 (the RCA 40429 may be dling the expected load. R • 5.1 KD C 2 • 0. lµfd SCR • 2N2577
8 2
UNIVERSAL TIMER-Turns electrical device off
after predetermined interval determined by
setting of R3. With 40503 trlac, will handle A-C BURST WELDER-Controls time duration at
loads up to 3.3 A. With 40429 triac, load which a-c line voltage is applied to welding
without sink can be 2.7 A and up to 6 A transformer Tl, over range of 20 ms to 1 1.
with sink. For wider range of time periods, 1O.kHz blocking oscillator produces 2·i.t•
provisions can be made to switch in different trigger pulses for scr's under control of mono
values for RS or C4.-"Hobby Circuits Man· mvbr.-"Circuits Manual," Motorola, Phoenix,
ual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 75. Ariz., 1965, p 9-4-3.
TIMER CIRCUITS 857
0--0
.
12 VOLTS
NEON-OPERATED SCR-Output from noon

operatos scr until circuit is reset. Book has r------OA
nomograph (p 31) for determining values of
R ond C to give desired time.-E. Bauman,
"Applications of Noon lamps and Gas Dis-
charge Tubos," Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p
60.
Tm'd
100
TIMER MOISTURE PHOTO

DETECTOR CELL
FET TIMER-Rongo is 5-50 s with values ture detedor. With photocell, circuit be-
shown for timer input to terminals A·B. By comes light-activated rolay.-''Tips on Using
substituting network of wires spaced ~&" FET's," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., HMA-33,
apart between A·B, circuit operates as mois- 1969.
22ov.,_......-t-tH-+.....~--ir-~~~~~~~~~~~~~T-~~~~---.
SCS TIMER-Load current begins about 0.5

"'
RS lood
RC after switch is set to TIME, and continues
unlil switch is reset .-Planar Silicon Con•
trolled Switch 3N84/3N85, General Electric,
Syracuso, N.Y., No. 65.18, 1964.
RI R2
I
,,
,
r··.,.Rl
~--·--- ---·s2-I t
0 SI,' b
•o--r-----...--t--t-t41'+""""-+-I
+
+ 15 Volts Cl
6 OUTPUT
R 1 = 100 U; % W C1 = 8µF - 500 V

R = 56 kO; S.S W C2 = 800 µ.F - 40 V (2222 060 17801)
18K 18K 2
R = ~.7 I!!; % W C3 = 5 µ.F - 16 V
3
R = 10 kO; potentiometer
4
MICROSECONDS TO MINUTES-Comparator IC R = 100 kO; potentiometer 0 = BYXlO or BY JOO
5 1
connected as shown behaves as one·shot R = 500 kO; potentiometer o 2 = 0A200 or 0A202
delay in which value of CT determines timing 6
inlerval. Oulput is normally at - 10 V. R = 3.9 Ml; % W D
3
= 0A202
7
Negativo input trigger pulse makes output R = 33 kO; 5.5 W TR 1 = BC147
8
switch to + 10 V and hold at that level until R9 "' 1 kO; % W
charge on CT drops to point where pin 3 of RL= relay 35 V - 7 mA
IC is loss positive than pin 2; output then V .D.R.= 2322 552 02321
reverts to -10 V. Circuit has good noise l·MIN TIMER-Interval before relay is oner• cessively high bleeder current.-Transistorized
immunily.-Applying the Model 5501 Mono· glzed con be adjusted for delay up to 1 min. Timers, Philips, Pub, Dept., Elcoma Div., Eind-
lithic Analog Comparator, Optical Electronics, Uses vollage-dependent resistor to stobllize· hoven, Tho Netherlands, No. 443, 196B.
Tucson, Ariz., No. 10147. voltage across R9, eliminating need for ox·
FLASH-ACTIVATED LASCR TURN·OFF DELAY

R1
-Random Impulse of light fires laser, op•
CRI 470K CRz plying full current to lood, ond initiating dis·
R5
charge of capocltors through R1-R3 ond
laser. Whon dlschorgo current drops below
Rz holding current of laser, it goes off and cull
33K load current ot next lino current zero. De-
croosing R3 reduces time that laser stoys on.
During conduction, full sine wavo is opplled
CR3 c, Cz to load, with very little harmonic distortion,
R3 so rfl Is ne91igiblo. Useful for driving lamps,
LC>il 0.511F
120VAC 2!10K solenoids, small motors, and other dovlcos
60CPS LOAO UP up to 25 W, particularly with optical pro-
TO grammer. Will turn on at any part of cycle,
2!1WATTS
but go off only at zero.-E. K. Howell, Tho
R4 Ught Activated SCR, General Electric, Syra-
IOK 2W
cuse, N.Y., No. 200.34, 1965.
RELAY
COIL
6-MINUTE UJT-Simple two-ult circuit pro•

vides 6-min delay that is accurate within
2% from -10 to 70 C. R4 provides flna
adjustmont of delay. Oscillator QI charges llOJll
r
G.E
C2 at rate of one pulse per minute until CIO
voltage ocross C2 exceeds firing point of
Q2.-G. E. Huffman, Unijunction Circuit Givos
long Time Dolay, floctronic: Design, Feb. 17,
1964, p 92-93.
85
220
04
2N2647
120 VAC
LINE
LOAO:
LESS THAN
150 WATTS
3K 39
3K 1.2K
2 HZ TO 5 5-Accuracy is idoal for photo- ambiguity. Timing range can be extended State Timer Expands Time Interval Range,
graphic work. Uses scr to gate diode bridge by using larger timing capaciton. Whon E/ottronic Design, Aug. 31, 1964, p 46 and 48.
thot drives ujt Q4 through binary Q2.Q3. switch on rear of pot is open, timer is by·
Q1 acts as AND gate to eliminate starting passed for focusing.-R. A. Kawcyn, Solid-
TIMER CIRCUITS 859
(+)----- NEON TIMER-Output is positive-going pulse

R of at lea" 100 V, Duration is determined
'
by value of capacitor before output. Book
has nomograph (p 31 I for determining values
of R and C to. give desired time dolay.-E.
I-- Bauman, "Applications of Noon lamps and
Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalito, Neptune,
N.J., p 61.
(-)
OPERATE
RI
Tl
. ,;ill
SOCP:..J
0.25-10.25 5-Uses pushbutton initiation of

liming sequence, wilh relay output. Timing
interval is determined by setting of precision CRJ CR4
HI-turn Helipot RlO, In Increments of 0.01 s.
Minimum value of 0.25 s Is due to series re-
sistance of time calibration pot RS. SW1
RI• ZA. I WATT RIO • IOOK, 10 TURN HELIPOT C4 • 101'F0, SOY
adds 1OOK series resistance R7 to extend time RZ.R3•350.ll,l/Z WAn All• ISOll. l/Z WATT SCAI ·GE Cl5f
range by 10 s, and 200K for 20 s. In posi- R4 • 3511, SWATT AIZ • 1811, 112 WATT OR CllF
tion 4, SW1 opens timing resistor circuit to RS•2.51t.LINEAR POT Al3•1.ZK. ZWATT CRl•CRS·G E ABA
R5 • 251C, l/Z WATT Al4•10011,1/2 WATT CA7· 18V. 10'11. I WATT ZENIA
give on·off control. Absolute timing oc- R7 • IOOK, 112'11., l/Z WATT Cl• 5001' fO. SOY 01 ·GE 21116718
curacy is 0.5% after initial calibration, and AD •ZOOK. 112'11., l/2 WATT CZ• 1001' FD, SOY SI ·GE CR2191GIZZA4
repeatability is 0.05%.-"SCR Manual," 4th R9 •IOA,l/2 WATT C3·1001'FO, 20V TANTAWllll 4PDT RELAY
PLI, PLZ • OE 1447, 24V LAMP
Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 164-165. Tl·115VIZSV IA TRANSFORMER
IN645
GND
20-200 MS FOR STEPPER-R2 controls amount

HALF AN HOUR-lnoxpensive modification of delay betweon dosing of pushbutton and
of astablo mvbr permits use of relatively stopping of 7·A rotary soledor switch to
small values of C to produce time delays up next position, when circuit switch SI is In
to 30 min. Component values are doter• position shown for automatic homing. Se-
mined by delay time t = =
RC and R 10 r. lodor switch sequoncos additional positions
R can be 30 meg or more. Ql is 2N1308 until home position Is reached. In manual
and Q2 is 2N1309.-J. L. Johansen, Modified mode, pushbutton sequences solector one
Astable Multivibrator Produces Very Long position for each closure.-E. G. McCoy, Ad-
Time Deloy, Electronic Design, May 10, 1965, justable Time Delay For Rotary Switches,
p 48-49. Electronic Design, April 13, 1964, p 72-73.
GO•H1 INPUT
FOUR RANGES TO 15 5-Use of Fairchild

RTµL 9923 JK flip·flops and RTµL 9914 dual
two-input galas dramotically simplifies con·
struction by experimenters of IC intervcil
C~OC« PULS[
timer thcit would otherwise require 211 Iran• lflllTERV&L
sistors and 271 resistors. Time·base gener-
ator arrangement shown provides accurcJtely
spaced clock pulses when enabled by con·
Tiii( BAK
trol sedion, for counting during duration of OUT PVT
event being timed, in four ronges covering
0.05 to 15 s.-D. l. Steinbach, A Digital IC
Timer, Elodroniu World, May 1969, p 48-
50.
POWER
SWITCH
RI
100
680k
Bz 2N2647 R3
a, 560k
DOUBLE DELAY-Provides adjustable turn·on
delay of up to 30 s after power is applied,
+ 100 de controlled by R1·C1, and turn-off delciy con·
TO de
IN4001 L trolled by R2-C2. Circuit is immune ta power
POWER 0 interruptions up ta several ms and will not
SOURCE A
0 reset for them. Operates from 12 to 36 V
d-c.-G. W. Vest, Timing Circuit Has Inde-
+ R2
pendent Turn-On and Turn-Off Delays, Elec·
Cl 47 4.Tk
4lµF Ironic Design, Aug. 16, 1969, p 238.
2N4441
+24VDCSTOP
- --- -Ai>ffiliONAL
STAGES AS
SEQUENCED TIMER-Venatilo ujt•scr orrcinge- START~ REQUIRED.
mont, operating from 24 V d-c, may have

as mciny stages as ore required, each with Al3A
preset timing or transducer•trlggorod time .....~~~~~~-1-------~~~~r~.....,1--~~M-..-ii.,
2.2K I
Intervals. Ideal for automatic starting and r---- I
stopping controls, vending machines, process 1
control, traffic control, and other sequence I
I
I I
programmer applications. Handles loads up
LOADI
to I A, such as hooter, lamps, maton, and I FOR
relays.-F. W. Gutzwillor and E. K. Howell, llNOUCTI
I LOAD
®lI
Economy Power Semiconductor Applications, I
General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 671.1, I I
I I
1965, p 5. 47 47
I I
I I
L------------------------------~
START STAGE PRESET TIMED STAGE ~ANSOUCE~ TRIGGERE~ ';.OR" SrAGE
TRIGGEREF> ~y STAGE ACTUATED DURING
CLOSURE OF . OPERATION OF
START BUTTON LOADS© OR @
*ALTERNATE POSITIONS OF SK·IOK TRANSDUCERS (PHOTOCELLS, THERMISTORS, ETC.)
TIMER CIRCUITS 861
+12 VOi.TS DC:
Rs
56K
SCR Rz
•,{ 180 OHM
UJT1
2N2647
C- GEAAl8AI05C I.CAO
330
30 5 WITH Dl3T2-Programmable ujt pro- bration is unnocossary.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., OHlolS
vides 30-s dolay after switch is closed, be- The Dl3T-A Programmablct Unijunction
fore scr turns on and applies power to load. Transistor, Goner al Electric, Syracuse, N. Y.,
With tolerances shown for components, coli- No. 90.70, 1967, p 11. R4
47
OHMS
r-0
SCR
2N2322 CR1 • G·E INS36
21.J ·-1~~'
UJT1 • G·E 2,,.2647
lASCR VARIABLE-PULSE-WIDTH TURN-OFF

z4y.:.. DElAY-lncident light trl99ers laser and ap-
1 ~
1 plies power to load. Voltage drop across
load activates ujt timing-turn-off circuit, with
delay determined by RI, Cl, and ujt, to
330K C tum off load in interval af up to several
10·5 POWER DELAY-Usos scr and zener in I0011f
seconds.-E. K. Howell, Tho Light Activated
place of relay to apply powor to 500-mA to give different dolay.-J. A. Moans, SCR SCR, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
load 1O s after 24-V battery is switched on. and Zenor Diode Provide Time Delay, Elec· 200.34, 1965.
Values of R, C, and zener can bo changed Ironic Design, March 30, 1964, p 73-75 •
.... , 51
+
C1
R = 390 kfl; 1/8 W R14 -= 33 0; 1/4 W

1
R = 560 kfl 1/8 W c 1 = 800 µF; 40 V (2222 060 17801)
2
R = 6.8 kfl; 1/8 W c2 = 100 nF;
4
RS = 12 k!l; 1/8 W
R = 5.6 kfl 1/8 W RL = relay 24 V - 300 mA
6
R7 = 4.7 kfl 1/8 W TR 1 = BC147
Ra = 1.2kfl; 1/4 W TR = BC147
2
R9 •= 270 0; 1/8 W TR = AC127
3
R =270 0; 1/8 W TR = AC127 14-MIN TIMER-Operates from 30-V d-c sup-
10 4
R = 10 O; 1W ply and energizes relay after 14-min delay.-
11 o 1 = BYtOO Transistorized Timon, Philips, Pub. Dept., El-
R12 = 1 Ul; potentiometer
0 2 = 0A200 coma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No.
R = 330 0; 5.5 W 443, 1968.
13
o------- , ~~A-R+T----------------~-----
Ve ..J._s,
••--.eo
-9V o,
2N404A DIODES-IN4148
R1 92K Rz 27.Cl.
112W IW
1.0
p.F
AMERICAN
ELECTRONICS Re :!:2%
+r
6V-60.0.
100µ.f - c SERIES 9500 30 S WITH SAMPLING-Programmable ujt
IOV TYPE G
provides 30-s delay after switch is closed,
beforo scr turns on and applies power to
0 1 (3120
load that is connoctod between anode of
Oz (3740
scr and +20 V, Both diodes are 1N4148;
COST-CUTIING RELAY DELAY-Darlington right-hand diode serves with I OK rosistor and
connection of transistors gives time delay of sampling transistor to apply external I ·kHz
8 s for relay pull-in with values shown. pulse train for modulating intrinsic standoff
With larger values of C, dolay can be sev- voltage once per ms to sample capacitor
eral minutes. For still groator delays, uso voltage during delay intorval.-W. R. Spof.
hi9her bota transistors and higher•rosistanco
0
ford, Jr., The Dl3T-A Programmable Uni·
rolay coil. Article gives delay equation.- junction Transistor, General Eledric, Syra•
M. Leopold and A. L. Plovy, Relay Arrange- cuse, N.Y., No, 90.70, 1967, p II.
ment Increases Time Delay-Reduces Cost,
Electronic Design, Dec. 21, 1964, p 55-56.
LOAD R
2.2MEGA
SCR
2N2323
c 1'_ IN 27
PULSE-TRIGGERED 4-S TIMER-Can be trig·

gerod by pulse as short as a few micrasoc·
OPERATE
onds, to apply power to load for time dura•
NEON-OPERATED TRANSISTOR-Output from
tian determined by RC time constant.
neon operates transistor which pulls In relay.
Inductive load requires clamping, along with
Book has nomograph (p 31) for determining
parallel resistor to facilitate triggering.-A.
values of R and C to give desired tline.-E.
Balint, SCR and UJT Form Simple Precision
Bauman, "Applications of Noon· lamps and
Timur, E/edronlc Design, Sept. 14, 1964, p
Gas Discharge Tubes," Signallte, Neptune,
76.
N.J., p 60.
+22 VOLTS 330

.-~---.--~....-~---4~~~~~-.i--~~..-~---4.,_..-.AA,_~--------~+2BV
MAX
1000 22 B20K 680
MEG MEG #1820
TIME 2BV
ADJUST IOOma
220 .001 BULB
B2
2N2646
+ Bl
Z4XL
22B IOµf
er C2 47 22K C3 Cl,C2 a C3 - 2MFD/IOOV
45-MIN TIMER-Gives long and adjustable ujt to apply sampling pulse to basa 2 of Semiconductor Timers and Low Frequoncy Os·
time delays without using tantalum or elec• other ujt, thereby reducing required trigger clllaton, General Eledrlc, Syracusu, N.Y., No.
trolytlc capacitors. Uses low-cost 2N2646 current by 1,000:1 or more.-D. V. Janos, 671.3, 1966, p 15.
TIMER CIRCUITS 863
8-80 S TURN·OFF DELAY-Closing SI makos

triac turn on and handle up to 6 A load cur•
rant. After interval determined by setting of
R7, ujt flros and delivors trigger pulse that
turns on scr and makes it self-latch. This
breaks drivo to triac gato and triac turns off.
Circuit is reset by opening Sl briefly. Uso
1200R
240VAC
QI
LOAD
R2
12on
R6
47K
R7
500K
Cl
1 12VDC
RCA 40429 trlac for 120 V and 40430 for

R3 I00/15V
240 V.-R. M. Marston, 20 Triac Circuits, 470n
Radio-Electronics, Juno 1970, p 51-53 and 97.
Cl
100115V
8-80 S DELAYED TURN·ON-R6 doterminos

interval botweon closing of SI and turning
12VOC on of trlac QI by ujt and scr. Triac thon
remains on as long as SI is closed. Use
1200R
240VAC RCA 40429 trlac for 120 V and 40430 for
240 V.-R. M. Marston, 20 Triac Circuits,
Raclio-Efecrroni", Juno 1970, p 51-53 and
97.
R2
47on
+28V DC +28VDC
INTERVAL TIMER FOR 3-A D·C LOAD-Timing
cycle Is Initiated by low-level (minimum of
I V) 5-µs pulse applied to terminal A, which
turns on scr CS· I to supply power to load •
.Simultaneously, CS-2 Is turned off and C2
bagins charging through R2, R3, and R4. LOAD
Zanor minimizes timing error. When charge
reaches 7.5 V, Z1 conducts and makes CS-2
fire, 1 s after initiating pulse, to turn off CS-1
and romove power from load. DI and R3
discharge C2 rapidly, to keep recycle time
under 1 mt.-lnterval Timer for High lovel
Output, Solid State Produds, Salom, Mass.,
No. 1.
A CS·I CS-2
CS- I - SSPI TYPE 383060 CONTROLLED SWITCH

CS-2 - SSPI TYPE AAIOO CONTROLLED SWITCH
l1- 6.8VOLT ZENER DIODE,TYPE IN710A C1 - 6pf, 30V
Zr IBVOLT ZENERDIODE,TYPEIN720A Cz- 40pf,IOV
RI • 1000 OHMS R4- 2200 OHMS
R2- 50,0000HMS Rs- 6800 OHMS
R3· 10 OHMS Rs- 2200 OHMS
D1 • IN483 SILICON DIODE ALL RESISTORS- ~4 WATT
l+I
l R
···r
1-1
OPERATE
100
OPERATE
TR0250
NEON TIMER-Relay latches when capacitor NEON.PULSED THYRATRON-Output pulse

charges to breakdown voltage of lamp. from noon causos thyratron to ignito and
Book has nomograph (p 31) for determining remain on until circuit Is reset. Handles 'Y2·
values of R and C to give desired time.-E. W load. Book has nomograph (p 31) for
Bauman, "Applications of Neon Lamps and determining values of R and C to givo de-
Gas Discharge Tubes," Signalite, Neptune, sired time.-E. Bauman, "Applications of
N.J., p 58, Noon Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes/'
Signalite, Neptune, N.J., p 59.
+ IOK IOK IOK

SEQUENTIAL TIMER-RC timer is driven from
scs ring counter at right. Only one scs is
12 on at a time, with successive timer output
VOLTS
pulses at B2 advancing ON stage to right.
Time interval is adjustable for eoch scs
stage. Timer itself uses four-lead comple-
mentary ujt such as 3N81 (dashed box),
which can be inhibited from firing by apply·
TRANSISTOR• ZN34" ing appropriate voltages to terminals A and
SCS-lN84 B.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Complementary Uni-
010CES • 5324
A 8 jundion Transistor, General Electric, Syracuse,
A DA 8 INHIBIT c FROM FIRING. EITHER INPUT MUST BE ZEJIO VO~TS TO FIRE A INH18JTS AT TK[ PEAK
N.Y., No. 90.72, 1968, p 14.
POINT, 8 INHIBITS IN TH[ VAl.l.tY
TRIGGER CIRCUIT IF REQUIRED

I 'I' 12V
RS R6 D3
270K ZS120
IOOK 8·2K
CT
R7 4001\ 12V
.....~~~1•~~~-'J''--~~--il'-.....J\
4 ·7K RELAY
8,uf
Ct
-------~
INPUT
2200pf
DI
25120
TRI TR3
MICRO ZTX300 ZTX300

SWITCH
TR2
02 R3
ZS120 I HJ\
ZTX300
R4
IOOK
PROCESS TIMER-Holds relay closed for timo pulso from oxternol circuitry or by simple Applications, Ferranti Ltd., Oldham, lanes.,
interval adjustable between I and 10 s aftor microswitch. For rango of 1 to I 0 s, R2 Is England, 1969, p 40.
timing action is initiated by negative input 200K and Rl is 2-meg pot.-E-Line Transistor
TIMER CIRCUITS 865
Sl RS
•16W o-----c~~---...-----. ,....~.....~~~~.-~~.....-'\.IV'1r-~+2av
\
\
\
\
t
EXTERNAL
\ SET Vl LOAD
'
\ CONTROL
\
lOK START
\
.
\
lOmeg
SCRI
\ 33K
Kl rll
Xl GND
RI - 2.2K, 1/2 WATT Ct· 0.2 TO 100MF0,15V
R2 • IK TO 500K LINEAR POT SCRI - GE C22F OR C llF
R3· 150fl, 112 WATT CRI • IBV, IO'fo, I WATT ZENER, IN1776
R4· 27,fl, 112 WATT CR2· G£ Al3A
R5· 56011, 2 WATT QI· GE 2Nl671B
Cl • 311F 150\J VZ TZ·27-WRZ50 UJT-SCR DELAY-Simple, versatile, and ac•
curate circuit applies power to load at pre-
0.1-25 5 NEON TIMER-Givos wido range of determined interval after initiating signal is
dolays for rolay operation after power is ~ applied. Timing is initiatod either by ap-
applied with 51. Power must bo romoved plying supply voltage or opening shorting
with 51 to reloaso relay after it pulls in.- contact across Cl. Delay depends on values
W. G. Miller, "Using and Undorstanding Min· of R1, R2, and Cl, For rosot, scr must be
iaturo Neon Lamps," Howard W. Soms & Co., turnod off by momentarily shorting it or by
Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p 72. opening d-c supply.-"SCR Manual," 4th Edi-
tion, General Electric, 1967, p 163-164.
VERSATILE TIMER-Easily assembled one·

transistor circuit pulls in relay when switch
51 is closed, charging Cl to battery supply
voltage. Cl then discharges ond turns on
QI, which pulls in relay. Circuit stays in
this condition until Cl is discharged below -"---.......,NC
saturation level of QI, as determined by ~""'ft---'-~ 0
setting of R3, to turn off Ql and release C1
~----4-oNO
relay. Gives choice of intervals from I 0 to
100 s, and oven greater timing range if
values of RI and Cl are changed. Na on•
off switch is required in battery circuit, be- QI NPN Tr•nsinor Silicon
RI 10 U Rltinor ~ Wm I°"'
cause leakage through transistor when it is R3 S0,000 r2 Potentiometer
off is only about I µ.A. Can be used for R2 1,000 r2 A01i1tor ~ W•tt 10!!.
enlarger control In dark room or for delay R4 270,000 r2 A..;.1or % Witt 10!!.
Cl 1000 µ.F 25 Volt Electroytic
in turning off garage light.-"Calectro Hand· SI Push Button, Nor~lly O!Hn Swilch
book," GC Electronics, Rockford, Ill., FR-69-C, RYI 1000 f2 SensiOve Ael•Y
p 45. Bl B1tt1ry, 9V Tren1i11or Aedio
. . --,-,-r--.-,
.
LOAD L.INE
:~:;;-·-
: ~ POLEI
Double Pole Breaker ~- • • ··-- • • - • • • · ··-----1
Type APL 14·R : -CIJ--,
- ---. -....... -.. --- -·
POLE2.
+24Y !10%
DOUBLE-THRESHOLD DELAY-Allows adjust• 22K 3W MAX
able time delay that responds to average 391(
(not rms) value of on overload, with essen-
tially zero delay above adjustable limit.
2N3417
Rl determines first threshold, while Cl ond 02
R2 determine time delay. With 560 µF for
Cl, there is no tripping of Airpax APL14-R IK
double-pole breokor (dashed box) ot 100%
CC'IUolON
load, delay of about 20 s ot 150% load,
5 s ot 200% load, ond minimum doloy of
about 0.01 s beyond 240% load.-Double 0·1/2Y.
IMPEOANCE
Threshold Time Deloy (Airpax od}, Electron-
10 OHMS
ics, Dec. 9, 1968, p 156.
+20 VOLTS
SWITCH IOO
MOMENTARY
CONTACT
40 MEG 2.2 MEG 2.2k
30V IK 47C
013TI
IK
IOOµ.F/25V 2.2 MEG

GE76F02KMIOI
10-S SCS-Positivo pulse to gate of 3N81 scs
triggers It on, for supplying power to roloy
load and ujt timing circuit. At completion
of timing interval based on RC, negative LONG DELAY WITH D13T2-At end of tim· ront.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Tho D13T-A Pro•
pulse is applied to anode of scs to turn it ing interval, Dl 3T2 produces sharp negative grammable Unijundion Transistor, General
off.-Planar Silicon Controlled Switch 3N81 / pulse for triggering D13T1 programmable ujt Eledrlc, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 90.70, 1967, p 12.
3N82, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. acting as thyristor for controlling load cur•
65.16, 1964.
0.1-90 S-Timing interval starts whon power

is applied, and stops when voltage is ap·
IOV-=.. plied to load. Ujt operates as oscillator that
pulses baso 2 of DSK1 complementary ujt for
triggering of 3N81 scs. Chief advantago of
circuit is uso of larger timing resistor and
smaller timing capacitor than in conventional
timors.-Silicon Complementary Unljundlon
Transistor DSK1, General Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 60.15, 1967.
RI
20Ml2 RA
BAV38 02
Cl
03 BZV95-
C16 G D
TAA320
s U1
DI
BAV38
RS 2312 6'2 11472

68Q
1R3
BCl77
R6
R9
18012
6.8kR
L...~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~...L~~~~~~~...L.~~~~--+
HIGH-ACCURACY ADJUSTABLE TIMER-Pro• along with voltage stabilization, to minimize porformance.-Tho TAA320 Integrated Circuit
vidos adjustable delay after switch S Is time terror. Actual timer is Miller Integrator Used In Long Delay Time Switches, Philips,
closed, before relay RA is energizod. In- that Includes IC, with zenor reference voltage. Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhovon, Tho
cludes temperature compensation with Rl 4, Report includes mathematical analysis of Netherlands, No. 447, 1969.
TIMER CIRCUITS 867
2704
C35F
CIOF UP TO 1 HR-Requires only low-leakage 4-
C9F µF mylar capacitor for time delays up to 1
hr because offedive firing current is reduced
by factor of 1,000. Voltage an timing ca•
IOp.f + pacitor CT is periodically sampled by sam•
piing pulse generated by 2·Hz ujt rolaxation
2!5V
asclllator.-"Unljundlan Circuit Hints," Gen•
oral Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., Fig. 9.
+25VDC +35VOC +30VOC
1.S A Quiescent Current .gv 1001(

II<
11P.O. Type 3000 c,

800.11. IOOpf
Tr3 Ein ~
~
ZTX 300
TIME OF
EVENT
kr1\
.... .
o'
i20f'S8C :
I
'
o
ov I
110 I •30 m NC
SELF-REPEATING TIMER-Cl is charged quickly
almost ta 9 V through resistors and first two
transistors. When it approachos full charge,
charging currant drops and both transistors TIME OF OCCURRENCE-Simple two-stage
turn off. Capacitor then discharges through transistor circuit with Shockley diode gives
R3, giving 5·s delay. When base voltage of highly precise timing of ttart of event. For
TR2 rises abava emitter voltage, TR1 and values shown, three samples of input wave-
TR2 turn on and process repeats. Positive form aro taken at predotorminod intervals
pulso Is applied to TR3 every 5 s at TRl to establish slope and baso lino, from which
turns on, turning on TR3 and energizing relay. oxact time of initiation of input signal can
-E-lino Transistor Applications, Ferranti ltd., bo computed.-L. M. Gormain, Occurrence
Oldham, Lanes., England, 1969, p 48, Generator Uses Shockley Dloda, Electronic
Design, Nov. 22, 1965, p 64.
-14V
BASIC FET TIMER-Circuit shown, covered in

Siliconix application note, has near•zora
temperature coefficient. Charge and dis- 150flf
charge time of R.C tank determines period 250
of timer above 90 s. For shorter periods,
use of junction fat's operating as constant
sources with linear charging rates is rocom•
mendad. Rogonorativo circuitry is added to 100
provide on-off tlming.-FETs for Timon, Eloc-
lronic Do1ign, Nov. 8, 1965, p 94, RESET
15 IMEG
EXT 560 OHMS

CONTROL
INPUT
Rz
4 LAYER
DIODE -
-ci::::::::::
OUTPUT
117VAC 10
0 + 01 GE SCRI
c 2N494C GE Cl!IF
5AMP 18 OR GE CllF
Ryz VOLT
117VAC Ry, 03 5AMP
RELAY IN2070 ZENER
117VAC GE 27 C4
SPOT RELAY Z4XL18 OHMS .O!lpl
OPOT
VARIABLE DELAY WITH INSTANT RESET-
Shockley diode in series with reloy provides 0.3 MS-3 MIN-Cl is stable low-leakage .,,.
instant reset for timo delays from fraction paper or mylar capacitor. Peak-point re·
of second to several minutes. For typical quirement of timing ujt Ql is reduced up to
5-A a-c relay, C should be above 1 µF.-B. l,000 times by pulsing its upper base with
Evans, Fovr•layer Diode Provides Time De- 0.75-V negative pulse derived from free.
lay with Instant Resot, Electronic Design, running oscillator Q2. If Rl is 2,000 meg
March 29, 1965, p 33-34. and Cl 2-µF mylar, circuit gives stable time
delays of over I hr.-"SCR Manual," 41h
Edition, General Electric, 1967, p 165-166.
SELF-DESTRUCTION FOR FUZES-Used in T-5

antiaircraft battery-powerod fuze for 4.5-
inch M-8 rocket, to explode fuzo from 6 to
11 s after missile was launched, if it had
not been triggered by proximity to enemy
aircraft, to preclude explosion on ground
approach over friendly territory ofter miss.
Delay circuit connects to grid of thyratron
and uses NE23 neon tube along with R·C
components. Small amount of radioactive
material on neon tube keeps neon sufficiently
ionizod to minimize variations In striking
voltage. When delay circuit trips thyratron,
1.5-µF capacitor dischorgos through armed
(switch closed) detonator.-A. V. Astin,
Editor, "Radio Proximity Fuzes for Fin-Sta· c-
biliJ:ed Missiles," Div. 4, NDRC, Vol. I, 1946
(available from Cloaringhouso, Springfleld,
Va.), p 131.
BLK llOVAC
OUTLET
OLK
53 ON
II !
0.6-60 5 FET-Devico connected to timer re-
ceives power for precise interval, adjustable
from 0.6 to 6 s for XI range and 6 to 60 s SI
for XlO range. Kl is 6·V relay and Bl is RESET,TIME
12-V No. 1815 pilot lamp. Useful in pho-

tography and othor s• Jrt•torm timing appli-
cations.-Article gives construction and coli·
bration dotails.-"Field Effect Transistor Proj-
ects," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1966, p
35-47.
TIMER CIRCUITS 869
11• •lC
IK
RI • 02
250K RELAY GE
(TIME ADJUST) COIL Al4B
GE 04 GE Al4D
1N!!04
120VRMS
"TIME• 60CPS
GE
Cl068
SCR
-= fUNNCl D•OOE $. G( rons·, Cl
CASCADED TUNNEL-DIODE TIME DELAY-

GARAGE-LIGHT TURN-OFF DELAY-Simplo
Two identical time delay stages are cas•
timing circuit givus adjustable delay of 0.01
caded. When current threshold of first tun•
to 60 s bofore light is turnod off by relay
nel diode is reached while capacitor is
after actuation of switch. Can also be used
charging, this diode switches into high-volt·
as timer for enlargar.-D. R. Grafham, Time-
age state and turns on first transistor, to
Delay Relay, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y,.
initiate similar timing action for second
No. 201.11, 1967.
stage. Time delay equations are given in
article.-W. R. Spofford, Jr,. Applications
For The New Low Cost TD 700 Series Tunnel
Diodes, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
90.66, 1967, p 8.
0--,
+4evo----o-;'O~~....-~~~~~~--<>-+-
1N1694
I
3.9K R 600 I
IW I
I
)
l START
SWITCH
I
I
------'-: 4E30-28
+ I
120V
l 20,.f
IOOV
25V
IW
10%
I
60 CPS
! 10 MS TO 10 MIN-Four-layer diode acts

as self-latching pnpn switch that closes
(fires) when C charges to firing voltage
1-5 A·C TIME DELAY-Requires only single through R. Delay time in seconds is
ujt, oscillating much higher than a-c line 0.000006R, or 10 min if R is 100 mag,
frequency so switching of scr's is practically Relay remains energized until S is opened.-
from full on to full off. Time delay is de- J. McNellis, PNPN Switch Affords Wido Ronge
termined by (R1 + R2)(C1 + C2). For greater Time Delay, Electronic Design, March 2, 1964,
delay, increase C2.-"Unijunction Circuit p 65-66.
Hints," General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., Fig. 10.
TO LOAD CRI CR2

GE·X4 GE·X4
~ RI
3.5K
C3
IOOml
15V
5WATTS
Rll
6.BK
500-W 10-MIN DELAY-Will turn off solder· ON
QI RIO
ing iron or clothes-pressing iron after ad· GE-10 470
justable delay of up to 10 min aftor weight OHMS
of iron in holder closos 51. This keeps iron
warm and roady for use within delay inter- R4 ·Cl
val while eliminating fire hazard of forget• 5MEG too,.1
ting to turn it off when leaving. Can also
be used for delayed turn-off of garage or
• 15V
SCRI
GE-XI
porch lights, or for turning on lamp or ap• RS R2

IOI< 100
pliance after similarly adjustable delay.-
OHMS
"Hobby Manual," General Electric, Owens· CR4
GE·X4
boro, Ky., 1965, p 142.
+20V
1-60 MIN WITH 5% ACCURACY-Fat fol·

lower, ujt, and scr provide adjustable time A
intervals, determinod by R, for recycling
intervals of 5 to 10 min. R can be 12-posl·
tion rotary switch having 12 values of R
ranging from 350K to 20 mog. Value of T
in minutes is approximately equal to 2.86
100µ.f +
times value of R in megohms.-E. B. Croson,
Solid-State Timer Improves Recycling Accu• 20Vr
racy, Electronic Design, July 6, 1964, p 51-52.
IK
1.0MEG
-tov +42v
1.0 MEG ~,GMF' 15 I

.95MF' , .,, Rz
, Rr
2.7k
V A+ LI Ct
DETONATOR
IN91
R-C ARMING OF FUZE-Used in T·171 radio

11ov1I+
proximity fuze for trench mortar shells to L2
provide additional delay in elodric arming
after mechanical arming has occurred. .,. TIME STRETCHER-Modification of Shockley
Time dolays up to 8 s can be obtained, de- diode delay eliminates nood for largo ca•
pending upon size of arming resistor botwaen pacitor to give delays up to 30 min. When
anode of 2D29 thyratron and B supply. anode of DI is tied to 42·V supply, Cl needs
Fuze cannot be tripped by input signal to to supply only remaining 8 V of 50-V break-
thyratron until 0.95-µF detonator firing ca· down voltago af DI. RI can be as large as
pacitor has boon fully charged by delay necessary to givo dosirod RI Cl time con-
circuit after mechanical arming.-A. V. Astin, stant, and C1 proportionally small. DI is
Editor, "Radio Proximity Fuzes for Fin-Stabi- 4E50.-A. L Plovy, Tima Delay Stratchod
lized Missiles," Div. 4, NDRC,. Vol. I, 1946 With Now Bias Schema, Electronics, Od. 30,
(available from Cloarlnghouso, Springfield, 1967, p 72.
Va.), p 125-130.
L
115v
I,--------1--__r I
28v o-c
d-c
r- CLOCK I
o I
I
+12-----o-::-&---.-......------11
VARIAC
L:) 75k
S K 2 I 1
p AND B
KA5DY
I
01 02 12v
IN676 IN676 IN646
~----TACHOMETER
MOTOR ..__ _ _ _ _ GENERATOR
SCRt
2Nl595
MOTOR ACCELERATION TIMER-Clock runs + C1
until motor roaches rated or predetermined 03 lpf Rz
04
speed, at which timo QI fires SCRl and trips IN676 IN676 51
relays, to stop clock. Elapsed time is than
used to calculate acceleration of motor.
Motor with known speed is used first to Will Toll How Fast a Motor Rovs Up, Eloc·
establish trigger point of Ql.-R. Traina, Time Ironies, Nov. 28, 1966, p 82-83.
TIMER CIRCUITS 871
tlOlolZv
R3
!Ok 2k
Cz
0.0047p.1
01
2Nf30Z OUTPUT
J-.
4 MS TO 32 MIN-Maintains 2% accuracy -:- generator that turns on Q3 on ahernate half-

ovor wido timing range controlled by R2, cycles. QI charges Cl to point at which
with Rl providing fine adjustment, Uses ujt 04 fires and generates output pulso.-A.
only low-cost components. Astable mvbr J. Um, Unijunction Improves Timing-Circuit
Q1-Q2 operates as variable-frequency pulse Accuracy, Electroniu, Oct. 30, 1967, p 69-70.
+IOV
40-5 POWER-SWITCH DELAY-M.odifled ujt

Rz trigger Ql provides delay up to 40 s, de·
332 pending on values of Rl and Cl, after 10-V
source voltage is applied, before firing scr
Oz
2N2322A Q2 to apply power to load. Ser then re-
mains on until 10-V source voltage is re-
moved. Temperature range is -30 to 100
C.-A. M. Hildebrondt, SCR and UJT Form
Time-Doloy Switch, Electronic Design, $opt.
13, 1965, p 82-83.
L
~ RLi 850 OHM
0
+ l3,5V
Cl
Kl
+ Dl 12V
10 Xl IN457 150S2
R2
27K
+ x1oy
..__. . . -ffcz-1
IOO
Sl
r-----
- - - - _J SET
TIME
QJ
2N3704
R4 IMEG R3
100 12
1 S TO 5 MIN-Potentiometer Rl In fet cir· pull-in of relay. Use of 52 with second tim- tween timing Intervals, so battery supply
cult determines time delay before relay pulls ing capacitor C2 Increases versatility by pro- can be used.-G. L. Jackson, Wide-Range
In after 51 Is moved to TIME position. Dar- viding two timing ranges. Maximum cur- Electronic Timer, Electronia World, Nov.
lington-connoctocl transistors provide addi- rent drain Is only 75 mA during actual 1967, p 56-57.
tional powar ampliflcation to ensure fost timing Interval, dropping to 0.5 mA be-
CHAPTER 90
Transceiver Circuits
C-W MONITOR-Self-containod three•tronsis-

tor circuit operating from single 1.5·V cell
has sufficient output to drive speoker con-
nected in place of 100-ohm primary of Tl.
Only connections required are to terminals
of transceiver keying jock. May also bo used
as code-practice oscillator.-A. D'Onofrio and
P. Stark, A C. W. Monitor for Grid-Block
Keyed Transceivers, CQ, April 1965, p 62-63.
L2.L3,L!>.•47nH. 2tlitni ct rmm en cu w1rq •

.ntQt-r<:I Cl'JQt't'\IZlw • 7mm
T~ona.rnltter
H
165-MHZ T-R SWITCH-Developed for mobile .5
application having transmitter power of 12
W. Switching is done by 88105 variable·
lc 1
IOOllf"
capacitance diode. During reception, DI and
D2 are reverse-biased and present high-Q
capacitance. Whon transmitter is operating,
these diodes are forward-biased and present
only small resistance. Bias voltage is 13.B
V, with polarity boing reversed to change
from transmit to roceivo.-J. M. Siemonsma,
Electronic Aerial Switch for Mobile Trans-
ceivers, Mu/lard Technical Communications,
Jan. 1968, p 3o-31.
RECEIVER R,=CHARACTERISTIC R, TRANSMISSION

ANTENNA IMPEDANCE OF
OR COUPLER TRANSMISSION LINE
~~::)______
Ot
2N1191
t,__- - - - - 1·
-RECEMR
• ANTENNA
INPUT
-::- TERMINALS
HE LAY
C2 IOk 5k
01
?Op! 1N34 2.Sma
O.Otpf
12v
'--~~~ ......~~~-+~~~-+~~~-e~~~-e~~~~~......~~~~~~~~~~+
T/R ACTUATOR-Whon protection circuit Ql- its characteristic impedance. This protects C2:C3 and R2:470. K. C. Marton, R·f Signals
Q2 is actuated by r·f signal exceeding 1 V input stage of receiver, without using ex- Actuate Transmit·Roceivo Switch, Electronics,
at predetermined frequency, relay is pulled pensive coaxial relays and disabling cir· Juno 12, 1967, p 103-104.
in to ground transmission lino going to re- cuih. Circuit can be made to oporato at
ceiver, to terminate receiving antenna in other r·f signol levels by changing ratios
872
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUITS 873
R·6
121<
,,.
R•T
C•I
...
w
----------------,
REC S· I SE«O
I
I
S·2
111# .,r
C•IJ -
C•S
u .....
50-MC CONVERSION FROM CB-Requires only

1 9-T
llAT.
addition af R-11 ta parts furnished with low•

priced CB kit, for short-range communication
(0.5 to 3 miles, depending on fixed station)
in 6-meter amateur band. Book gives
changes required in coils and crystals.-E.
C. Pienkowski, Converting the Knight C-100
CB Transceiver to 50 Mc, "The Mobile Manual
for Radio Amateurs," ARRL, Newington,
Conn., 1968, p 218-219.
2•• ••• ' "'

-"' .,.
,~~
'7111eSP
r,1,...
,........' _ "-L..I
~1 t1 . .
;?!:,Jr
.....·~ ·~-... * I'"
ro"' ~
n:~~,:.~
40-METER C-W TRANSCEIVER-Rocolvor sec- bandpass filter. Oscillator is zoner regulated tional selectivity. Articlo doscribos oporo-
tion has sensitivity of 0.1 p.V and transmitter to reduce warmup or tomporaturo drift al tion of ontiro circuit and gives conslructlon
has output of 23 W, operating from 28 V 5 MHz. 1-f valuo is 2.1 OS MHz. Second details. Can be operated on 20-meter and
d-c supply. Recoiver is single-conversion dotoctor is singlo-translstor oscillator-mixer 80-metor amateur bands as well, simply by
superhet with no r-f stage but with two followed by two diroct-couplod audio stages changing coils.-J. S. Hill, A Compact 40
tunod circuits ahead of mixor to form 7-MHz having muting, side-tone injection, and addi· Meler Transceiver, CQ, June 1966, p 22-27.
o,
Co 2N1225
560
Mlco
PORTABLE CALIBRATOR-Simple circuit can
Ra be used for checking froquency points In re-
R1 l50K ceiver or transmitter up to at least 150 MHz.
330K
Article gives construction details.-W. M.
Scherer, Harmonic-Rich 100 Kc Crystal Cali·
brator, CQ, Dec. 1965, p 28-30.
XTAL OSC. BUFFER AMPLIFIER
50·MHZ TRANSMlnER SECTION-Modiflca·

tion of earlier design usos transistors through·
out, with powor output depending on choice
of silicon transistors usod for Q3 and Q4:
possibilities are 27R131, 2N3553, and 2N·
3866. Ql and Q2 are 2N706 or equivalont.
IC is Radio Shack 2n-038 ratod at 1 W. YI
is third-overtone 50.11-54 MHz crystal. r-wa.tt
Boole gives all coil and transformer data.- tmdio
E. P. Tilton, 50-Mc Transistor Transceiver, Marie IJ»tf'·
II, "The Mobile Manual for Radio Amateurs,"
ARRL; Newington, Conn., 1968, p 222-231.
03 12V TO Xi.TR. P.A.
R3
10 3.9k 130 l,fk
620
DI
3.8V
04
,01
RZ
820
-----=~-+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ...
~~~~~ .. rolOYKEYED
typos can be found in sorvico manuals for
TRANSISTOR PROTECTION-Usod in G-E solid· JI
slate tronscoiver to protoct r·f powor tron• this MASTR line of 450.MHz two-way mobile
slstors ovor wido rango of stress and fauh ' Q3, whose emitter connects to bat1ery radios.-C. Smith, A Protection System for
conditions without affecting ofllcioncy. High through. LI at all times. Article doscribes Solid-Stole Tronsmittors, Electronics World,
transmit current Is carried and controllad by other protective actions in detail. Transistor Feb. 1969, p 38-39 and 77.
TRANSCEIVER CIRCUITS 8'75
(To Audio
Stoqts er Rcvr I
+14v.
.
t13.4•
1000
+14 •• --+-~ ~...;._,....-....,....,..--ot 9•. rtQ. PROTECTING RECEIVER FRONT END-Circuit
(To Xnltr.1 I To front·end
ol Rc... 1 delays application of supply voltage to re•
r- ceiver sedion 0.6 s to prevent burnout of

delicate transistors by residual radiation
from turned-off transmitter.-R. Jayaraman,
Delayed Switching for Transistor Receivers,
Antenno CO, Feb. 1970, p 39-40 and 98.
Rero, 180
R.F.AMP. MIXER
Tos..... L1
~
ij LalOOs
o
68,,'.I IOOO
SO·MHZ CONVERTER-May be used with any
small receiver and small SO.MHz transmitter
to give transceiver having reasonable power
for portable operation in 6°moter amateur
band while weighing under S lb. Other
crystals may be used for Y3 to provide cov•
erage of any 1-MHz segment in or near
SO.MHz band. Transistors are RCA 4023S
silicon. Book gives coil data. Sl B goos to
transceiver switch. Operates from 12-V
auto battery. Range is up to 100 miles in
mountain locations.-E. P. Tilton, SO-Mc Tran·
sister Transceiver, Mark II, ''Tho Mobile
Manual for Radio Amateurs," ARRL, Newing•
ton, Conn., 1968, p 222·231.
..
,
n
.....
L _ ._ _ _ _ ._ ·:.,.__ _
•
ferent frequencies In 27-MHz Citizens Band, mixed with Incoming signal ta produce 4S5-
depending on crystal used In transmitting. kHz 1-f signal. Talk-t'ecoivo switch 51 is
When receiving, unit operates like o-m radio shown In receive position.-1R1007 Citlaens
CB TRANSCEIVER-Seven-transistor portable except that intermediate frequency is deter- land TranKeiver, Magnavox Service Manual
transmitter-receiver operates on any of 22 dif· mined by soparato crystal whoso output is 6299, Fort Wayne, Ind., 1970.
ANTENNA 113
.,.. XMTR. !I ANT.
fl)"
CRIA L1, 4 TURNS#l8,
5116 LD. -- 50MMF
CR2A
CRIB
200pF T•R SWITCH

CR2B
ALL DIODES ARE 2N916.
PART VAUJES ARE FOR 1so TO 2so voe
30 MHz OPERATION. CR3A CR3B
10-50 MHZ DUPLEXER-All diodes conduct in

tronsmit mode, ond none conduct in receive
l.005
cs
mode, to give simple ond low-cost tronsmit·

TRANSMIT-RECEIVE SWITCH-Permits instant
receive switch requiring no externol bias
break-in during pauses in amateur c•w trans·
supplies or switching signals. lsolotion is
missions. Eliminates need for antenna relay,
greater thon 26 dB for 30-V peak signal.-
because transmitter is connected all tho time.
R. Van Sickle, Simple Duplexer Requires Only
Similarly, receiver is operating all the time,
Inexpensive Components, Electronic Design, permitting monitoring of station interference
July 5, 1969, p 80. during transmissions. Book gives complete
construction and operation data.-M. Lincoln,
All-Electronic T·R Switch for Hams, "Bench·
Tested Communications Projects," Haydon
Book Co., N.Y., p 22-25.
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT
30-76Mhz:
ANTENNA
son ISmo 30mo
0.01,.f
RECEIVER
TRANSMITTER
0,-06 , UNITRODE UM5200
BRIDGE T·R SWITCH-With switch in RECEIVE Receiver is then connected lo antenna through and open-circuited, so transmitter is un·
position shown, current of 30 mA from con• I .2 ohms. With switch in TRANSMIT posi- grounded and foeding antenna.-P. V. Wanok,
stont-current source flows through diode tion, OS and 06 conduct, grounding receiver Transmit-Receive Switch Exceeds 60-dB Isola-
bridge, forward-biasing diodes at 1.2 V. input, while bridge diodes are reverso·biased tion, Electronics, Aug. 18, 1969, p 93.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the cotegory of this chapter, use the index at the back
CHAPTER 91
Transmitter Circuits
Cs OUTPUT
40o-MHZ MICROSTRIPLINE AMPLIFIER-Doliv·

ers 15 W to SO.Ohm line. Correct bios is
obtoined without d·c blocking, os long os d-c
impedonce of source is obove 50 ohms.-"Sili·
~
con Power Circuits Monual,'' RCA, Harrison,
N.J., SP-51, p 349.
C1, C2, CT = trinimer copocitor, 2 lo 18 pf,

Amperox HTIOA/218 or equiv.
R1 =5.1 ohms, 0.5 wott, carbon
Noles:
C.
=
C. 0.03 µf, ceramic disc
= 470 pf, feedthrv, Allen Bradley FA5C or
1. Brood = y"• Teflon board (r = 2.6), Budd
Co. Polych""' Div., Grode 108l, 1 oz, double·
oquiY. clod copper, or equiv.
C., Co = 0.005 µf, ceramic disc 2. Dimensions In inches.
HFC HFC
:l.9µH 3.9µ II
~-Ol"F
1 µII
9-180 9-180
pf pf
1.5 T
82 K 1-30 1-:10 .01µ F

11':.1381
pf ,,r
.._______________.....__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _""' capacitive
to providecoupling,
proper with primary
collector coil topped
leading. Book
a.w 240-MHZ C W-Output stage is varacter

0 240 MHz using capacitive coupling. Idler 4- gives winding data for all coils.-"Circuits
trlpler thot consists basically of three tuned circuit is series-tuned to 160 MHz. Input cir· - Monual,'' Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p
circuits. Output circuit is double-tuned to cuit is double-tuned to 80 MHz ond uses 12-8·2.
877
225-400 MHZ POWER AMPLIFIER-Uses low.

pass L-C laddor networlcs for impedance
transformation. With 6 W drive, provides 17
W output power across entire band with total
output variation of 0.5 dB.-"Silicon Power
p 350.
Cc= 2000jF ls= 8.5 nH
Ci. C. = 7 pf la= 5.6 nff
=
c. 10 pf
=
c. 1.5 to 30 pf (Johanson type or equiv.) ls= 10 nH
=
=
c. 26.5 pf
c. = 17.5 pf
lo 19.5 nH llncludH induclanco of output cou•
piing capacitor c.1
Cr= 26.5 pf
Li
La
=•.5
= nff
1• nH (includes inductance of input cou• Note:
piing capacitor c.) All fixed companenls measured ol .COO MHz
+6.8V +IOV
C, = variable capacitor. high-quality. CR1 = siliconn:ctifier.type IN914

double-bearing type, Miller J 1 = coaxial connector, chassis-mount
23100 or 23050 or equivalent vhrtype
(See Table VII for value) L 1 = (See Table VII for values)
C2 = 25-picofarad air-type irimmer L2 = 2.5 millihenries, minature rf
capcitor: Hammarlund APC-25 choke, iron core, Millen J300·
or equivalent 2500 or equivalent
C 3 C 4 C5 C6 = silver mica capacitors.
300 volts (See Table Qi = MOS field effect transistor,
VII for values) type 3Nl28
C1 = 2200 picofarads, 300 volts, silver 02 = transistor. RCA 40245
mica Q3 = transistor. RCA SK3020
Cs = 0.05 picofarad, 50 volts or R 1 = 22,000 ohms, I /2 watt. IO%
greater. ceramic disc R2= 12.000to47,000ohms. l/2
c9 = 0.1picofarad,50 volts or greater, watt, 10%: select for 2-volt peak
ceramic disc output
C 10 C 11 = 1500 picofarads, 500 volts. R3 = 12.000ohms. 1/2 watt. IO%
feedthrough type R. = 820 ohms, I /2 watt, 10%
C12 = 0.025microfarad,50 volts or R5 = 47 ,000 ohms, I /2 watt, IO%
greater, ceramic disc R6 = 240ohms.1/2watt.10%
VFO-Variable-frequoncy oscillator is basi- calibration and rosettability. Can be usod
cally Colpitts type, covering 1.75 to 9 MHz in with flxod or mobilo amateur radio trans-
Rve ranges oach having different valuos for mitter. Book givos construction dotalls and
L1 and C1-C6. Each rango is bandspread values for all ranges.-"Hobby Circuits Man•
over almost all of tuning dial, for accurate val," RCA, Harrison, N.J., HM-90, p 144.
TRANSMITTER OIROlJ'ITS 879
20C>-400 MHZ MICROSTRIPLINE AMPLIRER-

With 5 W drive, delivers 15 W across ontlre
band with less than 1.5 dB output variation.
-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Har•
rison, N.J., SP·51, p 349.
DIMENSIONS IN INCMES
EXPONENTIAL +28 V
TAPER
12V
+Vee
C1, c,, Co, Ct = Variable capacitor, 0.3 to 3.5 ·
pf, Johanson piston typo or equiv.
=
c,, <120 pf feedthru
I= As described in 101<1
Rn= 2.7 ohms, 1i(& W
RFC= 0.1 µH
c:.. = 3.35 pf =
C., C., C10, C.. 8.60 pf
C., C1, Cn =
0.01 pf
Co, c.. Cu = 1500 pf
l 0GHZ 1·W AMPLIFIER-Emitter is directly c., Cio. Cu. c.•• c.. = 7 - 100 pf
connected to ground plone of stripline circuit c. = " - 150 pf
Cu = 1.5 - 20 pf
board. Power gain is 6 dB.-"Silicon Power C:..1, c:.... c:... = 0.2 pf 12 v
Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, C:o, c... c.. = 1500 pf
p 361.
•28V
lt = 2 turns No. 16 wire, ff." ID,
'I•" long v
1!500 pF
ls, La, la
ohm1
= ferrite rf choke, Z = 450
12
= = rf cholle,
O.lf'F
TO OUTPUT OF Lt, h, lu 1 11H
COMPENSATIHG l•, b 3 lurns No. 16 wire, Ml"
CIRCUIT ID, I/•" l°"g
t.2 OUTPUT h = 11/t turns No. 16 wire, 1/4 "
2·10HE RFC (5001 ID, :Yo" long
T£ST SIGNA
INPUT (C)~-!"""-4
lto =2 tums No. 16 wire, '.4" ID,
%" long
(5001 ln. ln. lu =
3'12 tums No. 16 wire,
'.4" ID, 3'8" long hlug tunod)
ho, ho, hf
%" ID, %" long
=
2 turns No. 18 wlro,
Ct = Ateo A26 or eQu;v.

ho, ls., !.= =
2 tums No. 18 wire,
1f.,# ID, 1/,# Ions
= Arco 427 ot oquiv.
C2
C•
C1
=
=80·480 pf, Arco •69 or equiv.
1'0·680 pf, Arco '66 or equiv.
h = 3 No, 14 wire. V4" ID. 'la.,, lono
l2 = 3 turns No. 10 wire, 'hH ID, 'A" long
turns
h = 3·1/1 turns No. 10 wire, S/1" ID, l!J" long

12 v
175-MHZ 35·W POWER AMPLIFIER-lncor•
poratos matching notworks and techni11ue1
30-MHZ NARROW-BAND 100-W AMPLIFIER-
Developed for UH with 28-V mobile radio for avoiding low.frequency oscillation when
supply. Uses RCA SSB developmental tran• operating from 12·V battery for mobile radio
slstor.-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, application.-"Silicon Powor Circuits Manual "
Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 320. RCA, Harrison, N.I., SP-51, p309. '
27-MHZ CB TRANSMITIER-Straightforward
design consists of modulator and transmitter.
Number of tuning components is minimized.
One sedion of double-pi network is peaked
for maximum output, and the other is ad- 220
pF
justed to limit of S W d-c input to Anal 47 RFe2 24
amplifier, as required by FCC.-"Silicon 001 pF
\ 510 11F
SP Sl, p 304.
0
'CRYSTAL
27MHz +llT015V
Ct = Arco No. 429 or equiv. h = 11 turn• No. 22 wire. 'f," ere

Lt = 14,3 turns No. 22 wire, 'I•" ere coif form with '"green dot'' core.
coit with
form
0.75°1.2 µH, Q
.. green
= 100
dot"" core. 0.5·0.9 µH, Q 120 =
L, = 7 turn• No. 22 wire, 'I•" CTC
L:: = 1A:2l/, turns No. 22 wire. If,''
CTC coil form with .. groen dott" core.
coil fctm with •·green dot•• cote,
0.21·0.34 µH. Q = 140
0.75-1.2 µH, Q = 100 RFC1, RFCo = IS µH, Millor No. 462.4
or equiv.
5 _AA..
0
TRIGGER IN
:>
TO
MODULATOR
-70 -----<>-12
60-5 TRANSMITIER WARM·UP-Allows fila-

ments in pulse-modulatod transmittor to
warm up before modulation pulses are ap·
l"lied. Transistor types are not critical. Ar·
ticle gives time dolay equation. With silicon
transistors and tantalum capacitors, circuit
operates from -SS to +85C.-E. Rosonbaum,
Sixty-Second Timor Allows Transmitter Wr.rm•
Up, Electronic Design, Jan. 20, 1964, p 82.
Ml
RF
IN
DIRECTIONACPOWER METER
CITIZENS BAND TUNING MONITOR-Minia· MATCHING VERTICAL LOOP-Depends on sides, in junglo IC.cations whero minimum
ture illumin.ated S meter Ml peaks whan CB switching of low-loss flxed mica capacitors height of conventional long·wlr", dipole, or
transw '•tor has good modulation and Is tuned and variable air-dioloctric capacitors instead rhombic antenna would have to bo at least
for maximum r·f output. Monitor can bo of customary taps or links. High·impodance, 40 foot for comparable performance. Will
permanently connected to transmission line. low-valuo capacitor is divided into two equal work in ham bands If military-quality capac•
Book gives construction details.-H. Friedman, soctions to provide close balance with respect itors can be obtalned.-K. H. Pattorson,
CB Tuning Monitor, "Bench-Tested Cammuni· to ground and thoroby pormit higher volt· Down-To-Earth Army Antenna, Eledronict,
cations Projects," Hayden Book Co., N.Y., p ages. Used with equilateral octagonal port· Aug. 21, 1967, p 111-114.
48-SO. able vertical loop antenna having S-foot
TRANSMITTER CIRCUITS 881
470
.02 µf
+ .1 µ.f
, 2 ll H
30 T 15 T
.170-780
3000-5000 pf
pf 3000-5000
pf
. 02 µf
I Modulation 1 Kc.
RFC= 200 µh + 12 Vdc. .1 µ.f

1
I
~
T , Micro-Metals Toroid Core 10 µC
1
T-50-2 Bifilar
T , Pri. 40 T, #28, 1/4" ID Slug Tuned Form
2
Sec. 8 T, #28, Wound over Pri.
20 WAT 2.18 MHz-Designed for marine band0 7-W modulation power from 10-ohm source.
radlotolophone uso. Consists of crystal oscil- -"Circuits Manual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
lator, driver, and output stago, Requires 1965, p 12-1-2.
TO ANTENNA
J2
L4
2.5mh
-
iC3 iC4
1000 1000 Tl
S·W ONE-TUBE C-W-Uses 6AW8·A triodo-

R5
IOOK
-.
03
~~
VI~SI
04
E
pentode. Can be oporated on 160, 80, 40, coils for Lt. Diodes D1-D4 aro 750-mA 400- construction dotoils.-E.' N. Noll, Ono-Tube
and 20 meter bands, by using appropriate piv silicon. Cl is lo-365 µµF and C2 is 100- S·Watter, "Bench-Tested Communications Proi-
crystal frequency and appropriato plug-in 580 p.p.F mica trimmer. Book gives comploto ods," Haydon Book Co., N.Y., p 31-33.
882 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MAN1.J AL
2N2832 (2) 2N2832
lOT
4700-6300
pf.
170-780
pf.
pf.+
1000
RFC
I
40 W at 2.18 MHZ-Requires 2.18-MHz car-
rier signal from standard crystal oscillator
J
and 18-W modulation powor from 5-ohm
sourco. Foods into SQ.ohm coaxial tran~ +12 Vdc.
mission llno.-"Circults Manual," Motorola, •5 fJ C •
Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 12-1-4.
RFC =20011 II
1
T , T • Micro-Metals Toroid Core T-50-2 Blfilar
1 2
J .Olµf,
.GS
RFC
-12 Vdc
...... lµf .lµfi
O.S-W 240.MHZ C-W-Operatos from 12.v power at 80 MHz to triplor stage. Final is
storage battery with total current drain of zero-biased class C loadod by doublo-tuned winding data for all colls.-"Clrcults Man·
180 mA. Oscillator is (ommon-base crystal- close-coupled transformer with impedances ual," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 12·
controlled Hartley dollverlng about 15 mW of ranging from 25 to 100 ohms. Book givos 7-2.
156-174 MHZ MARINE-BAND MULTIPLIER·

AMPLIFIER-Delivers 1 W to antenna (maxi·
mum powor specified by FCC for harbor
communications). Can be operated any•
whero in band without retuning, simply by
changing crystal frequency of exciter section
(not shown). Consists of throe frequency
multiplier stages using 40637 transistors,
followed by power amplifier stage.-"Silicon
SP-51, p 297.
ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE

IN PICOl'AAAOS UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIF,IEO
ALL RESISTORS 1/4 W
Li, l, =101/2 turns No. 22 enamol wire, close·
wound, 10/32" slug tunod coll forms 15/64"
00, shield can 112·· " If.I" x 1"; slug·carbonyl
S.F,' or oquiv.
OD, shlold can 1/2" x 1f2" K I"; slug
carbonyl S.F. or equiv.
= l1 ;;: 2'h turns No. 20 8. T., 1,4" long, cloSO·
wound, 10/32" slug tuned coil forms 15/64"
l3, l 1 = 4112 turns No. 22 enamel wiro, close• OD, shield con 1/2" " lf2" x l": slug =
wound, 10/32" slug tuned coil forms 15/64" carbonyl S.F. or equiv.
OD. shield con 1/2" x 'h" " 1"; slug =
corbonyl S.F. or equiv.
L.==
RFC
2 turns No. 20 B.T., 3/16" O, 3/16" long
4 turns No. 30 enamel wiro, ferrite beod,
ls, lo =11.'7 turns No. 20 8.T., 1,4" long, close•
wound, 10/32'' slug tuned coil forms 15/64"
Forroxcube No. 56-590-65/48 or equiv.
SO W AT SO MHZ-Oporalos from 12-V auto

storage battery, using lhroe transistors In
porallol and three chokes per stage for tran-
sient suppression.-"Silicon Power Circuits
Lg
C1, C.
c.. c.
=
=65 - 340 pf
100 - 560 pf
Ca, C., C1 = 1000 pf, t ..dthru
Cn = ==
Ca, Co, C10 1800 pf ceramic
0.2 pf ceramic
Li, lo, b 2·''2 turns No. 16 wlro, ~" ID,
'I•" long
lo, I.$, lo = 3·'/r turns No. 18 wiro, V•" ID,
Ml" long
h, la, b = A turns No. 1.A wire, :11/e"' ID,
1/1•
Lio =forferritecoiltchoko,
Noto:
long
1 = 450 ohms
Lt-La, uao Genoral Coramic1 Co.
02 moteriol I'/•" - 28 x 'l/e"I or oquiv.
~L150
INPUT
RI OUT-
50K PUT
~
S·BAND MULTIPLIER-Use of step recovery
diode gives emciency greater than 10%,
which is better than with varactor diodo as
<] frequency multiplier. Article gives circuit

design criteria. Output fllter is six·resonator
interdigital structure with 20·MHz bandwidth
and 2-dB insertion loss. Input of 100 MHz
is multiplied 20 times to give 2 GHz output.-
R. Hall, Harmonic Generators: Is the Step
Recovery Diode Best?, Electronic Design, Jan.
NFB
18, 1965, p 28-33.
DOUBLE·SIDEBAND CB-Parallel-fed push-pull
transistor output stage suppresses carrier of
Citizens Band transmitter, giving greater
operating range. Used in 100-mW 11-moter
transceiver .-L. E. Geisler, Transistor Trans•
milter Has High·Level DSB Modulation, "400
Ideas for Design Selected from Electronic
Design," Hayden Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p
30.
12nF
C""r=4-29pF
175-MHZ POWER AMPLIFIER-Circuit is ex-

ample of design procedure for optimizing
+28V input and output matching networks for r-f
power transistor. Maximum power output is
(IOOO pf °* 13.5 W. Causes and cures for spurious oscil-
lations are covered. Appendix gives doriva•
12K lions of design equations.-J. Mulder, On tho
Rel AS Design of Transistor R. F. Power Amplifiers,
Electronic Applications, Philips, Pub. Dept.,
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, Vol.
27, No. 4, 1966-1967, p 155-171.
' - - + - - - - T O TRANSISTOR BAS£

100
RFC RBIAS
TD ANODE OF DIOOE OUTPUT
OUTPUT
MATCHING
NETWORK
INPUT
30.MHZ LINEAR AMPLIFIER-Output voltage INPUT
of d-c differential ampliffer serves as bias MATCHING
NETWORK
source for power transistor. Two additional
stages provide current amplification, with
negative feedback for stability. Uses RCA
558 developmental transistor-diode package
(shown in accompanyln9 block diagram) for
BIAS RFC
temperature compensation, to give reliable CONTROL
operation over wide temperature range as AMPLIFIER I I
class AB ampllfler.-"Silicon Power Circuits L------J
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 318. LOW-COM>UCTANCE
COMPENSATING DIODE
2-30 MHZ LINEAR POWER AMPLIFIER-Wide·

band amplifler has power gain of over 40
dB and delivers 5 W pep output for 28-V
mobilo applications,-"Silicon Power Circuits
Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-SI, p 321.
T1, T2 = 18 tu•ns twMod pa;r, No. 28 enamel

w;re on 01 Cf 102 form
h = 50 turns No. 30 enamel w;re on CF 102
Ot form
sen
MICROS TRIP
1114" LONG
10 n
MICROSTAIP 375·MHZ STRIPLINE AMPLIFIER-Delivors 5 W
I 114" LONG for military a•m voice communication systems.
Transmission-line elements ore construded
from ':h2·inch Teflon fiberglass microstrip
board. Ferrite choke In transistor base re•
1•30 = turn provides low-frequency stability.-"Sili·
pF con Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., SP SI, p 347.
0
F•Ue TO 136 MHI

P•SmW
Z•50R TYPE
2N3866.~.-------,
I C1
.t1
=
Ce~
~c~ TYPE Ct
IN3193
=
•Vee •MOO.Vee
12.SV 12.SV
C1 = 330 pf, Arco S.M. or equiv. l• = S•/2 turns No. 22 wire, 13/6•" ID, dose
Cz = 0.005 µF, coromic wound, lapped at 2 turns
=
118-136 MHZ AIRCRAFT RADIO TRANSMITIER Co, c,, c,., C1• = =
Co, C1, Co, Co, Cu, Cn 1000 pF1 fe,,.chhru
0.05 µF, coram•c
C• = 50 pf, 5%, Arco S.M., or equiv.
b 6 turns No. 22 wiro, 13/64" ID, interwlnd
wilh L. on IRN·9 core material
L1 = 4 turns No. 22 wire, 131~•· ID, intorwind
-Requires no retuning for band coverage.
Push-pull output stage delivers 40 W pep.
C10, Cu, Cu = 82 pf, 5%, Arco S.M., or equl'(.
C1" C10, Cit= 150 pf, 5%, Arco S.M., or oqutv.
with h on IRN-9 core material
=
u 5 turns No. 22 wire, 13/64" ID, center·
c., = Variablo capacitor, 8·to·60 pf, Arco AOA tapped, interwlnd with IA
All stages are amplitude-moduloted.-"Sili·
con Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison,
ot equiv.
L1 = 7 turns No. 22 wire, 13/64" ID, 9/16" lon9,
Lo =5 turns No. 22 wlr•, 13/64" ID, lnterwlnd
with Ls
N,J., SP-SI, p 329. topped at 1.5 turns RFC = 1 turn No. 28 wire, ferrite bood, Ferrox•
cube Na. 56·590-65/48 or equiv.
CRYSTAL
MIKE
[:[):::
01 Transistor, FET. N Ch•nn•I HEP 802

01 F ••Id E lloct Transistor HEP 802 02 NPN Silicon Tr•nsi1tor HEP 55
02,03
RI
NPN S1hcon Transrstor RI I MEG n R1t1istor \\ W•tt 10%
1.000.000 U R ..ostor \\ W•tt 10'4 R2,R!> 4. 70012 Rasistor Y, W•ll I 0%
R2.R4 22.!lOO !! R..,.tor Y, W•tt lll'lr. RJ 10,000 2 Trom Pot
RJ 4,700 H R ..,.lor Y, W•tt 10% R4 10,000 Sl Rnostor Y, W•tt lll'lr.
R!"> 47.000 HR1t1ot1or \;Wan 10%
R6
R6 330 H Rotosto• Y. W•tt 10%
470.000 U Rosostor Y, Wall 10% c1.c2 10 µF 0 12V E lectrotyllc
C1.C:1 tOµFo n Von Erec:rrolytoc Cl O Q1 µFD O•SC Ceramic C.pac1lor
CJ 220 PF 01K Cl'tam1c IOµFO MICA C.pocotor
C4
C4 tOPF MICA C!"> l.!">·7 !">PF Varoml• C•oacotor
C6 10 PFO MCA Copacllor
A-M WIRELESS TRANSMITIER-High imped-
f..M WIRELESS TRANSMITIER-High imped·
ance of fet input stage of audio amplifler
anco of fot input stage of audio amplifler
provides proper match with crystal miko.
provldos proper match with crystal miko.
Drivor Q2 modulates Hartley oscillator Q2
Ql frequency-modulates single-transistor Os•
for feeding short antenna wiro connected to
cillator tunable over 88-108 MH1 f-m band.
four turns of hookup wiro wound around
Ll Is four turns of wlro wound on pencil
adjustablo forrito antenna coil L1, Operates
and spaced half-inch apart. C7 is two short
from two 9.y transistor radio batteries in
pieces of Insulated wlro twisted together,
series. Tune a•m radio to quiet spot, then
CB is 0.01-µF disc capacitor, and Bl is 9.y
adjust L1 until voice at mike is picked up.
transistor radio battery. Normal setting of
Range is one or two rooms In home.-"Caloc·
modulation control R3 Is mid-position. Tune
tro Handbook," GC Electronics, Rockford, Ill.,
f·m receiver to quiet spot, thon adjust C5
FR-69-C, p 46.
until voico at mike is heard.-"Caloctro Hand-
book," GC Electronics, Rockford, Ill., FR-69-C,
p 46.
9-180 .Ol11fd
pf
L2
'
I
I
~
ic
6
56 pf 200 pf
9-180 p
TO MODULATOR:::Jll
t. - 6 turns of #22 on 1/4" dia.
1
L - 4 turns of 422 on 1/4" dia.
2 2 W FOR CITIZENS BAND-27-MHi crystal
L - 3 turns of #20 on 3/8" dia • oscillator feeds driver and 1lngla.transistor
3 output 1tago. Requires 1.5 W audio Input
L - 4 turns of 1120 on 3/8" dia. power to provide minimum of 80% modula·
4
Motorola 2N2951 tlon. Modulation distortion Is less than 5%.
Ql & Q2 -"Circuits Monua~" Motorola, Phoenix, Ari1.,
Q3 Motorola 2N2950 1965, p 12·2-2.
35·MHZ 6-W NARROW-BAND A-M TRANS·

MITIER-Modulator requires 6 W audio
power, loocouse transmitter hos total of 12 W
d-c input power from 12·V mobile storago
C1, C., C., C1 :: 3·3.S pf
==
battery. Developed for aircraft radio ap·
C:, c.. c.. c. 8·60 pf
C., Cn, c,. 0.03 pf plicatians.-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual,"
C10, C1:. Cu :: 1000 pf
Li. le
b, b
=
= 3 tvrn1 No. 16 wiro. 11,·· 10.
lerrilo choke, Z - •.so ohms
v.H loftg
Lo = rf choko, 1.5 pH = 5 turn1 No. 16 wire. J/e.. 10,, 1Ja" long
= '
= b·1
L., lT
lo
lvr111 No. 16 wiro, •/,• ID, l/e" long
rl choko, 1.0 µH
Ri = 220 ohm1
= 180 ohms
La = wire·woun.d residor, R = 2.4 ohmt.
Ro
SR= IN2858A
ANTENNA
BP I
CRYSTAL MIKE
JI TRANSMIT
FREQUENCY CI
CK537AX ADJUST
GI
RI AUDIO
GAIH
A·M WIRELESS MIKE-Can loo operated lo· CONTROL Bl SWIA
I
golly if antenna Is no longer than 10 ft.
Tune radio to dead spot, then adjust Cl and
I
I +~l
RI until voice at mike Is hoard. Use 1.25-V
dry coll for BI and 45-V or 90-V battery for
V2. Cl is 150 pf, RI 750K, and LI 205
I
r
l------- ---------··--
-----· I
I
~
turns No. 24 enamel on %-Inch coil form.-

':-i.
L
R. M. Brown, "104 Simple One-Tuloo Projects/'
Talo Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa., 1969, p
102.
82
11111 ,,...+_ _.
r--------------------------------------------------t----------~~lv~
IOVTO
\.2 AC:1'R.
+
T'-..--+-----..~~Q-·...../-----------..--.....--.------.------------~-------t-..~;1:.
lk HO II Ok
SPIKE REGULATOR-Used in G·E 450-MHz

solid-state mobile radio to suppress voltage
R$
100 spikos caused by antonna mismatch, oxcos•
"' slve temperature, high input voltage, or
short on 12-V transmitter supply. Regulator
DZ
is part of complete protection system de-
scribed in artlclo.-C. Smith, A Protection
System for Solid-State Transmitters, Electron·
iu World, Fob, 1969, p 38-39 and 77.
IOV TO CClltTROL CIRCUIT
KCVED IOV PTT HIGH

TOXr.ITR
28Vdc 50-W 50-MHZ THREE-TRANSISTOR-Uses only

5.6t•H RFC throe stoges, one of which is low-levol Col-
002 0.1 pitts crystal oscillator. Providos continuous
3.91•H RFC
iooo n(--1·F-J--T ,.F power output, with 27 dB combined power
gain for driver and final stages. Provisions
for keying or frequency modulation may be
Uk 0.15-0.201•H
0.005,,f J RFC added. Report gives design approach for
optimizing performance of each stage. Cir•
..,. cuit is suitable only for f-m or c-w, not a-m .
-R. C. Hejhall, A 50 Watt 50 MHz Solid-Stale
Transmitter, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., AN·
246, 1967.
1000
156-174 MHz MARINE-BAND POWER AMPLI-

FIER-With 1-W f-m power applied to Input
of driver, output stage delivers over 10 W
to 50-ohm transmission llne.-"Silicon Power c,, C:, C.. Ct, C., Co. =Arco ~ or equiv, l:, l1 = 11/2 turns No. 20 wire, 1/4" ID, 3/32"
CT, c. =0.022 "'· 25 v long
Circuits Manual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, c., C10 = 1000 pf, ceramic standoff Lo=2 turns No. 18 wire, 1.4• ID, 5/16" long
p 298. Li, Ls = I turn No. 20 wire, 1.4• ID, 3/32" long RFC =4 turns No. 30 wire, ferrite bead Ferrox·
cubo No. 56·590·65/48 or equiv,
2 \V
- .6,2 Q2
L3 SOD
lOMW
K
.o~
"f
50 .0
~001 f
-
2-8 4-30
5-18 2-8 8-50 pf p!
pf pr pf
100
,____ ~,_ . . . . . . . . . . . . ...rv"".......................................,..~+25vdc
Ll =2T #20 1/2" OD

I·:-o._1_p_r______...,.J:_o_._1_,._r__T_ o.1 11 r L2 = lT #20 3/4" OD
L3 =3T #14 3/8" ID
L4 =2T #14 3/8" ID
2·W 160-MHZ DRIVER AND FINAL-Three- fair stablllty without neutralization, R·f mizo possibility of drcuit oscillation at somo
transistor output circuit provides overall gain choice that providos zero bias for Q2 should •-•r froquoncy.-"Clrcuits Manual," Mota•
of 23 dB. QI operates class A and provides bo as small as possible electrically to mini- rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 12-6-2.
LOAD
.----.H"'-"rvv'-1-.fOJ('4) AI
POUT
C4
=
FOR :n.S-MHz OPERATION
C1 =
=
"·40 pf
c. 7-100 pf
Ca= 3.35 pf
c.
CG
=
=
8-60 pf
1500 pF, feedthru
CG
h
=
0.01 µI, disc coro.,ic
=
1.3 turns No. 16 wire, If•" ID, y,." long
Lt
b
=
fotrilo choke, Z
= =
rf choke. O.AA µH
750 ohm1
Lt = .C turn1 No. 16 wire, 1/," ID,, 0.3'' long
R1 = 0.68 ohmt.. wire wound, 1 watt
Vcc•28V
FOR •OO-MHz OPERATION

40o.MHZ POWER AMPLIFIER-Delivers over
15 W at 400 MHz and over 20 W at 225 C. = ==
c•. c.
c.. c.
1.5·20 pf
3.35 pf
I 000 pf, faodlhru
MHz. T network matches 3-ohm Input im· C..
h
=
= 0.01 µf, dilc cerGmic
1.3 turns No. 16 wire, lf,H ID, 'I•• long
pedanco of transistor to SO-Ohm source h = =
ferrite choke, 2 750 ohms lor 0.12-pH
impedance, and pi network matches output choke)
to SO-Ohm load.-"5i6con Power Circuits Man•
b
h
=
= rf choke, 0.13 µH
3 lurns J,1z• x ~· coppar ribbon, ~ ID,
•
ual/' RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-51, p 348. 'Ir" long

R1 :: 0.68 _ohms, wiro wauncl, 1 watt
ANTENNA
C2
0.02}'-f
QI
2Nl39 WIRELESS MIKE-Tune to dead spot at low
end of a•m broadcast-band receiver. An-
Cl LI tenna len9th Is llmltod to 10 ft by law. If
365pf not hoard, try rovonlng connodlons to L2.
LI Is No. 7141 Boldon Utz wire wound
CARBON closely In slnglo layer to within Y4 inch of
MIKE ends of 7-inch by 0.33-lnch forrito rod. L2
·is 35 turns of No. 24 enameled wire wound
dirodly ovor 11.-"A Modern Transistor
RI C4 Workbook." Radio Shack, Boston, Mass.,
IOOK 0.02J1.f
1965, p 13.
RFC
L11h
L11h
HFC
l II b
.1 /1 f RFC
.001
pf
RL
.4-8 50
4-30
OSCILLATOR DOUBLER DIHVEH-1 DlllV£n-2 omv1m-a OUTPUT

1.5-W 120.MHZ AIRCRAFT-Uses 60.MHz crys- stages are colloctor•modulatod in order to Book 9lvo1 coll-winding data.-"Clrcult1 Man•
tal oscillator to food froquoncy-doubling am• obtain 100% modulation. QS and Q6 are ua~" Motorola, Phoonlx, Ariz., 1965, p 12·
plillor stago Q2, Both driver and output 2N2950 and all othor tranflstors aro 2N2951. ' 5-2.
..--~5---------.Qotl2 •
~IC!
_f111 •.,; l
<.7'
~
150-MHZ NARROW-BAND OUTPUT STAGE-
For use In battery•operatod portable trans-
mitter where good gain and high etllcioncy
ore important. Uses ZT3866 uhf transistor In
switching mode. Second harmonic suppres-
sion is excellent. Current droin is 155 mA.
Report gives design equations.-A Low Power
High Efficiency Output Stoge Using ZT3866
Transistors, Forronti Ltd., Oldhom, Lanes.,
c, , Ca , G4 - c. ~ - 30pF t.ri~er England, Application Noto 37, Dec. 1968.
c. l :.oOpF f"eed tr.rough
L< 1,T, 6.~= I.D. l.;.>rem T.C.TI. 100'.tll long
L• 0,47sUl Cembio11 Choke type 361,0-1 ~-2
L. O.l5uH camhion choke type 36h0-l-?
Lt' L, 0. 22µ11 CsmM or. Choke t:ype !·640- ~-2
c::::J
CRYSTAL Cl C3
4.7pf 50pf
d CHANNEL LOCATOR-When third-over-

tone Citizens-Band crystal for desired channel LI
is Inserted In oscillator, L1 will radiate thot
frequency to receiver for quick location of
C2
47pf
that channel. Adjust Rt Initially, without Bl
crystal, until milliammotor In series with 9V SI
battery shows 0.2 mA, then Insert crystal --~+ 11i=------o?o----
and adjust C3 for maximum sign.al at re- C4
colver. Lt is B&W 3003.-"A Modern Tran- 0.01,.t
sistor Workbook,". Radio Shock, Boston,
Mass., 1965, p 17.
RFC RFC RFC +25 Vdc

3.9µ H 3 .9 /1 H
3.9 ""
16 K
RFC
2.7 K
l 11 H 1 "H
9-180
pf
10-W 76-MHz C-W-Operates from 25.V d-c Book gives coil-winding data.-"Circults Man•
supply ond feeds Into 50.ohm cooxiol lino. uol," Motorolo, Phoenix, Ariz., 1965, p 12· R
L
=SO
Requires 6-mW Input powar. Output stoge 4-2.
draws 600 mA and driver stogos 166 mA.
15 W cd 160 MHZ-Provides 30.5 dB power

goin with only three transistor stages. Re-
port shows how input-output admittance
data in network design is used to optimize
performance of each stage. Addition of
appropriate osclllator, buffer, and multiplier
stages would give complete f·m or c·w
transmitter. Not Intended for a•m operation.
Requires 13-mW power input.-R. Hejhall, A
t - 66M, 6Tuu••tlT1n~Wur.) ):Z"l.O. l J'L.
1
160 MHz 15·Watt Solid-State Power Ampl;.
L, · Un.'\, 2 Tdr.• •It T11t~ Wu·"· l '2" I. O. S t ' I... lier, Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz., AN·214, 1967,
'-J • 1$n.'\.
4 T~u• •14 T1n*"PdWtrf'. l 4·· 1.D J f' L
L4 • t'S M. ) T"o• •H T1nMd Narf'. 3 ·1" I. D. l I· L.
TO
4CX2508
+28V DC SCREEN
50ml\
GRID
120V
400CPs·---.,
2.2K
500
POWER
LEVEL
IN492
Rz
270K Cz 2 STAGE
0.001 RC
COUPLEO
VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
560 560
between 200 and 250 W, over entire tuning For excessive power (negative error signal),
n
RF OUTPUT
TRANSMISSION LINE range. 1N21B diode in dirodlonal coupler output of second chopper drops to zero.
DIRECTION COUPLER rectifies r·f output samplo. Secondary of Power correction is made automatically by
120V filamont transformer chops off half of each varying voltage at screen af 4CX250B driver
400CPS
input cycle at 400-Hz rate. CR3 and CR4 over range of 50 to 120 V.-J. H. Davis and
R·f POWER OUTPUT CONTROL-Used in servo· form second chopper-a shunt gate that al· 8, van Sutphin, Automatic Carrier-Level Sys•
tuned a•m fsk 225-399.95 MHz transmilter to ternately blocks and passes when Input cmor tem Controls 250.Watt Transmitter, Eleclronlc
maintain power within 10% of present value, signal is positive to indicate low power. Do1lgn, March 16, 1964, p 78-81.
NOTE: To locate additionc:il circuits In tho cc:itegory of this chapter, use tho index at the back
of tliis book. Check c:ilso the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits,'' published by
McGrc:iw-Hill In 1968.
CHAPTER 92
Triangular-Wave Generator Circuits
VI
+lOOV
NE2
10
POSITION 1-.4 Hz
o-1 LOW-FREQUENCY TRIANGULAR-PULSE NEON
SWITCH -May be used as time base for any slow-
scan device requiring equal trace and re.
POS ITION 2 - 4Hz
trace time. SOOK controls may be 9an9od
for frequoncy control, or lsolatod for lin·
earity adjustmont.-W. G. Millar, ''Using and
POSITION 3·40Hz Understanding Miniature Neon Lamps," H.
W. Sams & Co., Indianapolis, Ind., 1969, p
47.
V2
NE2
+12v CR2 CR 3
R4 INT46A IN270
390 UV
CR4 IN7!12A
IN270 5.6 v
RI RI Rl!I +12V
6.8• 6.811 +12V 100
B R20
Rl4 IBk
1.811 RI& RIT
3.3k 3.h
RT RI
IM IM
R6 R II
1.211 03
100
2N2222A
R9
CAI 100• Rl2
IN753A !Ill
RIB
15 k
-12V +12 v
RIO
10011
Rl3
II II
-12V
SUBAUDIO TRIANGULAR WAVES-With to 0.05 H& with R7.Wave shapo is good.- orator Has Just a Few Components, Electronic
valuos shown, output can be adjusted down N. M. Nekomoto, LF Triangular Wavo Gon• Design, Nov. 22, 1967, p 105.
892
TRIANGULAR-WAVE GENERATOR CIRCUITS 893
SQIW!E
- 15 Volts
UNIVERSAL WAVEFORM GENERATOR-Com· TRIAlllLE

binatlon of six OEI IC moclules provides
choice of six clifforont output waveforms,
with frequency cloterminecl by 10-nF capaci·
tor ancl 1SOK rosistors In oscillator using
first 9125 opamp as switch with hysteresis Sil'i:
and seconcl as integrator clriven by cunont
having polarity determinocl by switch and
cliodo bridge. All waveforms are symmetrl·
cal about common output except triangle.
Diodes are 1N914 or slmllar.-A Square/ COSINE
Triangle/Sine/Cosine Waveform Generator,
Optical Electronle1, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10116,
+15V
0.01 HZ-200 KHZ TRIANGLE AND SQUARE
WAVE-Cl cloterminos froquoncy. Triangu-
lar linearity Is excellent. Q3 ancl Q4 form
cllfferontial amplifier with constant•current
gonerator 06. Positive feeclback throu9h
R9 buffer Q2 makes cllfferential ampllfl.itr act
5.611 as threshold cletector havin9 hl9h hysteresis.
RB controls symmetry.-W. E. Peterson, lnox-
ponslvo Generator Produces Trlan9lo and
Square Waves, Electronic Design, March 15,
1970, p 208 ancl 210.
01 02
2N3638 2N3638
~-··A····-, T:~ANGLE 03 04
~"~ 2N3643
(2 EAi R3
GND 2.2k
1 1 1
c '• 2 3
R4 R5
lk 5k
06 -
2N3643
R7
5.6k
CR2
IN752A
15.6VI
100pF
BZV88·C3V3
BZV88·C2V7
100nF
I I
~_ ....
___...._ ________ ___ .._ _______.,.
L-c:J--@-_J TRIANGULAR AND SAWTOOTH-Uses three
Philips TAA241 difference ompliflen, with Al
1
kQ BAX16 connected as integrator that feeds A2 con-
100pF nected as comparator. A3 merely servos to
invort output voltage of A2 so it is fed to
AI in correct phoso. Circuit n.ormolly pro-
vides trlongvlar output waveform. To got
sawtooth, input resistor of integrator is
shunted by diode o.,d resistor in series, os
shown by dashed lines.-J. Cohen ond J.
Oosterling, Applicotions of o Practical D. C.
Difference Amplifier, Philips, Pub. Dopt., El-
coma Div., Eindhovon, The Netherlands, No.
321, 1968.
+19V
R7
4.7k
R2 R3
20k 15k C3 RU
+ - 9k
R4 t--------t
01
2N3905
4.7k 'ZSµ.F
NV\
,.,_----t----1--------0 OUTPUT
/VV1 03
MP FI03
01 02
IN457 IN457
25,.U
RI
I Ok
lM R9
IOOk
RIO
IOOk RIZ
IOOk
R5 RB
Cl 02
2.7k R6 4.7k
0.01µ.F IOM Rl3
G.E. lk
D13TI
SAWTOOTH TO TRIANGLE-Sawtooth output collent symmetry and lineority.-H. Cohen,

of romp function generotor Q1-Q2 is In• Triangular Waveform Generotor is Simple Vet
verted by fet Q3 and converted into trionglo Effective, Eloclronic Design, Oct. 25, 1969, p
waveform by Dl ond D2. Output has ox• 111 ond 113.
22m 6.Bm
100JLI 100JLI
+12v +12v
C's IN PF. 1m Im lOOµf

UNLESS NOTED 33Dk
330
THREE WAVEFORMS AT 0.004 HZ-Three IC

opomps, connected os clipper and two in·
-12vo---o-~
FIRST
-12v o-----_, k
SECOND
INTEGRATOR INTEGRATOR
verters, give choice of squoro-wovo, triongu-
lor·wave, ond parabolic wovaform opproxi· genarotar. Pot controls output omplitude.- form Generator Uses 3 Op Amps, Electronics,
mating sine wove, for universol suboudio A. D. Dolagrongo, Low Frequency Wove• April 14, 1969, p 98.
fi!-_ ___!,M~~1
'-"'JVIK""""~.....~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~t-'f-"~2K,..,..-t't. I OUTPUT
•N914 IK
IPOS. SLOPE!
L2v
L_____ J~:v T
•K
!NEC.. SlOPEl
1·5
MHI)
10 HZ-5 MHZ AT STABILIZED I V-Reducos quency bands, with Rf providing tuning in quency and 1haft rotation.-J. P. Bolton and
true trionguh:ir wavo with 1 % linearity over each band. Hyperbolic resistance curve for B. E. Packham, Wide-Rongo Trlangular•Wavo
antlre range. SI gives choice of six fro· Rf gives 1traight 1ine relation between fro-
0
Generator, EEE, March 1967, p 96 and 98.
TRIANGLE-SQUARE WITH ONE IC-Uses

Burroughs dual 1709 opamp package MC·
1437P, with opamp Al serving as levot.do-
tectlng swhching amplifier for generating
square waves, and opamp A2 connected as
5pF integrator for generating triangular waves
with excellent linearity. Cl determines fre-
quency range, which is 8 to 120 kHz for 500
pf and 400 to I 0,000 Hz for 0.01 µ.F. Out•
put has constant amplitude to over 50 kHz.
-J. F. Kingsbury, Single IC Forms Wido-
Range Triangle/Square-Wave Generator,
EEE, Oct. 1969, p 109-110.
5pF
+150V
A079 O.OOS-0.5 HZ TRIANGULAR-Upper frequency
limit of dual astable low-subaudio oscillator
is set by Ionization time of neons. Lower
frequency depends on leakage resistance of
C, which should be high-quality paper ar
mylar.-E. Bauman, "Applications of Neon
Lamps and Gas Discharge Tubes," Slgnalite,
A079 Neptune, NJ., p 37.
ir
2
-10 v
- 15 v 0----"...,..,..,,........,
1.6k .A
10 k .A
+15 v
S2 Offset 50 k
!Ok""
Square
-15 v
Amplitude
-lOV "Trim for ±10 V output.

0.1-100 HZ SINE·SQUARE-TRIANGULAR- having choice of three output waveforms, quoncy, amplitude, and offset are lndo-
Combination of opamps with Burr-Brown as required for testing electrical or hydraulic pendant.-Sine/Cosino Function Generator,
4018·25 sine-cosine module gives accurate sorvos, low-pass activo flltors, and other Burr· Brown Rose arch, Tucson, Ariz., PDS·21 O,
and stable low-frequency function generator low.frequency devices. Adjustments of fro- 1968, p 6.
IOk
!Ok
lk lk
IOk
Al.L DIDOES IN914
40-70 KHZ TRIANGULAR . AND SQUARE lively. Produces triangular wave at output
WAVES-Output frequency range of almost of opamp A2 (terminal 9 of A2) and square
one octave Is covered by control voltages of wave at output of A3. Amplitude of square
4 to 7 V d-c with better than 0.5% linearity. wave Is 3 V P·P and rise time 100 ns.-D. M.
Cl determines nominal center froquency, Stewart, linear VCO Generates Sawtooth
with values from 2 µF to 60 pF giving fre• and Square Waveforms, EEE, March 1969, p
quencies from 30 Hz to 750 kHz respec· 86.
FREQUENCY +20v
CONTROL VOLTAGE
Ra
IOOk
09
2N3415
.....
~~-1" _·
..
t IOk
TRIANGULAR
OUTPUT
010
+20
Rz
8.2k
vvv
2N3102
.______...,..,_,_,._____--i.,_---+zov
trot voltage. Circuit Is inherently solf·start-
TRIANGULAR AND SQUARE WAVEFORMS- of wavoforms, with rise and fall times of 80 "=' lng.-C. Marosi, Voltage-Controlled Muhl
D-c amplifier Q7.Q8.Q9..Q11 addod to modi- ns. 8oth outputs can be linoarly varied over Produces Triangular Output, Electronics, Od.
fied astable mvbr Q1..Q2..Q5..Q6 gives choice frequency range of 25 to 1 by external con- 31, 1966, p 72-73.
e SYM.
IOOk----. -
JOk IOk
TRIANGLE OR SQUARE-WAVE-Gives choice

of outputs. Symmetry is better than 1 %
from 30 Hz to 25 kHz. RI should bo log
tap or.-"Linear Applications," Signetics, Sun-
nyvale, Cal.
-12
1N64
...
VOLTAGE SWEEP GENERATOR-Input pulse
must be negative. frequoncy range is
1 ', • 0.51'F~
5,000 to 10,000 pps with values shown for + Cc
CC, going down to minimum of 500 pps for Sweep
2 µF and up to maximum of 200,000 pps output
for 0.001 µF. Output waveform is constant-
voltage triangular.-A. C. Gillio, "Pulse ond
Logic Circuits," McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968, p
274.
cz ,.F o, I (1 (1
O.OS COLL.~
I I
V:
' •
~
I
Q I I ' I I
·~
EMITTER:
: ; : :
~iLL.i1)1)'
NEW TRIANGLE GENERATOR-Modification of
; ' l astable mvbr, using two resis&ors in place of
'
'
I I
'
'
I •
.'
I
direct coupling, generates triangular wavos
automatically at transistor emltten.-5.
Oz !.._ ! .....:..._ ; _..l
EMITTER~~ Chang, A New Astable Multivibrator Gen•
erating Triangular Wavos, Proc. IEEE, Juno
1968, p 1103.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in the category of this chapter, uso the indox al the back
of this book. Check also tho author's "Sourcobook of Electronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 93
Trigger Circuits
. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . . . - - - - 0 + 4 - S Y Yee
ZOpF
OZpH
KSS48
•:,..-- ··\·\. ~- --- - --;
I
..
I
Vin I
I
o---11--~---·--t--C. TR1
ZTlllZ
1004
01,.r
Tl\ 0, Tl\1. ZTX312
(BSVlS)
IOK
+ - - - . _ j l A f ' - . _ j W ' - - - - - - - - - - 4 - - - - - ' - - - - - - - - o - 4 . 5 y Vu

IK 3'3K
HIGH-SPEED SCHMITT-Operates from do< to mode koeps them out of saturation and
50 MHz, with rise and fall times below eliminates storage delay times.-"E·Llne Tron•
6 ns. R·f chokes may be omitted if loading slstor Applications," Ferranti Ltd., Oldham,
is light. Operating transistors in current Lones., England, 1969, p 20.
R, (SET 8AL.ANCE)
RELAY
ZS120
4
8
R,
L-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-<,__~~_.,,__~~ ......~~~ov
TRIGGER PREVENTS RELAY CHATTER-Two as whon comparing temperatures at lwa dif· by maximum hysteresis thot can bo tolerated.
tronsistors are inserted between IC differ• forenl locations with thermistors T1 an"' T2 -Microlin Amplifiers ZLD25 and ZLD2T, Fer•
ential amplifler and relay to introduce in bridge circuit. Bridge resistors RI and ranti Ltd., Oldham, lanes., England, Report
enough trigger action to prevent chatter of R2 should have low temperature coefficients. II, 1967, p 13.
relay whon input is changing very slowly, Value of feedback resistor RF Is determined
899
....-------o OUT
IN tnnr
I
I
I
••
THREE NOR'S GIVE SPIKE-Used to provide

trlggor pulso in digital system at timo whon
clock pulse Is not available. Switching do·
lay times of logic elomonts aro uaod lo
gonorato narrow output pulse whonovor d-c +:5
lovol of input changes. With values shown,
output pulse width i1 threo tlmos that of
Individual NOR gato.-D. R. Hobaugh, NOR
Gatos Gonorato Non-Clocked Output Pulse, 1.81( 2.2K
Elodronic Deslgn, Doc. 20, 1965, p S0-51.
IC SCHMITT-Only two resistors nood bo
added to IC d·c amplifier to give stable and I.SK
predictable operation as Schmitt trigger.
Book gives design oquations.-"linear lnte--
5.6K
grated Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41,
p 129.
-6
NOR CIRCUIT
+1ev VOLTAGE-LEVEL INDICATOR LAMPS-Pulse

111330
amplitude of 1 V triggers SCS-1 and turns on
LAMP associated incandescent lamp without affect•
PULSE
AMPLITUDE IOOK IOOK ing ether lamp. 3-V pulse is delayed by R-C
IS EITHER intogratlng notwork for SCS·l and therefore
IOR3V
triggers SCS-2 first. This roises common
INPUT emitter voltage, preventing SCS-1 from trig•
!OK goring, 10 only right-hand lamp comes on
33'1 to indicate pro sen co of 3·V pulse.-Planar
Silicon Controlled Switch 3N84/3N85, Gonoral
Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 65.18, 1964,
16K 22K
FULL WAVE
OUTPUT
lOV
R
lM IOV lM
FULL-WAVE NEON-Noon provides triggering
of scr when voltage across tho two capacitors
r.acho1 its breakdown voltage In rango of MOSFET SCHMITT-Combination of mosfot pair
60 to 100 V. Will control scr from full off with pnp transistor givos trigger having vary
up to 95% of total rms load voltage. Pulso high input impedance, low output lmpodanco,
transformer fires scrs alternately. Noon and good temperature stability. Zonon usod about 3 V more negotivo than zonor raferonco
gives visual indication that one of sen Is for generating roferenco voltage and shifting voltago will then oporato trlggor.-C. R.
rocolvlng triggering pulso.-C. R. Dougherty, lovol can bo changed to allow far dlfforont Perkins, "Application of MOSFET Dovlces to
Neon Trlggor Circuits for SCR'1, Elocrronlc detection lovols. Adjust R so Ql 11 non• Electronic Circuits," Hughos, Newport Boach,
Design, Jan. 6, 1964, p 78. conducting and Q2 is fully oni input signal Cal., 1968, p 34.
TRIGGER CIRCUITS 901
CURRENT-OPERATED SCHMln IC-Uses Philips

TAA293 ganerol-purpose ampliRer. With
--
zero input currant, output is about 4 V. At
about 26 µA input, circuit switches to low
state.-The TAA293 as a Schmitt Tri99er and
Multivibrator, Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., +
Eindhoven, The Netharlands, No. 25, 1968. ~
Trigger
'----~·
EMlnER-TRIGGERED MVBR-Circuit is basically flop. Most effective at lower trigger fro•
•16Wo----. omlller•triggered flip-Bop, developed for use quencles. Book gives design criteria and
with ring counters, shift regislers, and other equations.-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse and Logic
counters. Often called complemented flip- Circuits," McGraw-Hiii, N.Y., 1968, p 238.
no IK lllK IU llC HO
c IOIC IOIC
~ 21YOC R1
10 SCR
0.1,.1 ... ,., TO SCR
GAT! •7 ~ GATE
2,400-HZ NEON-Trigger pulso roaches maxi· <- ~
mum amplitude of 5 V P·P In loss than 10
µs. Valua of IOK resistor may ba varied for
differant pulse haight.-W. G. Millar, "Using °' •Oz - Gi Ziii•••
and Understanding Miniature Noon Lamps," o1 ao.- BE t1tH•7
p 40. Jllllllll NOTE; FOR - [ \'Ol,TAGES
IZSS THAii H voe
US£ ZNl414 FOR o, a Oz
llOO'I
PULSE TRAIN GENERATOR-Used to maintain 1,200 Hz for values shown. Frequency of
triggaring of scr during major portion or all of flip-flop QI -Q2 determines frequency of scr
conduction period. Transistor mvbr provides output.-J. C. Hey, Simple Circuits for Trigger·
allernate driving voltages to ujt oscillators. ing SCR's Into Fast-Rising Load Currents,
Pulse frequency within train of pulses Is General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.41,
• determined by RI Cl time constant, and is 1965, p 6 .
01
2.5K
471(
Rz SK
4300 p,t 01 - GE2N34t6
+ +zellDC
CR1 - GEZ4XL22 tZENERI Oz
T1 - TURNS RATIO l'I

2~ TURNS IEACH WINDtNGI
TO SCR
220 ~ Cz TO SCI!
GAT[
#28 BIFILAR ON FERRITE GATE
~
IROOI CORE. CORE 1· LONG ~
ANO 112" DIAMETER
TRIGGER-DIODE EQUIVALENT-Dovelopod for FOR IOKC OSCILLATION, Ro• 2.2 K
applications whore driving voltage for trigger 2KC OSCILLATION, Rg • 10 K
I ICC OSCILLATION, Ro • 22 K closoly matchod. Frequency of trigger pulses
is too low for avallablo triggor dlodos. Uses
low-cost components.-J. C. Hoy, Simple Cir· RIP-FLOP TRIGGER FOR TWO SCR's-Provldes depends on value of resistors RO.-J. C. Hey,
cuits for Triggorlng SCR's Into Fast-Rising Load altornate output pulses as required for two- S-imple Circuits for Trig9orlng SCR's Into
Currents, Goneral Eloctric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. scr lnvarter circuits. R1 adjusts frequency. Fast-Rising Load Currents, General Eledric,
200.41, 1965, p 4. R2 adjusts symmotry. Capacitors should be Syracuso, N.Y., No. 200.41, 1965, p 3.
HECEIVER'S +12V
2nd DETECTOR
OUTPUT
R, 2N697
JU1---.. . . . 330 01 25C SUPPRESSING NOISE TRIGGERING-Insertion
EMITTER
of low•pass filter at second detector output
FOLLOWER
of pulse-decoding receiver, using temperature•
sensing Sensistor as resistive element R1,
improves trigger sensitivity by making band·
width docrease with increasing temperature.
At -40 C, 3-dB bandwidth is 3.9 MHz, as
compared to 2.7 MHz at SO C.-C. Samocki,
-= -12v
Temperature Varies Bandwidth to Improve
Trigger Sensitivity, Eleclronic Design, Jan. 4,
PULSE 1965, p 77-78.
DECODER
CR3
I
GE Al4B
POSITIVE HALF-CYCLE SCR TRIGGER-When R2

pushbutton switch SW is moved from 1 to 2, 82'1
112W
scr will trigger near beginning of noxt positive SCRI
half-cyclo and stay on only for balance of C2 GE C20B
llOV OR
+ 0.1,.F
that half-cycle. Switch may be closod ran· 60Hr GEC!OB
RI
domly at any time during tho two preceding SPOT
SW 3304
half-cycles. Ser will not trigger again until l/2W
SW is opened and then reclosed. This type
of one-shot logic Is used in some test equip·
ment supplies and for solenoid drives of R3 +
IOOA a*
electronic hammers and stapling guns, where l/2W 10,.F
load current must Aow only for one half-cycle.
-"SCR Manual," 4th Edition, General Electric,
1967, p 151-152. *TIME CONSTANT OF Cl RI MAY NEEO TAILORING DEPENDING ON
HOLDING CURRENT OF SCRI.
Rz IK
21 voe -:-
GE20A8
c, TO SCR
.0043pf GATE
~
SIMPLE SCR TRIGGER-Cl charges through V.(T11C!~-..f

---A- - - - - - - T l
RI -R2 to 25-V breakover ofl N3840 trigger B- -- --------T2
diode, then discharges through diode into
base of power transistor QI to make it pro•
duce high-current output pulse of about 20 V Vo (T2l B c 0 Volts
for applying to gate of scr as trigger. Stray -Vee
circuit inductances must bo minimized to give BASIC SCHMln-Chief uses are converting
required current rise of I 0 A por µs. Repe- sine wave into rectangular wave, reshaping
tition rate of trigger pulses Is adjusted with distorted rectangulor waves, and detecting
R1.-J. C. Hoy, Simple Circuits for Triggering presence of signals. Book gives design crl·
SCR's Into Fast-Rising Load Currents, General teria.-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse and Logic Circultl,"
Electric, Syracuso, N.Y., No. 200.41, 1965, p 3. McGraw-Hiii, N.Y., 1968, p 244.
- - - - - - - - . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - +Vcc•IZV ~----------------~tlOv
RL 1 Rlz 10k IOk +10v
4 7k 47K
~__._..__fl_
0.3v
02
2Nt306
TR 1 '----f-C I TRz
ZTX300 ZTOOO
P1
l NPUT -/:\:J- -Sv
ADJUSTABLE HYSTERESIS-Potentiometer Pl
ot input of conventional flip-flop dotormines
threshold level at which input signol turns
QI on and QI off to generate output stop.
LEVEL-OPERATED SWITCH-Feodback through Ideal for goneroting squore pulses from sine
common omitter resistor of Schmitt trigger waves or for providing binary output from
makes circuit switch rapidly from on to off transducer. Setting of Pl also controls
and vice versa. Design equations are given. amount of hysteresis, for preventing choHer
-"E-Une Transistor Applications.'' Ferranti in trigger circuit as it chonges stote if 60-Hz
Ltd., Oldham, lanes., England, 1969, p 19. hum is picked up by sensing tronsducer.-D.
Schoon, Potentiometer Turns FJip.flop Into An
Adjustoble Trigger, Electronics, Sept. 4, 1967,
p 95-96.
+4.5v
SPIKE GENERATOR-Simple capacitorless cir·

INPUT
STEP
-1.,4 Sv Ov A
~16nm I--
cuit differentiates loading edge of rectangular
input pulse, to produce flxod·wldth trigger·
ing spikes about I 6 ns wide. Can be built
Lo. Rz
500 OUTPUT
with RTL IC's.-G. A. May, Differentiating
Pulse Former Requires No Capacitors, Elec•
Ironies, May 1, 1967, p 70-71.
INPUT Ot -l16n~~
2N708
+4;;-] f
-Ov l.J
INVERTED
OUTPUT
lOk
OUTPUT
01 02
2N2635 HIGH·IMPEDANCE SCHMITT-Input imped-
ance is over 2,000 ohms, about 200 times
greater than conventional Schmitt, as re-
HYSTERESIS quired for squarln9 low-power information
RESISTOR
IOk signals. Trip points ond hysteresis of cir-
cuit romoin stable and predictoble over
wido temperature ronge. QI and 02 form
current-mode switch controlllng Q3.-G.
Morosi, Differential Schmitt Trigger with 200-
K Input Impedance, Electronics, Jon. 23, 1967,
ALI. DIODES IN662 p 9Q-91.
~
LOAO
OUTPUT
ET JUST BELOW
+V REE-RUNNING
LEVEL
IK
TRIGGER I V•• J L · IK IOp.h
INPUT OV
" ' 120V SIGNAL}
60Hr
10
NEON TRIGGER FOR TRIAC-Cholce of triac TUNNEL-DIODE TRIGGER-Simple ono·shot Article presents pseudo-Schmitt circuit that
doponds on laad. For maximum precision of mvbr is triggorod by 1.Y pulse. One draw• eliminates those uncortainties In trigger logic,
triggering, neon should be shielded against back, howovor, is varying response to differ· -H. A. Zimmerman, Pseudo-Schmitt Eliminates
radiation.-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," ont triggor signals because of mannor in Uncertainties in Trigger logic, Electronic Do·
RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP·Sl, p 237. which ono-shot recovers triggering sensitivity. sign, Nov. 22, 1965, p 3~5.
01
2N5126
1ov-=-
EFFICIENT TRIGGER-Threo parts minimize lovol accurately. Ideal for use as thyristor
cost while giving good tomperaturo stability, gate-drive trigger in phase controls.-R. B.
POSITIVE-SUPPLY UJT-SCR-Triggor current rapid switching, and efficient energy trans· Hood, Transistor Breakdown Yields lnexpon•
flows through 10-V supply, with 1().µF capaci· fer. Utiliros reverse broakdown character· sivo Thyristor Trigger. Electronics, Sept. 4,
tor assuring low supply impodarico and istic of emiller-base junction to set triggering 1967, p 96.
adoquato lrigger current. Choico of scr de·
ponds on load curront.-Silicon Complementary
Unijunction Transistor DSK1, General Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., No. 60.15, 1967.
+20V
SCHMITT TRIGGER DRIVER !2V
20K 4.S K
18£5
101(
IDK
'C'
BASE-TRIGGERED FLIP-FLOP-Switching action ZENER IMPROVES TRIGGERING ACCUllACY-

occurs 011ly on positive excursions of input Replacement of feedback resistor with 6-V
triggor applied to baso, so oulput frequency zoner CRl In Schmitt trigger narrows range
is half that of input to complemented flip-flop between turn-on and turn-off voltages from
(4,000 pps for input of 8,000 pps with values 4 V to about 0.3 V.-R. E. Risoly, Zener Diode
shown), and circuit acts as froquency divider. Reduces Schmitt Trigger Hysteresis, "400
-A. C. Gillie, "Pulse and logic Circuits," Ideas for Design Seloctod from Electronic
McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1968, p 240. Design," Hayden Book Co., N.Y., 1964, p 93.
TYPE
2N3241
so• 470 47K
4.7f(
.
28VOC :§::
100
TYPE
2N406 0.1,.1
+IN
no TO SCR ca.rt
.00451'1
5.6K 470
TWO TRANSISTORS EQUAL ONE DIODE-Re-
generative action of circuit, when oithor Cll1 - GE 11'4154
transistor begins to conduct, causes switching 01 - GE 2N2646
comparablo to avalanching in trigger diode. OZ { - 2N 508 lfOA SUPPLT -TAGE LES$ THAN 25 VOCI
With proper biasing, circuit will trigger at - ZN513J l'CA SUPl'LT VOLTAGE ISP TO 35 voe
- ZN3414 IFOA SISPPLY VOLTAGE LESS THAN HVOC l
15 V or leu.-"Silicon Powor Circuits Manual,'' Os { - 2H3416 I FOA SUPPLY VOLTAGE UP TO 35 voe l
RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP·51, p 240.
REGENERATIVE TRANSISTOR PAIR AS SCR pulse al desired triggering frequency.-J. C.
TRIGGER-Can be used when trigger-circuit Hoy, Simple Circuits for Triggering SCR'5 Into
driving voltage is too low for available Fast-Rising load Currants, General Electric,
trigger diodes. Ujt QI providos exlornal sync Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.41, 1965, p 5.
LOAD
"-' llOV
IOHr
O,Oll'F
IOOV
NEON TRIGGER FOR SCR-Possiblo drawback

is offoct of radiation on breakdown point
of neon. For precise control, neon should
be shielded or specially treatod for radiation.
low cost and long life aro offsetting od·
vantages.-"Silicon Powor Circuits Manual,"
flt
lkfi
0V'o--------<~------<O./
STABLE SCHMITI-Close thermal coupling of low-Drift Transistor Pairs," Philips, Pub. Dept.,
transistor pair results in trigger (input) volt· Elcoma Div., Eindhoven; The Netherlands, Ap·
ages more stable ovor entire frequency range plication Book, 1968, p 25.
than separate tronsistors.-"Circuits Using
VOLTAGE.OPERATED SCHMITI IC-Uses Philips

TAA293 gonoral-purpose amplifier connoctod
as amlttor-coupled Schmitt followed by out•
put amplifier. Output voltage is 5 to 6 V
p·p dopanding on saturation vahage of out·
put transistor. Riso time is about 200 ns
and fall timo 40 ns.-The TAA293 as a Schmitt KRYTRON·TRIGGERED IGNITION-Four ele- 0
industrial ignition.-Krytrons-Cold Cathqde
Trigger and Multivibrator, Phillps, Pub. Dept., mont cold-cathode gas-flllod switch tube pro- Switch Tubes, EG&G, Boston, Mass., KR·IOO,
Elcoma Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands, No. duces high peak current for short duration 1968.
25, 1968. through pulse transformer, for triggering
I
A.C OR DC SCR
POWER
MULTI-SHOT TRIGGER-Period of output pulso trigger Q4-Q5. Articlo gives design oqua-
NEGATIVE-SUPPLY UJT-SCR-Complomentary doponds on number of input triggor pulses tions.-R. S. Hughes, Multi-Shot Trigger Cir-
ujt makes triggering of scr oaslor than with occurring whilo circuit is active. Uses Schmitt cuit, EEE, June 1967, p 138-139.
positive supply. Choice of scr dopends on
load current.-Silicon Camplomontary Uni-
junclion Transistor D5K I, General Electric,
Syracuse, N.Y., Na. 60.15, 1967.
l/4M3.3AZ
eo
lOQQ RL 100J)
R6
l.9K R4
SK
•20v -20Y
CURRENT-MODE SCHMITT-50-HMz trigger is
TWO-TRANSISTOR SCR TRIGGER-Two-tran-
inverter modification in which input roferonco -1 V from lovols of 0 and -2 V which
sistor circuit, with regonorative action com•
voltage of one stage depends on collector would otherwise result, With 2N2258 tran-
parablo to avalanching in trigger diode, can
voltage of preceding stage. Bias pol serves sistors, rise and fall times ore 2 and 3 ns
deliver trigger currents up to 1 A, m·ore
as sensitivity-symmetry control. R4 supplies respectively.-"High Speed Switching Tran•
than enough for triggering all RCA thyristors.
constant current into 1~ohm output load, sistor Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
-"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Har-
so output levels are shifted lo + 1 V and 1969, p 283.
rison, N.J., SP-51, p 240.
-IOV
+ 28V
56k 2511. IOk IOK 180
4.7#£F FNI034
---t).__+-++t
0-0 2N490
0.lfl
R\*
'" IN3U50
•Rt • 18 II FOR VTlllHlll • -IV

l·NS RISE TIME-Simple modiRcatian of ujt
BETTER SCHMITT-Two mosfot's provide higher relaxation oscillator, driving tunnel diode,
trigger speed, higher input inmpedance, and serves as fast trigger generator that can
better temperature stability than transistor deliver high enough output current to simplify
version. ~1 sots trigger lovel in range from ampliflcotion and shaping of output wave•
-2 V to +2 V.-5. Biren, Two MOS-FETs form.-E. Elad, Tunnel Diode and UJT Produce
and Resistors Make Bettor Schmitt Trigger, Ultra-Fast Trigger Output, Electronic Design,
Electronic Detign, Moy 10, 1967, p 92. Juno 7, 1965, p 4o-41.
+12V
Rr
25k 10 HZ-100 KHZ FAST-RISE SCHMITI-Requiros
POT OUTPUT
no capacitors, and transistors may be low•
cost types such as 2N44 I 8, 2N4275, or
Rs
3.3k MPS2369. Waveform is axcellont at all fre•
2-6V quencies without adjustment of (omponent
IOHz tolOOkHz values, and both rise and fall times are less
than 12 ns. May be used for sine-square
R2 R6 wave convenion.-J. H. Cono, Simplified
2.2k 27 Schmitt Yields Fast Rise Timo, EEE, April
1968, p 108.
HALF-WAVE NEON-Controls scr from full off SCR

up to 95% of half-wave rms output voltage. C-22
Closing switch applies full power. Neon also
117VfAC 117V/AC
provides visual indication that scr is receiving
triggering pulse.-C. R. Dougherty, Neon Trig·
ger Circuits for SCR's, Electronic Design, Jan.
6, 1964, p. 78,
·•00
9 IK
2 2• •19 •100
OUTPUT TO
e1as
.19
I 5K
'6•
I 2K IK
!Omo
CURA[~'!' lo•
T12G
SOURCE
~s• ZN22t9 S9K
100
•• oos
•T
81FtLAR
•19 100
-100 •62
1 SS
o''°'"
-100
500.MHZ PSEUDO-SCHMITI WITHOUT TRIG-

l()K 100 ,, GER UNCERTAINTY-Provides reliable trigger-
I OUT PVT
ing, free from input misrecognition and
10"'0
frequency countdown problems, for input
UlllPUf signals below 5 mV. Tunnel diodes and
zoo 250
matched high-speed diodes near center of
diagram are key elements, providing recog-
4.70'f
•19 nizing and arming functions for muhivibrators
connected in multiple-foodback arrangement.
TAIQQ[A
tl<PUT
300 9.IK
Very similar circuit is used in Tektronix 5T3
ISO G><MSI TRIG
IOOK LEVEL timing unit for Typo 661 sampling cro.
6.2•
Article describes circuit operation in detail.
-H. A. Zimmerman, Pseudo-Schmitt Eliminates
0.21&• Uncertainties in Trigger logic, fledronic De-
-19
1'=' -11
•It
TAIG L[V[L
ZERO
sign, Nov, 22, 1965, p 31>-32 and 34-35.
CHAPTER 94
Ultrasonic Circuits
OSelLLATOR-QUADRUPLER DOUBLER FINAL

OUTPUT
1son1
1.5·W SONOBUOY TRANSMITTER-Used with

underwater hydrophone to pick up sounds
af .nemy submarine. Crystal oscillator fre-
quency is 16S MHz. Over-all efficiency is
greater than 50% with 12-15 V battery sup· +
ply. Final stage Is straight-through class C Ci
c.
= 750.05pf
= µf vee 0 1s v
amplitler using RCA developmental transistor; C:i = 32-250 pf le = 2· 1A turns No. 18 wire, 3ii" ID (close
C1, C10, Cu, Cn = 3·35 pf
C. = 2200 pf, leodthru = 1.0 µH
WO•nd)
if power output of 0.5 W is sufficient, 2N4427
Ce, Cit, Cia = 0.01 µF
h. ls
may be usod lnstead.-"Sillcon Power Circuits
C• = 1A·150 pf
Lt
Ri
== 5 turns No. 16 wlro, 1/ ID x
1000 ohms
4" 1/1 " long
Manua~" RCA, Harrison, N.J., SP-Sl, p 344. Ca=50pf Ra = 1200 ohms
c. =500 pf R• = A7 ohms
Cu, Cu = UDO pf, leedthru R1 = 10 ohms
Cu= 8-60 pf Rs = ICO ohms
Lt = 22 /lH Ro = 51 ohms
l2 = 5.5 "" Rt = potoollomoter, 50 ohms
b =3 No. 16 wire, y," ID x 1009 R, = ICIO ohms
l1 = 5 turns Ho. 22 wire,
h1101 l/1"
~" ID lclo.. wound) =
La = 2·'/• l•ros No. 16 wire, '/•" ID x "I•" lone
Vat varactor
Ref. Diodo = 12·volt zencr diode
2-KHZ PINGER-Pulse from ujt timer turns an

transistor that applies power to oscillator that
generates 2-kHz pulse for transducer. If
1OOK resistor is replaced with pressure
petentlometor, ping rate can vary with water
depth. Transducer is double bllaminar piezo- TRANSDUCER
electric ceramic unit.-F. Watlington, Uni·
junction Controls Oscillator In Simple Under•
water Pinger, Electronics, Jan. 5, 1970, p 98.
3,000µ1
22.5v
TIMER SWITCH OSCILLATOR
908
ULTRASONIC CIRCUITS 909
+12v
fOftf
fN753A IN914
Q,
5E4020
Qz
2N2907A
5.111
EXTENDING DARLINGTON DOWN TO D·C- -t2v
Zener bootstrap boosts input impedance of +t2v
Darlington to 30 meg and assures operation sensors and hydrophone transducers. If R. J, Turner, Zenor in Bootstrap Extends
down to d·c signals. Useful as lsolatlon supor-beta transistor such as MC1556 Is u11d Amplifier's Range to D·C, Electronic1, March
amplifier for applications such as medlcol for Q1, Input raslstonce Is over 100 meg.- 16, 1970, p 88.
40 2N2112 SILICON
TRANSISTORS IN
PUSH.PULL
PARALLEL
.
I
I
I
I
10-KW AMPLIFIER-All-transistor amplifier INPUT1J-J\.11....+-- :l[lou+~ur

provldos better than 50% etllcioncy In gen· l ~ LOAD
orating IO·kW pulses 250-ms wido with 10%
duty cycle, over frequency rango of 2 to 12
kHz. Wh'en driving crystal for ceramic trans•
ducors, tuning roadors are required for
power fador corrodion so amplifler sees
resistive load at transmitted froquoncy.
Pulse-shaping network is necessary to prevent
dangerous transients at start and finish of
keylng.-"Silicon Power Transistor Handbook,"
Westinghouse, Youngwood, Pa., p 6-6.
J'lf
+ 4X160+
0
I
90V OC
SUPPLY
+300v
7-45ppf T-45ppf
E;~ R1 2 Bmh Bmh
2.7K •Vis 010

40ppf 40ppf 1:Eo
I 2 II I 2 10 II
0 0
J
Oii
":'
CONSTANT·K VARIABLE·BANDWIDTH-Usod 0.015J-Lf Rs
In superheteradyne calibration receiver for
pulsed sonar signals having various froquon•
cies and pulse widths. Negative feedback Is from 20 to 140 kHz In 10 geometrlcally di·
usod to change bandwidth without affecting vided steps determined by raslstor values.
LOW IMPEDANCE
gain of i·f amplifier. Article gives design CATHODE FOLLOWER -G. E. Ott, Filter Amplifier Maintains Gain
equations. Values shown are for 200-kHz - - - - - - . - O v e r Wide Band, Elecfron/c Design, Oct. 11,
center frequency, with bandwidth varying 1965, p 58-61.
SINGLE-SCR ULTRASONIC INVERTER-Con be

L driven over froquency range of about 400 to
so,.H
30,000 Hz by external pulse generator. For
values shown, will deliver SOO W at 10,000
Hz from 100 V d-c for ultrasonic cleaning,
R Ve welding, and mixing applications, induction
heating, sonar, fluorescent-lamp dimmors,
IOOV and d c/d·c convorters. Article gives com•
0
POWER
SUPPLY plete design procedure for adapting circuit to
any specific applicotion.-N. Mopham, A low•
Cost, Ultrasonic-Frequency Inverter Using a
Singlo SCR, General Electric, Syracuse, N.Y.,
1son· No. 671.2, 1966, p 10.
GE
PULSE A2BC
GENERATOR.+~~~_.
G
50 W AT 40 KHZ-Power transistors in tuned
clan C power amplifier achieve 88% effi·
ciency. Can bo used for ultrasonic cleaners
and fothometers. Power gain is 21 dB.
Article gives transformer winding data.-
50-W Ultrasonic Amplifier, Eledronic Design,
March 2, 1964, p SB.
-35V
@2A
COIL DRIVE A8
READ AMPLIFIER A
3.91(
HALL
MULTIPLIER
PACKAGE
75 2.2K
2 3
le
-24•
-24•
-24•
360 •24v 510
750
200 3.91<
HALL ELEMENT
ORIVE Ac
680
ordinates to polar for crt display. Applico· model 700 Hollofox.-G. H. Smeroge, Holl•
POLAR DISPLAY-Drive and read amplifier tions include direction-finding, sonar, and Effoct Multiplier Simplifies Polar Display,
circuits shown ore for Holl multiplier, two of ppi radar systems. Both drives ore differen- Electronic Design, March 29, 1965, p 24, 26,
which are used to transform rectangular co- tial ampliflers. Holl multiplier is Helipot 28-29.
ULTRASONIC CIRCUITS 911
+15V
HYDROPHONE PREAMP-Low-noise circuit

2N930
L
provides 40 dB gain from 10 to 10,000 Hz
when used with 330-pF hydrophone.-W. F.
Blodgett, Low-Noise Preamplifier Uses FET,
l.
-l:'>V
I·
,!.
EEE, May 1967, p 182.
IOOV
POWER IOOpF
SUPPLY
GE
PULSE A28C
GEHERATORo+----
BASIC SOLID·STATE INVERTER-Can generate reactive loads. Applications includo ultra• from 100-120 V d-c supply. Froquency is
kilowatts of power over frequency range of sonic cleaning, mixing, and welding with determined by external pulso gonorators.
400 Hz to 30 kHz for ultrasonic and other either magnetostrictive or eloctrostrictivo Article gives design procedure and equations.
applications, with good waveform and good transducers, induction heating, sonar, d·c/d-c -N. Mapham, A Low Cost, Ultrasonic Fre-
regulation ovor wide range of loads and converters, regulated d-c power supplies, quency Inverter Using a Singlo SCR, General
phase anglos. Requires only single scr, mini· and high-frequency supplies for fluorescent Electric, Syracuse, N.Y., No. 200.49, 1967, p
mizing cost of trigger circuitry. Can handle lamps and fluorescont dimmers. Operates 10.
3.9k
O.Oll'f
..------------------1 .. (---0lJTPUT
IOOk
R1
SIGNAL Oz
INPUT --------J\/\/\-~~~--1t--~~~~~--1t--~--~~-+-1 2Nl613
4.7k 0,011' I 0.01,..1
AGC LONG TIME CONSTANT

INPUT --A/V\,-- fli'v------+-t
ID·C CURRENT)
47k 1.Bk 0.5/'f

47k tk
WIDE-RANGE AGC FOR SONAR-Accepts undistorted output between 0.5 and 1.5 V use in low-cost pleasure-craft sonar.-M. F.
much greater range of Input signal levels for inputs from 0.5 mV to 0.5 V. Frequency Feller, AGC Amplifier Handles 60-DB Rongo,
than conventional age circuits while holding range is 20 Hz to I 00 kHz. Designed for Electronics, Nov. 28, 1966, p 81-82.
01
1¥1 2
+
A --
B Lt
c
SCR 1
Voe C1 JUUL
TRIGGER
INPUT
Ci, C2. Ct, C.. = 7-to-100 pf Arco .ol23 or oqulv.

Cll=
= 14°to l50 pf, Arco 424, or oquiv.
0
c. 0.01 pf. 50 v
100 W AT 1-20 KHZ WITH SCR-Simplo m
=
c, 1000 pf, f•odthru circuit has bottor than 90% oftlcloncy In
generating ultrasonic slno•wavo output at
Li= 0.75 ""
Ls= I turn No. 18 wlro, ffz" ID
la
Lt
== l '/2 turna No. 18 wlro, I/," ID
II/, lurna No. 18 wlro, Mc• ID
frequency of Input trigger which can be simple
mvbr or ujt oscillator. If 60.Hz Uno v1>ltago
RFC = 450 ohma, ferrite · is usod In place of d-c: supply, will give
175-MHZ SONOBUOY OUTPUT STAGE- bursts of ultrasonic power. Values of com·
ponent1 aro not ultlcal, oven though they
Straight·through cla11 C power output 1tago
dotermino operating froqucsncy.-H. R. Camon•
dolivor1 500 mW for 60 mW drive powor.-
"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Har- zlnd, Soo1aw Circuit Gives Sino-Wavo Power,
rison, N.J., SP-51, p 345. EEE, Doc. 1966, p 119-120.
7 8
Al
C&
-----t PA222
I INTEGRATED
CIRCUIT
.1
I BOTTOM
VIEW)
50-100,000 HZ IC AMJIUFIER-lnput resistance
+ C9 ,,. ... Is about 22K. Distortion lovol at output 11
150 3% at about 1 W. Rl Is solcsctod to adjust
pf
no-signal current drain, and can bo 68K, lOOK,
+ CZ or 150K.-lntogratod Circuit Audio Ampliflcsr
5 PA222, General Eloctrlc, Syracuse, N.Y., No.
25V
85.20, 1967.
··'
·;~
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho category of this chapter, uso tho Index at tho back
of this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcoboolc of El11ctronlc Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 95
Video Circuits
-2& VOL.TS DC
Cs= 25 flF.
C•=25 l'F
Ca =10(1 to 300 pF
C:1
o-!-ii----t-~1-1
C. =100 l'F
L=30/lH
'TO PREVIOUS Rs= 20000
STAGE
Rs= 3600
-6V
f.,,. R. =2000
R, = 62
Ra= 620
30-DB NONINVERTING WITHOUT PHASE

COMPENSATION-IC opamp with only threo
external resistors provides flat response to LOW-LEVEL VIDEO AMPLIFIER-Uses 2N274 ohms, output resistance 4,000 ohms, and
2 MHz, with gain then increasing to peak pnp transistor having cutoff frequency of 30 power gain up to 27 dB.-"Translstor Man-
at 4.5 MHz before dropping down to zero MHz. At 12.5 MHz, input resistance Is 150 ual," RCA, Harrison, N.J., SC-13, p 130.
above 10 MH1.-"Linoar Integrated Circuits,"
RCA, Harrison, N.J., lc-41, p 247.
+6v
o,
2N7C8
Os
2N708
04
2N708 ....- - - - - - - - - - E o u r
1.2k 1k
-Gv with 15-ns riso time and 30-ns fall time. Ql

UNITY-GAIN BUFFER-Voltage gain Is be- video processors. Can be used to sample and Q2 cancel d-c offset at lnput.-R. J.
tween 0.995 and 0.999 over entiro tempera· d-c levol of Integrator and transfer analog Turner, Buffer Amp Provides Stability Ovor
ture range of -30 to +160 F and Input pulse to output decision circuits such as Wido Temperature Range, Electronics, Nov.
Impedance ls high, as required in radar Schmitt trl99er. Will handle Input pulses 24, 1969, p 107.
913
400 100K
out DE
RF TEST
7-MHZ WITH 250 GAIN-OEI Model 9186

opamp in two-rosistor conllguratlon shows
low noise and good stability without ex•
ternal phase compensation, with closed-loop
gain level of 250 from d-c to 7 MHz.-Three • SEE TEJCT a TABLE
Inverting Amplillors Using tho 9186, Optical
Eledronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10124.
F
IA
117VAC
\ 300
Output
Input
8
C9
.1
CCTV VIDEO MODULATOR-Permits use of Rl7

INVERTING WITH GAIN OF 10-Uses OEI closed-circuit tv camera with any homo tv VIDEO • / ' 7!14
9300 opamp having 6 dB/octavo rolloff up set. Output is sufficient for feeding several to<!FTHRU OPTIONAL- -:-
to 100 MHz. IC requires +6 V an.d -6V receivers over several hundred feet of coax SEE TEXT
supplies. Riso and fall times aro 30 ns for 1 cable. Article gives coil turns data and should provide about 1 V p-p and no9ative-
V output. Use metal-film resistors to prevent crystal frequency for each channel. For chan- 9oin9 sync.-E. T. Hansen, Build a Video
overshoot and ringing.-Applying tho Model nel 10, uso 48.312-MHz crystal, with 11 turns Modulator for CCTV, Radio-Eleclronics, Jan.
9300 Monolithic Operational Ampliller, Opti• for LI, 4 for L2, and sV2 for L3. Camora 1966, p 52-54.
cal Electronics, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10134.
+6V
vee•
+6V
l-l"F
~""'
C1
l14F
3
Rs•!
son
Vs ru
=
CASCODE VIDEO AMPLIFIER-Frequency re-
sponse is flat within 3 dB between 6 kHz BROADBAND VIDEO AMPLIFIER-Uses CA3018
and 11 MHz, using four-transistor IC con• transistor IC array In two d-c coupled stages.
nected as shown. Mid-frequency voltage gain Two feedback loops provide d-c stability,
is 37 dB, and useful dynamic input range Froquoncy response Is down 3 dB at 800 Hir
is 40 µV to 16.6 mV p-p.-"Linear Integrated and 32 MHz.-"Linear Integrated Circuits,"
Circuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 311. RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 309.
VIDEO CIRCUITS 915
IllPllr
30-MHZ FAST-RISE AMPLIFIER-Provides gain

of 3.3 and 7-ns rise limo with OEI 9186
opamp.-Three Inverting Ampliflors Using the
4.7,.F 9186, Optical Electronics, Tuscon, Ariz., No.
- +
10124.
CD
100000 OHMS
63 db (OPEii I.COP)
40 db
I
9000 OHMS 20 db IN
CASCADED IC WITH FEEDBACK-With R·C
coupling of two IC d-c ampllflers, open-loop
mid-band gain Is 63 dB, and bandpass i1
18 Hz to 135 kHz. Under closed-loop con•
dltlons, bandpass is 0.13 Hz to 6.6 MHz for
20 dB gain,-"Llnear Integrated Circuits,"
RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 126. UNITY'-GAIN BUFFER-Used as wide-band in.
vertlng amplifier having high Input im·
podance, as required by vidlcon, high·im·
pedance transducer, and soma detectors.
Wilh OEI 9186 opamp, provides unity gain
up to 17 MHz.-Three lnvorting Ampliflors
Using the 9186, Optical Electronlcs, Tucson,
Ariz., No. 10124.
+20V
+20v
8.2K
27k
2N2219
O.lfLf 470
22
ZERO VOL.TS de
0.01
~i'
22
0.1µ.f 470 100
Cz
2-8 '='
pf
8.2K
500-MHZ VIDEO-Variable capacitors Cl and

C2 adjusl bandwidth of two-stage cascodo
-2ov
amplifier. Increased bandwidth is achieved GAIN CONTROL-Push-pull omittor-follower
by adding common·baso transistor amplitler provides hlgh-lovol gain conlrol of video
to single common-emitter stage having SO-Ohm signal while maintaining zero d-c voltage r
input; inductive coniponont of common-base output. Transistors must bo balanced: com·
stage forms resonant rise In currant to com• man heat sink helps. Can be used to drive
ponsato for dropoff of other stage at high long cables, wilh signals up to 30 V p•p.
frequoncios.-H. T. McAleer, Emitter Peakln9 -H. F. Stearns, Gain-Control Circuit Avoids
Pushes Bandwidth to 500 MHs, Electronics, D·C Shift, EledrOftic Design, Feb. 1, 1965,
Sopt. 4, 1967, p 96-97. p28.
INPUT OUTPUT
Analog
Control
Input
Dlg-
l
15 Volta
l tal o--."""-...
FAST SWITCH-OE! 5354 analog switch is

basically spst, either on or off. Provides
very high isolation at video frequencies,
with sufficiently fast switching time to allow
video switching during vertical retrace in•
l! SELF -RESON>INT AT 28 MHz
terval. Switching voltage is at analog levols
28-MHZ LIMITER-Uses two IC video amplifiers of 0 and +10 V. For spdt switching, two
to provide full limiting at input of 300 µV. 5354 switches are needed.-A Fast Video
Total goin is 61 dB, and bandwidth before Switcher Using Analog Switches, Optical
limiting is 3.8 MHz.-"Linoar Integrated Cir• Electronics, Tucson, ·Ariz., No. 10171.
cuits," RCA, Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 179.
IOOil
500-KHZ LIMITER-Uses two IC video ampli- 001

Vour
t
fiers lo provide voltage gain of al least
100 dB, witlr limited signal becoming ap·
parent above noise for 1-µV Input signal.
Limiting is good for input signals up to 3 V.
-"Linear Integrated Circuits," RCA, Harrison,
N.J., IC-41, p 180.
=
ll SELF-RESONANT AT 500 kHz
n .005)11
•m
ll .005jlf
470
n .oos 11 t
-11v
llt I.SK 10 LS
6800
6.8K
·•
.OOlµf ._------+-I..
1:E-t 2N2084 A. 2N2084 2N2084
INPUT 2.2K 2.21( 2.2K DETlCTED
OUTPUT
.005
.005pf 6IOQ 6100

.005
"'
6100
"'
6&00
.005jlf
0
L2, LI 12 TUllllS 30 WG. EIWUU.t:D COPP£11 WIRE "•DIAM. CENTER TAPPED}

L.S.
L5
l4 9 TUllllS
20 TUNIS
.
" 5/8" FERRITE CORE
15-MHZ BANDWIDTH AT 30 MHZ-Sta99er- design procedure and instructions for allgn-

tuned video amplifier with balanced dotactor mont.-A 30 MC Wide Band Transistor Ampli· Amporax Electronic Corp., Hicksville, l.I.,
has gain of 60 dB. Article gives detailed fier Using the 2N2084 Universal Transistor, N.Y., ALR-5621, 1964.
VIDEO CIRCUITS 917
Rl R 75 SINGLE-CHIP LINE DRIVER-Modulo contains

OUTPUT A
high-level output stage and high-performance
- INPUT (75) (Gain • 10) opamp In one package, for applications re•
quiring low closed-loop gain (balow 30).
16 75 Will driva SO.ohm load at 10 V with eithor
+ INPUT OUTPUT B
polarity, and may tharoforo be used to drive
O>----c"""'J two cables with full output swing, or more
if lowor voltage Is permissible. Use negative
R2 Input if phaso inversion is required. Either
(75) Input may be d-c or a-c ceupled.-A Video
Amplifier/Lino Driver, Optical Electronics,
+12 -18
-6V
+12 +12
IK
SELF-LIMITING-Use of complementary tran•
slstors In pulsed video amplifler provides
= l.8pF
compression without limitor diodes, for oper•
30·DB NONINVERTING WITH PHASE COM· ation over wide dynamic range of input volt·
PENSATION-Uso of 1.8-pF capacitor in paral· ages, from 5 mV to 5 V. Can be used to
lol with feedback resistor of IC opamp gives drive Schmitt trigger for roshaping of pulses.
flat response to about 3 MHz, with feedback -R. P. Fischl, Jr., Pulsod-Video Ampliflor
ratio rolling off at slope of one for higher Limits Without Diodes, Electronic Design,
froquencio1.-"Linoar Integrated Circuits," April 13, 1964, p 68 and 70.
RCA, Harrl1on, N.J., IC-41, p 247.
CLAMP AMPLIFIER-Usod in cable tv circuits

when hum level is so high that shaded
horizontal ban appear in pidure. Video 11
16
clamped during horizontal blanking interval,
a OUTPUT at known sync lovol. Clamping also restores
d-c information. Clamping reduces hum
amplitude as much as 6 dB per octave.
Uses OEI 5430 1p1t analog switch.-A Video
Clamp Ampliller, Optical Electronlct, Tucson,
Ariz., No. 10164.
R1
lOOK
LINE DRIVER-Combination of 9186A opamp
and 9110 current booster will drive 100-ohm 16 OUTPUT (COAX
load with up to 10 V of either polarity, at CABLE)
bandwidths up to 10 MHz. Slowing rota of Tho gain ts 100K/R1 + 1
opamp is 600 V per µ.s. Circuit Is usoful for R2•R1, lOK
gain levels up to 100 (40 dB).-A Video R2 or less Cf ls needed to ell111tnate rtngtng.
Amplifier/Lino Driver, Optical Electronics, R2 • 100KR1/(100K + Rl) Cc le nooded to ellmlnata aey
Tucson, Ariz., No. 10170. oscUlattona.
2K
-6 v
!OK
IK 6·DB INVERTING IC OPAMP-Rosponso of

video amplifler with 56·pf phase-compensat•
Ing capocitance is flat within 3 dB up to
= 5.6 MH1. Changing componsating capaci·
30-DB NONINVERTING-Phase componsation tanco to 33 pf increases 3°dB bandwidth to
of IC opamp is providod by 5-pF capacitor 11 MHz.-"Linoar lntegratod Circuits," RCA,
in series with 10K. Used as vidoo amplifier Harrison, N.J., IC-41, p 248.
having flat closod·loop response up to about
3 MHz.-"Linear lntegratod Circuits," RCA,
+sv
INPUT
OUTPUT
1k
13-MHZ AMPLIFIER WITHOUT CROSSOVER

DISTORTION-Dual Darlington transistor con•
3k figuration operating class B dellvors 270.mA
-6v--'l.f\/\.--• signal into 30·ohm load at 1 MHz. Re•
sponse Is 3 dB down at 13 MH1. Diodes
Ds 1N4148 -av eliminate distortion over wide tomperoturo
range.-R. J. Turner, Diodes Eliminate Cross•
1N414B ovor Distortion In Video Ampliflor, E/ectronin,
Jan. 19, 1970, p 92.
NOTE: To locato additional circuits In the category of this chaptor, use tho index at the bade
CHAPTER 96
Voltage-Controlled Oscillator Circuits
•30 v
OPTOELECTRONIC VCO-Output frequency is

proportional to d-c: voltage applied to lamp
terminals of Ray1i1tor. Multlvlbrator is
driven at half speed, to produce square
wave at output terminals. Output frequency
Increases with lamp voltage, Oscillator is
Isolated from control voltage, permitting
simple remote control of frequency.-Raysis-
tot Optoelectronic Devices, Raytheon Com•
ponents Division, Quincy, Mass., 1967, p 16.
+10v
tOk IOk
470pl
c
OUTPUT
c·
tOk 470pf
Q,
MEM511A
FREOUENCY-
CONTROL
VOLTAGE
I ~2vl
10k
VOLTAGE CONTROLS FREQUENCY-Single

stage of Darlington IC differential amplifier
Is wired a1 free-running mvbr. Small chan9e LGv
In frequency control voltage produces ex-
tremely large frequency shift because input tlvlty Is 40 lcHz par volt, essentially Inde- Multivibrator Sensitivity Improved by MOS
lot's act al voltage•variablo rosi1ton. Son1l
0 pendent of tomporaturo.-F. G. Christianson, FET's, Electronics, Dec. 11, 1967, p 96.
919
IZOO
Fl ,.-, r ov
D LJ.-·IOV
IOOKc
OUTPUT
100.KHZ VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED-Addition of
two feedback loops to saturating•type mvbr
Q3-Q4 gives voltage-controlled square-wave
oscillator whoso frequency is determined by
the 1OK emitter current sources, 3,600.pF
capacitor, and colledor voltage of Q3 with
rasped to ground. Q1 ·Q2 form Integrating
opamp that changes collector voltage of Q3 3600pf
to control frequoncy.--Modified Multi Forms 56K
Voltage·Controllod Oscillator, Electronic De·
sign, Oct. 11, 1965, p 68. IOK IOK
ZOK
+45V ALL a:ZN3638
-IZV
CR 1
IO•VOLT
ZENER ·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·J
._...............--tl---4~-----+----~
T11zo: I STEP DOWN I
i TO OUTPUT
STAGE
"1 BASIC
OSCILLATOR
i.
r·-·-·-·-· "! I
• C4
I i 8.Zpf
a . MODE A
-!-f-BASIC
·-·1 I C5
o.e TO 8.Spf
R
40
14
OSCILLATOR
LOOP
.I
I .
.r·-·-· . I
I.
I .I
I.
ii .I ----+- LOOP
VARICAP BIAS
CIRCUITRY I. . 1-J ..
___ J
FEEDBACK
CAPACITANCE
NETWORK
....·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·
r-·-·-:-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·- ~I
·-·-·1
.____i._•
•
CONTROL • K
Ii INPUT R10
680
33
C11 CONTROL VOLTAGE
330pf 1 INPUT CIRCUITRY
i.
CR3
IN695
CR4
IN695 i
.
L-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·!..·-·-·
l·MHZ VOLTAGE.CONTROLLED CRYSTAL-Used
·-·-·-·-·---~---·....J
million.-P. J, Boyle, A Design Approach to
+12V
as servo olomont In c•W traclcJng system. Transistari:red Voltage-Controlled Crystal Os-
Article describes operation In detail and gives typically be 8 parts in ono billion, and cillators, Electronic Design, March. 2, 1964, p
design procoduro. Short-term stability can long-term drift as good as 2 parts in one 22-24 and 26-27.
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED 0 SCILLATOR CIRCUITS 921
+12V 01
REO. 2N2647
STEPPING MOTOR DRIVE-Produces sawtooth FREQUENCY CALIBRATION
waveform over frequency range of 100,000:1
for d·c control voltago range of 0 to 5 V, as
source of pulses for driving stopping motor
in servo system. Upper frequency limit is
about 250 Ha. Ql discharges C at end of
each liming period as sot by Rs . ....:w.
F. Ball,
Ultrawido-Rango VCO Uses Op Amp and 0 TO +5V R2
UJT, Electronic Design, Sept. 27, 1967, p 66 4.7k c
and 68.
+12V
REG-
ZERO ADJ. R1:1+-~Rll\,,,,_ _ _ _ _ _--I

3
IOM
•o
-12v
REG. R4 OPERATIONAL
+£ 4.7k AMPi.IFl£R
LINEAR VCO-Output frequency Is propor-

tional to input current or voltage within 1 %
for 15% deviation from given center fre·
quoncy. Typical values for 10.V supply volt•
ago and operation between 5 and 10 kHz,
using Magnetics 50056·10 cores, are 350 to
500 turns for N4, 50 turns for N2 and N2',
and 150 turns far other windings. Can be
operated with balanced Rooting input and
output. Has good rejection for common•
mode signals.-M. W. Barth, Voltage Con•
trolled Oscillator Provides Good Unoarlty,
Electronic Design, Nov. 23, 1964, p 65-67.
R -CHOSEN TO PROVIDE
o DESIRED SENSITIVITY
Rx-<RL lTHE DESIRED LOAD)
Vee
+20V
tOK
0.01 :I: 0.01.,.. RFC

..... 100
O.OOt - ph
SYNC
INPUT
·.'
1r
O.t IOOK
0.05
20o-300 MHZ FET SWEEP-Inexpensive Col· for operation from sulsaucllo to naar•glgahertz
pith oscillator usos voltage-variable capacitors froquencios.-T. F. Prasser, FET's Produce
D2 and 03 lo change frequency of fol triangulor output of Q3 for driving diodes Stable Oscillators, E/oclronin, Oct. 3, 1966,
osclllator QI ·02. Sync input pulse initiates through !suffer Q4. Circuit can lse clasignod . p 102-103.
........-~~~..........._~~~.....~~~~~~....--0+2ov
2204
~PULSE
~OUT
0.1
VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY-Output frequency is
proportional to Input voltage, with 1 V d-c:
Input producing 1 kHz with batter than 0.1 %
linearity. Input impedance Is 1OOK. Article
gives adjustment procedure. Supply voltages
must bo as stable as accuracy required.
-Uni(unction Circuit Hints, Genorol Eloctrlc,
Syracuse, N.Y., Fig. 11.
INPUT
-12v
+12 voe
B1AS ~:"'s..,.
•10Vdc
__·,,,o•-..7W,..._,,,o..,••...
4... H---. \'(C
+
VARACTOR
VAR•Al\I
510 VAT12ET
470p>h
12¥ AMPL ITUOE
50 111ec RISE
VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY CONVERTER-Produces
pulse rate directly proportional to varying VAFIACTOR BtAS
d-c: input voltage, for driving digital motor +10 TO 120 voe
of sarvo system. Frequency of output varies
1,500.MHZ VCO-Tunabla range is 500 MHz,
linearly from zero for no input to 300 Hz
ond froquoncy drift lass than 100 kHz after
for 10 V lnput.-J. M. Howe, Transistorized
vco is fumed off for 15 min. Useful when
Voltage·Froquoncy Converter Operates Line-
several vco's are used oltornotoly to cover
arly, "400 Ideas for Design Selected from
larger frequency rango. Diode In feedback
Electronic Design," Haydon Book Co., N.Y.,
loop minimizes thermal effech.-A. Barone,
1964, p 77.
PIN-Diode Turnoff for Microwave VCO, EEE,
Sept. 1967, p 133-134.
+20V
CONTROL
VOLTAGE 560
noov
·v- K .,
•...
68K R 70K
2W 1
v, 3,31(
391( 100
IN660 I(
PULSE PERIOD CONTROL-Provldos linear volt· period varying from about 0.2 to 2 ms. parator Circuit Controls Repetition Period
ago control of pulso repetition period. Con• Comparator diode CRl triggers mono mvbr llnaarly, E/edronic Design, Juno 22, 1964,
trol range is about 4 to 45 V, with pulse through 2N834 ampliflor.-B. Paarl, Com- p 66 and 68.
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS 923
C2
0.1,uf 0.1,uf
@
r
TToL9003
D1 R2
FDIOO 3911
IFAIRCHILD)
O.lpf
v,
~
22k @
I
STABILIZING VCO-Output amplitude of volt·
age-controlled oscillator (Vt) is stabilized
c,
O.luf
02
FDIOO
!FAIRCHILD)
V2
1
is obtained when V2 ls about 10 mV.
Operation depends on the fad that dynamic
3-11 MHZ VCO WITH CROSS-COUPLED IC
GATES-Unearity is better than 5% of full-
scale frequency over entite control voltage
range of 3.5 to 7 V d-c. Output waveform
Is square, with rise and fall times typically
over Its frequency range by simple junction resistance of junction diode varies inversely less than 5 n1. Output amplitude varies with
diode circuit -that acts as nonlinear resistive with Input ch~nges.-F. Glanna11I, Diode's control voltage, but this can be ovorcome by
divider whose output V2 varies inversely Resistance Variation Stablllzes Slgnal Ampli- adding another goto or buffor.-1. lsraoly,
with input changes. Proper circuit operation tudes, Electronics, June 26, 1967, p 107. Improved VCO Usos n1 IC, EEE, Sopt. 1968,
p 106-107.
OJSOKc 0.500Kc 7Kc 14Kc
~. ·.
249
BALANCE
+e ---A A I O-A""-------i.-~
+2 - / VV 4.7V
27K
-I f-tuc
range of 20 Hz to 40 MH1.-A. Goodman,
PANORAMIC·RECEIVER VCO-Balanced·bridgo modulation on signal. Article gives design Improve VCO Froquoncy Control Via Bal•
summing network at lower right makes cantor equations. Oscillator has linear voltage-fre- ancod Brldge Mixer, Electronic Design, Nov.
0
frequency of vco Ql..Q2 independent of quency charadoristic over roqulrod roceivar 22, 1965, p 48 and So-53.
+12.sv
RICH
R:5
IOk
+ 1.5 Volta R3
IIOk
R
RI
IOk
c hlsh
lov
• 1.5 Volta
ca 02
ELECTRONICALLY VARIABLE CAPACITOR- 0.15 2N2647
Gives output swing of over 100 kHz in volt· p.F
ago follower mode whon using OEI opamp
having unity-gain froquoncy of 60 MHz. Re-
port gives detailed description of operation.
Useful in voltage-controlled L·C and R-C -12.sv
oscillators and fllters.-An Eloctronlcally Vari-
able Capacitor, Optical Electronics, Tucson, VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY CONVERTER-Linearity input voltage.-5. G. Johnson, Voltage•To·
Ariz., No. 10042. is better than 0.5% over frequency ranee Frequency Convortor Built With Ono UJT Os-
of two decades produced by input signal cillator, Electronic Dedgn, Dec. 6, 1967, p
range of 0 to I V d·c. Rate of charge of 122.
C2 in ujt oscillator Q2 varies linearly with
+5VOLTS R2,R4-200 OHMS

ALL GATES ARE 114 5N7400tTJ:}
7-MHZ VCO USING TIL GATES-Low shunt
capacitance of 9atos pormits much higher RI
upper froquoncy limit than is possible with lk
cross-coupled transistors. Frequency can bo
increased or decroasod 10% by varying In•
put control voltage between +s V and -5
V. Rosistor values aro chosen to bias gates
at their turnover points, typically 1.4 to 2
R2
V. Inverting 9ato1 are optional, but will
improve wave 1hapo and buffer output from
external clock lead.-A. C. Burley and A. V.
R5
Aellen, Hi9h°Frequency VCO Uses TIL Gatos,
E/edronic Design, May 24, 1970, p 112 and
,__~~~-OINVERTED
114. OUTPUT
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER SINGLE SHOT MULTIVIBRATOR

+12v
Rz
~
~22pf . ···. ,. L
'.
f,5k
_: • •: '.I·.
-11-tp.sec
JlouTPUT
R
4.7k d
supply-voltage variations. Frequency change oscillator by applying varying d-c voltago to
Is loss than I% for 30% supply-voltage base of Q2.-J. Klssllngor, Pulso Gonorator 11
STABLE SQUARE-WAVE-Time constant RICI change and temperature ranee of -25 to Supply And Temperature lndopondont, flee•
Is essentially indopendent of temperature and 100 C. Can be used as voltago-contrellod Ironies, May 27, 1968, p 106.
DUAL-GATE IC AS VCO-Total cost of parts is

undor $1. Gatos ore connoctod as froo-run•
ning mvbr whose frequency is controlled
over rango of 30 to 70 kHz by d-c input con•
trol voltage of 4 to 9 V.-L. Toth, Voltage-
Controllod Oscillator Uses Two Integrated
Circuits, EloClronic Design, Nov. 8, 1969, p
109.
0
+3.6V
-----------~----+ + 10.6~
VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED 800 KHZ-1.7 MHZ-

Serves as local swoop oscillator in superhet
receiver used for signal analysis and/or
signal identification. Provides groator linear-
ity over wider bandwidth of modulation than
convontlonal circuits. Uses mvbr operating
from wetl-rogulated power supply. Article
gives design equations and performance
grophs.-A. Goodman, Increasing tho Bond
Range of a Voltage-Controlled Oscillator,
Electronic Design, Sept. 28, 1964, p 28-35.
l Tl
Cl
1000 1>F
,.
.~I ,q_
+6.2
0
II\
I
INTEGRATOR
~i-4
2N3972 2N5019 R4 ,.
22k
RI
330k
CR3' CR4'
+0 - --"' -
.... ....
6.2V 6.2V
IN821 IN821
R6
I Ok
TRIANGLE ANO SQUARE WAVES-Providos 90 deg out of phase. CR3 and CR4 aro tom• R8
choice of outputs with excollont linearity and R7
peraturo-componsated reference diodes that lk I Ok
good stability, with output frequency of 80 conduct only In reverse dlredion.-J. M. Kas-
to 8,000 Hz determined by d-c control volt·
ago In.range of 10 mV to 1 V. Outputs are
son, Op Amps Simplify linear VCG, EDN,
Nov. 1, 1969, p 65-66.. ~ -
0A95
CROSS-COUPLED NOR GATES-low-cost vco

may be used as f-m generator, phaso-lock
loop reference, or analog-digital converter.
IC gate connodions form astable mvbr for
which frequency is 0.5 Hz when C1 and C2
are 100 p.F and control voltage Is zero.
With 10 p.f for both capacitors, frequency is
6.3 Hz; 4,700 pf gives 20 kHz; 110 pf gives
757 kHz.-E. S. D"nn, Wido Range VCO
Uses IC, EEE, May 1967, p 182 and 184.
ber of output pulses per unit time propor-
tional to magnitude of analog Input signal.
Uses Phillps DOA40 opamp and PS10 gato
+12v 2kn 2kn 12kn -12v to drive pulse generator.-0. Beato, Simple
AID CONVERTER DRIVES STEPPING MOTOR- Analogue-to-Digital Converter, Philips, Pub.
Magnitude of analog Input voltage determines Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, The Nether·
period between output pulses, making num• lands, No. 68.
,. _____________ --------- ---- --- - - - --- ----- -------------------

~- ------- -------- -- --- -- -- -- --
PHASE DETECTOR :
: VCO
I
I IOOk
IOI< +15Vdc 750
-15Vdc
IM
2k
O.Olf'FT
I
I
I -15Vdc ....
I IN459
I
- '=' I
L-·--------------------------J
lk
6.2k
, .. ~
+15Vdc
3k /
/'
I
, I
./
~--------------------------------------J
METER GAIN ANO BIAS
VCO AS DISCRIMINATOR-Yeo Is phase• quency coverage Is achieved In three ranges

locked to Incoming prr in range of 95 to by switch at bottom.-P. B. Uhlenhopp and
205 Hz. Average value of phase-clotedor l. G. Smoins, Try Using VCOs as Discrimina-
output varies linearly with phase angle aver tors, Elecrronlc Design, June 7, 1970, p 86-
full 360-deg range. System is similar to 87.
that long used In f-m/f-m telemetry. Fre•
+20 v
+SO V
Eln
CURRENT SOURCE AS VCO-Current source

charges capacitor linearly at rate determined
OPTOELECTRONIC VCO-Two Ray1l1tors in
by input voltagl?. Capacitor discharges when
grid circuits of anode-coupled mvbr, with
its voltage exceeds breakdown voltage of
lamps in parallel, provide frequency range
four-layer diode. Can bo used as sweep
of 5 to 5,000 H1 for d·c input control volt·
circuit, with or without synchronisation by
ago range of 0.4 V. Raysisters can be Ray•
external pul••· Unaarity I• batter than 1 %
thaon CKl 102.-Raysistor Optoelectronic De-
of full scale a• voltage-frequency tran•ducer
vices, Raythoon Components Division,
below 1 kH1.-Applylng the Model 8106
Quincy, Mass., 1967, p 18.
Monolithlc Precision Current Source, Optical
Electronici, TucJOn, Ariz., Na. 10168.
Ve • 10 V Pull Scale
Po • 1Mffs PS, Cz • 100 pF
Fo • 100 kHs FS, !QUARE Ca
LINEAR VCo-Generates bath square and
c, • 1 rl ourPur sawtooth waveforms at frequency dependent
on differential · control voltage Ve having
equal positive and negative levels. Control
voltage Is readily generated by signal lt11lf
?RLU«;LE and inverted signal of apamp such as OEI
10K OUIPUr 9302.-Applying the Modal 9300 Monolithic
JK Operational Amplifter, Optical Eloctronlcs,
Tucson, Arl1., No. 10134.
+Ve
c1 - adjust at 1MHs and higher
+ll•JUl
-ta.
------OUTPUT
+12v
Dt
INTEGRATOR IN914
+12v -12v Di
IN957A
VOLTAGE DETECTOR 9.lv
D, D,
IN823A IN823A
6.3v 'REFERENCE NETWORK 6.3v supply voltage. Opamp Al 11rv11s as Inte-
grator and A2 as Schmitt trl91er. Uaed In
voltage-controlled oscillator Increase linearly analog dlgltal convertars.-D. J. Knowlton,
0
0-1 KHZ VCO-lncroasing d-c: Input voltage from 0 to 1 kHz. Output frequency is stable Two OP Amps Simplify D11l9n of Oscillator,
from O to 5 V makes output froquency of within 0.1% for variations up to 15% In Electronlci, April 27, 1970, p 92.
CHAPTER 97
Voltage-Level Detector Circuits
24v +10-=\/=i
---- • ··--TRIGGER
LEVEL +IOV
Li
OUTPUT
POWER ZENER-Zoner conducts when supply

voltage recichos 24 V, developing voltage
across lK resistor that turns on transistor. ALL TRANSISTORS 2N696
Resulting increased power Is obtained at
5.6-5.8 V GO-NO-GO-Pr6Vldes voltage dis• GO bonds, Input voltages should bo applied
fraction of cost of power zener otherwise
crimlnatlon within 0.2·V pa11band for auto· to Ql through suitable voltage dividers or
required.-J. 0. Schroeder, Transistor In·
matlc testing. Only voltages within pass- zener diodes.-R. Vokoun, Voltage Level Dis·
creases Zener'• Power Capability, Electron·
band cause switching of Schmitt trigger. crlminotor Provides Go-No-Go Indication,
ics, Sept. 16, 1968, p 99-100.
R3 controls width of pa11band. For other Electronic Design, Nov. 23, 1964, p 67-69.
-Svd·c
IN75B HIGH VOLTAGE
METER SCALE
R1
GDI2
50k
ANALOG
DEVICES INTERMEDIATE
106 VOLTAGE
INPUT
VOLTAGE METER SCALE
- -..... 7
..
r- Oz
IN75B LOW VOLTAGE
METER SCALE
Rz
50l
ANALOG
DEVICES
106
1N
+Svd-c
whothor input 11 below lower limit. Any
AUTOMATIC VOLTMETER-IC opomps and Independently adjustable. One output will limit may be either positive or negatlve.-
other standard logic circuits connected as Indicate whether input Is above upper limit, W. Ellermeyer, Voltage Comporotor Is Modo
shown give automatic three-rango switching anothor will indicate whether input is be- With Op Amps and Logic Gates, Electronics,
for voltage comparator. Voltage limits ore tween limits, and third output will indicate July 8, 1968, p 91-92.
928
VOLTAGE-LEVEL DETEOTOR OIROUITS 929
VOLTAGE-LEVEL DETECTOR-Differential ampll·

fler has two stable states as In flip-flop, and
changes state whenever d-c input lava! goos
above preset reference level. With compo·
nents shown, differential of only 100 mV
with respect to reference will change state.
-G. Richwoll, Adjustable Level•Detector, EEE,
Oct. 1966, p 139.
-20V
+9v -12v +4.511
AMPLIFIER AND
FIELD EFFECT STORAGE
+9v
2-Mhz f50-nsec 02
CM603
r::J[sE--- DELAY LINE
4
-4.5v
-4.5v -12v -4,5v
+4.5v +9v -4.5v
COMPARATOR
+4.5v
-4.5v
04
2N9t8
.:··: ·.:·
·..
+9v -4.5v -4.5v
SCHMITT TRIGGER - - - - - - - - -.. ONE-SHOT 11------1.A_N_D_G;,.A_T.;.E....---svNC PULSE
VIDEO BURST PEAK DETECTOR-Useful whore video, radar, and sonar equipment. Corn· to 1 V.-D. 5. Greenstein, Detector Stores
position of peak In video signal is required, parator circuit can sons• highest peak of 2- Peaks of Video Bursts, Elecfronlcs, Oct. 3,
as for sampling time delay signals and for MHz a-m burst to within 5 mV for peaks up 1966, p 104-106.
+24V
R2
211
FAIL·SAFE VOLTAGE MONITOR-Operatos

latching relay when Input voltage oxcaeds INPUT
threshold level set by R1. For fail-safe ap-
plication, relay contacts are connocted to
remove power from systom or perform other
required function. Transistors pravlde tom· 01
2Nll31
peraturo compensation to improve accuracy. CRI
-M. Furukawa, Voltage-Sensing Circuit Is Vz
Temperature.Compensated, Electranic Design,
May 10, 1967, p 9o-91.
INPUT
R~OMib_
~.
LEVEL
t r ESC CORP. IOA 26
DELA'\' LINE
Pos ltlve
Input
o-----':....J
I
OUTPUT
cmeioory
o-tl--1'~~~~.rrY'W"\-.~~-- .......
INPUT 100
PEAK SENSE AND HOLD-IC analog compara·
+25 tor serves for comparing Input voltage with
that across memory capacitor. If input is
groator than that of capacitor, output moves
2K in positive direction to charge capacitor until
500 it equals input voltage. 5501 then changes
stato. and reverse-biases diode, isolating ca·
pacitor to hold value of input voltage.-
GAIN CONTROL
Applying tho Model 5501 Monolithic Analog
Comparator, Optical Electronics, Tucson,
DELA'\'
COMPARATOR Ariz., No. 10147.
EXCLUSIVE OR
Upper Limit
665 665 -5vJY\.
Unknown
OUTPUT
-5
Lower Limit
CORE PULSE-HEIGHT DmCTOR-Salf-track·
Ing detector is virtually Independent of duty IOK
cydo, recovors core-memory outputs having
random d-c componont, and can detect slg·
nals In prosonco ol noise frequencies that
are one order of magnitude lowor than slg·
nal. Will detect 200-ns pulse with rise time WINDOW DETECTOR-Usos two analog com•
of 100 ns. Uses comparator method, by parators ta give zero output whan unknown
making comparison between each half-cycle input voltage is within predetermined ac-
procodlng and followlng d-c level crossing. captablo ranga or "window." Output Is posl·
All transistors are 2N711.-R. T. Shevlin, live whan unknown is beyond llmlts that are
Pulse-Height Detector Operates lndopondently independently set.-Applylng tho Model 55DI
of D-c Input Level, Electronic Dellgn, March Monolithic Analog Comparator, Optical Elec•
29, 1965, p 32-33. Ironies, Tucson, Ariz., No. 10147.
VOLTAGE-LEVEL DETECTOR CIRCUITS 931
ov +12V
STORAGE
CAPACITOR
IJ'F 0
de OUTPUT
G
ov
-12v
NARROW-PULSE PEAK SENSOR-Provides ox• 0.2 µ1 and duty cycle bolow 1% for ropoti- current to storage capacitor that governs d-c
act proportionality of d-c output to Input tive 1lgnal1. IC dlfforontial comparator output voltage.-W. C. Diiion, An Operational
signal peaks. Has low threshold, for re- samples peak and compares it with existing Peak Detector Captures Very Narrow Pulses,
sponse to very slight increases in peak am• d-c output voltage, then drives level shifter Electronic Design, Oct. 25, 1967, p 138 and
plitudos. Will haridlo pulses as narrow as controlling transistor switch that supplies 140.
I
r-~-~---------------r--------r---------1-------------,
..-~~+-~~--~~-;..~~~~~~....;..~~~~~--~~..;_+2ov
I 100
I
fI
1 IN457
INPUT
I
I
I
I 470k
I 2.2k
II
I '----t--!---------T-+---t-+---......;:...-------'"--..;.... ,,
I
I
~-------- ---T---------~~---------1~-----------~----------- __ J +20.
100
2N2712
.';
+ c, + I
·.. 45J&I 4.7M 12J&f :
+
I 12pf
II
Ii ----------·~---------!~----
--------'Fz 1G2
---------------.!!.•------------
I Hz
_J
I
.,,
.________-iF3--------,G;-------------------Jii3-------------
L:!._ __________________ .1-------------J---
L.; _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
PEN RECORDER SCALE CHANGER-Although provided, with automatic changing at ond of lmpodanco matching. G stages are tllp.ftops
developed to operate with 1pectromotor that scan whon Input during scan rises to 1 V, adfustod to switch at different Input voltage
repetitively scans froquoncy bond of light 2 V, and 4 V. Artido gives operating de- levols. H stages operate as ground swltchos.
omissions in upper atmosphoro, this low-cost toils. Poak lovel detector stage E drives
0 -9. E. Boumo and R. L. GoHlngor, Automatic
scolo changer can bo used with other meters throe identical chains of F, G, ond H stages, Scale Changer Shifts Recorder Range, flet-
and recorders as well. Throe ranges are one for each scale factor. F stages provldo tronln, May 15, 1967, p 95-97.
Rt= Rt=IOk
PEAK DmCTOR-Basic diode-capacitor peale

detector accuracy is improved 1,000 times
by adding fet and IC opamp. With nulling
switch apen and positive pulse at input, cir·
cuit acts as inverting amplifier. Whon
downward transition of pulse begins, output
is held constant at poale value because de-
4.7m tector and source follower cannot follow
change In polarity. To adjust output for
aero offset with zero input voltage, close
nulling switch and adjust 20K pot.-A. E.
Vinatzer, High Accuracy Obtained from Peale
Dete~tor Using Op Amp, Electronics, March
6.8k
17, 1969, p 94.
IOOpf
+12v 20k -12v
+15V +5V +5V +15V +5V
DETECTOR AND COUNTER-Circuit shown 1,5K

will detect envelope of bursts of high-fre· POINT
quency pulses in range of 1 leHz to I MHz "A"
if suitable component values are used. For ,__....._ _ _'°Vout
those shown, upper limit for Input prf is I
MAGNETIC
leHz. If DI is connected to point A Instead PICK-UP 01
of to +s V, circuit becomes pulse counter 2N2501
that delivers output pulse after arrival of VjnJll~
specified number of input pulses. After each
circuit Ioele-up, 0.01-µF capacitor must be
I
discharged manually or given time to dis· O.OllJF
charge before input Is roappliod.-K. Sheth, 22K
Pulse-Train Detector and Counter, EEE, Nov. 47K
1966, p 156.
-15V -15V =
Initial
Condition
10 k 10 k
Ik 10 le
10 k
I
E·I
1 conditions. Gain accuracy and input imped·

ance aro determined by IOK resistors in
E0 =-Ei (peok) 1
INVERTING PEAK DETECTOR-Uses Burr· summin9 networle. Can reset to either no9a• are ne9ativo and somo posltivo.-Operatlonal
Brown 9580 electronic switch and two tivo or posltivo Initial conditions, permitting Ampliflers, Burr-Brown Research, Tucson,
opamps to provide high-speed resot to Initial use as peale detector oven if some maxima Ariz., ll-327, 1969, p 43,
+22VOC
ANAL.CG
INPUT
A
..I
!:!Ill
.J
~
z V1
ANALOG VOLTAGE SENSOR-Action of posi·

.
!2
Ill
::I
II.
!
tlvo-going analog input voltage on tunnel REQUIRE OUTPUT REQUIRE OUTPUT
dlade makes transistor saturate, at prede- INDICATION INDICATION
termined Input point, so as to switch tran·
slstor on for positive halves of Input signal TIME
cyclos.-Tunnel Diode-Transistor Level Sensor
+&V
(Circuit Digest), Electronic Delign, March 2,
R2
1964, p 58. lk
SYL.VANIA
6ES8
40K
R2 I
lk
I
I
•a
I
IN757 I
I lk
(9V)
L- -¥_.J
-6V
EQUAL VOLTAGE TEST-For balanclng two
ENVELOPE DnECTOR-Pllot lamp is turnod Rt and R2, and Is 69 mV for limits of 2.5 V
voltage-divider points in production testing.
on when input signal voltage is above upper and 3.5 V.-K. Wolf, Signal-Level Envelope
Only 200-mV difference in either direction
limit V2 or below lower limit Vt. Amount Detector Uses Dual Operational Amplillor,
causes variation in illumination level of
of hysteresis about each limit is function of Electronic Design, Fob. I, 1969, p 78 and 80.
lamps. Any reference from zero to dissipa·
lion level of tube can be used instead of 9
V sliown.-E. Bauman, "Applications of
Neon Lamps and Gas DiKharge Tubes," Sig·
nalite, Neptune, N.J., p t45. +ISV
5 MV-tO V LEVEL DETECTOR-High-sensitivity

+t2vd·c voltage level detector, using only tunnel Re 2.26 K
diode and two transistor switches, requlros
no diode limiters to protect from overload.
:r2p.f To sample input, Q2 Is turned off by sample IK
2k
pulse. QI will switch only if Input signal
Is positive during sampling time. With PULSE
minor changes, circuit can be used as Iran• 560
OUTPUT sient detector or level comparator.-A. J, (jj) 2s•c
SIGNAL Welty, Tunnel-Diede Lovet Detector ls Ultra•
.··-·· tN754A Sonsitivo, Electronic De1ign, Jan, 4, t965, p
73-74. 100
INPUT
SIGNAL. soo
•Ov TO ±1ov MAX

THRESHOLD DETECTOR-Zoner diodes clamp 750
collector of transistor at 0.5 V, just outside
saturation region, to ollmlnate turnoff delay
and thereby give fastor rise and fall limos,
of order of 30 ns. Threshold value Is inde- SAMPLE 0.1 ""'
aa----~lt----'\,..,.,,.
100
______..___-+.~
pendent of temperature if temperature ca-
olllcient of Dt 11 matched to D2 and that of
D3 Is matched to base•omltter junction of
Qt, Potentiometer sots threshold level.-B.
u IN626
Fugit, Celloctor Clamping Improves Thresh-
-15V
old Detector, Electronics, Sept. 3D, 1968, p 81.
!Ok
Vi
Cl
0.31'-F
Ra Ra PULSE AMPLITUDE-POLARITY SORTER-Qt de-

tects positive Input pulses and amplifies them
sufflciently to drive several output circuits,
A
8 A while Q2 slmllorly detects and ompliflos
negative Input pulses, Transistor typos are
500 not critical, as long as QI is pnp and Q2
Is npn. Zen6rs CRI and CR2 are chosen to
maintain associated transistors back-biased
AMBIGUITY - Throe-level voltage monitor until Incoming pulse makes transistors con•
automatically turns off lower-level Indicator duct. Other two diodos simply provide
lamps when lamp at higher level is tri99ered, Isolation. Signal-level odjustments ore best
to olimlnote ambiguity In display. Uses made by using variable resistors for RI and
CI06BI scr's and any suitable noon lamps. R6. Pulses of different levels can be sorted
If circuit is to monitor I 00 V d·c to tolerance by using sovorol circuits In parallel and ad-
of 2 V, RA and RB ore chosen to moke QI (ustlng each for different level. Other re-
and Q2 fire when VI is 102 V and 98 V. sistor values ore not crltlcol.-F. W. Kear,
Technique con be extended to more lovols Pulse-Sortor Network Detects, Amplifies Bi·
by adding more sedions llko middle one Polar Signals, Electronic Design, Aug. 30,
(Q2.Q3·L3).-A. Prokop, SCR Threshold Do· 1965, p 48-49.
toctor Eliminates Ambiguities, Electronic Do·
sign, Sept. I, 1969, p 104 and 106.
+15Y
+15V CIRCUIT A
IK 270 +15V +15V
UNDER
VOLTAGE CCW
ADJUST
68K
IOK
SIGNAL
INPUT 27K
27K 331<
2K
'::' '::' '::' '::' '::'

01 Oz Os
2N:SU 2N491 2Nl:SOB
o,
-&V 2Nl308 i
OYERVOl.TAGE
y x LAMP
CIRCUIT D CIRCUIT E
SAME AS SAME AS
y v CIRCUITC CIRCUIT C
NOTE:
I. ALL OIOOES IN645
2. RESISTORS ARE 114W
S. CAPACITOR'S VOLTAGE RATINGS 25V MIN
4. CAPACITOR VALUES IN J'-f
5. VARIABLE RESISTOR IN COLLECTOR
CIRCUIT OF 0 1 IS A 25 TURN RESISTOR
UNDER-OVER-NORMAL LAMPS FOR D-C E, as Indicated In block dlograms, to drive

VOLTAGE MONITOR-Rongo of operation Is Indicating lamps. Article describes opera•
0.5 V to 8 V for values given. Monitor tlon of circult.-G. W. Gault, Simple Voltogo
Or ':' uses two Identical channels containing cir-
-6V 2Nl:S08 Monitor Increases Sensitivity, Electronic De-
cuit A heaving six transistors. Those two llgn, Sept. 14, 1964, p 70.
CIRCUIT C
channels food circuit C (lower left), D, ond
PEAK SENSING WITH TUNNEL DIODE-Used

IN3606 6.BK IN3604
to measure peak voltage of waveform that
repeats well above 60 times per second.
100-µf capacitor is charged by half-wave
IN3606
3N81
OuTPUT
v0
1
20V
rectified 60-Hz volta9e that also is applied
lo anode of scs 3NBI. Whan Input wave-
form brings tunnel diode to ih peak point
60CPS current, .diode switches ond turns on scs,
terminating chorglng of copacitor. In nega-
•
I
tive half-cycle, capacitor dinhorges slightly
IOO- 220K
!!OV but is recharged on next positive half-cycle.
Output voltage is thus propomonol to peak
of Input wavoform.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Ap•
plications For Tho Now Low Cost TD700
Series Tunnel Diodes, General Electric, Syra•
Vo= [1p- v~fk] (R2+R3) cuso, N.Y., No. 90,66, 3/67, p 10.
+IS
lk RB
ADJUSTABLE HYSTERESIS-Dilferentlal com-

parator and zener provide indopondontly
adjustable voltage trip point and hysteresis.
Ql and Q3 can be 2N3904 or equivalent, Q2
2N3096 or equivalent, and Dl 1N708. R7 INPUT
varies referenco level, for changing trip point
from 0.7 V to 5 V, whllo RS changes hys-
teresis.-R. Billon, Level Detector Has Inde- DI
pendently Adjustablo Hystorosis and Trip
Point, Elodronic De1i9n, Oct. 11, 1967, p 98.
~ COMPARATOR
ENVELOPE PEAK DETEaOR-Can handle
modulation frequencies from d-c to 30 MHz.
Input wovoform is applied simultonoously to
~. two IC integrators connected to have differ•
ent time constants. This gives intersecting
--_fl_
ACTIVE J1J1... DUAL
IN BAND- NANO ONE OUT
PASS SHOT
FILTER
lkhz Lr
output waveforms, Intersections of which are
detected by two IC comporolors. Adjusting
R3 changes time constant of one Integrator to
make loading edge of output pulse of ono-
shot correspond to paok of desired wave-
MODULATED
CARRIER form. Article givos detailed oxplanotlon of
circuit operatlon.-E. B. Dalkiewlc:r and E.
Lybarger, Intersecting Waveforms Trigger
Peak Doloctor, Elodronlc1, May 1, 1967, p
69-70.
·12V
MULTIPLE-VOLTAGE MONITOR-Simple com-

parison amplifier and summing (unction are
usod to camparo junction voltage with ref·
erence valtago that is actually system ground
or zero. Used for manitoring system having
many power supplies with voltage levels of
both polaritios. Any change in ono of moni·
tored voltage levels will unbalance compori·
son omplifior and mako warning lamp glow.
Valtogo measuroments must thon bo mode
to identify defective supply. Sensing ac•
curacy is 5%.-R. C. Gerdes, Voltogo Sensor
Monitors Multiplo Powor Supply Outputs, REFERENCE
"400 ldeos for Design Soloctod from Elqc- VOLTAGE
&.Bk
tronic Design," Hoydon Book Co., N.Y., 1964,
p 216.
+12v
10 VOLTS WHEN E1n < I VOLT TUNNEL-DIODE LEVEL DETECTOR-Adjusting

v •• value of input resistor will mako tunnel
0 VOLTS WHEN E1 0 •1 VOLT
diode swilch at any desired threshold volt-
GE 2N360&
age, and turn back off when input voltogo is
dropped to zoro.-W. R. Spofford, Jr., Appli·
cations For Tho Now Low Cost TD 700 Series
Tunnel Diodes, General Electric, Syracuse,
N.Y., No. 90.66, 1967, p 8.
+12v
02
2N4402
LOGIC.LEVEL LAMP-Lamp lights when probo
is touched to terminal hoving pulse amplitude 03
or d·c level abovo 0.7 V. Speeds trouble- 2N3906
shooting of digital circuits by eliminating IN270
need to look at cro or motor. Lamp is
mounted directly on probe. Ught-emitting
diodes such as HP5082·4400 in sories with
470-0hm resistor may bo used in placo of PROBE 3311
QI
lamp for faster response. Level detector QI 2N3904 15k
triggers 1-ms mono mvbr Q2.Q3.-J. M. Firth,
Go/No Go Circuit Givos Visual Indication of MINIATURE
IOV BULB
RTL Logic Lovel, Elecfronic De1i9n, Feb. 15,
1970, p 88.
-=
+6\ldc Oz ...
1N759A
03
2N404 OUTPUT
o,
1N759A
HOLDING PEAK VOLTAGE-Will hold peak + Cz
Ct 10K
voltage of short-duration analog signal for 1.2~F Q,68~F
any required period up to several hundred
ms. Permits uso of pon recorders having Oz 04
1low response. Value of Cl determines 2N1613 ?Nl613
holding poriod. First throo transistors form Rt
Z2K IK
combined Schmitt trigger and one-shot.-P.
P. Tong, Peak-Hold Circuit, EEE, Morch 1967,
p 164 and 166.
+12Vde
10-KHZ SINE-WAVE PEAK DETECTOR-Simple

tunnel-diode threshold detector sonso1 pealc
values exceeding preset level. Output volt·
ago Is near supply voltage while input is
low, and drops to about zero when input
IN>--11--~,,.____....,.,.,_~t-._.,..--t-I
exceeds threshold value controlled by setting
Ci Ill of Ri.-D. B. Hockman, Sense Signal Levels
33J.4F !1% with a Tunnel Diode, Electronic Do1ign, Feb.
15V 1, 1969, p 48-51.
THRESHOLD
+HYiie Cl 0
VOLTAGE
RI
OUTPUT
Iii 0
INPUT
SENSE
r- -..,I LINES
1
I R2 I OUTPUT
Iii
I I
I I
I I
I I 10K IOK
_.J
VOLTAGE LIMIT MONITOR-Relay contacts DUAL SENSE AMPLIFIER-Uses two 5501 ana·
are closed as lang as d·c input voltage ii log comparators to indicate when any un•
within spociRad limits. If voltage rises balance or voltage difference exists on two
above limit, Q1 conducts and shorts out relay input lines. Output is positive regardless
coil. If voltage drops below limit, both of which input line is more positive. Noiso
transistors cut ·off and relay drops out. Ze· on lines does not cause false output indica•
nor1 determine voltage limits.-0. Tedonstig, tion.-Applying the Modol 5501 Monolithic
Monitor DC Levels with a Simple Circuit, Elec• Analog Comparator, Optical Electronics,
Ironic Design, June 6, 1968, p 110 and 112. Tucson, Ariz., No. 10147.
INl614
270
IOOµf Ci
150v
25v
1N3003B
\
02 39v 03 56v 04 68v Os 82v 0& 100v 07 120v 0 8 150v
MONITORING POWER·LINE TRANSIENTS- bination corresponds to detected voltage bocauso they avolanche into conduction.
Provides continuous survolllanco of 2B·V d-c level about 5 V above zoner breakdown Operator thon lcnow1 that spike was greater
supply lino, staring approximato voltage voltage. Detection levels for zonors shown than 61 V but less than 73 V required to
magnitude of largest transient spilce. Each are 44, 61, 73, 87, 105, 125, and 155 V. blow fuse for D4.-0. Pitzalis, Jr., Zenor Cir-
zener Is in series with sensilive 10.ohm 0.066· 37-V spilce on 28-V lino means total pealc cuit Detects Transienls in Power Lines, Eloc•
A instrument fuso, and each zenor·fuso com- of 65 V, which blows fusos for D2 and D3 franks, May 12, 1969, p 111.
Rz Cz
IN914 IM 5~F Vcc•S 2 v
3 13 ""1...-...J"" lk
s 0
MCI027
A 0 C1
A1 T220pF 10- 2.4k
I 5k
Vu
PEAK DETECTOR-Dolivors d·c voltago pro- 1035L differential-input gale to servo as ·5 2 v
portional to poak amplitude of pulsos as arbitrary reference against which nogatlvo-
narrow as 10 ns. Negative autput voltage, going input pulse Is compared. Roferonce Output Is lndependont of pulse width.-M. J.
proportional to voltage across C2, Is fed rlsos with oach input pulse until oquilib· Prickett, Poak Dotoctor for Vory Narrow
back to Inverting input of Motorola MC- rium is roochod ond C2 slops charging. Pulses, EEE, June 1970, p 92 and 94.
+v
CURE FOR VOLTAGE-DROPPING HYmRESIS
-Uso of ujt osclllator Ql In voltogo indica•
tor ovorcomes hysteresis effect. Circuit will
trigger off within 2% of desired level for
triggoring an, aver wide tomperaturo range.
Supply voltage Is 28 V. Lamp glows when
voltago roaches desired level. If two circuits
are usod, with relays in placo of lamps, they
can bo used to romovo power whenever
voltage goes above or below 2% of desired
triggor level determined by R7.-J. V. Crow•
ling, Solid-State Voltage Indicator Ovor-
comos Hysteresis Problem, Eledronic Design,
Doc. 21, 1964, p 51--52.
+2811
V IPEAKI IN 470
FROM 4
TRANSISTOR
UNDER TEST
IN BREAKDOWN IOM
CHASSIS
t.11 M
RESET 2N3053
SIGNAL
THRESHOLD DETECTOR-Circuit shown is

2mo,
5psec
PULSE
typical of flvo voltogo lovol detodors used

with automatic transistor r-f breokdown
-
testor to indlcote breakdown voltogos In flvo
ranges botwoen 90 and 135 V. Lamp gives
go-no-go indication. Articlo includos meas- Phonomonon lmprovos the Voltago Capability +8.2v
uring circuit and block diagram of automatic of a Transistor, Elodronics, June 12, 1967,
production tester.-P. Schiff, R·f Breokdown p 97-101.
VOLTAGE-LEVEL DETECTOR CIRClJ'ITS 939
HYSTERESIS CIRCUIT DESIGN-Article gives +Er

mathematical procoduro roquiring calcula·
tlon of only four resistor values to obtain
desired upper and lower threshold points on
hysteresis curve. Design approach assumes
opamp input impedance is much larger than
source impedance, and output impedance
much smaller than load impodance, with
amplifier switching stato whon differential
Input voltage is 0 V. Values shown are for
6.2 V upper threshold and -0.7 V lower
threshold, with 3 V input roquired for switch·
ing amplifier from low to high state and
0.5 V for high to low state.-W. A. Cooke, A
Simplified Design Approach for Hysteresis
Circuits, Electronics, Nov. 10, 1969, p 106.
THREE-VOLTAGE MONITOR-Lamp glows only

when all three supply voltages are present
510 in typical pnp digital system having nega•
2N404 tive collector and clamp supplies, and posl•
tive bias supply. For npn system, uso com•
121C 100 plemontary version of drcuit. Absence of
12K any ono voltage extinguishes lamp, giving
llK true AND function. Stabistors provide tight
control over orror level of clamp voltago.-
D. Chin, DC Presence Indicator Chocks Throe
Voltages, "400 Ideas for Design Selected
·4V ·12 v from Electronic Design," Hayden Book Co.,
N.Y., 1964, p 155.
BINARY
INPUT
IOOK
IOOK
2 8
IOOK 400K
3 BINARY
IOOK OUTPUT
4
IOOK
5
IOOK
6
IOOK
7
IOOK
8
IOOK INl513
9
ZERO REFERENCE
NINE-INPUT LEVEL DETECTOR-Simple opamp (0 V for logical zero) or on (-11 V d-c for design of radio toloscopo.-W. Leroy Gahm,
circuit with diode limiting servos In place of logical one). Output is binary ono only Binary Level Detector for Input Step.Voltages,
expensive binary logic. Binary output de- when more than presoleded number of in· Electronic Design, Oct. 26, 1964, p 50.
pends on whether each binary input Is off puts is one. Developed in conntldion with
940 ELEOTBONIC CIRCUITS MANUAL
AUTOMATIC RANGE SELECTOR-Electronic

range-changing switch for voltmoter usos two
OUTPUT
opamps to comparo Input vciltago with flxod
INPUT IOK roforonco derived from divider R4-R5. With
values shown, ranges providod are 0-1 V and
0-10 V full-scalo. When input voltage ex·
ceods first range, output of opamp pA710
goes negative and shuts off QI, docreasing
gain by fador of 10 for upper range. lso·
latlon dlodo can bo addod to QI for driving
scale Indicator showing which range Is In
uso.-C. Becldoin, Automatic Scaling Circuit
Uses ICs, EEE, Doc. 1966, p 118.
33on
INl692
VOLTAGE SENSING-When Input voltage to
be snnHd exceeds roferonco voltage applied
18V
by extornal source, ujt fires and produces IW
output pulso that can be usod to flro scr or + r° 115V
f...o60CPS
other pulse-sensitive device. Rl adjusts IOOp.f
trigger level. Triggor current required is less
than 5 p.A. Lona-term voltago stability is
10 mV, and short-term Is 1 mV.-T. P. Sylvan,
50V
'I
24V
l/4A
Tho Unijunctlon Transistor Charaderistics and

Applications, Goneral Eloctrlc, Syracuse, N. Y.,
No, 90.10, 1965, p 79.
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
2k 2k
100pf 100pf
1k · O,Olftf tk
FAST-RISE PULSES-Two unity·

gain opamp pairs stretch pulses with rise
times 1011 than 100 ns sufllciontly for meas-
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS uring peak amplitude with ordinary digital
voltmetor.-J. McDonald and A. Pinkerton,
A,C NIM MA-30 (NUCLEAR EQUIPMENT)
2·Stago Poak-Holding Circuit Storos Submlcro·
B 148·C (ANALOG DEVICES) second Pulses, Efedronin, Nov, 10, 1969, p
D KM 47-C ( K ond M ELECTRONICS) 105.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits in tho catogory of this choptor, use tho indox at tho back
af this book. Chock also tho author's "Sourcobook of Eledronic Circuits," published by
CHAPTER 98
Voltage Reference Circuits
5.y REFERENCE SUPPLY-Circuit adually

gives highly stable 6.7 V, but this can be
adjusted to oxactly 5 V by RS In procislon•
typo output control circuit. Transistor Q4
serves as temperature-compensating voltago-
regulator diode. Article gives construction
and adjustment details.-C. D. Todd, Stable,
Low-Cost Reference Power Supplies, Electron•
ics World, Dec. 1967, p 39-41 and 79.
117V A.C. RI
I.SUI. tlo
10•1•
._~~~~+-~~ ....~~~~~~~--oo
Tl-117V:2G.8V C,T. TRIAD F•40X ALL TRANSISTORS ARE 2Nll6!8
TRIADNSlX
4k CASCADED ZENER REFERENCE-Provides ref·

orenco voltage supply of 8.555 V, which
1: 1
chonges only 0.0001 % for 10% Input volt.
ago chon90. 1N2985B 22•V diode absorbs
Iorgo ch11n9es in Input, permitting operation
of second dlodo ovor linear rango.-''Zener
Diode Handbook," Motorola, Phoenix, Ariz.,
1967, p 6-19.
-4 KV BRIDGE REFERENCE-Diode bridge +10v

coupled to costablo mvbr clomps random-
-~ . froquoncy rcondom·wldth digital input pulses
'o d-c level without distortion. Used to un•
lllonk crt where grid Is biased at -4 kV
bolow ground.-W. E. Peterson, D-c Restorer
Clomps Random Pulses to a Reference, Elec•
Ironies, July 7, 1969, p 106. 15pf
-.jTt 1-
;u- l-
-.j Tt
INPUT -4b.JI_
OUTPUT
56pf C3
___.....__ ___. 100 pf
470pt
ALL DIODES 1N914 EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN 6 kv
ALL TRANSISTORS 2N708 -4kv
941
Rll
llkJ\
WW
10-V REFERENCE SUPPLY-Providos constant
IOU\WW
voltage, Independent of temperature, for
calibrating lab or shop instruments and for
monitorln9 very small voltage changes. Sta•
blllty Is achieved by using low-cest transis-
tors as temperaturo-compensated voltage +IOV
regulator diodes. Article gives construction ...- - O A
and adjustment details, and chopper circuits
for making a-c measurements.-C. D. Todd,
Stable, Low-Cost Reference Power Supplies,
E/edroni" World, Dec. 1967, p 39-41 and
79. cw
ov
T 1-uTv: 26.BV TRIAO F_...•_4_0_11_ _ _ _ _A_LL_7_R...
AN"'"s-1s_T_O_R_S_A_R_E_Z_N..3...6_3_8_-oc
Dl•04-IN1692 1 IN4001 OR IN!1059
10.!l. + 6.2 V 200mA
~r::+ j:~A
6.2 V D·C WITH POWER ZENER-Converts
+·~----------------.,------------------=-----.-----......----
nonstabilized 9.y d·c supply to 6.2 V with

stabilization factor of SO: 1. Diode must be 8ZY88·CSV6
mounted on heat sink. Hum and ripple
from source are attenuated in same ratio.-
"Zener Diodes and Thoir Applications.'' RB RIO
8ZY88-CSV6
R1
lk
02
-
IOtl11A
I
2N5136
I
v,. I
18.Sto SSV
I
ADJUSTABLE ZENER-Performs functions of
zener diodo, with R2 determining operating
I
voltage at any value above about 0.8 V. I
Impedance Is maximum of 3 ohms below 5
V, whero convontional zaners havo consid·
I
erably higher Impedance and are not always I
readily avallable.-K. Karash, Adjustable,
Low-Impedance Zener, EEE, March 1970, p 01
I R9
130. I ,•
J
~;
I
+ft.-----..........----------. I ;
l
zo v
I
I
I
1N'180
(8.5 V)
I
standard colibt'otor and reference source
I1 long-tolled 1101r of 110W*r supply
DIFFERENTIAL ZENER REFERENCE-Provides MULTIPLE-VOLTAGE REFERENCE SOURCE- Dl is changed, R3 can be adjusted to give
2.1 ·V reference by utilizing difference be· Stablll1in9 circuit at left of dashed line, using same reference voltages and 6.S V d·c across
tween 8.S·V and 6.4-V zonor references. zoner Dl in series with two-transistor con- ontiro resistor string R3·R7.-High Stability
Technique is particularly useful for tempera· stant•curront source, can be Incorporated Roforonco Diodes BZX47 Family, Philips, Pub.
turo-componsatod reference valtege seurcos. between differential ampliflor and any sup- Dept., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The Nether-
-"Zenor Diode Handbook/' Motorola, Phoe- ply between 18.5 and SS V d-c, for excollont lands, No. 331, 1968.
nix, Ariz., 1967, p 6-19. voltage and temperature stability. When
VOLTAGE REFERENCE CIRCUITS 943
5-V FET REFERENCE-Use of p-chennel 2N-

4343 fet as constant-current source in com-
bination with rosistor gives much bettor
temperaturo stability than convenional zener
reference. Ouput Impedance is below 0.1
ohm up to full load of 180 mA.-H. Olson,
Stabilize Voltage Regulator by Replacing
Zener with a FET, Electronic Design, Sept.
27, 1967, p 72 and 74.
J +
DIFFERENTIAL-AMPLIFIER SUPPLY-Provides
highly stabilized output of about 5.3 V ot 1.5
mA, as required by many differential ampli-
~Y7B ~kO fiers. Change of 20% In input voltago
changes output less than 0.011 %.-"Voltage
Regulator (Zener) Diodes," Phillps, Pub. Dept.,
Elcema Div., Eindhoven, The Netherlands,
Application Baek, p 46.
ov
19
Vp
OOA40 Q
a -v,.,
+i v,.
11
ov ov
POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE 5 V-Reference
voltagos of opposite polarity are Independ- 201d1
Yp
ently adjustable to same value, 5 V for
resistor values shown, or 10 V with different OOA40 o +v"'
values. Voltage drift Is only 0.2 mV per v,.
dog C. Can delivor up to 5 mA por output. change R4, R7, and RB to 10K.-P. van Don-
11
Usos three Philips DOA40 opamps as voltage gen, Voltage Reference Unit Using Type DOA-
comparators, with 8ZX48 zoner serving as 40 Operational Amplifiers, Phillps, Pub. Dept.,
roference voltage. For 10 V reference, use Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The Netherlands, No.
15-V positive and nogative supplies and 65. OV
IN
+12V
261 8.2 V D.C REFERENCE-Opamp and five com·

1.47 k ponents provide 0.01 mV per V d-c regula·
t.1% ti%
tion for low-current applications (10 mA) such
as for vco'1 In fffdback loops and for pre-
6 +t.2V cision digital-analog converters. Other out·
put voltages are obtained by chan9ln9 zoner
OUT and resistor divider value1.-F. R. Shirley
and L. Vanderlesk, A Stable Valta9e Refer-
IN827 4.64 k ence Uses Only Six Components, Electronic
±.•% Design, Jan. 18, 1968, p 128.
33pF
-= -= ':::'
-15 T0-40V
CONSTANT CURRENT FOR ZENER-Precision 01

volta9e obtained by 1ondin9 constant cur- 2NR4ll
rent through tomporature-componsatod ref·
erence diode D1 Is compared with volta9e Q2
drop across R2 by dlfforontial amplifier A1. 2N4920
Amplifier adjusts Its output to produce con-
stant voltage drop across R2 for drivln9 con•
Eg•-12.4V( NOM.I
slant cunont through D2. Output volta9e
varies loss than 2 mV for load cunenh of 0 %i;OTO
300rnA
to 300 mA and supply voltages of 15 to 40
02
V.-S. Miller, Precision Valta9e Reference IN829A
Combined with Volta9e Re9ulator, fledronlc
Design, Sept. 1, 1969, p 102 and 104.
A1•LMIOI OR
EQUIV.
Rz
lk
IOOµf
50v
r
Your
1-t--·~Sk
VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENT
01
2N1546A
IOOJLI
re9ulated power supply 9ivos variable d-c
reference for any cholc• of input and output
voltages. QI operates as constant•volta90
-24v~~.....,~~~~~.-..~~~--' source over ran90 of -2 to -23 V In cir-
VARIABLE D·C REFERENCE-Addition of tran· cuit shown, in which output volta9e range la Yields Variable d-c Reference, fledrenlc1,
slltar QI te standard re9ulater circuit of 15 to 24 V.-A. Steinman, Modified Regulator Aprll 28, 1969, p 78.
VOLTAGE REFERENCE CIRCUITS 945
QI
2N4360
-
I •CONSTANT~ 5 mA
6 V AT 5 MA-Utilizes collector-omittor
breakdown characteristic of bipolar transl..
tor and constant-current property of !unction
fet to give low-cost reference source having
Q2 output variation of only 3%.-E. J. Kennedy,
2N3638A Inexpensive 6-'V Reforence Is Also Tompora·
turo·Stable, Eleclronil: De1l9n, Nov. 8, 1967,
p 112 and 114.
STANDARD-CELL REPLACEMENT - Provides

constant output af about 4.5 V over tem-
perature range of 30 to 60 C, 11 undamaged
by Intermittent short-circuits, and much more
shock-resistant than Weston standard cell.
D1·D6 are BIY88-C6V2 senors and D7 ls
BZY88-C4V3. Values of R3 and R5 are de-
termined by experiment as described In book.
-''Voltage Regulator (Zener) Diodes,"
The Netherlands, Application Book, p 26.
-2ov
1
v,
1 --
I
6 1.2kQO
T100nF I ::c 0.0022µ.f
W/?h ~
ADJUSTABLE REFERENCE VOLTAGE-IC op-
ADJUSTABLE REFERENCE-Uses Philips TAA• amp and resistor divider translate zaner
241 difference ampliler In circuit with 5.3 V diode reference to any desired precise volt·
senor. Can bo adjustad to steady value age in range from -5 to +5 V, at low
close to -5 V with Rf. Re provides com• cost. Useful when required voltage refer·
pensation for bias current drift. Tempera• once is low, as for powering thermistor
ture drift of circuit is 0.5 mV per degree C. bridge. RI adjusts reference voltaga.-J.
-J. Cohen and J. Oosterling, Applications Ahhousa, IC Ampliflar Provides Variable Ref·
of a Pradical D. C. Difference Ampliler, eronce Vohage, flodronlcs, Od. 17, 1966, p
Phillps, Pub. Dept., Elcoma Div., Eindhovon, 88.
Tho Nothorlands, No. 321, 1968.
8.2 V-Usod as reference voltage supply for

IOO·V serlos•rogulatod d-c power supply.-
"Silicon Power Circuits Manual," RCA, Harri·
son, N.J., SP-51, p 216.
9 ll.6VAC
946 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS MANVAL
4.5·V ZENER SUBSTITUTE FOR WESTON CELL

-Provides raforonco voltage between 4 and
6 V with bottor constancy than standard call,
dospito a-c lino voltage ftuctuations up to
10% and tomporaturo variations botwoon .30
l
120V
and 60 C. Supply voltage is Rrst stabilized
by shunt•ragulatad circuits connoctod In cas•
cada. Final zonor has opposite temporatura
coofflcient to that of preceding dlodo, to
oliminate effoct of tomperaturo.-5. T. Ho,
Roforonce-Volta90 Unit Equipped with Zonor
Diodos, Electronic Applications, Philips, Pub.
Dopt., Elcoma Div., Elndhoven, The Nether•
6xOAZ 203 OAZ208 lands, Vol. 24, No. 4, 1963-1964, p 153-161.
100mA I
0 D o ,...,i o - - . -....
I
pi\'.ot
lamp
1
I
L _____ ...J L- - - - _ _J
Ri = S kO, S.5 W R4 = I kn, linear R1 =I kO, S.S W Di to Do = OAZ203
R2 = 390 n, S.5 W R5 = 390 n •, S.S W Ra= 68 kO, I W D1 = OAZ208
Ra =see text Ro = 2.2 kn, s.s w C1,C2 = 25 llF, 150 V De to Dio = BYXIO
4-6 V SECONDARY STANDARD-Brldgo rocti· standard colls. Requires calibration against variation.-$. T. Ho, Refarence-Voltogo Unit
tier across socondary of powor-lino trans- standard coll or aquivalant-a«uracy maasur• Equipped with Zoner Diodes, Eloctronic Ap-
former aner9lzos zenars providing output ing instrument. Value of RS Is based on plications, Philips, Pub. Dopt., Elcoma Div.,
voltage batweon 4 and 6 V, depending on assumed permissible output voltage varla• Eindhovon, Tho Netherlands, Vol. 24, No. 4,
compononts, having graator constancy than lion of 0.1 mV for 10% lino voltage 1963-1964, p 153-161.
NOTE: To locate additional circuits In tho category of this chapter, use tho index at tho back
of this book. Chock also the author's "Sourcebook of Electronic Circuits.'' published by
CHAPTER 99
Zero-Voltage Detector Circuits
St
LOAD
Ot
1N4004
AC
LINE Cl 01
Rt 0.25 µF 04 2N4216
3.8 k MPT-28
02 03
R2 1N4004 1N4004 R3
8.2 k 1k
1 w
SENSITIVE-GATE SCR SWITCH-Zero-point ference. Circuit actually oscillates near

switch ensures that control scr turns on at zero-crossing point and provides series of
start of each positive alternation. If turned pulses to assure zero-point switching.-"Somi·
on later in cycle, voltage and current spikos conductor Power Circuits Handbook,'' Moto•
produced could cause electromagnetic inter- rola, Phoenix, Ariz., 1968, p 6-5.
+5v +12v -12v

":"
ZERO ADJ. +12v
LEAD 33k
INPUT I 4.7k 47k
R2
10,.t 111
4.7k
0.011'1
..,..
-6v
\;. 0.01 O.Olµf
µf
.,,. ":"
+5v +12v
Os
LAG 4.7k -12v 2N930
INPUT I ANALOG
10,.t OUTPUT TO
4.7k DIGITAL
VOLTMETER
O.Olµf
-12v
'--------DIGITAL OUTPUT
ZERO-CROSSING DETECTOR-Two voltage put signal, far amplification by 5N7400 TTL ing pulse train is applied to digital voltmeter.
comparators and logic gate feed digital volt· gate, difforontiation, and setting of latch -R. H. Gruner, Phase Comparator Yields
meter to form digital-output phase compara- gates 3 and 4 for driving analog switch 4:1t Digital Output, Electronics, Sept. 15, 1969, p
tor giving 1% accuracy at 1 MHz. Voltage duty cycle determined by phase relationship 118,
comparators detoct zero crossings of each in· of input signals. D·c complemont of result·
947
RFl-FREE A-C SWITCH-Triacs close circuit

only when line voltago is near zero and
open it only when currant is near zero, to
minimize rfl, With St opon, Tl fires at bu.
ginning of each a-c half-cycle and prevents LOAD
T2 from firing, When Sl is closed, Tl com-
mutates off at next zero crossing and R2 115Voe
supplies gate current to T2 so it fires at be- 60Hi
ginning of each following half-cycle until
51 is openod,-W, B. Milos, Switch Your AC TRIACS•RCA
TA 2893
Loads at Zaro Voltage or

Electronic Circuits Manual (Markus, 1971) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electronic Circuits Manual (Markus, 1971) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1971

McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY

Copyright © 1971 by McGraw-Hill, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This book was set in Spartan heavy by Brown Brothers

ADDRESSES OF ELECTRONICS PUBLICATIONS

PULSED·LIGHT INTRUSION ALARM RECEIVER

CRl,2,3,4,5·G·E TYPE INl692

CONTACT CLOSURE IOK

BASIC SCS ALARM-Transducer can be any

BURGLAR NOISE ALARM-When sound level,

BLOWN-FUSE ALARM-Audible alarm, wired 200PIV

•cHOSEN ACCOR1>1NG 10 ALARM CURRENT

AUTO. REKT UH CLOSID POS.l

BOTH LAMPS NO. 327 IN AIRCRAFT TYPE

TEMPERATURE ALARM-Wiii ring bell, turn on

TEFLON COVERED WIRE

ALARM BOX-Single scr In relaxation oKllla•

AUDIBLE-VISUAL FAULT ALARM-Whon fault

120K.n. 510K 22K

IOOKA IOKA VARIABLE GAIN-Voltage-controlled common-

100J'F 15kA 680.A

0.002,.1 IOOk LOAD

ALL TRANSISTORS• RCA 40264

SPIKES INTO CAPACITIVE LOAD-Delivers load. Common-emitter amplifier Ql drives

LINEAR DARLINGTON-Uses low-cost Darling·

H25C07 +av +av

IOMeg IOMoQ IOMoQ

INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT

Dl5TORT10NLESS CLASS A-Solf-goneratod

SELF-BIASING FOR FEl'-Voltago drop pro-

GND HIGH-GAIN IC-Takes input of 0.4 mV P-P

NONINVERTING WIDEBAND-Gives high Input

BOOTSTRAPPING-Combining positive and positive foodback. Article gives design equa-

Input Rl .---ti-----+ OUTPUT

IC INVERTING A-C AMPLIFIER-Uses Ferranti

VOLTAGE GAIN' 0.1

II-MHZ 3-W AMPLIFIER-Uses pair of BFY50 +12V

LONG LONG-TAIL PAIR-Drift is less than 75

Dt CABLE-DRIVING PULSE AMPLIFIER-Upper

POWER·FET FRONT END-Covers 0.5 to 40

+vee THREE-STAGE CASCADED IC-Symmetrical Vee l+l

eithor 4.5-V or 6-V supplies, oxcept for larger

WIDEBAND CONTROL AMPLIFIER-Voltogo

HIGH-IMPEDANCE NONINVERTING A·C AM·

30·MHZ 3·W AMPLIFIER-Provides power gain

NOTES: o, Adjust lor • 18 v ot Point ''A".

HIGH·Z INPUT-Use of p-channel diffused 10-MHZ NARROW-BAND-With tuned inpul

IMPROVING SIGNAL TRANSFER-Complemen· INPUT

+sov +30V +SOY

CONSTANT-CURRENT SOURCE-Q2 offers hi9h whoroos 2.5K r11lstor In ploco of Q2 would

INFINITE IMPEDANCE-Simple two-stage am·

* SELECTED TO GIVE ZERO \IOL.TS AT THE BASE

UNITY GAIN AT HIGH IMPEDANCE-Input

10.W Hl·R-Quasi-complementary circuit uses + INllU

I05av A.C. C.T.,AT aoo .. A D.C.

<K'~! ~· Sl8 obtain higher gain for tape playback, add

IC HEARING AID-Uses TAA370 IC developed

2-W IC AMPLIFIER-Uses GE PA-237 inte-

2·W IC WITH 2-MEG INPUT-Usos GE PA·237 750K

r 1-W IC AUDIO AMP-Gives high gain ond

0.5-W AMPLIRER-Serves os contor of lnex• c,

ceramic cartridge phonograph os program 9-VOLT

IC AUDIO OUTPUT-Dollvon up to 1 W, either